The naturall and morall historie of the East and West Indies Intreating of the remarkable things of heaven, of the elements, mettalls, plants and beasts which are proper to that country: together with the manners, ceremonies, lawes, governments, and warres of the Indians. Written in Spanish by the R.F. Ioseph Acosta, and translated into English by E.G.
         Historia natural y moral de las Indias. English
         Acosta, José de, 1540-1600.
      
       
         
           1604
        
      
       Approx. 1125 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 308 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A22928
         STC 94
         ESTC S100394
         99836236
         99836236
         494
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A22928)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 494)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English Books, 1475-1640 ; 605:08)
      
       
         
           
             The naturall and morall historie of the East and West Indies Intreating of the remarkable things of heaven, of the elements, mettalls, plants and beasts which are proper to that country: together with the manners, ceremonies, lawes, governments, and warres of the Indians. Written in Spanish by the R.F. Ioseph Acosta, and translated into English by E.G.
             Historia natural y moral de las Indias. English
             Acosta, José de, 1540-1600.
             Grimeston, Edward, attributed name.
          
           [8], 188, 187-590, [14] p.
           
             Printed by Val: Sims for Edward Blount and William Aspley,
             London :
             1604.
          
           
             E.G. = Edward Grimeston?.
             Translation of: Historia natural y moral de las Indias.
             The first leaf and the last leaf are blank.
             Includes index.
             A variant omits the words "the R.F." on the title page.
             Reproduction of the original in Cambridge University Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           America -- Early accounts to 1600.
           Asia -- Description and travel -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2003-10 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-11 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-12 Mona Logarbo
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-12 Mona Logarbo
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           THE
           NATVRALL
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           East
           and
           West
           Indies
           .
        
         
           Intreating
           of
           the
           remarkeable
           things
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           of
           the
           Elements
           ,
           Mettalls
           ,
           Plants
           and
           Beasts
           which
           are
           proper
           to
           that
           Country
           :
           Together
           with
           the
           Manners
           ,
           Ceremonies
           ,
           Lawes
           ,
           Governements
           ,
           and
           Warres
           of
           the
           Indians
           .
        
         
           Written
           in
           Spanish
           by
           
             Ioseph
             Acosta
          
           ,
           and
           translated
           into
           English
           by
           
             E.
             G
             〈…〉
          
        
         
           LONDON
           Printed
           by
           
             Val
             :
             Sims
          
           for
           
             Edward
             Blount
          
           and
           
             William
             Aspley
          
           .
           1604.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           right
           Honorable
           Sir
           Robert
           Cicill
           
             Knight
             ,
             Baron
             of
          
           Essingden
           ,
           Vicount
           Cranborne
           ,
           principall
           Secretary
           to
           his
           Maiestie
           ,
           master
           of
           the
           Court
           of
           Wardes
           and
           Liveries
           ,
           and
           one
           of
           his
           Highnesse
           most
           honourable
           Privie
           Counsell
           .
        
         
           RIght
           Honorable
           ;
           If
           it
           appeare
           presumption
           in
           me
           to
           shew
           my
           love
           ,
           my
           dutie
           betraies
           me
           to
           it
           .
           The
           advantage
           I
           have
           gleaned
           from
           idle
           houres
           ,
           in
           exchanging
           this
           Indian
           History
           from
           Spanish
           to
           English
           ,
           is
           commended
           to
           your
           Honors
           Patronage
           ,
           whose
           first
           father
           
             Ioseph
             Acosta
          
           ,
           hath
           with
           great
           observation
           made
           worthie
           the
           over-looking
           .
           A
           greater
           motive
           then
           that
           you
           are
           your selfe
           ,
           needed
           not
           to
           excite
           me
           to
           this
           dedication
           .
           I
           beseech
           you
           my
           good
           Lord
           ,
           take
           it
           into
           shelter
           ,
           and
           receive
           that
           which
           is
           not
           ,
           for
           that
           which
           I
           would
           it
           were
           .
           Let
           my
           insufficiencie
           be
           measured
           by
           my
           good
           will.
           So
           shall
           my
           poore
           abilities
           thrive
           vnder
           your
           incouragement
           ,
           and
           happily
           leade
           me
           on
           to
           some
           stronger
           vndertaking
           ;
           wherein
           I
           shall
           bee
           bound
           to
           thanke
           you
           for
           mine
           owne
           paines
           ,
           and
           for
           ever
           remaine
        
         
           
             Your
             Lordships
             most
             devoted
             
               E.
               G.
            
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           Authors
           advertisement
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           MANY
           have
           written
           sundry
           bookes
           and
           discourses
           of
           the
           
             New
             World
          
           at
           the
           
             West
             Indies
          
           ,
           wherein
           they
           describe
           new
           and
           strange
           things
           discovered
           in
           those
           partes
           ,
           with
           the
           actes
           and
           adventures
           of
           the
           Spaniards
           ,
           which
           have
           conquered
           and
           peopled
           those
           Countries
           .
           But
           hitherto
           I
           have
           not
           seene
           any
           other
           Author
           which
           treates
           of
           the
           causes
           and
           reasons
           of
           these
           novelties
           and
           wonders
           of
           nature
           ,
           or
           that
           hath
           made
           any
           search
           thereof
           .
           Neither
           have
           I
           read
           any
           booke
           which
           maketh
           mention
           of
           the
           histories
           of
           the
           antient
           Indians
           ,
           and
           naturall
           inhabitants
           of
           the
           
             New
             World.
          
           In
           truth
           these
           two
           things
           are
           difficult
           ;
           The
           first
           being
           the
           works
           of
           Nature
           ,
           contrarie
           to
           the
           antient
           and
           received
           Philosophy
           ,
           as
           to
           shew
           that
           the
           region
           which
           they
           call
           the
           burning
           Zone
           ,
           is
           very
           moist
           ,
           and
           in
           many
           places
           very
           temperate
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           raines
           there
           ,
           whenas
           the
           Sunne
           is
           neerest
           ,
           with
           such
           like
           things
           .
           For
           such
           as
           have
           written
           of
           the
           West
           Indies
           ,
           have
           not
           made
           profession
           of
           so
           deepe
           Philosophie
           ;
           yea
           ,
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           those
           Writers
           have
           had
           no
           knowledge
           thereof
           .
           The
           second
           thing
           it
           treats
           of
           ,
           is
           ,
           of
           the
           proper
           historie
           of
           the
           Indians
           ,
           the
           which
           required
           much
           conference
           and
           travaile
           among
           
           the
           Indians
           themselves
           :
           the
           which
           most
           of
           them
           that
           have
           treated
           of
           the
           Indies
           could
           not
           doe
           ,
           either
           not
           vnderstanding
           the
           language
           ,
           or
           not
           curious
           in
           the
           search
           of
           their
           Antiquities
           :
           so
           as
           they
           have
           beene
           contented
           to
           handle
           those
           things
           which
           have
           beene
           most
           common
           and
           superficiall
           .
           Desiring
           therefore
           to
           have
           some
           more
           particular
           knowledge
           thereof
           ,
           I
           have
           beene
           carefull
           to
           learne
           from
           men
           of
           greatest
           experience
           and
           best
           seene
           in
           these
           matters
           ,
           and
           to
           gather
           from
           their
           discourses
           and
           relations
           ,
           what
           I
           have
           thought
           sit
           to
           give
           knowledge
           of
           the
           deedes
           and
           custome
           of
           these
           people
           .
           And
           for
           that
           which
           concernes
           the
           nature
           of
           those
           Countries
           ,
           and
           their
           properties
           ,
           I
           have
           learned
           it
           by
           the
           experience
           of
           many
           friends
           ,
           and
           by
           my
           dilligence
           to
           search
           ,
           discover
           ,
           and
           conferre
           with
           men
           of
           iudgement
           and
           knowledge
           .
           In
           my
           opinion
           there
           are
           many
           advertisements
           ,
           which
           may
           serve
           and
           benefit
           better
           wits
           for
           the
           searching
           out
           of
           the
           truth
           ,
           or
           to
           proceede
           farther
           ,
           in
           finding
           that
           pleasing
           which
           is
           conteined
           heerein
           .
           So
           as
           although
           this
           new
           World
           be
           not
           new
           ,
           but
           old
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           much
           which
           hath
           beene
           written
           thereof
           ;
           yet
           this
           historie
           may
           in
           some
           sort
           be
           h●ld
           for
           new
           ;
           for
           it
           is
           partly
           historicall
           ,
           and
           partly
           philosophicall
           ,
           as
           well
           for
           that
           they
           are
           the
           workes
           of
           nature
           ,
           as
           of
           free-will
           ;
           which
           are
           the
           deedes
           and
           customes
           of
           men
           ,
           the
           which
           hath
           caused
           mee
           to
           name
           it
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
           Containing
           these
           two
           things
           :
           In
           the
           first
           two
           bookes
           mention
           is
           made
           of
           that
           which
           concernes
           the
           heavens
           temperature
           ,
           and
           habitation
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           which
           books
           I
           had
           first
           written
           in
           Latine
           ,
           &
           now
           I
           have
           translated
           them
           into
           Spanish
           ,
           vsing
           more
           the
           liberty
           of
           an
           author
           ,
           then
           the
           strict
           bonds
           of
           a
           translator
           ,
           to
           apply
           my self
           the
           better
           to
           those
           for
           whom
           it
           is
           written
           in
           the
           vulgar
           tong
           .
           In
           the
           two
           following
           books
           ,
           is
           treated
           of
           that
           which
           concernes
           the
           Elements
           and
           naturall
           mixtures
           ,
           as
           Mettalls
           ,
           Plants
           ,
           Beasts
           ,
           and
           what
           else
           is
           remarkable
           at
           the
           Indies
           .
           The
           
           rest
           of
           the
           bookes
           relate
           what
           I
           could
           certainely
           discover
           ,
           and
           what
           I
           thought
           worthie
           memory
           of
           the
           Indians
           themselves
           ,
           their
           Ceremonies
           ,
           Customs
           ,
           Governments
           ,
           Wars
           ,
           &
           Adventures
           .
           In
           the
           same
           Historie
           shall
           be
           spoken
           (
           as
           I
           could
           learne
           and
           comprehend
           ,
           )
           of
           the
           figures
           of
           the
           antient
           Indians
           ,
           seeing
           they
           had
           no
           writing
           nor
           characters
           as
           we
           have
           ,
           which
           is
           no
           small
           industry
           to
           have
           preserved
           their
           Antiquities
           ,
           without
           the
           vse
           of
           letters
           .
           To
           conclude
           ,
           the
           scope
           of
           this
           worke
           is
           ,
           that
           having
           knowledge
           of
           the
           workes
           of
           nature
           ,
           which
           the
           wise
           Author
           of
           all
           nature
           made
           ,
           we
           may
           praise
           and
           glorifie
           the
           high
           God
           ,
           who
           is
           wonderfull
           in
           all
           things
           and
           all
           places
           .
           And
           having
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Indians
           customes
           ,
           we
           may
           helpe
           them
           more
           easily
           to
           follow
           and
           persever
           in
           the
           high
           vocation
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ;
           to
           the
           knowledge
           whereof
           ,
           the
           Lord
           would
           draw
           this
           blinde
           nation
           in
           these
           latter
           daies
           .
           Besides
           al
           these
           things
           ,
           every
           one
           may
           sucke
           out
           some
           profit
           for
           himselfe
           ;
           for
           that
           the
           wise
           do
           alwaies
           draw
           forth
           some
           good
           out
           of
           the
           smalest
           subiect
           ,
           as
           we
           finde
           deepe
           Philosophie
           in
           the
           least
           and
           basest
           creatures
           .
           I
           must
           onely
           advertise
           the
           Reader
           ,
           that
           the
           two
           first
           bookes
           of
           this
           historie
           or
           discourse
           ,
           were
           written
           in
           Peru
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           five
           ,
           since
           in
           Europe
           ,
           dutie
           binding
           me
           to
           returne
           into
           these
           partes
           :
           so
           as
           some
           speake
           of
           matters
           of
           the
           Indies
           ,
           as
           of
           things
           present
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           as
           being
           absent
           .
           And
           therefore
           I
           have
           thought
           it
           good
           to
           advertise
           the
           Reader
           heereof
           ,
           that
           this
           diversitie
           of
           speach
           may
           not
           be
           troublesome
           vnto
           him
           .
        
         
           
             Farewell
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           Table
           of
           the
           most
           remarkable
           things
           contained
           in
           this
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           :
        
         
           
             A.
             
          
           
             Abundance
             of
             waters
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
          
           
             folio
             93
          
           
             Absurditie
             of
             Platoes
             Atlantike
             Iland
             .
          
           
             73
          
           
             Abuse
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             at
             Peru
             taking
             winter
             for
             summer
             .
          
           
             89
          
           
             Acamapach
             first
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             482
          
           
             Accord
             betwixt
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             &
             his
             subiects
             before
             they
             attempted
             a
             warre
             .
          
           
             532
          
           
             Adlaguagi
             a
             kind
             of
             mummery
             of
             women
             .
          
           
             367
          
           
             Acts
             of
             
               Ferdinand
               Cortez
            
             .
          
           
             574
          
           
             Adimant
             makes
             a
             path
             in
             the
             Sea.
             
          
           
             57
          
           
             The
             Adamant
             impartes
             a
             vertue
             to
             yron
             to
             looke
             alwayes
             towards
             the
             north
             .
          
           
             58
          
           
             Vse
             of
             the
             Adamant
             to
             saile
             by
             not
             antient
             .
          
           
             59
          
           
             Adoration
             of
             the
             dead
             begunne
             and
             augmented
             .
          
           
             340
          
           
             Adultery
             punished
             with
             death
             .
          
           
             469
          
           
             Agilitie
             of
             monkies
             .
          
           
             315
          
           
             Aire
             how
             necessary
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man
          
           
             114
          
           
             The
             Aire
             stirred
             with
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             heauens
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             line
             ,
             is
             sufficient
             to
             guide
             a
             ship
             .
          
           
             137
          
           
             Alcos
             little
             dogges
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Indians
             are
             very
             carefull
             .
          
           
             301
          
           
             
               Amarro
               Ingua
            
             put
             to
             death
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             in
             Cusco
             .
          
           
             481
          
           
             Amber
             a
             kinde
             of
             physicall
             and
             sweet
             gumme
             .
          
           
             287
          
           
             Almonds
             growing
             in
             Cocos
             .
          
           
             281
          
           
             Almonds
             of
             Chacapoias
             helde
             for
             the
             rarest
             fruit
             in
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             The
             Auntients
             could
             not
             make
             a
             determind
             voyage
             without
             the
             Compasse
             .
          
           
             57
          
           
             Th'Antients
             went
             only
             with
             oares
             .
          
           
             60
          
           
             Antient
             Doctors
             more
             studious
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             than
             of
             Philosophie
             .
          
           
             ●
          
           
             Annona
             a
             fruit
             called
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             Almond
             butter
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             some
             resemblance
             .
          
           
             278
          
           
             Apopanaca
             the
             overseer
             of
             the
             Monasteries
             of
             women
             .
          
           
             367
          
           
             Apachitas
             toppes
             of
             hilles
             that
             were
             worshipped
             .
          
           
             540
          
           
             Arches
             in
             buildings
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             460
          
           
             Aristotle
             not
             refuted
             by
             Lactantius
             as
             touching
             the
             place
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             22
          
           
             Armes
             of
             the
             Mexicans
             .
          
           
             488
          
           
             Army
             of
             the
             ayre
             foretelling
             a
             great
             ruine
             .
          
           
             561
          
           
             Arte
             of
             warre
             much
             honoured
             by
             the
             Mexicans
             .
          
           
             488
          
           
             Arte
             to
             know
             the
             Starres
             invented
             by
             the
             Phenicens
             .
          
           
             54
          
           
             Ashes
             issuing
             in
             great
             aboundance
             out
             of
             the
             Vulcans
             .
          
           
             195
          
           
             Advantage
             which
             the
             Christians
             had
             of
             the
             Indians
             to
             plant
             the
             faith
             
             there
             .
          
           
             389
          
           
             S.
             Augustine
             doubts
             whether
             the
             heaven
             invirons
             the
             earth
             of
             all
             parts
          
           
             3
          
           
             Attire
             for
             the
             head
             very
             divers
             in
             sundry
             provinces
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             467
          
           
             Austeritie
             practised
             by
             the
             Indians
             to
             keepe
             themselves
             chaste
             .
          
           
             373
          
           
             Axi
             a
             kinde
             of
             Indian
             pepper
             .
          
           
             168
          
        
         
           
             B.
             
          
           
             BAllance
             wherein
             the
             Divell
             made
             the
             Iapponois
             confes
             themselves
             .
          
           
             401
          
           
             Barkes
             at
             the
             Indies
             called
             Canoes
             .
          
           
             68
          
           
             Battell
             without
             bloudshed
             ,
             made
             only
             for
             a
             ceremony
             at
             the
             yeelding
             of
             Tescuco
             .
          
           
             539
          
           
             Balme
             of
             Palestina
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Indi●s
             very
             different
             .
          
           
             285
          
           
             Bezars
             stone
             found
             in
             the
             stomacke
             of
             some
             beasts
             soveraigne
             against
             poison
             ,
             how
             it
             growes
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             the
             most
             excellent
             .
          
           
             323
          
           
             Beasts
             carefully
             preserved
             by
             the
             Ingu●s
             .
          
           
             464
          
           
             Beasts
             worshipped
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             &
             why
             .
          
           
             340
          
           
             Beasts
             being
             venomous
             converted
             by
             divelish
             artes
             into
             good
             norishment
          
           
             510
          
           
             Beasts
             that
             are
             perfect
             cannot
             bee
             ingendred
             as
             those
             that
             are
             imperfect
             according
             to
             the
             order
             of
             nature
             .
          
           
             65
          
           
             Beasts
             of
             sundry
             sorts
             at
             the
             Indies
             that
             are
             not
             in
             Europe
             .
          
           
             3●7
          
           
             Birds
             remaine
             willingly
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             305
          
           
             Birds
             ,
             some
             exceeding
             small
             ,
             others
             wonderfull
             great
             .
          
           
             309
          
           
             Birds
             very
             profitable
             for
             the
             dung
             .
          
           
             311
          
           
             Bisexte
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             437
          
           
             Bochas
             and
             Such●s
             notable
             fishes
             in
             the
             Lake
             of
             Titica●a
             .
          
           
             170
          
           
             B●ncos
             the
             divelles
             Ministers
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             370
          
           
             Bridge
             of
             strawe
             very
             firme
             to
             passe
             over
             a
             swift
             streame
             .
          
           
             93
          
           
             Brises
             and
             lower
             winds
             are
             two
             generall
             names
             which
             comprehend
             the
             windes
             of
             either
             side
             .
          
           
             132
          
           
             Bodies
             being
             dead
             ,
             wonderfully
             well
             preserved
             .
          
           
             478
          
           
             Burthen
             of
             the
             Indian
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             what
             iournies
             they
             make
             so
             laden
             .
          
           
             321
          
        
         
           
             C
          
           
             CAcao
             a
             fruite
             much
             esteemed
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             &
             serves
             them
             for
             mony
             .
          
           
             271
          
           
             Cacavi
             ,
             bread
             made
             of
             a
             roote
             .
          
           
             257
          
           
             Calibasses
             ,
             or
             Pompions
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             greatnesse
             .
          
           
             264
          
           
             Calculation
             of
             the
             Indians
             very
             witty
             and
             ready
             .
          
           
             456
          
           
             Camey
             the
             second
             moneth
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             412
          
           
             Canes
             of
             sugar
             of
             great
             revenews
             .
          
           
             298
          
           
             Canopus
             a
             star
             seene
             at
             the
             new
             world
             .
          
           
             16
          
           
             Cap
             of
             Comorni
             ,
             sometimes
             called
             the
             promontory
             of
             Cory
             .
          
           
             37
          
           
             Carthaginians
             did
             forbid
             the
             sayling
             to
             vnknowne
             lands
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             36
          
           
             Care
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             to
             teach
             their
             children
             their
             superstitious
             idolatry
             .
          
           
             486
          
           
             Cattle
             in
             troupes
             without
             maisters
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Cuba
               Iamaica
            
             ,
             and
             others
             .
          
           
             70
          
           
             Cattle
             at
             the
             Indies
             killed
             onely
             for
             their
             hides
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Caymans
             or
             Lizards
             like
             vnto
             Crocodiles
             ,
             whereof
             Pli●ie
             speakes
             .
          
           
             165
          
           
             Ceremony
             of
             the
             Mexicans
             in
             drawing
             bloud
             from
             divers
             parts
             .
          
           
             551
          
           
             Ceremonies
             of
             the
             Indians
             in
             the
             buriall
             of
             their
             dead
             .
          
           
             348
          
           
             Ceremonies
             at
             the
             sacrificing
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             382
          
           
             Chachalmua
             the
             chiefe
             priests
             and
             their
             attire
             at
             their
             sacrifices
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Chasquis
             Indian
             posts
             that
             caried
             news
             to
             all
             places
             .
          
           
             452
          
           
             
             Chica
             a
             drinke
             very
             wholesome
             for
             the
             backe
             .
          
           
             255
          
           
             Chichimequas
             auntient
             Inhabitants
             of
             N●w
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             barbarous
             life
             .
          
           
             501
          
           
             Chicocapote
             a
             fruit
             like
             vnto
             mermelade
          
           
             278
          
           
             Chille
             ,
             a
             country
             of
             the
             same
             temperature
             with
             Spaine
             .
          
           
             87
          
           
             Chinchilles
             ,
             small
             beasts
             that
             have
             exquisite
             skinnes
             .
          
           
             314
          
           
             Chocholate
             ,
             the
             Indians
             drinke
             ,
             wherof
             they
             make
             great
             account
             .
          
           
             271
          
           
             Cinabrium
             ,
             or
             vermilian
             ,
             called
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             Limpi
             .
          
           
             238
          
           
             Coca
             ,
             a
             leafe
             which
             the
             Perusians
             vsed
             for
             money
             .
          
           
             210
          
           
             Coca
             ,
             a
             small
             leafe
             whereof
             the
             Indians
             make
             great
             traffike
             :
             it
             doth
             incourage
             and
             fortifie
             .
          
           
             271
          
           
             Cocas
             ,
             Indian
             palmes
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             rare
             properties
             .
          
           
             280
          
           
             Coch●nille
             ,
             a
             graine
             that
             growes
             vppon
             the
             Tunall
             trees
             .
          
           
             275
          
           
             Colleges
             ordained
             at
             Mexico
             to
             teach
             their
             young
             children
             to
             pronounce
             Orations
             .
          
           
             447
          
           
             Combate
             betwixt
             a
             Caymant
             and
             a
             Tyger
             .
          
           
             166
          
           
             Comedies
             very
             ordinary
             in
             China
             .
          
           
             444
          
           
             Combate
             betwixt
             an
             Indian
             and
             a
             Caymant
             .
          
           
             167
          
           
             Comets
             in
             the
             ayre
             moove
             from
             East
             to
             Weast
             .
          
           
             137
          
           
             Communion
             imitated
             by
             the
             slaves
             of
             Satan
             .
          
           
             393
          
           
             Comparison
             to
             prove
             the
             naturall
             effect
             of
             raine
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
          
           
             95
          
           
             Crowne
             of
             the
             kings
             of
             Mexico
             like
             to
             that
             of
             the
             duke
             of
             Venice
             .
          
           
             518
          
           
             Crimes
             punished
             with
             death
             by
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             469
          
           
             Corriers
             at
             the
             Indies
             very
             swift
             being
             but
             footemen
             .
          
           
             452
          
           
             Coya
             the
             Inguas
             chiefe
             wife
             ,
             whose
             son
             succeeded
             after
             the
             vncle
             .
          
           
             455
          
           
             Crosse
             ,
             a
             notable
             starr●
             at
             the
             new
             found
             world
             .
          
           
             16
          
           
             Crowning
             of
             the
             kings
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             perfourmed
             with
             great
             solemnitie
             ,
             and
             the
             shedding
             of
             much
             mans
             bloud
             .
          
           
             541
          
           
             Covetousnes
             of
             a
             certaine
             priest
             thinking
             to
             drawe
             gold
             out
             of
             a
             vulcan
             .
          
           
             195
          
           
             Councell
             of
             Lima
             dissolved
             the
             marriage
             betwixt
             brother
             and
             sister
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             471
          
           
             Cotton
             growes
             vppon
             trees
             it
             serves
             to
             make
             linnen
             cloth
             .
          
           
             276
          
           
             Colde
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             makes
             Aristotles
             opinion
             ridiculous
             .
          
           
             101
          
           
             Corage
             of
             men
             at
             the
             passage
             of
             Pongo
             .
          
           
             176
          
           
             The
             Continent
             of
             lands
             is
             ioyned
             in
             some
             part
             ,
             or
             else
             it
             is
             very
             neere
             ▪
          
           
             68
          
           
             Before
             the
             Creation
             there
             was
             neither
             time
             nor
             place
             ,
             a
             matter
             harde
             to
             imagine
             .
          
           
             ●4
          
           
             Crueltie
             of
             the
             Indians
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             .
          
           
             382
          
           
             Cruell
             ceremony
             to
             sprinckle
             the
             Embassadours
             with
             bloud
             ,
             thinking
             thereby
             to
             have
             a
             better
             answer
             .
          
           
             571
          
           
             Cu
             the
             great
             Temple
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             the
             singularities
             thereof
             .
          
           
             361
          
           
             Cugno
             ,
             a
             kinde
             of
             bread
             at
             the
             Indies
             made
             of
             rootes
             .
          
           
             186
          
           
             Cuschargui
             ,
             a
             dried
             flesh
             which
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             .
          
           
             320
          
           
             Cusco
             ,
             the
             auntient
             habitation
             of
             the
             kings
             of
             Peru.
             
          
           
             128
          
        
         
           
             D
          
           
             DAies
             and
             nights
             equall
             al
             the
             yeere
             vnder
             the
             liquinoctiall
             .
          
           
             83
          
           
             Daies
             in
             summer
             very
             shorte
             at
             Peru.
             
          
           
             103
          
           
             Five
             Daies
             in
             the
             yeere
             superfluous
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Indians
             did
             nothing
             .
          
           
             434
          
           
             Dancing
             and
             publike
             recreations
             necessary
             in
             every
             cōmon-weal●
             .
          
           
             492
          
           
             
             Dauncing
             in
             Mex●●o
             ,
             where
             the
             King
             himselfe
             d●unced
             .
          
           
             489
          
           
             Da●tes
             ,
             wilde
             be●sts
             almost
             like
             vnto
             moiles
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             skinnes
          
           
             313
          
           
             D●luge
             pretended
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             some
             likel●hood
             .
          
           
             79
          
           
             D●vision
             of
             the
             lands
             of
             Azca●●zalco
             ,
             after
             the
             victory
             obtained
             by
             ●scoalt
             .
          
           
             533
          
           
             Discovery
             of
             the
             west
             Indies
             prophecied
             by
             Senec●
             .
          
           
             38
          
           
             Discovery
             of
             new
             lands
             ,
             made
             more
             by
             tempest
             of
             weather
             than
             otherwise
             .
          
           
             62
          
           
             Disseine
             of
             the
             Author
             .
          
           
             82
          
           
             The
             Divell
             jealous
             against
             God
             ,
             and
             hates
             men
             mortally
             .
          
           
             329
          
           
             The
             Divell
             didde
             speake
             in
             the
             Indies
             Guacas
             or
             Oratories
             .
          
           
             351
          
           
             Difference
             of
             letters
             ,
             pictures
             ,
             &
             characters
             .
          
           
             439
          
           
             Difficultie
             to
             know
             whence
             the
             Indians
             come
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             have
             vsed
             no
             letters
             .
          
           
             79
          
           
             Discourse
             vpon
             the
             discoverie
             of
             Magellan
             by
             Sarmiento
             .
          
           
             154
          
           
             Division
             of
             Peru
             into
             
               Lanos
               ,
               Sierres
            
             ,
             &
             Andes
             .
          
           
             184
          
           
             Division
             of
             the
             people
             .
          
           
             456
          
           
             Division
             of
             the
             Cittie
             of
             M●xico
             into
             foure
             quarters
             ,
             made
             by
             the
             commaundement
             of
             their
             God.
             
          
           
             512
          
           
             Divinations
             practis●d
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             how
             .
          
           
             406
          
           
             Divorces
             practised
             amongst
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             and
             how
             .
          
           
             409
          
           
             Death
             the
             punishment
             of
             Virgins
             that
             were
             incontinent
             .
          
           
             367
          
           
             Death
             of
             Chimalpopoca
             the
             yoong
             king
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             sl●ine
             treacherously
             by
             the
             Tapanecan●
             .
          
           
             526
          
           
             Death
             of
             Mo●esuma
             the
             l●st
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             576
          
           
             Doctors
             of
             the
             holy
             church
             not
             to
             be
             reprooved
             ,
             differing
             in
             opinion
             of
             Philosophie
             .
          
           
             2
          
           
             Dogges
             as
             dangerous
             as
             wolves
             .
          
           
             301
          
           
             Dogges
             daungerous
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Cuba
               ,
               Hispaniola
            
             ,
             and
             others
             .
          
           
             70
          
           
             Drake
             an
             Englishman
             didde
             passe
             the
             straight
             of
             Magellan
             in
             our
             time
             ,
             &
             others
             since
             .
          
           
             154
          
           
             Duckes
             in
             great
             aboundaunce
             in
             the
             Lake
             of
             Titicaca
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             doe
             hunt
             them
             .
          
           
             171
          
           
             Drought
             followes
             not
             the
             neerenesse
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
          
           
             85
          
        
         
           
             E.
             
          
           
             EAgle
             vppon
             a
             Tunall
             the
             Armes
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             513
          
           
             Earthquakes
             very
             strange
             ,
             and
             the
             cause
             .
          
           
             197
          
           
             Earth
             ,
             how
             it
             is
             sustained
             .
          
           
             10
          
           
             The
             Earth
             vnder
             the
             pole
             Antartike
             ,
             is
             not
             all
             covered
             with
             waters
             .
          
           
             18
          
           
             The
             Earth
             in
             longitude
             is
             all
             of
             one
             temperature
             ,
             but
             not
             in
             latitude
             .
          
           
             29
          
           
             The
             Earth
             with
             the
             water
             make
             one
             globe
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Eclipse
             of
             the
             Moone
             a
             certain
             proofe
             of
             the
             roundnesse
             of
             the
             heavens
             .
          
           
             6
          
           
             Effectes
             naturall
             proceede
             from
             contrary
             causes
             .
          
           
             96
          
           
             Elements
             participate
             with
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             first
             moover
             .
          
           
             138
          
           
             Electours
             of
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             were
             commonly
             his
             kinsmen
             .
          
           
             485
          
           
             Election
             of
             the
             kings
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             &
             the
             feastes
             at
             their
             instalment
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Election
             of
             the
             first
             K●
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             515
          
           
             Entry
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             into
             new
             Spain
             in
             the
             yeere
             1518.
             
          
           
             558
          
           
             Entrie
             of
             Cortez
             into
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             574
          
           
             Errour
             of
             imagination
             .
          
           
             23
          
           
             Esaies
             passage
             expounded
             by
             the
             exemplification
             of
             the
             Gospel
             .
          
           
             208
          
           
             Emerauldes
             more
             esteemed
             in
             former
             time
             then
             now
             .
          
           
             249
          
           
             Exercises
             wherin
             they
             instructed
             their
             youth
             .
          
           
             487
          
           
             Explication
             of
             a
             passage
             of
             saint
             Paule
             against
             the
             roundnes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             14
          
           
             
             Explication
             of
             the
             110
             ,
             Psalme
             vppon
             the
             same
             subiect
             .
          
           
             15
          
        
         
           
             F.
             
          
           
             FAmiliar
             reasons
             to
             teach
             an
             Indian
             ,
             that
             the
             Sunne
             is
             no
             god
             .
          
           
             ●42
          
           
             Fasting
             of
             the
             Indians
             before
             the
             fea●●
             of
             Ita
             ,
             not
             accompanying
             with
             their
             wives
             .
          
           
             374
          
           
             A
             Father
             loosing
             his
             children
             ,
             was
             held
             for
             a
             great
             sinner
             ,
             h●
             would
             kil
             his
             childrē
             to
             save
             his
             own
             life
             .
          
           
             399
          
           
             Fert●litie
             vnfruitefull
             in
             the
             Ilandes
             of
             new
             Spain●
             ▪
          
           
             187
          
           
             Feasts
             of
             Merchants
             made
             with
             many
             sportes
             .
          
           
             424
          
           
             Feast
             of
             the
             Idoll
             of
             Tlascalla
             .
          
           
             355
          
           
             Feasts
             for
             to
             have
             raine
             .
          
           
             411
          
           
             Feasts
             for
             every
             moneth
             .
          
           
             412
          
           
             F●re
             drawne
             out
             of
             two
             stickes
             rubbd
             one
             against
             another
             by
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             119
          
           
             Fire
             in
             hell
             different
             from
             ours
             .
          
           
             195
          
           
             Fire
             from
             heaven
             consumed
             for
             their
             sinnes
             .
          
           
             63
          
           
             Fish
             flying
             .
          
           
             165
          
           
             Fountaine
             casting
             vp
             hote
             water
             ,
             the
             which
             turnes
             into
             a
             rocke
             .
          
           
             173
          
           
             Figge
             tree
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             halfe
             carries
             fruite
             at
             one
             season
             ,
             the
             other
             at
             another
             .
          
           
             297
          
           
             ●loures
             of
             Europe
             grow
             best
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             283
          
           
             ●loridians
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             golde
             .
          
           
             207
          
           
             Flowing
             and
             ebbing
             of
             the
             sea
             is
             no
             local
             motion
             ,
             but
             an
             alteration
             and
             ferv●●
             of
             the
             waters
             .
          
           
             162
          
           
             Flowing
             and
             ebbing
             of
             the
             seas
             divers
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Fountaine
             of
             salt
             in
             Cusc●
             .
          
           
             174
          
           
             Forrests
             wonderfull
             thicke
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             291
          
           
             Forrests
             of
             orange
             trees
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             294
          
           
             Forme
             of
             that
             which
             is
             discovered
             at
             Peru.
             
          
           
             201
          
           
             
               Fr●●ci●
               H●●nandes
            
             the
             Author
             of
             a
             rar●
             booke
             of
             plants
             ,
             roote●
             ,
             and
             physicall
             hearbes
             at
             the
             I●dies
             .
          
           
             ●90
          
           
             Fruites
             of
             Europe
             much
             incr●ased
             a●
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             294
          
        
         
           
             G.
             
          
           
             GArlicke
             much
             esteemed
             a●
             th●
             Indie●
             .
          
           
             261
          
           
             Gardin●
             vppon
             the
             water
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             a
             Lake
             .
          
           
             172
          
           
             Gardins
             artificially
             made
             vppon
             the
             water
             t●
             remove
             where
             they
             please
             .
          
           
             519
          
           
             Giant●
             came
             in
             an●ient
             time
             to
             Peru.
             
          
           
             62
          
           
             Golde
             found
             in
             three
             sortes
             .
          
           
             212
          
           
             Gold
             of
             Caravana
             most
             famous
             at
             P●ru
             .
          
           
             214
          
           
             Gold
             and
             silver
             esteemed
             throughout
             the
             whole
             world
             .
          
           
             206
          
           
             Golde
             &
             silver
             served
             the
             Indians
             but
             for
             ornament
             .
          
           
             209
          
           
             Gold
             why
             esteemd
             above
             other
             mettalles
             .
          
           
             212
          
           
             Golde
             how
             refined
             into
             powlder
             .
          
           
             214
          
           
             Goomes
             ,
             with
             physicall
             and
             odo●if●rous
             oyles
             with
             their
             names
             .
          
           
             287
          
           
             
               Gonzales
               Pziarre
            
             vanquished
             and
             defeated
             ,
             his
             crueltie
             against
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             475
          
           
             Governors
             of
             provinces
             ,
             how
             est●bl●shed
             by
             the
             Inguas
             .
          
           
             455
          
           
             Guacas
             or
             Sanctuaries
             very
             well
             maintained
             .
          
           
             463
          
           
             Guancos
             and
             Vicuna●
             wilde
             goates
             .
          
           
             70
          
           
             Guayaquil
             an
             Indian
             oake
             ,
             and
             verie
             sweete
             .
          
           
             292
          
           
             Guayavos
             an
             Indian
             fruite
             .
          
           
             277
          
           
             Guaynacapa
             ,
             the
             great
             and
             valiant
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             his
             life
             ,
             he
             was
             worshipped
             as
             a
             god
             in
             his
             life
             .
          
           
             479
          
           
             Guayras
             furnaces
             to
             refine
             gold
             .
          
           
             233
          
           
             Gospel
             preached
             to
             the
             Indians
             when
             their
             Empire
             was
             at
             the
             h●ghest
             ,
             even
             a●
             to
             the
             Romans
             .
          
           
             583
          
        
         
           
             H.
             
          
           
             
             
               HAtun●●squi
               Ay●●r●y
            
             ,
             the
             six●
             m●neth
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             which
             answereth
             vnto
             Maie
             .
          
           
             413
          
           
             Harts
             of
             men
             pulld
             out
             and
             sacrificed
             :
             how
             that
             ceremony
             beganne
             .
          
           
             509
          
           
             Haire
             of
             the
             prie●●s
             horribly
             long
             and
             annoynted
             with
             rozen
             .
          
           
             403
          
           
             Heaven
             is
             round
             ,
             and
             turn●●
             vppon
             two
             Poles
             ,
             prooved
             more
             by
             experience
             than
             demonstration
             .
          
           
             5
          
           
             Heaven
             no
             farther
             from
             the
             earth
             of
             the
             one
             side
             than
             of
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             18
          
           
             Hennes
             found
             at
             the
             Indies
             at
             the
             f●●st
             discovery
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Gualpa
             ,
             and
             their
             egges
             Ponto
             .
          
           
             306
          
           
             Hercules
             Pillers
             the
             limites
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             old
             world
             .
          
           
             27
          
           
             Hipocrisie
             of
             M●tesuma
             last
             King
             of
             M●xico
             .
          
           
             554
          
           
             Historie
             of
             the
             Indies
             not
             to
             bee
             contemned
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             495
          
           
             Historie
             of
             M●xico
             kept
             in
             the
             Librarie
             of
             Vatican
             .
          
           
             550
          
           
             Historie
             of
             Mexico
             how
             framed
             .
          
           
             446
          
           
             Horses
             goodly
             and
             strong
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             301
          
           
             Horse-shooes
             of
             silver
             for
             want
             of
             y●on
             .
          
           
             212
          
           
             House
             admirably
             filled
             with
             all
             sortes
             of
             beasts
             like
             to
             another
             Noes
             Arke
             .
          
           
             484
          
           
             Humor
             of
             the
             Iewes
             contrary
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             76
          
        
         
           
             I.
             
          
           
             IEalousie
             of
             the
             Indies
             one
             against
             an
             other
             for
             renowme
             of
             valour
             .
          
           
             472
          
           
             Idlenesse
             bannished
             by
             the
             Inguas
             as
             dangerous
             for
             the
             subiects
             .
          
           
             457
          
           
             Idoll
             carried
             by
             foure
             Priestes
             for
             a
             guide
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             seek
             a
             new
             land
             like
             to
             the
             children
             of
             Israel
             .
          
           
             504
          
           
             Idolls
             of
             the
             kings
             Inguas
             reverenced
             as
             themselves
             .
          
           
             356
          
           
             Iland
             of
             Su●atra
             now
             called
             Taproba●a
             .
          
           
             37
          
           
             Iland
             
               ●tl●n●ik●
               of
               Pla●●
            
             a
             meere
             fab●e
          
           
             72
          
           
             Iland
             of
             fagots
             made
             with
             exceeding
             labour
             to
             passe
             an
             army
             vppon
             the
             sea
             .
          
           
             550
          
           
             Iland●s
             very
             farre
             from
             the
             firme
             land
             no●
             inhabi●ed
             .
          
           
             ●9
          
           
             I●nmortalitie
             of
             the
             soule
             beleeved
             by
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             347
          
           
             Indies
             ,
             what
             it
             signifieth
             ,
             and
             what
             we
             vnderstand
             by
             that
             word
             .
          
           
             47
          
           
             Weast
             Indies
             ,
             most
             popular
             governements
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             there
             were
             but
             two
             kingdomes
             .
          
           
             453
          
           
             Indians
             not
             greatly
             desirous
             of
             silver
             .
          
           
             76
          
           
             Indians
             have
             lived
             in
             troups
             ,
             as
             those
             doe
             of
             
               Florida
               ,
               Br●sill
            
             ,
             and
             other
             places
             .
          
           
             80
          
           
             Indians
             good
             swimmers
             .
          
           
             168
          
           
             Indians
             had
             no
             proper
             word
             to
             signifie
             God.
             
          
           
             334
          
           
             The
             Indians
             know
             all
             Artes
             necessarie
             for
             mans
             life
             ,
             without
             any
             need
             one
             of
             another
             .
          
           
             466
          
           
             Infants
             sacrificed
             to
             the
             Sunne
             .
          
           
             336
          
           
             Inguas
             kings
             of
             Peru
             worshipped
             after
             their
             deaths
             .
          
           
             344
          
           
             The
             Inguas
             empery
             continued
             above
             300.
             yeares
             .
          
           
             471
          
           
             Inguas
             married
             their
             sisters
             .
          
           
             455
          
           
             Inundation
             of
             Nile
             a
             naturall
             thing
             ,
             though
             it
             seeme
             supernaturall
             .
          
           
             88
          
           
             Iustice
             ,
             by
             whome
             executed
             in
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             486
          
           
             Indian
             bookes
             how
             they
             can
             be
             made
             without
             letters
             .
          
           
             440
          
           
             Iustice
             severely
             executed
             by
             Motesuma
             the
             last
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             570
          
           
             Integritie
             of
             women
             greatly
             honored
             by
             the
             Mexicaines
             .
          
           
             409
          
           
             Inventions
             of
             
               Iupanguy
               Ingua
            
             to
             deprive
             his
             father
             and
             brother
             of
             the
             kingdome
             .
          
           
             476
          
        
         
           
             L.
             
          
           
             LAke
             exceeding
             hote
             in
             the
             middest
             
             of
             a
             colde
             land
             .
          
           
             171
          
           
             Lake
             of
             Mexico
             having
             two
             kindes
             of
             water
             .
          
           
             172
          
           
             Lakes
             on
             the
             tops
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             growe
             .
          
           
             171
          
           
             Lactanti●
             laughes
             at
             the
             Perepatetiks
             touching
             the
             heaven
             .
          
           
             2
          
           
             Lactantius
             con●uted
             touching
             the
             Antipodes
             .
          
           
             21
          
           
             Ladders
             of
             leather
             to
             come
             out
             of
             the
             mines
             .
          
           
             230
          
           
             Landes
             of
             excellent
             temperature
             not
             yet
             discovered
             .
          
           
             190
          
           
             Lawyers
             have
             erred
             .
          
           
             432
          
           
             Liberalitie
             of
             Autzol
             the
             eight
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             551
          
           
             Litters
             of
             massie
             golde
             .
          
           
             212
          
           
             Lions
             of
             Peru
             vnlike
             to
             them
             of
             Afftrike
             .
             70
             the
             Indians
             hunt
             them
             .
          
           
             303
          
        
         
           
             M.
             
          
           
             MAlaca
             ,
             formerly
             called
             ,
             the
             golden
             Ch●rsonesus
             .
          
           
             37
          
           
             Mamaco●as
             antient
             women
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             mothers
             to
             the
             virgins
             secluded
             .
          
           
             366
          
           
             Mameys
             ,
             a
             fruit
             like
             vnto
             peaches
             .
          
           
             276
          
           
             Manati
             a
             monstrous
             fish
             that
             feedes
             in
             the
             fields
             ,
             it
             is
             like
             to
             flesh
             when
             ye
             eate
             it
             .
          
           
             164
          
           
             Mandarins
             Indian
             officers
             ,
             how
             hard
             it
             is
             to
             bee
             capable
             of
             those
             offices
             .
          
           
             440
          
           
             Mangocapa
             the
             fi●●t
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             what
             they
             faine
             of
             him
             .
          
           
             474
          
           
             Maguey
             ,
             a
             tree
             of
             woonders
             ,
             and
             to
             what
             vse
             it
             serves
             .
          
           
             273
          
           
             Mandarin
             tongue
             is
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             is
             done
             by
             characters
             .
          
           
             441
          
           
             Many
             rare
             things
             in
             nature
             ,
             knowne
             more
             by
             chance
             thā
             by
             industry
          
           
             63
          
           
             Mans
             bloud
             drunke
             by
             the
             slave
             that
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             .
          
           
             425
          
           
             Marriage
             of
             the
             Indians
             how
             celebrated
             .
          
           
             408
          
           
             Marriage
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             defended
             onely
             in
             the
             first
             degree
             .
          
           
             469
          
           
             Marriage
             of
             the
             Inguas
             with
             their
             sisters
             vnlawful
             .
          
           
             170
          
           
             Marks
             of
             some
             navigations
             of
             the
             Antients
             .
          
           
             61
          
           
             Mattins
             at
             midnight
             practised
             by
             the
             Divells
             ministers
             .
          
           
             365
          
           
             Mays
             ,
             Indian
             corne
             ,
             howe
             they
             eate
             it
             ,
             and
             make
             drinke
             thereof
             .
          
           
             253
          
           
             Mechoacanes
             enim●es
             to
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             506
          
           
             Men
             ,
             how
             they
             might
             passe
             to
             the
             Indies
             .
             51
             and
             how
             they
             might
             people
             it
             .
          
           
             7●
          
           
             Men
             and
             women
             sacrificed
             at
             the
             death
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             to
             serve
             him
             in
             the
             other
             worlde
             .
          
           
             346
          
           
             Men
             made
             gods
             ,
             and
             then
             sacrificed
             .
          
           
             357
          
           
             Men
             beeing
             sacrificed
             eaten
             by
             the
             Priests
             .
          
           
             385
          
           
             Mineralles
             imitate
             plants
             in
             their
             maner
             of
             growing
             .
          
           
             203
          
           
             Mines
             ,
             some
             wandering
             ,
             some
             fixt
             .
          
           
             217
          
           
             Mines
             in
             olde
             time
             very
             rich
             ,
             yet
             nothing
             neere
             to
             them
             of
             Potozi
             .
          
           
             224
          
           
             Mines
             exceeding
             painefull
             .
          
           
             228
          
           
             Mines
             of
             quickesilver
             in
             Spaine
             .
          
           
             238
          
           
             Middle
             region
             of
             the
             ayre
             colde
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             108
          
           
             Milles
             to
             grinde
             ●ettalls
             .
          
           
             246
          
           
             Mettall
             poore
             and
             rich
             what
             they
             be
             .
          
           
             217
          
           
             Mettall
             ,
             the
             neerer
             that
             it
             is
             to
             the
             superficies
             of
             th●
             earth
             ,
             the
             richer
             .
          
           
             229
          
           
             Mettalls
             why
             created
             .
          
           
             205
          
           
             Mettalles
             are
             no●
             found
             but
             in
             barren
             grounds
             .
          
           
             209
          
           
             M●xi
             ,
             chiefe
             of
             the
             people
             that
             came
             from
             Mexico
             from
             whom
             they
             took
             their
             name
             .
          
           
             506
          
           
             Mexico
             a
             Citty
             built
             in
             a
             Lake
             .
          
           
             170
          
           
             Mockery
             of
             the
             Mexicains
             against
             the
             Tlatelulcos
             af●et
             they
             had
             vanquished
             them
             .
          
           
             548
          
           
             Moneth
             at
             the
             Indies
             of
             twenty
             daies
          
           
             434
          
           
             
             Morning
             most
             pleasant
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             most
             troublesome
             in
             Peru.
             
          
           
             113
          
           
             Mulberie
             trees
             planted
             in
             new
             Spaine
             have
             greatly
             profited
             for
             silkworms
          
           
             298
          
           
             Muttons
             or
             sheepe
             of
             Peru
             serving
             ●or
             ass●s
             to
             carry
             their
             burthens
             ,
             profitable
             above
             all
             other
             beasts
             .
          
           
             319
          
        
         
           
             N.
             
          
           
             NAvatalcas
             ,
             people
             that
             reformed
             new
             Spaine
             .
          
           
             498
          
           
             Navigation
             at
             this
             day
             very
             easie
             .
          
           
             56
          
           
             Navigation
             of
             Salomon
             what
             it
             might
             be
             .
          
           
             60
          
           
             New
             Spaine
             what
             it
             is
             .
          
           
             187
          
           
             New
             world
             lying
             almost
             all
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
          
           
             82
          
           
             Nights
             in
             summer
             very
             fresh
             at
             Peru
             in
             respect
             of
             Europe
             .
          
           
             112
          
           
             Nights
             of
             six
             months
             vnder
             the
             Pole.
             
          
           
             29
          
           
             Night
             ,
             how
             it
             comes
             .
          
           
             6
          
           
             Nobilitie
             of
             Mexico
             murdered
             in
             dancing
             by
             the
             Spaniardes
             .
          
           
             576
          
           
             Nostril
             of
             the
             kings
             of
             Mexico
             pierced
             to
             hang
             an
             emerald
             .
          
           
             545
          
           
             Nutts
             at
             the
             Indies
             vnpleasant
             called
             by
             them
             imprisoned
             .
          
           
             280
          
        
         
           
             O.
             
          
           
             OBiection
             against
             Aristo●l●
             not
             resolved
             .
          
           
             28
          
           
             Occasion
             of
             warre
             betwixt
             the
             Tap●necans
             and
             Mexicans
             .
          
           
             526
          
           
             Ocean
             at
             the
             Indies
             divided
             into
             the
             north
             and
             south
             seas
             .
          
           
             207
          
           
             Ointment
             which
             the
             Indians
             did
             vse
             ,
             to
             make
             themselves
             fitte
             to
             speake
             with
             the
             Divell
             ,
             the
             which
             made
             them
             cruell
             and
             without
             feare
             .
          
           
             403
          
           
             Ophir
             is
             at
             the
             east
             Indies
             .
          
           
             41
          
           
             Opinion
             of
             some
             that
             the
             earthly
             Paradise
             is
             vnder
             the
             Equinocti●ll
             not
             without
             re●son
             .
          
           
             114
          
           
             Orders
             of
             priests
             in
             Mexico
             and
             their
             ordinary
             offices
             .
          
           
             365
          
           
             Ord●●s
             of
             Kn●ghts
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             the
             markes
             they
             carried
             .
          
           
             488
          
           
             Oration
             of
             the
             Mexicains
             to
             the
             king
             of
             Culhuacan
             .
          
           
             516
          
           
             Oration
             that
             an
             old
             man
             made
             to
             Acama●●xtl●
             first
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             517
          
           
             Oration
             of
             a
             Mexicaine
             knight
             ,
             to
             retaine
             the
             people
             incensed
             for
             the
             murther
             of
             their
             king
             .
          
           
             526
          
           
             Oration
             of
             an
             olde
             Mexicaine
             for
             the
             election
             of
             a
             new
             king
             .
          
           
             527
          
           
             Oration
             of
             the
             K.
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             made
             to
             Moteçuma
             vpon
             his
             election
             .
          
           
             555
          
        
         
           
             P.
             
          
           
             PAchacamac
             the
             great
             Sanctuarie
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             334
          
           
             Pacos
             ,
             wilfull
             beasts
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             be
             governed
             .
          
           
             319
          
           
             Pallaces
             of
             recreation
             and
             affliction
             .
          
           
             563
          
           
             Palisadoe
             horrible
             to
             beholde
             ,
             all
             of
             dead
             mens
             heads
             .
          
           
             362
          
           
             Papas
             ,
             rootes
             whereof
             some
             Indians
             make
             a
             bread
             called
             Cugno
             .
          
           
             186
          
           
             Papas
             a
             kinde
             of
             bread
             .
          
           
             259
          
           
             Papas
             in
             Mexico
             were
             the
             soveraigne
             priests
             of
             the
             Idols
             .
          
           
             365
          
           
             Paragu●y
             a
             river
             in
             America
             which
             overflowes
             like
             vnto
             Nile
             .
          
           
             88
          
           
             Passage
             of
             Pariacaca
             very
             daungerous
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             winde
             .
          
           
             146
          
           
             Passage
             of
             Pariacaca
             one
             of
             the
             highest
             partes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             P●ste
             of
             Mays
             ,
             called
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             the
             flesh
             of
             their
             god
             Vuziliputzl●
             ,
             which
             they
             eate
             .
          
           
             393
          
           
             Pastures
             at
             the
             Indies
             lie
             common
             ,
             which
             makes
             flesh
             good
             cheap
             .
          
           
             299
          
           
             Paltas
             ,
             a
             delicate
             fruite
             ,
             and
             good
             for
             the
             stomacke
             .
          
           
             277
          
           
             Painting
             ,
             the
             booke
             of
             fooles
             .
          
           
             439
          
           
             Penance
             inioyned
             by
             the
             Indian
             Confessors
             .
          
           
             401
          
           
             Partriges
             none
             in
             Peru.
             
          
           
             70
          
           
             Pericol●●gero
             a
             very
             heavie
             beast
             .
          
           
             314
          
           
             Parrots
             flie
             by
             stockes
             like
             vnto
             Pigeons
             .
          
           
             70
          
           
             
             Pearles
             in
             olde
             time
             more
             esteemed
             than
             now
             .
          
           
             251
          
           
             Peru
             abounding
             in
             wine
             .
          
           
             187
          
           
             Peru
             abounds
             more
             in
             gold
             and
             silver
             then
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             207
          
           
             Peru
             ,
             what
             part
             of
             the
             world
             it
             is
             .
          
           
             183
          
           
             Peru
             ,
             a
             name
             derived
             from
             a
             river
             of
             that
             country
             ,
             not
             of
             Ophir
             ,
             as
             some
             thinke
             .
          
           
             42
          
           
             Perusiens
             very
             carefull
             to
             preserve
             their
             History
             by
             tradition
             ,
             without
             letters
             or
             characters
             .
          
           
             449
          
           
             Pleasant
             manner
             of
             fishing
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             168
          
           
             P●lots
             ,
             why
             at
             this
             day
             they
             sit
             on
             the
             poope
             ,
             and
             not
             on
             the
             prowe
             ,
             as
             in
             olde
             time
             .
          
           
             55
          
           
             Phisitions
             in
             former
             times
             very
             cunning
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             289
          
           
             Pines
             ,
             or
             pine
             apples
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             262
          
           
             Pinchao
             ,
             an
             idoll
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             &
             with
             what
             arte
             he
             was
             framed
             .
          
           
             361
          
           
             Pleasant
             act
             of
             a
             Portugall
             ,
             whereby
             hee
             freed
             himselfe
             from
             sacrificing
             .
          
           
             346
          
           
             Plane
             brings
             forth
             fruit
             all
             the
             yeare
             .
          
           
             267
          
           
             Plane
             leafe
             fit
             to
             write
             on
             .
          
           
             268
          
           
             Planets
             moove
             not
             of
             themselves
             in
             a
             corruptible
             body
             .
          
           
             7
          
           
             Plants
             ,
             why
             they
             profite
             more
             at
             the
             Indies
             than
             in
             Europe
             .
          
           
             261
          
           
             Plebeians
             excluded
             from
             the
             Kings
             presence
             ,
             and
             from
             all
             office
             by
             Moteçuma
             .
          
           
             557
          
           
             Pliny
             died
             in
             too
             curious
             a
             search
             .
          
           
             196
          
           
             Pole
             at
             the
             south
             not
             marked
             by
             anie
             sixed
             starre
             .
          
           
             16
          
           
             Pongo
             the
             most
             daungerous
             passage
             in
             the
             worlde
             vppon
             the
             river
             of
             Amazons
             .
          
           
             176
          
           
             Portugalles
             very
             expert
             in
             the
             Arte
             of
             navigation
             .
          
           
             17
          
           
             Pot●zi
             ,
             a
             mountaine
             famous
             for
             the
             rich
             mines
             ,
             and
             howe
             they
             were
             discovered
             .
          
           
             219
          
           
             Presages
             threatning
             the
             ruine
             of
             states
             not
             to
             be
             contemned
             as
             vain
             things
          
           
             560
          
           
             Priestes
             which
             every
             Indian
             Nobleman
             had
             like
             vnto
             Almoners
             .
          
           
             349
          
           
             Priests
             of
             Idolles
             how
             they
             consulted
             with
             their
             gods
             .
          
           
             360
          
           
             Pretext
             of
             the
             Inguas
             to
             inlarge
             their
             dominions
             ,
             was
             religion
             ,
             which
             they
             held
             for
             the
             best
             .
          
           
             472
          
           
             Processions
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             394
          
           
             Prodigious
             sights
             before
             the
             ruine
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             561
          
           
             Profit
             which
             may
             be
             gathered
             by
             the
             reading
             of
             these
             excerable
             Indian
             superstitions
             .
          
           
             428
          
           
             Propertie
             most
             rare
             of
             the
             Adamant
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             Ant●ents
             .
          
           
             55
          
           
             Province
             next
             to
             Mexico
             left
             vnconquered
             ,
             to
             exercise
             their
             youth
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             Captaines
             to
             sacrifice
             .
          
           
             541
          
           
             Ptol●me
             and
             Avicen
             held
             the
             bu●ning
             zone
             to
             be
             habitable
             .
          
           
             102
          
           
             Punas
             ,
             a
             desart
             in
             Peru
             ,
             where
             the
             aire
             killes
             both
             men
             and
             beasts
             .
          
           
             149
          
           
             Pyramide
             of
             fire
             appearing
             in
             the
             heaven
             for
             a
             whole
             yeere
             ,
             before
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Mexicain
             Empire
             .
          
           
             561
          
           
             
               Pr●te
               Ians
            
             country
             exceeding
             hot
             .
          
           
             106
          
        
         
           
             Q.
             
          
           
             QVantitie
             of
             golde
             which
             commeth
             yearely
             from
             the
             Indies
             into
             Spain
          
           
             215
          
           
             Quetzalcoalt
             the
             marchants
             god
             ,
             and
             where
             he
             was
             worshipped
             .
          
           
             354
          
           
             Qu●ppos
             bowes
             serving
             as
             registers
             for
             the
             remembring
             of
             that
             which
             passed
             in
             Peru.
             
          
           
             449
          
           
             Quicke-silver
             flies
             from
             all
             mettalles
             ,
             except
             golde
             and
             silver
             .
          
           
             234
          
           
             Quicke-silver
             turnes
             into
             smoake
             ,
             and
             againe
             into
             quickesilver
             .
          
           
             235
          
           
             Quickesilver
             heavier
             than
             anie
             other
             mettall
             .
          
           
             236
          
           
             Quickesilver
             how
             it
             is
             drawne
             out
             of
             the
             mines
             .
          
           
             239
          
        
         
           
           
             R.
             
          
           
             RAine
             caused
             by
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
          
           
             89
          
           
             Rayme
             the
             first
             month
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             &
             it
             answ
             ers
             with
             December
             .
          
           
             411
          
           
             Our
             Reason
             ignorant
             even
             of
             natural
             things
             .
          
           
             59
          
           
             Regions
             very
             delightfull
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             114
          
           
             Regions
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             verie
             temperate
             .
          
           
             101
          
           
             Religion
             served
             the
             Indians
             for
             a
             p●●text
             to
             make
             warre
             .
          
           
             80
          
           
             Remedy
             against
             the
             alteration
             which
             the
             winde
             causeth
             in
             Pariacaca
             .
          
           
             147
          
           
             Riches
             of
             some
             Ilands
             in
             new
             Spaine
             .
          
           
             187
          
           
             Riches
             incredible
             of
             the
             Perusiens
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             taken
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             .
          
           
             462
          
           
             Rice
             very
             common
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             260
          
           
             River
             of
             Amazons
             diversly
             called
             ,
             it
             is
             termed
             the
             empresse
             of
             all
             rivers
             .
          
           
             92
          
           
             Rivers
             admirable
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
          
           
             93
          
           
             River
             of
             Amazons
             three
             score
             leagues
             wide
             at
             the
             mouth
             .
          
           
             92
          
           
             River
             of
             Magdale●ne
             called
             the
             G●eat
             river
             runnes
             farre
             into
             the
             sea
             and
             mingles
             not
             his
             water
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Rivers
             ,
             h●lles
             ,
             great
             stones
             ,
             and
             toppes
             of
             mountaines
             worshipped
             by
             the
             Indian
             .
          
           
             355
          
           
             Ro●kes
             r●sing
             in
             the
             midd●st
             of
             the
             sea
             and
             no
             bo●tome
             to
             be
             sound
             about
             them
             .
          
           
             202
          
           
             Roses
             how
             they
             growe
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             283
          
           
             Round●●s
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             and
             the
             mo●●en
             thereof
             vnknowne
             to
             some
             doctors
             of
             the
             church
             .
          
           
             2
          
           
             Rootes
             wors●●pt
             by
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             341
          
           
             Roo●es
             very
             profitable
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             ibidem
          
           
             A
             Rowle
             the
             ma●ke
             of
             the
             kings
             Inguas
             ,
             as
             heere
             the
             S●●pter
             and
             the
             Crowne
             .
          
           
             297
          
           
             Ruine
             of
             a
             great
             village
             full
             of
             sorcerers
             .
          
           
             199
          
        
         
           
             S.
             
          
           
             SAcrifices
             of
             men
             howe
             they
             were
             made
             .
          
           
             383
          
           
             Sacrifices
             diversly
             made
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             vpon
             divers
             occasions
             .
          
           
             376
          
           
             Sacrifices
             vsuall
             with
             the
             Indians
             in
             their
             necessities
             .
          
           
             480
          
           
             Sainos
             strange
             beasts
             to
             hunt
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             may
             be
             slaine
             .
          
           
             312
          
           
             Salsepareille
             ,
             good
             for
             the
             French
             disease
             .
          
           
             174
          
           
             Sciences
             knowne
             by
             the
             Chinois
             .
          
           
             444
          
           
             S.
             Croix
             of
             the
             Sierre
             a
             province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             how
             it
             was
             converted
             to
             the
             faith
             .
          
           
             580
          
           
             Sea
             held
             by
             the
             Antients
             vnnavigable
             beyond
             the
             straights
             of
             G●braltar
             .
          
           
             26
          
           
             Seas
             ,
             some
             hote
             ,
             some
             cold
             .
          
           
             111
          
           
             Sea-water
             refresheth
             although
             it
             bee
             salt
             .
          
           
             107
          
           
             Silver
             ,
             why
             esteemed
             above
             all
             other
             mettall
             next
             to
             gold
             .
          
           
             216
          
           
             Silver
             more
             esteemed
             in
             some
             places
             than
             gold
             .
          
           
             217
          
           
             S●lver
             ,
             how
             it
             is
             refined
             by
             fire
             ,
             &
             how
             by
             quickesilver
             .
          
           
             218
          
           
             Silver
             of
             divers
             sortes
             .
          
           
             232
          
           
             Silver
             ,
             how
             it
             is
             tried
             .
          
           
             247
          
           
             Soccabons
             artificially
             invented
             to
             draw
             foorth
             the
             mettall
             more
             easily
             .
          
           
             229
          
           
             The
             Sunne
             the
             nearer
             it
             is
             vnto
             vs
             the
             more
             it
             heates
             .
          
           
             ●3
          
           
             The
             Sun
             hath
             contrary
             effects
             within
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             and
             without
             the
             tropickes
             .
          
           
             87
          
           
             The
             Sunne
             by
             his
             great
             force
             causeth
             moisture
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             .
          
           
             95
          
           
             The
             Sunne
             worshipped
             commonly
             by
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             335
          
           
             A
             Sorceresse
             sister
             to
             the
             Idoll
             which
             built
             the
             towne
             of
             Mal●nalco
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             none
             but
             sorcerers
             .
          
           
             507
          
           
             Spaniards
             borne
             at
             the
             Indies
             called
             
             Crollos
             .
          
           
             278
          
           
             Spaniards
             held
             for
             gods
             .
          
           
             69
          
           
             Spaniards
             called
             by
             the
             Indians
             Virachocas
             ,
             children
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             480
          
           
             Spanish
             ships
             esteemed
             by
             the
             Indians
             for
             rockes
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             69
          
           
             The
             Spaniard
             one
             yeare
             with
             an
             other
             draws
             a
             million
             of
             silver
             from
             Potozi
             .
          
           
             225
          
           
             Springs
             of
             Nile
             sought
             for
             by
             Caesar.
             
          
           
             30
          
           
             Springs
             ,
             some
             blew
             ,
             others
             redde
             like
             bloud
             .
          
           
             175
          
           
             Snakes
             ,
             the
             Armes
             of
             the
             kings
             of
             Peru
             .
          
           
             338
          
           
             Blacke
             Spots
             in
             the
             milken
             way
             at
             the
             south
             .
          
           
             16
          
           
             Starres
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Doctors
             of
             the
             Church
             moove
             of
             themselves
             .
          
           
             2
          
           
             Starres
             worshipped
             by
             the
             Indians
             for
             divers
             reasons
             .
          
           
             336
          
           
             Stones
             superstitiously
             offred
             at
             passages
             to
             have
             faire
             way
             .
          
           
             341
          
           
             Stones
             carved
             and
             cut
             like
             wood
             .
          
           
             173
          
           
             Stones
             ,
             halfe
             golde
             ,
             halfe
             stone
             .
          
           
             212
          
           
             Stones
             of
             a
             wonderfull
             greatnes
             artificially
             ioyned
             together
             by
             the
             Indians
             in
             their
             buildings
             without
             any
             morter
             .
          
           
             459
          
           
             Straight
             of
             Magellan
             discovered
             by
             a
             Portugall
             ,
             and
             carrieth
             the
             same
             name
             .
          
           
             152
          
           
             Straight
             at
             the
             Articke
             Pole
             ,
             which
             they
             imagine
             to
             be
             in
             Florida
             ,
             not
             yet
             discovered
             .
          
           
             157
          
           
             Straight
             of
             Gibraltar
             called
             in
             olde
             time
             the
             P●llers
             of
             H●rcules
             .
          
           
             151
          
           
             Stuffes
             of
             three
             sortes
             made
             of
             wooll
             .
          
           
             465
          
           
             Su●●illes
             Indian
             nosegay●s
             ,
             they
             love
             them
             greatly
             ,
             and
             present
             them
             to
             their
             guests
             .
          
           
             282
          
           
             Supe●st●tion
             vsed
             at
             the
             carrying
             of
             a
             streame
             through
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             552
          
        
         
           
             T.
             
          
           
             TAbacco
             ,
             a
             plant
             vsed
             for
             a
             counterpoison
             .
          
           
             289
          
           
             
               Ta●bos
               '
            
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             the
             most
             auntient
             race
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             79
          
           
             Temperature
             quite
             contrary
             in
             lesse
             tha●
             fiftie
             leagues
             .
          
           
             183
          
           
             Temple
             at
             Cusco
             like
             to
             the
             Pantheon
             at
             Rome
             .
          
           
             359
          
           
             Tescalipuca
             the
             god
             of
             Iubiles
             at
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             his
             ornaments
             .
          
           
             353
          
           
             Tharsis
             sometimes
             signifies
             the
             Crisolite
             or
             Iacinth
             ,
             somet●mes
             the
             Sea
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             that
             colour
             ,
             by
             the
             reverberation
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
          
           
             46
          
           
             Tharsis
             in
             the
             Scripture
             is
             not
             Tarso
             a
             citty
             in
             Cilicia
             .
          
           
             47
          
           
             Tharsis
             and
             Ophir
             generall
             wordes
             in
             the
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Tlas●altecas
             ,
             the
             sixt
             generation
             of
             the
             Mava●alcas
             ,
             they
             gave
             entrie
             to
             the
             Spaniardes
             .
          
           
             501
          
           
             Tlacaell●c
             ,
             the
             most
             valiant
             Captaine
             the
             Mexicaines
             had
             .
          
           
             530
          
           
             Thanksgiving
             after
             a
             victorie
             .
          
           
             574
          
           
             Tiburons
             ,
             a
             very
             greedy
             fis●
             .
          
           
             165
          
           
             Three
             kindes
             of
             beastes
             found
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             303
          
           
             Three
             kinds
             of
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             their
             qualities
             .
          
           
             178
          
           
             Three
             things
             ordinarily
             vsed
             in
             all
             the
             Indian
             ceremonies
             .
          
           
             410
          
           
             Three
             kinds
             of
             governement
             knowne
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             471
          
           
             Tigres
             at
             Peru
             more
             cruell
             to
             the
             Indians
             than
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             .
          
           
             70
          
           
             Tigres
             may
             swimme
             seaven
             or
             eight
             leagues
             by
             sea
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Tooth
             of
             a
             Giant
             of
             an
             exceeding
             greatnes
             .
          
           
             501
          
           
             Tree
             of
             a
             wonderfull
             greatnesse
             .
          
           
             291
          
           
             Tit●caca
             a
             Lake
             of
             woonderfull
             greatnesse
             .
          
           
             169
          
           
             The
             Trinitie
             imitated
             by
             the
             Divell
             ,
             and
             worsh●pped
             by
             the
             Indians
             in
             three
             Images
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
          
           
             412
          
           
             Tunall
             ,
             a
             tree
             of
             a
             strange
             forme
             fit
             for
             
             many
             vses
             .
          
           
             274
          
        
         
           
             V.
             
          
           
             VAlour
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             586
          
           
             Vallies
             hotter
             than
             the
             mountains
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             108
          
           
             Vallies
             the
             best
             habitations
             of
             Peru.
             
          
           
             185
          
           
             Varietie
             of
             temperature
             of
             lands
             lying
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             .
          
           
             105
          
           
             Verm●llion
             and
             Quickesilver
             grow
             in
             the
             s●me
             stone
             .
          
           
             237
          
           
             Victories
             of
             the
             Mexicans
             against
             the
             Tapenecans
             .
          
           
             533
          
           
             Vicugnes
             a
             kinde
             of
             wilde
             sheepe
             ,
             the
             flesh
             is
             good
             for
             the
             paine
             in
             the
             e●es
             .
          
           
             316
          
           
             Vines
             without
             fruit
             in
             new
             Spaine
             .
          
           
             188
          
           
             Vines
             in
             Peru
             and
             Ch●lle
             beare
             good
             wine
             .
          
           
             296
          
           
             Vines
             of
             the
             vallie
             of
             Y●a
             ,
             which
             doe
             growe
             and
             are
             never
             watered
             with
             any
             raine
             ,
             and
             how
             .
          
           
             ibid
          
           
             Vines
             that
             carry
             grapes
             every
             moneth
             in
             the
             yeere
             .
          
           
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Viraco●h●
             ,
             the
             name
             which
             the
             Indians
             gave
             to
             their
             supreme
             god
             ,
             with
             others
             of
             great
             power
             .
          
           
             333
          
           
             Vuziliputzli
             the
             chiefe
             idoll
             of
             Mexico
             and
             his
             ornaments
             .
          
           
             352
          
           
             Vittells
             set
             vppon
             the
             tombes
             of
             dead
             men
             to
             feede
             them
             .
          
           
             347
          
           
             Voyce
             heard
             foretelling
             the
             ruine
             of
             Moteçuma
             .
          
           
             565
          
           
             Volcan
             of
             Guat●mala
             more
             admirable
             than
             all
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             194
          
           
             Volcans
             how
             entertained
             .
          
           
             196
          
           
             Voyage
             of
             Hannon
             the
             Carthagin●an
             admirable
             in
             his
             time
             .
          
           
             36
          
           
             Vros
             bru●ish
             people
             which
             esteeme
             not
             themselves
             .
          
           
             94
          
           
             Vtilitie
             of
             all
             naturall
             histories
             .
          
           
             117
          
           
             Vnction
             of
             Vuzilovitli
             the
             second
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             521
          
        
         
           
             W.
             
          
           
             WAy
             by
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             go
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             their
             returne
             .
          
           
             128
          
           
             Waters
             of
             Guayaquil
             most
             soveraigne
             for
             the
             French
             disease
             .
          
           
             174
          
           
             Warres
             of
             the
             Mexicans
             most
             commonly
             to
             take
             prisoners
             .
          
           
             483
          
           
             Westerne
             windes
             hurtefull
             to
             silke-wormes
             .
          
           
             144
          
           
             Westerne
             windes
             blowe
             not
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
          
           
             126
          
           
             Whales
             how
             taken
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             eate
             them
             .
          
           
             167
          
           
             Windes
             very
             daungerous
             ,
             which
             kill
             and
             preserve
             the
             dead
             bodies
             without
             corruption
             .
          
           
             147
          
           
             Windes
             called
             Brises
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             which
             come
             from
             the
             east
             .
          
           
             127
          
           
             Windes
             ,
             how
             many
             ,
             and
             their
             names
             .
          
           
             133
          
           
             Windes
             of
             the
             land
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             blow
             rather
             by
             night
             than
             by
             day
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             sea
             contrary
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             142
          
           
             Winde
             corrupts
             yron
             .
          
           
             144
          
           
             Windes
             that
             blowe
             southerly
             make
             the
             coast
             habitable
             .
          
           
             125
          
           
             One
             Winde
             hath
             diverse
             properties
             according
             to
             the
             place
             where
             it
             raignes
             ,
             and
             the
             cause
             .
          
           
             120
          
           
             Winde
             doth
             cause
             strange
             diversities
             of
             temperature
             .
          
           
             112
          
           
             Wisedome
             of
             this
             world
             weake
             in
             divine
             ,
             yea
             in
             humane
             things
             .
          
           
             31
          
           
             Winter
             and
             summe●
             ,
             and
             the
             cause
             .
          
           
             90
          
           
             Woods
             rare
             and
             sweete
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             292
          
           
             Words
             of
             a
             man
             which
             had
             his
             heart
             pulled
             out
             .
          
           
             390
          
           
             Writing
             of
             the
             Chinois
             was
             from
             the
             toppe
             downeward
             ,
             and
             the
             Mexicans
             from
             the
             foote
             vpward
             .
          
           
             447
          
        
         
           
             X.
             
          
           
             XAmabusis
             ,
             pilgrimes
             forced
             to
             confesse
             their
             sinnes
             vpon
             the
             toppe
             of
             a
             rocke
             .
          
           
             400
          
        
         
           
             Y.
             
          
           
             YCa
             and
             Arica
             ,
             and
             their
             manner
             of
             
             sayling
             in
             skinnes
             .
          
           
             63
          
           
             Year●
             at
             the
             Indies
             divided
             into
             eighteene
             moneths
             .
          
           
             432
          
           
             Youth
             very
             carefully
             instructed
             in
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             489
          
           
             Yeare
             at
             Peru
             approaching
             neerer
             to
             ours
             than
             that
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
           
             437
          
           
             Ytu
             a
             great
             feast
             at
             the
             Indies
             which
             they
             made
             in
             their
             necessitie
             .
          
           
             416
          
           
             
               Yupangu●
               Ingua
            
             was
             in
             Peru
             like
             to
             an
             other
             Numa
             in
             Rome
             for
             the
             making
             of
             Lawes
             .
          
           
             261
          
        
         
           
             Z.
             
          
           
             ZEphiru●
             a
             pleasant
             and
             wholesome
             winde
             .
          
           
             126
          
           
             Zone
             which
             they
             call
             burning
             ,
             the
             Antients
             held
             inhabitable
             .
          
           
             30
          
           
             Burning
             zone
             in
             some
             partes
             temperate
             ,
             in
             others
             colde
             ,
             and
             in
             others
             hote
             .
          
           
             101
          
           
             Burning
             Zone
             peopled
             ,
             and
             pleasaunt
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             Philosophers
             .
          
           
             86
          
           
             Burning
             Zone
             why
             temperate
             .
          
           
             105
          
           
             In
             the
             burning
             Zone
             they
             saile
             easily
             from
             east
             to
             weast
             ,
             and
             not
             contrarie
             ,
             and
             why
             .
          
           
             132
          
           
             In
             the
             burning
             Zone
             the
             neerenesse
             of
             the
             Sunne
             dooth
             not
             alwaies
             cause
             raine
             .
          
           
             100
          
        
         
           The
           end
           of
           the
           Table
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Errata
           .
        
         
           
             111.22
             .
             for
             ,
             Paraguen
             reade
             Paraguay
             .
          
           
             120.30
             .
             for
             ,
             River
             reade
             Region
             .
          
           
             135.32
             .
             for
             ,
             to
             reade
             in
          
           
             141.28
             .
             for
             ,
             the
             motion
             reade
             without
             any
             ●otion
          
           
             148.33
             .
             for
             ,
             inhabited
             reade
             not
             inhabited
          
           
             164.17
             .
             for
             ,
             greene
             reade
             great
          
           
             198.23
             .
             for
             ,
             hundred
             reade
             five
             hundred
          
           
             213.21
             .
             for
             ,
             Curuma
             reade
             Cucuma
          
           
             229.17
             .
             for
             ,
             to
             reade
             and
          
           
             235.11
             .
             for
             ,
             it
             reade
             that
          
           
             241.8
             ,
             for
             ,
             it
             reade
             his
          
           
             253.12
             ,
             for
             ,
             maces
             reade
             markes
          
           
             274.8
             .
             for
             ,
             little
             reade
             like
          
           
             278.19
             .
             for
             ,
             is
             no
             reade
             is
             a
          
           
             351.25
             .
             for
             ,
             many
             reade
             in
             many
          
           
             368.2
             .
             for
             ,
             possession
             reade
             profession
          
           
             397.14
             .
             for
             ,
             to
             the
             communion
             reade
             to
             the
             people
             in
             manner
             of
             a
             communion
          
           
             514.21
             .
             for
             partiall
             reade
             particular
          
           
             324.32
             .
             for
             ,
             convenient
             in
             a
             maner
             reade
             in
             a
             convenient
             manner
             .
          
           
             335.3
             .
             for
             ,
             of
             reade
             to
          
           
             347.25
             .
             for
             ,
             neither
             reade
             in
             their
          
        
         
           Gentle
           Reader
           ,
           from
           the
           folio
           225.
           line
           14
           ,
           16
           ,
           19
           ,
           20.
           where
           you
           finde
           peeces
           reade
           pezoes
           till
           you
           come
           to
           folio
           322.
           line
           22.
           
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
         
           THE
           FIRST
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           East
           and
           West
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             opinions
             of
             some
             Authors
             ,
             which
             supposed
             that
             the
             Heavens
             did
             not
             extend
             to
             the
             new-found
             world
             .
             The
             first
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             THE
             Ancients
             were
             so
             farre
             from
             conceypt
             ,
             that
             this
             new-found
             world
             was
             peopled
             by
             any
             Nation
             ,
             that
             many
             of
             them
             could
             not
             imagine
             there
             was
             any
             land
             on
             that
             part
             :
             and
             (
             which
             is
             more
             worthie
             of
             admiration
             )
             some
             have
             flatly
             denyed
             ,
             that
             the
             Heavens
             (
             which
             we
             now
             beholde
             )
             could
             extend
             thither
             .
             For
             although
             the
             greatest
             part
             ,
             (
             yea
             ,
             the
             most
             famous
             among
             the
             Philosophers
             )
             have
             well
             knowne
             that
             the
             Heaven
             was
             round
             (
             as
             in
             effect
             it
             is
             )
             and
             by
             that
             meanes
             did
             compasse
             and
             comprehend
             within
             it self
             the
             whole
             earth
             :
             yet
             many
             ,
             (
             yea
             ,
             of
             the
             holy
             doctors
             of
             greatest
             authoritie
             )
             
             have
             disagreed
             in
             opinion
             vpon
             this
             point
             :
             supposing
             the
             frame
             of
             this
             vniversall
             world
             to
             bee
             fashioned
             like
             vnto
             a
             house
             :
             whereas
             the
             roofe
             that
             covers
             it
             ,
             invirons
             onely
             the
             vpper
             part
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             rest
             :
             inferring
             by
             their
             reasons
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             should
             else
             hang
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             the
             which
             seemed
             vnto
             them
             voyd
             of
             sense
             .
             For
             as
             we
             see
             in
             every
             building
             ,
             the
             ground-worke
             and
             foundation
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             the
             cover
             opposite
             vnto
             it
             :
             even
             so
             in
             this
             great
             building
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             Heaven
             should
             remaine
             above
             on
             the
             one
             part
             ,
             and
             the
             earth
             vnder
             it
             .
             The
             glorious
             Chrysostome
             ,
             (
             a
             man
             better
             seene
             in
             the
             studie
             of
             holy
             Scriptures
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             knowledge
             of
             Philosophie
             )
             seemes
             to
             be
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             when
             in
             his
             Commentaries
             vpon
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             he
             doth
             laugh
             at
             those
             ,
             
             which
             hold
             the
             heavens
             to
             be
             round
             .
             And
             it
             seemes
             ,
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             doth
             inferre
             as
             much
             ;
             terming
             the
             Heavens
             a
             Tabernacle
             or
             Frame
             built
             by
             the
             hand
             of
             God.
             And
             hee
             passeth
             farther
             vpon
             this
             point
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             which
             mooves
             and
             goes
             ,
             
             is
             not
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             but
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             Moone
             and
             Starres
             which
             moove
             in
             the
             heaven
             ,
             even
             as
             Sparrowes
             and
             other
             birds
             moove
             in
             the
             ayre
             :
             contrary
             to
             that
             ,
             which
             the
             Philosophers
             hold
             ,
             that
             they
             turne
             with
             the
             Heaven
             itselfe
             ,
             as
             the
             armes
             of
             a
             wheele
             doe
             with
             the
             wheele
             .
             
             Theodoret
             a
             very
             grave
             Authour
             ,
             followes
             Chrysostome
             in
             this
             opinion
             ,
             and
             Theophilus
             likewise
             ,
             as
             hee
             is
             accustomed
             almost
             in
             all
             thinges
             .
             
             But
             
               Lactantius
               Firmian
            
             ,
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             holding
             the
             same
             opinion
             ,
             
             doth
             mocke
             the
             Peripatetickes
             and
             Academickes
             ,
             which
             give
             the
             heaven
             a
             round
             forme
             ,
             placing
             the
             earth
             in
             the
             middest
             thereof
             :
             for
             that
             it
             seemeth
             ridiculous
             vnto
             him
             ,
             that
             the
             
             earth
             should
             hang
             in
             the
             ayre
             ,
             as
             is
             before
             sayde
             .
             By
             which
             his
             opinion
             ,
             hee
             is
             conformable
             vnto
             Epicurus
             ,
             who
             holdeth
             ,
             that
             on
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             but
             a
             Chaos
             and
             infinite
             gulph
             .
             And
             it
             seemeth
             that
             S.
             Ierome
             draweth
             neere
             to
             this
             opinion
             ,
             
             writing
             vpon
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Ephesians
             in
             these
             wordes
             .
             
               The
               naturall
               Philosopher
               by
               his
               contemplation
               pierceth
               to
               the
               height
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               other
               part
               he
               findeth
               a
               great
               vast
               in
               the
               depth
               and
               bowels
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
             Some
             likewise
             say
             that
             Procopius
             affirmes
             (
             the
             which
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             )
             vpon
             the
             booke
             of
             Genesis
             ,
             
             that
             the
             opinion
             of
             Aristotle
             ,
             touching
             the
             forme
             and
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             Heaven
             ,
             is
             contrarie
             and
             repugnant
             to
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             .
             But
             whatsoever
             the
             Ancients
             say
             or
             holde
             touching
             this
             point
             ,
             it
             must
             not
             trouble
             vs
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             wel
             knowne
             and
             verified
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             not
             beene
             so
             studious
             in
             the
             knowledge
             and
             demonstrations
             of
             Philosophie
             ,
             beeing
             busied
             in
             other
             studies
             of
             farre
             greater
             importance
             .
             But
             that
             which
             is
             more
             to
             be
             admired
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             S.
             Augustine
             himselfe
             ,
             
             so
             well
             seene
             in
             all
             naturall
             Sciences
             ,
             yea
             ,
             very
             learned
             in
             Astrologie
             and
             Physicke
             ,
             remaynes
             yet
             still
             in
             doubt
             ,
             not
             able
             to
             resolve
             ,
             whether
             the
             Heaven
             did
             compasse
             in
             the
             earth
             on
             all
             parts
             .
             
             
               What
               care
               I
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               if
               we
               suppose
               the
               Heaven
               doth
               inviron
               the
               earth
               on
               all
               parts
               like
               vnto
               a
               bowle
               ,
               beeing
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               as
               a
               bottome
               is
               compassed
               with
               threed
               :
               or
               that
               we
               say
               it
               is
               not
               so
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Heaven
               covereth
               the
               earth
               of
               one
               part
               onely
               ,
               as
               a
               great
               Basin
               that
               hangs
               over
               it
               .
            
             In
             the
             same
             place
             he
             seemeth
             to
             shew
             ,
             (
             nay
             ,
             hee
             speaketh
             plainely
             )
             that
             there
             is
             no
             certaine
             demonstration
             ,
             to
             proove
             the
             figure
             of
             the
             world
             to
             be
             round
             ,
             but
             onely
             by
             simple
             coniectures
             .
             In
             which
             places
             cited
             and
             others
             ;
             they
             hold
             the
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             Heaven
             very
             doubtfull
             .
             
             But
             wee
             ought
             not
             to
             take
             it
             offencively
             ,
             nor
             esteeme
             lesse
             of
             the
             Doctors
             of
             the
             holy
             Church
             ,
             if
             in
             some
             points
             of
             Philosophie
             and
             naturall
             knowledge
             ,
             they
             have
             varied
             in
             opinion
             from
             that
             which
             is
             helde
             for
             good
             philosophie
             ;
             seeing
             all
             their
             studie
             hath
             been
             to
             know
             ,
             preach
             and
             serve
             the
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             wherein
             they
             have
             bin
             excellent
             ,
             and
             having
             well
             imployed
             their
             studies
             in
             causes
             of
             greater
             waight
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             small
             matter
             in
             them
             ,
             not
             to
             have
             knowen
             all
             particularities
             concerning
             the
             creatures
             .
             But
             those
             vaine
             Philosophers
             of
             our
             age
             ,
             are
             much
             more
             to
             bee
             blamed
             ,
             who
             having
             attayned
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             being
             and
             order
             of
             the
             creatures
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             course
             and
             motion
             of
             the
             Heavens
             ,
             have
             not
             yet
             learned
             (
             wretched
             as
             they
             are
             )
             to
             knowe
             the
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             but
             busying
             themselves
             wholly
             in
             his
             workes
             ,
             have
             not
             yet
             mounted
             by
             their
             imaginations
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Soveraigne
             Author
             thereof
             ,
             
             as
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             teacheth
             vs
             :
             or
             if
             they
             have
             knowne
             him
             ,
             they
             have
             not
             served
             and
             glorified
             him
             ,
             as
             they
             ought
             ,
             blinded
             with
             their
             imaginations
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Apostle
             doth
             accuse
             and
             blame
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             Heaven
             is
             round
             on
             all
             parts
             ,
             mooving
             in
             his
             course
             of
             it selfe
             .
             
               CHAP.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             BVt
             comming
             to
             our
             subiect
             :
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             the
             opinion
             which
             Aristotle
             and
             the
             other
             Peripateticks
             held
             with
             the
             Stoicks
             ,
             (
             that
             the
             figure
             of
             Heaven
             was
             round
             ,
             and
             did
             moove
             circularly
             in
             his
             
             course
             )
             is
             so
             perfectly
             true
             ;
             as
             we
             which
             doe
             now
             live
             in
             Peru
             ,
             see
             it
             visibly
             .
             Wherin
             experience
             should
             be
             of
             more
             force
             ,
             then
             all
             Philosophicall
             demonstrations
             ,
             being
             sufficient
             to
             proove
             that
             the
             Heaven
             is
             round
             ,
             and
             comprehends
             and
             contaynes
             the
             earth
             within
             it
             of
             al
             parts
             .
             And
             to
             cleere
             any
             doubt
             that
             might
             grow
             ,
             it
             sufficeth
             that
             I
             have
             seene
             in
             this
             our
             Hemisphere
             ,
             that
             part
             of
             Heaven
             which
             turnes
             about
             this
             earth
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             Ancients
             :
             and
             have
             observed
             the
             two
             Poles
             ,
             whereon
             the
             Heavens
             turne
             ,
             as
             vpon
             their
             Axeltrees
             .
             I
             say
             ,
             the
             Articke
             or
             North
             Pole
             ,
             which
             those
             of
             Europe
             beholde
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Antarticke
             or
             Southerne
             Pole
             (
             whereof
             saint
             Augustine
             is
             in
             doubt
             )
             the
             which
             we
             change
             and
             take
             for
             the
             North
             here
             at
             Peru
             ,
             
             having
             passed
             the
             Equinoctiall
             line
             .
             Finally
             ,
             it
             sufficeth
             that
             I
             have
             sayled
             neere
             70.
             degrees
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             forty
             of
             the
             one
             side
             of
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             23.
             on
             the
             other
             ,
             omitting
             at
             this
             present
             the
             testimony
             of
             others
             ,
             which
             have
             sayled
             much
             farther
             then
             my selfe
             ,
             &
             in
             a
             greater
             height
             ,
             comming
             neere
             70.
             degrees
             towards
             the
             South
             .
             Who
             will
             not
             confesse
             ,
             but
             the
             ship
             called
             the
             Victori●
             (
             worthie
             doubtlesse
             of
             eternall
             memorie
             )
             hath
             wonne
             the
             honor
             and
             praise
             to
             have
             best
             discovered
             and
             compassed
             the
             round
             earth
             ,
             yea
             ,
             that
             great
             Chaos
             ,
             and
             infidite
             Vast
             ,
             which
             the
             ancient
             Philosophers
             affirmed
             to
             bee
             vnder
             ,
             the
             earth
             ,
             having
             compassed
             about
             the
             worlde
             ,
             and
             circled
             the
             vastnesse
             of
             the
             great
             Oceans
             .
             Who
             is
             hee
             then
             ,
             that
             will
             not
             confesse
             by
             this
             Navigation
             ,
             but
             the
             whole
             earth
             (
             although
             it
             were
             bigger
             then
             it
             is
             described
             )
             is
             subiect
             to
             the
             feet
             of
             man
             ,
             s●eing
             he
             may
             measure
             it
             ?
             Thus
             ,
             without
             doubt
             the
             Heaven
             is
             of
             a
             round
             and
             perfect
             figure
             ;
             and
             the
             earth
             
             likewise
             imbracing
             and
             ioyning
             with
             the
             water
             ,
             makes
             one
             globe
             or
             round
             bowle
             framed
             of
             these
             two
             elements
             ,
             having
             their
             bounds
             &
             limits
             within
             their
             own
             roundnes
             &
             greatnes
             .
             The
             which
             may
             be
             sufficiently
             proved
             by
             reasons
             of
             Philosophie
             and
             Astrologie
             ,
             leaving
             al
             subtil
             definitions
             commonly
             obiected
             .
             That
             ,
             to
             the
             most
             perfect
             body
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             Heaven
             )
             we
             must
             give
             the
             most
             perfect
             figure
             ,
             which
             without
             doubt
             is
             round
             :
             whose
             circular
             motion
             could
             not
             be
             firme
             nor
             equall
             in
             it selfe
             ,
             if
             it
             had
             any
             corner
             or
             nooke
             of
             any
             side
             ,
             or
             if
             it
             were
             crooked
             ,
             (
             as
             of
             necessitie
             it
             must
             be
             )
             if
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moone
             &
             stars
             ,
             made
             not
             their
             course
             about
             the
             whole
             world
             .
             But
             leaving
             all
             these
             reasons
             ,
             it
             seemes
             that
             the
             Moone
             is
             sufficient
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             as
             a
             faithfull
             witnesse
             of
             the
             Heaven
             it selfe
             ,
             seeing
             that
             her
             Eclypse
             happens
             ,
             but
             when
             as
             the
             roundnesse
             of
             the
             earth
             opposeth
             it selfe
             diametrally
             betwixt
             her
             and
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             meanes
             keepes
             the
             Sunne-beames
             from
             shining
             on
             her
             .
             The
             which
             could
             not
             chance
             ,
             if
             the
             earth
             were
             not
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             world
             compassed
             in
             and
             invironed
             by
             the
             whole
             Heaven
             .
             Some
             haue
             doubted
             whether
             the
             light
             of
             the
             Moone
             were
             borrowed
             from
             the
             brightnes
             of
             the
             Sunne
             :
             but
             it
             is
             needlesse
             ,
             seeing
             there
             can
             bee
             found
             no
             other
             cause
             of
             the
             Eclipses
             ,
             full
             ,
             and
             quarters
             of
             the
             Moone
             ,
             but
             the
             communication
             of
             the
             beames
             which
             proceed
             from
             the
             Sunne
             .
             
             In
             like
             sort
             if
             wee
             will
             carefully
             examine
             this
             matter
             ,
             we
             shall
             finde
             that
             the
             darkenesse
             of
             the
             night
             proceedes
             from
             no
             other
             cause
             but
             from
             the
             shadow
             which
             the
             earth
             makes
             ,
             not
             suffering
             the
             light
             of
             the
             sunne
             to
             passe
             to
             the
             other
             parte
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             where
             his
             beames
             shine
             not
             .
             If
             then
             it
             be
             so
             ,
             that
             the
             sunne
             passeth
             no
             farther
             ,
             neyther
             doth
             cast
             his
             
             beames
             on
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             but
             onely
             turnes
             about
             ,
             and
             returnes
             to
             his
             setting
             ,
             making
             a
             ridge
             vpon
             the
             earth
             by
             his
             turning
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             he
             must
             of
             force
             confesse
             ,
             that
             shall
             denie
             the
             roundnes
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             seeing
             (
             according
             to
             their
             saying
             )
             the
             heaven
             as
             a
             basen
             doth
             onely
             couer
             the
             face
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             )
             it
             should
             then
             plainly
             follow
             ,
             that
             wee
             could
             not
             obserue
             the
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             daies
             and
             nights
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             some
             regions
             be
             short
             and
             long
             according
             to
             the
             seasons
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             are
             alwaies
             equall
             :
             the
             which
             S.
             Augustine
             noteth
             in
             his
             bookes
             
               De
               Genes
               .
               ad
               litter
               am
               .
            
             
             That
             we
             may
             easily
             comprehend
             the
             oppositions
             ,
             conversions
             ,
             elevations
             ,
             descents
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             aspects
             and
             dispositions
             of
             Planets
             and
             starres
             ,
             when
             we
             shall
             vnderstand
             they
             move
             ,
             and
             yet
             notwithstanding
             the
             heaven
             remaines
             firme
             and
             immoveable
             .
             The
             which
             seemeth
             to
             me
             easie
             to
             comprehend
             ,
             and
             will
             be
             to
             all
             others
             ,
             if
             it
             may
             be
             lawfull
             to
             imagine
             that
             which
             my
             fancy
             doth
             conceive
             :
             for
             if
             we
             suppose
             that
             every
             star
             and
             planet
             be
             a
             body
             of
             it selfe
             ,
             &
             that
             it
             be
             led
             &
             guided
             by
             an
             Angell
             ,
             
             as
             Habacuc
             was
             carried
             into
             Babilon
             :
             who
             I
             pray
             you
             is
             so
             blind
             ,
             but
             seeth
             that
             all
             the
             diverse
             aspects
             which
             we
             see
             appeare
             in
             planets
             &
             starres
             may
             proceede
             from
             the
             diuersity
             of
             motion
             which
             he
             that
             guides
             them
             doth
             voluntarily
             giue
             them
             .
             We
             cannot
             then
             with
             any
             reason
             affirme
             ,
             but
             that
             this
             space
             &
             region
             by
             which
             they
             faine
             that
             stars
             do
             continually
             march
             and
             rowle
             ,
             is
             elementarie
             and
             corruptible
             ,
             seeing
             it
             divides
             it selfe
             when
             they
             passe
             ,
             the
             which
             vndoubtedly
             do
             not
             passe
             by
             any
             void
             place
             .
             If
             then
             the
             region
             wherein
             the
             starres
             and
             planets
             move
             ,
             be
             corruptible
             ,
             the
             stars
             and
             planets
             of
             their
             owne
             motion
             should
             be
             ,
             by
             reason
             likewise
             corruptible
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             consequence
             they
             
             must
             alter
             ,
             change
             ,
             and
             be
             finally
             extinct
             :
             for
             naturally
             that
             which
             is
             conteined
             is
             no
             more
             durable
             then
             that
             which
             conteineth
             .
             And
             to
             say
             that
             the
             Celestiall
             bodies
             be
             corruptible
             ,
             it
             agreeth
             not
             with
             the
             psalme
             ,
             
               That
               God
               made
               them
               for
               euer
            
             :
             
             And
             it
             is
             lesse
             conformable
             to
             the
             order
             &
             preservation
             of
             this
             vniversall
             world
             .
             I
             say
             moreover
             ,
             to
             confirme
             this
             truth
             ,
             that
             the
             heauens
             move
             ,
             and
             in
             them
             the
             starres
             march
             in
             turning
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             cannot
             easily
             discerne
             with
             our
             eyes
             ,
             seeing
             we
             see
             that
             not
             onely
             thestarres
             do
             moue
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             regions
             &
             wh●le
             parts
             of
             heaven
             :
             I
             speake
             not
             onely
             of
             the
             shining
             and
             most
             r●splendent
             parts
             ,
             as
             of
             that
             which
             we
             call
             
               Via
               lactea
            
             ,
             and
             the
             vulgar
             ,
             S.
             Iaques
             way
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             the
             darker
             and
             obscurer
             parts
             in
             heaven
             .
             For
             there
             we
             see
             really
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             spots
             and
             darkenes
             ,
             which
             are
             most
             apparent
             :
             the
             which
             I
             remember
             not
             to
             haue
             seene
             at
             any
             time
             in
             Europe
             ,
             but
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             other
             Hemisphere
             I
             haue
             often
             seene
             them
             very
             apparant
             .
             These
             spots
             are
             in
             colour
             and
             forme
             like
             vnto
             the
             Eclips
             of
             the
             Moone
             ,
             and
             are
             like
             vnto
             it
             in
             blacknes
             and
             darkenes
             :
             they
             march
             ,
             fixed
             to
             the
             same
             starres
             ,
             alwaies
             of
             one
             forme
             and
             bignes
             ,
             as
             we
             haue
             noted
             by
             infallible
             observation
             .
             It
             may
             be
             this
             will
             seeme
             strange
             to
             some
             ,
             &
             they
             will
             demand
             whence
             these
             spots
             in
             heaven
             should
             grow
             ?
             To
             the
             which
             I
             cannot
             answere
             otherwise
             at
             this
             time
             ,
             but
             (
             as
             the
             Philosophers
             do
             affirme
             )
             that
             this
             
               Via
               lactea
            
             ,
             or
             milken
             way
             ,
             is
             compounded
             of
             the
             thickest
             parts
             of
             the
             heaven
             :
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             it
             receiues
             the
             greater
             light
             ,
             and
             contrariwise
             there
             are
             other
             parts
             very
             thinne
             and
             transparent
             ,
             the
             which
             receiuing
             lesse
             light
             seeme
             more
             blacke
             &
             obscure
             .
             Whether
             this
             be
             the
             true
             reason
             or
             no
             ,
             I
             dare
             not
             certenly
             affirme
             .
             Yet
             is
             it
             true
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             the
             figure
             these
             spots
             have
             in
             heaven
             ,
             they
             moue
             with
             the
             
             same
             proportion
             with
             their
             starres
             without
             any
             separation
             :
             the
             which
             is
             a
             true
             ,
             certaine
             ,
             and
             often
             noted
             experience
             .
             It
             followeth
             then
             by
             all
             that
             we
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             heaven
             containeth
             in
             it
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             circling
             continually
             about
             it
             ,
             without
             any
             more
             doubt
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             teacheth
             vs
             that
             the
             earth
             is
             in
             middest
             of
             the
             world
             .
             
               CHAP.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             it
             seemes
             to
             
               Procopius
               ,
               Gaza
            
             ,
             and
             to
             some
             others
             of
             his
             opinion
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             repugnant
             to
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             to
             place
             the
             earth
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             to
             say
             that
             the
             heaven
             is
             round
             :
             yet
             in
             truth
             ,
             
             this
             doctrine
             is
             not
             repugnant
             ,
             but
             conformable
             to
             that
             which
             it
             doth
             teach
             vs.
             For
             laying
             aside
             the
             tearmes
             which
             the
             Scripture
             it selfe
             doth
             vse
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             
               The
               roundnesse
               of
               the
               earth
            
             .
             And
             that
             which
             it
             sayeth
             in
             an
             other
             place
             that
             whatsoever
             is
             corporeall
             ,
             is
             vnvironed
             and
             compassed
             in
             by
             the
             heavens
             ,
             and
             conteyned
             within
             the
             roundnes
             thereof
             :
             at
             the
             least
             thy
             cannot
             deny
             ,
             but
             that
             place
             of
             Ecclesiastes
             is
             very
             plaine
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               The
               Sunneriseth
               and
               sets
               ,
               and
               returnes
               to
               the
               same
               place
               ,
               and
               so
               begins
               to
               rise
               againe
               :
               he
               takes
               his
               course
               by
               the
               South
               ,
               turning
               towards
               the
               North
               :
               this
               spirit
               march●th
               compassing
               about
               all
               thinges
               ,
               and
               then
               returnes
               to
               the
               same
               place
               .
            
             In
             this
             place
             the
             paraphrase
             and
             exposition
             of
             
               Gregorie
               Neocesarien
            
             ,
             or
             Nazianzene
             ,
             sayeth
             ,
             
               The
               Sunne
               hauing
               runne
               about
               the
               whole
               earth
               ,
               returnes
               as
               it
               were
               turning
               to
               the
               same
               point
               .
            
             That
             which
             Solomon
             saveth
             ,
             (
             being
             interpreted
             by
             Gregorie
             )
             could
             not
             be
             trve
             ,
             if
             any
             part
             of
             
             the
             earth
             were
             not
             invironed
             with
             the
             heaven
             .
             And
             so
             S.
             Ierome
             doth
             vnderstand
             it
             ,
             
             writing
             vpon
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Ephesians
             ,
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             
               The
               most
               common
               opinion
               affirmes
               (
               agreeing
               with
               Ecclesiastes
               :
               )
            
             That
             the
             heaven
             is
             round
             ,
             mooving
             circularly
             like
             vnto
             a
             bowle
             .
             And
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             no
             round
             figure
             conteyneth
             in
             it
             ,
             eyther
             longitude
             ,
             latitude
             ,
             heigth
             or
             depth
             ,
             for
             that
             all
             parts
             are
             equall
             .
             Whereby
             it
             appeares
             ,
             according
             to
             S.
             
               Ierome
               ,
               That
               those
               which
               hold
               the
               heaven
               to
               be
               round
               ,
               are
               not
               repugnant
               to
               the
               holy
               Scripture
               ,
               but
               conformable
               to
               the
               same
               .
            
             
             And
             although
             that
             S.
             Basile
             especially
             ,
             and
             S.
             Ambrose
             (
             who
             doth
             vsually
             imitate
             him
             in
             his
             bookes
             called
             Hexameron
             )
             seeme
             somewhat
             doubtfull
             of
             this
             point
             :
             yet
             in
             the
             end
             they
             grant
             that
             the
             world
             is
             round
             .
             It
             is
             true
             that
             S.
             Ambrose
             doth
             not
             yeelde
             to
             this
             quintessence
             ,
             
             which
             Aristotle
             attributes
             to
             the
             heavens
             :
             without
             doubt
             it
             is
             a
             goodly
             thing
             to
             see
             with
             what
             a
             grace
             and
             excellent
             stile
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             treates
             of
             the
             scituation
             and
             firmenes
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             to
             breed
             in
             vs
             a
             wonderfull
             admiration
             ,
             and
             no
             lesse
             content
             to
             behold
             the
             vnspeakable
             power
             and
             wisedome
             of
             the
             Creator
             .
             
             For
             that
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             God
             himselfe
             saies
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             hee
             which
             planted
             the
             pillers
             which
             support
             the
             earth
             :
             giving
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             (
             as
             S.
             Ambrose
             doth
             well
             expound
             it
             )
             that
             the
             vnmeasurable
             weight
             of
             the
             whole
             earth
             is
             held
             vp
             by
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             divine
             power
             .
             
             The
             holy
             Scripture
             doth
             commonly
             so
             call
             them
             ,
             and
             vseth
             this
             phrase
             ,
             naming
             them
             the
             pillers
             of
             heaven
             and
             earth
             :
             not
             those
             of
             Atlas
             ,
             as
             the
             Poets
             faine
             :
             but
             of
             the
             eternall
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             who
             by
             his
             vertue
             supports
             both
             heaven
             and
             earth
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             in
             an
             other
             place
             teacheth
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             ,
             or
             a
             great
             part
             thereof
             ,
             
             is
             ioyned
             to
             ,
             and
             compassed
             in
             by
             the
             Element
             
             of
             water
             ,
             speaking
             generally
             ,
             that
             God
             placed
             the
             earth
             vpon
             the
             waters
             .
             And
             in
             another
             place
             ,
             
             that
             hee
             framed
             the
             roundnes
             of
             the
             earth
             vpon
             the
             Sea.
             And
             although
             S.
             Augustine
             doth
             not
             conclude
             vpon
             this
             text
             as
             a
             matter
             of
             faith
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             and
             the
             water
             make
             one
             globe
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             pretending
             by
             this
             meanes
             to
             give
             another
             exposition
             to
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Psalme
             :
             
             yet
             notwithstanding
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             words
             of
             the
             psalme
             we
             are
             given
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             we
             haue
             no
             other
             reason
             to
             imagine
             any
             other
             ciment
             or
             vniting
             to
             the
             earth
             then
             the
             Element
             of
             water
             ,
             the
             which
             although
             it
             be
             pliant
             and
             moveable
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             support
             and
             inviron
             this
             great
             masse
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             wrought
             by
             the
             wisedome
             of
             that
             great
             Architect
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             the
             earth
             is
             built
             vpon
             the
             waters
             ,
             and
             vpon
             the
             sea
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             the
             earth
             is
             rather
             vnder
             the
             waters
             :
             for
             according
             to
             common
             iudgement
             and
             imagination
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             on
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             earth
             which
             we
             inhabite
             ,
             seemes
             to
             be
             vnder
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             the
             waters
             and
             sea
             ,
             which
             doe
             compasse
             in
             the
             earth
             on
             the
             other
             part
             ,
             should
             be
             vnderneath
             ,
             and
             the
             earth
             aboue
             :
             yet
             the
             very
             truth
             is
             ,
             that
             what
             is
             properly
             beneath
             ,
             that
             is
             alwaies
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             vniversall
             :
             but
             the
             holy
             scripture
             frames
             it selfe
             to
             our
             manner
             of
             conceiving
             and
             speaking
             .
             Some
             may
             demaund
             (
             seeing
             the
             earth
             is
             set
             vpon
             the
             waters
             ,
             as
             the
             scripture
             sayeth
             ,
             )
             whereon
             the
             waters
             are
             placed
             ,
             or
             what
             support
             have
             they
             ?
             And
             if
             the
             earth
             and
             the
             water
             make
             one
             round
             globe
             ,
             how
             can
             all
             this
             monstrous
             masse
             be
             sustayned
             ?
             To
             this
             the
             holy
             scripture
             answereth
             them
             in
             another
             place
             ,
             giving
             vs
             greatest
             cause
             to
             admire
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Creator
             :
             and
             saith
             in
             these
             wordes
             :
             
             
               The
               earth
               extends
               towards
               the
               
               North
               vpon
               the
               Vast
               ,
               and
               stayes
               hanging
               vpon
               nothing
               .
            
             The
             which
             in
             trueth
             is
             very
             well
             spoken
             ,
             for
             that
             really
             it
             seemes
             this
             heape
             of
             earth
             and
             water
             is
             set
             vpon
             nothing
             ,
             when
             we
             describe
             it
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             as
             in
             trueth
             it
             is
             .
             But
             this
             wonder
             which
             men
             so
             much
             admire
             ,
             God
             himselfe
             hath
             not
             layd
             open
             ,
             demanding
             of
             the
             same
             Iob
             in
             these
             termes
             :
             
             
               Tell
               mee
               if
               thou
               canst
               ,
               who
               hath
               layd
               the
               lyne
               or
               cast
               the
               lead
               for
               the
               building
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               and
               with
               what
               morter
               the
               foundations
               have
               beene
               layed
               and
               ioyned
               .
            
             Finally
             ,
             to
             make
             vs
             vnderstand
             the
             fashion
             and
             modell
             of
             this
             admirable
             frame
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             Prophet
             Dauid
             accustomed
             to
             sing
             and
             praise
             his
             divine
             works
             ,
             saies
             very
             well
             in
             a
             Psalme
             made
             of
             this
             subiect
             ,
             
             in
             these
             wordes
             ,
             
               Thou
               which
               hast
               built
               the
               earth
               vpon
               firmenes
               it selfe
               ,
               that
               it
               cannot
               stagger
               nor
               move
               for
               ever
               and
               ever
               .
            
             Meaning
             to
             shew
             the
             cause
             why
             the
             earth
             set
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             falleth
             not
             ,
             nor
             staggereth
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             for
             that
             by
             nature
             it
             hath
             sure
             foundations
             ,
             layed
             by
             the
             most
             wise
             Creator
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             it
             might
             sustaine
             it selfe
             without
             any
             other
             support
             .
             Mans
             imagination
             is
             therefore
             deceived
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             seeking
             other
             foundations
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             for
             want
             thereof
             ,
             doth
             measure
             divine
             things
             ,
             according
             to
             humaine
             reason
             .
             So
             that
             we
             neede
             not
             to
             feare
             (
             how
             g●eat
             or
             heavy
             soever
             this
             masse
             of
             earth
             then
             hanging
             in
             the
             aire
             seemeth
             to
             be
             ,
             )
             that
             it
             can
             fal
             or
             turne
             topsy
             tur●y
             ,
             being
             assured
             vpon
             this
             point
             :
             for
             that
             the
             same
             Psalmist
             saieth
             ,
             that
             it
             shall
             neuer
             be
             overthrowne
             .
             Truly
             Dauid
             with
             reason
             (
             after
             he
             had
             beheld
             and
             sung
             the
             wonderfull
             workes
             of
             the
             Lord
             )
             doth
             not
             cease
             to
             praise
             him
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             
             saying
             ,
             
               O
               how
               great
               &
               wonderfull
               are
               the
               workes
               of
               the
               Lord.
            
             It
             appeares
             that
             all
             spring
             from
             his
             knowledge
             .
             And
             in
             truth
             (
             if
             I
             shall
             freely
             speake
             my
             opinion
             
             touching
             this
             point
             )
             often
             in
             my
             trauell
             passing
             the
             great
             gulfes
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             marching
             by
             other
             regions
             of
             so
             strange
             lands
             ,
             staying
             to
             behold
             and
             consider
             the
             greatnes
             of
             these
             workes
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             I
             felt
             a
             wonderfull
             consolation
             of
             the
             soveraigne
             wisedome
             and
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             who
             shines
             in
             his
             works
             :
             in
             comparison
             whereof
             ,
             all
             the
             Pallaces
             ,
             Castells
             ,
             and
             princely
             buildings
             ,
             together
             with
             all
             the
             inventions
             of
             man
             ,
             seeme
             nothing
             ,
             yea
             ,
             are
             base
             and
             contemptible
             in
             respect
             thereof
             .
             O
             how
             often
             hath
             come
             into
             my
             minde
             and
             mouth
             that
             place
             of
             the
             Psalme
             ,
             which
             sayeth
             thus
             ,
             
               Great
               comfort
               hast
               thou
               given
               me
               O
               Lord
               by
               thy
               workes
               :
               I
               will
               not
               cease
               to
               reioyce
               in
               the
               contemplation
               of
               the
               workes
               of
               thy
               hands
               .
            
             Really
             and
             in
             truth
             ,
             the
             workes
             of
             God
             haue
             (
             I
             know
             not
             what
             )
             secret
             &
             hidden
             grace
             and
             vertve
             :
             the
             which
             although
             they
             be
             often
             beheld
             ,
             yet
             do
             they
             still
             cause
             a
             new
             taste
             and
             content
             :
             whereas
             contrariwise
             ,
             the
             workes
             of
             man
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             built
             with
             exquisite
             art
             ,
             yet
             often
             seene
             ,
             they
             are
             no
             more
             esteemed
             ,
             but
             breede
             a
             distaste
             :
             be
             they
             most
             pleasant
             Gardins
             ,
             Pallaces
             ,
             or
             stately
             Temples
             ,
             be
             they
             Piramides
             of
             proud
             buildings
             ,
             Pictures
             ,
             carved
             images
             ,
             or
             stones
             of
             rare
             worke
             and
             invention
             ,
             or
             whatsoever
             else
             adorned
             with
             all
             the
             beauties
             possible
             :
             Yet
             is
             it
             most
             certen
             that
             viewing
             them
             twice
             or
             thrice
             with
             attention
             ,
             the
             eye
             presently
             turnes
             away
             ,
             being
             glutted
             with
             the
             sight
             thereof
             .
             But
             if
             you
             beholde
             the
             sea
             with
             attention
             ,
             or
             some
             steepe
             mountaine
             ,
             growing
             from
             a
             plaine
             to
             a
             strange
             heigth
             ,
             or
             the
             fieldes
             clad
             in
             their
             naturall
             verdure
             with
             pleasant
             flowres
             ,
             or
             the
             raging
             course
             of
             some
             river
             ,
             beating
             continually
             against
             the
             rocks
             :
             finally
             ,
             what
             worke
             of
             nature
             soever
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             often
             viewed
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             still
             breede
             a
             new
             content
             and
             never
             
             gluttes
             the
             sight
             :
             the
             which
             is
             like
             vnto
             a
             stately
             bancket
             of
             the
             divine
             wisedom
             ,
             which
             doth
             alwaies
             cause
             a
             new
             consideration
             without
             any
             lothing
             .
          
        
         
           
             Containing
             an
             answere
             to
             that
             which
             is
             obiected
             out
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             against
             the
             roundnes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             CHAP.
             4.
             
          
           
             REturning
             then
             to
             the
             figure
             of
             heaven
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             out
             of
             what
             authoritie
             of
             the
             holy
             scripture
             they
             can
             prove
             that
             it
             is
             not
             round
             ,
             nor
             his
             motion
             circular
             :
             neither
             do
             I
             see
             (
             whereas
             S.
             Paul
             calles
             the
             heaven
             a
             Tabernacle
             ,
             or
             a
             Tent
             which
             God
             made
             ,
             
             &
             not
             man
             :
             )
             how
             can
             it
             be
             applied
             to
             this
             purpose
             :
             for
             although
             he
             telleth
             vs
             that
             it
             was
             made
             by
             God
             ,
             yet
             must
             we
             not
             therefore
             coniecture
             that
             the
             heaven
             covereth
             the
             earth
             like
             to
             a
             roofe
             on
             the
             one
             part
             only
             ,
             neither
             that
             the
             heaven
             was
             framed
             without
             motion
             ,
             as
             it
             seemes
             some
             would
             inferre
             .
             The
             Apostle
             in
             this
             place
             treated
             of
             the
             conformity
             of
             the
             auncient
             Tabernacle
             of
             the
             lawe
             ,
             saying
             therevpon
             ,
             that
             the
             Tabernacle
             of
             the
             new
             law
             of
             grace
             ,
             is
             heaven
             :
             into
             the
             which
             ,
             the
             great
             Priest
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             entred
             once
             by
             his
             bloud
             :
             and
             thereby
             is
             vnderstood
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             as
             great
             preheminence
             of
             the
             new
             aboue
             the
             old
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             author
             of
             the
             new
             ,
             which
             is
             God
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             olde
             which
             was
             man
             :
             although
             it
             be
             most
             certen
             ,
             that
             the
             olde
             was
             built
             by
             the
             wisedome
             of
             God
             ,
             who
             instructed
             his
             workeman
             BeZeleell
             .
             
             Neither
             must
             we
             imagine
             that
             these
             comparisons
             ,
             parables
             ,
             and
             allegories
             ,
             doe
             in
             all
             thinges
             agree
             
             with
             that
             wherevnto
             they
             are
             applyed
             ,
             as
             the
             happy
             Crysostome
             hath
             learnedly
             spoken
             vpon
             this
             point
             .
             
             The
             other
             authoritie
             (
             which
             S.
             Augustine
             saies
             is
             alleaged
             of
             some
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             heaven
             is
             not
             round
             )
             is
             this
             ,
             
               The
               heavens
               stretch
               forth
               like
               vnto
               a
               skin
               .
            
             
             Whereby
             he
             concludes
             that
             it
             is
             not
             round
             ,
             but
             flat
             on
             the
             vpper
             part
             ,
             wherevnto
             the
             same
             Doctor
             doth
             answere
             verie
             well
             and
             familiarly
             ,
             giuing
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             that
             place
             of
             the
             Psalme
             ,
             is
             not
             properly
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             figure
             of
             heaven
             ,
             
             but
             onely
             to
             shew
             with
             what
             facilitie
             God
             built
             so
             great
             a
             heaven
             ,
             being
             no
             more
             painefull
             for
             him
             to
             build
             so
             huge
             a
             couer
             as
             the
             heaven
             is
             ,
             then
             to
             vnfould
             a
             double
             skin
             .
             Or
             else
             the
             Psalmist
             pretending
             to
             shew
             vs
             the
             great
             maiesty
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             whome
             the
             heaven
             with
             his
             greatnes
             and
             beautie
             doth
             serve
             in
             like
             manner
             ,
             as
             our
             tents
             and
             pavilions
             in
             the
             field
             .
             The
             which
             was
             well
             expressed
             by
             a
             Poet
             calling
             it
             ,
             
               The
               Tent
               of
               the
               cleere
               heaven
               .
            
             In
             like
             sort
             ,
             the
             place
             of
             Isaii
             ,
             which
             sayeth
             ,
             
               Heaven
               serves
               mee
               as
               a
               chaire
               ,
               and
               the
               earth
               for
               a
               foote-stoole
               .
            
             
             But
             if
             wee
             follow
             the
             error
             of
             the
             Antromorphites
             ,
             which
             did
             atribute
             corporall
             members
             vnto
             God
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             divinitie
             :
             we
             should
             haue
             occasion
             vppon
             this
             last
             text
             ,
             to
             examine
             how
             it
             were
             possible
             the
             earth
             should
             be
             a
             foote-stoole
             to
             Gods
             feete
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             same
             God
             could
             hold
             his
             feete
             of
             the
             one
             part
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             many
             heads
             round
             about
             ,
             seeing
             that
             hee
             is
             in
             all
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             were
             a
             vaine
             and
             ridiculous
             thing
             .
             Wee
             must
             therefore
             conclude
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             we
             ought
             not
             to
             follow
             the
             letter
             which
             killes
             ,
             
             but
             the
             spirit
             which
             quickneth
             ,
             as
             saith
             S.
             Paul.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             fashion
             and
             forme
             of
             Heaven
             ,
             at
             the
             new-found
             world
             .
             CHAP.
             5.
             
          
           
             MAny
             in
             Europe
             demaund
             of
             what
             forme
             and
             fashion
             Heaven
             is
             in
             the
             Southerne
             parts
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             no
             certaintie
             found
             in
             ancient
             bookes
             ,
             who
             although
             they
             graunt
             there
             is
             a
             Heaven
             on
             this
             other
             part
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             yet
             come
             they
             not
             to
             any
             knowledge
             of
             the
             forme
             thereof
             ,
             although
             in
             trueth
             they
             make
             mention
             of
             a
             goodly
             great
             Starre
             seene
             in
             those
             partes
             ,
             
             which
             they
             call
             Canopus
             .
             Those
             which
             of
             late
             dayes
             have
             sayled
             into
             these
             parts
             ,
             have
             accustomed
             to
             write
             strange
             things
             of
             this
             heaven
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             very
             bright
             ,
             having
             many
             goodly
             starres
             :
             and
             in
             effect
             ,
             thinges
             which
             come
             farre
             ,
             are
             commonly
             described
             with
             encrease
             .
             But
             it
             seemes
             contrary
             vnto
             me
             ,
             holding
             it
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             in
             our
             Region
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             greater
             nomber
             and
             bigger
             Starres
             ;
             finding
             no
             starres
             in
             these
             partes
             ,
             which
             exceed
             the
             Fisher
             or
             the
             Chariot
             in
             bignesse
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             Crosse
             in
             these
             partes
             is
             very
             fayre
             and
             pleasing
             to
             behold
             :
             wee
             call
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             foure
             notable
             and
             apparant
             starres
             ,
             which
             make
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             crosse
             ,
             set
             equally
             and
             with
             proportion
             .
             The
             ignorant
             suppose
             this
             Crosse
             to
             be
             the
             southerne
             Pole
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             see
             the
             Navigators
             take
             their
             heigth
             thereby
             ,
             as
             we
             are
             accustomed
             to
             doe
             by
             the
             North
             starre
             .
             But
             they
             are
             deceyved
             ,
             and
             the
             reason
             ,
             why
             Saylers
             doe
             it
             in
             this
             ●orte
             ,
             is
             for
             that
             in
             the
             South
             parts
             there
             is
             no
             fixed
             starre
             that
             markes
             the
             Pole
             ,
             as
             the
             North
             starre
             doth
             to
             our
             Pole.
             And
             therefore
             they
             take
             their
             heigth
             by
             the
             
             starre
             at
             the
             foot
             of
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             distant
             from
             the
             true
             and
             fixed
             Pole
             Antarticke
             thirtie
             degrees
             ,
             as
             the
             North
             starre
             is
             distant
             from
             the
             Pole
             Articke
             three
             degrees
             or
             little
             more
             .
             And
             so
             it
             is
             more
             difficult
             to
             take
             the
             heigth
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             sayd
             starre
             at
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             Crosse
             must
             bee
             right
             ,
             the
             which
             chanceth
             but
             in
             one
             houre
             of
             the
             night
             ;
             which
             is
             in
             divers
             seasons
             of
             the
             yeere
             in
             divers
             houres
             ,
             and
             often
             times
             it
             appeareth
             not
             in
             the
             whole
             night
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             is
             very
             difficult
             to
             take
             the
             heigth
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             most
             expert
             Pilots
             regard
             not
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             taking
             the
             heigth
             of
             the
             Sunne
             by
             the
             Astrolabe
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             know
             in
             what
             height
             they
             are
             :
             wherein
             commonly
             the
             Portugals
             are
             more
             expert
             ,
             as
             a
             Nation
             that
             hath
             more
             discourse
             in
             the
             Arte
             of
             Navigation
             then
             any
             other
             .
             There
             are
             also
             other
             starres
             in
             these
             southerne
             parts
             ,
             which
             in
             some
             sort
             resemble
             those
             of
             the
             North.
             That
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Milken
             way
             ,
             is
             larger
             and
             more
             resplendent
             in
             the
             south
             parts
             ,
             appearing
             therein
             those
             admirable
             blacke
             spots
             ,
             
             whereof
             wee
             have
             made
             mention
             .
             As
             for
             other
             particularities
             ,
             let
             others
             speake
             of
             them
             with
             greater
             curiositle
             ,
             and
             let
             this
             which
             wee
             have
             sayde
             ,
             suffice
             for
             this
             time
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             there
             is
             Land
             and
             Seavader
             the
             two
             Poles
             .
             CHAP.
             6.
             
          
           
             IIt
             is
             no
             smal
             labour
             to
             have
             vnfolded
             this
             doubt
             with
             this
             knowledge
             and
             resolution
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             Heaven
             in
             these
             parts
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             doth
             cover
             them
             
             as
             in
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
            
             ,
             and
             A●●ri●ke
             .
             And
             this
             point
             serveth
             often
             against
             many
             Spaniards
             ,
             who
             beeing
             here
             ,
             sigh
             for
             Spaine
             ,
             having
             no
             discourse
             ,
             but
             of
             their
             countrie
             ,
             They
             wonder
             ,
             yea
             ,
             they
             grow
             discontented
             with
             vs
             ,
             imagining
             that
             we
             have
             forgotten
             &
             make
             small
             accompt
             of
             our
             native
             soyle
             .
             To
             whom
             we
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             desire
             to
             returne
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             doth
             nothing
             trouble
             vs
             ,
             being
             as
             neere
             vnto
             Heaven
             at
             Peru
             ,
             as
             in
             Spaine
             :
             as
             saint
             Ierome
             saith
             well
             ,
             writing
             vnto
             Paulinus
             ;
             That
             the
             gates
             of
             Heaven
             are
             as
             neere
             vnto
             Brittanie
             ,
             as
             to
             Ierusalem
             .
             But
             although
             the
             Heaven
             doth
             compasse
             in
             the
             world
             of
             all
             pa●ts
             ,
             yet
             must
             we
             not
             imagine
             that
             there
             is
             land
             necessarily
             on
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             .
             For
             being
             so
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             elements
             of
             earth
             and
             water
             make
             one
             globe
             or
             bowle
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             most
             renowmed
             ancient
             Authors
             ,
             (
             as
             Plutarch
             testifieth
             )
             and
             as
             it
             is
             prooved
             by
             most
             certaine
             demonstrations
             ,
             
             wee
             may
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             the
             sea
             doth
             occupie
             all
             this
             part
             ,
             which
             is
             vnder
             the
             Antartike
             or
             southerne
             Pole
             ,
             so
             as
             there
             should
             not
             remaine
             any
             place
             in
             these
             partes
             for
             the
             earth
             ,
             the
             which
             saint
             Augustine
             doth
             very
             learnedly
             hold
             against
             them
             that
             maintaine
             the
             Antipodes
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             although
             it
             bee
             prooved
             ,
             and
             wee
             beleeve
             that
             the
             worlde
             is
             round
             like
             to
             a
             bowle
             ,
             wee
             may
             not
             therefore
             inferre
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             other
             part
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             the
             earth
             is
             vncovered
             ,
             and
             without
             water
             .
             Without
             doubt
             ,
             
             saint
             Augustine
             speakes
             well
             vpon
             this
             point
             ;
             and
             as
             the
             contrary
             is
             not
             prooved
             ,
             so
             doth
             it
             not
             follow
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             any
             land
             discovered
             at
             the
             Antarticke
             Pole.
             The
             which
             experience
             hath
             now
             plainely
             taught
             vs
             ,
             for
             although
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             worlde
             vnder
             the
             Pole
             Antarticke
             be
             sea
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             altogether
             ,
             but
             there
             is
             likewise
             land
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             
             earth
             and
             water
             imbrace
             one
             another
             ,
             which
             truely
             is
             a
             thing
             to
             make
             vs
             admire
             and
             glorifie
             the
             Arte
             of
             the
             soveraigne
             Creator
             .
             We
             know
             then
             by
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             
             the
             waters
             were
             gathered
             together
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             earth
             remayned
             vncovered
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             same
             holy
             Writte
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             these
             gatherings
             together
             of
             the
             water
             were
             called
             Sea
             ;
             and
             as
             there
             be
             many
             ,
             so
             of
             necessitie
             there
             must
             be
             many
             Seas
             .
             And
             this
             diversitie
             of
             seas
             is
             not
             onely
             in
             the
             Mediterranean
             Sea
             ,
             whereas
             one
             is
             called
             Euxi●e
             ,
             another
             the
             Caspian
             ,
             an
             other
             the
             Erethean
             or
             redde
             Sea
             ,
             an
             other
             the
             Persian
             ,
             an
             other
             of
             Italie
             ,
             and
             so
             many
             others
             .
             But
             also
             in
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             which
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             doth
             vsually
             call
             a
             gulph
             :
             although
             really
             and
             in
             trueth
             it
             be
             but
             a
             Sea
             ,
             yet
             in
             many
             and
             divers
             manners
             :
             as
             in
             respect
             of
             Peru
             and
             all
             America
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             called
             the
             North
             Sea
             ,
             the
             other
             the
             South
             ;
             and
             at
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             called
             the
             Indian
             sea
             ,
             the
             other
             that
             of
             China
             .
             And
             I
             have
             observed
             ,
             as
             well
             by
             my
             owne
             navigation
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             relation
             of
             others
             ,
             that
             the
             Sea
             is
             never
             divided
             from
             the
             Lande
             above
             a
             thousand
             Leagues
             .
             And
             although
             the
             great
             Ocean
             stretcheth
             farre
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             never
             passe
             this
             measure
             .
             I
             will
             not
             for
             all
             this
             affirme
             that
             wee
             sayle
             not
             above
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             in
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             which
             were
             repugnant
             to
             trueth
             ,
             being
             well
             knowne
             that
             the
             shippes
             of
             Portugal
             have
             sailed
             foure
             times
             as
             much
             ,
             and
             more
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             whole
             world
             may
             bee
             compassed
             about
             by
             sea
             ,
             as
             wee
             have
             seene
             in
             these
             dayes
             ,
             without
             any
             further
             doubt
             .
             But
             I
             say
             and
             affirme
             ,
             that
             of
             that
             which
             is
             at
             this
             day
             discovered
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             land
             distant
             from
             an
             other
             firme
             land
             ,
             by
             direct
             line
             ,
             or
             from
             some
             Islands
             neere
             vnto
             it
             above
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             ,
             and
             so
             betwixt
             two
             firme
             
             lands
             there
             is
             no
             greater
             distance
             of
             sea
             ,
             accompting
             from
             the
             neerest
             parts
             of
             both
             the
             lands
             :
             for
             from
             the
             end
             of
             Europe
             or
             Affricke
             and
             their
             coastes
             ,
             to
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             the
             Isles
             of
             
               Acores
               ,
               Cape
               Verd
            
             and
             others
             in
             the
             like
             degree
             ,
             are
             not
             above
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             or
             five
             hundred
             from
             the
             Mayne
             land
             .
             From
             the
             saide
             Ilands
             running
             along
             to
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             there
             are
             scant
             nine
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             to
             the
             Ilands
             of
             saint
             Dominick
             ,
             the
             Virgins
             ,
             the
             Happy
             Ilandes
             and
             the
             rest
             ;
             and
             the
             same
             Ilands
             runne
             along
             in
             order
             to
             the
             Ilandes
             of
             Barlovent
             which
             are
             
               Cuba
               ,
               Hispan●ola
            
             ,
             and
             Boriquen
             ;
             from
             the
             same
             Ilands
             vnto
             the
             Mayne
             land
             are
             scarce
             two
             or
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             &
             in
             the
             neerest
             part
             farre
             lesse
             .
             The
             firme
             land
             runnes
             an
             infinite
             space
             ▪
             from
             Terra●Florida
             to
             the
             land
             of
             Patagons
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             from
             the
             Straight
             of
             Maggellan
             ,
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             Mendoce
             ,
             there
             runnes
             a
             long
             Continent
             but
             not
             very
             large
             :
             for
             the
             largest
             is
             the
             Travers
             of
             Peru
             ,
             which
             is
             distant
             from
             Brasil
             about
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             .
             In
             this
             South
             Sea
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             not
             yet
             discovered
             the
             ende
             towards
             the
             West
             ,
             yet
             of
             late
             they
             have
             found
             out
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Salomon
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             many
             and
             great
             ,
             distant
             from
             Peru
             about
             eyght
             hundred
             leagues
             .
             And
             for
             that
             wee
             finde
             by
             observation
             ,
             that
             whereas
             there
             bee
             many
             and
             great
             Ilandes
             ,
             so
             there
             is
             some
             firme
             Land
             not
             farre
             off
             ,
             I
             my selfe
             with
             many
             others
             doe
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             some
             firme
             land
             neere
             vnto
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Salomon
             ,
             the
             which
             doth
             answere
             vnto
             our
             America
             on
             the
             West
             part
             ,
             and
             possibly
             might
             runne
             by
             the
             heigth
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             to
             the
             Straightes
             of
             Maggellan
             .
             Some
             hold
             ,
             that
             
               Nova
               Guinea
            
             is
             firme
             Land
             ,
             and
             some
             learned
             men
             describe
             it
             neere
             to
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Salomon
             ;
             so
             as
             it
             is
             likely
             ,
             a
             good
             parte
             of
             the
             
             world
             is
             not
             yet
             discovered
             ,
             seeing
             at
             this
             day
             our
             men
             sayle
             in
             the
             South
             Sea
             vnto
             China
             and
             the
             Philippines
             :
             and
             wee
             say
             ,
             that
             to
             go
             from
             Peru
             to
             those
             parts
             ,
             they
             passe
             a
             greater
             Sea
             ,
             then
             in
             going
             from
             Spaine
             to
             Peru.
             Moreover
             ,
             wee
             know
             ,
             that
             by
             that
             famous
             Straight
             of
             Maggellan
             these
             two
             Seas
             doe
             ioyne
             and
             continue
             one
             with
             an
             other
             (
             I
             say
             the
             South
             sea
             with
             that
             of
             the
             North
             )
             by
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Antarticke
             Pole
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             fiftie
             one
             degrees
             of
             altitude
             .
             But
             it
             is
             a
             great
             question
             (
             wherein
             many
             have
             busied
             themselves●
             )
             whether
             these
             two
             Seas
             ioyne
             together
             in
             the
             North
             part
             :
             but
             I
             have
             not
             heard
             ,
             that
             any
             vnto
             this
             day
             ,
             could
             attayne
             vnto
             this
             point
             ,
             but
             by
             certaine
             likelihoods
             and
             coniectures
             ,
             some
             affirme
             ,
             there
             is
             an
             other
             Straight
             vnder
             the
             North
             ,
             opposite
             to
             that
             of
             Maggellan
             .
             But
             it
             sufficeth
             for
             our
             subiect
             ,
             to
             knowe
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             firme
             Land
             on
             this
             Southerne
             part
             ,
             as
             bigge
             as
             all
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asiae
            
             and
             Affricke
             :
             that
             vnder
             both
             the
             Poles
             we
             finde
             both
             land
             and
             sea
             ,
             one
             imbracing
             an
             other
             .
             Whereof
             the
             Ancients
             might
             stand
             in
             doubt
             ,
             and
             contradict
             it
             for
             want
             of
             experience
             .
          
        
         
           
             To
             confute
             the
             opinion
             of
             Lactantius
             ,
             who
             holdes
             there
             be
             no
             Antipodes
             .
             
               CHAP.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             SEeing
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             firme
             land
             vpon
             the
             South
             part
             or
             Pole
             Antartike
             ,
             wee
             must
             now
             see
             if
             it
             be
             inhabited
             :
             
             the
             which
             hath
             bene
             a
             matter
             very
             disputable
             in
             former
             times
             .
             
               Lactantius
               Firmian
            
             ,
             and
             S.
             Augustine
             mocke
             at
             such
             as
             hold
             there
             be
             any
             Antipodes
             ,
             
             (
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             
             as
             men
             marching
             with
             their
             feete
             opposite
             to
             ours
             .
             But
             although
             these
             two
             authors
             agree
             in
             theis
             ieasts
             ,
             yet
             doe
             they
             differ
             much
             in
             their
             reasons
             and
             opinions
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             of
             very
             divers
             spirits
             and
             iudgements
             .
             Lactantius
             followes
             the
             vulgar
             ,
             seeming
             ridiculous
             vnto
             him
             that
             the
             heaven
             should
             be
             round
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             earth
             should
             bee
             compassed
             in
             the
             midst
             thereof
             ,
             like
             vnto
             a
             ball
             ,
             whereof
             he
             writes
             in
             these
             tearmes
             ,
             
               What
               reason
               is
               there
               for
               some
               to
               affirme
               ,
               that
               there
               are
               Antipodes
               ,
               whose
               steppes
               are
               opposite
               to
               ours
               ?
               Is
               it
               possible
               that
               any
               should
               bee
               so
               grosse
               and
               simple
               as
               to
               beleeve
               there
               were
               a
               people
               or
               nation
               marching
               with
               their
               fe●te
               vpwardes
               ,
               and
               their
               heades
               downwardes
               ,
               and
               that
               thinges
               which
               are
               placed
               heere
               of
               one
               sort
               ,
               are
               in
               that
               other
               part
               hanging
               topsie
               turvie
               :
               that
               trees
               and
               corne
               growe
               downwardes
               ,
               and
               that
               raine
               ,
               snow
               ,
               &
               haile
               ,
               fall
               from
               the
               earth
               vpward
               .
            
             Then
             after
             some
             other
             discourse
             ,
             the
             same
             Lactantius
             vseth
             these
             words
             ,
             
               The
               imagination
               and
               conceit
               which
               some
               haue
               had
               ,
               supposing
               the
               heaven
               to
               be
               round
               ,
               hath
               bene
               the
               cause
               to
               invent
               these
               Antipodes
               hanging
               in
               the
               aire
               .
               So
               as
               I
               knowe
               not
               what
               to
               say
               of
               such
               Philosophers
               ,
               whoe
               having
               once
               erred
               ,
               continue
               still
               obstinately
               in
               their
               opinions
               defending
               one
               another
               .
            
             But
             whatsoever
             he
             saieth
             ,
             wee
             that
             live
             now
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             inhabite
             that
             part
             of
             the
             world
             which
             is
             oposite
             to
             Asia
             and
             their
             Antipodes
             (
             as
             the
             Cosmographers
             do
             teach
             vs
             )
             finde
             not
             our selves
             to
             bee
             hanging
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             our
             heades
             downward
             ,
             and
             our
             feete
             on
             high
             .
             Truly
             it
             is
             strange
             to
             consider
             ,
             that
             the
             spirit
             and
             vnderstanding
             of
             man
             cannot
             attaine
             vnto
             the
             trueth
             ,
             without
             the
             vse
             of
             imagination
             :
             and
             on
             the
             other
             part
             ,
             it
             were
             impossible
             but
             he
             should
             erre
             and
             be
             deceived
             ,
             if
             hee
             should
             wholy
             
             forbeare
             it
             .
             We
             cannot
             comprehend
             the
             heaven
             to
             be
             round
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             the
             earth
             to
             bee
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             it
             ,
             without
             imagination
             .
             But
             if
             this
             imagination
             were
             not
             controuled
             and
             reformed
             by
             reason
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             we
             should
             bee
             deceiued
             ;
             whereby
             we
             may
             certainely
             conclude
             ,
             that
             in
             our
             soules
             there
             is
             a
             certaine
             light
             of
             heaven
             ,
             whereby
             wee
             see
             and
             iudge
             of
             the
             interior
             formes
             which
             present
             themselves
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             same
             we
             alow
             of
             ,
             or
             reiect
             that
             which
             imagination
             doth
             offer
             vnto
             vs.
             Hereby
             we
             see
             that
             the
             rationall
             soule
             is
             above
             all
             corporall
             powers
             :
             and
             as
             the
             force
             and
             etenall
             vigour
             of
             truth
             doth
             rule
             in
             the
             most
             eminent
             part
             of
             man
             :
             yea
             ,
             we
             plainely
             see
             that
             this
             pure
             light
             is
             participant
             and
             proceedes
             from
             that
             first
             great
             light
             ,
             that
             whoso
             knoweth
             not
             this
             ,
             or
             doubteth
             thereof
             ,
             we
             may
             well
             say
             that
             he
             is
             igmorant
             ,
             or
             doubtes
             whether
             he
             be
             a
             man
             or
             no.
             So
             ,
             if
             we
             shall
             demaund
             of
             our
             imagination
             what
             it
             thinkes
             of
             the
             roundnes
             of
             heaven
             ,
             without
             doubt
             she
             will
             answere
             vs
             as
             Lactantius
             doth
             ,
             That
             if
             the
             heaven
             were
             round
             ,
             the
             Sun
             &
             starres
             should
             fall
             ,
             when
             as
             they
             move
             and
             change
             their
             places
             ,
             rising
             towards
             the
             South
             .
             Even
             so
             ,
             if
             the
             earth
             did
             hang
             in
             the
             ayre
             ,
             those
             which
             inhabite
             the
             other
             part
             ,
             should
             go
             with
             their
             feete
             vpwards
             ,
             and
             their
             heades
             downward
             ,
             and
             the
             raine
             which
             falles
             from
             above
             ,
             should
             mount
             vpward
             ,
             with
             many
             other
             ridiculous
             deformities
             .
             But
             if
             we
             consult
             with
             the
             force
             of
             reason
             ,
             she
             will
             make
             small
             accoumpt
             of
             all
             these
             vaine
             imaginations
             ,
             nor
             suffer
             vs
             to
             beleeve
             them
             no
             more
             than
             a
             foolish
             dreame
             .
             But
             Reason
             will
             answer
             with
             this
             her
             integritie
             and
             gravitie
             ,
             that
             it
             were
             a
             very
             grosse
             error
             ,
             to
             imagine
             the
             whole
             world
             to
             be
             like
             vnto
             a
             house
             ,
             placing
             the
             earth
             for
             the
             foundation
             ,
             and
             the
             heaven
             
             for
             the
             covering
             .
             Moreover
             she
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             as
             in
             all
             creatures
             the
             head
             is
             the
             highest
             part
             and
             most
             elevated
             ,
             although
             all
             creatures
             have
             not
             heades
             placed
             in
             one
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             sctuation
             ,
             some
             being
             in
             the
             highest
             part
             ,
             as
             man
             ,
             some
             athwart
             ,
             as
             sheepe
             ,
             others
             in
             the
             middest
             ,
             as
             spiders
             :
             )
             even
             so
             the
             heaven
             ,
             in
             what
             part
             soeuer
             it
             be
             ,
             remaines
             above
             ,
             and
             the
             earth
             likewise
             in
             what
             part
             soever
             ,
             remaines
             vnderneath
             .
             Our
             imagination
             therefore
             is
             grounded
             vpon
             time
             and
             place
             ,
             the
             which
             she
             cannot
             comprehend
             nor
             conceive
             in
             generall
             ,
             but
             in
             particular
             .
             It
             followeth
             ,
             that
             when
             wee
             shall
             raise
             it
             to
             the
             consideration
             of
             things
             which
             exceede
             the
             time
             and
             place
             which
             are
             knowne
             vnto
             her
             ,
             then
             presently
             she
             shrinkes
             and
             cannot
             subsist
             ,
             if
             reason
             doth
             not
             support
             her
             .
             In
             like
             sort
             we
             see
             ,
             vpon
             the
             discourse
             of
             the
             creation
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             our
             imagination
             straies
             to
             seeeke
             out
             a
             time
             before
             the
             creation
             thereof
             ,
             and
             to
             build
             the
             world
             :
             she
             discribes
             a
             place
             ,
             but
             shee
             comes
             not
             to
             consider
             that
             the
             worlde
             might
             bee
             made
             after
             another
             fashion
             .
             Notwithstanding
             ,
             reason
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             no
             time
             before
             there
             was
             a
             motion
             ,
             whereof
             time
             is
             the
             measure
             ,
             neyther
             was
             there
             any
             place
             before
             the
             vniversall
             ,
             which
             comprehendes
             within
             it
             all
             place
             .
             
             Wherein
             the
             excellent
             Philosopher
             Aristotle
             doth
             plainely
             satisfie
             (
             and
             in
             few
             wordes
             )
             that
             argument
             made
             against
             the
             place
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             helping
             himselfe
             with
             our
             vse
             of
             imagination
             ,
             when
             hee
             sa●eth
             ,
             and
             with
             trueth
             ,
             
               That
               in
               the
               world
               the
               same
               place
               of
               the
               earth
               is
               in
               the
               midst
               and
               beneath
               ,
               and
               the
               more
               a
               thing
               is
               in
               the
               middest
               ,
               the
               more
               it
               is
               vnderneath
               .
            
             The
             which
             answer
             being
             produced
             by
             
               Lactantius
               Firmian
            
             ,
             yet
             hee
             doth
             passe
             it
             over
             without
             confutation
             ,
             
             by
             reason
             ,
             saying
             that
             he
             cannot
             stay
             thereon
             ,
             and
             omitte
             the
             handling
             of
             other
             matters
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             reason
             why
             S.
             Augustine
             denied
             the
             Antipodes
             .
             CHAP.
             8.
             
          
           
             THe
             reason
             which
             moved
             S.
             Augustine
             to
             deny
             the
             Antipodes
             ,
             was
             other
             then
             that
             formerly
             alleadged
             ,
             being
             of
             a
             higher
             iudgement
             ,
             for
             the
             reson
             before
             mentioned
             (
             that
             the
             Antipodes
             should
             go
             vpwards
             )
             is
             confuted
             by
             the
             same
             Doctor
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             sermons
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               The
               ancients
               hold
            
             ,
             
             
               that
               the
               earth
               of
               all
               parts
               is
               beneath
               ,
               and
               the
               heaven
               above
               ,
               by
               reason
               whereof
               the
            
             Antipodes
             ,
             
               which
               they
               say
               go
               opposite
               vnto
               vs
               ,
               have
               like
               vnto
               vs
               the
               heaven
               above
               their
               heads
               .
            
             Seeing
             then
             S.
             Augustine
             hath
             confessed
             this
             to
             bee
             conformable
             to
             good
             Philosophie
             ,
             what
             reason
             shall
             we
             say
             did
             move
             so
             learned
             and
             excellent
             a
             man
             to
             follow
             the
             contrary
             opinion
             ?
             Doubtlesse
             he
             drew
             the
             motive
             and
             cause
             from
             the
             bowels
             of
             divinitie
             ,
             whereby
             the
             holie
             Writ
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             all
             mankinde
             doth
             come
             from
             the
             first
             man
             Adam
             :
             and
             to
             say
             that
             men
             could
             passe
             to
             that
             new
             world
             ,
             crossing
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             were
             vncredible
             ,
             and
             a
             meere
             lye
             .
             And
             in
             truth
             ,
             if
             the
             successe
             an
             experience
             of
             what
             we
             have
             seene
             in
             these
             ages
             ,
             had
             not
             satisfied
             vs
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             we
             had
             yet
             held
             this
             reason
             to
             bee
             good
             .
             And
             although
             we
             know
             this
             reason
             neither
             to
             be
             pertinent
             nor
             true
             ,
             yet
             will
             we
             make
             answere
             therevnto
             ,
             shewing
             in
             what
             sort
             ,
             and
             by
             what
             meanes
             ,
             the
             first
             linage
             of
             men
             might
             passe
             thither
             ,
             and
             howe
             and
             by
             what
             meanes
             they
             came
             to
             people
             and
             inhabite
             the
             
             Indies
             .
             And
             for
             that
             wee
             meane
             heereafter
             to
             intreat
             briefly
             of
             this
             subiect
             ,
             it
             shall
             be
             fit
             now
             to
             vnderstand
             what
             the
             holy
             Doctor
             Augustine
             disputes
             vppon
             this
             matter
             in
             his
             bookes
             of
             the
             cittie
             of
             God
             ,
             
               It
               is
               no
               point
               that
               we
               ought
               to
               beleeve
               (
               as
               some
               affirme
               )
               that
               there
               are
            
             Antipodes
             ,
             
             
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               men
               which
               inhabite
               that
               other
               part
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               in
               whose
               region
               the
               Sunne
               riseth
               when
               it
               sets
               with
               vs
               ,
               and
               that
               their
               steppes
               be
               opposite
               and
               contrarie
               to
               ours
               ,
               seeing
               they
               affirme
               not
               this
               by
               any
               certaine
               revelation
               which
               they
               have
               ,
               but
               onely
               by
               a
               Philosophicall
               discourse
               they
               make
               ,
               whereby
               they
               conclude
               ,
               that
               the
               earth
               being
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               invironed
               of
               all
               parts
               and
               covered
               equallie
               with
               the
               heaven
               ,
               of
               necestitie
               that
               must
               be
               in
               the
               lowest
               place
               which
               is
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             Afterwardes
             hee
             continues
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               The
               holie
               Scripture
               doth
               not
               erre
               ,
               neither
               is
               deceived
               in
               anie
               sort
               :
               the
               truth
               whereof
               is
               well
               approved
               in
               that
               which
               it
               propoundeth
               of
               things
               which
               are
               passed
               ,
               for
               as
               much
               as
               that
               which
               hath
               benefore-told
               ,
               hath
               succeded
               in
               every
               point
               ,
               as
               we
               see
               :
               And
               it
               is
               a
               thing
               voide
               of
               all
               sense
               ,
               to
               say
               ,
               that
               men
               could
               passe
               from
               this
               continent
               to
               the
               new
               found
               world
               &
               cut
               through
               the
               Vast
               Ocean
               ,
               seeing
               it
               were
               impossible
               for
               men
               to
               passe
               into
               those
               parts
               any
               other
               way
               ,
               being
               most
               certain
               that
               almen
               descēd
               from
               the
               first
               man.
            
             Wherein
             we
             see
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             difficultie
             S.
             Augustine
             hath
             found
             ,
             was
             nothing
             else
             but
             the
             incomparable
             greatnes
             of
             this
             vast
             
               Ocean
               .
               Gregorie
               Nazianzene
            
             was
             of
             the
             same
             opinion
             ,
             
             assuring
             (
             as
             a
             matter
             without
             any
             doubt
             )
             that
             it
             was
             not
             possible
             to
             saile
             beyond
             the
             Straights
             of
             Gibraltar
             :
             and
             vpon
             this
             subiect
             he
             writes
             in
             an
             Epistle
             of
             his
             :
             
               I
               agree
               well
               with
               the
               saying
               of
            
             Pindarus
             ,
             
               That
               past
               Cadiz
               ,
               that
               Sea
               is
               not
               nauigable
               .
            
             And
             hee
             himselfe
             in
             the
             funerall
             Sermon
             he
             made
             for
             saint
             Basil
             saith
             :
             
               It
               was
               not
               tollerable
               for
               anie
               one
               sailing
               on
               the
               Sea
               ,
               to
               passe
               the
               
               Straight
               of
               Gibraltar
               .
            
             And
             it
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             this
             place
             of
             Pindarus
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               That
               it
               is
               not
               lawfull
               ,
               neyther
               for
               wise
               men
               nor
               fooles
               ,
               to
               know
               what
               is
               beyond
               the
               Straight
               of
               Gibraltar
               ,
            
             hath
             beene
             taken
             for
             a
             Proverbe
             .
             Thus
             we
             see
             by
             the
             beginning
             of
             this
             Proverbe
             ,
             how
             the
             Ancients
             were
             obstinately
             setled
             in
             this
             opinion
             ;
             as
             also
             by
             the
             bookes
             of
             Poets
             ,
             Historiographers
             and
             ancient
             Cosmographers
             ,
             that
             the
             end
             and
             bounds
             of
             the
             earth
             were
             set
             at
             Cadiz
             in
             Spaine
             :
             where
             they
             plant
             the
             pillars
             of
             Hercules
             :
             there
             they
             set
             the
             limits
             of
             the
             Romane
             Empire
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             describe
             the
             boundes
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             not
             onely
             prophane
             writers
             speake
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             to
             apply
             it selfe
             to
             our
             phrase
             saith
             ,
             
               That
               the
               edict
               of
            
             Augustus
             Caesa●
             
               was
               published
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               that
               all
               the
               world
               should
               be
               taxed
               :
               and
               of
            
             Alexander
             
               the
               great
               ,
               that
               he
               stretched
               forth
               his
               Empire
               even
               to
               the
               end
               and
               vttermost
               bounds
               of
               the
               earth
               .
            
             And
             in
             another
             place
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Gospell
             did
             flourish
             and
             increase
             through
             the
             vniversall
             world
             .
             For
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             by
             an
             vsuall
             phrase
             ,
             calleth
             all
             the
             worlde
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             part
             thereof
             ,
             and
             was
             at
             that
             time
             discovered
             and
             knowne
             .
             And
             the
             Ancients
             were
             ignorant
             ,
             that
             the
             East
             Indian
             Sea
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             West
             were
             navigable
             ,
             wherin
             they
             have
             generally
             agreed
             .
             By
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             Plinie
             writes
             as
             a
             certaine
             trueth
             ,
             that
             the
             seas
             which
             are
             betwixt
             two
             lands
             ,
             takes
             from
             vs
             a
             iust
             moitie
             of
             the
             habitable
             earth
             .
             For
             saith
             he
             ,
             we
             cannot
             passe
             thither
             ,
             neyther
             they
             come
             hither
             .
             Finally
             ,
             
               Tullie
               ,
               Macrobius
               ,
               Pomponius
               Mela
               ,
            
             and
             the
             ancient
             Writers
             hold
             the
             same
             opinion
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             Aristotles
             opinion
             ,
             touching
             the
             new
             Worlde
             ,
             and
             what
             abused
             him
             to
             make
             him
             deny
             it
             .
             
               CHAP.
               9.
            
             
          
           
             BEsides
             all
             the
             former
             reasons
             ,
             there
             was
             yet
             an
             other
             ,
             which
             mooved
             the
             Ancients
             to
             beleeve
             it
             to
             be
             impossible
             for
             men
             to
             passe
             to
             this
             new
             world
             :
             the
             which
             they
             held
             ;
             for
             that
             besides
             the
             vastnesse
             of
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             the
             heate
             of
             that
             Region
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             was
             so
             excessive
             ,
             as
             it
             would
             not
             suffer
             any
             man
             ,
             how
             venturous
             or
             laborious
             so-ever
             ,
             to
             passe
             by
             sea
             or
             land
             ,
             from
             one
             Pole
             to
             an
             other
             .
             For
             although
             these
             Philosophers
             have
             themselves
             affirmed
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             was
             round
             ,
             (
             as
             in
             effect
             it
             is
             )
             and
             that
             vnder
             the
             2.
             
             Poles
             there
             was
             habitable
             land
             ;
             yet
             could
             they
             not
             conceyve
             ,
             that
             the
             Region
             ,
             containing
             all
             that
             lyeth
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropickes
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             of
             the
             five
             Zones
             or
             Regions
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             the
             Cosmographers
             and
             Astrologers
             divide
             the
             Worlde
             )
             might
             be
             inhabited
             by
             man.
             The
             reason
             they
             give
             to
             maintaine
             this
             Zone
             to
             be
             inhabitable
             ,
             was
             ,
             for
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             which
             makes
             his
             course
             directly
             over
             this
             Region
             ,
             and
             approcheth
             so
             neere
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             set
             on
             fire
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             consequence
             ,
             causeth
             a
             want
             of
             waters
             and
             pastures
             .
             Aristotle
             was
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             who
             although
             he
             were
             a
             great
             Philosopher
             ,
             yet
             was
             hee
             deceyved
             in
             this
             poynt
             :
             for
             the
             cleering
             whereof
             ,
             it
             shall
             be
             good
             to
             observe
             his
             reasons
             ,
             and
             to
             note
             wherein
             he
             hath
             discoursed
             well
             ,
             
             and
             wherein
             he
             hath
             erred
             .
             This
             Philosopher
             makes
             a
             question
             of
             the
             Meridionall
             or
             Southerne
             winde
             ,
             whether
             wee
             should
             beleeve
             it
             takes
             his
             
             beginning
             from
             the
             South
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             other
             Pole
             contrary
             to
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             writes
             in
             these
             termes
             .
             
               Reason
               teacheth
               vs
               ,
               that
               the
               latitude
               and
               largenesse
               of
               the
               habitable
               earth
               ,
               hath
               her
               boundes
               and
               limits
               ,
               and
               yet
               all
               this
               habitable
               earth
               cannot
               bee
               vnited
               and
               ioyned
               one
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               by
               reason
               the
               middle
               Region
               is
               so
               intemperate
               .
               For
               it
               is
               certaine
               ,
               that
               in
               her
               longitude
               ,
               which
               is
               from
               East
               to
               West
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               immoderate
               cold
               nor
               heate
               ,
               but
               in
               her
               latitude
               and
               heigth
               ,
               which
               is
               from
               the
               Pole
               to
               the
               Equinoctiall
               Line
               .
               So
               as
               we
               may
               well
               passe
               the
               whole
               earth
               in
               her
               longitude
               ,
               if
               the
               greatnesse
               of
               the
               Sea
               ,
               which
               ioynes
               lands
               together
               ,
               were
               no
               hinderance
               .
            
             Hitherto
             there
             is
             no
             contradicting
             of
             Aristotle
             ,
             who
             hath
             great
             reason
             to
             affirme
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             in
             her
             longitude
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             runnes
             more
             equally
             ,
             &
             is
             more
             proper
             for
             the
             life
             and
             habitation
             of
             man
             ,
             then
             in
             her
             latitude
             from
             North
             to
             South
             .
             The
             which
             is
             true
             ,
             not
             onely
             for
             this
             foresaid
             reason
             of
             Aristotle
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             alwayes
             one
             temperature
             of
             the
             Heavens
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             being
             equally
             distant
             both
             from
             the
             Northerne
             colde
             and
             the
             Southerne
             heate
             .
             But
             also
             for
             an
             other
             reason
             ,
             for
             that
             travelling
             alwayes
             in
             longitude
             ,
             we
             see
             the
             dayes
             and
             nights
             succed
             one
             another
             by
             course
             ,
             the
             which
             falleth
             not
             out
             going
             in
             her
             latitude
             :
             for
             of
             necessitie
             wee
             must
             come
             to
             that
             Region
             vnder
             the
             Pole
             ,
             whereas
             there
             is
             continuall
             night
             for
             sixe
             Moneths
             ,
             a
             very
             inconvenient
             thing
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man.
             The
             Philosopher
             passeth
             on
             further
             ,
             r●prooving
             the
             Geographers
             ,
             which
             described
             the
             earth
             in
             his
             time
             ,
             and
             saith
             thus
             :
             
               Wee
               may
               discerne
               the
               trueth
               of
               that
               which
               I
               have
               sayd
               ,
               by
               the
               passages
               which
               may
               be
               made
               by
               land
               ,
               and
               the
               navigations
               by
               sea
               ,
               for
               there
               is
               a
               great
               difference
               betwixt
               the
               longitude
               and
               the
               latitude
               ,
               for
               the
               distance
               from
               the
               pillars
               of
            
             Hercules
             ,
             
               at
               the
               Straight
               of
            
             
             Gibraltar
             ,
             
               vnto
               the
               East
            
             Indies
             ,
             
               exceeds
               the
               proportion
               of
               above
               five
               to
               three
               ,
               the
               passage
               which
               is
               from
            
             Ethiopia
             
               to
               the
               lake
               of
            
             Meotis
             
               in
               the
               farthest
               confines
               of
            
             Scythia
             ,
             
               the
               which
               is
               confirmed
               by
               the
               account
               of
               iourneyes
               by
               land
               ,
               &
               by
               sayling
               ,
               as
               we
               do
               now
               know
               by
               experience
               :
               we
               have
               also
               knowledge
               of
               the
               habitable
               earth
               ,
               even
               vnto
               those
               partes
               which
               are
               inhabitable
               .
            
             And
             truely
             in
             this
             point
             wee
             must
             pardon
             Aristotle
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             his
             time
             ,
             they
             had
             not
             discovered
             beyond
             the
             first
             Ethiopia
             ,
             called
             the
             exterior
             ,
             ioyning
             to
             Arabia
             and
             Affricke
             ,
             the
             other
             Ethiopia
             being
             wholy
             vnknowne
             in
             his
             age
             :
             Yea
             ,
             all
             that
             great
             Land
             ,
             which
             we
             now
             call
             the
             Land
             of
             
               Prete
               Ian
            
             ,
             neyther
             had
             they
             any
             knowledge
             of
             the
             rest
             that
             lyes
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             and
             runnes
             beyond
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             ,
             vnto
             the
             Cape
             of
             good
             Hope
             ,
             so
             famous
             and
             well
             knowne
             by
             the
             navigation
             of
             Portugals
             ;
             so
             as
             if
             wee
             measure
             the
             Land
             from
             this
             Cape
             vnto
             Scythia
             and
             Tartaria
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             this
             distance
             and
             latitude
             ,
             will
             proove
             as
             great
             as
             the
             longitude
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             Gibraltar
             vnto
             the
             East
             Indies
             .
             It
             is
             certaine
             ,
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             the
             springs
             of
             Nilus
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             ende
             of
             Ethiopia
             ,
             and
             therefore
             Lucan
             reprooves
             the
             curiositie
             of
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             ,
             searching
             out
             the
             springs
             of
             Nilus
             in
             these
             verses
             ;
             
               
                 O
                 Romaine
                 what
                 availes
                 thee
                 so
                 much
                 travell
                 ,
              
               
                 
                 In
                 search
                 of
                 Niles
                 first
                 source
                 thy selfe
                 to
                 gravell
                 .
              
            
             And
             the
             same
             Poet
             ,
             speaking
             to
             Nile
             sayth
             :
             
               
                 Since
                 thy
                 first
                 source
                 is
                 yet
                 so
                 vnrevealed
                 ,
              
               
                 Nile
                 ,
                 what
                 thou
                 art
                 ,
                 is
                 from
                 the
                 world
                 concealed
                 .
              
            
          
           
             But
             by
             the
             holy
             scripture
             we
             may
             conceive
             that
             this
             land
             is
             habitable
             :
             for
             if
             it
             were
             not
             ,
             the
             Prophet
             Sophonias
             would
             not
             say
             (
             speaking
             of
             these
             nations
             called
             to
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             )
             
             
               The
               children
               of
               my
               dispersed
               (
               so
               he
               
               calleth
               the
               Apostles
               )
               shall
               bring
               me
               presents
               from
               beyond
               the
               bancks
               of
            
             Ethiopia
             .
             Yet
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             )
             there
             is
             reason
             to
             pardon
             the
             Philosopher
             ,
             who
             beleeved
             the
             writers
             and
             Cosmographers
             of
             his
             time
             .
             Let
             vs
             continue
             and
             examine
             what
             followes
             of
             the
             same
             
               Aristotle
               :
               One
               part
               of
               the
               world
               (
               saith
               he
               )
               which
               lieth
               towards
               the
               North
               ,
               beyond
               the
               temperate
               zone
               ,
               is
               inhabitable
               for
               the
               exceeding
               cold
               :
               the
               other
               part
               vpon
               the
               South
               ,
               is
               likewise
               inhabitable
               beyond
               the
               Tropicke
               for
               the
               extreame
               heate
               .
               But
               the
               partes
               of
               the
               world
               lying
               beyond
               India
               on
               the
               one
               side
               ,
               and
               the
               pillers
               of
            
             Hercules
             
               on
               the
               other
               ,
               without
               doubt
               cannot
               bee
               ioyned
               and
               continued
               one
               with
               the
               other
               :
               so
               as
               all
               the
               habitable
               earth
               is
               not
               conteined
               in
               one
               continent
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               sea
               which
               divides
               it
               .
            
             In
             this
             last
             point
             he
             speakes
             truth
             :
             then
             hee
             continues
             touching
             the
             other
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               It
               is
               necessarie
               the
               earth
               should
               have
               the
               same
               proportion
               with
               the
               Pole
               Antarticke
               ,
               as
               this
               our
               part
               which
               is
               habitable
               hath
               with
               the
               North
               :
               and
               there
               is
               no
               doubt
               ,
               but
               in
               that
               other
               world
               all
               things
               should
               be
               ordred
               as
               in
               ours
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               growing
               and
               order
               of
               the
               winds
               .
            
             And
             having
             alleaged
             other
             reasons
             to
             no
             purpose
             ,
             he
             concludes
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               We
               must
               confesse
               of
               necessitie
               ,
               that
               the
               Southerne
               wind
               is
               that
               which
               blowes
               and
               comes
               from
               the
               burning
               zone
               ,
               the
               which
               being
               so
               neere
               the
               sunne
               ,
               wantes
               water
               and
               pastures
               .
            
             This
             is
             Aristotles
             opinion
             ,
             and
             in
             truth
             ,
             mans
             coniecture
             can
             hardly
             passe
             any
             farther
             .
             So
             as
             I
             do
             often
             consider
             (
             with
             a
             Christian
             contemplation
             )
             how
             weake
             the
             Philosophie
             of
             the
             wise
             of
             this
             world
             hath
             beene
             in
             the
             search
             of
             divine
             things
             ,
             seeing
             in
             humaine
             things
             (
             wherein
             they
             seeme
             so
             well
             read
             )
             they
             often
             erre
             .
             Aristotle
             holds
             ,
             that
             the
             habitable
             earth
             of
             the
             Pole
             Antartike
             ,
             in
             longitude
             from
             East
             to
             West
             is
             very
             great
             ,
             and
             in
             latitude
             from
             the
             Pole
             Antartike
             
             to
             the
             Equi●●cticall
             is
             very
             s●●all
             ●●
             the
             which
             is
             so
             contrary
             to
             the
             truth
             ,
             that
             in
             a
             maner
             all
             the
             habitation
             on
             this
             side
             the
             Pole
             Antartike
             is
             in
             latitude
             ,
             (
             I
             meane
             from
             the
             Pole
             to
             the
             line
             )
             and
             in
             longitude
             from
             East
             to
             West
             it
             is
             so
             small
             ,
             as
             the
             latitude
             exceedes
             in
             three
             partes
             or
             more
             .
             In
             his
             other
             opinion
             he
             affirme●
             ,
             that
             the
             middle
             region
             is
             inhabitable
             ,
             being
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             burnt
             vp
             by
             the
             excessive
             heate
             caused
             by
             the
             ne●renes
             of
             the
             sunne
             ▪
             and
             by
             this
             reason
             hath
             neither
             waters
             nor
             pastures
             .
             The
             which
             is
             in
             like
             so●t
             contrary
             :
             for
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             is
             scituated
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropickes
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             and
             yet
             is
             it
             found
             very
             well
             peopled
             and
             inhabited
             by
             men
             and
             other
             sortes
             of
             crea●ures
             ,
             being
             a
             region
             of
             all
             the
             world
             the
             most
             fruitfull
             of
             waters
             and
             pastures
             ,
             and
             very
             temperate
             in
             the
             greatest
             pa●t
             ,
             which
             the
             will
             of
             God
             hath
             so
             appointed
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             even
             in
             naturall
             things
             he
             hath
             confounded
             the
             wisedome
             of
             this
             world
             ▪
             To
             conclude
             ,
             wee
             must
             beleeve
             that
             the
             burning
             zone
             is
             well
             inhabited
             ,
             although
             the
             auncients
             have
             held
             it
             impossible
             .
             But
             the
             other
             zone
             or
             region
             ,
             which
             lyeth
             betwixt
             the
             burning
             zone
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Pole
             Antartike
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             in
             a
             climate
             more
             commodious
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             smally
             peopled
             and
             inhabited
             ,
             seeing
             wee
             know
             no
             other
             dwelling
             in
             it
             but
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Chile
             and
             a
             small
             portion
             ioyning
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             good
             Hope
             .
             The
             rest
             is
             possessed
             by
             the
             Ocean
             .
             Although
             many
             be
             of
             opinion
             (
             the
             which
             I
             likewise
             hold
             )
             that
             there
             is
             much
             more
             land
             not
             yet
             discovered
             ,
             the
             which
             should
             be
             firme
             land
             opposite
             to
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Chile
             ,
             which
             runnes
             beyond
             the
             circkle
             or
             Tropicke
             of
             capricorne
             .
             And
             if
             there
             be
             any
             :
             without
             doubt
             it
             is
             a
             land
             of
             an
             excellent
             
             temper
             ,
             being
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             two
             extreames
             ,
             and
             scituate
             in
             the
             same
             climate
             with
             the
             best
             regions
             in
             Europe
             .
             And
             in
             this
             regarde
             Aristotles
             coniecture
             was
             good
             .
             But
             speaking
             of
             what
             is
             discovered
             at
             this
             day
             in
             this
             zone
             ,
             it
             is
             little
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             large
             countries
             inhabited
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
          
        
         
           
             That
             Plinie
             ,
             and
             the
             auncients
             ,
             held
             the
             same
             opinion
             with
             
               Aristotle
               .
               CHAP.
               10.
            
             
          
           
             THis
             opinion
             of
             Aristotles
             ,
             hath
             bene
             held
             by
             Plinie
             ,
             who
             saith
             thus
             ,
             
             
               The
               temperature
               of
               the
               middle
               region
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               where
               the
               sunne
               continually
               runnes
               his
               course
               ,
               is
               scorched
               and
               burnt
               vp
               as
               with
               a
               neere
               fire
               .
            
             Ioyning
             to
             the
             same
             region
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             others
             of
             eyther
             side
             ,
             which
             (
             lying
             betwixt
             the
             heat
             of
             this
             burning
             zone
             &
             the
             cruell
             cold
             of
             the
             other
             two
             extreams
             ,
             )
             are
             very
             temperate
             ,
             and
             can
             have
             no
             communication
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             excessive
             heate
             of
             the
             heaven
             :
             which
             hath
             bene
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             generally
             discribed
             by
             the
             Poet
             in
             these
             verses
             .
          
           
             
               Heavens
               circuit
               is
               of
               fiue
               zones
               ,
               one
               whereof
               ,
            
             
               Which
               still
               the
               sunne
               burnes
               ,
               makes
               the
               earth
               below
            
             
               With
               flames
               intempestiue
               red
               hotte
               to
               glow
               .
            
          
           
             And
             the
             same
             Poet
             in
             another
             place
             .
          
           
             
               Heare
               this
               ,
               if
               any
               harbour
               in
               that
               seate
            
             
               Whose
               quarter
               vnder
               that
               large
               zone
               is
               set
            
             
               Amidst
               foure
               others
               by
               the
               sunne
               enlightned
               .
            
          
           
             And
             another
             Poet
             speakes
             more
             plainely
             .
          
           
             
             
               As
               many
               regions
               are
               there
               on
               the
               ground
               ,
            
             
               As
               are
               in
               heaven
               ,
               wherein
               fiue
               parts
               are
               found
               ,
            
             
               Whereof
               the
               midst
               ,
               through
               heate
               raisd
               from
               the
               rayes
            
             
               Of
               scorching
               sunne
               ,
               inhabitable
               staies
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Auncients
             have
             grounded
             their
             generall
             opinion
             vpon
             one
             reason
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             them
             certaine
             and
             not
             to
             be
             confuted
             :
             for
             finding
             that
             the
             more
             a
             region
             drew
             neere
             vnto
             the
             South
             ,
             the
             hotter
             it
             was
             :
             the
             proofe
             whereof
             was
             so
             infallible
             in
             those
             regions
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             in
             
               Italie
               ,
               Apulia
            
             is
             hotter
             then
             Tuscane
             ,
             and
             in
             
               Spaine
               Andelozia
            
             then
             Biscaie
             .
             A
             thing
             so
             apparent
             ,
             that
             although
             there
             bee
             but
             eight
             degrees
             difference
             or
             lesse
             betwixt
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             yet
             do
             wee
             finde
             the
             one
             extreame
             hotte
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             very
             colde
             ,
             whereby
             they
             did
             inferre
             ,
             that
             the
             region
             so
             neere
             the
             South
             ,
             having
             the
             sunne
             so
             directly
             for
             zenith
             ,
             must
             of
             necessity
             bee
             continually
             scorched
             with
             heate
             .
             They
             did
             likewise
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             divers
             seasons
             of
             the
             yeere
             ,
             as
             the
             Spring
             ,
             Summer
             ,
             Autumne
             &
             Winter
             ,
             were
             caused
             by
             the
             neerenes
             and
             distance
             of
             the
             sunne
             ,
             finding
             also
             that
             although
             they
             were
             farre
             from
             the
             Tropicke
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             sunne
             doth
             passe
             in
             summer
             ,
             yet
             when
             it
             approched
             neere
             vnto
             them
             ,
             at
             the
             same
             season
             they
             felt
             great
             heate
             .
             Whereby
             they
             did
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             had
             had
             the
             sunne
             so
             neere
             vnto
             them
             as
             to
             go
             directly
             over
             their
             heads
             ,
             the
             heate
             would
             have
             bene
             so
             insupportable
             ,
             as
             it
             would
             burne
             and
             consume
             men
             with
             the
             vehemency
             thereof
             .
             The
             same
             reason
             moved
             the
             Auncients
             ,
             to
             thinke
             that
             the
             middle
             region
             was
             not
             habitable
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             called
             it
             the
             burning
             zone
             .
             And
             in
             truth
             ,
             if
             visible
             experience
             did
             not
             vnfold
             this
             doubt
             ,
             we
             should
             yet
             confesse
             ,
             that
             this
             reason
             were
             very
             peremptorie
             
             and
             Mathematicall
             :
             whereby
             we
             may
             see
             how
             weake
             our
             vnderstanding
             is
             ,
             to
             comprehend
             these
             naturall
             things
             .
             But
             wee
             may
             say
             ,
             it
             is
             fallen
             out
             to
             the
             great
             good
             and
             happines
             of
             our
             age
             ,
             to
             have
             the
             knowledge
             of
             these
             two
             great
             wonders
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             to
             know
             how
             easily
             we
             may
             saile
             through
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             that
             vnder
             the
             burning
             zone
             men
             inioy
             a
             very
             temperate
             heaven
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Auncients
             could
             never
             beleeve
             .
             Of
             the
             last
             of
             these
             two
             wonders
             ,
             touching
             the
             qualitie
             and
             habitation
             of
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             we
             will
             discourse
             amply
             thereof
             in
             the
             next
             book
             .
             I
             thinke
             it
             therefore
             fit
             in
             this
             booke
             to
             treat
             of
             the
             maner
             of
             sailing
             through
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             imports
             vs
             much
             for
             the
             subiect
             of
             this
             worke
             .
             But
             before
             wee
             come
             to
             this
             point
             ,
             it
             shall
             be
             good
             to
             shew
             what
             the
             Auncients
             thought
             of
             these
             new
             men
             ,
             whome
             we
             call
             Indians
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             in
             ancient
             Bookes
             we
             finde
             some
             knowledge
             of
             this
             newe
             world
             .
             
               CHAP.
               11.
            
             
          
           
             LEt
             vs
             returne
             to
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             formerly
             spoken
             .
             Wee
             must
             necessarily
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             did
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             eyther
             there
             were
             no
             men
             beyond
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Cancer
             (
             as
             S.
             Augustine
             and
             Lactantius
             doe
             affirme
             )
             or
             if
             there
             were
             any
             ,
             
             at
             the
             least
             they
             did
             not
             inhabite
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropicks
             ,
             (
             as
             Aristotle
             and
             Plinie
             have
             maintained
             ,
             and
             before
             them
             the
             Philosopher
             Parmenides
             )
             the
             contrarie
             whereof
             is
             before
             sufficiently
             prooved
             ,
             both
             for
             the
             
             one
             and
             the
             other
             .
             But
             many
             through
             curiositie
             may
             demaund
             ,
             if
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             this
             trueth
             ,
             which
             to
             vs
             is
             now
             so
             apparent
             :
             seeing
             that
             in
             trueth
             it
             seemeth
             very
             strange
             ,
             that
             this
             newe
             worlde
             which
             is
             so
             spacious
             as
             we
             doe
             visibly
             see
             it
             ,
             should
             be
             hidden
             from
             the
             Ancients
             by
             so
             many
             ages
             .
             But
             some
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             seeking
             to
             obscure
             the
             felicitie
             of
             this
             age
             ,
             and
             the
             glory
             of
             our
             Nation
             ,
             strive
             to
             proove
             ,
             that
             the
             new
             found
             world
             was
             knowne
             to
             the
             Ancients
             .
             And
             in
             trueth
             wee
             cannot
             deny
             ,
             but
             there
             was
             some
             apparency
             .
             S.
             Ierome
             writing
             vpon
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Ephesians
             ,
             sayth
             ,
             
             
               We
               seeke
               with
               reason
               what
               the
               Apostle
               meaneth
               in
               these
               wordes
               ,
               where
               he
               saith
               :
               you
               have
               walked
               for
               a
               season
               according
               to
               the
               course
               of
               this
               world
               ,
               whether
               he
               would
               have
               vs
               to
               vnderstand
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               an
               other
               world
               ,
               which
               neither
               is
               ,
               nor
               depends
               of
               this
               world
               :
               but
               other
               worldes
               ,
               whereof
            
             Clement
             
               writes
               in
               his
               Epistle
               ,
               the
               Ocean
               and
               the
               worldes
               which
               are
               beyond
               the
               Ocean
               :
            
             These
             are
             the
             wordes
             of
             S.
             Ierome
             ,
             but
             in
             trueth
             I
             cannot
             finde
             this
             Epistle
             of
             S.
             Clement
             cited
             by
             S.
             Ierome
             :
             yet
             I
             beleeve
             vndoubtedly
             ,
             that
             S.
             Clement
             hath
             written
             it
             ,
             seeing
             S.
             Ierome
             maketh
             mention
             thereof
             .
             And
             with
             reason
             saint
             Clement
             saith
             ,
             that
             beyond
             the
             Ocean
             there
             is
             an
             other
             worlde
             ,
             yea
             ,
             many
             worldes
             ,
             as
             in
             trueth
             there
             is
             ;
             seeing
             there
             is
             so
             great
             distance
             from
             one
             newe
             worlde
             to
             an
             other
             new
             world
             :
             (
             I
             meane
             from
             Peru
             and
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             to
             China
             and
             the
             East
             Indies
             .
             )
             Moreover
             ,
             Plinie
             ,
             who
             hath
             beene
             so
             curious
             a
             searcher
             out
             of
             strange
             things
             ,
             reportes
             in
             his
             naturall
             Historie
             ,
             that
             Hannon
             a
             Captaine
             of
             the
             Carthaginians
             ,
             sayled
             through
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             from
             the
             Straight
             of
             Gibraltar
             ,
             coasting
             alongst
             the
             land
             ,
             
             even
             vnto
             the
             confines
             of
             Arabia
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             left
             this
             his
             Navigation
             in
             writing
             .
             If
             it
             bee
             as
             Plinie
             
             writes
             ,
             it
             followes
             that
             Hannon
             sayled
             as
             farre
             as
             the
             Portugals
             do
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             passing
             twice
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             :
             which
             is
             a
             fearefull
             thing
             .
             And
             the
             same
             Plinie
             reports
             of
             
               Cornelius
               Nepos
            
             a
             very
             grave
             Authour
             ,
             who
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             course
             hath
             beene
             sayled
             by
             an
             other
             man
             ,
             called
             Eudaxius
             ,
             but
             by
             contrary
             wayes
             :
             for
             this
             Eudaxius
             following
             the
             King
             of
             Latyres
             ,
             passed
             by
             the
             redde
             sea
             into
             the
             Ocean
             ;
             and
             turning
             backe
             ,
             came
             to
             the
             Straight
             of
             Gibraltar
             ,
             the
             which
             
               Cornelius
               Nepos
            
             affirmes
             to
             have
             happened
             in
             his
             time
             .
             And
             also
             other
             grave
             Authors
             do
             write
             ,
             that
             a
             ship
             of
             Carthage
             driven
             by
             force
             of
             winde
             into
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             came
             to
             a
             Land
             ,
             which
             vntill
             then
             was
             vnknowne
             :
             and
             returning
             to
             Carthage
             ,
             kindled
             a
             great
             desire
             in
             the
             Citizens
             to
             discover
             and
             people
             this
             land
             :
             the
             which
             the
             Senate
             perceyving
             ,
             did
             forbid
             this
             navigation
             by
             a
             rigorous
             decree
             ;
             fearing
             that
             with
             the
             desire
             of
             new
             lands
             ,
             they
             should
             leave
             to
             love
             their
             owne
             Countrie
             .
             By
             all
             this
             wee
             may
             gather
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             some
             knowledge
             of
             the
             new
             world
             :
             yet
             shall
             you
             hardly
             finde
             in
             the
             bookes
             of
             ancient
             Writers
             ,
             any
             thing
             written
             of
             our
             America
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             West
             Indies
             :
             but
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             (
             I
             say
             )
             there
             is
             sufficient
             testimonie
             ,
             not
             only
             of
             that
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             that
             on
             this
             side
             ,
             which
             then
             was
             farthest
             off
             ;
             going
             thither
             by
             a
             contrary
             way
             to
             that
             at
             this
             day
             .
             Is
             it
             not
             easie
             to
             find
             Molaco
             in
             ancient
             bookes
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             golden
             Chersonese
             :
             the
             Cape
             of
             Comori
             ,
             which
             was
             called
             the
             Promontorie
             of
             Coci
             ;
             &
             that
             great
             &
             famous
             Iland
             of
             Sumatra
             ,
             so
             well
             knowne
             by
             the
             ancient
             name
             of
             Taprobana
             .
             What
             shall
             wee
             say
             of
             the
             two
             Ethiopiaes
             ,
             the
             Brachmanes
             ,
             and
             that
             great
             Land
             of
             the
             Chinaes
             ?
             Who
             doubtes
             ,
             but
             there
             was
             often
             mention
             made
             thereof
             in
             
             ancient
             bookes
             ?
             But
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             we
             find
             not
             in
             Plinie
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             navigation
             they
             passed
             the
             Ilands
             of
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             
             which
             he
             calleth
             Fortunate
             :
             the
             principall
             whereof
             is
             sayd
             to
             be
             called
             Canarie
             ,
             for
             the
             multitude
             of
             dogs
             which
             are
             in
             it
             .
             But
             there
             is
             scarce
             any
             mention
             in
             ancient
             books
             of
             the
             voyages
             which
             are
             made
             at
             this
             day
             beyond
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             by
             the
             Gulph
             which
             with
             reason
             they
             call
             great
             .
             Yet
             many
             hold
             opinion
             ,
             that
             Seneca
             the
             Tragedian
             did
             prophecie
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             in
             his
             Tragedie
             of
             Medea
             ,
             which
             translated
             ,
             saith
             thus
             ;
             
               
                 
                 An
                 age
                 shall
                 come
                 ,
                 ere
                 ages
                 ende
                 ,
              
               
                 Blessedly
                 strange
                 and
                 strangely
                 blest
                 ,
              
               
                 When
                 our
                 Sea
                 farre
                 and
                 neere
                 or'prest
                 ,
              
               
                 His
                 shoare
                 shall
                 farther
                 yet
                 extend
                 .
              
               
                 Descryed
                 then
                 shall
                 a
                 large
                 Land
                 be
                 ,
              
               
                 By
                 this
                 profound
                 Seas
                 navigation
                 ,
              
               
                 An
                 other
                 World
                 ,
                 an
                 other
                 Nation
                 ,
              
               
                 All
                 men
                 shall
                 then
                 discovered
                 see
                 .
              
               
                 Thule
                 accounted
                 heretofore
              
               
                 The
                 worldes
                 extreme
                 ,
                 the
                 Northerne
                 bound
                 ,
              
               
                 Shall
                 be
                 when
                 Southwest
                 parts
                 be
                 found
                 ,
              
               
                 A
                 neerer
                 Isle
                 ,
                 a
                 neighbour
                 shoare
                 .
              
            
          
           
             This
             Seneca
             reports
             in
             these
             verses
             ;
             &
             we
             cannot
             wel
             deny
             ,
             but
             (
             vnderstanding
             it
             litterally
             )
             it
             is
             very
             true
             :
             for
             if
             we
             reckon
             the
             many
             yeeres
             he
             speakes
             of
             ,
             beginning
             from
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Tragedian
             ,
             it
             is
             above
             a
             thousand
             and
             foure
             hundred
             yeeres
             past
             :
             and
             if
             it
             were
             from
             the
             time
             of
             Medea
             ,
             it
             is
             above
             two
             thousand
             yeeres
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             see
             plainely
             now
             accomplished
             :
             seeing
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             Ocean
             so
             long
             time
             hidden
             ,
             hath
             beene
             found
             out
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             have
             discovered
             a
             great
             land
             and
             a
             new
             world
             inhabited
             ,
             more
             spatious
             
             then
             all
             the
             Continent
             of
             Europe
             and
             Asia
             .
             But
             therein
             may
             a
             question
             with
             reason
             be
             made
             ,
             whether
             Seneca
             spake
             this
             by
             divination
             ,
             or
             poetically
             and
             by
             chance
             .
             And
             to
             speake
             my
             opinion
             ,
             I
             beleeve
             hee
             did
             divine
             ,
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             wise
             men
             and
             well
             advised
             ;
             for
             that
             in
             his
             time
             they
             vndertooke
             newe
             voyages
             and
             navigations
             by
             sea
             ,
             hee
             knew
             well
             ,
             like
             a
             Philosopher
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             an
             other
             land
             contrary
             and
             opposite
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Antichthon
             .
             And
             by
             this
             ground
             he
             might
             conceyve
             ,
             that
             the
             industrie
             and
             courage
             of
             man
             might
             in
             the
             ende
             passe
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             discover
             new
             lands
             and
             another
             world
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             Senecaes
             time
             ,
             they
             had
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Voyage
             which
             Plinie
             speaketh
             of
             ,
             whereby
             they
             passed
             the
             great
             Ocean
             .
             The
             which
             seemes
             to
             bee
             the
             motive
             of
             Senecaes
             prophecie
             ,
             as
             he
             giveth
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             by
             these
             former
             verses
             ,
             after
             the
             which
             having
             described
             the
             carefull
             life
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             free
             from
             malice
             ,
             he
             followeth
             thus
             :
             
               
                 Now
                 is
                 it
                 not
                 as
                 earst
                 it
                 was
                 ,
              
               
                 For
                 whether
                 the
                 Ocean
                 will
                 or
                 nill
                 ,
              
               
                 He
                 traverst
                 is
                 by
                 hardy
                 will
                 :
              
               
                 Which
                 pastime
                 makes
                 time
                 so
                 to
                 passe
                 .
              
            
          
           
             And
             a
             little
             after
             he
             saith
             thus
             :
             
               
                 Now
                 every
                 boat
                 dares
                 swimme
                 and
                 sport
              
               
                 On
                 surging
                 Seas
                 ,
                 fearing
                 no
                 wracke
                 :
              
               
                 Passengers
                 seeking
                 what
                 they
                 lacke
                 ,
              
               
                 So
                 long
                 a
                 voyage
                 thinke
                 but
                 short
                 .
              
               
                 Nothing
                 is
                 nowe
                 more
                 to
                 discover
                 ,
              
               
                 No
                 place
                 is
                 now
                 left
                 to
                 surprise
                 ,
              
               
                 Townes
                 now
                 that
                 for
                 defence
                 devise
                 ,
              
               
                 With
                 new
                 fortifications
                 cover
                 .
              
               
                 All
                 in
                 the
                 world
                 turn'd
                 round
                 about
                 ,
              
               
                 No
                 thing
                 in
                 place
                 as
                 t'
                 was
                 enured
                 ,
              
               
               
                 Nothing
                 vnseene
                 ,
                 nothing
                 assured
              
               
                 This
                 Circle
                 vniverse
                 throughout
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Indian
                 ,
                 whom
                 at
                 home
                 heate
                 fries
                 ,
              
               
                 Drinkes
                 of
                 Araxis
                 waters
                 cold
                 :
              
               
                 The
                 Persian
                 rich
                 in
                 gems
                 and
                 gold
                 ,
              
               
                 Wash
                 in
                 the
                 Rhine
                 and
                 
                   Elbe
                   likewise
                
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Seneca
             did
             coniecture
             this
             by
             the
             great
             courage
             of
             men
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             shall
             happen
             last
             ,
             saying
             ,
             It
             shall
             fall
             out
             in
             the
             latter
             age
             ,
             &c.
             as
             hath
             bin
             before
             mentioned
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             opinion
             which
             Plato
             held
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             12.
             
          
           
             IF
             any
             one
             hath
             treated
             more
             particularly
             of
             the
             west
             Indies
             ,
             the
             honor
             belongs
             to
             Plato
             ,
             who
             in
             his
             time
             faith
             thus
             .
             
               In
               those
               dayes
               ,
               they
               could
               not
               sayle
               this
               Gulph
            
             (
             meaning
             the
             
               Atlantike
               Sea
            
             (
             which
             is
             the
             Ocean
             )
             which
             meetes
             at
             the
             Straight
             of
             
               Gibraltar
               )
               for
               that
               the
               passage
               was
               stopt
               at
               the
               mouth
               of
               the
               pillars
               of
            
             Hercules
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             same
             Straight
             of
             
               Gibraltar
               )
               and
               this
               Iland
               was
               in
               those
               dayes
               ioyned
               ▪
               to
               the
               foresaid
               mouth
               ,
               and
               was
               of
               that
               bignesse
               ,
               as
               it
               exceeded
               all
            
             Asia
             and
             Affricke
             
               together
               :
               and
               then
               was
               there
               a
               passage
               to
               goe
               from
               these
               Ilands
               to
               others
               ,
               and
               from
               those
               others
               Ilandes
               ,
               they
               went
               to
               the
               firme
               Land
               ,
               the
               which
               was
               neere
               invironed
               with
               the
               very
               Sea.
            
             This
             is
             reported
             by
             Critias
             in
             Plato
             .
             And
             such
             as
             beleeve
             that
             this
             narration
             of
             Plato
             is
             a
             true
             Historie
             ,
             delivered
             in
             these
             termes
             ,
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             great
             Atlanticke
             Iland
             (
             the
             which
             did
             exceed
             both
             Affricke
             and
             Asia
             in
             greatnesse
             )
             did
             then
             comprehend
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Ocean
             called
             Atlantike
             :
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             nowe
             sayle
             in
             :
             and
             that
             those
             other
             Ilands
             ,
             which
             (
             he
             sayde
             (
             
             were
             neere
             vnto
             this
             great
             one
             ;
             are
             those
             ,
             which
             wee
             now
             call
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Barlovante
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             
               Cuba
               ,
               Hispaniola
               ,
               S.
               Iohn
               de
               Port
               ricco
               ,
               Iamaica
               ,
            
             and
             other
             Ilands
             of
             that
             Countrie
             :
             and
             that
             the
             maine
             Land
             whereof
             hee
             maketh
             mention
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             wee
             now
             call
             firme
             Land
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             Peru
             and
             America
             ;
             and
             that
             Sea
             ,
             which
             he
             sayth
             is
             adioyning
             to
             the
             firme
             Land
             ,
             is
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             calleth
             the
             very
             Sea
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             comparison
             of
             her
             greatnesse
             ,
             all
             other
             Seas
             ,
             both
             Mediterranean
             ,
             yea
             ,
             and
             the
             Atlantike
             Sea
             ,
             are
             small
             in
             regard
             thereof
             .
             Hereby
             in
             trueth
             they
             give
             a
             cunning
             and
             wittie
             interpretation
             to
             these
             words
             of
             Plato
             .
             But
             whether
             this
             interpretation
             should
             be
             held
             for
             true
             or
             not
             ,
             I
             am
             resolved
             to
             declare
             in
             an
             other
             place
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             some
             have
             held
             opinion
             that
             in
             places
             of
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             whereas
             they
             speake
             of
             Ophir
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             our
             Peru.
             
               CHAP.
               13.
            
             
          
           
             SOme
             hold
             opinion
             ,
             that
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ;
             taking
             the
             region
             of
             Peru
             for
             that
             Ophir
             which
             so
             famous
             
               Robert
               Steevens
            
             ,
             or
             to
             say
             more
             truely
             
               Francis
               Vatable
            
             ,
             a
             man
             well
             seene
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             tong
             (
             as
             I
             have
             heard
             our
             master
             report
             ,
             who
             was
             his
             disciple
             )
             saith
             in
             his
             annotations
             vpon
             the
             9.
             chapter
             of
             the
             3.
             booke
             of
             Kings●
             ,
             that
             the
             Iland
             of
             Hispaniola
             which
             
               Christopher
               Colombus
            
             found
             out
             ,
             was
             that
             of
             Ophir
             ,
             
             from
             whence
             Solomon
             caused
             to
             bee
             brought
             foure
             hundred
             and
             twentie
             ,
             or
             foure
             hundred
             and
             50.
             talents
             of
             most
             fine
             and
             pure
             golde
             ,
             
             for
             that
             the
             golde
             of
             Cibao
             which
             our
             men
             bring
             from
             Hispaniola
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             same
             fashion
             and
             qualitie
             .
             And
             there
             are
             
             many
             others
             which
             affirme
             that
             our
             Peru
             is
             Ophir
             ,
             deriving
             one
             name
             from
             another
             ,
             who
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             when
             as
             the
             booke
             of
             Paralipomenon
             was
             written
             ,
             
             they
             called
             it
             Peru
             ,
             grounding
             it
             vpon
             that
             which
             the
             holy
             scripture
             saith
             ,
             that
             they
             brought
             from
             Ophir
             pure
             gold
             ,
             precious
             stones
             ,
             and
             wood
             which
             was
             rare
             and
             goodly
             :
             which
             things
             abound
             in
             Peru
             ,
             as
             they
             say
             .
             But
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             it
             is
             farre
             from
             the
             truth
             ,
             that
             Peru
             should
             be
             Ophir
             so
             famous
             in
             the
             Bible
             .
             For
             although
             in
             this
             Peru
             ,
             there
             be
             good
             store
             of
             gold
             ,
             yet
             is
             there
             not
             such
             aboundance
             ,
             as
             it
             may
             be
             equalled
             with
             the
             fame
             of
             the
             riches
             that
             was
             in
             auncient
             time
             at
             the
             East
             Indies
             .
             
             I
             finde
             not
             that
             in
             Peru
             there
             are
             such
             precious
             stones
             ,
             or
             such
             exquisite
             woods
             ,
             as
             the
             like
             have
             not
             bend
             seene
             at
             Ierusalem
             .
             For
             although
             there
             be
             exquisite
             Emeralds
             ,
             and
             some
             hard
             trees
             of
             Aromaticall
             wood
             ,
             yet
             do
             I
             not
             finde
             any
             thing
             ofso
             great
             commendation
             as
             the
             scripture
             giueth
             vnto
             Ophir
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             it
             seemes
             not
             likely
             that
             Solomon
             would
             leave
             the
             East
             Indies
             (
             most
             rich
             and
             plentifull
             )
             to
             send
             his
             fleetes
             to
             this
             farther
             land
             :
             whether
             if
             they
             had
             come
             so
             often
             (
             as
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             )
             we
             had
             surely
             found
             more
             signes
             and
             testimonies
             thereof
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             Etimologie
             of
             the
             name
             of
             Ophir
             ,
             and
             the
             change
             or
             reduction
             thereof
             to
             Peru
             ,
             seemes
             to
             me
             of
             small
             consideration
             ,
             being
             most
             certaine
             that
             the
             name
             of
             Peru
             is
             not
             very
             auncient
             ,
             nor
             common
             to
             all
             that
             countrie
             .
             It
             hath
             beene
             vsuall
             in
             the
             discoverie
             of
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             to
             give
             names
             to
             lands
             and
             portes
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             occasions
             presented
             at
             their
             ariuall
             :
             and
             I
             beleeve
             that
             the
             name
             of
             Peru
             ,
             hath
             bene
             so
             found
             out
             ,
             and
             put
             in
             practise
             :
             for
             we
             find
             heere
             that
             the
             name
             hath
             bene
             given
             to
             all
             the
             countrie
             of
             Peru
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             river
             so
             called
             
             by
             the
             inhbitants
             of
             the
             countrie
             ,
             where
             the
             Spaniards
             arived
             vpon
             their
             first
             discoverie
             .
             Whereby
             we
             maintaine
             that
             the
             Indians
             themselves
             bee
             ignorant
             ,
             and
             do
             not
             vse
             this
             name
             and
             appellation
             to
             signifie
             their
             land
             .
             It
             seemeth
             moreover
             ,
             the
             same
             Authors
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             Sepher
             spoken
             of
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             we
             now
             call
             Andes
             ,
             which
             are
             most
             high
             mountaines
             in
             Peru.
             But
             this
             resemblance
             of
             names
             and
             appellations
             is
             no
             sufficient
             proofe
             .
             If
             that
             were
             of
             force
             ,
             we
             might
             as
             well
             say
             ,
             that
             Iectan
             is
             Iecsan
             ,
             mentioned
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             .
             Neither
             may
             we
             say
             ,
             
             that
             the
             names
             of
             Titus
             and
             Paul
             ,
             which
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             of
             Peru
             do
             vse
             ,
             come
             from
             the
             Romans
             or
             Christians
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             too
             weake
             an
             argument
             ,
             to
             draw
             a
             conclusion
             of
             great
             matters
             .
             We
             see
             plainely
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             contrarie
             to
             the
             intention
             of
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             ,
             which
             some
             have
             written
             ,
             that
             Tharsis
             and
             Ophir
             were
             one
             and
             the
             same
             Province
             ,
             conferring
             the
             22
             ▪
             chapter
             of
             the
             4.
             booke
             of
             the
             Kings
             ,
             with
             the
             20.
             chapter
             of
             the
             second
             booke
             of
             Paralipomenon
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             Kings
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             Iosaphat
             prepared
             a
             fleete
             of
             shippes
             in
             Asiongaber
             to
             fetch
             golde
             at
             Ophir
             ,
             and
             in
             Paralipomenon
             ,
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             fleete
             was
             furnished
             to
             go
             vnto
             Tharsis
             .
             Whereby
             it
             may
             be
             supposed
             ,
             that
             in
             these
             fore-said
             bookes
             ,
             where
             the
             scripture
             speakes
             of
             Tharsis
             and
             Ophir
             ,
             that
             it
             meanes
             one
             thing
             .
             Some
             one
             may
             demaund
             ,
             what
             region
             or
             Province
             that
             Ophir
             was
             ,
             whether
             Solomons
             fleete
             went
             with
             the
             Mariners
             of
             Hyram
             King
             of
             Tyre
             and
             Sidon
             to
             fetch
             hold
             .
             And
             whether
             King
             Iosaphats
             fleete
             ,
             
             pretending
             to
             go
             ,
             did
             suffer
             shipwracke
             ,
             and
             perish
             in
             Asiongaber
             ,
             as
             the
             holy
             scripture
             doth
             testifie
             .
             In
             this
             I
             do
             willingly
             agree
             with
             the
             opinion
             of
             Ioseph
             ,
             in
             his
             books
             
             of
             Antiquities
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             Province
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             
             the
             which
             was
             found
             by
             that
             Ophir
             the
             sonne
             of
             Iectan
             ,
             wher●of
             mention
             is
             made
             in
             the
             10.
             of
             Genessis
             :
             and
             that
             Province
             did
             abound
             with
             most
             fine
             gold
             .
             Thereof
             it
             comes
             ,
             they
             did
             so
             much
             extol
             the
             gold
             of
             Ophir
             or
             of
             Ophas
             ,
             or
             as
             some
             wil
             say
             ,
             this
             word
             of
             Obrise
             is
             thesame
             with
             Ophrise
             ,
             for
             finding
             there
             seven
             sortes
             or
             kindes
             of
             gold
             (
             as
             S.
             Ierome
             reportes
             ,
             )
             that
             of
             Ophir
             was
             held
             for
             the
             most
             fine
             ,
             as
             heere
             we
             esteeme
             the
             gold
             of
             Valdivia
             and
             Caramaya
             .
             The
             chiefest
             reason
             which
             moves
             me
             to
             thinke
             that
             Ophir
             is
             at
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             West
             ▪
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             Solomons
             fleete
             could
             not
             come
             hither
             ,
             without
             passing
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             all
             China
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             sea
             :
             being
             vnlikely
             they
             would
             passe
             over
             all
             the
             world
             to
             come
             thither
             for
             gold
             ,
             that
             continent
             especially
             lying
             in
             that
             sort
             ,
             as
             they
             could
             not
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             thereof
             by
             any
             voiage
             by
             land
             .
             And
             hereafter
             we
             wil
             shew
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             never
             knowledge
             in
             thearte
             of
             Navigation
             ,
             without
             the
             which
             they
             could
             not
             runne
             so
             farre
             into
             the
             sea
             .
             Finally
             ,
             in
             these
             matters
             (
             when
             as
             there
             appeares
             no
             certaine
             proofes
             ,
             but
             onely
             light
             coniectures
             ,
             )
             wee
             are
             not
             bound
             to
             beleeve
             but
             what
             we
             shall
             thinke
             good
             .
          
        
         
           
             What
             Tharsis
             and
             Ophir
             signifie
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             .
             CHAP.
             14.
             
          
           
             IF
             every
             mans
             coniecture
             and
             opinion
             may
             be
             allowed
             ,
             for
             my
             part
             I
             hold
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             these
             words
             of
             Tharsis
             and
             Ophir
             ,
             most
             commonly
             do
             not
             signifie
             any
             certaine
             place
             :
             but
             it
             is
             a
             word
             and
             signification
             
             generall
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             as
             in
             our
             vulgar
             tongue
             ,
             this
             word
             of
             Indies
             ,
             is
             generall
             vnto
             vs
             in
             our
             vsuall
             maner
             ofspeech
             :
             for
             wee
             meane
             by
             the
             Indies
             ,
             those
             rich
             countries
             which
             are
             farre
             off
             ,
             and
             strange
             vnto
             vs.
             So
             we
             Spaniards
             do
             indifferently
             call
             Indies
             ,
             the
             countries
             of
             
               Peru
               ,
               Mexico
               ,
               China
               ,
               Malaca
               ,
            
             and
             Bresil
             :
             and
             from
             what
             parts
             soever
             of
             these
             any
             letters
             come
             ,
             wee
             say
             they
             bee
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             countries
             be
             farre
             distant
             and
             different
             one
             from
             another
             .
             Yet
             we
             cannot
             denie
             ,
             but
             that
             name
             of
             Indies
             ,
             is
             properly
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             .
             And
             for
             that
             in
             olde
             time
             they
             did
             speake
             of
             these
             Indies
             ,
             as
             of
             a
             countrie
             farre
             off
             ,
             so
             likewise
             ,
             in
             the
             discoverie
             of
             other
             remote
             lands
             ,
             they
             have
             given
             them
             the
             names
             of
             Indies
             ,
             being
             distant
             from
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             held
             as
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
             Even
             so
             ,
             in
             my
             iudgement
             ,
             Tharsis
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             doth
             not
             signifie
             any
             certaine
             and
             determined
             place
             ,
             but
             onely
             regions
             a
             farre
             off
             ,
             and
             (
             according
             to
             the
             vulgar
             opinion
             ,
             )
             very
             rich
             and
             strange
             :
             for
             that
             which
             Iosephus
             and
             some
             others
             would
             affirme
             ,
             that
             Tharsis
             is
             Tarso
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             
             in
             my
             opinion
             hath
             bene
             well
             refuted
             by
             S.
             Ierome
             :
             not
             onely
             for
             that
             these
             wordes
             are
             written
             with
             divers
             letters
             ,
             the
             one
             with
             an
             aspiration
             ,
             the
             other
             without
             :
             but
             also
             ,
             that
             many
             things
             are
             written
             of
             Tharsis
             ,
             which
             cannot
             agree
             with
             Tarso
             ,
             a
             Citie
             in
             Cilicia
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             in
             some
             places
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             Tharsis
             is
             said
             to
             be
             in
             Cilicia
             ,
             the
             which
             you
             shall
             find
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Iudith
             ,
             speaking
             of
             Holophernes
             ,
             who
             having
             passed
             the
             limits
             of
             Assyria
             ,
             
             he
             came
             to
             the
             great
             mountaines
             of
             Ange
             ,
             (
             which
             perchance
             is
             Taurus
             ,
             )
             which
             hilles
             be
             on
             the
             left
             hand
             of
             Cilicia
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             entred
             into
             all
             the
             Castells
             ,
             
             where
             he
             assembled
             
             all
             his
             forces
             ,
             having
             destroyed
             that
             famous
             Citie
             of
             Melothi
             ,
             he
             ruined
             all
             the
             children
             of
             Tharsis
             and
             of
             Israell
             ,
             which
             were
             ioyning
             vnto
             the
             desart
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             were
             in
             the
             South
             ,
             towards
             the
             land
             of
             Cellon
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             passed
             Euphrates
             :
             but
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             so
             written
             of
             Tharsis
             ,
             
             cannot
             be
             applied
             to
             the
             Citie
             of
             
               Tharso
               .
               Theodoret
            
             and
             some
             others
             ,
             following
             the
             interpretation
             of
             the
             70.
             
             in
             some
             places
             they
             set
             Tharsis
             in
             Affrike
             ,
             saying
             ,
             it
             was
             the
             same
             Citie
             which
             was
             aunciently
             called
             Carthage
             ,
             and
             is
             now
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Thunis
             :
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             Ionas
             ment
             to
             go
             thether
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             scripture
             reports
             ,
             that
             hefled
             from
             the
             Lord
             into
             Tharsis
             .
             Others
             pretend
             ,
             that
             Tharsis
             ,
             is
             a
             certaine
             countrie
             of
             the
             Indies
             :
             wherevnto
             it
             seemes
             that
             S.
             Ierome
             is
             inclined
             .
             
             I
             will
             not
             now
             decide
             these
             opinions
             :
             but
             I
             holde
             that
             in
             this
             case
             ,
             the
             scripture
             doth
             not
             alwaies
             signifie
             one
             region
             or
             certaine
             part
             of
             the
             world
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             wise
             men
             or
             Kings
             that
             came
             to
             worshippe
             Christ
             ,
             were
             of
             the
             East
             :
             and
             the
             scripture
             saith
             ,
             they
             were
             of
             
               Saba
               ,
               Epha
            
             ,
             and
             Madiem
             .
             And
             some
             learned
             men
             holde
             that
             they
             were
             of
             
               Ethiopia
               ,
               Arabia
            
             ,
             and
             Persia
             :
             and
             yet
             the
             Psalmist
             and
             the
             Church
             sings
             of
             them
             :
             
             
               The
               Kings
               of
               Tharsis
               shall
               bring
               presents
               .
            
             Wee
             agree
             then
             with
             S.
             Ierome
             :
             that
             Tharsis
             ,
             is
             a
             word
             that
             hath
             many
             and
             divers
             significations
             in
             the
             scripture
             .
             Sometimes
             it
             signifies
             the
             Crisolite
             ,
             or
             Iacinth
             stone
             ,
             sometimes
             a
             certaine
             region
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             sometimes
             the
             sea
             which
             is
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             a
             Iacinth
             by
             the
             reverberation
             of
             the
             sunne
             .
             But
             the
             same
             Doctor
             doth
             with
             reason
             deny
             that
             Tharsis
             is
             any
             region
             of
             the
             Indies
             whether
             Ionas
             would
             fly
             ,
             seeing
             that
             parting
             from
             Ioppa
             ,
             it
             had
             beene
             impossible
             to
             saile
             vnto
             the
             Indies
             by
             that
             sea
             ,
             for
             that
             Ioppa
             (
             which
             at
             this
             
             day
             wee
             call
             Iaffe
             ,
             )
             is
             no
             port
             of
             the
             red
             Sea
             ,
             ioyning
             to
             the
             East
             Indian
             Sea
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             Mediterranean
             Sea
             ,
             which
             hath
             no
             issue
             into
             the
             Indian
             .
             Whereby
             it
             doeth
             plainely
             appeare
             ,
             that
             the
             voyage
             which
             Solomons
             Fleet
             made
             ,
             parting
             from
             Asiongaber
             (
             whereas
             the
             shippes
             of
             king
             Iosaphat
             were
             lost
             )
             went
             by
             the
             redde
             Sea
             to
             Tharsis
             and
             Ophir
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             directly
             testified
             in
             the
             Scripture
             .
             The
             which
             voyage
             was
             very
             different
             from
             that
             which
             Ionas
             pretended
             to
             Tharsis
             :
             seeing
             that
             Asiongaber
             is
             the
             port
             of
             a
             Cittie
             of
             Idumea
             ,
             seated
             vpon
             the
             Straight
             ,
             whereas
             the
             red
             sea
             ioynes
             with
             the
             great
             Ocean
             .
             From
             this
             Ophir
             they
             brought
             to
             Salomon
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             Elephants
             teeth
             ,
             Monkies
             ,
             Indian
             Cocks
             ,
             and
             their
             voyage
             was
             of
             three
             yeeres
             :
             all
             which
             without
             doubt
             ought
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             which
             is
             fruitfull
             and
             aboundant
             of
             all
             these
             thinges
             ,
             as
             Plinie
             testifieth
             ,
             and
             our
             owne
             experience
             doth
             witnes
             .
             From
             our
             Peru
             ,
             doubtlesse
             they
             could
             not
             bring
             any
             Elephants
             teeth
             ,
             those
             beastes
             beeing
             vnknowne
             there
             ;
             but
             they
             might
             well
             bring
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             pleasant
             monkies
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             doth
             commonly
             vnderstand
             by
             this
             word
             of
             Tharsis
             ,
             eyther
             the
             great
             Sea
             ,
             or
             farre
             and
             strange
             Regions
             .
             So
             as
             he
             supposeth
             that
             the
             prophecies
             which
             speake
             of
             Tharsis
             (
             seeing
             the
             spirit
             of
             prophecie
             may
             comprehend
             all
             things
             )
             may
             often
             be
             applied
             to
             things
             of
             our
             new
             world
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Abdias
             ,
             which
             some
             doe
             interpret
             to
             be
             the
             Indies
             .
             
               CHAP.
               15.
            
             
          
           
             MAny
             say
             and
             affirme
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             it
             was
             foretold
             long
             before
             ,
             that
             this
             new
             worlde
             should
             be
             converted
             to
             Iesus
             Christ
             by
             the
             Spanish
             nation
             ,
             and
             to
             this
             purpose
             they
             expound
             the
             text
             of
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Abdias
             ,
             which
             sayth
             thus
             :
             
               At
               the
               transmigration
               of
               this
               O●t
               ,
               the
               children
               of
               Israel
               shall
               possesse
               all
               the
               the
               dwellings
               of
               the
               Cananites
               vnto
            
             Sarepte
             ,
             
               and
               the
               transmigration
               of
            
             Ierusalem
             ,
             
               which
               is
               at
            
             Bosphorus
             ,
             
               shall
               possesse
               the
               Citties
               of
               the
               South
               ,
               and
               they
               that
               shall
               save
               ,
               shall
               come
               vp
               to
               the
               hill
               of
            
             Sion
             
               to
               iudge
               the
               mount
               of
            
             Esau
             ,
             
               and
               the
               kingdome
               shall
               bee
               the
               Lordes
               .
            
             This
             hath
             beene
             set
             downe
             acording
             to
             the
             letter
             ,
             but
             the
             hebrew
             Authors
             reade
             it
             thus
             :
             
               And
               the
               transmigration
               of
               this
               O●t
               of
               the
               childrens
               ,
               which
               be
               the
               Cananites
               ,
               vnto
               Zarphat
            
             (
             which
             is
             France
             )
             
               and
               the
               transmigration
               of
               Ierusalem
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               Sapharad
            
             (
             vnderstood
             for
             
               Spaine
               )
               shall
               possesse
               for
               inheritance
               the
               Cities
               of
               the
               South
               ,
               and
               those
               which
               procure
               salvation
               ,
               shall
               mount
               vp
               to
               the
               hill
               of
               Sion
               ,
               to
               iudge
               the
               mount
               of
            
             Esau
             ,
             
               and
               the
               kingdome
               shall
               be
               the
               Lords
               .
            
             Yet
             some
             of
             them
             doe
             not
             produce
             any
             sufficient
             testimony
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             nor
             pertinent
             reasons
             to
             proove
             that
             Sapharad
             (
             which
             
               S.
               Ierome
            
             doth
             interpret
             the
             Bosphor
             or
             Straight
             ,
             and
             the
             70.
             
             Interpreters
             Euphrates
             ,
             )
             should
             signifie
             Spaine
             ,
             but
             their
             onely
             opinion
             .
             Others
             alleage
             the
             Caldean
             Paraphrase
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             and
             the
             ancient
             Rabbins
             ,
             which
             expound
             it
             on
             this
             sort
             ;
             as
             also
             that
             Zarphat
             is
             France
             ,
             (
             which
             the
             vulgar
             and
             the
             70
             -
             Interpreters
             call
             Sarepte
             .
             )
             But
             leaving
             this
             dispute
             ,
             which
             belongs
             to
             men
             of
             more
             leisure
             ;
             what
             
             necessitie
             is
             there
             to
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             the
             citties
             of
             the
             South
             or
             of
             Mageb
             (
             as
             the
             70
             .
             write
             )
             be
             those
             of
             this
             new
             world
             ?
             Moreover
             ,
             what
             need
             is
             there
             to
             beleeve
             and
             to
             take
             the
             Spanish
             Nation
             for
             the
             transmigration
             from
             Ierusalem
             to
             Sapharad
             ,
             vnlesse
             we
             will
             vnderstand
             Ierusalem
             spiritually
             ,
             and
             thereby
             the
             Church
             ?
             So
             as
             by
             the
             transmigration
             from
             Ierusalem
             to
             Sapharad
             ,
             the
             holy
             spirite
             shewes
             vs
             the
             children
             of
             the
             holy
             Church
             ,
             which
             inhabit
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             &
             the
             banks
             of
             the
             Sea
             ,
             for
             so
             is
             Sapharad
             vnderstood
             in
             the
             Syrian
             tongue
             ,
             and
             doth
             well
             agree
             with
             our
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             according
             to
             the
             Ancients
             is
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             beeing
             in
             a
             manner
             all
             invironed
             with
             Sea.
             And
             by
             the
             Citties
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             we
             may
             well
             vnderstand
             these
             Indies
             ,
             seeing
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             this
             newe
             worlde
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             South
             ;
             and
             the
             better
             part
             looks
             to
             the
             Pole
             Antartike
             .
             That
             which
             followeth
             is
             easie
             to
             interpret
             ,
             
               viz.
               They
               which
               procure
               Salvation
               ,
               shall
               ascend
               the
               hill
               of
               Sion
               ,
               to
               iudge
               the
               mount
               of
            
             Esau.
             For
             wee
             may
             say
             ,
             they
             vnite
             themselves
             to
             the
             doctrine
             and
             strength
             of
             the
             holy
             Church
             ,
             which
             seeke
             to
             breake
             and
             disperse
             the
             prophane
             errors
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             for
             that
             may
             be
             interpreted
             to
             iudge
             the
             mount
             of
             Esau
             :
             whereby
             it
             followes
             ,
             that
             in
             those
             daies
             the
             Realme
             shall
             neyther
             bee
             for
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             nor
             for
             them
             of
             Europe
             ,
             but
             for
             Iesus
             Christ
             our
             Saviour
             .
             Whosoever
             shall
             expound
             the
             Prophecie
             of
             Abdias
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             blamed
             ;
             being
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             did
             vnderstand
             all
             secrets
             long
             before
             .
             And
             it
             ,
             seemes
             there
             is
             great
             reason
             to
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             mention
             is
             made
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             of
             a
             matter
             of
             such
             importance
             ,
             as
             the
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             of
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             and
             their
             conversion
             to
             the
             faith
             .
             Isay
             saith
             in
             these
             wordes
             ;
             
               Oh
               the
               
               wings
               of
               ships
               which
               come
               from
               the
               other
               part
               of
               Ethiopia
               .
            
             
             Many
             learned
             Authors
             hold
             ,
             that
             al
             this
             Chapter
             is
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             Indies
             :
             and
             that
             same
             Prophet
             in
             an
             other
             place
             saith
             ;
             
             
               Those
               which
               shall
               escape
               out
               of
               Israel
               ,
               shal
               goe
               farre
               off
               to
            
             Tharsis
             
               and
               to
               remote
               Ilands
               ,
               where
               they
               shal
               convert
               many
               Nations
               vnto
               the
               Lorde
               .
            
             Amongest
             the
             which
             ,
             hee
             names
             
               Greece
               ,
               Italie
               ,
               Affricke
            
             with
             many
             others
             :
             the
             which
             without
             doubt
             may
             well
             bee
             applied
             vnto
             the
             conversion
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             Being
             most
             certaine
             that
             the
             Gospel
             shall
             be
             preached
             generally
             throughout
             the
             world
             ,
             as
             our
             Saviour
             hath
             promised
             ,
             and
             then
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             world
             shall
             come
             .
             It
             followes
             then
             ,
             and
             so
             we
             ought
             to
             vnderstand
             it
             ,
             that
             there
             be
             many
             Nations
             vpon
             the
             face
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             to
             whom
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             not
             yet
             been
             preached
             .
             Whereby
             we
             may
             gather
             ,
             that
             there
             remained
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             world
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             and
             that
             yet
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             good
             part
             to
             discover
             .
          
        
         
           
             By
             what
             meanes
             the
             first
             men
             might
             come
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             not
             willingly
             ,
             nor
             of
             set
             purpose
             .
             CHAP.
             16.
             
          
           
             NOw
             it
             is
             time
             to
             make
             answer
             to
             such
             as
             say
             there
             are
             no
             Antipodes
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             region
             where
             we
             live
             ,
             cannot
             bee
             inhabited
             .
             The
             huge
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Ocean
             did
             so
             amaze
             
               S.
               Augustine
            
             ,
             as
             he
             could
             not
             conceive
             how
             mankinde
             could
             passe
             to
             this
             new-found
             world
             .
             But
             seeing
             on
             the
             one
             side
             wee
             know
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             many
             yeeres
             agoe
             there
             were
             men
             inhabiting
             in
             these
             parts
             ,
             so
             likewise
             we
             cannot
             deny
             but
             the
             scripture
             doth
             teach
             vs
             cleerely
             ,
             that
             all
             men
             are
             come
             
             from
             the
             first
             man
             :
             without
             doubt
             we
             shall
             be
             forced
             to
             beleeve
             and
             confesse
             ,
             that
             men
             have
             passed
             hither
             from
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
               or
               Affricke
            
             ,
             yet
             must
             wee
             discover
             by
             what
             meanes
             they
             could
             passe
             .
             It
             is
             not
             likely
             that
             there
             was
             an
             other
             Noes
             Arke
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             men
             might
             be
             transported
             into
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             much
             lesse
             any
             Angell
             to
             carie
             the
             first
             man
             to
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             holding
             him
             by
             the
             haire
             of
             the
             head
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             Prophet
             Abac●c
             :
             for
             we
             intreat
             not
             of
             the
             mightie
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             only
             of
             that
             which
             is
             conformable
             vnto
             reason
             ,
             &
             the
             order
             and
             disposition
             of
             humane
             things
             .
             Wherefore
             these
             two
             things
             ought
             to
             be
             held
             for
             wonderfull
             and
             worthie
             of
             admiration
             ,
             yea
             ,
             to
             bee
             numbred
             among
             the
             secrets
             of
             God.
             The
             one
             is
             ;
             how
             man
             could
             passe
             so
             huge
             a
             passage
             by
             Sea
             and
             Lande
             .
             The
             other
             is
             ;
             that
             there
             beeing
             such
             multitudes
             of
             people
             ,
             they
             have
             yet
             beene
             vnknowne
             so
             many
             ages
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             I
             demaund
             ,
             by
             what
             resolution
             ,
             force
             or
             industrie
             ,
             the
             Indians
             could
             passe
             so
             large
             a
             Sea
             ,
             and
             who
             might
             be
             the
             Inventer
             of
             so
             strange
             a
             passage
             ?
             Truely
             I
             have
             often
             times
             considered
             thereof
             with
             my selfe
             ,
             (
             as
             many
             others
             have
             done
             )
             but
             never
             could
             I
             finde
             any
             thing
             to
             satisfie
             mee
             .
             Yet
             will
             I
             say
             what
             I
             have
             conceived
             ,
             and
             what
             comes
             presently
             into
             my
             minde
             ,
             seeing
             that
             testimonies
             faile
             mee
             ,
             whom
             I
             might
             follow
             ,
             suffering
             my selfe
             to
             be
             guided
             by
             the
             rule
             of
             reason
             ,
             (
             although
             it
             be
             very
             subtill
             .
             )
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             men
             came
             to
             this
             land
             of
             Peru
             by
             one
             of
             these
             two
             meanes
             ,
             either
             by
             land
             or
             by
             sea
             .
             If
             they
             came
             by
             sea
             ,
             it
             was
             casually
             ,
             and
             by
             chance
             ,
             or
             willingly
             ,
             &
             of
             purpose
             .
             I
             vnderstand
             by
             chance
             ,
             being
             cast
             by
             force
             of
             some
             storme
             or
             tempest
             ,
             as
             it
             happens
             in
             tempestuous
             times
             .
             I
             meane
             done
             of
             purpose
             ,
             when
             they
             prepared
             fleetes
             to
             discover
             new
             
             lands
             .
             Besides
             these
             two
             meanes
             ,
             I
             see
             it
             is
             not
             possible
             to
             find
             out
             any
             other
             ,
             if
             wee
             will
             follow
             the
             course
             of
             humane
             things
             ,
             and
             not
             devise
             fabulous
             and
             poeticall
             fictions
             ;
             for
             no
             man
             may
             thinke
             to
             finde
             another
             Eagle
             as
             that
             of
             Ganimede
             ,
             or
             a
             flying
             Horse
             ,
             like
             vnto
             Perseu●
             ,
             that
             should
             carie
             the
             Indians
             through
             the
             aire
             ;
             or
             that
             peradventure
             these
             first
             men
             haue
             vsed
             fishes
             ,
             as
             Mir-maides
             ,
             or
             the
             fish
             called
             a
             Nicholas
             ,
             to
             passe
             them
             thither
             .
             But
             laying
             aside
             these
             imaginations
             and
             fopperies
             ,
             let
             vs
             examine
             these
             two
             meanes
             ,
             the
             which
             will
             bee
             both
             pleasant
             and
             profitable
             .
             First
             in
             my
             iudgement
             ,
             it
             were
             not
             farre
             from
             reason
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             and
             auncient
             people
             of
             these
             Indies
             ,
             have
             discovered
             and
             peopled
             after
             the
             same
             sort
             as
             wee
             do
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             by
             the
             Arte
             of
             Navigation
             and
             aide
             of
             Pilots
             ,
             the
             which
             guide
             themselves
             by
             the
             heigth
             and
             knowledge
             of
             the
             heavens
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             industrie
             in
             handling
             and
             changing
             of
             their
             sailes
             according
             to
             the
             season
             .
             Why
             might
             not
             this
             well
             be
             ?
             Must
             we
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             we
             alone
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             our
             age
             ,
             have
             onely
             the
             Arte
             and
             knowledge
             to
             saile
             through
             the
             Ocean
             ?
             Wee
             see
             even
             now
             ,
             that
             they
             cut
             through
             the
             Ocean
             to
             discover
             new
             lands
             ,
             as
             not
             long
             since
             
               Alvaro
               Mendana
            
             and
             his
             companions
             did
             ,
             who
             parting
             from
             the
             Port
             of
             Lima
             ,
             came
             along●t
             the
             West
             ,
             to
             discover
             the
             land
             which
             lieth
             Eastward
             from
             Per●
             ;
             and
             at
             the
             end
             of
             three
             moneths
             ,
             they
             discovered
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Salomon
             ,
             which
             are
             many
             and
             very
             great
             ,
             and
             by
             all
             likelehood
             ,
             they
             lie
             adioyning
             to
             new
             Guinnie
             ,
             or
             else
             are
             very
             neere
             to
             some
             other
             firme
             land
             .
             And
             even
             now
             by
             commandement
             from
             the
             King
             and
             his
             Counsell
             ,
             they
             are
             resolved
             to
             prepare
             a
             new
             fleete
             for
             these
             Ilands
             .
             Seeing
             it
             is
             thus
             ,
             why
             may
             we
             not
             suppose
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             the
             
             courage
             and
             resolution
             to
             travell
             by
             sea
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             intent
             to
             discover
             the
             land
             which
             they
             call
             Antictho●
             opposite
             to
             theirs
             ,
             and
             that
             (
             according
             to
             the
             discourse
             of
             their
             Philosophie
             )
             it
             should
             be
             with
             an
             intent
             ,
             not
             to
             rest
             vntill
             they
             came
             in
             view
             of
             the
             landes
             they
             sought
             ?
             Surely
             there
             is
             no
             repugnancie
             or
             contrarietie
             in
             that
             which
             wee
             see
             happen
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             former
             ages
             ,
             seeing
             that
             the
             holy
             scripture
             doth
             wit●es
             ,
             that
             Solomon
             tooke
             Masters
             and
             Pilots
             from
             Tyre
             and
             Sidon
             ,
             men
             very
             expert
             in
             Navigation
             ,
             2
             who
             by
             their
             industry
             performed
             this
             voiage
             in
             three
             yeeres
             .
             3
             To
             what
             end
             thinke
             you
             doth
             it
             note
             the
             Arte
             of
             Mariners
             ,
             and
             their
             knowledge
             ,
             with
             their
             long
             voiage
             of
             three
             yeeres
             ,
             but
             to
             give
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             Solomons
             sleete
             sailed
             through
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ?
             Many
             are
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             which
             thinke
             that
             S.
             Augustine
             had
             small
             reason
             to
             wonder
             at
             the
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             who
             might
             well
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             so
             difficult
             to
             saile
             through
             ,
             considering
             what
             hath
             been
             spoken
             of
             Solomons
             Navigation
             .
             But
             to
             say
             the
             truth
             ,
             I
             am
             of
             a
             contrary
             opinion
             ,
             neither
             can
             I
             perswade
             my selfe
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             Indians
             came
             to
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             of
             purpose
             ,
             by
             a
             determined
             voiage
             ;
             neither
             will
             I
             yeeld
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             knowledgein
             the
             Art
             of
             Navigation
             ,
             whereby
             men
             at
             this
             day
             passe
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             from
             one
             part
             to
             another
             ,
             where
             they
             please
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             performe
             with
             an
             incredible
             swiftnes
             and
             resolution
             ;
             neither
             do
             I
             finde
             in
             all
             Antiquities
             ,
             any
             markes
             or
             testimonies
             of
             so
             notable
             a
             thing
             ,
             and
             of
             so
             great
             importance
             .
             Besides
             ,
             I
             finde
             not
             ,
             that
             in
             ancient
             bookes
             there
             is
             any
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             Adamant
             or
             Loadstone
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             Compasse
             to
             saile
             by
             :
             yea
             ,
             I
             beleeve
             they
             had
             no
             knowledge
             thereof
             .
             And
             if
             we
             take
             away
             
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             compasse
             to
             saile
             by
             ,
             we
             shall
             easily
             iudge
             how
             impossible
             it
             was
             for
             them
             to
             passe
             the
             great
             Ocean
             .
             Such
             as
             haue
             any
             knowledge
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             vnderstand
             me
             well
             :
             for
             that
             it
             is
             as
             easie
             to
             beleeve
             that
             a
             Mariner
             in
             full
             sea
             can
             direct
             his
             course
             where
             hee
             please
             ,
             without
             a
             compasse
             ,
             as
             for
             a
             blinde
             man
             to
             shew
             with
             his
             finger
             any
             thing
             ,
             be
             it
             neere
             or
             farre
             off
             .
             And
             it
             is
             strange
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             have
             bene
             so
             long
             ignorant
             of
             this
             excellent
             propertie
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             :
             
             for
             Plinie
             ,
             who
             was
             so
             curious
             in
             naturall
             causes
             ,
             writing
             of
             this
             Adamant
             stone
             ,
             speakes
             nothing
             of
             that
             vertue
             and
             propertie
             it
             hath
             ,
             alwaies
             to
             turne
             the
             iron
             which
             it
             toucheth
             towards
             the
             North
             :
             the
             which
             is
             the
             most
             admirable
             vertue
             it
             hath
             .
             
               Aristotle
               ,
               Theophrastes
               ,
               Dioscorides
               ,
               Lucretius
               ,
            
             nor
             any
             other
             Writers
             ,
             or
             naturall
             Philosophers
             ,
             
             that
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             make
             any
             mention
             thereof
             ,
             although
             they
             treate
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             .
             Saint
             Augustine
             writing
             many
             and
             sundry
             properties
             and
             excellencies
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             ,
             
             in
             his
             bookes
             of
             the
             Citie
             of
             God
             ,
             speakes
             nothing
             thereof
             .
             And
             without
             doubt
             ,
             all
             the
             excellencies
             spoken
             of
             this
             stone
             ,
             are
             nothing
             in
             respect
             of
             this
             strange
             propertie
             ,
             looking
             alwaies
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             great
             wonder
             of
             nature
             .
             There
             is
             yet
             another
             argument
             ,
             
             for
             Plinic
             treating
             of
             the
             first
             inventers
             of
             Navigation
             ,
             and
             naming
             all
             the
             instruments
             ,
             yet
             he
             speakes
             nothing
             of
             the
             compasse
             to
             sa●e
             by
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             .
             I
             say
             onely
             ,
             that
             the
             art
             to
             know
             the
             starres
             ,
             was
             invented
             by
             the
             Phaeniciens
             .
             And
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             whatsoever
             the
             Ancients
             knew
             of
             the
             Art
             of
             Navigation
             ,
             was
             onely
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             starres
             ,
             and
             observing
             the
             Shoares
             ,
             Capes
             ,
             and
             differences
             of
             landes
             .
             And
             if
             they
             had
             once
             lost
             the
             sight
             of
             land
             ,
             they
             knew
             
             not
             which
             way
             to
             direct
             their
             course
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             Stars
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             Moone
             :
             and
             that
             sailing
             (
             as
             it
             doth
             often
             ,
             in
             a
             darke
             and
             cloudie
             season
             ,
             )
             they
             did
             governe
             themselves
             by
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             winds
             ,
             and
             by
             coniecture
             of
             the
             waies
             which
             they
             had
             passed
             .
             Finally
             they
             went
             as
             they
             were
             guided
             by
             their
             owne
             motions
             .
             As
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             Indians
             saile
             a
             long
             way
             by
             sea
             ,
             guided
             only
             by
             their
             owne
             industrie
             &
             naturall
             instinct
             .
             And
             it
             serues
             greatly
             to
             purpose
             ,
             that
             which
             Plinie
             writes
             of
             the
             Ilanders
             of
             Taprobana
             ,
             (
             which
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             we
             call
             Sumatra
             ,
             )
             speaking
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             when
             as
             he
             treates
             of
             the
             art
             and
             industrie
             they
             vse
             in
             sailing
             .
             
               Those
               of
               Taprobana
               see
               not
               the
               North
               to
               saile
               by
               ▪
               which
               defect
               they
               supply
               with
               certaine
               small
               birdes
               they
               carrie
               with
               them
               ,
               the
               which
               they
               often
               let
               flie
               ,
               and
               as
               those
               birdes
               by
               a
               naturall
               instinct
               flie
               alwaies
               towards
               the
               land
               ,
               so
               the
               Mariners
               direct
               their
               course
               after
               them
               .
            
             Who
             doubtes
             then
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             had
             any
             knowledge
             of
             the
             compasse
             ,
             they
             would
             not
             have
             vsed
             these
             little
             birdes
             for
             their
             guides
             ,
             to
             discover
             the
             Land.
             To
             conclude
             ,
             this
             sufficeth
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             the
             secrets
             of
             the
             Loadstone
             :
             seeing
             that
             for
             so
             notable
             a
             thing
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             proper
             word
             in
             Latine
             ,
             Greeke
             ,
             or
             Hebrew
             :
             for
             a
             thing
             of
             such
             importance
             ,
             could
             not
             have
             wanted
             a
             name
             in
             these
             tongues
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             knowne
             it
             .
             Wherevpon
             the
             Pilots
             at
             this
             day
             to
             direct
             him
             his
             course
             that
             holds
             the
             helme
             ,
             sit
             aloft
             in
             the
             poope
             of
             the
             Shippe
             ,
             the
             better
             to
             obserue
             the
             compasse
             :
             where
             as
             in
             olde
             time
             ,
             they
             sat
             in
             the
             prow
             of
             the
             Shippe
             ,
             to
             marke
             the
             differences
             of
             lands
             and
             seas
             ,
             from
             which
             place
             ,
             they
             commaunded
             the
             Helme
             :
             as
             they
             vse
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             at
             the
             entrie
             or
             going
             out
             of
             any
             Port
             or
             haven
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Greekes
             
             called
             Pilots
             Proritaes
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             remained
             still
             in
             the
             prow
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             properties
             and
             admirable
             vertue
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             for
             Navigation
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             knowledge
             .
             
               CHAP.
               17.
            
             
          
           
             BY
             that
             which
             hath
             been
             formerly
             spoken
             ,
             it
             appeares
             ,
             that
             the
             Navigation
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             is
             as
             certaine
             ,
             and
             as
             short
             ,
             as
             wee
             are
             assured
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             .
             And
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             we
             see
             many
             that
             have
             sailed
             from
             Lisbone
             ,
             to
             Goa
             ,
             from
             Siville
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             through
             all
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             even
             vnto
             China
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             straight
             of
             Maggellan
             ,
             and
             that
             as
             certainely
             ,
             &
             as
             easily
             ,
             as
             the
             Husbandman
             goeth
             from
             his
             Farme
             vnto
             the
             Citie
             .
             We
             have
             also
             seene
             men
             that
             have
             made
             fifteene
             ,
             yea
             ,
             eighteene
             voiages
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             we
             have
             heard
             speake
             of
             some
             Ancients
             ,
             which
             have
             made
             above
             twentie
             vioges
             ,
             passing
             ,
             and
             repassing
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             have
             not
             seene
             any
             signes
             of
             such
             as
             have
             traveled
             ,
             nor
             met
             with
             any
             passengers
             to
             demand
             the
             way
             of
             them
             .
             
             For
             as
             the
             Wife
             man
             saith
             ,
             a
             ship
             cutteth
             the
             waves
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             leaving
             no
             way
             where
             it
             passeth
             ,
             nor
             any
             path
             in
             the
             flouds
             .
             But
             by
             the
             vertue
             and
             propertie
             of
             the
             Adam
             ant
             stone
             ,
             it
             makes
             as
             it
             were
             a
             beaten
             path
             in
             this
             Ocean
             .
             The
             high
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             having
             imparted
             this
             vertue
             vnto
             it
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             touch
             of
             iron
             ,
             it
             hath
             alwaies
             his
             motion
             and
             aspect
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             in
             what
             part
             of
             the
             world
             soever
             you
             be
             .
             Some
             search
             what
             should
             be
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             wonderfull
             propertie
             ,
             and
             imagine
             I
             know
             not
             what
             simpathie
             .
             But
             for
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             take
             more
             pleasure
             and
             content
             in
             
             the
             considerations
             of
             these
             wonders
             ,
             to
             praise
             the
             power
             and
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Almightie
             ,
             and
             reioyce
             in
             the
             contemplation
             of
             his
             admirable
             workes
             ,
             and
             to
             say
             with
             Solomon
             ,
             
             speaking
             vpon
             this
             subiect
             ,
             
               O
               father
               whose
               providence
               governes
               and
               maintaines
               a
               peece
               of
               wood
               ,
               giving
               it
               an
               assured
               way
               vpon
               the
               sea
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               swelling
               waves
               ,
               to
               shew
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               like
               sort
               ,
               thou
               canst
               save
               and
               deliver
               man
               from
               all
               perill
               and
               shipwracke
               ;
               yea
               ,
               although
               he
               were
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               sea
               without
               shippe
               .
               But
               for
               that
               thy
               works
               are
               full
               of
               wisedome
               ,
               men
               hazard
               their
               lives
               in
               a
               small
               peece
               of
               wood
               ,
               and
               passe
               through
               the
               sea
               in
               a
               shippe
               ,
               and
               are
               saved
               .
            
             And
             vpon
             the
             same
             subiect
             the
             Psalmist
             saieth
             ,
             
               They
               which
               go
               to
               the
               sea
               in
               shippes
               ,
               and
               trafficke
               by
               the
               great
               waters
               ,
               have
               seene
               the
               workes
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               his
               wonders
               in
               the
               depth
               of
               the
               sea
               .
            
             And
             in
             truth
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             one
             of
             the
             least
             wonders
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             the
             force
             of
             so
             small
             a
             stone
             should
             command
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             force
             the
             infinite
             depth
             thereof
             to
             obey
             him
             ,
             and
             follow
             his
             commandement
             .
             But
             for
             that
             it
             is
             an
             vsuall
             thing
             ,
             and
             seemes
             easie
             ,
             men
             do
             not
             admire
             it
             ,
             nor
             take
             any
             great
             regard
             thereof
             :
             and
             for
             that
             his
             bountie
             is
             such
             ,
             the
             ignorant
             make
             lesse
             account
             thereof
             .
             Notwithstanding
             ,
             such
             as
             will
             duly
             consider
             it
             ,
             are
             led
             by
             reason
             ,
             to
             blesse
             the
             wisedome
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             him
             thankes
             for
             so
             great
             a
             benefite
             .
             Being
             then
             decreed
             in
             heaven
             ,
             that
             these
             nations
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             have
             lyen
             so
             long
             hidden
             ,
             should
             bee
             knowne
             and
             discovered
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             rowt
             should
             be
             frequented
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             so
             many
             soules
             should
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             winne
             eternall
             life
             .
             There
             was
             an
             assured
             guide
             provided
             for
             such
             as
             travell
             that
             way
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Compasse
             to
             saile
             by
             ,
             and
             the
             vertue
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             .
             Wee
             doe
             not
             certainely
             know
             at
             what
             time
             this
             Art
             of
             sailing
             was
             brought
             to
             
             light
             .
             But
             for
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             hold
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             veri●
             ancient
             ,
             for
             besides
             the
             reasons
             alleadged
             in
             the
             former
             chapter
             ,
             I
             have
             not
             read
             in
             any
             ancient
             Author
             ,
             treating
             of
             dialles
             ,
             any
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             Adamant
             .
             And
             yet
             vndoubtedly
             ,
             the
             principall
             and
             most
             necessarie
             instument
             for
             sunne
             dialls
             ,
             which
             we
             vse
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             is
             the
             needle
             of
             iron
             touched
             with
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             .
             Some
             approved
             Authors
             write
             in
             the
             Historie
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             which
             began
             to
             discover
             this
             secret
             vpon
             the
             sea
             ,
             was
             
               Vascor
               de
               Gama
            
             ,
             who
             in
             the
             height
             of
             Mosambique
             ,
             
             met
             with
             certaine
             Mariners
             Moores
             ,
             which
             vsed
             this
             compasse
             or
             needle
             to
             saile
             by
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             meanes
             thereof
             ,
             he
             sailed
             through
             those
             seas
             :
             yet
             they
             write
             not
             from
             whom
             they
             learned
             this
             Art.
             And
             some
             amongst
             them
             are
             of
             our
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             were
             ignorant
             of
             this
             secret
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             I
             will
             shew
             a
             greater
             wonder
             of
             the
             needle
             to
             saile
             by
             ,
             which
             we
             might
             hold
             incredible
             ,
             if
             we
             had
             not
             proofe
             thereof
             by
             vndoubted
             experience
             .
             The
             iron
             touched
             or
             rubbed
             with
             that
             part
             of
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             which
             is
             towards
             the
             South
             ,
             hath
             this
             vertue
             ,
             to
             turne
             alwaies
             and
             in
             all
             places
             to
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             North.
             Yet
             doth
             it
             not
             in
             all
             places
             directly
             regard
             it
             ,
             but
             hath
             certaine
             points
             and
             climats
             ,
             where
             it
             directly
             regardes
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             their
             staies
             :
             but
             changing
             this
             climate
             ,
             it
             inclines
             a
             little
             ,
             either
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             the
             farther
             it
             goes
             from
             this
             climat
             ,
             which
             the
             Mariners
             cal
             North-east
             ,
             or
             North-west
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             coasting
             or
             inclining
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             West
             .
             And
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             of
             such
             consequence
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             this
             declining
             or
             coasting
             of
             the
             needle
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             observe
             it
             not
             advisedly
             (
             although
             it
             bee
             small
             ,
             )
             they
             shall
             stray
             wonderfully
             in
             their
             course
             ,
             and
             arrive
             in
             
             another
             place
             then
             where
             they
             pretended
             to
             go
             .
             Once
             a
             very
             expert
             Pilot
             of
             Portugal
             told
             mee
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             foure
             poyntes
             in
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             whereas
             the
             needle
             looked
             directly
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             the
             which
             hee
             named
             ,
             but
             I
             do
             not
             well
             remember
             them
             .
             One
             is
             in
             the
             height
             of
             the
             Iland
             of
             Corvo
             at
             the
             Terceres
             or
             Acores
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             well
             knowne
             to
             all
             men
             :
             but
             passing
             to
             a
             greater
             altitude
             ,
             it
             declines
             to
             the
             West
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             drawing
             to
             a
             lesse
             altitude
             ,
             towardes
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             it
             leanes
             to
             the
             East
             .
             The
             masters
             of
             this
             Arte
             can
             well
             tell
             how
             farre
             and
             how
             much
             .
             For
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             would
             gladly
             know
             ,
             of
             such
             as
             presume
             to
             knowe
             all
             thinges
             ,
             what
             should
             bee
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             effect
             ,
             and
             for
             what
             reason
             ,
             a
             little
             yron
             touched
             with
             the
             Adamant
             stone
             ,
             receyves
             such
             vertue
             ,
             as
             to
             looke
             alwayes
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             with
             such
             dexteritie
             ,
             that
             it
             vnderstandeth
             the
             sundry
             Clymates
             and
             scituations
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             which
             way
             it
             should
             turne
             and
             incline
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             any
             Philosopher
             or
             Cosinographer
             whatsoever
             .
             And
             seeing
             wee
             cannot
             well
             discover
             the
             causes
             and
             reasons
             of
             these
             thinges
             which
             wee
             see
             dayly
             ,
             without
             doubt
             they
             were
             very
             hard
             to
             beleeve
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             not
             apparent
             .
             Herein
             we
             discover
             our
             follie
             &
             vanitie
             ,
             to
             make
             our selves
             iudges
             '
             &
             to
             subiect
             divine
             &
             high
             things
             to
             our
             reason
             &
             discourse
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             better
             ,
             as
             S.
             Gregorie
             the
             divine
             sayth
             ,
             ●o
             subiect
             reason
             vnto
             faith
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             her
             owne
             mansion
             she
             hath
             no
             governement
             .
             But
             this
             shall
             suffice
             .
             Let
             vs
             returne
             to
             our
             purpose
             ,
             and
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             needle
             to
             sayle
             by
             ,
             was
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             Ancients
             :
             whereby
             we
             may
             resolve
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             impossible
             to
             make
             a
             determined
             voyage
             ,
             parting
             from
             the
             other
             world
             ,
             to
             come
             to
             this
             by
             the
             Ocean
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Wherein
             an
             answere
             is
             made
             to
             them
             that
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             times
             passed
             they
             have
             sayled
             through
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             .
             
               CHAP.
               18.
            
             
          
           
             THat
             which
             is
             alleaged
             to
             the
             contrary
             of
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             spoken
             ,
             that
             Salomons
             Fleet
             sayled
             in
             three
             yeeres
             ,
             is
             no
             sufficient
             proofe
             ,
             seeing
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             doth
             not
             directly
             affirme
             ,
             that
             this
             voyage
             continued
             three
             yeeres
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             was
             made
             once
             in
             three
             yeeres
             .
             And
             although
             wee
             graunt
             ,
             that
             the
             voyage
             lasted
             three
             yeeres
             ,
             it
             might
             bee
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             likely
             ,
             that
             this
             Fleet
             sayling
             towards
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             was
             stayed
             in
             their
             course
             ,
             by
             the
             diversitie
             of
             Ports
             and
             Regions
             ,
             which
             they
             discovered
             :
             as
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             in
             all
             the
             South
             Sea
             ,
             they
             sayle
             from
             Chile
             to
             newe
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             which
             voyage
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             more
             certaine
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             longer
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             turnings
             they
             are
             forced
             to
             make
             vpon
             the
             Coast
             ,
             and
             they
             stay
             in
             divers
             Portes
             :
             And
             in
             trueth
             ,
             I
             doe
             not
             finde
             in
             ancient
             bookes
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             lanched
             farre
             into
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             neyther
             can
             I
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             this
             their
             sayling
             was
             otherwise
             then
             they
             vse
             at
             this
             day
             in
             the
             Mediterranean
             Sea
             :
             which
             makes
             learned
             men
             to
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             in
             old
             time
             they
             did
             not
             sayle
             without
             Owers
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             went
             alwayes
             coasting
             along
             the
             shoare
             :
             and
             it
             seemes
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             doth
             testifie
             as
             much
             ,
             speaking
             of
             that
             famous
             voyage
             of
             the
             Prophet
             Ionas
             :
             where
             it
             sayes
             ,
             that
             the
             Marriners
             being
             forced
             by
             the
             weather
             ,
             rowed
             to
             land
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             That
             we
             may
             coniecture
             ,
             how
             the
             first
             Inhabitants
             of
             the
             Indies
             came
             thither
             by
             force
             of
             weather
             ,
             and
             not
             willingly
             .
             CHAP.
             19.
             
          
           
             HAving
             shewed
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             to
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             Inhabitants
             of
             the
             Indies
             came
             thither
             purposely
             ;
             it
             followeth
             then
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             came
             by
             Sea
             ,
             it
             was
             by
             chance
             ,
             or
             by
             force
             of
             weather
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             not
             incredible
             ,
             notwithstanding
             the
             vastnesse
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             seeing
             the
             like
             hath
             happened
             in
             our
             time
             ,
             when
             as
             that
             Marriner
             ,
             (
             whose
             name
             we
             are
             yet
             ignorant
             of
             )
             (
             to
             the
             end
             so
             great
             a
             worke
             ,
             and
             of
             such
             importance
             ,
             should
             not
             be
             attributed
             to
             any
             other
             Author
             then
             to
             God
             )
             having
             (
             through
             tempest
             discovered
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             )
             left
             for
             payment
             of
             his
             lodging
             ,
             where
             he
             had
             received
             it
             ,
             to
             
               Christopher
               Columbus
            
             ,
             the
             knowledge
             of
             so
             great
             a
             secret
             .
             Even
             so
             it
             might
             chance
             ,
             that
             some
             of
             Europe
             or
             Affricke
             in
             times
             past
             ,
             have
             bin
             driven
             by
             soule
             weather
             ,
             and
             cast
             vpon
             vnknowne
             lands
             beyond
             the
             Ocean
             .
             Who
             knoweth
             not
             ,
             that
             most
             ,
             or
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Regions
             in
             this
             newe
             world
             ,
             were
             discovered
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             must
             rather
             attribute
             to
             the
             violence
             of
             the
             weather
             ,
             then
             to
             the
             spirit
             and
             industrie
             of
             those
             which
             have
             discovered
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             we
             may
             know
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             in
             our
             time
             onely
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             vndertaken
             such
             voiages
             ,
             through
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             our
             shippes
             ,
             and
             the
             valour
             and
             courage
             of
             our
             men
             :
             we
             may
             reade
             in
             Plinie
             ,
             that
             many
             of
             the
             Ancients
             have
             made
             the
             like
             voyages
             ,
             he
             writes
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             
               It
               is
               reported
               that
            
             Caius
             Caesar
             ,
             
               sonne
               to
            
             Augustus
             Caesar
             ,
             
             
               having
               charge
               vpon
               the
               Arabian
               Sea
               ,
               did
               there
               see
               and
               finde
               certaine
               pieces
               and
               remainders
               
               of
               Spanish
               shippes
               that
               had
               perished
               .
            
             And
             after
             he
             saith
             :
             Nepos
             
               reportes
               of
               the
               Northerne
               circuite
               ,
               that
               they
               brought
               to
            
             Quintus
             Metellus
             Caeler
             
               companion
               in
               the
               Consulship
               to
            
             Caius
             Affranius
             (
             
               the
               same
            
             Metellus
             
               being
               then
               Proconsull
               in
            
             Gaule
             )
             
               certaine
               Indians
               which
               had
               beene
               presented
               by
               the
               King
               of
            
             Sueden
             :
             
               th●
               which
               Indians
               ,
               sailing
               from
            
             India
             ,
             
               for
               their
               trafficke
               ,
               were
               cast
               vpon
            
             Germanie
             
               by
               force
               of
               tempest
            
             .
             Doubtles
             ,
             if
             Plinie
             speaketh
             truth
             ,
             the
             Portugales
             in
             these
             daies
             ,
             saile
             no
             further
             then
             they
             did
             in
             those
             two
             shipwrackes
             ,
             
             the
             one
             from
             Spaine
             to
             the
             red
             Sea
             ,
             the
             other
             from
             the
             East
             Indies
             to
             Germanie
             .
             The
             same
             Author
             writes
             in
             another
             place
             ,
             that
             a
             servant
             of
             
               Annius
               Plocanius
            
             ,
             who
             farmed
             the
             customes
             of
             the
             red
             Sea
             ,
             sailing
             the
             course
             of
             Arabia
             ,
             there
             came
             so
             furious
             a
             Northerne
             wind
             ,
             that
             in
             fifteene
             daies
             he
             passed
             Caramania
             ,
             and
             discovered
             Hippares
             ,
             a
             port
             in
             Taprobane
             ,
             which
             at
             this
             day
             we
             call
             Sumatra
             .
             And
             they
             report
             of
             a
             shippe
             of
             Carthage
             ,
             which
             was
             driven
             out
             of
             the
             Mediterranean
             Sea
             ,
             by
             a
             Northerne
             wind
             ,
             to
             the
             view
             of
             this
             new
             world
             .
             The
             which
             is
             no
             strange
             thing
             to
             such
             as
             have
             any
             knowledge
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             to
             know
             that
             sometimes
             a
             storme
             continues
             long
             &
             furious
             ,
             without
             any
             intermission
             .
             I
             my selfe
             ,
             going
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             parting
             from
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             have
             in
             fifteene
             daies
             ,
             discovered
             the
             first
             land
             peopled
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             .
             And
             without
             doubt
             ,
             this
             voiage
             had
             been
             shorter
             ,
             if
             the
             Mariners
             had
             set
             vp
             all
             their
             sailes
             to
             the
             Northerne
             winds
             that
             blew
             .
             It
             seemes
             therefore
             likely
             to
             me
             ,
             that
             in
             times
             past
             ,
             men
             came
             to
             the
             Indies
             against
             their
             wills
             ,
             driven
             by
             the
             furie
             of
             the
             winds
             .
             In
             Peru
             ,
             they
             make
             great
             mention
             of
             certaine
             Giants
             ,
             which
             have
             been
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             whose
             bones
             are
             yet
             seene
             at
             Manta
             ,
             and
             
               Port
               Vi●il
            
             ,
             of
             a
             huge
             greatnes
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             proportion
             ,
             
             they
             should
             be
             thrice
             as
             big
             as
             the
             Indians
             .
             At
             this
             day
             they
             report
             that
             the
             Giants
             came
             by
             sea
             ,
             to
             make
             warre
             with
             those
             of
             the
             Countrie
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             made
             goodly
             buildings
             ,
             whereof
             at
             this
             day
             they
             shew
             a
             well
             ,
             built
             with
             stones
             of
             great
             price
             .
             They
             say
             moreover
             ,
             that
             these
             men
             committing
             abhominable
             sinnes
             ,
             especially
             against
             nature
             ,
             were
             consumed
             by
             fire
             from
             heaven
             .
             In
             like
             fort
             the
             Indians
             report
             of
             Y●a
             ,
             and
             Arica
             ,
             that
             in
             old
             time
             they
             were
             wont
             to
             saile
             farre
             to
             the
             Ilands
             of
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             made
             their
             voiages
             in
             Seales
             skinnes
             blowne
             vp
             .
             So
             as
             there
             wants
             no
             witnesses
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             they
             sailed
             in
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             before
             the
             Spaniards
             came
             thither
             .
             Thus
             we
             may
             well
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             the
             new
             world
             began
             to
             be
             inhabited
             ,
             by
             men
             that
             have
             been
             cast
             vpon
             that
             coast
             by
             the
             violence
             of
             the
             Northerne
             winds
             ,
             as
             wee
             have
             seene
             in
             our
             age
             .
             So
             it
             is
             ,
             (
             being
             a
             matter
             verie
             considerable
             )
             that
             the
             workes
             of
             nature
             of
             greatest
             importance
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             have
             been
             found
             out
             accidentally
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             the
             industrie
             and
             diligence
             of
             man.
             The
             greatest
             part
             of
             phisicall
             hearbes
             ,
             of
             Stones
             ,
             Plants
             ,
             Mettalls
             ,
             Perle
             ,
             gold
             ,
             Adamant
             ,
             Amber
             ,
             Diamont
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             part
             of
             such
             like
             things
             ,
             with
             their
             properties
             and
             vertues
             ,
             have
             rather
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             man
             by
             chance
             ,
             then
             by
             art
             or
             industrie
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             wee
             may
             know
             ,
             that
             the
             glorie
             &
             praise
             of
             such
             wonders
             ,
             should
             be
             attributed
             to
             the
             providence
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             mans
             vnderstanding
             :
             for
             that
             which
             we
             thinke
             to
             happen
             accidently
             ,
             proceedes
             alwaies
             from
             the
             ordinance
             and
             disposition
             of
             God
             ,
             who
             does
             all
             things
             with
             reason
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Notwithstanding
             all
             that
             hath
             bene
             said
             ,
             it
             is
             more
             likely
             that
             the
             first
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             came
             by
             land
             .
             CHAP.
             20.
             
          
           
             I
             Conclude
             then
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             likely
             the
             first
             that
             came
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             was
             by
             shipwracke
             and
             tempest
             of
             wether
             ,
             but
             heerevpon
             groweth
             a
             difficultie
             ,
             which
             troubleth
             me
             much
             .
             For
             ,
             suppose
             wee
             grant
             that
             the
             first
             men
             came
             from
             farre
             Countries
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             nations
             which
             we
             now
             see
             ,
             are
             issued
             from
             them
             ,
             and
             multiplied
             ;
             yet
             can
             I
             not
             coniecture
             ,
             by
             what
             meanes
             brute
             beastes
             (
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             aboundance
             )
             could
             come
             there
             ,
             not
             being
             likely
             ,
             they
             should
             have
             bin
             imbarked
             and
             carried
             by
             sea
             .
             The
             reason
             that
             inforceth
             vs
             to
             yeeld
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             men
             of
             the
             Indies
             are
             come
             from
             Europe
             ,
             or
             Asia
             ,
             is
             the
             testimonie
             of
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             which
             teacheth
             vs
             plainely
             ,
             that
             all
             men
             came
             from
             Adam
             .
             
             We
             can
             therefore
             give
             no
             other
             beginning
             to
             those
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             seeing
             the
             holy
             scripture
             saieth
             ,
             that
             all
             beasts
             and
             creatures
             of
             the
             earth
             perished
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             were
             reserved
             in
             the
             Arke
             of
             Noe
             ,
             for
             the
             multiplication
             and
             maintenance
             of
             their
             kinde
             :
             so
             as
             we
             must
             necessarily
             referre
             the
             multiplication
             of
             all
             beastes
             to
             those
             which
             came
             out
             of
             the
             Arke
             of
             Noe
             ,
             on
             the
             mountaines
             of
             Ararat
             ,
             where
             it
             staied
             .
             And
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             we
             must
             seeke
             out
             both
             for
             men
             and
             beastes
             ,
             the
             way
             whereby
             they
             might
             passe
             from
             the
             old
             world
             to
             this
             new
             .
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             treating
             vpon
             this
             question
             ,
             by
             what
             reason
             you
             shall
             finde
             in
             some
             Ilandes
             ,
             Wolves
             ,
             
             Tigers
             ,
             and
             other
             ravenous
             beastes
             ,
             which
             breede
             no
             profit
             to
             men
             ,
             seeing
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             Elephants
             ,
             Horses
             ,
             Oxen
             ,
             Dogges
             ,
             and
             other
             beastes
             
             which
             serve
             man
             to
             vse
             ,
             have
             been
             expresly
             carried
             in
             shippes
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             at
             this
             day
             brought
             from
             the
             East
             into
             Europe
             ,
             and
             transported
             from
             Europe
             ,
             to
             Peru
             ,
             although
             the
             voiages
             be
             verie
             long
             .
             And
             by
             what
             meanes
             these
             beastes
             which
             yeeld
             no
             profit
             ,
             but
             are
             very
             hurtefull
             (
             as
             Wolves
             ,
             and
             others
             of
             that
             wilde
             nature
             )
             should
             passe
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             supposing
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             deluge
             drowned
             all
             the
             earth
             .
             In
             which
             Treatie
             ,
             this
             learned
             &
             holy
             man
             laboures
             to
             free
             himselfe
             of
             these
             difficulties
             ,
             saying
             that
             they
             might
             swim
             vnto
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             or
             that
             some
             have
             carried
             them
             thither
             for
             their
             delight
             in
             hunting
             :
             or
             that
             ,
             by
             the
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             they
             had
             been
             newly
             created
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             after
             the
             same
             maner
             of
             the
             first
             creation
             ,
             when
             God
             said
             ,
             
               Let
               the
               earth
               bring
               forth
               everie
               living
               thing
               according
               to
               his
               kinde
               ,
            
             
             
               Cattle
               ,
               and
               creeping
               Wormes
               ,
               and
               the
               beastes
               of
               the
               field
               ,
               every
               one
               in
               his
               kinde
               .
            
             But
             if
             we
             shall
             apply
             this
             solution
             to
             our
             purpose
             ,
             the
             matter
             will
             remaine
             more
             doubtfull
             :
             for
             beginning
             at
             the
             last
             point
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             likely
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             order
             of
             Nature
             ,
             nor
             conformable
             to
             the
             order
             of
             government
             established
             by
             God
             ,
             that
             perfect
             creatures
             ,
             as
             Lions
             ,
             Tigers
             ,
             and
             Wolves
             ,
             should
             be
             engendered
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             that
             Rattes
             ,
             Frogges
             ,
             Bees
             ,
             and
             other
             imperfect
             creatures
             ,
             are
             commonly
             engendered
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             to
             what
             purpose
             is
             that
             which
             the
             scripture
             saieth
             ,
             and
             doth
             so
             often
             repeate
             ,
             
             
               Thou
               shalt
               take
               of
               all
               the
               beastes
               and
               birdes
               of
               the
               aire
               ,
               seven
               ,
               and
               seven
               ,
               male
               and
               female
               ,
               to
               maintaine
               generation
               vpon
               earth
            
             ;
             if
             such
             beasts
             after
             the
             deluge
             ,
             should
             be
             created
             againe
             after
             a
             new
             kinde
             of
             creation
             ,
             without
             coniunction
             of
             male
             and
             female
             ?
             And
             heerevpon
             might
             grow
             another
             question
             :
             Seeing
             such
             creatures
             are
             breeding
             on
             the
             earth
             (
             according
             to
             this
             opinion
             )
             wherefore
             are
             they
             not
             likewise
             in
             
             all
             other
             partes
             of
             the
             maine
             Land
             ,
             and
             in
             many
             Ilandes
             ,
             seeing
             wee
             must
             not
             regarde
             the
             naturall
             order
             of
             generation
             ,
             but
             the
             bountie
             of
             the
             Creator
             .
             On
             the
             other
             part
             ,
             I
             will
             not
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             thing
             incredible
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             carried
             some
             of
             these
             beastes
             for
             the
             pleasure
             of
             hunting
             :
             for
             that
             we
             often
             see
             ,
             Princes
             and
             great
             men
             keepe
             and
             nourish
             in
             their
             cages
             ,
             (
             onely
             for
             their
             pleasure
             and
             greatnesse
             )
             both
             Lyons
             ,
             Beares
             ,
             and
             other
             savage
             beastes
             ,
             especially
             when
             they
             are
             brought
             from
             farre
             Countries
             :
             but
             to
             speake
             that
             of
             Woolves
             ,
             Foxes
             and
             other
             beasts
             which
             yeeld
             no
             profite
             ,
             and
             have
             nothing
             rare
             and
             excellent
             in
             them
             ,
             but
             to
             hurt
             the
             cattell
             ;
             and
             to
             say
             also
             that
             they
             have
             carried
             them
             by
             sea
             for
             hunting
             ,
             truely
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             that
             hath
             no
             sense
             .
             Who
             can
             imagine
             ,
             that
             in
             so
             long
             a
             voyage
             ,
             men
             would
             take
             the
             paynes
             to
             carrie
             Foxes
             to
             Peru
             ,
             especially
             of
             that
             kind
             which
             they
             call
             Anas
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             filthiest
             that
             I
             have
             seene
             ?
             Who
             would
             likewise
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             have
             carried
             Tygers
             and
             Lyons
             ?
             Truely
             it
             were
             a
             thing
             worthy
             the
             laughing
             at
             ,
             to
             thinke
             so
             .
             It
             was
             sufficient
             ,
             (
             yea
             ,
             very
             much
             )
             for
             men
             ,
             driven
             against
             their
             willes
             by
             tempest
             ,
             in
             so
             long
             and
             vnknowne
             a
             voyage
             ,
             to
             escape
             the
             danger
             of
             the
             Sea
             with
             theyr
             owne
             lives
             ,
             without
             busying
             themselves
             to
             carrie
             Woolves
             and
             Foxes
             ,
             and
             to
             nourish
             them
             at
             Sea.
             If
             these
             beasts
             then
             came
             by
             Sea
             ,
             wee
             must
             beleeve
             it
             was
             by
             swimming
             ,
             which
             may
             happen
             in
             some
             Ilands
             not
             farre
             distant
             from
             others
             ,
             or
             fom
             the
             mayne
             Land
             ,
             the
             which
             wee
             cannot
             denie
             ,
             seeing
             the
             experience
             wee
             have
             ,
             and
             that
             wee
             see
             these
             beasts
             ,
             beeing
             prest
             to
             swimme
             day
             and
             night
             without
             wearinesse
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             escape
             .
             But
             this
             is
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             in
             smal
             ,
             Straights
             and
             passages
             :
             for
             in
             our
             Ocean
             ,
             they
             would
             mocke
             at
             such
             swimmers
             ,
             
             whenas
             birds
             faile
             in
             their
             flight
             ,
             yea
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             greatest
             wing
             ,
             vpon
             the
             passage
             of
             so
             great
             a
             Gulph
             .
             And
             although
             we
             finde
             small
             birdes
             ,
             which
             flie
             above
             a
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             often
             seene
             in
             our
             travel
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             a
             matter
             impossible●
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             very
             difficult
             ,
             for
             birdes
             to
             passe
             all
             the
             Ocean
             .
             All
             this
             beeing
             true
             which
             wee
             have
             spoken
             ,
             what
             way
             ●●all
             wee
             make
             for
             beastes
             and
             birdes
             to
             goe
             to
             the
             Indies
             ?
             and
             how
             can
             I
             say
             ,
             they
             passed
             from
             one
             worlde
             to
             an
             other
             ?
             I
             coniecture
             then
             ,
             by
             the
             discourse
             I
             have
             made
             ,
             that
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             which
             we
             call
             Indies
             ,
             is
             not
             altogether
             severed
             and
             disioyned
             from
             the
             other
             world
             :
             and
             to
             speake
             my
             opinion
             ,
             I
             have
             long
             beleeved
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             world
             are
             ioyned
             and
             continued
             one
             with
             an
             other
             in
             some
             part
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             are
             very
             neere
             .
             And
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             certaine
             knowledge
             of
             the
             contrary
             .
             For
             towards
             the
             Articke
             or
             Northerne
             Pole
             ,
             all
             the
             longitude
             of
             the
             earth
             is
             not
             discovered
             ,
             and
             many
             hold
             ,
             that
             above
             Florida
             ,
             the
             Land
             runnes
             out
             very
             large
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             say
             ,
             ioynes
             with
             the
             Scithike
             or
             Germaine
             Sea.
             Others
             affirme
             ,
             that
             a
             Ship
             sayling
             in
             that
             Sea
             ,
             reported
             to
             have
             seene
             the
             coast
             of
             Bacalaos
             ,
             which
             stretcheth
             almost
             to
             the
             confines
             of
             Europe
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             no
             man
             knowes
             how
             farre
             the
             land
             runnes
             beyond
             the
             Cape
             of
             Mendoça
             in
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             affirme
             it
             is
             a
             great
             Continent
             ,
             which
             runnes
             an
             infinite
             length
             :
             and
             returning
             to
             the
             Southerne
             Pole
             ,
             no
             man
             knowes
             the
             lands
             on
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             Straight
             of
             Magellan
             .
             A
             ship
             belonging
             to
             the
             Bishoppe
             of
             Plaisance
             ,
             which
             passed
             the
             Straight
             ,
             reports
             to
             have
             sayled
             alwayes
             within
             sight
             of
             Land
             :
             the
             like
             
               Hernando
               Lamer
            
             a
             Pilot
             doth
             affirme
             ,
             who
             (
             forced
             by
             foule
             weather
             )
             passed
             two
             or
             three
             degrees
             
             above
             the
             sayd
             Straight
             .
             So
             as
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             or
             experience
             that
             doth
             contradict
             my
             conceit
             and
             opinion
             ;
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             whole
             earth
             is
             vnited
             &
             ioyned
             in
             some
             part
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             the
             one
             approcheth
             neere
             vnto
             the
             other
             .
             If
             this
             be
             true
             ,
             (
             as
             in
             effect
             there
             is
             some
             likelyhood
             :
             )
             the
             answere
             is
             easie
             to
             the
             doubt
             we
             have
             propounded
             ,
             how
             the
             first
             Inhabitants
             could
             passe
             to
             the
             Indies
             :
             For
             that
             wee
             must
             beleeve
             they
             could
             not
             so
             conveniently
             come
             thither
             by
             Sea
             ,
             as
             travelling
             by
             Land
             ,
             which
             might
             be
             done
             without
             consideration
             ,
             in
             changing
             by
             little
             and
             little
             their
             lands
             and
             habitations
             .
             Some
             peopling
             the
             lands
             they
             found
             ,
             and
             others
             seeking
             for
             newe
             ;
             in
             time
             they
             came
             to
             inhabite
             and
             people
             the
             Indies
             ,
             with
             so
             many
             nations
             ,
             people
             ,
             and
             tongues
             as
             we
             see
             .
          
        
         
           
             By
             what
             meanes
             tame
             Beasts
             passed
             to
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             21.
             
          
           
             THe
             signes
             and
             arguments
             ,
             which
             offer
             themselves
             to
             such
             as
             are
             curious
             to
             examine
             the
             Indians
             maners
             and
             fashions
             ,
             helpe
             much
             to
             maintayne
             the
             foresayd
             opinion
             :
             for
             that
             you
             shall
             not
             finde
             any
             inhabiting
             the
             Ilands
             that
             are
             farre
             from
             the
             maine
             Land
             ,
             or
             from
             other
             Ilands
             ,
             as
             the
             Bermudes
             ,
             the
             reason
             whereof
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Ancients
             did
             never
             sayle
             but
             alongst
             the
             coast
             ,
             and
             in
             view
             of
             land
             :
             whereupon
             it
             is
             reported
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             found
             no
             great
             Ships
             in
             any
             part
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             capable
             to
             passe
             such
             Gulphs
             ,
             but
             onely
             
               Balsae
               ,
               Barkes
            
             and
             Canoes
             ,
             which
             are
             all
             lesse
             then
             our
             long
             boates
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Indians
             doe
             onely
             vse
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             could
             not
             runne
             through
             so
             great
             a
             Passage
             ,
             
             without
             apparant
             danger
             of
             ship-wracke
             :
             and
             although
             their
             shippes
             had
             beene
             sufficient
             ,
             yet
             had
             they
             no
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Astrolabe
             or
             Compasse
             .
             If
             then
             they
             had
             beene
             but
             eight
             or
             tenne
             dayes
             at
             Sea
             withoutsight
             of
             land
             ,
             they
             must
             of
             necessitie
             loose
             themselves
             ,
             having
             no
             knowledge
             where
             they
             were
             :
             wee
             know
             many
             Ilandes
             well
             peopled
             with
             Indians
             ,
             and
             their
             vsuall
             navigations
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             such
             ,
             as
             they
             may
             well
             performe
             in
             Canoes
             and
             boats
             ,
             without
             any
             Compasse
             to
             sayle
             by
             .
             Whenas
             the
             Indians
             of
             Peru
             ,
             which
             remayne
             at
             Tombes
             ,
             did
             see
             our
             first
             Spanish
             shippes
             sayling
             to
             Peru
             ,
             and
             viewed
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             their
             sailes
             ,
             being
             spread
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             bodies
             of
             the
             ships
             ,
             they
             stoode
             greatly
             amazed
             ,
             not
             beeing
             able
             to
             perswade
             themselves
             that
             they
             were
             shippes
             ,
             having
             never
             seene
             any
             of
             the
             like
             forme
             and
             greatnesse
             ,
             they
             supposed
             they
             had
             beene
             rockes
             .
             But
             seeing
             them
             advance
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             sincke
             ,
             they
             stood
             transported
             with
             amazement
             ,
             vntill
             that
             beholding
             them
             neerer
             ,
             they
             discovered
             men
             with
             beards
             that
             walked
             in
             them
             ,
             whom
             then
             they
             held
             for
             some
             gods
             or
             heavenly
             creatures
             .
             Whereby
             it
             appeares
             ,
             how
             strange
             it
             was
             to
             the
             Indians
             to
             have
             great
             Ships
             .
             There
             is
             yet
             an
             other
             reason
             ,
             which
             confirmes
             vs
             in
             the
             foresayd
             opinion
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             these
             beastes
             (
             which
             we
             say
             are
             not
             likely
             to
             have
             been
             transported
             by
             Sea
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             )
             remayne
             onely
             on
             the
             maine
             Land
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             any
             Ilands
             ,
             foure
             dayes
             iorney
             from
             the
             maine
             Land.
             I
             have
             made
             this
             search
             for
             proofe
             thereof
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             seemes
             to
             me
             a
             point
             of
             great
             importance
             ,
             to
             confirme
             me
             in
             mine
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             confines
             of
             the
             
               Indies
               ,
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
            
             ,
             and
             Affricke
             have
             some
             communication
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             approch
             very
             neere
             together
             .
             There
             are
             in
             America
             
             and
             Peru
             many
             wilde
             beastes
             ,
             as
             Lyons
             :
             (
             although
             they
             be
             not
             like
             in
             greatnesse
             ,
             fiercenesse
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             same
             colour
             ,
             redde
             ,
             to
             the
             renowmed
             Lyons
             of
             
               Affrica
               .
            
             )
             There
             are
             also
             many
             Tygers
             ,
             very
             cruell
             ,
             and
             more
             to
             the
             Indians
             then
             to
             the
             Spaniardes
             :
             there
             are
             likewise
             Beares
             ,
             but
             in
             no
             great
             aboundance
             :
             of
             Boares
             and
             Foxes
             an
             infinite
             number
             .
             And
             yet
             if
             wee
             shall
             seeke
             for
             all
             these
             kindes
             of
             beastes
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Cuba
               ,
               Hispaniola
               ,
               Iamaica
               ,
               Marguerita
               ,
            
             or
             Dominica
             ,
             you
             shall
             not
             finde
             any
             .
             So
             as
             in
             the
             sayde
             Ilands
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             very
             fertile
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             great
             circuit
             ,
             yet
             was
             there
             not
             any
             kind
             of
             beastes
             for
             service
             when
             the
             Spaniards
             arrived
             ,
             but
             at
             this
             day
             there
             are
             so
             great
             troopes
             of
             Horses
             ,
             Oxen
             ,
             Kyne
             ,
             Dogs
             and
             Hogges
             ,
             which
             have
             multiplied
             in
             such
             abundance
             ,
             as
             now
             the
             Kine
             have
             no
             certaine
             master
             ,
             but
             belong
             to
             him
             that
             shal
             first
             kil
             them
             ,
             be
             it
             on
             the
             mountaines
             or
             on
             the
             plaines
             ;
             which
             the
             Indians
             do
             ,
             onely
             to
             save
             their
             hides
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             great
             traffick
             ,
             without
             any
             regard
             of
             the
             flesh
             to
             eate
             it
             .
             Dogges
             have
             so
             increased
             ,
             as
             they
             march
             by
             troopes
             ,
             and
             endammage
             the
             cattell
             no
             lesse
             then
             wolves
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             great
             inconvenience
             in
             these
             Ilands
             .
             There
             wants
             not
             onely
             beastes
             in
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             but
             also
             birdes
             both
             great
             and
             small
             .
             As
             for
             Parrets
             ,
             there
             are
             many
             that
             flie
             by
             flockes
             ,
             but
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             )
             there
             are
             few
             of
             any
             other
             kinde
             .
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             ,
             nor
             heard
             of
             any
             Partriges
             there
             ,
             as
             in
             Peru.
             Likewise
             ,
             there
             are
             few
             of
             those
             beastes
             ,
             which
             at
             Peru
             they
             call
             Guancos
             ,
             and
             Vicunas
             ,
             like
             to
             wilde
             Goates
             ,
             very
             swifte
             ,
             in
             whose
             stomacke
             they
             find
             the
             Beezars
             stone
             ,
             which
             many
             do
             greatly
             value
             :
             sometimes
             you
             shall
             finde
             them
             as
             bigge
             as
             a
             hens
             egge
             ,
             yea
             ,
             halfe
             as
             bigge
             againe
             .
             They
             have
             no
             other
             kinde
             of
             beastes
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             we
             call
             Indian
             
             sheepe
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             besides
             their
             wooll
             and
             flesh
             (
             wherewith
             they
             clothe
             and
             feede
             themselves
             ,
             )
             do
             serve
             them
             as
             Asses
             to
             beare
             their
             burthens
             .
             They
             carrie
             halfe
             as
             much
             as
             a
             Moyle
             ,
             and
             are
             of
             small
             charge
             to
             their
             masters
             ,
             having
             neede
             ,
             neither
             of
             shooes
             ,
             saddle
             ,
             nor
             oates
             to
             live
             by
             ,
             nor
             of
             any
             furniture
             ,
             for
             that
             Nature
             hath
             provided
             them
             of
             all
             these
             ,
             wherein
             she
             seemes
             to
             have
             favoured
             these
             poore
             Indians
             .
             Of
             all
             these
             creatures
             ,
             and
             of
             many
             other
             sortes
             ,
             whereof
             I
             will
             make
             mention
             ,
             the
             maine
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             aboundes
             .
             But
             in
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             there
             are
             not
             any
             found
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             brought
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             once
             one
             of
             our
             Friars
             did
             see
             a
             Tigre
             in
             an
             Iland
             ,
             as
             hee
             reported
             vnto
             vs
             vpon
             the
             discourse
             of
             his
             peregrination
             and
             shipwracke
             ;
             but
             being
             demanded
             how
             farre
             it
             was
             from
             the
             maine
             land
             ,
             he
             answered
             ,
             sixe
             or
             eight
             leagues
             at
             the
             most
             ;
             which
             passage
             ,
             Tigres
             might
             easily
             swimme
             over
             .
             We
             may
             easily
             inferre
             by
             these
             arguments
             ,
             and
             others
             like
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             Indians
             went
             to
             inhabite
             the
             Indies
             ,
             more
             by
             land
             then
             by
             sea
             ;
             or
             if
             there
             were
             any
             navigation
             ,
             it
             was
             neither
             great
             ,
             nor
             difficult
             ,
             being
             an
             indibitable
             thing
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             world
             is
             continued
             and
             ioyned
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             they
             approach
             one
             neere
             vnto
             another
             in
             some
             parts
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             linage
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             hath
             not
             passed
             by
             the
             Atlantike
             Iland
             ,
             as
             some
             do
             imagine
             .
             
               CHAP.
               22.
            
             
          
           
             SOme
             (
             following
             Platoes
             opinion
             mentioned
             before
             ,
             )
             affirme
             ,
             that
             these
             men
             parted
             from
             Europe
             ,
             
             or
             Affricke
             ,
             to
             go
             to
             that
             famous
             and
             renowmed
             Atlantike
             Iland
             ,
             and
             so
             passed
             from
             one
             Iland
             vnto
             another
             ,
             
             vntill
             they
             came
             to
             the
             maine
             land
             of
             the
             Indies
             :
             for
             that
             Critias
             of
             Plato
             in
             his
             time
             discourseth
             in
             this
             maner
             :
             if
             the
             Atlantike
             Iland
             wereas
             great
             as
             all
             Asia
             ,
             and
             Affrike
             together
             ,
             or
             greater
             ,
             as
             Plato
             saies
             ,
             it
             should
             of
             necessitie
             containe
             all
             the
             Atlantike
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             stretch
             even
             vnto
             the
             Ilands
             of
             the
             new
             world
             .
             And
             Plato
             saieth
             moreover
             ,
             that
             by
             a
             great
             and
             strange
             deluge
             ,
             the
             Atlantike
             Iland
             was
             drowned
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             meanes
             the
             sea
             was
             made
             vnnavigable
             ,
             through
             the
             aboundance
             of
             banckes
             ,
             rockes
             ,
             and
             roughnesse
             of
             the
             waves
             ,
             which
             were
             yet
             in
             his
             time
             .
             But
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             the
             ruines
             of
             this
             drowned
             Iland
             weresetled
             ,
             which
             made
             this
             sea
             navigable
             .
             This
             hath
             been
             curiously
             handled
             and
             discoursed
             of
             by
             some
             learned
             men
             of
             good
             iudgement
             ;
             and
             yet
             (
             to
             speake
             the
             truth
             )
             being
             well
             considered
             ,
             they
             are
             ridiculous
             things
             ,
             resembling
             rather
             to
             Ovids
             tales
             ,
             then
             a
             Historie
             or
             Philosophie
             ,
             worthy
             of
             accoumpt
             .
             The
             greatest
             part
             of
             Platoes
             Interpreters
             ,
             affirme
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             true
             Historie
             ,
             whatsoever
             Critias
             reports
             of
             the
             strange
             beginning
             of
             the
             Atlantike
             Iland
             ,
             of
             the
             greatnes
             thereof
             ,
             of
             the
             warres
             they
             had
             against
             them
             of
             Europe
             ,
             with
             many
             other
             things
             .
             That
             which
             gives
             it
             the
             more
             credite
             of
             a
             true
             Historie
             ,
             be
             the
             wordes
             of
             Critias
             ,
             (
             whom
             Plato
             brings
             in
             in
             his
             time
             ,
             )
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             subiect
             he
             meanes
             to
             treate
             of
             ,
             is
             of
             strange
             things
             ,
             but
             yet
             true
             .
             The
             other
             disciples
             of
             Plato
             ,
             considering
             that
             this
             discourse
             hath
             more
             shew
             of
             a
             fable
             ,
             then
             of
             a
             true
             Historie
             ,
             say
             ,
             that
             we
             must
             take
             it
             as
             an
             allegorie
             ,
             and
             that
             such
             was
             the
             intention
             of
             their
             divine
             Philosopher
             .
             Of
             this
             opinion
             is
             Procles
             ,
             and
             Porphire
             ,
             yea
             ,
             and
             Origene
             ,
             who
             so
             much
             regardes
             the
             writings
             of
             Plato
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             speake
             thereof
             ,
             they
             seeme
             to
             bee
             the
             bookes
             of
             Moses
             ,
             or
             of
             Esdras
             :
             and
             
             whereas
             they
             thinke
             the
             writings
             of
             Plato
             have
             no
             shew
             of
             truth
             ,
             they
             say
             ,
             they
             are
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             mystically
             ,
             and
             in
             allegories
             .
             But
             to
             say
             the
             truth
             ,
             I
             do
             not
             so
             much
             respect
             the
             authoritie
             of
             Plato
             ,
             (
             whom
             they
             call
             Divine
             ,
             )
             as
             I
             wil
             beleeve
             he
             could
             write
             these
             things
             of
             the
             Atlantike
             Iland
             for
             a
             true
             Historie
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             but
             meere
             fables
             ,
             seeing
             hee
             confesseth
             that
             hee
             learned
             them
             of
             Critias
             ,
             being
             a
             little
             childe
             ,
             who
             (
             among
             other
             songs
             ,
             )
             sung
             that
             of
             the
             Atlantike
             Iland
             .
             But
             whether
             that
             Plato
             did
             write
             it
             for
             a
             true
             Historie
             ,
             or
             a
             fable
             ,
             for
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             beleeve
             that
             all
             which
             he
             hath
             written
             of
             this
             Iland
             ,
             beginning
             at
             the
             Dialogue
             of
             Time
             ,
             and
             continuing
             to
             that
             of
             Critias
             ,
             cannot
             be
             held
             for
             true
             ,
             but
             among
             children
             and
             old
             folkes
             .
             Who
             will
             not
             accoumpt
             it
             a
             fable
             ,
             to
             say
             that
             Neptune
             fell
             in
             love
             with
             Clite
             ,
             and
             had
             of
             her
             five
             paire
             of
             twinnes
             at
             one
             birth
             ▪
             And
             that
             out
             of
             one
             mountaine
             ,
             hee
             drew
             three
             round
             balles
             of
             water
             ,
             and
             two
             of
             earth
             ,
             which
             did
             so
             well
             resemble
             ,
             as
             you
             would
             have
             iudged
             them
             all
             one
             bowell
             ?
             What
             shall
             wee
             say
             moreover
             of
             that
             Temple
             of
             a
             thousand
             pace
             long
             ,
             and
             five
             hundred
             broade
             ,
             whose
             walles
             without
             were
             all
             covered
             with
             silver
             ,
             the
             seeling
             of
             gold
             ,
             and
             within
             ivorie
             ,
             indented
             and
             inlaied
             with
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             pearle
             ?
             In
             the
             end
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             ruine
             thereof
             ,
             he
             concludes
             thus
             in
             his
             time
             ,
             
               In
               one
               day
               ,
               and
               one
               night
               ,
               came
               a
               great
               deluge
               ,
               whereby
               all
               our
               souldiers
               were
               swallowed
               by
               heapes
               within
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               in
               this
               sort
               the
               Atlantike
               Iland
               being
               drowned
               ,
               it
               vanished
               in
               the
               Sea.
            
             Without
             doubt
             it
             fell
             out
             happily
             ,
             that
             this
             Iland
             vanished
             so
             suddenly
             ,
             seeing
             it
             was
             bigger
             then
             Asia
             and
             Affrike
             :
             and
             that
             it
             was
             made
             by
             enchantment
             .
             It
             is
             in
             likesort
             all
             one
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             ruines
             of
             this
             so
             great
             an
             Iland
             ,
             are
             seene
             in
             the
             bottome
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             that
             
             the
             Mariners
             which
             see
             them
             ,
             cannot
             saile
             that
             way
             .
             Then
             he
             addes
             ,
             
               For
               this
               cause
               vnto
               this
               day
               ,
               that
               Sea
               is
               not
               navigable
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               bancke
               which
               by
               little
               &
               little
               is
               growne
               in
               that
               drowned
               Iland
               .
            
             I
             would
             willingly
             demand
             what
             Sea
             could
             swallow
             vp
             so
             infinite
             a
             continent
             of
             land
             ,
             greater
             then
             Asia
             and
             Affrike
             ,
             whose
             confines
             stretched
             vnto
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             to
             swallow
             it
             vp
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             there
             should
             at
             this
             day
             remaine
             no
             signes
             nor
             markes
             thereof
             ,
             whatsoever
             :
             seeing
             it
             is
             well
             knowne
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             the
             Mariners
             finde
             no
             bottome
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             where
             they
             say
             this
             Iland
             was
             .
             Notwithstanding
             ,
             it
             may
             seeme
             indiscreete
             and
             farre
             from
             reason
             ,
             to
             dispute
             seriously
             of
             those
             things
             which
             are
             reported
             at
             pleasure
             ,
             or
             if
             we
             shall
             give
             that
             respect
             to
             the
             authoritie
             of
             Plato
             (
             as
             it
             is
             reason
             ,
             )
             we
             must
             rather
             vnderstand
             them
             to
             signifie
             simply
             ,
             (
             as
             in
             a
             picture
             )
             the
             prosperitie
             of
             a
             Citie
             ,
             and
             withall
             ,
             the
             ruine
             thereof
             .
             For
             the
             argument
             they
             make
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             this
             Atlantike
             Iland
             ,
             hath
             bene
             really
             and
             indeede
             ,
             saying
             that
             the
             sea
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             doth
             at
             this
             day
             beare
             the
             name
             of
             Atlantike
             ,
             is
             of
             small
             importance
             ,
             for
             that
             wee
             knowe
             Mount
             Atlas
             ,
             
             whereof
             Plinie
             sayes
             this
             sea
             tooke
             the
             name
             ,
             is
             vpon
             the
             confines
             of
             the
             Mediterranean
             Sea.
             And
             the
             same
             Plinie
             reportes
             ,
             that
             ioyning
             to
             the
             said
             Mount
             ,
             there
             is
             an
             Iland
             called
             Atlantike
             ,
             which
             he
             reportes
             to
             be
             little
             ,
             and
             of
             small
             accompt
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             opinion
             of
             many
             which
             holde
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             race
             of
             the
             Indians
             comes
             from
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             is
             not
             true
             .
             
               CHAP.
               23.
            
             
          
           
             NOw
             that
             wee
             have
             shewed
             how
             vnlikely
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             Indians
             passed
             to
             the
             Indies
             by
             the
             Atlantike
             
             Iland
             ,
             there
             are
             others
             holde
             opinion
             ,
             that
             they
             tooke
             the
             way
             ,
             whereof
             Esdras
             speakes
             in
             his
             fourth
             booke
             ,
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             
               And
               whereas
               thou
               sawest
               that
               he
               gathered
               an
               other
               peaceable
               troope
               vnto
               him
               ,
            
             
             
               thou
               shalt
               know
               ,
               those
               are
               the
               ten
               tribes
               ,
               which
               were
               caried
               away
               captives
               out
               of
               their
               own
               land
               ,
               in
               the
               time
               of
               king
            
             Ozeas
             ,
             whom
             Salmanazar
             
               king
               of
               the
            
             Assyrians
             
               tooke
               captives
               ,
               and
               ledde
               them
               beyond
               the
               river
               ,
               so
               were
               they
               brought
               into
               an
               other
               land
               :
               but
               they
               tooke
               this
               counsell
               to
               themselves
               ,
               to
               leave
               the
               multitude
               of
               the
               heathen
               ,
               and
               go
               forth
               into
               a
               farther
               countrie
               ,
               where
               never
               mankind
               dwelt
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               there
               observe
               their
               statutes
               ,
               which
               they
               could
               not
               keepe
               in
               their
               owne
               land
               :
               and
               they
               entred
               by
               the
               narrowe
               passages
               of
               the
               river
            
             Euphrates
             ,
             
               for
               then
               God
               shewed
               his
               wonders
               ,
               and
               stayed
               the
               springs
               of
               the
               flood
               ,
               vntill
               they
               were
               passed
               over
               :
               for
               the
               way
               vnto
               that
               Countrie
               is
               very
               long
               ,
               yea
               ,
               of
               a
               yeere
               and
               a
               halfe
               ,
               and
               this
               Region
               is
               called
            
             Arsareth
             ,
             
               then
               dwelt
               they
               there
               vntill
               the
               latter
               time
               ,
               and
               when
               they
               come
               forth
               againe
               ,
               the
               most
               Mightie
               shall
               hold
               still
               the
               springs
               of
               the
               river
               againe
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               goe
               through
               ;
               for
               this
               cause
               sawest
               thou
               this
               multitude
               peaceable
               .
            
             Some
             will
             apply
             this
             text
             of
             Esdras
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             saying
             ,
             they
             were
             guided
             by
             God
             ,
             whereas
             never
             mankinde
             dwelt
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             land
             where
             they
             dwelt
             ,
             is
             so
             farre
             off
             ,
             as
             it
             requires
             a
             yeere
             and
             a
             halfe
             to
             performe
             the
             voyage
             ,
             beeing
             by
             nature
             very
             peaceable
             .
             And
             that
             there
             are
             great
             signes
             and
             arguments
             amongst
             the
             common
             sort
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             to
             breed
             a
             beleefe
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             descended
             from
             the
             Iewes
             :
             for
             commonly
             you
             shall
             see
             them
             fearefull
             ,
             submisse
             ,
             ceremonious
             and
             subtill
             in
             lying
             .
             And
             moreover
             they
             say
             ,
             their
             habites
             are
             like
             vnto
             those
             the
             Iewes
             vsed
             ,
             for
             they
             weare
             a
             short
             coat
             or
             waste-coat
             ,
             and
             a
             cloake
             imbroidered
             all
             about
             ;
             they
             goe
             bare-footed
             ,
             or
             with
             soles
             
             tied
             with
             latchers
             over
             the
             foot
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Oiotas
             .
             And
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             appeares
             by
             their
             Histories
             ,
             as
             also
             by
             their
             ancient
             pictures
             ,
             which
             represent
             them
             in
             this
             fashion
             ,
             that
             this
             attire
             was
             the
             ancient
             habite
             of
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             and
             that
             these
             two
             kinds
             of
             garments
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             onely
             vse
             ,
             were
             vsed
             by
             Samson
             ,
             which
             the
             Scripture
             calleth
             Tunicam
             ,
             and
             Sidonem
             :
             beeing
             the
             same
             which
             the
             Indians
             terme
             wast-coat
             and
             cloake
             .
             But
             all
             these
             coniectures
             are
             light
             ,
             and
             rather
             against
             them
             then
             with
             them
             ;
             for
             wee
             know
             well
             ,
             that
             the
             Hebrewes
             vsed
             letters
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             no
             shew
             among
             the
             Indians
             ;
             they
             were
             great
             lovers
             of
             silver
             ,
             these
             make
             no
             care
             of
             it
             :
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             not
             circumcised
             ,
             held
             not
             themselves
             for
             Iewes
             ,
             and
             contrariwise
             the
             Indians
             are
             not
             at
             all
             ,
             neyther
             did
             they
             ever
             vse
             any
             ceremonie
             neere
             it
             ,
             as
             many
             in
             the
             East
             have
             done
             .
             But
             what
             reason
             of
             coniecture
             is
             there
             in
             this
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Iewes
             are
             so
             careful
             to
             preserve
             their
             language
             and
             Antiquities
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             they
             differ
             and
             are
             known
             from
             others
             ,
             and
             yet
             at
             the
             Indies
             alone
             ,
             they
             have
             forgotten
             their
             Linage
             ,
             their
             Law
             ,
             their
             Ceremonies
             ,
             their
             Messias
             ;
             and
             finally
             ,
             their
             whole
             Iudaisme
             .
             And
             whereas
             they
             say
             ,
             the
             Indians
             are
             feareful
             cowards
             ,
             superstitious
             ,
             and
             subtill
             in
             lying
             ;
             for
             the
             first
             ;
             it
             is
             not
             common
             to
             all
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             nations
             among
             the
             Barbarians
             free
             from
             these
             vices
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             valiant
             and
             hardy
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             blunt
             and
             dull
             of
             vnderstanding
             .
             As
             for
             ceremonies
             and
             superstitions
             ,
             the
             Heathen
             have
             alwayes
             vsed
             them
             much
             ;
             the
             manner
             of
             habites
             described
             which
             they
             vse
             ,
             being
             the
             plainest
             and
             most
             simple
             in
             the
             world
             ;
             without
             Arte
             ,
             the
             which
             hath
             been
             common
             ,
             not
             onely
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             but
             to
             all
             other
             Nations
             ;
             seeing
             that
             the
             very
             History
             of
             Esdras
             (
             if
             wee
             
             shall
             beleeve
             the
             Scriptures
             that
             bee
             Apocrypha
             )
             make
             more
             against
             them
             then
             for
             their
             purpose
             :
             for
             hee
             saith
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             that
             the
             ten
             tribes
             went
             from
             the
             multitude
             of
             the
             Heathen
             ,
             to
             keepe
             their
             faith
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             we
             see
             the
             Indians
             given
             to
             all
             the
             Idolatries
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             those
             which
             holde
             this
             opinion
             ,
             see
             well
             if
             the
             entries
             of
             the
             River
             Euphrates
             stretch
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             whether
             it
             be
             necessary
             for
             the
             Indies
             to
             repasse
             that
             way
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             written
             .
             Besides
             ,
             I
             know
             not
             how
             you
             can
             name
             them
             peaceable
             ,
             seeing
             they
             be
             alwaies
             in
             warre
             amongst
             themselves
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             I
             cannot
             see
             how
             that
             Euphrates
             in
             
               Esdras
               Apocrypha
            
             ,
             should
             be
             a
             more
             convenient
             passage
             to
             goe
             to
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             then
             the
             inchanted
             &
             fabulous
             Atlantike
             Iland
             of
             Plato
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             reason
             why
             we
             can
             find
             no
             beginning
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
             CHAP.
             24.
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             easier
             to
             refute
             and
             contradict
             the
             false
             opinions
             conceyved
             of
             the
             Originall
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             then
             to
             set
             downe
             a
             true
             and
             certaine
             resolution
             ;
             for
             that
             there
             is
             no
             writing
             among
             the
             Indians
             ,
             nor
             any
             certaine
             remembrances
             of
             their
             founders
             :
             neyther
             is
             there
             any
             mention
             made
             of
             this
             new
             world
             in
             their
             bookes
             that
             have
             knowledge
             of
             letters
             :
             our
             Ancients
             held
             ,
             that
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             there
             were
             neyther
             men
             ;
             land
             ,
             nor
             heaven
             .
             So
             as
             hee
             should
             seeme
             rash
             and
             presumptuous
             ,
             that
             should
             thinke
             to
             discover
             the
             first
             beginning
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
             But
             we
             may
             iudge
             a
             farre
             off
             ,
             by
             the
             former
             discourse
             ,
             that
             these
             Indians
             came
             by
             little
             and
             little
             to
             this
             newe
             world
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             the
             helpe
             and
             meanes
             of
             the
             neerenesse
             of
             lands
             ,
             or
             by
             some
             navigation
             :
             the
             
             which
             seemes
             to
             mee
             the
             meanes
             whereby
             they
             came
             ,
             and
             not
             that
             they
             prepared
             any
             armie
             to
             goe
             thither
             of
             purpose
             :
             neyther
             that
             they
             have
             been
             caried
             thither
             by
             any
             ship-wracke
             or
             tempest
             ,
             although
             some
             of
             these
             things
             may
             chance
             in
             some
             part
             of
             the
             Indies
             :
             for
             these
             Regions
             beeing
             so
             great
             ,
             as
             they
             containe
             Nations
             without
             number
             ,
             we
             may
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             some
             came
             to
             inhabite
             after
             one
             sort
             ,
             and
             some
             after
             an
             other
             .
             But
             in
             the
             ende
             I
             resolve
             vpon
             this
             point
             ,
             that
             the
             true
             and
             principall
             cause
             to
             people
             the
             Indies
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             the
             lands
             and
             limits
             thereof
             are
             ioyned
             and
             continued
             in
             some
             extremities
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             were
             very
             neere
             .
             And
             I
             beleeve
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             many
             thousand
             yeeres
             past
             ,
             since
             men
             first
             inhabited
             this
             new
             world
             and
             West
             Indies
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             first
             men
             that
             entred
             ,
             were
             rather
             savage
             men
             and
             hunters
             ,
             then
             bredde
             vp
             in
             civill
             and
             well
             governed
             Common-weales
             :
             and
             that
             they
             came
             to
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             having
             lost
             their
             owne
             land
             ,
             or
             being
             in
             too
             great
             numbers
             ,
             they
             were
             forced
             of
             necessitie
             to
             seeke
             some
             other
             habitations
             ;
             the
             which
             having
             found
             ,
             they
             beganne
             by
             little
             and
             little
             to
             plant
             ,
             having
             no
             other
             law
             ,
             but
             some
             instinct
             of
             nature
             ,
             and
             that
             very
             darke
             ,
             and
             some
             customes
             remayning
             of
             their
             first
             Countries
             .
             And
             although
             they
             came
             from
             Countries
             well
             governed
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             incredible
             to
             thinke
             ,
             that
             they
             had
             forgotten
             all
             through
             the
             tract
             of
             time
             and
             want
             of
             vse
             ;
             seeing
             that
             in
             Spaine
             and
             Italie
             we
             find
             companies
             of
             men
             ,
             which
             have
             nothing
             but
             the
             shape
             and
             countenance
             onely
             ,
             whereby
             we
             may
             coniecture
             in
             what
             sort
             this
             new
             world
             grew
             so
             barbarous
             and
             vncivill
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             What
             the
             Indians
             report
             of
             their
             beginning
             .
             CHAP.
             25.
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             no
             matter
             of
             any
             great
             importance
             ,
             to
             know
             what
             the
             Indians
             themselves
             report
             of
             their
             beginning
             ,
             being
             more
             like
             vnto
             dreames
             ,
             then
             to
             true
             Hiries
             .
             ●hey
             make
             great
             mention
             of
             a
             deluge
             happened
             in
             their
             Countrie
             :
             but
             we
             cannot
             well
             iudge
             if
             this
             deluge
             were
             vniversall
             (
             whereof
             the
             scripture
             makes
             mention
             ,
             )
             or
             some
             particular
             inundation
             of
             those
             regions
             where
             they
             are
             .
             Some
             expert
             men
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             those
             Countries
             are
             many
             notable
             signes
             of
             some
             great
             inundation
             ,
             and
             I
             am
             of
             their
             opinion
             which
             thinke
             that
             these
             markes
             and
             shewes
             of
             a
             deluge
             ,
             was
             not
             that
             of
             Noe
             ,
             but
             some
             other
             particular
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             Plato
             speakes
             of
             ,
             or
             Deucalions
             floud
             ,
             which
             the
             Poets
             sing
             of
             :
             whatsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             the
             Indians
             say
             ,
             that
             al
             men
             were
             drowned
             in
             this
             deluge
             :
             and
             they
             report
             that
             out
             of
             the
             great
             Lake
             Titicaca
             ,
             came
             one
             Viracocha
             ,
             which
             staied
             in
             Tiaguanaco
             ,
             where
             at
             this
             day
             there
             is
             to
             bee
             seene
             the
             ruines
             of
             ancient
             and
             very
             strange
             buildings
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             came
             to
             Cusco
             ,
             and
             so
             began
             mankinde
             to
             multiply
             .
             They
             shew
             in
             the
             same
             Iland
             a
             small
             Lake
             ,
             where
             they
             faine
             that
             the
             sunne
             hid
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             so
             was
             preserved
             ;
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             make
             great
             sacrifices
             vnto
             him
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             both
             of
             sheepe
             and
             men
             .
             Others
             report
             ,
             that
             sixe
             ,
             or
             I
             know
             not
             what
             number
             of
             men
             ,
             came
             out
             of
             a
             certaine
             cave
             by
             a
             window
             ,
             by
             whome
             men
             first
             began
             to
             multiplie
             :
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             call
             them
             Pacaritampo
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             are
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Tambos
             is
             the
             most
             ancient
             race
             of
             men
             .
             They
             say
             also
             ,
             that
             
               Mango
               Capa
            
             ,
             whom
             they
             acknowledge
             for
             the
             founder
             and
             chiefe
             of
             their
             Inguas
             ,
             was
             
             issued
             of
             that
             race
             ,
             and
             that
             from
             him
             sprang
             two
             families
             or
             linages
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             
               Havan
               Cusco
            
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             
               Vrni
               Cusco
            
             .
             They
             say
             moreover
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             attempted
             warre
             and
             conquered
             sundrie
             Provinces
             ,
             they
             gave
             a
             colour
             and
             made
             a
             pretext
             of
             their
             enterprise
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             world
             ought
             to
             acknowledge
             them
             ;
             for
             that
             all
             the
             world
             was
             renued
             by
             their
             race
             and
             Countrie
             :
             and
             also
             that
             the
             true
             religion
             had
             been
             reveiled
             to
             them
             from
             heaven
             .
             But
             what
             availeth
             it
             to
             speake
             more
             ,
             seeing
             that
             all
             is
             full
             of
             lies
             and
             vanitie
             ,
             and
             farre
             from
             reason
             ?
             Some
             learned
             men
             write
             ,
             that
             all
             which
             the
             Indians
             make
             mention
             of
             ,
             is
             not
             above
             400.
             yeeres
             old
             ,
             and
             whatsoever
             they
             speake
             of
             former
             ages
             ,
             is
             but
             a
             confusion
             full
             of
             obscuritie
             ,
             wherein
             we
             find
             no
             truth
             .
             The
             which
             may
             not
             seeme
             strange
             ,
             they
             having
             no
             vse
             of
             bookes
             ,
             or
             writing
             ;
             in
             steede
             whereof
             ,
             they
             vse
             counting
             with
             their
             Quipocamayes
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             peculiar
             vnto
             them
             .
             But
             which
             reckoning
             all
             they
             can
             report
             is
             not
             past
             400.
             yeeres
             .
             Instructing
             my selfe
             carefully
             of
             them
             ,
             to
             know
             from
             what
             land
             ,
             and
             what
             nation
             they
             passed
             ,
             to
             that
             where
             they
             ●ow
             live
             ,
             I
             have
             found
             them
             so
             farre
             vnable
             to
             give
             any
             reason
             thereof
             ,
             as
             they
             beleeve
             confidently
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             created
             at
             their
             first
             beginning
             at
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             where
             they
             now
             dwell
             .
             But
             we
             have
             freed
             them
             of
             this
             error
             by
             our
             faith
             ,
             
             which
             teacheth
             vs
             ,
             that
             all
             men
             came
             from
             the
             first
             man.
             There
             are
             great
             and
             apparant
             coniectures
             ,
             that
             these
             men
             for
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             had
             neither
             Kings
             nor
             common
             weales
             ,
             but
             lived
             in
             troupes
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             at
             this
             day
             in
             Florida
             ,
             the
             Chiriquanas
             those
             of
             Bresill
             and
             many
             other
             nations
             ,
             which
             have
             no
             certaine
             Kings
             ,
             but
             as
             occasion
             is
             offered
             in
             peace
             or
             warre
             ,
             they
             choose
             their
             Captaines
             as
             they
             please
             .
             But
             some
             men
             excelling
             
             others
             in
             force
             and
             wit
             ,
             began
             in
             time
             to
             rule
             and
             domineere
             as
             Nembroth
             did
             :
             
             so
             increasing
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             they
             erected
             the
             kingdomes
             of
             Peru
             and
             Mexico
             ,
             which
             our
             Spaniards
             found
             :
             and
             although
             they
             were
             barbarous
             ,
             yet
             did
             they
             farre
             surpasse
             all
             the
             other
             Indians
             .
             Behold
             how
             the
             foresaid
             reason
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             the
             Indians
             began
             to
             multiply
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             by
             savage
             men
             and
             fugitives
             ,
             which
             may
             suffice
             touching
             the
             beginning
             of
             these
             men
             we
             speake
             of
             ,
             leaving
             the
             rest
             ,
             vntill
             we
             treate
             of
             their
             Historie
             more
             at
             large
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           SECOND
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             That
             it
             is
             not
             out
             of
             purpose
             ,
             but
             necessarie
             to
             treate
             of
             the
             〈…〉
             .
             
               CHAP.
               1.
            
             
          
           
             FOR
             the
             well
             conceiving
             of
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             it
             is
             necessarie
             to
             know
             the
             nature
             and
             disposition
             of
             that
             Region
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             did
             call
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             held
             inhabitable
             ,
             seeing
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             which
             hath
             bin
             of
             late
             discovered
             ,
             lies
             and
             is
             scituate
             vnder
             this
             region
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             heaven
             .
             And
             it
             seemes
             to
             me
             greatly
             to
             purpose
             which
             some
             do
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             knowledge
             of
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             depends
             of
             the
             well
             vnderstanding
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             Equinoctiall
             :
             for
             that
             the
             difference
             which
             is
             betwixt
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             world
             ,
             proceeds
             in
             a
             maner
             from
             the
             qualities
             of
             this
             Equinoctiall
             .
             And
             we
             must
             note
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             space
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropickes
             ,
             must
             be
             properly
             taken
             and
             held
             for
             this
             middle
             line
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             
             Equinoctiall
             ;
             so
             called
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Sunne
             running
             his
             course
             therein
             ,
             makes
             the
             daies
             &
             nights
             even
             throughout
             the
             world
             :
             yea
             ,
             they
             that
             dwell
             vnder
             this
             line
             ,
             inioy
             ,
             throughout
             the
             yeare
             ,
             the
             same
             equalitie
             of
             daies
             ,
             and
             nights
             .
             In
             this
             Equinoctiall
             line
             ,
             we
             finde
             so
             many
             admirable
             qualities
             ,
             that
             with
             great
             reason
             mans
             vnderstanding
             doth
             studie
             and
             labour
             to
             search
             out
             the
             causes
             ;
             not
             moved
             therevnto
             so
             much
             by
             the
             doctrine
             of
             ancient
             Philosophers
             ,
             as
             by
             reason
             and
             certaine
             experience
             .
          
        
         
           
             For
             what
             reason
             the
             Ancients
             held
             ,
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             was
             inhabitable
             .
             
               CHAP.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             EXamining
             this
             subiect
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             no
             man
             can
             denie
             that
             which
             we
             plainely
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             Sunne
             when
             it
             drawes
             neere
             ,
             doth
             heate
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             retyres
             ,
             groweth
             cold
             .
             The
             daies
             and
             nightes
             ,
             with
             the
             Winter
             and
             Summer
             be
             witnesses
             heereof
             ;
             whose
             varietie
             with
             the
             heate
             and
             cold
             ,
             growes
             by
             the
             neerenes
             and
             distance
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             Moreover
             it
             is
             certaine
             ,
             the
             more
             the
             Sunne
             approacheth
             and
             casteth
             his
             beames
             prependicularly
             ,
             the
             more
             the
             earth
             is
             scorched
             and
             burnt
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             see
             plainely
             in
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             force
             of
             Summer
             ,
             whereby
             we
             may
             iudge
             (
             in
             my
             opinion
             )
             that
             the
             farther
             a
             Countrie
             is
             distant
             from
             the
             course
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             more
             cold
             it
             is
             .
             So
             we
             finde
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             the
             Countries
             and
             Regions
             ,
             which
             approach
             neerest
             to
             the
             North
             ,
             are
             coldest
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             those
             that
             lie
             neere
             the
             Zodiake
             ,
             where
             the
             Sunne
             keepes
             his
             course
             ,
             are
             most
             hot
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             Ethiopia
             passeth
             Affrike
             and
             Barbarie
             in
             
             heate
             ,
             Barbarie
             exceedes
             
               Andalousia
               ,
               Andalousia
               ,
               Castile
            
             and
             Arragon
             surpasse
             Biscaie
             and
             Fraunce
             .
             And
             the
             more
             they
             decline
             to
             the
             North
             ,
             the
             colder
             they
             are
             :
             and
             so
             by
             consequence
             ,
             those
             which
             approach
             neerest
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             are
             beaten
             perpendicularly
             with
             his
             beames
             ,
             they
             do
             most
             feele
             the
             heate
             thereof
             .
             Some
             vrge
             another
             reason
             to
             this
             effect
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             heaven
             is
             very
             ●odaine
             and
             light
             towards
             the
             Tropikes
             ,
             but
             neere
             the
             Poles
             it
             is
             slow
             and
             heavie
             ,
             whereby
             they
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             region
             which
             the
             Zodiake
             circles
             and
             conteines
             ,
             is
             set
             on
             fire
             with
             heate
             for
             three
             causes
             and
             reasons
             ;
             the
             one
             for
             the
             neerenes
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             other
             ,
             for
             that
             his
             beames
             reflect
             directly
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             doth
             participate
             and
             feele
             this
             swift
             and
             sodaine
             motion
             of
             the
             heaven
             .
             See
             what
             reason
             and
             discourse
             teacheth
             vs
             ,
             touching
             the
             cause
             of
             heat
             and
             cold
             vpon
             the
             regions
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             But
             what
             shall
             we
             say
             of
             the
             two
             other
             qualities
             ,
             wet
             and
             drie
             ?
             Even
             the
             same
             .
             For
             the
             drought
             seemes
             to
             grow
             by
             the
             neerenes
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             moistnes
             ,
             being
             retired
             farre
             off
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             night
             being
             colder
             then
             the
             day
             ,
             is
             likewise
             more
             moist
             ;
             and
             the
             day
             which
             is
             drier
             ,
             is
             also
             hotter
             .
             Winter
             ,
             whilst
             the
             Sun
             runnes
             his
             course
             farther
             off
             ,
             is
             more
             cold
             and
             rainie
             ,
             and
             Summer
             ,
             when
             the
             Sunne
             is
             neere
             ,
             is
             more
             hotte
             and
             drie
             :
             for
             even
             as
             the
             fire
             hath
             the
             propertie
             to
             parch
             and
             burne
             ,
             so
             hath
             it
             to
             drie
             vp
             the
             moistnes
             .
             These
             things
             therefore
             considered
             ,
             Aristotle
             and
             other
             Philosophers
             attribute
             vnto
             the
             regions
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             burning
             ,
             an
             excessive
             heat
             and
             a
             drouth
             likewise
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             said
             ,
             this
             region
             is
             wonderfully
             scorched
             and
             drie
             ;
             &
             so
             by
             consequence
             ,
             hath
             neither
             waters
             nor
             pastures
             ,
             whereby
             of
             necessitie
             it
             must
             be
             contrarie
             and
             vnfit
             for
             mans
             life
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             That
             the
             burning
             Zone
             is
             very
             moist
             ,
             contrary
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Ancients
             .
             
               CHAP.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             ALl
             that
             we
             have
             propounded
             ,
             seemes
             vndoubtedly
             true
             ,
             and
             to
             purpose
             ;
             and
             yet
             the
             conclusion
             they
             would
             draw
             from
             it
             ,
             is
             directly
             false
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             South
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             is
             peopled
             and
             inhabited
             by
             men
             ;
             and
             wee
             our selves
             have
             stayed
             long
             there
             ,
             beeing
             very
             commodious
             ,
             pleasant
             and
             agreeable
             .
             If
             therefore
             it
             be
             so
             (
             as
             we
             cannot
             denie
             it
             )
             that
             from
             a
             true
             proposition
             ,
             we
             cannot
             draw
             a
             false
             conclusion
             ,
             and
             yet
             this
             conclusion
             should
             be
             false
             ,
             (
             as
             indeed
             it
             is
             ,
             )
             we
             must
             of
             necessitie
             returne
             backe
             the
             same
             way
             ,
             to
             examine
             this
             proposition
             more
             strictly
             ,
             &
             whence
             the
             error
             should
             proceede
             :
             we
             will
             first
             shew
             the
             trueth
             ,
             as
             assured
             experience
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             then
             will
             we
             proove
             it
             ,
             (
             although
             it
             be
             verie
             difficult
             )
             and
             will
             endevour
             to
             give
             a
             rea●on
             ,
             following
             the
             termes
             of
             Philosophie
             .
             The
             last
             point
             that
             wee
             propounded
             ,
             that
             the
             drought
             is
             greatest
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             is
             neerest
             to
             the
             earth
             ,
             seemeth
             certaine
             and
             infallible
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             is
             very
             false
             ;
             f●r
             there
             is
             never
             greater
             aboundance
             of
             raine
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             then
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             goeth
             directly
             over
             them
             ,
             and
             is
             very
             neere
             .
             Truely
             it
             is
             an
             admirable
             thing
             ,
             and
             worthy
             observation
             ,
             that
             the
             ayre
             is
             most
             cleere
             ,
             and
             without
             rayne
             vnder
             this
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             is
             farthest
             off
             ;
             and
             contrariwise
             there
             is
             most
             rayne
             ,
             snow
             and
             mists
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             is
             neerest
             .
             Such
             as
             have
             not
             travelled
             in
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             wil
             happily
             thinke
             this
             incredible
             ,
             and
             it
             will
             seeme
             strange
             even
             vnto
             such
             as
             have
             beene
             there
             ,
             if
             they
             have
             not
             well
             observed
             it
             :
             but
             
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             will
             willingly
             yeeld
             ,
             in
             noting
             the
             certaine
             experience
             of
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             sayd
             of
             this
             part
             of
             Peru
             ,
             which
             looks
             to
             the
             Southerne
             or
             Antartike
             Pole
             :
             the
             Sunne
             is
             then
             farthest
             off
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             neerest
             vnto
             Europe
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             in
             Maie
             ,
             Iune
             ,
             Iuly
             and
             August
             ,
             whenas
             hee
             makes
             his
             course
             in
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Cancer
             .
             During
             which
             Moneths
             ,
             the
             aire
             at
             Peru
             is
             very
             cleere
             and
             calme
             ,
             neyther
             doth
             there
             fall
             any
             snow
             or
             raine
             ;
             all
             their
             rivers
             fall
             much
             ,
             and
             some
             are
             dried
             vp
             quite
             :
             but
             as
             the
             yeere
             increaseth
             ,
             and
             the
             Sunne
             approcheth
             neere
             vnto
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             ,
             then
             begins
             it
             to
             raine
             and
             to
             snow
             ,
             and
             their
             Rivers
             swell
             from
             October
             to
             December
             .
             Then
             after
             that
             the
             Sun
             retyring
             from
             Capricorne
             ,
             whenas
             his
             beames
             reflect
             directly
             vpon
             the
             heads
             of
             them
             of
             Peru
             ,
             then
             is
             the
             violence
             of
             their
             waters
             great
             ,
             then
             is
             the
             time
             of
             raine
             ,
             snow
             ,
             and
             great
             overflowings
             of
             their
             Rivers
             ,
             when
             as
             their
             heate
             is
             greatest
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             from
             Ianuarie
             to
             mid
             March
             :
             this
             is
             so
             true
             and
             certaine
             ,
             as
             no
             man
             may
             contradict
             it
             .
             And
             at
             that
             time
             the
             contrary
             is
             found
             in
             the
             Regions
             of
             the
             Pole
             Articke
             ,
             beyond
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             which
             proceeds
             from
             the
             same
             reason
             .
             But
             let
             vs
             now
             looke
             into
             the
             temperature
             of
             Panama
             &
             all
             that
             coast
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Barlovent
               ,
               Cuba
               ,
               Hispaniola
               ,
               Iamaica
               ,
            
             as
             of
             S.
             
               Iohn
               de
               Port
               ricco
            
             ,
             wee
             shall
             without
             doubt
             finde
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             November
             ,
             vntill
             Aprill
             ,
             they
             have
             the
             aire
             cleere
             and
             bright
             ;
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Sunne
             passing
             by
             the
             Equinoctiall
             to
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             ,
             retyres
             from
             those
             Regions
             more
             then
             at
             any
             other
             time
             of
             the
             yeere
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             they
             have
             violent
             showers
             and
             great
             swellings
             of
             water
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             returnes
             and
             is
             neerest
             vnto
             them
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             Iune
             ,
             vnto
             
             September
             ,
             for
             then
             his
             beames
             beate
             most
             vpon
             them
             .
             The
             like
             happens
             at
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             as
             we
             learne
             daily
             by
             letters
             that
             come
             .
             So
             as
             it
             is
             a
             generall
             rule
             ,
             (
             although
             in
             some
             places
             there
             is
             an
             exception
             )
             that
             in
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             South
             or
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             which
             is
             all
             one
             ,
             the
             aire
             is
             most
             cleere
             and
             driest
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sun
             is
             farthest
             off
             ;
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             when
             it
             approcheth
             ,
             there
             is
             greatest
             rayne
             and
             humiditie
             :
             and
             even
             as
             the
             Sunne
             advanceth
             or
             retyreth
             little
             or
             much
             ,
             even
             so
             the
             earth
             abounds
             or
             wants
             water
             and
             moisture
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             in
             the
             Regions
             which
             be
             without
             the
             Tropicks
             ,
             there
             is
             greatest
             store
             of
             waters
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             is
             farthest
             off
             ,
             contrary
             to
             that
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             .
             CHAP.
             4.
             
          
           
             IN
             Regions
             which
             lie
             without
             the
             Tropicks
             ,
             we
             see
             the
             contrary
             to
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             spoken
             :
             for
             that
             the
             rayne
             is
             mingled
             with
             cold
             ,
             &
             the
             drought
             with
             heate
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             well
             knowne
             in
             all
             Europe
             and
             the
             old
             world
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             in
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             whereof
             the
             whole
             Kingdome
             of
             Chile
             is
             a
             witnesse
             ,
             which
             lying
             without
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             height
             with
             Spaine
             ,
             is
             subiect
             to
             the
             same
             lawes
             of
             Winter
             and
             Summer
             ,
             but
             that
             Winter
             is
             there
             ,
             whenas
             it
             is
             Summer
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             being
             vnder
             divers
             Poles
             .
             So
             as
             when
             it
             is
             cold
             in
             these
             Provinces
             ,
             the
             waters
             are
             in
             great
             aboundance
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             when
             the
             Sunne
             is
             farthest
             off
             ,
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             Aprill
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             of
             September
             :
             finally
             ,
             the
             disposition
             of
             seasons
             is
             like
             to
             that
             in
             Europe
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             heat
             and
             drought
             comes
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             returnes
             ,
             which
             is
             
             the
             cause
             that
             this
             Realme
             of
             Chile
             approcheth
             neerer
             the
             temperature
             of
             Europe
             ,
             then
             any
             other
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             fruites
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             bodies
             and
             spirits
             of
             men
             .
             The
             like
             they
             report
             of
             that
             part
             which
             lies
             before
             the
             Inner
             Ethiopia
             ,
             that
             stretcheth
             out
             in
             manner
             of
             a
             point
             vnto
             the
             Cape
             
               Bonne
               Esperance
            
             or
             Good
             Hope
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             holde
             for
             a
             true
             cause
             of
             the
             inundations
             of
             Nile
             ,
             which
             bee
             in
             Summer
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Ancients
             have
             so
             much
             disputed
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             that
             Region
             the
             Winter
             and
             raine
             begins
             in
             April
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             hath
             passed
             Aries
             :
             and
             these
             waters
             ,
             which
             partly
             grow
             from
             snow
             ,
             and
             partly
             from
             raine
             ,
             assemble
             and
             make
             great
             Lakes
             and
             Pooles
             ,
             from
             whence
             by
             good
             and
             true
             Geographie
             the
             River
             of
             Nile
             proceedes
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             goes
             by
             little
             and
             little
             stretching
             out
             her
             course
             ,
             till
             that
             having
             runne
             a
             long
             way
             ,
             it
             finally
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Summer
             overfloweth
             Egypt
             ,
             which
             seemeth
             against
             nature
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             is
             certainely
             reported
             ;
             for
             at
             what
             time
             it
             is
             Summer
             in
             Egypt
             ,
             lying
             vnder
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Cancer
             ,
             then
             is
             it
             winter
             at
             the
             springes
             of
             Nile
             ,
             which
             is
             vnder
             the
             other
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             .
             There
             is
             in
             America
             an
             other
             inundation
             like
             to
             that
             of
             Nile
             ,
             at
             Paraguen
             ,
             or
             River
             
               de
               la
               Plata
            
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             the
             River
             of
             silver
             ,
             the
             which
             receiving
             yeerely
             infinite
             waters
             which
             fall
             from
             the
             Mountaines
             of
             Per●
             ,
             doth
             so
             terribly
             swell
             in
             her
             course
             ,
             and
             over-flowes
             that
             Region
             ,
             as
             the
             Inhabitants
             are
             forced
             ,
             during
             those
             Moneths
             ,
             to
             retyre
             themselves
             into
             boats
             and
             Canoes
             ,
             and
             to
             leave
             the
             dwelling
             of
             the
             Land.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             That
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropicks
             ,
             the
             greatest
             aboundance
             of
             raine
             is
             in
             Summer
             ,
             with
             a
             discourse
             of
             Winter
             and
             Summer
             .
             
               CHAP.
               5.
            
             
          
           
             TO
             conclude
             ,
             Summer
             is
             alwayes
             accompanied
             with
             heate
             and
             drought
             ,
             in
             the
             two
             temperate
             Zones
             ,
             and
             Winter
             with
             cold
             and
             moistnesse
             :
             but
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             those
             qualities
             are
             not
             alike
             ,
             for
             that
             raine
             accompanies
             heate
             ,
             and
             drought
             followeth
             the
             cold
             :
             I
             vnderstand
             by
             cold
             ,
             want
             of
             excessive
             heat
             ,
             so
             as
             Winter
             is
             taken
             in
             our
             Europe
             for
             the
             colde
             and
             raynie
             season
             ,
             and
             Summer
             for
             the
             hot
             and
             cleere
             season
             .
             Ou●
             Spaniards
             which
             live
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             newe
             Spaine
             ,
             seeing
             these
             two
             qualities
             not
             to
             concurre
             together
             as
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             call
             that
             season
             Winter
             ,
             wherein
             there
             is
             greatest
             aboundance
             of
             raine
             and
             waters
             ;
             and
             Summer
             ;
             where
             there
             is
             little
             or
             non●
             at
             all
             :
             wherein
             they
             are
             plainely
             deceived
             ,
             although
             they
             a●●irme
             by
             a
             generall
             rule
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Mountaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             it
             is
             Summer
             from
             the
             Moneth
             of
             Aprill
             to
             September
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             raine
             ceaseth
             in
             that
             season
             ;
             and
             that
             Winter
             is
             ,
             from
             the
             moneth
             of
             September
             vnto
             Aprill
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             showres
             returne
             then
             ▪
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             winter
             and
             summer
             at
             the
             same
             instant
             that
             in
             Spaine
             .
             So
             as
             when
             the
             Sun●e
             goeth
             directly
             over
             their
             heads
             ,
             they
             then
             take
             it
             to
             bee
             the
             depth
             of
             Winter
             ,
             having
             greatest
             store
             of
             raine
             .
             But
             it
             is
             worthy
             to
             be
             laughed
             at
             ,
             comming
             from
             ignorant
             men
             and
             vnlearned
             :
             for
             even
             as
             the
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             day
             and
             night
             proceeds
             from
             the
             presence
             or
             absence
             of
             the
             Sunne
             in
             our
             hemisphere
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             first
             motor
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             day
             and
             night
             ;
             even
             so
             the
             difference
             
             which
             we
             see
             betwixt
             Winter
             and
             Summer
             ,
             proceeds
             from
             the
             neerenesse
             and
             distance
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             said
             Sunne
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             proper
             cause
             .
             To
             speake
             trueth
             then
             ,
             it
             is
             Summer
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             is
             neerest
             ,
             and
             Winter
             when
             it
             is
             farthest
             off
             .
             Both
             heate
             and
             coldnesse
             ,
             and
             every
             other
             temperature
             ,
             growes
             of
             necessitie
             ,
             by
             the
             neerenesse
             and
             distance
             of
             the
             sunne
             ;
             but
             to
             raine
             ,
             or
             not
             to
             raine
             ,
             which
             is
             humiditie
             and
             drought
             ,
             doe
             not
             necessarily
             follow
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             easie
             to
             iudge
             (
             besides
             this
             vulgar
             opinion
             )
             that
             at
             Peru
             ,
             the
             Winter
             is
             cleere
             and
             without
             raine
             ,
             and
             the
             Summer
             full
             of
             showres
             ,
             and
             not
             otherwise
             ,
             as
             many
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             the
             winter
             is
             hotte
             ,
             and
             the
             summer
             cold
             .
             They
             fall
             into
             the
             like
             error
             ,
             vpon
             the
             difference
             they
             make
             betwixt
             the
             Plaines
             and
             the
             Mountaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             when
             it
             is
             summer
             vpon
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             it
             is
             winter
             in
             the
             vallie
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             April
             ,
             Maie
             ,
             Iune
             ,
             Iuly
             ,
             and
             August
             :
             for
             then
             the
             aire
             is
             very
             cleere
             vpon
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             without
             any
             raine
             or
             mistes
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             season
             ,
             we
             commonly
             see
             fogges
             in
             the
             plaine
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Guarva
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             very
             sweet
             dew
             wherewith
             the
             sunne
             is
             covered
             .
             But
             winter
             and
             summer
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             are
             caused
             by
             the
             neerenesse
             and
             distance
             of
             the
             sunne
             .
             Seeing
             then
             that
             throughout
             all
             Per●
             ,
             both
             vpon
             the
             Mountaines
             and
             on
             the
             Plaines
             ,
             the
             sunne
             approcheth
             and
             retyreth
             in
             one
             sort
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             reason
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             when
             it
             is
             summer
             in
             one
             part
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             winter
             in
             an
             other
             ;
             yet
             is
             it
             no
             m●tter
             of
             any
             importance
             ,
             to
             contend
             vpon
             the
             signification
             of
             words
             :
             Let
             them
             terme
             them
             as
             they
             please
             ,
             and
             call
             that
             summer
             when
             it
             raines
             not
             ,
             although
             the
             heat
             be
             greater
             .
             But
             that
             ,
             whereunto
             we
             must
             have
             greatest
             regard
             ,
             is
             the
             trueth
             of
             the
             subiect
             ,
             
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             drought
             and
             want
             of
             raine
             ,
             is
             not
             alwaies
             greatest
             ,
             when
             the
             sunne
             approcheth
             neerest
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             burning
             Zone
             abounds
             with
             waters
             and
             pastures
             ,
             against
             the
             opinion
             of
             Aristotle
             ,
             who
             holds
             the
             contrarie
             .
             
               CHAP.
               6.
            
             
          
           
             BY
             the
             former
             Discourse
             wee
             may
             easily
             conceive
             ,
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             is
             not
             drie
             ,
             but
             abounding
             with
             waters
             ;
             the
             which
             is
             so
             true
             ,
             as
             it
             exceeds
             all
             the
             Regions
             of
             the
             world
             for
             store
             of
             waters
             ,
             except
             in
             some
             parts
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             sands
             and
             desart
             Countries
             ,
             as
             wee
             finde
             likewise
             in
             some
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             .
             As
             for
             water
             from
             Heaven
             ,
             wee
             have
             alreadie
             shewen
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             great
             aboundance
             of
             raine
             ,
             snow
             and
             haile
             ,
             which
             especially
             abound
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Peru.
             But
             as
             for
             land-waters
             ,
             as
             rivers
             ,
             fountaines
             ,
             brookes
             ,
             springs
             ,
             floods
             ,
             and
             lakes
             ,
             I
             have
             not
             spoken
             thereof
             till
             now
             ;
             yet
             being
             an
             ordinarie
             thing
             ,
             that
             the
             waters
             below
             have
             a
             correspondencie
             with
             them
             above
             ,
             wee
             must
             not
             imagine
             that
             there
             can
             bee
             any
             want
             :
             and
             in
             trueth
             there
             is
             so
             great
             store
             of
             springs
             and
             fountaines
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             not
             finde
             in
             any
             Region
             or
             Countrie
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             so
             many
             lakes
             ,
             marishes
             ,
             and
             such
             store
             of
             rivers
             ,
             for
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             America
             is
             almost
             inhabitable
             through
             too
             great
             aboundance
             of
             waters
             :
             for
             that
             the
             rivers
             swelled
             with
             the
             great
             Raines
             in
             Summer
             ,
             doe
             often
             overflow
             their
             banckes
             ,
             with
             such
             furie
             ,
             as
             they
             breake
             all
             they
             incounter
             :
             and
             in
             many
             places
             they
             cannot
             passe
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             mudde
             and
             myre
             of
             marishes
             and
             vallies
             :
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             
             those
             that
             live
             neere
             to
             Paraguen
             ,
             (
             whereof
             wee
             have
             made
             mention
             ,
             )
             foreseeing
             the
             rising
             of
             the
             River
             before
             it
             comes
             ,
             put
             themselves
             and
             their
             goods
             into
             Canoes
             ,
             and
             so
             preserve
             themselves
             and
             their
             goods
             ,
             f●oating
             vp
             and
             downe
             ,
             almost
             for
             the
             space
             of
             three
             moneths
             :
             and
             when
             the
             River
             is
             returned
             within
             her
             boundes
             ,
             then
             they
             goe
             to
             their
             houses
             ,
             still
             wette
             and
             dropping
             with
             the
             ●●ood
             .
             And
             this
             River
             is
             so
             great
             ,
             as
             
               Nile
               ,
               Ganges
            
             &
             Euphrates
             all
             together
             cannot
             equall
             it
             .
             But
             what
             shall
             we
             say
             of
             the
             great
             river
             of
             Magdalaine
             ,
             which
             falles
             into
             the
             sea
             betwixt
             S.
             Martha
             and
             Carthagene
             ,
             and
             with
             reason
             is
             called
             the
             great
             river
             ?
             Sailing
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             I
             was
             amazed
             to
             see
             her
             streame
             (
             which
             was
             very
             cleere
             )
             runne
             ten
             leagues
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             being
             in
             breadth
             above
             two
             leagues
             ,
             not
             mingling
             no●
             vanquished
             with
             the
             violent
             waves
             of
             the
             Ocean
             .
             But
             if
             we
             shall
             speake
             more
             of
             rivers
             ,
             that
             great
             floud
             called
             by
             some
             ,
             the
             river
             of
             Amazons
             ,
             by
             others
             Marannon
             ,
             and
             by
             some
             ,
             the
             river
             of
             Orellana
             ,
             which
             our
             Spaniards
             sailed
             in
             their
             discoveries
             ,
             ought
             to
             blemish
             all
             the
             rest
             ;
             and
             in
             truth
             I
             am
             in
             doubt
             whither
             I
             may
             tearme
             it
             a
             river
             ,
             or
             a
             sea
             .
             It
             flowes
             from
             the
             mountaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             from
             whence
             it
             recei●es
             a
             great
             aboundance
             of
             water
             ,
             both
             of
             raine
             and
             of
             rivers
             ,
             which
             it
             gathereth
             into
             it
             ;
             then
             passing
             by
             the
             great
             plaines
             of
             
               Pautiti
               ,
               Dorado
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Amazons
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             it
             falles
             into
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             almost
             right
             against
             the
             ●land
             of
             Marguerite
             and
             Trinidado
             .
             It
             hath
             so
             large
             &
             broad
             a
             channel
             ,
             specially
             in
             the
             last
             third
             part
             of
             her
             length
             ,
             as
             it
             contains
             in
             it
             many
             great
             ●lands
             .
             And
             that
             which
             seemes
             incredible
             ,
             when
             you
             saile
             through
             the
             midst
             of
             it
             ,
             you
             shall
             see
             nothing
             but
             aire
             and
             water
             .
             They
             say
             moreover
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             midst
             you
             cannot
             see
             nor
             discover
             with
             the
             eye
             ,
             many
             great
             
             and
             high
             mountaines
             which
             are
             vpon
             the
             bankes
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             her
             great
             bredth
             .
             We
             have
             learned
             from
             credible
             persons
             ,
             the
             great
             and
             wonderfull
             bredth
             of
             this
             river
             (
             which
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             deserves
             well
             the
             name
             of
             Empresse
             and
             Queene
             of
             all
             flouds
             ,
             )
             which
             was
             by
             the
             report
             of
             a
             brother
             of
             our
             company
             ,
             who
             being
             then
             yong
             ,
             sailed
             it
             in
             the
             company
             of
             
               Peter
               d'Orsua
            
             ,
             with
             whom
             hee
             was
             present
             at
             all
             the
             adventures
             of
             this
             strange
             entrie
             and
             discoverie
             ;
             and
             at
             the
             seditious
             and
             pernitious
             acts
             of
             that
             wicked
             
               Diego
               d'
               Aguirra
            
             ,
             from
             the
             which
             God
             delivered
             him
             to
             place
             him
             in
             our
             company
             .
             Such
             are
             the
             rivers
             in
             that
             region
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             and
             the
             drie
             &
             parcht
             vp
             countrie
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             Aristotle
             and
             the
             Ancients
             affirmed
             there
             were
             neither
             waters
             ,
             nor
             pastures
             .
             But
             seeing
             I
             have
             made
             mention
             of
             the
             river
             of
             Marannon
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             abundance
             of
             the
             waters
             that
             are
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             to
             speake
             somewhat
             of
             that
             great
             Lake
             which
             they
             call
             Titicaca
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Collao
             .
             There
             are
             above
             ten
             great
             rivers
             which
             loose
             themselves
             entring
             into
             that
             Lake
             ,
             and
             yet
             hath
             it
             no
             issue
             but
             one
             small
             current
             of
             water
             ,
             although
             some
             hold
             it
             to
             be
             very
             deepe
             ,
             and
             of
             such
             a
             fashion
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             build
             a
             bridge
             over
             it
             ,
             for
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             neither
             can
             they
             passe
             it
             by
             boate
             for
             the
             violence
             of
             the
             current
             .
             They
             passe
             it
             by
             an
             artificiall
             and
             notable
             practice
             ,
             peculiar
             to
             the
             Indians
             ,
             with
             a
             bridge
             of
             straw
             laied
             vpon
             the
             water
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             being
             of
             so
             light
             a
             substance
             )
             sinkes
             not
             ,
             and
             yet
             this
             passage
             is
             very
             easie
             and
             safe
             .
             This
             Lake
             containes
             almost
             foure
             score
             leagues
             ,
             thirtie
             five
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             fifteene
             in
             bredth
             at
             the
             largest
             place
             .
             There
             are
             many
             Ilands
             which
             in
             olde
             time
             were
             inhabited
             and
             
             tilled
             ,
             but
             now
             lie
             waste
             .
             It
             brings
             forth
             a
             great
             aboundance
             of
             reedes
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             call
             Totora
             ,
             which
             serves
             them
             to
             a
             thousand
             vses
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             meate
             for
             swine
             ,
             for
             horses
             ,
             and
             for
             men
             ,
             they
             make
             houses
             therewith
             ,
             fire
             and
             barkes
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             the
             Vros
             in
             this
             their
             Totora
             finde
             all
             they
             have
             neede
             of
             .
             These
             Vros
             be
             such
             dull
             and
             brutish
             people
             ,
             as
             they
             esteeme
             not
             themselves
             men
             .
             It
             is
             reported
             of
             them
             ,
             that
             being
             demanded
             of
             what
             nation
             they
             were
             ?
             They
             answered
             ,
             they
             were
             not
             men
             ,
             but
             Vros
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             some
             kinde
             of
             beastes
             .
             There
             are
             whole
             villages
             of
             these
             Vros
             inhabiting
             in
             the
             Lake
             in
             their
             boates
             of
             Totora
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             tied
             together
             and
             fastened
             to
             some
             rocke
             ,
             and
             often
             times
             the
             whole
             village
             changeth
             from
             place
             to
             place
             .
             So
             as
             hee
             that
             would
             seeke
             them
             now
             whereas
             they
             were
             yesterday
             ,
             shall
             finde
             no
             shew
             nor
             remainder
             of
             them
             ,
             or
             of
             their
             village
             .
             The
             current
             or
             issue
             of
             this
             Lake
             ,
             having
             runne
             above
             fiftie
             leagues
             ,
             makes
             another
             Lake
             ,
             but
             lesse
             then
             the
             first
             which
             they
             call
             Paria
             ,
             and
             containes
             in
             it
             some
             small
             Ilands
             ,
             but
             they
             finde
             no
             issue
             thereof
             .
             Some
             imagine
             it
             runnes
             vnder
             the
             ground
             ,
             &
             that
             it
             falles
             into
             the
             South
             sea
             ;
             giving
             out
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             branch
             of
             a
             river
             which
             they
             see
             rise
             and
             enter
             into
             the
             sea
             neere
             the
             banke
             ,
             having
             no
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Spring
             .
             But
             contrariwise
             ,
             I
             beleeve
             that
             the
             waters
             of
             this
             Lake
             ,
             dissolve
             and
             are
             dispearsed
             within
             the
             Lake
             it selfe
             through
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             This
             discourse
             seemes
             sufficient
             to
             prove
             ,
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             reason
             to
             holde
             ,
             that
             the
             middle
             region
             was
             inhabitable
             for
             the
             defect
             of
             waters
             ,
             seeing
             there
             is
             such
             store
             both
             from
             heaven
             and
             on
             the
             earth
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Shewing
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             Sunne
             without
             the
             Tropicks
             ,
             causeth
             greatest
             quantitie
             of
             waters
             when
             it
             is
             farthest
             off
             ;
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             within
             them
             it
             breedeth
             most
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             neerest
             .
             
               CHAP.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             COnsidering
             with
             my selfe
             often
             times
             ,
             what
             should
             cause
             the
             Equinoctial
             to
             be
             so
             moist
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ;
             to
             refute
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             I
             finde
             no
             other
             reason
             ,
             but
             the
             great
             force
             of
             the
             sunne
             in
             those
             partes
             ,
             whereby
             it
             drawes
             vnto
             it
             a
             great
             aboundance
             of
             vapors
             from
             out
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             which
             in
             those
             parts
             is
             very
             great
             and
             spatious
             :
             and
             having
             drawne
             vnto
             it
             this
             great
             aboundance
             of
             vapours
             ,
             doth
             suddenly
             dissolve
             them
             into
             raine
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             approoved
             by
             many
             tryed
             experiences
             ,
             that
             the
             raine
             and
             great
             stormes
             from
             heaven
             proceed
             from
             the
             violent
             heat
             of
             the
             Sunne
             :
             first
             (
             as
             we
             have
             said
             before
             )
             it
             raines
             in
             those
             countries
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Sunne
             casts
             his
             beames
             directly
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             at
             which
             time
             he
             hath
             most
             force
             :
             but
             when
             the
             Sun
             retyres
             ,
             the
             heat
             is
             moderate
             ,
             and
             then
             there
             falls
             no
             raine
             :
             whereby
             we
             may
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             force
             and
             heat
             of
             the
             Sunne
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             raine
             in
             those
             Countries
             .
             Moreover
             we
             observe
             ,
             both
             in
             Peru
             ,
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             that
             the
             raine
             doth
             vsually
             fall
             in
             after-noone
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             sunne-beames
             are
             in
             their
             greatest
             force
             ,
             being
             strange
             to
             see
             it
             raine
             in
             the
             morning
             .
             And
             therefore
             travellers
             fore-seeing
             it
             ,
             begin
             their
             iourneyes
             earely
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             end
             and
             rest
             before
             noone
             ,
             for
             they
             hold
             that
             commonly
             it
             raines
             after
             noone
             .
             Such
             as
             have
             frequented
             and
             travelled
             those
             Countri●s
             ,
             can
             sufficiently
             speake
             thereof
             .
             And
             there
             are
             ,
             that
             (
             having
             made
             some
             abode
             there
             )
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             
             greatest
             aboundance
             of
             raine
             is
             ,
             when
             the
             Moone
             is
             at
             the
             full
             ;
             but
             to
             say
             the
             trueth
             ,
             I
             could
             never
             make
             sufficient
             proofe
             thereof
             ,
             although
             I
             have
             observed
             it
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             dayes
             ,
             the
             yeere
             and
             the
             moneths
             ,
             shew
             the
             trueth
             hereof
             ,
             that
             the
             violent
             heate
             of
             the
             sunne
             causeth
             the
             raine
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             :
             experience
             teacheth
             vs
             the
             like
             in
             artificiall
             thinges
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Limbecke
             ,
             wherein
             they
             draw
             waters
             from
             hearbs
             &
             flowers
             ;
             for
             the
             vehemencie
             of
             the
             fire
             forceth
             and
             driveth
             vp
             an
             aboundance
             of
             vapours
             ,
             which
             being
             pressed
             ,
             and
             finding
             no
             issue
             ,
             are
             converted
             into
             liquor
             and
             water
             .
             The
             like
             wee
             see
             in
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             which
             wee
             refine
             with
             quicke-silver
             ,
             the
             fire
             being
             small
             and
             slow
             ,
             wee
             draw
             out
             almost
             nothing
             of
             the
             quicke-silver
             ,
             but
             if
             it
             bee
             quicke
             and
             violent
             ,
             it
             doth
             greatly
             evaporate
             the
             quick-silver
             ,
             which
             incountring
             the
             head
             above
             ,
             doth
             presently
             turne
             into
             liquor
             ,
             and
             begins
             to
             drop
             downe
             :
             Even
             so
             the
             violent
             heate
             of
             the
             sunne
             produceth
             these
             two
             effects
             ,
             when
             it
             finds
             matter
             disposed
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             to
             draw
             vp
             the
             vapours
             on
             high
             ,
             and
             to
             dissolve
             them
             presently
             ,
             and
             turne
             them
             into
             raine
             ,
             when
             there
             is
             any
             obstacle
             to
             consume
             them
             .
             And
             although
             these
             things
             seeme
             contrary
             ,
             that
             one
             sunne
             within
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             being
             neere
             ,
             should
             cause
             raine
             ,
             and
             without
             the
             Zone
             afarre
             off
             should
             breed
             the
             like
             effect
             ;
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             all
             well
             considered
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             contrarietie
             .
             A
             thousand
             effects
             in
             naturall
             causes
             proceede
             of
             contrarie
             things
             by
             divers
             meanes
             :
             we
             drie
             linnen
             by
             the
             fire
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             and
             yet
             the
             one
             heats
             and
             the
             other
             cooles
             ;
             pastures
             are
             dried
             and
             hardened
             by
             the
             sunne
             and
             with
             the
             frost
             ;
             moderate
             exercise
             provokes
             sleepe
             ,
             being
             too
             violent
             ,
             it
             hindereth
             :
             if
             you
             lay
             no
             wood
             on
             the
             fire
             ,
             it
             dieth
             ;
             if
             you
             lay
             on
             to●
             much
             ,
             it
             likewise
             quencheth
             :
             
             for
             the
             onely
             proportion
             entertaines
             and
             makes
             it
             to
             continue
             .
             To
             well
             discerne
             a
             thing
             ,
             it
             must
             not
             be
             too
             neere
             the
             eie
             ,
             nor
             too
             farre
             off
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             reasonable
             distance
             proportionable
             ;
             being
             too
             farre
             off
             from
             any
             thing
             ,
             we
             loose
             the
             sight
             ,
             and
             too
             neere
             likewise
             ,
             we
             cannot
             see
             it
             .
             If
             the
             sunne
             beames
             be
             weake
             ,
             they
             draw
             vp
             no
             fogge
             from
             the
             rivers
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             violent
             ,
             having
             drawne
             vp
             the
             vapours
             ,
             they
             presently
             dissolve
             and
             consume
             them
             ;
             but
             if
             the
             heat
             be
             moderate
             ,
             it
             drawes
             vp
             and
             preserves
             it
             :
             for
             this
             reason
             the
             vapours
             rise
             not
             commonly
             in
             the
             night
             ,
             nor
             at
             noone
             ,
             but
             in
             morning
             ,
             whenas
             the
             sunne
             begins
             to
             enter
             into
             his
             force
             .
             There
             are
             a
             thousand
             examples
             of
             naturall
             causes
             vpon
             this
             subiect
             ,
             which
             we
             see
             do
             often
             grow
             from
             contrarie
             things
             :
             whereby
             we
             must
             not
             wonder
             ,
             if
             the
             sunne
             being
             neere
             ,
             engenders
             raine
             ,
             and
             being
             farre
             off
             ,
             works
             the
             like
             effect
             :
             but
             being
             of
             a
             moderate
             and
             proportionable
             distance
             ,
             causeth
             none
             at
             all
             .
             Yet
             there
             remaines
             one
             doubt
             ,
             why
             the
             neerenes
             of
             the
             sunne
             causeth
             the
             raine
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             and
             without
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             farthest
             off
             .
             In
             my
             opinion
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             Winter
             without
             the
             Tropicks
             ,
             the
             sunne
             hath
             not
             force
             sufficient
             to
             consume
             the
             vapours
             which
             rise
             from
             the
             land
             and
             sea
             ;
             for
             these
             vapours
             grow
             in
             great
             aboundance
             in
             the
             cold
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             congealed
             and
             thickened
             by
             the
             extremitie
             of
             the
             cold
             ;
             and
             after
             being
             pressed
             ,
             they
             dissolve
             and
             turne
             into
             water
             .
             Therefore
             in
             Winter
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             farthest
             off
             ,
             the
             daies
             short
             ,
             and
             the
             nights
             long
             ,
             his
             heat
             hath
             small
             force
             :
             but
             when
             the
             sunne
             approacheth
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             summer
             time
             ,
             his
             force
             is
             such
             ,
             as
             it
             drawes
             vp
             the
             vapors
             ,
             and
             suddenly
             consumes
             and
             disperseth
             them
             ;
             for
             the
             heat
             and
             the
             length
             of
             the
             
             daies
             grow
             through
             the
             neerenes
             of
             the
             sunne
             .
             But
             within
             the
             Tropickes
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             the
             far
             distance
             of
             the
             sunne
             workes
             the
             same
             effects
             that
             the
             neerenes
             doth
             without
             the
             Tropiks
             ;
             by
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             it
             raines
             no
             more
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             farre
             off
             ,
             then
             without
             the
             Tropicks
             when
             it
             is
             neerest
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             this
             approaching
             and
             rety●ing
             ,
             the
             sunne
             remaines
             alwaies
             in
             one
             distance
             whence
             proceedes
             this
             effect
             of
             cleerenes
             .
             But
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             in
             the
             period
             of
             his
             force
             in
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             cast
             his
             beames
             directly
             vpon
             the
             inhabitants
             heads
             ,
             there
             is
             neither
             cleerenes
             nor
             drienes
             ,
             as
             it
             seems
             there
             should
             be
             ,
             but
             rather
             great
             and
             strange
             showers
             ;
             for
             that
             by
             this
             violent
             heat
             ,
             he
             drawes
             vp
             suddenly
             a
             great
             aboundance
             of
             vapours
             from
             the
             Earth
             and
             Ocean
             ,
             which
             are
             so
             thicke
             ,
             as
             the
             winde
             ,
             not
             able
             easily
             to
             disperse
             them
             ,
             they
             melt
             into
             water
             ,
             which
             breedeth
             the
             cold
             raine
             in
             so
             great
             aboundance
             :
             for
             the
             excessive
             heat
             may
             soone
             draw
             vp
             many
             vapours
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             not
             so
             soone
             dissolved
             :
             and
             being
             gathered
             together
             through
             their
             great
             aboundance
             ,
             they
             melt
             and
             dissolve
             into
             water
             .
             The
             which
             we
             may
             easily
             discerne
             by
             this
             familiar
             example
             :
             rost
             a
             peece
             of
             porke
             ,
             mutton
             ,
             or
             veale
             ,
             if
             the
             fire
             be
             violent
             ,
             and
             the
             meate
             neere
             ,
             we
             see
             the
             fatte
             melts
             suddenly
             ,
             and
             droppes
             away
             ,
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             violent
             heat
             drawes
             forth
             the
             humour
             and
             fatte
             from
             the
             meate
             ,
             and
             being
             in
             great
             aboundance
             ,
             cannot
             dissolve
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             distills
             more
             away
             :
             But
             when
             the
             fire
             is
             moderate
             ,
             and
             the
             meat
             in
             an
             equall
             distance
             ,
             we
             see
             that
             it
             rostes
             hansomely
             ,
             and
             the
             fatte
             drops
             not
             too
             suddenly
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             moderate
             heat
             drawes
             out
             the
             moistnes
             which
             it
             consumes
             suddenly
             .
             And
             therefore
             Cookes
             make
             a
             moderate
             fire
             ,
             
             and
             lay
             not
             their
             meate
             too
             neere
             nor
             too
             farre
             off
             ,
             lest
             it
             melt
             away
             .
             The
             like
             may
             be
             seene
             in
             another
             experience
             in
             candles
             of
             tallow
             or
             waxe
             ,
             if
             the
             wike
             bee
             great
             ,
             it
             melts
             the
             tallow
             or
             the
             waxe
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             heat
             cannot
             consume
             the
             moistnes
             which
             riseth
             ,
             but
             if
             the
             flame
             be
             proporcionable
             ,
             the
             waxe
             melts
             nor
             droppes
             not
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             flame
             doth
             waste
             it
             by
             little
             and
             little
             as
             it
             riseth
             .
             The
             which
             seemeth
             to
             me
             the
             true
             reason
             ,
             why
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             and
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             the
             violence
             of
             the
             heat
             doth
             cause
             raine
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             other
             Regions
             growes
             through
             want
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             wee
             should
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             which
             hath
             been
             formerly
             spoken
             of
             the
             burning
             
               Zone
               .
               CHAP.
               8.
            
             
          
           
             IF
             in
             naturall
             and
             phisicall
             things
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             seeke
             out
             infallible
             and
             mathematicall
             rules
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             is
             ordinarie
             and
             tried
             by
             experience
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             most
             perfect
             rule
             ,
             wee
             must
             then
             beleeve
             what
             wee
             have
             said
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             more
             humiditie
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             then
             in
             other
             Regions
             ;
             and
             that
             it
             raines
             lesse
             there
             ,
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             neerest
             ,
             must
             be
             taken
             and
             vnderstood
             after
             one
             sort
             ,
             as
             in
             truth
             it
             is
             the
             most
             common
             and
             ordinarie
             .
             But
             this
             is
             not
             to
             hinder
             the
             exceptions
             which
             nature
             hath
             given
             to
             this
             rule
             ,
             making
             some
             Regions
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             extreamely
             drie
             .
             The
             which
             is
             reported
             of
             Ethiopia
             ,
             and
             wee
             have
             seene
             it
             in
             a
             great
             part
             of
             Peru
             ,
             where
             all
             that
             land
             or
             coast
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Plaines
             ,
             wants
             raine
             ,
             yea
             ,
             land
             waters
             ,
             except
             some
             vallies
             ,
             where
             rivers
             fall
             from
             the
             mountaines
             ;
             the
             rest
             is
             a
             sandie
             and
             barren
             soile
             ,
             where
             you
             shall
             hardly
             finde
             any
             springs
             ,
             but
             some
             deepe
             
             welles
             .
             But
             with
             the
             helpe
             of
             God
             ,
             wee
             will
             shew
             the
             reason
             why
             it
             raineth
             not
             in
             these
             Plaines
             (
             the
             which
             many
             demand
             ;
             )
             for
             now
             I
             onely
             pretend
             to
             shew
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             many
             exceptions
             to
             naturall
             rules
             ,
             whereby
             it
             may
             happen
             ,
             that
             in
             some
             part
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             it
             raines
             not
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             neerest
             ,
             but
             being
             farthest
             off
             ,
             although
             vnto
             this
             daie
             I
             have
             neither
             seene
             nor
             heard
             of
             it
             :
             but
             if
             it
             be
             so
             ,
             wee
             must
             attribute
             it
             to
             the
             particular
             qualitie
             of
             the
             earth
             :
             and
             also
             ,
             if
             sometimes
             the
             contrarie
             doth
             chance
             ,
             we
             must
             have
             regard
             that
             in
             naturall
             things
             there
             happens
             many
             contrarieties
             and
             le●s
             ,
             whereby
             they
             change
             and
             dissolve
             one
             another
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             the
             sunne
             will
             cause
             raine
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             winds
             will
             hinder
             it
             ,
             or
             else
             cause
             more
             aboundance
             then
             hath
             been
             vsuall
             .
             The
             windes
             have
             their
             properties
             and
             divers
             beginnings
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             they
             worke
             divers
             effects
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             most
             commonly
             contrarie
             to
             that
             which
             the
             order
             &
             season
             requires
             .
             Seeing
             then
             in
             all
             places
             we
             see
             great
             varieties
             in
             the
             yeere
             ,
             which
             proceedes
             from
             the
             divers
             motions
             and
             aspectes
             of
             Planets
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             out
             of
             purpose
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             wee
             may
             see
             and
             observe
             some
             things
             contrarie
             to
             that
             we
             have
             tried
             .
             But
             to
             conclude
             ,
             that
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             is
             a
             certaine
             and
             vndoubted
             truth
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             great
             draught
             which
             the
             Ancients
             held
             to
             be
             in
             the
             middle
             region
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             is
             nothing
             at
             all
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             there
             is
             great
             humiditie
             ,
             and
             then
             it
             raines
             most
             ,
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             neerest
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             That
             the
             Burning
             Zone
             is
             not
             violently
             hotte
             ,
             but
             moderate
             .
             CHAP.
             9.
             
          
           
             HItherto
             wee
             haue
             treated
             of
             the
             humiditie
             of
             the
             Burning
             Zone
             ,
             now
             it
             shall
             be
             fit
             to
             discourse
             of
             the
             other
             two
             qualities
             ,
             Hotte
             ,
             and
             Colde
             .
             We
             have
             shewed
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             this
             Discourse
             ,
             how
             the
             Ancients
             held
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             was
             hotte
             and
             exceeding
             drie
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             not
             so
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             hote
             and
             moist
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             greatest
             part
             ,
             the
             heat
             is
             not
             excessive
             ,
             but
             rather
             moderate
             ,
             which
             some
             would
             hold
             incredible
             ,
             if
             we
             had
             not
             tried
             it
             .
             When
             I
             passed
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             I
             will
             tell
             what
             chaunced
             vnto
             mee
             :
             having
             read
             what
             Poets
             and
             Philosophers
             write
             of
             the
             b●●ning
             Zone
             ,
             I
             perswaded
             my selfe
             ,
             that
             comming
             to
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             I
             should
             not
             indure
             the
             violent
             heate
             ,
             but
             it
             fell
             out
             otherwise
             ;
             for
             when
             I
             passed
             ,
             which
             was
             when
             the
             sun
             was
             there
             for
             Zenith
             ,
             being
             entered
             into
             Aries
             ,
             in
             the
             moneth
             of
             March
             ,
             I
             felt
             so
             great
             cold
             ,
             as
             I
             was
             forced
             to
             go
             into
             the
             sunne
             to
             warme
             me
             ,
             what
             could
             I
             else
             do
             then
             ,
             but
             laugh
             at
             Aristotles
             Meteors
             and
             his
             Philosophie
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             and
             at
             that
             season
             ,
             whenas
             all
             should
             be
             scorched
             with
             heat
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             rules
             ,
             I
             ,
             and
             all
             my
             companions
             were
             a
             colde
             ?
             In
             truth
             there
             is
             no
             region
             in
             the
             world
             more
             pleasant
             and
             temperate
             ,
             then
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             not
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             an
             equall
             temperature
             ,
             but
             have
             great
             diversities
             .
             The
             burning
             Zone
             in
             some
             parts
             is
             very
             temperate
             ,
             as
             in
             Quitto
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             plaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             in
             some
             partes
             verie
             colde
             ,
             as
             at
             Potozi
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             very
             hote
             ,
             as
             in
             
               Ethiopia
               ,
               Bresill
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Molucques
             .
             This
             diversitie
             being
             knowne
             and
             certaine
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             we
             must
             of
             force
             ,
             seeke
             out
             another
             cause
             of
             cold
             and
             heat
             
             then
             the
             sunne
             beames
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             one
             season
             of
             theyeere
             ,
             and
             in
             places
             of
             one
             height
             and
             distance
             ,
             from
             the
             Pole
             and
             Equinoctiall
             we
             finde
             so
             great
             diversitie
             ,
             that
             some
             are
             invironed
             with
             heat
             ,
             some
             with
             cold
             ,
             
             and
             others
             tempered
             with
             a
             moderate
             heat
             .
             Plato
             placeth
             his
             most
             renowmed
             Atlantike
             Iland
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ;
             then
             he
             saieth
             ,
             that
             at
             certaine
             seasons
             of
             the
             yeere
             ,
             it
             hath
             the
             sunne
             for
             Zenith
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             was
             very
             temperate
             ,
             fruitfull
             ,
             and
             rich
             .
             Plinie
             saieth
             ,
             that
             Taprobana
             (
             which
             at
             this
             day
             they
             call
             Sumatra
             ,
             )
             is
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             
             as
             in
             effect
             it
             is
             ,
             writing
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             onely
             happie
             and
             rich
             ,
             but
             also
             peopled
             with
             men
             and
             beasts
             :
             whereby
             we
             may
             easily
             iudge
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             Ancients
             held
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             to
             be
             insupportable
             ,
             yet
             might
             they
             well
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             so
             great
             as
             they
             had
             spoken
             .
             The
             most
             excellent
             Astrologer
             and
             Cosmographer
             Ptolome
             ,
             and
             the
             worthie
             Philosopher
             and
             Physitian
             Avicen
             ;
             were
             of
             a
             better
             resolution
             ,
             being
             both
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             there
             were
             verie
             commodious
             habitations
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             heat
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             is
             temperate
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             rayne
             and
             the
             shortnes
             of
             the
             dayes
             .
             CHAP.
             10.
             
          
           
             SInce
             the
             discoverie
             of
             this
             newe
             worlde
             ,
             wee
             have
             found
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             which
             late
             Writers
             have
             held
             for
             trueth
             .
             But
             it
             is
             a
             naturall
             thing
             ,
             whenas
             any
             matter
             beyond
             our
             conceit
             is
             made
             knowne
             vnto
             vs
             by
             experience
             ,
             we
             by
             and
             by
             examine
             the
             cause
             .
             Therefore
             wee
             desire
             to
             know
             the
             reason
             ,
             why
             a
             Region
             
             where
             the
             sunne
             approacheth
             neerest
             ,
             is
             not
             onely
             temperate
             ,
             but
             in
             many
             parts
             cold
             .
             Considering
             this
             matter
             generally
             ,
             I
             finde
             two
             general
             causes
             ,
             which
             maketh
             this
             Region
             temperate
             :
             the
             one
             is
             that
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             for
             that
             this
             Region
             is
             very
             moist
             and
             subiect
             to
             raine
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             but
             the
             rayne
             doth
             refresh
             it
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             water
             is
             by
             nature
             cold
             ;
             and
             although
             by
             the
             force
             of
             the
             fire
             it
             be
             made
             hotte
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             temper
             this
             heat
             proceeding
             onely
             from
             the
             sunne-beames
             .
             The
             which
             we
             see
             by
             experience
             in
             the
             inner
             Arabia
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             burnt
             with
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             having
             no
             showres
             to
             temper
             the
             violence
             thereof
             .
             The
             clouds
             and
             mists
             are
             the
             cause
             that
             the
             sunne
             offends
             not
             so
             much
             ,
             and
             the
             showers
             that
             fall
             from
             them
             ,
             refresh
             both
             the
             ayre
             and
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             moisten
             likewise
             how
             hot
             soever
             it
             be
             .
             They
             drinke
             raine
             water
             ,
             and
             it
             quencheth
             the
             thirst
             ,
             as
             our
             men
             have
             well
             tried
             ,
             having
             no
             other
             to
             drinke
             .
             So
             as
             reason
             and
             experience
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             raine
             of
             it selfe
             doth
             temper
             the
             heat
             ;
             and
             having
             by
             this
             meanes
             shewed
             ,
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             is
             much
             subiect
             vnto
             raine
             ,
             it
             appeares
             that
             there
             is
             matter
             in
             it
             ,
             to
             temper
             the
             violence
             of
             the
             heat
             .
             To
             this
             I
             will
             adde
             an
             other
             reason
             ,
             which
             deserves
             to
             be
             knowne
             ,
             not
             only
             for
             this
             matter
             ,
             but
             for
             many
             others
             ;
             for
             although
             the
             Sunne
             be
             very
             hotte
             and
             burning
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             long
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             day
             being
             there
             shorter
             ,
             and
             of
             lesse
             continuance
             ,
             it
             causeth
             not
             so
             violent
             a
             heate
             ;
             the
             which
             it
             behooves
             to
             specifie
             more
             particularly
             .
             Such
             as
             are
             practised
             in
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Spheare
             teach
             very
             well
             ,
             that
             the
             more
             the
             Zodiake
             is
             oblique
             and
             traversing
             our
             Hemisphere
             ,
             the
             more
             vnequall
             are
             the
             daies
             and
             nights
             ;
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             where
             the
             sphere
             is
             straight
             ,
             and
             the
             signes
             
             mount
             directly
             ,
             there
             the
             dayes
             and
             nights
             are
             equal●
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             all
             that
             Region
             which
             is
             betweene
             the
             two
             Tropicks
             ,
             there
             is
             lesse
             inequality
             then
             without
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             more
             we
             approch
             the
             Line
             ,
             the
             lesse
             inequalitie
             we
             finde
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             have
             tryed
             in
             those
             parts
             .
             Those
             of
             Quitto
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             are
             vnder
             the
             line
             ;
             have
             not
             throughout
             the
             whole
             yeere
             ,
             the
             dayes
             and
             nights
             more
             short
             at
             one
             season
             ,
             then
             at
             an
             other
             ,
             but
             are
             continually
             equall
             .
             Those
             of
             Lima
             beeing
             distant
             almost
             twelve
             degrees
             ,
             finde
             some
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             dayes
             and
             the
             nights
             ,
             but
             very
             little
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             December
             and
             Ianuarie
             ,
             the
             dayes
             increase
             an
             houre
             or
             little
             lesse
             .
             Those
             of
             PotoZi
             finde
             much
             more
             difference
             ,
             both
             in
             winter
             and
             in
             summer
             ,
             being
             almost
             vnder
             the
             Tropicke
             .
             But
             those
             that
             live
             without
             the
             Tropikes
             ,
             find
             the
             dayes
             in
             winter
             shorter
             ,
             and
             in
             summer
             longer
             :
             the
             more
             remote
             they
             are
             from
             the
             Equinoctial
             and
             come
             neere
             the
             Pole
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             Germany
             and
             in
             England
             ,
             the
             daies
             are
             longer
             in
             summer
             ,
             then
             in
             Italie
             and
             in
             Spaine
             .
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             which
             the
             Sphere
             doth
             teach
             ,
             and
             experience
             doth
             plainely
             shew
             vs.
             We
             must
             adde
             an
             other
             proposition
             ,
             which
             is
             likewise
             true
             and
             very
             considerable
             for
             all
             the
             effectes
             of
             nature
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             perseverance
             and
             continuation
             of
             the
             efficient
             cause
             to
             worke
             and
             moove
             .
             This
             presupposed
             ,
             if
             any
             one
             demaund
             of
             me
             ,
             why
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             Line
             ,
             the
             heat
             is
             not
             so
             violent
             in
             summer
             ,
             as
             in
             some
             other
             Regions
             ,
             (
             as
             in
             Andelousiae
             in
             the
             moneths
             of
             Iuly
             and
             August
             )
             I
             will
             answere
             ,
             that
             in
             Andelousia
             the
             dayes
             are
             longer
             ,
             and
             the
             nights
             shorter
             ;
             and
             as
             the
             day
             being
             hot
             ,
             inflames
             and
             causeth
             heat
             ;
             so
             the
             nights
             being
             cold
             and
             moist
             ,
             give
             a
             refreshing
             .
             According
             to
             the
             which
             ,
             at
             Peru
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             such
             great
             heat
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             
             dayes
             in
             summer
             are
             not
             long
             ,
             nor
             the
             nights
             short
             ;
             so
             as
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             day
             is
             much
             tempered
             by
             the
             freshnesse
             of
             the
             night
             .
             And
             although
             the
             burning
             Zone
             be
             neerer
             the
             Sunne
             then
             all
             other
             Regions
             ,
             yet
             doth
             not
             the
             heate
             continue
             there
             so
             long
             .
             It
             is
             a
             naturall
             thing
             ,
             that
             a
             small
             fire
             continued
             ,
             heats
             more
             ,
             then
             a
             greater
             that
             lastes
             but
             little
             ,
             especially
             if
             there
             bee
             any
             thing
             to
             refresh
             it
             .
             He
             therefore
             that
             shal
             put
             these
             two
             properties
             of
             the
             Zone
             in
             one
             ballance
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             most
             rainie
             in
             the
             time
             of
             greatest
             heate
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             dayes
             are
             shortest
             there
             ,
             he
             shall
             perchance
             finde
             them
             to
             equall
             the
             other
             two
             contrarieties
             ,
             which
             bee
             ,
             that
             the
             Sunne
             is
             neerer
             and
             more
             directly
             over
             them
             then
             in
             other
             Regions
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             there
             be
             other
             reasons
             besides
             the
             former
             mentioned
             ,
             which
             shew
             ,
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             is
             temperate
             ,
             especially
             alongst
             the
             Ocean
             .
             
               CHAP.
               11.
            
             
          
           
             BEing
             a
             thing
             concluded
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             forenamed
             properties
             are
             common
             and
             vniversal
             to
             all
             the
             region
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             :
             and
             yet
             in
             the
             same
             there
             are
             found
             some
             places
             very
             hote
             ,
             and
             other
             exceeding
             colde
             :
             Also
             ,
             that
             the
             temperature
             is
             not
             there
             equall
             in
             all
             places
             ,
             but
             vnder
             one
             climate
             ,
             one
             part
             is
             hote
             ,
             another
             colde
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             temperate
             ,
             all
             at
             one
             season
             ;
             we
             are
             forced
             to
             seeke
             out
             other
             reasons
             ,
             whence
             this
             great
             diversitie
             should
             proceede
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             .
             Discoursing
             therefore
             vpon
             this
             question
             ,
             I
             do
             finde
             threeapparant
             and
             certaine
             causes
             ,
             and
             a
             fourth
             more
             obscure
             and
             darke
             .
             The
             apparant
             and
             certaine
             causes
             be
             :
             The
             first
             is
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             the
             second
             ,
             the
             scituation
             
             of
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             ,
             the
             nature
             and
             propertie
             of
             many
             and
             sundry
             windes
             .
             Besides
             these
             three
             which
             I
             holde
             for
             manifest
             ,
             I
             beleeve
             there
             is
             a
             fourth
             hidden
             and
             lesse
             apparant
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             propertie
             of
             the
             same
             land
             inhabited
             ,
             and
             the
             particular
             influence
             of
             the
             heavens
             .
             Whoso
             woulde
             neerely
             consider
             the
             causes
             and
             generall
             reasons
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             shall
             finde
             them
             insufficient
             for
             the
             full
             resolution
             of
             this
             point
             ,
             observing
             that
             which
             daily
             happens
             in
             diverse
             partes
             of
             the
             Equinoctiall
             .
             Manomotapa
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             kingdom
             of
             
               Prester
               Iean
            
             are
             seated
             vnder
             the
             line
             ,
             or
             very
             neere
             .
             In
             which
             regions
             they
             endure
             excessive
             heate
             ,
             and
             the
             men
             are
             all
             blacke
             ;
             the
             which
             is
             not
             onely
             in
             those
             parts
             of
             the
             land
             farre
             from
             the
             sea
             ,
             but
             also
             in
             Ilands
             invironed
             with
             the
             sea
             .
             The
             Iland
             of
             Saint
             Thomas
             is
             vnder
             the
             Line
             ,
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Cape
               Verd
            
             are
             very
             neere
             ,
             and
             both
             in
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             are
             violent
             heates
             :
             and
             the
             men
             are
             likewise
             blacke
             .
             Vnder
             the
             same
             line
             ,
             or
             very
             neere
             ,
             lies
             a
             part
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             new
             kingdome
             of
             Grenado
             ,
             which
             notwithstanding
             are
             very
             temperate
             Countries
             ,
             inclining
             rather
             to
             colde
             then
             heate
             ,
             and
             the
             inhabitants
             are
             white
             .
             The
             Country
             of
             Bresill
             is
             in
             the
             same
             distance
             from
             the
             line
             with
             Peru
             ,
             and
             yet
             both
             Bresill
             and
             all
             that
             coast
             is
             extreamely
             hot
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             in
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             is
             very
             temperate
             .
             I
             say
             then
             ,
             that
             whosoever
             would
             consider
             these
             differences
             ,
             and
             give
             a
             reason
             thereof
             ,
             cannot
             content
             himselfe
             with
             these
             generall
             rules
             before
             specified
             ,
             to
             proove
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             may
             be
             a
             temperate
             land
             .
             Among
             the
             speciall
             causes
             and
             reasons
             ,
             I
             have
             first
             placed
             the
             Sea
             ,
             for
             without
             doubt
             ,
             the
             neerenesse
             thereof
             doth
             helpe
             to
             temper
             and
             coole
             the
             heat
             :
             
             for
             although
             the
             water
             be
             salt
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             alwayes
             water
             ,
             whose
             nature
             is
             cold
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             remarkeable
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             the
             water
             cannot
             be
             made
             hot
             by
             the
             violence
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             as
             in
             rivers
             :
             finally
             ,
             even
             as
             salt-peeter
             (
             though
             it
             be
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             salt
             )
             hath
             a
             propertie
             to
             coole
             water
             ,
             even
             so
             we
             see
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             in
             some
             ports
             and
             havens
             ,
             the
             salt-water
             doth
             refresh
             ;
             the
             which
             wee
             have
             observed
             in
             that
             of
             Callao
             ,
             whereas
             they
             put
             the
             water
             or
             wine
             which
             they
             drinke
             ,
             into
             the
             Sea
             in
             flaggons
             to
             be
             refreshed
             ,
             whereby
             wee
             may
             vndoubtedly
             finde
             ,
             that
             the
             Ocean
             hath
             this
             propertie
             ,
             to
             temper
             and
             moderate
             the
             excessive
             heate
             :
             for
             this
             cause
             we
             feele
             greater
             heat
             at
             land
             then
             at
             sea
             ,
             
               Caeteris
               paribus
            
             ;
             and
             commonly
             Countries
             lying
             neere
             the
             sea
             ,
             are
             coooler
             then
             those
             that
             are
             farther
             off
             .
             
               Caeteris
               paribus
            
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             even
             so
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             lying
             very
             neere
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             wee
             may
             with
             reason
             say
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             receive
             a
             great
             benefite
             from
             the
             sea
             to
             temper
             the
             heat
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             highest
             landes
             are
             the
             coldest
             ,
             and
             the
             reason
             thereof
             .
             
               CHAP.
               12.
            
             
          
           
             BVt
             if
             we
             shall
             yet
             search
             more
             particularly
             ,
             we
             shall
             not
             finde
             in
             all
             this
             land
             an
             equall
             temperature
             of
             heate
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             in
             equal
             distance
             from
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             degree
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             some
             partes
             there
             is
             great
             heate
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             ,
             very
             little
             .
             Doubtlesse
             ,
             the
             cause
             thereof
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             is
             lower
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             higher
             ;
             which
             causeth
             that
             the
             one
             is
             hote
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             colde
             .
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             toppes
             of
             the
             
             mountaines
             are
             colder
             then
             in
             the
             bottome
             of
             the
             vallies
             ,
             the
             which
             proceedes
             ,
             not
             onely
             for
             that
             the
             sunne
             beames
             have
             greater
             repercussions
             vpon
             lower
             places
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             a
             great
             reason
             ;
             yet
             there
             is
             an
             other
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             ayre
             is
             colder
             when
             it
             is
             farthest
             from
             the
             ground
             .
             The
             Plaines
             of
             Collao
             at
             Peru
             &
             of
             Popaian
             in
             new
             Spaine
             make
             sufficient
             proofe
             hereof
             .
             For
             without
             al
             doubt
             those
             parts
             are
             high
             countries
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             cold
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             all
             invironed
             with
             high
             points
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             much
             subiect
             to
             the
             Sunne
             beames
             .
             But
             if
             we
             demand
             why
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             Plaines
             along
             the
             coast
             be
             very
             hote
             ,
             and
             the
             plaines
             of
             the
             same
             Countries
             of
             Peru
             and
             new
             Spaine
             be
             contrariwise
             colde
             ?
             In
             truth
             I
             see
             no
             other
             reason
             can
             be
             given
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             one
             is
             a
             lowe
             country
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             high
             .
             Experience
             dooth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             ayre
             is
             colder
             than
             the
             neather
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             more
             the
             mountaines
             approach
             to
             the
             middle
             ,
             the
             colder
             they
             are
             ,
             being
             covered
             with
             snow
             and
             frosts
             .
             Reason
             it selfe
             dooth
             yeelde
             to
             it
             .
             For
             if
             there
             be
             a
             sphere
             and
             region
             of
             fire
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             and
             the
             other
             Philosophers
             say
             ,
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             ayre
             must
             be
             most
             colde
             ,
             by
             Antiparistasis
             ,
             the
             colde
             being
             expelled
             and
             thickned
             there
             ,
             as
             in
             summer
             time
             we
             see
             in
             wells
             that
             are
             very
             deepe
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             the
             Philosophers
             affirme
             ,
             that
             the
             two
             extreame
             regions
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             that
             above
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             belowe
             ,
             are
             the
             hottest
             ,
             and
             the
             middle
             region
             more
             colde
             .
             If
             it
             be
             thus
             ,
             as
             experience
             doth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             we
             shall
             yet
             draw
             out
             another
             reason
             and
             notable
             argument
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             burning
             Zone
             is
             temperate
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Indies
             is
             a
             high
             countrey
             ,
             filled
             with
             many
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             by
             their
             neerenesse
             refresh
             the
             
             neighbour
             countries
             .
             You
             may
             continually
             see
             vppon
             the
             toppes
             of
             these
             mountaines
             ,
             snow
             ,
             haile
             and
             frozen
             waters
             ;
             and
             the
             cold
             so
             bitter
             ,
             as
             the
             grasse
             is
             all
             withered
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             men
             and
             beasts
             which
             passe
             that
             way
             ,
             are
             benummed
             with
             colde
             .
             This
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             :
             and
             it
             happens
             most
             commonly
             when
             they
             have
             the
             sunne
             for
             zenith
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             most
             certaine
             and
             conformable
             vnto
             reason
             ,
             that
             the
             mountaines
             are
             colder
             than
             the
             valleis
             and
             plaines
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             participate
             more
             of
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             colde
             .
             The
             cause
             why
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             ayre
             is
             more
             colde
             ,
             hath
             bin
             shewed
             before
             :
             for
             that
             the
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             next
             to
             the
             fiery
             exhalation
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             )
             is
             vpon
             the
             spheare
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             repells
             and
             thrustes
             backe
             all
             the
             colde
             ,
             the
             which
             retires
             it selfe
             into
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             by
             Antiparistasis
             ,
             as
             the
             Philosophers
             speake
             .
             Now
             if
             any
             one
             should
             question
             with
             me
             in
             this
             manner
             ;
             If
             it
             be
             so
             that
             the
             ayre
             is
             hot
             and
             moist
             ,
             as
             Aristotle
             holdes
             ,
             and
             as
             we
             commonly
             say
             ,
             whence
             then
             proceeds
             the
             cold
             which
             is
             congealed
             in
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             seeing
             it
             cannot
             come
             from
             the
             fierie
             spheare
             ?
             For
             if
             it
             come
             from
             the
             water
             ,
             or
             the
             earth
             ,
             
             by
             this
             reason
             the
             lower
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             should
             be
             colder
             than
             the
             middle
             .
          
           
             To
             answer
             truely
             what
             I
             thinke
             ,
             I
             will
             confesse
             ,
             that
             this
             Argument
             and
             Obiection
             is
             so
             difficult
             ,
             as
             I
             am
             almost
             ready
             to
             follow
             the
             opinion
             of
             such
             as
             reproove
             the
             qualities
             ,
             agreements
             and
             disagreements
             which
             Aristotle
             gives
             vnto
             the
             Elements
             ,
             saying
             they
             are
             but
             imaginations
             ,
             who
             for
             this
             occasion
             hold
             the
             aire
             to
             be
             colde
             by
             nature
             .
             And
             to
             this
             end
             they
             vse
             many
             arguments
             and
             reasons
             ,
             whereof
             we
             will
             propound
             one
             
             very
             familiar
             and
             well
             knowne
             ,
             leaving
             the
             rest
             aparte
             .
             In
             the
             canicular
             dayes
             we
             are
             accustomed
             to
             beate
             the
             ayre
             with
             a
             fanne
             ,
             and
             we
             finde
             that
             it
             doth
             refresh
             vs
             ;
             so
             as
             these
             Authors
             affirme
             ,
             that
             heate
             is
             no
             private
             property
             of
             any
             other
             Element
             ,
             but
             of
             fire
             only
             ,
             which
             is
             dispersed
             and
             mingled
             with
             all
             things
             (
             as
             the
             great
             Denis
             doth
             teach
             vs.
             )
             
             But
             whether
             it
             be
             so
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             (
             for
             I
             will
             not
             contradict
             Aristotle
             ,
             but
             in
             that
             which
             is
             most
             certaine
             )
             in
             the
             end
             they
             agree
             all
             ,
             that
             the
             middle
             region
             of
             the
             ayre
             is
             colder
             than
             the
             lowest
             next
             to
             the
             earth
             ,
             as
             experience
             dooth
             shew
             vs
             ;
             seeing
             that
             in
             this
             middle
             region
             are
             congealed
             ,
             snowe
             ,
             haile
             ,
             frosts
             ,
             and
             other
             signes
             of
             extreame
             colde
             .
             The
             middle
             region
             then
             which
             they
             call
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             having
             on
             the
             one
             side
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             other
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             we
             must
             hold
             them
             for
             sufficient
             causes
             to
             temper
             and
             coole
             the
             heate
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             colde
             windes
             be
             the
             principall
             cause
             to
             make
             the
             burning
             Zone
             temperate
             .
             
               CHAH.
               13.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             temperature
             of
             this
             region
             ought
             chiefly
             to
             be
             attributed
             to
             the
             property
             of
             the
             wind
             that
             blows
             in
             that
             country
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             pleasant
             and
             fresh
             .
             The
             providence
             of
             the
             great
             God
             Creator
             of
             al
             things
             hath
             bin
             such
             ,
             as
             he
             hath
             ordained
             fresh
             and
             coole
             windes
             in
             that
             region
             where
             the
             sunne
             makes
             his
             course
             (
             which
             seemes
             should
             be
             burnt
             vp
             )
             that
             by
             their
             coolenes
             the
             excessive
             heate
             of
             the
             sunne
             might
             be
             qualified
             .
             And
             they
             are
             not
             farre
             from
             apparance
             of
             reason
             ,
             which
             held
             that
             the
             earthly
             Paradise
             was
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             .
             If
             they
             had
             not
             deceived
             themselves
             in
             the
             cause
             
             of
             their
             opinion
             ,
             saying
             that
             the
             equalitie
             of
             the
             dayes
             and
             nights
             ,
             was
             sufficient
             of
             it selfe
             to
             make
             that
             Zone
             temperate
             ;
             to
             which
             opinion
             many
             others
             have
             beene
             opposite
             ,
             of
             which
             number
             was
             that
             renowmed
             Poet
             ,
             saying
             ;
             
               
                 That
                 coast
                 incessantly
                 by
                 hotte
                 beames
                 tyred
              
               
                 Of
                 Phoebus
                 ,
                 who
                 from
                 thence
                 never
                 retyred
                 .
              
            
          
           
             The
             coolenesse
             of
             the
             night
             then
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             moderate
             and
             to
             correct
             the
             violent
             heate
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ;
             but
             rather
             this
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             receives
             so
             sweet
             a
             temperature
             ,
             by
             the
             benefite
             of
             the
             fresh
             and
             pleasant
             aire
             ,
             as
             notwithstanding
             ,
             it
             were
             held
             by
             the
             Ancients
             to
             be
             more
             hotte
             then
             a
             burning
             furnace
             :
             yet
             those
             which
             inhabite
             there
             ,
             take
             it
             for
             a
             delightfull
             spring
             .
             It
             appeares
             by
             arguments
             and
             very
             apparant
             reasons
             ,
             that
             the
             cause
             heereof
             consistes
             principally
             in
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             winde
             .
             We
             see
             in
             one
             climate
             ,
             some
             regions
             and
             Citties
             hotter
             then
             others
             ,
             onely
             for
             that
             they
             feele
             lesse
             winde
             to
             refresh
             them
             .
             The
             like
             is
             in
             other
             Countries
             where
             no
             winde
             blowes
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             all
             on
             fire
             like
             vnto
             a
             furnace
             .
             There
             are
             many
             of
             these
             Villages
             and
             Townes
             in
             
               Bresill
               ,
               Ethiopia
            
             ,
             and
             Paraguen
             ,
             as
             every
             one
             knoweth
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             more
             considerable
             ;
             wee
             see
             these
             differences
             ,
             not
             only
             on
             the
             Land
             ,
             but
             also
             on
             the
             Sea
             :
             there
             are
             some
             seas
             where
             they
             feele
             great
             heat
             ,
             as
             they
             report
             of
             that
             of
             Mozambigus
             and
             Ormus
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Sea
             of
             Panama
             in
             the
             West
             :
             the
             which
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             engenders
             and
             brings
             forth
             great
             Lizards
             (
             called
             Cayamans
             ,
             )
             as
             also
             in
             the
             sea
             of
             Bresill
             .
             There
             are
             other
             seas
             in
             the
             same
             degree
             of
             height
             ,
             very
             colde
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             Peru
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             wee
             were
             a
             cold
             ,
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             before
             )
             when
             we
             first
             sailed
             it
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             March
             ,
             when
             the
             Sunne
             was
             directly
             
             over
             vs.
             In
             truth
             on
             this
             continent
             ,
             where
             the
             land
             and
             sea
             are
             of
             one
             sort
             ,
             wee
             cannot
             imagine
             any
             other
             cause
             of
             this
             so
             great
             a
             difference
             ,
             but
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             winde
             which
             doth
             refresh
             them
             .
             If
             wee
             shall
             neerely
             looke
             into
             the
             consideration
             of
             the
             winde
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             wee
             may
             resolve
             many
             doubts
             which
             some
             obiect
             ,
             and
             which
             seeme
             strange
             and
             wonderfull
             :
             wherefore
             the
             Sunne
             casting
             his
             beames
             vppon
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             and
             particularly
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             that
             more
             violently
             then
             in
             Spaine
             in
             the
             Canicular
             daies
             ,
             yet
             they
             defend
             the
             heat
             with
             a
             light
             covering
             ,
             so
             as
             with
             a
             slender
             covering
             of
             mats
             or
             straw
             ,
             they
             are
             better
             preserved
             from
             the
             heate
             ,
             then
             in
             Spaine
             vnder
             a
             roofe
             of
             wood
             ,
             or
             a
             vault
             of
             stone
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             why
             are
             not
             the
             nightes
             in
             summer
             at
             Peru
             ,
             as
             hotte
             and
             troublesome
             as
             in
             Spaine
             ?
             Wherefore
             on
             the
             highest
             tops
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             even
             amongst
             the
             heaps
             of
             snow
             ,
             you
             shall
             sometimes
             feele
             great
             and
             insupportable
             heat
             ?
             Wherefore
             in
             all
             the
             Province
             of
             Colao
             ,
             when
             ye
             come
             into
             the
             shade
             ,
             how
             little
             soever
             ,
             you
             feele
             cold
             :
             But
             comming
             into
             the
             Sunne
             beames
             ,
             you
             presently
             finde
             the
             heate
             excessive
             ?
             Why
             is
             all
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             being
             ful
             of
             sands
             ,
             very
             temperate
             ?
             And
             why
             is
             Potozi
             (
             distant
             from
             the
             silver
             Citie
             but
             eighteene
             leagues
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             degree
             )
             of
             so
             divers
             a
             temperature
             ,
             that
             the
             Countrie
             being
             extreamely
             colde
             ,
             it
             is
             wonderfully
             barren
             and
             drie
             ?
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             the
             silver
             Citie
             is
             temperate
             ,
             inclining
             vnto
             heat
             ,
             and
             hath
             a
             pleasant
             and
             fertil
             soile
             ?
             It
             is
             more
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             winde
             is
             the
             principall
             cause
             of
             these
             strange
             diversities
             ;
             for
             without
             the
             benefite
             of
             these
             coole
             windes
             ,
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             Sunne
             is
             such
             ,
             as
             (
             although
             it
             bee
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             snow
             ,
             )
             it
             burnes
             and
             sets
             all
             on
             fire
             :
             but
             when
             the
             coolenes
             of
             the
             
             aire
             returnes
             suddenly
             ,
             the
             heat
             is
             qualified
             how
             great
             soever
             it
             be
             :
             and
             whereas
             this
             coole
             winde
             raines
             ordinarie
             ,
             it
             keepes
             the
             grosse
             vapours
             and
             exhalations
             of
             the
             earth
             from
             gathering
             together
             ,
             which
             cause
             a
             heavie
             and
             troublesome
             heat
             :
             whereof
             we
             see
             the
             contrarie
             in
             Europe
             ,
             for
             by
             the
             exhalation
             of
             these
             vapours
             ,
             the
             earth
             is
             almost
             burnt
             vp
             with
             the
             Sunne
             by
             day
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             nights
             so
             hotte
             and
             troublesome
             ,
             as
             the
             aire
             doth
             often
             seeme
             like
             vnto
             a
             furnace
             :
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             at
             Peru
             ,
             this
             freshnes
             of
             the
             winde
             ,
             is
             the
             cause
             (
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             some
             small
             shade
             at
             the
             Sunnesetting
             )
             that
             they
             remaine
             coole
             .
             But
             contrariwise
             ,
             in
             Europe
             the
             most
             agreeable
             and
             pleasing
             time
             in
             summer
             ,
             is
             the
             morning
             ,
             and
             the
             evening
             is
             the
             most
             hotte
             and
             troublesome
             .
             But
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             vnder
             all
             the
             Equinoctiall
             it
             is
             not
             so
             ,
             for
             every
             morning
             the
             winde
             from
             the
             sea
             doth
             cease
             ,
             and
             the
             Sunne
             beginnes
             to
             cast
             his
             beames
             ;
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             feele
             the
             greatest
             heat
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             vntill
             the
             returne
             of
             the
             same
             windes
             ,
             which
             otherwise
             they
             call
             the
             tide
             or
             winde
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             which
             makes
             them
             first
             to
             feele
             cold
             .
             We
             have
             tried
             al
             this
             ,
             whilst
             we
             were
             at
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Barlovante
             ,
             where
             in
             the
             mornings
             we
             did
             sweat
             for
             heat
             ,
             and
             at
             noone
             we
             felt
             a
             fresh
             aire
             ;
             for
             that
             then
             ,
             a
             North-easterly
             wind
             which
             is
             fresh
             and
             coole
             ,
             doth
             commonly
             blow
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             they
             which
             inhabite
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             live
             a
             sweete
             and
             pleasant
             life
             .
             
               CHAP.
               14.
            
             
          
           
             IF
             those
             which
             have
             held
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             earthly
             Paradise
             was
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             had
             beene
             guided
             by
             this
             discourse
             ,
             
             they
             had
             not
             seemed
             altogether
             
             deceived
             ,
             not
             that
             I
             will
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             delightfull
             Paradice
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Scripture
             speakes
             was
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             which
             were
             too
             great
             a
             temeritie
             to
             affirme
             it
             for
             certaine
             .
             But
             I
             may
             well
             say
             ,
             if
             there
             be
             any
             Paradice
             on
             earth
             ,
             it
             ought
             to
             bee
             placed
             whereas
             they
             inioy
             a
             sweete
             and
             quiet
             temperature
             ;
             for
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             troublesome
             or
             repugnant
             to
             mans
             life
             ,
             then
             to
             live
             vnder
             a
             heaven
             or
             aire
             that
             is
             contrarie
             ,
             troublesome
             or
             sicklie
             :
             as
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             agreeable
             ,
             then
             to
             inioy
             a
             heaven
             that
             is
             sound
             ,
             sweet
             and
             pleasant
             :
             It
             is
             certaine
             that
             we
             do
             not
             participate
             of
             any
             of
             the
             Elements
             ,
             nor
             have
             not
             the
             vse
             of
             any
             so
             often
             in
             our
             bodies
             as
             of
             the
             aire
             .
             It
             is
             that
             which
             invironeth
             our
             bodies
             on
             all
             parts
             ,
             which
             enters
             into
             our
             bowells
             ,
             and
             at
             everie
             instant
             visits
             the
             heart
             ;
             and
             there
             ingraves
             her
             properties
             .
             If
             the
             aire
             be
             any
             thing
             corrupted
             ,
             it
             causeth
             death
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             pure
             and
             healthfull
             ,
             it
             augmenteth
             the
             strength
             ;
             finally
             we
             may
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             aire
             alone
             is
             the
             life
             of
             man
             :
             so
             as
             although
             we
             have
             goods
             and
             riches
             ,
             if
             the
             aire
             be
             troublesome
             and
             vnholsome
             ,
             wee
             cannot
             live
             quietly
             ,
             nor
             with
             content
             :
             But
             if
             the
             aire
             be
             healthfull
             ,
             pleasant
             ,
             and
             sweete
             ,
             although
             we
             have
             no
             other
             wealth
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             yeelde
             content
             .
             Considering
             with
             my selfe
             ,
             the
             pleasing
             temperature
             of
             many
             Countries
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             where
             they
             know
             not
             what
             winter
             is
             ,
             which
             by
             his
             cold
             doth
             freese
             them
             ,
             nor
             summer
             which
             doth
             trouble
             them
             with
             heat
             ,
             but
             that
             with
             a
             Matte
             they
             preserve
             themselves
             from
             the
             iniuries
             of
             all
             weather
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             scarce
             have
             any
             neede
             to
             change
             their
             garments
             throughout
             the
             yeere
             .
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             often
             considering
             of
             this
             ,
             I
             find
             that
             if
             men
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             would
             vanquish
             their
             passions
             ,
             and
             free
             themselves
             from
             the
             snares
             of
             covetousnesse
             ,
             leaving
             many
             fruitelesse
             and
             
             pernicious
             disseines
             ,
             without
             doubt
             they
             might
             live
             at
             the
             Indies
             very
             pleasant
             and
             happily
             :
             for
             that
             which
             other
             Poets
             sing
             of
             the
             Elisean
             fields
             and
             of
             the
             famous
             Tempe
             ,
             or
             that
             which
             Plato
             reports
             or
             faines
             of
             his
             Atlantike
             Iland
             ;
             men
             should
             finde
             in
             these
             lands
             ,
             if
             with
             a
             generous
             spirit
             they
             would
             choose
             rather
             to
             command
             their
             silver
             and
             their
             desires
             ,
             then
             to
             remaine
             slaves
             as
             they
             are
             .
             That
             which
             wee
             have
             hitherto
             discoursed
             ,
             shal
             suffice
             touching
             the
             qualities
             of
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             of
             colde
             ,
             heat
             ,
             drought
             ,
             raine
             ,
             and
             the
             causes
             of
             temperature
             .
             The
             particular
             discourse
             of
             windes
             ,
             waters
             ,
             landes
             ,
             mettalls
             ,
             plants
             ,
             and
             beasts
             ,
             (
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             aboundance
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             )
             shall
             remaine
             for
             the
             other
             bookes
             ;
             for
             the
             difficultie
             of
             that
             which
             is
             handled
             in
             this
             ,
             though
             briefly
             ,
             will
             happily
             seeme
             too
             tedious
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           An
           advertisement
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           THE
           Reader
           must
           vnderstand
           ,
           that
           I
           wrote
           the
           two
           first
           bookes
           in
           Latine
           ,
           when
           I
           was
           at
           Peru
           ,
           and
           therefore
           they
           speake
           of
           matters
           of
           the
           Indies
           ,
           as
           of
           things
           present
           :
           Being
           since
           returned
           into
           Spaine
           ,
           I
           thought
           good
           to
           translate
           them
           into
           our
           vulgar
           tongue
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           change
           my
           former
           maner
           of
           speeach
           .
           But
           in
           the
           five
           following
           bookes
           ,
           for
           that
           I
           made
           them
           in
           Europe
           ,
           I
           have
           beene
           forced
           to
           change
           my
           stile
           ,
           and
           therein
           to
           treate
           of
           matters
           of
           the
           Indies
           ,
           as
           of
           Countries
           and
           things
           absent
           .
           And
           for
           that
           this
           diversitie
           of
           speech
           might
           with
           reason
           offend
           the
           Reader
           ,
           I
           have
           thought
           good
           to
           advertise
           him
           thereof
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           THIRD
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             That
             the
             naturall
             Historie
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             is
             pleasant
             and
             agreeable
             .
             
               CHAP.
               1.
            
             
          
           
             EVerie
             naturall
             Historie
             is
             of
             it selfe
             pleasing
             ,
             &
             very
             profitable
             ,
             to
             such
             as
             will
             raise
             vp
             their
             discourse
             and
             contemplation
             on
             high
             ,
             in
             that
             it
             doth
             move
             them
             to
             glorify
             the
             Author
             of
             all
             nature
             ,
             as
             we
             sea
             the
             wise
             &
             holy
             men
             do
             ,
             
             specially
             David
             in
             many
             Psalmes
             .
             And
             Iob
             likewise
             ,
             treating
             of
             the
             secrets
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             whereas
             the
             same
             Lord
             answereth
             Iob
             so
             amplie
             .
             He
             that
             takes
             delight
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             wondrous
             works
             of
             Nature
             ,
             shal
             taste
             the
             true
             pleasure
             &
             content
             of
             Histories
             ;
             &
             the
             more
             ,
             whenas
             he
             shal
             know
             they
             are
             not
             the
             simple
             workes
             of
             men
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             Creator
             himself
             ,
             &
             that
             he
             shall
             comprehend
             the
             naturall
             causes
             of
             these
             workes
             ,
             then
             shall
             he
             truly
             occupie
             himselfe
             in
             the
             studie
             of
             Philosophie
             .
             But
             he
             that
             shall
             raise
             his
             consideration
             higher
             ,
             beholding
             the
             gret
             &
             first
             architect
             of
             all
             these
             marvells
             ,
             he
             shal
             know
             his
             wisedom
             
             and
             infinite
             greatnes
             ,
             and
             (
             we
             may
             say
             )
             shall
             be
             divinely
             imployed
             .
             And
             so
             the
             discourse
             of
             naturall
             things
             ,
             may
             serve
             for
             many
             good
             considerations
             ,
             although
             the
             feeblenes
             and
             weakenes
             of
             many
             appetites
             ,
             are
             commonly
             accustomed
             to
             stay
             at
             things
             lesse
             profitable
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             desire
             to
             know
             new
             things
             ,
             called
             curiositie
             .
             The
             Discourse
             and
             Historie
             of
             naturall
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             (
             besides
             the
             common
             content
             it
             gives
             ,
             )
             hath
             yet
             another
             benefite
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             treate
             of
             things
             a
             farre
             off
             ,
             the
             greatest
             part
             whereof
             were
             vnknowne
             to
             the
             most
             excellent
             Authors
             of
             that
             profession
             ,
             which
             have
             bin
             among
             the
             Ancients
             .
             And
             if
             wee
             should
             write
             these
             naturall
             things
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             so
             amply
             as
             they
             require
             ,
             being
             so
             strange
             ,
             I
             doubt
             not
             but
             we
             might
             compile
             workse
             ,
             no
             lesse
             then
             those
             of
             
               Plinie
               ,
               Theophrastes
            
             ,
             and
             Aristotle
             .
             But
             I
             hold
             not
             my selfe
             sufficient
             ,
             and
             although
             I
             were
             ,
             yet
             is
             not
             my
             intent
             ,
             but
             to
             note
             some
             naturall
             things
             which
             I
             haue
             seene
             and
             knowne
             being
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             or
             have
             received
             from
             men
             worthy
             of
             credit
             ,
             the
             which
             seeme
             rare
             to
             me
             ,
             and
             scarce
             knowne
             in
             Europe
             .
             By
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             I
             will
             passe
             over
             many
             of
             them
             briefly
             ,
             ether
             bicause
             they
             are
             writen
             of
             by
             others
             ,
             or
             else
             require
             a
             longer
             discourse
             then
             I
             can
             now
             give
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             windes
             ,
             their
             differences
             ,
             properties
             ,
             and
             causes
             in
             generall
             .
             
               CHAP.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             HAving
             discoursed
             in
             the
             two
             former
             Books
             of
             that
             which
             concernes
             the
             heavens
             ,
             and
             the
             habitation
             of
             the
             Indies
             in
             generall
             ,
             it
             behooves
             ●s
             now
             to
             treate
             of
             the
             three
             elements
             ,
             aire
             ,
             water
             and
             land
             ,
             and
             their
             compounds
             ,
             which
             be
             mettalls
             ,
             plants
             and
             beasts
             ;
             for
             as
             for
             
             the
             fire
             ,
             I
             see
             no
             speciall
             matter
             at
             the
             Indies
             which
             is
             not
             in
             other
             regions
             ,
             vnlesse
             some
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             manner
             to
             strike
             fire
             in
             rubbing
             two
             stones
             one
             against
             another
             ,
             as
             some
             Indians
             vse
             ,
             or
             to
             boyle
             any
             thing
             in
             gourdes
             ,
             casting
             a
             burning
             stone
             into
             it
             ,
             and
             other
             such
             like
             things
             ,
             are
             remarkeable
             ,
             whereof
             I
             have
             written
             what
             might
             be
             spoken
             .
             But
             of
             those
             which
             are
             in
             the
             Vulcans
             and
             mouths
             of
             fire
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             worthy
             doubtlesse
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             I
             will
             speake
             in
             their
             order
             ,
             treating
             of
             the
             diversitie
             of
             grounds
             ,
             whereas
             they
             finde
             these
             fires
             or
             Vulcans
             .
             Therefore
             to
             beginne
             with
             the
             winds
             ,
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             with
             good
             reason
             ,
             Salomon
             in
             the
             great
             iudgement
             which
             God
             had
             given
             him
             ,
             esteemes
             much
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             windes
             ;
             and
             their
             properties
             ,
             being
             very
             admirable
             ;
             for
             that
             some
             are
             moyst
             ,
             others
             drie
             ,
             some
             vnwholesome
             ,
             others
             found
             ,
             some
             hote
             ,
             others
             colde
             ,
             some
             calme
             and
             pleasant
             ,
             others
             rough
             and
             tempestuous
             ,
             some
             barren
             ,
             and
             others
             fertile
             ,
             with
             infinite
             other
             differences
             .
             There
             are
             some
             windes
             which
             blow
             in
             certaine
             regions
             ,
             and
             are
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             Lordes
             thereof
             ,
             not
             addmitting
             any
             entry
             or
             communication
             of
             their
             contraries
             .
             In
             some
             partes
             they
             blow
             in
             that
             sorte
             ,
             as
             sometimes
             they
             are
             Conquerours
             ,
             sometimes
             conquered
             ;
             often
             there
             are
             divers
             and
             contrary
             winds
             ,
             which
             doe
             runne
             together
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             dividing
             the
             way
             betwixt
             them
             ,
             sometimes
             one
             blowing
             above
             of
             one
             sort
             ,
             and
             another
             below
             of
             an
             other
             sorte
             ;
             sometimes
             they
             incounter
             violently
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             which
             puts
             them
             at
             sea
             in
             great
             danger
             :
             there
             are
             some
             windes
             which
             helpe
             to
             the
             generation
             of
             creatures
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             hinder
             and
             are
             opposite
             .
             There
             is
             a
             certaine
             wind
             ,
             of
             such
             a
             quality
             ,
             as
             when
             it
             blowes
             in
             some
             country
             ,
             it
             causeth
             it
             to
             raine
             fleas
             ,
             and
             in
             so
             great
             aboundaunce
             ,
             as
             
             they
             trouble
             and
             darken
             the
             aire
             ,
             and
             cover
             all
             the
             sea
             shoare
             :
             and
             in
             other
             places
             it
             raines
             frogges
             .
             These
             diversities
             and
             others
             which
             are
             sufficiently
             knowne
             ,
             are
             commonly
             attributed
             to
             the
             place
             by
             the
             which
             these
             windes
             passe
             .
             For
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             from
             these
             places
             they
             take
             their
             qualities
             to
             be
             colde
             ,
             hote
             ,
             drie
             or
             moyst
             ,
             sickly
             or
             sound
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             partly
             true
             ,
             and
             cannot
             be
             denied
             ;
             for
             that
             in
             a
             small
             distance
             you
             shall
             see
             in
             one
             winde
             many
             diversities
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             the
             Solanus
             or
             Easterne
             winde
             is
             commonly
             hote
             and
             troublesome
             in
             Spaine
             ;
             and
             in
             Murria
             it
             is
             the
             coolest
             and
             healthfullest
             that
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             passeth
             by
             the
             Orchards
             ,
             and
             that
             large
             champaine
             which
             wee
             see
             very
             fresh
             .
             In
             Carthagene
             which
             is
             not
             farre
             from
             thence
             ,
             the
             same
             winde
             is
             troublesome
             and
             vnholesome
             .
             The
             meridionall
             (
             which
             they
             of
             the
             Ocean
             call
             South
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Mediterranean
             sea
             ,
             
               Mezo
               giorno
            
             )
             commonly
             is
             raynie
             and
             boisterous
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             Citie
             wherof
             I
             speake
             ,
             it
             is
             wholesome
             and
             pleasant
             .
             Plinie
             reports
             that
             in
             Affricke
             it
             raines
             with
             a
             Northerne
             winde
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             is
             cleere
             .
             Hee
             then
             that
             shall
             well
             consider
             what
             I
             have
             spoken
             of
             these
             windes
             ,
             hee
             may
             conceive
             ,
             that
             in
             a
             small
             distance
             of
             land
             or
             sea
             ,
             one
             winde
             hath
             many
             and
             diverse
             qualities
             ,
             yea
             sometimes
             quite
             contrary
             ;
             whereby
             we
             may
             inferre
             ,
             that
             he
             draweth
             his
             property
             from
             the
             place
             where
             it
             passeth
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             in
             such
             sort
             true
             (
             although
             we
             may
             not
             say
             in
             〈◊〉
             )
             as
             it
             is
             the
             onely
             and
             principall
             cause
             of
             the
             diversitie
             of
             the
             windes
             .
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             we
             easely
             finde
             ,
             that
             in
             a
             river
             containing
             fiftie
             leagues
             in
             circuite
             (
             I
             putte
             it
             thus
             for
             an
             example
             )
             that
             the
             winde
             which
             blowes
             of
             the
             one
             parte
             ,
             is
             hote
             and
             moist
             ;
             and
             that
             which
             blowes
             on
             the
             other
             ,
             is
             colde
             and
             drie
             :
             Notwithstanding
             this
             
             diversitie
             is
             not
             found
             in
             places
             by
             which
             it
             passeth
             ,
             the
             which
             makesmee
             rather
             ●o
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             windes
             bring
             these
             qualities
             with
             them
             ,
             whereby
             they
             give
             vnto
             them
             the
             names
             of
             these
             qualities
             .
             For
             example
             ,
             we
             attribute
             to
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             ,
             otherwise
             called
             Cicrco
             ,
             the
             property
             to
             be
             colde
             and
             drie
             ,
             and
             to
             dissolve
             mists
             ;
             to
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             his
             contrary
             called
             Lev●s●he
             ,
             wee
             attribute
             the
             contrary
             qualitie
             ,
             which
             is
             moist
             and
             hote
             ,
             and
             ingenders
             mists
             .
             This
             being
             generall
             and
             common
             ,
             we
             must
             seeke
             out
             another
             vniversall
             cause
             ,
             to
             give
             a
             reason
             of
             these
             effects
             .
             It
             is
             not
             enough
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             places
             by
             which
             they
             passe
             ,
             give
             them
             these
             qualities
             ,
             seeing
             that
             passing
             by
             the
             same
             places
             we
             see
             contrary
             effects
             .
             So
             as
             we
             must
             of
             force
             confesse
             ,
             that
             the
             region
             of
             the
             heaven
             where
             they
             blowe
             ,
             gives
             them
             these
             qualities
             ;
             as
             the
             Septentrionall
             is
             colde
             ,
             because
             it
             commes
             from
             the
             North
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             region
             farthest
             from
             the
             Sunne
             .
             The
             Southerne
             which
             blows
             from
             the
             Midday
             or
             South
             ,
             is
             hote
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             the
             heate
             drawes
             the
             vapours
             ,
             it
             is
             also
             moist
             and
             raynie
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             the
             north
             is
             drie
             and
             subtile
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             suffereth
             no
             vapours
             to
             congeale
             .
             And
             in
             this
             maner
             wee
             may
             discourse
             of
             other
             windes
             ,
             giving
             them
             the
             qualities
             of
             the
             region
             where
             they
             blowe
             .
             But
             looking
             more
             precisely
             into
             it
             ,
             this
             reason
             can
             not
             satisfie
             me
             :
             I
             will
             therefore
             demaund
             ,
             What
             doth
             the
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             by
             which
             they
             passe
             ;
             if
             i●
             doth
             〈◊〉
             them
             their
             qualities
             .
             I
             speake
             it
             for
             that
             in
             German
             in
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             is
             hote
             and
             moist
             ,
             and
             in
             Affrike
             the
             Northerne
             is
             cold
             and
             drie
             .
             Notwithstanding
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             in
             what
             region
             soever
             of
             Germanie
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             is
             ingendred
             ,
             it
             must
             needes
             be
             more
             cold
             then
             any
             part
             of
             Affrike
             where
             the
             Northerne
             is
             ingendred
             .
             
             And
             if
             it
             be
             so
             ,
             why
             is
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             more
             cold
             in
             Affrike
             then
             the
             Southerne
             in
             Germany
             ,
             seeing
             it
             proceeds
             from
             a
             hotter
             region
             ?
             Some
             may
             answer
             me
             that
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             blowes
             from
             the
             North
             ,
             which
             is
             colde
             ;
             but
             this
             is
             neither
             sufficient
             ,
             nor
             true
             :
             for
             if
             it
             were
             so
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             blowes
             in
             Affrike
             ,
             it
             should
             also
             runne
             and
             continue
             his
             motion
             in
             al
             the
             Region
             ,
             even
             vnto
             the
             North
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             not
             so
             :
             For
             at
             one
             instant
             there
             blowe
             Northerne
             windes
             very
             colde
             ,
             in
             countries
             that
             are
             in
             fewer
             degrees
             ;
             and
             Southerne
             winds
             which
             are
             very
             hotte
             ,
             in
             countries
             lying
             in
             more
             degrees
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             vsuall
             ,
             and
             well
             knowne
             .
             Whereby
             (
             in
             my
             opinion
             )
             wee
             may
             inferre
             that
             it
             is
             no
             pertinent
             reason
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             places
             by
             which
             the
             winds
             do
             passe
             give
             them
             their
             qualities
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             be
             diversified
             for
             that
             they
             blowe
             from
             divers
             regions
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             although
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             have
             some
             reason
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             .
             But
             it
             is
             needefull
             to
             seeke
             further
             ,
             to
             knowe
             the
             true
             and
             originall
             cause
             of
             these
             so
             strange
             differences
             which
             we
             see
             in
             the
             windes
             .
             I
             cannot
             conceive
             any
             other
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             same
             efficient
             cause
             which
             bringeth
             foorth
             and
             maketh
             the
             winds
             to
             grow
             ,
             dooth
             withall
             give
             them
             this
             originall
             qualitie
             :
             for
             in
             trueth
             the
             matter
             whereon
             the
             windes
             are
             made
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             (
             according
             to
             Aristotle
             )
             but
             the
             exhalation
             of
             the
             interior
             Elements
             ,
             may
             well
             cause
             in
             effect
             a
             great
             parte
             of
             this
             diversitie
             ,
             being
             more
             grosse
             ,
             more
             subtile
             ,
             more
             drie
             ,
             and
             more
             moist
             .
             But
             yet
             this
             is
             no
             pertinent
             reason
             ,
             seeing
             that
             we
             see
             in
             one
             region
             ,
             where
             the
             vapours
             and
             exhalations
             are
             of
             one
             sorte
             and
             qualitie
             ,
             that
             there
             rise
             windes
             and
             effectes
             quite
             contrary
             .
             We
             must
             therefore
             referre
             the
             cause
             to
             the
             higher
             and
             celestiall
             efficient
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             
             to
             the
             motion
             and
             influence
             of
             the
             heavens
             ,
             the
             which
             by
             their
             contrary
             motions
             ,
             give
             and
             cause
             divers
             influences
             .
             But
             the
             beginnings
             of
             these
             motions
             and
             influences
             are
             so
             obscure
             and
             hidden
             from
             men
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             other
             part
             ,
             so
             mighty
             ,
             and
             of
             so
             great
             force
             ,
             as
             the
             holie
             Prophet
             David
             in
             his
             propheticall
             Spirite
             ,
             and
             the
             Prophet
             Ieremie
             admiring
             the
             greatnes
             of
             the
             Lorde
             speake
             thus
             ,
             
               Qui
               profert
               ventos
               d●
               thesauris
               suis.
            
             :
             *
             He
             that
             drawes
             the
             windes
             out
             of
             his
             treasures
             .
             In
             trueth
             these
             principles
             and
             beginnings
             are
             rich
             and
             hidden
             treasures
             :
             for
             the
             Author
             of
             all
             things
             holdes
             them
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             power
             ;
             and
             when
             it
             pleaseth
             him
             ,
             sendeth
             them
             foorth
             for
             the
             good
             or
             chastisement
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             sends
             foorth
             such
             windes
             as
             hee
             pleaseth
             :
             not
             as
             that
             Eolus
             whome
             the
             Poets
             doe
             foolishly
             faine
             to
             have
             charge
             of
             the
             winds
             ,
             keeping
             them
             in
             a
             cave
             like
             vnto
             wild
             beasts
             .
             We
             see
             not
             the
             beginning
             of
             these
             windes
             ,
             neyther
             do
             we
             know
             how
             long
             they
             shal
             continue
             ,
             or
             whither
             they
             shall
             goe
             .
             But
             we
             see
             and
             know
             well
             the
             diverse
             effects
             and
             operations
             they
             have
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             supreme
             trueth
             ,
             the
             Author
             of
             all
             things
             hath
             taught
             vs
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               Spiritus
               vbi
               vult
               spirat
               ,
               &
               vocemeius
               audis
               ,
               &
               nescis
               vnde
               venit
               ,
               aut
               q●●
               vadit
               .
            
             The
             spirit
             or
             winde
             blowes
             where
             it
             pleaseth
             ,
             and
             although
             thou
             feelest
             the
             breath
             ,
             yet
             doost
             thou
             not
             knowe
             whence
             it
             commeth
             ,
             nor
             whither
             it
             shall
             goe
             :
             To
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             conceiving
             a
             little
             of
             matters
             which
             are
             present
             &
             common
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             wee
             should
             not
             presume
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             which
             is
             so
             high
             and
             so
             hidden
             ,
             as
             the
             causes
             and
             motives
             of
             the
             Holy-ghost
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             sufficient
             that
             wee
             knowe
             his
             operations
             and
             effectes
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             plainely
             discovered
             in
             his
             greatnes
             and
             perfections
             ,
             and
             to
             have
             treated
             alitle
             philosophically
             of
             the
             windes
             ,
             and
             the
             causes
             of
             their
             differences
             ,
             
             properties
             ,
             and
             operations
             ,
             which
             wee
             have
             produced
             into
             three
             ;
             the
             place
             by
             which
             they
             passe
             ,
             the
             regions
             where
             they
             blowe
             ,
             and
             the
             celestiall
             virtue
             ,
             the
             beginning
             and
             motive
             of
             the
             windes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             certaine
             properties
             of
             windes
             which
             blowe
             at
             the
             new
             worlde
             .
             
               CHAP.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             a
             question
             much
             disputed
             by
             Aristotle
             ,
             whether
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             ,
             which
             we
             call
             Abreguo
             ,
             blowes
             from
             the
             pole
             Antartike
             ,
             or
             onely
             from
             the
             Equinoctiall
             line●
             which
             is
             properly
             to
             demaund
             ,
             if
             beyond
             the
             Equinoctiall
             it
             holde
             the
             same
             qualitie
             of
             hote
             and
             rainie
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             here
             .
             It
             is
             a
             point
             whereof
             we
             may
             with
             reason
             stand
             in
             doubt
             ,
             for
             although
             it
             passe
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             still
             the
             Southerne
             wind
             ,
             seeing
             it
             comes
             from
             the
             same
             parte
             of
             the
             worlde
             ;
             as
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             which
             comes
             to
             the
             contrary
             ,
             continues
             stil
             the
             same
             winde
             ,
             although
             it
             passe
             the
             burning
             Zone
             and
             Equinoctiall
             line
             .
             And
             it
             seemes
             hereby
             ,
             that
             these
             two
             windes
             should
             hold
             their
             first
             properties
             ,
             the
             one
             to
             be
             hote
             and
             moist
             ,
             the
             other
             colde
             and
             drie
             ;
             the
             South
             to
             breede
             mists
             and
             raine
             ,
             and
             the
             North
             to
             disperse
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             a
             cleere
             Skie
             .
             Notwithstanding
             Aristotle
             leanes
             to
             the
             contrary
             opinion
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             Europe
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             is
             colde
             ,
             because
             it
             comes
             from
             the
             Pole
             ,
             a
             region
             extreamely
             colde
             ,
             and
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             contrariwise
             is
             hotte
             ,
             because
             it
             comes
             from
             the
             South
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             region
             the
             Sunne
             dooth
             most
             heate
             .
             By
             this
             reason
             then
             we
             should
             believe
             that
             the
             South
             winde
             should
             be
             colde
             to
             them
             that
             inhabite
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             the
             Northerne
             wind
             
             should
             be
             hote
             ,
             for
             in
             those
             partes
             the
             Southerne
             wind
             comes
             from
             the
             Pole
             ,
             &
             the
             Northerne
             from
             the
             Line
             .
             And
             though
             it
             seemes
             by
             this
             reason
             ,
             that
             the
             Southern
             winde
             should
             be
             more
             colde
             there
             ,
             than
             the
             Northern
             is
             heere
             :
             for
             that
             they
             holde
             the
             region
             of
             the
             South
             Pole
             to
             be
             more
             colde
             then
             that
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             by
             reason
             that
             the
             Sunne
             stayeth
             seaven
             dayes
             every
             yeere
             in
             the
             Tropike
             of
             Cancer
             ,
             more
             then
             it
             dooth
             in
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             ,
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             Equinoxes
             and
             Solstices
             he
             makes
             in
             the
             two
             Circles
             ,
             wherein
             it
             seemeth
             ,
             that
             Nature
             would
             shew
             the
             preheminence
             and
             excellencie
             of
             this
             moity
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             North
             ,
             above
             the
             other
             parte
             in
             the
             South
             :
             so
             as
             it
             seemeth
             there
             is
             reason
             to
             beleeve
             that
             these
             qualities
             of
             the
             windes
             doe
             change
             in
             passing
             the
             Line
             ;
             but
             in
             trueth
             it
             is
             not
             so
             ,
             as
             I
             could
             comprehend
             by
             the
             experience
             I
             had
             some
             yeeres
             ,
             being
             in
             those
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             lie
             on
             the
             South
             of
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Line
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             is
             not
             vsually
             colde
             and
             cleere
             there
             as
             heere
             .
             In
             some
             parts
             of
             Peru
             ,
             as
             at
             Lima
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             Plaines
             ,
             they
             find
             the
             Northern
             windes
             troublesome
             and
             vnwholesome
             ,
             and
             all
             along
             the
             coast
             ,
             which
             runs
             above
             five
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             they
             holde
             the
             Southerne
             windes
             for
             healthfull
             and
             coole
             ,
             and
             (
             which
             is
             more
             )
             most
             cleere
             and
             pleasant
             ;
             yea
             it
             never
             raines
             ,
             contrary
             to
             that
             wee
             see
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             of
             this
             side
             the
             Line
             .
             Yet
             that
             which
             chaunceth
             vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             is
             no
             generall
             rule
             ,
             but
             rather
             an
             exception
             ,
             and
             a
             wonder
             of
             Nature
             ,
             neuer
             to
             raine
             vpon
             that
             coast
             ,
             and
             ever
             to
             have
             one
             winde
             ,
             without
             giving
             place
             to
             his
             contrary
             ,
             whereof
             we
             will
             heereafter
             speake
             our
             minde
             .
          
           
           
             Now
             let
             vs
             stand
             vpon
             this
             point
             ,
             that
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             beyond
             the
             line
             ,
             hath
             not
             the
             same
             properties
             ,
             which
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             hath
             on
             this
             side
             ,
             although
             they
             both
             blow
             from
             the
             midday
             ,
             to
             regions
             and
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             which
             be
             opposite
             and
             contrarie
             .
             For
             it
             is
             no
             generall
             rule
             there
             ,
             that
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             is
             neither
             hote
             nor
             rainie
             there
             ,
             as
             the
             South
             winde
             is
             on
             this
             side
             ;
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             it
             raines
             whenas
             the
             South
             winde
             blowes
             there
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             all
             the
             Sierre
             or
             mountaine
             of
             Peru
             ,
             in
             Chile
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Countrie
             of
             Congo
             ,
             which
             is
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             farre
             advanced
             into
             the
             Sea.
             And
             in
             Potozi
             likewise
             ,
             the
             winde
             which
             they
             call
             Tomahani
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             our
             North
             ,
             )
             if
             my
             memorie
             faile
             me
             not
             ,
             is
             extreamely
             cold
             ,
             drie
             ,
             and
             vnpleasant
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             heere
             with
             vs.
             Yet
             doth
             not
             the
             Northerne
             winde
             disperse
             the
             cloudes
             vsually
             there
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             heere
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             if
             I
             be
             not
             deceived
             ,
             it
             doth
             often
             cause
             raine
             .
             There
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             the
             windes
             do
             borrow
             this
             great
             diversitie
             of
             contrarie
             effects
             ,
             from
             the
             places
             by
             which
             they
             passe
             ,
             and
             the
             neere
             regions
             where
             they
             are
             bred
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             by
             daily
             experience
             in
             a
             thousand
             places
             .
             But
             speaking
             in
             generall
             of
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             windes
             ,
             we
             must
             rather
             looke
             to
             the
             coastes
             or
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             from
             whence
             they
             proceede
             ,
             then
             to
             observe
             ,
             whether
             they
             be
             on
             this
             side
             ,
             or
             beyond
             the
             line
             ,
             as
             it
             seemes
             the
             Philosopher
             held
             opinion
             .
             These
             capitall
             windes
             ,
             which
             be
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             West
             ,
             have
             no
             such
             universall
             qualities
             ,
             nor
             so
             common
             in
             this
             continent
             ,
             nor
             in
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             the
             two
             former
             .
             The
             Solanus
             or
             Easterne
             winde
             ,
             is
             commonly
             here
             troblesome
             &
             vnholsome
             ,
             &
             the
             Westerne
             or
             Zephirus
             ,
             is
             more
             milde
             and
             healthfull
             .
             At
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             the
             Easterne
             winde
             
             which
             they
             call
             Brise
             ,
             is
             contrariwise
             very
             healthfull
             and
             pleasant
             .
             Of
             the
             West
             ,
             I
             cannot
             speake
             any
             thing
             certaine
             or
             generall
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             blowes
             not
             at
             all
             ,
             or
             very
             seldome
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             for
             in
             all
             the
             navigation
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropikes
             ,
             the
             Easterne
             winde
             is
             ordinary
             .
             And
             for
             that
             it
             is
             one
             of
             the
             admirable
             workes
             of
             Nature
             ,
             it
             shall
             be
             good
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             cause
             and
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             the
             Brises
             ,
             or
             Easterly
             windes
             ,
             do
             continually
             blowe
             ,
             and
             without
             the
             Zone
             the
             westerne
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Easterly
             are
             ordinarie
             alwaies
             there
             .
             
               CHAP.
               4.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             waies
             at
             Sea
             are
             not
             as
             at
             Land
             ,
             to
             returne
             the
             sameway
             they
             passe
             .
             It
             is
             all
             one
             way
             (
             saieth
             the
             Philosopher
             )
             from
             Athens
             to
             Thebes
             ,
             and
             from
             Thebes
             to
             Athens
             ;
             but
             it
             is
             not
             so
             at
             Sea
             ,
             
             for
             we
             go
             one
             way
             ,
             and
             returne
             by
             another
             .
             The
             first
             which
             discovered
             the
             East
             and
             weast
             Indies
             ,
             laboured
             much
             with
             great
             difficultie
             to
             finde
             out
             their
             course
             ,
             vntill
             that
             Experience
             (
             the
             mistris
             of
             these
             secrets
             ,
             )
             had
             taught
             them
             ,
             that
             to
             saile
             through
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             is
             not
             like
             the
             passage
             in
             Italie
             ,
             through
             the
             Mediterranean
             sea
             ,
             where
             in
             their
             returne
             ,
             they
             observe
             the
             same
             Ports
             and
             Capes
             they
             had
             sight
             of
             in
             their
             passage
             ,
             attending
             still
             the
             benefite
             of
             the
             winde
             ,
             which
             changeth
             instantly
             ,
             and
             when
             that
             failes
             ,
             they
             have
             recourse
             to
             their
             owers
             ;
             and
             so
             the
             Gallies
             go
             and
             come
             daily
             ,
             coasting
             along
             the
             shoare
             .
             In
             some
             partes
             of
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             they
             may
             not
             looke
             for
             any
             other
             winde
             then
             that
             which
             blowes
             ,
             for
             that
             commonly
             it
             continues
             long
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             good
             to
             
             go
             by
             ,
             is
             not
             fit
             to
             returne
             with
             :
             for
             in
             the
             sea
             beyond
             the
             Tropicke
             ,
             and
             within
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             the
             Easterly
             windes
             raine
             continually
             ,
             not
             suffering
             their
             contraries
             .
             In
             the
             which
             region
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             strange
             things
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             that
             Zone
             ,
             (
             being
             the
             greatest
             of
             the
             five
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             the
             world
             is
             divided
             ,
             )
             the
             Easterly
             windes
             (
             which
             they
             call
             Brises
             )
             do
             raine
             ,
             not
             suffering
             the
             Westerne
             or
             Southerne
             ,
             (
             which
             they
             call
             lower
             windes
             ,
             )
             to
             have
             their
             course
             at
             any
             season
             of
             the
             yeere
             :
             The
             other
             wonder
             is
             ,
             that
             these
             Easterly
             windes
             never
             cease
             to
             blow
             ,
             and
             most
             commonly
             in
             places
             neerest
             to
             the
             line
             ,
             (
             where
             it
             seemes
             that
             calmes
             should
             be
             more
             frequent
             ,
             being
             a
             part
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             most
             subi●ct
             to
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             contrarie
             ,
             for
             you
             shall
             hardly
             finde
             any
             calmes
             there
             ,
             and
             the
             winde
             is
             cold
             and
             continues
             longer
             ,
             which
             hath
             been
             found
             true
             in
             all
             the
             navigations
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             This
             is
             the
             reason
             ,
             why
             the
             voyage
             they
             make
             from
             Spaine
             to
             the
             West
             Indies
             is
             shorter
             ,
             more
             easie
             ,
             and
             more
             assured
             ,
             then
             the
             returne
             to
             Spaine
             .
             The
             fleetes
             parting
             from
             Siville
             ,
             have
             more
             difficultie
             to
             passe
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             gulph
             of
             Yegues
             or
             of
             Mares
             ,
             is
             variable
             ,
             being
             beaten
             with
             divers
             windes
             ,
             but
             having
             passed
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             they
             saile
             with
             a
             westerne
             winde
             vntill
             they
             come
             to
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             where
             presently
             they
             finde
             an
             Easterly
             winde
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             saile
             on
             with
             full
             windes
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             have
             scant
             any
             ne●de
             to
             touch
             their
             sailes
             in
             the
             whole
             voiage
             :
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             called
             this
             great
             gulph
             ,
             the
             gulph
             of
             Dances
             for
             the
             calmenes
             and
             pleasantnes
             thereof
             .
             Then
             following
             their
             course
             ,
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Guadelupe
               Dominique
               ,
               Desir●e
               ,
               Marigualante
               ,
            
             and
             the
             rest
             ,
             which
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             be
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             suburbs
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             There
             the
             fleetes
             seperate
             
             and
             divide
             themselves
             ,
             whereof
             some
             (
             which
             go
             to
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             )
             take
             to
             the
             right
             hand
             towards
             Hispaniola
             ;
             and
             having
             discovered
             Cape
             S.
             Anthonie
             ,
             they
             passe
             vnto
             S.
             
               Ihon
               Delua
            
             ,
             alwaies
             vsing
             the
             same
             Easterly
             windes
             .
             Those
             for
             the
             maine
             Land
             ,
             take
             the
             left
             hand
             ,
             discovering
             the
             high
             mountaine
             of
             Tayrone
             ,
             then
             having
             touched
             at
             Carthagene
             ,
             they
             passe
             vnto
             
               Nombre
               de
               Dios
            
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             go
             by
             land
             to
             Panama
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             ,
             by
             the
             South
             sea
             to
             Peru.
             But
             when
             the
             fleetes
             returne
             to
             Spaine
             ,
             they
             make
             their
             voiage
             in
             this
             sort
             :
             The
             fleete
             of
             Peru
             discovers
             Cape
             S.
             Anthonie
             ,
             then
             they
             enter
             into
             the
             Havana
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             goodly
             Port
             in
             the
             Iland
             of
             Cuba
             .
             The
             fleete
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             doth
             likewise
             touch
             at
             the
             Havana
             ,
             being
             parted
             from
             the
             true
             Crosse
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             Iland
             of
             S.
             
               Ihon
               Delua
            
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             not
             without
             difficultie
             ,
             for
             that
             commonly
             Easterly
             windes
             blow
             there
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             contrarie
             winde
             to
             go
             to
             the
             Havana
             .
             These
             fleetes
             being
             ioyned
             together
             for
             Spaine
             ,
             they
             seeke
             their
             height
             without
             the
             Tropicks
             ,
             where
             presently
             they
             finde
             Westerly
             winds
             ,
             which
             serve
             them
             vntill
             they
             come
             in
             view
             of
             the
             Acores
             ,
             or
             Terceres
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             to
             Seville
             .
             So
             as
             their
             voiage
             in
             going
             ,
             is
             of
             a
             small
             height
             ,
             not
             above
             twentie
             degrees
             from
             the
             line
             ,
             which
             is
             within
             the
             Tropickes
             .
             But
             the
             returne
             is
             without
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             in
             eight
             and
             twentie
             or
             thirtie
             degrees
             of
             height
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             for
             that
             within
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             the
             Easterne
             winds
             continually
             blow
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             fittest
             to
             go
             from
             ,
             Spaine
             to
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             course
             is
             ,
             from
             East
             to
             west
             ;
             and
             without
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             in
             three
             and
             twentie
             degrees
             of
             height
             ,
             )
             they
             finde
             westerly
             winds
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             the
             more
             certaine
             and
             ordinarie
             ,
             the
             farther
             you
             are
             from
             the
             line
             ,
             and
             more
             fit
             to
             returne
             
             from
             the
             Indies
             ;
             for
             that
             they
             are
             windes
             blowing
             from
             the
             South
             and
             West
             ,
             which
             serve
             to
             runne
             into
             the
             East
             and
             North.
             The
             like
             discourse
             is
             of
             the
             Navigation
             made
             into
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             going
             from
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             or
             Peru
             ,
             to
             the
             Philippines
             or
             China
             ,
             and
             returning
             from
             the
             Philippines
             or
             China
             to
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             easie
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             saile
             alwaies
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             neere
             the
             line
             ,
             where
             they
             finde
             the
             Easterly
             windes
             to
             blow
             in
             their
             poope
             .
             In
             the
             yeere
             1584.
             there
             went
             a
             shippe
             from
             Callo●
             in
             Lima
             to
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             which
             sailed
             2000.
             and
             700.
             leagues
             without
             sight
             of
             land
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             it
             discovered
             ,
             was
             the
             Iland
             of
             Lusson
             ,
             where
             they
             tooke
             port
             ,
             having
             performed
             their
             voiage
             in
             two
             moneths
             ,
             without
             want
             of
             winde
             or
             any
             torment
             ,
             and
             their
             course
             was
             almost
             continually
             vnder
             the
             line
             ;
             for
             that
             from
             Lima
             (
             which
             is
             twelve
             degrees
             to
             the
             South
             )
             he
             came
             to
             Menilla
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             the
             North.
             The
             like
             good
             fortune
             had
             
               Alvaro
               de
               Mandana
            
             ,
             whenas
             he
             went
             to
             discover
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Soloman
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             had
             alwaies
             a
             full
             gale
             ,
             vntill
             he
             came
             within
             view
             of
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             the
             which
             must
             be
             distant
             from
             that
             place
             of
             Peru
             ,
             from
             whence
             he
             parted
             ,
             about
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             ,
             having
             runne
             their
             course
             alwaies
             in
             one
             height
             to
             the
             South
             .
             The
             returne
             is
             like
             vnto
             the
             voiage
             from
             the
             Indies
             vnto
             Spaine
             :
             for
             those
             which
             returne
             from
             the
             Philippines
             or
             China
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             may
             recover
             the
             Westerne
             windes
             ,
             they
             mount
             a
             great
             height
             ,
             vntill
             they
             come
             right
             against
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Iappon
             ,
             and
             discovering
             the
             Caliphornes
             ,
             they
             returne
             by
             the
             coast
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             to
             the
             Port
             of
             Acapulco
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             parted
             .
             So
             as
             it
             is
             proved
             likewise
             by
             this
             navigation
             ,
             that
             they
             saile
             easily
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             within
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             
             Easterly
             windes
             do
             raine
             :
             but
             returning
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             they
             must
             seeke
             the
             Westerne
             windes
             without
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             in
             the
             height
             of
             seven
             and
             twentie
             degrees
             .
             The
             Portingales
             prove
             the
             like
             in
             their
             navigations
             to
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             in
             a
             contrarie
             course
             ;
             for
             that
             going
             from
             Portugall
             the
             voiage
             is
             troublesome
             ,
             but
             their
             returne
             is
             more
             easie
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             going
             ,
             their
             course
             is
             from
             the
             West
             to
             the
             East
             :
             so
             as
             they
             must
             of
             necessitie
             mount
             ,
             vntill
             they
             have
             found
             their
             generall
             windes
             ,
             which
             they
             hold
             to
             be
             above
             the
             seven
             and
             twentith
             degree
             .
             And
             in
             their
             returne
             ,
             they
             discover
             the
             Terceres
             ,
             but
             with
             more
             ease
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             come
             from
             the
             East
             ,
             where
             the
             Easterly
             or
             Northerne
             windes
             do
             serve
             them
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             Marriners
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             certaine
             rule
             and
             observation
             ,
             that
             within
             the
             Tropickes
             continually
             raine
             Easterly
             windes
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             very
             easie
             to
             saile
             to
             the
             West
             .
             But
             without
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             there
             are
             in
             some
             seasons
             Easterly
             windes
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             ,
             and
             more
             ordinarie
             Westerne
             windes
             :
             by
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             they
             which
             saile
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             labour
             alwaies
             to
             be
             out
             of
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             to
             put
             themselves
             in
             the
             height
             of
             seven
             and
             twentie
             degrees
             .
             And
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             men
             have
             indangered
             themselves
             to
             vndertake
             strange
             Navigations
             ,
             and
             to
             seeke
             out
             farre
             Countries
             vnknowne
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             differences
             of
             the
             Brises
             or
             Easterne
             windes
             ,
             and
             the
             Westerne
             ,
             and
             likewise
             of
             other
             windes
             .
             CHAP.
             5.
             
          
           
             ALthough
             that
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             be
             generall
             and
             well
             approoved
             ,
             yet
             there
             remaines
             still
             a
             desire
             in
             me
             to
             learne
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             secret
             ;
             why
             vnder
             
             the
             burning
             Zone
             we
             saile
             alwaies
             from
             East
             to
             Weast
             ,
             with
             so
             great
             facilitie
             ,
             and
             not
             from
             Weast
             to
             East
             ▪
             Which
             is
             as
             much
             as
             if
             wee
             should
             demaund
             ,
             why
             the
             Easterly
             windes
             raine
             there
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             Weasterly
             ,
             for
             that
             according
             to
             good
             Philosophie
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             perpetuall
             ,
             vniversall
             ,
             and
             of
             it selfe
             (
             as
             the
             Philosophers
             say
             )
             must
             have
             a
             proper
             cause
             ,
             and
             of
             it selfe
             .
             But
             before
             I
             stay
             at
             this
             question
             ,
             which
             seemes
             remarkeable
             ,
             it
             shal
             be
             necessary
             to
             shew
             what
             we
             vnderstand
             by
             Brises
             or
             Easterly
             windes
             ,
             and
             Weasterly
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             will
             serve
             much
             for
             this
             subiect
             ,
             and
             for
             many
             other
             matters
             touching
             windes
             and
             navigations
             .
             The
             Pilotes
             make
             two
             and
             thirty
             poynts
             of
             windes
             ,
             for
             that
             to
             bring
             their
             ship
             to
             the
             desired
             haven
             ,
             they
             must
             make
             their
             account
             as
             punctually
             and
             as
             strictly
             as
             they
             can
             ;
             for
             bending
             to
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             or
             the
             other
             ,
             never
             so
             little
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             of
             their
             course
             ,
             they
             should
             finde
             themselves
             farre
             from
             their
             pretended
             place
             .
             And
             they
             reckon
             but
             twoo
             and
             thirty
             quarters
             of
             the
             windes
             ,
             for
             that
             more
             woulde
             confound
             the
             memorie
             .
             But
             with
             reckoning
             as
             they
             accompt
             two
             and
             thirty
             windes
             ,
             so
             may
             they
             reckon
             ,
             three
             score
             and
             foure
             ,
             one
             hundred
             twenty
             and
             eight
             ,
             and
             two
             hundred
             fifty
             and
             six
             .
             Finally
             ,
             multiply
             these
             partes
             to
             an
             infinite
             ,
             for
             the
             place
             where
             the
             shippe
             is
             ,
             being
             as
             it
             were
             the
             centre
             ,
             and
             all
             hemisphere
             in
             circumference
             ,
             what
             should
             let
             ,
             but
             wee
             may
             accompt
             lines
             without
             number
             ,
             the
             which
             comming
             from
             this
             centre
             ,
             drawe
             directly
             to
             these
             lineall
             circles
             in
             so
             many
             partes
             ,
             which
             might
             cause
             as
             many
             diverse
             windes
             ,
             seeing
             that
             the
             winde
             comes
             from
             all
             partes
             of
             the
             hemisphere
             ,
             which
             we
             may
             divide
             into
             as
             many
             parts
             as
             we
             will
             imagine
             ,
             yet
             the
             wisedome
             of
             man
             ,
             conformable
             to
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             observes
             foure
             windes
             ,
             the
             principall
             
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             the
             foure
             corners
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             ioyne
             in
             making
             a
             crosse
             with
             two
             lines
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             goes
             from
             one
             Pole
             to
             another
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             from
             one
             Equinoctiall
             to
             the
             other
             .
             Of
             the
             one
             side
             the
             North
             or
             Aquilon
             ,
             and
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             or
             mid-day
             opposite
             ;
             and
             on
             the
             other
             side
             the
             East
             ,
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             Sunne
             rising
             ,
             and
             the
             Weast
             from
             his
             setting
             .
             And
             although
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             in
             some
             places
             speakes
             of
             other
             diversities
             of
             windes
             ,
             as
             of
             Eurus
             and
             Aquilo●
             ,
             which
             those
             in
             the
             Ocean
             sea
             call
             Nordest
             ,
             &
             they
             of
             the
             mediterranean
             sea
             ,
             Gregual
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             mention
             made
             in
             Saint
             Paul●
             navigation
             ;
             yet
             the
             same
             holy
             Scripture
             makes
             mention
             of
             those
             foure
             notable
             windes
             ,
             which
             all
             the
             worlde
             knowes
             ,
             which
             areas
             is
             saide
             ,
             North
             ,
             South
             ,
             East
             and
             Weast
             .
          
           
             But
             for
             that
             we
             finde
             three
             differences
             in
             the
             rising
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             name
             of
             East
             comes
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             two
             greatest
             declinings
             which
             he
             doth
             vsually
             make
             ,
             and
             the
             meane
             betwixt
             them
             both
             ,
             as
             hee
             dooth
             rise
             in
             diverse
             places
             ,
             in
             winter
             ,
             in
             summer
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             which
             holdes
             the
             middle
             of
             these
             two
             seasons
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             they
             have
             reckoned
             two
             other
             windes
             ,
             the
             East
             of
             summer
             ,
             and
             the
             East
             of
             winter
             ;
             and
             by
             consequence
             ,
             two
             Weasts
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             summer
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             of
             winter
             ,
             their
             contraries
             .
             So
             as
             there
             are
             eight
             windes
             in
             eight
             notable
             poyntes
             of
             heaven
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             two
             Poles
             ,
             the
             two
             Equinoxes
             ,
             the
             two
             Solstices
             ,
             and
             their
             opposites
             in
             the
             same
             Circle
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             called
             by
             divers
             names
             and
             appellations
             in
             every
             place
             of
             the
             sea
             and
             land
             .
             Those
             which
             saile
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             doe
             vsually
             call
             them
             thus
             .
             They
             give
             the
             name
             of
             North
             to
             those
             windes
             that
             blowe
             from
             our
             Pole
             ,
             which
             carrieth
             
             the
             same
             name
             ,
             and
             Northeast
             that
             which
             is
             neerest
             ,
             and
             comes
             from
             the
             summer
             East
             :
             They
             call
             East
             that
             which
             comes
             directly
             from
             the
             rising
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             and
             Southeast
             that
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             winter
             rising
             .
             To
             the
             Mid-day
             or
             Pole
             Antartike
             they
             give
             the
             name
             of
             Southwest
             ;
             and
             to
             that
             of
             the
             winters
             setting
             ,
             the
             name
             of
             Southwest
             ,
             to
             the
             right
             setting
             Equinoctiall
             the
             name
             of
             West
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             summers
             setting
             ,
             Northweast
             .
             They
             divide
             amongst
             them
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             winds
             ,
             and
             give
             them
             their
             names
             as
             they
             participate
             and
             approach
             to
             others
             :
             as
             North-northweast
             ,
             North-north-east
             ,
             East-northeast
             ,
             East-southeast
             ,
             South-southweast
             ,
             Weast-southwest
             ,
             Weast-norwest
             ;
             so
             as
             by
             their
             names
             we
             know
             whence
             they
             proceed
             .
             In
             the
             Mediterranean
             sea
             ,
             although
             they
             follow
             the
             same
             division
             and
             maner
             of
             reckoning
             ,
             yet
             doe
             they
             give
             them
             other
             different
             names
             ;
             they
             call
             the
             North
             Tramontana
             ,
             and
             his
             contrary
             ,
             the
             South
             MeZo-giorno
             ,
             or
             Mydy
             ;
             the
             East
             they
             call
             Levant
             ,
             and
             the
             Weast
             Povant
             :
             and
             those
             which
             crosse
             these
             foure
             they
             call
             thus
             :
             Southeast
             is
             by
             them
             named
             Xirocque
             ,
             or
             Xaloque
             ,
             and
             his
             opposite
             ,
             which
             is
             Norwest
             ;
             Mestrall
             they
             call
             the
             northeast
             .
             Gre●
             or
             Greguall
             ;
             and
             the
             Southweast
             his
             contrary
             ;
             
               Levesche
               ,
               Libique
            
             ,
             or
             Affricaine
             .
             In
             Latine
             the
             foure
             knowne
             winds
             be
             ,
             
               S●ptentrio
               ,
               Auster
               ,
               Subsolanus
               ,
               Favonius
            
             ;
             and
             those
             which
             be
             interlaced
             are
             
               Aquilo
               ,
               Vulturnus
               ,
               Affricus
            
             and
             Corus
             ;
             according
             vnto
             
               Plinie
               ,
               Vulturnus
            
             and
             Eurus
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             winde
             that
             Southeast
             or
             
               Xaloque
               ,
               Favonius
            
             is
             the
             Weast
             or
             
               Pon●nt
               ,
               Aquilo
            
             and
             Boreas
             is
             Nortest
             or
             Gregual
             ,
             or
             
               Tramontana
               ,
               Affricus
            
             and
             Libique
             is
             the
             Southweast
             or
             
               Levesche
               ,
               Auster
            
             and
             Notus
             is
             the
             South
             or
             Midday
             ,
             Corus
             and
             Zephirus
             the
             Northwest
             or
             Mestral
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Northeast
             or
             Gregual
             ,
             they
             give
             no
             other
             
             name
             then
             Phenicien
             .
             Some
             divide
             them
             after
             an
             other
             maner
             :
             but
             for
             that
             it
             is
             not
             now
             our
             purpose
             to
             repeate
             the
             Latine
             and
             Greeke
             names
             of
             all
             the
             windes
             ,
             lette
             vs
             onely
             shew
             which
             be
             those
             amongst
             these
             windes
             ,
             that
             the
             Mariners
             of
             the
             Indian
             Ocean
             call
             Brises
             ,
             and
             lower
             winds
             .
             I
             was
             long
             in
             some
             difficulty
             about
             these
             names
             ,
             seeing
             them
             to
             vse
             them
             very
             diversly
             ,
             vntill
             I
             found
             that
             these
             names
             were
             more
             generall
             ,
             then
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             .
             They
             call
             Brises
             those
             which
             serve
             to
             goe
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             which
             blowe
             in
             their
             poope
             ,
             which
             by
             this
             meanes
             comprehend
             all
             the
             Easterly
             windes
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             depend
             of
             them
             .
             And
             they
             do
             call
             lower
             windes
             those
             which
             are
             fitte
             to
             returne
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             blowe
             from
             the
             South
             to
             the
             summer-weast
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             be
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             two
             Esquadrons
             of
             windes
             of
             eyther
             side
             ,
             the
             Corporalles
             be
             of
             oneside
             Northeast
             or
             Greguall
             ,
             on
             the
             other
             Southweast
             or
             Levesche
             .
             But
             you
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             number
             of
             eight
             windes
             and
             differences
             which
             we
             have
             counted
             ,
             five
             are
             proper
             to
             saile
             by
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             other
             three
             .
             I
             say
             ,
             that
             when
             a
             ship
             sailes
             at
             sea
             ,
             he
             may
             make
             a
             long
             voyage
             with
             one
             of
             these
             windes
             ,
             although
             they
             serve
             him
             not
             equally
             ;
             but
             he
             cannot
             vse
             any
             of
             the
             other
             three
             .
             As
             if
             a
             shippe
             goe
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             he
             shall
             saile
             with
             the
             North
             ,
             Northeast
             ,
             Northweast
             ,
             and
             with
             East
             and
             Weast
             :
             for
             side-windes
             serve
             to
             goe
             ,
             or
             to
             come
             .
             But
             with
             a
             Southerne
             wind
             he
             cannot
             saile
             ,
             being
             directly
             contrary
             ,
             nor
             with
             with
             his
             two
             Collaterals
             which
             is
             Southest
             and
             Southwest
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             very
             triviall
             thing
             ,
             &
             common
             to
             them
             that
             saile
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             is
             not
             needefull
             to
             explaine
             them
             heere
             ,
             but
             to
             signifie
             that
             the
             side-windes
             of
             the
             right
             East
             ,
             are
             those
             which
             commonly
             blow
             to
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             which
             they
             doe
             call
             Brises
             :
             and
             those
             from
             
             the
             South
             declining
             to
             the
             Weast
             ,
             which
             serve
             to
             saile
             from
             Weast
             to
             East
             ,
             are
             not
             common
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             seeke
             them
             without
             the
             tropikes
             ;
             and
             the
             Indian
             Mariners
             commonly
             call
             them
             lower
             windes
             ,
             or
             
               Vents
               dábas
            
             .
          
        
         
           
             What
             is
             the
             reason
             why
             sailing
             v●der
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             we
             finde
             alwayes
             Easterly
             windes
             ?
             
               CHAP.
               6.
            
             
          
           
             LEt
             vs
             now
             speake
             of
             that
             which
             toucheth
             the
             Question
             propounded
             ,
             what
             should
             be
             the
             reason
             whie
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             wee
             saile
             easily
             from
             East
             to
             Weast
             ,
             and
             not
             contrary
             :
             wherein
             we
             must
             presuppose
             two
             certaine
             groundes
             .
             The
             one
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             first
             moover
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Diurnall
             ,
             not
             on●lie
             drawes
             and
             mooves
             with
             him
             the
             celestiall
             spheares
             ,
             which
             are
             inferiour
             vnto
             him
             ,
             as
             wee
             see
             daily
             in
             the
             sunne
             ,
             the
             moone
             ,
             and
             the
             starres
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             Elements
             do
             participate
             of
             this
             motion
             ,
             insomuch
             as
             they
             are
             not
             hindered
             .
             The
             earth
             is
             not
             mooved
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             her
             heavinesse
             ,
             which
             makes
             it
             immooveable
             ,
             being
             far
             from
             this
             first
             motor
             .
             The
             element
             of
             water
             moves
             not
             likewise
             with
             this
             Diurnall
             motion
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             vnited
             to
             the
             earth
             and
             make
             one
             sphere
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             earth
             keeps
             it
             from
             all
             circular
             motion
             .
             But
             th'
             other
             two
             elements
             of
             fire
             &
             aire
             ,
             are
             more
             subtil
             and
             neerer
             the
             heavenly
             regions
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             participate
             of
             their
             motion
             ,
             and
             are
             driven
             about
             circularly
             ,
             as
             the
             same
             celestial
             bodies
             .
             As
             for
             the
             fire
             ,
             without
             doubt
             it
             hath
             his
             sphere
             ,
             (
             as
             Aristotle
             and
             other
             Philosophers
             have
             held
             )
             but
             for
             the
             aire
             (
             which
             is
             no
             point
             of
             our
             subiect
             )
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             that
             it
             mooves
             with
             a
             motion
             diurnall
             ,
             which
             is
             
             from
             East
             to
             Weast
             ,
             which
             we
             see
             plainely
             in
             Comets
             that
             moove
             from
             the
             East
             vnto
             the
             Weast
             ,
             mounting
             ,
             descending
             ,
             and
             finally
             turning
             in
             the
             hemispheare
             in
             the
             same
             sort
             as
             the
             Starres
             move
             in
             the
             firmament
             ;
             for
             otherwise
             these
             Comets
             being
             in
             the
             region
             &
             sphere
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             whereas
             they
             ingender
             ,
             appeares
             consum'd
             .
             It
             should
             be
             impossible
             for
             them
             to
             moove
             circularly
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             ,
             if
             the
             element
             of
             the
             aire
             doth
             not
             moove
             with
             the
             same
             motion
             that
             the
             first
             motor
             dooth
             .
             For
             these
             elements
             being
             of
             a
             burning
             substance
             ,
             by
             reason
             they
             should
             be
             fixt
             ,
             without
             mooving
             circularly
             ,
             if
             the
             sphere
             where
             they
             are
             did
             not
             moove
             ;
             if
             it
             be
             not
             as
             we
             faine
             ,
             that
             some
             Angell
             or
             intellectuall
             Spirite
             dooth
             walke
             with
             the
             Comet
             ,
             guiding
             it
             circularly
             .
             In
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             God
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             seaventy
             and
             seaven
             appeered
             that
             wonderfull
             Comet
             ,
             (
             in
             forme
             like
             vnto
             a
             feather
             )
             from
             the
             horizon
             almost
             to
             the
             middest
             of
             heaven
             ,
             and
             continued
             from
             the
             first
             of
             November
             ,
             vntill
             the
             eight
             of
             December
             :
             I
             say
             from
             the
             first
             of
             November
             ,
             for
             although
             in
             Spaine
             it
             was
             noted
             but
             the
             ninth
             of
             November
             (
             according
             to
             the
             testimony
             of
             Writers
             of
             that
             time
             )
             yet
             at
             Peru
             ,
             where
             I
             was
             then
             ,
             I
             remember
             well
             ,
             we
             did
             see
             it
             ,
             and
             observe
             it
             eight
             dayes
             before
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             time
             after
             .
             Touching
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             diversity
             ,
             some
             may
             dilate
             vpon
             it
             particularly
             ,
             I
             will
             onely
             shew
             ,
             that
             during
             those
             fourtie
             dayes
             which
             it
             continued
             ,
             we
             all
             observed
             (
             both
             such
             as
             were
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             we
             that
             lived
             then
             at
             the
             Indies
             )
             that
             it
             mooved
             daily
             with
             an
             vniversall
             motion
             ,
             from
             East
             to
             Weast
             ,
             as
             the
             Moone
             and
             other
             Planets
             ,
             wherby
             it
             appeeres
             that
             the
             sphere
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             being
             its
             Region
             ,
             the
             element
             it selfe
             must
             of
             necessitie
             moove
             after
             the
             same
             sort
             .
             We
             noted
             ,
             also
             ,
             that
             besides
             this
             vniversall
             
             motion
             ,
             it
             had
             an
             other
             particular
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             moved
             with
             the
             planets
             fro
             west
             to
             east
             ;
             for
             every
             night
             it
             turned
             more
             Eastward
             ▪
             like
             vnto
             the
             Moone
             ,
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             Planet
             of
             Venus
             .
             Wee
             did
             also
             observe
             a
             third
             particular
             motion
             ,
             whereby
             it
             mooved
             from
             the
             zodiacke
             towards
             the
             North
             ;
             for
             after
             some
             nights
             it
             was
             found
             neerer
             vnto
             the
             Septentrionall
             signes
             .
             And
             it
             may
             be
             this
             was
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             great
             Comet
             was
             sooner
             seene
             by
             those
             that
             were
             southerly
             ,
             as
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             later
             discovered
             by
             them
             of
             Europe
             :
             for
             by
             this
             third
             motion
             (
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             )
             it
             approached
             neerer
             the
             Northerne
             Regions
             .
             Yet
             every
             one
             may
             well
             observe
             the
             differences
             of
             this
             motion
             ,
             so
             as
             wee
             may
             well
             perceive
             ,
             that
             many
             and
             sundry
             celestiall
             bodies
             ,
             give
             their
             impressions
             to
             the
             sphere
             of
             the
             aire
             .
             In
             like
             sorte
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             that
             the
             ayre
             mooves
             with
             the
             circular
             motion
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             from
             Est
             to
             West
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             first
             ground
             before
             mentioned
             .
             The
             second
             is
             no
             lesse
             certaine
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             aire
             in
             those
             parts
             that
             are
             vnder
             the
             Line
             ,
             or
             neere
             vnto
             it
             ,
             is
             very
             swift
             and
             light
             ,
             the
             more
             it
             approacheth
             to
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ;
             but
             the
             farther
             off
             it
             is
             from
             the
             Line
             ,
             approching
             neere
             the
             Poles
             ,
             the
             more
             slowe
             and
             heavie
             this
             motion
             is
             .
             The
             reason
             heereof
             is
             manifest
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             mooving
             of
             the
             celestiall
             bodies
             ,
             being
             the
             efficient
             cause
             of
             the
             mooving
             of
             the
             ayre
             ,
             it
             must
             of
             necessitie
             be
             more
             quicke
             and
             light
             ,
             where
             the
             celestiall
             bodies
             have
             their
             swiftest
             motion
             .
          
           
             To
             labour
             to
             shew
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             heaven
             hath
             a
             quicker
             motion
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Line
             ,
             then
             in
             any
             other
             part
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             were
             to
             make
             small
             account
             of
             men
             :
             seeing
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             see
             in
             a
             wheele
             ,
             that
             its
             motion
             is
             more
             slowe
             and
             heavy
             in
             the
             
             part
             of
             greatest
             circumference
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             lesse
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             greater
             circumference
             ends
             at
             one
             instant
             with
             the
             lesser
             .
             From
             these
             two
             grounds
             proceedes
             the
             reason
             ,
             where
             such
             as
             saile
             great
             gulphs
             from
             east
             to
             west
             ,
             doe
             alwayes
             finde
             the
             winde
             in
             their
             powpe
             ,
             going
             in
             a
             small
             altitude
             ,
             and
             the
             neerer
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Equinoctiall
             ,
             the
             more
             certaine
             and
             durable
             the
             winde
             is
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             sailing
             from
             west
             to
             east
             ,
             they
             always
             finde
             the
             winde
             contrary
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             swift
             motion
             of
             the
             Equinoctiall
             drawes
             after
             it
             the
             element
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             the
             surplus
             of
             the
             higher
             spheares
             .
             So
             as
             the
             aire
             dooth
             alwayes
             follow
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             day
             .
             Going
             from
             east
             to
             weast
             ,
             without
             any
             alteration
             ,
             and
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             aire
             being
             swift
             ,
             draweth
             after
             it
             all
             the
             vapours
             and
             exhalations
             which
             rise
             from
             the
             sea
             ,
             which
             causeth
             in
             those
             Regions
             a
             continuall
             easterly
             winde
             ,
             which
             runnes
             from
             the
             Levant
             .
             Father
             
               Alonso
               Sanches
            
             a
             religious
             man
             ,
             and
             of
             our
             company
             ,
             who
             hath
             travelled
             the
             east
             and
             west
             Indies
             ,
             as
             a
             man
             ingenious
             ,
             and
             of
             experience
             ,
             said
             ,
             that
             sailing
             vnder
             the
             Line
             ,
             or
             neere
             vnto
             it
             ,
             with
             a
             continued
             and
             durable
             season
             ,
             it
             seemed
             to
             him
             to
             be
             the
             same
             aire
             ,
             mooved
             by
             the
             heaven
             the
             which
             guided
             the
             ships
             ,
             and
             was
             not
             properly
             a
             winde
             nor
             exhalation
             ,
             but
             an
             aire
             moved
             with
             the
             daily
             course
             of
             the
             sunne
             :
             for
             proofe
             whereof
             he
             shewed
             ,
             that
             the
             season
             is
             alwayes
             equall
             ,
             and
             alike
             at
             the
             gulph
             of
             
               Danees
               ▪
            
             and
             in
             other
             great
             gulphes
             where
             wee
             saile
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             by
             reason
             whereof
             their
             sailes
             are
             always
             of
             one
             fashion
             ,
             without
             any
             blustring
             ,
             having
             no
             neede
             ,
             in
             a
             manner
             ,
             to
             change
             them
             in
             all
             their
             course
             .
             And
             if
             the
             ayre
             were
             not
             mooved
             by
             the
             heavens
             ,
             it
             might
             sometimes
             faile
             ,
             sometimes
             change
             to
             the
             contrary
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             there
             would
             grow
             some
             stormes
             .
             
             Although
             this
             be
             learnedly
             spoken
             ,
             yet
             can
             we
             not
             deny
             it
             to
             be
             a
             winde
             ,
             seeing
             there
             are
             vapours
             and
             exhalations
             of
             the
             sea
             ;
             and
             that
             we
             sometimes
             see
             the
             Brise
             or
             easterly
             winds
             stronger
             ,
             sometimes
             more
             weake
             ,
             and
             placed
             in
             that
             sort
             ,
             as
             sometimes
             they
             can
             hardly
             carry
             all
             their
             sailes
             .
             We
             must
             then
             know
             (
             and
             it
             is
             true
             )
             that
             the
             aire
             mooved
             ,
             draweth
             vnto
             it
             the
             vapours
             it
             findes
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             force
             is
             great
             ,
             and
             findes
             no
             resistance
             ,
             by
             reason
             whereof
             the
             easterne
             and
             weasterne
             windes
             are
             continuall
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             maner
             alwayes
             alike
             ,
             in
             those
             parts
             which
             are
             neere
             the
             Line
             ,
             and
             almost
             vnder
             all
             the
             burning
             zone
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             course
             the
             Sunne
             followes
             betwixt
             the
             two
             circles
             of
             Cancer
             and
             Capricorne
             .
          
        
         
           
             Why
             without
             the
             Zone
             ,
             in
             a
             greater
             altitude
             ,
             wee
             finde
             alwayes
             west●rly
             wind●s
             
               CHAP.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             WHoso
             would
             neerely
             looke
             into
             what
             hath
             bin
             spoken
             ,
             may
             likewise
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             going
             from
             the
             west
             to
             the
             east
             ,
             in
             altitude
             beyond
             the
             Tropikes
             ,
             we
             shall
             finde
             westerne
             windes
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             Equinoctiall
             being
             so
             swift
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             cause
             that
             the
             ay●e
             mooveth
             vnder
             it
             according
             to
             this
             motion
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             east
             to
             weast
             ,
             drawing
             after
             it
             the
             vapors
             and
             exhalations
             that
             rise
             of
             either
             side
             the
             Equinoctial
             or
             burning
             zone
             ,
             incount●ing
             the
             course
             and
             motion
             of
             the
             zone
             ,
             are
             forced
             by
             the
             repercussion
             to
             returne
             almost
             to
             the
             contrary
             ,
             whence
             growe
             the
             southweast
             winds
             so
             ordinary
             in
             those
             parts
             .
             Even
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             course
             of
             waters
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             if
             they
             be
             incountred
             by
             others
             of
             more
             force
             ,
             )
             returne
             in
             a
             maner
             backe
             .
             So
             it
             seemes
             to
             be
             like
             in
             vapours
             and
             exhalations
             ,
             whereby
             
             it
             growes
             that
             the
             windes
             doe
             turne
             and
             separate
             themselves
             from
             one
             part
             to
             another
             .
             These
             westerly
             winds
             do
             commonly
             rai●●
             in
             a
             meane
             altitude
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             twenty
             and
             seeven
             to
             thirty
             and
             seven
             degrees
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             not
             so
             certaine
             nor
             so
             regular
             as
             the
             Brises
             that
             are
             in
             a
             lesse
             altitude
             .
             The
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             southwest
             windes
             are
             no
             causes
             of
             this
             proper
             and
             equal
             motion
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             as
             the
             Brises
             are
             ,
             being
             neere
             to
             the
             Line
             .
             But
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             )
             they
             are
             more
             ordinarie
             ,
             and
             often
             more
             furious
             and
             tempestuous
             .
             But
             passing
             into
             a
             greater
             altitude
             ,
             as
             of
             fortie
             degrees
             ,
             there
             is
             as
             small
             assurance
             of
             windes
             at
             sea
             as
             at
             land
             ;
             for
             sometimes
             the
             east
             or
             north
             winde
             blowes
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             the
             south
             ,
             or
             weast
             :
             whereby
             it
             happeneth
             their
             navigations
             are
             more
             vncertaine
             ,
             and
             more
             dangerous
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             exceptions
             to
             the
             foresaid
             Rules
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Windes
             and
             Calmes
             both
             at
             Land
             and
             at
             Sea.
             
               CHAP.
               8.
            
             
          
           
             THat
             which
             we
             have
             spoken
             of
             winds
             ,
             which
             blow
             ordinarilie
             within
             and
             without
             the
             Zone
             ,
             must
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             maine
             Sea
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             great
             gulphes
             ;
             for
             at
             land
             it
             is
             otherwise
             ,
             where
             we
             finde
             all
             sorts
             of
             windes
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             inequalitie
             which
             is
             betwixt
             the
             mountaines
             and
             the
             vallies
             ;
             the
             great
             number
             of
             Rivers
             and
             Lakes
             ,
             and
             the
             divers
             scituations
             of
             Countries
             ,
             whence
             the
             grosse
             and
             thicke
             vapors
             arise
             ,
             which
             are
             moved
             from
             the
             one
             part
             or
             the
             other
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             diversitie
             of
             their
             beginnings
             ,
             which
             cause
             these
             divers
             windes
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             caused
             by
             the
             heaven
             having
             not
             power
             enough
             ,
             to
             draw
             and
             move
             them
             with
             it
             .
             And
             this
             varietie
             of
             windes
             is
             
             not
             onely
             found
             at
             land
             ,
             but
             also
             vpon
             the
             sea
             coast
             ,
             which
             is
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             be
             foraine
             or
             land
             windes
             which
             come
             from
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             many
             which
             blow
             from
             the
             sea
             ;
             the
             which
             windes
             from
             the
             sea
             ,
             are
             commonly
             more
             wholesome
             and
             more
             pleasant
             then
             those
             of
             the
             land
             ,
             which
             are
             contrariwise
             troublesome
             and
             vnwholesome
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             the
             differrence
             of
             the
             coast
             that
             causeth
             this
             diversitie
             :
             commonly
             the
             land
             windes
             blow
             from
             mid-night
             to
             the
             sunne
             rising
             ,
             and
             the
             sea
             windes
             vntill
             sunne
             setting
             .
             The
             reason
             perhaps
             may
             be
             ,
             that
             the
             earth
             ,
             as
             a
             grosse
             substance
             ,
             fumes
             more
             whenas
             the
             sunne
             shines
             not
             vpon
             it
             ,
             even
             as
             greene
             wood
             ,
             or
             scarce
             drie
             ,
             smoakes
             most
             when
             the
             flame
             is
             quenched
             .
             But
             the
             sea
             ,
             which
             is
             compounded
             of
             more
             subtile
             partes
             ,
             engenders
             no
             fumes
             ,
             but
             when
             it
             is
             hote
             ,
             even
             as
             straw
             or
             haie
             ,
             being
             moist
             and
             in
             small
             quantitie
             ,
             breedes
             smoake
             when
             it
             is
             burnt
             ,
             and
             when
             the
             flame
             failes
             ,
             the
             fume
             suddenly
             ceaseth
             .
             Whatsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             it
             is
             certaine
             that
             the
             land
             winde
             blowes
             by
             night
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             sea
             by
             day
             .
             So
             that
             even
             as
             there
             are
             often
             contrarie
             ,
             violent
             ,
             and
             tempestuous
             windes
             vpon
             the
             sea
             coast
             ,
             so
             do
             we
             see
             very
             great
             calmes
             .
             Some
             men
             of
             great
             experience
             report
             ,
             that
             having
             sailed
             many
             great
             passages
             at
             sea
             vnder
             the
             line
             ,
             yet
             did
             they
             never
             see
             any
             calmes
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             alwaies
             make
             way
             little
             or
             much
             ,
             the
             aire
             being
             moved
             by
             the
             celestiall
             motion
             ,
             which
             is
             sufficient
             to
             guide
             a
             ship
             ,
             blowing
             in
             poope
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             .
             I
             have
             already
             said
             ,
             that
             a
             ship
             of
             Lima
             going
             to
             Mani●●a
             ,
             sailed
             two
             thousand
             seven
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             alwaies
             vnder
             the
             line
             ,
             or
             not
             above
             twelve
             degrees
             from
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             the
             moneths
             of
             Februarie
             and
             March
             ,
             whenas
             the
             sunne
             is
             there
             for
             Zenith
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             this
             space
             they
             found
             no
             
             calmes
             ,
             but
             alwaies
             a
             fresh
             gale
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             two
             moneths
             they
             performed
             this
             great
             voyage
             .
             But
             in
             the
             burning
             Zone
             and
             without
             it
             ,
             you
             shall
             vsually
             see
             great
             calmes
             vpon
             the
             coastes
             ,
             where
             the
             vapors
             come
             from
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             or
             maine
             land
             .
             And
             therefore
             stormes
             and
             tempestes
             ,
             and
             the
             suddaine
             motions
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             are
             more
             certaine
             and
             ordinarie
             vpon
             the
             coastes
             ,
             whereas
             the
             vapors
             come
             from
             the
             land
             ,
             then
             in
             full
             sea
             ,
             I
             meane
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             for
             without
             it
             and
             at
             sea
             ,
             there
             are
             both
             calmes
             and
             whirlewindes
             .
             Notwithstanding
             ,
             sometimes
             betwixt
             the
             two
             Tropickes
             ,
             yea
             ,
             vnder
             the
             line
             ,
             you
             shall
             have
             great
             raine
             and
             suddaine
             showers
             ,
             yea
             ,
             farre
             into
             the
             sea
             ;
             for
             the
             working
             whereof
             ,
             the
             vapors
             and
             exhalations
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             are
             sufficient
             ,
             which
             moving
             sometimes
             hastily
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             cause
             thunder
             and
             whirlewindes
             ,
             but
             this
             is
             more
             ordinarie
             neere
             to
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             vpon
             the
             land
             .
             When
             I
             sailed
             from
             Peru
             to
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             I
             observed
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             time
             we
             were
             vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             our
             voiage
             was
             (
             as
             it
             was
             ordinary
             ,
             )
             very
             calme
             and
             easie
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Southerne
             winde
             that
             blowes
             ,
             having
             alwaies
             a
             fore
             winde
             ,
             returning
             from
             Spaine
             and
             new
             Spaine
             .
             As
             we
             passed
             the
             gulph
             ,
             lanching
             farther
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             almost
             vnder
             the
             line
             ,
             we
             found
             the
             season
             coole
             ,
             quiet
             ,
             and
             pleasant
             ,
             with
             a
             full
             winde
             ,
             but
             comming
             neere
             to
             Nicaragua
             ,
             and
             to
             all
             that
             coast
             ,
             we
             had
             contrarie
             windes
             ,
             with
             great
             store
             of
             raine
             and
             fogges
             .
             All
             this
             navigation
             was
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             :
             for
             from
             twelve
             degrees
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             which
             is
             Lima
             ,
             wee
             sailed
             to
             the
             seventeenth
             ,
             which
             is
             Gautulco
             ,
             a
             port
             of
             new
             Spaine
             :
             and
             I
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             such
             as
             have
             observed
             their
             navigations
             ,
             made
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             shall
             finde
             what
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             which
             may
             suffice
             for
             the
             windes
             which
             raine
             at
             sea
             ,
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             some
             mervellous
             effects
             of
             the
             windes
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             some
             partes
             of
             the
             
               Indies
               .
               CHAP.
               9.
            
             
          
           
             IT
             were
             a
             very
             difficult
             matter
             ,
             to
             report
             particularly
             the
             admirable
             effectes
             which
             some
             windes
             cause
             in
             divers
             regions
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             a
             reason
             thereof
             .
             There
             are
             windes
             ,
             which
             naturally
             trouble
             the
             water
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             makes
             it
             greene
             and
             blacke
             ,
             others
             cleere
             as
             Cristall
             ,
             some
             comfort
             and
             make
             glad
             ,
             others
             trouble
             and
             breede
             heavines
             .
             Such
             as
             nourish
             silke-wormes
             ,
             have
             great
             care
             to
             shut
             their
             windowes
             ,
             whenas
             the
             South-west
             windes
             do
             blow
             ,
             and
             to
             open
             them
             to
             the
             contrarie
             :
             having
             found
             by
             certaine
             experience
             ,
             that
             their
             wormes
             diminish
             and
             die
             with
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             fatten
             and
             become
             better
             with
             the
             other
             ;
             and
             who
             so
             will
             neerely
             observe
             it
             ,
             shall
             finde
             in
             himselfe
             ,
             that
             the
             diversities
             of
             windes
             ,
             cause
             notable
             impressions
             and
             changes
             in
             the
             bodie
             ,
             principally
             in
             sicke
             partes
             and
             ill
             disposed
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             most
             tender
             and
             weake
             .
             The
             holy
             scripture
             calleth
             one
             a
             burning
             winde
             ,
             
             another
             ,
             a
             winde
             full
             of
             dew
             and
             sweetnes
             .
             And
             it
             is
             no
             wonder
             if
             wee
             see
             such
             notable
             effects
             of
             the
             windes
             ,
             in
             plants
             ,
             beasts
             ,
             and
             men
             ,
             seeing
             that
             we
             see
             it
             visibly
             in
             yron
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             hardest
             of
             all
             mettalls
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             grates
             of
             yron
             in
             some
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             so
             rusted
             and
             consumed
             ,
             that
             pressing
             it
             betwixt
             your
             fingers
             ,
             it
             dissolved
             into
             powder
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             had
             been
             hay
             or
             parched
             straw
             ,
             the
             which
             proceedes
             only
             from
             the
             winde
             which
             doth
             corrupt
             it
             ,
             having
             no
             meanes
             to
             withstand
             it
             .
             But
             leaving
             apart
             many
             other
             great
             and
             notable
             effects
             ,
             I
             will
             onely
             make
             mention
             of
             two
             .
             The
             one
             ,
             although
             it
             causeth
             pangs
             grater
             then
             death
             it selfe
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             not
             
             breede
             any
             further
             inconvenience
             .
             The
             other
             takes
             away
             life
             without
             feeling
             of
             it
             .
             The
             sicknes
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             wherewith
             such
             are
             troubled
             as
             first
             begin
             to
             go
             to
             sea
             ,
             is
             a
             matter
             very
             ordinary
             ;
             and
             yet
             if
             the
             nature
             thereof
             were
             vnknowne
             to
             men
             ,
             we
             should
             take
             it
             for
             the
             pangs
             of
             death
             ,
             seeing
             how
             it
             af●licts
             and
             torments
             while
             it
             doth
             last
             ,
             by
             the
             casting
             of
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             paine
             of
             the
             head
             ,
             and
             other
             troublesome
             accidents
             .
             But
             in
             trueth
             this
             sicknes
             so
             common
             and
             ordinarie
             ,
             happens
             vnto
             men
             by
             the
             change
             of
             the
             aire
             and
             sea
             .
             For
             although
             it
             be
             true
             that
             the
             motion
             of
             the
             shippe
             helpes
             much
             ,
             in
             that
             it
             moves
             more
             or
             lesse
             :
             and
             likewise
             the
             infections
             and
             ill
             favors
             of
             things
             in
             the
             shippe
             :
             yet
             the
             proper
             and
             naturall
             cause
             ,
             is
             the
             aire
             and
             the
             vapors
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             the
             which
             doth
             so
             weaken
             and
             trouble
             the
             body
             and
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             accustomed
             therevnto
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             wonderfully
             moved
             and
             changed
             :
             for
             the
             aire
             is
             the
             Element
             ,
             by
             which
             wee
             live
             and
             breathe
             ,
             drawing
             it
             into
             our
             entrailes
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             bathe
             therewithall
             .
             And
             therefore
             there
             is
             nothing
             that
             so
             suddenly
             ,
             and
             with
             so
             great
             force
             doth
             alter
             vs
             ,
             as
             the
             change
             of
             the
             aire
             we
             breathe
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             those
             which
             die
             of
             the
             plague
             .
             It
             is
             approved
             by
             many
             experiences
             ,
             that
             the
             aire
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             is
             the
             chiefe
             cause
             of
             this
             strange
             indisposition
             ;
             the
             one
             is
             ,
             that
             when
             there
             blowes
             from
             the
             sea
             a
             strong
             breath
             ,
             we
             see
             them
             at
             the
             land
             as
             it
             were
             sea
             sicke
             ,
             as
             I
             my selfe
             have
             often
             found
             .
             Another
             is
             ,
             the
             farther
             we
             go
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             retyre
             from
             land
             ,
             the
             more
             we
             are
             touched
             and
             dazeled
             with
             this
             sicknes
             .
             Another
             is
             ,
             that
             coasting
             along
             any
             Iland
             ,
             and
             after
             lanching
             into
             the
             maine
             ,
             we
             shall
             there
             finde
             the
             aire
             more
             strong
             .
             Yet
             will
             I
             not
             deny
             ,
             but
             the
             motion
             and
             agitation
             may
             cause
             this
             sicknes
             ,
             seeing
             that
             
             we
             see
             some
             are
             taken
             therewith
             passing
             rivers
             in
             Barkes
             :
             others
             in
             like
             sort
             going
             in
             Coches
             and
             Carosses
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             divers
             complexions
             of
             the
             stomacke
             :
             as
             contrariwise
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             ,
             how
             boistrous
             and
             troublesome
             soever
             the
             sea
             be
             ,
             doe
             never
             feele
             it
             .
             Wherefore
             it
             is
             a
             matter
             certaine
             ,
             &
             tried
             ,
             that
             the
             aire
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             doth
             commonly
             cause
             this
             effect
             in
             such
             as
             newly
             go
             to
             sea
             .
             I
             thought
             good
             to
             speake
             this
             ,
             to
             shew
             a
             strange
             effect
             ,
             which
             happens
             in
             some
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             where
             the
             ayre
             &
             the
             wind
             that
             rains
             make
             men
             dazie
             ,
             not
             lesse
             ,
             but
             more
             then
             at
             sea
             .
             Some
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             fable
             ,
             others
             say
             it
             is
             an
             addition
             :
             for
             my
             part
             I
             will
             speake
             what
             I
             have
             tried
             .
             There
             is
             in
             Peru
             ,
             a
             high
             mountaine
             which
             they
             call
             Pariacaca
             ,
             and
             having
             heard
             speake
             of
             the
             alteration
             it
             bred
             ,
             I
             went
             as
             well
             prepared
             as
             I
             could
             .
             according
             to
             the
             instructions
             which
             was
             given
             me
             ,
             by
             such
             as
             they
             call
             Vaguianos
             or
             expert
             men
             :
             but
             notwithstanding
             all
             my
             provision
             ,
             when
             I
             came
             to
             mount
             the
             degrees
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             top
             of
             this
             mountaine
             ,
             I
             was
             suddenly
             surprized
             with
             so
             mortall
             and
             strange
             a
             pang
             ,
             that
             I
             was
             ready
             to
             fall
             from
             the
             top
             to
             the
             ground
             :
             and
             although
             we
             were
             many
             in
             company
             ,
             yet
             every
             one
             made
             haste
             (
             without
             any
             tarrying
             for
             his
             companion
             ,
             )
             to
             free
             himselfe
             speedily
             from
             this
             ill
             passage
             .
             Being
             then
             alone
             with
             one
             Indian
             ,
             whom
             I
             intreated
             to
             helpe
             to
             stay
             me
             ,
             I
             was
             surprised
             with
             such
             pangs
             of
             straining
             &
             casting
             ,
             as
             I
             thought
             to
             cast
             vp
             my
             heart
             too
             ;
             for
             having
             cast
             vp
             meate
             ,
             sleugme
             ,
             &
             choller
             ,
             both
             yellow
             and
             greene
             ;
             in
             the
             end
             I
             cast
             vp
             blood
             ,
             with
             the
             straining
             of
             my
             stomacke
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             if
             this
             had
             continued
             ,
             I
             should
             vndoubtedly
             have
             died
             ;
             but
             this
             lasted
             not
             above
             three
             or
             foure
             houres
             ,
             that
             we
             were
             come
             into
             a
             more
             convenient
             and
             naturall
             temperature
             ,
             
             where
             all
             our
             companions
             (
             being
             fouteteene
             or
             fifteene
             )
             were
             much
             wearied
             .
             Some
             in
             the
             passage
             demaunded
             confession
             ,
             thinking
             verily
             to
             die
             ;
             others
             left
             the
             ladders
             and
             went
             to
             the
             ground
             ,
             beeing
             overcome
             with
             casting
             ,
             and
             going
             to
             the
             stoole
             :
             and
             it
             was
             tolde
             me
             ,
             that
             some
             have
             lost
             their
             lives
             there
             with
             this
             accident
             .
             I
             beheld
             one
             that
             did
             beate
             himselfe
             against
             the
             earth
             ,
             crying
             out
             for
             the
             rage
             and
             griefe
             which
             this
             passage
             of
             Pariacaca
             hadde
             caused
             .
             But
             commonly
             it
             dooth
             no
             important
             harme
             ,
             onely
             this
             ,
             paine
             and
             troublesome
             distaste
             while
             it
             endures
             :
             and
             not
             onely
             the
             passage
             of
             Pariacaca
             hath
             this
             propertie
             ,
             but
             also
             all
             this
             ridge
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             which
             runnes
             above
             five
             hundred
             leagues
             long
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             place
             soever
             you
             passe
             ,
             you
             shall
             finde
             strange
             intemperatures
             ,
             yet
             more
             in
             some
             partes
             then
             in
             other
             ,
             and
             rather
             to
             those
             which
             mount
             from
             the
             sea
             ,
             then
             from
             the
             plaines
             .
             Besides
             Pariacaca
             ,
             I
             have
             passed
             it
             by
             Lucanas
             and
             Soras
             ;
             in
             an
             other
             place
             ,
             by
             Colleguas
             ,
             and
             by
             Cavanas
             .
             Finally
             ,
             by
             foure
             different
             places
             ,
             going
             and
             comming
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             in
             this
             passage
             I
             have
             felt
             this
             alteration
             ,
             although
             in
             no
             place
             so
             strongly
             ,
             as
             at
             the
             first
             in
             Pariacaca
             ,
             which
             hath
             beene
             tried
             by
             allsuch
             as
             have
             passed
             it
             .
             And
             no
             doubt
             but
             the
             winde
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             intemperature
             and
             strange
             alteration
             ,
             or
             the
             aire
             that
             raignes
             there
             .
             For
             the
             best
             remedy
             (
             and
             all
             they
             finde
             )
             is
             to
             stoppe
             their
             noses
             ,
             their
             eares
             ,
             and
             their
             mouthes
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             may
             be
             ,
             and
             to
             cover
             themselves
             with
             cloathes
             ,
             especially
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             ayre
             is
             subtile
             and
             piercing
             ,
             going
             into
             the
             entrailes
             ,
             and
             not
             onely
             men
             feele
             this
             alteration
             ,
             but
             also
             beasts
             that
             sometimes
             stay
             there
             ,
             so
             as
             there
             is
             no
             spurre
             can
             make
             them
             goe
             forward
             .
             For
             my
             part
             I
             holde
             this
             place
             to
             be
             one
             of
             the
             highest
             parts
             of
             land
             
             in
             the
             worlde
             ;
             for
             we
             mount
             a
             wonderfull
             space
             .
             And
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             the
             mountaine
             N●vade
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             Pirences
             ,
             and
             the
             Alpes
             of
             Italie
             ,
             are
             as
             ordinarie
             houses
             ,
             in
             regarde
             of
             hie
             Towers
             .
             I
             therefore
             perswade
             my selfe
             ,
             that
             the
             element
             of
             the
             aire
             is
             there
             so
             subtile
             and
             delicate
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             not
             proportionable
             with
             the
             breathing
             of
             man
             ,
             which
             requires
             a
             more
             grosse
             and
             temperate
             aire
             ,
             and
             I
             beleeve
             it
             is
             the
             cause
             that
             doth
             so
             much
             alter
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             &
             trouble
             all
             the
             disposition
             .
             The
             passages
             of
             the
             mountaines
             N●vade
             ,
             and
             other
             of
             Europe
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             although
             the
             aire
             be
             colde
             there
             ,
             and
             doth
             force
             men
             to
             weare
             more
             clothes
             ,
             yet
             this
             colde
             doth
             not
             take
             away
             the
             appetite
             from
             meate
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             it
             provokes
             ;
             neyther
             dooth
             it
             cause
             any
             casting
             of
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             but
             onely
             some
             paine
             in
             the
             feete
             and
             handes
             .
             Finally
             ,
             their
             operation
             is
             outward
             .
             But
             that
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             whereof
             I
             speake
             (
             without
             molesting
             of
             foote
             or
             hand
             ,
             or
             any
             outward
             parte
             )
             troubles
             all
             the
             entrailes
             within
             :
             and
             that
             which
             is
             more
             admirable
             ,
             when
             the
             sunne
             is
             hote
             ,
             which
             maketh
             mee
             imagine
             ,
             that
             the
             griefe
             wee
             feele
             comes
             from
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             aire
             which
             wee
             breathe
             :
             Therefore
             that
             is
             most
             subtile
             and
             delicate
             ,
             whose
             colde
             is
             not
             so
             sensible
             ,
             as
             piercing
             .
             All
             this
             ridge
             of
             mountains
             is
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             desart
             ,
             without
             any
             villages
             or
             habitations
             for
             men
             ,
             so
             as
             you
             shall
             scarce
             finde
             any
             small
             cotages
             to
             lodge
             such
             as
             do
             passe
             by
             night
             :
             there
             are
             no
             beasts
             ,
             good
             or
             bad
             ,
             but
             some
             Vicunos
             ,
             which
             are
             their
             countrey
             muttons
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             strange
             and
             wonderfull
             property
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             shew
             in
             his
             place
             .
             The
             grasse
             is
             often
             burnt
             ,
             and
             all
             blacke
             with
             the
             aire
             ,
             and
             this
             desart
             runnes
             five
             and
             twenty
             or
             thirty
             leagues
             overthwart
             ,
             and
             in
             length
             above
             five
             hundred
             leagues
             .
             There
             are
             other
             desarts
             or
             places
             inhabited
             ,
             
             which
             at
             Peru
             they
             call
             Punas
             (
             speaking
             of
             the
             second
             poynt
             we
             promised
             )
             where
             the
             quallitie
             of
             the
             ayre
             cutteth
             off
             mans
             life
             without
             feeling
             .
             In
             former
             time
             the
             Spaniardes
             went
             from
             Peru
             ,
             to
             the
             realme
             of
             Chille
             by
             this
             mountaine
             ,
             but
             at
             this
             day
             they
             do
             passe
             commonly
             by
             sea
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             alongst
             the
             side
             of
             it
             .
             And
             though
             that
             way
             be
             laborious
             and
             troublesome
             ,
             yet
             is
             there
             not
             so
             great
             daunger
             as
             by
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             Plaines
             ,
             on
             the
             which
             many
             men
             have
             perished
             and
             died
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             have
             scaped
             by
             great
             happe
             ,
             whereof
             some
             have
             remained
             lame
             .
             There
             runs
             a
             small
             breath
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             very
             strong
             nor
             violent
             ,
             but
             proceedes
             in
             such
             sorte
             ,
             that
             men
             fall
             downe
             dead
             ,
             in
             a
             manner
             without
             feeling
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             they
             loose
             their
             feete
             and
             handes
             :
             the
             which
             may
             seeme
             fabulous
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             most
             true
             .
          
           
             I
             have
             knowne
             and
             frequented
             long
             the
             Gennerall
             
               Ierome
               Costilla
            
             ,
             the
             auntient
             peopler
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             who
             had
             lost
             three
             or
             foure
             toes
             ,
             which
             fell
             off
             in
             passing
             the
             desart
             of
             Chille
             ,
             being
             perished
             with
             this
             aire
             ,
             and
             when
             he
             came
             to
             looke
             on
             them
             ,
             they
             were
             dead
             ,
             and
             fell
             off
             without
             any
             paine
             ,
             even
             as
             a
             rotten
             Apple
             falleth
             from
             the
             tree
             .
             This
             Captaine
             reported
             ,
             that
             of
             a
             good
             army
             which
             hee
             had
             conducted
             by
             that
             place
             ,
             in
             the
             former
             yeeres
             ,
             since
             the
             discoverie
             of
             this
             kingdome
             by
             Almagro
             ,
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             men
             remained
             dead
             there
             ,
             whose
             bodies
             he
             found
             lying
             in
             the
             desart
             ,
             without
             any
             stink
             or
             corruption
             ;
             adding
             thervnto
             one
             thing
             very
             strange
             ,
             that
             they
             found
             a
             yong
             boy
             alive
             ,
             and
             being
             examined
             how
             hee
             had
             lived
             in
             that
             place
             ,
             hee
             saide
             ,
             that
             hee
             laie
             hidden
             in
             a
             little
             cave
             ,
             whence
             hee
             came
             to
             cutte
             the
             flesh
             of
             a
             dead
             horse
             with
             a
             little
             knife
             ,
             and
             thus
             had
             he
             nourished
             himselfe
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             with
             I
             know
             not
             how
             
             many
             companions
             that
             lived
             in
             that
             sort
             ,
             but
             now
             they
             were
             all
             dead
             ,
             one
             dying
             this
             day
             ,
             and
             another
             to
             morrow
             ,
             saying
             that
             hee
             desired
             nothing
             more
             then
             to
             die
             there
             with
             the
             rest
             ,
             seeing
             that
             he
             found
             not
             in
             himselfe
             any
             disposition
             to
             goe
             to
             any
             other
             place
             ,
             nor
             to
             take
             any
             taste
             in
             any
             thing
             .
             I
             have
             vnderstoode
             the
             like
             of
             others
             ,
             and
             particularly
             of
             one
             that
             was
             of
             our
             company
             ,
             who
             being
             then
             a
             Secular
             man
             ,
             had
             passed
             by
             these
             desarts
             :
             and
             it
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             ,
             the
             qualitie
             of
             this
             colde
             aire
             ,
             which
             killes
             ,
             and
             also
             preserves
             the
             dead
             bodies
             without
             corruption
             .
             I
             have
             also
             vnderstoode
             it
             of
             a
             reverend
             religious
             man
             ,
             of
             the
             Order
             of
             Saint
             Dominike
             ,
             and
             Prelate
             thereof
             ,
             who
             hadde
             seene
             it
             passing
             by
             the
             desarts
             :
             and
             which
             is
             strange
             ,
             hee
             reported
             ,
             that
             travelling
             that
             way
             by
             night
             ,
             was
             forced
             to
             defend
             himselfe
             against
             that
             deadly
             winde
             which
             blowes
             there
             (
             having
             no
             other
             meanes
             )
             but
             to
             gather
             together
             a
             great
             number
             of
             those
             dead
             bodies
             that
             lay
             there
             ,
             and
             made
             therof
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             a
             rampire
             and
             a
             bolster
             for
             his
             head
             :
             in
             this
             manner
             did
             he
             sleepe
             ,
             the
             dead
             bodies
             giving
             him
             life
             .
             Without
             doubt
             this
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             cold
             so
             piercing
             ,
             that
             it
             quencheth
             the
             vitall
             heate
             ,
             cutting
             off
             his
             influence
             ;
             and
             being
             so
             exceeding
             colde
             ,
             yet
             doth
             not
             corrupt
             nor
             give
             any
             putrifaction
             to
             the
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             for
             that
             putrifaction
             groweth
             from
             heate
             and
             moystnesse
             .
             As
             for
             the
             other
             kinde
             of
             ayre
             which
             thunders
             vnder
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             causeth
             earthquakes
             ,
             more
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             then
             in
             any
             other
             Regions
             ,
             I
             wil
             speake
             thereof
             in
             treating
             the
             qualities
             of
             the
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             We
             wil
             content
             our selves
             now
             with
             what
             wee
             have
             spoken
             of
             the
             wind
             and
             aire
             ,
             and
             passe
             to
             that
             which
             is
             to
             be
             spok●n
             of
             the
             water
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             Ocean
             that
             invirons
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             North
             and
             South
             Seas
             .
             
               CHAP.
               10.
            
             
          
           
             AMongst
             all
             waters
             the
             Ocean
             is
             the
             principall
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             Indies
             have
             beene
             discovered
             ,
             and
             are
             invironed
             therewith
             ;
             for
             either
             they
             be
             Ilands
             of
             the
             Ocean
             sea
             ,
             or
             maine
             land
             ,
             the
             which
             wheresoever
             it
             ends
             ,
             is
             bounded
             with
             this
             Ocean
             .
             To
             this
             day
             they
             have
             no●
             discovered
             at
             the
             Indies
             any
             mediterranian
             sea
             ,
             as
             in
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
            
             ,
             and
             Affrike
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             there
             enters
             some
             arme
             of
             this
             great
             sea
             ,
             and
             makes
             distinct
             seas
             ,
             taking
             their
             names
             from
             the
             Provinces
             they
             bathe
             :
             and
             almost
             all
             the
             mediterranean
             Seas
             continue
             and
             ioyne
             together
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             Ocean
             itselfe
             ,
             by
             the
             straight
             of
             Gibraltar
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             called
             ,
             the
             Pillers
             of
             Hercules
             ,
             although
             the
             red
             sea
             being
             separated
             from
             the
             mediterranean
             seas
             ,
             enters
             alone
             into
             the
             Indian
             Ocean
             ;
             and
             the
             Caspian
             sea
             ioynes
             not
             with
             any
             other
             :
             so
             that
             at
             the
             Indies
             wee
             finde
             not
             anie
             other
             sea
             then
             this
             Ocean
             ,
             which
             they
             divide
             into
             two
             ,
             the
             one
             they
             call
             the
             north
             sea
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             the
             south
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             Indies
             which
             were
             first
             discovered
             by
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             reacheth
             vnto
             Spaine
             ,
             lies
             all
             to
             the
             north
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             land
             thereafter
             discovered
             a
             sea
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             called
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             decline
             vntill
             they
             have
             passed
             the
             Line
             :
             and
             having
             lost
             the
             North
             ,
             or
             Pole
             articke
             ,
             they
             called
             it
             South
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             they
             have
             called
             all
             that
             Ocean
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             which
             lieth
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             althogh
             a
             great
             part
             of
             it
             be
             seated
             to
             the
             north
             ,
             as
             al
             the
             coast
             of
             new
             
               Spaine
               ,
               Nuaragna
               ,
               Guatimala
            
             and
             Panama
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             hee
             that
             first
             discovered
             this
             sea
             ,
             was
             called
             Blasconunes
             of
             
             Bilbo
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             did
             by
             that
             part
             which
             we
             now
             call
             maine
             land
             ,
             where
             it
             growes
             narrow
             ,
             and
             the
             two
             seas
             approach
             so
             neere
             the
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             but
             seaven
             leagues
             of
             distance
             :
             for
             although
             they
             make
             the
             way
             eighteene
             from
             
               Nombre
               de
               Dios
            
             ,
             to
             Panama
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             with
             turning
             to
             seeke
             the
             commoditie
             of
             the
             way
             ,
             but
             drawing
             a
             direct
             line
             ,
             the
             one
             sea
             shall
             not
             be
             found
             more
             distant
             from
             the
             other
             .
             Some
             have
             discoursed
             and
             propounded
             to
             cut
             through
             this
             passage
             of
             seaven
             leagues
             ,
             and
             to
             ioyne
             one
             sea
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             to
             make
             the
             passage
             from
             Peru
             more
             commodious
             and
             easie
             ,
             for
             that
             these
             eighteene
             leagues
             of
             land
             betwixt
             
               Nombre
               de
               Dios
            
             and
             Panama
             ,
             is
             more
             painefull
             and
             chargeable
             then
             2300.
             by
             sea
             ,
             wherevpon
             some
             would
             say
             ,
             it
             were
             a
             meanes
             to
             drowne
             the
             land
             ,
             one
             sea
             being
             lower
             then
             another
             .
             
             As
             in
             times
             past
             we
             finde
             it
             written
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             same
             consideration
             ,
             they
             gave
             over
             the
             enterprize
             to
             win
             the
             red
             sea
             into
             Nile
             ,
             in
             the
             time
             of
             King
             Sesostris
             ,
             and
             since
             ,
             in
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Othomans
             .
             But
             for
             my
             part
             ,
             
             I
             hold
             such
             discourses
             and
             propositions
             for
             vaine
             ,
             although
             this
             inconvenient
             should
             not
             happen
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             will
             not
             hold
             for
             assured
             .
             I
             beleeve
             there
             is
             no
             humaine
             power
             able
             to
             beat
             and
             breake
             downe
             those
             strong
             and
             impenetrable
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             God
             hath
             placed
             betwixt
             the
             two
             seas
             ,
             and
             hath
             made
             them
             most
             hard
             rockes
             ,
             to
             withstand
             the
             furie
             of
             two
             seas
             .
             And
             although
             it
             were
             possible
             to
             men
             ,
             yet
             in
             my
             opinion
             they
             should
             feare
             punishment
             from
             heaven
             ,
             in
             seeking
             to
             correct
             the
             workes
             ,
             which
             the
             Creator
             by
             his
             great
             providence
             hath
             ordained
             and
             disposed
             in
             the
             framing
             of
             this
             vniversall
             world
             .
             Leaving
             this
             discourse
             of
             opening
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             ioyning
             both
             seas
             together
             ,
             there
             is
             yet
             another
             lesse
             rash
             ,
             but
             very
             difficult
             
             and
             dangerous
             to
             search
             out
             .
             Whether
             these
             two
             great
             gulphes
             do
             ioyne
             in
             any
             other
             part
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             enterprize
             of
             
               Fernando
               Magellan
            
             a
             Portugall
             gentleman
             ,
             whose
             great
             courage
             and
             constancie
             in
             the
             research
             of
             this
             subject
             ,
             and
             happy
             successe
             in
             the
             finding
             thereof
             ,
             gave
             the
             name
             of
             ete●nall
             memory
             to
             this
             straight
             ,
             which
             iustly
             they
             call
             by
             the
             name
             of
             the
             discoverer
             Magellan
             ,
             of
             which
             straight
             we
             will
             intreate
             a
             little
             ,
             as
             of
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             wonders
             of
             the
             world
             .
             Some
             have
             beleeved
             ,
             that
             this
             Straight
             which
             Magellan
             had
             discovered
             in
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             was
             none
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             was
             straightned
             ,
             as
             
               Don
               Alonso
               d'
               Arsille
            
             writes
             in
             his
             Auracane
             :
             and
             at
             this
             day
             there
             are
             some
             that
             say
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             such
             straight
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             are
             Ilands
             betwixt
             the
             sea
             and
             land
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             maine
             land
             endes
             there
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             whereof
             are
             all
             Ilands
             ,
             beyond
             the
             which
             the
             one
             sea
             ioynes
             fully
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             or
             to
             speake
             better
             ,
             it
             is
             all
             one
             Sea.
             But
             in
             turth
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             straight
             and
             a
             long
             and
             stretched
             out
             land
             on
             eyther
             side
             ,
             although
             it
             hath
             not
             yet
             beene
             knowne
             how
             farre
             it
             stretcheth
             of
             the
             one
             side
             of
             the
             straight
             towards
             the
             South
             .
             After
             Magellan
             ,
             a
             shippe
             of
             the
             Bishoppe
             of
             Plaisance
             passed
             the
             straight
             ,
             
               Don
               Gui●ieres
               Carvaial
            
             ,
             (
             whose
             maste
             they
             say
             is
             yet
             at
             Lima
             ,
             at
             the
             entrie
             of
             the
             palace
             ,
             )
             they
             went
             afterwards
             coasting
             along
             the
             South
             ,
             to
             discover
             the
             Straight
             ,
             by
             the
             commandement
             of
             
               Don
               Garcia
            
             of
             Mendoce
             ,
             then
             governer
             of
             Chille
             ,
             according
             to
             that
             which
             Captaine
             Ladrillero
             found
             it
             and
             passed
             it
             .
             I
             have
             read
             the
             discourse
             and
             report
             he
             made
             ,
             where
             he
             saieth
             ,
             that
             he
             did
             not
             hazard
             himselfe
             to
             land
             in
             the
             Straight
             ,
             but
             having
             discovered
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             he
             returned
             back
             ,
             for
             the
             roughnes
             of
             the
             time
             ,
             winter
             being
             now
             come
             ,
             
             which
             caused
             the
             waves
             comming
             from
             the
             North
             ,
             to
             grow
             great
             and
             swelling
             ,
             and
             the
             sea
             continually
             foming
             with
             rage
             .
             In
             our
             time
             ,
             
               Francis
               Drake
            
             an
             Englishman
             ,
             passed
             this
             straight
             .
             After
             him
             ,
             Captaine
             Sarmiento
             passed
             it
             on
             the
             South
             side
             .
             And
             lastly
             ,
             in
             the
             yeere
             1587.
             other
             Englishmen
             passed
             it
             ,
             by
             the
             instruction
             of
             Drake
             ,
             which
             at
             this
             time
             runne
             along
             all
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru.
             And
             for
             that
             the
             report
             which
             the
             master
             Pilot
             that
             passed
             it
             made
             ,
             seemeth
             notable
             vnto
             me
             ,
             I
             will
             heere
             set
             it
             downe
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Straight
             of
             Magellan
             ,
             and
             how
             it
             was
             passed
             on
             the
             South
             side
             .
             
               CHAP.
               11.
            
             
          
           
             IN
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             God
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             seaventy
             nine
             ,
             
               Francis
               Drake
            
             having
             passed
             the
             Straights
             that
             runne
             alongest
             the
             coast
             of
             Chille
             ,
             and
             all
             Peru
             ,
             and
             taken
             the
             shippe
             of
             Saint
             
               Iean
               d'
               Anthona
            
             ,
             where
             there
             was
             a
             great
             number
             of
             barres
             of
             silver
             ,
             the
             Viceroy
             Don
             Francis
             of
             Toledo
             armed
             and
             sent
             foorth
             two
             good
             shippes
             ,
             to
             discover
             the
             Straight
             ,
             appoynting
             
               Peter
               Sarmiento
            
             for
             Captaine
             ,
             a
             man
             learned
             in
             Astrologie
             .
             They
             parted
             from
             Callao
             of
             Lima
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             October
             ;
             and
             forasmuch
             as
             vpon
             that
             coast
             there
             blowes
             a
             contrary
             winde
             from
             the
             South
             ,
             they
             tooke
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             having
             sailed
             litle
             above
             thirty
             days
             with
             a
             favourable
             winde
             ,
             they
             came
             to
             the
             same
             altitude
             of
             the
             Straight
             :
             but
             for
             that
             it
             was
             very
             hard
             to
             discover
             ,
             they
             approched
             neere
             vnto
             the
             land
             ,
             where
             they
             entred
             into
             a
             great
             Bay
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             there
             is
             an
             Archipelague
             of
             Ilands
             :
             Sarimento
             grew
             obstinate
             ,
             that
             this
             was
             the
             Straight
             ,
             and
             staied
             a
             whole
             moneth
             to
             finde
             it
             
             out
             ,
             by
             diverse
             wayes
             creeping
             vppe
             to
             the
             high
             mountaines
             .
             But
             seeing
             they
             could
             not
             discover
             it
             ,
             at
             the
             instance
             of
             such
             as
             were
             in
             the
             army
             ,
             they
             returned
             to
             sea
             .
             The
             same
             day
             the
             weather
             grew
             rough
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             ranne
             their
             course
             ,
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             night
             the
             Admiralls
             light
             failed
             so
             ,
             as
             the
             other
             shippe
             never
             see
             them
             after
             :
             The
             day
             following
             ,
             the
             force
             of
             the
             winde
             continuing
             still
             ,
             being
             a
             ●ide
             wind
             ,
             the
             Admiralles
             shippe
             discovered
             an
             opening
             ,
             which
             made
             land
             ,
             thinking
             good
             to
             enter
             there
             for
             shelter
             ,
             vntill
             the
             tempest
             were
             past
             .
             The
             which
             succeeded
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             having
             discovered
             this
             vent
             ,
             they
             found
             that
             it
             ranne
             more
             and
             more
             into
             the
             land
             ;
             and
             coniecturing
             that
             it
             should
             be
             the
             Straight
             which
             they
             sought
             ,
             they
             tooke
             the
             height
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             where
             they
             found
             themselves
             in
             fiftie
             degrees
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             very
             height
             of
             the
             Straight
             :
             and
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             better
             assured
             ,
             they
             thrust
             out
             their
             Brigandine
             ,
             which
             having
             run
             many
             leagues
             into
             this
             arme
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             without
             seeing
             any
             end
             ,
             they
             found
             it
             to
             be
             the
             very
             Straight
             .
             And
             for
             that
             they
             had
             order
             to
             passe
             it
             ,
             they
             planted
             a
             hie
             Crosse
             there
             ,
             with
             letters
             thereon
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             other
             ship
             should
             chance
             to
             arrive
             there
             ,
             they
             should
             have
             newes
             of
             their
             Generall
             ,
             and
             follow
             .
             They
             passed
             the
             Straight
             in
             a
             favourable
             time
             without
             difficultie
             ,
             and
             passing
             into
             the
             north
             sea
             ,
             they
             came
             to
             certaine
             vnknowne
             Ilandes
             ,
             where
             they
             tooke
             in
             fresh
             water
             ,
             and
             other
             refreshings
             :
             From
             thence
             they
             tooke
             their
             course
             towardes
             
               Cape
               de
               Vert
            
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             Pilote
             maior
             returned
             to
             Peru
             ,
             by
             the
             way
             of
             Carthagene
             ,
             and
             Panama
             ,
             carrying
             a
             discourse
             of
             the
             Straight
             to
             the
             Viceroy
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             their
             successe
             ,
             of
             whom
             he
             was
             well
             rewarded
             for
             his
             good
             service
             .
          
           
           
             But
             Captaine
             
               Peter
               Sarmiento
            
             sailed
             from
             
               Cape
               Vert
            
             to
             Seville
             in
             the
             same
             ship
             wherewith
             he
             had
             passed
             the
             Straight
             ,
             and
             went
             to
             Court
             ;
             where
             his
             Maiestie
             rewarded
             him
             ;
             and
             at
             his
             instance
             ,
             gave
             commaundement
             to
             prepare
             a
             great
             army
             ,
             which
             he
             sent
             vnder
             the
             commaund
             of
             
               Diego
               Flores
               de
               Valdes
            
             ,
             to
             people
             and
             fortifie
             this
             Straight
             .
             But
             this
             army
             ,
             after
             variable
             successe
             ,
             spent
             much
             ,
             and
             profited
             little
             .
          
           
             Returning
             now
             to
             the
             Viceadmiralles
             shippe
             ,
             which
             went
             in
             company
             of
             the
             Generall
             ,
             having
             lost
             him
             in
             the
             storme
             ,
             they
             tooke
             the
             sea
             ,
             but
             the
             wind
             being
             contrary
             and
             stormy
             ,
             they
             looked
             all
             to
             perish
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             confessed
             themselves
             ,
             and
             prepared
             for
             death
             .
             This
             tempest
             continued
             three
             dayes
             without
             intermission
             ,
             and
             hourely
             they
             feared
             to
             runne
             on
             ground
             ;
             but
             it
             fel
             out
             contrary
             ,
             for
             they
             went
             still
             from
             land
             ,
             vntill
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             third
             day
             ,
             that
             the
             storme
             ceased
             ,
             and
             then
             taking
             the
             height
             ,
             they
             found
             themselves
             in
             fiftie
             sixe
             degrees
             :
             but
             seeing
             they
             had
             not
             crossed
             ,
             and
             yet
             were
             farre
             from
             land
             ,
             they
             were
             amazed
             ,
             whereby
             they
             surmized
             (
             as
             
               Hernando
               Lamero
            
             tolde
             me
             )
             that
             the
             land
             which
             is
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Straight
             ,
             as
             wee
             goe
             by
             the
             south
             sea
             ,
             runnes
             not
             the
             same
             o
             romer
             that
             it
             doth
             to
             the
             Straight
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             turneth
             to
             the
             East
             ▪
             for
             else
             it
             were
             impossible
             but
             they
             shoulde
             have
             touched
             land
             ,
             having
             runne
             so
             long
             time
             with
             this
             crosse
             winde
             :
             but
             they
             passed
             on
             no
             further
             ,
             neyther
             coulde
             they
             discover
             the
             lands
             end
             (
             which
             some
             holde
             to
             be
             there
             )
             whether
             it
             were
             an
             Iland
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Straight
             ,
             where
             the
             two
             seas
             of
             North
             and
             South
             doe
             ioyne
             together
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             did
             runne
             vppe
             towardes
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             ioyne
             with
             the
             land
             of
             Vesta
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             which
             answers
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             Good
             Hope
             (
             as
             it
             is
             the
             
             opinion
             of
             some
             .
             )
             The
             trueth
             hereof
             is
             not
             to
             this
             day
             well
             knowne
             ,
             neither
             is
             there
             any
             one
             found
             that
             hath
             discovered
             that
             land
             .
             The
             Viceroy
             Don
             
               Martin
               Henrique
            
             sa●de
             vnto
             me
             ,
             that
             he
             held
             this
             report
             for
             an
             ●nvention
             of
             the
             English
             ,
             that
             the
             Straight
             should
             pr●sen●lie
             make
             an
             Iland
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             two
             seas
             did
             ioyne
             together
             ;
             for
             that
             (
             beeing
             Viceroy
             of
             New
             Spaine
             )
             hee
             had
             diligently
             examined
             the
             Portugall
             Pilote
             ,
             who
             had
             bin
             left
             there
             by
             
               Francis
               Drake
            
             ,
             and
             yet
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             any
             such
             matter
             by
             him
             .
             But
             that
             was
             a
             very
             Straight
             ,
             and
             a
             maine
             land
             on
             either
             side
             .
             Returning
             then
             to
             the
             saide
             Viceadmirall
             ,
             they
             discovered
             this
             Straight
             (
             as
             the
             saide
             
               Hernando
               Lamero
            
             reported
             vnto
             mee
             )
             but
             by
             another
             mouth
             or
             entrie
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             greater
             height
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             certaine
             great
             Iland
             which
             is
             at
             the
             entrie
             of
             the
             Straight
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             ,
             the
             Bell
             ,
             for
             the
             forme
             it
             carries
             .
             And
             (
             as
             he
             saide
             )
             hee
             woulde
             have
             passed
             it
             :
             but
             the
             Captaine
             and
             souldiers
             woulde
             not
             yeelde
             therevnto
             ,
             supposing
             that
             the
             time
             was
             too
             farre
             spent
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             were
             in
             great
             daunger
             .
             And
             so
             they
             returned
             to
             Chille
             and
             Peru
             ,
             without
             passing
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Straight
             which
             some
             holde
             to
             be
             in
             Florida
             .
             CHAP.
             12.
             
          
           
             EVen
             as
             Magellan
             found
             out
             this
             Straight
             vppon
             the
             South
             ,
             so
             some
             have
             pretended
             to
             discover
             another
             Straight
             ,
             which
             they
             say
             is
             in
             the
             north
             ,
             and
             suppose
             it
             to
             be
             in
             Florida
             ,
             whose
             coast
             runs
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             they
             knowe
             no
             end
             thereof
             .
             
               Peter
               Melendez
            
             the
             Adelantade
             ,
             a
             man
             very
             expert
             at
             sea
             ,
             affirmeth
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             Straight
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             King
             had
             commanded
             
             him
             to
             discover
             it
             ,
             wherein
             he
             shewed
             a
             great
             desire
             :
             he
             propounded
             his
             reasons
             to
             proove
             his
             opinion
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             seene
             some
             remainders
             of
             shippes
             in
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             like
             vnto
             those
             the
             which
             the
             Chinois
             vse
             ,
             which
             had
             beene
             impossible
             ,
             if
             there
             were
             no
             passage
             from
             one
             sea
             vnto
             another
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             he
             reported
             ,
             that
             in
             a
             certaine
             great
             Bay
             in
             Florida
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             runnes
             300.
             leagues
             within
             the
             land
             ,
             )
             they
             see
             Whales
             in
             some
             season
             of
             the
             yeere
             ,
             which
             come
             from
             the
             other
             sea
             .
             Shewing
             moreover
             other
             likelihood
             ,
             he
             concludes
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             a
             thing
             agreeing
             with
             the
             wisedome
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             and
             the
             goodly
             order
             of
             nature
             ,
             that
             as
             there
             was
             communication
             and
             a
             passage
             betwixt
             the
             two
             seas
             at
             the
             Pole
             Antartike
             ,
             so
             there
             should
             in
             like
             sort
             ,
             be
             one
             at
             the
             Pole
             Artike
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             principall
             Pole.
             Some
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             Drake
             had
             knowledge
             of
             this
             Straight
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             gave
             occasion
             so
             to
             iudge
             ,
             whenas
             he
             passed
             along
             the
             coast
             of
             new
             Spaine
             by
             the
             South
             sea
             .
             Yea
             ,
             they
             hold
             opinion
             ,
             that
             other
             Englishmen
             which
             this
             yeere
             1587.
             tooke
             a
             shippe
             comming
             from
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             with
             great
             quantitie
             of
             gold
             and
             other
             riches
             ,
             did
             passe
             this
             straight
             ,
             which
             prize
             they
             made
             neere
             to
             the
             Calliphornes
             ,
             which
             course
             the
             ships
             returning
             from
             the
             Philippines
             and
             China
             ,
             to
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             do
             vsually
             observe
             .
             They
             confidently
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             (
             as
             the
             courage
             of
             man
             is
             great
             ,
             and
             his
             desire
             infinite
             ,
             to
             finde
             new
             meanes
             to
             inrich
             himselfe
             )
             so
             within
             few
             yeeres
             this
             secret
             will
             be
             discovered
             .
             And
             truly
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             worthie
             admiration
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             Ants
             do
             alwaies
             follow
             the
             trace
             of
             other
             ;
             so
             men
             in
             the
             knowledge
             and
             search
             of
             new
             things
             ,
             never
             stay
             ,
             vntill
             they
             have
             attained
             the
             desired
             end
             for
             the
             content
             and
             glorie
             of
             men
             .
             And
             the
             high
             and
             eternall
             wisedome
             of
             the
             
             Creator
             vseth
             this
             curiositie
             of
             men
             ,
             to
             communicate
             the
             light
             of
             his
             holy
             Gospell
             to
             people
             ,
             that
             alwaies
             live
             in
             the
             obscure
             darkenesse
             of
             their
             errors
             .
             But
             to
             conclude
             ,
             the
             straight
             of
             the
             Artike
             Pole
             (
             if
             there
             be
             any
             )
             hath
             not
             been
             yet
             discovered
             .
             It
             shall
             not
             therefore
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             to
             speake
             what
             we
             know
             of
             the
             particularities
             of
             the
             Antartike
             straight
             ,
             already
             discovered
             and
             knowne
             ,
             by
             the
             report
             of
             such
             as
             have
             seene
             and
             observed
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             properties
             of
             the
             Straight
             of
             Magellan
             .
             CHAP.
             13.
             
          
           
             THis
             Straight
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             is
             iust
             fiftie
             degrees
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             from
             one
             sea
             to
             another
             ,
             fourscore
             and
             ten
             ,
             or
             a
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             in
             the
             narrowest
             place
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             league
             and
             little
             lesse
             ,
             wher●
             it
             was
             intended
             the
             King
             should
             build
             a
             Fort
             to
             defend
             the
             passage
             .
             It
             is
             so
             deepe
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             sounded
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             they
             finde
             grovnd
             at
             18.
             yea
             ,
             at
             15.
             fadomes
             .
             Of
             these
             hundred
             leagues
             which
             it
             containes
             in
             length
             from
             one
             sea
             vnto
             the
             other
             ,
             it
             is
             plainely
             seene
             ,
             that
             the
             waves
             of
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             runne
             30.
             leagues
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             70.
             are
             possessed
             with
             the
             billowes
             and
             waves
             of
             the
             North
             sea
             .
             But
             there
             is
             this
             difference
             ,
             that
             the
             30.
             leagues
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             runne
             betwixt
             the
             rockes
             and
             most
             high
             mountaines
             ,
             whose
             tops
             are
             continually
             covered
             with
             snow
             :
             so
             as
             they
             seeme
             )
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             great
             height
             )
             to
             be
             ioyned
             together
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             entrie
             of
             the
             Straight
             to
             the
             South
             so
             hard
             to
             discover
             .
             In
             these
             30.
             leagues
             ,
             the
             sea
             is
             very
             deepe
             ,
             and
             without
             bottome
             ,
             yet
             may
             they
             fasten
             their
             ships
             
             to
             the
             land
             ,
             the
             b●nckes
             being
             straight
             and
             vneven
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             70.
             leagues
             towards
             the
             North
             ,
             they
             finde
             ground
             ,
             and
             of
             either
             side
             there
             are
             large
             plaines
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Ca●●na●
             .
             Many
             great
             rivers
             of
             faire
             and
             cleere
             water
             runne
             into
             this
             Straight
             ,
             and
             thereabout
             are
             great
             and
             wonderfull
             forrests
             ,
             whereas
             they
             finde
             some
             trees
             of
             excellent
             wood
             and
             sweete
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             not
             knowne
             in
             these
             partes
             ,
             whereofsuch
             as
             passed
             from
             thence
             to
             Peru
             ,
             brought
             some
             to
             shew
             .
             There
             are
             many
             medowes
             within
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             many
             Ilands
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Straight
             .
             The
             Indians
             that
             inhabite
             on
             the
             South
             side
             ,
             are
             little
             ,
             and
             cowards
             ,
             those
             that
             dwell
             on
             the
             North
             part
             ,
             are
             great
             and
             valiant
             :
             they
             brought
             some
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             they
             hadde
             taken
             .
             They
             found
             peeces
             of
             blew
             cloth
             ,
             and
             other
             markes
             and
             signes
             that
             some
             men
             of
             Europe
             had
             passed
             there
             .
             The
             Indians
             ●●luted
             our
             men
             with
             the
             name
             of
             Iesia
             .
             They
             are
             good
             Archers
             ,
             and
             go●
             clad
             in
             wilde
             beasts
             skinnes
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             aboundance
             .
             The
             waters
             of
             the
             Straight
             rise
             and
             fall
             as
             the
             tide
             ,
             and
             they
             may
             visibly
             see
             the
             tides
             come
             of
             the
             one
             side
             of
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             other
             from
             the
             South
             whereas
             they
             meete
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             )
             is
             thirtie
             leagues
             from
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             from
             the
             North.
             And
             although
             it
             seemes
             there
             should
             be
             more
             daunger
             then
             in
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             yet
             whenas
             Captaine
             Sarmi●nto
             his
             shippe
             (
             whereof
             I
             spake
             )
             passed
             it
             ,
             they
             had
             no
             great
             stormes
             ,
             but
             found
             farre
             lesse
             difficultie
             then
             they
             expected
             :
             for
             then
             the
             time
             was
             very
             calme
             and
             pleasant
             .
             And
             moreover
             ,
             the
             waves
             from
             the
             north
             sea
             ,
             came
             broken
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             length
             of
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             leagues
             ,
             and
             the
             waves
             from
             the
             south
             sea
             were
             not
             raging
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             deapth
             ,
             in
             
             which
             deapth
             ,
             the
             waves
             breake
             ,
             and
             are
             swallowed
             vp
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             in
             winter
             the
             straight
             is
             not
             navigable
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             tempests
             and
             raging
             of
             the
             sea
             in
             that
             season
             .
             Some
             shippes
             which
             have
             attempted
             to
             passe
             the
             Straight
             in
             winter
             ,
             have
             perished
             .
             One
             onely
             shippe
             passed
             it
             on
             the
             South
             side
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Captaine
             I
             made
             mention
             of
             .
             I
             was
             fully
             instructed
             of
             all
             that
             I
             have
             spoken
             by
             the
             Pilote
             thereof
             ,
             called
             
               Hernando
               Alonse
            
             ,
             and
             have
             seene
             the
             true
             discription
             of
             the
             Straight
             they
             made
             in
             passing
             it
             ,
             whereof
             they
             carried
             the
             copie
             to
             the
             King
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             the
             original
             to
             their
             viceroy
             of
             Peru.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             of
             the
             Indian
             Ocean
             .
             CHAP.
             14.
             
          
           
             ONe
             of
             the
             mostadmirable
             secrets
             of
             Nature
             is
             the
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             not
             onely
             for
             this
             strange
             property
             of
             rising
             and
             falling
             ,
             but
             much
             more
             for
             the
             difference
             there
             is
             thereof
             in
             diverse
             seas
             ,
             yea
             in
             diverse
             coastes
             of
             one
             and
             the
             same
             sea
             .
             There
             are
             some
             seas
             that
             have
             no
             daily
             flowing
             nor
             ebbing
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             inner
             Mediterranean
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Thyrene
             sea
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             flowes
             and
             ebbes
             every
             day
             in
             the
             vpper
             Mediterranean
             sea
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             of
             Venice
             ,
             and
             iustly
             giveth
             cause
             of
             admiration
             ,
             that
             these
             two
             seas
             being
             Mediterranean
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Venice
             being
             no
             greater
             then
             the
             other
             ,
             yet
             hath
             it
             his
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             as
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             and
             that
             other
             sea
             of
             Italie
             none
             at
             all
             .
             There
             are
             some
             Mediterranean
             seas
             ,
             that
             apparantly
             rise
             and
             fall
             everie
             moneth
             ;
             and
             others
             that
             neyther
             rise
             in
             the
             day
             ,
             nor
             in
             the
             moneth
             .
             There
             are
             other
             seas
             ,
             as
             the
             Spanish
             Ocean
             ,
             
             that
             have
             their
             flux
             and
             reflux
             every
             day
             ;
             and
             besides
             that
             ,
             they
             have
             it
             monethly
             ,
             which
             commeth
             twice
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             at
             the
             entry
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             ful
             of
             every
             Moone
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Spring
             tides
             .
             To
             say
             that
             any
             sea
             hath
             this
             daily
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             ,
             and
             not
             monethly
             ,
             I
             knowe
             not
             any
             .
             It
             is
             strange
             ,
             the
             difference
             we
             finde
             of
             this
             subiect
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             there
             are
             some
             places
             whereas
             the
             sea
             doth
             daily
             rise
             &
             fall
             two
             leagues
             as
             at
             Panama
             ,
             and
             at
             a
             high
             water
             it
             riseth
             much
             more
             ;
             There
             are
             other
             places
             where
             it
             doth
             rise
             and
             fall
             so
             little
             ,
             that
             hardly
             can
             you
             finde
             the
             difference
             .
             It
             is
             ordinary
             in
             the
             Ocean
             sea
             to
             have
             a
             daily
             flowing
             and
             ebbing
             ,
             and
             that
             was
             twice
             in
             a
             naturall
             day
             ,
             and
             ever
             it
             falls
             three
             quarters
             of
             an
             houre
             sooner
             one
             day
             then
             another
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             course
             of
             the
             Moone
             :
             so
             as
             the
             tide
             falles
             not
             alwayes
             in
             one
             houre
             of
             the
             day
             .
             Some
             would
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             flux
             and
             reflux
             proceeded
             from
             the
             locall
             motion
             of
             the
             water
             of
             the
             sea
             ;
             so
             as
             the
             water
             that
             riseth
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             falles
             on
             the
             other
             that
             is
             opposite
             vnto
             it
             :
             so
             that
             it
             is
             ful
             sea
             on
             the
             one
             side
             when
             as
             it
             is
             a
             lowe
             water
             on
             the
             opposite
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             a
             kettle
             full
             of
             water
             ,
             when
             wee
             moove
             it
             ,
             when
             it
             leanes
             to
             the
             one
             side
             the
             water
             increaseth
             ;
             and
             on
             the
             other
             it
             diminisheth
             .
             Others
             affirme
             ,
             that
             the
             sea
             riseth
             in
             all
             partes
             at
             one
             time
             ,
             and
             decreaseth
             at
             one
             instant
             :
             as
             the
             boyling
             of
             a
             pot
             ,
             comming
             out
             of
             the
             centre
             it
             extendeth
             it selfe
             on
             all
             partes
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             ceaseth
             ,
             it
             falles
             likewise
             on
             all
             partes
             .
          
           
             This
             second
             opinion
             is
             true
             ,
             and
             in
             my
             iudgement
             ,
             certaine
             and
             tried
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             for
             the
             reasons
             which
             the
             Philosophers
             give
             in
             their
             Meteors
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             certaine
             experience
             wee
             may
             make
             .
             For
             to
             satisfie
             my selfe
             vpon
             this
             point
             and
             question
             ,
             I
             demanded
             particularly
             
             of
             the
             said
             Pilot
             ,
             how
             he
             found
             the
             tides
             in
             the
             straight
             ,
             and
             if
             the
             tides
             of
             the
             South
             sea
             did
             fall
             whenas
             those
             of
             the
             North
             did
             rise
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             (
             this
             question
             being
             true
             )
             why
             the
             increase
             of
             the
             sea
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             is
             the
             decrease
             thereof
             in
             another
             ,
             as
             the
             first
             opinion
             holdeth
             .
             He
             answered
             that
             it
             was
             not
             so
             ,
             but
             they
             might
             see
             plainely
             ,
             that
             the
             tides
             of
             the
             North
             and
             South
             seas
             rise
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             waves
             of
             one
             sea
             incountred
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             at
             one
             instant
             likewise
             they
             began
             to
             retire
             ,
             every
             one
             into
             his
             sea
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             rising
             and
             falling
             was
             daily
             seene
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             incounter
             of
             the
             tides
             (
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             )
             was
             at
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             leagues
             to
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             and
             thirtie
             to
             the
             South
             .
             Whereby
             wee
             may
             plainely
             gather
             ,
             that
             the
             ebbing
             and
             flowing
             of
             the
             Ocean
             is
             no
             pure
             locall
             motion
             ,
             but
             rather
             an
             alteration
             :
             whereby
             all
             waters
             really
             rise
             and
             increase
             at
             one
             instat
             ,
             and
             in
             others
             ,
             they
             dimini●h
             ,
             as
             the
             boyling
             of
             a
             pot
             ,
             whereof
             I
             have
             spoken
             .
             It
             were
             impossible
             to
             comprehend
             this
             poynt
             by
             experience
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             not
             in
             the
             Straight
             ,
             where
             all
             the
             Ocean
             ,
             both
             on
             th'
             one
             side
             ,
             &
             on
             th'
             other
             ioynes
             together
             :
             for
             none
             but
             Angelles
             can
             see
             it
             ,
             and
             iudge
             of
             the
             opposite
             parts
             :
             for
             that
             man
             hath
             not
             so
             long
             a
             sight
             ,
             nor
             so
             nimble
             and
             swift
             footing
             as
             were
             needefull
             ,
             to
             transporte
             his
             eyes
             from
             one
             parte
             to
             another
             ,
             in
             so
             short
             a
             time
             ,
             as
             a
             tide
             will
             give
             him
             respite
             ,
             which
             are
             only
             six
             houres
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             sundry
             Fishers
             ,
             and
             their
             maner
             of
             fishing
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             
               CHAP.
               15.
            
             
          
           
             THere
             are
             in
             the
             Indian
             Ocean
             ,
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             fishes
             ,
             the
             kindes
             &
             properties
             whereof
             the
             Creator
             
             only
             can
             declare
             .
             There
             are
             many
             such
             as
             we
             have
             in
             the
             sea
             of
             Europe
             ,
             as
             shaddes
             ,
             and
             aloses
             which
             come
             from
             the
             sea
             into
             the
             rivers
             ;
             dorads
             ,
             pilchards
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             .
             There
             are
             others
             ,
             the
             like
             I
             doe
             not
             thinke
             to
             have
             seene
             in
             these
             partes
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             they
             doe
             call
             Cabrillas
             ,
             which
             doe
             somewhat
             resemble
             the
             trowt
             ,
             and
             in
             new
             Spaine
             they
             call
             them
             Bobos
             ,
             they
             mount
             from
             the
             sea
             into
             the
             rivers
             .
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             any
             Besugues
             there
             ,
             nor
             trowts
             ,
             although
             some
             say
             there
             are
             in
             Chille
             .
             There
             are
             Tonins
             in
             some
             partes
             vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             rare
             ,
             and
             some
             are
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             at
             a
             certaine
             time
             they
             do
             cast
             their
             spawne
             in
             the
             Straight
             of
             Magellan
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             in
             Spaine
             at
             the
             Straight
             of
             Gibraltar
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             finde
             more
             vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Chille
             ,
             although
             those
             I
             have
             seene
             there
             ,
             are
             not
             like
             to
             them
             in
             Spaine
             .
             At
             the
             Ilandes
             (
             which
             they
             call
             Barlovente
             )
             which
             are
             Cuba
             ,
             Saint
             
               Dominique
               ,
               Port
               rique
            
             ,
             and
             Iamaique
             ,
             they
             find
             a
             fish
             which
             they
             call
             Manati
             ,
             a
             strange
             kinde
             of
             fish
             ,
             if
             we
             may
             call
             it
             fish
             ,
             a
             creature
             which
             ingenders
             her
             yoong
             ones
             alive
             ,
             and
             hath
             teates
             ,
             and
             doth
             nourish
             them
             with
             milke
             ,
             feeding
             of
             grasse
             in
             the
             fieldes
             ,
             but
             in
             effect
             it
             lives
             continually
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             eate
             it
             as
             fish
             ;
             yet
             when
             I
             did
             eate
             of
             it
             at
             Saint
             Dominique
             on
             a
             friday
             ,
             I
             hadde
             some
             scruple
             ,
             not
             for
             that
             which
             is
             spoken
             ,
             but
             for
             that
             in
             colour
             and
             taste
             it
             was
             like
             vnto
             morselles
             of
             veale
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             greene
             ,
             and
             like
             vnto
             a
             cowe
             on
             the
             hinder
             partes
             .
             I
             didde
             woonder
             at
             the
             incredible
             ravening
             of
             the
             Tib●rons
             ,
             or
             sharkes
             ,
             whenas
             I
             did
             see
             drawne
             from
             one
             (
             that
             was
             taken
             in
             the
             Port
             )
             out
             of
             his
             gullet
             ,
             a
             buchers
             great
             knife
             ,
             a
             great
             yron
             hooke
             ,
             and
             a
             peece
             of
             a
             cowes
             head
             with
             one
             whole
             horne
             ,
             neyther
             doe
             I
             knowe
             if
             both
             were
             there
             ,
             or
             no.
             I
             did
             see
             in
             a
             creeke
             made
             with
             
             that
             sea
             ,
             a
             quarter
             of
             a
             horse
             for
             pleasure
             hanging
             vpon
             a
             stake
             ,
             whither
             presently
             came
             a
             company
             of
             these
             Tiburons
             ,
             at
             the
             smel
             thereof
             :
             and
             for
             the
             more
             pleasure
             ,
             this
             horse
             flesh
             was
             hung
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             I
             knowe
             not
             how
             many
             hand
             breadth
             from
             the
             water
             ;
             this
             company
             of
             fish
             flocke
             about
             it
             ,
             leaping
             vp
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             strange
             nimblenesse
             cut
             off
             both
             flesh
             and
             bone
             off
             the
             horse
             leg
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             had
             beene
             the
             stalke
             of
             a
             lettuce
             ;
             their
             teeth
             being
             as
             sharpe
             as
             a
             rasour
             .
             There
             are
             certaine
             small
             fishes
             they
             call
             Rambos
             ,
             which
             cleave
             to
             these
             Tiburons
             ,
             neyther
             can
             they
             drive
             them
             away
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             fed
             with
             that
             which
             falles
             from
             the
             Tiburons
             .
             There
             are
             other
             small
             fishes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             flying
             fishes
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             found
             within
             the
             tropickes
             ,
             and
             in
             no
             other
             place
             ,
             as
             I
             thinke
             :
             they
             are
             pursued
             by
             the
             Ducades
             ;
             and
             to
             escape
             them
             they
             leape
             out
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             goe
             a
             good
             way
             in
             the
             ayre
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             are
             called
             flying
             Fishes
             :
             they
             have
             wings
             as
             it
             were
             of
             linnen
             cloth
             ,
             or
             of
             parchment
             ,
             which
             do
             supporte
             them
             some
             space
             in
             the
             ayre
             .
             There
             did
             one
             flie
             or
             leape
             into
             the
             shippe
             wherin
             I
             went
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             did
             see
             ,
             and
             observe
             the
             fashion
             of
             his
             wings
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Indian
             histories
             there
             is
             often
             mention
             made
             of
             Lezards
             or
             Caymans
             (
             as
             they
             call
             them
             )
             and
             they
             are
             the
             very
             same
             which
             Plinie
             and
             the
             Antients
             call
             Crocodiles
             ,
             they
             finde
             them
             on
             the
             sea
             side
             ,
             and
             in
             hote
             rivers
             ,
             for
             in
             colde
             rivers
             there
             are
             none
             to
             be
             found
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             finde
             none
             vpon
             all
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             vnto
             Payra
             ,
             but
             forward
             they
             are
             commonly
             seene
             in
             the
             rivers
             .
             It
             is
             a
             most
             fierce
             and
             cruell
             beast
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             slow
             and
             heavie
             .
             Hee
             goes
             hunting
             and
             seekes
             his
             prey
             on
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             what
             hee
             takes
             alive
             ,
             he
             drownes
             it
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             yet
             dooth
             hee
             not
             eate
             it
             ,
             but
             out
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             
             for
             that
             his
             throate
             is
             of
             such
             a
             fashion
             ,
             as
             if
             there
             entred
             any
             water
             ,
             he
             should
             easily
             be
             drowned
             .
             It
             is
             a
             woonderfull
             thing
             to
             see
             a
             combat
             betwixt
             a
             Caymant
             and
             a
             Tigre
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             most
             cruell
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             A
             religious
             man
             of
             our
             company
             tolde
             me
             that
             he
             had
             seene
             these
             beasts
             fight
             most
             cruelly
             one
             against
             the
             other
             ;
             vpon
             the
             sea
             shoare
             the
             Caymant
             with
             his
             taile
             gave
             great
             blowes
             vnto
             the
             Tygre
             ,
             striving
             with
             his
             great
             force
             to
             carry
             him
             into
             the
             water
             :
             and
             the
             Tygre
             with
             his
             pawes
             resisted
             the
             Caymant
             ,
             drawing
             him
             to
             land
             .
             In
             the
             end
             the
             Tigre
             vanquished
             and
             opened
             the
             Lezard
             ;
             it
             seemes
             by
             the
             belly
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             most
             tender
             and
             penetrable
             ,
             for
             in
             every
             other
             parte
             hee
             is
             so
             hard
             ,
             that
             no
             lance
             ,
             and
             scarce
             a
             harquebuze
             can
             pierce
             it
             .
             The
             victory
             which
             an
             Indian
             had
             of
             a
             Caymant
             was
             yet
             more
             rare
             :
             the
             Caimant
             had
             carried
             away
             his
             yong
             childe
             ,
             and
             sodainely
             plunged
             into
             the
             sea
             ;
             the
             Indian
             mooved
             with
             choller
             ,
             cast
             himselfe
             after
             him
             ,
             with
             a
             knife
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             are
             excellent
             swimmers
             and
             dievers
             ,
             and
             the
             Caymant
             swimmeth
             alwayes
             on
             the
             toppe
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             hee
             hurt
             him
             in
             the
             belly
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             the
             Caymant
             feeling
             himselfe
             wounded
             ,
             went
             to
             the
             shoare
             ,
             leaving
             the
             little
             infant
             dead
             .
             But
             the
             combate
             which
             the
             Indians
             have
             with
             Whales
             is
             yet
             more
             admirable
             ,
             wherein
             appeares
             the
             power
             and
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             to
             give
             so
             base
             a
             Nation
             (
             as
             be
             the
             Indians
             )
             the
             industry
             and
             courage
             to
             incounter
             the
             most
             fierce
             and
             deformed
             beast
             in
             the
             worlde
             ,
             and
             only
             to
             fight
             with
             him
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             vanquish
             him
             ,
             &
             not
             to
             triumph
             over
             him
             .
             Considering
             this
             ,
             I
             have
             often
             remembred
             that
             place
             of
             the
             Psalme
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             Whale
             ,
             
               Draco
               iste
               quem
               formasti
               ad
               illudendum
               eum
               :
            
             What
             greater
             mockerie
             can
             there
             be
             ,
             then
             to
             see
             an
             Indian
             
             leade
             a
             whale
             as
             bigge
             as
             a
             mountaine
             ,
             vanquished
             with
             a
             corde
             ?
             The
             maner
             the
             Indians
             of
             Florida
             vse
             (
             as
             some
             expert
             men
             have
             tolde
             me
             )
             to
             take
             these
             whales
             ,
             (
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             store
             )
             is
             ,
             they
             put
             themselves
             into
             a
             Canoe
             ,
             which
             is
             like
             a
             barke
             of
             a
             tree
             ,
             and
             in
             swimming
             approach
             neere
             the
             whales
             side
             ,
             then
             with
             great
             dexteritie
             they
             leape
             to
             his
             necke
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             ride
             as
             on
             horse
             backe
             expecting
             his
             time
             ,
             then
             hee
             thrustes
             a
             sharpe
             and
             strong
             stake
             (
             which
             hee
             carries
             with
             him
             )
             into
             the
             whales
             nosthrill
             ,
             for
             so
             they
             call
             the
             hole
             or
             vent
             by
             which
             they
             breathe
             ,
             presently
             hee
             beates
             it
             in
             with
             an
             other
             stake
             as
             forcibly
             as
             hee
             can
             ;
             in
             the
             meane
             space
             the
             whale
             dooth
             fu●iously
             beate
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             raiseth
             mountaines
             of
             water
             ,
             running
             into
             the
             deepe
             with
             great
             violence
             ,
             and
             presently
             riseth
             againe
             ,
             not
             knowing
             what
             to
             doe
             for
             paine
             ;
             the
             Indian
             still
             sittes
             firme
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             him
             full
             payment
             for
             this
             trouble
             ,
             he
             beates
             another
             stake
             into
             the
             other
             vent
             or
             nosthrill
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             stoppeth
             him
             quite
             ,
             and
             takes
             away
             his
             breathing
             ,
             then
             hee
             betakes
             him
             to
             his
             Canoe
             ,
             which
             he
             holdes
             tied
             with
             a
             corde
             to
             the
             whales
             side
             ,
             and
             goes
             to
             land
             ,
             having
             first
             tied
             his
             corde
             to
             the
             whale
             ,
             the
             which
             hee
             lettes
             runne
             with
             the
             whale
             ,
             who
             leapes
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             whilest
             he
             finds
             water
             enough
             :
             being
             troubled
             with
             paine
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             hee
             comes
             neere
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             remaines
             on
             ground
             by
             the
             hugenesse
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             vnable
             any
             more
             to
             moove
             ;
             then
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Indians
             come
             vnto
             the
             Conqueror
             ,
             to
             gather
             his
             spoiles
             ,
             they
             kill
             him
             ,
             and
             cut
             his
             flesh
             in
             peeces
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             bad
             enough
             ;
             this
             do
             they
             drie
             and
             beate
             into
             powlder
             ,
             vsing
             it
             for
             meate
             ,
             it
             dooth
             last
             them
             long
             :
             wherein
             is
             fulfilled
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             spoken
             in
             another
             Psalme
             of
             the
             whale
             ,
             
               Dedisti
               eum
               escam
               populis
               Aethiopum
               :
               Peter
               Mendez
            
             the
             Adelantade
             
             did
             often
             speake
             of
             this
             kinde
             of
             fishing
             .
             Whereof
             M●nardes
             makes
             mention
             in
             his
             booke
             .
             There
             is
             an
             other
             fishing
             which
             the
             Indians
             do
             commonly
             vse
             in
             the
             sea
             ,
             the
             which
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             lesse
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             worthy
             the
             report
             .
             They
             make
             as
             it
             were
             faggots
             of
             bul-rushes
             or
             drie
             sedges
             well
             bound
             together
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Ba●sas
             ,
             having
             carried
             them
             vppon
             their
             shoulders
             to
             the
             sea
             ,
             they
             cast
             them
             in
             ,
             and
             presently
             leape
             vppon
             them
             ;
             being
             so
             set
             ,
             they
             lanch
             out
             into
             the
             deepe
             ,
             rowing
             vp
             and
             downe
             with
             small
             reedes
             of
             eyther
             side
             :
             they
             goe
             a
             league
             or
             two
             into
             the
             sea
             to
             fish
             ,
             carrying
             with
             them
             their
             cordes
             and
             nettes
             vppon
             these
             faggots
             ,
             and
             beare
             themselves
             thereon
             .
             They
             cast
             out
             their
             nettes
             ,
             and
             do
             there
             remaine
             fishing
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             the
             day
             and
             night
             ,
             vntill
             they
             have
             filled
             vp
             their
             measure
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             returne
             wel
             satisfied
             .
             Truely
             it
             was
             delightfull
             to
             see
             them
             fish
             at
             Callao
             of
             Lima
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             were
             many
             in
             number
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             set
             on
             horsebacke
             ,
             cutting
             the
             waves
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             which
             in
             their
             place
             of
             fishing
             are
             great
             and
             furious
             ,
             resembling
             the
             Tritons
             or
             Neptunes
             ,
             which
             they
             paint
             vppon
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             beeing
             come
             to
             land
             ,
             they
             drawe
             their
             barke
             out
             of
             the
             water
             vpon
             their
             backes
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             presently
             vndoe
             ,
             and
             lay
             abroade
             on
             the
             shoare
             to
             drie
             .
             There
             were
             other
             Indians
             of
             the
             vallies
             of
             Yca
             which
             were
             accustomed
             to
             goe
             to
             fish
             in
             leather
             ,
             or
             skinnes
             of
             sea-wolves
             ,
             blowne
             vp
             with
             winde
             ,
             and
             from
             time
             to
             time
             they
             did
             blowe
             them
             like
             balles
             of
             winde
             ,
             lest
             they
             should
             sinke
             .
             In
             the
             vale
             of
             Canete
             ,
             which
             in
             olde
             time
             they
             called
             Guaroo
             ,
             there
             were
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Indian
             fishers
             ;
             but
             bicause
             they
             resisted
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             when
             he
             came
             to
             conquer
             that
             land
             ,
             he
             made
             shew
             of
             peace
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             therefore
             to
             feast
             him
             ,
             they
             appoynted
             a
             solemne
             fishing
             of
             manie
             
             thousand
             Indians
             ,
             which
             went
             to
             sea
             in
             their
             vessels
             of
             reeds
             ;
             at
             whose
             returne
             ,
             the
             Ingua
             (
             who
             had
             layde
             many
             souldiers
             in
             ambush
             )
             made
             a
             cruell
             butcherie
             of
             them
             ,
             so
             as
             afterward
             this
             land
             remained
             vnpeopled
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             aboundant
             and
             fertile
             .
             I
             did
             see
             an
             other
             manner
             of
             fishing
             ,
             wherevnto
             Don
             Francis
             of
             Toledo
             the
             Viceroy
             didde
             leade
             mee
             ,
             yet
             was
             it
             not
             in
             the
             sea
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             river
             which
             they
             call
             great
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             where
             the
             Indians
             Chiraquanas
             plunged
             into
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             swimming
             wyth
             an
             admirable
             swiftnesse
             ,
             followed
             the
             fish
             ,
             where
             with
             dartes
             and
             hookes
             which
             they
             vse
             to
             carry
             in
             their
             right
             hand
             ,
             only
             swimming
             with
             the
             left
             )
             they
             wound
             the
             fish
             ,
             and
             so
             hurt
             ,
             they
             brought
             them
             foorth
             ,
             seeming
             in
             this
             more
             like
             vnto
             fishes
             then
             men
             of
             the
             land
             .
             But
             now
             that
             we
             have
             left
             the
             sea
             ,
             let
             vs
             come
             to
             other
             kinde
             of
             waters
             that
             remaine
             to
             be
             spoken
             of
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Lakes
             and
             Pooles
             that
             be
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             16.
             
          
           
             IN
             place
             of
             the
             Mediterranean
             Sea
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             old
             world
             ,
             the
             Creator
             hath
             furnished
             this
             new
             with
             many
             Lakes
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             some
             so
             great
             ,
             as
             they
             may
             be
             properly
             called
             seas
             ;
             seeing
             the
             Scripture
             calleth
             that
             of
             Palestina
             so
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             so
             great
             as
             some
             of
             these
             .
             The
             most
             famous
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             Titicaca
             ,
             which
             is
             at
             Peru
             ,
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Callao
             ,
             the
             which
             as
             I
             have
             said
             in
             the
             former
             booke
             ,
             containes
             neere
             fourscore
             leagues
             in
             compasse
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             ,
             there
             runnes
             ten
             or
             twelve
             great
             rivers
             .
             A
             while
             since
             ,
             they
             began
             to
             
             saile
             in
             it
             with
             barkes
             and
             shippes
             ,
             wherein
             they
             proceeded
             so
             ill
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             shippe
             was
             split
             with
             a
             tempest
             that
             did
             rise
             in
             the
             Lake
             .
             The
             water
             is
             not
             altogether
             sower
             nor
             salt
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             so
             thicke
             ,
             as
             it
             cannot
             be
             drunke
             .
             There
             are
             two
             kindes
             of
             fishes
             breed
             in
             this
             Lake
             in
             great
             aboundance
             ,
             the
             one
             they
             call
             Suches
             ,
             which
             is
             great
             and
             savorous
             ,
             but
             phlegmatike
             and
             vnwholesome
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             Bogos
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             healthfull
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             lesse
             and
             fuller
             of
             bones
             ;
             there
             are
             great
             numbers
             of
             wilde-duckes
             and
             wigens
             .
             Whenas
             the
             Indians
             will
             feast
             it
             ,
             or
             shew
             delight
             to
             any
             one
             that
             passeth
             along
             the
             two
             banckes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Chucuyto
             and
             Omasugo
             ,
             they
             assemble
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Canoes
             ,
             making
             a
             circle
             and
             invironing
             the
             fowle
             ,
             vntill
             they
             take
             with
             their
             hands
             what
             they
             please
             ;
             and
             they
             call
             this
             maner
             of
             fishing
             Chaco
             .
             On
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             banke
             of
             this
             Lake
             ▪
             are
             the
             best
             habitations
             of
             Peru.
             From
             the
             issue
             thereof
             there
             growes
             a
             lesser
             Lake
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             great
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Paria
             ,
             vpon
             the
             bankes
             whereof
             ,
             there
             are
             great
             numbers
             of
             cattell
             ,
             especially
             swine
             ,
             which
             grow
             exceeding
             fatte
             with
             the
             grasse
             vpon
             those
             banks
             .
             There
             are
             many
             other
             Lakes
             in
             the
             high
             mountains
             ,
             whence
             proceede
             brooks
             &
             rivers
             ,
             which
             after
             become
             great
             flouds
             .
             Vpon
             the
             way
             from
             Arequippa
             to
             Callao
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             Lakes
             ,
             vpon
             the
             mountains
             of
             th'
             one
             &
             other
             side
             the
             way
             ,
             from
             th'
             one
             flowes
             a
             brooke
             ,
             which
             growes
             to
             a
             ●loud
             ,
             and
             falles
             into
             the
             South
             sea
             ;
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             they
             say
             the
             famous
             river
             of
             Aporima
             takes
             her
             beginning
             ;
             from
             the
             which
             ,
             some
             hold
             that
             the
             renowned
             river
             of
             Amazos
             ,
             otherwise
             called
             Maragnon
             proceedes
             ,
             with
             so
             great
             an
             assembly
             and
             aboundance
             of
             waters
             ,
             which
             ioyne
             in
             these
             mountaines
             .
             It
             is
             a
             question
             may
             be
             often
             asked
             ,
             
             why
             there
             are
             so
             many
             Lakes
             in
             the
             toppes
             of
             these
             mountaines
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             no
             river
             enters
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             many
             great
             streames
             issue
             forth
             ,
             and
             yet
             do
             we
             scarce
             see
             these
             Lakes
             to
             diminish
             any
             thing
             at
             any
             season
             of
             the
             yeere
             .
             To
             imagine
             that
             these
             Lakes
             grow
             by
             the
             snow
             that
             melts
             ,
             or
             raine
             from
             heaven
             ,
             that
             doth
             not
             wholy
             satisfie
             me
             :
             for
             there
             are
             many
             that
             have
             not
             this
             aboundance
             of
             snow
             ,
             nor
             raine
             ,
             and
             yet
             we
             see
             no
             decrease
             in
             them
             ,
             which
             makes
             me
             to
             beleeve
             they
             are
             springs
             which
             rise
             there
             naturally
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             not
             against
             reason
             ,
             to
             thinke
             that
             the
             snow
             and
             raine
             helpe
             somewhat
             in
             some
             seasons
             .
             These
             Lakes
             are
             so
             common
             in
             the
             highest
             toppes
             of
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             that
             you
             shall
             hardly
             finde
             any
             famous
             river
             that
             takes
             not
             his
             beginning
             from
             one
             of
             them
             .
             Their
             water
             is
             very
             cleere
             ,
             and
             breedes
             little
             store
             of
             fish
             ,
             and
             that
             little
             is
             very
             small
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             cold
             which
             is
             there
             Continually
             .
             Notwithstanding
             ,
             some
             of
             these
             Lakes
             be
             very
             hote
             ,
             which
             is
             another
             wonder
             .
             At
             the
             end
             of
             the
             vallie
             of
             Tarapaya
             neere
             to
             Potozi
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             Lake
             in
             forme
             round
             ,
             which
             seemes
             to
             have
             been
             made
             by
             compasse
             ,
             whose
             water
             is
             extreamely
             hote
             ,
             and
             yet
             the
             land
             is
             very
             colde
             :
             they
             are
             accustomed
             to
             bathe
             themselves
             neere
             the
             banke
             ,
             for
             else
             they
             cannot
             indure
             the
             heate
             being
             farther
             in
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             Lake
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             boiling
             of
             above
             twenty
             foote
             square
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             very
             spring
             ,
             and
             yet
             (
             notwithstanding
             the
             greatnes
             of
             this
             spring
             )
             it
             is
             never
             seene
             to
             increase
             in
             any
             sort
             :
             it
             seemes
             that
             it
             exhales
             of
             it selfe
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             hath
             some
             hidden
             and
             vnknowne
             issue
             ,
             neither
             do
             they
             see
             it
             decrease
             ;
             which
             is
             another
             wonder
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             drawne
             from
             it
             a
             great
             streame
             ,
             to
             make
             certaine
             engines
             grinde
             for
             mettall
             ,
             considering
             the
             great
             quantity
             
             of
             water
             that
             issueth
             forth
             ,
             by
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             it
             should
             decrease
             .
             But
             leaving
             Peru
             ,
             and
             passing
             to
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             Lakes
             there
             ,
             are
             no
             lesse
             to
             be
             observed
             ;
             especially
             that
             most
             famous
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             we
             finde
             two
             sortes
             of
             waters
             ,
             one
             salt
             Lake
             to
             that
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             cleere
             and
             sweete
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             rivers
             that
             enter
             into
             it
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             Lake
             ,
             is
             a
             rocke
             verie
             delightfull
             and
             pleasant
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             baths
             of
             hote
             water
             that
             issue
             forth
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             greatly
             esteeme
             for
             their
             health
             .
             There
             are
             gardins̄
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             this
             Lake
             ,
             framed
             and
             fleeting
             vpon
             the
             water
             ,
             where
             you
             may
             see
             plottes
             full
             of
             a
             thousand
             sortes
             of
             hearbes
             and
             flowers
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             a
             man
             cannot
             well
             conceive
             them
             without
             sight
             .
             The
             Citie
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             is
             seated
             in
             the
             same
             Lake
             ,
             although
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             filled
             vp
             the
             place
             of
             the
             scituation
             with
             earth
             ,
             leaving
             onely
             some
             currents
             of
             water
             ,
             great
             and
             small
             ,
             which
             enter
             into
             the
             Citie
             ,
             to
             carrie
             such
             things
             as
             they
             have
             neede
             of
             ,
             as
             wood
             ,
             hearbes
             ,
             stone
             ,
             fruites
             of
             the
             countrie
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             things
             .
             When
             Cortez
             conquered
             Mexico
             ,
             he
             caused
             Brigandins
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             yet
             afterwards
             he
             thought
             it
             more
             safe
             not
             to
             vse
             them
             :
             therfore
             they
             vse
             Canoes
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             store
             .
             There
             is
             great
             store
             of
             fish
             in
             this
             Lake
             ,
             yet
             have
             I
             not
             seene
             any
             of
             price
             :
             notwithstanding
             ,
             they
             say
             the
             revenue
             of
             this
             Lake
             ,
             is
             worth
             three
             hundred
             thousand
             duckets
             a
             yeere
             .
             There
             are
             many
             other
             Lakes
             ,
             not
             far
             from
             this
             ,
             whence
             they
             bring
             much
             fish
             to
             Mexico
             .
             The
             Province
             of
             Mechovacan
             is
             so
             called
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             aboundeth
             greatly
             with
             fish
             .
             There
             are
             goodly
             and
             great
             Lakes
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             there
             is
             much
             fish
             ,
             and
             this
             Province
             is
             coole
             and
             healthfull
             .
             There
             are
             many
             other
             Lakes
             ,
             whereof
             it
             is
             not
             possible
             to
             make
             mention
             ,
             nor
             to
             know
             them
             in
             
             particular
             ,
             onely
             we
             may
             note
             by
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             discoursed
             in
             the
             former
             booke
             ,
             that
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             there
             is
             greater
             abundance
             of
             Lakes
             ,
             then
             in
             any
             other
             parte
             of
             the
             world
             :
             and
             so
             by
             that
             which
             we
             have
             formerly
             spoken
             ,
             and
             the
             little
             we
             shall
             say
             of
             rivers
             and
             fountaines
             ,
             we
             will
             end
             this
             discourse
             of
             Waters
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             many
             and
             divers
             Springs
             and
             Fountaines
             .
             CHAP.
             17.
             
          
           
             THere
             is
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             in
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             great
             diversitie
             of
             Springs
             ,
             Fountaines
             ,
             and
             Rivers
             ,
             and
             some
             have
             strange
             properties
             .
             In
             Guancavilica
             of
             Peru
             ,
             (
             where
             the
             mines
             of
             quick-silver
             be
             ,
             )
             there
             is
             a
             Fountaine
             that
             casts
             forth
             hote
             water
             ,
             and
             in
             running
             ,
             the
             water
             turnes
             to
             rocke
             ,
             of
             which
             rocke
             or
             stone
             ,
             they
             build
             in
             a
             mauer
             all
             the
             houses
             of
             the
             Village
             .
             This
             stone
             is
             soft
             ,
             and
             easie
             to
             cutte
             ,
             for
             they
             cut
             it
             as
             easily
             with
             yron
             as
             if
             it
             were
             wood
             ,
             it
             is
             light
             and
             lasting
             .
             If
             men
             or
             beasts
             drinke
             thereof
             ,
             they
             die
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             congeales
             in
             the
             very
             entrailes
             ,
             and
             turnes
             into
             stone
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             some
             horses
             have
             died
             .
             As
             this
             water
             turnes
             into
             stone
             ,
             the
             which
             flowes
             ,
             stoppes
             the
             passage
             to
             the
             rest
             ;
             so
             as
             of
             necessitie
             it
             changeth
             the
             course
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             it
             runnes
             in
             divers
             places
             ,
             as
             the
             rocke
             increaseth
             .
             At
             the
             point
             of
             Cape
             S.
             Helaine
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             spring
             or
             fountaine
             of
             pitch
             ,
             which
             at
             Peru
             ,
             they
             call
             Coppey
             .
             This
             should
             be
             like
             to
             that
             which
             the
             Scripture
             speakes
             of
             the
             savage
             valley
             ,
             where
             they
             did
             finde
             pits
             of
             pitch
             .
             The
             Mariners
             vse
             these
             fountaines
             of
             pitch
             or
             Coppey
             ,
             to
             pitch
             their
             ropes
             and
             tackling
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             
             serves
             them
             as
             pitch
             and
             tarre
             in
             Spaine
             .
             When
             I
             sailed
             into
             new
             Spaine
             by
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             the
             Pilot
             shewed
             me
             an
             Iland
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             I
             le
             of
             Wolves
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             another
             fountaine
             or
             pit
             of
             Coppey
             or
             pitch
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             anoint
             their
             tackling
             .
             There
             are
             other
             fountaines
             and
             springs
             of
             
               Goultran
               rozen
            
             ,
             which
             the
             Pilot
             (
             an
             excellent
             man
             in
             his
             charge
             )
             tolde
             me
             he
             had
             seene
             ,
             and
             that
             sometimes
             sailing
             that
             waies
             ,
             being
             so
             farre
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             as
             he
             had
             lost
             the
             sight
             of
             land
             ,
             yet
             did
             he
             know
             by
             the
             smell
             of
             the
             Coppey
             ,
             where
             he
             was
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             if
             he
             had
             knowne
             the
             land
             ,
             such
             is
             the
             savour
             that
             issues
             continually
             from
             that
             fountaine
             .
             At
             the
             baths
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             baths
             of
             Ingua
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             course
             of
             water
             ,
             which
             comes
             forth
             all
             hote
             and
             boiling
             ;
             and
             ioyning
             vnto
             it
             ,
             there
             is
             another
             whose
             water
             is
             as
             cold
             as
             ice
             .
             The
             Ingua
             was
             accustomed
             to
             temper
             the
             one
             with
             the
             other
             ;
             &
             it
             is
             a
             wonderfull
             thing
             to
             see
             springs
             of
             so
             contrarie
             qualities
             ,
             so
             neere
             one
             to
             the
             other
             .
             There
             are
             an
             infinit
             number
             of
             other
             hote
             springs
             ,
             specially
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             in
             the
             water
             whereof
             ,
             you
             cannot
             indure
             to
             hold
             your
             hand
             ,
             the
             space
             of
             an
             
               Ave
               Maria
            
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             seene
             tried
             by
             wager
             .
             In
             a
             farme
             neere
             to
             Cusco
             ,
             springs
             a
             fountain
             of
             salt
             ,
             which
             as
             it
             runs
             turns
             into
             salt
             ,
             very
             white
             &
             exceeding
             good
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             if
             it
             were
             in
             another
             countrie
             )
             were
             no
             small
             riches
             ,
             yet
             they
             make
             very
             small
             accoumpt
             thereof
             ,
             for
             the
             store
             they
             have
             there
             .
             The
             waters
             which
             runne
             in
             Guayaquel
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             Peru
             ,
             almost
             vnder
             the
             Equinoctiall
             line
             ,
             are
             held
             to
             be
             healthfull
             for
             the
             French
             disease
             ,
             and
             other
             such
             like
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             come
             from
             many
             places
             farre
             off
             to
             be
             cured
             .
             And
             they
             say
             the
             cause
             thereof
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             that
             Countrie
             there
             is
             great
             aboundance
             of
             rootes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Sallepareille
             ,
             the
             vertue
             and
             operation
             
             whereof
             is
             so
             knowne
             ,
             that
             it
             communicates
             her
             propertie
             to
             the
             waters
             wherein
             it
             is
             put
             to
             cure
             this
             disease
             .
             Bilcanota
             is
             a
             mountaine
             the
             which
             (
             according
             to
             common
             opinion
             ,
             )
             is
             in
             the
             highest
             part
             of
             Peru
             ,
             the
             toppe
             whereof
             is
             all
             covered
             with
             snow
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             is
             blacke
             like
             coale
             .
             There
             issueth
             forth
             of
             it
             ,
             two
             springs
             in
             contrarie
             places
             ,
             which
             presently
             growe
             to
             be
             very
             great
             b●rookes
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             little
             and
             little
             become
             great
             flouds
             ,
             the
             one
             goes
             to
             Calloa
             ,
             into
             the
             great
             Lake
             Titicaca
             ,
             the
             other
             goes
             to
             the
             lands
             ,
             and
             is
             that
             which
             they
             call
             Yucay
             ,
             which
             ioyning
             with
             another
             ,
             runnes
             into
             the
             North
             sea
             ,
             with
             a
             violent
             and
             furious
             course
             .
             This
             spring
             ,
             when
             it
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             rocke
             Bilcanota
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             lie
             ,
             having
             an
             asshie
             colour
             ,
             and
             castes
             a
             fume
             as
             a
             thing
             burnt
             ,
             the
             which
             runs
             farre
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             vntill
             the
             multitude
             of
             waters
             that
             runne
             into
             it
             ,
             quench
             this
             smoake
             and
             fire
             which
             it
             drawes
             from
             the
             spring
             .
             In
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             I
             have
             seene
             a
             spring
             as
             it
             were
             inke
             ,
             somewhat
             blew
             ,
             in
             Peru
             another
             ,
             of
             colour
             red
             like
             bloud
             ,
             wherevpon
             they
             call
             it
             the
             red
             river
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Rivers
             .
             
               CHAP.
               18.
            
             
          
           
             AMongst
             all
             Rivers
             ,
             not
             onely
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             but
             generally
             through
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             River
             Maragnon
             ,
             or
             of
             Amazons
             ,
             is
             the
             chiefe
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             spoken
             in
             the
             former
             booke
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             have
             often
             sailed
             it
             ,
             pretending
             to
             discover
             the
             lands
             ,
             which
             by
             report
             are
             very
             rich
             ,
             especially
             those
             they
             call
             Dorado
             and
             
               Paytiti
               ,
               Iean
               de
               Salnies
            
             ,
             the
             Adelantade
             ,
             made
             a
             memorable
             entrie
             ,
             though
             of
             small
             effect
             .
             There
             is
             a
             passage
             which
             
             they
             call
             Pongo
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             most
             daungerous
             in
             all
             the
             worlde
             ;
             for
             the
             river
             being
             there
             straightned
             ,
             and
             forced
             betwixt
             two
             high
             steepe
             rockes
             :
             the
             water
             falles
             directly
             downe
             with
             so
             great
             a
             violence
             ,
             that
             comming
             steepe
             downe
             ,
             it
             causeth
             such
             a
             boyling
             ,
             as
             it
             seemeth
             impossible
             to
             passe
             it
             without
             drowning
             :
             yet
             the
             courage
             of
             men
             durst
             attempt
             to
             passe
             it
             ,
             for
             the
             desire
             of
             this
             renowmed
             Dorado
             :
             they
             slipt
             downe
             from
             the
             top
             to
             the
             bottome
             ,
             thrust
             on
             with
             the
             violence
             and
             currant
             of
             the
             floud
             ,
             holding
             themselves
             fast
             in
             their
             Canoes
             or
             barkes
             :
             and
             although
             in
             falling
             they
             were
             turned
             topsie
             turvie
             ,
             and
             both
             they
             and
             their
             Canoes
             plunged
             into
             the
             deepe
             ,
             yet
             by
             their
             care
             and
             industry
             they
             recovered
             themselves
             againe
             ;
             and
             in
             this
             sort
             the
             whole
             army
             escaped
             ,
             except
             some
             few
             that
             were
             drowned
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             more
             admirable
             ,
             they
             carried
             themselves
             so
             cunningly
             ,
             that
             they
             neyther
             lost
             their
             powlder
             nor
             munition
             .
             In
             their
             returne
             (
             having
             suffered
             many
             troubles
             and
             daungers
             )
             they
             were
             forced
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             to
             passe
             backe
             that
             same
             way
             )
             mounting
             by
             one
             of
             those
             high
             Rockes
             ,
             sticking
             their
             poniards
             in
             the
             rocke
             .
          
           
             Captaine
             
               Peter
               d'
               Orsua
            
             made
             an
             other
             entry
             by
             the
             same
             river
             ,
             who
             being
             dead
             in
             the
             same
             voyage
             ,
             and
             the
             souldiers
             mutined
             ;
             other
             Captaines
             followed
             the
             enterprise
             ,
             by
             an
             arme
             that
             comes
             into
             the
             north
             sea
             .
             A
             religious
             man
             of
             our
             company
             told
             vs
             ,
             that
             being
             then
             a
             secular
             man
             ,
             he
             was
             present
             in
             a
             manner
             at
             all
             that
             enterprise
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             tides
             did
             flowe
             almost
             a
             hundred
             leagu●s
             vp
             the
             river
             ,
             and
             whereas
             it
             enters
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             is
             vnder
             the
             Line
             ,
             or
             very
             neere
             )
             it
             hath
             70.
             leagues
             ,
             breadth
             at
             the
             mouth
             of
             it
             ,
             a
             matter
             incredible
             ;
             and
             which
             exceedes
             the
             breadth
             of
             the
             Mediterranean
             
             sea
             ,
             though
             there
             be
             some
             others
             ,
             who
             in
             their
             descriptions
             give
             it
             but
             twenty
             five
             or
             thirty
             leagues
             bredth
             at
             the
             mouth
             .
             Next
             to
             this
             river
             that
             of
             Plata
             ,
             or
             of
             Silver
             holdes
             the
             second
             place
             ,
             which
             is
             otherwise
             called
             Paragu●y
             ,
             which
             runnes
             from
             the
             mountaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             in
             thirty
             five
             degrees
             of
             altitude
             to
             the
             South
             :
             it
             riseth
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             like
             to
             the
             river
             of
             Nile
             ,
             but
             much
             more
             without
             comparison
             ,
             and
             makes
             the
             fields
             it
             overflowes
             like
             vnto
             a
             sea
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             three
             moneths
             ,
             and
             after
             returneth
             againe
             to
             his
             course
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             ships
             do
             saile
             many
             leagues
             against
             the
             streame
             .
             There
             are
             many
             other
             rivers
             that
             are
             not
             of
             that
             greatnes
             ,
             and
             yet
             are
             equall
             :
             yea
             they
             surpasse
             the
             greatest
             of
             Europe
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             Magdalaine
             ,
             neere
             to
             Saint
             Marthe
             the
             great
             river
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Alvarado
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             an
             infinit
             number
             of
             others
             .
             Of
             the
             south
             side
             ,
             on
             the
             mountains
             of
             Peru
             ,
             the
             rivers
             are
             not
             vsually
             so
             great
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             current
             is
             not
             long
             ,
             and
             that
             many
             waters
             cannot
             ioyne
             together
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             very
             swift
             ,
             descending
             from
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             have
             sodaine
             falles
             ,
             by
             reason
             whereof
             they
             are
             very
             dangerous
             ,
             and
             many
             men
             have
             perished
             there
             .
             They
             increase
             and
             overflowe
             most
             in
             the
             time
             of
             heate
             .
             I
             have
             gone
             over
             twenty
             and
             seaven
             rivers
             vpon
             that
             coast
             ,
             yet
             did
             I
             never
             passe
             any
             one
             by
             a
             foord
             .
             The
             Indians
             vse
             a
             thousand
             devises
             to
             passe
             their
             rivers
             .
             In
             som
             places
             they
             have
             a
             long
             cord
             that
             runs
             fro
             one
             side
             to
             th'
             other
             ,
             &
             thereon
             hangs
             a
             basket
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             he
             puts
             himselfe
             that
             meanes
             to
             passe
             ;
             and
             then
             they
             drawe
             it
             from
             the
             bancke
             with
             another
             corde
             ,
             so
             as
             hee
             passeth
             in
             this
             basket
             .
             In
             other
             places
             the
             Indian
             passeth
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             on
             horse
             backe
             ,
             vppon
             a
             bottle
             of
             straw
             ,
             and
             behinde
             him
             hee
             that
             desires
             to
             passe
             ;
             and
             so
             rowing
             with
             a
             peece
             of
             a
             boorde
             ,
             carries
             him
             over
             .
             
             In
             other
             places
             they
             make
             a
             floate
             of
             gourds
             or
             pompions
             ,
             vppon
             the
             which
             they
             set
             men
             with
             their
             stuffe
             to
             carry
             over
             ,
             and
             the
             Indians
             having
             cordes
             fastned
             to
             them
             ,
             goe
             swimming
             before
             ,
             and
             drawe
             this
             floate
             of
             pompions
             after
             them
             ,
             as
             horses
             doe
             a
             Coach
             :
             others
             goe
             behinde
             thrusting
             it
             forward
             .
             Having
             passed
             ,
             they
             take
             their
             barke
             of
             pompions
             vppon
             their
             backe
             ,
             and
             returne
             swimming
             :
             this
             they
             doe
             in
             the
             river
             of
             Saint
             at
             Peru.
             We
             passed
             that
             of
             Alvarado
             in
             new
             Spaine
             vpon
             a
             table
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             carried
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             lost
             their
             footing
             ,
             they
             swamme
             .
             These
             devises
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             others
             wherewith
             they
             vse
             to
             passe
             their
             rivers
             ,
             breede
             a
             terrour
             in
             the
             beholders
             ,
             helping
             themselves
             with
             such
             weake
             and
             vnsure
             means
             ;
             and
             yet
             they
             are
             very
             confident
             .
             They
             do
             vse
             no
             other
             bridges
             but
             of
             haire
             or
             of
             straw
             .
             There
             are
             now
             vppon
             some
             rivers
             bridges
             of
             stone
             ,
             built
             by
             the
             diligence
             of
             some
             governours
             ,
             but
             many
             fewer
             then
             were
             needfull
             in
             such
             a
             country
             ,
             where
             so
             many
             men
             are
             drowned
             by
             default
             thereof
             ,
             and
             the
             which
             yeeldes
             so
             much
             silver
             ,
             as
             not
             onely
             Spaine
             ,
             but
             also
             other
             strange
             Countries
             make
             sumptuous
             buildings
             therewith
             .
             The
             Indians
             do
             drawe
             from
             these
             floudes
             that
             runne
             from
             the
             mountaines
             to
             the
             vallies
             and
             plaines
             ,
             many
             and
             great
             brooks
             to
             water
             their
             land
             ,
             which
             they
             vsually
             doe
             with
             such
             industry
             ,
             as
             there
             are
             no
             better
             in
             Murcia
             ,
             nor
             at
             Millan
             it selfe
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             also
             the
             greatest
             and
             onely
             wealth
             of
             the
             Plaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             of
             many
             other
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             in
             generall
             .
             CHAP.
             19.
             
          
           
             WE
             may
             know
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             the
             greatest
             parte
             (
             seeing
             it
             is
             the
             last
             of
             the
             three
             Elements
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             have
             propounded
             to
             treate
             in
             this
             Booke
             )
             by
             the
             discourse
             we
             have
             made
             in
             the
             former
             Booke
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             seeing
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Indies
             dooth
             lie
             vnder
             it
             .
             But
             to
             make
             it
             knowne
             the
             more
             particularly
             ,
             I
             have
             observed
             three
             kindes
             of
             lands
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             passed
             through
             those
             Regions
             :
             whereof
             there
             is
             one
             very
             lowe
             ,
             another
             very
             high
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             which
             holds
             the
             middle
             of
             these
             two
             extreames
             .
             The
             lower
             is
             that
             which
             lieth
             by
             the
             sea
             coasts
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             in
             all
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             commonly
             very
             hote
             and
             moist
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             is
             not
             so
             healthfull
             ;
             and
             at
             this
             day
             we
             see
             it
             lesse
             p●opled
             ,
             although
             in
             former
             times
             it
             hath
             beene
             greatly
             inhabited
             with
             Indians
             ,
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             histories
             of
             New
             Spaine
             and
             Peru
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             kept
             and
             lived
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             soile
             was
             naturall
             vnto
             them
             being
             bred
             there
             .
             They
             lived
             of
             fishing
             at
             sea
             ,
             &
             of
             seeds
             ,
             drawing
             brooks
             from
             the
             rivers
             ,
             which
             they
             used
             for
             want
             of
             raine
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             raines
             little
             there
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             not
             at
             all
             .
             This
             lowe
             countrie
             hath
             many
             places
             inhabitable
             ,
             as
             wel
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             sands
             which
             are
             dangerous
             ,
             (
             for
             there
             are
             whole
             mountaines
             of
             these
             sandes
             )
             as
             also
             for
             the
             marishes
             which
             grow
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             waters
             that
             fall
             from
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             finding
             no
             issue
             in
             these
             flatte
             and
             lowe
             landes
             ,
             drowne
             them
             ,
             and
             make
             them
             vnprofitable
             .
          
           
           
             And
             in
             trueth
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             all
             the
             Indian
             sea
             coast
             is
             of
             this
             sort
             ,
             chiefly
             vppon
             the
             South
             sea
             :
             The
             habitation
             of
             which
             coasts
             is
             at
             this
             present
             so
             wasted
             &
             contemned
             ,
             that
             of
             thirtie
             partes
             of
             the
             people
             that
             inhabited
             it
             ,
             there
             wants
             twenty
             nine
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             likely
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Indians
             will
             in
             short
             time
             decay
             .
             Many
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             varietie
             of
             their
             opinions
             ,
             attribute
             this
             to
             diverse
             causes
             ;
             some
             to
             the
             great
             labour
             which
             hath
             beene
             imposed
             vppon
             these
             Indians
             ;
             others
             ,
             vnto
             the
             change
             and
             varietie
             of
             meates
             and
             drinks
             they
             vse
             ,
             since
             their
             commerce
             with
             the
             Spaniards
             ;
             others
             to
             their
             great
             excesse
             &
             drinking
             ,
             and
             to
             other
             vices
             they
             have
             :
             for
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             hold
             this
             disorder
             to
             be
             the
             greatest
             cause
             of
             their
             decay
             ,
             whereof
             it
             is
             not
             now
             time
             to
             discourse
             any
             more
             .
             In
             this
             lowe
             countrey
             (
             which
             I
             say
             generally
             is
             vnhealthfull
             ,
             and
             vnfit
             for
             mans
             habitation
             )
             there
             is
             exception
             in
             some
             places
             which
             are
             temperate
             and
             fertile
             ,
             as
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Plaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             coole
             vallies
             and
             very
             fertile
             .
             The
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             habitation
             of
             the
             coast
             entertaines
             all
             the
             traffike
             of
             Spaine
             by
             sea
             :
             whereon
             all
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             Indies
             dependeth
             .
             Vpon
             this
             coast
             there
             are
             some
             Townes
             wel
             peopled
             ,
             as
             Lima
             and
             Truxillo
             in
             
               Peru
               ,
               Panama
            
             and
             Carthagena
             vppon
             the
             maine
             land
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Ilands
             S.
             
               Dominique
               ,
               Port
               Ricco
            
             ,
             and
             Havana
             ,
             with
             many
             other
             Townes
             which
             are
             lesse
             than
             these
             ,
             as
             the
             true
             Crosse
             in
             new
             
               Spaine
               ,
               Yca
               ,
               Arigua
            
             and
             others
             in
             Peru
             :
             the
             ports
             are
             commonly
             inhabited
             ,
             although
             but
             slenderly
             .
             The
             second
             sort
             of
             land
             is
             contrary
             ,
             very
             high
             ,
             and
             by
             consequent
             ,
             colde
             and
             drie
             ,
             as
             all
             the
             mountaines
             are
             commonly
             .
             This
             land
             is
             neither
             fertile
             nor
             pleasant
             ,
             but
             very
             healthfull
             ,
             which
             makes
             it
             to
             be
             peopled
             and
             inhabited
             .
             There
             are
             pastures
             ,
             and
             great
             store
             of
             cattell
             ,
             the
             
             which
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             parte
             ,
             entertaines
             life
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             cattell
             ,
             they
             supply
             the
             want
             they
             have
             of
             corne
             and
             graine
             ,
             by
             trucking
             and
             exchange
             .
             But
             that
             which
             makes
             these
             landes
             more
             inhabited
             and
             peopled
             ,
             is
             the
             riches
             of
             the
             mines
             that
             are
             found
             there
             ,
             for
             that
             all
             obeys
             to
             golde
             and
             silver
             .
             By
             reason
             of
             the
             mines
             there
             are
             some
             dwellings
             of
             Spaniards
             and
             Indians
             ,
             which
             are
             increased
             and
             multiplied
             ,
             as
             Potozi
             and
             Gancavelicqua
             in
             Peru
             ,
             and
             Cacatecas
             in
             new
             Spaine
             .
             There
             are
             also
             through
             all
             these
             mountaines
             great
             dwellings
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             which
             to
             this
             day
             are
             maintained
             ;
             yea
             some
             will
             say
             they
             increase
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             labour
             of
             the
             mines
             dooth
             consume
             many
             ,
             and
             some
             generall
             diseases
             have
             destroyed
             a
             great
             part
             ,
             as
             the
             Cocoliste
             in
             new
             Spaine
             :
             yet
             they
             finde
             no
             great
             diminution
             .
             In
             this
             extreamitie
             of
             of
             high
             ground
             they
             finde
             two
             commodities
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             of
             pastures
             and
             mines
             ,
             which
             doe
             well
             countervaile
             the
             two
             other
             that
             are
             in
             the
             lower
             grounds
             alongest
             the
             sea
             coast
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             commerce
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             &
             the
             aboundance
             of
             wine
             which
             groweth
             not
             but
             in
             the
             hot
             landes
             .
             Betwixt
             these
             two
             extreames
             there
             is
             ground
             of
             a
             meane
             height
             ,
             the
             which
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             in
             some
             partes
             higher
             or
             lower
             one
             than
             other
             ,
             yet
             doth
             it
             not
             approach
             neyther
             to
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             sea
             coast
             ,
             nor
             the
             intemperature
             of
             the
             mountaines
             .
             In
             this
             sorte
             of
             soile
             there
             groweth
             many
             kindes
             of
             graine
             ,
             as
             wheate
             ,
             barley
             ,
             and
             mays
             ,
             which
             grows
             not
             at
             all
             in
             the
             high
             countries
             ,
             but
             well
             in
             the
             lower
             ,
             there
             is
             likewise
             store
             of
             pasture
             ,
             cattel
             ,
             fruits
             ,
             and
             greene
             forrests
             .
             This
             part
             is
             the
             best
             habitation
             of
             the
             three
             ,
             for
             health
             and
             recreation
             ;
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             best
             peopled
             of
             any
             parte
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             have
             curiously
             observed
             in
             manie
             voyages
             that
             I
             have
             vndertaken
             ,
             and
             have
             alwayes
             
             found
             it
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             Province
             best
             peopled
             at
             the
             Indies
             be
             in
             this
             scituation
             .
             Let
             vs
             looke
             neerely
             into
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             without
             doubt
             is
             the
             best
             Province
             the
             Sunne
             dooth
             circle
             )
             by
             what
             parte
             soever
             you
             doe
             enter
             ,
             you
             mount
             vp
             ;
             and
             when
             you
             have
             mounted
             a
             good
             height
             ,
             you
             beginne
             to
             descend
             ,
             yet
             very
             little
             :
             and
             that
             land
             is
             alwayes
             much
             higher
             then
             that
             along
             the
             sea
             coast
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             land
             about
             Mexico
             is
             of
             this
             nature
             and
             scituation
             ;
             and
             that
             which
             is
             about
             the
             Vulcan
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             best
             soile
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             
               Peru
               ,
               Arequipa
               ,
               Guamangua
            
             and
             Cusco
             ,
             although
             more
             in
             one
             then
             in
             the
             other
             .
             But
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             all
             is
             high
             ground
             ,
             although
             they
             descend
             into
             deepe
             valleies
             ,
             and
             climbe
             vppe
             to
             high
             mountaines
             :
             the
             like
             is
             spoken
             of
             
               Quitto
               ,
               Saint
               Foy
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             best
             of
             the
             new
             kingdome
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             I
             doe
             beleeve
             that
             the
             wisedome
             and
             providence
             of
             the
             Creator
             would
             have
             it
             so
             ,
             that
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             this
             countrey
             of
             the
             Indies
             should
             be
             hillie
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             be
             of
             a
             better
             temperature
             :
             for
             being
             lowe
             ,
             it
             had
             beene
             very
             hotte
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             especially
             being
             farre
             from
             the
             sea
             .
             Also
             all
             the
             land
             I
             have
             seene
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             is
             neere
             to
             the
             mountaines
             on
             the
             one
             side
             or
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             of
             all
             partes
             :
             So
             as
             I
             have
             oftentimes
             saide
             there
             ,
             that
             I
             woulde
             gladly
             see
             any
             place
             ,
             from
             whence
             the
             horizon
             did
             fashion
             it selfe
             and
             end
             by
             the
             heaven
             ,
             and
             a
             countrey
             stretched
             out
             and
             even
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             Spaine
             in
             a
             thousand
             champaine
             fields
             ;
             yet
             doe
             I
             not
             remember
             that
             I
             have
             ever
             seene
             such
             sightes
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             were
             it
             in
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             or
             vpon
             the
             maine
             land
             ,
             although
             I
             have
             travelled
             above
             seaven
             hundred
             leagues
             in
             length
             .
             But
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             the
             neerenesse
             of
             the
             mountaines
             is
             very
             commodious
             in
             this
             region
             ,
             to
             
             temper
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             the
             best
             inhabited
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             are
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             :
             and
             generally
             ,
             all
             that
             countrie
             aboundes
             in
             grasse
             ,
             pastures
             ,
             and
             forrests
             ,
             contrary
             vnto
             that
             which
             Aristotle
             and
             the
             Auntients
             did
             holde
             .
             So
             as
             when
             wee
             goe
             out
             of
             Europe
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             wee
             woonder
             to
             see
             the
             land
             so
             pleasant
             ,
             greene
             and
             fresh
             .
             Yet
             this
             rule
             hath
             some
             exceptions
             ,
             &
             chiefly
             in
             the
             land
             of
             Peru
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             a
             strange
             nature
             amongst
             all
             others
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             will
             now
             proceede
             to
             speake
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             properties
             of
             the
             land
             of
             Peru.
             CHAP.
             20.
             
          
           
             WEe
             meane
             by
             Peru
             ,
             not
             that
             great
             parte
             of
             the
             worlde
             which
             they
             call
             America
             ,
             seeing
             that
             therein
             is
             contained
             Bresil
             ,
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Chille
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Grenade
             ,
             and
             yet
             none
             of
             these
             kingdomes
             is
             Peru
             ,
             but
             onely
             that
             parte
             which
             lies
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             beginning
             at
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Quitto
             ,
             which
             is
             vnder
             the
             Line
             ,
             and
             runnes
             in
             length
             to
             the
             realme
             of
             Chille
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             without
             the
             Tropickes
             ,
             which
             were
             sixe
             hundred
             leagues
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             in
             breadth
             it
             containes
             no
             more
             then
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             is
             fiftie
             common
             leagues
             ,
             although
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             as
             at
             Chachapayas
             ,
             it
             be
             broader
             .
             This
             parte
             of
             the
             world
             which
             we
             call
             Peru
             ,
             is
             very
             remarkeable
             ,
             and
             containes
             in
             it
             strange
             properties
             ,
             which
             serveth
             as
             an
             exception
             to
             the
             generall
             rule
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             The
             first
             is
             ,
             that
             vpon
             all
             that
             coast
             it
             blowes
             continually
             with
             one
             onely
             winde
             ,
             which
             is
             South
             and
             Southweast
             ,
             contrary
             to
             that
             which
             dooth
             vsually
             blow
             vnder
             the
             burning
             Zone
             .
             The
             second
             is
             ,
             
             that
             this
             winde
             being
             by
             nature
             the
             most
             violent
             ,
             tempestuous
             ,
             and
             vnhealthfull
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             yet
             in
             this
             region
             it
             is
             marvellous
             pleasing
             ,
             healthful
             ,
             and
             agreeable
             :
             so
             as
             we
             may
             attribute
             the
             habitation
             of
             that
             part
             therevnto
             ,
             without
             the
             which
             it
             would
             be
             troublesome
             and
             inhabitable
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             heate
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             not
             refreshed
             with
             the
             winde
             .
             The
             third
             propertie
             is
             ,
             that
             it
             never
             raines
             ,
             thunders
             ,
             snowes
             ,
             nor
             hailes
             in
             all
             this
             coast
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             matter
             worthy
             of
             admiration
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             that
             alittle
             distance
             from
             the
             coast
             it
             raines
             and
             snowes
             terribly
             .
             Fiftly
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             two
             ridges
             of
             mountaines
             which
             runne
             the
             one
             as
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             in
             one
             altitude
             ,
             notwithstanding
             on
             the
             one
             there
             are
             great
             forrests
             ,
             and
             it
             raines
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             yeere
             ,
             being
             very
             hote
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             is
             all
             naked
             and
             bare
             ,
             and
             very
             colde
             :
             so
             as
             winter
             and
             summer
             are
             divided
             on
             those
             two
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             raine
             and
             cleerenesse
             it selfe
             .
             For
             the
             better
             vnderstanding
             hereof
             ,
             wee
             must
             consider
             that
             Peru
             is
             divided
             as
             it
             were
             into
             three
             partes
             ,
             long
             and
             narrow
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Lanos
               ,
               Sierras
            
             ,
             and
             Andes
             ;
             the
             Lanos
             runnes
             along
             est
             the
             sea
             coast
             ;
             the
             Sierras
             be
             all
             hilles
             ,
             with
             some
             vallies
             ;
             and
             the
             Andes
             be
             steepe
             and
             craggie
             mountaines
             .
             The
             Lanos
             or
             sea
             coast
             ,
             have
             some
             tenne
             leagues
             in
             breadth
             ,
             in
             some
             parts
             lesse
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             parts
             alittle
             more
             .
             The
             Sierra
             containes
             some
             twentie
             leagues
             in
             breadth
             :
             and
             the
             Andes
             as
             much
             ,
             sometimes
             more
             ,
             sometimes
             lesse
             .
             They
             runne
             in
             length
             from
             north
             to
             south
             ,
             and
             in
             breadth
             from
             east
             to
             weast
             .
             It
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             ,
             that
             in
             so
             small
             a
             distance
             ,
             as
             fiftie
             leagues
             ,
             equally
             distant
             from
             the
             Line
             and
             Pole
             ,
             there
             should
             bee
             so
             great
             a
             contrarietie
             ,
             as
             to
             raine
             almost
             continually
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             and
             never
             in
             the
             other
             .
             It
             never
             raines
             vpon
             the
             coast
             or
             Lanos
             ,
             although
             there
             falles
             sometimes
             a
             
             small
             dew
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Guarva
             ,
             and
             in
             
               Castill
               Mol●●●a
            
             ,
             the
             which
             sometimes
             thickens
             ,
             and
             falles
             in
             certaine
             droppes
             of
             water
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             troublesome
             ,
             nor
             such
             as
             they
             neede
             any
             covering
             .
             Their
             coverings
             are
             of
             mattes
             with
             a
             little
             earth
             vpon
             them
             which
             is
             sufficient
             .
             Vpon
             the
             Andes
             it
             raines
             in
             a
             manner
             continually
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             sometimes
             more
             cleere
             then
             other
             .
             In
             the
             Sierra
             which
             lies
             betwixt
             both
             the
             extreames
             ,
             it
             raineth
             in
             the
             same
             season
             as
             it
             dooth
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             September
             vnto
             Aprill
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             other
             season
             ,
             the
             time
             is
             more
             cleere
             ,
             which
             is
             when
             the
             Sunne
             is
             farthest
             off
             ,
             and
             the
             contrarie
             when
             it
             is
             neerest
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             discoursed
             at
             large
             in
             the
             former
             booke
             .
             That
             which
             they
             call
             Andes
             ,
             and
             Sierra
             ,
             are
             twoo
             ridges
             of
             most
             high
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             runne
             above
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             ,
             the
             one
             in
             view
             of
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             almost
             equally
             .
             There
             are
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             Vicagues
             ,
             which
             breede
             in
             the
             Sierres
             ,
             and
             are
             properly
             like
             vnto
             wilde
             goates
             ,
             very
             nimble
             and
             swift
             .
             There
             are
             also
             of
             those
             beasts
             which
             they
             call
             Guanacos
             and
             Pacos
             ,
             which
             are
             sheepe
             ,
             which
             we
             may
             wel
             terme
             the
             asses
             of
             that
             countrey
             ;
             whereof
             we
             shall
             speake
             in
             their
             place
             .
             And
             vpon
             the
             Andes
             they
             finde
             Apes
             ,
             very
             gentle
             and
             delightfull
             ,
             and
             Parrots
             in
             great
             numbers
             .
             There
             also
             they
             find
             the
             hearb
             or
             tree
             which
             they
             call
             Coca
             ,
             that
             is
             so
             greatly
             esteemed
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             the
             trafficke
             they
             make
             of
             it
             ,
             is
             worthy
             much
             mony
             .
          
           
             That
             which
             they
             call
             Sierre
             ,
             causeth
             vallies
             ,
             whereas
             it
             opens
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             best
             dwellings
             of
             Peru
             ,
             as
             is
             the
             valley
             of
             Xauxa
             of
             Andaguaylas
             ,
             and
             Yucay
             .
             In
             these
             vallies
             there
             growes
             wheat
             ,
             mays
             and
             other
             sortes
             of
             fruits
             ,
             but
             lesse
             in
             one
             then
             in
             the
             other
             .
             Beyond
             the
             Citie
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             (
             the
             ancient
             Court
             of
             the
             Lordes
             of
             those
             
             Realmes
             ,
             )
             the
             two
             ridges
             of
             mountaines
             seperate
             them
             .
             selves
             one
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             midst
             leave
             a
             plaine
             and
             large
             champian
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Province
             of
             Callao
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             many
             rivers
             and
             great
             store
             of
             fertile
             pastures
             :
             there
             is
             also
             that
             great
             Lake
             of
             Titicaca
             .
             And
             although
             it
             be
             a
             ful
             soile
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             height
             and
             intemperature
             ,
             that
             the
             Sierre
             having
             no
             more
             trees
             nor
             forrests
             ,
             yet
             the
             want
             they
             have
             of
             bread
             ,
             is
             countervailed
             with
             the
             rootes
             they
             sowe
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Papas
             ,
             and
             they
             grow
             in
             the
             earth
             .
             This
             roote
             is
             the
             Indians
             foode
             ;
             for
             drying
             it
             ,
             and
             making
             it
             cleane
             ,
             they
             make
             that
             which
             they
             call
             Chugno
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             bread
             and
             nourishment
             of
             those
             Provinces
             .
             There
             are
             other
             rootes
             and
             small
             hearbes
             which
             they
             eate
             .
             It
             is
             a
             healthfull
             soile
             ,
             best
             peopled
             ,
             and
             the
             richest
             of
             all
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             the
             aboundance
             of
             cattell
             they
             feed
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             those
             that
             are
             in
             Europe
             ,
             as
             sheepe
             ,
             neate
             ,
             and
             goates
             ,
             as
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Countrie
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Guanacos
             and
             Pacos
             ,
             and
             there
             are
             store
             of
             Partridges
             .
             Next
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Callao
             ,
             is
             that
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             hote
             vallies
             very
             fertile
             ,
             and
             very
             high
             rockes
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             very
             rich
             in
             mines
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             no
             part
             of
             the
             world
             shall
             you
             finde
             better
             ,
             nor
             fairer
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             reason
             why
             it
             raines
             on
             the
             Lanos
             ,
             along
             the
             Sea
             coast
             .
             
               CHAP.
               21.
            
             
          
           
             FOr
             that
             it
             is
             rare
             and
             extraordinarie
             to
             see
             a
             Countrie
             where
             it
             never
             raines
             nor
             thunders
             ;
             men
             desire
             naturally
             to
             know
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             strangenes
             .
             The
             reason
             which
             some
             give
             that
             have
             neerely
             looked
             into
             it
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             vpon
             that
             coast
             there
             rise
             no
             vapors
             ,
             sufficient
             
             to
             engender
             raine
             for
             want
             of
             matter
             ;
             but
             onely
             that
             there
             be
             finall
             and
             light
             vapors
             ,
             which
             cannot
             breede
             any
             other
             then
             mistes
             and
             dewes
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             Europe
             ,
             oftentimes
             vapors
             do
             rise
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             turned
             into
             raine
             ,
             but
             into
             mistes
             only
             :
             the
             which
             growes
             from
             the
             substance
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             grosse
             and
             sufficient
             enough
             to
             turne
             to
             raine
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             the
             reason
             why
             that
             which
             happens
             but
             some
             times
             in
             Europe
             ,
             falles
             out
             continually
             vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             this
             region
             is
             very
             drie
             ,
             and
             yeeldes
             no
             grosse
             vapors
             .
             The
             drinesse
             is
             knowne
             by
             the
             gre●
             abundance
             of
             sandes
             ,
             having
             neither
             welles
             nor
             fountaines
             ,
             but
             of
             fifteene
             stades
             deepe
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             height
             of
             a
             man
             or
             more
             ,
             )
             and
             that
             is
             neere
             vnto
             rivers
             ,
             the
             water
             whereof
             ,
             piercing
             into
             the
             land
             ,
             giues
             them
             meanes
             to
             make
             welles
             .
             So
             as
             it
             hath
             been
             found
             by
             experience
             ,
             that
             the
             course
             of
             rivers
             being
             turned
             ,
             the
             welles
             have
             beene
             dried
             vp
             ,
             vntill
             they
             returned
             to
             their
             ordinarie
             course
             :
             and
             they
             give
             this
             reason
             for
             a
             materiall
             cause
             of
             this
             effect
             ,
             but
             they
             have
             another
             efficient
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             lesse
             considerable
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             the
             great
             height
             of
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             which
             comming
             along
             the
             coast
             ,
             shadowes
             the
             Lanos
             ;
             so
             as
             it
             suffers
             no
             winde
             to
             blowe
             from
             the
             land
             ,
             but
             above
             the
             toppes
             of
             these
             mountaines
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             there
             raines
             no
             winde
             ,
             but
             that
             from
             the
             Sea
             ,
             which
             finding
             no
             opposite
             ,
             doth
             not
             presse
             ,
             nor
             straine
             forth
             the
             vapors
             which
             rise
             to
             engender
             raine
             ;
             so
             as
             the
             shadowe
             of
             the
             mountaines
             keepes
             the
             vapors
             from
             thickning
             ,
             and
             convertes
             them
             all
             into
             mistes
             .
             There
             are
             some
             experiences
             agree
             with
             this
             discourse
             ;
             for
             that
             it
             raines
             vpon
             some
             small
             hilles
             along
             the
             coast
             ,
             which
             are
             least
             shadowed
             ,
             as
             the
             rockes
             of
             Atico
             and
             Arequipa
             .
             It
             hath
             rained
             in
             some
             yeeres
             whenas
             the
             Northern
             
             or
             easterly
             windes
             have
             blowen
             :
             yea
             ,
             all
             the
             time
             they
             have
             continued
             ,
             as
             it
             happened
             in
             seventie
             eight
             ,
             vpon
             the
             Lan●s
             of
             Trugillo
             ,
             where
             it
             rained
             aboundantly
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             had
             not
             seene
             in
             many
             ages
             before
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             it
             raines
             vpon
             the
             same
             coast
             ,
             in
             places
             ,
             whereas
             the
             Easterly
             or
             Northerne
             windes
             be
             ordinarie
             ,
             as
             in
             Guayaquil
             ,
             and
             in
             places
             whereas
             the
             land
             riseth
             much
             ,
             and
             turnes
             from
             the
             shadow
             of
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             as
             in
             those
             that
             are
             beyond
             Ariqua
             .
             Some
             discourse
             in
             this
             maner
             ,
             but
             let
             every
             one
             thinke
             as
             he
             please
             .
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             comming
             from
             the
             mountaines
             to
             the
             vallies
             ,
             they
             do
             vsually
             see
             as
             it
             were
             two
             heavens
             ,
             one
             cleere
             and
             bright
             above
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             obscure
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             a
             graie
             vaile
             spread
             vnderneath
             ,
             which
             covers
             all
             the
             coast
             :
             and
             although
             it
             raine
             not
             ,
             yet
             this
             mist
             is
             wonderfull
             profitable
             to
             bring
             forth
             grasse
             ,
             and
             to
             raise
             vp
             and
             nourish
             the
             seede
             :
             for
             although
             they
             have
             plentie
             of
             water
             ,
             which
             they
             draw
             from
             the
             Pooles
             and
             Lakes
             ,
             yet
             this
             moisture
             from
             heaven
             hath
             such
             a
             vertue
             ,
             that
             ceasing
             to
             fal
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             it
             breedes
             a
             great
             discommoditie
             and
             defect
             of
             graine
             and
             seedes
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             more
             worthy
             of
             admiration
             ,
             the
             drie
             and
             barren
             sandes
             are
             by
             this
             deaw
             so
             beautified
             with
             grasse
             and
             flowers
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             a
             pleasing
             and
             agreeable
             sight
             ,
             and
             verie
             profitable
             for
             the
             feeding
             of
             cattell
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             mountaine
             called
             Sandie
             ,
             neere
             to
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Kings
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             propertie
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             of
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             Lands
             ,
             
               CHAP.
               22.
            
             
          
           
             NEw
             Spaine
             passeth
             all
             other
             Provinces
             in
             pastures
             ,
             which
             breedes
             infinite
             troopes
             of
             horse
             ,
             kine
             ,
             
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             other
             cattell
             .
             It
             aboundes
             in
             fruite
             and
             all
             kinde
             of
             graine
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             Countrie
             the
             best
             furnished
             ,
             and
             most
             accomplished
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             Yet
             Peru
             doth
             surpasse
             it
             in
             one
             thing
             ,
             which
             is
             wine
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             growes
             store
             ,
             and
             good
             ;
             and
             they
             daily
             multiplie
             and
             increase
             ,
             the
             which
             doth
             grow
             in
             very
             hote
             vallies
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             waterings
             .
             And
             although
             there
             bee
             vines
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             yet
             the
             grape
             comes
             not
             to
             his
             maturitie
             ,
             fit
             to
             make
             wine
             .
             The
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             raines
             there
             in
             Iulie
             and
             August
             ,
             whenas
             the
             grape
             ripens
             :
             and
             therefore
             it
             comes
             not
             to
             his
             perfection
             .
             And
             if
             any
             one
             through
             curiositie
             would
             take
             the
             paines
             to
             make
             wine
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             like
             to
             that
             of
             Genua
             and
             Lombardie
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             small
             and
             sharpe
             ,
             having
             a
             taste
             like
             vnto
             veriuice
             .
             The
             Ilands
             which
             they
             call
             Barlovente
             ,
             which
             be
             
               Hispaniola
               ,
               Cuba
               ,
               Port
               Ricco
               ,
            
             &
             others
             there
             abouts
             ,
             are
             beautified
             with
             many
             greene
             pastures
             ,
             and
             abound
             in
             cattell
             ,
             as
             neate
             ,
             and
             swine
             ,
             which
             are
             become
             wilde
             .
             The
             wealth
             of
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             be
             their
             sugar-workes
             and
             hides
             .
             There
             is
             much
             
               Cassia
               fistula
            
             &
             ginger
             .
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             incredible
             ,
             to
             see
             the
             multitude
             of
             these
             marchandizes
             brought
             in
             one
             fleete
             ,
             being
             in
             a
             maner
             impossible
             that
             all
             Europe
             should
             waste
             so
             much
             .
             They
             likewise
             bring
             wood
             of
             an
             excellent
             qualitie
             and
             colour
             ,
             as
             Ebone
             ,
             &
             others
             ,
             which
             serve
             for
             buildings
             and
             Ioyners
             .
             There
             is
             much
             of
             that
             wood
             which
             they
             call
             
               Lignum
               Sanctum
            
             or
             Guage
             ,
             fit
             to
             cure
             the
             pox
             .
             All
             these
             Ilands
             and
             others
             there
             abouts
             ,
             which
             are
             many
             ,
             have
             a
             goodly
             and
             pleasant
             aspect
             ,
             for
             that
             throughout
             the
             yeere
             ,
             they
             are
             beautified
             with
             grasse
             &
             greene
             trees
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             cannot
             discerne
             when
             it
             is
             Autumne
             or
             Summer
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             continuall
             moisture
             ioyned
             to
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             burning
             Zone
             .
             And
             although
             this
             land
             be
             
             of
             a
             great
             circuite
             ,
             yet
             are
             there
             few
             dwellings
             ,
             for
             that
             of
             it selfe
             it
             engenders
             great
             Arcabutos
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             which
             be
             Groves
             or
             very
             thicke
             Coppeses
             :
             and
             on
             the
             plaines
             there
             are
             many
             marishes
             and
             bogges
             .
             They
             give
             yet
             another
             notable
             reason
             ,
             why
             they
             are
             so
             smally
             peopled
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             have
             remained
             few
             naturall
             Indians
             ,
             through
             the
             inconsideratenesse
             and
             disorder
             of
             the
             first
             Conquerors
             that
             peopled
             it
             :
             and
             therefore
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             they
             vse
             Negros
             ,
             but
             they
             cost
             deere
             ,
             being
             very
             fit
             to
             till
             the
             land
             .
             There
             growes
             neither
             bread
             nor
             wine
             in
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             too
             great
             fertilitie
             and
             the
             vice
             of
             the
             soile
             ,
             suffers
             them
             not
             to
             seede
             ,
             but
             castes
             all
             forth
             in
             grasse
             ,
             very
             vneaqually
             .
             There
             are
             no
             olive
             trees
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             they
             beare
             no
             olives
             ,
             but
             manie
             greene
             leaves
             pleasant
             to
             the
             view
             ,
             which
             beare
             no
             fruite
             .
             The
             bread
             they
             vse
             is
             of
             Cacave
             ,
             whereof
             we
             shall
             heereafter
             speake
             .
             There
             is
             gold
             in
             the
             riuers
             of
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             which
             some
             draw
             foorth
             ,
             but
             in
             small
             quantitie
             ,
             I
             was
             little
             lesse
             then
             a
             yeere
             in
             these
             ilands
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             hath
             beene
             told
             me
             of
             the
             maine
             land
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             where
             I
             have
             not
             been
             ,
             as
             in
             
               Florida
               ,
               Nicaraqua
               ,
               Guatimala
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             a
             maner
             of
             this
             temper
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             described
             :
             yet
             have
             I
             not
             set
             downe
             every
             particular
             of
             Nature
             in
             these
             Provinces
             of
             the
             firme
             land
             ,
             having
             no
             perfect
             knowledge
             thereof
             .
             The
             Countrie
             which
             doth
             most
             resemble
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             the
             regions
             of
             Europe
             ,
             in
             all
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             is
             the
             realme
             of
             Chille
             ,
             which
             is
             without
             the
             generall
             rule
             of
             these
             other
             Provinces
             ,
             being
             seated
             without
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             and
             the
             Tropicke
             of
             Capricorne
             .
             This
             land
             of
             it selfe
             is
             coole
             and
             fertile
             ,
             and
             brings
             forth
             all
             kindes
             of
             fruites
             that
             be
             in
             Spaine
             ;
             it
             yeeldes
             great
             aboundance
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             and
             aboundes
             in
             pastures
             and
             cattell
             .
             The
             aire
             is
             
             wholesome
             and
             cleere
             ,
             temperate
             betwixt
             heate
             and
             cold
             ,
             winter
             and
             summer
             are
             very
             distinct
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             finde
             great
             store
             of
             very
             fine
             gold
             .
             Yet
             this
             land
             is
             poore
             and
             finally
             peopled
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             continuall
             warre
             with
             the
             Auricanos
             ,
             and
             their
             associates
             ,
             being
             a
             rough
             people
             and
             friends
             to
             libertie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             vnknowne
             Land
             ,
             and
             the
             diversitie
             of
             a
             whole
             day
             ,
             betwixt
             them
             of
             the
             East
             and
             the
             West
             .
             CHAP.
             23.
             
          
           
             THere
             are
             great
             coniectures
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             temperate
             Zone
             at
             the
             Antartike
             Pole
             ,
             there
             are
             great
             and
             fertile
             lands
             :
             but
             to
             this
             day
             they
             are
             not
             discovered
             ,
             neither
             do
             they
             know
             any
             other
             land
             in
             this
             Zone
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             Chille
             ,
             and
             some
             part
             of
             that
             land
             which
             runnes
             from
             Ethiopia
             ,
             to
             the
             Cape
             of
             
               Good
               Hope
            
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             in
             the
             first
             booke
             ;
             neither
             is
             it
             knowne
             if
             there
             be
             any
             habitations
             in
             the
             other
             two
             Zones
             of
             the
             Poles
             ,
             and
             whether
             the
             land
             continues
             and
             stretcheth
             to
             that
             which
             is
             towards
             the
             Antartike
             or
             South
             Pole.
             Neither
             do
             we
             know
             the
             land
             that
             lies
             beyond
             the
             straight
             of
             Magellan
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             greatest
             height
             yet
             discovered
             ,
             is
             in
             fiftie
             ●ix
             degrees
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             formerly
             saide
             ;
             and
             toward
             the
             Artike
             or
             Northerne
             Pole
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             knowne
             how
             farre
             the
             land
             extendes
             ,
             which
             runnes
             beyond
             the
             Cape
             of
             Mendocin
             ,
             and
             the
             Caliphornes
             ,
             nor
             the
             bounds
             and
             end
             of
             Florida
             ,
             neither
             yet
             how
             farre
             it
             extendes
             to
             the
             West
             .
             Of
             late
             ,
             they
             have
             discovered
             a
             new
             land
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               New
               Mexico
            
             ,
             where
             they
             say
             is
             much
             people
             that
             speake
             the
             Mexicaine
             tongue
             .
             The
             Philippines
             and
             the
             following
             Ilands
             ,
             as
             some
             report
             that
             know
             
             it
             by
             experience
             ,
             ranne
             above
             nine
             hundred
             leagues
             .
             But
             to
             intreate
             of
             
               China
               ,
               Cochinchina
               ,
               Syam
            
             ,
             and
             other
             regions
             which
             are
             of
             the
             
               East
               Indies
            
             ,
             were
             contrary
             to
             my
             purpose
             ,
             which
             is
             onely
             to
             discourse
             of
             the
             West
             :
             nay
             ,
             they
             are
             ignorant
             of
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             America
             ,
             which
             lies
             betwixt
             Peru
             and
             Bresill
             ,
             although
             the
             bounds
             be
             knowne
             of
             all
             sides
             ,
             wherein
             there
             is
             diversitie
             of
             opinions
             ;
             some
             say
             it
             is
             a
             drowned
             land
             ,
             full
             of
             Lakes
             and
             waterie
             places
             ;
             Others
             affirme
             there
             are
             great
             and
             florishing
             kingdomes
             ,
             imagining
             there
             be
             the
             Paytiti
             ,
             the
             Dorado
             ,
             and
             the
             Caesars
             ,
             where
             they
             say
             are
             wonderfull
             things
             .
             I
             have
             heard
             one
             of
             our
             company
             say
             ,
             a
             man
             worthy
             of
             credite
             ,
             that
             hee
             had
             seene
             great
             dwellings
             there
             ,
             and
             the
             waies
             as
             much
             beaten
             ,
             as
             those
             betwixt
             Salamanca
             ,
             and
             Villadillit
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             did
             see
             ,
             whenas
             
               Peter
               d'Orsua
            
             ,
             and
             after
             ,
             those
             that
             succeeded
             him
             ,
             made
             their
             entrie
             and
             discoverie
             by
             the
             great
             river
             of
             Amazons
             ,
             who
             beleeving
             that
             the
             Dorado
             which
             they
             sought
             ,
             was
             farther
             off
             ,
             cared
             not
             to
             inhabit●
             there
             ,
             and
             after
             went
             both
             without
             the
             Dorado
             ,
             which
             they
             could
             not
             finde
             ,
             and
             this
             great
             Province
             which
             they
             left
             .
             To
             speake
             the
             truth
             ,
             the
             habitations
             of
             America
             ,
             are
             to
             this
             day
             vnknowne
             ,
             except
             the
             extreamities
             ,
             which
             are
             
               Peru
               ,
               Bresill
            
             ,
             and
             that
             part
             where
             the
             land
             beginnes
             to
             straighten
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             river
             of
             Silver
             ,
             then
             Tucuman
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             round
             to
             Chille
             and
             Charc●
             .
             Of
             late
             we
             have
             vnderstood
             by
             letters
             from
             some
             of
             ours
             which
             go
             to
             S.
             Croix
             ,
             in
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             that
             they
             go
             discovering
             of
             great
             Provinces
             and
             dwellings
             ,
             betwixt
             Bresill
             and
             Peru.
             Time
             will
             reveile
             them
             ,
             for
             as
             at
             this
             day
             the
             care
             and
             courage
             of
             men
             is
             great
             ,
             to
             compasse
             the
             world
             from
             one
             part
             to
             another
             ;
             so
             wee
             may
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             as
             they
             have
             discovered
             that
             which
             is
             now
             
             knowne
             ,
             they
             may
             likewise
             lay
             open
             that
             which
             re●●nes
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             Gospell
             may
             be
             preached
             to
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             seeing
             the
             two
             Crownes
             of
             Portugall
             and
             Ca●●ille
             ,
             have
             met
             by
             the
             East
             and
             West
             ,
             ioyning
             their
             discoveries
             together
             ,
             which
             in
             truth
             is
             a
             matter
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             is
             come
             to
             China
             and
             Iappan
             by
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             to
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             which
             are
             neighbours
             ,
             and
             almost
             ioyning
             vnto
             China
             ,
             by
             the
             West
             :
             for
             from
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Lusson
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             chiefe
             of
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             is
             the
             Citie
             of
             Mamill●
             ,
             vnto
             Macan
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             I
             le
             of
             Cauton
             ,
             are
             but
             foure
             score
             or
             a
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             and
             yet
             we
             finde
             it
             strange
             ,
             that
             notwithstanding
             th●●
             small
             distance
             from
             the
             one
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             yet
             according
             to
             their
             accoumpt
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             daies
             difference
             betwixt
             them
             ;
             so
             as
             it
             is
             Sunday
             at
             Macan
             ,
             whenas
             it
             is
             but
             Saterday
             at
             Mamille
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             rest
             .
             Those
             of
             Macan
             and
             of
             China
             have
             one
             day
             advanced
             before
             the
             Philippines
             .
             It
             happened
             to
             father
             
               Alo●●●
               Sanches
            
             ,
             of
             whom
             mention
             is
             made
             before
             ,
             that
             parting
             from
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             he
             arrived
             at
             Macan
             the
             second
             day
             of
             Maie
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             computation
             ,
             and
             going
             to
             say
             the
             Masse
             of
             S.
             Athanasius
             ,
             he
             found
             they
             did
             celebrate
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             invention
             of
             the
             holy
             Crosse
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             did
             then
             reckon
             the
             third
             of
             Maie
             .
             The
             like
             happened
             vnto
             him
             in
             another
             voyage
             beyond
             it
             .
          
           
             Some
             have
             found
             this
             alteration
             and
             diversitie
             ,
             strange
             ,
             supposing
             that
             the
             fault
             proceedes
             from
             the
             one
             or
             the
             other
             ;
             the
             which
             is
             not
             so
             :
             but
             it
             is
             a
             true
             and
             well
             observed
             computation
             ,
             for
             according
             to
             the
             difference
             of
             waies
             where
             they
             have
             beene
             ,
             we
             must
             necessarily
             say
             ,
             that
             when
             they
             meete
             ,
             there
             must
             bee
             difference
             of
             a
             day
             ;
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             sailing
             from
             West
             
             to
             East
             ,
             they
             alwaies
             gaine
             of
             the
             day
             ,
             finding
             the
             sunne
             rising
             sooner
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             those
             that
             saile
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             do
             alwaies
             loose
             of
             the
             day
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Sunne
             riseth
             later
             vnto
             them
             ;
             and
             as
             they
             approach
             neerer
             the
             East
             or
             the
             West
             ,
             they
             have
             the
             day
             longer
             or
             shorter
             .
             In
             Peru
             ,
             which
             is
             westward
             in
             respect
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             they
             are
             above
             sixe
             houres
             behinde
             ;
             so
             as
             when
             it
             is
             noone
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             it
             is
             morning
             at
             Peru
             ;
             and
             when
             it
             is
             morning
             heere
             ,
             it
             is
             mid-night
             there
             .
             I
             have
             made
             certaine
             proofe
             thereof
             ,
             by
             the
             computation
             of
             Eclipses
             of
             the
             Sunne
             and
             Moone
             .
             Now
             that
             the
             Portugalls
             have
             made
             their
             navigations
             from
             West
             to
             East
             ,
             and
             the
             Castillans
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             when
             they
             came
             to
             ioyne
             and
             meete
             at
             the
             Philippines
             and
             Macan
             ,
             the
             one
             have
             gained
             twelve
             houres
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             hath
             lost
             as
             much
             ;
             so
             as
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             and
             in
             one
             time
             ,
             they
             finde
             the
             difference
             of
             twentie
             houres
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             whole
             day
             ;
             so
             as
             necessarily
             ,
             the
             one
             are
             at
             the
             third
             of
             Maie
             ,
             whenas
             the
             others
             accoumpt
             but
             the
             second
             ;
             and
             whenas
             the
             one
             doth
             fast
             for
             Easter
             eve
             ,
             the
             others
             eate
             flesh
             for
             the
             day
             of
             the
             resurrection
             .
             And
             if
             we
             will
             imagine
             that
             they
             passe
             farther
             ,
             turning
             once
             againe
             about
             the
             world
             ,
             vsing
             the
             same
             computation
             ,
             when
             they
             should
             returne
             to
             ioyne
             together
             ,
             they
             should
             finde
             by
             the
             same
             accoumpt
             ,
             two
             daies
             difference
             :
             for
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             those
             that
             go
             to
             the
             Sunne
             rising
             ,
             accoumpt
             the
             day
             sooner
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Sunne
             riseth
             to
             them
             sooner
             ,
             and
             those
             that
             go
             to
             the
             setting
             ,
             accoumpt
             the
             day
             later
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             goes
             from
             them
             later
             :
             finally
             ,
             the
             diversitie
             of
             the
             noone
             tide
             ,
             causeth
             the
             divers
             reckoning
             of
             the
             day
             .
             And
             now
             for
             as
             much
             as
             those
             that
             doe
             saile
             from
             East
             to
             West
             ,
             change
             their
             noone
             tide
             without
             perceiving
             it
             ,
             and
             yet
             still
             follow
             the
             same
             computation
             
             they
             did
             when
             they
             parted
             ;
             of
             necessitie
             having
             made
             the
             compasse
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             they
             must
             finde
             the
             want
             of
             a
             whole
             day
             in
             their
             computation
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Volcans
             or
             Vents
             of
             fire
             .
             
               CHAP.
               24.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             we
             finde
             vents
             of
             fire
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             as
             mount
             Aetna
             and
             Wesuvio
             ,
             which
             now
             they
             call
             mount
             S●ma
             ,
             yet
             is
             that
             notable
             which
             is
             found
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             Ordinarily
             these
             Volcans
             be
             rockes
             or
             pikes
             of
             most
             high
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             raise
             themselves
             above
             the
             toppes
             of
             all
             other
             mountaines
             ;
             vpon
             their
             toppes
             they
             have
             a
             plaine
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             midst
             thereof
             a
             pitte
             or
             great
             mouth
             ,
             which
             discends
             even
             vnto
             the
             foote
             thereof
             ;
             a
             thing
             verie
             terrible
             to
             beholde
             .
             Out
             of
             these
             mouthes
             ,
             there
             issues
             smoake
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             fire
             :
             some
             cast
             little
             smoake
             ,
             and
             have
             in
             a
             manner
             no
             force
             of
             Volcans
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             Arequipa
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             an
             vnmeasurable
             height
             ,
             and
             almost
             all
             fand
             .
             It
             cannot
             be
             mounted
             vp
             in
             lesse
             then
             two
             daies
             ,
             yet
             they
             have
             not
             found
             any
             shew
             of
             fire
             ,
             but
             onely
             the
             reliques
             of
             some
             sacrifices
             which
             the
             Indians
             made
             while
             they
             were
             Gentiles
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             it
             doth
             cause
             a
             little
             smoake
             .
             The
             Volcan
             of
             Mexico
             which
             is
             neere
             to
             the
             Village
             of
             Angels
             ,
             is
             likewise
             of
             an
             admirable
             height
             ,
             whereas
             they
             mount
             thirty
             leagues
             in
             turning
             :
             from
             this
             Volcan
             issueth
             not
             continually
             ,
             but
             sometimes
             ,
             almost
             every
             day
             ,
             a
             great
             exhalation
             or
             whirle-winde
             of
             smoake
             ,
             which
             ascends
             directly
             vp
             like
             to
             the
             shot
             of
             a
             Crosse-bow
             ,
             and
             growes
             after
             like
             to
             a
             great
             plume
             of
             feathers
             ,
             vntill
             it
             ceaseth
             quite
             ,
             and
             is
             presently
             converted
             into
             an
             obscure
             and
             darke
             cloude
             .
             Most
             commonly
             it
             riseth
             in
             the
             morning
             
             after
             the
             Sunne
             rising
             ,
             and
             at
             night
             when
             it
             setteth
             ,
             although
             I
             have
             seene
             it
             breake
             out
             at
             other
             times
             .
             Sometimes
             it
             dooth
             cast
             foorth
             great
             store
             of
             ashes
             after
             this
             smoake
             .
             They
             have
             not
             yet
             seene
             any
             fire
             come
             from
             it
             ;
             yet
             they
             feare
             it
             will
             issue
             forth
             and
             burne
             al
             the
             land
             round
             about
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             best
             of
             all
             the
             kingdome
             :
             And
             they
             holde
             it
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             some
             correspondencie
             betwixt
             this
             Vulcan
             &
             the
             Sierre
             of
             Tlaxcala
             ,
             which
             is
             neere
             vnto
             it
             ,
             that
             causeth
             the
             great
             thunders
             and
             lightnings
             they
             doe
             commonly
             heare
             and
             see
             in
             those
             parts
             .
          
           
             Some
             Spaniards
             have
             mounted
             vppe
             to
             this
             Volcan
             ,
             and
             given
             notice
             of
             the
             mine
             of
             sulphre
             to
             make
             powlder
             thereof
             .
             Cortez
             reportes
             the
             care
             hee
             had
             to
             discover
             what
             was
             in
             this
             Volcan
             .
             The
             Volcans
             of
             Guatimalla
             are
             more
             renowned
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             their
             greatnesse
             and
             height
             :
             which
             those
             that
             saile
             in
             the
             South
             Sea
             discover
             a
             farre
             off
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             violence
             and
             terrour
             of
             the
             fire
             it
             casts
             .
             The
             three
             and
             twentieth
             day
             of
             December
             ,
             in
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             God
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             and
             sixe
             ,
             almost
             all
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Guatimalla
             fell
             with
             an
             Earthquake
             ,
             and
             some
             people
             slaine
             .
             This
             Volcan
             had
             then
             sixe
             moneths
             together
             ,
             day
             and
             night
             cast
             out
             from
             the
             toppe
             ,
             and
             vomited
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             a
             floud
             of
             fire
             ,
             the
             substance
             falling
             vpon
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             Volcan
             ,
             was
             turned
             into
             ashes
             like
             vnto
             burnt
             earth
             (
             a
             thing
             passing
             mans
             iudgement
             ,
             to
             conceive
             how
             it
             could
             cast
             so
             much
             matter
             from
             its
             centre
             during
             sixe
             moneths
             ,
             being
             accustomed
             to
             cast
             smoake
             alone
             ,
             and
             that
             sometimes
             with
             small
             flashes
             .
             This
             was
             written
             vnto
             me
             being
             at
             Mexico
             ,
             by
             a
             Secretarie
             of
             the
             audience
             of
             Guatimalla
             ,
             a
             man
             woorthy
             of
             credite
             ,
             and
             at
             that
             time
             it
             had
             not
             ceased
             to
             cast
             out
             fire
             .
             This
             yeere
             past
             ,
             being
             
             in
             Quitto
             in
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Kings
             ,
             the
             Volcan
             which
             is
             neere
             therevnto
             ,
             cast
             such
             aboundance
             of
             ashes
             ,
             that
             in
             many
             leagues
             compasse
             thereabout
             it
             darkened
             the
             light
             of
             the
             day
             :
             and
             there
             fell
             such
             store
             in
             Quitto
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             not
             able
             to
             goe
             in
             the
             streetes
             .
             There
             have
             beene
             other
             Volcans
             seene
             which
             cast
             neither
             smoake
             ,
             flame
             ,
             nor
             yet
             ashes
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             botome
             they
             are
             seene
             to
             burn
             with
             a
             quicke
             fire
             without
             dying
             :
             such
             a
             one
             was
             that
             which
             in
             our
             time
             a
             coverous
             and
             greedy
             Priest
             seeing
             ,
             perswaded
             himselfe
             that
             they
             were
             heapes
             of
             golde
             hee
             did
             see
             burning
             ,
             imagining
             it
             coulde
             be
             no
             other
             matter
             or
             substance
             ,
             which
             had
             burnt
             so
             many
             yeeres
             ,
             and
             not
             consumed
             .
             And
             in
             this
             conceit
             hee
             made
             certaine
             kettles
             with
             chaines
             ,
             and
             an
             instrument
             ,
             to
             gather
             and
             drawe
             vp
             the
             golde
             out
             of
             this
             pitte
             or
             Volcan
             :
             but
             the
             fire
             scorned
             him
             ,
             for
             no
             sooner
             did
             his
             yron
             chaine
             and
             caldron
             approach
             neere
             the
             fire
             ,
             but
             sodainely
             they
             were
             broken
             in
             peeces
             .
             Yet
             some
             tolde
             mee
             ,
             that
             this
             man
             was
             still
             obstinate
             ,
             seeking
             other
             inventions
             for
             to
             drawe
             out
             this
             golde
             as
             he
             imagined
             .
          
        
         
           
             What
             should
             be
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             fire
             and
             smoake
             continues
             so
             long
             in
             these
             Vulcans
             ?
             
               CHAP.
               25.
            
             
          
           
             THere
             is
             no
             neede
             now
             to
             make
             any
             mention
             of
             other
             Vulcans
             ,
             seeeing
             wee
             may
             well
             vnderstand
             by
             the
             former
             what
             they
             are
             :
             yet
             is
             it
             woorthy
             the
             search
             ,
             what
             should
             be
             the
             cause
             why
             the
             fire
             and
             smoake
             continues
             in
             these
             Volcans
             ;
             for
             that
             it
             seemes
             a
             prodigious
             thing
             ,
             yea
             against
             the
             course
             of
             Nature
             ,
             to
             vomite
             and
             cast
             out
             so
             many
             flames
             .
             Whence
             dooth
             this
             matter
             proceede
             ,
             or
             whether
             it
             be
             ingendred
             within
             the
             bowelles
             
             thereof
             ?
             Some
             have
             held
             opinion
             ,
             that
             these
             Volcans
             consume
             the
             inner
             substance
             they
             have
             of
             Nature
             ;
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             naturally
             they
             shal
             end
             ,
             whenas
             they
             have
             consumed
             the
             fuell
             (
             as
             a
             man
             may
             say
             )
             that
             is
             within
             them
             .
             According
             to
             which
             opinion
             we
             see
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             some
             mountaines
             and
             rockes
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             drawe
             a
             burnt
             stone
             which
             is
             light
             ,
             but
             very
             hard
             ,
             and
             is
             excellent
             to
             builde
             with
             ,
             as
             that
             which
             is
             carried
             to
             Mexico
             .
             And
             in
             effect
             there
             are
             some
             shewes
             of
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             spoken
             ,
             that
             these
             mountaines
             or
             rockes
             hadde
             sometimes
             a
             naturall
             fire
             ,
             which
             hath
             died
             after
             the
             matter
             was
             consumed
             ;
             and
             so
             these
             stones
             have
             remayned
             burnt
             and
             pierced
             with
             the
             fire
             as
             we
             see
             .
             For
             my
             part
             ,
             I
             will
             not
             contradict
             it
             ,
             that
             in
             those
             places
             there
             hath
             not
             bin
             fire
             sometimes
             ,
             or
             Volcans
             .
             But
             there
             is
             some
             difficultie
             to
             be
             beleeve
             it
             should
             be
             so
             in
             all
             Volcans
             ,
             considering
             the
             matter
             they
             cast
             out
             is
             almost
             infinite
             ;
             and
             that
             being
             gathered
             together
             ,
             it
             could
             not
             be
             contained
             in
             the
             same
             concavitie
             from
             whence
             it
             goes
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             Volcans
             ,
             that
             in
             hundreds
             ,
             yea
             thousands
             of
             yeeres
             are
             alwaies
             of
             one
             fashion
             ,
             casting
             out
             continually
             ,
             smoke
             ,
             fire
             ,
             and
             ashes
             .
             Plinie
             the
             Historiographer
             of
             naturall
             things
             (
             as
             the
             other
             Plinie
             his
             nephew
             reports
             )
             searching
             out
             the
             secret
             how
             this
             should
             passe
             :
             and
             appr●ching
             too
             neere
             th'exhalation
             of
             fire
             of
             one
             of
             these
             Volcans
             ,
             died
             ;
             and
             thinking
             by
             his
             diligence
             to
             find
             an
             end
             thereof
             ,
             had
             an
             end
             of
             his
             life
             .
             For
             my
             parte
             ,
             vpon
             this
             consideration
             I
             think
             ,
             that
             as
             ther
             are
             places
             in
             th'
             earth
             ,
             whose
             vertue
             is
             to
             draw
             vaporous
             matter
             ,
             and
             to
             convert
             it
             into
             water
             ,
             which
             be
             the
             fountaines
             that
             alwayes
             runne
             ,
             and
             have
             alwayes
             matter
             to
             make
             them
             runne
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             drawe
             vnto
             them
             the
             substance
             of
             water
             .
             
             In
             like
             sorte
             there
             are
             places
             that
             have
             the
             propertie
             to
             draw
             vnto
             them
             hote
             exhalations
             ,
             and
             to
             convert
             them
             into
             fire
             and
             smoake
             which
             by
             their
             force
             and
             violence
             cast
             out
             other
             thicke
             matter
             which
             dissolves
             into
             ashes
             ,
             into
             pumice
             stone
             ,
             or
             such
             like
             substance
             :
             and
             for
             a
             sufficient
             argument
             to
             proove
             it
             to
             be
             so
             in
             these
             Volcans
             ,
             they
             sometimes
             cast
             smoke
             ,
             and
             not
             alwayes
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             fire
             ,
             and
             not
             alwayes
             ,
             which
             is
             according
             to
             that
             it
             can
             drawe
             vnto
             it
             ,
             and
             digest
             ,
             as
             the
             fountaines
             which
             in
             winter
             abound
             ,
             and
             in
             summer
             decrease
             ;
             yea
             some
             are
             quite
             dried
             vp
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             force
             and
             vigour
             they
             have
             ,
             and
             the
             matter
             that
             is
             presented
             :
             even
             so
             it
             is
             of
             these
             Volcans
             ,
             which
             cast
             fire
             more
             or
             lesse
             at
             certaine
             seasons
             .
             Others
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             hell
             fire
             ,
             which
             issueth
             there
             ,
             to
             serve
             as
             a
             warning
             ,
             thereby
             to
             consider
             what
             is
             in
             the
             other
             life
             :
             but
             if
             hell
             (
             as
             Divines
             holde
             )
             be
             in
             the
             centre
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             the
             which
             containes
             in
             diameter
             above
             two
             thousand
             leagues
             ,
             we
             can
             not
             iudge
             that
             this
             fire
             is
             from
             the
             centre
             ;
             for
             that
             hell
             fire
             (
             as
             saint
             Basil
             and
             others
             teach
             )
             is
             very
             different
             from
             this
             which
             wee
             see
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             without
             light
             ,
             
             and
             burneth
             without
             comparison
             much
             more
             then
             ours
             .
             And
             therefore
             I
             conclude
             ,
             that
             what
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             seemes
             to
             me
             more
             reasonable
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Earthquakes
             .
             
               CHAP.
               26.
            
             
          
           
             SOme
             have
             held
             ,
             that
             from
             these
             Volcans
             which
             are
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             earthquakes
             proceed
             ,
             being
             very
             common
             there
             :
             but
             for
             that
             they
             ordinarily
             chance
             in
             places
             farre
             from
             those
             Volcans
             ,
             it
             can
             not
             be
             the
             totall
             cause
             .
             It
             is
             true
             they
             have
             a
             certaine
             simpathy
             one
             with
             
             another
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             hote
             exhalations
             which
             engender
             in
             the
             inner
             concavities
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             seeme
             to
             be
             the
             materiall
             substance
             of
             fire
             in
             the
             Volcans
             ,
             whereby
             there
             kindleth
             an
             other
             more
             grosse
             matter
             ,
             and
             makes
             these
             shewes
             of
             flame
             and
             smoke
             that
             come
             forth
             .
             And
             these
             exhalations
             (
             finding
             no
             easie
             issue
             in
             the
             earth
             )
             move
             it
             ,
             to
             issue
             forth
             with
             great
             violence
             ,
             wherby
             we
             heare
             that
             horrible
             noise
             vnder
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             likewise
             the
             shaking
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             being
             stirred
             with
             this
             burning
             exhalation
             ;
             Even
             as
             gunpowlder
             in
             mines
             ,
             having
             fire
             put
             to
             it
             breakes
             rockes
             and
             walles
             :
             and
             as
             the
             chesnut
             laid
             into
             the
             fire
             ,
             leapes
             and
             breakes
             with
             a
             noyse
             ,
             whenas
             it
             casts
             forth
             the
             aire
             (
             which
             is
             contained
             within
             the
             huske
             )
             by
             the
             force
             of
             the
             fire
             :
             Even
             so
             these
             Earthquakes
             do
             most
             commonly
             happen
             in
             places
             neere
             the
             water
             or
             sea
             .
             As
             we
             see
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             that
             townes
             and
             citties
             farthest
             from
             the
             sea
             and
             waters
             are
             least
             afflicted
             therewith
             ;
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             those
             that
             are
             seated
             vpon
             portes
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             vpon
             rivers
             ,
             the
             sea
             coast
             ,
             and
             places
             neere
             vnto
             them
             ,
             feele
             most
             this
             calamitie
             .
             There
             hath
             happened
             in
             Peru
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             is
             wonderfull
             ,
             and
             worthy
             to
             be
             noted
             )
             Earthquakes
             which
             have
             runne
             from
             Chille
             vnto
             Quitto
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             above
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             I
             say
             the
             greatest
             that
             ever
             I
             heard
             speake
             of
             ,
             for
             lesser
             be
             more
             common
             there
             .
             Vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Chille
             (
             I
             remember
             not
             well
             in
             what
             yeare
             )
             there
             was
             so
             terrible
             an
             Earthquake
             ,
             as
             it
             overturned
             whole
             mountains
             ,
             and
             thereby
             stopped
             the
             course
             of
             rivers
             which
             it
             converted
             into
             lakes
             ,
             it
             beat
             downe
             townes
             ,
             and
             flew
             a
             great
             number
             of
             people
             ,
             causing
             the
             sea
             to
             leave
             her
             place
             some
             leagues
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             shippes
             remained
             on
             drie
             ground
             ,
             farre
             from
             the
             ordinary
             roade
             ,
             with
             many
             other
             heavie
             and
             horrible
             things
             .
             And
             as
             I
             well
             remember
             ,
             
             they
             say
             this
             trouble
             and
             motion
             ,
             caused
             by
             the
             Earthquake
             ,
             ranne
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             alongest
             the
             coast
             .
             Soone
             after
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             yeere
             eighty
             two
             ,
             happened
             that
             Earthquake
             of
             Arequipa
             ,
             which
             in
             a
             maner
             overthrew
             the
             whole
             citie
             .
             Since
             in
             the
             yeere
             eightie
             sixe
             ,
             the
             ninth
             of
             Iulie
             ,
             fell
             an
             other
             Earthquake
             in
             the
             cittie
             of
             Kings
             ,
             the
             which
             as
             the
             Viceroy
             did
             write
             ,
             hadde
             runne
             a
             hundred
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             leagues
             alongest
             the
             coast
             ,
             and
             overthwart
             in
             the
             Sierre
             fiftie
             leagues
             .
             The
             mercy
             of
             the
             Lord
             was
             great
             in
             this
             earth
             quake
             ,
             to
             forewarne
             the
             people
             by
             a
             great
             noyse
             which
             they
             heard
             alittle
             before
             the
             Earthquake
             ,
             who
             taught
             by
             former
             experiences
             ,
             presently
             put
             themselves
             in
             safetie
             ,
             leaving
             their
             houses
             ,
             streets
             ,
             and
             gardins
             ,
             to
             go
             into
             the
             fieldes
             ;
             so
             as
             although
             it
             ruined
             a
             great
             parte
             of
             the
             Cittie
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             chiefest
             buildings
             ,
             yet
             there
             died
             not
             above
             fifteene
             or
             twenty
             persons
             of
             all
             the
             Inhabitants
             .
             It
             caused
             the
             like
             trouble
             and
             motion
             at
             sea
             ,
             as
             it
             had
             done
             at
             Chille
             ,
             which
             happened
             presently
             after
             the
             Earthquake
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             might
             see
             the
             sea
             furiously
             to
             flie
             out
             of
             her
             boundes
             ,
             and
             to
             runne
             neere
             two
             leagues
             into
             the
             land
             ,
             rising
             above
             foureteene
             fadome
             :
             it
             covered
             all
             that
             plaine
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             ditches
             and
             peeces
             of
             wood
             that
             were
             there
             ,
             swamme
             in
             the
             water
             .
             There
             was
             yet
             an
             other
             earthquake
             in
             the
             Realme
             and
             Cittie
             of
             Quitto
             ;
             and
             it
             seemes
             all
             these
             notable
             Earthquakes
             vppon
             that
             coast
             ,
             have
             succeeded
             one
             an
             other
             by
             order
             ,
             as
             in
             trueth
             it
             is
             subiect
             to
             these
             inconveniences
             .
             And
             therefore
             although
             vpon
             the
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             there
             be
             no
             torments
             from
             heaven
             ,
             as
             thunder
             and
             lightning
             ,
             yet
             are
             they
             not
             without
             feare
             vppon
             the
             land
             :
             and
             so
             everie
             one
             hath
             before
             his
             eies
             ,
             the
             Heraults
             of
             divine
             Iustice
             ,
             to
             moove
             him
             to
             feare
             God.
             For
             as
             the
             Scripture
             saith
             ,
             
             
               Fecit
               haec
               vt
               timeatur
            
             .
             Returning
             then
             to
             our
             purpose
             ,
             I
             say
             the
             sea
             coast
             is
             most
             subiect
             to
             these
             earthquakes
             ,
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             in
             my
             iudgement
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             water
             dooth
             stop
             the
             conduites
             and
             passages
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             hote
             exhalations
             should
             passe
             ,
             which
             are
             engendered
             there
             .
             And
             also
             the
             humiditie
             thickning
             the
             superficies
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             dooth
             cause
             the
             fumes
             and
             hot
             exhalations
             to
             goe
             close
             together
             and
             incounter
             violently
             in
             the
             bowells
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             doe
             afterwards
             breake
             forth
             .
          
           
             Some
             have
             observed
             ,
             that
             such
             Earthquakes
             have
             vsually
             hapned
             ,
             whenas
             a
             rainie
             season
             falles
             after
             some
             drie
             ye●res
             .
             Wherevpon
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Earthquakes
             are
             most
             rare
             ,
             where
             are
             most
             welles
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             approoved
             by
             experience
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Mexico
             holde
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Lake
             whereon
             it
             is
             seated
             ,
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             Earthquakes
             that
             happen
             there
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             not
             very
             violent
             :
             and
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             Townes
             and
             Provinces
             ,
             farre
             within
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             farthest
             from
             the
             sea
             ,
             receive
             sometimes
             great
             losses
             by
             these
             Earthquakes
             ,
             as
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Chachapoyas
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             in
             Italie
             that
             of
             Ferrara
             ,
             although
             vpon
             this
             subiect
             .
             It
             seemes
             this
             latter
             ,
             being
             neere
             to
             a
             river
             ,
             and
             not
             farre
             from
             the
             Adriatic
             sea
             ,
             should
             rather
             be
             numbred
             among
             the
             sea-Townes
             .
             In
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eightie
             and
             one
             ,
             in
             Cugiano
             ,
             a
             Cittie
             of
             Peru
             ,
             otherwise
             called
             the
             Peace
             ,
             there
             hapned
             a
             strange
             accident
             touching
             this
             subiect
             .
             A
             village
             called
             Angoango
             (
             where
             many
             Indians
             dwelt
             that
             were
             sorcerers
             and
             idolatrers
             )
             fell
             sodainely
             to
             ruine
             ,
             so
             as
             a
             great
             parte
             thereof
             was
             raised
             vp
             and
             carried
             away
             ,
             and
             many
             of
             the
             Indians
             smothered
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             seems
             incredible
             (
             yet
             testified
             by
             men
             of
             credit
             )
             the
             earth
             that
             
             was
             ruined
             and
             so
             beaten
             downe
             ,
             did
             runne
             and
             slide
             vpon
             the
             land
             for
             the
             space
             of
             a
             league
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             as
             it
             had
             beene
             water
             or
             wax
             molten
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             stopt
             and
             filled
             vppe
             a
             Lake
             ,
             and
             remayned
             so
             spread
             over
             the
             whole
             countrey
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             land
             and
             sea
             imbrace
             one
             an
             other
             .
             CHAP.
             27.
             
          
           
             I
             Wil
             end
             with
             this
             Element
             of
             earth
             ,
             vniting
             it
             to
             the
             precedent
             of
             water
             ,
             whose
             order
             and
             embracing
             is
             truely
             of
             it selfe
             admirable
             .
             These
             two
             elements
             have
             one
             spheare
             divided
             betweene
             them
             ,
             and
             entertaine
             and
             embrace
             one
             another
             in
             a
             thousand
             sortes
             and
             maners
             .
             In
             some
             places
             the
             water
             encounters
             the
             land
             furiously
             as
             an
             enemy
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             places
             ,
             it
             invirons
             it
             after
             a
             sweete
             and
             amiable
             manner
             .
             There
             are
             partes
             whereas
             the
             sea
             enters
             far
             within
             the
             land
             ,
             as
             comming
             to
             visite
             it
             ;
             and
             in
             other
             partes
             the
             land
             makes
             restitution
             ,
             casting
             his
             capes
             ,
             points
             and
             tongues
             farre
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             piercing
             into
             the
             bowelles
             thereof
             .
             In
             some
             partes
             one
             element
             ends
             and
             another
             beginnes
             ,
             yeelding
             by
             degrees
             one
             vnto
             another
             .
             In
             some
             places
             (
             where
             they
             ioyne
             )
             it
             is
             exceeding
             deepe
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             the
             South
             Sea
             ,
             and
             in
             those
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             whereas
             the
             shippes
             ride
             close
             to
             the
             land
             ;
             and
             although
             they
             sound
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             ,
             yea
             foure
             score
             fadomes
             ,
             yet
             do
             they
             finde
             no
             bottome
             ,
             which
             makes
             men
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             these
             are
             pikes
             or
             poynts
             of
             land
             which
             rise
             vp
             from
             the
             bottome
             ,
             a
             matter
             woorthy
             of
             great
             admiration
             .
             Heerevpon
             a
             very
             expert
             Pilote
             said
             vnto
             me
             ,
             that
             the
             Ilands
             which
             they
             call
             of
             Woolves
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             that
             lie
             
             at
             the
             entry
             of
             the
             coast
             of
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             beeing
             called
             Cocos
             ,
             were
             of
             this
             manner
             .
          
           
             Moreover
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             place
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             great
             Ocean
             ,
             without
             the
             view
             of
             land
             ,
             and
             many
             leagues
             from
             it
             ,
             where
             are
             seene
             as
             it
             were
             two
             towers
             or
             pikes
             of
             a
             very
             high
             elevated
             rocke
             ,
             rising
             out
             of
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             yet
             ioyning
             vnto
             it
             they
             finde
             no
             bottome
             .
             No
             man
             can
             yet
             perfectly
             comprehend
             ,
             nor
             conceive
             the
             full
             and
             perfect
             forme
             of
             the
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             boundes
             being
             not
             wholy
             discovered
             to
             this
             day
             :
             yet
             wee
             may
             ghesse
             that
             it
             is
             proportioned
             like
             a
             heart
             with
             the
             lungs
             .
             The
             broadest
             of
             this
             heart
             is
             from
             Bresill
             to
             Peru
             ,
             the
             poynt
             at
             the
             straight
             of
             Magellan
             ,
             and
             the
             top
             where
             it
             ends
             is
             the
             firme
             land
             ,
             and
             there
             the
             continent
             begins
             by
             little
             and
             litle
             to
             extend
             itselfe
             vntill
             wee
             come
             to
             the
             height
             of
             Florida
             and
             the
             vpper
             landes
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             yet
             well
             discovered
             .
             We
             may
             vnderstand
             other
             particularities
             of
             this
             land
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             by
             the
             Commentaries
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             written
             of
             their
             successe
             and
             discoveries
             ;
             and
             amongest
             the
             rest
             ,
             of
             the
             Peregrination
             which
             I
             have
             written
             ;
             which
             in
             trueth
             is
             strange
             ,
             and
             may
             give
             a
             great
             light
             .
             This
             in
             my
             opinion
             may
             suffice
             at
             this
             time
             ,
             to
             give
             som
             knowledge
             of
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             touching
             the
             common
             elements
             ,
             of
             the
             which
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             worlde
             are
             famed
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           FOVRTH
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             Of
             three
             kindes
             of
             mixtures
             or
             compounds
             ,
             of
             the
             which
             I
             must
             intreate
             in
             this
             Historie
             .
             
               CHAP.
               1.
            
             
          
           
             HAving
             intreated
             in
             the
             former
             booke
             of
             that
             which
             concernes
             the
             Elements
             ,
             and
             the
             simples
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             in
             this
             present
             booke
             we
             will
             discourse
             of
             mixtures
             and
             compounds
             ,
             seeming
             fit
             for
             the
             subiect
             we
             shall
             treate
             of
             .
             And
             although
             there
             be
             many
             other
             sundrie
             kindes
             ,
             yet
             we
             will
             reduce
             this
             matter
             into
             three
             ,
             which
             are
             Mettalls
             ,
             Plants
             ,
             and
             Beasts
             .
             Mettalls
             are
             (
             as
             plants
             ,
             )
             hidden
             and
             buried
             in
             the
             bowels
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             which
             have
             some
             conformitie
             in
             themselves
             ,
             in
             the
             forme
             and
             maner
             of
             their
             production
             ;
             for
             that
             wee
             see
             and
             discover
             even
             in
             them
             ,
             branches
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             a
             bodie
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             grow
             and
             proceede
             ,
             which
             
             are
             the
             greater
             veines
             and
             the
             lesse
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             have
             a
             knitting
             in
             themselves
             :
             and
             it
             seemes
             properly
             that
             these
             minerales
             grow
             like
             vnto
             plants
             ,
             not
             that
             they
             have
             any
             inward
             vegitative
             life
             ,
             being
             onely
             proper
             to
             plants
             :
             but
             they
             are
             engendered
             in
             the
             bowels
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             by
             the
             vertue
             and
             force
             of
             the
             Sunne
             and
             other
             planets
             ,
             and
             in
             long
             continuance
             of
             time
             ,
             they
             increase
             and
             multiply
             after
             the
             maner
             of
             plants
             .
             And
             even
             as
             mettalls
             be
             plants
             hidden
             in
             the
             earth
             ,
             so
             we
             may
             say
             ,
             that
             plants
             be
             living
             creatures
             fixed
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             whose
             life
             is
             maintained
             by
             the
             nourishment
             which
             Nature
             furnisheth
             from
             their
             first
             begnning
             .
             But
             living
             creatures
             surpasse
             plants
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             have
             a
             more
             perfect
             being
             ;
             and
             therefore
             have
             neede
             of
             a
             more
             perfect
             foode
             and
             nourishment
             ;
             for
             the
             search
             whereof
             ,
             Nature
             hath
             given
             them
             a
             moving
             and
             feeling
             to
             discover
             and
             discerne
             it
             .
             So
             as
             the
             rough
             and
             barren
             earth
             is
             as
             a
             substance
             and
             nutriment
             for
             mettalls
             ;
             and
             that
             which
             is
             fertile
             and
             better
             seasoned
             a
             nourishment
             for
             plants
             .
             The
             same
             plants
             serve
             as
             a
             nourishment
             for
             living
             creatures
             ,
             and
             the
             plants
             and
             living
             creatures
             together
             as
             a
             nourishment
             for
             men
             ,
             the
             inferiour
             nature
             alwaies
             serving
             for
             the
             maintenance
             and
             sustentation
             of
             the
             superiour
             ,
             and
             the
             lesse
             perfect
             yeelding
             vnto
             the
             more
             perfect
             :
             whereby
             we
             may
             see
             how
             much
             it
             wants
             ,
             that
             gold
             and
             silver
             and
             other
             things
             which
             men
             so
             much
             esteeme
             by
             their
             covetousnesse
             ,
             should
             be
             the
             happines
             of
             man
             ,
             wherevnto
             he
             should
             tend
             ,
             seeing
             they
             be
             so
             many
             degrees
             in
             qualitie
             inferior
             to
             man
             ,
             who
             hath
             been
             created
             and
             made
             onely
             to
             be
             a
             subiect
             to
             serve
             the
             vniversall
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             as
             his
             proper
             end
             and
             perfect
             rest
             ,
             and
             to
             which
             man
             ,
             all
             other
             things
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             were
             not
             propounded
             or
             left
             ,
             but
             to
             gaine
             
             this
             last
             end
             .
             Who
             so
             would
             consider
             of
             things
             created
             ,
             and
             discourse
             according
             to
             this
             Philosophie
             ,
             might
             draw
             some
             fruite
             from
             the
             knowledge
             and
             consideration
             thereof
             ,
             making
             vse
             of
             them
             to
             know
             and
             glorifie
             their
             Author
             .
             But
             he
             that
             would
             passe
             on
             farther
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             their
             properties
             and
             profits
             ,
             and
             would
             curiously
             search
             them
             out
             ,
             hee
             shall
             finde
             in
             these
             creatures
             ,
             that
             which
             the
             Wiseman
             saies
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             snares
             and
             pitfalles
             to
             the
             feete
             of
             fooles
             &
             ignorant
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             they
             fall
             and
             loose
             themselves
             daily
             .
             
             To
             this
             intent
             therefore
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Creator
             may
             be
             glorified
             in
             his
             creatures
             ,
             I
             pretend
             to
             speake
             of
             some
             things
             in
             this
             Booke
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             many
             at
             the
             Indies
             worth
             the
             report
             ,
             touching
             mettalls
             ,
             plants
             ,
             and
             beasts
             ,
             which
             are
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             in
             those
             parts
             .
             But
             for
             that
             it
             were
             a
             great
             worke
             to
             treate
             thereof
             exactly
             ,
             and
             requires
             greater
             learning
             and
             knowledge
             ;
             yea
             ,
             much
             more
             leisure
             then
             I
             have
             ,
             my
             intent
             is
             only
             to
             treate
             of
             some
             things
             succinctly
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             have
             observed
             ,
             as
             well
             by
             experience
             ,
             as
             the
             report
             of
             men
             of
             credite
             ,
             touching
             these
             three
             things
             which
             I
             have
             propounded
             ,
             leaving
             to
             men
             more
             curious
             and
             diligent
             to
             treate
             more
             amply
             of
             these
             matters
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             aboundance
             and
             great
             quantitie
             of
             Mettall
             at
             the
             West
             
               Indies
               .
               CHAP.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             wisedome
             of
             God
             hath
             made
             mettalls
             for
             phisicke
             ,
             and
             for
             defence
             ,
             for
             ornament
             and
             for
             instruments
             for
             the
             worke
             of
             men
             ,
             of
             which
             foure
             things
             we
             may
             easily
             yeelde
             examples
             ,
             but
             the
             principall
             end
             of
             mettalls
             ,
             and
             the
             last
             thereof
             ,
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             life
             of
             man
             
             hath
             not
             onely
             neede
             of
             nourishment
             as
             the
             beasts
             ,
             but
             also
             he
             must
             worke
             and
             labour
             according
             vnto
             the
             reason
             and
             capacitie
             which
             the
             Creator
             hath
             given
             him
             .
             And
             as
             mans
             vnderstanding
             doth
             apply
             it selfe
             to
             divers
             artes
             and
             faculties
             ,
             so
             the
             same
             Author
             hath
             given
             order
             ,
             that
             hee
             should
             finde
             matter
             and
             subiect
             to
             diverse
             artes
             ,
             for
             the
             conservation
             ,
             reparation
             ,
             suretie
             ,
             ornament
             and
             exaltation
             of
             his
             workes
             .
             The
             diversitie
             therefore
             of
             mettalls
             ,
             which
             the
             Creator
             hath
             shut
             vp
             in
             the
             closets
             and
             concavities
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             is
             such
             ,
             and
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             man
             drawes
             profit
             and
             commoditie
             from
             everie
             one
             of
             them
             .
             Some
             serve
             for
             curing
             of
             diseases
             ,
             others
             for
             armes
             and
             for
             defence
             against
             the
             enemies
             ,
             some
             are
             for
             ornament
             and
             beautifying
             of
             our
             persons
             and
             houses
             ,
             and
             others
             are
             fit
             to
             make
             vessels
             and
             yron-workes
             ,
             with
             divers
             fashions
             of
             instruments
             ,
             which
             the
             industry
             of
             man
             hath
             found
             out
             and
             put
             in
             practise
             .
             But
             above
             all
             the
             vses
             of
             mettalls
             ,
             which
             bee
             simple
             and
             natural
             ,
             the
             communication
             and
             commerce
             of
             men
             hath
             found
             out
             one
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             vse
             of
             money
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             as
             the
             Philosopher
             saieth
             )
             is
             the
             measure
             of
             all
             things
             .
             
             And
             although
             naturally
             ,
             and
             of
             it selfe
             ,
             it
             be
             but
             one
             onely
             thing
             ,
             yet
             in
             value
             and
             estimation
             wee
             may
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             all
             things
             .
             Mony
             is
             vnto
             vs
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             meate
             ,
             clothing
             ,
             house
             ,
             horse
             ,
             and
             generally
             whatsoever
             man
             hath
             neede
             of
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             all
             obeyes
             to
             mony
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             Wise
             man
             saith
             ,
             to
             finde
             an
             invention
             that
             one
             thing
             should
             be
             all
             .
             Men
             guided
             or
             thrust
             forward
             by
             a
             naturall
             instinct
             ,
             choose
             the
             thing
             most
             durable
             and
             most
             maniable
             ,
             which
             is
             mettall
             ,
             and
             amongst
             mettals
             ,
             gave
             them
             the
             preheminence
             in
             this
             invention
             of
             mony
             ,
             which
             of
             their
             nature
             were
             most
             durable
             and
             incorruptible
             ,
             which
             is
             silver
             and
             golde
             .
             
             The
             which
             have
             bin
             in
             esteeme
             ,
             not
             onlie
             amongst
             the
             
               Hebrewes
               Assirians
               ,
               Greekes
               ,
               Romans
               ,
            
             and
             other
             nations
             of
             Europe
             and
             Asia
             ,
             but
             also
             amongst
             the
             most
             retyred
             and
             barbarous
             nations
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             Indians
             both
             East
             and
             West
             ,
             where
             gold
             and
             silver
             is
             held
             in
             great
             esteeme
             ,
             imploying
             it
             for
             the
             workes
             of
             their
             Temples
             and
             Pallaces
             ,
             &
             for
             the
             attyring
             and
             ornament
             of
             kings
             and
             great
             personages
             .
             And
             although
             we
             have
             found
             some
             Barbarians
             ,
             which
             know
             neither
             gold
             nor
             silver
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             reported
             of
             those
             of
             Florida
             ,
             which
             tooke
             the
             bagges
             and
             sackes
             wherein
             the
             silver
             was
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             cast
             vpon
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             left
             as
             a
             thing
             vnprofitable
             .
             And
             Plinie
             likewise
             writes
             of
             the
             Babitacques
             ,
             which
             abhorred
             gold
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             buried
             it
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             no
             man
             should
             vse
             it
             .
             But
             at
             this
             day
             they
             finde
             few
             of
             these
             Floridiens
             or
             Babitacques
             ,
             but
             great
             numbers
             of
             such
             as
             esteeme
             ,
             seeke
             ,
             and
             make
             accoumpt
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             having
             no
             neede
             to
             learne
             it
             of
             those
             that
             go
             from
             Europe
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             their
             covetousnesse
             is
             not
             yet
             come
             to
             the
             height
             of
             ours
             ,
             neither
             have
             they
             so
             much
             worshipped
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             Idolaters
             ,
             as
             some
             blinde
             Christians
             ,
             who
             have
             committed
             many
             great
             out-rages
             for
             gold
             and
             silver
             .
             Yet
             is
             it
             a
             thing
             very
             worthy
             consideration
             ,
             that
             the
             wisedome
             of
             the
             Eternall
             Lord
             ,
             would
             inrich
             those
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             are
             most
             remote
             ,
             and
             which
             are
             peopled
             with
             men
             of
             lesse
             civilitie
             and
             governement
             ,
             planting
             there
             great
             store
             of
             mines
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             greatest
             aboundance
             that
             ever
             were
             ,
             thereby
             to
             invite
             men
             to
             search
             out
             those
             lands
             ,
             and
             to
             possesse
             them
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             by
             this
             occasion
             ,
             they
             might
             plant
             religion
             ,
             and
             the
             worship
             of
             the
             true
             God
             ,
             amongst
             those
             that
             knew
             it
             not
             ,
             fulfilling
             therein
             the
             prophecie
             of
             
             Isaie
             .
             
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             should
             stretch
             forth
             her
             boundes
             ,
             not
             onely
             to
             the
             right
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             the
             left
             :
             which
             is
             vnderstood
             as
             S.
             Augustine
             saieth
             ,
             that
             the
             Gospell
             should
             be
             spread
             abroad
             ,
             
             not
             onely
             by
             those
             that
             sincerely
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             true
             &
             perfect
             charity
             preach
             and
             declare
             it
             ,
             but
             also
             by
             those
             that
             publish
             it
             ,
             tending
             to
             temporall
             ends
             ;
             whereby
             wee
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             Indian
             land
             ,
             being
             more
             aboundant
             in
             mines
             and
             riches
             ,
             hath
             beene
             in
             our
             age
             best
             instructed
             in
             the
             Christian
             religion
             ,
             the
             Lord
             vsing
             our
             desires
             and
             inclinations
             to
             serve
             his
             soveraigne
             intentions
             .
             Herevpon
             a
             Wise
             man
             said
             ,
             that
             what
             a
             father
             doth
             to
             marie
             his
             daughter
             wel
             ,
             is
             to
             give
             her
             a
             great
             portion
             in
             mariage
             ;
             the
             like
             hath
             God
             done
             for
             this
             land
             so
             rough
             and
             laboursome
             ,
             giving
             it
             great
             riches
             in
             mines
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             meanes
             it
             might
             be
             the
             more
             sought
             after
             .
             At
             the
             West
             Indies
             then
             there
             are
             great
             store
             of
             mines
             of
             all
             sortes
             of
             mettalls
             ,
             as
             copper
             ,
             yron
             ,
             lead
             ,
             tinne
             ,
             quicke-silver
             ,
             silver
             and
             gold
             :
             and
             amongst
             all
             the
             regions
             and
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             realmes
             of
             Peru
             abound
             most
             in
             these
             mettalls
             ,
             especially
             with
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             quicke
             silver
             ,
             or
             mercurie
             ,
             whereof
             they
             have
             found
             great
             store
             ,
             and
             daily
             discover
             new
             mines
             .
             And
             without
             doubt
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             those
             which
             are
             to
             discover
             ,
             are
             without
             comparison
             ,
             farre
             more
             in
             number
             ,
             then
             those
             which
             are
             yet
             discovered
             :
             yea
             ,
             it
             seemes
             that
             all
             the
             land
             is
             sowed
             with
             these
             mettalls
             ,
             more
             then
             any
             other
             in
             the
             world
             that
             is
             yet
             knowne
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             or
             that
             ancient
             writers
             have
             made
             mention
             of
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             qualitie
             and
             nature
             of
             the
             earth
             where
             the
             mettalls
             are
             found
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             these
             mettalls
             are
             not
             imployed
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             them
             .
             CHAP.
             3.
             
          
           
             THe
             reason
             why
             there
             is
             so
             great
             aboundance
             of
             mettalls
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             (
             especially
             at
             the
             west
             of
             Peru
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             )
             is
             the
             will
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             who
             hath
             imparted
             his
             giftes
             as
             it
             pleased
             him
             .
             But
             comming
             to
             a
             naturall
             and
             philosophicall
             reason
             ,
             
             it
             is
             very
             true
             ,
             which
             Philon
             a
             wise
             man
             writes
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             mettalls
             ,
             grow
             naturally
             in
             land
             that
             is
             most
             barren
             and
             vnfruitefull
             .
             And
             we
             see
             ,
             that
             in
             lands
             of
             good
             temperature
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             fertile
             with
             grasse
             and
             fruites
             ,
             there
             are
             seldome
             found
             any
             mines
             ;
             for
             that
             Nature
             is
             contented
             to
             give
             them
             vigour
             to
             bring
             forth
             fruites
             more
             necessarie
             for
             the
             preservation
             and
             maintenance
             of
             the
             life
             of
             beasts
             and
             men
             .
             
             And
             contrariwise
             to
             lands
             that
             are
             very
             rough
             ,
             drie
             ,
             and
             barren
             ,
             (
             as
             in
             the
             highest
             mountains
             and
             inaccessible
             rockes
             of
             a
             rough
             temper
             ,
             )
             they
             finde
             mines
             of
             silver
             ,
             of
             quicke-silver
             and
             of
             gold
             ,
             and
             all
             those
             riches
             (
             which
             are
             come
             into
             Spaine
             since
             the
             West
             Indies
             were
             discovered
             )
             have
             been
             drawne
             out
             of
             such
             places
             which
             are
             rough
             and
             full
             ,
             bare
             and
             fruitlesse
             :
             yet
             the
             taste
             of
             this
             mony
             ,
             makes
             these
             places
             pleasing
             and
             agreeable
             ,
             yea
             ,
             well
             inhabited
             with
             numbers
             of
             people
             .
             And
             although
             there
             be
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             many
             mines
             of
             all
             kinds
             of
             mettalls
             as
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             yet
             they
             vse
             none
             but
             those
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             and
             as
             much
             quicke-silver
             as
             is
             necessarie
             to
             refine
             their
             gold
             and
             silver
             .
             They
             carrie
             yron
             thither
             from
             Spaine
             and
             China
             .
             As
             for
             copper
             ,
             the
             Indians
             have
             drawne
             
             of
             it
             ,
             and
             vsed
             it
             for
             their
             armes
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             not
             vsually
             of
             yron
             ,
             but
             of
             copper
             .
             Since
             the
             Spaniards
             possessed
             the
             Indies
             ,
             they
             have
             drawne
             very
             little
             ,
             neither
             do
             they
             take
             the
             paine
             to
             seeke
             out
             these
             mines
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             many
             busying
             themselves
             in
             the
             search
             of
             richer
             and
             more
             precious
             mettalls
             ,
             wherein
             they
             spend
             their
             time
             &
             labour
             .
             They
             vse
             no
             other
             mettalls
             ,
             as
             copper
             ,
             and
             yron
             ,
             but
             only
             that
             which
             is
             sent
             them
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             or
             that
             which
             remaines
             of
             the
             refining
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             .
             We
             finde
             not
             that
             the
             Indians
             in
             former
             times
             vsed
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             mettall
             for
             mony
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             price
             of
             things
             ,
             but
             only
             for
             ornament
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             whereof
             there
             was
             great
             quantitie
             in
             their
             Temples
             ,
             Palaces
             ,
             and
             Toombes
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             kindes
             of
             vessels
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             which
             they
             had
             .
             They
             vsed
             no
             gold
             nor
             silver
             to
             trafficke
             or
             buy
             withall
             ,
             but
             did
             change
             and
             trucke
             one
             thing
             for
             another
             ,
             as
             Homer
             and
             Plinie
             report
             of
             the
             Ancients
             .
             They
             had
             some
             other
             things
             of
             greater
             esteeme
             ,
             
             which
             went
             currant
             amongst
             them
             for
             price
             ,
             and
             in
             steede
             of
             coine
             :
             and
             vnto
             this
             day
             this
             custome
             continues
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Provinces
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             in
             steede
             of
             money
             they
             vse
             Cacao
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             a
             small
             fruite
             ,
             )
             and
             therewith
             buy
             what
             they
             will.
             In
             Peru
             they
             vse
             Cocae
             ,
             to
             the
             same
             end
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             is
             a
             leafe
             the
             Indians
             esteeme
             much
             ,
             )
             as
             in
             Paraguay
             ,
             they
             have
             stampes
             of
             yron
             for
             coine
             ,
             and
             cotten
             woven
             in
             S.
             Croix
             ,
             of
             the
             Sierre
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             maner
             of
             the
             Indians
             trafficke
             ,
             and
             their
             buying
             and
             selling
             ,
             was
             to
             exchange
             ,
             and
             give
             things
             for
             things
             :
             and
             although
             there
             were
             great
             martes
             and
             famous
             faires
             ,
             yet
             had
             they
             no
             neede
             of
             mony
             ,
             nor
             of
             brokers
             ,
             for
             that
             every
             one
             had
             learned
             what
             he
             was
             to
             give
             in
             exchange
             for
             every
             kinde
             of
             marchandise
             .
             
             Since
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             ,
             the
             Indians
             have
             vsed
             gold
             and
             silver
             to
             buy
             withall
             :
             and
             in
             the
             beginning
             there
             was
             no
             coine
             ,
             but
             silver
             by
             weight
             was
             theirprice
             and
             mony
             ,
             as
             they
             report
             of
             the
             ancient
             Romans
             .
             Since
             ,
             
             for
             a
             greater
             benefite
             ,
             they
             have
             forged
             coine
             in
             Mexico
             and
             Peru
             ,
             yet
             vnto
             this
             day
             they
             have
             not
             in
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             coined
             any
             mony
             of
             copper
             or
             other
             mettall
             but
             onely
             of
             silver
             and
             golde
             :
             for
             the
             richnes
             of
             that
             Countrie
             hath
             not
             admitted
             nor
             received
             such
             money
             as
             they
             call
             bullion
             ,
             nor
             other
             kindes
             of
             alloy
             ,
             which
             they
             vse
             in
             Italie
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             Provinces
             of
             Europe
             ;
             Although
             in
             some
             Ilands
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             S.
             Dominique
             &
             
               Port
               Ricco
            
             ,
             they
             vse
             coine
             of
             leather
             ,
             which
             is
             square
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             currant
             onely
             in
             those
             Ilands
             ,
             having
             little
             silver
             or
             gold
             .
             I
             say
             little
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             much
             ,
             for
             that
             no
             man
             digges
             it
             and
             refines
             it
             .
             But
             for
             that
             the
             riches
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             their
             maner
             to
             labour
             in
             the
             mines
             ,
             consistes
             of
             golde
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             quicke●silver
             ,
             I
             will
             speake
             some
             thing
             of
             these
             three
             mettalls
             ,
             leaving
             the
             rest
             for
             this
             time
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             golde
             which
             they
             digge
             and
             refine
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             4.
             
          
           
             GOld
             amongst
             other
             mettals
             hath
             bin
             alwayes
             held
             the
             most
             excellent
             ;
             and
             with
             reason
             ,
             beeing
             the
             most
             durable
             and
             incorruptible
             of
             all
             others
             ;
             for
             sire
             which
             consumes
             and
             diminisheth
             the
             rest
             ,
             amends
             it
             ,
             and
             brings
             it
             to
             perfection
             .
             Golde
             which
             hath
             often
             passed
             through
             the
             fire
             ,
             keepes
             his
             colour
             ,
             and
             is
             most
             fine
             and
             pure
             ;
             which
             properly
             is
             called
             (
             as
             Plinie
             saith
             )
             Obriso
             ,
             wherof
             the
             Scripture
             makes
             so
             often
             mention
             ,
             &
             
             vse
             ,
             which
             consumeth
             all
             other
             mettalles
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             same
             Plinie
             saith
             )
             dooth
             not
             any
             thing
             waste
             golde
             ,
             
             nor
             yet
             hurte
             it
             ,
             neither
             is
             it
             eaten
             ,
             nor
             groweth
             olde
             .
             And
             although
             his
             substance
             and
             body
             be
             firme
             and
             solide
             ;
             yet
             dooth
             it
             yeelde
             and
             bow
             woonderfully
             ;
             the
             Beaters
             and
             Drawers
             of
             golde
             knowe
             well
             the
             force
             it
             hath
             to
             bee
             drawen
             out
             without
             breaking
             .
             All
             which
             things
             well
             considered
             ,
             with
             other
             excellent
             properties
             ,
             will
             give
             men
             of
             iudgement
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             wherefore
             the
             holie
             Scripture
             dooth
             compare
             Charitie
             to
             golde
             .
             
             To
             conclude
             ,
             there
             is
             little
             neede
             to
             relate
             the
             excellencies
             thereof
             to
             make
             it
             more
             desirable
             .
             For
             the
             greatest
             excellencie
             it
             hath
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             knowne
             (
             as
             it
             is
             )
             amongst
             men
             ,
             for
             the
             supreame
             power
             and
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             worlde
             .
             Comming
             therefore
             to
             our
             subiect
             ;
             at
             the
             Indies
             there
             is
             great
             abundance
             of
             this
             mettall
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             wel
             knowne
             by
             approoved
             histories
             ,
             that
             the
             Inguas
             of
             Peru
             did
             not
             content
             themselves
             with
             great
             and
             small
             vessels
             of
             gold
             ,
             as
             pots
             ,
             cups
             ,
             goblets
             ,
             and
             flagons
             ;
             yea
             with
             kowles
             or
             great
             vessells
             ,
             but
             they
             had
             chaires
             also
             ,
             and
             litters
             of
             massie
             golde
             :
             and
             in
             their
             Temples
             they
             had
             set
             vppe
             maine
             Images
             of
             pure
             golde
             ,
             whereof
             they
             finde
             some
             yet
             at
             Mexico
             ,
             but
             not
             such
             store
             as
             when
             the
             first
             Conquerours
             came
             into
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             kingdome
             ,
             who
             found
             great
             treasure
             ,
             and
             without
             doubt
             there
             was
             much
             more
             hidden
             in
             th
             earth
             by
             the
             Indians
             .
             It
             would
             seeme
             ridiculous
             to
             reporte
             that
             they
             have
             made
             their
             horse
             shooes
             of
             silver
             for
             want
             of
             yron
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             have
             payd
             three
             hundred
             crownes
             for
             a
             bottle
             of
             wine
             ,
             and
             other
             strange
             things
             ;
             and
             yet
             in
             trueth
             this
             hath
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             yea
             and
             greater
             matters
             .
             They
             drawe
             golde
             in
             those
             partes
             ,
             after
             three
             sorts
             :
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             I
             have
             seene
             all
             three
             vsed
             .
             For
             eyther
             they
             find
             gold
             in
             
             graines
             ,
             in
             powlder
             ,
             or
             in
             stone
             .
             They
             do
             call
             golde
             in
             graines
             ,
             small
             morsels
             of
             gold
             ,
             which
             they
             find
             whole
             ,
             without
             mixture
             of
             any
             other
             mettall
             ,
             which
             hath
             no
             neede
             of
             melting
             or
             refining
             in
             the
             fire
             :
             and
             they
             call
             them
             pippins
             ,
             for
             that
             commonly
             they
             are
             like
             to
             pippins
             ,
             or
             seeds
             of
             melons
             ,
             or
             pompions
             :
             and
             that
             wherof
             Iob
             speakes
             ,
             when
             he
             saies
             ,
             
               Leve
               illius
               aurum
            
             ,
             
             though
             sometimes
             there
             be
             greater
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             I
             have
             seene
             weighed
             many
             poundes
             .
             It
             is
             the
             excellencie
             of
             this
             mettall
             alone
             (
             as
             Plinie
             affirmes
             )
             to
             be
             found
             thus
             pure
             and
             perfect
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             seene
             in
             any
             other
             mettalles
             ,
             
             which
             are
             alwayes
             earthly
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             scumme
             ,
             and
             neede
             purging
             by
             the
             fire
             :
             I
             have
             likewise
             seene
             silver
             naturall
             like
             to
             .
             Yea
             there
             is
             an
             other
             kinde
             which
             the
             Indians
             call
             Papas
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             they
             find
             peeces
             very
             fiue
             and
             pure
             ,
             like
             to
             small
             round
             rootes
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             rare
             in
             that
             mettall
             ,
             but
             vsuall
             in
             gold
             .
             They
             finde
             little
             of
             this
             golde
             in
             pippin
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             other
             kindes
             .
             Golde
             in
             stone
             is
             a
             veine
             of
             gold
             that
             groweth
             or
             ingendereth
             within
             the
             stone
             or
             flint
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             seene
             in
             the
             mines
             of
             Curuma
             ,
             within
             the
             government
             of
             Salines
             ,
             very
             great
             stones
             pierced
             and
             intermixed
             with
             gold
             ;
             others
             that
             were
             halfe
             gold
             ,
             and
             halfe
             stone
             .
             The
             golde
             which
             groweth
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             is
             found
             in
             pittes
             or
             mines
             ,
             which
             have
             their
             veines
             like
             to
             the
             silver
             mines
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             very
             hard
             to
             drawe
             it
             foorth
             :
             Agatarchides
             writes
             in
             his
             first
             booke
             of
             the
             Erithrean
             or
             red
             sea
             (
             as
             Phocion
             reportes
             in
             his
             Bibliotheca
             )
             of
             the
             manner
             and
             fashion
             to
             refine
             golde
             ,
             drawne
             out
             of
             stones
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             antient
             Kings
             of
             Egypt
             were
             wont
             to
             vse
             ,
             &
             it
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             to
             see
             how
             that
             which
             is
             written
             resembles
             properly
             to
             the
             manner
             they
             vse
             at
             this
             day
             in
             refining
             these
             mettalls
             of
             golde
             and
             silver
             .
             The
             greatest
             
             quantitie
             of
             golde
             which
             is
             drawne
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             is
             that
             in
             powlder
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             found
             in
             streames
             and
             places
             wher
             much
             water
             hath
             passed
             ,
             because
             the
             slouds
             at
             the
             Indies
             abound
             in
             this
             kinde
             of
             golde
             ;
             As
             the
             Ancients
             for
             this
             occasion
             did
             celebrate
             the
             river
             of
             Tagus
             in
             
               Spaine
               ,
               Pa●olus
            
             in
             Asia
             ,
             and
             Ganges
             in
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             and
             call●d
             the●
             
               R●menta
               auri
            
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             others
             call
             gol●e
             in
             p●wl●er
             ,
             and
             of
             this
             sort
             is
             the
             greatest
             quantitie
             of
             golde
             they
             have
             at
             this
             day
             .
             At
             this
             present
             in
             t●e
             ●lands
             of
             
               Barlovent
               ,
               Hispaniola
               ,
               Cuba
            
             ,
             and
             
               Port
               Ricco
            
             ,
             there
             hath
             beene
             ,
             and
             is
             great
             quantity
             in
             the
             rivers
             ,
             but
             they
             bring
             little
             from
             thence
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             the
             naturall
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             country
             ,
             &
             the
             difficultie
             to
             drawe
             it
             .
             There
             is
             great
             aboundance
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Chille
             ,
             of
             Quitto
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             new
             Realme
             of
             Grenado
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             famous
             golde
             is
             that
             of
             Caranava
             in
             Peru
             ,
             and
             of
             Valdivia
             in
             Chille
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             riseth
             with
             his
             alloy
             and
             perfection
             ,
             which
             is
             twenty
             three
             carrats
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             and
             sometim●s
             more
             .
             They
             make
             accompt
             likewise
             of
             the
             gold
             of
             Vera●●a
             to
             be
             very
             fine
             .
             They
             bring
             much
             golde
             to
             Mexico
             from
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             and
             China
             ,
             but
             commonly
             it
             is
             weake
             and
             of
             base
             alloy
             .
             Golde
             is
             commonly
             found
             mixt
             with
             silver
             or
             with
             copper
             ;
             but
             that
             which
             is
             mixed
             with
             silver
             is
             commonly
             of
             fewer
             carra●s
             then
             that
             which
             is
             mixed
             with
             copper
             .
             If
             there
             b●●a
             si●e
             part●
             of
             silver
             ,
             
             Plinie
             saieth
             ,
             it
             is
             then
             properly
             called
             Fl●●●●
             ,
             which
             hath
             the
             property
             to
             shine
             more
             at
             the
             light
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             then
             fine
             gold
             or
             fine
             silver
             .
             That
             which
             is
             incorporate
             with
             copper
             ,
             is
             commonly
             of
             a
             higher
             value
             .
             They
             refine
             powldred
             golde
             in
             basens
             ,
             washing
             it
             in
             many
             waters
             ,
             vntill
             the
             sand
             falles
             from
             it
             ,
             and
             the
             golde
             as
             most
             heavie
             remaineth
             in
             the
             bottome
             .
             
             They
             refine
             it
             likewise
             with
             quicke-silver
             and
             strong
             water
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             allume
             whereof
             they
             make
             this
             water
             hath
             the
             vertue
             to
             separate
             gold
             from
             drosse
             ,
             or
             from
             other
             mettalls
             .
             After
             it
             is
             purified
             and
             molten
             ,
             they
             make
             brickes
             or
             small
             barres
             to
             cary
             it
             vnto
             Spaine
             ;
             for
             being
             in
             powlder
             ,
             they
             cannot
             transport
             it
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             they
             can
             neither
             custome
             it
             ,
             marke
             it
             ,
             nor
             take
             say
             ,
             vntill
             it
             be
             molten
             .
             The
             foresaide
             His●●ria●
             grapher
             reporteth
             that
             Spaine
             above
             all
             other
             Countries
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             did
             abound
             in
             gold
             and
             silver
             ;
             
             especially
             Galitia
             and
             Portugall
             ,
             &
             above
             all
             ,
             the
             Asturia●s
             ,
             whence
             hee
             saieth
             they
             brought
             every
             yeere
             twenty
             thousand
             pounds
             of
             golde
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             found
             not
             so
             great
             aboundance
             in
             any
             other
             place
             .
             The
             which
             is
             confirmed
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Macabees
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             saide
             ,
             that
             amongest
             the
             great
             riches
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             
             they
             had
             in
             their
             power
             ,
             the
             golde
             and
             silver
             of
             Spaine
             .
             At
             this
             day
             the
             great
             treasure
             of
             Spaine
             comes
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             wherein
             the
             divin●
             Providence
             hath
             appoynted
             one
             Realme
             to
             serve
             another
             ,
             which
             doe
             imparte
             their
             wealth
             to
             participate
             their
             governement
             for
             the
             good
             the
             one
             of
             the
             other
             ,
             in
             communicating
             mutually
             the
             goodes
             and
             graces
             they
             doe
             inioy
             :
             wee
             can
             not
             value
             nor
             esteeme
             the
             quantitie
             of
             golde
             that
             is
             brought
             from
             the
             Indies
             ;
             but
             we
             may
             well
             say
             ,
             it
             is
             much
             more
             then
             that
             which
             〈◊〉
             reports
             was
             brought
             yeerely
             from
             Spaine
             to
             Rom●
             .
             In
             the
             fleete
             where
             I
             came
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             ye●re
             ,
             1585.
             the
             declarati●n
             of
             the
             firme
             land
             was
             of
             of
             twelve
             cassons
             or
             chests
             of
             golde
             ,
             every
             casson
             at
             the
             least
             weied
             foure
             Arobes
             ,
             that
             is
             a
             hundred
             weight
             ;
             and
             a
             thousand
             fifty
             and
             sixe
             mares
             from
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             was
             for
             the
             King
             only
             ,
             besides
             that
             which
             came
             for
             Merchants
             and
             private
             men
             being
             registred
             ;
             and
             
             much
             that
             came
             vnregistred
             .
             This
             may
             suffice
             touching
             the
             golde
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             now
             we
             will
             speake
             of
             silver
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Silver
             at
             the
             
               Indies
               .
               CHAP.
               5.
            
             
          
           
             WE
             reade
             these
             wordes
             in
             the
             Booke
             of
             
               Iob
               ,
               Siluer
               hath
               certain
               beginnings
               and
               roots
               in
               his
               veins
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               golde
               hath
               a
               setled
               place
               ,
               where
               it
               ingenders
               and
               thickens
               ,
               yron
               with
               digging
               is
               drawne
               out
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               and
               stone
               molten
               with
               heate
               is
               turned
               into
               copper
               :
            
             Hereby
             he
             wisely
             shewes
             in
             few
             words
             ,
             the
             nature
             of
             silver
             ,
             golde
             ,
             yron
             &
             copper
             .
             We
             have
             spoken
             something
             of
             the
             places
             where
             golde
             is
             ingendered
             and
             congealed
             ,
             which
             is
             either
             of
             the
             foresaide
             stones
             in
             the
             deapth
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             bowells
             of
             the
             earth
             :
             or
             in
             the
             sand
             of
             rivers
             ,
             and
             where
             brookes
             have
             runne
             ,
             or
             else
             on
             the
             toppes
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             the
             which
             golde
             in
             powlder
             runnes
             downe
             with
             the
             water
             .
             And
             this
             is
             the
             common
             opinion
             they
             holde
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             Wherevppon
             many
             of
             the
             common
             sort
             believe
             that
             the
             deluge
             (
             having
             drowned
             all
             ,
             even
             to
             the
             highest
             hills
             )
             hath
             beene
             the
             cause
             that
             at
             this
             day
             they
             finde
             this
             golde
             in
             the
             rivers
             ,
             and
             in
             places
             so
             farre
             off
             .
             Now
             we
             wil
             shew
             how
             they
             discover
             the
             mines
             of
             silver
             ,
             their
             veines
             ;
             rootes
             ,
             and
             beginnings
             whereof
             Iob
             speakes
             .
          
           
             And
             first
             I
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reason
             why
             they
             give
             silver
             the
             second
             place
             among
             all
             other
             mettalles
             ,
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             approacheth
             neerer
             to
             golde
             then
             any
             other
             ,
             being
             more
             durable
             and
             lesse
             indomaged
             by
             the
             fire
             ,
             and
             more
             maniable
             then
             any
             other
             :
             yea
             it
             passeth
             golde
             in
             brightnesse
             ,
             beauty
             and
             sound
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             cleere
             ,
             and
             agreeable
             ,
             for
             the
             colour
             is
             more
             conformable
             and
             resembling
             
             the
             light
             ,
             and
             the
             sound
             more
             percing
             ,
             more
             lively
             ,
             and
             more
             delicate
             .
             Likewise
             there
             are
             some
             places
             where
             they
             value
             silver
             more
             then
             golde
             .
             It
             is
             yet
             an
             argument
             ,
             to
             iudge
             that
             gold
             is
             more
             pretious
             rhen
             all
             other
             mettalls
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             found
             with
             greater
             difficultie
             ;
             and
             Nature
             seemes
             more
             sparing
             in
             bringing
             it
             foorth
             (
             although
             there
             be
             countries
             as
             they
             say
             of
             Chine
             )
             where
             they
             finde
             golde
             more
             easily
             then
             silver
             :
             yet
             it
             is
             more
             common
             and
             ordinarie
             ,
             to
             finde
             silver
             with
             more
             facilitie
             and
             greater
             abundance
             then
             gold
             .
             The
             Creator
             hath
             furnished
             the
             Weast
             Indies
             with
             so
             great
             a
             treasure
             of
             silver
             ,
             as
             all
             that
             which
             we
             reade
             of
             in
             antient
             Histories
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             spoken
             of
             the
             mines
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             other
             provinces
             ,
             is
             not
             comparable
             to
             that
             we
             see
             in
             those
             partes
             .
             The
             mines
             of
             silver
             are
             commonly
             found
             in
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             high
             rockes
             very
             desart
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             sometimes
             bin
             found
             in
             Plaines
             and
             Champaines
             .
             There
             are
             two
             different
             kindes
             ,
             the
             one
             they
             call
             stragling
             ,
             the
             other
             fixed
             and
             setled
             .
             The
             straggling
             ,
             are
             peeces
             of
             mettall
             found
             in
             certaine
             places
             ,
             the
             which
             drawne
             away
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             more
             found
             .
             But
             the
             fixed
             veines
             ,
             are
             those
             which
             have
             a
             continuance
             in
             depth
             and
             length
             ,
             like
             to
             great
             branches
             and
             armes
             of
             trees
             ;
             and
             when
             they
             find
             anie
             one
             of
             them
             ,
             they
             commonly
             finde
             many
             in
             the
             same
             place
             .
             The
             maner
             to
             purge
             &
             refine
             silver
             which
             the
             Indians
             have
             vsed
             ,
             was
             by
             melting
             ,
             in
             dissolving
             this
             masse
             of
             mettall
             by
             fire
             ,
             which
             casts
             the
             earthly
             drosse
             aparte
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             force
             separates
             silver
             from
             lead
             ,
             tinne
             from
             copper
             ,
             and
             other
             mettalls
             mixt
             .
             To
             this
             end
             they
             did
             build
             small
             furnaces
             in
             places
             whereas
             the
             winde
             did
             commonly
             blow
             ,
             and
             with
             wood
             and
             cole
             made
             their
             refining
             ,
             the
             which
             furnaces
             in
             Ptru
             they
             call
             Guayras
             .
             
             Since
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             ,
             besides
             this
             manner
             of
             refining
             which
             they
             vse
             to
             this
             day
             :
             they
             likewise
             refine
             silver
             with
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             draw
             more
             by
             this
             means
             then
             in
             refining
             it
             by
             fire
             .
             For
             there
             is
             some
             kind
             of
             silver
             mettall
             found
             which
             can
             by
             no
             meanes
             be
             purged
             ,
             and
             refined
             by
             fire
             ,
             but
             onely
             with
             quickesilver
             .
             But
             thi●
             kinde
             of
             mettall
             is
             commonly
             poore
             and
             weake
             ,
             the
             which
             vsually
             they
             finde
             in
             greatest
             aboundance
             .
             They
             c●l
             that
             poore
             which
             yields
             least
             silver
             ,
             and
             great
             quantitie
             of
             other
             mettall
             ,
             and
             that
             rich
             which
             yieldes
             m●st
             silver
             .
             It
             is
             strange
             to
             see
             ,
             not
             onely
             the
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             refining
             of
             mettall
             by
             fire
             ,
             and
             without
             it
             by
             quicke-silver
             ,
             but
             also
             that
             some
             of
             these
             mettalles
             ,
             which
             are
             refined
             by
             the
             fire
             ,
             can
             not
             well
             be
             molten
             with
             any
             artificiall
             winde
             ,
             as
             with
             bellowes
             ;
             but
             when
             it
             is
             kindled
             and
             blowen
             with
             the
             naturall
             ayre
             ,
             or
             naturall
             winde
             .
             The
             mettall
             of
             the
             mines
             of
             Porco
             is
             easily
             refined
             with
             bellowes
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             mines
             of
             Potozi
             cannot
             be
             molten
             with
             bellowes
             ,
             but
             only
             by
             the
             breath
             of
             their
             Guayras
             ,
             which
             are
             small
             furnaces
             vpon
             the
             sides
             of
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             built
             expresly
             where
             the
             winde
             lies
             ,
             within
             the
             which
             they
             melt
             this
             mettal
             ;
             and
             though
             it
             be
             hard
             to
             yielde
             a
             reason
             for
             this
             difference
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             most
             certaine
             and
             approoved
             by
             long
             experience
             :
             so
             as
             the
             greedie
             desire
             of
             this
             mettall
             so
             much
             valued
             amongst
             men
             ,
             hath
             made
             them
             seek
             out
             a
             thousand
             gentle
             inventions
             and
             devises
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             will
             heereafter
             make
             mention
             .
             The
             chiefe
             places
             of
             the
             Ind●●s
             from
             whence
             they
             drawe
             silver
             ,
             a●e
             N●w
             Spain●
             ,
             and
             P●ru
             ;
             but
             the
             mines
             of
             P●ru
             farre
             surpasse
             the
             rest
             ;
             and
             amongst
             all
             others
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             those
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             will
             intreate
             alittle
             at
             leasure
             ,
             being
             the
             most
             famous
             and
             remarkeable
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             mountaine
             or
             hill
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             and
             the
             discovery
             thereof
             .
             
               CHAP.
               6.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             mountaine
             or
             hill
             of
             Potozi
             so
             famous
             ,
             scituate
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             distant
             from
             the
             Equinoctiall
             towardes
             the
             South
             ,
             or
             Pole
             Antartike
             ,
             21.
             degrees
             and
             two
             thirds
             :
             so
             as
             it
             falles
             vnder
             the
             Tropicke
             ,
             bordering
             vpon
             the
             burning
             Zone
             ,
             and
             yet
             this
             region
             is
             extreamely
             cold
             ,
             yea
             ,
             more
             then
             old
             Castill
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             more
             then
             Flanders
             it selfe
             ,
             although
             by
             reason
             it
             should
             be
             hote
             or
             temperate
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             height
             and
             elevation
             of
             the
             Pole
             where
             it
             is
             seated
             .
             The
             reason
             of
             this
             so
             cold
             a
             temperature
             ,
             is
             the
             height
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             whereas
             colde
             and
             intemperate
             windes
             continually
             blow
             ,
             especially
             that
             which
             they
             call
             Thomahavi
             ,
             which
             is
             boistrous
             and
             most
             cold
             .
             It
             raines
             most
             commonly
             in
             Iune
             ,
             Iulie
             ,
             and
             August
             .
             The
             ground
             and
             soile
             of
             this
             mountaine
             is
             drie
             ,
             cold
             ,
             and
             very
             vnpleasant
             ,
             yea
             altogether
             barren
             ,
             which
             neither
             engenders
             nor
             brings
             forth
             any
             fruite
             ,
             grasse
             ,
             nor
             graine
             ;
             it
             is
             naturally
             inhabitable
             ,
             for
             the
             intemperature
             of
             the
             heaven
             ,
             and
             the
             barrennes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             But
             the
             force
             of
             silver
             ,
             which
             drawes
             vnto
             it
             the
             desire
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             hath
             peopled
             this
             mountaine
             more
             then
             any
             other
             place
             in
             all
             these
             Kingdomes
             ,
             making
             it
             so
             fruitfull
             of
             all
             kindes
             of
             meats
             ,
             as
             there
             wantes
             nothing
             that
             can
             be
             desired
             ,
             yea
             ,
             in
             great
             aboundance
             ;
             and
             although
             there
             be
             nothing
             but
             what
             is
             brought
             by
             carriage
             ,
             yet
             every
             place
             aboundes
             so
             with
             fruite
             ,
             conserves
             exquisite
             wines
             ,
             silkes
             ,
             &
             all
             other
             delicats
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             not
             inferiour
             to
             any
             other
             part
             .
             This
             mountaine
             is
             of
             colour
             darke
             red
             ,
             and
             is
             in
             forme
             pleasing
             
             at
             the
             first
             sight
             ,
             resembling
             perfectly
             the
             fashion
             of
             a
             pavilion
             ,
             or
             of
             a
             sugar
             loafe
             .
             It
             exceedes
             all
             other
             hilles
             and
             mountaines
             about
             it
             in
             height
             .
             The
             way
             whereby
             they
             ascend
             ,
             is
             very
             rough
             and
             vneven
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             go
             vpon
             horse-backe
             .
             It
             is
             round
             at
             the
             top
             ,
             &
             at
             the
             foote
             it
             hath
             a
             league
             in
             circuite
             .
             It
             containes
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             1680.
             common
             yardes
             ,
             the
             which
             reduced
             to
             the
             measure
             of
             Spanish
             leagues
             ,
             makes
             a
             quarter
             of
             a
             league
             .
             At
             the
             foote
             of
             this
             mountaine
             there
             is
             another
             small
             hill
             that
             riseth
             out
             of
             it
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             there
             hath
             beene
             sometimes
             mines
             of
             mettall
             dispearsed
             ,
             which
             were
             found
             as
             it
             were
             in
             purses
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             fixed
             or
             continued
             veines
             ;
             yet
             were
             they
             very
             rich
             ,
             though
             few
             in
             number
             .
             This
             small
             rocke
             was
             called
             by
             the
             Indians
             
               Guayna
               Potozi
            
             ,
             which
             is
             yong
             Potozi
             ;
             at
             the
             foote
             whereof
             beginnes
             the
             dwellings
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             and
             Indians
             ,
             which
             are
             come
             to
             the
             riches
             and
             worke
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             which
             dwelling
             may
             containe
             some
             two
             leagues
             in
             circuite
             ,
             and
             the
             greatest
             trafficke
             and
             commerce
             of
             all
             Peru
             is
             in
             this
             place
             .
             The
             mines
             of
             this
             mountaine
             were
             not
             digged
             nor
             discovered
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Inguas
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             Lordes
             of
             Peru
             ,
             before
             the
             Spaniardes
             entred
             ,
             although
             they
             had
             digged
             and
             opened
             the
             mines
             of
             Porco
             ,
             neere
             to
             Potozi
             ,
             distant
             onely
             sixe
             leagues
             .
             The
             reason
             might
             be
             the
             want
             of
             knowledge
             thereof
             ,
             although
             some
             do
             report
             I
             know
             not
             what
             fable
             ,
             that
             having
             sometimes
             laboured
             to
             open
             those
             mines
             ,
             a
             voyce
             was
             heard
             ,
             commaunding
             them
             not
             to
             touch
             it
             ,
             being
             reserved
             for
             others
             .
             In
             trueth
             they
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             wealth
             thereof
             ,
             till
             after
             twelve
             yeeres
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             were
             entred
             into
             Peru
             ,
             the
             discovery
             whereof
             was
             made
             in
             this
             manner
             .
          
           
           
             An
             Indian
             called
             Gualpa
             ,
             of
             the
             Nation
             of
             Chumbibilca
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             Province
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             going
             one
             day
             to
             hunt
             for
             venison
             ,
             passing
             towardes
             the
             weast
             whither
             the
             beast
             was
             fled
             ,
             he
             beg●●ne
             to
             runne
             vppe
             against
             the
             rocke
             ,
             which
             at
             that
             time
             was
             covered
             and
             planted
             with
             certaine
             trees
             ,
             they
             call
             Quinua
             ,
             and
             with
             thick
             bushes
             ,
             and
             as
             he
             strived
             to
             gette
             vp
             a
             way
             which
             was
             somewhat
             rough
             and
             vneasie
             ,
             hee
             was
             forced
             to
             lay
             holde
             vpon
             a
             braunch
             ,
             which
             issued
             from
             a
             veine
             of
             a
             silver
             mine
             (
             which
             since
             they
             have
             called
             Rich
             )
             which
             he
             pulled
             vp
             ,
             perceiving
             in
             the
             hole
             or
             roote
             thereof
             ,
             mettall
             ,
             the
             which
             hee
             knew
             to
             be
             very
             good
             ,
             by
             the
             experience
             hee
             had
             of
             the
             mines
             of
             Porco
             :
             and
             after
             finding
             vpon
             the
             ground
             ,
             certaine
             peeces
             of
             mettall
             ,
             which
             lay
             broken
             and
             dispersed
             neere
             to
             this
             veine
             ,
             being
             scarse
             well
             able
             to
             iudge
             thereof
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             colour
             was
             spoyled
             and
             changed
             by
             the
             Sunne
             and
             raine
             .
             He
             carried
             it
             to
             Porco
             to
             trie
             by
             the
             Guayras
             (
             which
             is
             the
             triall
             of
             mettall
             by
             fire
             ,
             and
             having
             thereby
             found
             the
             great
             riches
             and
             his
             happy
             fortune
             ,
             he
             secretly
             digged
             and
             drew
             mettall
             out
             of
             this
             veine
             ,
             not
             imparting
             it
             to
             any
             man
             ,
             vntil
             that
             an
             Indian
             called
             Guanca
             ,
             of
             the
             valley
             of
             Xaura
             ,
             which
             is
             vpon
             the
             bordures
             of
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Kings
             ,
             who
             remaining
             at
             Porco
             ,
             neere
             vnto
             Gualpa
             of
             Chumbibilca
             ,
             perceved
             one
             day
             that
             he
             made
             a
             refining
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             wedges
             and
             brickes
             were
             greater
             then
             such
             as
             were
             vsually
             made
             in
             those
             places
             :
             and
             also
             increasing
             in
             his
             expence
             of
             apparrell
             ,
             having
             till
             then
             lived
             but
             basely
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             the
             mettall
             his
             neighbour
             refined
             was
             different
             from
             that
             of
             Porco
             ,
             he
             thought
             to
             discover
             this
             secret
             ,
             and
             wrought
             so
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             other
             kept
             it
             as
             secret
             as
             hee
             could
             ,
             yet
             thorow
             importunitie
             he
             was
             forced
             to
             carry
             him
             vnto
             the
             
             rocke
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             having
             enioyed
             this
             rich
             treasure
             full
             two
             months
             .
             And
             then
             Gualpa
             the
             Indian
             willed
             Guanca
             for
             his
             part
             to
             take
             a
             veine
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             discovered
             neare
             to
             the
             rich
             veine
             ,
             which
             at
             this
             day
             is
             called
             the
             veine
             of
             
               Diego
               Centeno
            
             ,
             that
             was
             not
             lesse
             rich
             ,
             but
             more
             hard
             to
             digge
             and
             to
             drawe
             foorth
             ;
             and
             so
             by
             agreement
             they
             divided
             betweene
             them
             the
             richest
             rocke
             in
             the
             world
             .
             It
             chaunced
             after
             ,
             the
             Indian
             Guanca
             finding
             some
             difficulty
             to
             digge
             and
             drawe
             foorth
             his
             mettall
             ,
             being
             most
             hard
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Gualpa
             refusing
             to
             impart
             any
             of
             his
             mine
             vnto
             him
             ,
             they
             fell
             at
             debate
             ;
             so
             as
             Guanca
             of
             Xaura
             grieved
             therewith
             ,
             and
             with
             some
             other
             discontents
             ,
             discovered
             this
             secret
             vnto
             his
             maister
             called
             Villaroel
             a
             Spaniard
             ,
             who
             then
             remained
             at
             Porco
             .
             This
             Villaroel
             desirous
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             trueth
             ,
             went
             to
             Potozi
             ,
             &
             finding
             the
             riches
             his
             Yanacona
             or
             servant
             had
             discovered
             vnto
             him
             ,
             caused
             the
             Indian
             Guanca
             to
             be
             inrolled
             ,
             vndertaking
             with
             him
             the
             saide
             veine
             ,
             which
             was
             called
             Centeno
             ,
             they
             call
             it
             vndertaking
             ,
             that
             is
             as
             much
             as
             to
             note
             and
             marke
             the
             mine
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             ground
             in
             circuite
             for
             him
             ,
             which
             the
             Lawe
             graunts
             vnto
             those
             that
             discover
             any
             mine
             ,
             or
             vnto
             those
             that
             digge
             them
             :
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             having
             discovered
             them
             to
             the
             Iustice
             ,
             they
             remayned
             Lords
             of
             the
             mine
             ,
             to
             dig
             and
             drawe
             foorth
             the
             silver
             ,
             as
             being
             their
             owne
             ,
             paying
             only
             their
             duties
             vnto
             the
             King
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             fift
             parte
             .
             So
             as
             the
             first
             discovery
             and
             inregistring
             of
             the
             mines
             of
             Potozi
             was
             the
             21.
             of
             April
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             fortie
             five
             in
             the
             territorie
             of
             Porco
             ,
             by
             the
             saide
             Villaroel
             a
             Spaniard
             ,
             and
             Guan●a
             an
             Indian
             .
             Presently
             after
             they
             discovered
             another
             veine
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             veine
             of
             Tinne
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             very
             rich
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             rough
             and
             very
             painfull
             
             to
             worke
             in
             ,
             the
             mettall
             being
             as
             hard
             as
             slint
             .
             Since
             the
             thirtie
             day
             of
             August
             in
             the
             same
             yeere
             of
             a
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             forty
             and
             five
             the
             veine
             called
             Mendieta
             was
             inrolled
             ,
             and
             these
             are
             the
             foure
             principall
             veines
             of
             Potozi
             .
             They
             say
             of
             the
             rich
             veine
             ,
             the
             first
             that
             was
             discovred
             that
             the
             metall
             lay
             above
             the
             ground
             the
             height
             of
             a
             launce
             ,
             like
             vnto
             rockes
             ,
             raising
             the
             superficies
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             like
             vnto
             a
             crest
             of
             three
             hundred
             foote
             long
             ,
             and
             thirteene
             foote
             broade
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             remained
             bare
             &
             vncovered
             by
             the
             deluge
             .
             This
             veine
             having
             resisted
             the
             violence
             and
             force
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             as
             the
             hardest
             part
             .
             The
             mettall
             was
             so
             rich
             as
             it
             was
             halfe
             silver
             ,
             and
             this
             veine
             continued
             in
             his
             bounty
             fiftie
             or
             three
             score
             stades
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             height
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             then
             it
             failed
             .
             In
             this
             maner
             the
             mines
             of
             Potozi
             were
             discovered
             by
             the
             Divine
             Providence
             ,
             who
             (
             for
             the
             felicitie
             of
             Spaine
             )
             would
             have
             the
             greatest
             treasure
             that
             ever
             was
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             discovered
             ,
             at
             such
             time
             whenas
             the
             Emperour
             Charles
             the
             fift
             of
             famous
             memorie
             held
             the
             Empire
             ,
             the
             kingdomes
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             the
             Seigniorie
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             Presently
             after
             that
             ,
             the
             discoverie
             of
             Potozi
             was
             knowne
             in
             Peru
             ;
             many
             Spaniardes
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             parte
             of
             the
             Bourgeois
             of
             the
             silver
             Cittie
             ,
             which
             is
             eighteene
             leagues
             from
             Potozi
             ,
             came
             thither
             to
             take
             mines
             :
             yea
             there
             came
             many
             Indians
             from
             divers
             provinces
             ,
             especially
             tha
             GuayZadores
             of
             Porco
             ,
             so
             as
             within
             a
             short
             space
             it
             was
             the
             best
             peopled
             habitation
             of
             all
             the
             kingdome
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             treasure
             which
             is
             daily
             drawne
             from
             the
             rocke
             or
             mountaine
             of
             
               Potozi
               .
               CHAP.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             I
             Have
             often
             doubted
             ,
             if
             in
             antient
             Histories
             there
             were
             found
             any
             so
             rich
             mines
             ,
             as
             those
             we
             have
             seen
             
             in
             our
             time
             in
             Peru.
             If
             there
             were
             ever
             rich
             mines
             in
             the
             worlde
             ,
             and
             famous
             for
             this
             effect
             ,
             they
             have
             bin
             those
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             they
             of
             Cartbage
             did
             inioy
             ,
             and
             since
             ,
             the
             Romans
             ,
             the
             which
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             are
             not
             onely
             famous
             and
             esteemed
             in
             prophane
             bookes
             ,
             but
             also
             ,
             in
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             .
             Hee
             that
             maketh
             most
             particular
             mention
             of
             these
             mines
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             that
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             is
             Plinie
             ,
             
             who
             writeth
             thus
             in
             his
             naturall
             Historie
             :
             
               They
               finde
               silver
               almost
               in
               all
               provinces
               ,
               but
               that
               of
            
             Spaine
             
               is
               the
               best
               ,
               which
               growes
               and
               ingenders
               in
               a
               barren
               soile
               ,
               vppon
               mountaines
               and
               rockes
               .
               It
               is
               a
               certaine
               and
               infallible
               thing
               ,
               that
               in
               places
               where
               they
               have
               once
               discovered
               any
               of
               these
               veines
               ,
               there
               are
               others
               not
               farre
               off
               ,
               which
               is
               likewise
               found
               in
               all
               other
               mettalls
               ,
               and
               for
               this
               the
               Greekes
               ,
               in
               my
               opinion
               ,
               called
               them
               mettalls
               .
               It
               is
               strange
               that
               the
               pits
               or
               holes
               of
               these
               mines
               of
            
             Spaine
             ,
             
               the
               which
               they
               beganne
               to
               digge
               in
            
             Hannibals
             
               time
               ,
               are
               at
               this
               day
               ,
               and
               hold
               the
               names
               of
               their
               discoverers
               .
               Amongst
               these
               mines
               ,
               that
               which
            
             Bebello
             
               discovered
               ,
               which
               holdes
               his
               name
               vnto
               this
               day
               ,
               was
               very
               famous
               ;
               and
               they
               say
               it
               yeelded
               so
               great
               riches
               to
            
             Hanniball
             ,
             
               that
               ev●rie
               day
               they
               gathered
               three
               hundred
               pounds
               weight
               of
               silver
               ,
               and
               vnto
               this
               day
               they
               have
               alwaies
               continued
               labouring
               in
               this
               mine
               ,
               so
               as
               it
               is
               now
               digd
               15.
               hundred
               pases
               deep
               into
               the
               mountaine
               .
               Out
               of
               which
               pits
               ,
               notwithstanding
               the
               deapth
               ,
               the
               Gascoin●s
               that
               labour
               in
               them
               drawe
               out
               the
               water
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               worke
               with
               more
               ease
               ,
               whilest
               their
               candelles
               and
               lights
               last
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               that
               in
               such
               aboundaunce
               ,
               as
               it
               seemes
               to
               be
               a
               river
               .
            
             Hitherto
             are
             the
             woordes
             of
             Pliny
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             would
             set
             downe
             word
             by
             word
             ,
             the
             better
             to
             content
             such
             as
             know
             what
             mines
             be
             ,
             seeing
             that
             what
             is
             tried
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             was
             then
             in
             vse
             .
             And
             truely
             the
             riches
             of
             this
             mine
             of
             Hannibal
             vpon
             the
             Pirrenean
             hilles
             ,
             was
             great
             and
             famous
             ,
             which
             the
             Romans
             possessed
             ,
             having
             continued
             
             the
             worke
             even
             vnto
             Plinies
             time
             ,
             which
             was
             about
             three
             hundred
             yeeres
             .
             The
             deapth
             of
             this
             mine
             was
             fifteene
             hundred
             pases
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             mile
             and
             a
             halfe
             :
             and
             it
             was
             so
             rich
             in
             the
             beginning
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             woorth
             daily
             to
             the
             maister
             thereof
             three
             hundred
             poundes
             ,
             at
             twelve
             ounces
             to
             the
             pound
             .
             But
             although
             this
             were
             a
             great
             treasure
             ,
             it
             did
             not
             approach
             neere
             to
             that
             which
             in
             our
             time
             hath
             bin
             found
             in
             Potozi
             :
             for
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             Registers
             of
             the
             house
             of
             contraction
             of
             that
             Province
             ,
             and
             as
             many
             antient
             men
             worthy
             of
             credite
             doe
             testifie
             ,
             whenas
             the
             licentiate
             Pollo
             governed
             that
             Province
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             many
             yeeres
             after
             the
             discovery
             of
             this
             mountaine
             ,
             they
             did
             every
             saterday
             enter
             a
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             and
             twoo
             hundred
             thousand
             peeces
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Kings
             fift
             amounted
             to
             thirty
             and
             forty
             thousand
             peeces
             ;
             and
             for
             every
             yeere
             a
             million
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             or
             little
             lesse
             .
             So
             as
             according
             to
             that
             computation
             they
             didde
             drawe
             every
             day
             from
             this
             mine
             thirtie
             thousand
             peeces
             ,
             
             whereof
             there
             came
             to
             the
             King
             for
             his
             fift
             ,
             sixe
             thousand
             peeces
             a
             day
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             yet
             another
             thing
             to
             be
             spoken
             of
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             riches
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             that
             the
             account
             which
             hath
             been
             made
             ,
             was
             only
             of
             silver
             that
             was
             marked
             and
             customed
             .
             And
             it
             is
             wel
             knowne
             in
             Peru
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             long
             vsed
             silver
             in
             these
             Realmes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             currant
             ,
             which
             was
             neither
             marked
             nor
             customed
             .
             And
             they
             holde
             it
             for
             certain
             which
             know
             these
             mines
             ,
             that
             in
             these
             daies
             ,
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             silver
             drawne
             at
             Potozi
             ,
             was
             not
             customed
             ,
             and
             this
             had
             course
             amongest
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             much
             amongst
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             seene
             continued
             to
             mytime
             ;
             so
             as
             it
             may
             appeare
             ,
             the
             third
             part
             of
             the
             riches
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             yea
             the
             one
             halfe
             came
             not
             to
             light
             ,
             neither
             was
             it
             customed
             .
             There
             is
             yet
             a
             more
             notable
             
             consideration
             ,
             in
             that
             which
             Plinie
             saieth
             ,
             they
             hadde
             digged
             a
             fifteene
             hundred
             pases
             in
             this
             mine
             of
             Bebell●
             ;
             and
             that
             continually
             they
             found
             water
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             hinderaunce
             they
             have
             to
             drawe
             foorth
             theyr
             mettall
             .
             But
             in
             this
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             digged
             two
             hundred
             stades
             or
             heights
             of
             a
             man
             in
             deapth
             ;
             yet
             did
             they
             never
             finde
             any
             water
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             happinesse
             of
             this
             mountaine
             .
             But
             the
             mines
             of
             P●r●o
             ,
             whose
             mettall
             is
             good
             and
             very
             rich
             ,
             are
             at
             this
             day
             left
             for
             the
             discommoditie
             of
             water
             ,
             which
             they
             have
             found
             in
             their
             worke
             ;
             for
             they
             are
             two
             insupportable
             labours
             in
             searching
             of
             the
             mettall
             ;
             first
             to
             digge
             and
             breake
             the
             rockes
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             drawe
             out
             the
             water
             all
             together
             .
             The
             first
             of
             them
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             to
             cut
             through
             the
             rockes
             ,
             is
             paine
             enough
             ;
             yea
             very
             hard
             and
             excessive
             :
             finally
             ,
             at
             this
             day
             the
             King
             receives
             for
             his
             fift
             yeerely
             ,
             from
             the
             mines
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             a
             million
             of
             silver
             ,
             besides
             the
             wealth
             that
             growes
             by
             quickesilver
             ,
             and
             other
             royall
             prerogatives
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             great
             treasure
             .
             Some
             men
             of
             iudgement
             having
             cast
             vp
             the
             accomptes
             ,
             say
             ,
             that
             what
             hath
             beene
             brought
             into
             the
             custome
             house
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             vnto
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             and
             five
             ,
             amounteth
             vnto
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             millions
             of
             peeces
             of
             essay
             ,
             whereof
             every
             Peece
             is
             woorth
             thirteene
             rialls
             ,
             and
             a
             fourth
             parte
             ,
             not
             reckoning
             the
             silver
             which
             hath
             bin
             caried
             away
             without
             custome
             ,
             or
             that
             hath
             beene
             entred
             in
             other
             roiall
             custome
             houses
             ,
             or
             the
             silver
             that
             hath
             beene
             wrought
             in
             the
             country
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             entred
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             innumerable
             ,
             although
             the
             first
             Registers
             of
             Entries
             are
             not
             so
             exactly
             kept
             as
             at
             this
             day
             ;
             for
             that
             in
             the
             beginning
             and
             first
             discoveries
             ,
             they
             made
             their
             receit
             by
             Romans
             ,
             so
             great
             was
             their
             aboundance
             .
          
           
           
             But
             by
             the
             instructions
             and
             remembraunces
             of
             
               Don
               Francisco
               de
               Toledo
            
             the
             Viceroy
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Saviour
             Christ
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             seaventy
             and
             foure
             they
             find
             seventy
             and
             sixe
             millions
             to
             that
             yeere
             :
             and
             from
             that
             yeare
             to
             eighty
             five
             inclusive
             ,
             it
             appeares
             by
             the
             royall
             registers
             ,
             there
             were
             thirty
             five
             millions
             more
             entred
             .
             They
             sent
             this
             accompt
             to
             the
             Viceroy
             from
             Potozi
             ,
             in
             the
             yeere
             I
             have
             mentioned
             ,
             being
             then
             in
             Peru
             ;
             and
             since
             the
             wealth
             that
             hath
             come
             from
             Peru
             by
             ship
             ,
             hath
             amounted
             to
             much
             more
             .
             In
             that
             fleete
             where
             I
             came
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             seaven
             ,
             there
             were
             eleven
             millions
             transported
             in
             the
             two
             fleets
             of
             Peru
             &
             Mexico
             ,
             whereof
             two
             thirds
             were
             in
             that
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             almost
             the
             one
             halfe
             for
             the
             King.
             I
             thought
             good
             to
             set
             this
             downe
             particularly
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             power
             which
             his
             heavenly
             Maiestie
             hath
             given
             to
             the
             Kings
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             heaping
             so
             many
             Crowns
             and
             Kingdomes
             vpon
             them
             ,
             who
             (
             by
             the
             especiall
             favour
             of
             heaven
             )
             have
             ioyned
             the
             East
             with
             the
             Weast
             Indies
             ,
             invironing
             the
             whole
             worlde
             with
             their
             Power
             .
             This
             digression
             shall
             serve
             to
             shew
             the
             riches
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             we
             will
             now
             shew
             how
             they
             labour
             in
             the
             mines
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             refine
             their
             mettalls
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             they
             labour
             in
             the
             mines
             of
             Potozi
             .
             CHAP.
             8.
             
          
           
             BOctius
             complaining
             of
             the
             first
             inventer
             of
             mines
             ,
             
             spake
             well
             ;
             
               
                 Heus
                 primus
                 quis
                 fuit
                 ille
                 ,
              
               
                 Auri
                 qui
                 ponder
                 a
                 testi
                 .
              
               
                 Gemmasque
                 ,
                 latere
                 volentes
                 ,
              
               
                 Preciosa
                 pericula
                 fodit
                 ?
              
            
             
               
               
                 Alas
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 the
                 first
                 ,
              
               
                 So
                 curious
                 and
                 accurst
                 ,
              
               
                 Who
                 digged
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 mine
                 ,
              
               
                 Mans
                 minde
                 to
                 vndermind
                 ,
              
               
                 Heavie
                 weights
                 of
                 golde
                 ore
                 ,
              
               
                 Better
                 concealde
                 before
                 :
              
               
                 And
                 pearle
                 crept
                 into
                 ground
                 ,
              
               
                 Pale
                 for
                 feare
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 :
              
               
                 Galing
                 gold
                 ,
                 wringing
                 rings
                 ,
              
               
                 Precious
                 ,
                 but
                 perilous
                 things
                 .
              
            
          
           
             With
             reason
             he
             calleth
             them
             precious
             dangers
             ,
             
             for
             the
             great
             labour
             and
             perill
             wherewith
             they
             draw
             out
             these
             mettalls
             ,
             which
             men
             so
             much
             esteeme
             .
             Plinie
             saies
             ,
             that
             in
             Italie
             there
             are
             many
             mines
             ,
             but
             the
             Ancients
             would
             not
             suffer
             their
             people
             to
             worke
             in
             them
             ,
             onely
             to
             preserve
             the
             people
             .
             They
             brought
             these
             mettalls
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             made
             the
             Spaniards
             labour
             in
             the
             mines
             as
             tributaries
             .
             The
             like
             doth
             Spaine
             now
             with
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             there
             remaining
             many
             mines
             of
             mettall
             yet
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             they
             will
             not
             seeke
             them
             ,
             nor
             suffer
             any
             to
             worke
             in
             them
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             inconveniencies
             which
             happen
             daily
             ,
             but
             they
             bring
             them
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             where
             they
             digge
             it
             with
             much
             labour
             and
             perill
             .
             This
             rocke
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             containes
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             foure
             principall
             veines
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Rich
             veine
             ,
             that
             of
             Centeno
             ,
             that
             of
             Tinne
             ,
             
             and
             that
             of
             Mendieta
             .
             All
             these
             veines
             are
             of
             the
             East
             part
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             as
             looking
             to
             the
             Sunne
             rising
             ,
             for
             on
             the
             West
             part
             there
             is
             not
             any
             .
             The
             foresaid
             veines
             runne
             from
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             Pole
             to
             Pole.
             In
             the
             largest
             place
             they
             have
             six
             foote
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             narrowest
             a
             spanne
             bredth
             .
             There
             are
             others
             of
             divers
             fashions
             that
             runne
             out
             of
             the
             said
             veines
             ;
             like
             as
             out
             of
             the
             great
             armes
             of
             trees
             ,
             there
             commonly
             
             sprowt
             foorth
             lesse
             .
             ●verie
             veine
             hath
             divers
             mines
             which
             are
             partes
             and
             portions
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             distinct
             and
             divided
             betwixt
             divers
             Masters
             ,
             by
             whose
             names
             they
             are
             commonly
             called
             .
             The
             great
             mine
             containes
             fourescore
             yardes
             ,
             neither
             may
             it
             be
             more
             by
             the
             law
             ,
             and
             the
             least
             containes
             foure
             .
             All
             these
             mines
             are
             at
             this
             day
             very
             deepe
             .
             In
             the
             rich
             mine
             they
             reckon
             78.
             mines
             ,
             which
             are
             80.
             yards
             deep
             ,
             or
             a
             hundred
             stades
             or
             height
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             two
             hundred
             .
             In
             the
             veine
             of
             Centeno
             ,
             are
             24.
             mines
             ,
             whereof
             some
             are
             70.
             or
             80.
             stades
             deepe
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             the
             other
             veines
             of
             this
             mountaine
             .
             For
             a
             remedie
             to
             this
             great
             profunditie
             ,
             they
             have
             invented
             mines
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Socca
               bones
            
             ,
             which
             are
             caves
             or
             ventes
             made
             at
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             the
             which
             go
             crossing
             til
             they
             incounter
             with
             the
             veines
             :
             for
             wee
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             veines
             runne
             North
             to
             South
             ,
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             in
             declining
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             as
             they
             beleeve
             by
             coniecture
             ,
             above
             twelve
             hundred
             stades
             .
             And
             by
             this
             account
             ,
             although
             the
             mines
             extend
             in
             such
             a
             profunditie
             ,
             yet
             there
             remaines
             six
             times
             as
             much
             space
             vnto
             the
             bottome
             or
             roote
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             say
             ,
             are
             most
             rich
             and
             aboundant
             ,
             as
             the
             body
             and
             spring
             of
             all
             veines
             .
             Although
             vnto
             this
             day
             we
             have
             seene
             the
             contrary
             by
             experience
             ,
             for
             the
             higher
             the
             veine
             is
             to
             the
             superficies
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             the
             more
             rich
             they
             finde
             it
             :
             and
             the
             deeper
             it
             goes
             ,
             the
             poorer
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             baser
             aloy
             .
             They
             then
             invented
             the
             Soccabons
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             enter
             to
             worke
             in
             the
             mines
             very
             easily
             ,
             with
             lesse
             charge
             ,
             paine
             ,
             and
             danger
             .
             They
             have
             eight
             foote
             in
             breadth
             ,
             and
             a
             stade
             in
             height
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             shut
             with
             doores
             .
             By
             them
             they
             drawe
             forth
             their
             mettall
             very
             easily
             ,
             
             paying
             to
             the
             proprietary
             of
             the
             Soccabon
             ,
             the
             fift
             part
             of
             all
             the
             mettall
             they
             draw
             forth
             .
             There
             are
             nine
             already
             made
             ,
             and
             others
             are
             begunne
             .
             They
             were
             twenty
             and
             nine
             yeeres
             in
             making
             of
             one
             Soccabon
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             of
             the
             venome
             that
             flowes
             from
             the
             rich
             veine
             .
             It
             was
             begunne
             in
             the
             yeere
             1550.
             the
             eleventh
             yeere
             of
             the
             discoverie
             ,
             and
             was
             ended
             in
             the
             yeere
             1585.
             the
             eleventh
             of
             August
             .
             This
             Soccabon
             crossed
             the
             rich
             veine
             thirtie
             five
             stades
             from
             the
             roote
             or
             spring
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             where
             it
             met
             to
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             mine
             ,
             were
             a
             hundred
             thirty
             five
             stades
             .
             So
             as
             they
             must
             descend
             all
             this
             depth
             to
             labour
             in
             the
             mine
             .
             This
             Soccabon
             containes
             from
             his
             mouth
             vnto
             the
             veine
             of
             Crusero
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             250.
             yardes
             ,
             in
             which
             worke
             were
             spent
             twentie
             nine
             yeeres
             ,
             whereby
             wee
             may
             see
             what
             great
             paines
             men
             take
             to
             draw
             silver
             out
             of
             the
             bowells
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             They
             labour
             in
             these
             mines
             in
             continuall
             darkenes
             and
             obscuritie
             ,
             without
             knowledge
             of
             day
             or
             night
             .
             And
             forasmuch
             as
             those
             places
             are
             never
             visited
             with
             the
             Sunne
             ;
             there
             is
             not
             onely
             continuall
             darkenes
             ,
             but
             also
             an
             extreame
             colde
             ,
             with
             so
             grosse
             an
             aire
             contrary
             to
             the
             disposition
             of
             man
             ,
             so
             as
             ,
             such
             as
             newly
             enter
             ,
             are
             sicke
             ,
             as
             they
             at
             sea
             .
             The
             which
             happened
             to
             me
             in
             one
             of
             these
             mines
             ,
             where
             I
             felt
             a
             paine
             at
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             beating
             of
             the
             stomacke
             .
             Those
             that
             labour
             therein
             ,
             vse
             candles
             to
             light
             them
             ,
             dividing
             their
             worke
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             they
             that
             worke
             in
             the
             day
             ,
             rest
             by
             the
             night
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             change
             .
             The
             mettall
             is
             commonly
             hard
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             breake
             it
             with
             hammers
             ,
             splitting
             and
             hewing
             it
             by
             force
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             s●intes
             .
             After
             they
             carry
             vp
             this
             mettall
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             by
             ladders
             of
             three
             branches
             ,
             made
             of
             neates
             lether
             twisted
             like
             peeces
             of
             wood
             ,
             which
             are
             crossed
             with
             staves
             of
             
             wood
             ;
             so
             as
             by
             every
             one
             of
             these
             ladders
             they
             mount
             and
             discend
             together
             .
             They
             are
             ten
             stades
             long
             a
             peece
             :
             and
             at
             the
             end
             of
             one
             ,
             beginnes
             another
             of
             the
             same
             length
             ,
             every
             ladder
             beginning
             and
             ending
             at
             platformes
             of
             wood
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             seates
             to
             rest
             them
             ,
             like
             vnto
             galleries
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             are
             many
             of
             these
             ladders
             to
             mount
             by
             one
             at
             the
             end
             of
             another
             .
             A
             man
             carries
             ordinarily
             the
             weight
             of
             two
             Arrobes
             of
             mettall
             vpon
             his
             shoulders
             ,
             
             tied
             together
             in
             a
             cloth
             in
             maner
             of
             a
             skippe
             ,
             and
             so
             mount
             they
             three
             and
             three
             .
             He
             that
             goes
             before
             carries
             a
             candle
             tied
             to
             his
             thumbe
             :
             for
             (
             as
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             )
             they
             have
             no
             light
             from
             heaven
             ,
             and
             so
             go
             they
             vp
             the
             ladder
             holding
             it
             with
             both
             their
             handes
             ,
             to
             mount
             so
             great
             a
             height
             ,
             which
             commonly
             is
             above
             a
             hundred
             &
             fiftie
             stades
             :
             a
             fearefull
             thing
             ,
             and
             which
             breeds
             an
             amazement
             to
             thinke
             vpon
             it
             ,
             so
             great
             is
             the
             desire
             of
             silver
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             gaine
             thereof
             ,
             men
             indure
             any
             paines
             .
             And
             truly
             it
             is
             not
             without
             reason
             ,
             that
             Plinie
             treating
             of
             this
             subiect
             ,
             exclaimes
             and
             saies
             thus
             ,
             
               We
               enter
               even
               into
               the
               bowells
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               go
               hunting
               after
               riches
               ,
               even
               to
               the
               place
               of
               the
               damned
               .
            
             And
             after
             in
             the
             same
             booke
             he
             saieth
             :
             Those
             that
             seeke
             for
             mettalls
             ,
             performe
             workes
             more
             then
             Giants
             ,
             making
             holes
             and
             caves
             in
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             piercing
             mountaines
             so
             deepe
             by
             the
             light
             of
             candles
             ,
             whereas
             the
             day
             and
             the
             night
             are
             alike
             ,
             and
             in
             many
             moneths
             they
             see
             no
             day
             .
             So
             as
             ,
             often
             the
             walles
             of
             their
             mines
             fal
             ,
             smothering
             many
             of
             them
             that
             labour
             therein
             .
             And
             afterwardes
             he
             addes
             ,
             
               They
               pierce
               the
               hard
               rocke
               with
               hammers
               of
               yron
               ,
               waying
            
             150
             
               poundes
               ,
               and
               draw
               out
               the
               mettall
               vpon
               their
               shoulders
               ,
               labouring
               day
               and
               night
               ,
               one
               delivering
               his
               charge
               to
               another
               ,
               and
               all
               in
               darkenes
               ,
               onely
               the
               last
               sees
               the
               light
               :
               with
               wedges
               and
               hammers
               they
               breake
               
               the
               flintes
               ,
               how
               hard
               and
               strong
               soever
               ,
               for
               the
               hunger
               of
               gold
               is
               yet
               more
               sharpe
               and
               strong
               .
            
             This
             Plinie
             saies
             ,
             who
             although
             he
             speakes
             as
             a
             historiographer
             of
             that
             age
             ,
             yet
             doth
             he
             seeme
             to
             prophecie
             of
             this
             time
             .
             Neither
             is
             it
             lesse
             which
             Phocion
             of
             Agatharchides
             reports
             of
             the
             great
             travell
             they
             indure
             ,
             whom
             they
             called
             Chrysios
             ,
             in
             drawing
             out
             of
             golde
             :
             for
             as
             the
             said
             Author
             saieth
             ,
             gold
             and
             silver
             are
             as
             painefull
             to
             digge
             and
             drawe
             forth
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             pleasing
             to
             possesse
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             they
             refine
             the
             Mettall
             of
             Silver
             
               CHAP.
               9.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Veines
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             where
             they
             finde
             silver
             ,
             runnes
             betwixt
             two
             rockes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Chase
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             is
             commonly
             as
             hard
             as
             flint
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             soft
             and
             easie
             to
             breake
             .
             This
             mettall
             is
             not
             alwaies
             equal
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             same
             bountie
             ,
             for
             you
             shall
             finde
             in
             one
             and
             the
             same
             veine
             ,
             one
             sort
             of
             mettall
             very
             rich
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             C●cilla
             ,
             or
             Tacana
             ,
             from
             which
             they
             draw
             much
             silver
             ;
             and
             another
             is
             poore
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             draw
             little
             .
             The
             most
             rich
             mettall
             of
             this
             mountaine
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             Amber
             ,
             and
             the
             next
             is
             that
             which
             inclines
             to
             blacke
             .
             There
             is
             other
             somewhat
             red
             ,
             and
             other
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             ashes
             :
             finally
             of
             divers
             and
             sundrie
             coloures
             ,
             which
             seeme
             to
             such
             as
             know
             them
             not
             ,
             to
             be
             stones
             of
             no
             value
             .
             But
             the
             miners
             do
             presently
             know
             his
             qualitie
             and
             perfection
             ,
             by
             certaine
             signes
             and
             small
             veines
             they
             finde
             in
             them
             .
             They
             carry
             all
             this
             mettall
             they
             drawe
             out
             of
             these
             mines
             ,
             vpon
             Indian
             sheepe
             ,
             which
             serve
             them
             as
             Asses
             to
             carry
             it
             to
             the
             milles
             ,
             the
             richest
             mettall
             is
             refined
             by
             melting
             in
             those
             small
             furnaces
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Guayra●
             ,
             for
             that
             is
             most
             leadie
             ;
             by
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             it
             is
             most
             
             subiect
             to
             melt
             ,
             &
             for
             the
             better
             melting
             therof
             ,
             th'
             Indians
             cast
             in
             a
             matter
             ,
             they
             call
             Soroche
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             mettal
             ful
             of
             lead
             .
             The
             mettal
             being
             in
             these
             furnaces
             ,
             the
             filth
             and
             earthie
             drosse
             ,
             through
             the
             force
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             remaines
             in
             the
             bottome
             ,
             and
             the
             silver
             and
             lead
             melt
             ;
             so
             as
             the
             silver
             swimmes
             vpon
             the
             lead
             ,
             vntill
             it
             be
             purified
             ;
             then
             after
             they
             refine
             the
             silver
             many
             times
             ,
             after
             this
             maner
             of
             melting
             .
             They
             have
             vsually
             drawne
             out
             of
             one
             quintall
             of
             mettall
             ,
             thirtie
             ,
             fortie
             ,
             and
             fiftie
             peeces
             of
             silver
             ,
             and
             yet
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             most
             excellent
             ,
             that
             have
             bin
             shewne
             me
             ,
             where
             they
             have
             drawne
             in
             the
             melting
             two
             hundred
             ,
             yea
             ,
             two
             hundred
             and
             fiftie
             peeces
             of
             silver
             of
             a
             quintall
             of
             mettall
             ;
             a
             rare
             wealth
             ,
             and
             almost
             incredible
             ,
             if
             we
             had
             not
             seene
             the
             tryall
             thereof
             by
             fire
             ,
             but
             such
             mettalls
             are
             verie
             rare
             .
             The
             poorest
             mettall
             is
             that
             which
             yeeldes
             two
             ,
             three
             ,
             five
             ,
             or
             six
             peeces
             ,
             or
             little
             more
             .
             This
             mettall
             hath
             commonly
             little
             lead
             ,
             but
             is
             drie
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             cannot
             refine
             it
             with
             fire
             .
             And
             for
             this
             reason
             in
             Potozi
             ,
             there
             was
             great
             store
             of
             these
             poore
             mettalls
             ,
             whereof
             they
             made
             no
             great
             account
             ,
             but
             were
             reiected
             like
             straw
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             skumme
             of
             the
             good
             mettall
             ,
             vntill
             they
             found
             meanes
             to
             refine
             it
             by
             quicke-silver
             ,
             whereby
             the
             skumme
             they
             called
             Oquiache
             was
             of
             great
             profit
             ,
             for
             the
             quicke-silver
             by
             a
             strange
             and
             wonderfull
             propertie
             ,
             purifies
             the
             silver
             ,
             and
             is
             apt
             for
             these
             mettalls
             which
             are
             drie
             and
             poore
             ,
             wherein
             they
             consume
             lesse
             quicke-silver
             then
             in
             the
             richer
             :
             for
             the
             richer
             they
             are
             ,
             the
             more
             neede
             of
             quicke-silver
             they
             have
             .
             At
             this
             day
             the
             most
             vsuall
             maner
             of
             refining
             in
             Potozi
             ,
             is
             by
             quicke-silver
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             the
             mines
             of
             Cacatecas
             ,
             and
             others
             of
             new
             Spaine
             .
             There
             were
             in
             old
             time
             vpon
             the
             sides
             and
             toppes
             of
             Potozi
             ,
             above
             six
             thousand
             Guayras
             ,
             which
             
             are
             small
             furnaces
             where
             they
             melt
             their
             mettall
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             placed
             like
             lightes
             ,
             (
             a
             pleasant
             sight
             to
             behold
             by
             night
             ,
             )
             casting
             a
             light
             a
             farre
             off
             like
             a
             flame
             of
             fire
             .
             But
             at
             this
             day
             there
             are
             not
             above
             two
             thousand
             ,
             for
             that
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             )
             they
             vse
             little
             melting
             ,
             but
             refine
             it
             by
             quicke-silver
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             profit
             .
             And
             for
             that
             the
             properties
             of
             quicke-silver
             are
             admirable
             ;
             and
             that
             this
             maner
             of
             refining
             of
             silver
             is
             remarkable
             ,
             I
             will
             discourse
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             of
             the
             mines
             and
             worke
             ,
             and
             what
             is
             requisite
             for
             that
             subiect
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             wonderfull
             properties
             of
             Quicke-silver
             .
             CHAP.
             10.
             
          
           
             QVickesilver
             ,
             so
             called
             by
             the
             Latines
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             runnes
             and
             slides
             suddenly
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             amongst
             all
             other
             mettalls
             hath
             great
             and
             wonderfull
             vertues
             .
             The
             first
             is
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             a
             true
             mettall
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             hard
             ,
             neither
             hath
             it
             any
             certaine
             forme
             nor
             subsistance
             like
             to
             other
             mettalls
             ,
             but
             is
             liquide
             ,
             not
             like
             vnto
             gold
             and
             silver
             molten
             ,
             but
             of
             his
             owne
             proper
             nature
             ;
             and
             although
             it
             be
             a
             liquor
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             more
             heavie
             then
             any
             other
             mettall
             :
             and
             therefore
             all
             others
             swim
             above
             and
             sinke
             not
             to
             the
             bottome
             ,
             being
             more
             light
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             two
             poundes
             of
             yron
             put
             into
             a
             barrell
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             the
             which
             did
             swimme
             about
             like
             vnto
             wood
             or
             corke
             vpon
             the
             water
             .
             
             Plinie
             gives
             an
             exception
             heerevnto
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             gold
             alone
             doth
             sinke
             and
             not
             swimme
             above
             it
             .
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             the
             experience
             ;
             but
             it
             may
             be
             this
             growes
             ,
             by
             reason
             that
             quicke-silver
             by
             nature
             doth
             inviron
             gold
             ,
             and
             covers
             it
             ,
             which
             is
             one
             of
             the
             most
             important
             properties
             it
             hath
             ;
             for
             it
             
             ioynes
             with
             gold
             in
             a
             strange
             maner
             ,
             it
             seekes
             it
             where
             it
             lies
             ,
             and
             invirons
             it
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             distinguish
             and
             sep●rate
             it
             from
             any
             other
             body
             or
             mettall
             wherewith
             it
             is
             mixt
             :
             for
             this
             reason
             such
             take
             gold
             as
             will
             preserve
             themselves
             from
             the
             dangerrs
             and
             discommodities
             of
             quicke-silver
             .
             They
             have
             vsed
             a
             remedie
             to
             those
             (
             in
             whose
             eares
             they
             had
             put
             quicke-silver
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             to
             die
             secretly
             ,
             )
             to
             put
             little
             plates
             of
             gold
             into
             their
             eares
             ,
             (
             for
             that
             gold
             hath
             the
             vertue
             to
             draw
             out
             Mercurie
             ,
             )
             and
             after
             they
             drew
             out
             thefe
             plates
             all
             white
             with
             the
             quicke-silver
             ,
             it
             did
             sticke
             vnto
             them
             .
             Being
             one
             day
             at
             Madril
             ,
             I
             went
             to
             see
             the
             exquisite
             workes
             which
             
               Iacomo
               de
               Treco
            
             ,
             (
             a
             rare
             worke
             man
             of
             Milan
             ,
             )
             made
             for
             S.
             Laurence
             the
             Roiall
             ,
             it
             was
             my
             hap
             to
             be
             there
             one
             day
             ,
             whenas
             they
             gilded
             certaine
             peeces
             of
             a
             countertable
             of
             brasse
             ,
             which
             is
             done
             with
             quicke-silver
             ;
             and
             for
             that
             the
             fume
             of
             Mercurie
             is
             mortall
             ,
             he
             told
             me
             that
             the
             worke-men
             preserved
             themselves
             from
             this
             venome
             ,
             by
             swallowing
             a
             double
             duckat
             of
             gold
             roled
             vp
             ;
             the
             which
             being
             in
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             drawes
             vnto
             it
             all
             the
             quicke-silver
             that
             enters
             in
             fume
             by
             the
             eares
             ,
             eyes
             ,
             nostrilles
             ,
             and
             mouth
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             freed
             themselves
             from
             the
             danger
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             which
             the
             gold
             gathered
             in
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             and
             after
             cast
             out
             by
             the
             excrements
             :
             a
             thing
             truly
             worthy
             of
             admiration
             .
             After
             the
             quicke-silver
             hath
             purified
             and
             purged
             gold
             from
             all
             other
             mettalls
             and
             mixtures
             ,
             he
             is
             likewise
             seperated
             from
             the
             golde
             his
             friend
             by
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             the
             which
             purifies
             it
             from
             all
             quicke-silver
             .
             Plinie
             saies
             ,
             
             that
             by
             a
             certaine
             art
             and
             invention
             they
             did
             seperate
             gold
             from
             quicke-silver
             .
             It
             seemes
             to
             me
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             knowledge
             to
             refine
             silver
             by
             quicke-silver
             ,
             which
             at
             this
             day
             is
             the
             greatest
             vse
             ,
             and
             
             chiefe
             profite
             of
             quickesilver
             ;
             for
             that
             he
             saies
             plainely
             ,
             that
             quickesilver
             ioynes
             with
             no
             other
             mettall
             but
             with
             gold
             ;
             and
             when
             he
             makes
             mention
             of
             refining
             of
             silver
             ,
             he
             speakes
             onely
             but
             of
             the
             manner
             of
             melting
             ;
             whereby
             wee
             may
             inferre
             that
             the
             Ancients
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             this
             secret
             .
             In
             truth
             ,
             though
             there
             be
             a
             league
             and
             simpathie
             betwixt
             golde
             and
             quicke-silver
             ,
             yet
             whereas
             the
             mercurie
             findes
             no
             gold
             ,
             it
             ioynes
             with
             silver
             ,
             though
             not
             in
             the
             like
             maner
             as
             with
             gold
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             it
             doth
             clense
             and
             purge
             it
             from
             earth
             ,
             copper
             ,
             &
             lead
             ,
             amongst
             the
             which
             the
             silver
             growes
             ,
             without
             any
             neede
             of
             fire
             to
             melt
             it
             :
             yet
             must
             they
             vse
             fire
             to
             seperate
             it
             from
             the
             silver
             ,
             as
             I
             will
             shew
             hereafter
             .
             Quick-silver
             holds
             no
             account
             of
             other
             mettalls
             ,
             but
             of
             golde
             and
             silver
             ;
             but
             contrariwise
             it
             doth
             corrupt
             them
             ,
             force
             and
             consume
             them
             ,
             and
             flieth
             from
             them
             as
             much
             as
             may
             be
             .
             The
             which
             is
             likewise
             admirable
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             put
             it
             in
             earthen
             vessells
             ,
             or
             in
             beasts
             skinnes
             .
             For
             if
             it
             be
             put
             in
             vessells
             of
             copper
             ,
             of
             yron
             ,
             or
             other
             mettall
             ,
             it
             presently
             pierceth
             and
             corrupts
             them
             .
             And
             therefore
             Plinie
             calleth
             it
             the
             poyson
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             consumes
             and
             spoyles
             all
             .
             We
             finde
             quick-silver
             in
             the
             graves
             of
             dead
             men
             ,
             which
             after
             it
             hath
             consumed
             the
             bodies
             ,
             comes
             foorth
             pure
             and
             whole
             .
             There
             hath
             beene
             likewise
             found
             in
             the
             bones
             and
             marrow
             of
             men
             and
             beasts
             ,
             who
             having
             received
             it
             in
             fume
             by
             the
             mouth
             and
             nosthrills
             ,
             congeales
             within
             them
             and
             pierceth
             even
             vnto
             the
             bones
             .
             Therefore
             it
             is
             a
             dangerous
             thing
             to
             frequent
             so
             perillous
             and
             mortall
             a
             creature
             .
             It
             hath
             an
             other
             propertie
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             runne
             and
             make
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             small
             droppes
             ,
             whereof
             not
             one
             is
             lost
             ,
             be
             they
             never
             so
             little
             ,
             but
             they
             returne
             every
             way
             to
             their
             liquor
             .
             It
             is
             almost
             incorruptible
             ,
             having
             nothing
             
             in
             a
             maner
             that
             may
             consume
             it
             .
             And
             therfore
             Plinie
             calles
             it
             the
             eternall
             sweate
             .
             It
             hath
             yet
             another
             propertie
             ,
             that
             although
             it
             dooth
             separate
             gold
             from
             copper
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             mettalles
             ,
             yet
             they
             that
             will
             guilde
             copper
             ,
             brasse
             ,
             or
             silver
             ,
             vse
             quicke-silver
             as
             the
             meanes
             of
             this
             vnion
             ;
             for
             with
             the
             helpe
             thereof
             they
             guilde
             mettalls
             .
             Amongest
             all
             the
             woonders
             of
             this
             strange
             liquor
             that
             seemes
             to
             me
             most
             woorthy
             observation
             ,
             that
             although
             it
             be
             the
             weightiest
             thing
             in
             the
             worlde
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             converted
             into
             the
             lightest
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             which
             is
             smoake
             ,
             and
             sodainely
             the
             same
             smoake
             which
             iss
             o
             light
             a
             thing
             ,
             turnes
             againe
             into
             so
             heavy
             a
             substance
             ,
             as
             is
             the
             proper
             liquor
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             whereinto
             it
             is
             dissolved
             ;
             for
             this
             smoake
             incountering
             the
             mettall
             on
             high
             ,
             being
             a
             solide
             bodie
             ,
             or
             comming
             into
             a
             colde
             region
             ,
             sodainely
             it
             thickens
             and
             is
             converted
             into
             quickesilver
             ,
             and
             if
             you
             set
             him
             once
             againe
             to
             the
             fire
             ,
             hee
             dooth
             likewise
             returne
             into
             smoake
             ,
             to
             be
             resolved
             againe
             into
             quicke-silver
             .
             A
             strange
             transmutation
             of
             so
             heavy
             a
             substance
             into
             so
             light
             a
             thing
             ;
             and
             of
             so
             light
             into
             so
             heavy
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             may
             hold
             for
             a
             rare
             thing
             in
             Nature
             .
             And
             therfore
             the
             Author
             of
             Nature
             is
             iustly
             to
             be
             glorified
             in
             these
             and
             all
             other
             strange
             properties
             of
             this
             mettall
             ,
             seeing
             that
             all
             things
             created
             doe
             properly
             obey
             their
             secret
             and
             vnknowne
             lawes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             place
             where
             they
             finde
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             discovered
             these
             rich
             mines
             in
             Guancavilca
             .
             
               CHAP.
               11.
            
             
          
           
             QVicke-silver
             is
             found
             in
             a
             kinde
             of
             stone
             ,
             which
             dooth
             likewise
             yeelde
             Vermillion
             ,
             which
             the
             Antients
             
             called
             Minium
             ,
             and
             at
             this
             day
             they
             call
             the
             Images
             of
             cristall
             miniades
             ,
             which
             are
             painted
             with
             quick-silver
             .
             The
             Antients
             made
             great
             accompt
             of
             this
             Minium
             or
             vermillion
             ,
             holding
             it
             for
             a
             sacred
             colour
             ,
             as
             Plinie
             reportes
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             Romans
             were
             accustomed
             to
             paint
             the
             face
             of
             Iupiter
             ,
             and
             the
             bodies
             of
             those
             that
             triumphed
             in
             Ethiopia
             :
             yea
             their
             idolles
             and
             their
             Governors
             likewise
             had
             their
             faces
             coloured
             with
             this
             Minium
             .
             And
             this
             vermillion
             was
             so
             esteemed
             at
             Rome
             ▪
             (
             which
             they
             brought
             onely
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             where
             they
             had
             many
             pittes
             and
             mines
             of
             quickesilver
             ,
             which
             continue
             there
             to
             this
             day
             )
             that
             the
             Romans
             suffered
             it
             not
             to
             be
             refined
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             left
             they
             should
             steale
             some
             of
             it
             ,
             but
             they
             carried
             it
             to
             Rome
             ,
             sealed
             vp
             in
             a
             masse
             as
             they
             drew
             it
             out
             of
             the
             mine
             .
             and
             after
             refined
             it
             .
             They
             did
             yeerely
             bring
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             especially
             from
             Andalusie
             ,
             about
             tenne
             thousand
             pound
             weight
             ,
             which
             the
             Romans
             valued
             as
             an
             infinite
             treasure
             .
             I
             have
             reported
             all
             this
             out
             of
             that
             Author
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             those
             which
             doesee
             what
             passeth
             at
             this
             day
             in
             Peru
             ,
             may
             have
             the
             content
             to
             know
             what
             chanced
             in
             former
             ages
             ,
             among
             the
             mightiest
             Lords
             of
             the
             world
             .
             I
             speake
             for
             the
             Inguas
             kings
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             naturall
             Indians
             thereof
             ,
             which
             have
             laboured
             and
             digged
             long
             in
             these
             mines
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             not
             knowing
             what
             quicke-silver
             was
             ,
             seeking
             onely
             for
             Cinabrium
             or
             vermillion
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Limpi
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             esteeme
             much
             ,
             for
             that
             same
             effect
             that
             Plinie
             reportes
             of
             the
             Romans
             and
             Ethiopians
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             to
             paint
             the
             face
             and
             bodies
             of
             themselves
             and
             their
             idolls
             :
             the
             like
             hath
             been
             much
             practised
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             especially
             when
             they
             went
             to
             the
             warres
             ,
             and
             vse
             it
             at
             this
             day
             in
             their
             ▪
             feasts
             and
             dauncing
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             slubbering
             ,
             supposing
             that
             their
             faces
             and
             visages
             so
             slubbered
             ,
             
             did
             much
             terrifie
             ,
             and
             at
             this
             day
             they
             holde
             it
             for
             an
             ornament
             and
             beautifying
             ;
             for
             this
             cause
             there
             were
             strange
             workes
             of
             mines
             in
             the
             mountaines
             of
             Guan●avilca
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             Peru
             ,
             neere
             to
             the
             cittie
             of
             Guamangu●
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             which
             they
             drew
             this
             mettal
             ,
             it
             is
             of
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             if
             at
             this
             day
             they
             enter
             by
             the
             caves
             or
             Soccabones
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             made
             in
             those
             dayes
             ,
             they
             loose
             themselves
             ,
             finding
             no
             passage
             out
             :
             but
             they
             regarded
             not
             quicke-silver
             ,
             which
             naturally
             is
             in
             the
             same
             substance
             or
             mettall
             of
             vermillion
             ,
             neither
             hadde
             they
             knowledge
             of
             any
             such
             matter
             .
          
           
             The
             Indians
             were
             not
             alone
             for
             so
             long
             a
             time
             without
             the
             knowledge
             of
             this
             treasure
             ,
             but
             likewise
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             who
             vntill
             the
             yeare
             of
             the
             incarnation
             of
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             three
             score
             and
             six
             ,
             and
             threescore
             and
             seaven
             (
             at
             such
             time
             as
             the
             licentiate
             Castro
             governed
             in
             Peru
             )
             discovered
             not
             the
             mines
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             which
             happened
             in
             this
             manner
             .
             A
             man
             of
             iudgement
             called
             
               Henrique
               Guar●es
            
             ,
             a
             Portugall
             borne
             ,
             having
             a
             peece
             of
             this
             coloured
             mettall
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             call
             Limpi
             ,
             with
             which
             they
             paint
             their
             faces
             ,
             as
             hee
             beheld
             it
             well
             ,
             found
             it
             to
             be
             the
             same
             which
             they
             call
             Vermillion
             in
             Castille
             ;
             and
             for
             that
             hee
             knew
             well
             that
             vermillion
             was
             drawne
             out
             of
             the
             same
             mettall
             that
             quickesilver
             was
             ,
             hee
             coniectured
             these
             mines
             to
             be
             of
             quickesilver
             ,
             went
             to
             the
             place
             whence
             they
             drew
             this
             mettall
             ,
             to
             make
             triall
             thereof
             .
             The
             which
             hee
             found
             true
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             sorte
             the
             mines
             of
             Palcas
             in
             the
             territorie
             of
             Guamangua
             ,
             being
             discovered
             ,
             great
             numbers
             of
             men
             went
             thither
             to
             drawe
             out
             quickesilver
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             carry
             it
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             they
             refine
             silver
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             quickesilver
             ,
             wherewith
             many
             are
             inriched
             .
             This
             country
             of
             mines
             which
             
             they
             call
             Guancavilca
             ,
             was
             then
             peopled
             with
             Spaniards
             and
             Indians
             that
             came
             thither
             ,
             and
             come
             still
             to
             worke
             in
             these
             mines
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             great
             numbers
             ,
             and
             very
             plentifull
             :
             but
             of
             all
             these
             mines
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             call
             
               d'
               Amador
               de
               Cabrera
            
             ,
             or
             of
             Saintes
             ,
             is
             goodly
             and
             notable
             .
             It
             is
             a
             rocke
             of
             most
             hard
             stone
             ,
             interlaced
             all
             with
             quickesilver
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             greatnesse
             ,
             that
             it
             extendes
             above
             foure
             score
             Varres
             or
             yardes
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             forty
             in
             breadth
             ;
             in
             which
             mine
             they
             have
             many
             pittes
             and
             ditches
             ,
             of
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             stades
             deepe
             ,
             so
             as
             three
             hundred
             men
             may
             well
             worke
             together
             ;
             such
             is
             the
             capacity
             thereof
             .
             This
             mine
             was
             discovered
             by
             an
             Indian
             of
             Amador
             of
             Cabrera
             ,
             called
             Navincopa
             of
             the
             village
             of
             Acoria
             ,
             the
             which
             Amador
             of
             Cabrera
             caused
             to
             be
             registred
             in
             his
             name
             .
             He
             was
             in
             surte
             against
             the
             Procurer
             fiscall
             ,
             but
             the
             vsufruite
             was
             adiudged
             to
             him
             by
             sentence
             as
             the
             discoverer
             .
             Since
             he
             solde
             his
             interest
             to
             another
             ,
             for
             two
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             thousand
             ducates
             ;
             and
             afterwards
             thinking
             he
             had
             bin
             deceived
             in
             the
             sale
             ,
             he
             commenced
             an
             action
             against
             the
             buyer
             ,
             being
             worth
             ,
             as
             they
             say
             ,
             above
             five
             hundred
             thousand
             ducats
             ;
             yea
             ,
             some
             holde
             it
             to
             be
             worth
             a
             million
             of
             golde
             :
             a
             rare
             thing
             to
             see
             a
             mine
             of
             that
             wealth
             .
          
           
             Whenas
             
               Don
               Francisco
            
             of
             Toledo
             governed
             in
             Peru
             ,
             there
             was
             one
             which
             had
             bin
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             observed
             how
             they
             refined
             silver
             with
             mercury
             ,
             called
             
               Pero
               Fernandes
               de
               Valesco
            
             ,
             who
             offred
             to
             refine
             silver
             at
             Potoz●
             ,
             with
             mercury
             ;
             and
             having
             made
             triall
             thereof
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             redemption
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             seaventy
             and
             one
             ,
             perfourmed
             it
             with
             credite
             ;
             then
             beganne
             they
             to
             refine
             silver
             at
             PotoZi
             with
             quicksilver
             ,
             which
             they
             transported
             from
             Guancavelicqua
             ,
             which
             
             was
             a
             goodly
             helpe
             for
             the
             mines
             ;
             for
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             quickesilver
             they
             drew
             an
             infinite
             quantity
             of
             mettal
             from
             these
             mines
             ,
             whereof
             they
             made
             no
             accompt
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             called
             scrapings
             .
             For
             as
             it
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             the
             quickesilver
             purifies
             the
             silver
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             drie
             ,
             poore
             ,
             and
             of
             base
             alloy
             ,
             which
             can
             not
             be
             doone
             by
             melting
             in
             the
             fire
             .
             The
             Catholike
             King
             drawes
             from
             it
             quickesilver
             mines
             ,
             without
             any
             charge
             or
             hazard
             ,
             almost
             foure
             hundred
             thousand
             peeces
             of
             a
             mine
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             foureteene
             rialls
             a
             peece
             ,
             or
             little
             lesse
             ,
             besides
             the
             rights
             that
             rise
             in
             Potozi
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             imployed
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             a
             great
             riches
             .
             They
             doe
             yearely
             ,
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             drawe
             from
             these
             mines
             of
             Guancavilca
             ,
             eight
             thousand
             quintalls
             of
             quickesilver
             ,
             yea
             and
             more
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             maner
             how
             to
             drawe
             out
             Quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             refine
             Silver
             .
             
               CHAP.
               12.
            
             
          
           
             LEt
             vs
             now
             speake
             how
             they
             draw
             out
             Quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             refine
             Silver
             therewith
             .
             They
             take
             the
             stone
             or
             mettall
             where
             they
             finde
             the
             quicke-silver
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             put
             into
             the
             fire
             in
             pots
             of
             earth
             well
             luted
             ,
             being
             well
             beaten
             ,
             so
             as
             this
             mettall
             or
             stone
             comming
             to
             melt
             by
             the
             heate
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             the
             quicke-silver
             seperates
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             goes
             forth
             in
             exhalation
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             even
             with
             the
             smoake
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             vntill
             itincounters
             some
             body
             where
             it
             staies
             and
             congeales
             ,
             and
             if
             it
             passe
             vp
             higher
             ,
             without
             meeting
             of
             any
             hard
             substance
             ,
             it
             mountes
             vp
             vntill
             it
             be
             colde
             ;
             and
             then
             congeled
             ,
             it
             falles
             downe
             againe
             .
             When
             the
             melting
             is
             finished
             ,
             they
             vnstoppe
             the
             pottes
             and
             draw
             forth
             the
             mettall
             ,
             sometimes
             staying
             vntill
             it
             be
             very
             cold
             ,
             for
             if
             
             there
             remained
             any
             fume
             or
             vapor
             ,
             which
             should
             incounter
             them
             that
             vnstopt
             the
             pottes
             ,
             they
             were
             in
             danger
             of
             death
             ,
             or
             to
             be
             benumined
             of
             their
             limbes
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             to
             loose
             their
             teeth
             .
             And
             for
             that
             they
             spend
             an
             infinite
             quantitie
             of
             wood
             ,
             in
             the
             melting
             of
             these
             mettalls
             .
             A
             Miller
             called
             
               Rodrigo
               de
               Tores
            
             ,
             found
             out
             a
             profitable
             invention
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             to
             gather
             certaine
             straw
             which
             growes
             throughout
             all
             those
             mountaines
             of
             Peru
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Ycho
             ,
             it
             is
             like
             vnto
             a
             hard
             reede
             wherewith
             they
             make
             their
             fire
             .
             It
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             to
             see
             the
             force
             which
             this
             straw
             hath
             to
             melt
             and
             dissolve
             these
             mettalls
             ,
             the
             which
             falles
             out
             ,
             as
             Plinie
             saies
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             gold
             which
             melts
             more
             easily
             with
             the
             flame
             of
             straw
             ,
             
             then
             with
             hote
             burning
             coales
             .
             They
             put
             the
             quicke-silver
             thus
             molten
             into
             skinnes
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             keepes
             best
             in
             lether
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             sort
             they
             lay
             it
             into
             the
             Kings
             store-howse
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             carry
             it
             by
             sea
             to
             Ariqua
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             Potozi
             by
             land
             vpon
             their
             sheepe
             .
             There
             is
             yeerely
             spent
             in
             PotoZi
             for
             the
             refining
             of
             mettalles
             ,
             about
             six
             or
             seven
             thousand
             quintalles
             of
             quicke-silver
             ,
             besides
             that
             they
             drawe
             from
             the
             plates
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             earth
             or
             drosse
             of
             the
             first
             washings
             of
             these
             mettalls
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             in
             caldrons
             .
             )
             The
             which
             plates
             they
             burne
             in
             their
             furnaces
             ,
             to
             draw
             out
             the
             quicke-silver
             which
             remaines
             in
             them
             :
             and
             there
             are
             above
             fiftie
             of
             these
             furnaces
             in
             the
             Citie
             of
             PotoZi
             ,
             and
             in
             Tarpaya
             .
             The
             quantitie
             of
             mettalls
             which
             they
             refine
             ,
             (
             as
             some
             men
             of
             experience
             have
             made
             the
             account
             ,
             )
             doth
             amount
             yeerely
             to
             above
             three
             hundred
             thousand
             quintalles
             ;
             from
             the
             earth
             and
             drosse
             whereof
             being
             molt
             and
             refined
             ,
             they
             may
             draw
             yeerely
             above
             two
             thousand
             quintalles
             of
             quick-silver
             .
             We
             must
             vnderstand
             there
             are
             divers
             sortes
             of
             mettalls
             ,
             
             for
             some
             yeelde
             much
             silver
             ,
             and
             waste
             little
             quicke-silver
             ;
             others
             consume
             much
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             yeelde
             little
             silver
             ;
             and
             there
             are
             others
             which
             consume
             much
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             yeeldes
             much
             silver
             ;
             and
             others
             that
             consume
             little
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             also
             yeelde
             little
             silver
             ;
             and
             as
             men
             incounter
             in
             these
             mettalles
             ,
             so
             they
             grow
             rich
             or
             poore
             in
             their
             trafficke
             .
             Although
             commonly
             the
             rich
             mettall
             yeeldes
             much
             silver
             ,
             and
             consumes
             much
             quicke-silver
             ;
             and
             likewise
             that
             which
             is
             poore
             ,
             yeeldes
             little
             silver
             ,
             and
             consumes
             as
             little
             mercurie
             .
             They
             first
             beat
             and
             grinde
             the
             mettall
             very
             small
             ,
             with
             hammers
             and
             other
             instruments
             ,
             which
             beat
             this
             stone
             like
             vnto
             tanne
             milles
             ,
             and
             being
             well
             beaten
             ,
             they
             searce
             it
             in
             a
             copper
             searce
             ,
             making
             the
             poulder
             as
             small
             and
             fine
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             horse
             haire
             :
             these
             searces
             being
             well
             fitted
             ,
             doe
             sift
             thirtie
             quintalles
             in
             a
             day
             and
             a
             night
             ;
             then
             they
             put
             the
             poulder
             of
             the
             mettall
             into
             the
             vessels
             vpon
             furnaces
             ,
             whereas
             they
             anoint
             it
             and
             mortifie
             it
             with
             brine
             ,
             putting
             to
             everie
             fiftie
             quintalles
             of
             poulder
             ,
             five
             quintalls
             of
             salt
             .
             And
             this
             they
             do
             for
             that
             the
             salt
             seperates
             the
             earth
             and
             filth
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             quicke-silver
             may
             the
             more
             easily
             draw
             the
             silver
             vnto
             it
             .
             After
             they
             put
             quicke
             ▪
             silver
             into
             a
             peece
             of
             holland
             and
             presse
             it
             out
             vpon
             the
             mettall
             ,
             which
             goes
             forth
             like
             a
             dewe
             ,
             alwaies
             turning
             and
             stirring
             the
             mettall
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             it
             may
             be
             well
             incorporate
             .
             Before
             the
             invention
             of
             these
             furnaces
             of
             fire
             ,
             they
             did
             often
             mingle
             their
             mettall
             with
             quicke-silver
             ,
             in
             great
             troughes
             ,
             letting
             it
             settle
             some
             daies
             ,
             and
             did
             then
             mix
             it
             ,
             and
             stirre
             it
             againe
             ,
             vntill
             they
             thought
             all
             the
             quicke-silver
             were
             well
             incorporate
             with
             the
             silver
             ,
             the
             which
             continued
             twentie
             daies
             and
             more
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             least
             nine
             daies
             .
             Since
             they
             discovered
             (
             as
             the
             desire
             to
             get
             is
             diligent
             ,
             )
             
             that
             to
             shorten
             the
             time
             fire
             did
             much
             helpe
             :
             to
             incorporate
             silver
             the
             sooner
             with
             quicke-silver
             ,
             they
             in
             vented
             these
             furnaces
             ,
             whereon
             they
             set
             vessels
             to
             put
             in
             their
             mettall
             ,
             with
             salt
             and
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             vnderneath
             they
             put
             fire
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             in
             furnaces
             made
             for
             the
             nonce
             vnderneath
             ;
             so
             as
             in
             five
             or
             six
             daies
             the
             quicke-silver
             is
             incorporate
             with
             the
             silver
             .
             And
             when
             they
             finde
             that
             the
             mercurie
             hath
             done
             his
             part
             ,
             and
             assembled
             all
             the
             silver
             ,
             leaving
             nothing
             behinde
             ,
             but
             is
             well
             imbrued
             as
             a
             spunge
             doth
             water
             ,
             dividing
             it
             from
             the
             earth
             ,
             lead
             ,
             and
             copper
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             it
             is
             engendered
             .
             Then
             after
             they
             seperate
             it
             likewise
             from
             the
             quicke-silver
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             do
             in
             this
             sort
             ;
             they
             put
             the
             mettall
             in
             caldrons
             ,
             and
             vessells
             full
             of
             water
             ,
             where
             with
             certaine
             wheeles
             they
             turne
             the
             mettall
             round
             about
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             should
             make
             mustard
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             earth
             and
             drosse
             goes
             from
             the
             mettall
             with
             the
             water
             that
             runs
             away
             :
             The
             silver
             &
             quicke-silver
             as
             most
             ponderous
             remaining
             in
             the
             botome
             ;
             the
             mettal
             which
             remaines
             ,
             is
             like
             vnto
             sand
             :
             then
             they
             take
             it
             out
             and
             wash
             it
             againe
             in
             great
             platters
             of
             wood
             ,
             or
             keelers
             full
             of
             water
             ,
             still
             drawing
             the
             earth
             from
             it
             ,
             vntill
             they
             leave
             the
             silver
             and
             quicke-silver
             well
             clensed
             .
             There
             slippes
             away
             also
             some
             small
             portion
             of
             silver
             and
             quicke-silver
             with
             the
             earth
             and
             drosse
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             washings
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             after
             wash
             againe
             and
             draw
             out
             the
             remainder
             .
             When
             the
             silver
             and
             quicke-silver
             are
             clensed
             and
             beginne
             to
             shine
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             remaines
             no
             earth
             ,
             they
             put
             all
             the
             mettall
             into
             a
             cloth
             ,
             which
             they
             straine
             out
             very
             forcibly
             ,
             so
             as
             all
             the
             quicke-silver
             passeth
             out
             ,
             being
             not
             incorporate
             with
             the
             silver
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             remaines
             as
             a
             loafe
             of
             silver
             ,
             like
             to
             a
             marke
             of
             almonds
             pressed
             to
             draw
             oyle
             .
             And
             being
             thus
             pressed
             ,
             
             the
             remainder
             containes
             but
             the
             sixt
             part
             in
             silver
             ,
             and
             five
             in
             mercurie
             .
             So
             as
             if
             there
             remaines
             a
             marke
             of
             threescore
             pounds
             ,
             ten
             are
             of
             silver
             ,
             and
             fiftie
             of
             mercurie
             .
             Of
             these
             markes
             they
             make
             pinnes
             ,
             (
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             )
             like
             pine
             apples
             ,
             or
             sugar
             loaves
             ,
             hollow
             within
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             commonly
             make
             of
             a
             hundred
             pound
             weight
             ;
             then
             to
             seperate
             the
             silver
             from
             the
             quicke-silver
             ,
             they
             put
             it
             into
             a
             violent
             fire
             ,
             which
             they
             cover
             with
             an
             earthen
             vessell
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             mold
             of
             a
             sugar
             loafe
             ,
             or
             vnto
             a
             capuchon
             or
             hoode
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             cover
             with
             coales
             ,
             and
             set
             fire
             vnto
             it
             ;
             whereby
             the
             quicke-silver
             exhales
             in
             smoake
             ,
             the
             which
             striking
             against
             the
             capuchon
             of
             earth
             ,
             it
             thickens
             and
             distills
             ,
             like
             vnto
             the
             smoake
             of
             a
             potte
             covered
             ;
             and
             by
             a
             pipe
             like
             vnto
             a
             limbecke
             ,
             they
             receive
             the
             quicke-silver
             which
             distills
             ,
             the
             silver
             remaining
             without
             changing
             the
             forme
             ,
             but
             in
             weight
             it
             is
             diminished
             five
             partes
             of
             that
             it
             was
             ,
             and
             is
             spungious
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             worthy
             the
             observation
             .
             Of
             two
             of
             these
             loaves
             they
             make
             one
             barre
             of
             silver
             ,
             in
             weight
             65.
             or
             66.
             markes
             :
             and
             in
             this
             sort
             they
             carry
             it
             to
             the
             touch
             ,
             custome
             ,
             and
             marke
             .
             Silver
             drawne
             with
             mercurie
             ,
             is
             so
             fine
             ,
             that
             it
             never
             abates
             of
             two
             thousand
             three
             hundred
             and
             fourescore
             of
             alloy
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             so
             excellent
             ,
             that
             the
             worke-men
             are
             inforced
             to
             alay
             it
             ,
             putting
             some
             mixture
             to
             it
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             likewise
             in
             their
             mints
             ,
             whereas
             their
             mony
             is
             stampt
             .
             Silver
             indures
             all
             these
             martiredomes
             ,
             (
             if
             we
             may
             so
             call
             it
             ,
             )
             to
             be
             refined
             ,
             the
             which
             if
             we
             consider
             well
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             bodie
             framed
             where
             they
             grinde
             ,
             sift
             ,
             kneade
             ,
             lay
             the
             leven
             ,
             &
             bake
             the
             silver
             :
             besides
             all
             this
             ,
             they
             wash
             it
             and
             wash
             it
             againe
             ,
             they
             bake
             it
             and
             bake
             it
             againe
             ,
             induring
             the
             pestells
             ,
             sives
             ,
             troughes
             ,
             furnaces
             ,
             caldrons
             ,
             presses
             :
             and
             finally
             ,
             by
             the
             water
             and
             fire
             .
             I
             speake
             this
             ,
             for
             that
             seeing
             
             seeing
             this
             art
             in
             PotoZi
             ,
             I
             did
             consider
             what
             the
             Scripture
             speakes
             of
             the
             iust
             ,
             
             
               Colabit
               eos
               et
               purgabit
               quasi
               argentum
            
             :
             And
             that
             which
             they
             speake
             in
             another
             part
             ,
             
               Sic
               vt
               argentum
               purgatum
               terra
               ,
               purgatum
               s●ptuplum
               .
            
             So
             as
             to
             purifie
             silver
             ,
             to
             refine
             and
             clense
             it
             from
             the
             earth
             and
             stone
             where
             it
             engenders
             ,
             they
             purge
             and
             purifie
             it
             seven
             times
             :
             for
             in
             effect
             it
             passeth
             their
             handes
             seven
             times
             ,
             yea
             ,
             oftener
             ,
             vntill
             it
             remaines
             pure
             and
             fine
             ;
             so
             is
             it
             in
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             where
             the
             soules
             must
             be
             so
             purified
             ,
             that
             shall
             inioy
             the
             heavenly
             perfection
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             their
             Engines
             to
             grinde
             the
             mettall
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             triall
             of
             Silver
             .
             
               CHAP.
               13.
            
             
          
           
             TO
             conclude
             ,
             this
             subiect
             of
             silver
             and
             of
             mettalls
             ,
             there
             remaines
             yet
             two
             things
             to
             speake
             of
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             of
             their
             engins
             and
             milles
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             their
             essay
             or
             triall
             :
             I
             have
             said
             before
             ,
             how
             they
             grinde
             their
             mettal
             :
             for
             the
             receving
             of
             the
             quicksilver
             ,
             which
             is
             done
             with
             diverse
             instruments
             and
             engins
             ,
             some
             with
             horses
             like
             vnto
             hand-milles
             ,
             others
             like
             water-milles
             ;
             of
             which
             two
             sortes
             there
             are
             great
             numbers
             .
             But
             for
             that
             the
             water
             they
             doe
             vse
             commonly
             ,
             is
             but
             of
             raine
             ,
             whereof
             they
             have
             not
             sufficient
             but
             three
             months
             in
             the
             yeare
             ,
             December
             ,
             Ianuary
             ,
             and
             February
             :
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             have
             made
             Lakes
             and
             standing
             Pooles
             ,
             which
             containe
             in●circuite
             about
             a
             thousand
             and
             six
             hundred
             roddes
             ,
             and
             in
             deapth
             three
             stades
             ;
             there
             are
             seaven
             with
             their
             sluces
             :
             so
             as
             when
             they
             have
             neede
             of
             any
             water
             ,
             they
             raise
             vp
             a
             sluce
             ,
             from
             whence
             runnes
             a
             little
             streame
             of
             water
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             stoppe
             vppon
             holy-dayes
             .
             And
             when
             the
             Lakes
             and
             Pooles
             doe
             fill
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             yeare
             
             abounds
             with
             raine
             ,
             their
             grinding
             dooth
             then
             continue
             sixe
             or
             seaven
             moneths
             ;
             so
             as
             even
             for
             silvers
             sake
             men
             desire
             a
             good
             yeere
             of
             raine
             in
             Potozi
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             in
             other
             places
             for
             bread
             .
             There
             are
             some
             other
             engins
             in
             Tarapaya
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             valley
             three
             or
             foure
             leagues
             distant
             from
             Potozi
             ,
             whereas
             there
             runnes
             a
             river
             as
             in
             other
             parts
             .
             The
             difference
             of
             these
             engins
             is
             ,
             that
             some
             goe
             with
             sixe
             pestels
             ,
             some
             with
             twelve
             ,
             and
             others
             with
             foureteene
             .
             They
             grinde
             and
             beate
             the
             mettall
             in
             morters
             ,
             labouring
             day
             and
             night
             ;
             and
             from
             thence
             they
             carry
             it
             to
             be
             sifted
             ,
             vpon
             the
             bankes
             of
             the
             brooke
             of
             Potozi
             .
             There
             are
             forty
             eight
             water-mills
             ,
             of
             eight
             ,
             ten
             ,
             and
             twelve
             pestells
             ,
             and
             foure
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Tanacognugno
             ;
             in
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Tarapaya
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             and
             twenty
             engins
             all
             vpon
             the
             water
             ;
             besides
             there
             are
             thirty
             goe
             with
             horses
             in
             PotoZi
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             in
             divers●partes
             ,
             so
             great
             the
             desire
             of
             man
             is
             to
             get
             silver
             ,
             which
             is
             tryed
             by
             deputies
             appoynted
             by
             the
             King.
             
          
           
             To
             give
             the
             alloy
             to
             every
             peece
             ,
             they
             cary
             the
             bars
             of
             silver
             vnto
             the
             Assay
             maister
             ,
             who
             gives
             to
             every
             one
             his
             number
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             carry
             many
             at
             once
             ,
             he
             cuttes
             a
             small
             peece
             of
             every
             one
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             weighs
             iustly
             ,
             and
             puttes
             them
             into
             a
             cruset
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             small
             vessell
             made
             of
             burnt
             bones
             beaten
             ;
             after
             hee
             placeth
             everie
             crusible
             in
             his
             order
             in
             the
             furnace
             ,
             giving
             them
             a
             violent
             fire
             ,
             then
             the
             mettall
             melteth
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             lead
             ,
             goes
             into
             smoake
             ,
             and
             the
             copper
             and
             tinne
             dissolves
             ,
             the
             silver
             remayning
             most
             fine
             ,
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             fire
             .
             It
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             ,
             that
             being
             thus
             refined
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             liquide
             and
             molten
             ,
             yet
             it
             never
             spilles
             ,
             were
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             crusible
             turned
             downewardes
             ;
             but
             it
             remayn●th
             fixed
             ,
             without
             the
             losse
             of
             a
             droppe
             .
             
             The
             Assay
             maister
             knoweth
             by
             the
             colour●
             and
             other
             signes
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             refined
             ,
             then
             dooth
             he
             draw
             the
             crusibles
             from
             the
             fire
             ,
             and
             weighs
             every
             peece
             curiously
             ,
             observing
             what
             every
             one
             wants
             of
             his
             weight
             ;
             for
             that
             which
             is
             of
             high
             alloy
             ,
             wastes
             but
             little
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             baser
             ,
             diminisheth
             much
             ;
             &
             according
             to
             the
             waste
             ,
             he
             sees
             what
             alloy
             he
             beares
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             which
             he
             markes
             every
             barre
             punctually
             .
             Their
             ballaunce
             and
             weights
             are
             so
             delicate
             ,
             and
             their
             graines
             so
             small
             ,
             as
             they
             cannot
             take
             them
             vppe
             with
             the
             hand
             ,
             but
             with
             a
             small
             paire
             of
             pincers
             :
             and
             this
             triall
             they
             make
             by
             candle
             light
             ,
             that
             no
             ayre
             might
             moove
             the
             ballance
             .
             For
             of
             this
             little
             the
             price
             of
             the
             whole
             barre
             dependeth
             .
             In
             trueth
             it
             is
             a
             very
             delicate
             thing
             ,
             and
             requires
             a
             great
             dexteritie
             ,
             
             which
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             vseth
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             to
             shew
             how
             God
             prooves
             his
             chosen
             :
             and
             to
             note
             the
             differences
             of
             the
             merites
             of
             soules
             ,
             whereas
             God
             gives
             the
             title
             of
             an
             Assay-maister
             to
             the
             Prophet
             Ieremie
             ,
             that
             hee
             may
             trie
             and
             declare
             the
             spirituall
             vertue
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             workes
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             proper
             worke
             of
             the
             Spirite
             of
             God
             ,
             being
             he
             that
             weighs
             the
             Soules
             of
             men
             .
             
             We
             will
             rest
             content
             with
             what
             we
             have
             spoken
             touching
             silver
             ,
             mettalls
             and
             mines
             ,
             and
             will
             passe
             to
             the
             two
             other
             mixtures
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             plants
             and
             beasts
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Emeraldes
             .
             
               CHAP.
               14.
            
             
          
           
             IT
             shall
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             to
             speake
             somthing
             of
             Emeraldes
             ,
             both
             for
             that
             it
             is
             a
             pretious
             thing
             ,
             as
             golde
             &
             silver
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             that
             they
             take
             their
             beginning
             from
             mines
             and
             mettalls
             ,
             
             as
             Plinie
             reportes
             .
             The
             Emerald
             hath
             bin
             in
             old
             time
             in
             great
             esteeme
             ,
             as
             the
             same
             
             Author
             writes
             ,
             giving
             it
             the
             third
             place
             amongst
             all
             iewelles
             and
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             that
             is
             next
             to
             the
             diamond
             and
             pearle
             .
             At
             this
             day
             they
             doe
             not
             so
             much
             esteeme
             the
             Emerald
             ,
             nor
             the
             pearle
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             aboundance
             is
             brought
             of
             these
             two
             sorts
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             onely
             the
             diamond
             holds
             the
             principality
             ,
             the
             which
             can
             not
             be
             taken
             from
             it
             .
             Next
             ,
             the
             rubies
             come
             in
             price
             and
             other
             stones
             ,
             which
             they
             hold
             more
             pretious
             than
             the
             Emerald
             .
             Men
             are
             so
             desirous
             of
             singularities
             &
             rare
             things
             ,
             that
             what
             they
             see
             to
             be
             common
             ,
             they
             do
             not
             esteeme
             .
             They
             report
             of
             a
             Spaniard
             ,
             who
             being
             in
             Italie
             when
             the
             Indies
             were
             first
             discovered
             ,
             shewed
             a●
             Emerald
             to
             a
             Lapidary
             ,
             who
             asking
             him
             the
             value
             thereof
             ,
             after
             he
             had
             well
             viewed
             it
             ,
             being
             of
             an
             excellent
             lustre
             and
             forme
             ,
             he
             prized
             it
             at
             a
             hundred
             ducats
             :
             he
             then
             shewed
             him
             an
             other
             greater
             than
             it
             ,
             which
             he
             valued
             at
             three
             hundred
             ducats
             .
             The
             Spaniard
             drunke
             with
             this
             discourse
             ,
             carried
             him
             to
             his
             lodging
             ,
             shewing
             him
             a
             casket
             full
             .
             The
             Italian
             seeing
             so
             great
             a
             number
             of
             Emeralds
             ,
             sayde
             vnto
             him
             ,
             Sir
             ,
             these
             are
             well
             woorth
             a
             crowne
             a
             peece
             :
             the
             like
             hath
             happened
             both
             at
             the
             Indies
             and
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             where
             the
             stones
             have
             lost
             their
             estimation
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             abundaunce
             they
             finde
             of
             them
             there
             .
          
           
             Pliny
             reportes
             many
             excellencies
             of
             the
             Emerald
             ,
             amongst
             the
             which
             he
             saith
             ,
             
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             more
             pleasing
             ,
             nor
             more
             healthfull
             for
             the
             sight
             ;
             wherein
             he
             hath
             reason
             ,
             but
             his
             authority
             importeth
             little
             ,
             seeing
             there
             is
             such
             store
             .
             
             It
             is
             reported
             that
             Lelia
             a
             Romane
             Dame
             bestowed
             vppon
             a
             scoffion
             and
             a
             garment
             embroidered
             with
             pearle
             and
             emerald
             400000.
             ducats
             ,
             the
             which
             at
             this
             day
             might
             be
             doone
             with
             lesse
             than
             forty
             thousand
             ducats
             ,
             yea
             two
             such
             .
             In
             diverse
             partes
             of
             the
             
             Indies
             ,
             and
             the
             Kings
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             didde
             much
             esteeme
             them
             ;
             some
             did
             vse
             to
             pierce
             their
             nosthrils
             ,
             and
             hang
             therein
             an
             excellent
             Emerald
             :
             they
             hung
             them
             on
             the
             visages
             of
             their
             idolles
             .
             The
             greatest
             store
             is
             found
             in
             the
             New
             Kingdome
             of
             Grenado
             ,
             and
             Peru
             ,
             neere
             vnto
             Manta
             and
             port
             Vieil
             .
             There
             is
             towardes
             that
             place
             a
             soile
             which
             they
             call
             ,
             the
             Land
             of
             Emeraldes
             ,
             for
             the
             knowledge
             they
             have
             of
             aboundance
             to
             be
             there
             :
             and
             yet
             vnto
             this
             day
             they
             have
             not
             conquered
             that
             Land.
             The
             Emeralds
             grow
             in
             stones
             like
             vnto
             cristall
             ;
             I
             have
             seene
             them
             in
             the
             same
             stone
             ,
             fashioned
             like
             a
             veine
             ,
             and
             they
             seeme
             by
             little
             and
             little
             to
             thicken
             and
             refine
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             that
             were
             halfe
             white
             ,
             and
             halfe
             greene
             ;
             others
             all
             white
             ,
             and
             some
             greene
             and
             very
             perfite
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             of
             the
             bignesse
             of
             a
             nut
             ,
             and
             there
             have
             bin
             some
             greater
             found
             :
             but
             I
             have
             not
             knowen
             that
             in
             our
             time
             they
             have
             found
             any
             of
             the
             form
             and
             bignesse
             of
             the
             platt
             or
             iewel
             they
             have
             at
             Genes
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             esteeme
             (
             and
             with
             reason
             )
             to
             be
             a
             iewell
             of
             great
             price
             ,
             and
             no
             relique
             ;
             yet
             without
             comparison
             ,
             the
             Emerald
             which
             Theophrastus
             speakes
             of
             ,
             which
             the
             King
             of
             Babilon
             presented
             to
             the
             King
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             surpasseth
             that
             of
             Genes
             ;
             it
             was
             foure
             cubites
             long
             ,
             and
             three
             broade
             ,
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             Iupiters
             Temple
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             needle
             or
             pyramide
             ,
             made
             of
             foure
             Emeralds
             stones
             of
             forty
             cubits
             long
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             foure
             broade
             ,
             and
             in
             others
             two
             :
             and
             that
             in
             his
             time
             there
             was
             in
             Tir
             in
             Hercules
             Temple
             ,
             a
             pillar
             of
             an
             Emerald
             .
             It
             may
             be
             (
             as
             Plinie
             saieth
             )
             it
             was
             of
             some
             greene
             stone
             ,
             somewhat
             like
             to
             the
             Emerald
             ,
             and
             they
             called
             it
             a
             false
             Emerald
             .
             As
             some
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Cathedrall
             Church
             of
             Cordoü●
             there
             are
             certaine
             pillars
             of
             Emeraldes
             which
             remaine
             since
             it
             was
             a
             Mesquite
             for
             the
             Kings
             
               Miramamolins
               
               Moores
            
             ,
             which
             raigned
             there
             .
             In
             the
             fleete
             ,
             the
             yeare
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             and
             seven
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             I
             came
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             they
             brought
             twoo
             chests
             of
             Emeraldes
             ,
             every
             one
             weighing
             at
             the
             least
             foure
             Arobes
             ,
             whereby
             wee
             may
             see
             the
             aboundaunce
             they
             have
             .
             The
             holy
             Scripture
             commends
             these
             Emeralds
             as
             pretious
             iewells
             ,
             
             they
             number
             them
             amongest
             the
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             which
             the
             hie
             Priest
             carried
             on
             his
             Ephod
             or
             breast-plate
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             did
             beautifie
             the
             walles
             of
             the
             heavenly
             Ierusalem
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Pearles
             .
             
               CHAP.
               15.
            
             
          
           
             NOw
             that
             we
             intreat
             of
             the
             great
             riches
             that
             comes
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             it
             were
             no
             reason
             to
             forgette
             the
             Pearle
             ,
             which
             the
             Ancients
             called
             Marguerites
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             first
             were
             in
             so
             great
             estimation
             ,
             as
             none
             but
             royall
             persons
             were
             suffered
             to
             weare
             them
             :
             but
             at
             this
             day
             there
             is
             such
             aboundance
             as
             the
             Negres
             themselves
             do
             weare
             chaines
             thereof
             ;
             they
             growe
             in
             shells
             or
             oysters
             ,
             in
             eating
             whereof
             I
             have
             found
             pearles
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             them
             :
             These
             oisters
             within
             are
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             heaven
             ,
             very
             lively
             .
             In
             some
             places
             they
             make
             spoones
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             mother
             of
             Pearle
             .
             The
             pearles
             do
             differ
             much
             informe
             ,
             in
             bignes
             ,
             figure
             ,
             colour
             and
             polishing
             ;
             so
             likewise
             in
             their
             price
             they
             differ
             much
             .
             Some
             they
             call
             
               Ave
               Mariaes
            
             ,
             being
             like
             the
             small
             graines
             of
             beades
             ;
             others
             are
             
               Pater
               nosters
            
             ,
             being
             bigger
             .
             Seldome
             shall
             you
             finde
             two
             of
             one
             greatnesse
             ,
             forme
             ,
             and
             colour
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             the
             Romans
             (
             as
             Pliny
             writeth
             )
             called
             them
             Vnions
             .
             
             Whenas
             they
             doe
             finde
             two
             that
             are
             alike
             in
             all
             poyntes
             ,
             they
             raise
             the
             price
             much
             ,
             especially
             for
             carerings
             .
             
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             payres
             valued
             at
             thousands
             of
             ducats
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             not
             like
             to
             Cleopatraes
             two
             pearles
             ,
             whereof
             Pliny
             reportes
             ,
             either
             of
             them
             being
             woorth
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             ducats
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             this
             foolish
             Queene
             wonne
             a
             wager
             she
             hadde
             made
             against
             
               Marc
               Anthony
            
             ,
             to
             spend
             in
             one
             supper
             above
             an
             hundred
             thousand
             ducats
             ;
             so
             at
             the
             last
             course
             shee
             dissolved
             one
             of
             these
             pearles
             in
             strong
             vineger
             ,
             &
             dranke
             it
             vp
             .
             They
             say
             the
             other
             pearle
             was
             cutt
             in
             two
             ,
             and
             placed
             in
             the
             Pantheon
             at
             Rome
             ,
             at
             th'●ares
             of
             the
             image
             of
             
               Venus
               .
               Esope
            
             reportes
             of
             Clovis
             the
             sonne
             of
             a
             Comedian
             ,
             who
             in
             a
             banquet
             presented
             to
             every
             one
             of
             his
             ghests
             (
             amongest
             other
             meates
             )
             a
             rich
             pearle
             dissolved
             in
             vineger
             ,
             to
             make
             his
             feast
             the
             more
             royall
             and
             sumptuous
             .
          
           
             These
             were
             the
             follies
             of
             those
             ages
             ,
             and
             those
             at
             this
             day
             are
             nothing
             lesse
             ,
             for
             that
             we
             see
             ,
             not
             onely
             hattes
             and
             bandes
             ,
             but
             also
             buskins
             ,
             and
             womens
             pantofles
             ,
             (
             yea
             of
             base
             condition
             )
             imbrodred
             all
             over
             with
             pearle
             .
             They
             fish
             for
             pearles
             in
             diverse
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             greatest
             aboundaunce
             is
             in
             the
             south
             Seas
             ,
             neere
             vnto
             Panama
             ,
             where
             the
             Ilandes
             of
             pearles
             be
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             .
             But
             at
             this
             day
             they
             finde
             greatest
             store
             ,
             and
             the
             best
             ,
             in
             the
             north
             Sea
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             neare
             to
             the
             rive
             of
             Hatch
             .
             I
             did
             see
             them
             make
             their
             fishing
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             done
             with
             great
             charge
             &
             labor
             of
             the
             poore
             slaves
             ,
             which
             dive
             sixe
             ,
             nine
             ,
             yea
             twelve
             fadomes
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             to
             seeke
             for
             oysters
             ,
             the
             which
             commonly
             are
             fastened
             to
             the
             rockes
             and
             gravell
             in
             the
             Sea
             ,
             they
             pull
             them
             vp
             ,
             and
             bring
             them
             above
             the
             water
             to
             their
             canoes
             ,
             where
             the●
             open
             them
             ,
             drawing
             forth
             the
             treasure
             they
             have
             within
             them
             .
             The
             water
             of
             the
             Sea
             in
             this
             parte
             is
             verie
             colde
             ,
             but
             yet
             the
             labor
             and
             toile
             is
             greatest
             in
             holding
             
             of
             their
             breath
             ,
             sometimes
             a
             quarter
             ,
             yea
             halfe
             an
             houre
             together
             ,
             being
             vnder
             the
             water
             at
             their
             fishing
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             these
             poore
             slaves
             may
             the
             better
             continue
             and
             holde
             their
             breaths
             ,
             they
             feede
             them
             with
             drie
             meates
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             small
             quantitie
             ,
             so
             as
             covetousnesse
             makes
             them
             abstaine
             and
             fast
             thus
             against
             their
             willes
             .
             They
             imploy
             their
             pearles
             to
             diverse
             workes
             ,
             and
             they
             pierce
             them
             to
             make
             chaines
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             store
             in
             every
             place
             .
             In
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lorde
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             one
             I
             did
             see
             the
             note
             of
             what
             came
             from
             the
             Indies
             for
             the
             King
             ,
             there
             were
             eighteen
             maces
             of
             pearle
             ,
             besides
             three
             caskets
             ,
             and
             for
             particulars
             ,
             there
             were
             twelve
             hundred
             threescore
             and
             foure
             marks
             ,
             and
             besides
             them
             ,
             seaven
             caskets
             not
             pierced
             ,
             which
             heeretofore
             we
             would
             have
             esteemed
             and
             helde
             for
             a
             lie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Indian
             Bread
             ,
             and
             of
             Mays
             .
             
               CHAP.
               16.
            
             
          
           
             IN
             our
             discourse
             of
             Plants
             ,
             wee
             will
             beginne
             with
             those
             which
             are
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             to
             the
             Indies
             ;
             and
             after
             with
             the
             rest
             that
             are
             common
             to
             the
             Indies
             and
             Europe
             ;
             and
             forasmuch
             as
             plants
             were
             chiefly
             created
             for
             the
             nourishment
             of
             man
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             chiefe
             (
             whereof
             he
             takes
             his
             nourishment
             ,
             )
             is
             bread
             ,
             it
             shall
             be
             good
             to
             shew
             what
             bread
             the
             Indians
             vse
             ,
             and
             whereon
             they
             live
             for
             want
             thereof
             .
             They
             have
             (
             as
             we
             have
             heere
             ,
             )
             a
             proper
             name
             ,
             whereby
             they
             note
             and
             signifie
             bread
             ,
             which
             at
             Peru
             ,
             they
             call
             Tanta
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             places
             by
             another
             name
             .
             But
             the
             qualitie
             and
             substance
             of
             the
             bread
             the
             Indians
             vse
             ,
             differs
             much
             from
             ours
             :
             for
             we
             finde
             not
             they
             had
             any
             kinde
             of
             wheat
             or
             barly
             ,
             
             nor
             any
             other
             kinde
             of
             graine
             which
             they
             vse
             in
             
             Europe
             ●o
             make
             bread
             withall
             :
             insteede
             whereof
             they
             vsed
             other
             kindes
             of
             graines
             and
             rootes
             ,
             amongst
             the
             which
             Mays
             holds
             the
             first
             place
             ,
             and
             with
             reason
             ,
             in
             Castile
             they
             call
             it
             Indian
             wheat
             ,
             and
             in
             Italie
             they
             call
             it
             Turkey
             graine
             .
             And
             even
             as
             wheat
             is
             the
             most
             common
             graine
             for
             the
             vse
             of
             man
             ,
             in
             the
             regions
             of
             the
             old
             world
             ,
             which
             are
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
            
             ,
             and
             Affrike
             :
             So
             in
             the
             new
             found
             worlde
             ,
             the
             most
             common
             graine
             is
             Mays
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             found
             almost
             in
             all
             the
             kingdomes
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             as
             at
             Peru
             ,
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             in
             the
             new
             kingdome
             of
             Granado
             ,
             in
             Gautimalla
             ,
             in
             Chille
             ,
             and
             vpon
             the
             maine
             land
             .
             I
             do
             not
             finde
             that
             in
             old
             time
             ,
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Barlovente
             ,
             as
             
               Cuba
               S.
               Dominique
               ,
               Iamaique
            
             ,
             and
             S.
             I●an
             ,
             that
             they
             vsed
             Mays
             :
             at
             this
             day
             they
             vse
             much
             Yuca
             and
             Cacavi
             ,
             whereof
             we
             will
             presently
             intreate
             .
             I
             do
             not
             thinke
             that
             this
             Mays
             is
             any
             thing
             inferiour
             to
             our
             wheat
             ,
             in
             strength
             nor
             substance
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             more
             hote
             and
             grosse
             ,
             and
             engenders
             more
             bloud
             ,
             wherevpon
             they
             that
             have
             not
             bin
             accustomed
             therevnto
             ,
             if
             they
             eat
             too
             much
             ,
             they
             swell
             and
             become
             scabbed
             .
             It
             growes
             vpon
             canes
             or
             reedes
             ;
             every
             one
             beares
             one
             or
             two
             grapes
             or
             branches
             ,
             to
             the
             which
             the
             graine
             is
             fastened
             ,
             and
             although
             the
             graine
             be
             bigge
             ,
             yet
             finde
             they
             great
             store
             thereof
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             some
             clusters
             I
             have
             told
             seven
             hundred
             graines
             .
             They
             must
             plant
             it
             with
             the
             hand
             one
             by
             one
             ,
             and
             not
             very
             thicke
             ;
             it
             desires
             a
             hote
             and
             moist
             ground
             ,
             and
             growes
             in
             great
             aboundance
             in
             many
             places
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             It
             is
             not
             strange
             in
             those
             countries
             to
             gather
             300.
             
             Fanegues
             or
             measures
             for
             one
             sowen
             .
             There
             is
             difference
             of
             Mays
             as
             there
             is
             of
             wheat
             ,
             one
             is
             great
             and
             very
             nourishing
             ,
             another
             small
             and
             drie
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Moroche
             ;
             the
             greene
             leaves
             
             and
             canes
             of
             Mays
             ,
             is
             a
             good
             foode
             for
             their
             mules
             and
             hor●es
             ,
             and
             it
             serves
             them
             for
             straw
             when
             it
             is
             dried
             ;
             the
             graine
             is
             of
             more
             nourishment
             for
             horses
             then
             barly
             ;
             and
             therefore
             in
             those
             countries
             ,
             they
             vse
             to
             water
             their
             horses
             before
             they
             eate
             ,
             for
             if
             they
             should
             drinke
             after
             ,
             they
             would
             swell
             as
             when
             they
             eate
             wheat
             .
             Mays
             is
             the
             Indians
             bread
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             commonly
             eate
             boiled
             in
             the
             graine
             hote
             ,
             and
             they
             call
             it
             Mote
             ,
             as
             the
             Chinois
             and
             Iopponois
             eate
             their
             Rice
             sodden
             with
             the
             hote
             water
             ;
             sometimes
             they
             eate
             it
             baked
             .
             There
             is
             some
             Mays
             round
             and
             bigge
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             Lucanas
             ,
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             eate
             rosted
             as
             a
             delicate
             meat
             ,
             and
             hath
             a
             better
             taste
             then
             Buarbenses
             ,
             or
             rosted
             peason
             .
             There
             is
             another
             kinde
             of
             eating
             it
             more
             pleasant
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             grinde
             the
             Mays
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             small
             cakes
             of
             the
             flower
             ,
             ●he
             which
             they
             put
             in
             the
             fire
             ,
             and
             then
             bring
             them
             hote
             to
             the
             table
             .
             In
             some
             places
             they
             call
             them
             Arepa●
             .
             They
             make
             also
             round
             bowles
             of
             this
             paste
             ,
             and
             so
             trimme
             them
             that
             they
             continue
             long
             ,
             eating
             it
             as
             a
             dainty
             dish
             .
          
           
             They
             have
             invented
             at
             the
             Indies
             (
             for
             friandise
             and
             pleasure
             )
             a
             certaine
             kinde
             of
             paste
             ,
             they
             doe
             make
             of
             this
             flowe
             mixt
             with
             sugar
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             biscuits
             and
             mellinders
             .
             This
             Mays
             serves
             the
             Indians
             ,
             not
             only
             for
             bread
             ,
             but
             also
             for
             wine
             :
             for
             they
             do
             make
             their
             drinke
             thereof
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             are
             sooner
             drunke
             than
             with
             wine
             of
             grapes
             .
             They
             make
             this
             wine
             of
             Mays
             in
             diverse
             sortes
             and
             maners
             ,
             calling
             it
             in
             
               Peru
               Acua
            
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             most
             common
             name
             of
             the
             
               Indies
               Chicha
            
             .
             And
             the
             strongest
             is
             made
             like
             vnto
             beere
             ,
             steeping
             the
             graine
             vntill
             it
             breake
             .
             After
             they
             boyle
             it
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             it
             growes
             so
             strong
             ,
             as
             alittle
             overthrowes
             a
             man.
             In
             Peru
             they
             call
             this
             Sora
             ,
             it
             is
             defended
             by
             the
             Law
             ,
             for
             the
             
             great
             inconveniences
             that
             grow
             thereby
             ,
             making
             men
             drunke
             .
             But
             this
             Lawe
             is
             ill
             observed
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             vse
             it
             still
             ;
             yea
             they
             spend
             whole
             dayes
             and
             nights
             in
             drinking
             carowse
             .
             
             Pliny
             reporteth
             ,
             that
             this
             maner
             of
             beverage
             of
             graine
             stieped
             ,
             and
             after
             sodden
             ;
             wherewith
             they
             were
             drunke
             ,
             was
             in
             old
             time
             vsed
             in
             
               Spaine
               ,
               France
            
             and
             other
             Provinces
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             in
             Flanders
             they
             vse
             ale
             made
             of
             mault
             .
             There
             is
             another
             maner
             of
             making
             this
             Acua
             or
             Chicha
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             champe
             the
             mays
             ,
             and
             make
             a
             leven
             thereof
             ,
             and
             then
             boile
             it
             ;
             yea
             the
             Indians
             holde
             opinion
             ,
             that
             to
             make
             good
             leven
             ,
             it
             must
             bee
             champed
             by
             old
             withered
             women
             ,
             which
             makes
             a
             man
             sicke
             to
             heare
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             doe
             drinke
             it
             .
             The
             cleanliest
             manner
             ,
             the
             most
             wholesome
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             least
             harmeth
             ,
             is
             to
             roast
             the
             Mays
             ,
             which
             the
             most
             civil
             Indians
             doe
             vse
             ,
             and
             some
             Spaniardes
             ,
             yea
             for
             physicke
             :
             For
             in
             effect
             they
             finde
             it
             a
             very
             wholesome
             drinke
             for
             the
             reines
             ,
             so
             as
             you
             shall
             hardly
             finde
             any
             one
             at
             the
             Indies
             complaine
             of
             paine
             in
             the
             backe
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             do
             drinke
             of
             this
             Chicha
             .
             The
             Spanyards
             and
             Indians
             eate
             this
             Mays
             boyled
             and
             roasted
             for
             daintinesse
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             tender
             in
             the
             grape
             like
             milke
             ,
             they
             putte
             it
             into
             the
             pot
             ,
             and
             make
             sawces
             that
             are
             good
             to
             eate
             .
             The
             buds
             of
             Mays
             are
             very
             fatte
             ,
             and
             serve
             insteede
             of
             butter
             and
             oyle
             :
             so
             as
             this
             Mays
             at
             the
             Indies
             serves
             both
             for
             men
             and
             beasts
             ,
             for
             bread
             ,
             wine
             ,
             and
             oile
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             the
             Viceroy
             
               Don
               Francisco
               de
               Toledo
            
             saide
             ,
             that
             Peru
             hadde
             two
             things
             rich
             ,
             and
             of
             great
             norishment
             ,
             which
             were
             Mays
             ,
             and
             the
             cattell
             of
             the
             countrey
             .
             In
             truth
             he
             had
             reason
             ,
             for
             these
             two
             things
             did
             serve
             them
             as
             a
             thousand
             .
          
           
             I
             will
             aske
             sooner
             than
             I
             can
             answer
             it
             ,
             whence
             Mays
             was
             first
             carried
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             why
             they
             do
             call
             this
             
             profitable
             graine
             in
             
               Italie
               ,
               Turkie
            
             graine
             ?
             for
             in
             trueth
             I
             doe
             not
             finde
             that
             the
             Antients
             make
             any
             mention
             of
             this
             graine
             ,
             though
             that
             mil
             (
             that
             Plinie
             writes
             to
             come
             from
             the
             Indies
             into
             Italie
             ,
             tenne
             yeares
             before
             he
             didde
             write
             it
             )
             hath
             some
             resemblance
             vnto
             Mays
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             a
             graine
             ,
             as
             he
             saies
             ,
             that
             growes
             in
             reede
             ,
             and
             covers
             it selfe
             with
             the
             leafe
             ,
             and
             hath
             the
             toppe
             like
             haires
             ,
             being
             very
             fertile
             ;
             all
             which
             things
             agree
             not
             with
             mill
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             God
             hath
             imparted
             to
             ev'ry
             region
             what
             is
             needefull
             .
             To
             this
             continent
             he
             hath
             given
             wheate
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             chiefe
             nourishment
             of
             man
             ;
             and
             to
             the
             Indians
             he
             hath
             given
             Mays
             ,
             which
             hath
             the
             second
             place
             to
             wheate
             ,
             for
             the
             nourishment
             of
             men
             and
             beasts
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Yucas
             ,
             Caçavi
             ,
             Papas
             ,
             Chunes
             ,
             and
             Ris.
             CHAP.
             17.
             
          
           
             IN
             some
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             they
             vse
             a
             kinde
             of
             bread
             they
             call
             Cacavi
             ,
             which
             is
             made
             of
             a
             certaine
             roote
             they
             call
             Yuca
             :
             This
             Yuca
             is
             a
             great
             and
             grosse
             roote
             ,
             which
             they
             cutte
             in
             small
             morsells
             ,
             they
             grate
             or
             scrape
             it
             ,
             and
             then
             put
             it
             in
             a
             presse
             to
             straine
             ,
             making
             a
             thinne
             and
             broade
             cake
             thereof
             ,
             almost
             '
             like
             vnto
             a
             Moores
             target
             or
             buckler
             ;
             then
             doe
             they
             drie
             it
             ,
             and
             this
             is
             the
             breade
             they
             eate
             .
             It
             hath
             no
             taste
             ,
             but
             is
             healthfull
             and
             of
             good
             nourishment
             :
             For
             this
             reason
             we
             said
             ,
             being
             at
             S.
             Dominike
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             the
             proper
             foode
             for
             great
             eaters
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             might
             eate
             much
             ,
             without
             any
             feare
             of
             surffetting
             .
             They
             must
             of
             necessitie
             water
             this
             Cacavi
             before
             they
             eate
             it
             :
             it
             is
             sharpe
             ,
             and
             easely
             watered
             with
             water
             or
             broath
             ,
             wherein
             it
             is
             very
             good
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             swells
             much
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             make
             Capirotades
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             
             hardly
             stieped
             in
             milke
             ,
             in
             honny
             of
             canes
             ,
             or
             in
             wine
             ,
             for
             that
             these
             liquors
             cannot
             pierce
             it
             ,
             as
             it
             doth
             bread
             made
             of
             wheate
             .
             Of
             this
             Cacavi
             there
             is
             one
             kind
             more
             delicate
             than
             any
             other
             ,
             which
             is
             that
             they
             make
             of
             the
             slower
             called
             Xauxau
             ,
             which
             they
             do
             much
             esteeme
             in
             those
             partes
             .
             For
             my
             parte
             ,
             I
             esteeme
             more
             a
             morsell
             of
             bread
             ,
             how
             hard
             &
             black
             soever
             .
             It
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             that
             the
             iuice
             or
             water
             that
             commeth
             from
             this
             roote
             when
             they
             straine
             it
             ,
             which
             makes
             the
             Cacavi
             is
             a
             deadly
             poison
             ,
             and
             killes
             any
             that
             drinkes
             thereof
             :
             but
             the
             substance
             that
             remaineth
             ,
             is
             a
             very
             wholesome
             bread
             and
             nourishment
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             saide
             .
             There
             is
             another
             kinde
             of
             Yuca
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             sweet
             ,
             and
             hath
             not
             this
             poyson
             in
             the
             iuyce
             :
             this
             is
             eaten
             in
             the
             roote
             boyled
             or
             roasted
             ,
             and
             is
             good
             meate
             .
             Cacavi
             will
             keepe
             long
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             carry
             it
             to
             sea
             in
             steede
             of
             biscuit
             .
             The
             place
             where
             they
             vse
             most
             of
             this
             bread
             ,
             is
             at
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Barlovente
             ,
             which
             are
             S.
             
               Dominicke
               ,
               Cuba
               ,
               Port
               Ricco
               ,
               Iamaique
               ,
            
             and
             some
             others
             thereabouts
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             soile
             of
             these
             Ilands
             will
             neither
             beare
             wheate
             ,
             nor
             Mays
             ,
             for
             whenas
             they
             sowe
             wheate
             ,
             it
             comes
             vp
             well
             ,
             and
             is
             presently
             greene
             ,
             but
             so
             vnequally
             ,
             as
             they
             cannot
             gather
             it
             ;
             for
             of
             the
             seede
             sowen
             ,
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             some
             is
             spindled
             ,
             some
             is
             in
             the
             eare
             ,
             and
             some
             doth
             but
             bud
             ,
             one
             is
             great
             and
             an
             other
             little
             ,
             one
             is
             in
             the
             grasse
             and
             another
             in
             the
             graine
             ;
             and
             although
             they
             have
             carried
             labourers
             thither
             ,
             to
             see
             if
             there
             were
             any
             tillage
             or
             Art
             to
             be
             vsed
             ,
             yet
             could
             they
             finde
             no
             remedy
             for
             the
             quality
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             They
             carry
             meale
             from
             New
             Spaine
             or
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             which
             is
             so
             moist
             ,
             that
             hardly
             can
             they
             make
             any
             profitable
             bread
             ,
             or
             of
             good
             taste
             .
             The
             wafer
             cakes
             wherewith
             they
             say
             Masse
             ,
             did
             bend
             like
             to
             wet
             paper
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             extreame
             humiditie
             
             and
             heate
             which
             are
             ioyntly
             in
             that
             countrey
             .
             There
             is
             an
             other
             extreame
             contrary
             to
             this
             ,
             which
             hinders
             the
             growing
             of
             mais
             or
             wheate
             in
             some
             parts
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             on
             the
             height
             of
             the
             Sierre
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             the
             provinces
             which
             they
             call
             of
             Colao
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             this
             Realme
             ,
             where
             the
             climate
             is
             so
             colde
             and
             drie
             ,
             as
             it
             will
             not
             suffer
             any
             of
             these
             seedes
             to
             growe
             :
             in
             steede
             thereof
             the
             Indians
             vse
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             roote
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Papas
             ,
             these
             rootes
             are
             like
             to
             grownd
             nuttes
             ,
             they
             are
             small
             rootes
             ,
             which
             cast
             out
             many
             leaves
             .
             They
             gather
             this
             Papas
             ,
             and
             dry
             it
             well
             in
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             then
             beating
             it
             they
             make
             that
             which
             they
             call
             Chuno
             ,
             which
             keepes
             many
             daies
             ,
             and
             serves
             for
             bread
             .
             In
             this
             realme
             there
             is
             great
             trafficke
             of
             Chuno
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             carry
             to
             the
             mines
             of
             Potozi
             :
             they
             likewise
             eate
             of
             these
             Papas
             boyled
             or
             roasted
             ,
             there
             is
             one
             sweete
             of
             these
             kindes
             ,
             which
             growes
             in
             hot
             places
             ,
             whereof
             they
             do
             make
             certaine
             sawces
             and
             minced
             meates
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Locro
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             these
             rootes
             are
             the
             bread
             of
             that
             land
             ;
             so
             as
             when
             the
             yeare
             is
             good
             ,
             they
             reioyce
             much
             ,
             for
             that
             oftentimes
             they
             freeze
             in
             the
             earth
             ,
             so
             great
             is
             the
             cold
             of
             that
             Region
             :
             they
             carry
             Mays
             from
             the
             valley
             or
             sea
             coast
             ,
             and
             the
             Spaniardes
             which
             are
             dainty
             ,
             carrie
             likewise
             from
             the
             same
             places
             wheate
             meale
             ,
             whereof
             they
             doe
             make
             good
             breade
             ,
             because
             that
             the
             land
             is
             drie
             .
          
           
             In
             other
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             at
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             they
             vse
             Rice
             insteade
             of
             bread
             ,
             whereof
             there
             growes
             very
             good
             ,
             and
             in
             great
             aboundance
             in
             all
             that
             countrey
             ,
             and
             in
             China
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             of
             good
             nourishment
             ,
             they
             seethe
             it
             in
             purcelaines
             ,
             and
             after
             mix
             it
             hote
             with
             the
             water
             amongest
             other
             meates
             .
             In
             many
             places
             they
             do
             make
             their
             wine
             and
             drinke
             of
             this
             Rice
             ,
             steeping
             ,
             and
             
             then
             after
             boyling
             it
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             the
             beere
             in
             Flaunders
             ,
             or
             the
             Acua
             in
             Peru.
             Rice
             is
             a
             meate
             not
             much
             lesse
             common
             and
             generall
             throughout
             the
             world
             ,
             than
             wheate
             or
             mays
             ,
             and
             perchaunce
             more
             ;
             for
             besides
             that
             they
             vse
             it
             ,
             in
             
               China
               ,
               Ioppon
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Philippines
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             ;
             it
             is
             a
             graine
             most
             common
             in
             Affrike
             and
             Ethiopia
             .
             It
             requires
             a
             wet
             ground
             ,
             almost
             overflowne
             like
             to
             a
             medow
             .
             In
             
               Europe
               ,
               Peru
            
             ,
             and
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             they
             have
             the
             vse
             of
             wheate
             ,
             they
             eate
             Rice
             as
             a
             meate
             ,
             and
             not
             for
             bread
             ;
             they
             seethe
             it
             with
             milke
             or
             with
             broth
             ,
             or
             in
             some
             other
             sorte
             .
             The
             most
             exquisite
             Rice
             commeth
             from
             the
             Philippines
             and
             China
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             sayde
             .
             And
             this
             may
             suffice
             to
             vnderstand
             what
             they
             eate
             generally
             at
             the
             Indies
             in
             steade
             of
             bread
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             divers
             Rootes
             which
             growe
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             18.
             
          
           
             ALthough
             in
             these
             parts
             the
             Land
             be
             more
             aboundant
             and
             fertile
             in
             fruites
             that
             growes
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             great
             diversitie
             of
             fruite
             trees
             ,
             and
             plants
             we
             have
             ;
             yet
             for
             rootes
             and
             other
             things
             that
             grow
             vnder
             the
             earth
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             vse
             for
             meates
             ,
             in
             my
             opinion
             there
             is
             greatest
             aboundance
             there
             :
             for
             of
             these
             kindes
             of
             plants
             ,
             we
             have
             readishes
             ,
             turneps
             ,
             parsneps
             ,
             carrots
             ,
             liekes
             ,
             garlike
             ,
             and
             some
             other
             profitable
             rootes
             .
             But
             in
             those
             countries
             they
             have
             so
             many
             divers
             sortes
             ,
             as
             I
             cannot
             reckon
             them
             ;
             those
             which
             I
             now
             remember
             besides
             Papas
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             principall
             ,
             there
             is
             
               Ocas
               ,
               Yanococas
               ,
               Camotes
               ,
               Vatas
               ,
               Xiquimas
               ,
               Yuca
               ,
               Cochu●ha
               ,
               Cavi
               ,
               Totora
               ,
               Mani
               ,
            
             and
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             other
             kindes
             ,
             as
             the
             Patattres
             ,
             which
             
             they
             eate
             as
             a
             delicate
             and
             toothsome
             meate
             .
             They
             have
             likewise
             carried
             fruites
             to
             the
             Indies
             from
             these
             parts
             ,
             the
             which
             prosper
             better
             there
             ,
             then
             the
             Indian
             plants
             do
             ,
             brought
             into
             Europe
             ;
             the
             reason
             in
             my
             opinion
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             greater
             variety
             of
             temperatures
             then
             in
             these
             partes
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             the
             plants
             in
             those
             regions
             do
             rise
             and
             prosper
             better
             ,
             fitting
             themselves
             to
             the
             temperature
             they
             require
             .
             And
             the
             rootes
             and
             plants
             which
             grow
             there
             ,
             and
             were
             not
             transported
             from
             hence
             ,
             are
             better
             then
             they
             be
             heere
             ;
             for
             onions
             ,
             garlike
             and
             parsnips
             are
             not
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             as
             they
             be
             at
             Peru
             :
             and
             as
             for
             turnips
             ,
             there
             is
             so
             great
             abundance
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             increased
             in
             so
             me
             places
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             as
             they
             have
             affirmed
             to
             me
             ,
             )
             they
             could
             not
             destroy
             the
             aboundance
             which
             grew
             vp
             ,
             for
             to
             sowe
             corne
             there
             .
             Wee
             have
             seene
             redish
             rootes
             as
             bigge
             as
             a
             mans
             arme
             ,
             very
             tender
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             good
             taste
             ,
             and
             of
             these
             tootes
             I
             have
             spoken
             ,
             some
             serve
             for
             ordinatie
             meate
             ,
             as
             the
             Camores
             ,
             which
             being
             rosted
             ,
             serve
             as
             pulse
             .
             There
             are
             other
             rootes
             that
             serve
             them
             for
             dainties
             ,
             as
             the
             Cochuch●
             ;
             it
             is
             a
             small
             sweete
             roote
             ,
             which
             some
             preserve
             for
             more
             delight
             .
             There
             are
             other
             rootes
             fit
             to
             coole
             ,
             as
             the
             Piquima
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             qualitie
             very
             cold
             and
             moist
             ,
             and
             in
             summer
             it
             refresheth
             and
             quencheth
             the
             thirst
             ;
             but
             the
             Papas
             and
             Ocas
             ,
             be
             the
             chiefe
             for
             nourishment
             and
             substance
             .
             The
             Indians
             esteeme
             garlike
             above
             all
             the
             rootes
             of
             Europe
             ,
             and
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             fruite
             of
             great
             force
             :
             wherein
             they
             want
             no
             reason
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             comforts
             and
             warmes
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             eate
             it
             with
             an
             appetite
             rawe
             as
             it
             comes
             out
             of
             the
             ground
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             divers
             sortes
             of
             greene
             Hearbes
             ,
             and
             Pulses
             ,
             and
             of
             those
             they
             call
             Concombres
             ,
             Pines
             ,
             or
             Pine
             Apples
             ,
             small
             fruites
             of
             Chille
             ,
             and
             of
             Prunes
             .
             
               CHAP.
               19
            
          
           
             SE●ing
             wee
             have
             begunne
             with
             the
             lesser
             Plants
             ,
             I
             might
             in
             few
             words
             ,
             touch
             that
             which
             concernes
             Flowers
             and
             Pot-hearbes
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             the
             Latines
             call
             Arbusta
             ,
             without
             any
             mention
             of
             trees
             .
             There
             are
             some
             kindes
             of
             these
             shrubbes
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             are
             of
             very
             good
             taste
             .
             The
             first
             Spaniards
             named
             many
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             with
             such
             Spanish
             names
             ,
             as
             they
             did
             most
             resemble
             ,
             as
             
               Pines
               ,
               Concombres
            
             ,
             and
             Prunes
             ,
             althogh
             they
             be
             very
             different
             fruites
             to
             those
             which
             are
             so
             called
             in
             Spaine
             .
             The
             Pines
             ,
             or
             Pine-aples
             ,
             are
             of
             the
             same
             fashion
             and
             forme
             outwardly
             to
             those
             of
             Castlle
             ,
             but
             within
             they
             wholy
             differ
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             have
             neither
             aples
             ,
             norscales
             ,
             but
             are
             all
             one
             flesh
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             eaten
             when
             the
             skinne
             is
             off
             ,
             it
             is
             fruite
             that
             hath
             an
             excellent
             smell
             ,
             and
             is
             very
             pleasant
             and
             delightfull
             in
             taste
             ,
             it
             is
             full
             of
             iuyce
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             sweete
             and
             sharpe
             taste
             ,
             they
             ●ate
             it
             being
             cut
             in
             morcells
             ,
             and
             steeped
             a
             while
             in
             water
             and
             salt
             .
             Some
             say
             that
             this
             breedes
             choler
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             vse
             ther●of
             is
             not
             very
             healthfull
             .
             But
             I
             have
             not
             seen●
             any
             experience
             thereof
             ,
             that
             might
             breede
             beleefe
             .
             They
             grow
             one
             by
             one
             like
             a
             cane
             or
             stalke
             ,
             which
             riseth
             amongst
             many
             leaves
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             lillie
             ,
             but
             somewhat
             bigger
             .
             The
             apple
             is
             on
             the
             toppe
             of
             every
             cane
             ,
             it
             growes
             in
             hote
             and
             moist
             groundes
             ,
             and
             the
             best
             are
             those
             of
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Barlovente
             .
             It
             growes
             not
             in
             Peru
             ,
             but
             they
             carry
             them
             from
             the
             Andes
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             neither
             good
             nor
             ripe
             .
             One
             presented
             one
             of
             these
             Pine-apples
             ,
             to
             the
             Emperour
             Charles
             the
             fift
             ,
             
             which
             must
             have
             cost
             much
             paine
             ,
             and
             care
             to
             bring
             it
             so
             farre
             ,
             with
             the
             plant
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             yet
             would
             he
             not
             trie
             the
             taste
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             conserves
             of
             these
             Pines
             ,
             which
             was
             very
             good
             .
             Those
             which
             they
             call
             Concombres
             ,
             are
             no
             trees
             ,
             but
             shrubbes
             ,
             continuing
             but
             one
             yeere
             .
             They
             gave
             it
             this
             name
             ,
             for
             that
             some
             of
             this
             fruite
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             is
             in
             length
             ,
             and
             roundnes
             like
             to
             the
             Concombres
             of
             Spaine
             :
             but
             for
             the
             rest
             they
             differ
             much
             ,
             for
             they
             are
             not
             greene
             ,
             but
             violet
             ,
             yellow
             ,
             or
             white
             ,
             neither
             are
             they
             thornie
             or
             rough
             ,
             but
             pollished
             and
             even
             ,
             having
             a
             very
             different
             taste
             ,
             and
             farre
             better
             then
             that
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             a
             sharpe
             sweete
             taste
             ,
             very
             pleaasant
             when
             it
             is
             ripe
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             so
             sharpe
             as
             the
             Pine.
             They
             are
             very
             coole
             ,
             full
             of
             liquor
             and
             of
             easie
             digestion
             ,
             and
             in
             time
             of
             heate
             ,
             fit
             to
             refresh
             .
             They
             take
             away
             the
             rinde
             which
             is
             white
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             remaines
             is
             meat
             .
             They
             grow
             in
             a
             temperate
             soile
             ,
             and
             require
             watering
             .
             And
             although
             for
             the
             resemblance
             they
             call
             them
             Concombres
             ,
             yet
             are
             there
             many
             of
             them
             round
             ,
             and
             others
             of
             a
             different
             fashion
             :
             so
             as
             they
             have
             not
             the
             figure
             of
             Concombres
             .
             I
             do
             not
             remember
             to
             have
             seene
             this
             kinde
             of
             fruite
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             nor
             at
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             but
             vpon
             the
             Lanos
             of
             Peru.
             That
             which
             they
             call
             the
             little
             fruite
             of
             Chille
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             ,
             very
             pleasant
             to
             eate
             ,
             &
             comes
             neere
             the
             taste
             of
             cheries
             ,
             but
             in
             all
             other
             things
             it
             differs
             much
             :
             for
             that
             it
             is
             no
             tree
             ,
             but
             an
             hearbe
             ,
             which
             growes
             little
             and
             spreades
             vpon
             the
             earth
             ,
             casting
             forth
             this
             little
             fruite
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             colour
             and
             graines
             ,
             resembles
             almost
             the
             mulbery
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             white
             and
             not
             ripe
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             more
             rough
             and
             bigger
             then
             the
             mulbery
             .
             They
             say
             this
             little
             fruite
             is
             naturally
             found
             in
             the
             fieldes
             of
             Chille
             ,
             where
             I
             have
             seene
             of
             them
             .
             They
             set
             it
             vpon
             plants
             
             and
             branches
             ,
             and
             it
             growes
             like
             any
             other
             shrubbe
             .
             Those
             which
             they
             call
             Prunes
             ,
             are
             verily
             the
             fruites
             of
             trees
             ,
             and
             have
             more
             resemblance
             then
             the
             rest
             to
             our
             plumbs
             .
             There
             are
             divers
             sorts
             ,
             whereof
             they
             call
             some
             Prunes
             of
             Nicaragua
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             very
             red
             and
             small
             ,
             and
             have
             little
             meat
             vpon
             the
             stone
             ,
             but
             that
             little
             is
             of
             an
             exquisite
             taste
             ;
             and
             of
             a
             sharpenes
             ,
             as
             good
             ,
             or
             rather
             better
             then
             cheries
             .
             They
             hold
             this
             fruite
             to
             be
             very
             holesome
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             give
             it
             to
             sicke
             folkes
             ,
             especially
             to
             provoke
             an
             appetite
             .
             There
             are
             others
             that
             be
             great
             and
             of
             a
             darke
             colour
             ,
             they
             have
             much
             meat
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             grosse
             and
             of
             no
             taste
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             Chavacanas
             ,
             which
             have
             every
             one
             two
             or
             three
             small
             stones
             .
             But
             to
             returne
             to
             pot-hearbs
             ,
             I
             finde
             not
             that
             the
             Indians
             had
             any
             gardins
             of
             divers
             hearbs
             and
             plants
             ,
             but
             did
             onely
             till
             the
             land
             in
             some
             partes
             for
             pulses
             ,
             which
             they
             vse
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             they
             call
             Fr●solles
             and
             Palares
             ,
             which
             serve
             them
             as
             our
             lentils
             ,
             beanes
             ,
             or
             tares
             :
             neither
             have
             I
             knowne
             that
             these
             pulses
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             kinds
             that
             be
             in
             Europe
             ,
             were
             there
             before
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             ,
             who
             carried
             plants
             and
             pulses
             from
             Spaine
             thither
             ,
             where
             they
             now
             grow
             and
             increase
             wonderfully
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             exceede
             greatly
             the
             fertilitie
             of
             these
             partes
             .
             As
             if
             we
             speake
             of
             mellons
             which
             grow
             in
             the
             vallie
             of
             Yuca
             ,
             in
             Peru
             ,
             whose
             roote
             becomes
             a
             stalke
             that
             continues
             many
             yeeres
             carrying
             mellons
             yeerely
             ,
             and
             they
             trimme
             it
             like
             vnto
             a
             tree
             ;
             a
             thing
             which
             I
             do
             not
             know
             to
             be
             in
             any
             part
             of
             Spaine
             .
             But
             that
             is
             more
             monstrous
             of
             the
             Calibasses
             or
             Indian
             Pompions
             ,
             and
             the
             greatnes
             they
             have
             as
             they
             grow
             ,
             especially
             those
             which
             are
             proper
             to
             the
             Countrie
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Capallos
             ;
             the
             which
             they
             eate
             most
             commonly
             in
             Lent
             ,
             boiled
             and
             trimmed
             with
             some
             other
             sawce
             .
             There
             are
             
             a
             thousand
             kindes
             of
             Calibasses
             ,
             some
             are
             so
             deformed
             in
             their
             bignes
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             rinde
             cut
             in
             the
             middest
             and
             clensed
             ,
             they
             make
             as
             it
             were
             baskets
             to
             put
             in
             all
             their
             meat
             for
             their
             dinner
             .
             Of
             the
             lesser
             they
             make
             vessells
             to
             eate
             and
             drinke
             in
             ,
             and
             do
             trimme
             them
             hansomely
             for
             many
             vses
             .
             I
             have
             spoken
             this
             of
             small
             plants
             ,
             wee
             will
             now
             speake
             of
             greater
             ;
             but
             first
             of
             their
             Axi
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             the
             lesser
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Axi
             or
             Indian
             Pepper
             .
             
               CHAP.
               20.
            
             
          
           
             THey
             have
             not
             found
             at
             the
             West
             Indies
             any
             kinde
             of
             Spices
             ,
             proper
             or
             peculiar
             to
             them
             ,
             as
             pepper
             ,
             cloves
             ,
             cinamon
             ,
             nu●megges
             or
             ginger
             ,
             although
             one
             of
             our
             company
             ,
             who
             had
             travelled
             much
             ,
             and
             in
             diverse
             partes
             ,
             tolde
             vs
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             desarts
             of
             the
             Iland
             of
             Iamaique
             he
             had
             found
             trees
             where
             pepper
             grewe
             .
             But
             they
             are
             not
             yet
             assured
             thereof
             ,
             neither
             is
             there
             anie
             trade
             of
             these
             spices
             at
             the
             
               Indies
               ,
            
             .
             The
             ginger
             was
             carried
             from
             the
             Indies
             to
             Hispaniola
             ,
             and
             it
             hath
             multiplied
             so
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             they
             know
             not
             what
             to
             do
             with
             the
             great
             aboundaunce
             they
             have
             .
             In
             the
             fleete
             the
             yeare
             1587.
             they
             brought
             22053.
             quintalls
             of
             ginger
             to
             Seville
             :
             but
             the
             naturall
             spice
             that
             God
             hath
             given
             to
             the
             weast
             Indies
             ,
             is
             that
             we
             call
             in
             Castill
             ,
             Indian
             pepper
             ,
             and
             in
             
               India
               ,
               Axi
            
             ,
             as
             a
             generall
             worde
             taken
             from
             the
             first
             land
             of
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             which
             they
             conquered
             .
             In
             the
             language
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             it
             is
             called
             Vchu
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             of
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Chili
            
             .
             This
             plant
             is
             well
             knowne
             ,
             and
             therefore
             I
             will
             speake
             alittle
             ,
             onely
             wee
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             in
             olde
             time
             it
             was
             much
             esteemd
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             ,
             which
             they
             carried
             into
             places
             where
             it
             grew
             not
             ,
             as
             a
             marchandise
             
             of
             consequence
             .
             It
             growes
             not
             vpon
             cold
             grounds
             ,
             as
             on
             the
             Sierre
             of
             Peru
             ,
             but
             in
             hote
             valleis
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             often
             watered
             .
             There
             is
             of
             this
             Axi
             of
             diverse
             colours
             ,
             some
             is
             greene
             ,
             some
             red
             ,
             some
             yellow
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             a
             burning
             color
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Caribe
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             extreamely
             sharpe
             and
             biting
             ;
             there
             is
             an
             other
             sort
             not
             so
             sharpe
             ,
             but
             is
             so
             sweete
             ,
             as
             they
             may
             eate
             it
             alone
             as
             any
             other
             fruit
             .
             There
             is
             some
             of
             it
             very
             small
             and
             pleasing
             in
             the
             mouth
             ,
             almost
             like
             to
             the
             smell
             of
             muske
             ,
             and
             is
             very
             good
             .
             That
             which
             is
             sharpe
             and
             biting
             in
             this
             Axi
             ,
             be
             the
             veines
             and
             the
             graine
             onely
             ;
             the
             rest
             is
             not
             :
             for
             that
             they
             eate
             it
             greene
             and
             dry
             ,
             whole
             and
             beaten
             ,
             in
             the
             pot
             ,
             and
             in
             sawces
             ,
             being
             the
             chiefe
             sawce
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             spice
             they
             have
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             When
             this
             Axi
             is
             taken
             moderately
             ,
             it
             helps
             and
             comforts
             the
             stomacke
             for
             digestion
             :
             but
             if
             they
             take
             too
             much
             ,
             it
             hath
             bad
             effects
             ,
             for
             of
             it selfe
             it
             is
             very
             hote
             ,
             fuming
             ,
             and
             pierceth
             greatly
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             vse
             thereof
             is
             preiudiciall
             to
             the
             health
             of
             yong
             folkes
             ,
             chiefely
             to
             the
             soule
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             provokes
             to
             lust
             .
             It
             is
             strange
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             fire
             and
             heate
             of
             it
             be
             well
             knowne
             by
             experience
             ,
             and
             that
             every
             man
             saies
             ,
             it
             burnes
             in
             the
             mouth
             and
             the
             stomacke
             ;
             yet
             some
             ,
             yea
             many
             holde
             ,
             that
             the
             Indian
             pepper
             is
             not
             hote
             ,
             but
             colde
             ,
             and
             well
             tempered
             .
             But
             I
             might
             say
             to
             them
             ,
             the
             like
             should
             be
             of
             pepper
             ;
             though
             they
             brought
             me
             as
             many
             experiences
             as
             they
             woulde
             of
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             :
             yet
             is
             it
             a
             very
             mockery
             to
             say
             it
             is
             not
             hote
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             in
             the
             highest
             degree
             .
             They
             vse
             salt
             to
             temper
             this
             Axi
             ,
             having
             great
             sorce
             to
             correct
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             moderate
             one
             with
             the
             other
             by
             the
             contrarietie
             that
             is
             in
             them
             .
             They
             vse
             also
             Tomates
             ,
             which
             are
             colde
             and
             very
             wholesome
             .
             It
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             graine
             great
             and
             full
             of
             iuyce
             ,
             the
             which
             gives
             a
             good
             taste
             to
             
             sawce
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             good
             to
             eate
             .
             They
             have
             generally
             throughout
             the
             Indies
             of
             this
             Indian
             pepper
             ,
             at
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             new
             
               Spaine
               ,
               Peru
            
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             that
             is
             discovered
             .
             And
             as
             mays
             is
             the
             generall
             graine
             for
             bread
             ,
             so
             Axi
             is
             the
             most
             common
             spice
             for
             sawces
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Plane
             tree
             .
             
               CHAP.
               21.
            
             
          
           
             COmming
             to
             the
             greater
             plants
             or
             trees
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             first
             that
             shall
             be
             needefull
             to
             treate
             of
             ,
             is
             the
             Plane
             or
             Platano
             ,
             as
             the
             vulgar
             call
             it
             .
             I
             have
             been
             sometimes
             in
             doubt
             ,
             whether
             the
             Plane
             which
             the
             Antients
             have
             so
             much
             celebrated
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             Indies
             were
             of
             one
             kinde
             .
             This
             well
             observed
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             they
             write
             of
             the
             other
             ,
             without
             all
             doubt
             they
             will
             appeare
             to
             be
             of
             sundry
             kindes
             .
             The
             reason
             why
             the
             Spaniards
             called
             it
             Plane
             ,
             (
             for
             the
             Indians
             had
             no
             such
             name
             )
             was
             as
             in
             other
             trees
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             have
             found
             some
             resemblance
             of
             the
             one
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             even
             as
             they
             called
             some
             fruites
             ,
             prunes
             ,
             pines
             ,
             and
             cucumbers
             ,
             being
             far
             different
             from
             those
             which
             are
             called
             by
             those
             names
             in
             Castille
             .
             The
             thing
             wherein
             was
             most
             resemblance
             ,
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             Planes
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             the
             Antients
             did
             celebrate
             ,
             is
             the
             greatnes
             of
             the
             leaves
             ,
             for
             that
             these
             have
             them
             very
             great
             and
             coole
             ,
             and
             the
             Antients
             did
             likewise
             much
             esteeme
             them
             for
             the
             greatnesse
             and
             coolenesse
             of
             their
             leaves
             .
             It
             is
             also
             a
             plant
             that
             requireth
             much
             water
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             maner
             continually
             ,
             which
             agrees
             with
             the
             sacred
             Scripture
             that
             saith
             ;
             
               Like
               to
               the
               Plane
               neere
               the
               waters
               .
            
             But
             in
             truth
             there
             is
             no
             more
             comparison
             nor
             resemblance
             of
             the
             one
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             then
             there
             is
             (
             as
             the
             Proverb
             saith
             )
             betwixt
             an
             egge
             and
             a
             chesnut
             .
             For
             first
             ,
             the
             antient
             plane
             
             carries
             no
             fruit
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             they
             made
             no
             account
             the●
             ▪
             of
             ,
             but
             the
             chiefest
             reason
             why
             they
             esteemed
             it
             ,
             was
             ,
             for
             the
             shadow
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             was
             no
             more
             Sunne
             vnder
             a
             Plane
             than
             vnder
             a
             roofe
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             the
             reason
             why
             they
             shoulde
             regarde
             it
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             yea
             make
             great
             accompt
             thereof
             ,
             is
             by
             reason
             of
             this
             fruite
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             good
             ;
             for
             they
             have
             little
             shade
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             the
             antient
             Plane
             had
             the
             body
             so
             bigge
             ,
             and
             the
             boughs
             so
             spread
             ,
             
             that
             Pliny
             reporteth
             of
             one
             Licinius
             a
             Romane
             Captaine
             ,
             who
             with
             eighteene
             of
             his
             companions
             dined
             at
             ease
             in
             th'hollow
             of
             one
             of
             these
             planes
             :
             and
             of
             the
             Emperour
             
               Caius
               Caligula
            
             ,
             who
             with
             eleven
             of
             his
             ghests
             feasted
             vpon
             the
             toppe
             of
             an
             other
             Plane
             ,
             where
             he
             made
             them
             a
             sumptuous
             banquet
             .
             The
             Indian
             Planes
             have
             neither
             so
             great
             nor
             hollow
             bodies
             ,
             not
             so
             broade
             boughs
             .
             He
             saieth
             moreover
             ,
             that
             the
             auntient
             Planes
             grew
             in
             Italie
             and
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             although
             they
             had
             beene
             brought
             thither
             from
             Greece
             ;
             and
             first
             from
             Asia
             ,
             but
             the
             Indians
             Planes
             growe
             neither
             in
             Italy
             nor
             in
             Spaine
             .
             I
             say
             they
             growe
             not
             there
             ,
             for
             although
             we
             have
             seene
             some
             at
             Seville
             in
             the
             Kings
             gardins
             ,
             yet
             they
             prosper
             not
             ,
             nor
             are
             of
             any
             account
             .
             Finally
             ,
             whatsoever
             they
             find
             alike
             betwixt
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             is
             very
             different
             .
             For
             although
             the
             leaves
             of
             the
             auntient
             Planes
             were
             very
             great
             ,
             yet
             were
             they
             not
             such
             ,
             nor
             so
             great
             as
             those
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             seeing
             that
             Pliny
             compares
             it
             to
             the
             leafe
             of
             a
             Vine
             or
             Figge
             tree
             .
          
           
             
             The
             leaves
             of
             the
             Indian
             Plane
             ,
             are
             of
             a
             wonderfull
             bignes
             ,
             and
             are
             ,
             in
             a
             maner
             ,
             sufficient
             to
             cover
             a
             man
             from
             the
             foote
             to
             the
             head
             ,
             so
             as
             no
             man
             can
             doubt
             but
             there
             is
             great
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             .
             But
             put
             the
             case
             that
             this
             Indian
             Plane
             be
             different
             from
             the
             ancient
             ,
             yet
             deserves
             it
             no
             lesse
             commendation
             ,
             
             it
             may
             be
             ,
             more
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             profitable
             qualities
             it
             hath
             .
             It
             is
             a
             plant
             that
             makes
             a
             stocke
             within
             theearth
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             which
             springs
             many
             and
             sundrie
             siens
             and
             sprigges
             ,
             divided
             ,
             and
             not
             ioyned
             together
             .
             These
             sprigges
             grow
             bigge
             ,
             every
             one
             making
             a
             small
             tree
             apart
             ,
             and
             in
             growing
             they
             cast
             forth
             these
             leaves
             ,
             which
             are
             of
             a
             fine
             greene
             smooth
             ,
             and
             great
             as
             I
             have
             said
             .
             When
             it
             is
             growne
             to
             the
             height
             of
             a
             stade
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             or
             two
             ,
             it
             puttes
             forth
             one
             only
             bough
             of
             fruite
             ,
             whereon
             sometimes
             there
             are
             great
             numbers
             of
             this
             fruite
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             lesse
             .
             I
             have
             tolde
             vpon
             some
             of
             these
             boughs
             three
             hundred
             ,
             whereof
             every
             one
             was
             a
             spanne
             long
             more
             or
             lesse
             ,
             and
             two
             or
             three
             fingers
             bigge
             ;
             yet
             is
             there
             much
             difference
             heerein
             ,
             betwixt
             some
             and
             others
             ,
             they
             take
             away
             the
             rinde
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             is
             a
             firme
             kernell
             and
             tender
             ,
             good
             to
             eate
             ,
             and
             nourishing
             .
             This
             fruite
             inclines
             more
             to
             cold
             then
             heate
             .
             They
             are
             accustomed
             to
             gather
             the
             boughs
             or
             clusters
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             being
             greene
             ,
             and
             put
             them
             into
             vessells
             ,
             where
             they
             ripen
             ,
             being
             well
             covered
             ,
             especially
             when
             there
             is
             a
             certaine
             hearbe
             mingled
             with
             it
             ,
             which
             serves
             for
             this
             effect
             .
             If
             they
             suffer
             them
             to
             ripen
             on
             the
             tree
             ,
             they
             have
             a
             better
             taste
             ,
             and
             a
             very
             good
             smell
             ,
             like
             to
             Camoisses
             or
             sweet
             apples
             .
             They
             last
             almost
             all
             the
             yeere
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             are
             alwaies
             yong
             ones
             that
             grow
             out
             of
             this
             stocke
             ;
             so
             as
             when
             one
             endes
             ,
             another
             beginnes
             to
             yeelde
             his
             fruite
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             halfe
             ripe
             and
             the
             other
             beginnes
             to
             bud
             anew
             ,
             so
             as
             one
             succeedes
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             fruite
             continues
             the
             whole
             yeere
             .
             In
             gathering
             the
             cluster
             ,
             they
             cut
             the
             sprigge
             or
             stalke
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             beares
             but
             one
             ,
             and
             never
             but
             once
             :
             but
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             ,
             the
             stalke
             remaines
             ,
             and
             castes
             forth
             new
             sienes
             or
             stalkes
             ,
             vntill
             it
             growes
             olde
             and
             dies
             .
             This
             Plane
             continues
             
             many
             yeares
             ,
             and
             requires
             much
             moisture
             ,
             and
             a
             very
             hote
             ground
             .
             They
             put
             ashos
             at
             the
             foote
             of
             it
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             ●●tertaining
             ther●f
             ,
             and
             they
             make
             small
             groves
             ;
             and
             very
             thicke
             ,
             which
             are
             of
             great
             profit
             and
             revenue
             vnto
             them
             ;
             for
             that
             it
             is
             the
             fruite
             ▪
             they
             vse
             most
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             is
             generall
             in
             all
             places
             ,
             although
             they
             say
             the
             first
             beginning
             comes
             from
             Ethiopia
             .
             And
             in
             trueth
             the
             Negros
             vse
             them
             much
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             they
             serve
             them
             as
             bread
             ,
             yea
             they
             make
             wine
             of
             them
             .
             They
             eate
             this
             fruite
             rawe
             like
             other
             fruits
             ;
             they
             likewise
             roast
             it
             ,
             and
             make
             many
             sorts
             of
             potages
             ,
             and
             conserves
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             thinges
             it
             serveth
             very
             well
             .
             There
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             small
             Planes
             ,
             white
             and
             very
             delicate
             ,
             which
             in
             Hispaniola
             they
             call
             Dominiques
             .
             There
             are
             others
             which
             are
             stronger
             and
             bigger
             ,
             and
             red
             of
             colour
             .
             There
             growes
             none
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             but
             are
             brought
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             from
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Cuernavaca
            
             ,
             and
             other
             vallies
             .
             Vpon
             the
             firme
             land
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             Ilands
             there
             are
             great
             store
             of
             Planes
             ,
             like
             vnto
             thicke
             groves
             .
             If
             this
             plant
             were
             fit
             for
             the
             fire
             ,
             it
             were
             the
             most
             profitable
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             nothing
             fit
             ,
             for
             neither
             the
             body
             no●
             the
             boughs
             will
             burne
             ,
             and
             much
             lesse
             will
             it
             serve
             for
             building
             ,
             being
             a
             sappy
             wood
             ,
             and
             without
             force
             .
             Yet
             
               Don
               Alonze
               Darzilla
            
             (
             as
             it
             is
             said
             )
             vsed
             the
             leaves
             of
             this
             tree
             dried
             ,
             to
             write
             a
             parte
             of
             the
             Auricana
             ,
             and
             in
             truth
             it
             may
             serve
             for
             want
             of
             paper
             ,
             seeing
             that
             the
             leafe
             is
             as
             broade
             as
             a
             sheet
             of
             paper
             ,
             or
             little
             lesse
             ,
             and
             foure
             times
             as
             long
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Cacao
             and
             Coca
             .
             
               CHAP.
               22.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             the
             Plane
             be
             the
             most
             profitable
             ,
             yet
             that
             Cacao
             is
             most
             esteemed
             at
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             the
             Coca
             in
             
             Peru
             ;
             in
             which
             two
             trees
             they
             have
             great
             superstition
             .
             The
             Cacao
             is
             a
             fruit
             little
             lesse
             than
             almonds
             ,
             yet
             more
             satte
             ,
             the
             which
             being
             roasted
             hath
             no
             ill●taste
             .
             It
             is
             so
             much
             esteemed
             amongest
             the
             Indians
             (
             yea
             and
             among
             the
             Spaniards
             )
             that
             it
             is
             one
             of
             the
             richest
             and
             the
             greatest
             traffickes
             of
             new
             Spaine
             :
             for
             being
             a
             drie
             fruite
             ,
             and
             that
             keepes
             long
             without
             corruption
             ,
             they
             carry
             whole
             shippes
             loaden
             from
             the
             province
             of
             Guatimalla
             .
             The
             last
             yeare
             an
             English
             Pirat
             did
             burne
             in
             the
             Port
             of
             Guatulco
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             above
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             charges
             of
             Cacao
             .
             They
             vse
             it
             in
             steede
             of
             money
             ,
             for
             with
             five
             Cacaos
             they
             buy
             one
             thing
             ,
             with
             thirtie
             an
             other
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             hundred
             an
             other
             ,
             without
             any
             contradiction
             ;
             and
             they
             vse
             to
             give
             it
             to
             the
             poore
             that
             beg
             for
             almes
             .
             The
             chiefe
             vse
             of
             this
             Cacao
             ,
             is
             in
             a
             drincke
             which
             they
             call
             Choch●laté
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             great
             accompt
             in
             that
             Country
             ,
             foolishly
             ,
             and
             without
             reason
             ;
             for
             it
             is
             loathsome
             to
             such
             as
             are
             not
             acquainted
             with
             it
             ,
             having
             askumme
             or
             froth
             that
             is
             very
             vnpleasant
             to
             taste
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             not
             very
             well
             conceited
             thereof
             .
             Yet
             it
             is
             a
             drinke
             very
             much
             esteemed
             among
             the
             Indians
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             feast
             noble
             men
             as
             they
             passe
             through
             their
             Country
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             both
             men
             and
             women
             ,
             that
             are
             accustomed
             to
             the
             Countrey
             ,
             are
             very
             greedy
             of
             this
             Chocholaté
             .
             They
             say
             they
             make
             diverse
             sortes
             of
             it
             ,
             some
             hote
             ,
             some
             colde
             ,
             and
             some
             temperate
             ,
             and
             put
             therein
             much
             of
             that
             Chili
             ;
             yea
             they
             make
             paste
             thereof
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             say
             is
             good
             for
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             Catarre
             .
             Whatsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             such
             as
             have
             not
             been
             nourished
             there
             ,
             are
             not
             very
             curious
             thereof
             .
             The
             tree
             whereon
             this
             fruite
             growes
             ,
             is
             of
             reasonable
             bignesse
             ,
             and
             well
             fashioned
             ,
             it
             is
             so
             tender
             ,
             that
             to
             keepe
             it
             from
             the
             burning
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             they
             plant
             neere
             vnto
             
             it
             ,
             a
             great
             tree
             ,
             which
             serves
             onely
             to
             shadow
             it
             ,
             and
             they
             call
             it
             the
             mother
             of
             Cacao
             .
             There
             are
             places
             where
             they
             are
             like
             to
             the
             Vines
             and
             Olive
             trees
             of
             Spaine
             .
             The
             province
             where
             there
             is
             greatest
             abundance
             for
             the
             traffike
             of
             Marchandise
             ,
             is
             Guatimalla
             .
             There
             growes
             none
             in
             Peru
             ,
             but
             Coca
             ,
             wherein
             they
             hold
             an
             other
             great
             superstition
             ,
             which
             seemes
             to
             be
             fabulous
             .
             In
             trueth
             the
             trafficke
             of
             Coca
             in
             Potozi
             doth
             yearely
             mount
             to
             above
             halfe
             a
             million
             of
             peeces
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             vse
             fourescore
             and
             tenne
             ,
             or
             foure
             score
             and
             fifteene
             thousand
             baskets
             every
             yeare
             .
             In
             the
             yeare
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             three
             ,
             they
             spent
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             .
             A
             basket
             of
             Coca
             in
             Cusco
             is
             woorth
             two
             peeces
             and
             a
             halfe
             ,
             and
             three
             ;
             and
             in
             Potozi
             it
             is
             readily
             worth
             foure
             peeces
             ,
             and
             five
             Tomines
             ,
             and
             five
             peeces
             tried
             .
             It
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             marchandise
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             all
             their
             Markets
             and
             Faires
             are
             made
             with
             great
             expedition
             .
             This
             Coca
             whereof
             they
             make
             such
             account
             ,
             is
             a
             small
             greene
             leafe
             ,
             which
             groweth
             vpon
             small
             trees
             about
             a
             fadome
             high
             ,
             and
             in
             hote
             and
             moyst
             grounds
             ;
             every
             foure
             moneths
             it
             casts
             forth
             this
             leafe
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Tresmitas
             or
             Tremoy
             ;
             it
             requires
             great
             care
             in
             planting
             ,
             beeing
             very
             tender
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             to
             keepe
             it
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             gathered
             .
             They
             laie
             it
             in
             order
             in
             long
             &
             narrow
             baskets
             ,
             and
             so
             lade
             theyr
             sheepe
             of
             the
             Country
             ,
             which
             go
             in
             troopes
             ,
             with
             one
             ,
             two
             ,
             or
             three
             thousand
             baskets
             of
             this
             marchandise
             .
             They
             bring
             it
             commonly
             from
             the
             Andes
             and
             vallies
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             an
             extreame
             heate
             ,
             and
             where
             it
             raines
             continually
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             yeare
             :
             wherein
             the
             Indians
             endure
             much
             labour
             and
             paine
             to
             entertaine
             it
             ,
             &
             often
             many
             die
             ;
             for
             that
             they
             go
             from
             the
             Sierre
             and
             colde
             places
             to
             till
             and
             gather
             them
             in
             the
             Andes
             .
             And
             therefore
             there
             hath
             beene
             great
             question
             and
             diversity
             
             of
             opinions
             among
             learned
             men
             ,
             whether
             it
             were
             more
             expedient
             to
             pull
             vp
             these
             trees
             ,
             or
             to
             let
             them
             growe
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             end
             they
             remained
             .
             The
             Indians
             esteeme
             it
             much
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             Kings
             Inguas
             it
             was
             not
             lawfull
             for
             any
             of
             the
             common
             people
             to
             vse
             this
             Coca
             without
             licence
             from
             the
             Governor
             .
             Their
             vse
             is
             to
             cary
             it
             in
             their
             mouthes
             ,
             chawing
             it
             ,
             and
             sucking
             out
             the
             iuyce
             ,
             but
             they
             swallow
             it
             not
             .
             They
             say
             it
             gives
             them
             great
             courage
             ,
             and
             is
             very
             pleasing
             vnto
             them
             .
             Many
             grave
             men
             holde
             this
             as
             a
             superstition
             &
             a
             meere
             imagination
             :
             for
             my
             part
             ,
             and
             to
             speake
             the
             truth
             ,
             I
             perswade
             not
             my selfe
             that
             it
             is
             an
             imagination
             ;
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             I
             thinke
             it
             works
             and
             gives
             force
             and
             courage
             to
             the
             Indians
             :
             for
             we
             see
             the
             effects
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             attributed
             to
             imagination
             ,
             as
             to
             go
             some
             daies
             without
             meate
             ,
             but
             onely
             a
             handfull
             of
             Coca
             ,
             and
             other
             like
             effects
             .
             The
             sawce
             wherewith
             they
             doe
             eate
             this
             Coca
             ,
             is
             proper
             enough
             ,
             whereof
             I
             have
             tasted
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             like
             the
             taste
             of
             leather
             .
             The
             Indians
             mingle
             it
             with
             the
             ashes
             of
             bones
             burnt
             and
             beat
             into
             powlder
             ;
             or
             with
             lime
             ,
             as
             others
             affirme
             ,
             which
             seemeth
             to
             them
             pleasing
             and
             of
             a
             good
             taste
             ;
             and
             they
             say
             it
             dooth
             them
             much
             good
             .
             They
             willingly
             imploy
             their
             money
             therein
             ,
             and
             vse
             it
             as
             money
             :
             yet
             all
             these
             things
             were
             not
             inconvenient
             ,
             were
             not
             the
             hazard
             of
             the
             trafficke
             thereof
             ,
             wherein
             so
             many
             men
             are
             occupied
             .
             The
             Seigniors
             Inguas
             ,
             vsed
             Coca
             as
             a
             delicate
             and
             royall
             thing
             ,
             which
             they
             offered
             most
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             burning
             it
             in
             honor
             of
             their
             idolls
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Maguey
             ,
             Tunal
             ,
             Cochenille
             ,
             Anir
             ,
             and
             Cotton
             .
             CHAP.
             23.
             
          
           
             MAguey
             is
             a
             tree
             of
             wonders
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Notaries
             or
             Chapetons
             (
             as
             the
             Indians
             call
             them
             )
             are
             wont
             
             to
             write
             miracles
             ,
             in
             that
             it
             yeeldeth
             water
             ,
             wine
             ,
             oyle
             ,
             vineger
             ,
             honny
             ,
             sirrope
             ,
             threede
             ,
             needles
             ,
             and
             a
             thousand
             other
             things
             .
             It
             is
             a
             tree
             which
             the
             Indians
             esteeme
             much
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             &
             have
             commonly
             in
             their
             dwellings
             some
             one
             of
             them
             for
             the
             maintenaunce
             of
             life
             ;
             it
             grows
             in
             the
             fields
             ,
             and
             hath
             great
             and
             large
             leaves
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             whereof
             is
             a
             strong
             &
             sharp
             point
             ,
             which
             serves
             to
             fasten
             little
             pins
             ,
             or
             to
             sowe
             as
             a
             needle
             ;
             &
             they
             draw
             out
             of
             this
             leafe
             as
             it
             were
             a
             kinde
             of
             threed
             which
             they
             vse
             .
             They
             cut
             the
             body
             which
             is
             big
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             tender
             ,
             wherein
             is
             a
             great
             hollownesse
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             substance
             mounts
             from
             the
             root
             ,
             and
             is
             a
             liquor
             which
             they
             drink
             like
             water
             ,
             being
             sweet
             &
             fresh
             .
             This
             liquor
             being
             sodden
             ,
             turnes
             like
             wine
             ,
             which
             growes
             to
             vineger
             ,
             suffring
             it
             to
             sowre
             ,
             and
             boyling
             it
             more
             ,
             it
             becomes
             as
             hony
             ,
             &
             boyling
             it
             halfe
             ,
             it
             serves
             as
             sirrope
             :
             which
             is
             healthfull
             enough
             ,
             and
             of
             good
             taste
             ;
             in
             my
             iudgement
             it
             is
             better
             then
             the
             sirrope
             of
             raisins
             .
             Thus
             doe
             they
             boyle
             this
             liquor
             ,
             and
             vse
             it
             in
             diverse
             sortes
             ,
             whereof
             they
             drawe
             a
             good
             quantitie
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             some
             season
             they
             draw
             daily
             some
             pots
             of
             this
             liquor
             .
             There
             are
             also
             of
             these
             trees
             in
             Peru
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             not
             so
             profitable
             as
             in
             new
             Spaine
             .
             The
             wood
             of
             this
             tree
             is
             hollow
             and
             soft
             ,
             and
             serves
             to
             keepe
             fire
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             match
             of
             a
             harquebuze
             ,
             and
             preserves
             it
             long
             ;
             I
             have
             seene
             the
             Indians
             vse
             it
             to
             that
             end
             .
          
           
             The
             Tunall
             is
             another
             famous
             tree
             in
             new
             Spaine
             :
             if
             we
             may
             call
             a
             tree
             a
             heape
             of
             leaves
             gathered
             together
             one
             vpon
             another
             ,
             it
             is
             the
             strangest
             fashiond
             tree
             of
             all
             other
             ,
             for
             first
             there
             grows
             one
             leafe
             out
             of
             the
             ground
             ,
             then
             another
             vpon
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             one
             vpon
             one
             ,
             till
             it
             commeth
             to
             his
             perfection
             ;
             but
             as
             the
             leaves
             growe
             vp
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             sides
             ,
             those
             vnderneath
             doe
             become
             great
             ,
             and
             loose
             in
             a
             manner
             the
             forme
             of
             leaves
             ,
             making
             a
             bodie
             
             and
             braunches
             ,
             which
             are
             sharpe
             ,
             pricking
             and
             deformed
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             some
             places
             they
             doe
             call
             it
             a
             Thistle
             .
             There
             are
             thistles
             or
             wilde
             Tunalls
             ,
             the
             which
             do
             carry
             no
             fruite
             ,
             or
             else
             it
             is
             very
             pricking
             without
             any
             profit
             .
             There
             are
             likewise
             planted
             Tunalls
             which
             yeelde
             fruite
             much
             esteemed
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Tunas
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             much
             greater
             then
             Plumbes
             ,
             and
             long
             .
             They
             open
             the
             shell
             which
             is
             fatte
             ,
             and
             within
             it
             is
             meate
             and
             small
             graines
             ,
             like
             to
             those
             of
             figges
             ,
             which
             be
             very
             sweete
             ;
             they
             have
             a
             good
             taste
             ,
             especially
             the
             white
             ,
             which
             have
             a
             pleasing
             smell
             ,
             but
             the
             red
             are
             not
             vsually
             so
             good
             .
             There
             is
             another
             sorte
             of
             Tunalls
             ,
             which
             they
             esteeme
             much
             more
             ,
             although
             it
             yeeldes
             no
             fruit
             ,
             yet
             it
             beares
             an
             other
             commoditie
             and
             profit
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             the
             graine
             ,
             for
             that
             certayne
             small
             wormes
             breede
             in
             the
             leaves
             of
             this
             tree
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             well
             husbanded
             ,
             and
             are
             therevnto
             fastned
             ,
             covered
             with
             a
             certaine
             small
             fine
             web
             ,
             which
             doth
             compasse
             them
             in
             daintily
             ;
             and
             this
             is
             that
             Indian
             Cochenille
             ,
             so
             famous
             ,
             and
             wherewith
             they
             die
             in
             graine
             .
             They
             let
             it
             drie
             ,
             and
             being
             dried
             ,
             carry
             it
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             great
             and
             rich
             marchandise
             .
             The
             arobe
             of
             this
             Cochenille
             or
             graine
             is
             worth
             many
             ducats
             .
             In
             the
             fleete
             ,
             the
             yeare
             1587.
             they
             did
             bring
             five
             thousand
             sixe
             hundred
             seventy
             seven
             arobes
             ,
             which
             amounted
             to
             twoo
             hundred
             foure
             score
             three
             thousand
             seven
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             peeces
             ,
             &
             commonly
             there
             comes
             every
             yeare
             as
             great
             a
             wealth
             .
          
           
             These
             Tunalls
             grow
             in
             temperate
             grounds
             inclining
             to
             colde
             .
             In
             Peru
             there
             growes
             none
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             plants
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             but
             they
             deserve
             not
             estimation
             .
             I
             will
             speake
             something
             likewise
             of
             the
             Anir
             ,
             although
             it
             comes
             not
             from
             a
             tree
             ,
             but
             from
             an
             hearb
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             serveth
             for
             the
             dying
             of
             cloth
             ,
             and
             is
             a
             marchandise
             
             which
             agrees
             with
             the
             graine
             ;
             it
             groweth
             in
             great
             aboundance
             iu
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             from
             whence
             there
             came
             in
             the
             fleete
             I
             mentioned
             5263.
             arobes
             ,
             or
             thereabouts
             ,
             which
             amounted
             to
             so
             many
             peeces
             .
             Cotten
             likewise
             growes
             vpon
             small
             shrubs
             ,
             and
             great
             trees
             like
             to
             little
             apples
             ,
             which
             doe
             open
             and
             yeelde
             forth
             this
             webbe
             ;
             which
             being
             gathered
             ,
             they
             spinne
             to
             make
             stuffes
             .
             It
             is
             one
             of
             the
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             of
             greatest
             profite
             ,
             and
             most
             in
             vse
             ;
             for
             it
             serves
             them
             both
             insteed
             of
             flaxe
             and
             wooll
             to
             make
             their
             garments
             .
             It
             groweth
             in
             a
             hote
             soyle
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             great
             store
             in
             the
             vallies
             ,
             and
             sea
             coast
             of
             Peru
             ,
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             Philippines
             and
             China
             .
             But
             the
             greatest
             store
             of
             any
             place
             that
             I
             know
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             province
             of
             Tucuman
             ,
             in
             that
             of
             saint
             Croix
             of
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             and
             at
             Paraguey
             ,
             whereas
             Cotten
             is
             their
             chiefe
             revenue
             .
             They
             carry
             cotten
             into
             Spaine
             from
             the
             Iland
             of
             Saint
             Dominike
             :
             and
             the
             yeare
             that
             I
             spake
             of
             ,
             there
             came
             64000.
             arobes
             .
             At
             the
             Indies
             whereas
             this
             cotten
             growes
             ,
             they
             make
             cloth
             ,
             which
             both
             the
             men
             and
             women
             vse
             commonly
             ,
             making
             table
             napkins
             thereof
             ,
             yea
             and
             sailes
             for
             their
             shippes
             .
             There
             is
             some
             course
             ,
             and
             other
             that
             is
             fine
             and
             delicate
             ;
             they
             die
             it
             into
             diverse
             colours
             ,
             as
             wee
             doe
             by
             our
             woollen
             cloth
             in
             Europe
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Mameys
             ,
             Guayavos
             ,
             and
             Paltos
             
               CHAP.
               24.
            
             
          
           
             THese
             Plants
             we
             have
             spoken
             of
             ,
             are
             the
             most
             profitable
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             necessary
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man
             :
             yet
             there
             are
             many
             other
             that
             are
             good
             to
             eate
             ,
             among
             the
             which
             the
             Mameys
             are
             esteemed
             ,
             being
             in
             fashion
             like
             to
             great
             peaches
             ,
             and
             bigger
             ,
             they
             have
             one
             or
             two
             stones
             within
             them
             ,
             and
             their
             meate
             
             is
             some
             what
             hard
             .
             There
             are
             some
             sweete
             ,
             and
             others
             somewhat
             sower
             ,
             and
             have
             the
             rinde
             hard
             .
             They
             make
             conserves
             of
             the
             meate
             of
             this
             fruite
             ,
             which
             is
             like
             to
             marmelade
             .
             The
             vse
             of
             this
             fruite
             is
             reasonable
             good
             ,
             but
             the
             conserves
             they
             make
             thereof
             ,
             are
             better
             .
             They
             grow
             in
             Ilands
             .
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             any
             in
             Peru.
             It
             is
             a
             great
             tree
             ,
             well
             fashioned
             ,
             and
             a
             reasonable
             faire
             leafe
             .
             The
             Guayavos
             be
             other
             trees
             which
             commonly
             carry
             an
             ill
             fruite
             ,
             full
             of
             sower
             kernells
             ,
             and
             are
             like
             to
             little
             apples
             .
             It
             is
             a
             tree
             little
             esteemed
             vpon
             the
             firme
             land
             and
             at
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             for
             they
             say
             it
             smells
             like
             to
             the
             Punaises
             .
             The
             taste
             and
             savour
             of
             this
             fruite
             is
             very
             grosse
             ,
             and
             the
             substance
             vnholesome
             .
             In
             
               S.
               Dominique
            
             and
             other
             Ilands
             ,
             there
             are
             whole
             mountaines
             full
             of
             these
             Guayavos
             ,
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             such
             kinde
             of
             trees
             before
             the
             Spaniards
             came
             there
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             broght
             them
             they
             know
             not
             from
             whence
             .
             This
             tree
             hath
             multiplied
             infinitely
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             no
             beast
             that
             will
             eate
             the
             kernells
             or
             the
             graine
             ,
             so
             as
             being
             thus
             scattered
             on
             the
             earth
             ,
             being
             hote
             and
             moist
             ,
             it
             multiplies
             in
             this
             sort
             .
             In
             Peru
             ,
             the
             Guayavos
             differs
             from
             others
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             fruite
             is
             not
             red
             ,
             but
             white
             ,
             neither
             hath
             it
             any
             ill
             smell
             ,
             but
             is
             of
             a
             very
             good
             taste
             ;
             and
             of
             what
             sort
             of
             Guayavos
             soever
             it
             bee
             ,
             the
             fruit
             is
             as
             good
             as
             the
             best
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             especially
             of
             those
             which
             they
             call
             
               Guayavos
               de
               Matos
            
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             little
             white
             Guayvilles
             .
             It
             is
             a
             fruit
             reasonably
             holesome
             ,
             and
             agrees
             with
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             being
             of
             a
             strong
             digestion
             ,
             and
             cold
             .
             The
             Paltas
             commonly
             are
             hote
             and
             delicate
             .
             The
             Palto
             is
             a
             great
             tree
             ,
             and
             carries
             a
             faire
             leafe
             ,
             which
             hath
             a
             fruite
             like
             to
             great
             peares
             :
             within
             it
             hath
             a
             great
             stone
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             is
             soft
             meate
             ,
             so
             as
             when
             they
             are
             full
             ripe
             ,
             they
             are
             as
             it
             were
             butter
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             delicate
             taste
             .
             In
             Peru
             the
             Paltas
             
             are
             great
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             very
             hard
             skale
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             taken
             off
             whole
             .
             This
             fruite
             is
             most
             vsuall
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             having
             a
             thinne
             skinne
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             pilled
             like
             an
             apple
             :
             they
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             very
             holesome
             meate
             ,
             and
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             it
             declines
             a
             little
             from
             heat
             .
             These
             
               Mamayes
               Guayavos
            
             ,
             and
             Paltos
             ,
             be
             the
             Indians
             peaches
             ,
             apples
             ,
             and
             peares
             ;
             and
             yet
             would
             I
             rather
             choose
             them
             of
             Europe
             .
             But
             some
             others
             by
             vse
             ,
             or
             it
             may
             be
             by
             affection
             ,
             doe
             more
             esteeme
             those
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             I
             doubt
             not
             but
             such
             as
             have
             not
             seene
             nor
             tasted
             of
             these
             fruites
             ,
             will
             take
             small
             pleasure
             to
             reade
             this
             discourse
             ,
             yea
             ,
             they
             will
             grow
             wearie
             to
             heare
             it
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             done
             in
             writing
             it
             ,
             which
             makes
             me
             to
             abridge
             it
             ,
             speaking
             of
             some
             other
             sortes
             of
             fruites
             ,
             for
             it
             were
             impossible
             to
             intreate
             of
             them
             all
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Chicoçapote
             ,
             Amonas
             ,
             and
             Capollis
             .
             CHAP.
             25.
             
          
           
             SOme
             desirous
             to
             augment
             thinges
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             have
             given
             out
             that
             there
             is
             no
             kinde
             of
             fruite
             like
             vnto
             Cotignac
             ,
             or
             marmelade
             ,
             and
             another
             which
             tastes
             like
             a
             meate
             made
             of
             almonds
             and
             creame
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Blanckemanger
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             taste
             of
             them
             deserves
             these
             names
             ,
             the
             marmalad
             is
             that
             which
             they
             call
             Capotes
             ,
             or
             Chicoçapotes
             ,
             which
             have
             a
             sweete
             taste
             ,
             and
             neere
             vnto
             the
             colour
             of
             marmalade
             .
             Some
             Crollos
             ,
             (
             for
             so
             they
             call
             the
             Spaniards
             borne
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             )
             say
             that
             this
             fruite
             passeth
             all
             the
             fruites
             of
             Spaine
             in
             excellency
             :
             yet
             am
             I
             not
             of
             that
             opinion
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             they
             say
             ,
             it
             passeth
             all
             other
             fruites
             in
             taste
             ;
             but
             I
             will
             not
             dwell
             vpon
             this
             question
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             doth
             not
             deserve
             it
             .
             Those
             Chicoçapotes
             or
             Capotes
             ,
             wherein
             there
             is
             little
             difference
             ,
             
             grow
             in
             the
             hotest
             partes
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             neither
             have
             I
             knowledge
             of
             any
             such
             fruite
             in
             the
             firme
             land
             of
             Peru
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Blanckemanger
             ,
             it
             is
             that
             Annona
             or
             Guanavana
             ,
             which
             growes
             in
             the
             firme
             land
             ,
             which
             is
             fashoned
             like
             vnto
             a
             peare
             ,
             a
             little
             sharpe
             and
             opened
             ,
             within
             it
             is
             white
             ,
             tender
             and
             soft
             like
             butter
             ,
             sweete
             and
             of
             a
             pleasing
             taste
             :
             It
             is
             no
             whit
             meate
             ,
             though
             they
             call
             it
             Blanckemanger
             ,
             but
             in
             truth
             they
             have
             added
             much
             vnto
             it
             ,
             by
             giving
             this
             name
             :
             although
             it
             be
             delicate
             and
             of
             a
             sawcie
             and
             delicious
             taste
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             the
             iudgement
             of
             some
             ,
             it
             is
             held
             for
             the
             best
             fruite
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             yet
             hath
             it
             many
             blacke
             kernells
             within
             it
             ,
             and
             the
             best
             which
             I
             have
             seene
             is
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             where
             the
             Capolies
             grow
             ,
             which
             be
             like
             vnto
             cheries
             ,
             with
             a
             stone
             ,
             but
             some
             what
             bigger
             :
             the
             forme
             and
             shape
             is
             like
             vnto
             cheries
             ,
             of
             a
             good
             taste
             ,
             being
             sweete
             and
             sharpe
             ;
             but
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             any
             Capollyes
             in
             any
             other
             Countrie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             many
             sortes
             of
             fruit
             Trees
             ,
             of
             Cocos
             ,
             Almondes
             ,
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             and
             Almonds
             of
             Chachapoyas
             .
             CHAP.
             26.
             
          
           
             IT
             were
             not
             possible
             to
             reckon
             all
             the
             fruites
             and
             trees
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             that
             I
             remember
             not
             many
             ,
             and
             there
             are
             many
             more
             whereof
             I
             have
             no
             knowledge
             ;
             and
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             it
             were
             troublesome
             to
             speake
             of
             all
             those
             I
             now
             remember
             .
             There
             are
             some
             grosse
             fruites
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             they
             call
             Lucumes
             ,
             (
             of
             which
             fruite
             they
             speake
             in
             a
             proverbe
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             counterfet
             price
             ,
             )
             The
             
               Guanos
               ,
               Pacayes
               ,
               Hubos
            
             ,
             and
             the
             nuttes
             which
             they
             call
             imprisoned
             ;
             which
             fruites
             seeme
             to
             many
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             same
             kinde
             of
             nuttes
             we
             have
             in
             Spaine
             ;
             
             yea
             ,
             they
             say
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             often
             transplanted
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             they
             would
             carry
             nuttes
             altogether
             like
             to
             those
             of
             Spaine
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             why
             the
             fruite
             is
             so
             vnpleasant
             ,
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             are
             wilde
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             we
             ought
             well
             to
             consider
             the
             providence
             and
             riches
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             who
             impartes
             to
             so
             divers
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             such
             varietie
             of
             fruite
             trees
             ,
             all
             for
             the
             service
             of
             man
             that
             inhabites
             the
             earth
             .
             And
             it
             is
             an
             admirable
             thing
             to
             see
             so
             many
             different
             formes
             ,
             tastes
             ,
             and
             effects
             vnknowne
             ,
             whereof
             we
             did
             never
             heare
             speake
             ,
             before
             the
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             And
             whereof
             Plinie
             himselfe
             ,
             Dioscorides
             and
             Theophrastes
             ,
             (
             yea
             ,
             the
             most
             curious
             ,
             )
             had
             no
             knowledge
             ,
             notwithstanding
             all
             their
             search
             and
             dilligence
             .
             There
             have
             beene
             some
             curious
             men
             of
             our
             age
             ,
             which
             have
             written
             some
             Treatises
             of
             the
             Indian
             plants
             ,
             of
             hearbes
             ,
             and
             rivers
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             operations
             for
             phisicke
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             may
             flie
             for
             their
             better
             instruction
             .
             I
             onely
             pretend
             ,
             (
             and
             in
             few
             words
             ,
             )
             to
             treate
             superficially
             of
             that
             which
             comes
             to
             memory
             touching
             this
             subiect
             ;
             yet
             do
             I
             not
             thinke
             it
             good
             to
             passe
             away
             vnder
             silence
             the
             Cocos
             or
             Indian
             palmes
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             a
             very
             notable
             propertie
             it
             hath
             .
             I
             call
             them
             palmes
             ,
             not
             properly
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             beares
             dates
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             are
             trees
             like
             to
             other
             palmes
             .
             They
             are
             high
             and
             strong
             ,
             and
             the
             higher
             they
             grow
             ,
             the
             broader
             they
             stretch
             out
             their
             branches
             .
             These
             Cocos
             yield
             a
             fruit
             which
             they
             likewise
             call
             Cocos
             ,
             wherof
             they
             commonly
             make
             vessells
             to
             drinke
             in
             ,
             and
             some
             they
             say
             have
             a
             vertue
             against
             poison
             ,
             and
             to
             cure
             the
             paine
             in
             the
             side
             .
             The
             nutte
             and
             meate
             being
             dried
             ,
             is
             good
             to
             eate
             ,
             and
             comes
             neere
             in
             taste
             to
             greene
             chesnuttes
             .
             When
             the
             Coco
             is
             tender
             vpon
             the
             tree
             ,
             the
             substance
             within
             it
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             milke
             ,
             which
             they
             drinke
             for
             
             daintines
             ,
             and
             to
             refresh
             them
             in
             time
             of
             heate
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             of
             these
             trees
             in
             S.
             
               Iean
               de
               Port
               Ricco
            
             ,
             and
             other
             parts
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             they
             report
             a
             wonderfull
             thing
             ,
             that
             every
             moneth
             or
             Moone
             ,
             this
             tree
             castes
             forth
             a
             new
             branch
             of
             this
             Cocos
             ;
             so
             as
             it
             yeeldes
             fruite
             twelve
             times
             in
             the
             yeere
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             written
             in
             the
             Apocalips
             :
             and
             in
             truth
             this
             seemes
             like
             vnto
             it
             ,
             for
             that
             all
             the
             branches
             are
             of
             different
             ages
             ,
             some
             beginning
             ,
             others
             being
             ripe
             ,
             and
             some
             halfe
             ripe
             .
             These
             Cocos
             ,
             are
             commonly
             of
             the
             forme
             and
             bignes
             of
             a
             small
             melon
             .
             There
             is
             of
             another
             kinde
             which
             they
             call
             Coquillos
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             a
             better
             fruite
             ,
             whereof
             there
             be
             some
             in
             Chille
             .
             They
             are
             some
             what
             lesse
             then
             nuttes
             ,
             but
             more
             round
             .
             There
             is
             another
             kinde
             of
             Cocos
             ,
             which
             have
             not
             the
             kernell
             so
             oylie
             ,
             but
             within
             they
             have
             a
             great
             number
             of
             small
             fruites
             like
             almonds
             ,
             like
             vnto
             the
             graines
             of
             a
             Poungarnet
             .
          
           
             These
             almonds
             are
             thrice
             as
             bigge
             as
             those
             of
             Castille
             ,
             and
             resemble
             them
             in
             taste
             ,
             thogh
             they
             be
             more
             sharpe
             ,
             and
             likewise
             moist
             and
             oylie
             .
             It
             is
             a
             good
             meate
             ,
             they
             vse
             it
             also
             in
             feasting
             ;
             for
             lack
             of
             almons
             to
             make
             marchpanes
             ,
             and
             such
             other
             things
             .
             They
             call
             them
             Almonds
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             for
             that
             these
             Cocos
             growe
             aboundantlie
             vpon
             the
             Andes
             of
             Peru
             ;
             they
             are
             so
             strong
             and
             hard
             ,
             as
             to
             open
             them
             ,
             they
             must
             beate
             them
             with
             a
             great
             stone
             ,
             when
             they
             fall
             from
             the
             tree
             .
             If
             they
             chance
             to
             hit
             anie
             one
             on
             the
             head
             ,
             he
             hath
             no
             more
             need
             of
             any
             surgeon
             .
             It
             is
             an
             incredible
             thing
             ,
             that
             within
             the
             hollowe
             of
             these
             Cocos
             ,
             which
             are
             no
             bigger
             than
             the
             rest
             ,
             or
             little
             more
             ,
             there
             are
             such
             a
             multi●●de
             of
             these
             almonds
             .
             But
             as
             touching
             almonds
             and
             other
             fruites
             ,
             all
             trees
             must
             yeelde
             to
             the
             almonds
             of
             Chachapo●●s
             ,
             which
             I
             cannot
             otherwise
             call
             .
             It
             is
             the
             most
             pleasing
             ,
             delicate
             ,
             and
             
             wholesome
             fruit
             of
             all
             that
             I
             have
             seene
             at
             the
             Indies
             ;
             yea
             a
             learned
             Physitian
             did
             affirme
             ,
             that
             amongest
             all
             the
             fruits
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             or
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             none
             came
             neere
             these
             Almonds
             in
             excellencie
             .
             There
             are
             both
             greater
             and
             lesse
             than
             those
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             but
             all
             are
             fatter
             than
             those
             of
             Castille
             .
             They
             are
             very
             tender
             to
             eate
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             much
             iuyce
             and
             substance
             ;
             and
             are
             oylie
             and
             very
             plesant
             :
             they
             grow
             vpon
             high
             trees
             ,
             bearing
             great
             leaves
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             a
             pre●ious
             thing
             ,
             so
             nature
             hath
             given
             them
             a
             good
             covering
             and
             defence
             ,
             being
             in
             a
             huske
             somewhat
             bigger
             ,
             and
             more
             pricking
             than
             a
             chesnut
             .
             Yet
             when
             this
             huske
             is
             drie
             ,
             they
             easily
             drawe
             foorth
             the
             graine
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Apes
             who
             are
             very
             greedie
             of
             this
             fruit
             ,
             and
             whereof
             there
             is
             aboundance
             in
             Chachapoyas
             of
             Peru
             (
             which
             is
             the
             onely
             countrey
             (
             to
             my
             knowledge
             )
             where
             these
             trees
             doe
             growe
             )
             fearing
             they
             should
             pricke
             them
             ,
             and
             yet
             desirous
             to
             draw
             forth
             the
             almond
             ,
             they
             cast
             them
             from
             the
             toppe
             of
             the
             tree
             against
             the
             stones
             ,
             and
             having
             broken
             the
             huske
             ,
             they
             open
             them
             to
             eate
             the
             fruite
             at
             their
             pleasure
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             many
             and
             diverse
             flowers
             ,
             and
             of
             some
             trees
             which
             yeeld
             onely
             a
             flower
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             Indians
             do
             vse
             them
             
               CHAP.
               27.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Indians
             are
             great
             lovers
             of
             flowers
             ,
             and
             in
             new
             Spaine
             more
             than
             in
             any
             other
             part
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             &
             therefore
             they
             are
             accustomed
             to
             make
             many
             kindes
             of
             nosegaies
             ,
             which
             there
             they
             call
             Suchilles
             ,
             with
             such
             prety
             varietie
             and
             art
             ,
             as
             nothing
             can
             be
             more
             pleasing
             .
             They
             have
             a
             custome
             amongst
             them
             ,
             that
             the
             chiefest
             man
             offer
             their
             Suchillos
             or
             nosegayes
             in
             honour
             to
             Noblemen
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             ghests
             ;
             and
             they
             presented
             vs
             with
             
             such
             aboundance
             as
             we
             passed
             through
             that
             Country
             ,
             as
             we
             knew
             not
             what
             to
             doe
             with
             them
             ;
             and
             at
             this
             day
             they
             vse
             the
             principall
             flowers
             of
             Castill
             ,
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             growe
             better
             there
             than
             heere
             ,
             as
             gilliflowers
             ,
             roses
             ,
             jasmins
             ,
             violets
             ,
             orange
             flowers
             ,
             and
             other
             sortes
             which
             they
             have
             transported
             ou●●f
             Spaine
             .
             The
             rose
             tree
             groweth
             too
             fast
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             beare
             no
             roses
             .
             It
             chaunced
             one
             day
             that
             a
             rose
             tree
             was
             burned
             ,
             and
             the
             siens
             which
             sprowted
             out
             ,
             presently
             bare
             aboundance
             of
             roses
             ,
             and
             thereby
             they
             learnd
             to
             prune
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             cut
             off
             the
             superfluous
             braunches
             ,
             so
             as
             at
             this
             day
             they
             yeeld
             reasonable
             store
             of
             ros●s
             .
             But
             besids
             these
             kindes
             of
             flowers
             ,
             which
             have
             beene
             transported
             from
             hence
             .
             There
             are
             many
             others
             ,
             whose
             names
             I
             do
             not
             know
             ,
             whereof
             some
             are
             red
             ,
             blew
             ,
             yellow
             ,
             violet
             and
             white
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             different
             colours
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             did
             vse
             to
             carry
             on
             their
             heads
             ,
             as
             feathers
             for
             ornament
             .
             True
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             many
             of
             these
             flowers
             are
             onely
             pleasing
             to
             the
             sight
             ,
             having
             no
             good
             savour
             ,
             eyther
             they
             are
             grosse
             ,
             or
             else
             they
             have
             none
             at
             all
             ;
             and
             yet
             there
             be
             some
             of
             an
             excellent
             scent
             .
             As
             those
             which
             growe
             vpon
             a
             tree
             termed
             by
             them
             Floripondio
             or
             carry
             flower
             ,
             which
             beares
             no
             fruit
             ,
             but
             onely
             these
             flowers
             ,
             which
             are
             greater
             than
             the
             Lillie
             ,
             and
             are
             like
             to
             little
             bells
             ,
             all
             white
             ,
             which
             have
             within
             them
             small
             threeds
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             lillie
             :
             it
             leaves
             not
             all
             the
             yeare
             to
             beare
             these
             flowers
             ,
             whose
             smell
             is
             woonderfull
             sweete
             and
             agreeable
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             coole
             of
             the
             morning
             .
             The
             Viceroy
             
               Don
               Francisco
               de
               Toledo
            
             sent
             of
             these
             trees
             vnto
             King
             Philip
             ,
             as
             a
             thing
             woorthy
             to
             be
             planted
             in
             royall
             gardins
             .
             In
             new
             Spaine
             the
             Indians
             esteeme
             much
             of
             a
             flower
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Volosuchil
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             flower
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             beares
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             heart
             ,
             
             and
             is
             not
             much
             lesse
             .
             There
             is
             likewise
             an
             other
             great
             tree
             ,
             which
             beares
             this
             kinde
             of
             flower
             ,
             without
             any
             fruite
             ;
             it
             hath
             a
             strong
             savour
             ,
             and
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             too
             violent
             ,
             the
             which
             may
             seeme
             to
             some
             more
             pleasing
             .
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             well
             knowne
             ,
             that
             the
             flower
             which
             they
             call
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             ●●th
             the
             figure
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             turnes
             according
             to
             the
             motion
             thereof
             .
             There
             are
             other
             kindes
             which
             they
             call
             gilleflowers
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             like
             to
             a
             fine
             orange
             tawnie
             vellet
             ,
             or
             a
             violet
             ;
             those
             have
             no
             scent
             of
             any
             account
             ,
             but
             onely
             are
             faire
             to
             the
             eye
             .
             There
             are
             other
             flowers
             which
             besides
             the
             bea●●ie
             of
             the
             eye
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             no
             smell
             ,
             yet
             have
             they
             a
             savour
             like
             vnto
             cresses
             ,
             the
             which
             if
             you
             shoulde
             eate
             with
             outlooking
             of
             them
             ,
             you
             would
             iudge
             them
             to
             be
             no
             other
             .
             The
             flower
             of
             Granadille
             is
             held
             for
             an
             admirable
             thing
             ,
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             it
             hath
             in
             it
             the
             markes
             of
             the
             passion
             ,
             and
             that
             therein
             they
             note
             the
             nailes
             ,
             the
             piller
             ,
             the
             whips
             ,
             and
             crowne
             of
             thornes
             ,
             and
             the
             woundes
             ,
             wherein
             they
             are
             not
             altogether
             without
             reason
             ,
             and
             yet
             to
             finde
             out
             and
             observe
             these
             things
             ,
             it
             requires
             some
             pietie
             to
             cause
             beleefe
             :
             but
             it
             is
             very
             exquisite
             and
             faire
             to
             the
             eye
             ,
             although
             it
             have
             no
             smell
             .
             The
             fruite
             which
             they
             also
             call
             Granadille
             is
             eaten
             and
             drunke
             ;
             or
             to
             speake
             more
             properly
             ,
             sucked
             ,
             for
             a
             refreshing
             ;
             this
             fruite
             is
             sweete
             ,
             and
             too
             sweete
             after
             some
             opinions
             .
             The
             Indians
             have
             vsed
             in
             their
             feasts
             and
             dances
             ,
             to
             carry
             flowers
             in
             their
             handes
             ,
             and
             the
             Kings
             and
             Noblemen
             carry
             them
             for
             their
             greatnes
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             we
             commonly
             see
             their
             ancient
             pictures
             with
             flowers
             in
             their
             hands
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             heere
             with
             gloves
             .
             I
             thinke
             this
             sufficient
             touching
             flowers
             .
             They
             vse
             BaZilic
             to
             this
             effect
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             no
             flower
             ,
             but
             an
             hearbe
             onely
             ,
             which
             they
             were
             won●
             
             to
             plant
             carefully
             in
             their
             gardins
             ,
             but
             now
             they
             regard
             it
             not
             ;
             so
             as
             it
             growes
             onely
             about
             their
             pooles
             and
             ponds
             ,
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Balme
             .
             
               CHAP.
               28.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Soveraigne
             Creator
             hath
             not
             onely
             fashioned
             Plants
             to
             serve
             as
             meat
             ,
             but
             also
             for
             recreation
             ,
             for
             phisicke
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             cure
             of
             man.
             I
             have
             spoken
             somewhat
             of
             those
             that
             serve
             for
             nourishment
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             chiefe
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             of
             those
             that
             serve
             for
             recreation
             ,
             and
             now
             we
             are
             to
             intreate
             of
             those
             which
             are
             proper
             for
             phisicke
             ,
             wherein
             I
             will
             speake
             something
             .
             And
             although
             all
             plants
             are
             medicinall
             when
             they
             are
             well
             knowne
             and
             applied
             ,
             yet
             there
             are
             some
             things
             especially
             ,
             which
             wee
             see
             directly
             ordained
             by
             the
             Creator
             for
             phisicke
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             health
             of
             man
             :
             as
             liquors
             ,
             oiles
             ,
             gummes
             ,
             and
             rozines
             ,
             which
             come
             from
             divers
             plants
             and
             hearbes
             ,
             and
             which
             easily
             shew
             by
             experience
             whereto
             they
             are
             proper
             .
             Above
             all
             ,
             Baulme
             is
             with
             reason
             esteemed
             for
             the
             excellent
             smell
             ,
             but
             much
             more
             for
             the
             exquisite
             effect
             it
             hath
             to
             cure
             woundes
             ,
             and
             divers
             other
             remedies
             ,
             as
             experience
             hath
             taught
             in
             the
             cure
             of
             diseases
             .
             The
             Balme
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             is
             not
             of
             the
             same
             kind
             of
             right
             Balme
             which
             they
             bring
             from
             Alexandria
             or
             Caire
             ,
             and
             in
             old
             time
             was
             in
             Iudea
             ;
             which
             Iudea
             (
             as
             Plinie
             writeth
             )
             did
             of
             all
             the
             world
             possesse
             this
             greatnesse
             ,
             vntill
             the
             Emperor
             Vespasian
             broght
             it
             to
             Rome
             &
             into
             Italie
             .
             
             The
             reason
             why
             I
             say
             the
             liquor
             of
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             are
             not
             of
             one
             kinde
             ,
             is
             for
             that
             the
             trees
             from
             whence
             it
             comes
             are
             very
             different
             :
             for
             the
             balme
             tree
             of
             Palestine
             was
             small
             ,
             and
             fashioned
             like
             to
             a
             Vine
             (
             as
             Plinic
             reporteth
             )
             
             who
             had
             seene
             it
             ,
             and
             those
             that
             at
             this
             day
             that
             have
             seene
             them
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             say
             as
             much
             .
             As
             also
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             calles
             the
             place
             where
             the
             Balme
             thickens
             ,
             
             Vine
             of
             Enguaddy
             ,
             for
             the
             resemblance
             it
             hath
             to
             vine
             .
             At
             the
             Indies
             I
             have
             seene
             the
             tree
             from
             whence
             they
             draw
             the
             Balme
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             bigge
             as
             a
             poungarnet
             tree
             ,
             and
             some
             thing
             neere
             the
             fashion
             ;
             and
             if
             my
             memory
             failes
             me
             not
             ,
             it
             hath
             nothing
             common
             with
             the
             vine
             ,
             although
             that
             Strabo
             writes
             ,
             that
             the
             ancient
             tree
             of
             Balme
             ,
             
             was
             of
             the
             bignes
             of
             a
             poungarnet
             tree
             .
             But
             in
             their
             accidents
             and
             operations
             ,
             their
             liquors
             are
             alike
             ,
             as
             likewise
             they
             be
             in
             their
             admirable
             smells
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             cure
             and
             healing
             of
             wounds
             ,
             in
             colour
             and
             substance
             ,
             seeing
             they
             report
             of
             other
             Balmes
             that
             there
             is
             some
             white
             ,
             vermilion
             ,
             greene
             ,
             and
             blacke
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             likewise
             seene
             in
             that
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             And
             as
             they
             drew
             forth
             the
             ancient
             in
             cutting
             and
             making
             incisions
             in
             the
             barke
             ,
             to
             cause
             the
             liquor
             to
             distill
             out
             ,
             so
             do
             they
             with
             that
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             although
             it
             distilles
             in
             greater
             aboundance
             .
             And
             as
             in
             the
             ancient
             there
             is
             one
             kinde
             which
             is
             pure
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Opobalsamum
             ,
             which
             be
             the
             very
             teares
             that
             distill
             ,
             so
             as
             there
             is
             another
             sort
             which
             is
             not
             so
             exquisite
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             drawe
             from
             the
             barke
             and
             leaves
             strained
             and
             boiled
             on
             the
             fire
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Xilobalssamum
             .
             The
             like
             is
             also
             in
             the
             Indian
             Balmes
             ;
             there
             is
             one
             pure
             that
             distilles
             from
             the
             tree
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             the
             Indians
             draw
             out
             by
             straining
             and
             boiling
             the
             leaves
             and
             wood
             ,
             yea
             ,
             they
             do
             sophisticate
             and
             augment
             it
             with
             other
             liquors
             ,
             to
             make
             it
             increase
             .
             It
             is
             not
             without
             reason
             they
             call
             it
             Balme
             ,
             for
             in
             truth
             it
             is
             so
             ,
             (
             although
             it
             be
             not
             of
             the
             same
             kinde
             of
             the
             ancient
             ,
             )
             yet
             it
             is
             much
             esteemed
             ,
             and
             should
             be
             more
             ,
             if
             the
             great
             aboundance
             were
             not
             
             the
             cause
             as
             in
             Emeraldes
             and
             Pearles
             .
             That
             which
             importes
             most
             ,
             is
             the
             vse
             wherein
             it
             is
             imployed
             ,
             for
             creame
             and
             vnctions
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             veneration
             :
             for
             that
             the
             Apostolike
             sea
             hath
             given
             libertie
             to
             give
             creame
             of
             Balme
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             vse
             it
             in
             confirmation
             and
             other
             ceremonies
             which
             they
             vse
             .
             They
             bring
             Balme
             to
             Spaine
             from
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             from
             the
             Province
             of
             Guatimalla
             ,
             from
             Chiappa
             ,
             and
             other
             places
             where
             it
             aboundes
             most
             ,
             although
             the
             most
             esteemed
             be
             that
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             Iland
             of
             Tollu
             ,
             which
             is
             vpon
             the
             maine
             land
             ,
             not
             farre
             from
             Carthagene
             .
             This
             Balme
             is
             white
             ,
             and
             commonly
             they
             holde
             the
             white
             to
             bee
             more
             perfect
             then
             the
             red
             ,
             although
             Plinie
             gives
             the
             first
             place
             to
             the
             vermilion
             ,
             
             the
             second
             to
             the
             white
             ,
             the
             third
             to
             greene
             ,
             and
             the
             last
             to
             blacke
             ;
             but
             it
             seemes
             that
             Strabo
             esteemed
             more
             the
             white
             Balmes
             as
             ours
             doe
             .
             Monardes
             discourseth
             at
             large
             of
             the
             Indian
             Balme
             in
             the
             first
             and
             second
             part
             ,
             especially
             of
             that
             of
             Carthagene
             and
             Tollu
             ,
             which
             is
             all
             one
             .
             I
             have
             not
             found
             that
             the
             Indians
             in
             olde
             time
             did
             much
             esteeme
             Balme
             ,
             nor
             yet
             imploy
             it
             in
             any
             important
             vse
             ,
             although
             Monardes
             saieth
             ,
             that
             the
             Indians
             cured
             their
             woundes
             therewith
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             the
             Spaniardes
             learned
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Amber
             ,
             and
             other
             Oyles
             ,
             Gums
             ,
             and
             Drugges
             ,
             which
             they
             bring
             from
             the
             
               Indies
               CHAP.
               29.
            
             
          
           
             NExt
             to
             Balme
             ,
             Amber
             holdes
             the
             second
             place
             :
             it
             is
             another
             liquor
             which
             is
             likewise
             sweete
             and
             medicinall
             ;
             but
             more
             thicke
             ,
             and
             turnes
             into
             a
             paste
             of
             a
             hote
             complexion
             ,
             and
             a
             good
             perfume
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             apply
             to
             woundes
             ,
             bruises
             ,
             and
             other
             necessities
             ;
             
             wherein
             I
             will
             referre
             my selfe
             to
             the
             Phisitions
             ,
             especially
             to
             Doctor
             Monardes
             ,
             who
             in
             his
             first
             Part
             ,
             hath
             written
             of
             this
             liquor
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             that
             are
             phisicall
             ,
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             Indies
             .
             This
             Amber
             comes
             from
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             hath
             that
             advantage
             above
             other
             Provinces
             in
             goomes
             ,
             liquors
             ,
             and
             iuyce
             of
             trees
             ,
             whereby
             they
             have
             such
             aboundance
             of
             matter
             ,
             for
             perfume
             and
             phisicke
             ,
             as
             is
             the
             Animé
             ,
             whereof
             there
             comes
             great
             store
             ,
             Copall
             ,
             or
             Suchicopal
             ,
             which
             is
             another
             kinde
             ,
             storax
             and
             encense
             ,
             which
             have
             excellent
             operations
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             very
             good
             smell
             fit
             for
             fumigations
             .
             Likewise
             the
             Tacamahaca
             and
             Caranna
             ,
             which
             are
             also
             very
             medicinall
             .
             They
             bring
             likewise
             from
             this
             Province
             oyle
             of
             Aspicke
             ,
             which
             the
             Phisitians
             and
             Painters
             vse
             much
             ,
             the
             one
             for
             plasters
             ,
             the
             other
             to
             vernish
             their
             pictures
             .
             They
             bring
             also
             for
             the
             Phisitians
             ,
             
               Cassia
               fistule
            
             ,
             the
             which
             growes
             plentifully
             in
             S.
             Dominique
             .
             It
             is
             a
             great
             tree
             ,
             which
             carries
             these
             canes
             as
             his
             fruite
             .
             They
             brought
             in
             the
             fleete
             wherein
             I
             came
             from
             S.
             Dominique
             fortie
             eight
             quintalles
             of
             
               Cassia
               fistule
               .
               Salcepareille
            
             is
             not
             lesse
             knowne
             ,
             for
             a
             thousand
             remedies
             wherein
             it
             is
             vsed
             .
             There
             came
             in
             the
             same
             fleete
             fiftie
             quintalles
             from
             the
             same
             Iland
             .
             There
             is
             much
             of
             this
             Sa●cepar●ille
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             most
             excellent
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Gua●aquill
             ,
             which
             is
             vnder
             the
             Line
             .
             Many
             go
             to
             be
             cured
             into
             this
             Province
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             the
             opinion
             of
             some
             ,
             that
             the
             pure
             water
             onely
             which
             they
             drinke
             ,
             gives
             them
             health
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             passeth
             by
             rootes
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             from
             whence
             it
             drawes
             this
             vertue
             ,
             so
             as
             there
             needes
             no
             great
             covering
             or
             garments
             to
             make
             a
             man
             sweate
             in
             that
             countrie
             .
             The
             wood
             of
             Guayac
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               Lignum
               sanctum
            
             ,
             or
             Indian
             wood
             growes
             aboundantly
             in
             the
             same
             Ilands
             ,
             and
             is
             as
             heavie
             as
             yron
             ,
             so
             
             as
             it
             presently
             sinkes
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             heereof
             they
             brought
             in
             the
             same
             fleete
             350.
             quintalls
             ,
             and
             they
             might
             have
             brought
             twentie
             ,
             yea
             ,
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             of
             this
             wood
             ,
             if
             there
             were
             vse
             for
             it
             .
             There
             came
             in
             the
             same
             fleete
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             same
             Iland
             ,
             130.
             quintalles
             of
             Bresill
             wood
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             fierie
             red
             ,
             so
             well
             knowne
             ,
             and
             much
             vsed
             in
             dying
             and
             other
             things
             .
             There
             are
             at
             the
             Indies
             infinite
             numbers
             of
             other
             aromaticall
             woodes
             ,
             gummes
             ,
             oyles
             ,
             and
             drugges
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             is
             not
             possible
             to
             name
             them
             all
             ,
             neither
             doth
             it
             now
             much
             import
             .
             I
             say
             onely
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             of
             C●sco
             ,
             and
             the
             Mexicaine
             Kings
             ,
             there
             were
             many
             great
             personages
             expert
             in
             curing
             of
             diseases
             with
             simples
             ,
             and
             did
             goodly
             cures
             ,
             having
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             many
             vertues
             and
             properties
             of
             hearbes
             ,
             rootes
             ,
             woodes
             ,
             and
             plants
             ,
             which
             grow
             there
             ,
             and
             whereof
             the
             Ancients
             of
             Europe
             have
             had
             no
             knowledge
             .
             There
             are
             a
             thousand
             of
             these
             simples
             fit
             to
             purge
             ,
             as
             the
             rootes
             of
             Mechoaçan
             ,
             the
             Pignons
             of
             Punua
             ,
             the
             conserve
             of
             Guanucquo
             ,
             the
             oyle
             of
             Fig-trees
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             the
             which
             being
             well
             applied
             ,
             and
             in
             time
             ,
             they
             hold
             to
             be
             of
             no
             lesse
             efficacie
             then
             the
             drugges
             that
             come
             from
             the
             East
             .
             The
             which
             may
             be
             seene
             in
             reading
             the
             discourse
             which
             Monardes
             hath
             made
             in
             the
             first
             and
             second
             Part
             ,
             where
             he
             treates
             amply
             of
             Tobacco
             ,
             or
             Petum
             ,
             whereof
             they
             have
             made
             notable
             experiences
             against
             poison
             .
             Tobacco
             is
             a
             small
             tree
             or
             plant
             ,
             common
             enough
             ,
             the
             which
             hath
             in
             it
             rare
             vertues
             ,
             as
             amongst
             others
             it
             serves
             for
             a
             counterpoison
             ,
             like
             to
             many
             and
             divers
             other
             plants
             :
             for
             the
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             hath
             imparted
             his
             vertues
             at
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             not
             willing
             that
             any
             thing
             should
             grow
             idle
             .
             But
             it
             is
             another
             soveraigne
             gift
             to
             man
             ,
             to
             know
             them
             and
             their
             proper
             vses
             ,
             the
             
             which
             the
             same
             Creator
             gives
             to
             whome
             hee
             pleaseth
             .
             Doctor
             
               Francis
               Hernandes
            
             hath
             made
             a
             goodly
             worke
             vppon
             this
             subiect
             ,
             of
             Indian
             plants
             ,
             liquors
             ,
             and
             other
             phisicall
             things
             ,
             by
             the
             Kings
             expresse
             commission
             and
             commaundement
             ,
             causing
             all
             the
             plants
             at
             the
             Indies
             to
             be
             lively
             painted
             ,
             which
             they
             say
             are
             above
             a
             thousand
             two
             hundred
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             worke
             cost
             above
             three
             score
             thousand
             ducats
             :
             out
             of
             which
             worke
             the
             Doctor
             
               Nardus
               Anthonius
            
             an
             Italian
             Physitian
             hath
             made
             a
             curious
             extract
             ,
             sending
             him
             to
             the
             foresaid
             bookes
             ,
             that
             desires
             more
             exactly
             to
             knowe
             the
             plants
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             especially
             for
             physicke
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             great
             forrests
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             of
             Cedars
             ,
             of
             Ceivas
             ,
             and
             other
             great
             trees
             .
             
               CHAP.
               30.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             from
             the
             beginning
             the
             earth
             did
             bring
             foorth
             plants
             and
             trees
             by
             the
             commandement
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             yet
             hath
             it
             yielded
             more
             in
             one
             place
             than
             in
             another
             :
             and
             besides
             the
             plants
             and
             trees
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             industry
             of
             man
             have
             beene
             transplanted
             and
             carried
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             there
             are
             many
             which
             Nature
             it selfe
             hath
             brought
             forth
             .
             I
             do
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             of
             this
             sort
             there
             are
             more
             at
             the
             new
             world
             ,
             which
             we
             do
             call
             the
             Indies
             ,
             either
             in
             number
             or
             diversitie
             ,
             than
             in
             the
             olde
             ,
             as
             
               Europe
               ,
               Asia
            
             ,
             or
             Affrike
             .
             The
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             climate
             at
             the
             Indies
             is
             generally
             hot
             and
             moist
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             declared
             in
             the
             second
             Booke
             ,
             against
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Auntients
             ,
             which
             causeth
             the
             earth
             naturally
             for
             to
             bring
             foorth
             an
             infinit
             number
             of
             wilde
             plants
             ,
             whereby
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Indies
             is
             inhabitable
             ,
             being
             almost
             impossible
             to
             travell
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             woodes
             and
             thicke
             forrests
             that
             are
             there
             ;
             which
             they
             labour
             dailie
             
             to
             cut
             downe
             .
             It
             hath
             bin
             needefull
             (
             passing
             through
             some
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             especially
             where
             they
             newly
             entred
             )
             to
             make
             their
             way
             ,
             in
             cutting
             downe
             trees
             ,
             and
             pulling
             vp
             bushes
             ,
             so
             that
             (
             as
             some
             religious
             men
             have
             written
             that
             have
             tried
             it
             )
             they
             coulde
             not
             sometimes
             have
             passed
             above
             a
             league
             in
             a
             day
             .
             One
             of
             our
             brothers
             (
             a
             man
             worthy
             of
             credite
             )
             reported
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             that
             being
             straied
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             not
             knowing
             which
             way
             he
             shoulde
             passe
             ,
             he
             fell
             among
             such
             thicke
             bushes
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             forced
             to
             go
             vpon
             them
             ,
             without
             setting
             foote
             to
             the
             ground
             ,
             by
             the
             space
             of
             fifteene
             whole
             dayes
             :
             and
             to
             see
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             or
             to
             marke
             some
             way
             in
             this
             thicke
             forrest
             full
             of
             wood
             ,
             he
             was
             forced
             to
             climbe
             to
             the
             top
             of
             the
             highest
             trees
             to
             discover
             .
             He
             that
             shall
             reade
             the
             discourse
             of
             his
             travell
             ,
             how
             often
             hee
             was
             lost
             ,
             and
             the
             wayes
             he
             passed
             ,
             with
             the
             strange
             adventures
             that
             happened
             vnto
             him
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             have
             written
             briefly
             ,
             being
             so
             worthy
             the
             knowledge
             ,
             and
             having
             my selfe
             travelled
             alittle
             over
             the
             mountaines
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             were
             it
             but
             the
             eighteene
             leagues
             betwixt
             
               Nombre
               de
               Dios
            
             and
             Panama
             ,
             may
             well
             iudge
             what
             great
             forrests
             there
             are
             .
             So
             as
             having
             no
             winter
             in
             those
             parts
             ,
             to
             nip
             them
             with
             colde
             ,
             and
             the
             humiditie
             of
             the
             heavens
             ,
             and
             earth
             being
             so
             great
             ,
             as
             the
             mountaines
             bring
             foorth
             infinit
             forrests
             ,
             and
             the
             plaines
             which
             they
             call
             Savanas
             ,
             great
             plenty
             of
             grasse
             :
             there
             is
             no
             want
             of
             pasture
             for
             feeding
             ,
             of
             timber
             building
             ,
             nor
             of
             wood
             for
             fewell
             .
             It
             is
             impossible
             to
             set
             downe
             the
             differences
             and
             formes
             of
             so
             many
             wilde
             trees
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             names
             of
             the
             greatest
             parte
             are
             vnknowne
             .
          
           
             Cedars
             in
             olde
             time
             so
             much
             esteemed
             ,
             are
             there
             very
             common
             ,
             both
             for
             buildings
             and
             shippes
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             of
             diverse
             sortes
             ,
             some
             white
             ,
             and
             some
             redde
             ,
             very
             
             odoriferant
             .
             There
             are
             great
             store
             of
             Bay
             trees
             ,
             very
             pleasant
             to
             beholde
             vpon
             the
             Andes
             of
             Peru
             ,
             vppon
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Nicaragua
             ,
             and
             in
             New
             Spaine
             .
             There
             are
             also
             infinite
             numbers
             of
             Palmes
             and
             Ceivas
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Indians
             make
             their
             Canoes
             ,
             which
             are
             boates
             made
             of
             one
             peece
             .
             They
             bring
             into
             Spaine
             from
             the
             Havana
             ,
             excellent
             timber
             .
             In
             the
             Iland
             of
             Cuba
             ,
             there
             are
             infinite
             numbers
             of
             like
             trees
             ,
             as
             
               Ebene
               ,
               Caovana
               ,
               Grenadille
            
             ,
             Cedars
             ,
             and
             other
             kindes
             which
             I
             do
             not
             know
             .
             There
             are
             great
             pine
             trees
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             not
             so
             strong
             as
             those
             in
             Spaine
             :
             they
             beare
             no
             pignous
             or
             kernells
             ,
             but
             empty
             apples
             .
             The
             oaks
             as
             they
             cal
             them
             of
             Guaiaquil
             ,
             is
             an
             excelent
             wood
             and
             sweet
             ,
             when
             they
             cut
             it
             ;
             yea
             there
             are
             kanes
             or
             most
             high
             reedes
             ,
             of
             whose
             boughs
             or
             small
             reedes
             they
             doe
             make
             bottles
             and
             pitchers
             to
             carry
             water
             ,
             and
             do
             likewise
             vse
             them
             in
             their
             buildings
             .
             There
             is
             likewise
             the
             wood
             of
             Mansle
             ,
             or
             Firre
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             masts
             for
             their
             shippes
             ,
             and
             they
             holde
             them
             as
             strong
             as
             yron
             .
             Molle
             is
             a
             tree
             of
             many
             vertues
             ,
             which
             casteth
             foorth
             small
             boughes
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Indians
             make
             wine
             .
             In
             Mexico
             they
             call
             it
             the
             tree
             of
             Peru
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             came
             from
             thence
             :
             but
             it
             growes
             also
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             better
             than
             those
             in
             Peru.
             There
             are
             a
             thousand
             other
             trees
             ,
             which
             were
             a
             super●●uous
             labour
             to
             intreate
             of
             ,
             whereof
             some
             are
             of
             an
             exceeding
             greatnesse
             ,
             I
             will
             speake
             only
             of
             one
             which
             is
             in
             
               Tlaco
               Chavoya
            
             ,
             three
             leagues
             from
             Guayaca
             in
             New
             Spaine
             :
             this
             tree
             being
             measured
             within
             ,
             being
             hollow
             ,
             was
             found
             to
             have
             nine
             fadome
             ,
             and
             without
             ,
             neare
             to
             the
             roote
             ,
             sixteene
             ,
             and
             somewhat
             higher
             ,
             twelve
             .
             This
             tree
             was
             strooke
             with
             lightning
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottom●
             ,
             through
             the
             heart
             ,
             the
             which
             caused
             this
             hollownesse
             ;
             they
             say
             that
             before
             the
             
             thunder
             fell
             vpon
             it
             ,
             it
             was
             able
             to
             shadow
             a
             thousand
             men
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             did
             assemble
             there
             for
             theyr
             daunces
             and
             superstitions
             :
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             there
             doth
             remaine
             some
             boughes
             and
             verdure
             ,
             but
             not
             much
             .
             They
             know
             not
             what
             kinde
             of
             tree
             it
             is
             ,
             but
             they
             say
             it
             is
             a
             kind
             of
             Cedar
             .
             Such
             as
             shall
             finde
             this
             strange
             ,
             let
             them
             reade
             what
             Plinie
             reporteth
             of
             the
             Plane
             of
             Lidia
             ,
             
             the
             hollow
             whereof
             contained
             foure
             score
             foote
             and
             one
             ,
             and
             seemed
             rather
             a
             Cabbin
             or
             a
             house
             ,
             than
             the
             hollow
             of
             a
             tree
             ,
             his
             boughs
             like
             a
             whole
             wood
             ,
             the
             shaddow
             whereof
             covered
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             field
             .
             By
             that
             which
             is
             writen
             of
             this
             tree
             ,
             we
             have
             no
             great
             cause
             to
             wonder
             at
             the
             Weaver
             ,
             who
             hadde
             his
             dwelling
             and
             loome
             in
             the
             hollow
             of
             a
             chesnut
             tree
             ;
             and
             of
             another
             chesnut
             tree
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             not
             the
             very
             same
             ,
             into
             the
             hollow
             whereof
             there
             entered
             eighteene
             men
             on
             horsebacke
             ,
             and
             passed
             out
             without
             disturbing
             one
             another
             .
             The
             Indians
             did
             commonly
             vse
             their
             idolatries
             in
             these
             trees
             ,
             so
             strange
             and
             deformed
             ,
             even
             as
             did
             the
             antient
             Gentiles
             ,
             as
             some
             Writers
             of
             our
             time
             doe
             report
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Plants
             and
             fruits
             which
             have
             bin
             carried
             out
             of
             Spaine
             to
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             31.
             
          
           
             THe
             Indians
             have
             received
             more
             profit
             ,
             and
             have
             bin
             better
             recompensed
             in
             plants
             that
             have
             bin
             broght
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             than
             in
             any
             other
             marchandise
             ,
             for
             that
             those
             few
             which
             are
             carried
             from
             the
             Indies
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             growe
             little
             there
             ,
             and
             multiply
             not
             ,
             and
             contrariwise
             the
             great
             number
             that
             have
             beene
             caried
             from
             Spaine
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             prosper
             wel
             &
             multiplie
             greatly
             :
             I
             know
             not
             whether
             I
             shall
             attribute
             it
             to
             the
             bounty
             of
             the
             plants
             
             that
             goe
             from
             hence
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             goodnesse
             of
             the
             soile
             that
             is
             there
             .
             Finally
             ,
             there
             is
             at
             the
             Indies
             any
             good
             thing
             that
             Spaine
             brings
             foorth
             ;
             in
             some
             places
             it
             is
             better
             ,
             in
             some
             worse
             ,
             as
             wheate
             ,
             barley
             ,
             hearbes
             ,
             and
             all
             kindes
             of
             pulses
             ,
             also
             lettuce
             ,
             colewortes
             ,
             radishes
             ,
             onions
             ,
             garlike
             ,
             parsley
             ,
             turneps
             ,
             parseneps
             ,
             Becengenes
             ,
             or
             apples
             of
             love
             ,
             siccorie
             ,
             beetes
             ,
             spinage
             ,
             pease
             ,
             beanes
             ,
             vetches
             ;
             and
             finally
             ,
             whatsoever
             groweth
             heere
             of
             anie
             profite
             ,
             so
             as
             all
             that
             have
             voyaged
             thither
             ,
             have
             beene
             curious
             to
             carry
             seedes
             of
             all
             sorts
             ,
             and
             all
             have
             growen
             ,
             although
             diversly
             ,
             some
             more
             ,
             some
             lesse
             .
             As
             for
             those
             trees
             that
             have
             most
             aboundantly
             fructified
             ,
             be
             orange
             trees
             ,
             limons
             ,
             citrons
             ,
             and
             others
             of
             that
             sort
             .
             In
             some
             partes
             there
             are
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             whole
             woods
             and
             forrests
             of
             orange
             trees
             :
             the
             which
             seeming
             strange
             vnto
             mee
             ,
             I
             asked
             who
             had
             planted
             the
             fields
             with
             so
             many
             orange
             trees
             ▪
             they
             made
             mee
             answer
             ,
             that
             it
             did
             come
             by
             chaunce
             ,
             for
             that
             oranges
             being
             fallen
             to
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             rotten
             ,
             their
             seeds
             did
             spring
             ,
             and
             of
             those
             which
             the
             water
             had
             carried
             away
             into
             diverse
             partes
             ,
             these
             woods
             grew
             so
             thicke
             :
             which
             seemed
             to
             me
             a
             very
             good
             reason
             .
             I
             have
             saide
             that
             this
             fruite
             hath
             generally
             increased
             most
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             for
             that
             I
             have
             not
             beene
             in
             any
             place
             but
             I
             finde
             orange
             trees
             ,
             for
             that
             all
             their
             soyle
             is
             hote
             and
             moist
             ,
             which
             this
             tree
             most
             desires
             .
             There
             growes
             not
             any
             vppon
             the
             Sierre
             or
             mountaine
             ,
             but
             they
             carry
             them
             from
             the
             vallies
             or
             sea
             coast
             .
             The
             conserve
             of
             oranges
             which
             they
             do
             make
             at
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             is
             the
             best
             I
             have
             seene
             anie
             where
             ;
             peaches
             ,
             presses
             and
             apricockes
             have
             greatly
             multiplied
             ,
             especially
             in
             New
             Spaine
             .
             At
             Peru
             there
             growes
             few
             of
             these
             kindes
             of
             fruites
             ,
             except
             peaches
             ,
             and
             much
             lesse
             in
             the
             Ilands
             .
             There
             growes
             apples
             and
             peares
             ,
             yet
             but
             scarcely
             :
             there
             
             are
             but
             few
             plumbs
             ,
             but
             aboundance
             of
             figges
             ,
             chiefly
             in
             Peru.
             They
             finde
             quinces
             in
             all
             the
             country
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             in
             such
             aboundance
             ,
             as
             they
             gave
             vs
             fifty
             choice
             ones
             for
             halfe
             a
             riall
             .
             There
             is
             great
             store
             of
             pomegranets
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             all
             sweete
             ,
             for
             the
             sharp
             are
             not
             there
             esteemed
             .
             There
             are
             very
             good
             melons
             in
             some
             partes
             of
             Peru.
             Cherries
             both
             wilde
             and
             tame
             have
             not
             prospered
             well
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             do
             not
             impute
             to
             want
             of
             temperature
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             of
             all
             sorts
             ,
             but
             to
             carelesnesse
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             have
             not
             well
             observed
             the
             temperature
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             I
             do
             not
             finde
             that
             in
             those
             partes
             there
             wants
             any
             dainty
             fruite
             .
             As
             for
             grosse
             fruites
             ,
             they
             have
             no
             Beillottes
             nor
             chesnuttes
             ,
             neither
             doe
             I
             finde
             that
             any
             have
             growne
             there
             to
             this
             day
             .
             Almonds
             growe
             there
             ,
             but
             rarely
             .
             They
             carry
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             for
             such
             as
             are
             dainty
             mouthed
             ,
             both
             almonds
             ,
             nuttes
             ,
             and
             filberds
             ;
             but
             I
             have
             not
             knowne
             they
             had
             any
             medlers
             or
             servises
             ,
             which
             importes
             little
             .
             In
             my
             iudgement
             ,
             this
             may
             suffice
             to
             shew
             that
             there
             wanteth
             no
             delightfull
             fruites
             .
             Now
             let
             vs
             speake
             somewhat
             of
             plants
             that
             profit
             ,
             and
             which
             have
             been
             carried
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             so
             will
             ende
             that
             Treatise
             ,
             beeing
             too
             troublesome
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             grapes
             ,
             vignes
             ,
             olives
             ,
             mulberies
             ,
             and
             kanes
             of
             sugar
             .
             CHAP.
             32.
             
          
           
             I
             Meane
             by
             profitable
             plants
             ,
             those
             ,
             which
             besides
             that
             which
             they
             eate
             in
             the
             house
             ,
             bring
             silver
             to
             theyr
             maisters
             ;
             the
             chiefe
             of
             these
             is
             the
             vigne
             ,
             whereof
             commeth
             wine
             vinegar
             ,
             grapes
             ,
             greene
             and
             dry
             ,
             veriuyce
             ,
             and
             sirrope
             .
             But
             the
             wine
             is
             the
             best
             .
             There
             growes
             no
             wine
             ,
             nor
             grapes
             in
             the
             Ilandes
             ,
             nor
             firme
             land
             ,
             but
             in
             
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             vignes
             which
             beare
             grapes
             ,
             and
             yet
             make
             no
             wine
             .
             The
             cause
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             grape
             ripens
             not
             well
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             raine
             that
             falles
             in
             the
             months
             of
             Iuly
             and
             August
             ,
             which
             hinders
             their
             ripening
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             serve
             onely
             to
             eate
             .
             They
             carry
             wine
             out
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             to
             all
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             except
             Peru
             and
             the
             realme
             of
             Chillé
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             vignes
             that
             yeelde
             excellent
             wine
             ,
             which
             increase
             daily
             both
             in
             quantity
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             a
             great
             riches
             in
             that
             country
             ,
             and
             in
             beauty
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             are
             become
             with
             time
             and
             practise
             more
             expert
             vignerous
             .
             The
             vignes
             of
             Peru
             are
             commonly
             in
             hote
             vallies
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             waters
             ,
             which
             they
             water
             with
             the
             hand
             ,
             because
             there
             falles
             no
             raine
             at
             all
             from
             heaven
             ;
             and
             vppon
             the
             Lanos
             and
             Sierre
             it
             comes
             not
             in
             time
             .
             There
             are
             some
             places
             where
             the
             vignes
             are
             not
             watered
             ,
             neither
             from
             heaven
             nor
             earth
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             increase
             in
             great
             aboundance
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             valley
             of
             Yca
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             ditches
             that
             they
             call
             VillacuZi
             ,
             in
             which
             places
             they
             finde
             ditches
             ,
             or
             th'
             earth
             suncke
             downe
             amongest
             the
             dead
             sands
             ,
             which
             are
             thorowout
             the
             yeare
             of
             a
             woonderfull
             coolenesse
             ,
             and
             yet
             it
             raines
             not
             there
             at
             any
             time
             ,
             neither
             is
             there
             any
             maner
             of
             meanes
             to
             water
             it
             artificially
             ;
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             because
             the
             soile
             is
             spongious
             ,
             and
             suckes
             vp
             the
             water
             of
             the
             rivers
             that
             fall
             from
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             which
             moisten
             these
             sands
             ,
             or
             else
             it
             is
             the
             moistnesse
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             as
             others
             suppose
             ,
             which
             passing
             over
             this
             sand
             ,
             is
             the
             cause
             why
             it
             is
             not
             barren
             nor
             vnprofitable
             ,
             as
             the
             Philosopher
             teaches
             .
             The
             vignes
             have
             so
             increased
             there
             ,
             as
             for
             this
             cause
             onely
             the
             tithes
             of
             the
             Churches
             are
             multiplied
             five
             or
             sixe
             times
             double
             within
             these
             twentie
             yeares
             .
             The
             most
             fertile
             vallies
             for
             vignes
             be
             Victor
             neare
             to
             
               Arequipa
               ,
               Yca
            
             in
             the
             territory
             of
             Lima
             ,
             and
             Caraguato
             
             in
             the
             Countrey
             of
             Chuquiavo
             ;
             they
             carry
             this
             wine
             to
             
               Potozi
               ,
               Cusco
            
             and
             divers
             partes
             ,
             which
             yeeldes
             a
             great
             revenue
             :
             for
             notwithstanding
             all
             the
             aboundance
             they
             have
             ,
             a
             bottle
             or
             arobe
             is
             there
             woorth
             five
             or
             sixe
             duckats
             ,
             and
             if
             it
             be
             Spanish
             wine
             (
             as
             they
             commonly
             carry
             in
             their
             fleetes
             )
             it
             is
             woorth
             tenne
             or
             twelve
             .
             They
             make
             wine
             like
             to
             that
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             in
             the
             realme
             of
             Chille
             ,
             being
             in
             the
             same
             climate
             ;
             but
             it
             corrupteth
             being
             carried
             to
             Peru
             :
             they
             eate
             the
             grape
             where
             they
             cannot
             drink
             the
             wine
             .
             And
             it
             is
             strange
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             citty
             of
             Cusco
             you
             shall
             finde
             ripe
             grapes
             all
             the
             yeare
             long
             :
             the
             reason
             is
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             for
             that
             those
             valleis
             bring
             foorth
             fruits
             in
             diverse
             moneths
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             either
             for
             that
             they
             cutte
             their
             vignes
             in
             diverse
             seasons
             ;
             or
             that
             this
             varietie
             proceedes
             from
             the
             quality
             of
             the
             soyle
             ;
             but
             whatsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             there
             are
             some
             vallies
             which
             carry
             fruit
             all
             the
             yeare
             .
             If
             any
             one
             wonder
             at
             this
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             he
             will
             wonder
             much
             more
             at
             that
             which
             I
             shall
             say
             ,
             and
             perchaunce
             not
             beleeve
             it
             .
             There
             are
             trees
             in
             Peru
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             part
             yeeldes
             fruit
             one
             sixe
             moneths
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             halfe
             part
             yeeldes
             fruite
             the
             other
             sixe
             moneths
             .
             In
             Malla
             which
             is
             thirteene
             leagues
             from
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Kings
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             figge
             tree
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             halfe
             which
             is
             towardes
             the
             South
             ,
             is
             greene
             ,
             and
             yeeldeth
             his
             fruite
             one
             season
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             summer
             vpon
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             moity
             towards
             the
             Lanos
             or
             sea
             coast
             ,
             is
             greene
             ,
             and
             yeeldes
             his
             fruite
             in
             the
             other
             contrary
             season
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             summer
             vpon
             the
             Lanos
             ,
             which
             groweth
             from
             the
             diverse
             temperature
             ,
             and
             the
             ayre
             which
             commeth
             from
             the
             one
             part
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             .
             The
             revenue
             of
             wine
             there
             is
             not
             small
             ,
             but
             it
             goeth
             not
             out
             of
             the
             country
             .
             But
             the
             silke
             that
             is
             made
             in
             new
             Spaine
             is
             transported
             into
             other
             
             countries
             ,
             as
             to
             Peru.
             There
             were
             no
             Mulberrie
             trees
             in
             the
             Indies
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             were
             brought
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             they
             grow
             well
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             province
             which
             they
             call
             Mistecqua
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             silke-wormes
             ,
             and
             they
             put
             to
             worke
             the
             silke
             they
             gather
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             very
             good
             taffataes
             :
             Yet
             to
             this
             day
             they
             have
             made
             neyth●r
             damaske
             ,
             sattin
             ,
             nor
             velvet
             .
             The
             sugar
             yet
             is
             a
             greater
             revenue
             ,
             for
             they
             not
             only
             spend
             it
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             but
             also
             they
             carry
             much
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             for
             the
             canes
             grow
             exceeding
             well
             in
             many
             parts
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             They
             have
             built
             their
             engins
             in
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             in
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             partes
             ,
             which
             yeeldeth
             them
             a
             very
             great
             revenue
             .
          
           
             It
             was
             tolde
             me
             ,
             that
             the
             engine
             for
             sugar
             in
             Nasca
             ,
             was
             worth
             yeerely
             above
             thirty
             thousand
             peeces
             of
             revenue
             .
             That
             of
             Chicama
             ioyning
             to
             Truxillo
             ,
             was
             likewise
             of
             great
             revenue
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             new
             Spaine
             are
             of
             no
             lesse
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             to
             see
             what
             store
             they
             consume
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             They
             brought
             from
             the
             Iland
             of
             S.
             Dominique
             ,
             in
             the
             fleete
             wherein
             I
             came
             eight
             hundred
             ninety
             eight
             chests
             of
             sugar
             ,
             which
             being
             (
             as
             I
             did
             see
             )
             shipped
             at
             
               Port
               Ricco
            
             (
             every
             chest
             (
             in
             my
             opinion
             )
             weied
             eight
             arobes
             ,
             every
             arobes
             weighing
             five
             and
             twenty
             pounds
             ,
             which
             are
             two
             hundred
             weight
             of
             sugar
             )
             is
             the
             chiefe
             revenue
             of
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             so
             much
             are
             men
             given
             to
             the
             desire
             of
             sweete
             things
             .
             There
             are
             likewise
             olives
             and
             olive
             trees
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             I
             say
             in
             Mexico
             and
             in
             Peru
             ,
             yet
             hath
             there
             not
             beene
             to
             this
             day
             any
             mill
             for
             oile
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             eate
             all
             their
             olives
             ,
             and
             dresse
             them
             well
             :
             they
             finde
             the
             charge
             is
             greater
             to
             make
             oile
             than
             the
             profit
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             carry
             all
             the
             oyle
             they
             do
             spend
             from
             Spaine
             .
             And
             heere
             we
             will
             end
             with
             plants
             ,
             and
             will
             passe
             to
             such
             beasts
             as
             be
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             Beasts
             bearing
             wooll
             ,
             and
             of
             Kine
             .
             
               CHAP.
               33.
            
             
          
           
             I
             ●inde
             there
             are
             three
             kindes
             of
             beasts
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             whereof
             some
             have
             been
             carried
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             others
             are
             of
             the
             same
             kinde
             we
             have
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             yet
             not
             carried
             by
             the
             Spaniardes
             ;
             and
             others
             are
             proper
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             none
             in
             Spaine
             .
             Of
             the
             first
             kinde
             are
             sheepe
             ,
             kine
             ,
             goates
             ,
             swine
             ,
             horses
             ,
             asses
             ,
             dogs
             ,
             cattes
             and
             other
             such
             beasts
             ,
             for
             there
             are
             of
             all
             these
             kindes
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             The
             smaller
             cattell
             have
             greatly
             multiplied
             ,
             and
             if
             they
             could
             make
             profite
             of
             their
             woolls
             by
             sending
             them
             into
             Europe
             ,
             it
             were
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             riches
             the
             Indies
             had
             ,
             for
             there
             the
             flockes
             of
             sheepe
             have
             great
             pastures
             ,
             whereas
             their
             feeding
             failes
             not
             .
             In
             Peru
             there
             is
             such
             store
             of
             pastures
             and
             feedings
             ,
             as
             no
             man
             hath
             any
             proper
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             but
             every
             man
             feedes
             his
             troupes
             where
             he
             pleaseth
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             there
             is
             commonly
             great
             store
             of
             flesh
             ,
             and
             very
             good
             cheape
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             things
             that
             come
             from
             sheepe
             ,
             as
             milke
             ,
             and
             cheese
             .
             For
             a
             time
             they
             lost
             their
             woolles
             ,
             vntill
             that
             some
             beganne
             to
             husband
             it
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             cloth
             and
             coverings
             ,
             which
             hath
             beene
             a
             great
             helpe
             for
             the
             poorer
             sort
             of
             the
             countrie
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             cloth
             of
             Castille
             is
             very
             deere
             there
             .
             There
             are
             many
             Clothiers
             in
             Peru
             ,
             but
             more
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             yet
             the
             cloth
             that
             comes
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             is
             farre
             better
             ,
             whether
             the
             woll
             be
             more
             fine
             ,
             or
             the
             worke
             men
             more
             expert
             .
             In
             former
             times
             there
             were
             men
             that
             did
             possesse
             threescore
             and
             ten
             ,
             yea
             ,
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             at
             this
             day
             they
             have
             not
             many
             lesse
             .
             If
             this
             were
             in
             Europe
             ,
             it
             were
             a
             very
             great
             substance
             ,
             but
             in
             that
             countrie
             it
             is
             but
             a
             meane
             wealth
             .
             In
             many
             partes
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             
             I
             thinke
             in
             the
             greatest
             part
             ,
             small
             cattell
             do
             not
             increase
             and
             profite
             well
             ,
             by
             reason
             that
             the
             grasse
             is
             high
             ,
             and
             the
             soile
             so
             vicious
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             feede
             so
             well
             as
             great
             cattell
             .
             And
             therefore
             there
             is
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             line
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             two
             kindes
             .
             Some
             are
             ●ame
             and
             go
             in
             troupes
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Land
             of
             Charca
             ,
             and
             other
             Provinces
             of
             Peru
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             all
             new
             Spaine
             :
             from
             these
             tame
             kine
             they
             draw
             such
             profite
             as
             they
             do
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             flesh
             ,
             butter
             ,
             calves
             ,
             and
             oxen
             to
             till
             the
             ground
             .
             The
             other
             kinde
             is
             wilde
             ,
             which
             live
             in
             the
             mountaines
             and
             forrests
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             tame
             them
             not
             ,
             neither
             have
             they
             any
             master
             to
             whom
             they
             are
             proper
             ,
             both
             for
             the
             roughnes
             and
             thickenes
             of
             the
             forrest
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             the
             great
             multitude
             there
             is
             ,
             and
             he
             that
             first
             killes
             them
             ,
             is
             the
             master
             ,
             as
             of
             any
             wilde
             beast
             .
             These
             wilde
             kine
             have
             so
             multiplied
             in
             S.
             Dominique
             ,
             and
             thereabouts
             ,
             that
             they
             troupe
             together
             in
             the
             fields
             and
             woods
             by
             thousands
             ,
             having
             no
             master
             to
             whom
             they
             appertaine
             .
             They
             hunt
             these
             beasts
             onely
             for
             their
             hides
             ,
             they
             go
             to
             the
             field
             on
             horse-backe
             with
             their
             weapons
             to
             hough
             them
             ,
             coursing
             the
             kine
             :
             and
             when
             they
             have
             strucken
             any
             and
             staied
             them
             ,
             they
             are
             their
             owne
             ,
             they
             flea
             them
             and
             carry
             the
             hides
             home
             ,
             leaving
             the
             flesh
             ,
             which
             every
             one
             neglects
             for
             the
             aboundance
             there
             is
             ,
             so
             as
             some
             have
             testified
             in
             this
             Iland
             ,
             that
             in
             some
             places
             the
             aire
             hath
             been
             corrupted
             with
             the
             aboundance
             of
             these
             stinking
             carcases
             .
             The
             hides
             they
             bring
             into
             Spaine
             ,
             is
             one
             of
             the
             best
             revenues
             of
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             &
             of
             new
             Spaine
             .
             In
             the
             fleet
             the
             yere
             1●87
             .
             there
             came
             from
             S.
             Dominique
             ,
             3●444
             .
             hides
             ,
             and
             from
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             64350.
             which
             they
             value
             at
             96532.
             peeces
             ,
             so
             as
             when
             they
             discharge
             one
             of
             these
             fleetes
             ,
             it
             is
             admirable
             to
             behold
             the
             river
             of
             Seville
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             arcenall
             
             (
             where
             they
             vnlade
             ,
             )
             so
             many
             hides
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             marchandize
             .
             There
             are
             also
             great
             numbers
             of
             goates
             ,
             whose
             cheefe
             profite
             is
             their
             tallowe
             ,
             besides
             their
             kidmilke
             and
             other
             commodities
             ,
             for
             that
             both
             rich
             and
             poore
             vse
             this
             tallowe
             for
             lightes
             ,
             for
             as
             there
             is
             a
             great
             quantitie
             ,
             so
             do
             they
             make
             very
             good
             accoumpt
             of
             it
             ;
             yea
             ,
             more
             then
             of
             oyle
             ,
             but
             all
             the
             tallow
             they
             vse
             is
             onely
             of
             the
             males
             .
             They
             yse
             their
             skinnes
             for
             shooes
             ,
             yet
             I
             hold
             them
             not
             so
             good
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             are
             carried
             from
             Castill
             .
             Horses
             have
             multiplied
             there
             ,
             and
             are
             very
             excellent
             in
             many
             places
             ;
             yea
             in
             many
             partes
             there
             are
             races
             found
             as
             good
             as
             the
             best
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             passing
             of
             a
             carrier
             ,
             and
             for
             pompe
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             travell
             :
             and
             therefore
             they
             vse
             horses
             most
             commonly
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             no
             want
             of
             moyles
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             many
             ,
             especially
             where
             they
             make
             their
             carriages
             by
             land
             .
             There
             is
             no
             great
             numbers
             of
             asses
             ,
             having
             no
             great
             vse
             for
             them
             ,
             neither
             for
             travell
             nor
             service
             .
             There
             are
             some
             few
             ca●mells
             ;
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             in
             Peru
             ,
             that
             were
             brought
             from
             the
             Canaries
             ,
             and
             have
             multiplied
             there
             alittle
             .
             In
             S.
             Dominique
             ,
             dogges
             have
             so
             multiplied
             in
             number
             and
             bignes
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             it
             is
             the
             scourge
             and
             affliction
             of
             that
             Iland
             :
             for
             they
             eate
             the
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             go
             in
             troupes
             through
             the
             fields
             .
             Such
             that
             kill
             them
             are
             rewarded
             like
             to
             them
             that
             kill
             woolves
             in
             Spaine
             .
             At
             the
             first
             there
             were
             no
             dogges
             at
             the
             Indies
             but
             some
             beasts
             like
             vnto
             little
             dogges
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Indians
             call
             Alco
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             call
             all
             dogges
             that
             go
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             by
             the
             same
             name
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             resemblance
             that
             is
             betwixt
             them
             .
             The
             Indians
             doe
             so
             love
             these
             little
             dogges
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             spare
             their
             meate
             to
             feede
             them
             ,
             so
             as
             when
             they
             travell
             in
             the
             countrie
             ,
             they
             carrie
             them
             with
             them
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             or
             in
             
             their
             bosomes
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             are
             sicke
             ,
             they
             keepe
             them
             with
             them
             ,
             without
             any
             vse
             ,
             but
             onely
             for
             company
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             some
             Beasts
             of
             Europe
             ,
             which
             the
             Spaniardes
             found
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             should
             passe
             thither
             .
             CHAP.
             34.
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             certaine
             that
             they
             have
             carried
             from
             Spaine
             all
             these
             beasts
             whereof
             I
             have
             spoken
             ,
             of
             which
             kindes
             there
             were
             none
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             first
             discovered
             about
             a
             hundred
             yeares
             since
             ;
             for
             besides
             that
             it
             may
             be
             wel
             approved
             by
             witnesses
             at
             this
             day
             living
             .
             It
             is
             also
             a
             sufficient
             argument
             to
             see
             that
             the
             Indians
             in
             their
             to●gue
             ,
             have
             no
             proper
             words
             to
             signifie
             these
             beasts
             ,
             but
             they
             vse
             the
             same
             Spanish
             names
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             corrupted
             :
             for
             being
             ignorant
             of
             the
             thing
             ,
             they
             tooke
             the
             word
             common
             to
             those
             places
             from
             whence
             they
             came
             .
             I
             have
             found
             this
             a
             good
             rule
             ,
             to
             discerne
             what
             things
             the
             Indians
             had
             before
             the
             Spaniardes
             came
             there
             ,
             and
             what
             they
             had
             not
             :
             for
             they
             gave
             names
             to
             those
             they
             had
             and
             knew
             before
             ,
             and
             have
             given
             new
             names
             to
             these
             that
             are
             newly
             come
             vnto
             them
             ,
             which
             commonly
             are
             the
             same
             Spanish
             names
             ,
             although
             they
             pronounce
             them
             after
             their
             maner
             ,
             as
             for
             a
             horse
             ,
             wine
             ,
             and
             wheate
             .
             They
             found
             of
             some
             sortes
             of
             beasts
             that
             are
             in
             Europe
             ,
             &
             were
             not
             carried
             thither
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             .
             There
             are
             Lions
             ,
             Tigres
             ,
             Beares
             ,
             Boares
             ,
             Foxes
             ,
             and
             other
             fierce
             &
             wilde
             beasts
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             treated
             in
             the
             first
             booke
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             was
             not
             likely
             they
             should
             passe
             to
             the
             Indies
             by
             Sea
             ,
             being
             impossible
             to
             swimme
             the
             Ocean
             :
             and
             it
             were
             a
             follie
             to
             imagine
             that
             men
             had
             imbarked
             them
             with
             them
             .
             
             It
             followes
             therefore
             that
             this
             worlde
             ioynes
             with
             the
             new
             in
             some
             part
             :
             by
             which
             these
             beasts
             might
             passe
             ,
             
             and
             so
             by
             little
             and
             little
             multiplied
             this
             world
             .
             The
             lions
             which
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             are
             not
             red
             ,
             neither
             have
             they
             such
             haire
             as
             they
             vsually
             paint
             them
             with
             .
             They
             are
             grey
             ,
             and
             not
             so
             furious
             as
             they
             seeme
             in
             pictures
             .
             The
             Indians
             assemble
             in
             troupes
             to
             hunt
             the
             lion
             ,
             and
             make
             as
             it
             were
             a
             circle
             ,
             which
             they
             do
             call
             Chaco
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             inviron
             them
             ,
             and
             after
             they
             kil
             them
             with
             stones
             ,
             staves
             ,
             and
             other
             weapons
             .
             These
             lions
             vse
             to
             climbe
             trees
             ,
             where
             being
             mounted
             ,
             the
             Indians
             kil
             them
             with
             launces
             and
             crossebowes
             ,
             but
             more
             easily
             with
             harquebuzes
             .
             The
             Tygres
             are
             more
             fierce
             and
             cruell
             ,
             and
             are
             more
             dangerous
             to
             meete
             ,
             because
             they
             breake
             foorth
             and
             assaile
             men
             in
             treason
             :
             They
             are
             spotted
             ,
             as
             the
             Historiographers
             describe
             them
             .
             I
             have
             heard
             some
             report
             that
             these
             Tygres
             were
             very
             fierce
             against
             the
             Indians
             ,
             yet
             would
             they
             not
             adventure
             at
             all
             vppon
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             or
             very
             little
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             would
             choose
             an
             Indian
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             many
             Spaniardes
             ,
             and
             carry
             him
             away
             .
          
           
             The
             Beares
             which
             in
             Cusco
             they
             call
             Otoioncos
             ,
             be
             of
             the
             same
             kinde
             that
             ours
             are
             ,
             and
             keepe
             in
             the
             ground
             .
             There
             are
             few
             swarmes
             of
             Bees
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             honniecombes
             are
             found
             in
             trees
             ,
             or
             vnder
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             hives
             as
             in
             Castille
             .
             The
             honny
             comhes
             which
             I
             have
             seene
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Chiguanas
             ,
             are
             of
             a
             grey
             colour
             ,
             having
             little
             iuyce
             ,
             and
             are
             more
             like
             vnto
             sweete
             strawe
             ,
             than
             to
             hony
             combs
             .
             They
             say
             the
             Bees
             are
             litle
             ,
             like
             vnto
             flies
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             swarme
             vnder
             the
             earth
             .
             The
             hony
             is
             sharp
             and
             black
             ,
             yet
             in
             some
             places
             there
             is
             better
             ,
             and
             the
             combes
             better
             fashioned
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             province
             of
             Tucuman
             in
             Chille
             ,
             
             and
             in
             Carthagene
             .
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             nor
             heard
             speak●
             of
             wilde
             boares
             ,
             but
             of
             foxes
             and
             other
             wild
             beasts
             that
             eate
             their
             cattell
             and
             fowle
             ,
             there
             are
             more
             than
             their
             shepheards
             would
             willingly
             have
             .
             Besides
             these
             beasts
             that
             are
             furious
             and
             hurtfull
             ,
             there
             are
             others
             that
             are
             profitable
             ,
             and
             have
             not
             beene
             transported
             by
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             as
             stagges
             and
             diere
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             gro●t
             aboundance
             in
             all
             the
             forrests
             .
             But
             the
             greatest
             parte
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             diere
             without
             hornes
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             I
             have
             never
             seene
             nor
             heard
             speake
             of
             other
             ,
             and
             all
             are
             without
             hornes
             like
             vnto
             Corcos
             .
             It
             seemes
             not
             hard
             to
             beleeve
             ,
             but
             is
             almost
             certain
             ,
             that
             all
             these
             beasts
             for
             their
             lightnesse
             ,
             and
             being
             naturally
             wilde
             ,
             have
             passed
             from
             one
             world
             to
             an
             other
             ,
             by
             some
             parts
             where
             they
             ioyne
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             the
             great
             Ilands
             farre
             from
             the
             maine
             land
             I
             have
             not
             heard
             that
             there
             are
             any
             ,
             though
             I
             have
             made
             diligent
             inquiry
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Fowles
             which
             are
             heere
             ,
             and
             are
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             how
             they
             could
             passe
             thither
             .
             CHAP.
             35.
             
          
           
             WEe
             may
             more
             easily
             beleeve
             the
             same
             of
             birdes
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             are
             of
             the
             same
             kindes
             that
             wee
             have
             ,
             as
             partridges
             ,
             turtles
             ,
             pigeons
             ,
             stockdoves
             ,
             quailes
             ,
             and
             many
             sorts
             of
             falcons
             ,
             which
             they
             send
             from
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             Peru
             ,
             to
             the
             noblemen
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             for
             they
             make
             great
             accompt
             of
             them
             .
             There
             are
             also
             Herons
             and
             Eagles
             of
             diverse
             kindes
             ;
             and
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             but
             these
             birds
             &
             such
             like
             ,
             have
             sooner
             passed
             thither
             than
             lions
             ,
             tygres
             ,
             and
             stagges
             .
             There
             are
             likewise
             at
             the
             Indies
             great
             numbers
             of
             parrots
             ,
             especially
             vpon
             the
             Andes
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Ilands
             of
             
               Port
               Ricco
            
             and
             saint
             Dominique
             ,
             
             where
             they
             flee
             by
             flockes
             ,
             as
             pigeons
             do
             here
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             birdes
             with
             their
             wings
             may
             goe
             where
             they
             will
             ;
             and
             truely
             many
             kindes
             might
             well
             passe
             the
             gulph
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             certaine
             ,
             as
             Plinie
             affirmeth
             ,
             
             that
             there
             are
             many
             that
             passe
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             goe
             into
             strange
             regions
             ,
             although
             I
             have
             not
             read
             that
             any
             fowle
             hath
             passed
             by
             flight
             so
             great
             a
             gulph
             ,
             as
             is
             the
             Indian
             Ocean
             ,
             yet
             hold
             I
             it
             not
             altogether
             impossible
             ,
             seeing
             the
             common
             opinion
             of
             mariners
             ,
             that
             you
             shall
             finde
             them
             twoo
             hundred
             leagues
             and
             more
             from
             the
             land
             ,
             And
             as
             Aristotle
             dooth
             teach
             ,
             that
             birdes
             endure
             the
             water
             easely
             ,
             having
             little
             respiration
             ,
             as
             wee
             see
             in
             sea
             fowle
             ,
             which
             dive
             and
             remain
             long
             vnder
             the
             water
             .
             Even
             so
             we
             may
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             fowle
             which
             bee
             at
             this
             present
             vppon
             the
             maine
             land
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Ilands
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             might
             passe
             the
             sea
             ,
             resting
             themselves
             in
             some
             small
             Ilands
             ,
             or
             vpon
             some
             land
             which
             they
             discovered
             by
             a
             naturall
             instinct
             (
             as
             Plinie
             reporteth
             of
             some
             )
             or
             peradventure
             falling
             into
             the
             water
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             weary
             of
             flying
             ,
             
             and
             after
             beganne
             their
             flight
             a
             new
             when
             they
             had
             alittle
             rested
             .
             As
             for
             the
             fowles
             which
             we
             see
             in
             the
             Ilands
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             no
             beasts
             ,
             I
             beleeve
             certainly
             that
             they
             passed
             by
             one
             of
             the
             foresayde
             meanes
             .
             But
             for
             other
             birdes
             which
             we
             finde
             vppon
             the
             maine
             land
             ,
             especially
             those
             whose
             flight
             is
             shorte
             ,
             it
             is
             more
             credible
             that
             they
             came
             thither
             as
             the
             beasts
             did
             ,
             which
             are
             of
             the
             same
             kindes
             that
             wee
             have
             in
             Europe
             .
             For
             at
             the
             Indies
             there
             are
             great
             birds
             ,
             very
             heavy
             ,
             as
             Estridges
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             many
             in
             Peru
             ;
             which
             doe
             vse
             sometimes
             to
             terrifie
             the
             Indian
             sheepe
             as
             they
             do
             goe
             with
             their
             burthens
             .
          
           
             But
             leaving
             these
             birds
             that
             govern
             themselves
             without
             the
             care
             of
             man
             ,
             but
             onely
             for
             hawking
             ,
             let
             vs
             now
             
             speake
             of
             tame
             fowle
             ;
             I
             wondered
             at
             hennes
             ,
             seeing
             there
             were
             som
             at
             the
             Indies
             before
             the
             Spaniards
             came
             there
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             well
             approoved
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             a
             proper
             name
             of
             the
             country
             ,
             and
             they
             call
             a
             henne
             Gualpa
             ,
             and
             the
             egge
             P●nto
             ,
             and
             they
             vse
             the
             same
             proverb
             wee
             doe
             ,
             to
             call
             a
             coward
             ,
             a
             henne
             .
             Those
             that
             were
             at
             the
             discovery
             of
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Soloman
             ,
             do
             report
             that
             they
             have
             seene
             hennes
             there
             like
             vnto
             ours
             :
             wee
             may
             conceive
             that
             the
             henne
             being
             so
             tame
             a
             fowle
             ,
             and
             so
             profitable
             ,
             men
             might
             carry
             them
             with
             them
             when
             they
             passed
             from
             one
             place
             to
             another
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             at
             this
             day
             the
             Indians
             in
             their
             travel
             carry
             their
             henne
             with
             them
             ,
             or
             chicken
             vpon
             the
             burthen
             they
             have
             on
             their
             shoulders
             :
             and
             likewise
             they
             carry
             them
             easily
             in
             their
             cages
             of
             reedes
             or
             wood
             .
             Finally
             ,
             there
             be
             at
             the
             Indies
             many
             kindes
             of
             beasts
             and
             birdes
             ,
             such
             as
             we
             have
             in
             Europe
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             specified
             ,
             and
             other
             sortes
             which
             I
             leave
             to
             others
             to
             discourse
             of
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             it
             spould
             be
             possible
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             Indies
             there
             should
             be
             anie
             sortes
             of
             beasts
             ,
             whereof
             the
             like
             are
             no
             where
             else
             .
             
               CHAP.
               36.
            
             
          
           
             IV
             were
             a
             matter
             more
             difficult
             ,
             to
             shew
             ,
             and
             prove
             ,
             what
             beginning
             many
             &
             sundry
             sorts
             of
             beasts
             had
             ,
             which
             are
             found
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             of
             whose
             kindes
             we
             have
             none
             in
             this
             continent
             .
             For
             if
             the
             Creator
             hath
             made
             them
             there
             ,
             wee
             may
             not
             then
             alleadge
             nor
             flie
             to
             Noahs
             Arke
             ,
             neither
             was
             it
             then
             necessary
             to
             save
             all
             sorts
             of
             birds
             and
             beasts
             ,
             if
             others
             were
             to
             be
             created
             anew
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             wee
             could
             not
             affirme
             ,
             that
             the
             creation
             of
             the
             world
             was
             made
             and
             finished
             in
             sixe
             dayes
             ,
             if
             there
             were
             yet
             other
             new
             kinds
             to
             make
             ,
             and
             specially
             perfit
             
             beasts
             ,
             and
             no
             lesse
             excellent
             than
             those
             that
             are
             knowen
             vnto
             vs
             :
             If
             we
             say
             then
             that
             all
             these
             kindes
             of
             creatures
             were
             preserved
             in
             the
             Arke
             by
             Noah
             ,
             it
             followes
             ,
             that
             those
             beasts
             ,
             of
             whose
             kindes
             we
             finde
             not
             any
             but
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             have
             passed
             thither
             from
             this
             continent
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             saide
             of
             other
             beasts
             that
             are
             knowne
             vnto
             vs.
             This
             supposed
             ,
             I
             demand
             how
             it
             is
             possible
             that
             none
             of
             their
             kinde
             shoulde
             remaine
             heere
             ?
             and
             how
             they
             are
             found
             there
             ,
             being
             as
             it
             were
             travellers
             and
             strangers
             ?
             Truly
             it
             is
             a
             question
             that
             hath
             long
             held
             me
             in
             suspens
             .
             I
             say
             for
             example
             ,
             if
             the
             sheep
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             they
             call
             Pacos
             and
             Guanacos
             ,
             are
             not
             found
             in
             any
             other
             regions
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             who
             hath
             carried
             them
             thither
             ?
             or
             how
             came
             they
             there
             ?
             seeing
             there
             is
             no
             shew
             nor
             remainder
             of
             them
             in
             all
             this
             worlde
             ?
             If
             they
             have
             not
             passed
             from
             some
             other
             region
             ,
             how
             were
             they
             formed
             and
             brought
             foorth
             there
             ?
             It
             may
             be
             GOD
             hath
             made
             a
             new
             creation
             of
             beasts
             .
             That
             which
             I
             speake
             of
             these
             Pacos
             and
             Guanacos
             may
             be
             said
             of
             a
             thousand
             different
             kindes
             of
             birdes
             and
             beasts
             of
             the
             forrest
             ,
             which
             have
             never
             beene
             knowne
             ,
             neither
             in
             shape
             nor
             name
             ;
             and
             whereof
             there
             is
             no
             mention
             made
             ,
             neither
             among
             the
             Latins
             ,
             nor
             Greekes
             ,
             nor
             any
             other
             nations
             of
             the
             world
             .
             We
             must
             then
             say
             ,
             that
             though
             all
             beasts
             came
             out
             of
             the
             Arke
             ,
             yet
             by
             a
             naturall
             instinct
             ,
             and
             the
             providence
             of
             heaven
             ,
             diverse
             kindes
             dispersed
             themselves
             into
             diverse
             regions
             ,
             where
             they
             found
             themselves
             so
             well
             ,
             as
             they
             woulde
             not
             parte
             ;
             or
             if
             they
             departed
             ,
             they
             did
             not
             preserve
             themselves
             ,
             but
             in
             processe
             of
             time
             ,
             perished
             wholy
             ,
             as
             we
             do
             see
             it
             chaunce
             in
             many
             things
             .
             For
             if
             we
             shall
             looke
             precisely
             into
             it
             ,
             we
             shall
             finde
             that
             it
             is
             not
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             alone
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             but
             generall
             to
             many
             other
             Nations
             and
             Provinces
             
             of
             
               Asia
               ,
               Europe
            
             ,
             and
             Affrike
             ,
             where
             they
             say
             there
             are
             certaine
             kindes
             of
             creatures
             ,
             that
             are
             not
             found
             in
             other
             regions
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             if
             they
             be
             any
             where
             else
             ,
             they
             are
             knowne
             to
             be
             carried
             from
             thence
             .
             Seeing
             then
             these
             creatures
             came
             out
             of
             the
             Arke
             ,
             as
             for
             example
             ,
             the
             elephant
             which
             we
             finde
             only
             in
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             have
             beene
             imparted
             to
             other
             regions
             ,
             wee
             may
             say
             as
             much
             of
             these
             creatures
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             of
             others
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             are
             not
             found
             in
             any
             other
             part
             of
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             Wee
             may
             likewise
             consider
             well
             vppon
             this
             subiect
             ,
             whether
             these
             beasts
             differ
             in
             kind
             ,
             and
             essentially
             from
             all
             others
             ,
             or
             if
             this
             difference
             be
             accidentall
             ,
             which
             might
             growe
             by
             diverse
             accidents
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             linages
             of
             men
             ,
             some
             are
             white
             ,
             others
             blacke
             ,
             some
             giants
             ,
             others
             dwa●fes
             :
             and
             in
             apes
             ,
             some
             have
             no
             taile
             ,
             others
             have
             :
             and
             in
             sheepe
             ,
             some
             are
             bare
             ,
             others
             have
             fleeces
             ;
             some
             great
             and
             strong
             with
             a
             long
             necke
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             Peru
             ;
             others
             weake
             and
             little
             ,
             having
             a
             short
             necke
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             Castille
             .
             But
             to
             speake
             directly
             ,
             whoso
             would
             by
             this
             Discourse
             ,
             shewing
             only
             these
             accidentall
             differences
             ,
             preserve
             the
             propagation
             of
             beasts
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             reduce
             them
             to
             those
             of
             Europ
             ,
             he
             shal
             vndertake
             a
             charge
             he
             will
             hardly
             discharge
             with
             his
             honor
             .
             For
             if
             we
             shall
             iudge
             the
             kindes
             of
             beasts
             by
             their
             properties
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             Indies
             are
             so
             diverse
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             to
             call
             an
             egge
             a
             chesnut
             ,
             to
             seeke
             to
             reduce
             them
             to
             the
             knowne
             kinds
             of
             Europe
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Fowles
             that
             are
             proper
             to
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             37.
             
          
           
             THere
             are
             many
             kindes
             of
             notable
             fowles
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             eyther
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             that
             ours
             be
             ,
             or
             of
             different
             .
             
             They
             bring
             certaine
             birds
             from
             China
             ,
             that
             have
             no
             feete
             ,
             and
             all
             their
             bodies
             are
             almost
             feathers
             .
             They
             sit
             not
             vpon
             the
             ground
             ,
             but
             hang
             vpon
             boughs
             ,
             by
             strings
             or
             feathers
             which
             they
             have
             ,
             and
             so
             rest
             themselves
             ,
             like
             flies
             or
             aierie
             things
             .
             In
             Peru
             there
             are
             birdes
             which
             they
             ●●ll
             Tómineios
             ,
             so
             small
             ,
             that
             often
             times
             I
             have
             doubted
             seeing
             them
             flie
             ,
             whether
             they
             were
             bees
             or
             butter-flies
             ;
             but
             in
             truth
             they
             are
             birdes
             .
             Contrariwise
             ,
             those
             which
             they
             call
             Condores
             ,
             be
             of
             an
             exceeding
             greatnes
             ,
             and
             of
             such
             a
             force
             ,
             that
             not
             onely
             they
             will
             open
             a
             sheepe
             and
             eate
             it
             ,
             but
             also
             a
             whole
             calfe
             .
             Those
             which
             they
             call
             Auras
             ,
             and
             others
             PoullaZes
             ,
             (
             which
             in
             my
             opinion
             are
             of
             the
             kinde
             of
             ravens
             ,
             )
             are
             of
             a
             strange
             lightnes
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             very
             quicke
             sight
             ,
             being
             very
             fit
             to
             clense
             Citties
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             leave
             no
             carion
             nor
             dead
             thing
             .
             They
             passe
             the
             night
             on
             trees
             or
             vpon
             rockes
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             morning
             they
             come
             to
             the
             cities
             and
             townes
             ,
             sitting
             on
             the
             toppes
             of
             the
             highest
             buildings
             ,
             where
             they
             attend
             their
             prey
             .
             Their
             yong
             have
             white
             feathers
             ,
             as
             they
             report
             of
             ravens
             ,
             and
             so
             change
             into
             blacke
             .
          
           
             The
             Guacamayac
             be
             birdes
             bigger
             then
             Parrets
             ,
             &
             resemble
             them
             somthing
             ;
             they
             are
             esteemed
             for
             the
             varietie
             of
             their
             feathers
             ,
             which
             be
             very
             faire
             &
             pleasing
             .
             In
             new
             Spaine
             there
             are
             aboundance
             of
             birdes
             with
             excellent
             feathers
             ,
             so
             as
             there
             be
             not
             any
             found
             in
             Europe
             that
             comes
             neere
             them
             ,
             as
             we
             may
             see
             by
             the
             images
             of
             feathers
             they
             bring
             from
             thence
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             (
             with
             great
             reason
             ,
             )
             much
             valued
             and
             esteemed
             ,
             giving
             cause
             of
             admiration
             ,
             that
             with
             the
             feathers
             of
             birdes
             ,
             they
             should
             make
             so
             excellent
             a
             worke
             ,
             and
             so
             perfectly
             equall
             ,
             as
             they
             seeme
             properly
             to
             be
             the
             true
             coloures
             of
             a
             painter
             ,
             and
             have
             so
             lively
             and
             pleasing
             a
             regard
             ,
             as
             
             the
             Painter
             cannot
             exceede
             it
             with
             his
             pencill
             and
             colours
             .
             Some
             Indians
             which
             are
             good
             and
             expert
             workemen
             in
             this
             Art
             ,
             will
             represent
             perfectly
             in
             feathers
             ,
             whatsoever
             they
             see
             drawne
             with
             the
             pencill
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             Painters
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             have
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             no
             advantage
             over
             them
             .
             
               Don
               Philip
            
             the
             Prince
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             his
             schoolemaster
             ,
             did
             give
             vnto
             him
             three
             figures
             or
             po●traitures
             made
             of
             feathers
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             to
             put
             in
             a
             Breviary
             .
             His
             Highnes
             did
             shew
             them
             to
             King
             Philip
             his
             father
             ,
             the
             which
             his
             Maiesty
             beholding
             attentively
             ,
             said
             ,
             that
             hee
             had
             never
             seene
             in
             so
             small
             a
             worke
             ,
             a
             thing
             of
             so
             great
             excellency
             and
             perfection
             .
             One
             day
             as
             they
             presented
             to
             Pope
             
               Sixtus
               quintus
            
             ,
             another
             square
             bigger
             then
             it
             ,
             wherein
             was
             the
             figure
             of
             St.
             Francis
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             had
             told
             him
             it
             was
             made
             of
             feathers
             by
             the
             Indians
             ,
             he
             desired
             to
             make
             triall
             thereof
             ,
             touching
             the
             table
             with
             his
             fingers
             ,
             to
             see
             if
             it
             were
             of
             feathers
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             seemed
             strange
             ,
             to
             see
             them
             so
             properly
             fitted
             ,
             that
             the
             eye
             could
             not
             iudge
             nor
             discerne
             whether
             they
             were
             naturall
             colours
             of
             feathers
             ,
             or
             artificiall
             ,
             done
             with
             the
             pencill
             .
             It
             is
             a
             goodly
             thing
             to
             see
             the
             lustre
             which
             a
             greene
             ,
             an
             orange
             tawny
             like
             gold
             ,
             and
             other
             fine
             colours
             do
             cast
             ,
             and
             beholding
             them
             another
             way
             they
             seeme
             dead
             colours
             .
             They
             make
             the
             best
             and
             goodliest
             figures
             of
             feathers
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Mechovacan
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             village
             of
             Pascaro
             .
             The
             manner
             is
             with
             small
             delicate
             pinsors
             they
             pul
             the
             feathers
             from
             the
             dead
             fowles
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             fine
             paste
             they
             cunningly
             ioyne
             them
             together
             .
             They
             take
             the
             smal
             &
             delicate
             feathers
             of
             those
             birds
             ,
             which
             in
             Peru
             they
             call
             T●miney●s
             ,
             or
             others
             like
             vnto
             them
             ,
             which
             have
             the
             most
             perfect
             colours
             in
             their
             feathers
             .
             The
             Indians
             (
             besides
             these
             images
             ,
             )
             did
             vse
             feathers
             in
             many
             other
             most
             excellent
             
             workes
             ,
             especially
             for
             the
             ornament
             of
             Kings
             and
             Noblemen
             ,
             their
             Temples
             and
             Idolls
             .
             There
             are
             also
             other
             great
             birdes
             ,
             which
             have
             excellent
             and
             fine
             feathers
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             plumes
             of
             sundry
             colours
             ,
             especially
             when
             they
             go
             to
             warre
             ,
             inriching
             them
             with
             gold
             and
             silver
             very
             artificially
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             matter
             of
             great
             price
             .
             They
             have
             the
             same
             birdes
             still
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             not
             so
             curious
             ,
             neither
             do
             they
             make
             so
             many
             gentill
             devises
             as
             they
             were
             wont
             .
             There
             are
             other
             birdes
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             contrarie
             to
             these
             of
             so
             rich
             feathers
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             besides
             that
             they
             are
             ill
             favovred
             ,
             )
             serve
             to
             no
             other
             vse
             but
             for
             dung
             ,
             and
             yet
             perchance
             they
             are
             of
             no
             lesse
             profite
             .
             I
             have
             considered
             this
             ,
             wondering
             at
             the
             providence
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             who
             hath
             so
             appointed
             ,
             that
             all
             creatures
             should
             serve
             man.
             In
             some
             Ilands
             or
             Phares
             ,
             which
             are
             ioyning
             to
             the
             coast
             ●of
             Peru
             ,
             wee
             see
             the
             toppes
             of
             the
             mountaines
             all
             white
             ,
             and
             to
             sight
             ,
             you
             would
             take
             it
             for
             snow
             ,
             or
             for
             some
             white
             land
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             heapes
             of
             dung
             of
             sea
             fowle
             which
             go
             continually
             thither
             :
             and
             there
             is
             so
             great
             aboundance
             ,
             as
             it
             riseth
             many
             elles
             ,
             yea
             ,
             many
             launces
             in
             height
             ,
             which
             seemes
             but
             a
             fable
             .
             They
             go
             with
             boates
             to
             these
             Ilands
             ,
             onely
             for
             the
             dung
             ,
             for
             there
             is
             no
             other
             profit
             in
             them
             .
             And
             this
             dung
             is
             so
             commodious
             and
             profitable
             ,
             as
             it
             makes
             the
             earth
             yeelde
             great
             aboundance
             of
             fruite
             .
             They
             cal
             this
             dung
             Guano
             ,
             whereof
             the
             valley
             hath
             taken
             the
             name
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Limagua●a
             ,
             in
             the
             valleys
             of
             Peru
             ,
             where
             they
             vse
             this
             dung
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             the
             most
             fertile
             of
             all
             that
             countrie
             .
             The
             quinces
             ,
             poungranets
             ,
             and
             other
             fruites
             there
             ,
             exceede
             all
             other
             in
             bountie
             and
             greatnes
             ;
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             water
             wherewith
             they
             water
             it
             ,
             passeth
             by
             a
             land
             compassed
             with
             this
             dung
             ,
             which
             causeth
             the
             beautie
             of
             this
             fruite
             .
             So
             as
             these
             birdes
             have
             not
             only
             
             the
             flesh
             to
             serve
             for
             meate
             ,
             their
             singing
             for
             recreation
             ,
             their
             feathers
             for
             ornament
             and
             beautie
             ,
             but
             also
             their
             dung
             serves
             to
             fatten
             the
             ground
             .
             The
             which
             hath
             bin
             so
             appointed
             by
             the
             soveraigne
             Creator
             ,
             for
             the
             service
             of
             man
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             remember
             to
             acknowledge
             and
             be
             loyall
             to
             him
             from
             whom
             all
             good
             proceedes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Beasts
             for
             the
             Chases
             .
             
               CHAP.
               38.
            
             
          
           
             BEsides
             the
             Beasts
             of
             Chase
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             which
             be
             common
             to
             the
             Indies
             and
             Europe
             ,
             there
             are
             others
             which
             I
             doe
             not
             remember
             to
             have
             seene
             heere
             ,
             vnlesse
             perhappes
             they
             have
             been
             brought
             from
             thence
             .
             There
             are
             beasts
             called
             Sainos
             ,
             made
             like
             small
             hogges
             ,
             which
             have
             this
             singular
             to
             themselves
             ,
             to
             have
             their
             navill
             vppon
             the
             ridge
             of
             their
             backes
             :
             these
             go
             by
             troupes
             through
             the
             woods
             ,
             they
             are
             cruell
             and
             nothing
             fearefull
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             they
             assaile
             ,
             and
             have
             their
             tallents
             sharpe
             as
             rasors
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             make
             dangerous
             wounds
             and
             incisions
             ,
             if
             such
             as
             hunt
             them
             put
             not
             themselves
             in
             safetie
             .
             Such
             as
             hunt
             them
             ,
             (
             for
             the
             more
             safer
             killing
             of
             them
             ,
             )
             they
             climbe
             vp
             into
             trees
             ,
             whither
             the
             Sainos
             or
             hogges
             come
             presently
             in
             troupes
             ,
             biting
             the
             tree
             when
             they
             cannot
             hurte
             the
             man
             ,
             and
             then
             with
             their
             launces
             they
             kill
             what
             they
             will.
             They
             are
             very
             good
             to
             eate
             ,
             but
             they
             must
             of
             necessitie
             cut
             off
             the
             round
             peece
             where
             the
             navil
             growes
             vpon
             the
             backe
             ;
             for
             otherwise
             ,
             within
             a
             day
             they
             corrupt
             .
             There
             is
             another
             kinde
             of
             little
             beast
             like
             to
             sucking
             pigges
             ,
             and
             they
             call
             them
             Guadatinaias
             .
             I
             am
             in
             doubt
             whether
             there
             were
             any
             swine
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             ●efore
             the
             Spaniardes
             came
             thither
             ,
             like
             to
             these
             in
             ●paine
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             the
             discoverie
             of
             the
             Ilands
             of
             Soloman
             ,
             
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             they
             found
             hennes
             and
             swine
             of
             Spaine
             .
             But
             howsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             this
             cattell
             hath
             greatly
             multiplied
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             They
             eate
             the
             flesh
             fresh
             ,
             and
             hold
             it
             to
             be
             as
             holesome
             and
             as
             good
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             of
             mutton
             ;
             as
             in
             Carthagene
             in
             some
             partes
             ,
             they
             are
             become
             wilde
             and
             cruell
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             hunt
             like
             wilde
             boares
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             S.
             Dominique
             ,
             and
             other
             Ilands
             where
             the
             beasts
             live
             in
             the
             forrests
             .
             In
             some
             places
             they
             feede
             them
             with
             the
             graine
             of
             Mays
             ,
             and
             they
             grow
             wonderfully
             fatte
             ,
             to
             have
             the
             grease
             ,
             which
             they
             vse
             for
             want
             of
             oyle
             ;
             in
             some
             places
             they
             make
             g●mons
             ,
             as
             in
             Toll●ca
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             in
             Paria
             at
             Peru.
             Returning
             then
             to
             such
             beasts
             as
             are
             pecullar
             there
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             Sainos
             are
             like
             vnto
             swine
             ,
             though
             somewhat
             lesse
             ;
             even
             so
             the
             Dante
             's
             resemble
             small
             kine
             ,
             but
             more
             vnto
             mules
             ,
             having
             no
             hornes
             .
             The
             hides
             of
             these
             beasts
             are
             much
             esteemed
             for
             jerkins
             and
             other
             coverings
             ,
             they
             are
             so
             hard
             as
             they
             resist
             any
             blow
             whatsoever
             .
             And
             as
             the
             Dante
             's
             be
             defended
             by
             the
             hardnes
             of
             their
             hides
             ,
             so
             those
             which
             they
             call
             Armadillos
             are
             by
             the
             multitude
             of
             their
             scales
             ,
             which
             open
             and
             shut
             as
             they
             please
             like
             to
             a
             curasse
             .
             There
             be
             litle
             beasts
             which
             go
             thorow
             the
             woods
             ,
             called
             Armadillos
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             defence
             they
             have
             hiding
             themselves
             within
             their
             scales
             ,
             and
             opening
             when
             they
             list
             :
             I
             have
             eaten
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             doe
             not
             holde
             it
             for
             a
             meate
             of
             any
             great
             woorth
             ,
             but
             the
             flesh
             of
             the
             Yguanas
             is
             a
             better
             meate
             ,
             but
             more
             horrible
             to
             the
             eye
             :
             for
             they
             are
             like
             to
             the
             very
             Lizardes
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             of
             a
             doubtfull
             kinde
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             go
             to
             the
             water
             ,
             &
             comming
             to
             land
             they
             climbe
             the
             trees
             vpon
             the
             bankes
             ;
             and
             as
             they
             cast
             themselves
             from
             the
             trees
             into
             the
             water
             ,
             the
             boates
             watch
             vnderneath
             to
             receive
             them
             .
             The
             Chinchilles
             is
             an
             other
             kind
             
             of
             small
             beasts
             ,
             like
             squirrels
             ,
             they
             have
             a
             woonderfull
             smoothe
             and
             soft
             skinne
             ,
             which
             they
             weare
             as
             a
             healthfull
             thing
             to
             comfort
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             and
             those
             partes
             that
             have
             neede
             of
             a
             moderate
             heate
             ;
             they
             make
             coverings
             and
             rugges
             of
             the
             haire
             of
             these
             Chinchilles
             ,
             which
             are
             found
             on
             the
             Sierre
             of
             Peru
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             likewise
             a
             small
             beast
             very
             common
             which
             they
             call
             Cuyes
             ,
             and
             which
             the
             Indians
             hold
             for
             a
             very
             good
             meate
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             accustomed
             often
             to
             offer
             these
             Cuyes
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             .
             They
             are
             like
             small
             conies
             ,
             and
             have
             their
             borows
             i●
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             they
             have
             vndermined
             all
             the
             land
             :
             some
             are
             grey
             ,
             some
             white
             ,
             and
             some
             speckled
             .
             There
             are
             other
             small
             animalles
             which
             they
             call
             Viscachas
             ,
             and
             are
             like
             to
             hares
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             bigger
             ,
             they
             hunt
             them
             and
             eate
             the
             flesh
             .
             Of
             common
             hares
             there
             are
             great
             store
             in
             some
             parts
             .
             There
             are
             also
             connies
             in
             the
             realme
             of
             Quitto
             ,
             but
             the
             good
             are
             come
             from
             Spaine
             .
             There
             is
             another
             strange
             beast
             ,
             the
             which
             for
             his
             great
             heavinesse
             ,
             and
             slownesse
             in
             mooving
             ,
             they
             call
             Perico-ligero
             ,
             or
             the
             little
             light
             dogge
             ,
             hee
             hath
             three
             nailes
             to
             every
             hand
             ,
             and
             mooves
             both
             hand
             and
             feete
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             by
             compasse
             and
             very
             heavily
             :
             it
             is
             in
             face
             like
             to
             a
             monkie
             ,
             and
             hath
             a
             shrill
             crie
             ;
             it
             climeth
             trees
             ,
             and
             eates
             Ants.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Micos
             or
             Indian
             Monkies
             .
             
               CHAP.
               39.
            
             
          
           
             THroughout
             all
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             eyther
             of
             these
             Ilands
             of
             the
             firme
             land
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             there
             are
             infinite
             numbers
             of
             Micos
             or
             Monkies
             ,
             which
             are
             a
             kind
             of
             apes
             ,
             but
             very
             different
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             have
             a
             taile
             ,
             yea
             a
             very
             long
             one
             .
             And
             amongest
             them
             there
             are
             some
             kinds
             which
             are
             thrise
             ,
             yea
             foure
             times
             bigger
             than
             the
             
             ordinary
             ;
             some
             are
             all
             blacke
             ,
             some
             bay
             ,
             some
             grey
             ,
             and
             some
             spotted
             .
             Their
             agilitie
             and
             maner
             of
             doing
             is
             admirable
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             seeme
             to
             have
             reason
             &
             discourse
             to
             go
             vpon
             trees
             ,
             wherein
             they
             seeme
             to
             imitate
             birds
             .
             Going
             from
             
               Nombre
               de
               Dios
            
             to
             Panama
             ,
             I
             did
             see
             in
             Capira
             ,
             one
             of
             these
             monkies
             leape
             from
             one
             tree
             to
             an
             other
             ,
             which
             was
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             a
             river
             ,
             making
             me
             much
             to
             wonder
             .
             They
             leape
             where
             they
             list
             ,
             winding
             their
             tailes
             about
             a
             braunch
             to
             shake
             it
             :
             and
             when
             they
             will
             leape
             further
             than
             they
             can
             at
             once
             ,
             they
             vse
             a
             pretty
             devise
             ,
             tying
             themselves
             by
             the
             tailes
             one
             of
             another
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             make
             as
             it
             were
             a
             chaine
             of
             many
             :
             then
             doe
             they
             launch
             themselves
             foorth
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             holpen
             by
             the
             force
             of
             the
             rest
             ,
             takes
             holde
             where
             hee
             list
             ,
             and
             so
             hangs
             to
             a
             bough
             ,
             and
             helpes
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             till
             they
             be
             gotten
             vp
             .
             It
             were
             long
             to
             report
             the
             fooleries
             ,
             trickes
             ,
             traverses
             ,
             and
             pleasant
             sportes
             they
             make
             when
             they
             are
             taught
             ,
             which
             seeme
             not
             to
             come
             from
             bruit
             beasts
             ,
             but
             from
             a
             manlike
             vnderstanding
             .
             I
             sawe
             one
             in
             Carthagen●
             in
             the
             Governours
             house
             ,
             so
             taught
             ,
             as
             the
             things
             he
             did
             seemed
             incredible
             :
             they
             sent
             him
             to
             the
             Taverne
             for
             wine
             ,
             putting
             the
             pot
             in
             one
             hand
             ,
             and
             the
             money
             in
             the
             other
             ;
             and
             they
             could
             not
             possibly
             gette
             the
             money
             out
             of
             his
             hand
             ,
             before
             he
             had
             his
             pot
             full
             of
             wine
             .
             If
             any
             children
             mette
             him
             in
             the
             streete
             ,
             and
             threw
             any
             stones
             at
             him
             ,
             he
             would
             set
             his
             pot
             downe
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             cast
             stones
             against
             the
             children
             till
             he
             had
             assured
             his
             way
             ,
             then
             would
             he
             returne
             to
             carry
             home
             his
             pot
             .
             And
             which
             is
             more
             ,
             although
             hee
             were
             a
             good
             bibber
             of
             wine
             (
             as
             I
             have
             oftentimes
             seene
             him
             drinke
             ,
             when
             his
             maister
             hath
             given
             it
             him
             )
             yet
             would
             he
             never
             touch
             it
             vntill
             leave
             was
             given
             him
             .
             They
             told
             me
             moreover
             ,
             that
             if
             hee
             sawe
             any
             women
             painted
             ,
             he
             
             would
             fall
             vppon
             them
             ,
             pull
             off
             their
             attire
             ,
             and
             would
             seeke
             to
             bite
             them
             .
          
           
             This
             may
             be
             an
             addition
             which
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             ,
             but
             I
             doe
             not
             thinke
             there
             is
             any
             beast
             in
             the
             world
             approacheth
             so
             neare
             the
             conversation
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             as
             this
             monkey
             doth
             .
             They
             report
             so
             many
             things
             ,
             which
             for
             feare
             I
             shoulde
             be
             thought
             to
             give
             credite
             to
             fables
             ,
             or
             they
             should
             be
             so
             esteemed
             ,
             I
             thinke
             best
             to
             omitte
             ,
             blessing
             the
             Author
             of
             all
             creatures
             ,
             in
             that
             hee
             would
             createa
             kinde
             of
             beast
             ,
             onely
             for
             the
             recreation
             and
             delight
             of
             man.
             Some
             report
             that
             they
             carried
             these
             Micos
             or
             Monkies
             to
             Solomon
             from
             the
             Weast
             Indies
             ,
             but
             for
             my
             parte
             ,
             I
             holde
             it
             was
             from
             the
             East
             Indies
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Vicugnes
             ,
             and
             Tarugnes
             of
             
               Peru.
               CHAP.
               40.
            
             
          
           
             AMongst
             the
             most
             remarkable
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             of
             Peru
             ,
             be
             the
             Vicugnes
             ,
             and
             sheepe
             of
             the
             countrie
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             which
             are
             tractable
             beasts
             and
             of
             great
             profite
             ;
             the
             Vicugnes
             are
             wilde
             ,
             and
             the
             sheepe
             are
             tame
             .
             Some
             thinke
             that
             the
             Vicugnes
             are
             those
             which
             Aristotle
             ,
             
             Plinie
             ,
             and
             other
             Authors
             call
             Capreas
             ,
             which
             are
             wilde
             goates
             ,
             and
             in
             truth
             they
             have
             some
             resemblance
             ,
             for
             the
             lightnes
             they
             have
             in
             the
             woodes
             and
             mountaines
             ,
             but
             yet
             they
             are
             no
             goates
             ,
             for
             the
             Vicugnes
             have
             no
             hornes
             ,
             as
             those
             have
             ,
             whereof
             Aristotle
             makes
             mention
             ;
             neither
             are
             they
             the
             goates
             of
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             from
             whom
             they
             draw
             the
             Bezar
             stone
             ;
             for
             if
             they
             be
             of
             that
             kinde
             ,
             it
             were
             a
             diverse
             one
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             race
             of
             dogges
             ,
             the
             mastie
             is
             divers
             from
             the
             greyhound
             .
             The
             Vicugnes
             of
             Peru
             are
             not
             those
             beasts
             which
             carrie
             the
             Bezar
             stone
             ,
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             there
             they
             cal
             BeZaars
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             are
             a
             kind
             of
             
             Stagges
             and
             Venison
             ;
             yet
             do
             I
             not
             know
             in
             any
             part
             of
             the
             world
             there
             be
             any
             of
             these
             beasts
             ▪
             but
             in
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             Chille
             ,
             which
             are
             countries
             ioyning
             one
             to
             another
             .
             These
             Vicugnes
             are
             greater
             then
             goates
             ,
             and
             lesse
             then
             calves
             .
             Their
             haire
             is
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             dried
             roses
             ,
             somewhat
             cleerer
             ;
             they
             have
             no
             hornes
             like
             Stagges
             and
             Goates
             .
             They
             feede
             vpon
             the
             heighest
             tops
             of
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Pugnas
             .
             The
             snowe
             nor
             frost
             doth
             not
             offend
             them
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             they
             seem
             to
             delight
             in
             it
             .
             They
             goe
             in
             troupes
             ,
             and
             runne
             most
             lightly
             ;
             when
             they
             meete
             with
             any
             travellers
             or
             beasts
             ,
             they
             fly
             away
             ,
             seeming
             very
             fearefull
             ,
             and
             in
             flying
             they
             drive
             their
             yong
             ones
             before
             them
             .
             They
             do
             not
             finde
             that
             they
             multiply
             much
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             did
             defend
             the
             hunting
             of
             Vicugnes
             ;
             if
             it
             were
             not
             for
             their
             feasts
             ,
             or
             by
             their
             commandement
             .
             Some
             complaine
             ,
             that
             since
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             there
             ,
             they
             have
             given
             too
             much
             libertie
             to
             hunt
             the
             Vicugnes
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             they
             are
             much
             diminished
             .
             The
             maner
             the
             Indians
             vse
             in
             their
             hunting
             ,
             they
             assemble
             many
             men
             together
             ,
             to
             the
             number
             of
             1000.
             or
             2000.
             yea
             ,
             more
             ,
             and
             invironing
             a
             great
             circuit
             of
             wood
             ,
             they
             hunt
             their
             game
             vntill
             they
             have
             compassed
             it
             in
             on
             all
             parts
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             they
             commonly
             take
             three
             or
             foure
             hundred
             ,
             and
             so
             choosing
             what
             they
             list
             ,
             they
             let
             go
             the
             rest
             ,
             especially
             the
             females
             for
             breede
             .
             They
             are
             accustomed
             to
             sheere
             these
             beasts
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             fleece
             to
             make
             coverings
             and
             rugges
             of
             great
             value
             ,
             for
             that
             this
             wooll
             is
             like
             to
             white
             silke
             ,
             which
             lastes
             long
             :
             and
             as
             the
             colour
             is
             naturall
             and
             not
             died
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             perpetuall
             .
             The
             stuffes
             that
             are
             made
             of
             this
             wooll
             ,
             are
             very
             fresh
             &
             good
             in
             summer
             ,
             and
             they
             hold
             them
             profitable
             for
             the
             inflammation
             of
             the
             reines
             ,
             &
             other
             parts
             
             tempering
             the
             excessive
             heate
             .
             This
             wooll
             hath
             the
             like
             vertue
             when
             it
             is
             made
             in
             quiltes
             ,
             and
             therefore
             some
             vse
             it
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             for
             the
             triall
             they
             have
             made
             thereof
             .
             They
             say
             moreover
             ,
             that
             this
             wooll
             or
             coverings
             made
             thereof
             ,
             is
             phisicall
             for
             other
             indispositions
             ,
             as
             for
             the
             gowt
             :
             yet
             doe
             I
             not
             know
             that
             they
             have
             made
             any
             certaine
             triall
             thereof
             .
             The
             flesh
             of
             these
             Vicugnes
             is
             not
             good
             ,
             although
             the
             Indians
             eate
             it
             ,
             and
             drie
             it
             .
             For
             the
             effects
             of
             Physicke
             ,
             I
             will
             say
             what
             I
             have
             seene
             vppon
             the
             Sierre
             of
             Peru
             ,
             comming
             one
             night
             into
             a
             Tambo
             or
             Inne
             ,
             being
             much
             afflicted
             with
             paine
             in
             mine
             eies
             ,
             thinking
             they
             would
             fall
             out
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             dooth
             commonly
             happen
             in
             those
             partes
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             passe
             thorow
             places
             covered
             with
             snow
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             accident
             .
             Being
             troubled
             with
             this
             paine
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             patience
             ,
             there
             came
             an
             Indian
             woman
             which
             said
             to
             me
             ,
             Father
             ,
             lay
             this
             to
             thine
             eies
             ,
             and
             thou
             shalt
             be
             cured
             ,
             it
             was
             a
             peece
             of
             the
             flesh
             of
             Vicugnes
             newly
             killed
             &
             all
             bloody
             .
             I
             vsed
             this
             medicine
             ,
             &
             presently
             the
             pain
             ceased
             ,
             and
             soone
             after
             went
             quite
             away
             .
             Besides
             these
             Chacos
             which
             is
             the
             most
             common
             manner
             of
             hunting
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             they
             have
             vsed
             another
             more
             private
             to
             take
             them
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             comming
             neere
             ,
             they
             do
             cast
             certaine
             lines
             with
             plummets
             of
             lead
             ,
             which
             intangle
             their
             legges
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             cannot
             runne
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             means
             they
             take
             the
             Vicugne
             .
             The
             chiefe
             reason
             why
             this
             beast
             is
             esteemed
             ,
             is
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             BeZars
             stone
             they
             finde
             in
             them
             ,
             whereof
             we
             will
             intreate
             heereafter
             .
             There
             is
             another
             kinde
             of
             beasts
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Tarugues
             ,
             which
             likewise
             are
             wilde
             ,
             and
             more
             nimble
             than
             the
             Vicugnes
             .
             They
             are
             greater
             of
             body
             ,
             and
             more
             hote
             .
             They
             have
             soft
             eares
             and
             hanging
             :
             they
             goe
             not
             in
             troups
             as
             the
             Vicugnes
             .
             I
             have
             not
             seene
             them
             but
             alone
             ,
             
             and
             most
             commonly
             in
             high
             places
             .
             They
             also
             drawe
             BeZars
             stones
             from
             these
             Tarugues
             ,
             which
             are
             greater
             ,
             and
             have
             more
             operation
             and
             vertue
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Pacos
             ,
             Guanacos
             ,
             and
             Indian
             Mutlons
             .
             CHAP.
             41.
             
          
           
             THere
             is
             nothing
             at
             Peru
             of
             greater
             riches
             and
             profit
             than
             the
             cattell
             of
             the
             country
             ,
             which
             our
             men
             call
             Indian
             sheep
             ,
             and
             the
             Indians
             in
             their
             generall
             language
             call
             them
             Lama
             .
             For
             all
             things
             well
             considered
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             beast
             of
             the
             greatest
             profite
             and
             least
             charge
             of
             any
             that
             I
             knowe
             :
             from
             them
             they
             drawe
             meate
             and
             clothing
             ,
             as
             from
             the
             sheepe
             of
             Spaine
             .
             Moreover
             they
             have
             the
             benefite
             to
             carry
             all
             things
             they
             have
             neede
             of
             ,
             vsing
             them
             to
             beare
             their
             burthens
             :
             and
             they
             have
             no
             neede
             eyther
             of
             shooes
             or
             saddles
             ,
             nor
             yet
             of
             oates
             ,
             but
             he
             serveth
             his
             maister
             for
             nought
             ,
             feeding
             on
             the
             grasse
             hee
             findes
             in
             the
             fieldes
             ;
             so
             as
             God
             hath
             furnished
             them
             of
             sheepe
             and
             mares
             ,
             and
             all
             in
             one
             beast
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             a
             poore
             nation
             ,
             so
             woulde
             hee
             in
             this
             poynt
             free
             them
             from
             charge
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             much
             pasture
             vppon
             the
             Sierre
             :
             and
             this
             kinde
             of
             cattell
             hath
             no
             neede
             of
             any
             other
             charge
             .
             There
             are
             two
             kindes
             of
             these
             sheepe
             or
             Lamas
             ,
             the
             one
             they
             call
             Pacos
             ,
             or
             sheep
             bearing
             wooll
             ,
             and
             the
             others
             are
             bare
             ,
             and
             have
             litle
             wooll
             ,
             so
             are
             they
             better
             for
             burthen
             ;
             they
             are
             bigger
             than
             great
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             lesse
             than
             calves
             ,
             they
             have
             a
             very
             long
             necke
             ,
             like
             to
             a
             cammell
             ,
             whereof
             they
             have
             good
             neede
             :
             for
             being
             high
             of
             stature
             ,
             they
             have
             neede
             of
             a
             long
             necke
             ,
             else
             should
             they
             be
             deformed
             .
             They
             are
             of
             diverse
             colours
             ,
             some
             all
             white
             ,
             others
             all
             blacke
             ,
             some
             grey
             and
             some
             spotted
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Moromoro
             .
             The
             Indians
             
             had
             great
             superstitions
             in
             choosing
             the
             beasts
             for
             sacrifices
             ,
             of
             what
             colour
             they
             should
             be
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             diversitie
             of
             seasons
             and
             sacrifices
             .
             Their
             flesh
             is
             good
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             hard
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             their
             Lambs
             is
             the
             better
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             delicate
             that
             can
             bee
             eaten
             :
             yet
             they
             eate
             not
             many
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             chiefe
             fruite
             and
             profit
             they
             yielde
             ,
             is
             their
             wooll
             ,
             to
             make
             clothes
             ,
             and
             their
             service
             to
             carry
             burdens
             .
             The
             Indians
             make
             stuffs
             of
             this
             wooll
             wherewith
             they
             clothe
             themselves
             ,
             the
             one
             is
             grose
             and
             common
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Hanaca
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             fine
             and
             delicate
             which
             they
             call
             Cumbi
             ,
             they
             make
             carpets
             and
             coverings
             ,
             and
             other
             exquisite
             workes
             ,
             which
             last
             long
             ,
             and
             have
             a
             very
             faire
             lustre
             ,
             like
             halfe
             silke
             :
             and
             that
             which
             is
             most
             rare
             ,
             is
             their
             maner
             of
             weaving
             their
             workes
             ,
             being
             both
             sides
             alike
             ,
             so
             as
             you
             shall
             not
             find
             any
             end
             in
             a
             whole
             peece
             .
             The
             Ingua
             king
             of
             Peru
             had
             many
             chiefe
             workemen
             ,
             to
             make
             this
             worke
             of
             Cumb●
             ▪
             and
             the
             which
             ,
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             were
             resident
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Capachica
             ,
             ioyning
             to
             the
             great
             lake
             of
             Titicaca
             .
             They
             die
             this
             wooll
             into
             diverse
             fine
             colours
             ,
             with
             sundry
             kindes
             of
             hearbes
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             many
             sortes
             of
             workes
             both
             course
             and
             fine
             .
             All
             the
             Indians
             ,
             both
             men
             and
             women
             ,
             woorke
             in
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             and
             have
             their
             loo●nes
             in
             their
             houses
             ,
             having
             no
             neede
             to
             buy
             any
             stuffes
             for
             their
             necessary
             vses
             .
             Of
             the
             f●esh
             of
             these
             sheepe
             they
             make
             Cuschargui
             ,
             or
             dried
             flesh
             ,
             the
             which
             will
             last
             very
             long
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             great
             accompt
             .
             They
             are
             accustomed
             to
             drive
             troupes
             of
             these
             sheepe
             with
             burthens
             ,
             and
             to
             go
             in
             bandes
             ,
             three
             hundred
             ,
             five
             hundred
             ,
             yea
             a
             thousand
             in
             a
             company
             ,
             with
             wine
             ,
             mays
             ,
             coca
             ,
             chuno
             ,
             quicke-silver
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             ●indes
             of
             m●rchandise
             ,
             and
             of
             silver
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             best
             of
             all
             .
             They
             carry
             barres
             of
             silver
             from
             PotoZi
             to
             Ariq●●
             ,
             
             which
             is
             three
             score
             and
             tenne
             leagues
             .
             I
             have
             often
             w●ondered
             to
             see
             these
             troupes
             of
             sheepe
             laden
             with
             a
             thousand
             or
             two
             thousand
             barres
             of
             silver
             ,
             and
             much
             m●re
             ,
             which
             is
             above
             three
             hundred
             thousand
             ducats
             ,
             without
             any
             other
             guard
             o
             rescort
             than
             some
             Indians
             ,
             which
             serve
             onely
             to
             guide
             these
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             to
             lade
             and
             vnlade
             them
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             most
             ,
             some
             few
             Spaniardes
             :
             and
             they
             sleepe
             all
             night
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             fieldes
             ,
             without
             other
             guarde
             :
             and
             yet
             in
             so
             long
             a
             way
             and
             so
             weake
             a
             guarde
             ,
             they
             never
             finde
             want
             or
             losse
             of
             anie
             thing
             in
             so
             great
             a
             treasure
             of
             silver
             ,
             so
             safe
             is
             the
             way
             in
             Peru.
             The
             burthen
             which
             one
             of
             these
             sheepe
             dooth
             commonly
             carry
             ,
             is
             of
             foure
             or
             sixe
             arrobes
             :
             
             when
             their
             voyage
             is
             long
             they
             goe
             not
             above
             two
             ,
             three
             ,
             or
             foure
             leagues
             at
             the
             most
             on
             a
             day
             .
             Those
             that
             guide
             those
             troupes
             ,
             have
             their
             ordinary
             lodgings
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             assured
             to
             have
             water
             and
             pasture
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             vnlade
             and
             set
             vppe
             their
             tents
             ,
             making
             fire
             ,
             and
             dressing
             their
             meates
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             painefull
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             a
             ●leugmatike
             and
             slowe
             manner
             of
             travell
             .
             When
             there
             is
             but
             one
             dayes
             iourney
             ,
             one
             of
             these
             sheepe
             will
             beare
             eight
             arobes
             in
             weight
             ,
             or
             more
             ,
             and
             beares
             this
             burthen
             eight
             or
             tenne
             leagues
             in
             a
             day
             ,
             as
             the
             poore
             souldiers
             were
             wont
             to
             doe
             ,
             when
             they
             marched
             through
             Peru.
             This
             kinde
             of
             cattell
             delights
             most
             in
             a
             cold
             aire
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             live
             vpon
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             and
             die
             in
             the
             Lanos
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             heate
             .
             Sometimes
             these
             sheepe
             are
             all
             covered
             with
             ice
             and
             frost
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             continue
             sound
             and
             well
             .
             The
             bare
             sheepe
             are
             pleasant
             to
             behold
             ,
             for
             they
             will
             stay
             vpon
             the
             way
             ,
             raising
             vppe
             their
             neckes
             ,
             and
             will
             looke
             vpon
             any
             one
             very
             wistly
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             remaine
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             without
             mooving
             or
             any
             shew
             of
             feare
             ,
             which
             giveth
             occasion
             of
             laughter
             ,
             
             seeing
             them
             thus
             to
             stand
             .
             And
             yet
             sometimes
             they
             do
             growe
             amazed
             sodainely
             ,
             and
             runne
             away
             with
             their
             burthens
             ,
             even
             to
             the
             highest
             rockes
             ,
             so
             as
             not
             being
             able
             to
             come
             vnto
             them
             ,
             they
             are
             constraind
             to
             kil
             them
             with
             an
             harquebuze
             ,
             lest
             they
             should
             loose
             their
             barres
             of
             silver
             ,
             which
             they
             sometimes
             carry
             .
             The
             Pacos
             will
             grow
             reasty
             vnder
             their
             burdens
             ,
             lying
             downe
             ,
             and
             will
             endure
             to
             be
             cutte
             in
             a
             thousand
             peeces
             before
             they
             wil
             rise
             when
             this
             humor
             takes
             them
             :
             whereof
             the
             proverb
             growes
             in
             Peru
             ,
             to
             say
             that
             one
             is
             reastie
             ,
             to
             signifie
             ,
             he
             is
             obstinate
             ;
             for
             that
             when
             any
             of
             these
             beasts
             is
             moodie
             ,
             it
             is
             with
             excesse
             :
             the
             remedy
             they
             have
             is
             ,
             to
             stay
             and
             sit
             downe
             by
             the
             Paco
             ,
             making
             much
             on
             him
             ,
             vntill
             the
             fit
             be
             past
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             rise
             :
             and
             sometimes
             they
             are
             forced
             to
             stay
             two
             or
             three
             houres
             .
             They
             have
             a
             disease
             like
             to
             scabbes
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Carache
             ,
             whereof
             they
             commonly
             die
             .
             The
             Antients
             had
             a
             remedy
             ,
             to
             bury
             them
             quicke
             that
             had
             the
             Carache
             ,
             lest
             they
             shoulde
             infect
             the
             rest
             ,
             being
             a
             very
             contagious
             disease
             ,
             and
             goes
             from
             one
             to
             another
             .
             An
             Indian
             that
             hath
             one
             or
             two
             of
             these
             sheepe
             ,
             is
             not
             reputed
             poore
             ,
             for
             one
             of
             them
             is
             woorth
             sixe
             or
             seaven
             peeces
             of
             assay
             ,
             and
             more
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             time
             and
             places
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             BeZaars
             stone
             .
             
               CHAP.
               42.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Bezaars
             stone
             is
             found
             in
             all
             these
             beasts
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             which
             are
             proper
             to
             Peru
             ,
             whereof
             some
             Authors
             of
             our
             time
             have
             written
             whole
             bookes
             ,
             which
             they
             may
             reade
             that
             desire
             to
             have
             a
             more
             particular
             knowledge
             .
             For
             the
             present
             subiect
             it
             shall
             be
             sufficient
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             stone
             which
             they
             call
             Bezaar
             ,
             is
             found
             in
             the
             stomacke
             and
             belly
             of
             this
             beast
             ,
             somtimes
             
             one
             alone
             ,
             sometimes
             two
             ,
             three
             ,
             and
             foure
             .
             They
             are
             very
             different
             in
             forme
             ,
             greatnesse
             and
             colour
             ,
             for
             that
             some
             are
             small
             like
             filberds
             ,
             &
             lesse
             ;
             others
             like
             walnuts
             ;
             some
             like
             pigeons
             egges
             ,
             and
             others
             as
             bigge
             as
             a
             hens
             egge
             :
             and
             I
             have
             seene
             some
             as
             bigge
             as
             an
             orange
             ;
             in
             forme
             some
             are
             round
             ,
             others
             in
             fashion
             like
             to
             lentils
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             formes
             .
             For
             their
             colour
             ,
             som
             are
             black
             ,
             some
             white
             ,
             some
             grey
             ,
             darke
             greene
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             beene
             guilded
             .
             It
             is
             no
             certaine
             rule
             to
             iudge
             the
             best
             and
             most
             fine
             by
             the
             colour
             or
             forme
             .
             All
             these
             stones
             are
             made
             and
             fashioned
             of
             divers
             films
             and
             skins
             one
             vpon
             another
             .
             In
             the
             province
             of
             Xaura
             and
             other
             provinces
             of
             Peru
             ,
             they
             find
             these
             stones
             in
             divers
             kinds
             of
             beasts
             ,
             both
             wild
             and
             tame
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             
               Guanacos
               ,
               Pacos
               ,
               Vicugnes
            
             ,
             and
             Tarugues
             ,
             some
             adde
             an
             other
             kind
             ,
             which
             they
             say
             are
             wilde
             goates
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             call
             Cypris
             .
             These
             other
             kindes
             of
             beastes
             are
             very
             well
             knowen
             in
             Peru
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             have
             already
             discoursed
             .
             The
             Guanacos
             or
             country
             sheepe
             ,
             or
             Pacos
             ,
             have
             commonly
             the
             lesser
             stones
             ,
             and
             blacke
             ,
             neither
             are
             they
             so
             much
             approoved
             for
             the
             vse
             of
             Physicke
             .
             They
             draw
             the
             greatest
             Bezaar
             stones
             from
             the
             Vicugnes
             ,
             and
             they
             are
             grey
             ,
             or
             white
             ,
             or
             of
             a
             darke
             greene
             ,
             which
             are
             helde
             for
             the
             better
             .
             They
             esteem
             those
             of
             the
             Tarugues
             for
             the
             most
             excellent
             ,
             whereof
             there
             are
             some
             reasonable
             bigge
             :
             they
             are
             commonly
             white
             ,
             inclining
             to
             grey
             ;
             and
             they
             have
             the
             filmes
             commonly
             bigger
             and
             thicker
             than
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             They
             finde
             the
             Bezaar
             stone
             equally
             both
             in
             male
             and
             female
             .
             All
             beasts
             that
             ingender
             it
             ,
             chaw
             the
             cuid
             ,
             and
             commonly
             feede
             vpon
             the
             snow
             and
             rockes
             .
             The
             Indians
             reporte
             &
             teach
             by
             tradition
             from
             their
             fathers
             and
             Antients
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             province
             of
             Xaura
             ,
             and
             in
             other
             
             provinces
             of
             Peru
             ,
             there
             are
             many
             herbs
             and
             venomous
             beasts
             ,
             which
             poison
             the
             water
             and
             the
             pastures
             where
             they
             eate
             and
             drinke
             ,
             and
             where
             they
             breathe
             :
             amiddest
             which
             venomous
             hearbs
             there
             is
             one
             very
             well
             knowne
             of
             the
             Vicugne
             ,
             by
             a
             naturall
             instinct
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             beasts
             that
             ingender
             the
             Bezaar
             stone
             ,
             which
             eate
             this
             hearb
             ,
             and
             by
             meanes
             thereof
             they
             preserve
             themselves
             from
             the
             poisoned
             waters
             and
             pastures
             :
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             of
             this
             hearb
             the
             stone
             is
             compounded
             in
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             whence
             it
             drawes
             all
             the
             vertue
             against
             poyson
             and
             other
             woonderfull
             effects
             .
             This
             is
             the
             opinion
             &
             tradition
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             discovered
             by
             men
             of
             great
             experience
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             which
             agrees
             with
             reason
             ,
             and
             with
             that
             which
             Plinie
             reports
             of
             the
             mountaine
             goates
             ,
             
             which
             are
             nourished
             and
             fed
             vpon
             poison
             without
             suffering
             any
             harme
             .
             The
             Indians
             being
             demaunded
             ,
             why
             the
             sheepe
             ,
             kine
             ,
             goates
             ,
             and
             calves
             ,
             such
             as
             are
             in
             Castille
             ,
             have
             not
             the
             Bezaar
             stone
             ,
             seeing
             that
             they
             feede
             on
             the
             same
             rockes
             :
             their
             answer
             is
             ,
             That
             they
             beleeve
             not
             ,
             that
             those
             beasts
             of
             Castille
             eate
             of
             that
             hearb
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             have
             found
             the
             Bezaar
             stone
             in
             stags
             and
             fallow
             diere
             .
             This
             seemes
             to
             agree
             with
             our
             knowlege
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             new
             Spaine
             they
             find
             the
             Bezaar
             stone
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             no
             
               Vicugnes
               ,
               Pacos
               ,
               Tarugues
            
             ,
             nor
             Guanacos
             ,
             but
             only
             stags
             ,
             in
             some
             of
             which
             they
             finde
             these
             stones
             .
          
           
             The
             principall
             vertue
             of
             the
             BeZaar
             stone
             is
             against
             poison
             and
             venomous
             diseases
             ,
             although
             there
             bee
             heerein
             divers
             opinions
             ,
             some
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             mockerie
             ,
             others
             for
             a
             miracle
             .
             Howsoever
             it
             be
             ,
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             that
             it
             is
             of
             a
             great
             operation
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             applied
             in
             time
             ,
             &
             convenient
             in
             a
             maner
             ,
             as
             hearbes
             ,
             and
             to
             persons
             capable
             and
             disposed
             :
             for
             there
             is
             no
             medicine
             
             that
             doth
             alwaies
             cure
             infallibly
             .
             In
             Spaine
             and
             Italie
             ,
             we
             have
             seene
             admirable
             effects
             of
             this
             stone
             ,
             against
             the
             T●verdette
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             plague
             ,
             but
             not
             so
             much●s
             in
             Peru.
             They
             do
             apply
             it
             beaten
             and
             put
             into
             some
             liquor
             ,
             which
             may
             make
             it
             fit
             for
             the
             cure
             of
             melancholy
             ,
             the
             falling
             sickenes
             ,
             pestilent
             feavers
             ,
             &
             many
             other
             diseases
             .
             Some
             take
             it
             in
             wine
             ,
             others
             in
             vineger
             ,
             with
             water
             Dezahac
             ,
             of
             
               League
               de
               beufe
            
             ,
             borrage
             and
             other
             sortes
             ,
             as
             the
             Phisitians
             and
             Apoticaries
             can
             tell
             .
             The
             Bezaar
             stone
             hath
             no
             proper
             savour
             ,
             as
             Rasis
             the
             Arabian
             doth
             testifie
             .
             Wee
             have
             seene
             notable
             trialls
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             but
             the
             Author
             of
             this
             vniversall
             world
             ,
             hath
             given
             great
             vertues
             to
             this
             stone
             .
             The
             Bezaar
             stones
             which
             comes
             from
             the
             East
             Indies
             ,
             have
             the
             first
             place
             of
             account
             ,
             they
             are
             of
             an
             olive
             colour
             ,
             the
             second
             are
             those
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             those
             of
             New
             Spaine
             .
             Since
             that
             these
             stones
             were
             in
             request
             ,
             they
             say
             ,
             the
             Indians
             have
             made
             artificiall
             ones
             ;
             and
             many
             when
             they
             see
             these
             stones
             greater
             then
             the
             ordinarie
             ,
             they
             take
             them
             to
             be
             false
             and
             counterfait
             :
             triall
             and
             experience
             is
             the
             best
             mistres
             to
             know
             them
             .
             One
             thing
             is
             worthy
             admiration
             ,
             that
             they
             grow
             and
             are
             fashioned
             vpon
             very
             strange
             things
             ,
             as
             vpon
             the
             tagge
             of
             a
             point
             ,
             vpon
             a
             pinne
             ,
             or
             a
             peece
             of
             wood
             ,
             which
             they
             finde
             in
             the
             centre
             of
             this
             stone
             ,
             and
             yet
             do
             they
             not
             hold
             it
             false
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             beast
             might
             swallow
             it
             ,
             and
             the
             stone
             thicken
             vpon
             it
             ,
             and
             growes
             one
             vpon
             another
             ,
             and
             so
             it
             increaseth
             .
             I
             did
             see
             in
             Peru
             ,
             two
             stones
             fashioned
             vpon
             Pignons
             of
             Castille
             ,
             which
             made
             vs
             to
             wonder
             much
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             all
             Peru
             ,
             we
             had
             not
             seene
             any
             pines
             or
             Pignons
             of
             Castille
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             not
             brought
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             seemes
             to
             me
             very
             extraordinary
             .
             This
             little
             may
             suffice
             touching
             the
             Bezaars
             stone
             .
             They
             
             bring
             other
             phisicall
             stones
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             the
             stone
             of
             Hyiada
             ,
             or
             of
             Rate
             ,
             the
             bloud
             stone
             ,
             the
             stones
             of
             milke
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             sea
             .
             Those
             which
             they
             call
             Cornerina●
             ,
             for
             the
             heart
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             no
             neede
             to
             speake
             ,
             having
             nothing
             common
             with
             the
             subiect
             of
             beastes
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             intreated
             :
             which
             gives
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             how
             the
             great
             Master
             and
             Author
             of
             all
             ,
             hath
             imparted
             his
             benefites
             and
             wonderfull
             secrets
             ,
             to
             all
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             for
             the
             which
             he
             is
             to
             be
             glorified
             for
             ever
             .
          
           
             (
             *
             ⁎
             *
             )
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           Prologue
           to
           the
           Bookes
           following
           .
        
         
           HAving
           intreated
           of
           the
           Natural
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           ,
           I
           wil
           hereafter
           discourse
           of
           the
           Morall
           History
           ,
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           of
           the
           deeds
           and
           customes
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
           For
           after
           the
           heaven
           ,
           the
           temperature
           ,
           the
           scituation
           ,
           &
           the
           qualities
           of
           the
           new
           world
           ;
           after
           the
           elements
           &
           mixtures
           ;
           I
           mean
           mettals
           ,
           plants
           ,
           &
           beasts
           ,
           whereof
           we
           have
           spoken
           in
           the
           former
           Bookes
           ,
           as
           occasion
           did
           serve
           :
           both
           Order
           &
           Reason
           doth
           invite
           vs
           to
           continue
           and
           vndertake
           the
           discourse
           of
           those
           men
           which
           inhabite
           the
           new
           world
           .
           And
           therefore
           I
           pretend
           in
           the
           following
           bookes
           ,
           to
           speake
           what
           I
           thinke
           worthie
           of
           this
           subiect
           .
           And
           for
           that
           the
           intention
           of
           this
           Historie
           ,
           is
           not
           onely
           to
           give
           knowledge
           of
           what
           hath
           passed
           at
           the
           Indies
           ,
           but
           also
           to
           continue
           this
           knowledge
           ,
           to
           the
           fruite
           we
           may
           gather
           by
           it
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           helpe
           this
           people
           for
           their
           soules
           health
           ,
           and
           to
           glorifie
           the
           Creator
           and
           Redeemer
           ,
           who
           hath
           drawne
           them
           from
           the
           obscure
           darkenes
           of
           their
           infidelitie
           ,
           and
           imparted
           vnto
           them
           the
           admirable
           light
           of
           his
           Gospel
           .
           And
           therefore
           I
           will
           first
           speake
           in
           these
           bookes
           following
           ,
           what
           concernes
           their
           religion
           ,
           or
           superstition
           ,
           their
           customes
           ,
           their
           idolatries
           ,
           and
           their
           sacrifices
           ;
           and
           after
           ,
           what
           concernes
           their
           policie
           and
           government
           ,
           their
           lawes
           ,
           customes
           ,
           and
           their
           deedes
           .
           And
           for
           that
           the
           memorie
           is
           preserved
           amongst
           the
           Mexicaine
           Nation
           ,
           of
           their
           beginnings
           ,
           successions
           ,
           warres
           ,
           and
           other
           things
           worthie
           the
           relation
           :
           besides
           ,
           that
           which
           shall
           be
           handled
           in
           the
           sixt
           booke
           ,
           I
           will
           make
           a
           peculiar
           Discourse
           in
           the
           seventh
           ,
           sh●wing
           the
           disposition
           and
           forewarnings
           this
           Nation
           had
           of
           the
           new
           Kingdome
           of
           Christ
           our
           Lord
           ,
           which
           should
           be
           ext●nded
           in
           these
           Countries
           ,
           and
           should
           conquer
           them
           to
           himself
           ,
           as
           he
           hath
           do●e
           in
           all
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           world
           .
           The
           which
           in
           truth
           is
           a
           thing
           worthie
           of
           great
           consideration
           ,
           to
           see
           how
           the
           divine
           providence
           hath
           appointe●
           ,
           that
           the
           light
           
           of
           his
           word
           should
           finde
           a
           passage
           in
           the
           furthest
           boundes
           of
           the
           world
           .
           It
           is
           not
           my
           proiect
           at
           this
           time
           to
           write
           what
           the
           Span●ardes
           have
           done
           in
           those
           partes
           ,
           for
           there
           are
           bookes
           enow
           written
           vpon
           this
           subiect
           ,
           nor
           yet
           how
           the
           Lordes
           servants
           have
           laboured
           and
           profited
           ,
           for
           that
           requires
           a
           new
           labour
           .
           I
           will
           onely
           content
           my selfe
           to
           plant
           this
           Historie
           and
           relation
           at
           the
           doores
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           alreadie
           entered
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           knowne
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           things
           of
           the
           Indies
           ;
           to
           the
           end
           that
           Christianitie
           may
           be
           planted
           and
           augmented
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           expounded
           at
           large
           in
           the
           bookes
           we
           have
           written
           ,
           
             De
             procuranda
             Indiorum
             salute
          
           .
           And
           if
           any
           one
           wonder
           at
           some
           fashions
           &
           customes
           of
           the
           Indies
           ,
           &
           wil
           scorne
           them
           as
           fooles
           ,
           or
           abhorre
           them
           as
           divelish
           and
           inhumane
           people
           ,
           let
           him
           remember
           that
           the
           same
           things
           ,
           yea
           ,
           worse
           ,
           have
           beene
           seene
           amongst
           the
           Greekes
           and
           Romans
           ,
           who
           have
           commanded
           the
           whole
           world
           ,
           as
           we
           may
           easily
           vnderstand
           ,
           not
           onely
           of
           our
           Authors
           ,
           as
           Eusebius
           ,
           of
           
             Cesarea
             ,
             Clement
             Alexandrine
          
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           but
           also
           of
           their
           owne
           ;
           as
           
             Plinie
             ,
             Denis
             Halicarnassis
          
           ,
           and
           Plutarke
           :
           for
           the
           Prince
           of
           darkenes
           being
           the
           head
           of
           all
           Infidelitie
           ,
           it
           is
           no
           new
           thing
           to
           finde
           among
           Infidells
           ,
           cruelties
           ,
           filthines
           ,
           and
           follies
           fit
           for
           such
           a
           Master
           .
           And
           although
           the
           ancient
           Gentiles
           have
           farre
           surpassed
           these
           of
           the
           new
           world
           in
           valour
           and
           naturall
           knowledge
           ,
           yet
           may
           wee
           observe
           many
           things
           in
           them
           worthie
           the
           remembrance
           .
           But
           to
           conclude
           ,
           they
           shew
           to
           be
           barbarous
           people
           ,
           who
           being
           deprived
           of
           the
           supernaturall
           light
           ,
           want
           likewise
           philosophie
           and
           naturall
           knowledge
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           FIFT
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             That
             the
             Pride
             and
             Malice
             of
             the
             Divell
             ,
             hath
             beene
             the
             cause
             of
             Idolatrie
             .
             
               CHAP.
               1.
            
             
          
           
             THE
             Pride
             and
             Presumption
             of
             the
             Divell
             is
             so
             great
             &
             obstinate
             ,
             that
             alwaies
             hee
             seekes
             and
             strives
             to
             be
             honoured
             as
             God
             :
             and
             doth
             arrogate
             to
             himselfe
             all
             hee
             can
             ;
             whatsoever
             doth
             appertaine
             to
             the
             most
             high
             God
             ,
             hee
             ceaseth
             not
             to
             abuse
             the
             blinde
             Nations
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             vpon
             whom
             the
             cleere
             light
             of
             the
             holy
             Gospel
             hath
             not
             yet
             shone
             .
             
             Wee
             reade
             in
             Iob
             of
             this
             prowd
             tyrant
             ,
             who
             settes
             his
             eyes
             aloft
             ,
             and
             amongst
             all
             the
             sonnes
             of
             pride
             ,
             he
             is
             the
             King.
             The
             holy
             Scripture
             instructes
             vs
             plainely
             of
             his
             vile
             intentions
             ,
             and
             his
             overweening
             treason
             ,
             whereby
             he
             hath
             pretended
             to
             make
             his
             Throne
             ,
             equall
             vnto
             Gods
             ,
             saying
             in
             
               Esay
               ,
               Thou
               diddest
               say
               within
               thy selfe
               ,
               I
               will
               mount
               vp
               to
               heaven
               ,
            
             
             
             
               and
               set
               my
               chaire
               vpon
               all
               the
               starres
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               I
               will
               sit
               vpon
               the
               toppe
               of
               the
               Firmament
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               sides
               of
               the
               North
               ,
               I
               will
               ascend
               above
               the
               height
               of
               the
               cloudes
               ,
               and
               will
               be
               like
               to
               the
               most
               High.
            
             
             
               And
               in
            
             Ezechiel
             ,
             
               Thy
               heart
               was
               lifted
               vp
               ,
               and
               thou
               hast
               said
               ,
               I
               am
               God
               ,
               and
               have
               set
               in
               the
               chaire
               of
               God
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               sea
               .
            
             Thus
             doth
             Sathan
             continually
             persist
             in
             this
             wicked
             desire
             ,
             to
             make
             himselfe
             God.
             And
             although
             the
             iust
             and
             severe
             chastisement
             of
             the
             most
             high
             hath
             spoiled
             him
             of
             all
             his
             pompe
             and
             beautie
             ,
             which
             made
             him
             grow
             prowd
             ,
             being
             intreated
             as
             his
             fellonie
             and
             indiscretion
             had
             deserved
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             written
             by
             the
             same
             Prophets
             ;
             yet
             hath
             he
             left
             nothing
             of
             his
             wickednes
             and
             perverse
             practises
             ,
             the
             which
             hee
             hath
             made
             manifest
             by
             all
             meanes
             possible
             ,
             like
             a
             mad
             dogge
             that
             bites
             the
             sword
             wherewith
             he
             is
             strucken
             .
             For
             as
             it
             is
             written
             ,
             the
             pride
             of
             such
             as
             hate
             God
             ,
             doth
             alwaies
             increase
             .
             H●nce
             comes
             the
             continuall
             and
             strange
             care
             which
             this
             enemie
             of
             God
             hath
             alwaies
             had
             ,
             to
             make
             him
             to
             be
             worshipt
             of
             men
             ,
             inventing
             so
             many
             kinds
             of
             Idolatries
             ,
             wherby
             he
             hath
             so
             long
             held
             the
             gretest
             part
             of
             the
             world
             in
             subiection
             ;
             so
             as
             there
             scarce
             remaines
             any
             one
             corner
             for
             God
             &
             his
             people
             of
             Israel
             .
             
             And
             since
             the
             power
             of
             the
             Gospel
             hath
             vanquished
             and
             disarmed
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             the
             force
             of
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             hee
             hath
             broken
             and
             ruined
             the
             most
             important
             and
             puissant
             places
             of
             his
             kingdome
             with
             the
             like
             tyrannie
             ;
             hee
             hath
             begunne
             to
             assaile
             the
             barbarous
             people
             and
             Nations
             farthest
             off
             ,
             striving
             to
             maintaine
             amongst
             them
             his
             false
             and
             lying
             divinitie
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Sonne
             of
             God
             had
             taken
             from
             him
             in
             his
             Church
             ,
             tying
             him
             with
             chaines
             as
             in
             a
             cage
             or
             prison
             ,
             like
             a
             furious
             beast
             to
             his
             great
             confusion
             ,
             &
             reioycing
             of
             the
             servants
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             he
             doth
             signify
             in
             Iob.
             
          
           
           
             But
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             although
             idolatrie
             had
             beene
             rooted
             out
             of
             the
             best
             and
             most
             notable
             partes
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             yet
             he
             hath
             retired
             himself
             into
             the
             most
             remote
             parts
             ,
             and
             hath
             ruled
             in
             that
             other
             part
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             which
             although
             it
             be
             much
             inferiour
             in
             nobilitie
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             not
             oflesse
             compasse
             .
             There
             are
             two
             causes
             and
             chiefe
             motives
             ,
             for
             the
             which
             the
             divell
             hath
             so
             much
             laboured
             to
             plantidolatry
             and
             all
             infidelity
             ,
             so
             as
             you
             shall
             hardly
             finde
             any
             Nation
             where
             there
             is
             not
             some
             markes
             thereof
             .
             The
             one
             is
             this
             great
             presumption
             and
             pride
             ,
             which
             is
             such
             ,
             that
             whoso
             would
             consider
             ,
             how
             hee
             durst
             affront
             the
             very
             Sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             true
             God
             in
             saying
             impudently
             ,
             that
             he
             should
             fall
             downe
             and
             worship
             him
             :
             the
             which
             he
             did
             ,
             
             although
             he
             knew
             not
             certainely
             that
             this
             was
             the
             very
             God
             ,
             yet
             had
             he
             some
             opinion
             that
             it
             was
             the
             Sonne
             of
             God.
             A
             most
             cruell
             and
             horrible
             pride
             ,
             to
             dare
             thus
             impudently
             affront
             his
             God
             ;
             truely
             he
             shall
             not
             finde
             it
             very
             strange
             ,
             that
             hee
             makes
             himselfe
             to
             be
             worshipped
             as
             God
             ,
             by
             ignorant
             Nations
             ,
             seeing
             hee
             would
             seeke
             to
             be
             worshipped
             by
             God
             himselfe
             ,
             calling
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             being
             an
             abhominable
             and
             detestable
             creature
             .
             The
             other
             cause
             and
             motive
             of
             idolatrie
             ,
             is
             the
             mortall
             hatred
             hee
             hath
             conceived
             for
             ever
             against
             mankinde
             .
             For
             as
             our
             Saviour
             saith
             ,
             hee
             hath
             beene
             a
             murtherer
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             and
             holdes
             it
             as
             a
             condition
             and
             inseparable
             qualitie
             of
             his
             wickednesse
             .
             And
             for
             that
             he
             knowes
             the
             greatast
             misery
             of
             man
             ,
             is
             to
             worship
             the
             creature
             for
             God
             :
             for
             this
             reason
             hee
             never
             leaves
             to
             invent
             all
             sortes
             of
             Idolatries
             ,
             to
             destroy
             man
             ,
             and
             make
             him
             ennemy
             to
             God.
             There
             are
             two
             mischiefes
             which
             the
             divell
             causeth
             in
             idolatry
             ;
             the
             one
             ,
             that
             hee
             denies
             his
             God
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             text
             ,
             
               Thou
               hast
               left
               thy
               God
               who
               created
               thee
            
             :
             
             The
             other
             
             is
             ,
             that
             hee
             dooth
             subiect
             himselfe
             to
             a
             thing
             baser
             than
             himselfe
             ;
             for
             that
             all
             creatures
             are
             inferior
             to
             the
             reasonable
             ,
             and
             the
             divell
             ,
             although
             hee
             be
             superior
             to
             man
             in
             nature
             ,
             yet
             in
             estate
             he
             is
             much
             inferior
             ,
             seeing
             that
             man
             in
             this
             life
             is
             capable
             of
             Divinitie
             and
             Eternitie
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             God
             is
             dishonoured
             ,
             and
             man
             lost
             in
             all
             parts
             by
             idolatry
             ,
             wherwith
             the
             divell
             in
             his
             pride
             is
             well
             content
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             many
             kindes
             of
             idolatry
             the
             Indians
             have
             vsed
             .
             CHAP.
             2.
             
          
           
             
             IDolatry
             saieth
             the
             holy-Ghost
             by
             the
             Wise
             man
             ,
             is
             the
             cause
             .
             beginning
             ,
             and
             end
             of
             all
             miseries
             ,
             for
             this
             cause
             the
             enemy
             of
             mankinde
             hath
             multiplied
             so
             many
             sortes
             and
             diversities
             of
             idolatry
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             an
             infinite
             matter
             to
             specifie
             them
             all
             .
             Yet
             we
             may
             reduce
             idolatry
             to
             twoo
             heades
             ,
             the
             one
             grounded
             vppon
             naturall
             things
             ,
             the
             other
             vpon
             things
             imagined
             and
             made
             by
             mans
             invention
             .
             The
             first
             is
             divided
             into
             two
             ;
             for
             eyther
             the
             thing
             they
             worship
             is
             generall
             ,
             as
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             Moone
             ,
             Fire
             ,
             Earth
             and
             Elements
             ,
             or
             else
             it
             is
             particular
             ,
             as
             some
             certayne
             river
             ,
             fountaine
             ,
             tree
             ,
             or
             forrest
             ,
             when
             these
             things
             are
             not
             generaly
             worshipped
             in
             their
             kindes
             ,
             but
             onely
             in
             particular
             .
             In
             this
             first
             kind
             of
             idolatry
             they
             have
             exceeded
             in
             Peru
             ,
             and
             they
             properly
             cal
             it
             Guaca
             .
             The
             second
             kinde
             of
             idolatry
             which
             depends
             of
             mans
             invention
             &
             fictions
             ,
             may
             likewise
             be
             divided
             into
             two
             sortes
             ,
             one
             which
             regards
             onely
             the
             pure
             arte
             and
             invention
             of
             man
             ,
             as
             to
             adore
             the
             Images
             or
             statues
             of
             gold
             ,
             wood
             ,
             or
             stone
             of
             Mercury
             or
             Pallas
             ,
             which
             neyther
             are
             ,
             nor
             ever
             were
             any
             thing
             else
             but
             the
             bare
             pictures
             :
             and
             the
             other
             that
             concernes
             that
             which
             really
             
             hath
             beene
             ,
             and
             is
             in
             trueth
             the
             same
             thing
             ,
             but
             not
             such
             as
             idolatry
             faines
             ;
             as
             the
             dead
             ,
             or
             some
             things
             proper
             vnto
             them
             ,
             which
             men
             worshippe
             through
             vanitie
             and
             flatterie
             ,
             so
             as
             wee
             reduce
             all
             to
             foure
             kindes
             of
             idolatry
             ,
             which
             the
             infidells
             vse
             ;
             of
             all
             which
             it
             behooveth
             vs
             to
             speake
             something
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             the
             Indians
             have
             some
             knowledge
             of
             God.
             CHAP.
             3.
             
          
           
             FIrst
             ,
             although
             the
             darkenesse
             of
             infidelitie
             holdeth
             these
             Nations
             in
             blindenesse
             ,
             yet
             in
             many
             thinges
             the
             light
             of
             truth
             and
             reason
             works
             somewhat
             in
             them
             .
             And
             they
             commonly
             acknowledge
             a
             supreame
             Lorde
             and
             Author
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             which
             they
             of
             Peru
             called
             Vnachocha
             ,
             and
             gave
             him
             names
             of
             great
             excellence
             ,
             as
             Pachacamac
             ,
             or
             Pachayachachic
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             the
             Creator
             of
             heaven
             and
             earth
             :
             and
             Vsapu
             ,
             which
             is
             admirable
             ,
             and
             other
             like
             names
             .
             Him
             they
             did
             worship
             ,
             as
             the
             chiefest
             of
             all
             ,
             whom
             they
             did
             honor
             in
             beholding
             the
             heaven
             .
             The
             like
             wee
             see
             amongest
             them
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             China
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             infidelles
             ▪
             Which
             accordeth
             well
             with
             that
             which
             is
             saide
             of
             Saint
             Paul
             ,
             in
             the
             Acts
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             where
             hee
             did
             see
             the
             Inscription
             of
             an
             Altare
             ;
             
               Ignoto
               Deo
            
             :
             To
             the
             vnknowne
             God.
             Wherevpon
             the
             Apostle
             tooke
             occasion
             to
             preach
             vnto
             them
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               He
               whome
               you
               worship
               without
               knowing
               ,
            
             
             
               him
               doe
               I
               preach
               vnto
               you
               .
            
             In
             like
             sort
             ,
             those
             which
             at
             this
             day
             do
             preach
             the
             Gospel
             to
             the
             Indians
             ,
             find
             no
             great
             difficultie
             to
             perswade
             them
             that
             there
             is
             a
             high
             God
             and
             Lord
             over
             all
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             is
             the
             Christians
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             true
             God.
             And
             yet
             it
             hath
             caused
             great
             admiration
             in
             me
             ,
             that
             although
             they
             had
             this
             knowledge
             ,
             yet
             had
             
             they
             no
             proper
             name
             for
             God.
             If
             wee
             shall
             seeke
             into
             the
             Indian
             tongue
             for
             a
             word
             to
             answer
             to
             this
             name
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             in
             Latin
             ,
             Deus
             ,
             in
             Greeke
             ,
             Theos
             ,
             in
             Hebrew
             ,
             El
             ,
             in
             Arabike
             ,
             Alla
             ;
             but
             wee
             shall
             not
             finde
             any
             in
             the
             Cuscan
             or
             Mexicaine
             tongues
             .
             So
             as
             such
             as
             preach
             or
             write
             to
             the
             Indians
             ,
             vse
             our
             Spanish
             name
             Dios
             ,
             fitting
             it
             to
             the
             accent
             or
             pronounciation
             of
             the
             Indian
             tongues
             ,
             the
             which
             differ
             much
             ,
             whereby
             appeares
             the
             small
             knowledge
             they
             had
             of
             God
             ,
             seeing
             they
             cannot
             so
             much
             as
             name
             him
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             not
             by
             our
             very
             name
             :
             yet
             in
             trueth
             they
             had
             some
             little
             knowledge
             ,
             and
             therefore
             in
             Peru
             they
             made
             him
             a
             rich
             temple
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Pachacamac
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             principall
             Sanctuarie
             of
             the
             realme
             .
             And
             as
             it
             hath
             beene
             saide
             ,
             this
             word
             of
             Pachacamac
             ,
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             the
             Creator
             ,
             yet
             in
             this
             temple
             they
             vsed
             their
             idolatries
             ,
             worshipping
             the
             Divell
             and
             figures
             .
             They
             likewise
             made
             sacrifices
             and
             offrings
             to
             Viracocha
             ,
             which
             helde
             the
             chiefe
             place
             amongst
             the
             worships
             which
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             made
             .
             Heereof
             they
             called
             the
             Spaniards
             Virocochas
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             holde
             opinion
             they
             are
             the
             sonnes
             of
             heaven
             ,
             and
             divine
             ;
             even
             as
             others
             did
             attribute
             a
             deitie
             to
             Paul
             and
             Barnabas
             ,
             calling
             the
             one
             Iupiter
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Mercurie
             ,
             so
             woulde
             they
             offer
             sacrifices
             vnto
             them
             ,
             as
             vnto
             gods
             :
             and
             as
             the
             Barbarians
             of
             Melite
             (
             which
             is
             Malté
             )
             seeing
             that
             the
             viper
             did
             not
             hurt
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             
             they
             called
             him
             God.
             
          
           
             As
             it
             is
             therefore
             a
             trueth
             ,
             conformable
             to
             reason
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             soveraigne
             Lorde
             and
             King
             of
             heaven
             ,
             
             whome
             the
             Gentiles
             (
             with
             all
             their
             infidelities
             and
             idolatries
             )
             have
             not
             denyed
             ,
             as
             wee
             see
             in
             the
             Philosophy
             of
             Timee
             in
             Plato
             ,
             in
             the
             Metaphisickes
             of
             Aristotle
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Aesculape
             of
             Tresmigister
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             the
             Poesies
             of
             
             Homer
             &
             Virgil.
             Therefore
             the
             Preachers
             of
             the
             Gospel
             have
             no
             great
             difficultie
             to
             plant
             &
             perswade
             this
             truth
             of
             a
             supreame
             God
             ,
             be
             the
             Nations
             of
             whome
             they
             preach
             never
             so
             barbarous
             and
             brutish
             .
             But
             it
             is
             hard
             to
             roote
             out
             of
             their
             mindes
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             other
             God
             ,
             nor
             any
             other
             deitie
             then
             one
             :
             and
             that
             all
             other
             things
             of
             themselves
             have
             no
             power
             ,
             being
             ,
             nor
             workeing
             proper
             to
             themselves
             ,
             but
             what
             the
             great
             and
             only
             God
             and
             Lord
             doth
             give
             and
             impart
             vnto
             them
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             it
             is
             necessarie
             to
             perswade
             them
             by
             all
             meanes
             ,
             in
             reproving
             their
             errors
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             that
             wherein
             they
             generally
             faile
             ,
             in
             worshipping
             more
             then
             one
             God
             ,
             as
             in
             particular
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             much
             more
             )
             to
             hold
             for
             Gods
             ,
             and
             to
             demand
             favour
             and
             helpe
             of
             those
             things
             which
             are
             not
             Gods
             ,
             nor
             have
             any
             power
             ,
             but
             what
             the
             true
             God
             their
             Lord
             and
             Creator
             hath
             given
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             first
             kinde
             of
             Idolatrie
             ,
             vpon
             naturall
             and
             vniversall
             things
             .
             
               CHAP.
               4.
            
             
          
           
             NExt
             to
             Viracocha
             ,
             or
             their
             supreme
             God
             ,
             that
             which
             most
             commonly
             they
             have
             and
             do
             adore
             amongst
             the
             Infidells
             ,
             is
             the
             Sunne
             ;
             and
             after
             ,
             those
             things
             which
             are
             most
             remarkable
             in
             the
             celestiall
             or
             elementarie
             nature
             ,
             as
             the
             moone
             ,
             starres
             ,
             sea
             ,
             and
             land
             .
             The
             Guacas
             ,
             or
             Oratories
             ,
             which
             the
             Inguas
             Lords
             of
             Peru
             ,
             had
             in
             greatest
             reverence
             ,
             next
             to
             Viracocha
             and
             the
             sunne
             ,
             was
             the
             thunder
             which
             they
             called
             by
             three
             divers
             names
             ,
             
               Chuquilla
               ,
               Catuilla
            
             ,
             and
             Intiillapa
             ,
             supposing
             it
             to
             bee
             a
             man
             in
             heaven
             ,
             with
             a
             sling
             and
             a
             mace
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             in
             his
             power
             to
             cause
             raine
             ,
             haile
             ,
             thunder
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             that
             appertaines
             to
             the
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             where
             the
             
             cloudes
             engender
             .
             It
             was
             a
             Guaca
             ,
             (
             for
             so
             they
             called
             their
             Oratories
             ,
             )
             generall
             to
             all
             the
             Indians
             of
             Pe●●
             ,
             offering
             vnto
             him
             many
             sacrifices
             :
             and
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Court
             and
             Metropolitane
             Cittie
             ,
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             children
             vnto
             him
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Sunne
             .
             They
             did
             worship
             these
             three
             ,
             Viracocha
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             Thunder
             after
             another
             maner
             then
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             as
             Pollo
             writes
             who
             had
             made
             triall
             thereof
             ,
             they
             did
             put
             as
             it
             were
             a
             gauntlet
             or
             glove
             vpon
             their
             hands
             ,
             when
             they
             did
             lift
             them
             vp
             to
             worshippe
             them
             .
             They
             did
             worshippe
             the
             earth
             ▪
             which
             they
             called
             Pachamama
             ,
             as
             the
             Ancients
             did
             the
             goddess●
             Tellus
             :
             and
             the
             sea
             likewise
             which
             they
             call
             Mamacocha
             ,
             as
             the
             Ancients
             worshipped
             Thetis
             ,
             or
             Neptune
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             they
             did
             worship
             the
             rainebow
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             armes
             and
             blazons
             of
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             with
             two
             snakes
             stretched
             out
             on
             either
             side
             .
             Amongst
             the
             starres
             they
             all
             did
             commonly
             worship
             that
             which
             they
             called
             Colca
             ,
             and
             we
             heere
             Cabrille
             .
             They
             did
             attribute
             divers
             offices
             to
             divers
             starres
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             had
             neede
             of
             their
             favour
             did
             worship
             them
             ,
             as
             the
             shepheard
             did
             sacrifice
             to
             a
             starre
             which
             they
             called
             Vrcuhillay
             ,
             which
             they
             hold
             to
             be
             a
             sheepe
             of
             divers
             colours
             ,
             having
             the
             care
             to
             preserve
             their
             cattell
             ;
             and
             they
             imagine
             it
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Astronomers
             call
             Tyra
             .
             These
             shepheards
             worshippe
             two
             other
             starres
             ,
             which
             walke
             neere
             vnto
             them
             ,
             they
             call
             them
             Cat●chillay
             ,
             and
             Vrcuchillay
             ;
             and
             they
             faine
             them
             to
             be
             an
             Ewe
             and
             a
             Lambe
             .
             Others
             worshipped
             a
             starre
             which
             they
             called
             Machacu●y
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             attribute
             the
             charge
             and
             power
             over
             serpents
             ,
             and
             snakes
             ,
             to
             keepe
             them
             from
             hurting
             of
             them
             .
             They
             ascribe
             power
             to
             another
             starre
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Chuguinchinchay
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             as
             much
             as
             Tigre
             ,
             )
             over
             Tigres
             ,
             Beares
             ,
             and
             Lyons
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             generally
             beleeved
             ,
             
             that
             of
             all
             the
             beasts
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             there
             is
             one
             alone
             in
             heaven
             like
             vnto
             them
             ,
             the
             which
             hath
             care
             of
             their
             procreation
             and
             increase
             .
             And
             so
             they
             did
             observe
             and
             worship
             divers
             starres
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             they
             called
             
               Chacana
               ,
               Topatarca
               ,
               Mamanan
               ,
               Mirco
               ,
               Miquiquicay
               ,
            
             and
             many
             other
             .
             So
             as
             it
             seemed
             they
             approached
             somewhat
             neere
             the
             propositions
             of
             Platoes
             Idees
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             almost
             in
             the
             same
             maner
             after
             the
             supreame
             God
             ,
             worshiped
             the
             Sunne
             :
             And
             therefore
             they
             called
             Hernando
             CorteZ
             ,
             )
             as
             he
             hath
             written
             in
             a
             letter
             sent
             vnto
             the
             Emperour
             Charles
             the
             fift
             .
             )
             Sonne
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             for
             his
             care
             and
             courage
             to
             compasse
             the
             earth
             .
             But
             they
             made
             their
             greatest
             adoration
             to
             an
             Idol
             called
             Vitzilipuztli
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             all
             this
             region
             they
             called
             the
             most
             puissant
             ,
             and
             Lord
             of
             all
             things
             for
             this
             cause
             the
             Mexicaines
             built
             him
             a
             Temple
             ,
             the
             greatest
             ,
             the
             fairest
             ,
             the
             highest
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             sumptuous
             of
             all
             other
             .
             The
             scituation
             &
             beautie
             thereof
             ,
             may
             wel
             be
             coniectured
             by
             the
             ruines
             which
             yet
             remaine
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Mexico
             .
             But
             heere
             the
             Mexicaines
             Idolatrie
             hath
             bin
             more
             pernicious
             and
             hurtfull
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             as
             wee
             shall
             see
             plainer
             heereafter
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             their
             adoration
             and
             idolatrie
             ,
             was
             imployed
             to
             Idols
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             naturall
             things
             ,
             although
             they
             did
             attribute
             naturall
             effects
             to
             these
             Idolls
             ,
             as
             raine
             ,
             multiplication
             of
             cattell
             ,
             warre
             ,
             and
             generation
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             Greekes
             and
             Latins
             have
             forged
             Idolls
             of
             
               Phoebus
               ,
               Mercurie
               ,
               Iupiter
               ,
               Minerva
               ,
            
             and
             of
             Mars
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             whoso
             shall
             neerely
             looke
             into
             it
             ,
             shall
             finde
             this
             manner
             which
             the
             Divell
             hath
             vsed
             to
             deceive
             the
             Indians
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             same
             wherewith
             hee
             hath
             deceived
             the
             Greekes
             and
             Romans
             ,
             and
             other
             ancient
             Gentiles
             ,
             giving
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             these
             notable
             
             creatures
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             Moone
             ,
             Starres
             ,
             and
             Elements
             ,
             had
             power
             and
             authoritie
             to
             doe
             good
             or
             harme
             to
             men
             .
             And
             although
             God
             hath
             created
             all
             these
             things
             for
             the
             vse
             of
             man
             ,
             yet
             hath
             he
             so
             much
             forgotte
             himselfe
             ,
             as
             to
             rise
             vp
             against
             him
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             he
             hath
             imbased
             himselfe
             to
             creatures
             that
             are
             inferiour
             vnto
             himselfe
             ,
             worshiping
             and
             calling
             vpon
             their
             workes
             ,
             forsaking
             his
             Creator
             .
             As
             the
             Wise
             man
             saieth
             well
             in
             these
             wordes
             ,
             
               All
               men
               are
               vaine
               and
               abused
               that
               have
               not
               the
               knowledge
               of
               God
               ,
            
             
             
               seeing
               they
               could
               not
               know
               him
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               by
               the
               things
               that
               seemed
               good
               vnto
               them
               :
               and
               although
               they
               have
               beheld
               his
               workes
               ,
               yet
               have
               they
               not
               attained
               to
               know
               the
               author
               and
               maker
               thereof
               ,
               but
               they
               have
               beleeved
               that
               the
               fire
               ,
               winde
               ,
               swift
               aire
               ,
               the
               course
               of
               the
               starres
               ,
               great
               rivers
               ,
               with
               Sunne
               and
               Moone
               ,
               were
               Gods
               and
               governours
               of
               the
               world
               :
               and
               being
               in
               love
               with
               the
               beautie
               of
               these
               things
               ,
               they
               thought
               they
               should
               esteeme
               them
               as
               Gods.
            
             It
             is
             reason
             they
             should
             consider
             how
             much
             more
             faire
             the
             Creator
             is
             ,
             seeing
             that
             he
             is
             the
             Author
             of
             beauties
             and
             makes
             all
             things
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             if
             they
             admire
             the
             power
             and
             effects
             of
             these
             things
             ,
             thereby
             they
             may
             vnderstand
             how
             much
             more
             mightie
             hee
             is
             that
             gave
             them
             their
             being
             ,
             for
             by
             the
             beautie
             and
             greatnes
             of
             the
             creatures
             ,
             they
             may
             iudge
             what
             the
             Maker
             is
             .
             Hitherto
             are
             the
             wordes
             of
             the
             Booke
             of
             Wisedome
             ,
             from
             whence
             we
             may
             draw
             a
             good
             and
             strong
             argument
             ,
             to
             overthrow
             the
             Idolatrie
             of
             Infidells
             ,
             who
             seeke
             rather
             to
             serve
             the
             creature
             then
             the
             Creator
             ,
             
             as
             the
             Apostle
             doth
             iustly
             reprehend
             them
             .
             But
             for
             as
             much
             as
             this
             is
             not
             of
             our
             present
             subiect
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             hath
             been
             sufficiently
             treated
             of
             in
             the
             Sermons
             written
             against
             the
             errors
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             it
             shall
             bee
             sufficient
             now
             to
             shew
             that
             they
             did
             worship
             the
             great
             God
             ,
             and
             their
             vaine
             
             and
             lying
             gods
             all
             of
             one
             fashion
             :
             for
             their
             maner
             to
             pray
             to
             Viracocha
             ,
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             Starres
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             their
             Idolls
             ,
             was
             to
             open
             their
             hands
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             a
             certaine
             sound
             with
             their
             mouthes
             ,
             (
             like
             people
             that
             kissed
             ,
             )
             and
             to
             aske
             that
             which
             every
             one
             desired
             in
             offering
             his
             sacrifices
             ,
             yet
             was
             there
             great
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             wordes
             they
             vsed
             in
             speaking
             to
             the
             great
             Ticiviracocha
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             did
             attribute
             the
             cheefe
             power
             and
             commandement
             over
             all
             things
             ,
             and
             those
             they
             vsed
             to
             others
             ,
             the
             which
             every
             one
             did
             worship
             privately
             in
             his
             house
             ,
             as
             Gods
             or
             particular
             Lords
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             their
             intercessors
             to
             this
             great
             Ticciviracocha
             .
             This
             maner
             of
             worship
             ,
             opening
             the
             hands
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             kissing
             ,
             hath
             something
             like
             to
             that
             which
             Iob
             had
             in
             horror
             ,
             as
             fit
             for
             Idolaters
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               If
               I
               have
               kissed
               my
               hands
               with
               my
               mouth
               ,
            
             
             
               beholding
               the
               Sunne
               when
               it
               shines
               ,
               or
               the
               Moone
               when
               it
               is
               light
               ,
               the
               which
               is
               a
               great
               iniquitie
               ,
               and
               to
               deny
               the
               most
               great
               God.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Idolatry
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             to
             particular
             things
             .
             CHAP.
             5.
             
          
           
             THe
             Divell
             hath
             not
             beene
             contented
             to
             make
             these
             blinde
             Indians
             to
             worshippe
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             Moone
             ,
             Starres
             ,
             Earth
             and
             Sea
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             generall
             things
             in
             nature
             ,
             but
             hee
             hath
             passed
             on
             further
             ,
             giving
             them
             for
             God
             ,
             and
             making
             them
             subiect
             to
             base
             and
             abiect
             things
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             filthy
             and
             infamous
             .
             No
             man
             needes
             to
             woonder
             at
             this
             barbarous
             blindnes
             ,
             if
             hee
             remember
             what
             the
             Apostle
             speaketh
             of
             Wise
             men
             and
             Philosophers
             ,
             That
             having
             knowne
             God
             ,
             
             they
             did
             not
             glorifie
             him
             ,
             nor
             give
             him
             thankes
             as
             to
             their
             God
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             lost
             in
             their
             own
             imaginations
             and
             conceipts
             ,
             
             and
             their
             hearts
             were
             hardened
             in
             their
             follies
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             changed
             the
             glory
             and
             deity
             of
             the
             eternall
             God
             ,
             into
             shews
             and
             figures
             of
             vaine
             and
             corruptible
             things
             ,
             as
             men
             ,
             birds
             ,
             beasts
             and
             serpents
             :
             we
             know
             well
             that
             the
             Egyptians
             did
             worship
             the
             Dogge
             of
             Osiris
             ,
             the
             Cow
             of
             Isis
             ,
             and
             the
             Sheepe
             of
             Ammon
             :
             the
             Romans
             did
             worship
             the
             goddesse
             Februa
             ,
             of
             Feavers
             ,
             and
             the
             Tarpeien
             Goose
             :
             and
             Athenes
             the
             wise
             did
             worship
             the
             Cocke
             and
             the
             Raven
             ,
             and
             such
             other
             like
             vanities
             and
             mockeries
             ,
             whoreof
             the
             auntient
             Histories
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             are
             full
             .
             Men
             fell
             into
             this
             great
             misery
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             would
             not
             subiect
             themselves
             to
             the
             Lawe
             of
             the
             true
             God
             and
             Creator
             ,
             as
             Saint
             Athanasius
             dooth
             learnedly
             handle
             ,
             writing
             against
             Idolatry
             .
             But
             it
             is
             wonderfull
             strange
             to
             see
             the
             excesse
             which
             hath
             beene
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             especially
             in
             Peru
             :
             for
             they
             worshipped
             rivers
             ,
             fountaines
             ,
             the
             mouthes
             of
             rivers
             ,
             entries
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             rockes
             or
             great
             stones
             ,
             hilles
             and
             the
             tops
             of
             mountains
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Apachitas
             ,
             and
             they
             hold
             them
             for
             matters
             of
             great
             devotion
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             they
             did
             worship
             all
             things
             in
             nature
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             them
             remarkable
             and
             different
             from
             the
             rest
             ,
             as
             acknowledging
             some
             particular
             deitie
             .
          
           
             They
             shewd
             me
             in
             Caxamalca
             of
             Nasca
             a
             little
             hill
             or
             great
             mount
             of
             sand
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             chiefe
             Idoll
             or
             Guaca
             of
             the
             Antients
             .
             I
             demaunded
             of
             them
             what
             divinitie
             they
             found
             in
             it
             ?
             They
             answered
             ,
             that
             they
             did
             worship
             it
             for
             the
             woonder
             ,
             beeing
             a
             very
             high
             mount
             of
             sand
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             very
             thicke
             mountains
             of
             stone
             .
             Wee
             had
             neede
             in
             the
             cittie
             of
             Kings
             ,
             of
             great
             store
             of
             great
             wood
             ;
             for
             the
             melting
             of
             a
             Bell
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             cut
             downe
             a
             great
             deformed
             tree
             ,
             which
             for
             the
             greatnesse
             and
             antiquitie
             thereof
             had
             beene
             a
             long
             time
             
             the
             Oratorie
             and
             Guaca
             of
             the
             Indians
             .
             And
             they
             beleeved
             there
             was
             a
             certaine
             Divinity
             in
             any
             thing
             that
             was
             extraordinary
             and
             strange
             in
             his
             kinde
             ,
             attributing
             the
             like
             vnto
             small
             stones
             and
             mettalls
             ;
             yea
             vnto
             rootes
             and
             fruites
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             as
             the
             rootes
             they
             call
             Papas
             .
             There
             is
             a
             strange
             kinde
             which
             they
             call
             Lallahuas
             ,
             which
             they
             kissed
             and
             worshipped
             .
             They
             did
             likewise
             woorshippe
             Beares
             ,
             Lions
             ,
             Tygres
             and
             Snakes
             ,
             to
             th
             end
             they
             should
             not
             hurt
             them
             :
             and
             such
             as
             their
             gods
             bee
             ,
             such
             are
             the
             things
             they
             offer
             vnto
             them
             in
             their
             worshippe
             .
             They
             have
             vsed
             as
             they
             goe
             by
             the
             way
             ,
             to
             cast
             ,
             in
             the
             crosse
             wayes
             ,
             on
             the
             hilles
             ,
             and
             toppes
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Apachittas
             ,
             olde
             shooes
             ,
             feathers
             ,
             and
             Coca
             chewed
             ,
             being
             an
             hearb
             they
             vse
             much
             .
             And
             when
             they
             have
             nothing
             left
             ,
             they
             cast
             a
             stone
             as
             an
             offring
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             passe
             freely
             ,
             and
             have
             greater
             force
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             say
             increaseth
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             reported
             in
             a
             provinciall
             Counsell
             of
             Peru.
             And
             therefore
             they
             finde
             in
             the
             hie
             wayes
             great
             heapes
             of
             stones
             offered
             ,
             and
             such
             other
             things
             .
             
             The
             like
             follie
             ●id
             the
             Antients
             vse
             ,
             of
             whome
             it
             is
             spoken
             in
             the
             Proverbs
             ,
             
               Like
               vnto
               him
               that
               offereth
               stones
               vnto
               Mercurie
               ,
            
             
             
               such
               a
               one
               is
               hee
               that
               honoureth
               fooles
               ,
            
             meaning
             that
             a
             man
             shall
             reape
             no
             more
             fruit
             nor
             profit
             of
             the
             second
             than
             the
             first
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             God
             Mercury
             ,
             made
             of
             stone
             ,
             dooth
             not
             acknowledge
             any
             offering
             ,
             neyther
             doth
             a
             foole
             any
             honour
             that
             is
             doone
             him
             .
             They
             vsed
             another
             offring
             no
             lesse
             pleasant
             and
             ridiculous
             ,
             pulling
             the
             haire
             from
             the
             eyebrowes
             to
             offer
             it
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             hills
             ,
             Apachittas
             ,
             to
             the
             winds
             ,
             or
             to
             any
             other
             thing
             they
             feare
             .
             Such
             is
             the
             miseries
             that
             many
             Indians
             have
             lived
             in
             ,
             and
             do
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             whom
             the
             divell
             doth
             abuse
             like
             very
             Babes
             ,
             with
             any
             foolish
             illusion
             whatsoever
             :
             So
             dooth
             Saint
             Chrysostome
             
             in
             one
             of
             his
             Homilies
             compare
             them
             ,
             but
             the
             servants
             of
             God
             which
             labour
             to
             draw
             them
             to
             salvation
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             contemne
             these
             follies
             and
             childishnesse
             ,
             being
             sufficient
             to
             plunge
             these
             poore
             abused
             creatures
             into
             eternall●perdition
             ;
             but
             they
             ought
             with
             good
             and
             cleere
             reasons
             ,
             to
             drawe
             them
             from
             so
             great
             ignorance
             .
             For
             in
             trueth
             it
             is
             a
             matter
             woorthy
             of
             consideration
             ,
             to
             see
             how
             they
             subiect
             themselves
             to
             such
             as
             instruct
             them
             in
             the
             true
             way
             of
             life
             .
             Ther
             is
             nothing
             among
             all
             the
             creatures
             more
             beutifull
             than
             the
             sunne
             ,
             which
             all
             the
             Gentiles
             did
             commonly
             worship
             .
             A
             discreete
             captaine
             and
             good
             christian
             told
             me
             ,
             that
             he
             had
             with
             a
             good
             reason
             perswaded
             the
             Indians
             ,
             that
             the
             Sunne
             was
             no
             god
             .
             He
             required
             the
             Ca●ique
             or
             chiefe
             Lord
             ,
             to
             give
             him
             an
             Indian
             that
             were
             light
             ,
             to
             carry
             him
             a
             Letter
             ;
             which
             doone
             ,
             he
             saide
             to
             the
             Cacique
             ,
             Tel
             me
             ,
             who
             is
             Lord
             and
             chiefe
             ,
             either
             this
             Indian
             that
             carries
             the
             letter
             ,
             or
             thou
             that
             dost
             send
             him
             ?
             The
             Cacique
             answered
             ,
             without
             doubt
             I
             am
             ,
             for
             he
             dooth
             but
             what
             I
             commau●d
             him
             .
             Even
             so
             replied
             the
             Captaine
             ,
             is
             it
             of
             the
             Sunne
             we
             see
             ,
             and
             the
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             :
             For
             that
             the
             Sunne
             is
             but
             a
             servant
             to
             the
             most
             high
             Lorde
             ,
             which
             (
             by
             his
             commaundement
             )
             runnes
             swiftly
             ,
             giving
             light
             to
             all
             nations
             .
             Thus
             thou
             seest
             it
             is
             against
             reason
             to
             yeeld
             that
             honour
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             which
             is
             due
             to
             the
             Creator
             and
             Lord
             of
             all
             .
             The
             Captaines
             reason
             pleased
             them
             all
             ;
             and
             the
             Cacique
             with
             his
             Indians
             sayde
             it
             was
             trueth
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             much
             pleased
             to
             vnderstand
             it
             .
          
           
             They
             report
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             ,
             a
             man
             of
             a
             subtill
             spirite
             ,
             who
             (
             seeing
             that
             all
             his
             predecessors
             had
             worshipped
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             )
             said
             ,
             that
             hee
             did
             not
             take
             the
             Sunne
             to
             be
             God
             ,
             neither
             could
             it
             be
             ,
             for
             that
             God
             was
             
             a
             great
             Lord
             ,
             who
             with
             great
             quiet
             and
             leasure
             performeth
             his
             workes
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Sunne
             doth
             never
             cease
             his
             course
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             thing
             which
             laboured
             so
             much
             could
             not
             seeme
             to
             be
             God.
             Wherein
             hee
             spake
             truth
             .
             Even
             so
             ,
             when
             they
             shew
             the
             Indians
             their
             blind
             errors
             ,
             by
             lively
             and
             plaine
             reasons
             ,
             they
             are
             presently
             perswaded
             and
             yeelde
             admirably
             to
             the
             trueth
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             another
             kinde
             of
             idolatry
             vpon
             the
             dead
             .
             CHAP.
             6.
             
          
           
             THere
             is
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             idolatry
             ,
             very
             different
             from
             the
             rest
             ,
             which
             the
             Gentiles
             have
             vsed
             for
             the
             deads
             sake
             whom
             they
             loved
             and
             esteemed
             :
             and
             it
             seemeth
             that
             the
             Wise
             man
             would
             give
             vs
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             the
             beginning
             of
             idolatry
             proceeded
             thence
             ,
             saying
             thus
             ;
             
               The
               seeking
               of
               Idolles
               was
               the
               beginning
               of
               fornication
               ,
               and
               the
               bringing
               vp
               of
               them
               is
               the
               destruction
               of
               life
            
             ;
             
             
               for
               they
               were
               not
               from
               the
               beginning
               ,
               neither
               shall
               they
               continue
               for
               ever
               ,
               but
               the
               vanitie
               and
               idlenesse
               of
               men
               hath
               found
               out
               this
               invention
               ,
               therefore
               shall
               they
               shortly
               come
               to
               an
               end
               :
               for
               when
               a
               father
               mourned
               heavily
               for
               the
               death
               of
               his
               miserable
               sonne
               ,
               he
               made
               for
               his
               consolation
               ,
               an
               Image
               of
               the
               dead
               man
               ,
               and
               b●ganne
               to
               worshippe
               him
               as
               a
               god
               ,
               who
               a
               little
               before
               had
               ended
               his
               daies
               like
               a
               mortall
               man
               ,
               commanding
               his
               servants
               to
               make
               ceremonies
               &
               sacrifices
               in
               remembrance
               of
               him
               .
               Thus
               in
               processe
               of
               time
               this
               vngratious
               custome
               waxing
               strong
               ,
               was
               held
               for
               a
               lawe
               ,
               and
               Images
               were
               worshipped
               by
               the
               commaundement
               of
               Kings
               and
               Tirantes
               .
               Then
               they
               beganne
               to
               doe
               the
               like
               to
               them
               that
               were
               absent
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               they
               could
               not
               honour
               in
               presence
               ,
               being
               farre
               off
               ,
               they
               did
               worship
               in
               this
               sort
               ,
               cansing
               the
               Images
               of
               Kings
               to
               be
               brought
               whom
               they
               would
               worship
               ,
               supplying
               (
               by
               this
               invention
               )
               
               their
               absence
               whom
               they
               desired
               to
               flatter
               .
               The
               curiositic
               of
               excellent
               workmen
               increased
               this
               Idolatrie
               ,
               for
               these
               Images
               were
               made
               so
               excellent
               by
               their
               Art
               ,
               that
               the
               ignorant
               were
               provoked
               to
               worshippe
               them
               ,
               so
               as
               by
               the
               perfection
               of
               their
               Arte
               ,
               pretending
               to
               content
               them
               that
               gave
               them
               to
               make
               ,
               they
               drew
               Pictures
               and
               Images
               farre
               more
               excellent
               :
               and
               the
               common
               people
               ,
               ledde
               with
               the
               shew
               and
               grace
               of
               the
               worke
               ,
               did
               holde
               and
               esteeme
               him
               for
               a
               God
               ,
               whome
               before
               they
               had
               honoured
               as
               a
               man
               :
               And
               this
               was
               the
               miserable
               errour
               of
               men
               ,
               who
               sometimes
               yeelding
               to
               their
               affection
               and
               sence
               ,
               sometimes
               to
               the
               flatterie
               of
               their
               Kings
               ,
               did
               attribute
               vnto
               stones
               the
               incommunicable
               name
               of
               God
               ,
               worshipping
               them
               for
               Gods.
               
            
          
           
             All
             this
             is
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Wisedome
             ,
             woorthy
             to
             be
             noted
             ;
             and
             such
             as
             are
             curious
             in
             the
             search
             of
             Antiquities
             ,
             shall
             finde
             that
             the
             beginning
             of
             idolatry
             were
             these
             Images
             of
             the
             dead
             .
             I
             say
             idolatry
             ,
             which
             is
             properly
             the
             worship
             of
             Idolles
             and
             Images
             :
             for
             that
             it
             is
             not
             certaine
             that
             this
             other
             idolatry
             to
             worship
             the
             creatures
             ,
             as
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             the
             hostes
             of
             heaven
             ,
             or
             the
             number
             of
             Planets
             and
             Starres
             ,
             whereof
             mention
             is
             made
             in
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             hath
             beene
             after
             the
             idolatry
             of
             Images
             ,
             
             although
             without
             doubt
             they
             have
             made
             idols
             in
             honour
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             
             the
             Moone
             ,
             and
             the
             Earth
             .
             Returning
             to
             our
             Indians
             they
             came
             to
             the
             height
             of
             Idolatry
             by
             the
             same
             meanes
             the
             Scripture
             maketh
             mention
             of
             :
             first
             they
             had
             a
             care
             to
             keepe
             the
             bodies
             of
             their
             Kings
             and
             Noblemen
             whole
             ,
             from
             any
             ill
             scent
             or
             corruption
             above
             two
             hundred
             yeares
             .
             In
             this
             sorte
             were
             their
             Kings
             Inguas
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             every
             one
             in
             his
             Chappell
             and
             Oratorie
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             Marquise
             of
             Canette
             being
             Viceroy
             ,
             to
             root
             out
             Idolatry
             ,
             caused
             three
             or
             foure
             of
             their
             gods
             to
             be
             drawne
             out
             and
             carried
             to
             the
             city
             of
             Kings
             ,
             
             which
             bredde
             a
             great
             admiration
             ,
             to
             see
             these
             bodies
             (
             dead
             so
             many
             yeares
             before
             )
             remaine
             so
             faire
             and
             also
             whole
             .
             Every
             one
             of
             these
             Kings
             Inguas
             left
             all
             his
             treasure
             and
             revenues
             ,
             to
             entertaine
             the
             place
             of
             worshippe
             where
             his
             body
             was
             layed
             ,
             and
             there
             were
             many
             Ministers
             with
             all
             his
             familie
             dedicated
             to
             his
             service
             :
             for
             no
             King
             successor
             did
             usurpe
             the
             treasures
             and
             plate
             of
             his
             predecessor
             ,
             but
             he
             did
             gather
             all
             new
             for
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             his
             pallace
             .
             They
             were
             not
             content
             with
             this
             Idolatry
             to
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             but
             also
             thev
             made
             their
             figures
             and
             representations
             :
             and
             every
             King
             in
             his
             life
             time
             caused
             a
             figure
             to
             be
             made
             wherin
             he
             was
             represented
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Guaoigui
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             brother
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             should
             doe
             to
             this
             Image
             ,
             during
             his
             life
             and
             death
             ,
             as
             much
             honor
             and
             reverence
             as
             to
             himself
             .
             They
             carryed
             this
             Image
             to
             the
             warres
             ,
             and
             in
             procession
             for
             rayne
             or
             fayre
             weather
             ,
             making
             sundry
             feastes
             and
             sacrifices
             vnto
             them
             .
             There
             have
             beene
             many
             of
             these
             Idolles
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             territorie
             ,
             but
             nowe
             they
             say
             that
             this
             superstition
             of
             worshipping
             of
             stones
             hath
             altogether
             ceased
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             most
             part
             ,
             after
             they
             had
             beene
             discovered
             by
             the
             diligence
             of
             the
             Licentiate
             Pollo
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             was
             that
             of
             the
             
               Inguas
               Rocha
            
             ,
             chief
             of
             the
             faction
             or
             race
             of
             
               Hanam
               Cusco
            
             .
             And
             we
             find
             that
             among
             other
             Nations
             they
             had
             in
             great
             estimation
             and
             reverence
             the
             bodies
             of
             their
             predecessors
             ,
             and
             did
             likewise
             worship
             their
             Images
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Superstitions
             they
             vsed
             to
             the
             Dead
             .
             
               CHAP.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Indians
             of
             Peru
             beleeved
             commonly
             that
             the
             Soules
             lived
             after
             this
             life
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             good
             were
             in
             glorie
             ,
             and
             the
             bad
             in
             paine
             ;
             so
             as
             there
             is
             little
             difficultie
             
             to
             perswade
             them
             to
             these
             articles
             .
             But
             they
             are
             not
             yet
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             that
             point
             ,
             that
             the
             bodies
             should
             rise
             with
             the
             soules
             ▪
             And
             therefore
             they
             did
             vse
             a
             wonderfull
             care
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             saide
             ,
             to
             preserve
             the
             bodies
             which
             they
             honoured
             after
             death
             :
             to
             this
             end
             their
             successors
             gave
             them
             garments
             ,
             and
             made
             sacrifices
             vnto
             them
             ,
             especially
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             ,
             being
             accompanied
             at
             their
             funeralls
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             number
             of
             servants
             and
             women
             for
             his
             service
             in
             the
             other
             life
             :
             and
             therefore
             on
             the
             day
             of
             his
             decease
             ,
             they
             did
             put
             to
             death
             the
             woman
             he
             had
             loved
             best
             ,
             his
             servants
             and
             officers
             that
             they
             might
             serve
             him
             in
             the
             other
             life
             .
          
           
             Whenas
             Guanacapa
             died
             ,
             (
             who
             was
             father
             to
             Atagualpa
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             ,
             )
             they
             put
             to
             death
             aboue
             a
             thousand
             persons
             of
             all
             ages
             and
             conditions
             ,
             for
             his
             service
             to
             accompany
             him
             in
             the
             other
             life
             ,
             after
             many
             songs
             and
             drunkennes
             they
             slew
             them
             ;
             and
             these
             that
             were
             appointed
             to
             death
             ,
             held
             themselves
             happy
             .
             They
             did
             sacrifice
             many
             things
             vnto
             them
             ,
             especially
             young
             children
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             bloud
             they
             made
             a
             stroake
             on
             the
             dead
             mans
             face
             ,
             from
             one
             eare
             to
             the
             other
             .
             This
             superstition
             and
             inhumanitie
             ,
             to
             kill
             both
             men
             and
             women
             ,
             to
             accompanie
             and
             serve
             the
             dead
             in
             the
             other
             life
             ,
             hath
             beene
             followed
             by
             others
             ,
             and
             is
             at
             this
             day
             vsed
             amongst
             some
             other
             barbarous
             Nations
             .
             And
             as
             Pollo
             writes
             ,
             it
             hath
             beene
             in
             a
             maner
             generall
             throughout
             all
             the
             Indies
             .
             The
             Reverent
             Beda
             reportes
             ,
             that
             before
             the
             Englishmen
             were
             converted
             to
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             they
             had
             the
             same
             custome
             ,
             to
             kill
             men
             to
             accompany
             and
             serve
             the
             dead
             .
             It
             is
             written
             of
             a
             Portugall
             ,
             who
             being
             captive
             among
             the
             Barbarians
             ,
             had
             beene
             hurt
             with
             a
             dart
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             lost
             one
             eye
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             would
             have
             sacrificed
             him
             to
             accompany
             
             a
             Nobleman
             that
             was
             dead
             ,
             hee
             said
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             those
             that
             were
             in
             the
             other
             life
             ,
             would
             make
             small
             account
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             if
             they
             gave
             him
             a
             blind
             man
             for
             a
             companion
             ;
             &
             that
             it
             were
             better
             to
             give
             him
             an
             attendant
             that
             had
             both
             his
             eyes
             .
             This
             reason
             being
             found
             good
             by
             the
             Barbarians
             ,
             they
             let
             him
             go
             .
             Besids
             this
             superstition
             of
             sacrificing
             men
             to
             the
             dead
             ,
             beeing
             vsed
             but
             to
             great
             Personages
             ,
             there
             is
             another
             far
             more
             general
             &
             common
             in
             all
             the
             Indies
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             set
             meate
             and
             drinke
             vpon
             the
             grave
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             imagining
             they
             did
             feede
             thereon
             :
             the
             which
             hath
             likewise
             beene
             an
             error
             amongst
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             as
             saint
             Augustine
             writes
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             gave
             them
             meate
             and
             drinke
             .
             At
             this
             day
             many
             Indian
             Infidells
             ,
             doe
             secretly
             draw
             their
             dead
             out
             of
             the
             churchyard
             ,
             and
             burie
             them
             on
             hilles
             ,
             or
             vpon
             passages
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             or
             else
             in
             their
             owne
             houses
             .
             They
             have
             also
             vsed
             to
             put
             gold
             and
             silver
             in
             their
             mouth
             ,
             hands
             ,
             and
             bosome
             ,
             and
             to
             apparell
             them
             with
             new
             garments
             durable
             ,
             and
             well
             lined
             vnder
             the
             herse
             .
          
           
             They
             beleeve
             that
             the
             soules
             of
             the
             dead
             wandred
             vp
             and
             downe
             and
             indure
             colde
             ,
             thirst
             ,
             hunger
             and
             travell
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             make
             their
             anniversaries
             ,
             carrying
             them
             clothes
             ,
             meate
             and
             drinke
             .
             So
             as
             the
             Prelates
             ,
             neitheir
             Synodes
             ,
             above
             all
             things
             ,
             give
             charge
             to
             their
             Priests
             to
             let
             the
             Indians
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             the
             offerings
             that
             are
             set
             vpon
             the
             sepulchre
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             feede
             the
             dead
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             poore
             and
             ministers
             ,
             and
             that
             God
             alone
             dooth
             feede
             the
             soules
             in
             the
             other
             life
             ;
             seeing
             they
             neither
             eate
             nor
             drinke
             any
             corporall
             thing
             ,
             being
             very
             needefull
             they
             should
             vnderstand
             it
             ,
             lest
             they
             should
             convert
             this
             religious
             vse
             into
             a
             superstition
             of
             the
             gentiles
             ,
             as
             many
             doe
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             manner
             of
             burying
             the
             dead
             among
             the
             Mexicaine
             and
             sundrie
             other
             Nations
             .
             CHAP.
             8.
             
          
           
             HAving
             reported
             what
             many
             nations
             of
             Peru
             have
             done
             with
             their
             dead
             ,
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             to
             make
             particular
             mention
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             in
             this
             poynt
             ,
             whose
             mortuaries
             were
             much
             solempnised
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             notable
             follies
             .
             It
             was
             the
             office
             of
             the
             priests
             and
             religious
             of
             Mexico
             (
             who
             lived
             there
             with
             a
             strange
             observance
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             saide
             heereafter
             )
             to
             interre
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             doe
             their
             obsequies
             .
             The
             places
             where
             they
             buried
             them
             ,
             was
             in
             their
             gardens
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             courts
             of
             their
             owne
             houses
             :
             others
             carried
             them
             to
             the
             places
             of
             sacrifices
             which
             were
             doone
             in
             the
             mountaines
             :
             others
             burnt
             them
             ,
             and
             after
             buryed
             the
             ashes
             in
             they●
             Temples
             ;
             and
             they
             buryed
             them
             all
             ,
             with
             whatsoever
             they
             had
             ,
             of
             apparel
             ,
             stones
             ,
             and
             jewells
             .
             They
             did
             put
             the
             ashes
             of
             such
             as
             were
             burnt
             into
             pots
             ,
             &
             with
             them
             ,
             the
             jewells
             ,
             stones
             ,
             and
             earerings
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             how
             rich
             and
             pretious
             soever
             .
             They
             did
             sing
             the
             funerall
             offices
             ,
             like
             to
             answeres
             ,
             and
             did
             often
             lift
             vp
             the
             dead
             bodies
             ,
             dooing
             many
             ceremonies
             .
             At
             these
             mortuaries
             they
             did
             eate
             and
             drinke
             ;
             and
             if
             it
             were
             a
             person
             of
             qualitie
             ,
             they
             gave
             apparrell
             to
             all
             such
             as
             came
             to
             the
             interrement
             .
             When
             any
             one
             dyed
             ,
             they
             layd
             him
             open
             in
             a
             chamber
             ,
             vntill
             that
             all
             his
             kinsfolkes
             and
             friendes
             were
             come
             ,
             who
             brought
             presents
             vnto
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             saluted
             him
             as
             if
             he
             were
             living
             .
             And
             if
             hee
             were
             a
             King
             or
             Lord
             of
             some
             towne
             ,
             they
             offered
             him
             slaves
             to
             be
             put
             to
             death
             with
             him
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             might
             serve
             him
             in
             the
             other
             world
             .
             They
             likewise
             put
             to
             death
             his
             priest
             ,
             
             or
             chaplaine
             (
             for
             every
             Noble
             man
             had
             a
             priest
             which
             administred
             these
             ceremonies
             within
             his
             house
             ,
             )
             and
             then
             they
             killed
             him
             ,
             that
             hee
             might
             execute
             his
             office
             with
             the
             dead
             .
             They
             likewise
             killed
             his
             cooke
             ,
             his
             butler
             ,
             his
             dwarfes
             ,
             and
             deformed
             men
             ,
             by
             whome
             he
             was
             most
             served
             :
             neyther
             did
             they
             spare
             the
             very
             brothers
             ,
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             who
             had
             most
             served
             them
             :
             for
             it
             was
             a
             greatnesse
             amongest
             the
             Noble
             men
             ,
             to
             be
             served
             by
             theyr
             brethren
             and
             the
             rest
             .
             Finally
             ,
             they
             put
             to
             death
             all
             of
             his
             traine
             ,
             for
             the
             entertaining
             of
             his
             house
             in
             the
             other
             world
             :
             and
             lest
             poverty
             should
             oppresse
             them
             ,
             they
             buried
             with
             them
             much
             wealth
             ,
             as
             golde
             ,
             silver
             ,
             stones
             ,
             curtins
             of
             exquisite
             worke
             ,
             bracelets
             of
             gold
             ,
             and
             other
             rich
             peeces
             .
             And
             if
             they
             burned
             the
             dead
             ,
             they
             vsed
             the
             like
             with
             all
             his
             servants
             ,
             and
             ornaments
             they
             gave
             him
             for
             the
             other
             world
             .
             Then
             tooke
             they
             all
             the
             ashes
             they
             buryed
             with
             very
             great
             solemnity
             .
             The
             obsequies
             continued
             tenne
             dayes
             with
             songs
             of
             plaints
             ,
             and
             lamentations
             ,
             and
             the
             priests
             caried
             away
             the
             dead
             with
             so
             many
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             in
             so
             great
             number
             ,
             as
             they
             coulde
             scarce
             accoumpt
             them
             .
             To
             the
             Captaines
             and
             Noblemen
             they
             gave
             trophees
             and
             markes
             of
             honour
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             enterprises
             and
             valor
             imployed
             in
             the
             warres
             and
             governements
             ;
             for
             this
             effect
             they
             had
             armes
             and
             particular
             blasons
             .
             They
             carried
             these
             markes
             or
             blazons
             to
             the
             place
             where
             hee
             desired
             to
             be
             buried
             or
             burnt
             ,
             marching
             before
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             accompanying
             it
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             in
             procession
             ,
             where
             the
             priests
             and
             officers
             of
             the
             Temple
             went
             with
             diverse
             furnitures
             and
             ornaments
             ,
             some
             casting
             incense
             ,
             others
             singing
             ,
             and
             some
             sounding
             of
             mournefull
             flutes
             and
             drummes
             ,
             which
             did
             much
             increase
             the
             sorrow
             of
             his
             kinsfolkes
             and
             subiects
             .
             The
             priest
             who
             did
             the
             office
             
             was
             decked
             with
             the
             markes
             of
             the
             idoll
             which
             the
             noble
             man
             had
             represented
             ;
             for
             all
             noble
             men
             did
             represent
             idolles
             ,
             and
             carried
             the
             name
             of
             some
             one
             :
             and
             for
             this
             occasion
             they
             were
             esteemed
             and
             honoured
             .
             The
             order
             of
             knighthoode
             did
             commonly
             carry
             these
             foresaide
             markes
             .
             He
             that
             should
             be
             burnt
             ,
             being
             brought
             to
             the
             place
             appoynted
             ,
             they
             invironed
             him
             with
             wood
             of
             pine
             trees
             ,
             and
             all
             his
             baggage
             ,
             then
             set
             they
             fire
             vnto
             it
             ,
             increasing
             it
             still
             with
             goomie
             wood
             ,
             vntill
             that
             all
             were
             converted
             into
             ashes
             ,
             then
             came
             there
             foorth
             a
             Priest
             attired
             like
             a
             Divell
             ,
             having
             mouthes
             vpon
             every
             ioynt
             of
             him
             ,
             and
             many
             eyes
             of
             glasse
             ,
             holding
             a
             great
             staffe
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             hee
             did
             mingle
             all
             the
             ashes
             very
             boldly
             ,
             and
             with
             so
             terrible
             a
             gesture
             ,
             as
             hee
             terrified
             all
             the
             assistants
             .
             Sometimes
             this
             minister
             had
             other
             different
             habites
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             quallitie
             of
             the
             dead
             .
             I
             have
             made
             this
             digression
             of
             obsequies
             and
             funeralls
             ,
             vpon
             the
             idolatry
             and
             superstition
             they
             had
             to
             the
             dead
             .
             It
             is
             reason
             to
             returne
             now
             to
             our
             chiefe
             subiect
             ,
             and
             to
             finish
             this
             matter
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             fourth
             and
             last
             kinde
             of
             Idolatry
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             ,
             especially
             the
             Mexicaines
             to
             Images
             and
             Idolls
             .
             
               CHAP.
               9.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             in
             trueth
             God
             is
             greatly
             offended
             with
             these
             above
             named
             Idolatries
             ,
             where
             they
             woorship
             the
             creatures
             ;
             yet
             the
             holy-Ghost
             doth
             much
             more
             reproove
             and
             condemne
             another
             kind
             of
             idolatry
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             of
             those
             that
             worship
             Images
             and
             figures
             made
             by
             the
             hand
             of
             men
             ,
             which
             have
             nothing
             else
             in
             them
             but
             to
             be
             of
             wood
             ,
             stone
             ,
             or
             mettall
             ,
             and
             of
             such
             forme
             as
             God
             hath
             given
             them
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Wiseman
             
             speaketh
             thus
             of
             such
             people
             ,
             
               They
               are
               miserable
               ,
               whose
               hopes
               may
               be
               counted
               among
               the
               dead
               ,
               that
               have
               called
               the
               workes
               of
               mens
               handes
               gods
               ,
               as
               golde
               ,
               silver
               ,
               and
               the
               invention
               of
               the
               likenes
               of
               beastes
               ,
               or
               a
               fruitlesse
               stone
               ,
               which
               hath
               nothing
               more
               in
               it
               than
               antiquitie
               .
            
             
             And
             hee
             dooth
             divinely
             follow
             this
             proposition
             against
             this
             errour
             and
             follie
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             Prophets
             
               Esay
               ,
               Ieremy
               ,
               Baruc
            
             ,
             &
             King
             David
             doe
             treate
             thereof
             amply
             .
             It
             is
             convenient
             and
             necessary
             that
             the
             Ministers
             of
             Christ
             which
             do
             reproove
             the
             errors
             of
             idolatry
             ,
             should
             have
             a
             good
             sight
             ,
             and
             consider
             well
             these
             reasons
             which
             the
             holy-Ghost
             doth
             so
             lively
             set
             downe
             ,
             being
             all
             reduced
             into
             a
             short
             sentence
             ,
             by
             the
             Prophet
             Osee
             ,
             
             
               Hee
               that
               hath
               made
               them
               was
               a
               workeman
               ,
               and
               therefore
               can
               they
               be
               no
               gods
               ,
               therefore
               the
               Calfe
               of
            
             Samaria
             
               shal
               be
               like
               the
               Spiders
               webbe
            
             .
             Returning
             to
             our
             purpose
             ,
             there
             hath
             beene
             great
             curiositie
             at
             the
             Indies
             in
             making
             of
             idolles
             and
             pictures
             of
             diverse
             formes
             and
             matters
             ,
             which
             they
             worshipped
             for
             gods
             ,
             and
             in
             Peru
             they
             called
             them
             Guacas
             ,
             being
             commonly
             of
             fowle
             and
             deformed
             beasts
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             such
             as
             I
             have
             seene
             ,
             were
             so
             .
             I
             beleeve
             verily
             that
             the
             Divel
             ,
             in
             whose
             honour
             they
             made
             these
             idolles
             ,
             was
             pleased
             to
             cause
             himselfe
             to
             be
             worshipped
             in
             these
             deformities
             ,
             and
             in
             ●rneth
             it
             was
             found
             so
             ,
             that
             the
             Divell
             spake
             and
             answered
             many
             of
             these
             Guacas
             or
             idolls
             ,
             and
             his
             priestes
             and
             ministers
             came
             to
             these
             Oracles
             of
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             he
             is
             ,
             such
             were
             his
             counsells
             and
             prophesies
             .
             In
             the
             provinces
             of
             New
             
               Spaine
               ,
               Mexico
               ,
               Tescuco
               ,
               Tlascalla
               ,
               Cholula
               ,
            
             and
             in
             the
             neighbour
             countries
             to
             this
             realme
             ,
             this
             kinde
             of
             idolatry
             hath
             beene
             more
             pactised
             than
             in
             any
             other
             realme
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             it
             is
             a
             prodigious
             thing
             to
             heare
             the
             superstitions
             rehersed
             that
             they
             have
             vsed
             in
             that
             poynt
             ,
             of
             the
             which
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             vnpleasant
             
             to
             speake
             something
             .
             The
             chiefest
             idoll
             of
             M●xic●
             was
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             sayde
             ,
             Vitziliputzli
             .
             It
             was
             an
             image
             of
             wood
             like
             to
             a
             man
             ,
             set
             vpon
             a
             stoole
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             ●
             zure
             ,
             in
             a
             brankard
             or
             litter
             ,
             at
             ●very
             corner
             was
             a
             pie●●
             of
             wood
             in
             forme
             of
             a
             Serpents
             head
             .
             The
             stoole
             signified
             that
             he
             was
             set
             in
             heaven
             :
             this
             idoll
             hadde
             all
             the
             forehead
             azure
             ,
             and
             had
             a
             band
             of
             azure
             vnder
             the
             nose
             from
             one
             eare
             to
             another
             :
             vpon
             his
             head
             he
             had
             a
             rich
             plume
             of
             feathers
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             beake
             of
             a
             small
             bird
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             covered
             on
             the
             toppe
             with
             golde
             burnished
             very
             browne
             :
             hee
             had
             in
             his
             left
             hand
             a
             white
             target
             ,
             with
             the
             figures
             of
             five
             pineapples
             ,
             made
             of
             white
             feathers
             ,
             set
             in
             a
             crosse
             :
             and
             from
             above
             issued
             forth
             a
             crest
             of
             gold
             ,
             and
             at
             his
             sides
             hee
             hadde
             foure
             dartes
             ,
             which
             (
             the
             Mexicaines
             say
             )
             had
             beene
             sent
             from
             heaven
             to
             do
             those
             actes
             and
             prowesses
             which
             shall
             be
             spoken
             of
             :
             In
             his
             right
             hand
             he
             had
             an
             azured
             staffe
             ,
             cutte
             in
             fashion
             of
             a
             waving
             snake
             .
             All
             these
             ornaments
             with
             the
             rest
             hee
             had
             ,
             carried
             his
             sence
             as
             the
             Mexicaines
             doe
             shew
             ;
             the
             name
             of
             Vitziliputzli
             signifies
             the
             left
             hand
             of
             a
             shining
             feather
             .
          
           
             I
             will
             speake
             heereafter
             of
             the
             prowde
             Temple
             ,
             the
             sacrifices
             ,
             feasts
             and
             ceremonies
             of
             this
             great
             idoll
             ,
             being
             very
             notable
             things
             .
             But
             at
             this
             present
             we
             will
             only
             shew
             ,
             that
             this
             idoll
             thus
             richly
             appareled
             and
             deckt
             ,
             was
             set
             vpon
             an
             high
             Altare
             ,
             in
             a
             small
             peece
             or
             boxe
             ,
             well
             covered
             with
             linnen
             clothes
             ,
             iewells
             ,
             feathers
             and
             ornaments
             of
             golde
             ,
             with
             many
             rundles
             of
             feathers
             ,
             the
             fairest
             and
             most
             exquisite
             that
             could
             be
             found
             :
             hee
             had
             alwaies
             a
             curtine
             before
             him
             for
             the
             greater
             veneration
             .
             Ioyning
             to
             the
             chamber
             or
             chappell
             of
             this
             idoll
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             peece
             of
             lesse
             worke
             ,
             and
             not
             so
             well
             beautified
             ,
             where
             there
             was
             another
             idoll
             they
             called
             
               T
               lalos
            
             .
             These
             
             two
             idolls
             were
             alwayes
             together
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             held
             them
             as
             companions
             ,
             and
             of
             equall
             power
             .
             There
             was
             another
             idoll
             in
             Mexico
             much
             esteemed
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             god
             of
             repentance
             ,
             and
             of
             jubilies
             and
             pardons
             for
             their
             sinnes
             .
             They
             called
             this
             idoll
             TeZcallipuca
             ,
             he
             was
             made
             of
             a
             blacke
             shining
             stone
             like
             to
             Iayel
             ,
             being
             attired
             with
             some
             Gentile
             devises
             after
             their
             manner
             ;
             it
             had
             eare-rings
             of
             golde
             and
             silver
             ,
             and
             through
             the
             nether
             lippe
             a
             small
             canon
             of
             cristall
             ,
             in
             length
             halfe
             a
             foote
             :
             in
             the
             which
             they
             sometimes
             put
             a
             greene
             feather
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             an
             azured
             ,
             which
             made
             it
             resemble
             sometimes
             an
             Emerald
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             a
             Turquois
             :
             it
             had
             the
             haire
             broided
             and
             bound
             vp
             with
             a
             haire-lace
             of
             golde
             burnished
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             whereof
             did
             hang
             an
             ●are
             of
             golde
             ,
             with
             two
             firebrands
             of
             smoake
             painted
             therein
             ,
             which
             did
             signifie
             the
             prayers
             of
             the
             afflicted
             and
             sinners
             that
             he
             heard
             ,
             when
             they
             recommended
             themselves
             vnto
             him
             .
             Betwixt
             the
             two
             eares
             hanged
             a
             number
             of
             small
             herons
             .
             He
             had
             a
             iewell
             hanging
             at
             his
             necke
             ,
             so
             great
             that
             it
             covered
             all
             his
             stomacke
             :
             vpon
             his
             armes
             bracelets
             of
             golde
             ;
             at
             his
             navilla
             rich
             greene
             stone
             :
             and
             in
             his
             left
             hand
             a
             fanne
             of
             pretious
             feathers
             ,
             of
             greene
             ,
             azure
             and
             yellow
             ,
             which
             came
             forth
             of
             a
             looking
             glasse
             of
             golde
             ,
             shining
             and
             well
             burnished
             ,
             and
             that
             signified
             ,
             that
             within
             this
             looking
             glasse
             hee
             sawe
             whatsoever
             was
             doone
             in
             the
             world
             .
             They
             called
             this
             glasse
             or
             chaston
             of
             golde
             Irlacheaya
             ,
             which
             signifies
             his
             glasse
             for
             to
             looke
             in
             .
             In
             his
             right
             hand
             he
             held
             foure
             dartes
             ,
             which
             signified
             the
             chasticement
             hee
             gave
             vnto
             the
             wicked
             for
             their
             sinnes
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             feared
             this
             idoll
             most
             ,
             lest
             he
             should
             discover
             their
             faults
             and
             offences
             .
             At
             his
             feast
             they
             had
             pardon
             of
             their
             sinnes
             ,
             which
             was
             made
             every
             foure
             yeares
             ,
             as
             shal
             be
             declared
             heereafter
             .
             They
             
             held
             this
             idoll
             Tescatlipuca
             for
             the
             god
             of
             drought
             ,
             of
             famine
             ,
             barrennesse
             and
             pestilence
             :
             And
             therefore
             they
             paynted
             him
             in
             another
             forme
             ,
             being
             set
             in
             great
             malesty
             vppon
             a
             stoole
             compassed
             in
             with
             a
             red
             curtin
             ,
             painted
             &
             wrought
             with
             the
             heads
             and
             bones
             of
             dead
             men
             .
             In
             the
             lest
             hand
             it
             had
             a
             target
             with
             five
             pines
             ,
             like
             vnto
             pine
             apples
             of
             cotton
             :
             and
             in
             the
             right
             a
             little
             dart
             with
             a
             threatning
             countenaunce
             ,
             and
             the
             arme
             stretcht
             out
             ▪
             as
             if
             he
             would
             cast
             it
             ;
             and
             from
             the
             target
             came
             foure
             dartes
             .
             It
             had
             the
             countenance
             of
             an
             angry
             man
             ,
             and
             in
             choler
             ,
             the
             body
             all
             painted
             blacke
             ,
             and
             the
             head
             full
             of
             Quailes
             feathers
             .
             They
             vsed
             great
             superstition
             to
             this
             idoll
             ,
             for
             the
             feare
             they
             had
             of
             it
             .
             In
             Cholula
             which
             is
             a
             commonwealth
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             they
             worshipt
             a
             famous
             idoll
             which
             was
             the
             god
             of
             marchandise
             ,
             being
             to
             this
             day
             greatly
             given
             to
             trafficke
             .
             They
             called
             it
             Qnetzaalcoalt
             .
          
           
             This
             idoll
             was
             in
             a
             great
             place
             in
             a
             temple
             very
             hie
             :
             it
             had
             about
             it
             ,
             golde
             ,
             silver
             ,
             jewells
             ,
             very
             rich
             feathers
             ,
             and
             habites
             of
             divers
             colours
             .
             It
             had
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             but
             the
             visage
             of
             a
             little
             bird
             ,
             with
             a
             red
             bill
             ,
             and
             above
             a
             combe
             full
             of
             wartes
             ,
             having
             ranckes
             of
             teeth
             ,
             and
             the
             tongue
             hanging
             out
             .
             It
             carried
             vpon
             the
             head
             ,
             a
             pointed
             myter
             of
             painted
             paper
             ,
             a
             sithe
             in
             the
             hand
             ,
             and
             many
             toyes
             of
             golde
             on
             the
             legges
             ;
             with
             a
             thousand
             other
             foolish
             inventions
             ,
             whereof
             all
             had
             their
             significations
             ,
             and
             they
             worshipt
             it
             ,
             for
             that
             hee
             enriched
             whome
             hee
             pleased
             ,
             as
             Memnon
             and
             Plutus
             .
             In
             trueth
             this
             name
             which
             the
             Choluanos
             gave
             to
             their
             God
             ,
             was
             very
             fi●te
             ,
             although
             they
             vnderstoode
             it
             not
             :
             they
             called
             it
             Quetzaalcoalt
             ,
             signifying
             colour
             of
             a
             rich
             feather
             ,
             for
             such
             is
             the
             divell
             of
             covetousnesse
             .
             These
             barbarous
             people
             contented
             not
             themselves
             to
             have
             gods
             onely
             ,
             
             but
             they
             had
             goddesses
             also
             ,
             as
             the
             Fables
             of
             Poets
             have
             brought
             in
             ,
             and
             the
             blind
             gentility
             of
             the
             Greekes
             and
             Romans
             worshipt
             them
             .
             The
             chiefe
             goddesse
             they
             worshipt
             was
             called
             ToZi
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             our
             granmother
             ,
             who
             as
             the
             Histories
             of
             Mexico
             report
             ,
             was
             daughter
             to
             the
             king
             of
             Culhuacan
             ,
             who
             was
             the
             first
             they
             s●eaed
             by
             the
             commaundement
             of
             Vitzliputzli
             ,
             whom
             they
             sacrificed
             in
             this
             so●t
             ,
             being
             his
             sister
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             beganne
             to
             flea
             men
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             to
             clothe
             the
             living
             with
             the
             skinnes
             of
             the
             sacrificed
             ,
             having
             learned
             that
             their
             gods
             were
             pleased
             therewith
             ,
             as
             also
             to
             pul
             the
             hearts
             out
             of
             them
             they
             sacrificed
             ,
             which
             they
             learned
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             who
             pulled
             out
             the
             hearts
             of
             such
             as
             he
             punished
             in
             Tulla
             ,
             as
             shall
             be
             sayd
             in
             his
             place
             .
             One
             of
             these
             goddesses
             they
             worshipt
             had
             a
             sonne
             ,
             who
             was
             a
             great
             hunter
             ,
             whome
             they
             of
             Tl●scalla
             afterwardes
             tooke
             for
             a
             god
             ,
             and
             those
             were
             ennemies
             to
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             by
             whose
             ayde
             the
             Spaniardes
             wonne
             Mexico
             .
             The
             province
             of
             Tlascalla
             is
             very
             fit
             for
             hunting
             ,
             and
             the
             people
             are
             much
             given
             therevnto
             .
             They
             therfore
             made
             a
             great
             feast
             vnto
             this
             idoll
             ,
             whom
             they
             painted
             of
             such
             a
             forme
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             not
             now
             needefull
             to
             loose
             any
             time
             in
             the
             description
             thereof
             .
             The
             feast
             they
             made
             was
             pleasant
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             sort
             :
             They
             sounded
             a
             Trumpet
             at
             the
             breake
             of
             day
             ,
             at
             the
             sound
             whereof
             they
             all
             assembled
             with
             thei●
             bowes
             ,
             arrows
             ,
             netts
             ,
             and
             other
             instruments
             for
             hunting
             :
             then
             they
             went
             in
             procession
             with
             theyr
             idoll
             ,
             being
             followed
             by
             a
             great
             number
             of
             people
             to
             a
             high
             mountayne
             ,
             vpon
             the
             toppe
             whereof
             they
             had
             made
             a
             bower
             of
             leaves
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             middest
             thereof
             an
             Altare
             richly
             deckt
             ,
             where-vpon
             they
             placed
             the
             idoll
             .
             They
             marched
             with
             a
             great
             bruit
             of
             Trumpettes
             ,
             Cornets
             ,
             Flutes
             and
             Drummes
             ,
             and
             being
             come
             vnto
             the
             
             place
             ,
             they
             invironed
             this
             mountaine
             on
             all
             sides
             ,
             putting
             fire
             to
             it
             on
             all
             partes
             :
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             manie
             beasts
             flew
             foorth
             ,
             as
             stagges
             ,
             connies
             ,
             hares
             ,
             foxes
             ,
             and
             woolves
             ,
             which
             went
             to
             the
             toppe
             flying
             from
             the
             fire
             .
             These
             hunters
             followed
             after
             with
             great
             cries
             and
             noyse
             of
             diverse
             instruments
             ,
             hunting
             them
             to
             the
             top
             before
             the
             idoll
             ,
             whither
             fled
             such
             a
             number
             of
             beastes
             ,
             in
             so
             great
             a
             prease
             ,
             that
             they
             leaped
             one
             vpon
             another
             ,
             vpon
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             vppon
             the
             Altare
             ,
             wherein
             they
             tooke
             great
             delight
             .
             Then
             tooke
             they
             a
             great
             number
             of
             these
             beasts
             ,
             and
             sacrificed
             them
             before
             the
             idoll
             ,
             as
             stagges
             and
             other
             great
             beasts
             ,
             pulling
             out
             their
             hearts
             ,
             as
             they
             vse
             in
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             like
             ceremony
             :
             which
             done
             ,
             they
             tooke
             all
             their
             prey
             vppon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             and
             retired
             with
             their
             idoll
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             they
             came
             ,
             and
             entered
             the
             citty
             laden
             with
             all
             these
             things
             ,
             very
             ioyfull
             ,
             with
             great
             store
             of
             musicke
             ,
             trumpets
             ,
             and
             drummes
             ,
             vntill
             they
             came
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             where
             they
             placed
             their
             idoll
             with
             great
             reverence
             and
             solemnitie
             .
             They
             presently
             went
             to
             prepare
             their
             venison
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             made
             a
             banquet
             to
             all
             the
             people
             ;
             and
             after
             dinner
             they
             made
             their
             playes
             ,
             representations
             ,
             and
             daunces
             before
             the
             idoll
             .
             They
             had
             a
             great
             number
             of
             other
             idolles
             ,
             of
             gods
             and
             goddesses
             ;
             but
             the
             chiefe
             were
             of
             the
             Mexicaine
             Nation
             ,
             and
             the
             neighbour
             people
             as
             is
             saide
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             a
             strange
             maner
             of
             Idolatry
             practised
             amongst
             the
             Mexicaines
             .
             
               CHAP.
               10.
            
             
          
           
             AS
             wee
             have
             saide
             that
             the
             kings
             Inguas
             of
             Peru
             caused
             Images
             to
             be
             made
             to
             their
             likenesse
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             their
             Guacos
             or
             brothers
             ,
             causing
             them
             for
             
             to
             be
             honored
             like
             themselves
             :
             even
             so
             the
             Mexicains
             have
             done
             of
             their
             gods
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             this
             sorte
             .
             They
             tooke
             a
             captive
             ,
             such
             as
             they
             thought
             good
             ,
             and
             afore
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             him
             vnto
             their
             idolls
             ;
             they
             gave
             him
             the
             name
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             to
             whome
             hee
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             ,
             and
             apparelled
             him
             with
             the
             same
             ornaments
             like
             their
             idoll
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             he
             did
             represent
             the
             same
             idoll
             .
             And
             during
             the
             time
             that
             this
             representation
             lasted
             ,
             which
             was
             for
             a
             yeere
             in
             some
             feasts
             ,
             in
             others
             sixe
             moneths
             ,
             and
             in
             others
             lesse
             :
             they
             reverenced
             and
             worshipped
             him
             in
             the
             same
             maner
             ,
             as
             the
             proper
             idoll
             ;
             and
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             he
             did
             eate
             ,
             drincke
             ,
             and
             was
             merry
             .
             When
             hee
             went
             through
             the
             streetes
             ,
             the
             people
             came
             forth
             to
             worship
             him
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             brought
             him
             an
             almes
             ,
             with
             children
             and
             sicke
             folkes
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             cure
             them
             ,
             and
             blesse
             them
             ,
             suffering
             him
             to
             doe
             all
             things
             at
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             onely
             hee
             was
             accompanied
             with
             tenne
             or
             twelve
             men
             lest
             he
             should
             flie
             .
             And
             he
             (
             to
             the
             end
             he
             might
             be
             reverenced
             as
             he
             passed
             )
             sometimes
             sounded
             vppon
             a
             small
             flute
             ,
             that
             the
             people
             might
             prepare
             to
             worship
             him
             .
             The
             feast
             being
             come
             ,
             and
             hee
             growne
             fatte
             ,
             they
             killed
             him
             ,
             opened
             him
             ,
             and
             eat
             him
             ,
             making
             a
             solempne
             sacrifice
             of
             him
             .
          
           
             In
             trueth
             it
             was
             a
             pittifull
             thing
             to
             consider
             in
             what
             sort
             Sathan
             held
             this
             people
             in
             his
             subiection
             ,
             and
             doth
             many
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             which
             commit
             the
             like
             cruelties
             and
             abhominations
             ,
             with
             the
             losse
             of
             the
             miserable
             soules
             and
             bodies
             of
             such
             as
             they
             offer
             to
             him
             ,
             and
             he
             laughes
             and
             mockes
             at
             the
             follie
             of
             these
             poore
             miserable
             creatures
             ,
             who
             deserve
             well
             ,
             for
             their
             offences
             ,
             to
             be
             forsaken
             of
             the
             most
             high
             God
             ,
             to
             the
             power
             of
             their
             adversary
             ,
             whom
             they
             have
             chosen
             for
             their
             god
             &
             support
             .
             But
             seeing
             wee
             have
             spoken
             sufficient
             of
             the
             Indians
             
             idolatrie
             :
             it
             followes
             that
             we
             treate
             of
             their
             Religion
             ,
             or
             rather
             Superstition
             ,
             which
             they
             vse
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             temples
             ,
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             Divell
             hath
             laboured
             to
             make
             himselfe
             equall
             vnto
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             imitate
             him
             in
             his
             Sacrifices
             ,
             Religion
             ,
             and
             Sacraments
             .
             
               CHAP.
               11.
            
             
          
           
             BEfore
             wee
             come
             to
             this
             point
             ,
             we
             ought
             to
             consider
             one
             thing
             ,
             which
             is
             worthie
             of
             speciall
             regard
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             ,
             how
             the
             Divell
             by
             his
             pride
             hath
             opposed
             himselfe
             to
             God
             ;
             and
             that
             which
             God
             by
             his
             wisedome
             hath
             decreed
             for
             his
             honour
             and
             service
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             good
             and
             health
             of
             man
             ,
             the
             Divell
             st●ives
             to
             imitate
             and
             to
             pervert
             ,
             to
             bee
             honoured
             ,
             and
             to
             cause
             man
             to
             be
             dammed
             :
             for
             as
             we
             see
             the
             great
             God
             hath
             Sacrif●●●s
             ,
             Priests
             ,
             Sacraments
             ,
             Religious
             Prophets
             ,
             and
             Ministers
             ,
             dedicated
             to
             his
             divine
             service
             and
             holy
             ceremonies
             ,
             so
             the
             Divell
             hath
             his
             sacrifices
             ,
             priests
             ,
             his
             kinds
             of
             sacraments
             ,
             his
             ministers
             appointed
             ,
             his
             secluded
             and
             fained
             holinesse
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             sortes
             of
             false
             prophets
             .
             All
             which
             will
             bee
             pleasant
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             being
             declared
             in
             particular
             ,
             and
             of
             no
             s●●ll
             s●uite
             for
             him
             that
             shall
             remember
             ,
             how
             the
             Divell
             is
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             ,
             
             as
             the
             truth
             saieth
             in
             the
             Gosp●l
             ;
             and
             therefore
             hee
             seekes
             to
             vsurpe
             to
             himselfe
             the
             glorie
             of
             God
             ,
             
             and
             to
             counterfait
             the
             light
             by
             his
             darknes
             .
             The
             Sooth-saiers
             of
             Egipt
             taught
             by
             their
             master
             Sa●●●●
             ,
             laboured
             to
             do
             wonders
             ,
             like
             vnto
             those
             of
             ●●s●s
             and
             Aron
             ,
             to
             be
             equall
             vnto
             them
             .
             We
             reade
             in
             the
             Booke
             of
             Iud●es
             of
             that
             Micas
             ,
             Priest
             of
             the
             vaine
             Idoll
             ,
             which
             vsed
             the
             same
             ornaments
             which
             were
             vsed
             in
             the
             Tabernacle
             of
             the
             true
             God
             ,
             as
             the
             Ephod
             ,
             the
             
             Seraphin
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             .
             There
             is
             scarce
             any
             thing
             instituted
             by
             Iesus
             Christ
             our
             Saviour
             in
             his
             Lawe
             of
             his
             Gospel
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Divell
             hath
             not
             counterfaited
             in
             some
             sort
             ,
             and
             carried
             to
             his
             Gentiles
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seene
             in
             reading
             that
             which
             we
             hold
             for
             certaine
             ,
             by
             the
             report
             of
             men
             worthie
             of
             credite
             ,
             of
             the
             customes
             and
             ceremonies
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             whereof
             we
             will
             treate
             in
             this
             Booke
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Temples
             that
             were
             found
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             CHAP.
             12.
             
          
           
             BEginning
             then
             with
             their
             Temples
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             great
             God
             would
             have
             a
             house
             dedicated
             ,
             where
             his
             holy
             name
             might
             be
             honoured
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             should
             be
             particularly
             vowed
             to
             his
             service
             ;
             even
             so
             the
             Divel
             ,
             by
             his
             wicked
             practices
             ,
             perswaded
             Infid●●
             to
             builde
             him
             prowd
             Temples
             ,
             and
             particular
             Oratories
             and
             Sanctuaries
             .
             In
             every
             Province
             of
             Peru
             ,
             there
             was
             one
             principall
             Guaca
             ,
             or
             house
             of
             adoration
             ;
             and
             besides
             it
             ,
             there
             was
             one
             generall
             throughout
             all
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ;
             amongst
             the
             which
             there
             hath
             beene
             two
             famous
             and
             notable
             ,
             the
             one
             which
             they
             called
             Pachamana
             ,
             is
             foure
             leagues
             from
             Lima
             ,
             whereat
             this
             day
             they
             see
             the
             ruines
             of
             a
             most
             ancient
             and
             great
             building
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             which
             
               Francis
               Pizarre
            
             and
             his
             people
             drew
             infinite
             treasure
             ,
             of
             vessell
             and
             pottes
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             which
             they
             brought
             when
             they
             tooke
             the
             
               Ingua
               A●tagu●l●●
            
             .
             There
             are
             certaine
             memories
             and
             discourses
             which
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             this
             Temple
             the
             Divell
             did
             speake
             visibl●
             ,
             and
             g●v●an
             ●ivers
             by
             his
             Oracle
             ,
             and
             that
             sometimes
             they
             did
             seea
             spotted
             snake
             :
             and
             it
             was
             a
             thing
             very
             comin
             ●n
             and
             approoved
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             that
             the
             
             Divell
             spake
             and
             answered
             in
             these
             fal
             se
             Sanctuaries
             deceiving
             this
             miserable
             people
             .
             But
             where
             the
             Gospel
             is
             entred
             ,
             and
             the
             Crosse
             of
             Christ
             planted
             ,
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             is
             becom
             mute
             ,
             as
             Plutark
             writes
             of
             his
             time
             ,
             
               Cur
               cessaverit
               Pithias
               fondere
               oracula
            
             :
             
             and
             
               Iustine
               Martir
            
             treates
             amply
             of
             the
             silence
             which
             Christ
             imposed
             to
             divells
             ,
             which
             spake
             by
             Idolls
             ,
             as
             it
             had
             been
             before
             much
             prophecied
             of
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             .
             The
             maner
             which
             the
             Infidel
             Ministers
             &
             Inchanters
             had
             to
             consult
             with
             their
             gods
             ,
             was
             as
             the
             Divell
             had
             taught
             them
             .
             It
             was
             commonlyin
             the
             night
             ,
             they
             entred
             backward
             to
             their
             idol
             ,
             &
             so
             went
             bending
             their
             bodies
             &
             head
             ,
             after
             an
             vglie
             maner
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             consulted
             with
             him
             .
             The
             answer
             he
             made
             ,
             was
             commonly
             like
             vnto
             a
             fearefull
             hissing
             ,
             or
             to
             a
             gnashing
             which
             did
             terrifie
             them
             ;
             and
             all
             that
             he
             did
             advertise
             or
             command
             them
             ,
             was
             but
             the
             way
             to
             their
             perdition
             and
             ruine
             .
             There
             are
             few
             of
             these
             Oracles
             found
             now
             ,
             through
             the
             mercy
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             great
             powre
             of
             Iesus
             Christ.
             There
             hath
             beene
             in
             Peru
             another
             Temple
             and
             Oratorie
             ,
             most
             esteemed
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             at
             this
             day
             is
             the
             monasterie
             of
             S.
             Dominicke
             .
             We
             may
             see
             it
             hath
             been
             a
             goodly
             and
             a
             stately
             worke
             ,
             by
             the
             pavement
             and
             stones
             of
             the
             building
             ,
             which
             remaine
             to
             this
             day
             .
             This
             Temple
             was
             like
             to
             the
             Pantheon
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             the
             house
             and
             dwelling
             of
             all
             the
             gods
             ;
             for
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             did
             there
             behold
             the
             gods
             of
             all
             the
             Nations
             and
             provinces
             they
             had
             conquered
             ,
             every
             Idoll
             having
             his
             private
             place
             ,
             whither
             they
             of
             that
             Province
             came
             to
             worship
             it
             with
             an
             excessive
             charge
             of
             things
             which
             they
             brought
             for
             his
             service
             .
             And
             thereby
             they
             supposed
             to
             keep
             safely
             in
             obedience
             ,
             those
             Provinces
             which
             they
             had
             conquered
             ,
             holding
             their
             gods
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             in
             
             hostage
             .
             In
             this
             same
             house
             was
             the
             Pinchao
             ,
             which
             was
             an
             Idoll
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             of
             most
             fine
             gold
             ,
             wrought
             with
             great
             riches
             of
             stones
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             placed
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             with
             so
             great
             Art
             ,
             as
             the
             Sunne
             at
             his
             rising
             did
             cast
             his
             beames
             thereon
             :
             and
             as
             it
             was
             of
             most
             fine
             mettall
             ,
             his
             beames
             did
             reflect
             with
             such
             a
             brightnes
             ,
             that
             it
             seemed
             another
             Sunne
             .
             The
             Inguas
             did
             worship
             this
             for
             their
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             Pachayacha
             ,
             which
             signifies
             the
             Creator
             of
             heaven
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             spoile
             of
             this
             so
             rich
             a
             Temple
             ,
             a
             souldier
             had
             for
             his
             part
             this
             goodly
             plate
             of
             gold
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             And
             as
             play
             was
             then
             in
             request
             ,
             he
             lost
             it
             all
             in
             one
             night
             at
             play
             ,
             whence
             came
             the
             proverb
             they
             have
             in
             Peru
             for
             great
             gamesters
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             they
             play
             the
             Sunne
             before
             it
             riseth
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Prowd
             Temples
             at
             Mexico
             .
             CHAP.
             13.
             
          
           
             THe
             Superstitions
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             have
             without
             comparison
             beene
             greater
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             their
             ceremonies
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             greatnes
             of
             their
             Temples
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             old
             time
             the
             Spaniards
             called
             by
             this
             word
             Cu
             ,
             which
             word
             might
             bee
             taken
             from
             the
             Ilanders
             of
             S.
             Dominique
             ,
             or
             of
             Cuba
             ,
             as
             many
             other
             wordes
             that
             are
             in
             vse
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             neyther
             from
             Spaine
             ,
             nor
             from
             any
             other
             language
             now
             vsuall
             among
             the
             Indians
             ,
             as
             is
             
               Mays
               ,
               Chico
               ,
               Vaquiano
               ,
               Chapeton
               ,
            
             and
             other
             like
             .
             There
             was
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             this
             Cu
             ,
             the
             famous
             Temple
             of
             Vitziliputzli
             ,
             it
             had
             a
             very
             great
             circuite
             ,
             and
             within
             a
             faire
             Court.
             It
             was
             built
             of
             great
             stones
             ,
             in
             fashion
             of
             snakes
             tied
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             circuite
             was
             called
             Coatepantli
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             a
             circuite
             of
             snakes
             :
             vppon
             the
             toppe
             of
             every
             chamber
             and
             oratorie
             where
             the
             
             Idolls
             were
             ,
             was
             a
             fine
             piller
             wruogh
             twit
             h●small
             stones
             ,
             blacke
             as
             icate
             ,
             set
             in
             goodly
             order
             ,
             the
             ground
             raised
             vp
             with
             white
             &
             red
             ,
             which
             below
             gave
             a
             great
             light
             ,
             vpon
             the
             top
             of
             the
             pillar
             were
             battlements
             very
             artificially
             made
             ,
             wrought
             like
             snailes
             ,
             supported
             by
             two
             Indians
             of
             stone
             ,
             sitting
             ,
             holding
             candlestickes
             in
             their
             hands
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             like
             Croisants
             garnished
             &
             enriched
             at
             the
             ends
             ,
             with
             yellow
             and
             greene
             feathers
             and
             long
             fringes
             of
             the
             same
             .
             Within
             the
             circuite
             of
             this
             court
             ,
             there
             were
             many
             chambers
             of
             religious
             men
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             were
             appointed
             for
             the
             service
             of
             the
             Priests
             and
             Popes
             ,
             for
             so
             they
             call
             the
             soveraigne
             Priests
             which
             serve
             the
             Idoll
             .
             This
             Court
             is
             so
             great
             and
             spatious
             ,
             as
             eight
             or
             ten
             thousand
             persons
             did
             daunce
             easily
             in
             round
             ,
             holding
             hands
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             an
             vsuall
             custome
             in
             that
             Realme
             ,
             although
             it
             seeme
             to
             many
             incredible
             .
          
           
             There
             were
             foure
             gates
             or
             en●●ies
             ,
             at
             the
             East
             ,
             West
             ,
             North
             ,
             and
             South
             ;
             at
             every
             one
             of
             these
             gates
             beganne
             a
             f●ire
             cawsey
             of
             two
             or
             three
             leagues
             long
             .
             There
             was
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Lake
             where
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Mexico
             is
             built
             ,
             foure
             large
             cawseies
             in
             crosse
             ,
             which
             did
             much
             beautify
             it
             ;
             vpon
             every
             portall
             or
             entery
             ,
             was
             a
             God
             or
             Idoll
             ,
             having
             the
             visage
             turned
             to
             the
             causey
             ,
             ●ight
             against
             the
             Temple
             gate
             of
             VitZiliputZli
             .
             There
             were
             thirtie
             steppes
             of
             thirtie
             fadome
             long
             ,
             and
             they
             divided
             from
             the
             circuit
             of
             the
             court
             by
             a
             streete
             that
             went
             betwixt
             them
             ;
             vpon
             the
             toppe
             of
             these
             steppes
             there
             was
             a
             walke
             of
             thirtie
             foote
             broade
             ,
             all
             pla●te●d
             with
             chalke
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             which
             walke
             was
             a
             Pallisado
             artificially
             made
             of
             very
             high
             trees
             ,
             planted
             in
             order
             a
             fadome
             one
             from
             another
             ▪
             These
             trees
             were
             very
             bigge
             ,
             and
             all
             pierced
             with
             small
             holes
             from
             the
             foote
             to
             the
             
             top
             ,
             and
             there
             were
             roddes
             did
             runne
             from
             one
             tree
             to
             another
             ,
             to
             the
             which
             were
             chained
             or
             tied
             many
             dead
             mens
             heades
             .
             Vpon
             every
             rod
             were
             twentie
             sculles
             ,
             and
             these
             ranckes
             of
             sculles
             continue
             from
             the
             foote
             to
             the
             toppe
             af
             the
             tree
             .
             This
             Pallissado
             was
             full
             of
             dead
             mens
             sculls
             from
             one
             end
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             a
             wonderfull
             mournefull
             sight
             and
             full
             of
             horror
             .
             These
             were
             the
             heads
             of
             such
             as
             had
             beene
             sacrificed
             ;
             for
             after
             they
             were
             dead
             ,
             and
             had
             eaten
             the
             flesh
             ,
             the
             head
             was
             delivered
             to
             the
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             which
             tied
             them
             in
             this
             sort
             vntill
             they
             fell
             off
             by
             morcells
             ;
             and
             then
             had
             they
             a
             care
             to
             set
             others
             in
             their
             places
             .
             Vpon
             the
             toppe
             of
             the
             Temple
             were
             two
             stones
             or
             chappells
             ,
             and
             in
             them
             were
             the
             two
             Idolls
             which
             I
             have
             spoken
             of
             ,
             VitziliputZli
             ,
             and
             his
             companion
             Tlalot
             .
             These
             Chappell
             's
             were
             carved
             and
             graven
             very
             artificially
             ,
             and
             so
             high
             ,
             that
             to
             ascend
             vp
             to
             it
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             staire
             of
             stone
             of
             sixscore
             steppes
             .
             Before
             these
             Chambers
             or
             Chappell
             's
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             Court
             of
             fortie
             foote
             square
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             whereof
             ,
             was
             a
             high
             stone
             of
             five
             hand
             breadth
             ,
             poynted
             in
             fashion
             of
             a
             Pyramide
             ,
             it
             was
             placed
             there
             for
             the
             sacrificing
             of
             men
             ;
             for
             being
             laid
             on
             their
             backes
             ,
             it
             made
             their
             bodies
             to
             bend
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             did
             open
             them
             and
             pull
             out
             their
             hearts
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             shewe
             heereafter
             .
             There
             were
             in
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             eight
             or
             nine
             other
             Temples
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             ioyned
             one
             to
             another
             within
             one
             great
             circuite
             ,
             and
             had
             their
             private
             st●ires
             ,
             their
             courts
             ,
             their
             chambers
             ,
             and
             their
             dortoires
             .
             The
             entries
             of
             some
             were
             to
             the
             East
             ,
             some
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             others
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             some
             to
             the
             North.
             All
             these
             Temples
             were
             curiously
             wrought
             ,
             and
             compassed
             in
             with
             divers
             sortes
             of
             battlements
             and
             pictures
             ,
             with
             many
             figures
             of
             stones
             ,
             being
             
             accompanied
             and
             fortefied
             with
             great
             and
             large
             spurres
             or
             platformes
             .
             They
             were
             dedicated
             to
             divers
             gods
             :
             but
             next
             to
             the
             Temple
             of
             VitziliputZli
             ,
             was
             that
             of
             Tescalipuca
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             god
             of
             penaunce
             and
             of
             punishments
             ,
             very
             high
             and
             well
             built
             .
          
           
             There
             were
             foure
             steps
             to
             ascend
             ,
             on
             the
             toppe
             was
             a
             flat
             or
             table
             of
             sixe
             score
             foote
             broad
             ,
             and
             ioyning
             vnto
             it
             was
             a
             hall
             hanged
             with
             tapistry
             and
             curtins
             of
             diverse
             colours
             and
             works
             .
             The
             doore
             thereof
             being
             low
             and
             large
             ,
             was
             alwayes
             covered
             with
             a
             vaile
             ,
             and
             none
             but
             the
             priests
             might
             enter
             in
             .
             All
             this
             Temple
             was
             beutified
             with
             diverse
             images
             and
             pictures
             most
             curiously
             ;
             for
             that
             these
             two
             Temple
             were
             as
             the
             cathedrall
             churches
             ;
             and
             the
             rest
             in
             respect
             of
             them
             as
             parishes
             and
             her
             ▪
             mitages
             :
             they
             were
             so
             spatious
             ,
             and
             had
             so
             many
             chambers
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             in
             them
             places
             for
             the
             ministerie
             ,
             colleges
             ,
             schooles
             ,
             and
             houses
             for
             priests
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             will
             intreate
             heereafter
             .
             This
             may
             suffice
             to
             conceive
             the
             divells
             pride
             ,
             and
             the
             misery
             of
             this
             wretched
             nation
             ,
             who
             with
             so
             great
             expence
             of
             their
             goods
             ,
             their
             labour
             ,
             and
             their
             lives
             ,
             did
             thus
             serve
             their
             capitall
             enimy
             ,
             who
             pretended
             nothing
             more
             than
             the
             destruction
             of
             their
             soules
             ,
             and
             consumption
             of
             their
             bodies
             .
             But
             yet
             they
             were
             well
             pleased
             ,
             having
             an
             opinion
             in
             their
             so
             great
             an
             error
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             great
             and
             mighty
             gods
             ,
             to
             whome
             they
             did
             these
             services
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Priestes
             and
             their
             offices
             .
             CHAP
             14.
             
          
           
             WE
             find
             among
             all
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             world
             ▪
             men
             specially
             dedicated
             to
             the
             service
             of
             the
             true
             God
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             false
             ,
             which
             serve
             in
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             declare
             
             vnto
             the
             people
             what
             their
             gods
             command
             them
             .
             Ther
             was
             in
             Mexico
             a
             strange
             curiositie
             vpon
             this
             point
             .
             And
             the
             divell
             counterfeiting
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             hath
             placed
             in
             the
             order
             of
             his
             Priests
             ,
             some
             greater
             or
             superiors
             ,
             and
             some
             lesse
             ,
             the
             one
             as
             Acolites
             ,
             the
             other
             as
             Levites
             ,
             &
             that
             which
             hath
             made
             me
             most
             to
             woonder
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             the
             divel
             would
             vsurpe
             to
             himselfe
             the
             service
             of
             God
             ;
             yea
             and
             vse
             the
             same
             name
             :
             for
             the
             Mexicaines
             in
             their
             antient
             tongue
             called
             their
             hie
             Priests
             Papas
             ,
             as
             they
             should
             say
             soveraigne
             Bishops
             ,
             as
             it
             appeares
             now
             by
             their
             Histories
             .
             The
             Priests
             of
             VitZliputzli
             succeeded
             by
             linages
             of
             certaine
             quarters
             of
             the
             Citty
             ,
             deputed
             for
             that
             purpose
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             other
             idolls
             came
             by
             election
             ,
             or
             being
             offered
             to
             the
             temple
             in
             their
             infancy
             .
             The
             dayly
             exercise
             of
             the
             Priestes
             was
             to
             cast
             incense
             on
             the
             idolles
             ,
             which
             was
             doone
             foure
             times
             in
             the
             space
             of
             a
             naturall
             day
             .
             The
             first
             at
             breake
             of
             day
             ,
             the
             second
             at
             noone
             ,
             the
             third
             at
             Sunne
             setting
             ,
             and
             the
             fourth
             at
             midnight
             .
             At
             midnight
             all
             the
             chiefe
             officers
             of
             the
             Temple
             did
             rise
             ,
             and
             in
             steade
             of
             bells
             ,
             they
             sounded
             a
             long
             time
             vpon
             trumpets
             ,
             cornets
             and
             flutes
             very
             heavily
             ;
             which
             being
             ended
             ,
             he
             that
             did
             the
             office
             that
             weeke
             ,
             stept
             foorth
             ,
             attyred
             in
             a
             white
             roabe
             after
             the
             Dalmatike
             manner
             ,
             with
             a
             censor
             in
             his
             hand
             full
             of
             coales
             ,
             which
             he
             tooke
             from
             the
             harth
             burning
             continually
             before
             the
             Altare
             ;
             in
             the
             other
             hand
             he
             had
             a
             purse
             full
             of
             incense
             ,
             which
             he
             cast
             into
             the
             censor
             ,
             and
             as
             he
             entred
             the
             place
             where
             the
             idoll
             was
             ,
             he
             incensed
             it
             with
             great
             reverence
             ,
             then
             tooke
             he
             a
             cloth
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             he
             wiped
             the
             Altar
             and
             the
             curtins
             .
             This
             doone
             ,
             they
             went
             all
             into
             a
             Chappell
             ,
             and
             there
             did
             a
             certaine
             kinde
             of
             rigorous
             and
             austere
             penaunce
             ,
             beating
             themselves
             ,
             and
             drawing
             of
             blood
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             shew
             in
             the
             treatise
             
             of
             Penance
             ,
             which
             the
             Divell
             hath
             taught
             to
             his
             creatures
             ;
             and
             heereof
             they
             never
             fayled
             at
             these
             Ma●tins
             at
             midnight
             .
             None
             other
             but
             the
             Priestes
             might
             entermeddle
             with
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             did
             imploy
             himselfe
             according
             to
             his
             dignity
             and
             degree
             .
             They
             did
             likewise
             preach
             to
             the
             people
             at
             some
             feastes
             ,
             as
             I
             will
             shew
             when
             we
             treate
             thereof
             .
             They
             had
             revenues
             ,
             and
             great
             offerings
             were
             made
             vnto
             them
             .
             I
             will
             speake
             heereafter
             of
             their
             vnction
             in
             Consecrating
             their
             Priestes
             .
             In
             Peru
             the
             Priestes
             were
             entertained
             of
             the
             revenues
             and
             inheritance
             of
             their
             God
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Chacaras
             ,
             which
             were
             many
             ,
             and
             also
             verie
             rich
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             monastery
             of
             Virgins
             which
             the
             divell
             hath
             invented
             for
             his
             service
             .
             CHAP.
             15.
             
          
           
             AS
             the
             religious
             life
             (
             wherof
             many
             servants
             of
             God
             have
             made
             profession
             in
             the
             holy
             Church
             ,
             immitating
             Iesus
             Christ
             and
             his
             holy
             Apostles
             )
             is
             very
             pleasing
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             his
             divine
             maiesty
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             his
             holy
             Name
             is
             so
             honoured
             ,
             and
             his
             Church
             beutified
             :
             So
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             hath
             laboured
             to
             imitate
             and
             counterfeit
             him
             heerein
             ;
             yea
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             hath
             striven
             with
             God
             in
             the
             observance
             and
             austere
             life
             of
             his
             ministers
             .
             There
             were
             in
             Peru
             many
             monasteries
             of
             Virgines
             (
             for
             there
             are
             no
             other
             admitted
             )
             at
             the
             least
             one
             in
             everie
             Province
             .
             In
             these
             monasteries
             there
             were
             two
             sortes
             of
             women
             ,
             one
             antient
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Mamacom●●
             ,
             for
             the
             instruction
             of
             the
             yoong
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             was
             of
             yoong
             maidens
             ,
             placed
             there
             for
             a
             certaine
             time
             ,
             and
             after
             they
             were
             drawne
             foorth
             ,
             either
             for
             their
             gods
             or
             
             for
             the
             Ingua
             .
             They
             called
             this
             house
             or
             monastery
             Acl●guagi
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             house
             of
             the
             chosen
             .
             Every
             monastery
             had
             his
             Vicar
             or
             Governour
             called
             Appopanaca
             ,
             who
             had
             liberty
             and
             power
             to
             choose
             whome
             he
             pleased
             ,
             of
             what
             qualitie
             soever
             ,
             being
             vnder
             eyght
             yeares
             of
             age
             ,
             if
             they
             seemed
             to
             be
             of
             a
             good
             stature
             and
             constitution
             .
          
           
             These
             Virgines
             thus
             shut
             vp
             into
             these
             monasteries
             ,
             were
             instructed
             by
             the
             Momacomas
             ,
             in
             diverse
             thinges
             needefull
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             customes
             and
             ceremonies
             of
             their
             gods
             ;
             and
             afterwardes
             they
             tooke
             them
             from
             thence
             ,
             being
             above
             foureteene
             ,
             sending
             them
             to
             the
             Court
             with
             suregards
             ,
             whereof
             some
             were
             appoynted
             to
             serve
             the
             Guacas
             and
             Sanctuaries
             ,
             keeping
             their
             virginities
             for
             ever
             :
             some
             others
             were
             for
             the
             ordinary
             sacrifices
             that
             were
             made
             of
             maidens
             ,
             and
             other
             extraordinary
             sacrifices
             ,
             they
             made
             for
             the
             health
             ,
             death
             ,
             or
             warres
             of
             the
             Ingua
             ;
             and
             the
             rest
             served
             for
             wives
             and
             concubines
             to
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             vnto
             other
             his
             kinsfolkes
             and
             captaines
             ,
             vnto
             whome
             hee
             gave
             them
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             great
             and
             honourable
             recompence
             :
             This
             distribution
             was
             vsed
             every
             yeare
             .
             These
             monasteries
             possessed
             rents
             and
             revenues
             for
             the
             maintenaunce
             of
             these
             Virgins
             ,
             which
             were
             in
             great
             numbers
             .
             It
             was
             not
             lawfull
             for
             any
             father
             to
             refuse
             his
             daughters
             when
             the
             Appopanaca
             required
             them
             for
             the
             service
             of
             these
             monasteries
             .
             Yea
             many
             fathers
             did
             willingly
             offer
             their
             daughters
             ,
             supposing
             it
             was
             a
             great
             merit
             to
             be
             sacrificed
             for
             the
             Ingua
             .
             If
             any
             of
             these
             Momacomas
             or
             Acllas
             were
             found
             to
             have
             trespassed
             against
             their
             honour
             ,
             it
             was
             an
             inevitable
             chasticement
             to
             bury
             them
             alive
             ,
             or
             to
             put
             them
             to
             death
             by
             some
             other
             kind
             of
             cruell
             torment
             .
          
           
           
             The
             divell
             hath
             even
             in
             Mexico
             had
             some
             kind
             of
             religious
             women
             ,
             although
             their
             possession
             was
             but
             ●●●
             one
             yeare
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             in
             this
             sorte
             :
             Within
             this
             gre●●
             circuit
             whereof
             we
             have
             spoken
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             principall
             temple
             ,
             there
             were
             two
             houses
             like
             cloyste●s
             ,
             the
             one
             opposite
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             one
             of
             men
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             women
             :
             In
             that
             of
             women
             ,
             they
             were
             virgines
             onely
             ,
             of
             twelve
             or
             thirteene
             yeares
             of
             age
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             Maydes
             of
             Penaunce
             .
             They
             wereas
             many
             as
             the
             men
             ,
             and
             lived
             chastly
             and
             regularly
             ,
             as
             virgins
             dedicated
             to
             the
             service
             of
             their
             god
             .
             Their
             charge
             was
             ,
             to
             sweepe
             and
             make
             cleane
             the
             temple
             ,
             and
             every
             morning
             to
             prepare
             meate
             for
             the
             idoll
             and
             his
             ministers
             ,
             of
             the
             almes
             the
             religious
             gathered
             .
             The
             foode
             they
             prepared
             for
             the
             idoll
             were
             small
             loaves
             in
             the
             forme
             of
             handes
             and
             feete
             ,
             as
             of
             marchpane
             :
             and
             with
             this
             bread
             they
             prepared
             certayne
             sawses
             which
             they
             cast
             dayly
             before
             the
             idoll
             ,
             and
             his
             priests
             did
             eate
             it
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             Baal
             ,
             that
             Daniel
             speaketh
             of
             .
             
             These
             virgins
             had
             their
             haire
             cutte
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             let
             them
             grow
             for
             a
             certaine
             time
             ▪
             they
             rose
             at
             midnight
             to
             the
             idolls
             mattins
             ,
             which
             they
             dayly
             celebrated
             ,
             performing
             the
             same
             exercises
             the
             religious
             did
             .
             They
             had
             their
             Abesses
             who
             imployed
             them
             to
             make
             cloth
             of
             diverse
             fashions
             for
             the
             ornament
             of
             their
             idolls
             and
             temples
             .
             Their
             ordinary
             habite
             was
             all
             white
             ,
             without
             any
             worke
             or
             colour
             .
             They
             did
             their
             penance
             at
             midnight
             ,
             sacrificing
             and
             wounding
             themselves
             ,
             and
             piercing
             the
             toppe
             of
             their
             eares
             ,
             they
             layde
             the
             blood
             which
             issued
             foorth
             vpon
             their
             cheekes
             :
             and
             after
             ,
             (
             to
             wash
             off
             the
             blood
             )
             they
             bathed
             themselves
             in
             a
             poole
             which
             was
             within
             their
             monastery
             .
             They
             lived
             very
             honestly
             and
             discreetly
             ;
             and
             if
             any
             were
             found
             ●o
             have
             offended
             ,
             although
             but
             lightly
             ,
             presently
             they
             
             were
             put
             to
             death
             without
             remission
             ,
             saying
             ,
             shee
             had
             polluted
             the
             house
             of
             their
             god
             .
             They
             helde
             it
             for
             an
             augure
             and
             advertisement
             ,
             that
             some
             one
             of
             the
             religious
             ,
             man
             ,
             or
             woman
             ,
             had
             committed
             a
             fault
             ,
             when
             they
             saw
             a
             Ratte
             or
             a
             Mowse
             passe
             ,
             or
             a
             Bat
             in
             the
             chappell
             of
             their
             idoll
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             had
             gnawed
             any
             of
             the
             vailes
             ▪
             for
             that
             they
             say
             ,
             a
             Catte
             or
             a
             Bat
             would
             not
             adventure
             to
             committe
             such
             an
             indignity
             ,
             if
             some
             offence
             had
             not
             gone
             before
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             beganne
             to
             make
             search
             of
             the
             fact
             ,
             and
             having
             discovered
             the
             offendor
             or
             offendors
             ,
             of
             what
             quality
             soever
             ,
             they
             presently
             put
             them
             to
             death
             .
          
           
             None
             were
             receyved
             into
             this
             monastery
             ,
             but
             the
             daughters
             of
             one
             of
             the
             sixe
             quarters
             ,
             named
             for
             that
             purpose
             :
             and
             this
             profession
             continued
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             sayd
             ,
             the
             space
             of
             one
             whole
             yeare
             :
             during
             the
             which
             time
             ,
             their
             fathers
             ,
             and
             they
             themselves
             had
             made
             a
             vowe
             to
             serve
             the
             idoll
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             they
             went
             to
             be
             married
             .
             These
             virgins
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             especially
             they
             of
             Peru
             had
             some
             resemblance
             to
             the
             Vestall
             Virgins
             of
             Rome
             ,
             as
             the
             Histories
             shew
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             wee
             may
             vnderstand
             how
             the
             divell
             hath
             desired
             to
             be
             served
             by
             them
             that
             observe
             Virginitie
             ,
             not
             that
             chastitie
             is
             pleasing
             vnto
             him
             ,
             for
             he
             is
             an
             vncleane
             spirite
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             desire
             he
             hath
             to
             take
             from
             the
             great
             God
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             in
             him
             lieth
             ,
             this
             glory
             to
             be
             served
             with
             cleannesse
             and
             integrity
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Monasteries
             of
             religious
             men
             that
             the
             divell
             hath
             invented
             for
             superstition
             .
             
               CHAP.
               16.
            
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             well
             knowne
             ,
             by
             Letters
             written
             by
             the
             fathers
             of
             our
             company
             from
             Iappon
             the
             number
             and
             multitude
             
             of
             religious
             men
             that
             are
             in
             those
             Provin●●●
             ,
             whome
             they
             call
             Boncos
             ,
             and
             also
             their
             superstit●●●
             ,
             customes
             and
             lies
             .
             Some
             fathers
             that
             have
             been
             in
             those
             countries
             ,
             report
             of
             these
             Boncos
             and
             religious
             men
             of
             China
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             many
             Orders
             ,
             and
             of
             diverse
             sortes
             ,
             some
             came
             vnto
             them
             clad
             in
             white
             ,
             bearing
             hoodes
             ,
             and
             others
             all
             in
             blacke
             ,
             without
             haire
             or
             hoode
             ,
             and
             these
             are
             commonly
             little
             esteemed
             ,
             for
             the
             Mandarins
             or
             ministers
             of
             Iustice
             whippe
             them
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             people
             .
             They
             make
             profession
             ,
             not
             to
             eate
             any
             flesh
             ,
             fish
             ,
             nor
             any
             thing
             that
             hath
             life
             ,
             but
             onely
             Rice
             and
             hearbes
             ;
             but
             in
             secret
             they
             do
             eate
             any
             thing
             ,
             and
             are
             worse
             than
             the
             common
             people
             .
             They
             say
             the
             religious
             men
             which
             are
             at
             the
             Court
             ,
             which
             is
             at
             Paquin
             ,
             are
             very
             much
             esteemed
             .
             The
             Mandarins
             go
             commonly
             to
             recreate
             themselves
             at
             the
             Narells
             or
             monasteries
             of
             these
             Monkes
             ,
             and
             returne
             in
             a
             manner
             alwayes
             drunke
             .
             These
             monasteries
             commonly
             are
             without
             the
             townes
             ,
             and
             have
             temples
             within
             their
             close
             :
             yet
             in
             China
             they
             are
             not
             greatly
             curious
             of
             idolles
             ,
             or
             of
             temples
             ,
             for
             the
             Mandarins
             little
             esteeme
             idolls
             ,
             and
             do
             hold
             it
             for
             a
             vaine
             thing
             ,
             and
             worthy
             to
             be
             laughed
             at
             :
             yea
             they
             beleeve
             there
             is
             no
             other
             life
             ,
             nor
             Paradice
             ,
             but
             to
             be
             in
             the
             office
             of
             the
             Mandarins
             ,
             nor
             any
             other
             hel
             ,
             than
             the
             prisons
             they
             have
             for
             offendours
             .
             As
             for
             the
             common
             sorte
             ,
             they
             say
             ,
             it
             is
             necessary
             to
             entertayne
             them
             with
             idolatry
             ,
             as
             the
             Philosopher
             himselfe
             reacheth
             his
             Governors
             :
             
             and
             in
             the
             Scripture
             it
             was
             an
             excuse
             which
             Aaron
             gave
             ,
             for
             the
             idol
             of
             the
             Calfe
             ,
             that
             he
             caused
             to
             be
             made
             ;
             yet
             the
             Chinois
             vsed
             to
             tarry
             in
             the
             poupe
             of
             their
             shippes
             ,
             
             in
             little
             chapels
             ,
             a
             virgin
             imbosst
             set
             in
             a
             chaire
             with
             two
             Chinois
             before
             her
             kneeling
             in
             maner
             of
             Angels
             ,
             having
             a
             light
             burning
             there
             
             both
             day
             and
             night
             .
             And
             when
             they
             are
             to
             sette
             saile
             ,
             they
             do
             many
             sacrifices
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             noyse
             of
             drummes
             and
             bells
             ,
             casting
             papers
             burnt
             at
             the
             poupe
             .
          
           
             Comming
             to
             our
             religious
             men
             ,
             I
             doe
             not
             knowe
             that
             in
             Peru
             there
             is
             any
             proper
             houses
             for
             men
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             Priests
             and
             Sorcerers
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             an
             infinite
             number
             .
             But
             it
             seemeth
             ,
             that
             in
             Mexico
             the
             divel
             hath
             set
             a
             due
             observation
             :
             for
             within
             the
             circuit
             of
             the
             great
             temple
             there
             were
             two
             monasteries
             ,
             as
             before
             hath
             bin
             sayd
             ,
             one
             of
             Virgins
             ,
             whereof
             I
             have
             spoken
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             yoong
             men
             secluded
             ,
             of
             eighteene
             or
             twenty
             yeares
             of
             age
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             religious
             .
             They
             weare
             shaved
             crownes
             ,
             as
             the
             Friars
             in
             these
             partes
             ,
             their
             haire
             alittle
             longer
             which
             fell
             to
             the
             middest
             of
             their
             care
             ,
             except
             the
             hinder
             part
             of
             the
             head
             ,
             which
             they
             let
             growe
             the
             breadth
             of
             foure
             fingers
             downe
             to
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             and
             which
             they
             tyed
             vppe
             in
             tresses
             .
             These
             yoong
             men
             that
             served
             in
             the
             temple
             of
             Vitzliputzli
             lived
             poorely
             and
             chastely
             ,
             and
             did
             the
             office
             of
             Levites
             ,
             ministering
             to
             the
             priests
             and
             chiefe
             of
             the
             temple
             ,
             their
             incense
             ,
             lights
             ,
             &
             garments
             ;
             they
             swept
             and
             made
             cleane
             the
             holy
             places
             ,
             bringing
             wood
             for
             a
             continual
             fire
             to
             the
             harth
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             which
             was
             like
             a
             lampe
             that
             still
             burnt
             before
             the
             Altar
             of
             their
             idoll
             .
             Besides
             these
             yong
             men
             ,
             there
             were
             other
             little
             boyes
             ,
             as
             novices
             ,
             that
             served
             for
             manuall
             vses
             ,
             as
             to
             deck
             the
             temple
             with
             boughs
             ,
             roses
             ,
             and
             reeds
             ,
             give
             the
             Priests
             water
             to
             wash
             with
             ,
             give
             them
             their
             rasors
             to
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             goe
             with
             such
             as
             begged
             almes
             to
             carry
             it
             .
             All
             these
             had
             their
             superiors
             ,
             who
             had
             the
             governement
             over
             them
             ,
             they
             lived
             so
             honestly
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             came
             in
             publike
             ,
             where
             there
             were
             any
             women
             ,
             they
             carried
             their
             heads
             very
             lowe
             ,
             with
             their
             eyes
             to
             
             the
             ground
             ,
             not
             daring
             to
             beholde
             them
             :
             they
             had
             linnen
             garments
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             lawfull
             for
             them
             to
             goe
             into
             the
             Citty
             foure
             or
             sixe
             together
             ,
             to
             aske
             almes
             in
             all
             quarters
             :
             and
             when
             they
             gave
             them
             none
             ,
             it
             was
             lawful
             to
             go
             into
             the
             corne
             fields
             and
             gather
             the
             cares
             of
             corne
             or
             clusters
             of
             Mays
             ,
             which
             they
             most
             needed
             ,
             the
             Maister
             not
             daring
             to
             speake
             ,
             nor
             hinder
             them
             .
             They
             had
             this
             liberty
             ,
             because
             they
             lived
             poorely
             ,
             and
             had
             no
             other
             revenues
             ,
             but
             almes
             .
             There
             might
             not
             be
             above
             fifty
             live
             in
             penance
             ,
             rising
             at
             midnight
             to
             sound
             the
             cornets
             and
             trumpets
             to
             awake
             the
             people
             .
             Every
             one
             watched
             the
             idoll
             in
             his
             turne
             ,
             left
             the
             fire
             before
             the
             Altare
             should
             die
             :
             they
             gave
             the
             censor
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             the
             Priest
             at
             midnight
             incensed
             the
             idoll
             ,
             and
             also
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             at
             noone
             ,
             and
             at
             night
             .
             They
             were
             very
             subiect
             and
             obedient
             to
             their
             superiors
             ,
             and
             passed
             not
             any
             one
             poynt
             that
             was
             commaunded
             them
             .
             And
             at
             midnight
             after
             the
             priesthad
             ended
             his
             censing
             ,
             they
             retired
             themselves
             into
             a
             secret
             place
             ,
             apart
             ,
             sacrificing
             ,
             &
             drawing
             blood
             ,
             from
             the
             calfes
             of
             their
             legges
             with
             sharpe
             bodkins
             :
             with
             this
             blood
             they
             rubbed
             their
             temples
             ,
             &
             vnder
             their
             cares
             :
             and
             this
             sacrifice
             finished
             ,
             they
             presently
             washt
             themselves
             in
             a
             little
             poole
             appoynted
             to
             that
             end
             .
             These
             yong
             men
             did
             not
             annoint
             their
             heads
             and
             bodies
             with
             any
             Petum
             ,
             as
             the
             Priestes
             did
             :
             their
             garments
             were
             of
             a
             course
             white
             linnen
             cloth
             they
             do
             make
             there
             .
             These
             exercises
             and
             strictnesse
             of
             penance
             continued
             a
             whole
             yeare
             ,
             during
             which
             time
             they
             lived
             with
             great
             austeritie
             and
             solitarinesse
             .
             In
             truth
             it
             is
             very
             strange
             to
             see
             that
             this
             false
             opinion
             of
             religion
             hath
             so
             great
             force
             among
             these
             yoong
             men
             and
             maidens
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             serve
             the
             Divell
             with
             so
             great
             rigor
             and
             austerity
             ,
             which
             many
             of
             vs
             doe
             not
             in
             the
             service
             
             of
             the
             most
             high
             God
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             a
             great
             shame
             and
             confusion
             ;
             for
             those
             amongst
             vs
             that
             glory
             to
             have
             doone
             a
             small
             penaunce
             ,
             although
             this
             exercise
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             was
             not
             continuall
             ,
             but
             for
             a
             yeare
             onely
             ,
             which
             made
             it
             the
             more
             tollerable
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Penance
             and
             the
             Strictnes
             the
             Indians
             have
             vsed
             at
             the
             Divells
             perswasion
             .
             
               CHAP.
               17.
            
             
          
           
             SEeing
             we
             are
             come
             to
             this
             point
             ,
             it
             shall
             bee
             good
             both
             to
             discover
             the
             cursed
             pride
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             and
             to
             confound
             it
             ,
             and
             somewhat
             to
             quicken
             our
             coldnes
             and
             sl●th
             in
             the
             service
             of
             the
             great
             GOD
             :
             to
             speake
             some
             thing
             of
             the
             rigor
             and
             strange
             penance
             this
             miserable
             people
             vsed
             at
             the
             Divells
             perswasion
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             false
             Prophets
             of
             Baal
             ,
             
             who
             did
             beate
             and
             wound
             them●elves
             with
             lancets
             ,
             drawing
             forth
             bloud
             ;
             or
             like
             those
             that
             sacrificed
             their
             sonnes
             and
             daughters
             vnto
             loathsome
             Belphegor
             ,
             passing
             them
             through
             the
             fire
             ,
             
             as
             holy
             Writ
             testifieth
             :
             for
             Sathan
             hath
             alwayes
             desired
             to
             be
             served
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             hurte
             and
             spoyle
             of
             man.
             It
             hath
             beene
             said
             that
             the
             priests
             and
             religious
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             rose
             at
             midnight
             ,
             and
             having
             cast
             incense
             before
             the
             idoll
             ,
             they
             retired
             themselves
             into
             a
             large
             place
             ,
             where
             there
             were
             many
             lights
             ;
             and
             sitting
             downe
             ,
             every
             one
             tooke
             a
             poynt
             of
             Manguay
             ,
             which
             is
             like
             vnto
             an
             awle
             or
             sharpe
             bodkin
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             ,
             or
             with
             some
             other
             kindes
             of
             launcets
             or
             rasors
             ,
             they
             pierced
             the
             calfes
             of
             their
             legges
             neare
             to
             the
             bone
             ,
             drawing
             foorth
             much
             blood
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             annoynted
             their
             temples
             ,
             &
             dipt
             these
             bodkins
             or
             lancets
             in
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             blood
             ,
             then
             set
             they
             them
             vpon
             the
             battlements
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             stickt
             in
             gloabes
             or
             bowles
             of
             strawe
             ,
             that
             all
             might
             see
             
             and
             know
             the
             penance
             they
             did
             for
             the
             people
             :
             they
             do
             wash
             off
             the
             blood
             in
             a
             lake
             appoynted
             for
             that
             purpose
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Ezapangue
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             water
             of
             blood
             .
          
           
             There
             were
             in
             the
             Temple
             a
             great
             number
             of
             bodkins
             or
             lancets
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             might
             not
             vse
             one
             twice
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             these
             Priests
             and
             Religious
             men
             ,
             vsed
             great
             fastings
             ,
             of
             five
             or
             ten
             daies
             together
             ,
             before
             any
             of
             their
             great
             feastes
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             vnto
             them
             as
             our
             foure
             ember
             weekes
             :
             they
             were
             so
             strict
             in
             continence
             ,
             that
             some
             of
             them
             (
             not
             to
             fall
             into
             any
             sensualitie
             ,
             )
             slit
             their
             members
             in
             the
             midst
             ,
             and
             did
             a
             thousand
             thinges
             to
             make
             themselves
             vnable
             ,
             lest
             they
             should
             offend
             their
             gods
             .
             They
             drunke
             no
             wine
             ,
             and
             slept
             little
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             their
             exercises
             were
             by
             night
             ,
             committing
             great
             cruelties
             and
             martiring
             themselves
             for
             the
             Divell
             ,
             and
             all
             to
             bee
             reputed
             great
             fasters
             and
             penitents
             .
          
           
             They
             did
             vse
             to
             discipline
             themselves
             with
             cordes
             full
             of
             knottes
             ,
             and
             not
             they
             onely
             ,
             but
             the
             people
             also
             vsed
             this
             punishment
             and
             whipping
             ,
             in
             the
             procession
             and
             feast
             they
             made
             to
             the
             idoll
             TeZcalipuca
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             before
             ,
             )
             is
             the
             god
             of
             penance
             ;
             for
             then
             they
             all
             carried
             in
             their
             hands
             new
             cordes
             of
             the
             threed
             of
             Manguey
             a
             fadome
             long
             ,
             with
             a
             knot
             at
             the
             end
             ,
             and
             therewith
             they
             whipped
             themselves
             ,
             giving
             great
             lashes
             over
             their
             shoulders
             .
             The
             Priests
             did
             fast
             five
             daies
             together
             before
             this
             feast
             ,
             eating
             but
             once
             a
             day
             ,
             and
             they
             lived
             apart
             from
             their
             wives
             ,
             not
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Temple
             during
             those
             five
             daies
             ,
             they
             did
             whip
             themselves
             rigorously
             in
             the
             maner
             aforesaid
             .
             The
             Iesuites
             which
             have
             written
             from
             the
             Indies
             ,
             treate
             amply
             of
             the
             penances
             and
             exceeding
             rigor
             the
             Boncos
             vse
             ,
             all
             
             which
             was
             but
             counterfait
             ,
             and
             more
             in
             shew
             ,
             then
             in
             trueth
             .
             In
             Peru
             to
             solemnize
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             Yta
             ,
             which
             was
             great
             ,
             all
             the
             people
             fasted
             two
             daies
             ;
             during
             the
             which
             ,
             they
             did
             not
             accompany
             with
             their
             wives
             ,
             neyther
             did
             they
             eate
             any
             meate
             with
             salt
             or
             garlike
             ,
             nor
             drinke
             Chica
             .
             They
             did
             much
             vse
             this
             kinde
             of
             fasting
             for
             some
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             did
             penance
             ,
             whipping
             themselves
             with
             sharpe
             stinging
             nettles
             ,
             and
             often
             they
             strooke
             themselves
             over
             the
             shoulders
             with
             certaine
             stones
             .
             This
             blinde
             Nation
             ,
             by
             the
             perswasion
             of
             the
             Divell
             ,
             did
             transport
             themselves
             into
             craggy
             mountaines
             ,
             where
             sometimes
             they
             sacrificed
             themselves
             ,
             casting
             themselves
             downe
             from
             some
             high
             rocke
             .
             All
             which
             are
             but
             snares
             and
             deceites
             of
             him
             that
             desires
             nothing
             more
             then
             the
             losse
             and
             ruine
             of
             man.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Sacrifices
             the
             Indians
             made
             to
             the
             Divell
             ,
             and
             whereof
             .
             
               CHAP.
               18.
            
             
          
           
             IT
             hath
             beene
             in
             the
             aboundance
             and
             diversitie
             of
             Offrings
             and
             Sacrifices
             taught
             vnto
             the
             Infidells
             for
             their
             idolatrie
             ,
             that
             the
             enemy
             of
             God
             and
             man
             ,
             hath
             most
             shewed
             his
             subtiltie
             and
             wickednes
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             a
             fit
             thing
             and
             proper
             to
             religion
             ,
             to
             consume
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             creatures
             ,
             for
             the
             service
             and
             honour
             of
             the
             Creator
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             by
             sacrifice
             :
             even
             so
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             hath
             invented
             the
             meanes
             to
             cause
             the
             creatures
             of
             God
             to
             be
             offered
             vnto
             him
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Author
             and
             Lord
             thereof
             .
             The
             first
             kinde
             of
             sacrifices
             which
             men
             vsed
             ,
             was
             very
             simple
             :
             for
             Caine
             offered
             the
             fruites
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             Abell
             the
             best
             of
             his
             cattell
             ,
             the
             which
             likewise
             Noe
             and
             Abraham
             did
             afterwardes
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Patriarkes
             ,
             
             vntil
             that
             this
             ample
             ceremony
             of
             Levi
             
             was
             given
             by
             Moses
             ,
             wherein
             there
             are
             so
             many
             sortes
             and
             differences
             of
             sacrifices
             of
             divers
             things
             ,
             for
             divers
             affaires
             ,
             and
             with
             divers
             ceremonies
             .
             In
             like
             sort
             ,
             among
             some
             Nations
             ,
             hee
             hath
             beene
             content
             to
             teach
             them
             to
             sacrifice
             of
             what
             they
             had
             :
             but
             among
             others
             hee
             hath
             passed
             farre
             ▪
             giving
             them
             a
             multitude
             of
             customes
             and
             ceremonies
             vpon
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             so
             many
             observances
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             wonderfull
             .
             And
             thereby
             it
             appeares
             plainely
             ,
             that
             he
             meanes
             to
             contend
             and
             equall
             himselfe
             to
             the
             ancient
             law
             ,
             and
             in
             many
             things
             vsurpe
             the
             same
             ceremonies
             ▪
             Wee
             may
             draw
             all
             the
             sacrifices
             the
             Infidells
             vse
             into
             three
             kindes
             ,
             one
             of
             insensible
             things
             ,
             another
             of
             beasts
             ,
             and
             the
             third
             of
             men
             .
             They
             did
             vse
             in
             Peru
             to
             sacrifice
             Coca
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             hearb
             they
             esteeme
             much
             ,
             of
             Mays
             ,
             which
             is
             their
             wheate
             ,
             of
             coloured
             feathers
             ,
             and
             of
             Chaquira
             ,
             which
             otherwise
             they
             call
             Mollo
             ,
             of
             shelles
             or
             oysters
             ,
             and
             sometime
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             being
             in
             figures
             of
             little
             beasts
             .
             Also
             of
             the
             fine
             stuffe
             of
             Cumbi
             ,
             of
             carved
             and
             sweete
             wood
             ,
             and
             most
             commonly
             tallow
             burnt
             .
             They
             made
             these
             offerings
             or
             sacrifices
             for
             a
             prosperous
             winde
             ,
             and
             faire
             weather
             ,
             or
             for
             their
             health
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             delivered
             from
             some
             dangers
             and
             mishappes
             .
             Of
             the
             second
             kinde
             ,
             their
             ordinary
             sacrifice
             was
             of
             Cuyes
             ,
             which
             are
             small
             beasts
             like
             rabbets
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Indians
             eate
             commonly
             .
             And
             in
             matters
             of
             importance
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             were
             rich
             men
             ,
             they
             did
             offer
             Pacos
             ,
             or
             Indian
             sheepe
             ,
             bare
             ,
             or
             with
             wooll
             ,
             observing
             curiously
             the
             numbers
             ,
             colours
             ,
             and
             times
             .
             The
             maner
             of
             killing
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             great
             or
             small
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             did
             vse
             according
             to
             their
             ancient
             ceremonies
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             the
             Moores
             vse
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Alquible
             ,
             hanging
             the
             beast
             by
             the
             right
             fore
             legge
             ,
             turning
             his
             eyes
             towards
             the
             Sun
             ,
             
             speaking
             certaine
             wordes
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             qualitie
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             they
             flew
             :
             for
             if
             it
             were
             of
             colour
             ,
             their
             wordes
             were
             directed
             to
             Chuquilla
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Thunder
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             want
             no
             water
             :
             if
             it
             were
             white
             &
             smoothe
             ,
             they
             did
             offer
             it
             to
             the
             Sunne
             with
             certaine
             wordes
             :
             if
             it
             had
             a
             fleece
             ,
             they
             did
             likewise
             offer
             it
             him
             with
             some
             others
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             shine
             vpon
             them
             and
             favour
             their
             generation
             :
             If
             it
             were
             a
             Guanaco
             ,
             which
             is
             gray
             ,
             they
             directed
             their
             sacrifice
             to
             Viracocha
             .
             In
             Cusco
             they
             did
             every
             yeare
             kill
             and
             sacrifice
             with
             this
             ceremony
             ,
             a
             shorne
             sheepe
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             did
             burne
             it
             ,
             clad
             in
             a
             red
             waste-coate
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             did
             burne
             it
             ,
             they
             cast
             certaine
             small
             baskets
             of
             Coca
             into
             the
             fire
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Vilcaronca
             ;
             for
             which
             sacrifice
             ,
             they
             have
             both
             men
             and
             beasts
             appointed
             which
             serve
             to
             no
             other
             vse
             .
             They
             did
             likewise
             sacrifice
             small
             birdes
             ,
             although
             it
             were
             not
             so
             vsuall
             in
             Peru
             as
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             the
             sacrificing
             of
             quailes
             was
             very
             ordinarie
             .
             Those
             of
             Peru
             did
             sacrifice
             the
             birdes
             of
             Puna
             ,
             (
             for
             so
             they
             call
             the
             desart
             when
             they
             should
             go
             to
             the
             warres
             ,
             for
             to
             weaken
             the
             forces
             of
             their
             adversaries
             Guacas
             .
             They
             called
             these
             sacrifices
             Cuzcovicca
             ,
             or
             Contevicca
             ,
             or
             Huallavicca
             ,
             or
             Sophavicca
             ,
             and
             they
             did
             it
             in
             this
             maner
             :
             they
             tooke
             many
             kindes
             of
             small
             birdes
             of
             the
             desart
             ,
             and
             gathered
             a
             great
             deale
             of
             a
             thornie
             wood
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Ya●lli
             ,
             the
             which
             being
             kindled
             ,
             they
             gathered
             together
             these
             small
             birdes
             .
             This
             assembly
             they
             called
             Qui●o
             ,
             then
             did
             they
             cast
             them
             into
             the
             fire
             ,
             about
             the
             which
             the
             officers
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             went
             with
             certaine
             round
             stones
             carved
             ,
             whereon
             were
             painted
             many
             snakes
             ,
             lions
             ,
             toades
             ,
             and
             tigres
             ,
             vttering
             this
             word
             ,
             Vsachum
             which
             signifies
             ,
             let
             the
             victorie
             be
             given
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             with
             other
             wordes
             ,
             whereby
             they
             sayed
             the
             forces
             
             of
             their
             enemies
             Guacas
             were
             confounded
             .
             And
             they
             drew
             forth
             certaine
             blacke
             sheepe
             ,
             which
             had
             beene
             kept
             close
             some
             daies
             without
             meate
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             called
             Vrca
             ,
             and
             in
             killing
             them
             they
             spake
             these
             words
             ;
             As
             the
             hearts
             of
             these
             beasts
             be
             weakened
             ,
             so
             let
             our
             enemies
             be
             weakned
             .
             And
             if
             they
             found
             in
             these
             sheep
             that
             a
             certaine
             peece
             of
             flesh
             behind
             the
             heart
             were
             not
             consumed
             by
             fasting
             and
             close
             keeping
             ,
             they
             then
             held
             it
             for
             an
             ill
             augure
             .
             They
             brought
             certaine
             black
             dogs
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Appuros
             ,
             and
             slew
             them
             ,
             casting
             them
             into
             a
             plaine
             ,
             with
             certaine
             ceremonies
             ,
             causing
             some
             kinde
             of
             men
             to
             eate
             this
             flesh
             ,
             the
             which
             sacrifices
             they
             did
             ,
             lest
             the
             Ingua
             should
             be
             hurt
             by
             poison
             :
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             fasted
             from
             morning
             vntill
             the
             stars
             were
             vp
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             did
             glut
             and
             defile
             themselves
             like
             to
             the
             Moores
             .
             This
             sacrifice
             was
             most
             fit
             for
             them
             to
             withstand
             their
             enemies
             gods
             :
             and
             although
             at
             this
             day
             a
             great
             part
             of
             these
             customes
             have
             ceased
             ,
             the
             wars
             being
             ended
             ,
             yet
             remaines
             there
             some
             relikes
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             private
             or
             generall
             quarrels
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             or
             the
             Caciques
             ,
             or
             in
             their
             Citties
             .
             They
             did
             likewise
             offer
             and
             sacrifice
             shelles
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Mollo
             ,
             and
             they
             offered
             them
             to
             the
             fountaines
             and
             springs
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             these
             shells
             were
             daughters
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             the
             mother
             of
             all
             waters
             .
             They
             gave
             vnto
             these
             shells
             sundrie
             names
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             color
             ,
             and
             also
             they
             vse
             them
             to
             divers
             ends
             .
             They
             vsed
             them
             in
             a
             maner
             in
             all
             kinde
             of
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             they
             put
             beaten
             shells
             in
             their
             Chica
             ,
             for
             a
             superstition
             .
             Finally
             they
             thought
             it
             convenient
             to
             offer
             sacrifices
             of
             every
             thing
             they
             did
             sow
             or
             raise
             vp
             .
             There
             were
             Indians
             appointed
             to
             doe
             these
             sacrifices
             to
             the
             fountaine
             ,
             springs
             ,
             and
             rivers
             ,
             which
             passed
             through
             the
             townes
             ,
             or
             by
             their
             Chacras
             ,
             
             which
             are
             their
             farmes
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             after
             seede
             ●ime
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             not
             cease
             running
             ,
             but
             alwaies
             water
             their
             groundes
             .
             The
             sorcerers
             did
             coniure
             ,
             to
             know
             what
             time
             the
             sacrifices
             should
             be
             made
             ,
             which
             being
             ended
             ,
             they
             did
             gather
             of
             the
             contribution
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             what
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             and
             delivered
             them
             to
             such
             as
             had
             the
             charge
             of
             these
             sacrifices
             .
             They
             made
             them
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             winter
             ,
             at
             such
             time
             as
             the
             fountaines
             ,
             springs
             ,
             and
             rivers
             ,
             did
             increase
             by
             the
             moistures
             of
             the
             weather
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             attribute
             to
             their
             sacrifices
             .
             They
             did
             not
             sacrifice
             to
             the
             fountaines
             and
             springs
             of
             the
             desarts
             .
             To
             this
             day
             continues
             the
             respect
             they
             had
             to
             fountaines
             ,
             springs
             ,
             pooles
             ,
             brookes
             ,
             or
             rivers
             ,
             which
             passe
             by
             their
             Citties
             or
             Chacras
             ,
             even
             vnto
             the
             fountaines
             and
             rivers
             of
             the
             desarts
             .
             They
             have
             a
             speciall
             regard
             and
             reverence
             to
             the
             meeting
             of
             two
             rivers
             ,
             and
             there
             they
             wash
             themselves
             for
             their
             health
             ,
             anointing
             themselves
             first
             with
             the
             flower
             of
             Mays
             ,
             or
             some
             other
             things
             ,
             adding
             therevnto
             divers
             ceremonies
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             do
             likewise
             in
             their
             bathes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Sacrifices
             they
             made
             of
             men
             .
             CHAP.
             19.
             
          
           
             THe
             most
             pittifull
             disaster
             of
             this
             poore
             people
             ,
             is
             their
             slavery
             vnto
             the
             Devill
             ,
             sacrificing
             men
             vnto
             him
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             Images
             of
             God.
             In
             many
             nations
             they
             had
             vsed
             to
             kill
             (
             to
             accompany
             the
             dead
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             declared
             )
             such
             persons
             as
             had
             been
             agreeable
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             whome
             they
             imagined
             might
             best
             serve
             him
             in
             the
             other
             world
             .
             Besides
             this
             ,
             they
             vsed
             in
             Peru
             ,
             to
             sacrifice
             yong
             children
             of
             foure
             or
             six
             yeares
             old
             vnto
             
             tenne
             :
             and
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             these
             sacrifices
             were
             for
             the
             affaires
             that
             did
             import
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             as
             in
             sickenes
             for
             his
             health
             :
             and
             when
             he
             went
             to
             the
             warres
             for
             victory
             ,
             or
             when
             they
             gave
             the
             wreathe
             to
             their
             new
             Ingua
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             marke
             of
             a
             King
             ,
             as
             heere
             the
             Scepter
             and
             the
             Crowne
             be
             .
             In
             this
             solemnitie
             they
             sacrificed
             the
             number
             of
             two
             hundred
             children
             ,
             from
             foure
             to
             ten
             yeares
             of
             age
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             cruell
             and
             inhumane
             spectacle
             .
             The
             manner
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             was
             to
             drowne
             them
             and
             bury
             them
             with
             certaine
             representations
             and
             ceremonies
             :
             sometimes
             they
             cutte
             off
             their
             heads
             ,
             annointing
             themselves
             with
             the
             blood
             from
             one
             eare
             to
             an
             other
             .
          
           
             They
             did
             likewise
             sacrifice
             Virgines
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             that
             were
             brought
             to
             the
             Ingua
             from
             the
             monasteries
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             saide
             .
             In
             this
             case
             there
             was
             a
             very
             great
             and
             generall
             abuse
             :
             If
             any
             Indian
             qualified
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             common
             sorte
             ,
             were
             sicke
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Divine
             tolde
             him
             confidently
             that
             he
             should
             die
             ,
             they
             did
             then
             sacrifice
             his
             owne
             sonne
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             or
             to
             Virachoca
             ,
             desiring
             them
             to
             be
             satisfied
             with
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             would
             not
             deprive
             the
             father
             of
             life
             .
             This
             cruelty
             is
             like
             to
             that
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             speakes
             of
             ,
             which
             king
             Moab
             vsed
             in
             sacrificing
             his
             first
             borne
             sonne
             vpon
             the
             wall
             ,
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             all
             Israel
             ,
             to
             whome
             this
             act
             seemed
             so
             mournfull
             ,
             as
             they
             would
             not
             presse
             him
             any
             further
             ,
             but
             returned
             to
             their
             houses
             .
             The
             holy
             Scripture
             also
             shewes
             that
             the
             like
             kinde
             of
             sacrifice
             had
             beene
             in
             vse
             amongst
             the
             barbarous
             nations
             of
             the
             Cananeans
             and
             Iebuseans
             and
             others
             ,
             whereof
             the
             booke
             of
             Wisedome
             speakes
             ,
             
               They
               call
               it
               peace
               to
               live
               in
               so
               great
               miseries
               and
               vexations
               as
               to
               sacrifice
               their
               owne
               children
               ,
               or
               to
               doe
               other
               hidden
               sacrifices
               ,
               as
               to
               watch
               whole
               nights
               ,
               doing
               the
               actes
               of
               fooles
               ,
               and
               
               so
               they
               keepe
               no
               cleanenesse
               in
               their
               life
               ,
               nor
               in
               their
               marriages
               ,
               but
               one
               through
               envy
               takes
               away
               the
               life
               of
               an
               other
               ,
               an
               other
               takes
               away
               his
               wife
               and
               his
               contentment
               ,
               and
               all
               is
               in
               confusion
               ,
               blood
               ,
               murther
               ,
               theft
               ,
               deceipt
               ,
               corruption
               ,
               infidelitie
               ,
               seditions
               ,
               periuries
               ,
               mutinies
               ,
               forgetfulnesse
               of
               God
               ,
               pollution
               of
               soules
               ,
               change
               of
               sexes
               and
               birth
               ,
               inconstancie
               of
               marriages
               ,
               and
               the
               disorder
               of
               adultery
               and
               filthinesse
               :
               for
               idolatry
               is
               the
               sincke
               of
               all
               miseries
               .
            
             The
             Wise
             man
             speaketh
             this
             of
             those
             people
             of
             whome
             David
             complaines
             ,
             
             that
             the
             people
             of
             Israel
             had
             learned
             those
             customes
             ,
             even
             to
             sacrifice
             their
             sonnes
             and
             daughters
             to
             the
             divell
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             never
             pleasing
             nor
             agreeable
             vnto
             God.
             For
             as
             hee
             is
             the
             Authour
             of
             life
             ,
             and
             hath
             made
             all
             these
             things
             for
             the
             commoditie
             and
             good
             of
             man
             ,
             so
             is
             hee
             not
             pleased
             that
             men
             should
             take
             the
             lives
             one
             from
             another
             ;
             although
             the
             Lord
             did
             approove
             and
             accept
             the
             willingnesse
             of
             the
             faithfull
             patriarke
             Abraham
             ,
             yet
             did
             hee
             not
             consent
             to
             the
             deede
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             to
             cut
             off
             the
             head
             of
             his
             sonne
             :
             wherein
             wee
             see
             the
             malice
             and
             tyranny
             of
             the
             divell
             ,
             who
             would
             be
             herein
             as
             God
             ,
             taking
             pleasure
             to
             be
             worshipt
             with
             the
             effusion
             of
             mans
             blood
             ,
             procuring
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             the
             ruine
             of
             soule
             and
             body
             together
             ,
             for
             the
             deadly
             hatred
             he
             beareth
             to
             man
             ,
             as
             his
             cruell
             enemy
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             horrible
             sacrifices
             of
             men
             which
             the
             Mexicaines
             vsed
             .
             
               CHAP.
               20.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             they
             of
             Peru
             have
             surpassed
             the
             Mexicaines
             in
             the
             slaughter
             and
             sacrifice
             of
             their
             children
             ,
             (
             for
             I
             have
             not
             read
             nor
             vnderstood
             that
             the
             Mexicaines
             vsed
             any
             such
             sacrifices
             )
             yet
             they
             of
             Mexico
             have
             exceeded
             them
             ,
             yea
             all
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             worlde
             ,
             
             in
             the
             great
             number
             of
             men
             which
             they
             had
             sacrificed
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             horrible
             maner
             thereof
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             we
             may
             see
             the
             great
             miserie
             wherein
             the
             Divell
             holdes
             this
             blind
             Nation
             ,
             I
             will
             relate
             particularly
             the
             custome
             and
             inhumane
             maner
             which
             they
             have
             observed
             :
             First
             the
             men
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             were
             taken
             in
             the
             warres
             ,
             neyther
             did
             they
             vse
             these
             solemne
             sacrifices
             but
             of
             Captives
             :
             so
             as
             it
             seemes
             therein
             they
             have
             followed
             the
             custome
             of
             the
             Ancients
             .
             For
             as
             some
             Authors
             say
             ,
             they
             called
             the
             sacrifice
             Victima
             ,
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             because
             it
             was
             of
             a
             conquered
             thing
             :
             they
             also
             called
             it
             
               Hostia
               quasi
               ab
               hoste
            
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             an
             offering
             made
             of
             their
             enemies
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             applied
             this
             word
             to
             all
             kindes
             of
             sacrifices
             .
             In
             truth
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             not
             sacrifice
             any
             to
             their
             idolls
             ,
             but
             Captives
             ,
             and
             the
             ordinarie
             warres
             they
             made
             ,
             was
             onely
             to
             have
             Captives
             for
             their
             sacrifices
             :
             and
             therefore
             when
             they
             did
             fight
             ,
             they
             laboured
             to
             take
             their
             enemies
             alive
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             kill
             them
             ,
             to
             inioy
             their
             sacrifices
             .
             And
             this
             was
             the
             reason
             which
             Moteçuma
             gave
             to
             the
             
               Marquise
               du
               Val
            
             ,
             when
             he
             asked
             of
             him
             ,
             why
             being
             so
             mighty
             ,
             and
             having
             conquered
             so
             many
             kingdomes
             ,
             hee
             had
             not
             subdued
             the
             Province
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             which
             was
             so
             neere
             ▪
             Moteçuma
             answered
             him
             ,
             that
             for
             two
             reasons
             hee
             had
             not
             conquered
             that
             Province
             ,
             although
             it
             had
             beene
             easie
             ,
             if
             he
             would
             have
             vndertaken
             it
             :
             the
             one
             was
             for
             the
             exercise
             of
             the
             youth
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             left
             they
             should
             fall
             into
             idlenes
             and
             delight
             :
             the
             other
             and
             the
             chiefe
             cause
             why
             he
             had
             reserved
             this
             Province
             ,
             was
             ,
             to
             have
             Captives
             for
             the
             sacrifices
             of
             their
             gods
             .
             The
             maner
             they
             vsed
             in
             these
             sacrifices
             ,
             was
             ,
             they
             assembled
             within
             the
             Palissadoe
             of
             dead
             mens
             sculles
             ,
             (
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             )
             such
             as
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             ,
             vsing
             a
             certaine
             ceremony
             
             at
             the
             foot
             of
             the
             palisado
             ,
             placing
             a
             great
             guard
             about
             them
             .
             Presently
             there
             slept
             foorth
             a
             Priest
             ,
             attyred
             with
             a
             shorte
             surplise
             full
             of
             tasselles
             beneath
             ,
             who
             came
             from
             the
             top
             of
             the
             temple
             with
             an
             idoll
             made
             of
             paste
             of
             wheate
             &
             mays
             mingled
             with
             hony
             ,
             which
             had
             the
             eyes
             made
             of
             the
             graines
             of
             greene
             glasse
             ,
             and
             the
             teeth
             of
             the
             graines
             of
             mays
             ,
             hee
             descended
             the
             steppes
             of
             the
             temple
             with
             all
             the
             speede
             he
             could
             ,
             and
             mounted
             on
             a
             great
             stone
             planted
             vpon
             a
             high
             terrasse
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             court
             .
             This
             stone
             was
             called
             Quauxicalli
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             stone
             of
             Eagle
             ,
             whereon
             he
             mounted
             by
             a
             little
             ladder
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             fore
             part
             of
             the
             terrase
             ,
             and
             descended
             by
             an
             other
             staire
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             still
             embracing
             his
             idoll
             .
             Then
             did
             he
             mount
             to
             the
             place
             where
             those
             were
             that
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             ,
             shewing
             this
             idoll
             to
             every
             one
             in
             particular
             ,
             saying
             vnto
             them
             ;
             this
             is
             your
             god
             .
             And
             having
             ended
             his
             shew
             ,
             he
             descended
             by
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             staires
             ,
             and
             all
             such
             as
             should
             die
             ,
             went
             in
             procession
             vnto
             the
             place
             where
             they
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             ,
             where
             they
             sound
             the
             Ministers
             ready
             for
             that
             office
             .
             The
             ordinary
             manner
             of
             sacrificing
             was
             ,
             to
             open
             the
             stomake
             of
             him
             that
             was
             sacrificed
             ,
             and
             having
             pulled
             out
             his
             heart
             halfe
             alive
             ,
             they
             tumbled
             the
             man
             downe
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             which
             were
             all
             imbrewed
             and
             defiled
             with
             blood
             :
             And
             to
             make
             it
             the
             more
             plaine
             ,
             sixe
             sacrificers
             beeing
             appoynted
             to
             this
             dignitie
             ,
             came
             into
             the
             place
             of
             sacrifice
             ,
             foure
             to
             holde
             the
             hands
             and
             feete
             of
             him
             that
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             ,
             the
             fift
             to
             holde
             his
             head
             ,
             and
             the
             sixt
             to
             open
             his
             stomacke
             ,
             and
             to
             pull
             out
             the
             heart
             of
             the
             sacrificed
             .
             They
             called
             them
             Chachalmua
             ,
             which
             in
             our
             tong
             is
             as
             much
             ,
             as
             the
             ministers
             of
             holy
             things
             .
             It
             was
             a
             high
             dignitie
             ,
             and
             much
             esteemed
             amongest
             
             them
             ,
             wherein
             they
             did
             inherite
             and
             succede
             as
             in
             a
             〈◊〉
             simple
             .
             The
             minister
             who
             had
             the
             office
             to
             kill
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             sixt
             amongest
             them
             ,
             was
             esteemed
             and
             honoured
             as
             the
             soveraigne
             Priest
             and
             Bishop
             ,
             whose
             name
             was
             different
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             difference
             of
             times
             and
             solemnities
             .
             Their
             habites
             were
             likewise
             divers
             when
             they
             came
             foorth
             to
             the
             sacrifice
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             diversitie
             of
             times
             .
             The
             name
             of
             their
             chiefe
             dignitie
             was
             Papa
             and
             Topilzin
             ,
             their
             habite
             and
             robe
             was
             a
             red
             curtin
             after
             the
             Dalmatike
             fashion
             ,
             with
             tasselles
             belowe
             ,
             a
             crowne
             of
             rich
             feathers
             ,
             greene
             ,
             white
             ,
             and
             yellow
             vpon
             his
             head
             ,
             and
             at
             his
             eares
             like
             pendants
             of
             golde
             ,
             wherein
             were
             set
             greene
             stones
             ,
             and
             vnder
             the
             lip
             vpon
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             beard
             hee
             had
             a
             peece
             like
             vnto
             a
             small
             canon
             of
             an
             azured
             stone
             .
             These
             sacrifices
             came
             with
             their
             faces
             and
             handes
             coloured
             with
             a
             shining
             blacke
             .
             The
             other
             five
             had
             their
             haire
             much
             curled
             ,
             and
             tied
             vp
             with
             laces
             of
             leather
             ,
             bound
             about
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             head
             :
             vpon
             their
             forehead
             they
             caried
             small
             roundelets
             of
             paper
             painted
             with
             diverse
             colours
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             attired
             in
             a
             Dalmatike
             robe
             of
             white
             ,
             wroght
             with
             blacke
             .
             With
             this
             attire
             they
             represented
             the
             very
             figure
             of
             the
             Divell
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             did
             strike
             feare
             and
             terro●
             into
             all
             the
             people
             ,
             to
             see
             them
             come
             forth
             with
             so
             ho●rible
             a
             representation
             .
             The
             soveraigne
             priest
             carried
             a
             great
             knife
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             of
             a
             large
             and
             sharpe
             flint
             :
             another
             priest
             carried
             a
             coller
             of
             wood
             wrought
             in
             forme
             of
             a
             snake
             :
             All
             six
             put
             themselves
             in
             order
             ,
             ioyning
             to
             this
             Piramidall
             stone
             ,
             whereof
             I
             have
             spoken
             ,
             being
             directly
             against
             the
             doore
             of
             the
             Chappell
             of
             their
             idoll
             .
             This
             stone
             was
             so
             pointed
             ,
             as
             the
             man
             which
             was
             to
             be
             sacrificed
             ,
             being
             laid
             there
             on
             ,
             vpon
             his
             backe
             ,
             did
             bend
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             letting
             the
             knife
             but
             fall
             vpon
             his
             stomacke
             
             it
             opened
             very
             easily
             in
             the
             middest
             .
             When
             the
             sacrificers
             were
             thus
             in
             order
             ,
             they
             drew
             forth
             such
             as
             had
             beene
             taken
             in
             warre
             ,
             which
             were
             to
             be
             sacrificed
             at
             that
             feast
             ,
             and
             being
             accompanied
             with
             a
             guard
             of
             men
             all
             naked
             ,
             they
             caused
             them
             to
             mount
             vp
             these
             large
             staires
             in
             ranke
             ,
             to
             the
             place
             where
             the
             Ministers
             were
             prepared
             :
             and
             as
             every
             one
             of
             them
             came
             in
             their
             order
             ,
             the
             six
             sacrificers
             tooke
             the
             prisoner
             ,
             one
             by
             one
             foote
             ,
             another
             by
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             one
             by
             one
             hand
             ,
             another
             by
             the
             other
             ,
             casting
             him
             on
             his
             backe
             vpon
             this
             pointed
             stone
             ,
             where
             the
             fift
             of
             these
             Ministers
             put
             the
             coller
             of
             wood
             about
             his
             necke
             ,
             and
             the
             high
             priest
             opened
             his
             stomacke
             with
             the
             knife
             ,
             with
             a
             strange
             dexteritie
             and
             nimblenes
             ,
             pulling
             out
             his
             heart
             with
             his
             hands
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             shewed
             smoaking
             vnto
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             to
             whom
             he
             did
             offer
             this
             heate
             and
             fume
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             presently
             he
             turned
             towardes
             the
             idoll
             ,
             and
             did
             cast
             the
             heart
             at
             his
             face
             ,
             then
             did
             they
             cast
             away
             the
             body
             of
             the
             sacrificed
             ,
             tumbling
             it
             downe
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             the
             stone
             being
             set
             so
             neere
             the
             staires
             ,
             as
             there
             were
             not
             two
             foote
             space
             betwixt
             the
             stone
             and
             the
             first
             steppe
             ,
             so
             as
             with
             one
             spurne
             with
             their
             foote
             ,
             they
             cast
             the
             body
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             .
             In
             this
             sort
             one
             after
             one
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             all
             those
             that
             were
             appointed
             .
             Being
             thus
             slaine
             ,
             and
             their
             bodies
             cast
             downe
             ,
             their
             masters
             ,
             or
             such
             as
             had
             taken
             them
             ,
             went
             to
             take
             them
             vp
             ,
             and
             carried
             them
             away
             :
             then
             having
             divided
             them
             amongest
             them
             ,
             they
             did
             eate
             them
             ,
             celebrating
             their
             feast
             and
             solemnitie
             .
             There
             were
             ever
             forty
             or
             fifty
             at
             the
             least
             thus
             sacrificed
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             had
             men
             very
             expert
             in
             taking
             them
             .
             The
             neighbour
             Nations
             did
             the
             like
             ,
             imitating
             the
             Mexicaines
             in
             the
             customes
             and
             ceremonies
             of
             the
             service
             of
             their
             gods
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             another
             kind
             of
             sacrifices
             of
             men
             which
             the
             Mexicaines
             vsed
             .
             
               CHAP.
               21.
            
             
          
           
             THere
             was
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             sacrifice
             which
             they
             made
             in
             divers
             feasts
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Racaxipe
             VelitZli
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             as
             the
             ●●eaing
             of
             men
             .
             They
             call
             it
             so
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             some
             feasts
             they
             tooke
             one
             or
             more
             slaves
             ,
             as
             they
             pleased
             ;
             and
             after
             they
             had
             flead
             him
             ,
             they
             with
             that
             skinne
             apparelled
             a
             man
             appoynted
             to
             that
             end
             .
             This
             man
             went
             dauncing
             and
             leaping
             thorow
             all
             the
             houses
             and
             market
             places
             of
             the
             cittie
             ,
             every
             one
             being
             forced
             to
             offer
             something
             vnto
             him
             :
             and
             if
             any
             one
             failed
             ,
             hee
             would
             strike
             him
             over
             the
             face
             ,
             with
             a
             corner
             of
             the
             skinne
             ,
             defyling
             him
             with
             the
             congealed
             blood
             .
             This
             invention
             continued
             vntill
             the
             skinne
             did
             stinke
             :
             during
             which
             time
             ,
             such
             as
             went
             gathered
             together
             much
             almes
             ,
             which
             they
             imployed
             in
             necessary
             things
             for
             the
             service
             of
             their
             gods
             .
             In
             many
             of
             these
             feasts
             they
             made
             a
             challenge
             ,
             betwixt
             him
             that
             did
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             him
             that
             should
             be
             sacrifyced
             thus
             :
             they
             tied
             the
             slave
             by
             one
             foote
             to
             a
             wheele
             of
             stone
             ,
             giving
             him
             a
             sword
             and
             target
             in
             his
             handes
             to
             defend
             himselfe
             :
             then
             presently
             stept
             foorth
             hee
             that
             sacrificed
             him
             ,
             armed
             with
             an●ther
             sword
             and
             target
             :
             if
             he
             that
             should
             be
             sacrificed
             defends
             himselfe
             valiantly
             against
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             resisted
             him
             ,
             hee
             then
             remayned
             freed
             from
             the
             sacrifyce
             ,
             winning
             the
             name
             of
             a
             famous
             Captaine
             ,
             and
             so
             was
             reputed
             :
             but
             if
             hee
             were
             van●uished
             ,
             they
             then
             sacrifyced
             him
             on
             the
             stone
             wherevnto
             he
             was
             tyed
             .
             It
             was
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             sacrifyce
             ,
             whenas
             they
             appoynted
             any
             slave
             to
             be
             the
             representation
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             saying
             that
             it
             was
             his
             picture
             :
             
             they
             every
             yeare
             gave
             one
             slave
             to
             the
             Priests
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             never
             want
             the
             lively
             image
             of
             their
             idoll
             .
             At
             his
             fyrst
             entry
             into
             the
             office
             ,
             after
             hee
             had
             beene
             well
             washed
             ,
             they
             attyred
             him
             with
             all
             the
             ornaments
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             giving
             him
             the
             same
             name
             .
             Hee
             was
             that
             whole
             yeare
             reverenced
             and
             honoured
             as
             the
             idoll
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             had
             alwayes
             with
             him
             twelve
             men
             for
             his
             guarde
             ,
             lest
             hee
             should
             flie
             ,
             with
             which
             guarde
             they
             suffered
             him
             to
             goe
             freely
             and
             where
             hee
             would
             :
             and
             if
             by
             chaunce
             he
             fled
             ,
             the
             chiefe
             of
             the
             guarde
             was
             put
             in
             his
             place
             to
             represent
             the
             idoll
             ,
             and
             after
             to
             be
             sacrificed
             .
          
           
             This
             Indian
             had
             the
             most
             honourable
             lodging
             in
             all
             the
             temple
             ,
             where
             he
             did
             eate
             and
             drincke
             ,
             and
             whither
             all
             the
             chiefe
             Ministers
             came
             to
             serve
             and
             honour
             him
             ,
             carrying
             him
             meate
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             great
             personages
             .
             When
             hee
             went
             through
             the
             streetes
             of
             the
             citie
             ,
             hee
             was
             well
             accompanyed
             with
             noble
             men
             ,
             he
             carried
             a
             little
             flute
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             which
             sometimes
             he
             sounded
             ,
             to
             give
             them
             knowledge
             when
             he
             passed
             :
             Then
             presently
             the
             women
             came
             forth
             with
             their
             little
             children
             in
             their
             armes
             ,
             which
             they
             presented
             vnto
             him
             ,
             saluting
             him
             as
             god
             .
             All
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             people
             did
             the
             like
             :
             at
             night
             they
             put
             him
             in
             a
             strong
             prison
             or
             cage
             ,
             left
             he
             should
             flie
             ;
             and
             when
             the
             feast
             came
             ,
             they
             sacrificed
             him
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             sayde
             .
             By
             these
             and
             manie
             other
             meanes
             hath
             the
             Divell
             abused
             and
             entertained
             these
             poore
             wretches
             ,
             and
             such
             was
             the
             multitude
             of
             those
             that
             had
             beene
             sacrificed
             by
             this
             infernall
             cruelty
             ,
             as
             it
             seems
             a
             matter
             incredible
             ,
             for
             they
             affirme
             there
             were
             some
             dayes
             five
             thousand
             or
             more
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             were
             above
             twenty
             thousand
             sacrifyced
             in
             diverse
             pla●es
             .
             The
             divell
             to
             intertaine
             this
             murther
             of
             men
             ,
             vsed
             
             a
             pleasant
             and
             strange
             invention
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             when
             it
             pleased
             the
             priests
             of
             Sathan
             they
             went
             to
             their
             Kings
             ,
             telling
             them
             how
             their
             gods
             died
             for
             hunger
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             remember
             them
             .
             Presently
             they
             prepared
             thems●lves
             ,
             &
             advertised
             one
             another
             ,
             that
             their
             gods
             required
             meate
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             should
             command
             their
             people
             to
             be
             ready
             to
             goe
             to
             the
             warres
             ;
             and
             thus
             the
             people
             assembled
             ,
             and
             the
             companies
             appoynted
             went
             to
             field
             ,
             where
             they
             mustred
             their
             forces
             ;
             and
             all
             their
             quarrell
             and
             fight
             was
             to
             take
             one
             an
             other
             for
             sacrifice
             ,
             striving
             on
             either
             side
             to
             take
             what
             captives
             they
             could
             ,
             so
             as
             in
             these
             battells
             they
             laboured
             more
             to
             take
             ,
             then
             to
             kill
             ,
             for
             that
             all
             their
             intention
             was
             to
             take
             men
             alive
             ,
             to
             give
             them
             to
             their
             idolls
             to
             eate
             ,
             for
             after
             that
             maner
             brought
             they
             their
             sacrifice
             vnto
             their
             gods
             .
             And
             wee
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             never
             king
             was
             crowned
             vntill
             he
             had
             subdewed
             some
             province
             ,
             from
             the
             which
             hee
             brought
             a
             great
             number
             of
             captives
             for
             the
             sacrifices
             of
             their
             gods
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             was
             an
             infinit
             thing
             to
             see
             what
             blood
             was
             spilt
             in
             the
             honour
             of
             the
             Divell
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             Indians
             grew
             weary
             ,
             and
             could
             not
             endure
             the
             cruelty
             of
             Sathan
             .
             
               CHAP.
               22.
            
             
          
           
             MAny
             of
             these
             Barbarians
             were
             nowe
             wearied
             and
             tyred
             with
             such
             an
             excessive
             cruelty
             ,
             in
             sheading
             so
             much
             blood
             ,
             and
             with
             so
             tedious
             a
             tribute
             ,
             to
             be
             alwayes
             troubled
             to
             get
             captives
             ,
             for
             the
             feeding
             of
             their
             gods
             ,
             seeming
             vnto
             them
             a
             matter
             supportable
             ,
             yet
             left
             they
             not
             to
             followe
             and
             execute
             their
             rigorous
             lawes
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             awe
             the
             ministers
             of
             these
             idols
             kept
             them
             in
             ,
             and
             the
             cunning
             wherewith
             they
             abused
             this
             poore
             
             people
             .
             But
             inwardly
             they
             desired
             to
             be
             freed
             from
             so
             heavy
             a
             yoke
             .
             And
             it
             was
             a
             great
             providence
             of
             God
             ;
             that
             the
             first
             which
             gave
             them
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Lawe
             of
             Christ
             ,
             found
             them
             in
             this
             disposition
             :
             for
             without
             doubt
             it
             seemed
             to
             them
             a
             good
             law
             ,
             and
             a
             good
             God
             ,
             to
             be
             served
             in
             this
             sorte
             .
             Heerevpon
             a
             grave
             religious
             man
             in
             New
             Spaine
             tolde
             me
             ,
             that
             when
             he
             was
             in
             that
             Country
             hee
             had
             demaunded
             of
             an
             auntient
             Indian
             ,
             a
             man
             of
             qualitie
             ,
             for
             what
             reason
             the
             Indians
             hadde
             so
             soone
             received
             the
             Lawe
             of
             Ie●us
             Christ
             ,
             and
             left
             their
             owne
             ,
             without
             making
             any
             other
             proofe
             ,
             triall
             ,
             or
             dispute
             thereon
             ,
             for
             it
             seemed
             they
             had
             changed
             their
             religion
             ,
             without
             any
             sufficient
             reason
             to
             moove
             them
             .
             The
             Indian
             answered
             him
             ,
             Beleeve
             not
             Father
             ,
             that
             we
             have
             embraced
             the
             Law
             of
             Christ
             so
             rashly
             as
             they
             say
             ,
             for
             I
             will
             tell
             you
             ,
             that
             we
             were
             already
             weary
             and
             discontented
             with
             such
             things
             as
             the
             idolls
             commaunded
             vs
             ,
             and
             were
             determined
             to
             leave
             it
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             an
             other
             Law.
             But
             whenas
             we
             found
             that
             the
             religion
             that
             you
             preached
             had
             no
             cruelties
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             was
             fit
             for
             vs
             ,
             &
             both
             iust
             and
             good
             ,
             we
             vnderstood
             and
             beleeved
             that
             it
             was
             the
             true
             Law
             ,
             and
             so
             we
             received
             it
             willingly
             .
             Which
             answer
             of
             this
             Indian
             agrees
             well
             with
             that
             we
             read
             in
             the
             first
             Discourse
             ,
             that
             
               Fernand
               Cortez
            
             sent
             to
             the
             Emperour
             Charles
             the
             fift
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             reportes
             ,
             that
             after
             he
             had
             conquered
             the
             citty
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             being
             in
             Cuyoacan
             ,
             there
             came
             Ambassadors
             to
             him
             from
             the
             province
             and
             commonwealth
             of
             Mechoacan
             ,
             requiring
             him
             to
             send
             them
             his
             law
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             would
             teach
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             it
             ,
             because
             they
             intended
             to
             leave
             their
             owne
             ,
             which
             seemed
             not
             good
             vnto
             them
             ,
             which
             Cortez
             graunted
             ,
             and
             at
             this
             day
             they
             are
             the
             best
             Indians
             ,
             and
             the
             truest
             Christians
             that
             are
             in
             New
             
             Spaine
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             that
             saw
             these
             cruell
             sacrifices
             ,
             resolved
             with
             all
             their
             power
             to
             abolish
             so
             detestable
             and
             cursed
             a
             butchering
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             the
             rather
             ,
             for
             that
             in
             one
             night
             before
             their
             eies
             they
             sawe
             threescore
             or
             threescore
             and
             tenne
             Spaniards
             sacrificed
             ,
             which
             had
             beene
             taken
             in
             a
             battell
             given
             at
             the
             conquest
             of
             Mexico
             :
             and
             another
             time
             they
             found
             written
             with
             a
             cole
             in
             a
             chamber
             in
             TeZcusco
             these
             wordes
             ;
             
               Hecre
               such
               a
               miserable
               man
               was
               prisoner
               with
               his
               companions
               whom
               they
               of
            
             Tezcusco
             
               did
               sacrifice
            
             .
          
           
             There
             happened
             a
             very
             strange
             thing
             vpon
             this
             subiect
             ,
             and
             yet
             true
             ,
             being
             reported
             by
             men
             worthie
             of
             credite
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             beholding
             these
             sacrifices
             ,
             having
             opened
             and
             drawne
             out
             the
             heart
             of
             the
             ●ustie
             yong
             man
             ,
             and
             cast
             him
             from
             the
             toppe
             of
             the
             staires
             ,
             (
             as
             their
             custome
             was
             ,
             )
             when
             hee
             came
             at
             the
             bottome
             ,
             he
             said
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             in
             his
             language
             ,
             Knightes
             ,
             they
             have
             slaine
             me
             ,
             the
             which
             did
             greatly
             moove
             our
             men
             to
             horror
             and
             pittie
             .
             It
             is
             no
             incredible
             thing
             ,
             that
             having
             his
             heart
             pulled
             out
             ,
             hee
             might
             speake
             ,
             seeing
             that
             Galen
             reportes
             that
             it
             hath
             often
             chanced
             in
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             beasts
             ,
             after
             the
             heart
             hath
             beene
             drawne
             out
             ,
             
             and
             cast
             vpon
             the
             altar
             ,
             the
             beasts
             have
             breathed
             ,
             yea
             ,
             they
             did
             bray
             and
             cry
             out
             alowde
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             did
             runne
             .
             Leaving
             this
             question
             how
             this
             might
             bee
             in
             nature
             ,
             I
             will
             follow
             my
             purpose
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             shew
             how
             much
             these
             barbarous
             people
             did
             now
             abhorre
             this
             insuportable
             slaverie
             they
             had
             to
             that
             insernall
             murtherer
             ,
             and
             how
             great
             the
             mercy
             of
             the
             Lord
             hath
             beene
             vnto
             them
             ,
             imparting
             his
             most
             sweete
             and
             agreeable
             law
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             How
             the
             Divell
             hath
             laboured
             to
             imitate
             and
             counterfaite
             the
             Sacraments
             of
             the
             holy
             Church
             .
             CHAP
             25.
             
          
           
             THat
             which
             is
             most
             admirable
             in
             the
             hatred
             and
             presumption
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             not
             onely
             counterfaited
             in
             idolatry
             and
             sacrifices
             ,
             but
             also
             in
             certaine
             ceremonies
             ,
             our
             sacraments
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             our
             Lord
             hath
             instituted
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             Church
             doth
             vse
             ,
             having
             especially
             pretended
             to
             imitate
             ,
             in
             some
             sort
             ,
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Communion
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             most
             high
             and
             divine
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             )
             for
             the
             great
             error
             of
             Infidells
             which
             proceeded
             in
             this
             maner
             .
             In
             the
             first
             moneth
             ,
             which
             in
             Peru
             they
             called
             Rayme
             ,
             and
             answereth
             to
             our
             December
             ,
             they
             made
             a
             most
             solemne
             feast
             ,
             called
             Capacrayme
             ,
             wherein
             they
             made
             many
             sacrifices
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             which
             continued
             many
             daies
             :
             during
             the
             which
             ,
             no
             stranger
             was
             suffered
             to
             bee
             at
             the
             Court
             which
             was
             in
             Cusco
             .
             These
             daies
             being
             past
             ,
             they
             then
             gave
             libertie
             to
             strangers
             to
             enter
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             be
             partakers
             of
             the
             feastes
             and
             sacrifices
             ,
             ministring
             to
             them
             in
             this
             maner
             .
             The
             Mamacomas
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             which
             were
             a
             kinde
             of
             Nunnes
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             made
             little
             loaves
             of
             the
             ●lower
             of
             Mays
             ,
             died
             and
             mingled
             with
             the
             bloud
             of
             white
             sheepe
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             that
             day
             ;
             then
             presently
             they
             commanded
             that
             all
             strangers
             should
             enter
             ,
             who
             set
             themselves
             in
             order
             ,
             and
             the
             Priests
             which
             were
             of
             a
             certaine
             linage
             ,
             discending
             from
             Liuquiyupangui
             ,
             gave
             to
             every
             one
             a
             morcell
             of
             these
             small
             loaves
             ,
             saying
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             gave
             these
             peeces
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             should
             be
             vnited
             and
             confederate
             with
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             advised
             them
             not
             to
             speake
             nor
             thinke
             any
             ill
             against
             the
             
             Ingua
             ,
             but
             alwaies
             to
             beare
             him
             good
             affection
             ,
             for
             that
             this
             peece
             should
             be
             a
             witnesse
             of
             their
             intentions
             and
             will
             ,
             and
             if
             they
             did
             not
             as
             they
             ought
             ,
             he
             would
             discover
             them
             and
             be
             against
             them
             .
             They
             carried
             these
             small
             loaves
             ,
             in
             great
             platters
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             appointed
             for
             that
             vse
             ,
             &
             all
             did
             receive
             &
             eate
             these
             peeces
             ,
             thanking
             the
             Sunne
             infinitely
             for
             so
             great
             a
             favour
             which
             hee
             had
             done
             them
             ,
             speaking
             wordes
             and
             making
             signes
             of
             great
             contentment
             and
             devotion
             :
             protesting
             that
             during
             their
             lives
             ,
             they
             would
             neither
             do
             nor
             thinke
             any
             thing
             against
             the
             Sunne
             nor
             the
             Ingua
             :
             and
             with
             this
             condition
             they
             received
             this
             foode
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             which
             should
             remaine
             in
             their
             bodies
             for
             a
             witnesse
             of
             their
             fidelitie
             which
             they
             observed
             to
             the
             Sunne
             and
             to
             the
             Iugua
             their
             King.
             This
             maner
             of
             divelish
             communicating
             they
             likewise
             vsed
             in
             the
             tenth
             moneth
             called
             Coyarayme
             ,
             which
             was
             September
             ,
             in
             the
             solemne
             feast
             which
             they
             called
             Cytua
             ,
             doing
             the
             like
             ceremonies
             .
             And
             besides
             this
             communion
             (
             if
             it
             be
             lawfull
             to
             vse
             this
             word
             in
             so
             divelish
             a
             matter
             ,
             )
             which
             they
             imparted
             to
             all
             strangers
             that
             came
             ,
             they
             did
             likewise
             send
             of
             these
             loaves
             to
             all
             their
             Guacas
             ,
             sanctuaries
             ,
             or
             idolls
             ,
             of
             the
             whole
             Realme
             ,
             and
             at
             one
             instant
             they
             found
             people
             of
             all
             sides
             ,
             which
             came
             expresly
             to
             receive
             them
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             said
             (
             in
             delivering
             them
             ,
             )
             that
             the
             Sunne
             had
             sent
             them
             that
             ,
             in
             signe
             that
             hee
             would
             have
             them
             all
             to
             worship
             and
             honour
             him
             ,
             and
             likewise
             did
             sende
             them
             in
             honour
             of
             the
             Caciques
             .
             Some
             perhappes
             will
             hold
             this
             for
             a
             fable
             and
             a
             fiction
             :
             yet
             is
             it
             most
             true
             ,
             that
             since
             the
             
               Ingua
               Yupangi
            
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             is
             hee
             that
             hath
             made
             most
             lawes
             ,
             customes
             ,
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             as
             Numa
             did
             in
             Rome
             :
             )
             this
             maner
             of
             communion
             hath
             continued
             ,
             vntill
             that
             the
             Gospel
             of
             our
             
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             thrust
             out
             all
             these
             superstitions
             ,
             giving
             them
             the
             right
             foode
             of
             life
             ,
             which
             vnites
             their
             soules
             to
             God
             :
             whoso
             would
             satisfie
             himselfe
             more
             amply
             ,
             let
             him
             reade
             the
             relation
             which
             the
             Licentiate
             Pollo
             did
             write
             ,
             
               Don
               Ieronimo
               de
               Loaysa
            
             Arch-bishop
             of
             the
             Cittie
             of
             Kings
             ,
             where
             he
             shall
             finde
             this
             and
             many
             other
             things
             which
             he
             hath
             discovered
             and
             found
             out
             by
             his
             great
             dilligence
             .
          
        
         
           
             In
             what
             maner
             the
             Divell
             hath
             laboured
             in
             Mexico
             to
             counterfaite
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             and
             Communion
             vsed
             in
             the
             holy
             Church
             .
             CHAP.
             24.
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             a
             thing
             more
             worthy
             admiration
             ,
             to
             heare
             speak
             of
             the
             Feast
             and
             solemnitie
             of
             the
             Communion
             which
             the
             Divell
             himselfe
             the
             Prince
             of
             Pride
             ,
             ordayned
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             although
             it
             bee
             somewhat
             long
             ,
             )
             yet
             shall
             it
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             to
             relate
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             written
             by
             men
             of
             credite
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             in
             the
             moneth
             of
             Maie
             ,
             made
             their
             principall
             feast
             to
             their
             god
             Vitz●liputZli
             ,
             and
             two
             daies
             before
             this
             feast
             ,
             the
             Virgins
             whereof
             I
             have
             spoken
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             were
             shut
             vp
             and
             secluded
             in
             the
             same
             Temple
             ,
             and
             were
             as
             it
             were
             religious
             women
             ,
             )
             did
             mingle
             a
             quantitie
             of
             the
             seede
             of
             beetes
             with
             rosted
             Mays
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             did
             mould
             it
             with
             honie
             ,
             making
             an
             idoll
             of
             that
             paste
             ,
             in
             bignesse
             like
             to
             that
             of
             wood
             ,
             putting
             insteede
             of
             eyes
             ,
             graines
             of
             g●eene
             glasse
             ,
             of
             blue
             ,
             or
             white
             ;
             and
             for
             teeth
             ,
             graines
             of
             M●●s
             ,
             set
             forth
             with
             all
             the
             orn●ment
             and
             furniture
             that
             I
             have
             said
             .
             This
             being
             finished
             ,
             all
             the
             Noblemen
             came
             and
             brought
             it
             an
             exquisite
             an●
             rich
             garment
             ,
             like
             vnto
             that
             of
             the
             idol
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             did
             
             attyre
             it
             .
             Being
             thus
             clad
             and
             deckt
             ,
             they
             did
             set
             it
             in
             an
             azured
             chaire
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             litter
             to
             carry
             it
             on
             their
             shoulders
             .
             The
             morning
             of
             this
             feast
             being
             come
             ,
             an
             houre
             before
             day
             ,
             all
             the
             maidens
             came
             forth
             attired
             in
             white
             ,
             with
             new
             ornaments
             ,
             the
             which
             that
             day
             were
             called
             the
             Sisters
             of
             their
             god
             VitzliputZli
             ,
             they
             came
             crowned
             with
             garlands
             of
             Mays
             rosted
             and
             parched
             ,
             being
             like
             vnto
             azahar
             or
             the
             flower
             of
             orange
             ,
             and
             about
             their
             neckes
             they
             had
             great
             chaines
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             went
             bauldricke-wise
             vnder
             their
             left
             arme
             .
             Their
             cheekes
             were
             died
             with
             vermillion
             ,
             their
             armes
             from
             the
             elbow
             to
             the
             wrist
             ,
             were
             covered
             with
             red
             parrots
             feathers
             .
             And
             thus
             attyred
             ,
             they
             tooke
             the
             idoll
             one
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             carrying
             it
             into
             the
             Court
             ,
             where
             all
             the
             yoong
             men
             were
             ,
             attyred
             in
             garmentes
             of
             an
             artificiall
             re●
             ,
             crowned
             after
             the
             same
             maner
             ,
             like
             vnto
             the
             women
             .
             Whenas
             the
             maidens
             came
             forth
             with
             the
             idoll
             ,
             the
             yong
             men
             drew
             neer
             with
             much
             reverence
             ,
             taking
             the
             litter
             wherein
             the
             idoll
             was
             ,
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             carrying
             it
             to
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             where
             al
             the
             people
             did
             humble
             themselves
             ,
             laying
             earth
             vpon
             their
             heads
             ,
             which
             was
             an
             ordinarie
             ceremonie
             which
             they
             did
             observe
             at
             the
             chiefe
             feast
             of
             their
             gods
             .
             This
             ceremony
             being
             ended
             ,
             all
             the
             people
             went
             in
             procession
             with
             all
             the
             diligence
             and
             speede
             they
             could
             ,
             going
             to
             a
             mountain
             which
             was
             a
             league
             from
             the
             city
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             called
             Chapulteper
             ,
             &
             there
             they
             made
             sacrifices
             .
             Presently
             they
             went
             from
             thence
             with
             like
             diligence
             ,
             to
             go
             to
             a
             place
             neere
             vnto
             it
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             ,
             Atlacuyavaya
             ,
             where
             they
             made
             their
             second
             station
             :
             and
             from
             thence
             they
             went
             to
             another
             Burgh
             or
             Village
             a
             league
             beyond
             Cuyoacan
             ,
             from
             whence
             they
             parted
             ,
             returning
             to
             the
             Citie
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             not
             making
             any
             other
             
             station
             .
             They
             went
             in
             this
             sort
             above
             foure
             leagues
             in
             three
             or
             foure
             houres
             ,
             calling
             this
             procession
             ,
             
               Ypayna
               Vitzliputzli
            
             .
             Being
             come
             to
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             staires
             ,
             they
             set
             downe
             the
             brancard
             or
             litter
             with
             the
             idoll
             ,
             tying
             great
             cordes
             to
             the
             armes
             of
             the
             brancarde
             ,
             then
             with
             great
             observance
             and
             reverence
             ,
             they
             did
             drawe
             vp
             the
             litter
             with
             the
             idoll
             in
             it
             to
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             some
             drawing
             above
             ,
             and
             others
             helping
             belowe
             ,
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             there
             was
             a
             great
             noise
             of
             fluites
             ,
             trumpets
             ,
             cornets
             ,
             and
             drummes
             .
             They
             did
             mount
             it
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             were
             very
             steepe
             and
             narrow
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             could
             not
             carry
             vp
             the
             litter
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             while
             they
             mounted
             vp
             the
             idoll
             ,
             all
             the
             people
             stoode
             in
             the
             Court
             with
             much
             reverence
             and
             feare
             .
             Being
             mounted
             to
             the
             top
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             had
             placed
             it
             in
             a
             little
             lodge
             of
             roses
             ,
             which
             they
             held
             readie
             ,
             presently
             came
             the
             yong
             men
             ,
             which
             strawed
             many
             flowers
             of
             sundrie
             kindes
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             filled
             the
             temple
             both
             within
             and
             without
             .
             This
             done
             ,
             all
             the
             Vi●gins
             came
             out
             of
             their
             convent
             ,
             bringing
             peeces
             of
             paste
             compounded
             of
             beetes
             ,
             and
             rosted
             Mays
             ,
             which
             was
             of
             the
             same
             paste
             whereof
             their
             idoll
             was
             made
             and
             compounded
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             of
             the
             fashion
             of
             g●eat
             bones
             .
             They
             delivered
             them
             to
             the
             yong
             men
             ,
             who
             carried
             them
             vp
             and
             laid
             them
             vp
             and
             laide
             them
             at
             the
             idolls
             feete
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             filled
             the
             whole
             place
             ,
             that
             it
             could
             receive
             no
             more
             .
             They
             called
             these
             morcels
             of
             paste
             ,
             the
             flesh
             and
             bones
             of
             VitziliputZli
             .
             Having
             layed
             abroade
             these
             bones
             ,
             presently
             came
             all
             the
             Ancients
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             Priests
             ,
             Levites
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             dignities
             and
             antiquities
             ,
             (
             for
             heerein
             there
             was
             a
             strict
             order
             amongst
             them
             ,
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             with
             
             ●heir
             vailes
             of
             diverse
             colours
             and
             workes
             ,
             every
             one
             according
             to
             his
             dignity
             and
             office
             ,
             having
             garlands
             vpon
             their
             heads
             ,
             and
             chaines
             of
             ●lowers
             about
             their
             neckes
             :
             after
             them
             came
             their
             gods
             and
             goddesses
             whom
             they
             worshipt
             of
             diverse
             figures
             ,
             attired
             in
             the
             same
             livery
             ,
             then
             putting
             themselves
             in
             order
             about
             those
             morsells
             &
             peeces
             of
             paste
             ,
             they
             vsed
             certaine
             ceremonies
             with
             singing
             and
             dauncing
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             they
             were
             blessed
             and
             consecrated
             for
             the
             flesh
             and
             bones
             of
             this
             idoll
             .
          
           
             This
             ceremony
             and
             blessing
             (
             whereby
             they
             were
             taken
             for
             the
             flesh
             and
             bones
             of
             the
             idoll
             )
             being
             ended
             ,
             they
             honoured
             those
             peeces
             in
             the
             same
             sorte
             as
             their
             god
             .
             Then
             came
             foorth
             the
             sacrificers
             ,
             who
             beganne
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             men
             ,
             in
             the
             manner
             as
             hath
             beene
             spoken
             ,
             and
             that
             day
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             a
             greater
             number
             than
             at
             any
             other
             time
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             the
             most
             solemne
             feast
             they
             observed
             .
             The
             sacrifices
             being
             ended
             ,
             all
             the
             yoong
             men
             and
             maides
             came
             out
             of
             the
             temple
             attired
             as
             before
             ,
             and
             being
             placed
             in
             order
             and
             ranke
             one
             directly
             against
             another
             ,
             they
             daunced
             by
             drummes
             the
             which
             sounded
             in
             praise
             of
             the
             feast
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             idoll
             which
             they
             did
             celebrate
             .
             To
             which
             song
             all
             the
             most
             ancient
             and
             greatest
             noble
             men
             did
             answer
             ,
             dauncing
             about
             them
             ,
             making
             a
             great
             circle
             as
             their
             vse
             is
             ,
             the
             yoong
             men
             and
             maides
             remayning
             alwayes
             in
             the
             middest
             .
             All
             the
             citty
             came
             to
             this
             goodly
             spectacle
             ,
             and
             there
             was
             a
             commaundement
             very
             strictly
             observed
             throughout
             all
             the
             land
             ,
             that
             the
             day
             of
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             idoll
             Vitziliputzli
             ,
             they
             should
             ●a●e
             no
             other
             meate
             ,
             but
             this
             paste
             with
             hony
             ,
             whereof
             the
             idoll
             was
             made
             .
             And
             this
             should
             be
             eaten
             at
             the
             point
             of
             day
             ,
             &
             they
             should
             drincke
             no
             water
             nor
             any
             other
             thing
             till
             after
             no
             one
             :
             
             they
             held
             it
             for
             an
             ill
             signe
             ,
             yea
             for
             sacrilege
             ,
             to
             doe
             the
             contrary
             :
             but
             after
             the
             ceremonies
             ended
             ,
             it
             was
             lawfull
             for
             them
             to
             eate
             any
             thing
             .
             During
             the
             time
             of
             this
             ceremony
             ,
             they
             hid
             the
             water
             from
             their
             litle
             children
             ,
             admonishing
             all
             such
             as
             had
             the
             vse
             of
             reason
             ,
             not
             to
             drinke
             any
             water
             ;
             which
             if
             they
             did
             ,
             the
             anger
             of
             God
             would
             come
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             they
             should
             die
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             observe
             very
             carefully
             and
             strictly
             .
             The
             ceremonies
             ,
             dancing
             ,
             and
             sacrifice
             ended
             ,
             they
             went
             to
             vnclothe
             themselves
             ,
             and
             the
             priests
             and
             superiors
             of
             the
             temple
             tooke
             the
             idoll
             of
             paste
             ,
             which
             they
             spoyled
             of
             all
             the
             ornaments
             it
             had
             ,
             and
             made
             many
             peeces
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             idoll
             it selfe
             as
             of
             the
             tronchons
             which
             were
             consecrated
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             gave
             them
             to
             the
             communion
             ,
             beginning
             with
             the
             greater
             ,
             and
             continuing
             vnto
             the
             rest
             ,
             both
             men
             ,
             women
             ,
             and
             little
             children
             ,
             who
             received
             it
             with
             such
             teares
             ,
             feare
             ,
             and
             reverence
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             an
             admirable
             thing
             ,
             saying
             that
             they
             did
             eate
             the
             flesh
             and
             bones
             of
             God
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             were
             grieved
             .
             Such
             as
             had
             any
             sicke
             folkes
             demaunded
             thereof
             for
             them
             ,
             and
             carried
             it
             with
             great
             reverence
             and
             veneration
             .
          
           
             All
             such
             as
             did
             communicate
             ,
             were
             bound
             to
             give
             the
             tenth
             of
             this
             seede
             ,
             whereof
             the
             idoll
             was
             made
             .
             The
             solemnitie
             of
             the
             idoll
             being
             ended
             ,
             an
             olde
             man
             of
             great
             authoritie
             stept
             vp
             into
             a
             high
             place
             ,
             and
             with
             alowde
             voice
             preached
             their
             lawe
             and
             ceremonies
             .
             Who
             would
             not
             wonder
             to
             see
             the
             divell
             so
             curious
             to
             seeke
             to
             be
             worshipped
             and
             reverenced
             in
             the
             same
             maner
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             our
             God
             hath
             appoynted
             and
             also
             taught
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             holy
             Church
             hath
             accustomed
             ?
             Hereby
             it
             is
             plainely
             verified
             what
             was
             propounded
             in
             the
             beginning
             ,
             that
             Sathan
             strives
             (
             all
             he
             can
             )
             to
             vsurp
             
             and
             chalenge
             vnto
             himselfe
             the
             honor
             and
             service
             that
             is
             due
             to
             God
             alone
             ,
             although
             he
             dooth
             still
             intermixe
             with
             it
             his
             cruelties
             and
             filthinesse
             ,
             being
             the
             spirite
             of
             murther
             and
             vncleanenesse
             ,
             and
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Consessors
             and
             Consession
             which
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             .
             
               CHAP.
               25.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             father
             of
             lies
             would
             likewise
             counterfeit
             the
             sacrament
             of
             Confession
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             idolatries
             seeke
             to
             be
             honored
             with
             ceremonies
             very
             like
             to
             the
             maner
             of
             Christians
             .
             In
             Peru
             they
             held
             opinion
             ,
             that
             all
             diseases
             and
             adversities
             came
             for
             the
             sinnes
             which
             they
             had
             committed
             :
             for
             remedy
             whereof
             they
             vsed
             sacrifices
             :
             moreover
             they
             confessed
             themselves
             verbally
             ,
             almost
             in
             all
             provinces
             ,
             and
             had
             Confessors
             appoynted
             by
             their
             superiors
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             there
             were
             some
             sinnes
             reserved
             for
             the
             superiors
             .
             They
             received
             penaunce
             ,
             yea
             some
             .
             times
             very
             sharpely
             ,
             especially
             when
             the
             offendor
             was
             a
             poore
             man
             ,
             and
             had
             nothing
             to
             give
             his
             Confessour
             .
             This
             office
             of
             Confessor
             was
             likewise
             exercised
             by
             women
             .
             The
             manner
             of
             these
             confessors
             forcerers
             whom
             they
             call
             Ychuiri
             or
             Ychuri
             ,
             hath
             beene
             most
             generall
             in
             the
             provinces
             of
             Collasuio
             .
             They
             holde
             opinion
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             heinous
             sinne
             to
             conceale
             any
             thing
             in
             confession
             .
             The
             Ychuyri
             or
             confessors
             discovered
             by
             lottes
             ,
             or
             by
             the
             view
             of
             some
             beast
             hides
             ,
             if
             any
             thing
             were
             concealed
             ,
             and
             punished
             them
             with
             many
             blowes
             ,
             with
             a
             stone
             vpon
             the
             shoulders
             ,
             vntill
             they
             had
             revealed
             all
             ,
             then
             after
             they
             gave
             him
             penaunce
             ,
             and
             did
             sacrifice
             .
             They
             doe
             likewise
             vse
             this
             confession
             ,
             when
             their
             children
             ,
             wives
             ,
             husbands
             ,
             or
             their
             Caciques
             be
             sicke
             ,
             or
             in
             any
             great
             exploite
             .
             And
             when
             their
             Ingra
             was
             sicke
             ,
             all
             
             the
             provinces
             confessed
             themselves
             ,
             chiefly
             those
             of
             the
             province
             of
             Collao
             .
             The
             Confessors
             were
             bound
             to
             hold
             their
             confessions
             secret
             ,
             but
             in
             certaine
             cases
             limited
             .
             The
             sinnes
             that
             they
             chiefly
             confessed
             ,
             was
             first
             to
             kill
             one
             another
             out
             of
             warre
             ,
             then
             to
             steale
             ,
             to
             take
             another
             mans
             wife
             ,
             to
             give
             poison
             or
             sorcery
             to
             doe
             any
             harme
             :
             and
             they
             helde
             it
             to
             be
             a
             grievous
             sinne
             ,
             to
             be
             forgetfull
             in
             the
             reverence
             of
             their
             Guacas
             ,
             or
             Oratories
             ,
             not
             to
             observe
             the
             feasts
             ,
             or
             to
             speake
             ill
             of
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             to
             disobey
             him
             .
             They
             accused
             not
             themselves
             of
             any
             secret
             actes
             and
             sinnes
             .
             But
             according
             to
             the
             report
             of
             some
             Priests
             ,
             after
             the
             christians
             came
             into
             that
             Countrey
             ,
             they
             accused
             themselves
             of
             their
             thoughts
             .
             The
             Ingua
             confessed
             himselfe
             to
             no
             man
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             that
             hee
             might
             tell
             them
             to
             Virachoca
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             might
             forgive
             them
             .
             After
             the
             Ingua
             had
             been
             confessed
             ,
             hee
             made
             a
             certaine
             bath
             to
             cleanse
             himselfe
             in
             a
             running
             river
             ,
             saying
             these
             words
             :
             I
             have
             told
             my
             sinnes
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             receive
             them
             ,
             O
             thou
             River
             ,
             and
             carry
             them
             to
             the
             sea
             ,
             where
             they
             may
             never
             appeare
             more
             .
             Others
             that
             confessed
             ,
             vsed
             likewise
             these
             baths
             ,
             with
             certaine
             ceremonies
             very
             like
             to
             those
             the
             Moores
             vse
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Guadoy
             ,
             and
             the
             Indians
             call
             them
             Opacuna
             .
             When
             it
             chaunced
             that
             any
             mans
             children
             died
             ,
             he
             was
             held
             for
             a
             great
             sinner
             ,
             saying
             that
             it
             was
             for
             his
             sinnes
             that
             the
             sonne
             died
             before
             the
             father
             .
             And
             therefore
             those
             to
             whom
             this
             had
             chanced
             ,
             after
             they
             were
             confessed
             ,
             they
             were
             bath'd
             in
             this
             bath
             called
             Opacuna
             ,
             as
             is
             saide
             before
             .
             Then
             some
             deformed
             Indian
             ,
             crookebackt
             ,
             and
             counterfet
             by
             nature
             ,
             came
             to
             whippe
             them
             with
             certaine
             nettles
             .
             If
             the
             Sorcerers
             or
             Inchaunters
             by
             their
             lots
             and
             divinations
             affirmed
             that
             any
             sicke
             body
             should
             die
             ,
             the
             sicke
             man
             makes
             no
             difficulty
             
             to
             kill
             his
             owne
             sonne
             ,
             though
             he
             had
             no
             other
             ,
             hoping
             by
             that
             meanes
             to
             escape
             death
             ,
             saying
             that
             in
             his
             place
             he
             offered
             his
             sonne
             in
             sacrifice
             .
             And
             this
             crueltie
             hath
             beene
             practised
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             even
             since
             the
             Christians
             came
             into
             that
             countrey
             .
             In
             trueth
             it
             is
             strange
             ,
             that
             this
             custome
             of
             confessing
             their
             secret
             sinnes
             ,
             hath
             continued
             so
             long
             amongest
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             doe
             so
             strict
             penances
             ,
             as
             ,
             to
             fast
             ,
             to
             give
             apparell
             ,
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             to
             remaine
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             to
             receive
             many
             stripes
             vpon
             the
             shoulders
             .
             Our
             men
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             province
             of
             Chiquito
             ,
             even
             at
             this
             day
             they
             meete
             with
             this
             plague
             of
             Confessors
             or
             Ychuris
             ,
             whereas
             many
             sicke
             persons
             repaire
             vnto
             them
             :
             but
             now
             ,
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             this
             people
             beginnes
             to
             see
             cleerely
             the
             effect
             and
             great
             benefite
             of
             our
             confession
             ,
             wherevnto
             they
             come
             with
             great
             devotion
             .
             And
             partely
             this
             former
             custome
             hath
             beene
             suffered
             by
             the
             providence
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             confession
             might
             not
             seeme
             tedious
             vnto
             them
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             meanes
             the
             Lord
             is
             wholy
             glorified
             ,
             and
             the
             Divell
             (
             who
             is
             a
             deceiver
             )
             deceived
             .
             And
             for
             that
             it
             concerneth
             this
             matter
             ,
             I
             will
             reporte
             the
             manner
             of
             a
             strange
             confession
             the
             Divell
             hath
             invented
             at
             Iapp●●
             ,
             as
             appeares
             by
             a
             letter
             that
             came
             from
             thence
             ,
             which
             faith
             thus
             :
             There
             are
             in
             Ocaca
             very
             great
             and
             high
             and
             stiep
             rockes
             ,
             which
             have
             prickes
             or
             poynts
             on
             them
             ,
             above
             two
             hundred
             fadome
             high
             .
             Amongest
             these
             rockes
             there
             is
             one
             of
             these
             pikes
             or
             poyntes
             so
             terribly
             high
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Xamabusis
             (
             which
             be
             pilgrimes
             )
             doe
             but
             looke
             vp
             vnto
             it
             ,
             they
             tremble
             ,
             and
             their
             haire
             stares
             ,
             so
             fearefull
             and
             horrible
             is
             the
             place
             .
             Vpon
             the
             toppe
             of
             this
             poynt
             there
             is
             a
             great
             rod
             of
             yron
             of
             three
             fadome
             long
             ,
             placed
             there
             by
             a
             strange
             devise
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             of
             this
             
             rodde
             is
             a
             ballance
             tied
             ,
             whereof
             the
             scales
             are
             so
             bigge
             ,
             as
             a
             man
             may
             sit
             in
             one
             of
             them
             :
             and
             the
             Goquis
             (
             which
             be
             divells
             in
             humane
             shape
             )
             commaund
             these
             pilgrims
             to
             enter
             therein
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             not
             leaving
             one
             of
             them
             :
             then
             with
             an
             engine
             or
             instrument
             which
             mooveth
             ,
             by
             meanes
             of
             a
             wheele
             ,
             they
             make
             this
             rodde
             of
             yron
             whereon
             the
             ballance
             is
             hanged
             ,
             to
             hang
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             one
             of
             these
             
             XamabuZisbeing
             set
             in
             one
             of
             the
             scales
             of
             the
             ballaunce
             .
             And
             as
             that
             wherein
             the
             man
             is
             sette
             hath
             no
             counterpoise
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             it
             presently
             hangeth
             downe
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             riseth
             vntill
             it
             meetes
             with
             and
             toucheth
             the
             rodde
             :
             then
             the
             Goqnis
             telleth
             them
             from
             the
             rocke
             ,
             that
             they
             must
             confesse
             themselves
             of
             all
             the
             sinnes
             they
             have
             committed
             ,
             to
             their
             remembrance
             ,
             and
             that
             with
             a
             lowde
             voyce
             ,
             to
             th'
             end
             that
             all
             the
             rest
             may
             heare
             him
             .
             Then
             presently
             hee
             beginneth
             to
             confesse
             ,
             whilest
             some
             of
             the
             standers
             by
             do
             laugh
             at
             the
             sinnes
             they
             doe
             heare
             ;
             and
             others
             sigh
             ,
             and
             at
             every
             sinne
             they
             confesse
             ,
             the
             other
             scale
             of
             the
             ballance
             falles
             alittle
             ,
             vntill
             that
             having
             tolde
             all
             his
             sinnes
             ,
             it
             remaines
             equall
             with
             the
             other
             ,
             wherein
             the
             sorrowfull
             penitent
             sits
             :
             then
             the
             Goquis
             turnes
             the
             wheele
             ,
             and
             drawes
             the
             rodde
             and
             ballance
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             the
             Pilgrime
             comes
             foorth
             ,
             then
             enters
             another
             ,
             vntill
             all
             have
             passed
             .
             A
             Iapponois
             reported
             this
             after
             hee
             was
             christned
             ,
             saying
             that
             he
             had
             beene
             in
             this
             pilgrimage
             ,
             and
             entred
             the
             ballance
             seaven
             times
             ,
             where
             he
             had
             confessed
             himselfe
             publikely
             .
             He
             saide
             moreover
             ,
             that
             if
             anie
             one
             did
             conceale
             any
             sinne
             ,
             the
             empty
             scale
             yeelded
             not
             :
             and
             if
             hee
             grew
             obstinate
             after
             instance
             made
             to
             confesse
             himselfe
             ,
             refusing
             to
             open
             all
             his
             sinnes
             ,
             the
             Goquis
             cast
             him
             downe
             from
             the
             toppe
             ,
             where
             in
             an
             instant
             he
             is
             broken
             into
             a
             thousand
             peeces
             .
             Yet
             this
             christian
             ,
             
             who
             was
             called
             Iohn
             tolde
             vs
             ,
             that
             commonly
             the
             feare
             and
             terrour
             of
             this
             place
             is
             so
             great
             to
             all
             such
             as
             enter
             therein
             ,
             and
             the
             danger
             they
             see
             with
             thei●●●●
             to
             fall
             out
             of
             the
             ballance
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             broken
             in
             peeces
             ,
             that
             seldome
             there
             is
             any
             one
             but
             discovers
             all
             his
             sins
             .
             This
             place
             is
             called
             by
             another
             name
             Sangenoto●●ro
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             place
             of
             Confession
             :
             wee
             see
             plainely
             by
             this
             discourse
             ,
             how
             the
             Divell
             hath
             pretended
             to
             vfurp
             vnto
             himselfe
             the
             service
             of
             God
             ,
             making
             confession
             of
             sinnes
             (
             which
             the
             Lord
             hath
             appoynted
             for
             the
             remedy
             of
             man
             )
             a
             divellish
             superstition
             ,
             to
             their
             great
             losse
             and
             perdition
             .
             He
             hath
             doone
             no
             lesse
             to
             the
             Heathe●
             of
             Iappon
             ,
             than
             to
             those
             of
             the
             provinces
             of
             Colla●
             in
             Peru.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             abhominable
             vnction
             which
             the
             Mexicaine
             prieste●
             and
             other
             Nations
             vsed
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             witchcraftes
             .
             CHAP.
             26.
             
          
           
             GOd
             appoynted
             in
             the
             auntient
             Lawe
             the
             manner
             how
             they
             should
             consecrate
             Aarons
             person
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Priests
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Lawe
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             wee
             have
             likewise
             the
             holy
             creame
             and
             vnction
             which
             they
             vse
             when
             they
             consecrate
             the
             Priestes
             of
             Christ.
             There
             was
             likewise
             in
             the
             auntient
             Lawe
             a
             sweete
             composition
             ,
             which
             God
             defend
             should
             be
             employed
             in
             anie
             other
             thing
             then
             in
             the
             divine
             service
             .
             The
             Divel
             hath
             sought
             to
             counterfet
             all
             these
             things
             after
             his
             manner
             ,
             as
             hee
             hath
             accustomed
             ,
             having
             to
             this
             end
             invented
             things
             so
             fowle
             and
             filthie
             ,
             whereby
             they
             discover
             we●
             who
             is
             the
             Author
             .
             The
             priests
             of
             the
             idolles
             in
             Mexico
             were
             annoynted
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             they
             annointed
             the
             body
             from
             the
             foote
             to
             the
             head
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             haire
             likewise
             ,
             
             which
             hung
             like
             tresses
             ,
             or
             a
             horse
             mane
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             applyed
             this
             vnction
             wet
             and
             moyst
             .
             Their
             haire
             grew
             so
             ,
             as
             in
             time
             it
             hung
             downe
             to
             their
             hammes
             ,
             so
             heavily
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             troublesome
             for
             them
             to
             beare
             it
             ,
             for
             they
             did
             never
             cut
             it
             ,
             vntill
             they
             died
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             were
             dispensed
             with
             for
             their
             great
             age
             ,
             or
             being
             employed
             in
             governments
             or
             some
             honorable
             charge
             in
             the
             commonwealth
             .
             They
             carried
             their
             haire
             in
             tresses
             ,
             of
             sixe
             fingers
             breadth
             ,
             which
             they
             died
             blacke
             with
             the
             fume
             of
             sapine
             ,
             or
             firre
             trees
             ,
             or
             rosine
             ;
             for
             in
             all
             Antiquitie
             it
             hath
             bin
             an
             offring
             they
             made
             vnto
             their
             idolls
             ,
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             it
             was
             much
             esteemed
             and
             reverenced
             .
             They
             were
             alwayes
             died
             with
             this
             tincture
             from
             the
             foote
             to
             the
             head
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             were
             like
             vnto
             shining
             Negroes
             ,
             and
             that
             was
             their
             ordinary
             vnction
             :
             yet
             whenas
             they
             went
             to
             sacrifice
             and
             give
             incense
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             or
             on
             the
             tops
             thereof
             ,
             or
             in
             any
             darke
             and
             obscure
             caves
             ,
             where
             their
             idolles
             were
             ,
             they
             vsed
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             vn●tion
             very
             different
             ,
             doing
             certaine
             ceremonies
             to
             take
             away
             feare
             ,
             and
             to
             give
             them
             courage
             .
             This
             vnction
             was
             made
             with
             diverse
             little
             venomous
             beastes
             ,
             as
             spiders
             ,
             scorpions
             ,
             palmers
             ,
             salamanders
             and
             vipers
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             boyes
             in
             the
             Colledges
             tooke
             and
             gathered
             together
             ,
             wherein
             they
             were
             so
             expert
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             alwayes
             furnished
             when
             the
             Priestes
             called
             for
             them
             .
             The
             chiefe
             care
             of
             these
             boyes
             was
             ,
             to
             hunt
             after
             these
             beasts
             ;
             if
             they
             went
             any
             other
             way
             ,
             and
             by
             chaunce
             met
             with
             any
             of
             these
             beasts
             ,
             they
             stayed
             to
             take
             them
             ,
             with
             as
             great
             paine
             ,
             as
             if
             their
             lives
             depended
             thereon
             .
             By
             the
             reason
             whereof
             the
             Indians
             commonly
             feared
             not
             these
             venomous
             beasts
             ,
             making
             no
             more
             accomp●
             than
             if
             they
             were
             not
             so
             ,
             having
             beene
             all
             bred
             in
             this
             exercise
             .
             To
             make
             an
             ointment
             of
             these
             beastes
             ,
             they
             
             took
             them
             all
             together
             ,
             and
             burnt
             them
             vpon
             the
             h●rt●
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             which
             was
             before
             the
             Altare
             ,
             vntill
             they
             were
             consumed
             to
             ashes
             :
             then
             did
             they
             put
             them
             in
             morters
             with
             much
             Tobacco
             or
             Petum
             (
             being
             an
             hearbe
             that
             Nation
             vseth
             much
             ,
             to
             benumme
             the
             flesh
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             feele
             ●heir
             travell
             )
             with
             the
             which
             they
             mingle
             the
             ashes
             ,
             making
             them
             loose
             their
             force
             ;
             they
             did
             likewise
             mingle
             with
             these
             ashes
             ,
             scorpions
             ,
             spiders
             and
             palmers
             alive
             ,
             mingling
             all
             together
             ,
             then
             did
             they
             put
             to
             it
             a
             certaine
             seede
             being
             grownd
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Ololuchqui
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Indians
             make
             a
             drinke
             to
             see
             visions
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             vertue
             of
             this
             hearbe
             is
             to
             deprive
             man
             of
             sence
             .
             They
             did
             likewise
             grinde
             with
             these
             ashes
             blacke
             and
             hairie
             wormes
             ,
             whose
             haire
             only
             is
             venomous
             ,
             all
             which
             they
             mingled
             together
             with
             blacke
             ,
             or
             the
             fume
             of
             rosine
             ,
             putting
             it
             in
             small
             po●
             ,
             which
             they
             set
             before
             their
             god
             ,
             saying
             it
             was
             his
             mea●e
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             called
             it
             a
             divine
             meate
             .
             By
             mea●●
             of
             this
             oyntment
             they
             became
             witches
             ,
             and
             did
             see
             and
             speake
             with
             the
             Divell
             .
             The
             priestes
             beeing
             slubbered
             with
             this
             oyntment
             ,
             lost
             all
             feare
             ,
             putting
             on
             a
             spirit
             of
             cruelty
             .
             By
             reason
             whereof
             they
             did
             very
             boldely
             kill
             men
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             going
             all
             alone
             in
             the
             night
             to
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             into
             obscure
             caves
             ,
             contemning
             all
             wilde
             beasts
             ,
             and
             holding
             it
             for
             certayne
             and
             approved
             ,
             that
             both
             lions
             ,
             tigres
             ,
             serpents
             ,
             and
             other
             furious
             beasts
             which
             breede
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             forrests
             ,
             fledde
             from
             them
             ,
             by
             the
             vertue
             of
             this
             Petum
             of
             their
             god
             .
          
           
             And
             in
             trueth
             though
             this
             Petum
             had
             no
             power
             to
             make
             them
             flie
             ,
             yet
             was
             the
             Divelles
             picture
             sufficient
             whereinto
             they
             were
             transformed
             .
             This
             Petum
             did
             also
             serve
             to
             cure
             the
             sicke
             ,
             and
             for
             children
             ;
             and
             therfore
             
             〈◊〉
             called
             it
             the
             Divine
             Physicke
             and
             so
             they
             came
             fro●
             all
             partes
             to
             the
             superiors
             and
             priests
             ,
             as
             to
             their
             saviors
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             apply
             this
             divine
             physicke
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             anoynted
             those
             parts
             that
             were
             grieved
             .
             They
             said
             that
             they
             felt
             heereby
             a
             notable
             case
             ,
             which
             might
             be
             ,
             for
             that
             Tobacco
             and
             Ololuchqui
             have
             this
             propertie
             of
             themselves
             ,
             to
             benumme
             the
             flesh
             ,
             being
             applied
             in
             maner
             of
             an
             emplaister
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             by
             a
             stronger
             reason
             being
             mingled
             with
             poysons
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             it
             did
             appease
             and
             benumme
             the
             paine
             ,
             they
             helde
             it
             for
             an
             effect
             of
             health
             ,
             and
             a
             divine
             virtue
             .
             And
             therefore
             rann●
             they
             to
             these
             priests
             as
             to
             holy
             men
             ,
             who
             kept
             the
             blind
             and
             ignorant
             in
             this
             error
             ,
             perswading
             them
             what
             they
             pleased
             ,
             and
             making
             them
             runne
             after
             their
             inventions
             and
             divellish
             ceremonies
             ,
             their
             authority
             being
             such
             ,
             as
             their
             wordes
             were
             sufficient
             to
             induce
             beliefe
             as
             an
             article
             of
             their
             faith
             .
             And
             thus
             made
             they
             a
             thousand
             superstitions
             among
             the
             vulgar
             people
             ,
             in
             their
             maner
             of
             offering
             incense
             ,
             in
             cutting
             their
             haire
             ,
             tying
             small
             flowers
             about
             their
             necks
             ,
             and
             strings
             with
             small
             bones
             of
             snakes
             ,
             commaunding
             them
             to
             bathe
             at
             a
             certaine
             time
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             should
             watch
             all
             night
             at
             the
             harth
             ,
             lest
             the
             fire
             should
             die
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             eate
             no
             other
             bread
             but
             that
             which
             had
             bin
             offered
             to
             their
             gods
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             vpon
             any
             occasion
             repaire
             vnto
             their
             witches
             ,
             who
             with
             certaine
             graines
             tolde
             fortunes
             ,
             and
             divined
             ,
             looking
             into
             keelers
             and
             pailes
             full
             of
             water
             .
             The
             sorcerers
             and
             ministers
             of
             the
             divell
             vsed
             much
             to
             besmere
             themselves
             .
             There
             were
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             these
             witches
             ,
             divines
             ,
             enchanters
             ,
             and
             other
             false
             prophets
             .
             There
             remaines
             yet
             at
             this
             day
             of
             this
             infection
             ,
             althogh
             they
             be
             secret
             ,
             not
             daring
             publikely
             to
             exercise
             their
             sacrileges
             ,
             divelish
             ceremonies
             &
             superstitions
             ,
             but
             their
             
             abuses
             and
             wickednes
             are
             discovered
             more
             at
             large
             and
             particularly
             in
             the
             confessions
             made
             by
             the
             Prelates
             of
             Peru.
             
          
           
             There
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             sorcerers
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             allowed
             by
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             it
             were
             sooth-saiers
             ,
             they
             take
             vpon
             them
             what
             forme
             and
             figure
             they
             please
             ,
             flying
             farre
             through
             the
             aire
             in
             a
             short
             time
             ,
             beholding
             all
             that
             was
             done
             .
             They
             talke
             with
             the
             Divell
             ,
             who
             answereth
             them
             in
             certaine
             stones
             or
             other
             things
             which
             they
             reverence
             much
             .
             They
             serve
             as
             coniurers
             ,
             to
             tell
             what
             hath
             passed
             in
             the
             farthest
             partes
             ,
             before
             any
             newes
             can
             come
             .
             As
             it
             hath
             chanced
             since
             the
             Spaniardes
             arrived
             there
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             distance
             of
             two
             or
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             ,
             they
             have
             knowne
             the
             mutinies
             ,
             battailes
             ,
             rebellions
             ,
             and
             deaths
             ,
             both
             of
             tyrants
             ,
             and
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Kings
             partie
             ,
             and
             of
             private
             men
             ,
             the
             which
             have
             beene
             knowne
             the
             same
             day
             they
             chanced
             ,
             or
             the
             day
             after
             ,
             a
             thing
             impossible
             by
             the
             course
             of
             nature
             .
             To
             worke
             this
             divination
             ,
             they
             shut
             themselves
             into
             a
             house
             ,
             &
             became
             drunk
             vntil
             they
             lost
             their
             sences
             ,
             a
             day
             after
             they
             answered
             to
             that
             which
             was
             demanded
             .
             Some
             affirme
             they
             vse
             certaine
             vnctions
             The
             Indians
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             old
             women
             do
             commonly
             vse
             this
             office
             of
             witch-craft
             ,
             &
             specially
             those
             of
             one
             Province
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Coaillo
             ,
             and
             of
             another
             towne
             called
             Manchey
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Province
             of
             Guarochiri
             .
             They
             likewise
             shew
             what
             is
             become
             of
             things
             stolne
             and
             lost
             .
             There
             are
             of
             these
             kindes
             of
             Sorcerers
             in
             all
             partes
             ,
             to
             whom
             commonly
             doe
             come
             the
             Anacona●●
             ,
             and
             Cyva
             ,
             which
             serve
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             have
             lost
             any
             thing
             of
             their
             masters
             ,
             or
             wh●n
             they
             desire
             to
             know
             the
             successe
             of
             things
             past
             or
             to
             come
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             goe
             to
             the
             Spaniardes
             citties
             for
             their
             private
             
             affaires
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             publike
             ,
             they
             demaund
             if
             their
             voyage
             shall
             be
             prosperous
             ,
             if
             they
             shall
             be
             sicke
             ,
             if
             they
             shall
             die
             ,
             or
             returne
             safe
             ,
             if
             they
             shall
             obtaine
             that
             which
             they
             pretend
             :
             and
             the
             witches
             or
             coniurers
             answer
             ,
             yea
             ,
             or
             no
             ,
             having
             first
             spoken
             with
             the
             Divell
             ,
             in
             an
             obscure
             place
             :
             so
             as
             these
             Anaconas
             do
             well
             heare
             the
             sound
             of
             the
             voyce
             ,
             but
             they
             see
             not
             to
             whom
             these
             coniurers
             speake
             ,
             neither
             do
             they
             vnderstand
             what
             they
             say
             .
             They
             make
             a
             thousand
             ceremonies
             and
             sacrifices
             to
             this
             effect
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             mocke
             the
             Divell
             and
             grow
             exceeding
             drunke
             ,
             for
             the
             doing
             whereof
             ,
             they
             particularly
             vse
             an
             hearbe
             called
             Villea
             ,
             the
             iuyce
             whereof
             they
             mingle
             with
             their
             Chica
             ,
             or
             take
             it
             in
             some
             other
             sort
             ,
             whereby
             we
             may
             see
             how
             miserable
             they
             are
             ,
             that
             have
             for
             their
             masters
             ,
             the
             ministers
             of
             him
             whose
             office
             is
             to
             deceive
             .
             It
             is
             manifest
             that
             nothing
             doth
             so
             much
             let
             the
             Indians
             from
             receiving
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             holy
             Gospel
             ,
             and
             to
             persever
             therein
             ,
             as
             the
             conferrence
             with
             these
             witches
             ,
             whereof
             there
             have
             bin
             ,
             and
             are
             still
             ,
             great
             numbers
             ,
             although
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             diligence
             of
             the
             Prelates
             and
             Priestes
             ,
             they
             decrease
             ,
             and
             are
             not
             so
             hurtefull
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             have
             beene
             converted
             and
             preached
             publikely
             ,
             discovering
             and
             blaming
             themselves
             ,
             their
             errors
             and
             deceites
             ,
             and
             manifesting
             their
             devises
             and
             lies
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             have
             seene
             great
             effects
             :
             as
             also
             we
             vnderstand
             by
             letters
             from
             Iappon
             ,
             that
             the
             like
             hath
             arrived
             in
             those
             parts
             :
             all
             to
             the
             glory
             and
             honour
             of
             our
             Lord
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             other
             Ceremonies
             and
             Customes
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             which
             are
             like
             vnto
             ours
             .
             
               CHAP.
               27.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Indians
             had
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             other
             ceremonies
             and
             customes
             ,
             which
             resembled
             to
             the
             
             ancient
             law
             of
             Moses
             ,
             and
             some
             to
             those
             which
             the
             Moores
             vse
             ,
             and
             some
             approached
             neere
             to
             the
             law
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             as
             their
             bathes
             or
             Opacuna
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             :
             they
             did
             wash
             themselves
             in
             water
             ,
             to
             clense
             them
             from
             their
             sins
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             had
             also
             amongst
             them
             a
             kinde
             of
             baptisme
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             did
             with
             ceremony
             ,
             cutting
             the
             eares
             and
             members
             of
             yong
             children
             new
             borne
             ,
             counterfaiting
             in
             some
             sort
             the
             circumcision
             of
             the
             Iewes
             .
             This
             ceremony
             was
             done
             principally
             to
             the
             sonnes
             of
             Kings
             and
             Noblemen
             :
             presently
             vpon
             their
             birth
             the
             priestes
             did
             wash
             them
             ,
             and
             did
             put
             a
             little
             sword
             in
             the
             right
             hand
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             left
             a
             target
             .
             And
             to
             the
             children
             of
             the
             vulgar
             sort
             ,
             they
             put
             the
             markes
             of
             their
             offices
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             daughters
             instruments
             to
             spinne
             ,
             knit
             ,
             and
             labour
             .
             This
             ceremony
             continued
             foure
             daies
             ,
             being
             made
             before
             some
             idoll
             .
             They
             contracted
             mariage
             after
             their
             maner
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Licentiate
             Pollo
             hath
             written
             a
             whole
             Treatise
             ,
             and
             I
             will
             speake
             somewhat
             thereon
             heereafter
             .
             In
             other
             things
             their
             customes
             and
             ceremonies
             have
             some
             shew
             of
             reason
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             were
             married
             by
             the
             handes
             of
             their
             priestes
             in
             this
             sort
             .
             The
             Bridegroome
             and
             the
             Bride
             stoode
             together
             before
             the
             priest
             ,
             who
             tooke
             them
             by
             the
             hands
             asking
             them
             if
             they
             would
             marrie
             ,
             then
             having
             vnderstoode
             their
             willes
             ,
             hee
             tooke
             a
             corner
             of
             the
             vaile
             wherewith
             the
             woman
             had
             her
             head
             covered
             ,
             and
             a
             corner
             of
             the
             mans
             gowne
             the
             which
             he
             tied
             together
             on
             a
             knot
             ,
             and
             so
             led
             them
             thus
             tied
             to
             the
             Bridegroomes
             house
             ,
             where
             there
             was
             a
             harth
             kindled
             ,
             and
             then
             he
             caused
             the
             wife
             to
             go
             seven
             times
             about
             the
             harth
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             married
             couple
             sate
             downe
             together
             ,
             and
             thus
             was
             the
             mariage
             contracted
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             were
             very
             iealous
             of
             the
             integritie
             of
             their
             
             wives
             :
             so
             as
             if
             they
             found
             they
             were
             not
             as
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             they
             knew
             eyther
             by
             signes
             or
             dishonest
             wordes
             ,
             )
             they
             presently
             gave
             notice
             thereof
             to
             their
             fathers
             and
             kinsfolkes
             of
             their
             wives
             ,
             to
             their
             great
             shame
             and
             dishonor
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             had
             not
             kept
             good
             guarde
             over
             them
             .
             But
             they
             did
             much
             honour
             and
             respect
             such
             as
             lived
             chastely
             ,
             making
             them
             great
             banquttes
             ,
             and
             giving
             great
             presentes
             both
             to
             her
             and
             to
             her
             kinsfolkes
             .
             For
             this
             occasion
             they
             made
             great
             offerings
             to
             their
             gods
             ,
             and
             a
             solemne
             banket
             in
             the
             house
             of
             the
             wife
             ,
             and
             another
             in
             the
             husbands
             .
             When
             they
             went
             to
             house
             they
             made
             an
             inventory
             of
             all
             the
             man
             and
             wife
             brought
             together
             ,
             of
             provisions
             for
             the
             house
             ,
             of
             land
             ,
             of
             iewells
             and
             ornaments
             ,
             which
             inventories
             every
             father
             kept
             ,
             for
             if
             it
             chanced
             they
             made
             any
             devorce
             ,
             (
             as
             it
             was
             common
             amongest
             them
             when
             they
             agree
             not
             ,
             )
             they
             divided
             their
             goods
             according
             to
             the
             portion
             that
             every
             one
             brought
             ,
             every
             one
             having
             libertie
             in
             such
             a
             case
             ,
             to
             marry
             whom●
             they
             pleased
             :
             and
             they
             gave
             the
             daughters
             to
             the
             wife
             ,
             and
             the
             sonnes
             to
             the
             husband
             .
             It
             was
             defended
             vpon
             paine
             of
             death
             ,
             not
             to
             marry
             againe
             together
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             observed
             very
             strictly
             .
             And
             although
             it
             seeme
             that
             many
             of
             their
             ceremonies
             agree
             with
             ours
             ,
             yet
             differ
             they
             much
             for
             the
             great
             abhomination
             they
             mingle
             therewithall
             .
             It
             is
             common
             and
             generall
             to
             have
             vsually
             one
             of
             these
             three
             things
             ,
             either
             cruelty
             ,
             filthines
             ,
             or
             slouth
             :
             for
             all
             their
             ceremonies
             were
             cruell
             and
             hurtefull
             ,
             as
             to
             kill
             men
             and
             to
             spill
             blood
             ,
             are
             filthy
             and
             beastly
             ,
             as
             to
             eate
             and
             drinke
             to
             the
             name
             of
             their
             Idolls
             ,
             and
             also
             to
             pisse
             in
             the
             honour
             of
             them
             ,
             carrying
             them
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             to
             annoint
             and
             besmeere
             themselves
             filthily
             ,
             and
             to
             do
             a
             thousand
             sortes
             of
             villanies
             ,
             
             which
             were
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             vaine
             ,
             ridiculous
             ,
             and
             idle
             ,
             and
             more
             like
             the
             actions
             of
             children
             ,
             then
             of
             men
             .
             The
             cause
             thereof
             is
             the
             very
             condition
             of
             this
             wic●ed
             spirit
             ,
             whose
             intention
             is
             alwaies
             to
             do
             ill
             ,
             provoking
             men
             still
             to
             murthers
             and
             filthines
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             least
             to
             vanities
             and
             fruitelesse
             actions
             ,
             the
             which
             every
             man
             may
             well
             know
             ,
             if
             he
             duly
             consider
             the
             behaviour
             and
             actions
             of
             the
             Divell
             ,
             towardes
             those
             he
             sets
             to
             deceive
             .
             For
             in
             all
             his
             illusions
             we
             finde
             a
             mixture
             of
             these
             three
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             of
             one
             of
             them
             .
             The
             Indians
             themselves
             (
             since
             they
             came
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             our
             faith
             ,
             )
             laugh
             and
             mocke
             at
             these
             fooleries
             and
             toyes
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             their
             gods
             held
             them
             busied
             ,
             whom
             they
             served
             more
             for
             feare
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             hurte
             them
             ,
             in
             not
             obaying
             them
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             then
             for
             any
             love
             they
             bare
             them
             .
             Although
             some
             ,
             yea
             ,
             very
             many
             lived
             ,
             abused
             and
             deceived
             ,
             with
             the
             vaine
             hope
             of
             temporall
             goods
             ,
             for
             of
             the
             eternall
             they
             had
             no
             knowledge
             .
             And
             whereas
             the
             temporall
             power
             was
             greatest
             ,
             there
             superstition
             hath
             most
             increased
             ;
             as
             we
             see
             in
             the
             Realmes
             of
             Mexico
             and
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             incredible
             to
             see
             the
             number
             of
             idolls
             they
             had
             :
             for
             within
             the
             citty
             of
             Mexico
             there
             were
             above
             three
             hundred
             
               Mango
               Ingua
               Yupangu●
            
             ,
             amongst
             the
             Kings
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             was
             hee
             that
             most
             augmented
             the
             service
             of
             their
             idolls
             ,
             inventing
             a
             thousand
             kindes
             of
             sacrifices
             ,
             feasts
             ,
             and
             ceremonies
             .
             The
             like
             did
             King
             Iscoalt
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             who
             was
             the
             fourth
             king
             .
             There
             was
             also
             a
             great
             number
             of
             superstitions
             and
             sacrifices
             in
             other
             Nations
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Guatimala
             ,
             at
             the
             Ilands
             in
             the
             new
             Kingdome
             ,
             in
             the
             Province
             of
             Chille
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             were
             like
             Common-wealthes
             and
             Comminalties
             .
             But
             it
             was
             nothing
             〈◊〉
             respect
             of
             Mexico
             and
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             Sathan
             was
             in
             ●ome
             ,
             
             or
             in
             his
             Ierusalem
             ,
             vntill
             he
             was
             cast
             out
             against
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             Crosse
             planted
             in
             his
             place
             ,
             and
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Christ
             our
             God
             occupied
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             tyrant
             did
             vsurpe
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             some
             Feast
             celebrated
             by
             them
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             Divell
             would
             imitate
             the
             mysterie
             of
             the
             holy
             Trinitie
             .
             
               CHAP.
               28.
            
             
          
           
             TO
             conclude
             that
             which
             concernes
             Religion
             ,
             there
             restes
             something
             to
             speake
             of
             the
             feasts
             and
             solemnities
             which
             the
             Indians
             did
             celebrate
             ,
             the
             which
             (
             for
             that
             they
             are
             divers
             and
             many
             )
             cannot
             be
             all
             specified
             .
             The
             Ingnas
             Lords
             of
             Peru
             ,
             had
             two
             kindes
             of
             feasts
             ,
             some
             were
             ordinarie
             ,
             which
             fell
             out
             in
             certaine
             moneths
             ,
             of
             the
             yeere
             :
             and
             others
             extraordinary
             ,
             which
             were
             for
             certaine
             causes
             of
             importance
             ,
             as
             when
             they
             did
             crowne
             a
             new
             King
             ,
             when
             they
             beganne
             some
             warre
             of
             importance
             ,
             when
             they
             had
             any
             great
             neede
             of
             water
             or
             drought
             ,
             or
             other
             like
             things
             .
             For
             the
             ordinary
             feasts
             ,
             we
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             every
             moneth
             of
             the
             yeare
             they
             made
             feasts
             ,
             and
             divers
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             although
             all
             of
             them
             had
             this
             alike
             ,
             that
             they
             offered
             a
             hundred
             sheepe
             ,
             yet
             in
             colour
             ,
             and
             in
             forme
             ,
             they
             are
             very
             divers
             .
             In
             the
             first
             moneth
             which
             they
             call
             Rayme
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             moneth
             of
             December
             ,
             they
             made
             their
             first
             feast
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             principall
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             they
             called
             it
             Capacrayme
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             rich
             and
             principall
             feast
             .
             In
             this
             feast
             they
             offered
             a
             great
             number
             of
             sheepe
             and
             lambs
             in
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             they
             burnt
             them
             with
             sweete
             wood
             ,
             then
             they
             caused
             gold
             and
             silver
             to
             be
             brought
             vpon
             certaine
             sheepe
             ,
             setting
             vppon
             them
             three
             Images
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             and
             three
             of
             the
             
             thunder
             ,
             the
             father
             ,
             the
             sonne
             ,
             and
             the
             brother
             .
             In
             these
             feasts
             they
             dedicated
             the
             Inguas
             children
             ,
             putting
             the
             Guaras
             or
             ensignes
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             they
             pierced
             their
             eares
             :
             then
             some
             olde
             man
             did
             whip
             them
             with
             slings
             ,
             and
             annoynted
             their
             faces
             with
             blood
             ,
             all
             in
             signe
             that
             they
             should
             be
             true
             Knights
             to
             the
             Ingua
             .
             No
             stranger
             might
             remaine
             in
             Cusco
             during
             this
             moneth
             ,
             and
             this
             feast
             ,
             but
             at
             the
             end
             thereof
             they
             entred
             ,
             and
             they
             gave
             vnto
             them
             peeces
             of
             the
             paste
             of
             mays
             with
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             eate
             in
             signe
             of
             confederation
             with
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             as
             hath
             bin
             said
             before
             .
             It
             is
             strange
             that
             the
             Divell
             after
             his
             manner
             hath
             brought
             a
             trinitie
             into
             idolatry
             ,
             for
             the
             three
             images
             of
             the
             Sunne
             called
             
               Apomti
               ,
               Churunti
            
             ,
             and
             Intiquaoqui
             which
             signifieth
             father
             and
             lord
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             sonne
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             the
             brother
             Sunne
             .
             In
             the
             like
             maner
             they
             named
             the
             three
             Images
             of
             Chuquilla
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             God
             that
             rules
             in
             the
             region
             of
             the
             aire
             ,
             where
             it
             thunders
             ,
             raines
             and
             snows
             .
             I
             remember
             ,
             that
             being
             in
             Cuquisaca
             ,
             an
             honourable
             priest
             shewed
             me
             an
             information
             ,
             which
             I
             had
             long
             in
             my
             handes
             ,
             where
             it
             was
             prooved
             that
             there
             was
             a
             certaine
             Guaca
             or
             Oratory
             ,
             whereas
             the
             Indians
             did
             worship
             an
             idoll
             called
             Tangatanga
             ,
             which
             they
             saide
             was
             one
             in
             three
             ,
             and
             three
             in
             one
             .
             And
             as
             this
             Priest
             stood
             amazed
             the
             reat
             ,
             I
             saide
             that
             the
             Divell
             by
             his
             infernall
             and
             obstinate
             pride
             (
             whereby
             he
             alwayes
             pretendes
             to
             make
             himselfe
             God
             ,
             )
             did
             steale
             all
             that
             he
             could
             from
             the
             trueth
             ,
             to
             imploy
             it
             in
             his
             lyings
             and
             deceits
             .
             Comming
             then
             to
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             second
             moneth
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Camey
             ,
             besides
             the
             sacrifices
             which
             they
             made
             ,
             they
             did
             cast
             the
             ashes
             into
             the
             river
             ,
             following
             five
             or
             sixe
             leagues
             after
             ,
             praying
             it
             to
             carry
             them
             into
             the
             sea
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Virochoca
             should
             there
             receive
             this
             
             present
             .
             In
             the
             third
             ,
             fourth
             and
             fift
             moneth
             ,
             they
             offered
             a
             hundred
             blacke
             sheepe
             ,
             speckled
             ,
             and
             grey
             ,
             with
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             I
             omitte
             for
             being
             too
             tedious
             .
             The
             ●ixt
             moneth
             is
             called
             Hat●●cuZ
             
               qui
               Aymorey
            
             ,
             which
             answereth
             to
             Maie
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             sacrificed
             a
             hundred
             sheepe
             more
             ,
             of
             all
             colours
             :
             in
             this
             moone
             and
             moneth
             ,
             which
             is
             when
             they
             bring
             Maie
             from
             the
             fieldes
             into
             the
             house
             ,
             they
             made
             a
             feast
             ,
             which
             is
             yet
             very
             vsuall
             among
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             they
             doe
             call
             it
             Aymorey
             .
          
           
             This
             feast
             is
             made
             comming
             from
             the
             Chacra
             or
             farme
             vnto
             the
             house
             ,
             saying
             certaine
             songs
             ,
             and
             praying
             that
             the
             Mays
             may
             long
             continue
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Mamacora
             .
             They
             take
             a
             certaine
             portion
             of
             the
             most
             fruitefull
             of
             the
             Mays
             that
             growes
             in
             their
             farmes
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             put
             in
             a
             certaine
             grenier
             which
             they
             doe
             call
             Pirua
             ,
             with
             certaine
             ceremonies
             ,
             watching
             three
             nightes
             :
             they
             put
             this
             Mays
             in
             the
             richest
             garments
             they
             have
             ,
             and
             beeing
             thus
             wrapped
             and
             dressed
             ,
             they
             worship
             this
             Pirua
             ,
             and
             hold
             it
             in
             great
             veneration
             ,
             saying
             it
             is
             the
             mother
             of
             the
             mays
             of
             their
             inheritances
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             this
             means
             the
             mays
             augments
             &
             is
             preserved
             .
             In
             this
             moneth
             they
             make
             a
             particular
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             the
             witches
             demaund
             of
             this
             Pirua
             ,
             if
             it
             hath
             strength
             sufficient
             to
             continue
             vntill
             the
             next
             yeare
             :
             and
             if
             it
             answers
             no
             ,
             then
             they
             carry
             this
             Mays
             to
             the
             farme
             to
             burne
             ,
             whence
             they
             brought
             it
             ,
             according
             to
             every
             mans
             power
             ;
             then
             make
             they
             another
             Pirua
             ,
             with
             the
             same
             ceremonies
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             they
             renue
             it
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             seede
             of
             Mays
             may
             not
             perish
             ,
             and
             if
             it
             answers
             that
             it
             hath
             force
             sufficient
             to
             last
             longer
             ,
             they
             leave
             it
             vntill
             the
             next
             yeare
             .
             This
             foolish
             vanitie
             continueth
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             very
             common
             amongest
             the
             Indians
             to
             
             have
             these
             Piruas
             ,
             &
             to
             make
             the
             feast
             of
             Aymorey
             .
             The
             seaventh
             moneth
             answereth
             to
             Iune
             ,
             and
             is
             called
             A●caycuZ
             
               qui
               Intiraymi
            
             ,
             in
             it
             they
             made
             the
             feast
             that
             is
             called
             Intiraymi
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             sacrificed
             a
             hundred
             sheepe
             called
             Guanacos
             ,
             and
             saide
             it
             was
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             In
             this
             moneth
             they
             made
             many
             Images
             of
             Quinua
             wood
             carved
             ,
             all
             attired
             with
             rich
             garmentes
             ,
             and
             they
             made
             their
             dancings
             which
             they
             do
             call
             Cayo
             .
             At
             this
             feast
             they
             cast
             flowers
             in
             the
             high
             wayes
             ,
             and
             thither
             the
             Indians
             came
             painted
             ,
             and
             their
             noblemen
             had
             small
             plates
             of
             golde
             vpon
             their
             beards
             ,
             and
             all
             did
             sing
             ;
             wee
             must
             vnderstand
             that
             this
             feast
             falleth
             almost
             at
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Christians
             observe
             the
             solempnitie
             of
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             which
             doth
             resemble
             it
             in
             some
             sort
             ,
             as
             in
             dauncing
             ,
             singing
             and
             representations
             .
             And
             for
             this
             cause
             there
             hath
             beene
             ,
             and
             is
             yet
             among
             the
             Indians
             ,
             which
             celebrated
             a
             feast
             somewhat
             like
             to
             ours
             of
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             )
             many
             superstitions
             in
             celebrating
             this
             ancient
             feast
             of
             Inti●aymi
             .
             The
             eight
             month
             is
             called
             
               Chahua
               Huarqui
            
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             did
             burne
             a
             hundred
             sheepe
             more
             ,
             all
             grey
             ,
             of
             the
             colour
             of
             Viscacha
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             former
             order
             ,
             which
             month
             doth
             answer
             to
             our
             Iuly
             .
             The
             ninth
             moneth
             was
             called
             Yapaguis
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             burnt
             an
             hundred
             sheepe
             more
             ,
             of
             a
             chesnut
             colour
             ;
             and
             they
             do
             likewise
             kill
             and
             burne
             a
             thousand
             Cuyes
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             frost
             ,
             the
             ayre
             ,
             the
             water
             ,
             nor
             the
             sunne
             should
             not
             hurt
             their
             farmes
             :
             and
             this
             moneth
             doth
             answer
             vnto
             August
             .
             The
             tenth
             moneth
             was
             called
             Coyarami
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             burnt
             a
             hundred
             white
             sheepe
             that
             had
             fleeces
             .
             In
             this
             month
             which
             answereth
             to
             September
             ,
             they
             made
             the
             feast
             called
             Situa
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             They
             assembled
             together
             the
             first
             day
             of
             the
             moone
             before
             the
             rising
             thereof
             :
             and
             
             in
             seeing
             it
             they
             cryed
             aloude
             ,
             carrying
             torches
             in
             their
             handes
             ,
             and
             saying
             ,
             Let
             all
             harme
             goe
             away
             ,
             striking
             one
             an
             other
             with
             their
             torches
             .
             They
             that
             did
             this
             ,
             were
             called
             Panconcos
             :
             which
             being
             doone
             ,
             they
             went
             to
             the
             common
             bath
             ,
             to
             the
             rivers
             and
             fountaines
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             to
             his
             own
             bath
             ,
             setting
             themselves
             to
             drink
             foure
             dayes
             together
             .
             In
             this
             moneth
             the
             Mamacomas
             of
             the
             sunne
             made
             a
             great
             number
             of
             small
             loaves
             with
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             gave
             a
             peece
             to
             every
             stranger
             ;
             yea
             they
             sent
             to
             every
             Guaca
             throughout
             the
             realme
             ,
             and
             to
             many
             Curacas
             ,
             in
             signe
             of
             confederation
             and
             loyaltie
             to
             the
             Sunne
             and
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             as
             hath
             bin
             said
             .
          
           
             The
             bathes
             drunkennesse
             and
             some
             relickes
             of
             this
             feast
             Situa
             ,
             remaine
             even
             vnto
             this
             day
             ,
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             with
             the
             ceremonies
             a
             little
             different
             ,
             but
             yet
             very
             secretly
             ,
             for
             that
             these
             chiefe
             and
             principall
             feasts
             have
             ceased
             .
             The
             eleventh
             moneth
             
               Homaraymi
               Punchaiquis
            
             ,
             wherein
             they
             sacrificed
             a
             hundred
             sheepe
             more
             .
             And
             if
             they
             wanted
             water
             ,
             to
             procure
             raine
             ,
             they
             set
             a
             black
             sheepe
             tied
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             a
             plaine
             ,
             powring
             much
             Chica
             about
             it
             ,
             and
             giving
             it
             nothing
             to
             eate
             ,
             vntill
             it
             rained
             ,
             which
             is
             practised
             at
             this
             day
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             in
             the
             time
             of
             our
             October
             .
             The
             twelfth
             and
             last
             month
             was
             called
             Aymara
             ,
             wherein
             they
             did
             likewise
             sacrifice
             a
             hundred
             sheepe
             ,
             and
             made
             the
             feast
             called
             
               Raymicantara
               Rayquis
            
             .
             In
             this
             moneth
             which
             aunswered
             to
             our
             November
             ,
             they
             prepared
             what
             was
             necessary
             for
             the
             children
             that
             should
             be
             made
             novices
             ,
             the
             moneth
             following
             ,
             the
             children
             with
             the
             old
             men
             made
             a
             certaine
             shew
             ,
             with
             rounds
             and
             turnings
             :
             and
             this
             feast
             was
             called
             Ituraymi
             ,
             which
             commonly
             they
             make
             when
             it
             raines
             too
             much
             ,
             or
             too
             little
             ,
             or
             when
             there
             is
             a
             plague
             .
          
           
           
             Among
             the
             extraordinary
             feasts
             which
             were
             verymany
             ,
             the
             most
             famous
             was
             that
             which
             they
             called
             〈◊〉
             .
             This
             feast
             Ytu
             hath
             no
             prefixed
             time
             nor
             season
             ,
             but
             in
             time
             of
             necessitie
             .
             To
             prepare
             themselves
             thereunto
             ,
             all
             the
             people
             fasted
             two
             dayes
             ,
             during
             the
             which
             they
             did
             neyther
             company
             with
             their
             wives
             ,
             nor
             eate
             anie
             meate
             with
             salt
             or
             garlicke
             ,
             nor
             drinke
             any
             Chica
             .
             All
             did
             assemble
             together
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             where
             no
             straunger
             was
             admitted
             ,
             nor
             any
             beast
             :
             they
             had
             garments
             and
             ornaments
             ,
             which
             served
             onely
             for
             this
             feast
             .
             They
             marched
             very
             quietly
             in
             procession
             ,
             their
             heades
             covered
             with
             their
             vailes
             ,
             sounding
             of
             drummes
             ,
             without
             speaking
             one
             to
             another
             .
             This
             continued
             a
             day
             and
             a
             night
             ;
             then
             the
             day
             following
             they
             daunced
             and
             made
             good
             cheere
             for
             twoo
             dayes
             and
             two
             nights
             together
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             their
             prayer
             was
             accepted
             .
             And
             although
             that
             this
             feast
             is
             not
             vsed
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             with
             all
             this
             antient
             ceremony
             ,
             yet
             commonly
             they
             make
             another
             which
             is
             verie
             like
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Ayma
             ,
             with
             garmentes
             that
             serve
             onely
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             and
             they
             make
             this
             kind
             of
             procession
             with
             their
             Drummes
             ,
             having
             fasted
             before
             ,
             then
             after
             they
             make
             good
             cheere
             ,
             which
             they
             vsually
             doe
             in
             their
             vrgent
             necessities
             .
             And
             although
             the
             Indians
             forbeare
             to
             sacrifice
             beasts
             ,
             or
             other
             things
             publikely
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             hidden
             from
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             yet
             doe
             they
             still
             vse
             many
             ceremonies
             that
             have
             their
             beginnings
             from
             these
             feasts
             and
             auntient
             superstitions
             :
             for
             at
             this
             day
             they
             do
             covertly
             make
             this
             feast
             of
             Ytu
             ,
             at
             the
             dances
             of
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             in
             making
             the
             daunces
             of
             Lyamallama
             ,
             and
             of
             Guacon
             ,
             and
             of
             others
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             auntient
             ceremonies
             ,
             wherevntowe
             ought
             to
             take
             good
             regarde
             .
             They
             have
             made
             more
             large
             Discourses
             of
             that
             which
             concerneth
             this
             matte●
             
             for
             the
             necessary
             observation
             of
             the
             abuses
             and
             superstitions
             the
             Indians
             had
             in
             the
             time
             of
             their
             gentility
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             the
             Priestes
             and
             Curates
             may
             the
             better
             take
             heede
             .
             Let
             this
             suffice
             now
             to
             have
             treated
             of
             the
             exercise
             wherewith
             the
             divell
             held
             those
             superstitious
             nations
             occupied
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             against
             his
             will
             wee
             may
             see
             the
             difference
             there
             is
             betwixt
             light
             and
             darknes
             ,
             betwixt
             the
             trueth
             of
             Christ
             and
             the
             lies
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             although
             the
             ennemy
             of
             God
             and
             man
             hath
             laboured
             with
             all
             his
             devises
             to
             counterfet
             those
             things
             which
             are
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             feast
             of
             Iubilee
             which
             the
             Mexicaines
             celebrated
             .
             CHAP.
             29.
             
          
           
             THe
             Mexicaines
             have
             beene
             no
             lesse
             curious
             in
             their
             feasts
             and
             solemnities
             ,
             which
             were
             of
             small
             charge
             ,
             but
             of
             great
             effusion
             of
             mans
             blood
             .
             Wee
             have
             before
             spoken
             of
             the
             principall
             feast
             of
             VitZiliputZli
             ,
             after
             the
             which
             the
             feast
             of
             Tezcalipuca
             was
             most
             solempnized
             .
             This
             feast
             fell
             in
             Maie
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             Kalender
             they
             called
             it
             Tozcolt
             :
             it
             fell
             every
             foure
             yeeres
             with
             the
             feast
             of
             Penaunce
             ,
             where
             there
             was
             given
             full
             indulgence
             and
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             .
             In
             this
             day
             they
             did
             sacrifice
             a
             captive
             which
             resembled
             the
             idoll
             Tezcalipuca
             ,
             it
             was
             the
             nineteenth
             day
             of
             Maie
             :
             vpon
             the
             even
             of
             this
             feast
             ,
             the
             Noblemen
             came
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             bringing
             a
             new
             garment
             like
             vnto
             that
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Priest
             put
             vpon
             him
             ,
             having
             first
             taken
             off
             his
             other
             garments
             ,
             which
             they
             kept
             with
             as
             much
             ,
             or
             more
             reverence
             than
             we
             doe
             our
             ornaments
             .
             There
             were
             in
             the
             coffers
             of
             the
             idoll
             many
             ornaments
             ,
             iewelles
             ,
             earerings
             ,
             and
             other
             riches
             ,
             as
             bracelets
             and
             pretious
             feathers
             which
             served
             
             to
             no
             othervse
             ,
             but
             to
             be
             there
             ,
             and
             was
             worshipped
             as
             their
             god
             it selfe
             .
             Besides
             the
             garment
             wherewith
             they
             worshipped
             the
             idoll
             that
             day
             ,
             they
             put
             vpon
             him
             certaine
             ensignes
             of
             feathers
             ,
             with
             fannes
             ,
             shadowes
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             being
             thus
             attired
             and
             furnished
             ,
             they
             drew
             the
             curtaine
             or
             vaile
             from
             before
             the
             doore
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             he
             might
             be
             seene
             of
             all
             men
             :
             then
             came
             forth
             one
             of
             the
             chiefe
             of
             the
             temple
             ,
             attired
             like
             to
             the
             idoll
             ,
             carrying
             flowers
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             and
             a
             flute
             of
             earth
             ,
             having
             a
             very
             sharpe
             sound
             ,
             and
             turning
             towards
             the
             east
             ,
             he
             founded
             it
             ,
             and
             then
             looking
             to
             the
             west
             ,
             north
             and
             south
             he
             did
             the
             like
             .
             And
             after
             he
             had
             thus
             sounded
             towards
             the
             foure
             parts
             of
             the
             world
             (
             shewing
             that
             both
             they
             that
             were
             present
             and
             absent
             did
             heare
             him
             )
             hee
             put
             his
             finger
             into
             the
             aire
             ,
             and
             then
             gathered
             vp
             earth
             ,
             which
             he
             put
             in
             his
             mouth
             ,
             and
             did
             eate
             it
             in
             signe
             of
             adoration
             .
             The
             like
             did
             all
             they
             that
             were
             present
             ,
             and
             weeping
             ,
             they
             fell
             flat
             to
             the
             ground
             ,
             invocating
             the
             darkenesse
             of
             the
             night
             ,
             and
             the
             windes
             ,
             intreating
             them
             not
             to
             leave
             them
             ,
             nor
             to
             forget
             them
             ,
             or
             else
             to
             take
             away
             their
             lives
             ,
             and
             free
             them
             from
             the
             labors
             they
             indured
             therein
             .
             Theeves
             ,
             adulterers
             ,
             and
             murtherers
             ,
             and
             all
             others
             offendors
             had
             great
             feare
             and
             heavinesse
             ,
             whilest
             this
             flute
             sounded
             ;
             so
             as
             some
             could
             not
             dissemble
             nor
             hide
             their
             offences
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             they
             all
             demanded
             no
             other
             thing
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             but
             to
             have
             their
             offences
             concealed
             ,
             powring
             foorth
             many
             teares
             ,
             with
             great
             repentaunce
             and
             sorrow
             ,
             offering
             great
             store
             of
             incense
             to
             appease
             their
             gods
             .
             The
             couragious
             and
             valiant
             men
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             olde
             souldiers
             ,
             that
             followed
             the
             Arte
             of
             Warre
             ,
             hearing
             this
             flute
             ,
             demaunded
             with
             great
             devotion
             of
             God
             the
             Creator
             ,
             of
             the
             Lorde
             for
             whome
             wee
             live
             ,
             of
             the
             sunne
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             their
             gods
             ,
             
             that
             they
             would
             give
             them
             victorie
             against
             their
             ennemies
             ,
             and
             strength
             to
             take
             many
             captives
             ,
             therewith
             to
             honour
             their
             sacrifices
             .
             This
             ceremonie
             was
             doone
             ten
             dayes
             before
             the
             feast
             :
             During
             which
             tenne
             dayes
             the
             Priest
             did
             sound
             this
             flute
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             all
             might
             do
             this
             worship
             in
             eating
             of
             earth
             ,
             and
             demaund
             of
             their
             idol
             what
             they
             pleased
             :
             they
             every
             day
             made
             their
             praiers
             ,
             with
             their
             eyes
             lift
             vp
             to
             heaven
             ,
             and
             with
             sighs
             and
             groanings
             ,
             as
             men
             that
             were
             grieved
             for
             their
             sinnes
             and
             offences
             .
             Although
             this
             contrition
             was
             onelie
             for
             feare
             of
             the
             corporal
             punishment
             that
             was
             given
             them
             ,
             and
             not
             for
             any
             feare
             of
             the
             eternall
             ,
             for
             they
             certainely
             beleeved
             there
             was
             no
             such
             severe
             punishment
             in
             the
             other
             life
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             they
             offered
             themselves
             voluntarily
             to
             death
             ,
             holding
             opinion
             that
             it
             is
             to
             all
             men
             an
             assured
             rest
             .
             The
             first
             day
             of
             the
             feast
             of
             this
             idoll
             TeZcalipuca
             being
             come
             ,
             all
             they
             of
             the
             Citty
             assembled
             together
             in
             a
             court
             ,
             to
             celebrate
             likewise
             the
             feast
             of
             the
             Kalender
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             have
             already
             spoken
             ,
             which
             was
             called
             Toxcoalth
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             drie
             thing
             :
             which
             feast
             was
             not
             made
             to
             any
             other
             end
             ,
             but
             to
             demaund
             raine
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             that
             we
             solemnise
             the
             Rogations
             :
             and
             this
             feast
             was
             alwayes
             in
             Maie
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             time
             that
             they
             have
             most
             neede
             of
             raine
             in
             those
             countries
             .
             They
             beganne
             to
             celebrate
             it
             the
             ninth
             of
             Maie
             ,
             ending
             the
             nineteenth
             .
             The
             last
             day
             of
             the
             feast
             the
             Priestes
             drew
             foorth
             a
             litter
             well
             furnished
             with
             curtins
             and
             pendants
             of
             diverse
             fashions
             .
             This
             litter
             had
             so
             many
             armes
             to
             holde
             by
             as
             there
             were
             ministers
             to
             carry
             it
             .
             All
             which
             came
             forth
             besmeered
             with
             blacke
             and
             long
             haire
             ,
             halfe
             in
             tresses
             with
             white
             strings
             ,
             and
             attyred
             in
             the
             livery
             of
             the
             idoll
             .
             Vpon
             this
             litter
             they
             set
             the
             
             personage
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             appoynted
             for
             this
             feast
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             resemblance
             of
             their
             God
             TeZcalip●●●
             ,
             and
             taking
             it
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             they
             broght
             it
             openly
             to
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             staires
             :
             then
             came
             forth
             the
             yong
             men
             and
             maidens
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             carrying
             a
             great
             cord
             wreathed
             of
             chaines
             of
             roasted
             mays
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             they
             invironed
             the
             Litter
             ,
             putting
             a
             chaine
             of
             the
             same
             about
             the
             idolles
             necke
             ,
             and
             a
             garland
             vppon
             his
             head
             .
             They
             called
             the
             cord
             Toxcalt
             ,
             signifying
             the
             drought
             and
             barrennesse
             of
             the
             time
             .
             The
             yoong
             men
             came
             wrapped
             in
             redde
             curtines
             ,
             with
             garlands
             and
             chains
             of
             roasted
             mays
             .
             The
             maides
             were
             clothed
             in
             new
             garments
             ,
             wearing
             chaines
             about
             their
             neckes
             of
             roasted
             mays
             ;
             and
             vpon
             their
             heads
             myters
             made
             of
             rods
             covered
             with
             this
             mays
             ,
             they
             had
             their
             feete
             covered
             with
             feathers
             ,
             and
             their
             armes
             and
             cheekes
             painted
             .
             They
             brought
             much
             of
             this
             roasted
             mays
             ,
             and
             the
             chiefe
             men
             put
             it
             vpon
             their
             heads
             ,
             and
             about
             their
             neckes
             ,
             taking
             flowers
             in
             their
             handes
             .
             The
             idoll
             beeing
             placed
             in
             his
             litter
             ,
             they
             strewd
             round
             about
             a
             great
             quantitie
             of
             the
             boughes
             of
             Manguey
             ,
             the
             leaves
             whereof
             are
             large
             and
             pricking
             .
          
           
             This
             litter
             being
             set
             vpon
             the
             religious
             mens-shoulders
             ,
             they
             carryed
             it
             in
             procession
             within
             the
             circuite
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             twoo
             Priests
             marching
             before
             with
             censors
             ,
             giving
             often
             incense
             to
             the
             idoll
             ;
             and
             every
             time
             they
             gave
             incense
             ,
             they
             lifted
             vp
             their
             armes
             as
             high
             as
             they
             could
             to
             the
             idoll
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             they
             lifted
             vp
             their
             praiers
             to
             heaven
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             smoke
             ascended
             on
             high
             .
             Then
             all
             the
             people
             in
             the
             Court
             turned
             ▪
             round
             to
             the
             place
             whither
             the
             idoll
             went
             ,
             every
             one
             carrying
             in
             his
             hand
             new
             cords
             of
             the
             threed
             of
             manguey
             ,
             a
             fadome
             long
             ,
             with
             a
             knotte
             at
             the
             end
             ,
             and
             
             with
             them
             they
             whipped
             themselves
             vppon
             the
             shoulders
             ;
             even
             as
             they
             doe
             heere
             vppon
             holy
             Thurseday
             .
             All
             the
             walles
             of
             the
             Court
             and
             battlements
             were
             full
             of
             boughs
             and
             flowers
             ,
             so
             fresh
             and
             pleasaunt
             ,
             as
             it
             did
             give
             a
             great
             contentment
             .
             This
             procession
             being
             ended
             ,
             they
             brought
             the
             idoll
             to
             his
             vsual
             place
             of
             abode
             ,
             then
             came
             a
             great
             multitude
             of
             people
             with
             flowres
             ,
             dressed
             in
             diverse
             sortes
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             filled
             the
             temple
             and
             all
             the
             court
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             seemed
             the
             ornament
             of
             an
             Oratory
             .
             All
             this
             was
             putte
             in
             order
             by
             the
             priests
             ,
             the
             yoong
             men
             administring
             these
             things
             vnto
             them
             from
             without
             .
             The
             chappell
             or
             chamber
             where
             the
             idoll
             remayned
             was
             all
             this
             day
             open
             without
             any
             vaile
             .
          
           
             This
             done
             ,
             every
             one
             came
             and
             offered
             curtines
             ,
             and
             pendants
             of
             Sandally
             ,
             precious
             stones
             ,
             iewells
             ,
             insence
             ,
             sweete
             wood
             ,
             grapes
             ,
             or
             eares
             of
             Mays
             ,
             quailes
             :
             and
             finally
             ,
             all
             they
             were
             accustomed
             to
             offer
             in
             such
             solemnities
             .
             Whenas
             they
             offered
             quailes
             ,
             (
             which
             was
             the
             poore
             mans
             offering
             ,
             )
             they
             vsed
             this
             ceremonie
             ,
             they
             delivered
             them
             to
             the
             priestes
             ,
             who
             taking
             them
             ,
             pulled
             off
             their
             heads
             ,
             and
             cast
             them
             at
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             Altare
             ,
             where
             they
             lost
             their
             bloud
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             did
             of
             all
             other
             things
             which
             were
             offered
             .
             Every
             one
             did
             offer
             meate
             and
             fruite
             according
             to
             their
             power
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             laid
             at
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             altar
             ,
             and
             the
             Ministers
             gathered
             them
             vp
             ,
             and
             carried
             them
             to
             their
             chambers
             .
             This
             solemne
             offering
             done
             ,
             the
             people
             went
             to
             dinner
             ,
             every
             one
             to
             his
             village
             or
             house
             ,
             leaving
             the
             feast
             suspended
             vntill
             after
             dinner
             .
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             ,
             the
             yong
             men
             and
             maidens
             of
             the
             temple
             ,
             with
             their
             ornaments
             ,
             were
             busied
             to
             serve
             the
             idoll
             ,
             with
             all
             that
             was
             appointed
             for
             him
             to
             eate
             :
             which
             meate
             was
             prepared
             by
             other
             women
             ,
             who
             had
             made
             
             a
             vow
             that
             day
             to
             serve
             the
             idoll
             .
             And
             therefore
             such
             as
             had
             made
             this
             vow
             ,
             came
             by
             the
             point
             of
             day
             ,
             offering
             themselves
             to
             the
             Deputies
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             command
             them
             what
             they
             would
             have
             done
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             did
             carefully
             performe
             .
             They
             did
             prepare
             such
             varietie
             of
             meates
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             admirable
             .
             This
             meate
             being
             ready
             ,
             and
             the
             houre
             of
             dinner
             come
             ,
             all
             these
             virgins
             went
             out
             of
             the
             Temple
             in
             procession
             ,
             every
             one
             carrying
             a
             little
             basket
             of
             bread
             in
             her
             hand
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             other
             ,
             a
             dish
             of
             these
             meates
             ;
             before
             them
             marched
             an
             old
             man
             ,
             like
             to
             a
             steward
             ,
             with
             a
             pleasant
             habite
             ,
             he
             was
             clothed
             in
             a
             white
             surples
             downe
             to
             the
             calves
             of
             his
             legges
             ,
             vpon
             a
             dublet
             without
             sleeves
             of
             red
             leather
             ,
             like
             to
             a
             iacket
             ,
             hee
             carried
             wings
             insteede
             of
             sleeves
             ,
             from
             the
             which
             hung
             broade
             ribbands
             ,
             at
             the
             which
             did
             hang
             a
             small
             Calibasse
             or
             pumpion
             ,
             which
             was
             covered
             with
             flowers
             ,
             by
             little
             holes
             that
             were
             made
             in
             it
             ,
             and
             within
             it
             were
             many
             superstitious
             things
             .
             This
             old
             man
             thus
             attyred
             ,
             marched
             very
             humbly
             and
             heavily
             before
             the
             preparation
             ,
             with
             his
             head
             declining
             :
             and
             comming
             neere
             the
             foote
             of
             the
             staires
             ,
             he
             made
             a
             great
             obeisance
             and
             reverence
             .
             Then
             going
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             the
             virgins
             drew
             neere
             with
             the
             meate
             ,
             presenting
             it
             in
             order
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             with
             great
             reverence
             .
             This
             service
             presented
             ,
             the
             old
             man
             returned
             as
             before
             ,
             leading
             the
             virgins
             into
             their
             convent
             .
             This
             done
             ,
             the
             yong
             men
             and
             ministers
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             came
             forth
             and
             gathered
             vp
             this
             meate
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             carried
             to
             the
             chambers
             of
             the
             chiefe
             Priests
             of
             the
             Temple
             ;
             who
             had
             fasted
             five
             daies
             ,
             eating
             onely
             once
             a
             day
             ,
             and
             they
             had
             also
             abstained
             from
             their
             wives
             ,
             not
             once
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Temple
             in
             these
             five
             daies
             .
             During
             the
             which
             ,
             they
             did
             whippe
             themselves
             rigorously
             with
             
             cordes
             ,
             they
             did
             eate
             of
             this
             divine
             meate
             ,
             (
             for
             so
             they
             called
             it
             ,
             )
             what
             they
             could
             ,
             neither
             was
             it
             lawfull
             for
             any
             other
             to
             eate
             thereof
             .
             All
             the
             people
             having
             dined
             ,
             they
             assembled
             againe
             in
             the
             court
             to
             see
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             feast
             ,
             whither
             they
             brought
             a
             captive
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             space
             of
             a
             whole
             yeare
             ,
             had
             represented
             the
             idoll
             ,
             being
             attyred
             ,
             decked
             ,
             and
             honoured
             ,
             as
             the
             idoll
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             doing
             all
             reverence
             vnto
             him
             ,
             they
             delivered
             him
             into
             the
             handes
             of
             the
             sacrificers
             ,
             who
             at
             that
             instant
             presented
             themselves
             ,
             taking
             him
             by
             the
             feete
             and
             handes
             .
             The
             Pope
             did
             open
             his
             stomacke
             ,
             and
             pull
             out
             his
             hart
             ,
             then
             did
             he
             lift
             vp
             his
             hand
             as
             high
             as
             he
             could
             ,
             shewing
             it
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Idoll
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             .
             Having
             thus
             sacrificed
             him
             that
             represented
             the
             idoll
             ,
             they
             went
             into
             a
             holy
             place
             appointed
             for
             this
             purpose
             ,
             whither
             came
             the
             yong
             men
             and
             virgins
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             with
             their
             ornaments
             ,
             the
             which
             being
             put
             in
             order
             ,
             they
             danced
             and
             sung
             with
             drummes
             and
             other
             instruments
             ,
             on
             the
             which
             the
             chiefe
             Priests
             did
             play
             and
             sound
             .
             Then
             came
             all
             the
             Noblemen
             with
             ensignes
             and
             ornaments
             like
             to
             the
             yong
             men
             ,
             who
             danced
             round
             about
             them
             .
             They
             did
             not
             vsually
             kill
             any
             other
             men
             that
             day
             ,
             but
             him
             that
             was
             sacrificed
             ,
             yet
             every
             fourth
             yeare
             they
             had
             others
             with
             him
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             Iubile
             and
             full
             pardons
             .
             After
             Sun
             set
             ,
             every
             one
             being
             satisfied
             with
             sounding
             ,
             eating
             ,
             and
             drinking
             ,
             the
             virgins
             went
             al
             to
             their
             convent
             ,
             they
             took
             great
             dishes
             of
             earth
             full
             of
             bread
             mixt
             with
             hony
             ,
             covered
             with
             small
             panniers
             ,
             wrought
             and
             fashioned
             with
             dead
             mens
             headsand
             bones
             ,
             and
             they
             carried
             the
             collation
             to
             the
             idoll
             ,
             mounting
             vp
             to
             the
             court
             ,
             which
             was
             before
             the
             doore
             of
             the
             Oratorie
             :
             and
             having
             set
             them
             downe
             ,
             they
             retired
             in
             the
             same
             order
             as
             they
             
             came
             ,
             the
             steward
             going
             still
             before
             .
             Presently
             came
             forth
             all
             the
             yong
             men
             in
             order
             ,
             with
             canes
             or
             reedes
             in
             their
             handes
             ,
             who
             beganne
             to
             runne
             as
             fast
             as
             they
             could
             to
             the
             toppe
             of
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             who
             should
             come
             first
             to
             the
             dishes
             of
             the
             collation
             .
             The
             Elders
             or
             chiefe
             Priests
             observed
             him
             that
             came
             first
             ,
             second
             ,
             third
             ,
             and
             fourth
             ,
             without
             regarding
             the
             rest
             .
             This
             collation
             was
             likewise
             all
             carried
             away
             by
             the
             yong
             men
             ,
             as
             great
             Relicks
             .
             This
             done
             ,
             the
             foure
             that
             arrived
             first
             were
             placed
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Antients
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             bringing
             them
             to
             their
             chambers
             with
             much
             honour
             ,
             praising
             them
             ,
             and
             giving
             them
             ornaments
             ;
             and
             from
             thence
             forth
             they
             were
             respected
             and
             reverenced
             as
             men
             of
             marke
             .
             The
             taking
             of
             this
             collation
             being
             ended
             ,
             and
             the
             feast
             celebrated
             with
             much
             ioy
             and
             noise
             ,
             they
             dismissed
             all
             the
             yong
             men
             and
             maides
             which
             had
             served
             the
             idoll
             ;
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             they
             went
             one
             after
             another
             ,
             as
             they
             came
             forth
             .
             All
             the
             small
             children
             of
             the
             colledges
             and
             schooles
             ,
             were
             at
             the
             gate
             of
             the
             court
             ,
             with
             bottomes
             of
             rushes
             and
             hearbes
             in
             their
             hands
             ,
             which
             they
             cast
             at
             them
             ,
             mocking
             and
             laughing
             ,
             as
             of
             them
             that
             came
             from
             the
             service
             of
             the
             idoll
             :
             they
             had
             libertie
             then
             to
             dispose
             of
             themselves
             at
             their
             pleasure
             ,
             and
             thus
             the
             feast
             ended
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Feast
             of
             Marchants
             ,
             which
             those
             of
             Cholutecas
             did
             celebrate
             .
             
               CHAP.
               30.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             I
             have
             spoken
             sufficiently
             of
             the
             service
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             vnto
             their
             gods
             ,
             yet
             will
             I
             speak
             something
             of
             the
             feast
             they
             called
             Quetzacoaalt
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             god
             of
             riches
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             solemnised
             in
             this
             maner
             .
             Fortie
             daies
             before
             the
             Marchants
             bought
             a
             
             slave
             well
             proportioned
             ,
             without
             any
             fault
             or
             blemish
             ,
             either
             of
             sickenes
             or
             of
             hurte
             ,
             whome
             they
             did
             attyre
             with
             the
             ornaments
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             represent
             it
             fortie
             daies
             .
             Before
             his
             clothing
             they
             did
             clense
             him
             ,
             washing
             him
             twice
             in
             a
             lake
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             lake
             of
             the
             gods
             ;
             and
             being
             purified
             ,
             they
             attyred
             him
             like
             the
             idoll
             .
             During
             these
             forty
             daies
             ,
             hee
             was
             much
             respected
             for
             his
             sake
             whom
             he
             represented
             .
             By
             night
             they
             did
             imprison
             him
             ,
             (
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             )
             left
             he
             should
             flie
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             morning
             they
             tooke
             him
             out
             of
             prison
             ,
             setting
             him
             vpon
             an
             eminent
             place
             ,
             where
             they
             served
             him
             ,
             giving
             him
             exquisite
             meates
             to
             eate
             .
             After
             he
             had
             eaten
             ,
             they
             put
             a
             chaine
             of
             flowers
             about
             his
             necke
             ,
             and
             many
             nosegaies
             in
             his
             hands
             .
             Hee
             had
             a
             well
             appointed
             guard
             ,
             with
             much
             people
             toaccompany
             him
             .
             When
             he
             went
             through
             the
             Cittie
             ,
             he
             went
             dancing
             and
             singing
             through
             all
             the
             streetes
             ,
             that
             hee
             might
             bee
             knowne
             for
             the
             resemblance
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             and
             when
             hee
             beganne
             to
             sing
             ,
             the
             women
             and
             little
             children
             came
             forth
             of
             their
             houses
             to
             salute
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             offer
             vnto
             him
             as
             to
             their
             god
             .
             Two
             old
             men
             of
             the
             Antients
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             came
             vnto
             him
             nine
             daies
             before
             the
             feast
             ,
             and
             humbling
             themselves
             before
             him
             ,
             they
             said
             with
             a
             low
             and
             submisse
             voyce
             ,
             Sir
             ,
             you
             must
             vnderstand
             that
             nine
             daies
             hence
             the
             exercise
             of
             dancing
             and
             singing
             doth
             end
             ,
             and
             thou
             must
             then
             die
             ;
             and
             then
             he
             must
             answer
             ,
             in
             a
             good
             houre
             .
             They
             call
             this
             ceremony
             ,
             
               Neyolo
               MaxiltleZtli
            
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             advertisement
             :
             and
             when
             they
             did
             thus
             advertise
             him
             ,
             they
             tooke
             very
             carefull
             heede
             whether
             hee
             were
             sad
             ,
             or
             if
             he
             danced
             as
             ioyfully
             as
             he
             was
             accustomed
             ,
             the
             which
             if
             he
             did
             not
             as
             cheerefully
             as
             they
             desired
             ,
             they
             made
             a
             foolish
             superstition
             in
             this
             maner
             .
             They
             presently
             
             tooke
             the
             sacrificing
             rasors
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             washed
             and
             clensed
             from
             the
             blood
             of
             men
             ,
             which
             remained
             of
             the
             former
             sacrifices
             .
             Of
             this
             washing
             they
             made
             a
             drinke
             mingled
             with
             another
             liquor
             made
             of
             Cacao
             ,
             giving
             it
             him
             to
             drinke
             ;
             they
             said
             that
             this
             would
             make
             him
             forget
             what
             had
             beene
             said
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             would
             make
             him
             in
             a
             maner
             incensible
             ;
             returning
             to
             his
             former
             dancing
             and
             mirth
             .
             They
             said
             moreover
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             offer
             himself
             cheerefully
             to
             death
             ,
             being
             inchanted
             with
             this
             drinke
             .
             The
             cause
             why
             they
             sought
             to
             take
             from
             him
             this
             heavinesse
             ,
             was
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             held
             it
             for
             an
             ill
             augure
             ,
             and
             a
             fore
             telling
             of
             some
             great
             harme
             .
             The
             day
             of
             the
             feast
             being
             come
             ,
             after
             they
             had
             done
             him
             much
             honor
             ,
             sung
             ,
             and
             given
             him
             incense
             ,
             the
             sacrificers
             tooke
             him
             about
             mid-night
             and
             did
             sacrifice
             him
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             offering
             his
             heart
             vnto
             the
             Moone
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             did
             afterwardes
             cast
             against
             the
             idoll
             ,
             letting
             the
             bodie
             fall
             to
             the
             bottome
             of
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             where
             such
             as
             had
             offered
             him
             tooke
             him
             vp
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             Marchants
             ,
             whose
             feast
             it
             was
             .
             Then
             having
             carried
             him
             into
             the
             chiefest
             mans
             house
             amongst
             them
             ,
             the
             body
             was
             drest
             with
             divers
             sawces
             ,
             to
             celebrate
             (
             at
             the
             breake
             of
             day
             ,
             )
             the
             banquet
             and
             dinner
             of
             the
             feast
             ,
             having
             first
             bid
             the
             idoll
             good
             morrow
             ,
             with
             a
             small
             dance
             ,
             which
             they
             made
             whilst
             the
             day
             did
             breake
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             prepared
             the
             sacrifice
             .
             Then
             did
             all
             the
             Marchants
             assemble
             at
             this
             banket
             ,
             especially
             those
             which
             made
             it
             a
             trafficke
             to
             buy
             and
             sell
             slaves
             ,
             who
             were
             bound
             every
             yeare
             to
             offer
             one
             ,
             for
             the
             resemblance
             of
             their
             god
             .
             This
             idoll
             was
             one
             of
             the
             most
             honoured
             in
             all
             the
             land
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Temple
             where
             hee
             was
             ,
             was
             of
             great
             authoritie
             :
             There
             were
             threescore
             staires
             to
             ascend
             vp
             vnto
             it
             ,
             and
             
             on
             the
             toppe
             was
             a
             court
             of
             an
             indifferent
             largenesse
             ,
             very
             finely
             drest
             and
             plastered
             ,
             in
             the
             midst
             whereof
             ,
             was
             a
             great
             round
             thing
             like
             vnto
             an
             Oven
             ,
             having
             the
             entrie
             low
             and
             narrow
             :
             so
             as
             they
             must
             stoope
             very
             low
             that
             should
             enter
             into
             it
             .
             This
             Temple
             had
             chambers
             and
             chappells
             as
             the
             rest
             ,
             where
             there
             were
             convents
             of
             Priests
             ,
             yong
             men
             ,
             maides
             ,
             and
             children
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             :
             and
             there
             was
             one
             Priest
             alone
             resident
             continually
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             changed
             weekely
             :
             For
             although
             there
             were
             in
             every
             one
             of
             these
             temples
             ,
             three
             or
             foure
             Curates
             or
             Ancients
             ,
             yet
             did
             every
             one
             serve
             his
             weeke
             without
             parting
             .
             His
             charge
             that
             weeke
             ,
             (
             after
             he
             had
             instructed
             the
             children
             ,
             )
             was
             to
             strike
             vp
             a
             drumme
             every
             day
             at
             the
             Sunne
             setting
             ,
             to
             the
             same
             end
             that
             we
             are
             accustomed
             to
             ring
             to
             evensong
             .
             This
             drumme
             was
             such
             as
             they
             might
             heare
             the
             house
             sound
             thereof
             throughout
             all
             the
             partes
             of
             the
             Cittie
             ,
             then
             every
             man
             shut
             vp
             his
             merchandise
             ,
             and
             retired
             vnto
             his
             house
             ,
             and
             there
             was
             so
             great
             a
             silence
             ,
             as
             there
             seemed
             to
             be
             no
             living
             creature
             in
             the
             Towne
             .
             In
             the
             morning
             whenas
             the
             day
             beganne
             to
             breake
             ,
             they
             beganne
             to
             sound
             the
             drumme
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             signe
             of
             the
             day
             beginning
             ,
             so
             as
             travellers
             and
             strangers
             attended
             this
             signall
             to
             beginne
             their
             iournies
             ,
             for
             till
             that
             time
             it
             was
             not
             lawfull
             to
             goe
             out
             of
             the
             cittie
             .
          
           
             There
             was
             in
             this
             temple
             a
             court
             of
             a
             reasonable
             greatnes
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             made
             great
             dances
             ,
             &
             pastimes
             ,
             with
             games
             or
             comedies
             the
             day
             of
             the
             idolls
             feast
             ;
             for
             which
             purpose
             there
             was
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             this
             court
             a
             theatre
             of
             thirty
             foote
             square
             very
             finely
             decked
             and
             trimmed
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             decked
             with
             flowers
             that
             day
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             arte
             and
             invention
             that
             mought
             be
             ,
             beeing
             invironed
             round
             with
             Arches
             of
             divers
             flowers
             and
             feathers
             ,
             
             and
             in
             some
             places
             there
             were
             tied
             many
             small
             birds
             ,
             connies
             ,
             and
             other
             tame
             beasts
             .
             After
             dinner
             all
             the
             people
             assembled
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             and
             the
             players
             presented
             themselves
             ,
             and
             played
             comedies
             ,
             some
             counterfeit
             the
             deafe
             ,
             and
             the
             rheumatike
             ,
             others
             the
             lame
             ,
             some
             the
             blinde
             ,
             and
             without
             handes
             ,
             which
             came
             to
             seeke
             for
             cure
             of
             the
             idoll
             :
             the
             deafe
             answered
             confusedly
             ,
             the
             rheumatike
             did
             cough
             ,
             the
             lame
             halted
             ,
             telling
             their
             miseries
             and
             griefes
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             made
             the
             people
             to
             laugh
             ;
             others
             came
             foorth
             in
             the
             forme
             of
             little
             beasts
             ,
             some
             were
             attired
             like
             snailes
             ,
             others
             like
             toades
             ,
             and
             some
             like
             lizardes
             :
             then
             meeting
             together
             ,
             they
             tolde
             their
             offices
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             retyring
             to
             his
             place
             ,
             they
             founded
             on
             small
             flutes
             ,
             which
             was
             pleasant
             to
             heare
             .
             They
             likewise
             counterfeited
             butterflies
             and
             small
             birdes
             of
             diverse
             colours
             ,
             and
             the
             children
             of
             the
             Temple
             represented
             these
             formes
             ,
             then
             they
             went
             into
             a
             little
             forrest
             planted
             there
             for
             the
             nonce
             ,
             where
             the
             Priestes
             of
             the
             Temple
             drew
             them
             foorth
             with
             instruments
             of
             musicke
             .
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             they
             vsed
             many
             pleasant
             speeches
             ,
             some
             in
             propounding
             ,
             others
             in
             defending
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             assistants
             were
             pleasantly
             intertained
             .
             This
             doone
             ,
             they
             made
             a
             maske
             or
             mummerie
             with
             all
             these
             personages
             ,
             and
             so
             the
             feast
             ended
             :
             the
             which
             were
             vsually
             doone
             in
             their
             principall
             feasts
             .
          
        
         
           
             What
             profit
             may
             be
             drawne
             out
             of
             this
             discourse
             of
             the
             Indians
             superstitions
             .
             
               CHAP
               31.
            
             
          
           
             THis
             may
             suffice
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             care
             and
             paine
             the
             Indians
             tooke
             to
             serve
             and
             honour
             their
             Idolls
             ▪
             or
             rather
             the
             divell
             :
             for
             it
             were
             an
             infinite
             matter
             ,
             and
             of
             small
             profit
             ,
             to
             report
             every
             thing
             that
             hath
             passed
             ,
             
             for
             that
             it
             may
             seeme
             to
             some
             needlesse
             to
             have
             spoken
             ●hus
             much
             :
             and
             that
             it
             is
             a
             losse
             of
             time
             ,
             as
             in
             reading
             the
             fables
             that
             are
             fained
             by
             the
             Romaines
             of
             Knighthoode
             .
             But
             if
             such
             as
             holde
             this
             opinion
             will
             looke
             wel
             into
             it
             ,
             they
             shall
             finde
             great
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             :
             and
             that
             it
             may
             be
             profitable
             for
             many
             considerations
             ,
             to
             have
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             cu●●oms
             and
             ceremonies
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             :
             first
             this
             knowledge
             is
             not
             only
             profitable
             ,
             but
             also
             necessary
             in
             those
             countries
             where
             these
             superstitions
             have
             beene
             practised
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             Christians
             ,
             and
             the
             maisters
             of
             the
             Law
             of
             Christ
             ,
             may
             know
             the
             errours
             and
             superstitions
             of
             the
             Antients
             ,
             and
             observe
             if
             the
             Indians
             vse
             them
             not
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             either
             secretly
             or
             openly
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             many
             learned
             and
             worthy
             men
             have
             written
             large
             Discourses
             ,
             of
             what
             they
             have
             found
             :
             yea
             the
             Provinciall
             counsells
             have
             commaunded
             them
             to
             write
             and
             print
             them
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             doone
             in
             Lima
             ,
             where
             hath
             beene
             made
             a
             more
             ample
             Discourse
             than
             this
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             importeth
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             that
             the
             Spaniardes
             being
             in
             those
             parts
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             should
             have
             the
             knowledge
             of
             all
             these
             things
             .
             This
             Discourse
             may
             likewise
             serve
             the
             Spaniards
             there
             ,
             and
             all
             others
             whersoever
             ,
             to
             give
             infinite
             thankes
             to
             God
             our
             Lord
             ,
             who
             hath
             imparted
             so
             great
             a
             benefite
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             giving
             them
             his
             holy
             Lawe
             ,
             which
             is
             most
             iust
             ,
             pure
             ,
             and
             altogether
             profitable
             .
             The
             which
             we
             may
             well
             know
             ,
             comparing
             it
             with
             the
             lawes
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             where
             so
             many
             wretched
             people
             have
             lived
             so
             miserably
             .
             It
             may
             likewise
             serve
             to
             discover
             the
             pride
             ,
             envy
             ,
             deceipts
             ,
             and
             ambushes
             of
             the
             Divell
             ,
             which
             he
             practiseth
             against
             those
             hee
             holdes
             captives
             ,
             seeing
             on
             the
             one
             side
             hee
             seekes
             to
             imitate
             God
             ,
             and
             make
             comparison
             with
             him
             and
             his
             
             holy
             Lawe
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             other
             side
             :
             hee
             dooth
             mingle
             with
             his
             actions
             so
             many
             vanities
             ,
             filthinesse
             and
             cruelties
             ,
             as
             hee
             that
             hath
             no
             other
             practise
             but
             to
             sophis●●cate
             and
             corrupt
             all
             that
             is
             good
             .
             Finally
             ,
             hee
             that
             shall
             see
             the
             darkenes
             and
             blindenes
             wherein
             so
             many
             Provinces
             and
             Kingdoms
             have
             lived
             so
             long
             time
             ,
             yea
             and
             whe●in
             many
             Nations
             ,
             and
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             world
             live
             yet
             ,
             deceived
             with
             the
             like
             trumperies
             ,
             he
             can
             not
             (
             if
             he
             have
             a
             Christians
             heart
             )
             but
             give
             thankes
             to
             the
             high
             God
             ,
             for
             such
             as
             hee
             hath
             called
             out
             of
             so
             great
             darkenes
             ,
             to
             the
             admirable
             light
             of
             his
             Gospel
             :
             beseeching
             the
             vnspeakeable
             charitie
             of
             the
             Creator
             to
             preserve
             and
             increase
             them
             in
             his
             knowledge
             and
             obedience
             ,
             and
             likewise
             be
             grieved
             for
             those
             that
             follow
             still
             the
             way
             of
             perdition
             .
             And
             that
             in
             the
             end
             hee
             beseech
             the
             Father
             of
             Pitty
             ,
             to
             open
             vnto
             them
             the
             treasures
             and
             riches
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             who
             with
             the
             Father
             and
             Holy-ghost
             raignes
             in
             all
             Ages
             ;
             Amen
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           SIXT
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             That
             they
             erre
             in
             their
             opinion
             ,
             which
             holde
             the
             Indians
             to
             want
             iudgement
             .
             
               CHAP.
               1.
            
             
          
           
             HAving
             treated
             before
             of
             the
             religion
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             ,
             I
             pretend
             to
             discourse
             in
             this
             Booke
             of
             their
             customs
             ,
             policy
             ,
             and
             government
             ,
             for
             two
             considerations
             :
             the
             one
             is
             to
             confu●e
             that
             false
             opinion
             many
             doe
             commonly
             holde
             of
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             a
             grose
             and
             brutish
             people
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             have
             so
             little
             vnderstanding
             ,
             as
             they
             scarce
             deserve
             the
             name
             of
             anie
             :
             So
             as
             many
             excesses
             and
             outrages
             are
             committed
             vpon
             them
             ,
             vsing
             them
             like
             bruite
             beasts
             ,
             and
             reputing
             them
             vnworthy
             of
             any
             respect
             ;
             which
             is
             so
             common
             and
             so
             dangerous
             an
             errour
             (
             as
             they
             know
             well
             who
             with
             any
             
             zèale
             and
             consideration
             have
             travelled
             amongst
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             have
             seene
             and
             observd
             their
             secrets
             and
             counsells
             ;
             )
             And
             moreover
             ,
             for
             the
             small
             regard
             many
             m●●e
             of
             these
             Indians
             ,
             who
             presume
             to
             knowe
             much
             ,
             and
             yet
             are
             commonly
             the
             most
             ignorant
             and
             presumptuous
             .
             I
             finde
             no
             better
             meanes
             to
             confound
             this
             pernicious
             opinion
             ,
             then
             in
             relating
             their
             order
             and
             maner
             ,
             whenas
             they
             lived
             vnder
             their
             owne
             lawes
             ,
             in
             which
             (
             although
             they
             had
             many
             barbarous
             things
             ,
             and
             without
             ground
             ,
             yet
             had
             they
             many
             others
             worthy
             of
             great
             admiration
             ,
             whereby
             wee
             may
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             by
             nature
             ,
             capable
             to
             receive
             any
             good
             instructions
             :
             and
             besides
             ,
             they
             did
             in
             some
             things
             ,
             passe
             many
             of
             our
             common-weales
             .
             It
             is
             no
             matter
             of
             marvell
             if
             there
             were
             so
             great
             and
             grose
             faults
             amongst
             them
             ,
             seeing
             there
             hath
             been
             likewise
             amongst
             the
             most
             famous
             Law
             givers
             and
             Philosophers
             (
             yea
             without
             exception
             ,
             Lycurgus
             and
             Plato
             )
             and
             amongest
             the
             wisest
             common-wealths
             ,
             as
             the
             Romanes
             and
             Athenians
             ,
             where
             wee
             may
             finde
             things
             so
             full
             of
             ignorance
             ,
             and
             so
             worthy
             of
             laughter
             ,
             as
             in
             trueth
             if
             the
             commonweales
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             hadde
             beene
             knowne
             in
             those
             times
             of
             the
             Romans
             and
             the
             Greekes
             ,
             their
             lawes
             and
             governements
             had
             been
             much
             esteemed
             by
             them
             :
             But
             we
             at
             this
             day
             little
             regarding
             this
             ,
             enter
             by
             the
             sword
             ,
             without
             hearing
             or
             vnderstanding
             ;
             perswading
             our selves
             that
             the
             Indians
             affaires
             deserve
             no
             other
             respect
             ,
             but
             as
             of
             venison
             that
             is
             taken
             in
             the
             forrest
             ,
             and
             broght
             for
             our
             vse
             and
             delight
             .
          
           
             The
             most
             grave
             and
             diligent
             ,
             which
             have
             searched
             and
             attained
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             their
             secrets
             ,
             customs
             and
             antient
             governement
             ,
             holde
             another
             opinion
             ,
             and
             admire
             the
             order
             and
             discourse
             that
             hath
             been
             betwixt
             
             them
             .
             Of
             which
             number
             is
             
               Polo
               Ondeguardo
            
             ,
             whome
             I
             vsually
             followe
             in
             the
             discourse
             of
             matters
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             for
             these
             of
             
               Mexico
               Iohn
               de
               Toüar
            
             ,
             who
             had
             a
             Prebend
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             is
             now
             of
             our
             company
             of
             Iesuites
             ,
             who
             by
             the
             commaundement
             of
             the
             viceroy
             
               Don
               Martin
               Enriques
            
             ,
             have
             made
             a
             diligent
             and
             a
             large
             collection
             of
             the
             Histories
             of
             that
             nation
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             grave
             and
             notable
             personages
             ,
             who
             both
             by
             word
             and
             writing
             have
             sufficiently
             informed
             me
             of
             all
             those
             things
             I
             shall
             here
             set
             downe
             .
             The
             other
             end
             ,
             and
             the
             good
             which
             may
             followe
             by
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             lawes
             customes
             and
             government
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             wee
             may
             helpe
             and
             governe
             them
             with
             the
             same
             lawes
             and
             customes
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             ruled
             according
             to
             their
             owne
             lawes
             and
             priviledges
             ,
             so
             farre
             foorth
             as
             they
             doe
             not
             contradict
             the
             Lawe
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             his
             holy
             Church
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             maintained
             and
             kept
             as
             their
             fundamentall
             lawes
             .
             For
             the
             ignorance
             of
             laws
             and
             customes
             hath
             bred
             many
             errours
             of
             great
             importaunce
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Governours
             and
             Iudges
             ,
             knowe
             not
             well
             how
             to
             give
             sentence
             ,
             nor
             rule
             their
             subiects
             .
             And
             besides
             ,
             the
             wrong
             which
             is
             doone
             vnto
             them
             ,
             against
             reason
             ,
             it
             is
             preiudiciall
             and
             hurtefull
             vnto
             our selves
             ;
             for
             thereby
             they
             take
             occasion
             to
             abhorre
             vs
             ,
             as
             men
             both
             in
             good
             and
             in
             evill
             alwayes
             contrary
             vnto
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             supputation
             of
             times
             ,
             and
             the
             Kalender
             the
             Mexicaines
             vsed
             .
             
               CHAP.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             ANd
             to
             beginne
             then
             by
             the
             division
             and
             supputation
             of
             times
             which
             the
             Indians
             made
             ,
             wherein
             truely
             wee
             may
             well
             perceive
             the
             great
             signes
             of
             their
             
             vivacitie
             and
             good
             vnderstanding
             .
             I
             will
             first
             shew
             in
             what
             sorte
             the
             Mexica●nes
             counted
             and
             divided
             their
             yeere
             ,
             their
             moneths
             ,
             their
             kalender
             ,
             their
             computations
             ,
             their
             worldes
             and
             ages
             .
             They
             divided
             the
             yeare
             into
             eighteene
             moneths
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             gave
             twentie
             dayes
             ,
             wherein
             the
             three
             hundred
             and
             three
             score
             days
             are
             accomplished
             ,
             not
             comprehending
             in
             any
             of
             these
             moneths
             the
             five
             dayes
             that
             remaine
             ,
             &
             make
             the
             yeare
             perfect
             .
             But
             they
             did
             reckon
             them
             aparte
             ,
             and
             called
             them
             the
             dayes
             of
             nothing
             :
             during
             the
             which
             ,
             the
             people
             did
             not
             any
             thing
             ,
             neither
             went
             they
             to
             their
             Temples
             ,
             but
             occupied
             themselves
             only
             in
             visiting
             one
             another
             ,
             and
             so
             spent
             the
             time
             :
             the
             sacrificers
             of
             the
             Temple
             did
             likewise
             cease
             their
             sacrifices
             .
             These
             five
             dayes
             being
             past
             ,
             they
             beganne
             the
             computation
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             whereof
             the
             first
             moneth
             and
             the
             beginning
             was
             in
             March
             ,
             when
             the
             leaves
             beganne
             to
             growe
             greene
             ,
             although
             they
             tooke
             three
             dayes
             of
             the
             moneth
             of
             February
             ;
             for
             the
             first
             day
             of
             their
             yeere
             was
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             the
             sixe
             and
             twentie
             day
             of
             February
             ,
             as
             appeareth
             by
             their
             kalender
             ,
             within
             the
             which
             ours
             is
             likewise
             comprehended
             and
             contained
             with
             a
             very
             ingenious
             Arte
             ,
             which
             was
             made
             by
             the
             antient
             Indians
             that
             knew
             the
             first
             Spaniardes
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             this
             Kalender
             ,
             and
             have
             it
             yet
             in
             my
             custody
             ,
             which
             well
             deserveth
             the
             sight
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             discourse
             and
             industry
             the
             Mexicaine
             Indians
             had
             .
             Every
             one
             of
             these
             eighteene
             monethes
             had
             his
             proper
             name
             ,
             and
             his
             proper
             picture
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             commonly
             taken
             of
             the
             principall
             feast
             that
             was
             made
             in
             that
             moneth
             ,
             or
             from
             the
             diversitie
             of
             tymes
             ,
             which
             the
             yeere
             caused
             in
             that
             moneth
             .
             They
             had
             in
             this
             Kalender
             certaine
             dayes
             marked
             and
             distinguished
             for
             their
             feasts
             .
             And
             they
             accompted
             their
             weekes
             by
             
             thirteene
             dayes
             ,
             ma●king
             the
             dayes
             with
             a
             Zero
             or
             cipher
             ,
             which
             they
             multiplied
             vnto
             thirteene
             ,
             and
             then
             beganne
             to
             count
             ,
             one
             ,
             two
             ,
             &c.
             
             They
             did
             likewise
             marke
             the
             yeares
             of
             these
             wheeles
             ,
             with
             foure
             signes
             or
             figures
             ,
             attributing
             to
             every
             yeare
             a
             peculiar
             signe
             ,
             whereof
             one
             was
             of
             a
             house
             ,
             an
             other
             of
             a
             conny
             ,
             the
             third
             of
             a
             reede
             ,
             and
             the
             fourth
             of
             a
             flint
             .
             They
             painted
             them
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             noting
             by
             those
             figures
             the
             yeare
             that
             did
             runne
             ,
             saying
             of
             so
             many
             houses
             ,
             of
             so
             many
             flints
             of
             such
             a
             wheele
             ,
             happened
             such
             a
             thing
             .
             For
             we
             must
             vnderstand
             that
             their
             wheele
             ,
             which
             was
             an
             age
             ,
             contained
             foure
             weekes
             of
             yeares
             ,
             every
             weeke
             containing
             thirteene
             yeares
             ,
             which
             in
             all
             made
             fiftie
             twoo
             yeares
             .
             In
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             wheele
             they
             painted
             a
             Sunne
             ,
             from
             the
             which
             went
             foure
             beames
             or
             lines
             in
             crosse
             to
             the
             circumference
             of
             the
             wheele
             ;
             and
             they
             made
             their
             course
             ,
             even
             as
             the
             circumference
             was
             divided
             into
             foure
             equall
             partes
             ,
             every
             one
             with
             his
             line
             ,
             having
             a
             distinct
             colour
             from
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             the
             foure
             colors
             were
             ,
             greene
             ,
             blew
             ,
             red
             ,
             and
             yellow
             :
             every
             portion
             of
             these
             foure
             had
             thirteene
             separations
             which
             had
             all
             their
             signes
             or
             particular
             figures
             ,
             of
             a
             house
             ,
             a
             conny
             ,
             a
             reed
             ,
             or
             a
             flint
             ,
             noting
             by
             every
             signe
             a
             yeare
             ,
             and
             vppon
             the
             head
             of
             this
             signe
             they
             painted
             what
             had
             happened
             that
             yeare
             .
          
           
             And
             therefore
             I
             did
             see
             in
             the
             Kalender
             mentioned
             the
             yeare
             when
             the
             Spaniards
             entered
             Mexico
             ,
             marked
             by
             the
             picture
             of
             a
             man
             clad
             in
             red
             ,
             after
             our
             manner
             ,
             for
             such
             was
             the
             habite
             of
             the
             first
             Spaniard
             ,
             whome
             
               Fernand
               Cortes
            
             sent
             ,
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             two
             &
             fifty
             years
             ,
             which
             finished
             the
             wheele
             .
             They
             vsed
             a
             pleasant
             ceremony
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             the
             last
             night
             they
             didde
             breake
             all
             their
             vesselles
             and
             stuffe
             ,
             and
             put
             out
             their
             fire
             ,
             and
             all
             
             the
             lights
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             worlde
             should
             end
             at
             the
             finishing
             of
             one
             of
             these
             wheeles
             ,
             and
             it
             might
             be
             at
             that
             time
             :
             for
             (
             said
             they
             )
             seeing
             the
             worlde
             must
             then
             end
             ,
             what
             neede
             is
             there
             to
             provide
             meate
             to
             eate
             ,
             and
             therfore
             they
             had
             no
             further
             neede
             of
             vessel
             nor
             fire
             .
             Vpon
             this
             conceit
             they
             passed
             the
             night
             in
             great
             feare
             ,
             saying
             it
             might
             happen
             there
             would
             be
             no
             more
             day
             ,
             and
             they
             watched
             very
             carefully
             for
             the
             day
             ;
             but
             when
             they
             saw
             the
             day
             beginne
             to
             breake
             ,
             they
             presently
             beat
             manie
             drummes
             ,
             and
             sounded
             cornets
             ,
             flutes
             ,
             and
             other
             instruments
             of
             ioy
             and
             gladnesse
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             God
             did
             yet
             prolong
             the
             time
             with
             another
             age
             ,
             which
             were
             fiftie
             two
             yeares
             .
             And
             then
             beganne
             an
             other
             wheele
             .
             The
             first
             day
             and
             beginning
             of
             this
             age
             they
             took
             new
             fire
             ,
             and
             bought
             new
             vesselles
             to
             dresse
             their
             meate
             ,
             and
             all
             went
             to
             the
             high
             Priest
             for
             this
             new
             fire
             ,
             having
             first
             made
             a
             solemne
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             given
             thanks
             for
             the
             comming
             of
             the
             day
             ,
             and
             prolongation
             of
             an
             other
             age
             .
             This
             was
             their
             manner
             of
             accounting
             their
             yeares
             ,
             moneths
             ,
             weekes
             ,
             and
             ages
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             accounted
             the
             yeares
             and
             moneths
             .
             
               CHAP.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             this
             supputation
             of
             times
             practised
             amongest
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             bee
             ingenious
             enough
             and
             certaine
             ,
             for
             men
             that
             had
             no
             learning
             ;
             yet
             in
             my
             opinion
             they
             wanted
             discourse
             and
             consideration
             ,
             having
             not
             grounded
             their
             computation
             according
             vnto
             the
             course
             of
             the
             moone
             ,
             nor
             distributed
             their
             months
             accordingly
             ,
             wherein
             those
             of
             Peru
             have
             far
             surpassed
             them
             :
             for
             they
             divided
             their
             yeare
             into
             as
             many
             dayes
             ,
             perfectly
             accomplished
             as
             we
             do
             heere
             ,
             and
             into
             twelve
             
             moneths
             or
             moones
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             they
             imployed
             and
             consumed
             the
             eleven
             daies
             that
             remaind
             of
             the
             moone
             as
             Polo
             writes
             .
             To
             make
             the
             computation
             of
             their
             yeare
             sure
             and
             certaine
             ,
             they
             vsed
             this
             industry
             ;
             vppon
             the
             mountaines
             which
             are
             about
             the
             citty
             of
             Cusco
             (
             where
             the
             Kings
             Inguas
             held
             their
             court
             ,
             beeing
             the
             greatest
             sanctuary
             of
             those
             realmes
             ,
             and
             as
             we
             should
             say
             an
             other
             Rome
             )
             there
             were
             twelve
             pillars
             set
             in
             order
             ,
             and
             in
             such
             distaunce
             the
             one
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             every
             month
             one
             of
             these
             pillers
             did
             note
             the
             rising
             and
             setting
             of
             the
             sunne
             .
             They
             called
             them
             Suceanga
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             they
             taught
             and
             shewed
             ,
             the
             feasts
             ,
             and
             the
             seasons
             fitte
             to
             sowe
             and
             reape
             ,
             and
             to
             do
             other
             things
             .
             They
             did
             certaine
             sacrifices
             to
             these
             pillars
             of
             the
             sunne
             .
             Every
             month
             had
             his
             proper
             name
             ,
             and
             pecular
             feasts
             .
             They
             beganne
             the
             yeare
             by
             Ianuary
             as
             wee
             doe
             .
             But
             since
             ,
             a
             king
             Ingua
             called
             Pachacuto
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             reformer
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             beganne
             their
             yeare
             by
             December
             ,
             by
             reason
             (
             as
             I
             coniecture
             )
             that
             then
             the
             Sunne
             returneth
             from
             the
             last
             poynt
             of
             Capricorne
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             tropike
             neerest
             vnto
             them
             .
             I
             know
             not
             whether
             the
             one
             or
             the
             other
             have
             observed
             any
             Bisexte
             ,
             although
             some
             holde
             the
             contrary
             .
             The
             weekes
             which
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             reckon
             ,
             were
             not
             properly
             weekes
             ,
             being
             not
             of
             seaven
             dayes
             :
             the
             Inguas
             likewise
             made
             no
             mention
             thereof
             which
             is
             no
             wonder
             ,
             seeing
             the
             account
             of
             the
             weeke
             is
             not
             grounded
             vpon
             the
             course
             of
             the
             sunne
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             moone
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             month
             ;
             but
             among
             the
             Hebrewes
             i●
             is
             grounded
             vpon
             the
             creation
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             as
             Moyses
             reporteth
             ;
             and
             amongest
             the
             Greekes
             and
             Latins
             vpon
             the
             number
             of
             the
             seven
             planets
             ,
             of
             whose
             names
             the
             dayes
             of
             the
             weeke
             have
             taken
             their
             denomination
             ;
             yet
             was
             it
             much
             for
             those
             
             Indians
             ,
             being
             men
             without
             bookes
             and
             learning
             ,
             to
             have
             a
             yeare
             ,
             seasons
             ,
             and
             feasts
             ,
             so
             well
             appoynted
             as
             I
             have
             sayd
             .
          
        
         
           
             That
             no
             nation
             of
             the
             Indies
             hath
             beene
             found
             to
             have
             had
             the
             vse
             of
             letters
             .
             
               CHAP
               4.
            
             
          
           
             LEtters
             were
             invented
             to
             signifie
             properly
             the
             words
             we
             do
             pronounce
             ,
             even
             as
             woordes
             (
             according
             to
             the
             Philosopher
             )
             are
             the
             signes
             and
             demonstrations
             of
             mans
             thoughtes
             and
             conceptions
             .
             And
             both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             (
             I
             say
             the
             letters
             and
             words
             )
             were
             ordained
             to
             make
             things
             knowne
             .
             The
             voyce
             for
             such
             as
             are
             present
             ,
             and
             letters
             for
             the
             absent
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             are
             to
             come
             .
             Signes
             and
             markes
             which
             are
             not
             properly
             to
             signifie
             wordes
             ,
             but
             things
             ,
             cannot
             be
             called
             ,
             neyther
             in
             trueth
             are
             they
             letters
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             written
             ,
             for
             wee
             can
             not
             say
             that
             the
             Picture
             of
             the
             sunne
             be
             a
             writing
             of
             the
             sunne
             ,
             but
             onely
             a
             picture
             ;
             the
             like
             may
             be
             saide
             of
             other
             signes
             and
             characters
             ,
             which
             have
             no
             resemblance
             to
             the
             thing
             ,
             but
             serve
             onely
             for
             memorie
             :
             for
             he
             that
             invented
             them
             ,
             did
             not
             ordaine
             them
             to
             signifie
             wordes
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             note
             the
             thing
             :
             neyther
             do
             they
             call
             those
             characters
             ,
             letters
             ,
             or
             writings
             ,
             as
             indeede
             they
             are
             not
             ,
             but
             rather
             ciphers
             ,
             or
             remembraunces
             ,
             as
             those
             be
             which
             the
             Spherists
             or
             Astronomers
             do
             vse
             ,
             to
             signifie
             divers
             signes
             or
             planets
             of
             
               Mars
               ,
               Venus
               ,
               Iupiter
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             Such
             characters
             are
             ciphers
             ,
             and
             no
             letters
             :
             for
             what
             name
             soever
             Mars
             may
             have
             in
             Italian
             ,
             French
             ,
             or
             Spanish
             ,
             this
             character
             doth
             alwaies
             signifie
             it
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             not
             found
             in
             letters
             :
             for
             although
             they
             siguify
             the
             thing
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             by
             meanes
             of
             words
             .
             So
             as
             they
             which
             know
             
             not
             the
             tongue
             ,
             vnderstand
             them
             not
             :
             as
             for
             example
             ,
             the
             Greekes
             nor
             the
             Hebrews
             ,
             cannot
             conceive
             what
             this
             word
             Sol
             doth
             signifie
             ,
             although
             they
             see
             it
             written
             ;
             for
             that
             they
             vnderstand
             not
             the
             Latine
             word
             :
             so
             as
             writing
             and
             letters
             are
             onely
             practiced
             by
             them
             ,
             which
             signifie
             words
             therewith
             .
             For
             if
             they
             signifie
             things
             mediately
             ,
             they
             are
             no
             more
             letters
             nor
             writings
             ,
             but
             ciphers
             and
             pictures
             :
             whereby
             we
             may
             observe
             two
             notable
             things
             .
             The
             one
             ,
             that
             the
             memory
             of
             histories
             and
             antiquities
             may
             bee
             preserved
             by
             one
             of
             these
             three
             meanes
             ,
             either
             by
             letters
             and
             writings
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             vsed
             amongst
             the
             Latines
             ,
             Greekes
             ,
             Hebrews
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             Nations
             ;
             or
             by
             painting
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             vsed
             almost
             throughout
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             said
             in
             the
             second
             Nicene
             Counsell
             ,
             
               Painting
               is
               a
               booke
               for
               fooles
               which
               cannot
               reade
               :
            
             or
             by
             ciphers
             and
             characters
             ,
             as
             the
             cipher
             signifies
             the
             number
             of
             a
             hundred
             ,
             a
             thousand
             and
             others
             ,
             without
             noting
             the
             word
             of
             a
             hundred
             ,
             or
             a
             thousand
             .
             The
             other
             thing
             we
             may
             observe
             thereby
             ,
             is
             that
             which
             is
             propounded
             in
             this
             chapter
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             no
             Nation
             of
             the
             Indies
             discovered
             in
             our
             time
             ,
             hath
             had
             the
             vse
             of
             letters
             and
             writings
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             other
             two
             sortes
             ,
             images
             ,
             and
             figures
             .
             The
             which
             I
             observe
             ,
             not
             onely
             of
             the
             Indies
             of
             Peru
             ,
             and
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             Iappon
             ,
             and
             China
             .
             And
             although
             this
             may
             seeme
             false
             to
             some
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             testified
             by
             the
             discourses
             that
             have
             beene
             written
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             so
             great
             Libraries
             and
             Vniversities
             in
             China
             ,
             and
             Iappon
             ,
             and
             that
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             their
             Chapas
             ,
             letters
             ,
             and
             expeditions
             ,
             yet
             that
             which
             I
             say
             ,
             is
             true
             ,
             as
             you
             may
             vnderstand
             by
             the
             discourse
             following
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             fashion
             of
             Letters
             ,
             and
             Bookes
             ;
             the
             Chinois
             vsed
             .
             CHAP.
             5.
             
          
           
             THere
             are
             many
             which
             thinke
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             the
             most
             common
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             writings
             which
             the
             Chinois
             vsed
             ,
             are
             letters
             ,
             as
             those
             we
             vse
             in
             Europe
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             them
             wee
             may
             write
             wordes
             and
             discourses
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             only
             differ
             from
             our
             letters
             and
             writings
             ,
             in
             the
             diversitie
             of
             caracters
             ,
             as
             the
             Greekes
             differ
             from
             the
             Latines
             ,
             and
             the
             Hebrews
             from
             the
             Chaldees
             .
             But
             it
             is
             not
             so
             ,
             for
             they
             have
             no
             Alphabet
             ,
             neither
             write
             they
             any
             letters
             ,
             but
             all
             their
             writing
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             painting
             and
             ciphering
             :
             and
             their
             letters
             signifie
             no
             partes
             of
             distinctions
             ,
             as
             ours
             do
             ,
             but
             are
             figures
             and
             representations
             of
             things
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             of
             fire
             ,
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             of
             the
             sea
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             things
             .
             The
             which
             appears
             plainely
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             writings
             and
             Chapas
             ,
             are
             vnderstood
             of
             them
             all
             ,
             although
             the
             languages
             the
             Chinois
             speake
             ,
             are
             many
             and
             very
             different
             ,
             in
             like
             sort
             as
             our
             numbers
             of
             ciphers
             are
             equally
             vnderstooode
             in
             the
             Spanish
             ,
             French
             ,
             and
             Arabian
             tongues
             :
             for
             this
             figure
             8.
             wheresoever
             it
             be
             ,
             signifies
             eight
             ,
             althogh
             the
             French
             call
             this
             number
             of
             one
             sort
             ,
             and
             the
             Spaniards
             of
             another
             .
             So
             as
             things
             being
             of
             themselves
             innumerable
             ,
             the
             letters
             likewise
             or
             figures
             which
             the
             Chinois
             vse
             to
             signifie
             them
             by
             ,
             are
             in
             a
             maner
             infinite
             :
             so
             as
             he
             that
             shall
             reade
             or
             write
             at
             China
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             Mandarins
             doe
             ,
             )
             must
             know
             and
             keepe
             in
             memory
             at
             the
             least
             fourescore
             and
             five
             thousand
             characters
             or
             letters
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             are
             perfect
             herein
             ,
             know
             above
             sixscore
             thousand
             .
             Astrange
             and
             prodigious
             thing
             ;
             yea
             ,
             incredible
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             not
             testified
             by
             men
             worthy
             of
             credite
             ,
             as
             the
             fathers
             of
             our
             company
             ,
             who
             are
             there
             continually
             ,
             learning
             their
             
             language
             and
             writing
             ,
             wherein
             they
             have
             studied
             day
             and
             night
             above
             tenne
             yeares
             ,
             with
             a
             continuall
             labour
             ;
             for
             the
             charitie
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             desire
             of
             salvation
             of
             soules
             ,
             prevailed
             in
             them
             above
             all
             this
             labour
             and
             difficultie
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             learned
             men
             are
             so
             much
             esteemed
             in
             China
             ,
             for
             the
             difficultie
             there
             is
             to
             conceive
             them
             :
             &
             those
             only
             have
             the
             offices
             of
             Mandarins
             ,
             Governours
             ,
             Iudges
             ,
             and
             Captaines
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             the
             fathers
             take
             great
             pains
             to
             instruct
             their
             children
             to
             reade
             and
             write
             .
             There
             are
             many
             of
             these
             schooles
             where
             the
             children
             are
             taught
             ,
             where
             the
             masters
             teach
             them
             by
             day
             ,
             and
             the
             fathers
             at
             home
             by
             night
             :
             so
             as
             they
             hurt
             their
             eyes
             much
             ,
             and
             they
             whippe
             them
             often
             with
             reedes
             ,
             although
             not
             so
             severely
             as
             they
             doe
             offenders
             .
             They
             call
             it
             the
             Mandarin
             tongue
             ,
             which
             requires
             a
             mans
             age
             to
             be
             conceived
             .
             And
             you
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             tongue
             which
             the
             Mandarins
             speake
             ,
             bee
             peculiar
             and
             different
             from
             the
             Vulgar
             ,
             which
             are
             many
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             studie
             it
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             Latine
             &
             Greeke
             heere
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             learned
             only
             throghout
             all
             China
             ,
             do
             vnderstand
             it
             :
             so
             it
             is
             notwithstanding
             that
             all
             that
             is
             written
             in
             it
             ,
             is
             vnderstood
             in
             all
             tongues
             :
             and
             although
             all
             the
             Provinces
             doe
             not
             vnderstand
             one
             another
             by
             speaking
             ,
             yet
             by
             writing
             they
             doe
             :
             for
             there
             is
             but
             one
             sort
             of
             figures
             and
             characters
             for
             them
             all
             ,
             which
             signifie
             one
             thing
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             same
             word
             and
             prolation
             :
             seeing
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             )
             they
             are
             onely
             to
             denote
             the
             things
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             worde
             ,
             as
             we
             may
             easily
             vnderstand
             by
             the
             examples
             of
             numbers
             in
             ciphering
             .
             And
             they
             of
             Iappon
             &
             the
             Chinois
             ,
             do
             reade
             and
             vnderstand
             well
             the
             writings
             one
             of
             another
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             divers
             Nations
             ,
             and
             different
             in
             tongue
             and
             language
             .
             If
             they
             speake
             what
             they
             reade
             or
             write
             ,
             they
             
             should
             not
             bee
             vnderstood
             .
             Such
             are
             the
             letters
             and
             bookes
             the
             Chinois
             vse
             ,
             being
             so
             famous
             in
             the
             world
             .
             To
             make
             their
             impressions
             ,
             they
             grave
             a
             boord
             or
             plank
             with
             the
             figures
             they
             will
             print
             ,
             then
             do
             they
             stampe
             as
             many
             leaves
             of
             paper
             as
             they
             list
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             as
             they
             have
             made
             their
             pictures
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             graven
             in
             copper
             or
             wood
             .
             But
             a
             man
             of
             iudgement
             may
             aske
             ,
             how
             they
             could
             signifie
             their
             conceptions
             by
             figures
             ,
             which
             approached
             neere
             or
             resemble
             the
             thing
             they
             would
             represent
             ?
             As
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             heats
             ,
             or
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             beheld
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             or
             ,
             the
             day
             is
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             Finally
             ,
             how
             it
             were
             possible
             to
             denote
             by
             the
             same
             figures
             ,
             the
             case
             ,
             the
             coniunction
             ,
             and
             the
             articles
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             many
             tongues
             and
             writings
             ?
             I
             answer
             therevnto
             ,
             that
             they
             distinguish
             and
             signifie
             this
             varietie
             by
             certaine
             points
             ,
             strikes
             ,
             and
             dispositions
             of
             the
             figure
             .
             But
             it
             is
             difficult
             to
             vnderstand
             how
             they
             can
             write
             proper
             names
             in
             their
             tongue
             ,
             especially
             of
             strangers
             ,
             being
             things
             they
             have
             never
             seene
             ,
             and
             notable
             to
             invent
             figures
             proper
             vnto
             them
             .
             I
             have
             made
             triall
             thereof
             being
             in
             Mexico
             with
             the
             Chinois
             ,
             willing
             them
             to
             write
             this
             proposition
             in
             their
             language
             ,
             
               Ioseph
               Acosta
               is
               come
               from
            
             Peru
             :
             and
             such
             like
             :
             wherevpon
             the
             Chinois
             was
             long
             pensive
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             end
             hee
             did
             write
             it
             ,
             the
             which
             other
             Chinois
             did
             after
             reade
             ,
             although
             they
             did
             vary
             a
             little
             in
             the
             pronountiation
             of
             the
             proper
             name
             .
             For
             they
             vse
             this
             devise
             to
             write
             a
             proper
             name
             :
             they
             seeke
             out
             something
             in
             their
             tongue
             ,
             that
             hath
             resemblance
             to
             that
             name
             ,
             and
             set
             downe
             the
             figure
             of
             this
             thing
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             difficult
             among
             so
             many
             proper
             names
             ,
             to
             finde
             things
             to
             resemble
             them
             in
             the
             prolation
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             very
             difficult
             and
             troublesome
             ,
             to
             write
             such
             names
             .
             Vpon
             this
             purpose
             ,
             father
             Allonso
             SancheZ
             
             told
             vs
             ,
             that
             when
             he
             was
             in
             China
             ,
             being
             led
             into
             divers
             Tribunall
             seates
             ,
             from
             Manderin
             to
             Manderin
             ,
             they
             were
             long
             in
             putting
             his
             name
             in
             writing
             in
             their
             Chapas
             ,
             yet
             in
             the
             end
             they
             did
             write
             it
             after
             their
             maner
             ,
             and
             so
             ridiculously
             ,
             that
             they
             scarce
             came
             neere
             to
             the
             name
             :
             and
             this
             is
             the
             fashion
             of
             letters
             and
             writings
             which
             the
             Chinois
             vsed
             .
             That
             of
             the
             Iapponois
             approched
             very
             neere
             ,
             although
             they
             affirme
             that
             the
             Noblemen
             of
             Iappon
             that
             came
             into
             Europe
             ,
             did
             write
             all
             things
             very
             easily
             in
             their
             language
             ,
             were
             they
             of
             our
             proper
             names
             :
             yea
             ,
             I
             have
             had
             some
             of
             their
             writings
             shewed
             me
             ,
             whereby
             it
             seemes
             they
             should
             have
             some
             kinde
             of
             letters
             ,
             although
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             their
             writings
             ,
             be
             by
             the
             characters
             and
             figures
             ,
             as
             hath
             bin
             saide
             of
             the
             Chinois
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Schooles
             and
             Vniversities
             of
             China
             .
             CHAP.
             6.
             
          
           
             THe
             fathers
             of
             our
             company
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             not
             seene
             in
             China
             ,
             any
             great
             schooles
             or
             vniversities
             of
             Philosophie
             ,
             and
             other
             naturall
             sciences
             ;
             beleeving
             there
             is
             not
             any
             ,
             but
             that
             all
             their
             studie
             is
             in
             the
             Mandarin
             tongue
             ,
             which
             is
             very
             ample
             and
             hard
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             :
             and
             what
             they
             studie
             ,
             bee
             things
             written
             in
             their
             owne
             tongue
             ,
             which
             be
             histories
             of
             sects
             ,
             and
             opinions
             ,
             of
             civill
             lawes
             ,
             of
             morall
             proverbes
             ,
             of
             fables
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             such
             compositions
             that
             depend
             thereon
             .
             Of
             divine
             sciences
             they
             have
             no
             knowledge
             ,
             neither
             of
             naturall
             things
             ,
             but
             some
             small
             remainders
             of
             straied
             propositions
             ,
             without
             art
             or
             methode
             ,
             according
             to
             everie
             mans
             witte
             and
             studie
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Mathematikes
             ,
             they
             have
             experience
             of
             the
             celestiall
             motions
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             starres
             .
             And
             for
             Phisicke
             ,
             they
             have
             knowledge
             
             of
             herbs
             ,
             by
             means
             wherof
             ,
             they
             cure
             many
             diseases
             ,
             &
             vse
             it
             much
             .
             They
             write
             with
             pensils
             ,
             &
             have
             many
             books
             writen
             with
             the
             hand
             ,
             and
             others
             printed
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             bad
             order
             .
             They
             are
             great
             plaiers
             of
             come
             dies
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             perform
             with
             great
             preparation
             of
             theaters
             ,
             apparel
             ,
             bels
             ,
             drums
             ,
             and
             voices
             .
             Some
             fathers
             report
             to
             have
             seene
             comedies
             which
             lasted
             ten
             or
             twelve
             dayes
             and
             nights
             ,
             without
             any
             want
             of
             comedians
             ,
             nor
             company
             to
             beholde
             them
             .
             They
             doe
             make
             many
             different
             sceanes
             ,
             and
             whilst
             some
             act
             ,
             the
             others
             feede
             and
             sleep
             .
             In
             these
             comedies
             they
             do
             commonly
             treate
             of
             morall
             things
             ,
             and
             of
             good
             examples
             ,
             intermingled
             with
             pleasant
             devises
             .
             This
             is
             the
             summe
             of
             that
             which
             our
             men
             report
             of
             the
             letters
             and
             exercises
             of
             them
             of
             China
             ;
             wherein
             wee
             must
             confesse
             to
             be
             much
             wit
             and
             industrie
             .
             But
             all
             this
             is
             of
             small
             substance
             ,
             for
             in
             effect
             all
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Chinois
             ,
             tendes
             onely
             to
             reade
             and
             write
             ,
             &
             no
             farther
             :
             for
             they
             attaine
             to
             no
             high
             knowledge
             .
             And
             their
             writing
             ,
             and
             reading
             ,
             is
             not
             properly
             reading
             ,
             and
             writing
             ;
             seeing
             their
             letters
             are
             no
             letters
             that
             can
             represent
             wordes
             ,
             but
             figures
             of
             innumerable
             things
             ,
             the
             which
             cannot
             be
             learned
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             long
             time
             and
             with
             infinite
             labour
             .
             But
             in
             the
             end
             with
             all
             their
             knowledge
             ,
             an
             Indian
             of
             Peru
             or
             Mexico
             ,
             that
             hath
             learned
             to
             reade
             and
             write
             ,
             knowes
             more
             then
             the
             wisest
             Mandarin
             that
             is
             amongst
             them
             :
             for
             that
             the
             Indian
             with
             foure
             and
             twentie
             letters
             which
             he
             hath
             learned
             ,
             will
             write
             all
             the
             wordes
             in
             the
             world
             :
             and
             a
             Mandarin
             with
             his
             hundred
             thousand
             letters
             ,
             will
             be
             troubled
             to
             write
             some
             proper
             name
             ,
             as
             of
             Martin
             ,
             or
             Alonso
             ,
             &
             with
             greater
             reason
             he
             shal
             be
             lesse
             able
             to
             write
             the
             names
             of
             things
             he
             knowes
             not
             .
             So
             as
             the
             writing
             in
             China
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             but
             a
             maner
             of
             painting
             or
             ciphring
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             fashion
             of
             letters
             and
             writings
             which
             the
             Mexicaines
             vsed
             .
             
               CHAP.
               7.
            
             
          
           
             WE
             finde
             amongest
             the
             Nations
             of
             New
             Spaine
             a
             great
             knowledge
             and
             memorie
             of
             antiquitie
             ;
             and
             therefore
             searching
             by
             what
             meanes
             the
             Indians
             had
             preserved
             their
             Histories
             ,
             and
             so
             many
             particularities
             ,
             I
             learned
             ,
             that
             although
             they
             were
             not
             so
             subtill
             and
             curious
             as
             the
             Chinois
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             Iappon
             ,
             yet
             had
             they
             some
             kinde
             of
             letters
             and
             bookes
             amongest
             them
             ,
             whereby
             they
             preserved
             (
             after
             their
             manner
             )
             the
             deeds
             of
             their
             predecessors
             .
             In
             the
             province
             of
             Yu-lata●
             ,
             where
             the
             Bishopricke
             is
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             
               de
               Honduras
            
             ,
             there
             were
             bookes
             of
             the
             leaves
             of
             trees
             ,
             folded
             and
             squared
             ,
             after
             their
             manner
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             the
             wise
             Indians
             contained
             the
             distribution
             of
             their
             times
             ,
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             planets
             ,
             of
             beasts
             and
             other
             naturall
             things
             ,
             with
             their
             antiquities
             ,
             a
             thing
             full
             of
             great
             curiositie
             and
             diligence
             .
             It
             seemed
             to
             some
             Pedant
             that
             all
             this
             was
             an
             inchantment
             &
             magicke
             arte
             ,
             who
             did
             obstinately
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             burnt
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             were
             committed
             to
             the
             fire
             .
             Which
             since
             ,
             not
             onely
             the
             Indians
             found
             to
             be
             ill
             done
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             curious
             Spaniards
             ,
             who
             desired
             to
             know
             the
             secrets
             of
             the
             countrey
             .
             The
             like
             hath
             happened
             in
             other
             things
             :
             for
             our
             men
             thinking
             that
             all
             was
             but
             superstition
             ,
             have
             lost
             many
             memorialls
             of
             an
             ancient
             and
             holy
             things
             ,
             which
             might
             have
             profited
             much
             .
             This
             proceedeth
             of
             a
             foolish
             and
             ignorant
             zeale
             ,
             who
             not
             knowing
             ,
             nor
             seeking
             to
             knowe
             what
             concerned
             the
             Indians
             ,
             say
             preiudicately
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             all
             but
             witchcrafts
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             the
             Indians
             are
             but
             drunkards
             ,
             incapable
             to
             know
             or
             learne
             any
             thing
             .
             
             For
             such
             as
             would
             be
             curiously
             informed
             of
             them
             ,
             have
             found
             many
             things
             worthy
             of
             consideration
             .
             One
             of
             our
             company
             of
             Iesuites
             ,
             a
             man
             very
             witty
             and
             wel
             experienced
             ,
             did
             assemble
             in
             the
             province
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             the
             Antients
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             of
             Talla
             ,
             and
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             conferring
             at
             large
             with
             them
             ,
             who
             shewed
             vnto
             him
             their
             books
             ,
             histories
             and
             kalenders
             ,
             things
             very
             woorthy
             the
             sight
             ,
             bicause
             they
             had
             their
             figures
             and
             hierogliphicks
             ,
             wherby
             they
             represented
             things
             in
             this
             maner
             :
             Such
             as
             had
             forme
             or
             figure
             ,
             were
             represented
             by
             their
             proper
             images
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             had
             not
             any
             ,
             were
             represented
             by
             characters
             that
             signified
             them
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             they
             figured
             and
             writ
             what
             they
             would
             .
             And
             to
             observe
             the
             time
             when
             any
             thing
             did
             happen
             ,
             they
             had
             those
             painted
             wheeles
             ,
             for
             every
             one
             of
             them
             contained
             an
             age
             ,
             which
             was
             two
             and
             fifty
             yeares
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ;
             and
             of
             the
             side
             of
             those
             wheeles
             ,
             they
             did
             paint
             with
             figures
             and
             characters
             right
             against
             the
             yeare
             ,
             the
             memorable
             things
             that
             happened
             therein
             .
             As
             they
             noted
             the
             yeare
             whenas
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             their
             Countrey
             ,
             they
             painted
             a
             man
             with
             a
             hatte
             and
             a
             red
             ierkin
             ,
             vpon
             the
             signe
             of
             the
             reede
             ,
             which
             did
             rule
             then
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             other
             accidents
             .
             But
             for
             that
             their
             writings
             and
             characters
             were
             not
             sufficient
             as
             our
             letters
             and
             writings
             be
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             so
             plainly
             expresse
             the
             words
             ,
             but
             onely
             the
             substance
             of
             their
             conceptions
             .
             And
             forasmuch
             as
             they
             were
             accustomed
             to
             reherse
             Discourses
             and
             Dialogues
             by
             heart
             ,
             compounded
             by
             their
             Oratours
             and
             auntient
             Rhethoritians
             ,
             and
             many
             Chapas
             made
             by
             their
             Poets
             (
             which
             were
             impossible
             to
             learne
             by
             their
             Hierogliphickes
             and
             Characters
             )
             the
             Mexicaines
             were
             very
             curious
             to
             have
             their
             children
             learne
             those
             dialogues
             and
             compositions
             by
             heart
             .
             For
             the
             which
             cause
             they
             had
             
             Schooles
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             Colledges
             or
             Seminaries
             ,
             where
             the
             Auncients
             taught
             children
             these
             Orations
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             they
             preserved
             amongst
             them
             by
             tradition
             from
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             as
             perfectly
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             beene
             written
             ;
             especially
             the
             most
             famous
             Nations
             had
             a
             care
             to
             have
             their
             children
             (
             which
             had
             any
             inclination
             to
             be
             Rhetoritians
             ,
             and
             to
             practise
             the
             office
             of
             Orators
             )
             to
             learne
             these
             Orations
             by
             heart
             :
             So
             as
             when
             the
             Spaniardes
             came
             into
             their
             Country
             ,
             and
             had
             taught
             them
             reade
             and
             write
             our
             letters
             ,
             many
             of
             the
             Indians
             then
             wrote
             these
             Orations
             ,
             as
             some
             grave
             men
             doe
             witnes
             that
             had
             read
             them
             .
             Which
             I
             say
             ,
             for
             that
             some
             which
             shall
             happly
             reade
             these
             long
             and
             eloquent
             discourses
             in
             the
             Mexicaine
             Historie
             ,
             will
             easilie
             beleeve
             they
             have
             beene
             invented
             by
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             and
             not
             really
             taken
             and
             reported
             from
             the
             Indians
             .
             But
             having
             knowne
             the
             certaine
             trueth
             ,
             they
             will
             give
             credite
             (
             as
             reason
             is
             )
             to
             their
             Histories
             .
             They
             did
             also
             write
             these
             Discourses
             after
             their
             manner
             ,
             by
             Characters
             and
             Images
             :
             and
             I
             have
             seene
             for
             my
             better
             satisfaction
             ,
             the
             
               Pater
               noster
               ,
               Ave
               Maria
            
             ,
             and
             Simboll
             ,
             or
             generall
             confession
             of
             our
             faith
             ,
             written
             in
             this
             manner
             by
             the
             Indians
             .
          
           
             And
             in
             trueth
             whosoever
             shall
             see
             them
             ,
             will
             wonder
             thereat
             .
             For
             ,
             to
             signifie
             these
             wordes
             ,
             I
             a
             sinner
             do
             confesse
             my selfe
             ,
             they
             painted
             an
             Indian
             vppon
             his
             knees
             ,
             at
             a
             religious
             mans
             feete
             ,
             as
             one
             that
             confesseth
             himselfe
             :
             and
             for
             this
             ,
             
               To
               God
               most
               mighty
            
             ,
             they
             painted
             three
             faces
             with
             their
             Crownes
             ,
             like
             to
             the
             Trinitie
             ,
             and
             
               To
               the
               glorious
               Virgine
               Marie
            
             ,
             they
             painted
             the
             face
             of
             our
             Lady
             ,
             and
             halfe
             the
             body
             of
             a
             little
             childe
             :
             and
             for
             S.
             Peter
             and
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             heads
             with
             crowns
             ,
             and
             a
             key
             with
             a
             sword
             :
             and
             whereas
             images
             failed
             ,
             they
             did
             set
             characters
             ,
             
             as
             
               Wherein
               I
               have
               sinned
               ,
               &c.
            
             whereby
             wee
             may
             conceive
             the
             quickenesse
             of
             spirite
             of
             these
             Indians
             ,
             seeing
             this
             manner
             of
             writing
             of
             our
             prayers
             and
             matters
             of
             faith
             hath
             not
             beene
             taught
             them
             by
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             neither
             could
             they
             have
             done
             it
             ,
             if
             they
             had
             not
             had
             an
             excellent
             conception
             of
             that
             was
             taught
             them
             .
             And
             I
             have
             seene
             in
             Peru
             ,
             a
             confession
             of
             sinnes
             brought
             by
             an
             Indian
             ,
             written
             in
             the
             same
             forte
             with
             pictures
             and
             characters
             ,
             painting
             every
             one
             of
             the
             tenne
             Commandementes
             ,
             after
             a
             certaine
             manner
             ,
             where
             there
             were
             certaine
             markes
             like
             ciphers
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             sinnes
             hee
             had
             committed
             against
             the
             Commaundements
             .
             I
             nothing
             doubt
             but
             if
             any
             of
             the
             most
             sufficient
             Spaniards
             were
             imployed
             to
             make
             memorialles
             of
             the
             like
             things
             by
             their
             images
             and
             markes
             ,
             they
             would
             not
             attaine
             vnto
             it
             in
             a
             whole
             yeare
             ,
             no
             not
             in
             tenne
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Registers
             and
             the
             manner
             of
             reckoning
             which
             the
             Indians
             of
             Peru
             vsed
             .
             CHAP.
             8.
             
          
           
             BEfore
             the
             Spaniardes
             came
             to
             the
             Indies
             ,
             they
             of
             Peru
             had
             no
             kinde
             of
             writing
             ,
             either
             letters
             ,
             characters
             ,
             ciphers
             ,
             or
             figures
             ,
             like
             to
             those
             of
             China
             and
             Mexico
             :
             yet
             preserved
             they
             the
             memory
             of
             their
             Antiquities
             ,
             and
             maintaine
             an
             order
             in
             all
             their
             affairs
             ,
             of
             peace
             ,
             warre
             ,
             and
             pollicie
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             were
             carefull
             observers
             of
             traditions
             from
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             and
             the
             yoong
             ones
             learned
             ,
             and
             carefully
             kept
             ,
             as
             a
             holy
             thing
             ,
             what
             their
             superiors
             had
             tolde
             them
             ,
             and
             taught
             it
             with
             the
             like
             care
             to
             their
             posteritie
             .
             Besides
             this
             diligence
             ,
             they
             supplied
             the
             want
             of
             letters
             and
             writings
             ,
             partely
             by
             painting
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             (
             although
             they
             of
             Peru
             
             were
             very
             grose
             and
             blockish
             )
             and
             partely
             ,
             and
             most
             commonly
             by
             Quippos
             .
             These
             Quippos
             are
             memorialls
             or
             registers
             ,
             made
             of
             bowes
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             there
             are
             diverse
             knottes
             and
             colours
             ,
             which
             do
             signifie
             diverse
             things
             ,
             and
             it
             is
             strange
             to
             see
             what
             they
             have
             expressed
             and
             represented
             by
             this
             meanes
             :
             for
             their
             Quippos
             serve
             them
             insteede
             of
             Bookes
             of
             histories
             ,
             of
             lawes
             ,
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             accounts
             of
             their
             affaires
             .
             There
             were
             officers
             appointed
             to
             keepe
             these
             Quippos
             ,
             the
             which
             at
             this
             day
             they
             call
             Quipocamayos
             ▪
             the
             which
             were
             bound
             to
             give
             an
             account
             of
             every
             thing
             ,
             as
             Notaries
             and
             Registers
             doe
             heere
             .
             Therefore
             they
             fully
             beleeved
             them
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             for
             according
             to
             the
             varietie
             of
             businesse
             ,
             as
             warres
             ,
             pollicie
             ,
             tributes
             ,
             ceremonies
             and
             landes
             ,
             there
             were
             sundry
             Quippos
             or
             braunches
             ,
             in
             every
             one
             of
             the
             which
             there
             were
             so
             many
             knottes
             little
             and
             great
             ,
             and
             strings
             tied
             vnto
             them
             ,
             some
             red
             ,
             some
             greene
             ,
             some
             blew
             ,
             some
             white
             ;
             and
             finally
             ,
             such
             diversitie
             ,
             that
             even
             as
             wee
             derive
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             woordes
             from
             the
             foure
             and
             twenty
             letters
             ,
             applying
             them
             in
             diverse
             sortes
             ,
             so
             doe
             they
             drawe
             innumerable
             woordes
             from
             their
             knottes
             ,
             and
             diversitie
             of
             colours
             .
             Which
             thing
             they
             doe
             in
             such
             a
             manner
             ,
             that
             if
             at
             this
             day
             in
             Peru
             ,
             any
             Commissary
             come
             at
             the
             end
             of
             two
             or
             three
             yeares
             ,
             to
             take
             information
             vppon
             the
             life
             of
             any
             officer
             ,
             the
             Indians
             come
             with
             their
             small
             reckonings
             verified
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             in
             such
             a
             village
             they
             have
             given
             him
             so
             many
             egges
             which
             hee
             hath
             not
             payed
             for
             ,
             in
             such
             a
             house
             a
             henne
             ,
             in
             an
             other
             ,
             two
             burdens
             of
             grasse
             for
             his
             horse
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             hath
             paied
             but
             so
             much
             mony
             ,
             and
             remaineth
             debtor
             so
             much
             .
             The
             proofe
             being
             presently
             made
             with
             these
             numbers
             of
             knottes
             and
             handfulls
             of
             cords
             ,
             it
             remaines
             for
             a
             certaine
             testimony
             and
             register
             .
             I
             did
             
             see
             a
             handfull
             of
             these
             strings
             ,
             wherein
             an
             Indian
             woman
             carried
             written
             a
             generall
             confession
             of
             all
             her
             life
             ,
             and
             thereby
             confessed
             herselfe
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             I
             could
             have
             done
             it
             in
             written
             paper
             .
             I
             asked
             her
             what
             those
             strings
             meant
             that
             differed
             from
             the
             rest
             :
             she
             aunswered
             mee
             ,
             they
             were
             certaine
             circumstaunces
             which
             the
             sin
             required
             to
             be
             fully
             confessed
             .
             Beside
             these
             Quippos
             of
             thred
             ,
             they
             have
             an
             other
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             a
             kinde
             of
             writing
             with
             small
             stones
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             they
             learne
             punctually
             the
             words
             they
             desire
             to
             know
             by
             heart
             .
             It
             is
             a
             pleasant
             thing
             to
             see
             the
             olde
             and
             the
             impotent
             (
             with
             a
             wheele
             made
             of
             small
             stones
             )
             learne
             the
             
               Pater
               noster
            
             ,
             with
             another
             the
             
               Ave
               Maria
            
             ,
             with
             another
             the
             Creede
             ;
             and
             to
             remember
             what
             stone
             signifies
             ,
             
               Which
               was
               conceived
               by
               the
               holy-ghost
               ,
            
             and
             which
             ,
             
               Suffered
               vnder
               Pontius
               Pilate
            
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             pleasant
             thing
             to
             see
             them
             correct
             themselves
             when
             they
             doe
             erre
             ;
             for
             all
             their
             correction
             consisteth
             onely
             in
             beholding
             of
             their
             small
             stones
             .
             One
             of
             these
             wheeles
             were
             sufficient
             to
             make
             mee
             forget
             all
             that
             I
             do
             knowe
             by
             heart
             .
             There
             are
             a
             great
             number
             of
             these
             wheeles
             in
             the
             Church-yardes
             for
             this
             purpose
             .
             But
             it
             seemes
             a
             kinde
             of
             witchcraft
             ,
             to
             see
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             Quippos
             ,
             which
             they
             make
             of
             graines
             of
             Mays
             ,
             for
             to
             cast
             vp
             a
             hard
             account
             ,
             wherein
             a
             good
             Arithmetitian
             would
             be
             troubled
             with
             his
             penne
             to
             make
             a
             division
             :
             to
             see
             how
             much
             every
             one
             must
             contribute
             :
             they
             do
             drawe
             so
             many
             graines
             from
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             adde
             so
             many
             to
             another
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             other
             inventions
             .
             These
             Indians
             wil
             take
             their
             graines
             ,
             and
             place
             five
             of
             one
             side
             ,
             three
             of
             another
             ,
             and
             eight
             of
             another
             ,
             and
             wil
             change
             one
             graine
             of
             one
             side
             ,
             and
             three
             of
             another
             :
             So
             as
             they
             finish
             a
             certaine
             account
             ,
             without
             erring
             in
             any
             poynt
             :
             
             and
             they
             sooner
             submitte
             themselves
             to
             reason
             by
             these
             Quippos
             ,
             what
             every
             one
             ought
             to
             pay
             ,
             then
             we
             can
             do
             with
             the
             penne
             .
             Hereby
             we
             may
             iudge
             if
             they
             have
             any
             vnderstanding
             ,
             or
             be
             brutish
             :
             for
             my
             parte
             ,
             I
             think
             they
             passe
             vs
             in
             those
             things
             ,
             wherevnto
             they
             do
             apply
             themselves
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             order
             the
             Indians
             holde
             in
             their
             writings
             .
             CHAP.
             9.
             
          
           
             IT
             shal
             be
             good
             to
             adde
             heerevnto
             what
             we
             have
             observed
             ,
             touching
             the
             Indians
             writings
             :
             for
             their
             maner
             was
             not
             to
             write
             with
             a
             continued
             line
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             ,
             or
             in
             circle-wise
             .
             The
             Latines
             and
             Greeks
             do
             write
             from
             the
             left
             hand
             vnto
             the
             right
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             vulgar
             and
             common
             manner
             we
             do
             vse
             .
             The
             Hebrewes
             contrariwise
             beganne
             at
             the
             right
             to
             the
             left
             ,
             and
             therefore
             their
             bookes
             beganne
             where
             ours
             did
             end
             .
             The
             Chinois
             write
             neither
             like
             the
             Greeks
             nor
             like
             the
             Hebrews
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             ,
             for
             as
             they
             be
             no
             letters
             but
             whole
             wordes
             ,
             and
             that
             every
             figure
             and
             character
             signifieth
             a
             thing
             ,
             they
             have
             no
             neede
             to
             assemble
             the
             parts
             one
             with
             an
             other
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             may
             well
             write
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             .
             Those
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             for
             the
             same
             cause
             did
             not
             write
             in
             line
             ,
             from
             one
             side
             to
             another
             ,
             but
             contrarie
             to
             the
             Chinois
             ,
             beginning
             below
             ,
             they
             mounted
             vpward
             .
             They
             vsed
             this
             maner
             of
             writing
             ,
             in
             the
             account
             of
             their
             daies
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             which
             they
             observed
             :
             Yet
             when
             they
             did
             write
             in
             their
             wheels
             or
             signes
             ,
             they
             beganne
             from
             the
             middest
             where
             the
             Sunne
             was
             figured
             ,
             and
             so
             mounted
             by
             their
             yeeres
             vnto
             the
             round
             and
             circumference
             of
             the
             wheele
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             wee
             
             finde
             foure
             different
             kindes
             of
             writings
             ,
             some
             writte
             from
             the
             right
             to
             the
             left
             ,
             others
             from
             the
             left
             to
             the
             right
             ,
             some
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             ,
             and
             others
             from
             the
             foote
             to
             the
             toppe
             ,
             wherein
             wee
             may
             discover
             the
             diversity
             of
             mans
             iudgement
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             Indians
             dispatched
             their
             Messengers
             .
             CHAP.
             10.
             
          
           
             TO
             finish
             the
             maner
             they
             had
             of
             writing
             ,
             some
             may
             with
             reason
             doubt
             how
             the
             Kings
             of
             Mexico
             and
             Peru
             had
             intelligence
             from
             all
             those
             realmes
             that
             were
             so
             great
             ,
             or
             by
             what
             meanes
             they
             could
             dispatch
             their
             affaires
             in
             Court
             ,
             seeing
             they
             had
             no
             vse
             of
             any
             letters
             ,
             nor
             to
             write
             pacquets
             :
             wherein
             we
             may
             be
             satisfied
             of
             this
             doubt
             ,
             when
             we
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             by
             wordes
             ,
             pictures
             ,
             and
             these
             memorialles
             ,
             they
             were
             often
             advertised
             of
             that
             which
             passed
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             there
             were
             men
             of
             great
             agilitie
             ,
             which
             served
             as
             curriers
             ,
             to
             goe
             and
             come
             ,
             whome
             they
             did
             nourish
             in
             this
             exercise
             of
             running
             from
             their
             youth
             ,
             labouring
             to
             have
             them
             well
             breathed
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             runne
             to
             the
             toppe
             of
             a
             high
             hill
             without
             wearines
             .
             And
             therefore
             in
             Mexico
             they
             gave
             the
             prize
             to
             three
             or
             foure
             that
             first
             mounted
             vp
             the
             staires
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             in
             the
             former
             Booke
             .
             And
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             when
             they
             made
             their
             solemne
             feast
             of
             Capacrayme
             ,
             the
             novices
             did
             runne
             who
             could
             fastest
             vp
             the
             rocke
             of
             Ynacauri
             .
             And
             the
             exercise
             of
             running
             is
             generall
             ;
             much
             vsed
             among
             the
             Indians
             .
             Whenas
             there
             chaunced
             any
             matter
             of
             importaunce
             ,
             they
             sent
             vnto
             the
             Lordes
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             the
             thing
             painted
             ,
             whereof
             they
             would
             advertise
             them
             ,
             as
             they
             did
             when
             the
             first
             Spanish
             ships
             appeared
             to
             their
             ●ight
             ,
             &
             when
             
             they
             tooke
             Topanchan
             .
             In
             Peru
             they
             were
             very
             curious
             of
             footemen
             ,
             and
             the
             Ingua
             had
             them
             in
             all
             parts
             of
             the
             realme
             ,
             as
             ordinary
             Posts
             called
             Chasquis
             ,
             whereof
             shall
             be
             spoken
             in
             his
             place
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             manner
             of
             governement
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Kings
             which
             the
             Indians
             had
             .
             CHAP.
             11.
             
          
           
             IT
             is
             apparant
             ,
             that
             the
             thing
             wherein
             these
             barbarous
             people
             shew
             their
             barbarisme
             ,
             was
             in
             their
             governement
             and
             manner
             of
             commaund
             :
             for
             the
             more
             that
             men
             approch
             to
             reason
             ,
             the
             more
             milde
             is
             their
             governement
             and
             lesse
             insolent
             ;
             the
             Kings
             and
             Lords
             are
             more
             tractable
             ,
             agreeing
             better
             with
             their
             subiects
             ,
             acknowledging
             them
             equall
             in
             nature
             ,
             though
             inferiour
             in
             duetie
             and
             care
             of
             the
             commonwealth
             .
             But
             amongst
             the
             Barbarians
             all
             is
             contrary
             ,
             for
             that
             their
             government
             is
             tyrannous
             ,
             vsing
             their
             subiects
             like
             beasts
             ,
             and
             seeking
             to
             be
             reverenced
             like
             gods
             :
             For
             this
             occasion
             many
             nations
             of
             the
             Indies
             have
             not
             indured
             any
             Kings
             ,
             or
             absolute
             &
             soveraigne
             Lords
             ,
             but
             live
             in
             comminalties
             ,
             creating
             and
             appointing
             Captains
             and
             Princes
             ,
             for
             certaine
             occasions
             onely
             ,
             to
             whome
             they
             obey
             during
             the
             time
             of
             their
             charge
             ,
             then
             after
             they
             returne
             to
             their
             former
             estates
             .
             The
             greatest
             part
             of
             this
             new
             world
             (
             where
             there
             are
             no
             settled
             kingdomes
             ,
             nor
             established
             commonweales
             ,
             neither
             princes
             nor
             succeeding
             kings
             )
             they
             governe
             themselves
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             although
             there
             be
             some
             Lordes
             and
             principall
             men
             raised
             above
             the
             common
             sort
             .
             In
             this
             sorte
             the
             whole
             Countrey
             of
             Chille
             is
             governed
             ,
             where
             the
             Auracanes
             ,
             those
             of
             Teucapell
             and
             others
             ,
             have
             so
             many
             yeeres
             resisted
             the
             Spaniardes
             .
             
             And
             in
             like
             sort
             all
             the
             new
             kingdome
             of
             Grenad●
             ,
             that
             of
             Guatimalla
             ,
             the
             Ilandes
             ,
             all
             
               Florida
               ,
               Bresill
               ,
               L●s●●
            
             and
             other
             countries
             of
             great
             circuite
             :
             but
             that
             in
             some
             places
             ,
             they
             are
             yet
             more
             barbarous
             ,
             scarcely
             acknowledging
             any
             head
             ,
             but
             all
             commaund
             and
             governe
             in
             common
             ,
             having
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             but
             wil
             ,
             violence
             ,
             industry
             and
             disorder
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             that
             most
             may
             ,
             most
             commaunds
             .
             At
             the
             East
             Indies
             there
             are
             great
             kingdomes
             ,
             well
             ordered
             and
             governed
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             
               Sian
               ,
               Bisnaga
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             which
             may
             bring
             to
             field
             when
             they
             please
             ,
             a
             hundred
             or
             two
             hundred
             thousand
             men
             .
          
           
             As
             likewise
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             China
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             greatnes
             and
             power
             ,
             surpasseth
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             whose
             kings
             ,
             (
             as
             they
             report
             ,
             )
             have
             continued
             above
             two
             thousand
             yeares
             ,
             by
             meanes
             of
             their
             good
             order
             and
             government
             .
             But
             at
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             they
             have
             onely
             found
             two
             Kingdomes
             or
             setled
             Empires
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Inguas
             in
             Peru.
             It
             is
             not
             easie
             to
             be
             said
             ,
             which
             of
             the
             two
             was
             the
             mightiest
             Kingdome
             ,
             for
             that
             Motecuma
             ,
             exceeded
             them
             of
             Peru
             ,
             in
             buildings
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             greatnes
             of
             his
             court
             :
             but
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             did
             likewise
             exceede
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             in
             treasure
             ,
             riches
             ,
             and
             greatnes
             of
             Provinces
             .
             In
             regarde
             of
             antiquitie
             ,
             the
             Monarchie
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             hath
             the
             advantage
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             not
             much
             ,
             and
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             they
             have
             beene
             equall
             in
             feates
             of
             armes
             and
             victories
             .
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             these
             two
             Kingdomes
             have
             much
             exceeded
             all
             the
             Indian
             Provinces
             ,
             discovered
             in
             this
             new
             world
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             good
             order
             and
             government
             ,
             as
             in
             power
             and
             wealth
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             in
             superstition
             and
             service
             of
             their
             idolls
             ,
             having
             many
             things
             like
             one
             to
             an
             other
             .
             But
             in
             one
             thing
             they
             differed
             much
             ,
             for
             among
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             the
             succession
             of
             the
             kingdome
             ,
             
             was
             by
             election
             ,
             as
             the
             Empire
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Peru
             ,
             was
             hereditarie
             ,
             and
             they
             succeeded
             in
             bloud
             ,
             as
             the
             Kingdomes
             of
             Fraunce
             ,
             and
             Spaine
             .
             I
             will
             therefore
             heereafter
             treate
             of
             these
             two
             governments
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             chiefe
             subiect
             and
             best
             knowne
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             ,
             )
             being
             fit
             for
             this
             discourse
             ,
             leaving
             many
             and
             tedious
             things
             which
             are
             not
             of
             importance
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Government
             of
             the
             Kings
             and
             Inguas
             of
             Peru.
             CHAP.
             12.
             
          
           
             THe
             Ingua
             which
             ruled
             in
             Peru
             ,
             being
             dead
             ,
             his
             lawfull
             sonne
             succeeded
             him
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             held
             him
             that
             was
             borne
             of
             his
             chiefe
             wife
             ,
             whome
             they
             called
             Coya
             .
             The
             which
             they
             have
             alwaies
             observed
             since
             the
             time
             of
             an
             Ingua
             ,
             calld
             Yupangui
             ,
             who
             married
             his
             sister
             :
             for
             these
             Kings
             held
             it
             an
             honour
             to
             marry
             their
             sisters
             .
             And
             although
             they
             had
             other
             wives
             ,
             and
             concubines
             ,
             yet
             the
             succession
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             appertained
             to
             the
             sonne
             of
             the
             Coya
             .
             It
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             King
             had
             a
             legitimate
             brother
             ,
             he
             succeeded
             before
             the
             sonne
             ,
             and
             after
             him
             his
             nephew
             ,
             and
             sonne
             to
             the
             first
             .
             The
             Curacas
             ,
             and
             Noblemen
             ,
             held
             the
             same
             order
             of
             succession
             in
             their
             goods
             and
             offices
             .
             And
             after
             their
             maner
             they
             made
             excessive
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             obsequies
             for
             the
             dead
             .
             They
             observed
             one
             custome
             very
             great
             &
             full
             of
             state
             ,
             that
             a
             King
             which
             entred
             newly
             into
             his
             Kingdome
             ,
             should
             not
             inherite
             any
             thing
             of
             the
             movables
             ,
             implements
             ,
             and
             treasure
             of
             his
             predecessour
             ,
             but
             hee
             must
             furnish
             his
             house
             new
             ,
             and
             gather
             together
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             necessarie
             ,
             not
             touching
             any
             thing
             of
             the
             deceased
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             wholy
             dedicated
             for
             his
             Oratorie
             or
             Guaca
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             entertainment
             of
             the
             family
             he
             left
             ,
             the
             which
             with
             his
             of-spring
             ,
             was
             
             alwaies
             busied
             at
             the
             sacrifices
             ,
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             service
             of
             the
             deceased
             King
             :
             for
             being
             dead
             ,
             they
             presently
             held
             him
             for
             a
             god
             ,
             making
             sacrifices
             vnto
             him
             ,
             images
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             ,
             there
             was
             infinite
             treasure
             in
             Peru
             :
             for
             every
             one
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             had
             laboured
             to
             have
             his
             Oratorie
             and
             treasure
             surpasse
             that
             of
             his
             predecessors
             .
             The
             marke
             or
             ensigne
             ,
             whereby
             they
             took
             possession
             of
             the
             realme
             ,
             was
             a
             red
             rowle
             of
             wooll
             ,
             more
             fine
             then
             silke
             ,
             the
             which
             hung
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             his
             forehead
             :
             and
             none
             but
             the
             Ingua
             alone
             might
             weare
             it
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             as
             a
             Crowne
             and
             royall
             Diademe
             :
             yet
             they
             might
             lawfully
             weare
             a
             rowle
             hanging
             on
             the
             one
             side
             ,
             neere
             vnto
             the
             eare
             ,
             as
             some
             Noblemen
             did
             ,
             but
             onely
             the
             Ingua
             might
             carry
             it
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             his
             forehead
             .
             At
             such
             time
             as
             they
             tooke
             this
             roule
             or
             wreathe
             ,
             they
             made
             solemne
             feasts
             ,
             and
             many
             sacrifices
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             vessell
             of
             gold
             ,
             and
             silver
             ,
             a
             great
             number
             of
             small
             formes
             or
             images
             of
             sheep
             ,
             made
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             great
             abundance
             of
             the
             stuffes
             of
             Cumby
             ,
             well
             wrought
             ,
             both
             fine
             and
             courser
             ,
             many
             shells
             of
             the
             sea
             of
             all
             sortes
             ,
             many
             feathers
             ,
             and
             a
             thousand
             sheepe
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             of
             divers
             colours
             .
             Then
             the
             chiefe
             Priest
             tooke
             a
             yong
             child
             in
             his
             handes
             ,
             of
             the
             age
             of
             six
             or
             eight
             yeares
             ,
             pronouncing
             these
             wordes
             with
             the
             other
             ministers
             speaking
             to
             the
             image
             of
             
               Viracocha
               ,
               Lord
               we
               offer
               this
               vnto
               thee
               ,
               that
               thou
               maiest
               maintaine
               vs
               in
               quiet
               ,
               and
               helpe
               vs
               in
               our
               warres
               ,
               maintaine
               our
               Lord
               the
            
             Ingua
             
               in
               his
               greatnes
               and
               estate
               ,
               that
               hee
               may
               alwaies
               increase
               ,
               giving
               him
               much
               knowledge
               to
               governe
               vs.
            
             There
             were
             present
             at
             this
             ceremony
             and
             oath
             ,
             men
             of
             all
             partes
             of
             the
             Realme
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             Guacas
             and
             Sanctuaries
             .
             And
             without
             doubt
             ,
             the
             affection
             and
             reverence
             this
             people
             bare
             to
             their
             Kings
             Inguas
             ,
             was
             very
             
             great
             ,
             for
             it
             is
             never
             found
             that
             any
             one
             of
             his
             subiectes
             committed
             treason
             against
             him
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             proceeded
             in
             their
             governments
             ,
             not
             only
             with
             an
             absolute
             power
             ,
             but
             also
             with
             good
             order
             and
             iustice
             ,
             suffering
             no
             man
             to
             be
             oppressed
             :
             The
             Ingua
             placed
             governours
             in
             divers
             Provinces
             ,
             amongst
             the
             which
             ,
             some
             were
             superiors
             ,
             and
             did
             acknowledge
             none
             but
             himselfe
             ,
             others
             were
             of
             lesse
             commaund
             ,
             and
             others
             more
             particular
             ,
             with
             so
             goodly
             an
             order
             ,
             and
             such
             gravitie
             ,
             as
             no
             man
             durst
             bee
             drunke
             ,
             nor
             take
             an
             eare
             of
             Mays
             from
             his
             neighbour
             .
             These
             Inguas
             held
             it
             for
             a
             maxime
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             necessary
             to
             keepe
             the
             Indians
             alwaies
             in
             action
             :
             and
             therefore
             we
             see
             it
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             long
             cawseies
             and
             workes
             of
             great
             labour
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             say
             were
             made
             to
             exercise
             the
             Indians
             ,
             lest
             they
             should
             remaine
             idle
             .
             When
             he
             conquered
             any
             new
             Province
             ,
             he
             was
             accustomed
             presently
             to
             send
             the
             greatest
             part
             ,
             and
             the
             chiefe
             of
             that
             Country
             into
             other
             Provinces
             ,
             or
             else
             to
             his
             Court
             ,
             and
             they
             call
             them
             at
             this
             day
             in
             
               Peru
               ,
               Mitimas
            
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             places
             hee
             sent
             others
             of
             the
             Nation
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             especially
             the
             Orciones
             ,
             which
             were
             as
             Knights
             of
             an
             ancient
             house
             .
             They
             punished
             faultes
             rigorously
             .
             And
             therefore
             such
             as
             have
             any
             vnderstanding
             heereof
             ,
             hold
             opinion
             ,
             that
             there
             can
             be
             no
             better
             government
             for
             the
             Indians
             ,
             no
             more
             assured
             ,
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Inguas
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             distribution
             the
             Inguas
             made
             of
             their
             Vessell
             .
             CHAP.
             13.
             
          
           
             TO
             relate
             more
             particularly
             what
             I
             have
             spoken
             before
             ,
             you
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             the
             distribution
             which
             the
             Inguas
             made
             of
             their
             vessells
             ,
             was
             so
             exact
             
             and
             distinct
             ,
             as
             he
             might
             governe
             them
             all
             with
             great
             facilitie
             ,
             although
             his
             realme
             were
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             long
             :
             for
             having
             conquered
             a
             Province
             ,
             he
             presently
             reduced
             the
             Indians
             into
             Towns
             and
             Comminalties
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             divided
             into
             bandes
             ,
             hee
             appointed
             one
             to
             have
             the
             charge
             over
             every
             ten
             Indians
             ,
             over
             every
             hundred
             another
             ,
             over
             every
             thousand
             another
             ,
             &
             over
             ten
             thousand
             another
             ,
             whom
             they
             called
             Humo
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             one
             of
             the
             greatest
             charges
             .
             Yet
             above
             all
             in
             every
             Province
             ,
             there
             was
             a
             Governour
             of
             the
             house
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             whom
             all
             the
             rest
             obeyed
             ,
             giving
             vnto
             him
             every
             yeare
             in
             particular
             account
             of
             what
             had
             passed
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             of
             such
             as
             were
             borne
             ,
             of
             those
             that
             were
             dead
             and
             of
             their
             troups
             and
             graine
             .
             The
             Governors
             went
             every
             yeare
             out
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             they
             remained
             ,
             and
             returned
             to
             the
             great
             feast
             of
             Rayme
             ,
             at
             the
             which
             ,
             they
             brought
             the
             tribute
             of
             the
             whole
             Realme
             to
             the
             Court
             ;
             neither
             might
             they
             enter
             but
             with
             this
             condition
             .
             All
             the
             Kingdome
             was
             divided
             into
             foure
             partes
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Tahuantinsuyo
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               Chinchasuyo
               ,
               Collasuyo
               ,
               Andesuyo
            
             ,
             &
             Condesuyo
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             foure
             waies
             which
             went
             from
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             the
             Court
             was
             resident
             ,
             and
             where
             the
             generall
             assemblies
             of
             the
             realme
             were
             made
             .
             These
             waies
             and
             Provinces
             being
             answerable
             vnto
             them
             ,
             were
             towards
             the
             foure
             quarters
             of
             the
             wo●ld
             ,
             Collasuyo
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             Chinchasuyo
             to
             the
             North
             ,
             Condesuȳo
             to
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             And●suyo
             to
             the
             East
             .
             In
             every
             towne
             and
             village
             ,
             there
             were
             two
             sortes
             of
             people
             ,
             which
             were
             of
             Hanansaya
             ,
             and
             Vrinsaya
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             those
             above
             ,
             and
             those
             below
             .
             When
             they
             commanded
             any
             worke
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             or
             to
             furnish
             any
             thing
             to
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             the
             officers
             knew
             presently
             how
             much
             every
             Province
             ,
             Towne
             ,
             and
             Family
             ,
             
             ought
             to
             furnish
             :
             so
             as
             the
             division
             was
             not
             made
             by
             equall
             portions
             ,
             but
             by
             cottization
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             qualities
             and
             wealth
             of
             the
             Countrie
             .
             So
             as
             for
             example
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             to
             gather
             a
             hundred
             thousand
             Fan●gues
             of
             Mays
             ,
             they
             knew
             presently
             how
             much
             every
             Province
             was
             to
             contribute
             ,
             were
             it
             a
             tenth
             ,
             a
             seventh
             ,
             or
             a
             fift
             part
             .
             The
             like
             was
             of
             Townes
             and
             Villages
             ,
             Aillos
             ,
             or
             Linages
             .
             The
             Quipocamayos
             ,
             which
             were
             the
             officers
             and
             intendants
             ,
             kept
             the
             account
             of
             all
             with
             their
             strings
             and
             knottes
             ,
             without
             failing
             ,
             setting
             downe
             what
             every
             one
             had
             paied
             ,
             even
             to
             a
             hen
             ,
             or
             a
             burthen
             of
             wood
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             moment
             they
             did
             see
             by
             divers
             regis●ers
             what
             every
             one
             ought
             to
             pay
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Edifices
             and
             maner
             of
             building
             of
             the
             Inguas
             CHAP.
             14.
             
          
           
             THE
             Edifices
             and
             Buildings
             which
             the
             Inguas
             made
             in
             temples
             ,
             fortresses
             ,
             waies
             ,
             countrie
             houses
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             ,
             were
             many
             in
             number
             ,
             and
             of
             an
             excessive
             labour
             ,
             as
             doth
             appeare
             at
             this
             day
             by
             their
             ruines
             and
             remainders
             ,
             both
             in
             
               Cusco
               ,
               Tyaguanaco
               ,
               Tambo
            
             ,
             and
             other
             places
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             stones
             of
             an
             vnmeasurable
             greatnes
             :
             so
             as
             men
             cannot
             conceive
             how
             they
             were
             cut
             ,
             brought
             ,
             and
             set
             in
             their
             places
             .
             There
             came
             great
             numbers
             of
             people
             from
             all
             Provinces
             ,
             to
             worke
             in
             these
             buildings
             and
             fortresses
             ,
             which
             the
             Ingua
             caused
             to
             be
             made
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             or
             other
             partes
             of
             the
             Realme
             .
             As
             these
             workes
             were
             strange
             ,
             and
             to
             amaze
             the
             beholders
             ,
             wherein
             they
             vsed
             no
             morter
             nor
             ciment
             ,
             neither
             any
             yron
             ,
             or
             steele
             ,
             to
             cut
             ,
             and
             set
             the
             stones
             in
             worke
             .
             They
             had
             no
             engines
             or
             other
             instruments
             to
             carrie
             them
             ,
             and
             yet
             were
             they
             so
             artificially
             wrought
             ,
             that
             
             in
             many
             places
             they
             could
             not
             see
             the
             ioyntes
             :
             and
             many
             of
             these
             stones
             are
             so
             big
             ,
             that
             it
             were
             an
             incredible
             thing
             ,
             if
             one
             should
             not
             see
             them
             .
             At
             Tiaguanaco
             ,
             I
             did
             measure
             a
             stone
             of
             thirty
             eight
             foote
             long
             ,
             of
             eighteene
             broade
             ,
             and
             six
             thicke
             .
             And
             in
             the
             wall
             of
             the
             fortresse
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             Moallon
             ,
             there
             are
             stones
             of
             a
             geater
             bignes
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             most
             strange
             ,
             these
             stones
             being
             not
             cut
             nor
             squared
             to
             ioyne
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             very
             vnequall
             one
             with
             another
             in
             forme
             and
             greatnes
             ,
             yet
             did
             they
             ioyne
             them
             together
             without
             ciment
             ,
             after
             an
             incredible
             maner
             .
             All
             this
             was
             done
             by
             the
             force
             of
             men
             ,
             who
             endured
             their
             labour
             with
             an
             invincible
             patience
             .
             For
             to
             ioyne
             one
             stone
             with
             an
             other
             ,
             they
             were
             forced
             to
             handle
             and
             trie
             many
             of
             them
             often
             ,
             being
             vneven
             .
             The
             Ingua
             appoynted
             every
             yeare
             what
             numbers
             of
             people
             should
             labour
             in
             these
             stones
             and
             buildings
             ,
             and
             the
             Indians
             made
             a
             division
             amongest
             them
             ,
             as
             of
             other
             things
             ,
             so
             as
             no
             man
             was
             oppressed
             .
             Although
             these
             buildings
             were
             great
             ,
             yet
             were
             they
             commonly
             ill
             appoynted
             and
             vnfit
             ,
             almost
             like
             to
             the
             Mosquites
             or
             buildings
             of
             the
             Barbarians
             .
          
           
             They
             could
             make
             no
             arches
             in
             their
             edifices
             ,
             no●
             morter
             or
             cyment
             to
             builde
             them
             withall
             :
             when
             they
             saw
             arches
             of
             wood
             built
             vpon
             the
             river
             of
             Xaura
             ,
             the
             bridge
             being
             finished
             ,
             and
             the
             wood
             broken
             downe
             ,
             they
             all
             beganne
             to
             runne
             away
             ,
             supposing
             that
             the
             bridge
             which
             was
             of
             stone
             should
             presently
             fall
             ;
             but
             when
             they
             found
             it
             to
             stand
             firme
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             went
             on
             it
             ,
             the
             Cacique
             saide
             to
             his
             companions
             ;
             
               It
               is
               reason
               we
               should
               serve
               these
               men
               ,
               who
               in
               trueth
               seeme
               to
               be
               the
               children
               of
               the
               Sunne
               .
            
             The
             bridges
             they
             made
             were
             of
             reedes
             plaited
             ,
             which
             they
             tied
             to
             the
             bankes
             with
             great
             stakes
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             could
             not
             make
             any
             bridges
             
             ofstone
             or
             wood
             .
             The
             bridge
             which
             is
             at
             this
             day
             vpon
             the
             current
             of
             the
             great
             lake
             Chiquitto
             in
             Collao
             is
             admirable
             ,
             for
             the
             course
             of
             that
             water
             is
             so
             deep
             ,
             as
             they
             can
             not
             settle
             any
             foundation
             ,
             and
             so
             broade
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             make
             an
             arch
             to
             passe
             it
             :
             so
             as
             it
             was
             altogether
             impossible
             to
             make
             a
             bridge
             eyther
             of
             wood
             or
             stone
             .
             But
             the
             wit
             and
             industry
             of
             the
             Indians
             invented
             a
             meanes
             to
             make
             a
             firme
             and
             assured
             bridge
             ,
             being
             only
             of
             strawe
             ,
             which
             seemeth
             fabulous
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             very
             true
             :
             For
             as
             we
             have
             said
             before
             ,
             they
             did
             binde
             together
             certaine
             bundles
             of
             reedes
             ,
             and
             weedes
             ,
             which
             do
             grow
             in
             the
             lake
             that
             they
             call
             Torora
             ,
             and
             being
             a
             light
             matter
             that
             sinkes
             not
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             they
             cast
             it
             vppon
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             reedes
             ,
             then
             having
             tyed
             those
             bundles
             of
             weedes
             to
             either
             side
             of
             the
             river
             ,
             both
             men
             and
             beasts
             goe
             over
             it
             with
             ease
             :
             passing
             over
             this
             bridge
             I
             have
             woondered
             ,
             that
             of
             so
             common
             and
             easie
             a
             thing
             ,
             they
             had
             made
             a
             bridge
             ,
             better
             ,
             and
             more
             assured
             than
             the
             bridge
             of
             boates
             from
             Seville
             to
             Triane
             .
             I
             have
             measured
             the
             length
             of
             this
             bridge
             ,
             and
             as
             I
             remember
             ,
             it
             was
             above
             three
             hundred
             foote
             ;
             and
             they
             say
             that
             the
             depth
             of
             this
             current
             is
             very
             great
             :
             and
             it
             seemes
             above
             ,
             that
             the
             water
             hath
             no
             motion
             ,
             yet
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             bottome
             it
             hath
             a
             violent
             and
             very
             furious
             course
             .
             And
             this
             shall
             suffice
             for
             buildings
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Inguas
             revenues
             ,
             and
             the
             order
             of
             Tributes
             they
             imposed
             vpon
             the
             Indians
             .
             CHAP.
             15.
             
          
           
             THe
             Inguas
             riches
             was
             incomparable
             ,
             for
             although
             no
             king
             did
             inherite
             the
             riches
             and
             treasure
             of
             his
             predecessor
             ,
             yet
             had
             he
             at
             commaund
             ,
             all
             the
             riches
             of
             
             his
             realmes
             ,
             aswell
             silver
             and
             gold
             ,
             as
             the
             stuffe
             of
             Cumbi
             ,
             and
             cattell
             ,
             wherein
             they
             abounded
             ,
             and
             their
             greatest
             riches
             of
             all
             ,
             was
             their
             innumerable
             number
             of
             vassalles
             ,
             which
             were
             all
             imployed
             as
             it
             pleased
             the
             King.
             They
             brought
             out
             of
             every
             province
             what
             he
             had
             chosen
             for
             tribute
             .
             The
             Chicas
             sent
             him
             sweete
             and
             rich
             woods
             ;
             the
             Lucanas
             sent
             Brancars
             to
             carry
             his
             Litter
             ;
             The
             Chumbilbicas
             ,
             dauncers
             ;
             and
             so
             the
             other
             provinces
             sent
             him
             what
             they
             had
             of
             aboundaunce
             ,
             besides
             their
             generall
             tribute
             ,
             wherevnto
             every
             one
             contributed
             .
             The
             Indians
             that
             were
             noted
             to
             that
             end
             ,
             labored
             in
             the
             mines
             of
             golde
             and
             silver
             ,
             which
             did
             abound
             in
             Peru
             ,
             whom
             the
             Ingua
             intertained
             with
             all
             they
             needed
             for
             their
             expences
             :
             and
             whatsoever
             they
             drew
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             was
             for
             him
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             there
             were
             so
             great
             treasures
             in
             this
             kingdome
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             the
             opinion
             of
             many
             ,
             that
             what
             fell
             in
             the
             handes
             of
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             (
             although
             it
             were
             very
             much
             )
             as
             wee
             know
             )
             was
             it
             not
             the
             tenth
             part
             of
             that
             which
             they
             hid
             and
             buried
             in
             the
             ground
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             could
             never
             discover
             ,
             notwithstanding
             all
             the
             search
             covetousnesse
             had
             taught
             them
             .
             But
             the
             greatest
             wealth
             of
             these
             barbarous
             people
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             their
             vassalles
             were
             all
             slaves
             ,
             whose
             labour
             they
             vsed
             at
             their
             pleasure
             :
             and
             that
             which
             is
             admirable
             ,
             they
             imployed
             them
             in
             such
             sorte
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             no
             servitude
             vnto
             them
             ,
             but
             rather
             a
             pleasing
             life
             .
             But
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             order
             of
             tributes
             which
             the
             Indians
             payed
             vnto
             their
             Lordes
             ,
             you
             must
             knowe
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             Ingua
             conquered
             any
             citties
             ,
             he
             divided
             all
             the
             land
             into
             three
             partes
             ,
             the
             first
             was
             ,
             for
             religion
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             Pachayachaqui
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Creator
             ,
             and
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             Chuquilla
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Thunder
             ,
             the
             Pachamana
             ,
             and
             the
             dead
             ,
             and
             other
             Guacas
             and
             sanctuaries
             ,
             
             had
             every
             one
             their
             proper
             lands
             ,
             the
             fruits
             wherof
             were
             spoyled
             and
             consumed
             in
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             nourishing
             of
             ministers
             and
             priests
             ;
             for
             there
             were
             Indians
             appoynted
             for
             every
             Guaca
             ,
             and
             sanctuary
             ,
             and
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             this
             revenue
             was
             spent
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             was
             the
             vniversall
             and
             generall
             sanctuarie
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             in
             that
             cittie
             ,
             where
             it
             was
             gathered
             :
             for
             that
             after
             the
             imitation
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             there
             were
             in
             every
             Citie
             ,
             Guacas
             ,
             and
             Oratories
             of
             the
             same
             order
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             same
             functions
             ,
             which
             were
             served
             after
             the
             same
             manner
             and
             ceremonies
             to
             that
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             admirable
             thing
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             found
             it
             by
             proofe
             in
             above
             a
             hundred
             townes
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             distant
             above
             twoo
             hundred
             leagues
             from
             Cusco
             .
             That
             which
             they
             sowed
             or
             reapt
             vpon
             their
             land
             ,
             was
             put
             into
             houses
             ,
             as
             greniers
             ,
             or
             store-houses
             ,
             built
             for
             that
             effect
             ,
             and
             this
             was
             a
             great
             parte
             of
             the
             Tribute
             which
             the
             Indians
             payed
             .
             I
             can
             not
             say
             how
             much
             this
             parte
             amounted
             vnto
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             greater
             in
             some
             partes
             than
             in
             other
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             places
             it
             was
             in
             a
             manner
             all
             :
             and
             this
             parte
             was
             the
             first
             they
             put
             to
             profite
             .
             The
             second
             parte
             of
             these
             lands
             and
             inheritances
             was
             for
             the
             Iugua
             ,
             wherewith
             he
             and
             his
             housholde
             were
             entertained
             ,
             with
             his
             kinsfolks
             ,
             noblemen
             ,
             garrisons
             and
             souldiers
             .
             And
             therefore
             it
             was
             the
             greatest
             portion
             of
             these
             tributes
             ,
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             quantity
             of
             golde
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             other
             tributes
             ,
             which
             were
             in
             houses
             appoynted
             for
             that
             purpose
             ,
             being
             longer
             and
             larger
             than
             those
             where
             they
             keepe
             the
             revenues
             of
             the
             Guacas
             .
             They
             brought
             this
             tribute
             very
             carefully
             to
             Cusco
             ,
             or
             vnto
             such
             places
             where
             it
             was
             needefull
             for
             the
             souldiers
             ,
             and
             when
             there
             was
             store
             ,
             that
             kept
             it
             tenne
             or
             twelve
             yeares
             ,
             vntill
             a
             time
             of
             necessitie
             .
             The
             Indians
             tilled
             and
             put
             to
             profite
             the
             Inguas
             
             lands
             ,
             next
             to
             those
             of
             the
             Guacas
             ;
             during
             which
             time
             they
             lived
             and
             were
             nourished
             at
             the
             charges
             of
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Guacas
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             land
             they
             laboured
             .
             But
             the
             olde
             men
             ,
             women
             ,
             and
             sicke
             folkes
             were
             reserved
             and
             exempt
             from
             this
             tribute
             ,
             and
             although
             whatsoever
             they
             gathered
             vpon
             those
             lands
             were
             for
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             or
             the
             Guac●s
             ,
             yet
             the
             property
             appertayned
             vnto
             the
             Indians
             and
             their
             successors
             .
             The
             third
             parte
             of
             these
             landes
             were
             given
             by
             the
             Ingua
             for
             the
             comminaltie
             ,
             and
             they
             have
             not
             yet
             discovered
             ,
             whether
             this
             portion
             were
             greater
             ,
             or
             lesse
             ,
             than
             that
             of
             the
             Ingua
             or
             Guacas
             .
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             they
             had
             a
             care
             and
             regarde
             ,
             it
             might
             be
             sufficient
             for
             the
             nourishment
             of
             the
             people
             .
             No
             particular
             man
             possessed
             any
             thing
             proper
             to
             himself
             of
             this
             third
             portion
             ,
             neither
             didde
             the
             Indians
             ever
             possesse
             any
             ,
             if
             it
             were
             not
             by
             speciall
             grace
             from
             the
             Ingua
             :
             &
             yet
             might
             it
             not
             be
             engaged
             nor
             divided
             amongest
             his
             heires
             .
             They
             every
             yeare
             divided
             these
             landes
             of
             the
             comminaltie
             ,
             in
             giving
             to
             every
             one
             ,
             that
             which
             was
             needfull
             for
             the
             nourishment
             of
             their
             persons
             and
             families
             .
             And
             as
             the
             familie
             increased
             or
             diminished
             ,
             so
             did
             they
             encrease
             or
             decrease
             his
             portion
             ,
             for
             there
             were
             measures
             appoynted
             for
             every
             person
             .
             The
             Indians
             payed
             no
             tribute
             of
             that
             which
             was
             apportioned
             vnto
             them
             :
             For
             all
             their
             tribute
             was
             to
             till
             and
             keepe
             in
             good
             order
             the
             landes
             of
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             the
             Guacas
             ,
             and
             to
             lay
             the
             fruits
             thereof
             in
             their
             store-houses
             .
             When
             the
             yeare
             was
             barren
             ,
             they
             gave
             of
             these
             fruits
             thus
             reserved
             to
             the
             needy
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             alwayes
             superaboundance
             .
             The
             Ingua
             did
             likewise
             make
             destribution
             of
             the
             cattell
             as
             of
             the
             landes
             ,
             which
             was
             to
             number
             and
             divide
             them
             ;
             then
             to
             appoynt
             the
             pastures
             and
             limites
             ,
             for
             the
             cattell
             belonging
             
             to
             the
             Guacas
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             to
             everie
             Towne
             :
             and
             therefore
             one
             portion
             of
             their
             revenues
             was
             for
             religion
             ,
             another
             for
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             &
             the
             third
             for
             the
             Indians
             themselves
             .
             The
             like
             order
             was
             observed
             among
             the
             hunters
             ,
             being
             forbidden
             to
             take
             or
             kill
             any
             females
             .
             The
             troups
             of
             the
             Inguas
             and
             Guacas
             ,
             were
             in
             great
             numbers
             and
             very
             fruitfull
             ;
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             called
             them
             Capaëllama
             ,
             but
             those
             of
             the
             common
             and
             publike
             ,
             were
             few
             in
             number
             and
             of
             small
             valew
             ,
             and
             therfore
             they
             called
             them
             Bacchallama
             .
             The
             Ingua
             took
             great
             care
             for
             the
             preservation
             of
             cattell
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             hath
             beene
             ,
             and
             is
             yet
             ,
             all
             the
             wealth
             of
             the
             Countrey
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             is
             sayd
             ,
             they
             did
             neither
             sacrifice
             any
             females
             ,
             nor
             kill
             them
             ,
             neither
             did
             they
             take
             them
             when
             they
             hunted
             .
             If
             the
             mangie
             or
             the
             scurvie
             which
             they
             call
             Carache
             take
             any
             beast
             ,
             they
             were
             presently
             commaunded
             to
             bury
             it
             quicke
             ,
             lest
             it
             should
             infect
             others
             .
             They
             did
             sheare
             their
             cattell
             in
             their
             season
             ,
             and
             distributed
             to
             every
             one
             to
             spinne
             and
             weave
             stuffes
             for
             the
             service
             of
             his
             familie
             .
             They
             had
             searchers
             to
             examine
             if
             they
             did
             employ
             themselves
             in
             these
             workes
             ,
             and
             to
             punish
             the
             negligent
             .
             They
             made
             stuffes
             of
             the
             wooll
             of
             the
             Inguas
             cattell
             ,
             for
             him
             and
             for
             his
             family
             ,
             one
             sorte
             very
             fine
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Cumbi
             ,
             and
             another
             grosser
             ,
             which
             they
             likewise
             called
             Abasca
             .
             There
             was
             no
             certaine
             number
             of
             these
             stuffes
             and
             garments
             appointed
             ,
             but
             what
             was
             delivered
             to
             every
             one
             .
             The
             wooll
             that
             remayned
             was
             put
             into
             the
             storehouses
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Spaniards
             found
             them
             ful
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             other
             things
             necessary
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man.
             There
             are
             few
             men
             of
             iudgement
             but
             doe
             admire
             at
             so
             excellent
             and
             well
             settled
             a
             governement
             ,
             seeing
             the
             Indians
             (
             being
             neyther
             religious
             ,
             nor
             christians
             )
             maintained
             after
             their
             manner
             ,
             
             this
             perfection
             ,
             nor
             to
             holde
             any
             thing
             proper
             ,
             and
             to
             provide
             for
             all
             their
             necessities
             ,
             entertaining
             with
             such
             aboundance
             matters
             of
             religion
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             concerned
             their
             King
             and
             Lord.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             artes
             and
             offices
             which
             the
             Indians
             did
             exercise
             .
             CHAP.
             16.
             
          
           
             THe
             Indians
             of
             Peru
             had
             one
             perfection
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             to
             teach
             their
             young
             children
             all
             artes
             and
             occupations
             necessary
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man
             ;
             for
             that
             there
             were
             no
             particular
             trades-men
             ,
             as
             amongest
             vs
             ,
             taylers
             ,
             shoomakers
             ,
             weavers
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             ,
             but
             every
             one
             learned
             what
             was
             needefull
             for
             their
             persons
             and
             houses
             ,
             and
             provided
             for
             themselves
             .
             All
             coulde
             weave
             and
             make
             their
             garments
             ,
             and
             therfore
             the
             Ingua
             furnishing
             them
             with
             wooll
             ,
             gave
             them
             clothes
             .
             Every
             man
             could
             till
             the
             ground
             ,
             and
             put
             it
             to
             profite
             ,
             without
             hyring
             of
             any
             labourers
             .
             All
             built
             their
             owne
             houses
             ,
             and
             the
             women
             vnderstoode
             most
             ,
             they
             were
             not
             bred
             vppe
             in
             delights
             ,
             but
             served
             their
             husbands
             carefully
             .
             Other
             arts
             and
             trades
             which
             were
             not
             ordinary
             and
             common
             for
             the
             life
             of
             man
             ,
             had
             their
             proper
             companies
             and
             workmen
             ,
             as
             goldsmiths
             ,
             painters
             ,
             potters
             ,
             watermen
             ,
             and
             players
             of
             instruments
             .
             There
             were
             also
             weavers
             and
             workemen
             for
             exquisite
             workes
             ,
             which
             the
             noblemen
             vsed
             :
             but
             the
             common
             people
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             had
             in
             their
             houses
             all
             things
             necessary
             ,
             having
             no
             need
             to
             buy
             .
             This
             continues
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             have
             no
             need
             one
             of
             another
             for
             things
             necessary
             :
             touching
             his
             person
             and
             family
             ,
             as
             shooes
             and
             garments
             ,
             and
             for
             their
             house
             ,
             to
             sowe
             and
             reape
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             yron
             woorkes
             ,
             and
             necessary
             instruments
             ;
             the
             Indians
             heerein
             doe
             imitate
             
             the
             institutions
             of
             the
             lesse
             auntient
             ,
             whereof
             is
             intreated
             in
             the
             life
             of
             the
             Fathers
             .
             In
             trueth
             it
             is
             a
             people
             not
             greatly
             covetous
             ,
             nor
             curious
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             are
             contented
             to
             passe
             their
             time
             quietly
             ,
             and
             without
             doubt
             ,
             if
             they
             made
             choise
             of
             this
             manner
             of
             life
             ,
             by
             election
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             custome
             or
             nature
             ,
             we
             may
             say
             that
             it
             was
             a
             life
             of
             great
             perfection
             ,
             being
             apt
             to
             receive
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             holy
             Gospel
             ,
             so
             contrary
             an
             enimy
             to
             pride
             ,
             covetousnes
             and
             delights
             .
             But
             the
             preachers
             give
             not
             alwayes
             good
             example
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             doctrine
             they
             preach
             to
             the
             Indians
             .
             It
             is
             woorthy
             observation
             ,
             although
             the
             Indians
             be
             simple
             in
             their
             manner
             and
             habites
             ,
             yet
             do
             we
             see
             great
             diversitie
             amongest
             the
             provinces
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             attire
             of
             their
             head
             ,
             for
             in
             some
             places
             they
             carried
             a
             long
             peece
             of
             cloth
             which
             went
             often
             about
             ,
             in
             some
             places
             a
             large
             piece
             of
             cloth
             ,
             which
             went
             but
             once
             about
             ,
             in
             some
             parts
             as
             it
             were
             litle
             morters
             or
             hattes
             ,
             in
             some
             others
             as
             it
             were
             high
             and
             round
             bonets
             ,
             &
             some
             like
             the
             bottome
             of
             sacks
             ,
             with
             a
             thousand
             other
             differences
             .
             They
             had
             a
             straight
             and
             inviolable
             lawe
             ,
             that
             no
             man
             might
             change
             the
             fashion
             of
             the
             garments
             of
             his
             province
             ,
             although
             hee
             went
             to
             live
             in
             another
             .
             This
             the
             Ingua
             held
             to
             be
             of
             great
             importance
             for
             the
             order
             and
             good
             governement
             of
             his
             realme
             ,
             and
             they
             doe
             observe
             it
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             though
             not
             with
             so
             great
             a
             care
             as
             they
             were
             accustomed
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Posts
             and
             Chasquis
             the
             Indians
             did
             use
             .
             CHAP.
             17.
             
          
           
             THere
             were
             many
             Posts
             and
             couriers
             which
             the
             Ingua
             maintened
             throughout
             his
             realme
             ,
             whom
             they
             called
             Chasquis
             ,
             and
             they
             carried
             commaundements
             
             to
             the
             Governours
             ,
             and
             returned
             their
             advises
             and
             advertisements
             to
             the
             Court.
             These
             Chasquis
             were
             placed
             at
             every
             course
             ,
             which
             was
             a
             league
             and
             a
             halfe
             one
             fro
             an
             other
             in
             twoo
             small
             houses
             ,
             where
             were
             foure
             Indians
             of
             every
             country
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             changed
             monthly
             .
             Having
             received
             the
             packet
             or
             message
             ,
             they
             ranne
             with
             all
             their
             force
             vntill
             they
             had
             delivered
             it
             to
             the
             other
             Chasquis
             ,
             such
             as
             were
             to
             runne
             ,
             being
             ready
             and
             watchfull
             .
             They
             ranne
             fifty
             leagues
             in
             a
             day
             and
             night
             ,
             although
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             that
             countrey
             be
             very
             rough
             .
             They
             served
             also
             to
             carry
             such
             things
             as
             the
             Ingua
             desired
             to
             have
             with
             speede
             .
             Therefore
             they
             had
             always
             sea-fish
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             of
             two
             dayes
             old
             or
             litle
             more
             ,
             although
             it
             were
             above
             a
             hundred
             leagues
             off
             .
             Since
             the
             Spaniardes
             entred
             ,
             they
             have
             vsed
             of
             these
             Chasquis
             ,
             in
             time
             of
             seditions
             whereof
             there
             was
             great
             need
             .
             
               Don
               Martin
            
             the
             viceroy
             appoynted
             ordinary
             posts
             at
             everie
             foure
             leagues
             ,
             to
             carry
             and
             recarry
             dispatches
             ,
             which
             were
             very
             necessary
             in
             this
             realme
             ,
             though
             they
             runne
             not
             so
             swiftly
             as
             the
             auntients
             did
             ,
             neither
             are
             there
             so
             many
             ,
             yet
             they
             are
             well
             payed
             ,
             and
             serve
             as
             the
             ordinaries
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             give
             letters
             which
             they
             carry
             foure
             or
             five
             leagues
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             iustice
             ,
             lawes
             ,
             and
             punishments
             which
             the
             Inguas
             have
             established
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             marriages
             .
             CHAP.
             18.
             
          
           
             EVen
             as
             such
             as
             had
             done
             any
             good
             service
             in
             warre
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             governement
             of
             the
             common-weale
             were
             honoured
             and
             recompensed
             with
             publike
             charges
             ,
             with
             lands
             given
             them
             in
             proper
             ,
             with
             armes
             and
             titles
             of
             honour
             ,
             and
             in
             marrying
             wives
             of
             the
             Inguas
             linage
             :
             
             Even
             so
             they
             gave
             severe
             punishments
             to
             such
             as
             were
             disobedient
             and
             offenders
             .
             They
             punished
             murther
             ,
             thes●
             and
             adultery
             ,
             with
             death
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             committed
             incest
             with
             ascendants
             or
             descendants
             in
             direct
             line
             ,
             were
             likewise
             punished
             with
             death
             .
             But
             they
             held
             it
             no
             adultery
             to
             have
             many
             wives
             or
             concubines
             ,
             neyther
             were
             the
             women
             subiect
             to
             the
             punishment
             of
             death
             ,
             being
             found
             with
             any
             other
             ,
             but
             onely
             she
             that
             was
             the
             true
             and
             lawfull
             wife
             ,
             with
             whome
             they
             contracted
             marriage
             ;
             for
             they
             had
             but
             one
             whome
             they
             did
             wed
             and
             receive
             with
             a
             particular
             solempnitie
             and
             ceremony
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             this
             maner
             :
             the
             bridegroome
             went
             to
             the
             brides
             house
             ,
             and
             led
             her
             from
             thence
             with
             him
             ,
             having
             first
             put
             an
             Ottoya
             vppon
             her
             foote
             .
             They
             call
             the
             shooe
             which
             they
             vse
             in
             those
             partes
             Ottoya
             ,
             being
             open
             like
             to
             the
             Franciscan
             Friars
             .
             If
             the
             bride
             were
             a
             mayde
             ,
             her
             Ottoya
             was
             of
             wooll
             ,
             but
             if
             she
             were
             not
             ,
             it
             was
             of
             reedes
             .
             All
             his
             other
             wives
             and
             concubines
             did
             honour
             and
             serve
             this
             as
             the
             lawfull
             wife
             ,
             who
             alone
             after
             the
             decease
             of
             her
             husband
             caried
             a
             mourning
             weed
             of
             blacke
             ,
             for
             the
             space
             of
             a
             yeare
             ;
             neither
             did
             she
             marry
             vntill
             that
             time
             were
             past
             ;
             and
             commonly
             she
             was
             yonger
             than
             her
             husband
             .
             The
             Ingua
             himselfe
             with
             his
             own
             hand
             gave
             this
             woman
             to
             his
             Governors
             and
             captains
             :
             and
             the
             Governors
             or
             Caciques
             ,
             assembled
             all
             the
             yongmen
             and
             maydes
             ,
             in
             one
             place
             of
             the
             Citty
             ,
             where
             they
             gave
             to
             every
             one
             his
             wife
             with
             the
             aforesaide
             ceremony
             ,
             in
             putting
             on
             the
             Ottoya
             ,
             and
             in
             this
             manner
             they
             contracted
             their
             marriages
             .
             If
             this
             woman
             were
             found
             with
             any
             other
             than
             her
             husband
             ,
             shee
             was
             punished
             with
             death
             ,
             and
             the
             adulterer
             likewise
             :
             and
             although
             the
             husband
             pardoned
             them
             ,
             yet
             were
             they
             punished
             ,
             although
             dispensed
             withall
             from
             death
             .
             They
             inflicted
             
             the
             like
             punishment
             on
             him
             that
             did
             committe●●●
             with
             his
             mother
             ,
             grandmother
             ,
             daughter
             ,
             or
             grand-childe
             ▪
             for
             it
             was
             not
             prohibited
             for
             them
             to
             ma●●●
             together
             ,
             or
             to
             have
             of
             their
             other
             kinsfolkes
             for
             concubines
             ;
             onely
             the
             first
             degree
             was
             defended
             ,
             neither
             did
             they
             allow
             the
             brother
             to
             have
             the
             company
             of
             his
             sister
             ,
             wherein
             they
             of
             Peru
             were
             very
             much
             deceived
             ,
             beleeving
             that
             their
             Inguas
             and
             noble
             men
             might
             lawfully
             contract
             marriage
             with
             their
             sisters
             ,
             yea
             by
             father
             and
             mother
             :
             for
             in
             trueth
             it
             hath
             beene
             alwayes
             helde
             vnlawfull
             among
             the
             Indians
             ,
             &
             defended
             to
             contract
             in
             the
             first
             degree
             ;
             which
             continued
             vntill
             the
             time
             of
             
               Topa
               Ingua
               Yupangui
            
             father
             to
             Guaynacapa
             ,
             and
             grandfather
             to
             Atahualpa
             ,
             at
             such
             time
             as
             the
             Spaniards
             entered
             Peru
             ,
             for
             that
             
               Topa
               Ingua
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             was
             the
             first
             that
             brake
             this
             custome
             ,
             marrying
             with
             Mamaoello
             ,
             his
             sister
             by
             the
             fathers
             side
             ,
             decreeing
             that
             the
             Inguas
             might
             marry
             with
             their
             sisters
             by
             the
             fathers
             side
             ,
             &
             no
             other
             .
          
           
             This
             he
             did
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             marriage
             he
             had
             Guaynacapa
             ,
             and
             a
             daughter
             called
             
               Coya
               Cussillimay
            
             :
             finding
             himselfe
             at
             the
             poynt
             of
             death
             ,
             hee
             commaunded
             his
             children
             by
             father
             and
             mother
             to
             marry
             together
             ,
             and
             gave
             permission
             to
             the
             noble
             men
             of
             his
             country
             ,
             to
             marrie
             with
             their
             sisters
             by
             the
             fathers
             side
             .
             And
             for
             that
             this
             marriage
             was
             vnlawful
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             lawe
             of
             nature
             ,
             God
             would
             bring
             to
             an
             end
             this
             kingdome
             of
             the
             I●guas
             ,
             during
             the
             raigne
             of
             
               Guascar
               Ingua
            
             ,
             and
             
               Atalmalpa
               Ingua
            
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             fruite
             that
             sprang
             from
             this
             marriage
             .
             Whoso
             will
             more
             exactly
             vnderstand
             the
             manner
             of
             marriages
             among
             the
             Indians
             of
             Peru
             ,
             lette
             him
             reade
             the
             Treatise
             Polo
             hath
             written
             ,
             at
             the
             request
             of
             
               Don
               Ieronimo
               Loaisa
            
             Archbishop
             of
             Kings
             :
             which
             P●●●
             made
             a
             very
             curious
             search
             ,
             as
             he
             hath
             doone
             of
             di●ers
             
             other
             things
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             The
             which
             importes
             much
             to
             be
             knowne
             to
             avoyde
             the
             errour
             and
             inconveniences
             whereinto
             many
             fall
             (
             which
             know
             not
             which
             is
             the
             lawfull
             wife
             or
             the
             concubine
             among
             the
             Indians
             )
             causing
             the
             Indian
             that
             is
             baptized
             to
             marry
             with
             his
             concubine
             ,
             leaving
             the
             lawfull
             wife
             :
             thereby
             also
             wee
             may
             see
             the
             small
             reason
             some
             have
             had
             ,
             that
             pretended
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             wee
             ought
             to
             ratifie
             the
             marriage
             of
             those
             that
             were
             baptized
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             brother
             and
             sister
             .
             The
             contrary
             hath
             beene
             determined
             by
             the
             provinciall
             Synode
             of
             Lyma
             ,
             with
             much
             reason
             ,
             seeing
             among
             the
             Indians
             themselves
             this
             kind
             of
             marriage
             is
             vnlawful
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Originall
             of
             the
             Inguas
             Lords
             of
             Peru
             ,
             with
             their
             Conquests
             and
             Victories
             .
             CHAP.
             19.
             
          
           
             BY
             the
             commandement
             of
             
               Don
               Phillip
            
             the
             Catholike
             King
             ,
             they
             have
             made
             the
             most
             dilligent
             and
             exact
             search
             that
             could
             be
             ,
             of
             the
             beginning
             ,
             customes
             ,
             and
             priviledges
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             not
             so
             perfectly
             done
             as
             was
             desired
             :
             for
             that
             the
             Indians
             had
             no
             written
             recordes
             :
             yet
             they
             have
             recovered
             that
             which
             I
             shall
             write
             ,
             by
             meanes
             of
             their
             Quippos
             and
             registers
             .
             First
             there
             was
             not
             in
             Peru
             in
             olde
             time
             ,
             any
             King
             or
             Lord
             to
             whome
             all
             obeyed
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             comminalties
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             there
             be
             in
             the
             realme
             of
             Chille
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             maner
             ,
             in
             all
             the
             Provinces
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             conquered
             in
             those
             westerne
             Indies
             ,
             except
             the
             realme
             of
             Mexico
             .
             You
             must
             therefore
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             they
             have
             found
             three
             maner
             of
             governments
             at
             the
             Indies
             .
             The
             first
             and
             best
             ,
             was
             a
             Monarchie
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             and
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             although
             
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             were
             tyrannous
             .
             The
             second
             was
             of
             Comminalties
             ,
             where
             they
             were
             governed
             by
             the
             advise
             and
             authoritie
             of
             many
             ,
             which
             are
             as
             it
             were
             Counsellors
             .
             These
             in
             time
             of
             warre
             ,
             made
             choise
             of
             a
             Captaine
             ,
             to
             whome
             a
             whole
             Nation
             or
             Province
             did
             obey
             ,
             and
             in
             time
             of
             peace
             ,
             every
             Towne
             or
             Comminaltie
             did
             rule
             and
             governe
             themselves
             ,
             having
             some
             chiefe
             men
             whom
             the
             vulgar
             did
             respect
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             ,
             (
             though
             not
             often
             ,
             )
             some
             of
             them
             assemble
             together
             about
             matters
             of
             importance
             ,
             to
             consult
             what
             they
             should
             thinke
             necessary
             .
             The
             third
             kinde
             of
             government
             ,
             is
             altogether
             barbarous
             ,
             composed
             of
             Indians
             without
             law
             ,
             without
             King
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             certaine
             place
             of
             abode
             ,
             but
             go
             in
             troupes
             like
             savage
             beasts
             .
             As
             farre
             as
             I
             can
             conceive
             ,
             the
             first
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             were
             of
             this
             kinde
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             
               Bresillians
               ,
               Chiraguanas
               ,
               Chunchos
               ,
               Ysoycingas
               Pilcocones
               ,
            
             and
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             the
             Floridians
             ,
             &
             all
             the
             Chichimaquas
             in
             new
             Spaine
             .
             Of
             this
             kind
             the
             other
             sort
             of
             government
             by
             Comminalties
             was
             framed
             ,
             by
             the
             industrie
             and
             wisedome
             of
             some
             amongst
             them
             ,
             in
             which
             there
             is
             some
             more
             order
             ,
             holding
             a
             more
             staied
             place
             ,
             as
             at
             this
             day
             those
             of
             Auracano
             ,
             and
             of
             Te●●pell
             in
             Chille
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             new
             kingdome
             of
             Grenado
             ,
             the
             Moscas
             ,
             and
             the
             Ottomittes
             in
             new
             Spaine
             :
             and
             in
             all
             these
             there
             is
             lesse
             fiercenes
             and
             incivilitie
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             quiet
             then
             in
             the
             rest
             .
             Of
             this
             kinde
             ,
             by
             the
             valure
             and
             knowledge
             of
             some
             excellent
             men
             ,
             grew
             the
             other
             government
             more
             mightie
             and
             potent
             ,
             which
             did
             institute
             a
             Kingdome
             and
             Monarchie
             .
             It
             appeares
             by
             their
             registers
             ,
             that
             their
             government
             hath
             continued
             above
             three
             hundred
             yeares
             ,
             but
             not
             fully
             foure
             ,
             although
             their
             Seigniorie
             for
             a
             long
             time
             ,
             was
             not
             above
             five
             or
             
             〈◊〉
             leagues
             compasse
             about
             the
             Citty
             of
             Cusco
             :
             their
             originall
             and
             beginning
             was
             in
             the
             valley
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             where
             by
             little
             &
             little
             they
             conquered
             the
             lands
             which
             we
             call
             Peru
             ,
             passing
             beyond
             Quitto
             ,
             vnto
             the
             river
             of
             Pasto
             towardes
             the
             North
             ,
             stretching
             even
             vnto
             Chille
             ,
             towardes
             the
             South
             ,
             which
             is
             almost
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             in
             length
             .
             It
             extended
             in
             breadth
             vnto
             the
             South
             sea
             towardes
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             vnto
             the
             great
             champains
             which
             are
             on
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             Andes
             ,
             where
             at
             this
             day
             is
             to
             be
             scene
             the
             Castell
             which
             is
             called
             the
             Pucara
             of
             the
             Ingua
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             a
             fortresse
             built
             for
             the
             defence
             of
             the
             frontire
             towards
             the
             East
             .
             The
             Inguas
             advanced
             no
             farther
             on
             that
             side
             ,
             for
             the
             aboundance
             of
             water
             ,
             marshes
             ,
             lakes
             ,
             and
             rivers
             ,
             which
             runne
             in
             those
             partes
             .
             These
             Inguas
             passed
             all
             the
             other
             Nations
             of
             Amarica
             ,
             in
             pollicy
             and
             government
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             in
             valour
             and
             armes
             ,
             although
             the
             Canaries
             which
             were
             their
             mortall
             enemies
             ,
             and
             favoured
             the
             Spaniardes
             ,
             would
             never
             confesse
             it
             ,
             nor
             yeelde
             them
             this
             advantage
             :
             so
             as
             even
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             if
             they
             fall
             into
             any
             discourse
             or
             comparisons
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             be
             a
             little
             chased
             and
             incensed
             ,
             they
             kill
             one
             another
             by
             thousands
             vpon
             this
             quarrell
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             most
             valiant
             ,
             as
             it
             hath
             happened
             in
             Cusco
             .
             The
             practise
             and
             meanes
             which
             the
             Inguas
             had
             to
             make
             themselves
             Lords
             of
             all
             this
             Countrie
             ,
             was
             in
             faining
             that
             since
             the
             generall
             deluge
             ,
             (
             whereof
             all
             the
             Indians
             have
             knowledge
             ,
             )
             the
             world
             had
             beene
             preserved
             ,
             restored
             ,
             and
             peopled
             by
             these
             Inguas
             ,
             and
             that
             seven
             of
             them
             came
             forth
             of
             the
             cave
             of
             Pacaricambo
             ,
             by
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             all
             other
             men
             ought
             them
             tribute
             and
             vassalage
             ,
             as
             their
             progenitors
             .
             Besides
             they
             said
             and
             affirmed
             ,
             that
             they
             alone
             held
             the
             true
             religion
             ,
             and
             knew
             how
             God
             should
             be
             served
             and
             
             honoured
             :
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             should
             instruct
             all
             men
             .
             It
             is
             a
             strange
             thing
             ,
             the
             ground
             they
             give
             to
             their
             customes
             and
             ceremonies
             .
             There
             were
             in
             Cusco
             above
             foure
             hundred
             Oratories
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             holy
             land
             ,
             and
             all
             places
             were
             filled
             with
             their
             mysteries
             :
             As
             they
             continued
             in
             the
             conquests
             of
             Provinces
             ,
             so
             they
             brought
             in
             the
             like
             ceremonies
             and
             customes
             .
             In
             all
             this
             realme
             the
             chiefe
             idolls
             they
             did
             worship
             ,
             were
             
               Viracocha
               ,
               Pach●yac●achic
            
             ,
             which
             signifies
             the
             Creator
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             after
             him
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Sunne
             received
             his
             vertue
             and
             being
             from
             the
             Creator
             ,
             as
             the
             other
             idolls
             do
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             were
             intercessors
             to
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             first
             Ingua
             ,
             and
             his
             Successors
             .
             CHAP.
             20.
             
          
           
             THe
             first
             man
             which
             the
             Indians
             report
             to
             be
             the
             beginning
             and
             first
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             was
             Mangocapa
             ,
             whom
             they
             imagine
             ,
             after
             the
             deluge
             ,
             to
             have
             issued
             forth
             of
             the
             cave
             of
             Tambo
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             Cusco
             about
             five
             or
             six
             leagues
             .
             They
             say
             that
             he
             gave
             beginning
             to
             two
             principall
             races
             or
             families
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             the
             one
             was
             called
             Hanancusco
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Vrincusco
             :
             of
             the
             first
             came
             the
             Lords
             which
             subdued
             and
             governed
             this
             Province
             ,
             and
             the
             first
             whom
             they
             make
             the
             head
             and
             steame
             of
             this
             family
             ,
             was
             called
             Ingaroca
             ,
             who
             founded
             a
             family
             or
             Aillo
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             them
             ,
             named
             Viçaquiquirao
             .
             This
             although
             he
             were
             no
             great
             Lord
             ,
             was
             served
             notwithstanding
             in
             vessell
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             .
             And
             dying
             ,
             he
             appointed
             that
             all
             his
             treasure
             should
             be
             imployed
             for
             the
             service
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             feeding
             of
             his
             family
             .
             His
             successor
             did
             the
             like
             :
             and
             this
             
             grew
             to
             a
             generall
             custome
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             that
             no
             Ingua
             might
             inherite
             the
             goods
             and
             house
             of
             his
             predecessor
             ,
             but
             did
             build
             a
             new
             pallace
             .
             In
             the
             time
             of
             this
             Inguar●ca
             ,
             the
             Indians
             had
             images
             of
             gold
             ;
             and
             to
             him
             succeeded
             Yaguarguaque
             ,
             a
             very
             old
             man
             :
             they
             say
             ,
             he
             was
             called
             by
             this
             name
             ,
             which
             signifies
             teares
             of
             blood
             ,
             for
             that
             being
             once
             vanquished
             and
             taken
             by
             his
             enemies
             ,
             for
             griefe
             and
             sorrow
             he
             wept
             blood
             .
             Hee
             was
             buried
             in
             a
             village
             called
             Paullo
             ,
             which
             is
             vpon
             the
             way
             to
             Omasugo
             :
             he
             founded
             a
             family
             called
             Aocuillidanaca
             .
             To
             him
             succeeded
             his
             sonne
             
               Viracocha
               Ingua
            
             ,
             who
             was
             very
             rich
             ,
             and
             made
             much
             vessell
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
             :
             hee
             founded
             the
             linage
             or
             family
             of
             
               C●copanaca
               .
               GonZales
               PiZarre
            
             sought
             out
             his
             body
             ,
             for
             the
             report
             of
             the
             great
             treasure
             was
             buried
             with
             him
             ,
             who
             after
             he
             had
             cruelly
             tormented
             many
             Indians
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             he
             found
             it
             in
             Xaquixaquana
             ,
             whereas
             they
             said
             
             PiZarrewas
             afterwards
             vanquished
             ,
             taken
             ,
             and
             executed
             by
             the
             President
             
               Guasca
               .
               Gonsales
               Pizarre
            
             ,
             caused
             the
             body
             of
             
               Viracocha
               Ingua
            
             to
             be
             burnt
             ;
             the
             Indians
             did
             afterwardes
             take
             the
             ashes
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             preserved
             in
             a
             small
             vessell
             ,
             making
             great
             sacrifices
             therevnto
             ,
             vntill
             Pollo
             did
             reforme
             it
             ,
             and
             other
             idolatries
             which
             they
             committed
             vpon
             the
             bodies
             of
             their
             other
             Inguas
             ,
             the
             which
             hee
             suppressed
             with
             an
             admirable
             diligence
             and
             dexterity
             ,
             drawing
             these
             bodies
             out
             of
             their
             hands
             ,
             being
             whole
             ,
             and
             much
             imbalmed
             ,
             whereby
             he
             extinguished
             a
             great
             number
             of
             idolatries
             which
             they
             committed
             .
             The
             Indians
             tooke
             it
             ill
             ,
             that
             the
             Ingua
             did
             intitle
             himselfe
             Viracocha
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             name
             of
             their
             God
             :
             and
             he
             to
             excuse
             himselfe
             ,
             gave
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             Viracocha
             appeared
             to
             him
             in
             his
             dreame
             ,
             commanding
             him
             to
             take
             this
             name
             .
             To
             him
             succeeded
             
               Pachacuti
               
               Ingua
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             who
             was
             a
             very
             valiant
             conquerour
             ,
             a
             great
             Polititian
             ,
             and
             an
             inventer
             of
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             traditions
             and
             superstitions
             of
             their
             idolatrie
             ,
             as
             I
             will
             presently
             shew
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             
               Pachacuti
               Ingua
               ,
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             and
             what
             happened
             in
             his
             time
             vnto
             Guaynacapa
             .
             CHAP.
             21.
             
          
           
             
               PAchacuti
               Ingua
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             rained
             seventy
             yeares
             ,
             and
             conquered
             many
             Countries
             .
             The
             beginning
             of
             his
             conquests
             ,
             was
             by
             meanes
             of
             his
             eldest
             brother
             ,
             who
             having
             held
             the
             government
             in
             his
             fathers
             time
             ,
             and
             made
             warre
             by
             his
             consent
             ,
             was
             over-throwne
             in
             a
             battle
             against
             the
             Changuas
             ,
             a
             Nation
             which
             inhabites
             the
             valley
             of
             Andaguayllas
             ,
             thirty
             or
             forty
             leagues
             from
             Cusco
             ,
             vpon
             the
             way
             to
             Lima.
             This
             elder
             brother
             thus
             defeated
             ,
             retyred
             himselfe
             with
             few
             men
             .
             The
             which
             
               Ingua
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             his
             yonger
             brother
             seeing
             ,
             devised
             and
             gave
             forth
             ,
             that
             being
             one
             day
             alone
             and
             melancholie
             ,
             Viracocha
             the
             Creator
             spake
             to
             him
             ,
             complaining
             ,
             that
             though
             he
             were
             vniversall
             Lord
             and
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             had
             made
             the
             heaven
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             men
             ,
             and
             that
             all
             was
             vnder
             his
             command
             ,
             yet
             did
             they
             not
             yeelde
             him
             the
             obedience
             they
             ought
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             did
             equally
             honour
             and
             worship
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             Thunder
             ,
             Earth
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             which
             had
             no
             virtue
             but
             what
             he
             imparted
             vnto
             them
             :
             giving
             him
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             in
             heaven
             where
             hee
             was
             ,
             they
             called
             him
             
               Viracocha
               Pachayachachic
            
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             vniversall
             Creator
             ;
             and
             to
             the
             end
             the
             Indians
             might
             beleeve
             it
             to
             be
             true
             ,
             he
             doubted
             not
             althogh
             he
             were
             alone
             ,
             to
             faise
             men
             vnder
             this
             title
             ,
             which
             
             should
             give
             him
             victory
             against
             the
             Changuas
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             then
             victorious
             ,
             and
             in
             great
             numbers
             ;
             and
             make
             himselfe
             Lord
             of
             those
             realmes
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             would
             send
             him
             men
             to
             his
             aide
             invisibly
             ,
             whereby
             he
             preva●led
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             vnder
             this
             colour
             and
             conceit
             ,
             hee
             beganne
             to
             assemble
             a
             great
             number
             of
             people
             ,
             whereof
             he
             made
             a
             mighty
             armie
             ,
             with
             the
             which
             he
             obtayned
             the
             victorie
             ,
             making
             himselfe
             Lord
             of
             the
             whole
             Realme
             ,
             taking
             the
             government
             from
             his
             father
             and
             brother
             .
             Then
             afterwardes
             he
             conquered
             and
             overthrew
             the
             Changuas
             ,
             and
             from
             that
             time
             commanded
             that
             Viracocha
             should
             be
             held
             for
             vniversall
             Lord
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             images
             of
             the
             Sunne
             and
             Thunder
             ,
             should
             do
             him
             reverence
             and
             honour
             :
             And
             from
             that
             time
             they
             beganne
             to
             set
             the
             image
             of
             Viracocha
             above
             that
             of
             the
             Sunne
             and
             Thunder
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Guacas
             .
             And
             although
             this
             
               Ingua
               Yupangui
            
             had
             given
             farmes
             ,
             landes
             ,
             and
             cattell
             to
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             Thunder
             ,
             and
             other
             Guacas
             ,
             yet
             did
             he
             not
             dedicate
             any
             thing
             to
             Viracocha
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             he
             had
             no
             neede
             ,
             being
             vniversall
             Lord
             and
             Creator
             of
             all
             things
             .
             He
             informed
             his
             souldiers
             after
             this
             absolute
             victory
             of
             the
             Changuas
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             they
             alone
             that
             had
             conquered
             them
             ,
             but
             certaine
             bearded
             men
             ,
             whome
             Viracocha
             had
             sent
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             no
             man
             might
             see
             them
             but
             himselfe
             ,
             which
             were
             since
             converted
             into
             stones
             ;
             it
             was
             therefore
             necessary
             to
             seeke
             them
             out
             ,
             whome
             he
             would
             know
             well
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             hee
             gathered
             together
             a
             multitude
             of
             stones
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             whereof
             he
             made
             choice
             ,
             placing
             them
             for
             Guacas
             ,
             or
             Idolls
             they
             worshipped
             and
             sacrificed
             vnto
             ;
             they
             called
             them
             P●ruraucas
             ,
             and
             carried
             them
             to
             the
             warre
             with
             great
             devotion
             ,
             beleeving
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             they
             had
             gotten
             the
             victory
             by
             their
             help
             .
             The
             imagination
             
             and
             fiction
             of
             this
             Ingua
             was
             of
             such
             force
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             means
             thereof
             hee
             obtained
             goodly
             victories
             :
             He
             founded
             the
             family
             called
             Yuacapanaca
             ,
             and
             made
             a
             great
             image
             of
             golde
             ,
             which
             hee
             called
             Indijllapa
             ,
             which
             hee
             placed
             in
             a
             brancard
             of
             golde
             ,
             very
             rich
             ,
             and
             of
             great
             price
             ,
             of
             the
             which
             gold
             the
             Indians
             tooke
             great
             store
             to
             carry
             to
             Xaxamalca
             ,
             for
             the
             libertie
             and
             ransome
             of
             Atahulpa
             ,
             when
             the
             Marquise
             
               Francis
               PiZarre
            
             held
             him
             prisoner
             .
             The
             Licentiate
             Polo
             found
             in
             his
             house
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             his
             servants
             and
             Mamacomas
             ,
             which
             did
             service
             to
             his
             memorie
             ,
             and
             found
             that
             the
             body
             had
             beene
             transported
             from
             Patallacta
             to
             Totocache
             ,
             where
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             since
             founded
             the
             parish
             of
             Saint
             Blaise
             .
             This
             body
             was
             so
             whole
             and
             preserved
             with
             a
             certaine
             rosin
             ,
             that
             it
             seemed
             alive
             ,
             he
             had
             his
             eyes
             made
             of
             a
             fine
             cloth
             of
             golde
             ,
             so
             artificially
             set
             ,
             as
             they
             seemed
             very
             naturall
             eyes
             ,
             he
             had
             a
             blowe
             with
             a
             stone
             on
             the
             head
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             received
             in
             the
             warres
             ,
             he
             was
             all
             grey
             and
             hairy
             ,
             having
             lost
             no
             more
             haire
             than
             if
             hee
             had
             died
             but
             the
             same
             day
             ,
             although
             it
             were
             seaventy
             and
             eight
             yeares
             since
             his
             decease
             .
             The
             foresaid
             Polo
             sent
             this
             body
             with
             some
             others
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             to
             the
             cittie
             of
             Lima
             ,
             by
             the
             viceroyes
             commaund
             which
             was
             the
             Marquise
             of
             Canette
             ,
             and
             the
             which
             was
             very
             necessary
             to
             root
             out
             the
             idolatry
             of
             Cusco
             .
             Many
             Spaniards
             have
             seene
             this
             body
             with
             others
             in
             the
             hospitall
             of
             Saint
             Andrew
             ,
             which
             the
             Marquise
             built
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             much
             decayed
             .
             
               Don
               Phillip
               Caritopa
            
             ,
             who
             was
             grand-childe
             or
             great
             grand-childe
             to
             this
             Ingua
             ,
             affirmed
             that
             the
             treasure
             hee
             left
             to
             his
             family
             was
             great
             ,
             which
             should
             be
             in
             the
             power
             of
             the
             
               Yanaconas
               ,
               Amaro
               ,
               Toto
            
             ,
             and
             others
             .
             To
             this
             Ingua
             succeeded
             
               Topaingua
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             to
             whom
             his
             son
             of
             the
             same
             name
             succeeded
             ,
             who
             founded
             the
             family
             called
             
               Cupac
               Aillo
            
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             greatest
             and
             most
             famous
             Ingua
             called
             Guaynacapa
             .
             CHAP.
             22.
             
          
           
             TO
             this
             latter
             Ingua
             succeeded
             Guaynacapa
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             yoong
             man
             ,
             rich
             and
             valiant
             ,
             and
             so
             was
             he
             in
             trueth
             more
             than
             any
             of
             his
             predecessors
             ,
             or
             successors
             .
             Hee
             was
             very
             wise
             ,
             planting
             good
             orders
             thorowout
             his
             whole
             realme
             ,
             hee
             was
             a
             bold
             and
             resolute
             man
             ,
             valiant
             ,
             and
             very
             happy
             in
             warre
             .
             Hee
             therefore
             obtained
             great
             victories
             ,
             and
             extended
             his
             dominions
             much
             farther
             then
             all
             his
             predecessors
             had
             done
             before
             him
             ;
             he
             died
             in
             the
             realme
             of
             Quitto
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             had
             conquered
             ,
             foure
             hundred
             leagues
             distant
             from
             his
             court
             .
             The
             Indians
             opened
             him
             after
             his
             decease
             ,
             leaving
             his
             heart
             and
             entrailes
             in
             Quitto
             ,
             the
             body
             was
             carried
             to
             Cusco
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             placed
             in
             the
             renowmed
             temple
             of
             the
             Sunne
             .
             We
             see
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             many
             cawseies
             ,
             buildings
             ,
             fortresses
             ,
             and
             notable
             workes
             of
             this
             king
             :
             hee
             founded
             the
             familie
             of
             
               Teme
               Bamba
            
             .
             This
             Guaynacapa
             was
             worshipped
             of
             his
             subiects
             for
             a
             god
             ,
             being
             yet
             alive
             ,
             as
             the
             olde
             men
             affirme
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             doone
             to
             any
             of
             his
             predecèssours
             .
             When
             he
             died
             ,
             they
             slew
             a
             thousand
             persons
             of
             his
             housholde
             ,
             to
             serve
             him
             in
             the
             other
             life
             ,
             all
             which
             died
             willingly
             for
             his
             service
             ,
             insomuch
             that
             many
             of
             them
             offered
             themselves
             to
             death
             ,
             besides
             such
             as
             were
             appoynted
             :
             his
             riches
             and
             treasure
             was
             admirable
             .
             And
             forasmuch
             as
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             soone
             after
             his
             death
             ,
             the
             Indians
             laboured
             much
             to
             conceale
             all
             ,
             although
             a
             great
             parte
             thereof
             was
             carried
             to
             Xaxamalca
             ,
             for
             the
             ransome
             of
             Atahulpa
             his
             sonne
             .
             Some
             woorthy
             of
             credite
             affirme
             that
             he
             hadde
             above
             three
             hundred
             sonnes
             and
             grand-children
             
             in
             Cusco
             .
             His
             mother
             called
             Mamaoella
             was
             much
             esteemed
             amongst
             them
             .
             Polo
             sent
             hir
             body
             with
             that
             of
             Guaynacapa
             very
             well
             imbalmed
             to
             Lima
             ,
             rooting
             out
             infinite
             idolatries
             .
             To
             Guaynacapa
             succeeded
             in
             Cusco
             a
             sonne
             of
             his
             called
             Titocussigualpa
             ,
             who
             since
             was
             called
             
               Guaspar
               Ingua
            
             ,
             his
             body
             was
             burned
             by
             the
             captaines
             of
             Atahulpa
             ,
             who
             was
             likewise
             sonne
             to
             Guaynacapa
             ,
             and
             rebelled
             in
             Quitto
             against
             his
             brother
             ,
             marching
             against
             him
             with
             a
             mighty
             armie
             .
             It
             happened
             that
             Quisquits
             and
             Chilicuchi
             captains
             to
             Atahulpa
             ,
             took
             
               Guaspar
               Ingua
            
             in
             the
             cittie
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             being
             received
             for
             Lord
             and
             king
             (
             for
             that
             hee
             was
             the
             lawfull
             successor
             )
             which
             caused
             great
             sorrowe
             throughout
             all
             his
             kingdome
             ,
             especially
             in
             his
             Court.
             And
             as
             alwayes
             in
             their
             necessities
             they
             had
             recourse
             to
             sacrifices
             ,
             finding
             themselves
             vnable
             to
             set
             their
             Lord
             at
             libertie
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             great
             power
             the
             captaines
             had
             that
             tooke
             him
             ,
             as
             also
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             army
             that
             came
             with
             Atahulpa
             ,
             they
             resolved
             (
             some
             say
             by
             the
             commaundement
             of
             this
             Ingua
             )
             to
             make
             a
             great
             and
             solemne
             sacrifice
             to
             
               Viracocha
               Pachayachachic
            
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             vniversall
             Creator
             ,
             desiring
             him
             ,
             that
             since
             they
             coulde
             not
             deliver
             their
             Lord
             ,
             he
             would
             send
             men
             from
             heaven
             to
             deliver
             him
             from
             prison
             .
             And
             as
             they
             were
             in
             this
             great
             hope
             ,
             vpon
             their
             sacrifice
             ,
             news
             came
             to
             them
             ,
             that
             a
             certaine
             people
             come
             by
             sea
             ,
             was
             landed
             ,
             and
             had
             taken
             Atahulpa
             prisoner
             .
             Heerevpon
             they
             called
             the
             Spaniards
             Viracochas
             ,
             beleeving
             they
             were
             men
             sent
             from
             God
             ,
             as
             well
             for
             the
             small
             number
             they
             were
             to
             take
             Atahulpa
             in
             Xaxamalca
             ,
             as
             also
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             chaunced
             after
             their
             sacrifice
             done
             to
             Viracocha
             ,
             and
             thereby
             they
             began
             to
             call
             the
             Spaniards
             Viracochas
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             at
             this
             day
             .
             And
             in
             truth
             ,
             if
             we
             had
             given
             them
             good
             example
             ,
             and
             such
             
             as
             we
             ought
             ,
             these
             Indians
             had
             well
             applied
             it
             ,
             in
             saying
             they
             were
             men
             sent
             from
             God.
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             very
             well
             worthy
             of
             consideration
             ,
             how
             the
             greatnesse
             and
             providence
             of
             God
             ,
             disposed
             of
             the
             entry
             of
             our
             men
             at
             Peru
             ,
             which
             had
             beene
             impossible
             ,
             were
             not
             the
             dissention
             of
             the
             two
             brethren
             and
             their
             partisans
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             opinion
             they
             hadde
             of
             christians
             ,
             as
             of
             men
             sent
             from
             heaven
             ,
             bound
             (
             by
             the
             taking
             of
             the
             Indians
             countrey
             )
             to
             labour
             to
             winne
             soules
             vnto
             Almightie
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             last
             Successours
             Inguas
             .
             
               CHAP.
               23.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             rest
             of
             this
             subiect
             is
             handled
             at
             large
             by
             the
             Spanish
             Writers
             in
             the
             histories
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             it
             is
             not
             my
             purpose
             ,
             I
             will
             speake
             only
             of
             the
             succession
             of
             the
             
               Inguas
               .
               Atahulpa
            
             being
             dead
             in
             Xaxamalca
             ,
             and
             Guascar
             in
             Cusco
             ,
             and
             
               Francis
               Pizarre
            
             with
             his
             people
             having
             seised
             on
             the
             realme
             ,
             Mangocapa
             sonne
             to
             Guaynacapa
             besieged
             them
             in
             Cusco
             very
             straightly
             :
             but
             in
             the
             end
             he
             abandoned
             the
             whole
             Countrey
             ,
             and
             retired
             himselfe
             to
             
               Vilca
               Bamba
            
             ,
             where
             he
             kept
             himselfe
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             rough
             and
             difficult
             accesse
             ,
             and
             there
             the
             successors
             Inguas
             remained
             ,
             vntill
             Amaro
             ,
             who
             was
             taken
             and
             executed
             in
             the
             market
             place
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             to
             the
             Indians
             incredible
             griefe
             and
             sorrow
             ,
             seeing
             iustice
             doone
             vpon
             him
             publiquely
             whome
             they
             helde
             for
             their
             Lorde
             .
             After
             which
             time
             ,
             they
             imprisoned
             others
             of
             the
             linage
             of
             these
             Inguas
             .
             I
             have
             knowne
             
               Don
               Charles
            
             grand-childe
             to
             Guaynacapa
             ,
             and
             son
             to
             Polo
             ,
             who
             was
             baptized
             ,
             and
             alwayes
             favoured
             the
             Spaniards
             against
             Mangocapa
             his
             brother
             ,
             when
             the
             Marquise
             of
             Canette
             governed
             in
             this
             Countrey
             ,
             
             Sarritopaingua
             ,
             went
             from
             Vilcabamba
             ,
             and
             came
             vpon
             assurance
             to
             the
             citty
             of
             Kings
             ,
             where
             there
             was
             given
             to
             him
             the
             valley
             of
             Yucay
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             to
             whom
             succeeded
             a
             daughter
             of
             his
             .
             Beholde
             the
             succession
             which
             is
             knowne
             at
             this
             day
             of
             that
             great
             and
             rich
             familie
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             whose
             raigne
             continued
             above
             three
             hundred
             yeeres
             ,
             wherein
             they
             reckon
             eleaven
             successors
             ,
             vntill
             it
             was
             wholy
             extinguished
             .
             In
             the
             other
             linage
             of
             Vrincusco
             ,
             which
             (
             as
             we
             have
             said
             before
             )
             had
             his
             beginning
             likewise
             from
             the
             first
             Mangocapa
             ,
             they
             reckon
             eight
             successors
             in
             this
             sort
             :
             To
             Mangocapa
             succeeded
             Cinchoraca
             ,
             to
             him
             
               Capac
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             to
             him
             
               Lluqui
               Yupangui
            
             ,
             to
             him
             
               Maytacapaest
               Tarcogumam
            
             ,
             vnto
             whome
             succeeded
             his
             sonne
             ,
             whome
             they
             name
             not
             ,
             to
             this
             son
             succeeded
             
               Don
               Iean
               Tambo
               ,
               Maytapanaça
            
             .
             This
             sufficeth
             for
             the
             originall
             and
             succession
             of
             the
             Inguas
             ,
             that
             governed
             the
             land
             of
             Peru
             ,
             with
             that
             that
             I
             have
             spoken
             of
             their
             Lawes
             Governement
             ,
             and
             manner
             of
             life
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             common-weale
             .
             CHAP.
             24.
             
          
           
             ALthough
             you
             may
             see
             by
             the
             historie
             which
             shal
             be
             written
             of
             the
             kingdome
             ,
             succession
             ,
             &
             beginning
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             their
             maner
             of
             commonweale
             and
             governement
             ,
             yet
             will
             I
             speake
             briefly
             what
             I
             shall
             thinke
             fitte
             in
             generall
             to
             be
             most
             observed
             :
             Whereof
             I
             will
             discourse
             more
             amply
             in
             the
             historie
             .
             The
             first
             point
             whereby
             we
             may
             iudge
             the
             Mexicaine
             governement
             to
             be
             very
             politike
             ,
             is
             the
             order
             they
             had
             and
             kept
             inviolable
             in
             the
             election
             of
             their
             king
             :
             for
             since
             their
             first
             ,
             called
             Acamapach
             ,
             vnto
             their
             last
             ,
             which
             was
             Moteçuma
             ,
             
             the
             second
             of
             that
             name
             ,
             there
             came
             none
             to
             the
             crowne
             by
             right
             of
             succession
             ,
             but
             by
             a
             lawfull
             nomination
             and
             election
             .
             This
             election
             in
             the
             beginning
             was
             by
             the
             voyce
             of
             the
             commons
             ,
             although
             the
             chiefe
             men
             managed
             it
             .
             Since
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Iscoalt
             the
             fourth
             king
             ,
             by
             the
             advise
             and
             order
             of
             a
             wise
             and
             valiant
             man
             ,
             called
             Tlacael
             ,
             there
             were
             foure
             certayne
             Electours
             appoynted
             ,
             which
             (
             with
             two
             lordes
             or
             kings
             subiect
             to
             the
             Mexicaine
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             of
             Tucuba
             )
             had
             power
             to
             make
             this
             election
             .
             They
             did
             commonly
             choose
             yoongmen
             for
             their
             kings
             ,
             because
             they
             went
             alwayes
             to
             the
             warres
             ,
             and
             this
             was
             in
             a
             manner
             the
             chiefe
             cause
             why
             they
             desired
             them
             so
             .
             They
             had
             a
             speciall
             regard
             that
             they
             shoulde
             be
             fit
             for
             the
             warres
             ,
             and
             take
             delight
             and
             glory
             therein
             .
             After
             the
             election
             they
             made
             twoo
             kindes
             of
             feasts
             ,
             the
             one
             in
             taking
             possession
             of
             the
             royall
             estate
             ,
             for
             the
             which
             they
             went
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             making
             great
             ceremonies
             and
             sacrifices
             vppon
             the
             harth
             ,
             called
             Divine
             ,
             where
             there
             was
             a
             continuall
             fire
             before
             the
             Altare
             of
             the
             idoll
             ,
             and
             after
             some
             Rhethoritians
             practised
             therein
             ,
             made
             many
             Orations
             and
             Speeches
             .
             The
             other
             feast
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             solempne
             ,
             was
             at
             his
             coronation
             ,
             for
             the
             which
             he
             must
             first
             overcome
             in
             battell
             ,
             and
             bring
             a
             certaine
             number
             of
             captives
             ,
             which
             they
             must
             sacrifice
             to
             their
             gods
             ;
             he
             entred
             in
             triumph
             with
             great
             pompe
             ,
             making
             him
             a
             solempne
             reception
             ,
             aswell
             they
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             who
             went
             all
             in
             procession
             ,
             sounding
             on
             sundry
             sortes
             of
             instruments
             ,
             giving
             incense
             ,
             and
             singing
             like
             Secular
             men
             ,
             as
             also
             the
             Courtiers
             ,
             who
             came
             forth
             with
             their
             devises
             to
             receive
             the
             victorious
             king
             .
             The
             Crowne
             or
             royall
             ensigne
             was
             before
             like
             to
             a
             Myter
             ,
             and
             behinde
             it
             was
             cut
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             was
             not
             round
             ,
             for
             the
             fore
             parte
             
             was
             higher
             ,
             and
             did
             rise
             like
             a
             poynt
             .
             The
             king
             of
             Tescuco
             had
             the
             privilege
             to
             crown
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             have
             beene
             very
             duetifull
             and
             loyall
             vnto
             their
             kings
             :
             and
             ,
             it
             hath
             not
             beene
             knowne
             that
             they
             have
             practised
             any
             treason
             against
             them
             ;
             onely
             their
             Histories
             report
             ,
             that
             they
             sought
             to
             poison
             their
             king
             called
             Ticocic
             ,
             being
             a
             coward
             ,
             and
             of
             small
             account
             :
             but
             it
             is
             not
             found
             that
             there
             hath
             beene
             any
             dissentions
             or
             partialities
             amongest
             them
             for
             ambition
             ,
             thogh
             it
             be
             an
             ordinary
             thing
             in
             Comminalties
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             they
             reporte
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             see
             heereafter
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             ,
             the
             best
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             refused
             this
             realme
             ,
             seeming
             vnto
             him
             to
             be
             very
             expedient
             for
             the
             Common-weale
             to
             have
             an
             other
             king
             .
             In
             the
             beginning
             when
             the
             Mexicaines
             were
             but
             poore
             and
             weake
             ,
             the
             kings
             were
             very
             moderate
             in
             their
             expenses
             and
             in
             their
             Court
             ,
             but
             as
             they
             increased
             in
             power
             ,
             they
             increased
             likewise
             in
             pompe
             and
             state
             ,
             vntill
             they
             came
             to
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             who
             if
             hee
             had
             had
             no
             other
             thing
             but
             his
             house
             of
             beasts
             and
             birds
             ,
             it
             had
             beene
             a
             prowde
             thing
             ,
             the
             like
             whereof
             hath
             not
             beene
             seene
             :
             for
             there
             was
             in
             this
             house
             all
             sortes
             of
             fish
             ,
             birds
             of
             Xacamamas
             ,
             and
             beasts
             ,
             as
             in
             an
             other
             Noahs
             Arke
             ,
             for
             sea
             fish
             ,
             there
             were
             pooles
             of
             salt-water
             ,
             and
             for
             river
             fish
             ,
             lakes
             of
             fresh-water
             ,
             birds
             that
             do
             prey
             were
             fedde
             ,
             and
             likewise
             wilde
             beasts
             in
             great
             aboundaunce
             :
             there
             were
             very
             many
             Indians
             imployed
             for
             the
             keeping
             of
             these
             beasts
             :
             and
             when
             he
             found
             an
             impossibilitie
             to
             nourish
             any
             sort
             of
             fish
             ,
             fowle
             ,
             or
             wilde
             beast
             ,
             hee
             caused
             the
             image
             or
             likenesse
             to
             be
             made
             ,
             richly
             cutte
             in
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             silver
             ,
             or
             golde
             ,
             in
             marble
             ,
             or
             in
             stone
             :
             and
             for
             all
             sortes
             of
             entertainements
             ,
             hee
             had
             his
             severall
             houses
             and
             pallaces
             ,
             some
             of
             pleasure
             ,
             others
             of
             sorrowe
             
             and
             mourning
             ,
             and
             others
             to
             treate
             of
             the
             affairs
             of
             the
             realme
             .
             There
             was
             in
             this
             pallace
             many
             chambers
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             qualitie
             of
             noble
             men
             that
             served
             him
             ,
             with
             a
             strange
             order
             and
             distinction
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             titles
             and
             dignities
             the
             Indians
             vsed
             .
             CHAP.
             25.
             
          
           
             THe
             Mexicaines
             have
             beene
             very
             curious
             ,
             to
             divide
             the
             degrees
             and
             dignities
             amongst
             the
             Noble
             men
             and
             Lords
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             distinguish
             them
             to
             whom
             they
             were
             to
             give
             the
             greatest
             honour
             .
             The
             dignity
             of
             these
             foure
             Electors
             was
             the
             greatest
             ,
             and
             most
             honourable
             ,
             next
             to
             the
             king
             ,
             and
             they
             were
             chosen
             presently
             after
             the
             kings
             election
             .
             They
             were
             commonly
             brothers
             ,
             or
             very
             neare
             kinsmen
             to
             the
             king
             ,
             and
             were
             called
             Tlacohecalcalt
             ,
             which
             signifies
             prince
             of
             darts
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             cast
             ,
             being
             a
             kind
             of
             armes
             they
             vse
             much
             .
             The
             next
             dignitie
             to
             this
             ,
             were
             those
             they
             doe
             call
             Tlacatecati
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             circumcisers
             or
             cutters
             of
             men
             .
             The
             third
             dignitie
             were
             of
             those
             which
             they
             called
             EZuahuacalt
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             sheader
             of
             blood
             .
             All
             the
             which
             Titles
             and
             Dignities
             were
             exercised
             by
             men
             of
             warre
             .
             There
             was
             another
             a
             fourth
             intituled
             ,
             Tlilancalqui
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             Lord
             of
             the
             blacke
             house
             ,
             or
             of
             darkenesse
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             certaine
             incke
             wherewith
             the
             Priests
             annoynted
             themselves
             ,
             and
             did
             serve
             in
             their
             idolatries
             .
             All
             these
             foure
             dignities
             were
             of
             the
             great
             Counsell
             ,
             without
             whose
             advise
             the
             king
             might
             not
             doe
             any
             thing
             of
             importance
             :
             and
             the
             king
             being
             dead
             ,
             they
             were
             to
             choose
             another
             in
             his
             place
             out
             of
             one
             of
             those
             foure
             dignities
             .
             Besides
             these
             ,
             there
             were
             other
             Counsells
             and
             Audiences
             ,
             and
             some
             say
             
             there
             were
             as
             many
             as
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             were
             divers
             seates
             and
             iurisdictions
             ,
             with
             their
             Counsellers
             and
             Iudges
             of
             the
             Court
             ,
             and
             o●hers
             that
             were
             vnder
             them
             ,
             as
             Corrigidors
             ,
             chiefe
             Iudges
             ,
             captaines
             of
             Iustice
             ,
             Lievetenants
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             which
             were
             yet
             inferiour
             to
             these
             ,
             with
             a
             very
             goodly
             order
             .
             All
             which
             depended
             on
             the
             foure
             first
             Princes
             that
             assisted
             the
             king
             .
             These
             foure
             onely
             had
             authoritie
             and
             power
             to
             condemne
             to
             death
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             sent
             them
             instructions
             of
             the
             sentences
             they
             had
             given
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             they
             gave
             the
             king
             to
             vnderstand
             what
             had
             passed
             in
             his
             Realme
             .
          
           
             There
             was
             a
             good
             order
             and
             settled
             policie
             for
             the
             revenues
             of
             the
             Crowne
             ,
             for
             there
             were
             officers
             divided
             throughout
             all
             the
             provinces
             ,
             as
             Receivers
             and
             Treasurers
             ,
             which
             received
             the
             Tributes
             and
             royall
             revenews
             .
             And
             they
             carried
             the
             Tribute
             to
             the
             Court
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             every
             moneth
             ;
             which
             Tribute
             was
             of
             all
             things
             that
             doe
             growe
             or
             ingender
             on
             the
             land
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             aswell
             of
             iewells
             and
             apparrell
             ,
             as
             of
             mear
             .
             They
             were
             very
             carefull
             for
             the
             well
             ordering
             of
             that
             which
             concerned
             their
             religion
             ,
             superstition
             ,
             and
             idolatries
             :
             and
             for
             this
             occasion
             there
             were
             a
             great
             number
             of
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             whom
             charge
             was
             given
             to
             teach
             the
             people
             the
             custome
             and
             ceremonies
             of
             their
             Lawe
             .
             Heerevppon
             one
             day
             a
             christian
             Priest
             made
             his
             complaint
             that
             the
             Indians
             were
             no
             good
             Christians
             ,
             and
             did
             not
             profite
             in
             the
             lawe
             of
             God
             ;
             an
             olde
             Indian
             answered
             him
             very
             well
             to
             the
             purpose
             in
             these
             termes
             :
             
               Let
               the
               Priest
            
             (
             saide
             hee
             )
             
               imploy
               as
               much
               care
               and
               diligence
               to
               make
               the
               Indians
               christians
               ,
               as
               the
               ministers
               of
               Idolles
               did
               to
               teach
               them
               their
               ceremonies
               ;
               for
               with
               halfe
               that
               care
               they
               will
               make
               vs
               the
               best
               christians
               in
               the
               worlde
               ,
               for
               that
               the
               lawe
               of
               Iesus
               Christ
               is
               much
               better
               ;
               but
               the
               Indians
               
               learne
               it
               not
               ,
               for
               want
               of
               men
               to
               instruct
               them
               .
            
             Wherein
             hee
             spake
             the
             very
             trueth
             ,
             to
             our
             great
             shame
             and
             confusion
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             Mexicaines
             made
             Warre
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             Orders
             of
             Knighthood
             
               CHAP.
               26.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Mexicaines
             gave
             the
             first
             place
             of
             honour
             to
             the
             profession
             of
             armes
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             Noblemen
             are
             their
             chiefe
             souldiers
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             were
             not
             noble
             ,
             by
             their
             valour
             and
             reputation
             gotten
             in
             warres
             ,
             came
             to
             dignities
             and
             honours
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             were
             held
             for
             noblemen
             .
             They
             gave
             goodly
             recompences
             to
             such
             as
             had
             done
             valiantly
             ,
             who
             inioyed
             priviledge●
             that
             none
             else
             might
             have
             ,
             the
             which
             did
             much
             incourage
             them
             .
             Their
             armes
             were
             of
             rasors
             of
             sharpe
             cutting
             flints
             ,
             which
             they
             set
             on
             either
             side
             of
             a
             staffe
             ,
             which
             was
             so
             furious
             a
             weapon
             ,
             as
             they
             affirmed
             that
             with
             one
             blow
             ,
             they
             would
             cut
             off
             the
             necke
             of
             a
             horse
             .
             They
             had
             strange
             and
             heavy
             clubbes
             ,
             lances
             ,
             fashioned
             like
             pikes
             ,
             and
             other
             maner
             of
             dartes
             to
             cast
             ,
             wherein
             they
             were
             very
             expert
             ;
             but
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             their
             combate
             was
             performed
             with
             stones
             .
             For
             defensive
             armes
             they
             had
             little
             rondaches
             or
             targets
             ,
             and
             some
             kind
             of
             morions
             or
             head-peeces
             invironed
             with
             feathers
             .
             They
             were
             clad
             in
             the
             skinnes
             of
             Tigres
             ,
             Lions
             ,
             and
             other
             sauage
             beasts
             .
             They
             came
             presently
             to
             hands
             with
             the
             enemie
             ,
             and
             were
             greatly
             practised
             to
             runne
             and
             wrestle
             ,
             for
             their
             chiefe
             maner
             of
             combate
             ,
             was
             not
             so
             much
             to
             kill
             ,
             as
             to
             take
             captives
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             vsed
             in
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             as
             hath
             beene
             saide
             .
             Moteçuma
             set
             Knighthood
             in
             his
             highest
             splendor
             ,
             ordaining
             certaine
             militarie
             orders
             ,
             as
             Commanders
             ,
             with
             certaine
             markes
             
             and
             ensignes
             .
             The
             most
             honourable
             amongest
             the
             Knightes
             ,
             were
             those
             that
             carried
             the
             Crowne
             of
             their
             haire
             ,
             tied
             with
             a
             little
             red
             ribband
             ,
             having
             a
             rich
             plume
             of
             feathers
             ,
             from
             the
             which
             ,
             did
             hang
             branches
             of
             feathers
             vpon
             their
             shoulders
             ,
             &
             roules
             of
             the
             same
             .
             They
             carried
             so
             many
             of
             these
             rowles
             ,
             as
             they
             had
             done
             worthy
             deedes
             in
             warre
             .
             The
             King
             himselfe
             was
             of
             this
             order
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seene
             in
             Chapultepec
             ,
             where
             Moteçuma
             and
             his
             sonnes
             were
             attyred
             with
             those
             kindes
             of
             feathers
             ,
             cut
             in
             the
             rocke
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             worthy
             the
             sight
             .
             There
             was
             another
             order
             of
             Knighthood
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             the
             Lions
             and
             the
             Tigres
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             commonly
             the
             most
             valiant
             and
             most
             noted
             in
             warre
             ,
             they
             went
             alwaies
             with
             their
             markes
             and
             armories
             .
             There
             were
             other
             Knightes
             ,
             as
             the
             grey
             Knightes
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             not
             so
             much
             respected
             as
             the
             rest
             :
             they
             had
             their
             haire
             cut
             round
             about
             the
             eare
             .
             They
             went
             to
             the
             war
             with
             markes
             like
             to
             the
             other
             Knightes
             ,
             yet
             they
             were
             not
             armed
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             girdle
             ,
             and
             the
             most
             honourable
             were
             armed
             all
             over
             .
             All
             Knightes
             might
             carry
             golde
             and
             silver
             ,
             and
             weare
             rich
             cotton
             ,
             vse
             painted
             and
             gilt
             vessell
             ,
             and
             carry
             shooes
             after
             their
             maner
             :
             but
             the
             common
             people
             might
             vse
             none
             but
             earthen
             vessell
             ,
             neyther
             might
             they
             carry
             shooes
             ,
             nor
             attyre
             themselves
             but
             in
             Nequen
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             a
             grosse
             stuffe
             .
             Every
             order
             of
             these
             Knightes
             had
             his
             lodging
             in
             the
             pallace
             noted
             with
             their
             markes
             ;
             the
             first
             was
             called
             the
             Princes
             lodging
             ,
             the
             second
             of
             Eagles
             ,
             the
             third
             of
             Lions
             and
             Tigres
             ,
             and
             the
             fourth
             of
             the
             grey
             Knightes
             .
             The
             other
             common
             officers
             ,
             were
             lodged
             vnderneath
             in
             meaner
             lodgings
             :
             if
             any
             one
             lodged
             out
             of
             his
             place
             ,
             he
             suffred
             death
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             great
             order
             and
             dilligence
             the
             Mexicaines
             vsed
             to
             instruct
             their
             youth
             .
             CHAP.
             27.
             
          
           
             THere
             is
             nothing
             that
             gives
             me
             more
             cause
             to
             admire
             ,
             nor
             that
             I
             finde
             more
             worthy
             of
             commendations
             and
             memory
             ,
             then
             the
             order
             and
             care
             the
             Mexicaines
             had
             to
             nourish
             their
             youth
             :
             for
             they
             knew
             well
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             good
             hope
             of
             a
             common-weale
             ,
             consisted
             in
             the
             nurture
             and
             institution
             of
             youth
             ,
             whereof
             Plato
             treates
             amply
             in
             his
             bookes
             
               De
               Legibus
            
             :
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             laboured
             and
             tooke
             paines
             to
             sequester
             their
             children
             from
             delights
             and
             liberties
             ,
             (
             which
             are
             the
             two
             plagues
             of
             this
             age
             ,
             )
             imploying
             them
             in
             honest
             and
             profitable
             exercises
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             there
             was
             in
             their
             Temples
             ,
             a
             private
             house
             for
             childeren
             ,
             as
             schooles
             ,
             or
             colledges
             ,
             which
             was
             seperate
             from
             that
             of
             the
             yong
             men
             and
             maides
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             whereof
             we
             have
             discoursed
             at
             largee
             .
             There
             were
             in
             these
             schooles
             a
             great
             number
             of
             children
             ,
             whom
             their
             fathers
             did
             willingly
             bring
             thither
             ,
             and
             which
             had
             teachers
             and
             masters
             to
             instruct
             them
             in
             all
             commendable
             exercises
             ,
             to
             be
             of
             good
             behaviour
             ,
             to
             respect
             their
             superiors
             ,
             to
             serve
             and
             obey
             them
             ,
             giving
             them
             to
             this
             end
             ,
             certaine
             precepts
             and
             instructions
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             they
             might
             be
             pleasing
             to
             Noblemen
             ,
             they
             taught
             them
             to
             sing
             and
             dance
             ,
             and
             did
             practise
             them
             in
             the
             exercise
             of
             warre
             ;
             some
             to
             shoote
             an
             arrow
             ,
             to
             cast
             a
             dart
             or
             a
             staffe
             burnt
             at
             the
             end
             ,
             and
             to
             handle
             well
             a
             target
             and
             a
             sword
             .
             They
             suffered
             them
             not
             to
             sleepe
             much
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             might
             accustome
             themselves
             to
             labour
             in
             their
             youth
             ,
             and
             were
             not
             men
             given
             to
             
             delightes
             .
             Besides
             the
             ordinary
             number
             of
             these
             children
             ,
             there
             were
             in
             the
             same
             colledges
             ,
             other
             children
             of
             Lordes
             and
             Noblemen
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             instructed
             more
             privately
             .
             They
             brought
             them
             their
             meate
             and
             ordinary
             from
             their
             houses
             ,
             and
             were
             recommended
             to
             antients
             and
             old
             men
             to
             have
             care
             over
             them
             ,
             who
             continually
             did
             advise
             them
             to
             be
             vertuous
             and
             to
             live
             chastely
             ;
             to
             be
             sober
             in
             their
             diet
             ,
             to
             fast
             ,
             and
             to
             march
             gravely
             ,
             and
             with
             measure
             .
             They
             were
             accustomed
             to
             exercise
             them
             to
             travell
             ,
             and
             in
             laborious
             exercises
             :
             and
             when
             they
             see
             them
             instructed
             in
             all
             these
             things
             ,
             they
             did
             carefully
             looke
             into
             their
             inclination
             :
             if
             they
             found
             any
             one
             addicted
             to
             the
             war
             ,
             being
             of
             sufficient
             yeares
             ,
             they
             sought
             all
             occasions
             to
             make
             triall
             of
             them
             ,
             sending
             them
             to
             the
             warre
             ,
             vnder
             colour
             to
             carry
             victualls
             and
             munition
             to
             the
             souldiers
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             might
             there
             see
             what
             passed
             ,
             and
             the
             labour
             they
             suffered
             .
             And
             that
             they
             might
             abandon
             all
             feare
             ,
             they
             were
             laden
             with
             heavy
             burthens
             ,
             that
             shewing
             their
             courage
             therein
             ,
             they
             might
             more
             easily
             be
             admitted
             into
             the
             company
             of
             souldiers
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             it
             happened
             ,
             that
             many
             went
             laden
             to
             the
             Armie
             ,
             and
             returned
             Captaines
             with
             markes
             of
             honour
             .
             Some
             of
             them
             were
             so
             desirous
             to
             bee
             noted
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             eyther
             taken
             ,
             or
             slaine
             :
             and
             they
             held
             it
             lesse
             honourable
             to
             remaine
             a
             prisoner
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             sought
             rather
             to
             be
             cut
             in
             peeces
             ,
             then
             to
             fall
             captives
             into
             their
             enemies
             hands
             .
             See
             how
             Noblemens
             children
             that
             were
             inclined
             to
             the
             warres
             were
             imployed
             .
             The
             others
             that
             had
             their
             inclination
             to
             matters
             of
             the
             Temple
             ;
             and
             to
             speake
             after
             our
             maner
             ,
             to
             be
             Ecclesiastical
             men
             ,
             having
             attained
             to
             sufficient
             yeares
             ,
             they
             were
             drawne
             out
             of
             the
             colledge
             ,
             and
             placed
             in
             the
             temple
             ,
             in
             the
             lodging
             
             appointed
             for
             religious
             men
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             gave
             them
             the
             orders
             of
             Ecclesiasticall
             men
             .
             There
             had
             they
             prelates
             and
             masters
             ,
             to
             teach
             them
             that
             which
             concerned
             their
             profession
             ,
             where
             they
             should
             remaine
             being
             destined
             therevnto
             .
             These
             Mexicaines
             tooke
             great
             care
             to
             bring
             vp
             their
             children
             :
             if
             at
             this
             day
             they
             would
             follow
             this
             order
             ,
             in
             building
             of
             houses
             and
             colledges
             for
             the
             instruction
             of
             youth
             ,
             without
             doubt
             Christianitie
             should
             florish
             much
             amongst
             the
             Indians
             .
             Some
             godly
             persons
             have
             begunne
             ,
             and
             the
             King
             with
             his
             Counsell
             have
             favored
             it
             :
             but
             for
             that
             it
             is
             a
             matter
             of
             no
             profit
             ,
             they
             advance
             little
             ,
             and
             proceede
             coldly
             .
             God
             open
             our
             eyes
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             see
             it
             to
             our
             shame
             ,
             seeing
             that
             we
             Christians
             do
             not
             that
             which
             the
             children
             of
             darkenes
             did
             to
             their
             perdition
             ,
             wherin
             we
             forget
             our
             duties
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Indians
             feasts
             and
             dances
             .
             CHAP.
             28.
             
          
           
             FOrasmuch
             as
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             which
             partly
             dependes
             of
             the
             good
             government
             of
             the
             Common-weale
             ,
             to
             have
             some
             plaies
             and
             recreations
             when
             time
             serves
             ;
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             to
             relate
             what
             the
             Indians
             did
             heerein
             ,
             especially
             the
             Mexicaines
             .
             We
             have
             not
             discovered
             any
             Nation
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             that
             live
             in
             comminalties
             ,
             which
             have
             not
             their
             recreations
             ,
             in
             plaies
             ,
             dances
             ,
             and
             exercises
             of
             pleasure
             .
             At
             Peru
             I
             have
             seene
             plaies
             in
             maner
             of
             combats
             ,
             where
             the
             men
             of
             both
             sides
             were
             sometimes
             so
             chafed
             ,
             that
             often
             their
             Paella
             (
             which
             was
             the
             name
             of
             this
             exercise
             ,
             )
             fell
             out
             to
             be
             dangerous
             .
             I
             have
             also
             seene
             divers
             sortes
             of
             dances
             ,
             wherein
             they
             did
             counterfait
             and
             represent
             certaine
             trades
             and
             offices
             ,
             as
             sheepheards
             ,
             laborers
             ,
             fishers
             ,
             and
             
             hunters
             ,
             and
             commonly
             they
             made
             all
             those
             dances
             ,
             with
             a
             very
             grave
             sound
             and
             pase
             :
             there
             were
             other
             dances
             and
             maskes
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Guacones
             ,
             whose
             actions
             were
             pure
             representations
             of
             the
             divell
             .
             There
             were
             also
             men
             that
             dance
             on
             the
             shoulders
             one
             of
             another
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             in
             Portugall
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             call
             Paellas
             ,
             The
             greatest
             part
             of
             these
             dances
             ,
             were
             superstitions
             ,
             and
             kindes
             of
             idolatries
             :
             for
             that
             they
             honoured
             their
             idolls
             and
             Guacas
             in
             that
             maner
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             the
             Prelates
             have
             laboured
             to
             take
             from
             them
             these
             dances
             ,
             all
             they
             could
             :
             but
             yet
             they
             suffer
             them
             ,
             for
             that
             part
             of
             them
             are
             but
             sportes
             of
             recreation
             ,
             for
             alwaies
             they
             dance
             after
             their
             maner
             .
             In
             these
             dances
             ,
             they
             vse
             sundry
             sortes
             of
             instruments
             ,
             whereof
             ,
             some
             are
             like
             flutes
             ,
             or
             little
             Canons
             ,
             others
             like
             drummes
             ,
             and
             others
             like
             cornets
             :
             but
             commonly
             they
             sing
             all
             with
             the
             voyce
             ,
             and
             first
             one
             or
             two
             sing
             the
             song
             ,
             then
             all
             the
             rest
             answer
             them
             .
             Some
             of
             these
             songs
             were
             very
             wittily
             composed
             ,
             contayning
             histories
             ,
             and
             others
             were
             full
             of
             superstitions
             ,
             and
             some
             were
             meere
             follies
             .
             Our
             men
             that
             have
             conversed
             among
             them
             ,
             have
             laboured
             to
             reduce
             matters
             of
             our
             holy
             faith
             to
             their
             tunes
             ,
             the
             which
             hath
             profited
             well
             :
             for
             that
             they
             imploy
             whole
             daies
             to
             rehearse
             and
             sing
             them
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             pleasure
             and
             content
             they
             take
             in
             their
             tunes
             .
             They
             have
             likewise
             put
             our
             compositions
             of
             musicke
             into
             their
             language
             ,
             as
             Octaves
             ,
             Songs
             ,
             and
             Rondells
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             have
             very
             aptly
             turned
             ,
             and
             in
             truth
             it
             is
             a
             goodly
             and
             very
             necessary
             meanes
             to
             instruct
             the
             people
             .
             In
             Peru
             ,
             they
             commonly
             called
             dances
             ,
             Tagui
             ,
             in
             other
             Provinces
             ,
             Areittos
             ,
             and
             in
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Mittottes
            
             .
             There
             hath
             not
             beene
             in
             any
             other
             place
             ,
             any
             such
             curiositie
             of
             plaies
             and
             dances
             ,
             as
             in
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             where
             at
             this
             day
             we
             see
             Indians
             
             so
             excellent
             dancers
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             admirable
             .
             Some
             dance
             vpon
             a
             cord
             ,
             some
             vpon
             a
             long
             and
             straight
             stake
             ,
             in
             a
             thousand
             sundrie
             sortes
             ,
             others
             with
             the
             soles
             of
             their
             feete
             and
             their
             hammes
             ,
             do
             handle
             ,
             cast
             vp
             and
             receive
             againe
             a
             very
             heavy
             blocke
             ,
             which
             seems
             incredible
             but
             in
             seeing
             it
             .
             They
             do
             make
             many
             other
             shewes
             of
             their
             great
             agilitie
             ,
             in
             leaping
             ,
             vaulting
             ,
             and
             tumbling
             ,
             sometimes
             bearing
             a
             great
             and
             heavie
             burthen
             ,
             sometimes
             enduring
             blowes
             able
             to
             breake
             a
             barre
             of
             yron
             .
             But
             the
             most
             vsuall
             exercise
             of
             recreation
             among
             the
             Mexicaines
             is
             the
             solemne
             Mittotte
             ,
             and
             that
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             daunce
             they
             held
             so
             brave
             and
             so
             honorable
             ,
             that
             the
             king
             himselfe
             daunced
             ,
             but
             not
             ordinarily
             ,
             as
             the
             king
             
               Don
               Pedro
            
             of
             Arragon
             with
             the
             Barber
             of
             Valencia
             .
             This
             daunce
             or
             Mittotte
             was
             commonly
             made
             in
             the
             Courts
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             and
             in
             those
             of
             the
             kings
             houses
             ,
             which
             were
             more
             spatious
             .
             They
             did
             place
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             the
             Court
             two
             instruments
             ,
             one
             like
             to
             a
             drumme
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             like
             a
             barrell
             made
             of
             one
             peece
             ,
             and
             hollow
             within
             ,
             which
             they
             set
             vppon
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             a
             beast
             ,
             or
             vpon
             a
             piller
             .
          
           
             These
             two
             instruments
             were
             so
             well
             accorded
             together
             ,
             that
             they
             made
             a
             good
             harmony
             :
             and
             with
             these
             instruments
             they
             made
             many
             kinds
             of
             Aires
             ,
             &
             Songs
             .
             They
             did
             all
             sing
             and
             dance
             to
             the
             sound
             and
             measure
             of
             these
             instruments
             ,
             with
             so
             goodly
             an
             order
             and
             accord
             ,
             both
             of
             their
             feete
             and
             voices
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             a
             pleasant
             thing
             to
             beholde
             .
             In
             these
             daunces
             they
             made
             twoo
             circles
             or
             wheeles
             ,
             the
             one
             was
             in
             the
             middest
             neere
             to
             the
             instruments
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Auntients
             and
             Noblemen
             did
             sing
             and
             daunce
             with
             a
             softe
             and
             slowe
             motion
             ;
             and
             the
             other
             was
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             people
             round
             about
             them
             ,
             but
             a
             good
             distance
             from
             the
             first
             ,
             wherein
             
             they
             daunced
             two
             and
             two
             more
             lightly
             ,
             making
             diverse
             kindes
             of
             pases
             ,
             with
             certaine
             leapes
             to
             the
             measure
             .
             All
             which
             together
             made
             a
             very
             great
             circle
             .
             They
             attired
             themselves
             for
             these
             dances
             with
             their
             most
             pretious
             apparrell
             and
             iewelles
             ,
             every
             one
             according
             to
             his
             abilitie
             ,
             holding
             it
             for
             a
             very
             honorable
             thing
             :
             for
             this
             cause
             they
             learned
             these
             daunces
             from
             their
             infancie
             .
             And
             although
             the
             greatest
             parte
             of
             them
             were
             doone
             in
             honor
             of
             their
             Idolles
             ,
             yet
             was
             it
             not
             so
             instituted
             ,
             as
             hath
             bin
             said
             ,
             but
             only
             as
             a
             recreation
             and
             pastime
             for
             the
             people
             .
             Therefore
             it
             is
             not
             convenient
             to
             take
             them
             quite
             from
             the
             Indians
             ,
             but
             they
             must
             take
             good
             heed
             they
             mingle
             not
             their
             superstitions
             amongest
             them
             .
             I
             have
             seene
             this
             Mittotte
             ,
             in
             the
             court
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Topetzotlan
             ,
             a
             village
             seaven
             leagues
             from
             Mexico
             :
             and
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             it
             was
             a
             good
             thing
             to
             busie
             the
             Indians
             vpon
             festivall
             dayes
             ,
             seeing
             they
             have
             neede
             of
             some
             recreation
             :
             and
             because
             it
             is
             publike
             ,
             and
             without
             the
             preiudice
             of
             any
             other
             ,
             there
             is
             lesse
             inconvenience
             ,
             than
             in
             others
             which
             may
             be
             done
             privately
             by
             themselves
             ,
             if
             they
             tooke
             away
             these
             .
             We
             must
             therfore
             conclude
             ,
             folowing
             the
             counsel
             of
             pope
             Gregory
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             very
             convenient
             to
             leave
             vnto
             the
             Indians
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             have
             had
             vsually
             of
             custom
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             be
             not
             mingled
             nor
             corrupt
             with
             their
             antient
             errors
             ,
             &
             that
             their
             feasts
             and
             pastimes
             may
             be
             to
             the
             honor
             of
             God
             and
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             whose
             feasts
             they
             celebrate
             .
             This
             may
             suffice
             in
             generall
             of
             the
             maners
             and
             politike
             customes
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             .
             And
             as
             for
             their
             beginning
             ,
             increase
             ,
             and
             Empire
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             is
             an
             ample
             matter
             ,
             and
             will
             be
             pleasant
             to
             vnderstand
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             we
             will
             intreate
             thereof
             in
             the
             Booke
             following
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           SEVENTH
           BOOKE
           of
           the
           Naturall
           and
           Morall
           Historie
           of
           the
           Indies
           .
        
         
           
             That
             it
             is
             profitable
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             actes
             and
             geasts
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             especially
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             .
             CHAP.
             1.
             
          
           
             EVery
             History
             wel
             written
             is
             profitable
             to
             the
             reader
             :
             For
             as
             the
             Wise
             man
             saith
             ,
             
               That
               which
               hath
               bin
               ,
               is
               ,
            
             
             
               and
               that
               which
               shall
               be
               ,
               is
               that
               which
               hath
               beene
               :
            
             Humane
             things
             have
             much
             resemblance
             in
             themselves
             ,
             and
             some
             growe
             wi●e
             by
             that
             which
             happneth
             to
             others
             .
             There
             is
             no
             Nation
             ,
             how
             barbarous
             soever
             ,
             that
             have
             not
             something
             in
             them
             ,
             good
             ,
             and
             woorthy
             of
             commendation
             ;
             nor
             Commonweale
             so
             well
             ordered
             ,
             that
             hath
             not
             something
             blame-worthy
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             ●●n●roll●d
             .
             
             If
             therefore
             there
             were
             no
             other
             fruite
             in
             the
             Historic
             and
             Narration
             of
             the
             deedes
             and
             gests
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             but
             this
             common
             vtilitie
             ,
             to
             be
             a
             Relation
             or
             Histori●
             of
             things
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             the
             effect
             of
             truth
             have
             happened
             ,
             it
             deserveth
             to
             be
             received
             as
             a
             profitable
             thing
             ,
             neither
             ought
             it
             to
             be
             reiected
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             concernes
             the
             Indians
             .
             As
             we
             see
             that
             those
             Authors
             that
             treate
             of
             naturall
             things
             ,
             write
             not
             onely
             of
             generous
             beasts
             ,
             notable
             and
             rare
             plants
             ,
             and
             of
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             wilde
             beasts
             ,
             common
             hearbs
             ,
             and
             base
             and
             vulgar
             stones
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             is
             alwayes
             in
             them
             some
             properties
             worthy
             observation
             .
             If
             therefore
             there
             were
             nothing
             else
             in
             this
             Discourse
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             is
             a
             Historie
             ,
             and
             no
             fables
             nor
             fictions
             ,
             it
             were
             no
             unwoorthy
             subiect
             to
             be
             written
             ,
             or
             read
             .
             There
             is
             yet
             an
             other
             more
             particular
             reason
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             wee
             ought
             heerein
             to
             esteeme
             that
             which
             is
             woorthy
             of
             memorie
             ,
             both
             for
             that
             it
             is
             a
             Nation
             little
             esteemed
             ,
             and
             also
             a
             subiect
             different
             from
             that
             of
             our
             Europe
             ,
             as
             these
             Nations
             be
             ,
             wherein
             wee
             should
             take
             most
             pleasure
             and
             content
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             ground
             of
             their
             beginning
             ,
             their
             maner
             of
             life
             ,
             with
             their
             happy
             and
             vnhappy
             adventures
             .
             And
             this
             subiect
             is
             not
             onely
             pleasant
             and
             agreeable
             ,
             but
             also
             profitable
             ,
             especially
             to
             such
             as
             have
             the
             charge
             to
             rule
             and
             governe
             them
             ;
             for
             the
             knowledge
             of
             their
             acts
             invites
             vs
             to
             give
             credite
             ,
             and
             dooth
             partely
             teach
             howe
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             intreated
             :
             yea
             it
             takes
             away
             much
             of
             that
             common
             and
             foolish
             contempt
             wherein
             they
             of
             Europe
             holde
             them
             ,
             supposing
             that
             those
             Nations
             have
             no
             feeling
             of
             reason
             .
             For
             in
             trueth
             wee
             can
             not
             cleere
             this
             errour
             better
             ,
             than
             by
             the
             true
             report
             of
             the
             actes
             and
             deedes
             of
             this
             people
             .
             I
             will
             therefore
             as
             briefely
             as
             I
             can
             ,
             intreate
             of
             the
             beginning
             ,
             proceedings
             and
             
             notable
             deedes
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             whereby
             wee
             may
             know
             the
             time
             and
             the
             disposition
             that
             the
             high
             God
             woulde
             choose
             ,
             to
             send
             vnto
             these
             Nations
             the
             light
             of
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             his
             only
             sonne
             our
             Lord
             ,
             whome
             I
             beseech
             to
             second
             our
             small
             labour
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             to
             the
             glory
             of
             his
             Divine
             greatnes
             ,
             and
             some
             profite
             to
             these
             people
             ,
             to
             whome
             hee
             hath
             imparted
             the
             lawe
             of
             his
             holy
             gospel
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             antient
             Inhabitants
             of
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             how
             the
             Navatlacas
             came
             thither
             .
             
               CHAP.
               2.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             antient
             and
             first
             Inhabitants
             of
             those
             provinces
             ,
             which
             wee
             call
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             were
             men
             very
             barbarous
             and
             savage
             ,
             which
             lived
             onely
             by
             hunting
             ,
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             were
             called
             Chichimecas
             .
             They
             did
             neither
             sowe
             nor
             till
             the
             ground
             ,
             neither
             lived
             they
             together
             ;
             for
             all
             their
             exercise
             was
             to
             hunt
             ,
             wherein
             they
             were
             very
             expert
             .
             They
             lived
             in
             the
             roughest
             partes
             of
             the
             mountaines
             beastlike
             ,
             without
             any
             pollicie
             ,
             and
             they
             went
             all
             naked
             .
             They
             hunted
             wilde
             beasts
             ,
             hares
             ,
             connies
             ,
             weezles
             ,
             mowles
             ,
             wilde
             cattes
             ,
             and
             birdes
             ;
             yea
             vncleane
             beasts
             ,
             as
             snakes
             ,
             lizards
             ,
             locusts
             and
             wormes
             ,
             whereon
             they
             fed
             ,
             with
             some
             hearbs
             and
             rootes
             .
             They
             slept
             in
             the
             mountaines
             ,
             in
             caves
             and
             in
             bushes
             ,
             and
             the
             wives
             likewise
             went
             a
             hunting
             with
             their
             husbandes
             ,
             leaving
             their
             yoong
             children
             in
             a
             little
             panier
             of
             reeds
             ,
             tied
             to
             the
             boughs
             of
             a
             tree
             ,
             which
             desired
             not
             to
             suck
             ●ntill
             they
             were
             returned
             from
             hunting
             .
             They
             had
             no
             superiors
             ,
             nor
             did
             acknowledge
             or
             worship
             any
             gods
             ,
             neyther
             hadde
             any
             manner
             of
             ceremonies
             or
             religion
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             in
             New
             Spaine
             of
             this
             kinde
             of
             people
             ,
             which
             live
             by
             their
             bowes
             and
             arrowes
             ,
             the
             
             which
             are
             very
             hurtfull
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             gather
             together
             in
             troupes
             to
             doe
             mischiefe
             ,
             and
             to
             robbe
             :
             neither
             can
             the
             Spaniards
             by
             force
             or
             cunning
             reduce
             them
             to
             any
             policie
             or
             obedience
             :
             for
             having
             no
             townes
             nor
             places
             of
             residence
             ,
             to
             sight
             with
             them
             ,
             were
             properly
             to
             hunt
             after
             savage
             beasts
             ,
             which
             scatter
             and
             hide
             themselves
             in
             the
             most
             rough
             and
             covered
             places
             of
             the
             mountaines
             .
             Such
             is
             their
             maner
             of
             living
             eve●
             to
             this
             day
             ,
             in
             many
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
             In
             the
             Bookes
             
               De
               procuranda
               Indiorum
               salute
            
             ,
             they
             discourse
             chiefly
             of
             this
             sort
             of
             Indians
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             saide
             that
             they
             are
             to
             be
             constrained
             and
             subiected
             by
             some
             honest
             force
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             necessary
             first
             to
             teach
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             men
             ,
             and
             then
             to
             be
             Christians
             .
             Some
             will
             say
             ,
             that
             those
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Ottomies
             ,
             were
             of
             this
             sort
             ,
             being
             commonly
             poore
             Indians
             ,
             inhabiting
             a
             rough
             and
             barren
             land
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             are
             in
             good
             numbers
             ,
             and
             live
             together
             with
             some
             order
             ,
             and
             such
             as
             do
             know
             them
             ,
             find
             them
             no
             lesse
             apt
             and
             capable
             of
             matters
             of
             christian
             religion
             ,
             than
             others
             which
             are
             held
             to
             be
             more
             rich
             and
             better
             governed
             .
             Comming
             therefore
             to
             our
             subiect
             ,
             the
             Chichimecas
             and
             Ottomies
             which
             were
             the
             first
             inhabitants
             of
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             for
             that
             they
             did
             neyther
             till
             nor
             sowe
             the
             land
             ,
             they
             left
             the
             best
             ▪
             and
             most
             fertile
             of
             the
             country
             vnpeopled
             ,
             which
             ,
             Nations
             that
             came
             from
             farre
             did
             possesse
             ,
             whome
             they
             called
             Navatalcas
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             a
             more
             civill
             and
             politike
             Nation
             ;
             this
             word
             signifies
             a
             people
             that
             speakes
             well
             ,
             in
             re●pect
             of
             other
             barbarous
             nations
             without
             reason
             .
             These
             s●cond
             peoplers
             Navatalcas
             ,
             came
             from
             other
             ●arre
             countries
             ,
             which
             lie
             toward
             the
             north
             ,
             where
             now
             they
             have
             discovered
             a
             kingdome
             they
             call
             New
             Mexico
             .
          
           
           
             There
             are
             two
             provinces
             in
             this
             countrey
             ,
             the
             one
             called
             AZtlan
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             a
             place
             of
             Herons
             :
             the
             other
             Tuculhuacan
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             land
             of
             such
             ,
             whose
             grandfathers
             were
             divine
             .
             The
             Inhabitants
             of
             these
             provinces
             have
             their
             houses
             ,
             their
             lands
             tilled
             ,
             gods
             ,
             customes
             ,
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             with
             like
             order
             and
             governement
             to
             the
             Navatalcas
             ,
             and
             are
             divided
             into
             seaven
             Tribes
             or
             Nations
             :
             and
             for
             that
             they
             have
             a
             custome
             in
             this
             province
             ,
             that
             every
             one
             of
             these
             linages
             hath
             his
             place
             and
             private
             territory
             .
             The
             Navatalcas
             paint
             their
             beginning
             and
             first
             territory
             in
             figure
             of
             a
             cave
             ,
             and
             say
             that
             they
             came
             forth
             of
             seaven
             caves
             to
             come
             and
             people
             the
             land
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             whereof
             they
             make
             mention
             in
             their
             Historie
             ,
             where
             they
             paint
             seaven
             caves
             and
             men
             comming
             forth
             of
             them
             .
             By
             the
             supputation
             of
             their
             bookes
             ,
             it
             is
             above
             eight
             hundred
             yeeres
             since
             these
             Navatalcas
             came
             foorth
             of
             their
             country
             ,
             reducing
             which
             to
             our
             accompt
             ,
             was
             about
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lord
             720.
             when
             they
             left
             their
             country
             to
             come
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             they
             stayed
             foure
             score
             yeares
             vpon
             the
             way
             ;
             and
             the
             cause
             of
             this
             their
             long
             stay
             in
             their
             voyage
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             their
             gods
             (
             which
             without
             doubt
             were
             divells
             ,
             and
             spake
             visibly
             vnto
             them
             )
             had
             perswaded
             them
             to
             seeke
             new
             lands
             that
             had
             certaine
             signes
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             came
             discovering
             the
             whole
             land
             ,
             to
             search
             for
             these
             tokens
             which
             their
             Idolls
             had
             given
             them
             ;
             and
             in
             places
             where
             they
             found
             any
             good
             dwellings
             ,
             they
             peopled
             it
             ,
             and
             laboured
             the
             land
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             discovered
             better
             countries
             ,
             they
             left
             those
             which
             they
             had
             first
             peopled
             ;
             l●aving
             still
             some
             ,
             especially
             the
             aged
             ,
             sicke
             folkes
             ,
             and
             the
             weary
             ;
             yea
             they
             did
             plant
             and
             build
             there
             ,
             whereof
             we
             see
             the
             remainders
             at
             this
             day
             .
             In
             the
             way
             where
             they
             passed
             ,
             they
             spent
             fourescore
             yeares
             in
             this
             manner
             of
             
             leisurely
             travell
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             might
             have
             done
             in
             a
             moneth
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             they
             entred
             the
             land
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             nine
             hundred
             and
             two
             ,
             after
             our
             computation
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             the
             six
             Linages
             of
             Navatlacas
             peopled
             the
             land
             of
             
               Mexico
               .
               CHAP.
               3.
            
             
          
           
             THese
             seaven
             Linages
             I
             have
             spoken
             of
             ,
             came
             not
             forth
             all
             together
             :
             the
             first
             were
             the
             Suchimilcos
             ,
             which
             signifie
             a
             Nation
             of
             the
             seedes
             of
             flowers
             .
             Those
             peopled
             the
             bankes
             of
             the
             great
             lake
             of
             Mexico
             towards
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             did
             build
             a
             cittie
             of
             their
             name
             ,
             and
             many
             villages
             .
             Long
             time
             after
             came
             they
             of
             the
             second
             linage
             called
             Chalcas
             ,
             which
             signifies
             people
             of
             mouthes
             ,
             who
             also
             built
             a
             cittie
             of
             their
             name
             ,
             dividing
             their
             limmits
             and
             territories
             with
             the
             Suchimilcos
             .
             The
             third
             were
             the
             Tepanecans
             ,
             which
             signifies
             people
             of
             the
             bridge
             :
             they
             did
             inhabite
             vpon
             the
             banke
             of
             the
             lake
             towards
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             they
             increased
             so
             ,
             as
             they
             called
             the
             chiefe
             and
             Metropolitane
             of
             their
             Province
             ,
             AzcapuZalco
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             an
             Ants
             nest
             ,
             and
             they
             continued
             long
             time
             mighty
             .
             After
             them
             came
             those
             that
             peopled
             Tescuco
             ,
             which
             be
             those
             of
             Culhua
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             crooked
             people
             :
             for
             that
             in
             their
             Countrey
             there
             was
             a
             mountaine
             much
             bending
             .
             And
             in
             this
             sort
             this
             lake
             was
             invironed
             with
             these
             foure
             Nations
             ,
             these
             inhabiting
             on
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             the
             Tepanecas
             on
             the
             North.
             These
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             were
             held
             for
             great
             Courtiers
             ,
             for
             their
             tongue
             and
             pronountiation
             is
             very
             sweete
             and
             pleasant
             .
             Then
             arrived
             the
             Tlalluicans
             ,
             which
             signifies
             men
             of
             the
             Sierre
             or
             mountaine
             .
             Those
             were
             the
             most
             rude
             and
             grosse
             of
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             who
             finding
             all
             the
             
             plaines
             about
             the
             lake
             possessed
             even
             vnto
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             they
             passed
             to
             the
             other
             side
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             where
             they
             found
             a
             very
             fertile
             ,
             spatious
             &
             warme
             countrey
             ,
             where
             they
             built
             many
             great
             villages
             ,
             calling
             the
             Metropolitane
             of
             their
             province
             Quahunachua
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             a
             place
             that
             sounds
             the
             voice
             of
             an
             Egle
             ,
             which
             our
             common
             people
             call
             by
             corruption
             ,
             Quernavaca
             ,
             and
             at
             this
             day
             they
             call
             this
             province
             ,
             the
             Marquisate
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             sixt
             generation
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             Tlascaltecans
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             men
             of
             bread
             ,
             passed
             the
             mountaine
             towards
             the
             east
             ,
             crossing
             all
             the
             Sierre
             ,
             or
             mountaine
             of
             Menade
             ,
             where
             that
             famous
             Vulcan
             is
             betwixt
             Mexico
             and
             the
             citty
             of
             Angells
             ,
             where
             they
             did
             finde
             a
             good
             country
             ,
             making
             many
             buildings
             .
             They
             built
             many
             townes
             and
             citties
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Metropolitane
             was
             called
             by
             their
             name
             Tlascala
             .
             This
             is
             the
             nation
             which
             favoured
             the
             Spaniards
             at
             their
             entrie
             ,
             by
             whos●
             help
             they
             did
             winne
             this
             country
             ,
             and
             therefore
             to
             this
             day
             they
             pay
             no
             tribute
             ,
             but
             enioy
             a
             generall
             exemption
             .
             When
             all
             these
             Nations
             peopled
             these
             countries
             ,
             the
             Chinchimecans
             being
             the
             antient
             inhabitants
             ,
             made
             no
             resistance
             ,
             but
             fledde
             ,
             and
             as
             people
             amazed
             ,
             they
             hid
             themselves
             in
             the
             most
             obscure
             of
             the
             rockes
             .
             But
             those
             that
             inhabited
             on
             th'
             other
             side
             of
             the
             mountaine
             where
             the
             Tlascaltecans
             had
             planted
             themselves
             ,
             did
             not
             suffer
             them
             in
             quiet
             ,
             as
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Chichimecans
             had
             done
             ,
             but
             they
             put
             themselves
             in
             def●nce
             to
             preserve
             their
             country
             ,
             and
             being
             giants
             as
             the
             Histories
             report
             ,
             they
             sought
             to
             expell
             the
             last
             commers
             ,
             but
             they
             were
             vanquisht
             by
             the
             policy
             of
             the
             Tlascaltecans
             ,
             who
             counterfetting
             a
             peace
             with
             them
             ,
             they
             invited
             them
             to
             a
             great
             banquet
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             were
             busiest
             in
             their
             drunkennes
             ,
             there
             were
             some
             laide
             in
             ambush
             ,
             
             who
             secretly
             stole
             away
             their
             weapons
             ,
             which
             were
             great
             clubbes
             ,
             targets
             ,
             swords
             of
             wood
             ,
             and
             other
             suc●
             armes
             .
             Then
             did
             they
             sodainely
             set
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             Chichimecas
             seeking
             to
             defend
             themselves
             ,
             they
             did
             want
             their
             armes
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             fled
             to
             the
             mountaines
             and
             forrests
             adioyning
             ,
             where
             they
             pulled
             downe
             trees
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             beene
             stalkes
             of
             lettices
             .
             But
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             the
             Tluscaltecans
             being
             armed
             ,
             and
             marching
             in
             order
             ,
             they
             defeated
             all
             the
             giants
             ,
             not
             leaving
             one
             alive
             .
             We
             must
             not
             holde
             this
             of
             the
             giants
             to
             be
             strange
             ,
             or
             a
             fable
             ;
             for
             at
             this
             day
             we
             finde
             dead
             mens
             bones
             of
             an
             incredible
             bignes
             .
          
           
             When
             I
             was
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lorde
             ,
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             eighty
             sixe
             ,
             they
             found
             one
             of
             those
             giants
             buried
             in
             one
             of
             our
             farmes
             ,
             which
             we
             call
             
               Iesus
               du
               Mont
            
             ,
             of
             whom
             they
             brought
             a
             tooth
             to
             be
             seene
             ,
             which
             (
             without
             augmenting
             )
             was
             as
             big
             as
             the
             fist
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             this
             ,
             all
             the
             rest
             was
             proportionable
             ,
             which
             I
             saw
             and
             admired
             at
             his
             deformed
             greatnes
             .
             The
             Tlascaltecans
             by
             this
             victory
             remained
             peaceable
             ,
             and
             so
             did
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             linages
             .
             These
             six
             linages
             did
             alwayes
             entertaine
             amitie
             together
             ,
             marrying
             their
             children
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             and
             dividing
             their
             limites
             quietly
             :
             then
             they
             studied
             with
             an
             emulation
             to
             encrease
             and
             beautifie
             their
             common-weale
             .
             The
             barbarous
             Chichimecans
             ,
             seeing
             what
             passed
             ,
             beganne
             to
             vse
             some
             governement
             ,
             and
             to
             apparrell
             themselves
             ,
             being
             ash●med
             of
             what
             had
             passed
             :
             for
             till
             then
             they
             had
             no
             shame
             .
             And
             having
             abandoned
             feare
             by
             their
             communication
             with
             these
             other
             people
             ,
             they
             beganne
             to
             learne
             many
             things
             of
             them
             ,
             building
             small
             cottages
             ,
             having
             some
             pollicie
             and
             governement
             .
             They
             did
             also
             choose
             Lordes
             ,
             whom
             they
             did
             acknowledge
             for
             their
             
             superiours
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             they
             did
             in
             a
             manner
             quite
             abandon
             this
             brutish
             life
             ,
             yet
             did
             they
             alwayes
             continue
             in
             the
             Mountaines
             divided
             from
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             Notwithstanding
             I
             hold
             it
             for
             certaine
             ,
             that
             this
             feare
             hath
             growne
             from
             other
             Nations
             and
             Provinces
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             who
             at
             the
             first
             were
             savage
             men
             ,
             who
             living
             onely
             by
             hunting
             ,
             piercing
             the
             rockie
             and
             rough
             countries
             ,
             discovering
             a
             new
             world
             ,
             the
             inhabitants
             whereof
             were
             almost
             like
             savage
             beasts
             ,
             without
             coverings
             or
             houses
             ,
             without
             tilled
             landes
             ,
             without
             cattell
             ,
             without
             King
             ,
             Law
             ,
             God
             ,
             or
             Reason
             .
             Since
             ,
             others
             seeking
             better
             and
             new
             lands
             ,
             inhabited
             this
             fertile
             Countrey
             ,
             planting
             pollitike
             order
             ,
             and
             a
             kinde
             of
             common-weale
             ,
             although
             it
             were
             very
             barbarous
             .
             After
             the
             same
             men
             ,
             or
             other
             Nations
             ,
             that
             had
             more
             vnderstanding
             then
             the
             rest
             ,
             laboured
             to
             subdue
             and
             oppresse
             the
             lesse
             mighty
             ,
             establishing
             Realmes
             and
             great
             Empires
             .
             So
             it
             happened
             in
             Mexico
             ,
             at
             Peru
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             partes
             where
             they
             finde
             Citties
             and
             Common-weales
             planted
             among
             these
             Barbarians
             .
             That
             which
             confirmes
             me
             in
             my
             opinion
             ,
             (
             whereof
             I
             have
             amply
             discoursed
             in
             the
             first
             booke
             ,
             )
             that
             the
             first
             inhabitants
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             came
             by
             land
             ,
             and
             so
             by
             consequence
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             continent
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             ioynes
             with
             that
             of
             
               Asia
               ,
               Europe
            
             ,
             and
             Afsrike
             ,
             and
             the
             new
             world
             with
             the
             old
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             not
             yet
             discovered
             any
             countrey
             that
             toucheth
             and
             ioynes
             with
             the
             other
             world
             ;
             or
             if
             there
             be
             any
             sea
             betwixt
             the
             two
             ,
             it
             is
             so
             narrow
             ,
             that
             wilde
             beasts
             may
             easily
             swim
             over
             ,
             and
             men
             in
             small
             boates
             .
             But
             leaving
             this
             Philosophie
             ,
             let
             vs
             returne
             to
             our
             history
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             Mexicaines
             departure
             ,
             of
             their
             iourney
             and
             peopling
             the
             Province
             of
             Mechovacan
             .
             CHA●
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             THree
             hundred
             and
             two
             yeares
             after
             the
             former
             two
             linages
             had
             left
             their
             Country
             ,
             to
             inhabite
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             the
             Country
             being
             now
             well
             peopled
             ,
             and
             reduced
             to
             some
             forme
             of
             government
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             seaventh
             cave
             or
             line
             arrived
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             Mexicaine
             Nation
             ,
             the
             which
             like
             vnto
             the
             rest
             ,
             left
             the
             Province
             of
             AZtlan
             ,
             and
             Teuculhuacan
             ,
             a
             pollitike
             ,
             courtlike
             ,
             and
             warlike
             Nation
             .
             They
             did
             worship
             the
             idoll
             VitZliputZli
             ,
             whereof
             ample
             mention
             hath
             beene
             made
             ,
             and
             the
             divell
             that
             was
             in
             this
             idoll
             spake
             ,
             and
             governed
             this
             Nation
             easily
             .
             This
             idoll
             commanded
             them
             to
             leave
             their
             Country
             ,
             promising
             to
             make
             them
             Princes
             and
             Lords
             over
             all
             the
             Provinces
             which
             the
             other
             six
             Nations
             did
             possesse
             ,
             that
             hee
             would
             give
             them
             a
             land
             abounding
             with
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             pretious
             stones
             ,
             feathers
             ,
             and
             rich
             mantells
             :
             wherevpon
             they
             went
             forth
             ,
             carrying
             their
             idoll
             with
             them
             in
             a
             coffer
             of
             reedes
             ,
             supported
             by
             foure
             of
             their
             principall
             priests
             ,
             with
             whom
             he
             did
             talke
             and
             reveale
             vnto
             them
             in
             secret
             ,
             the
             successe
             of
             their
             way
             and
             voyage
             ,
             advising
             them
             of
             what
             should
             happen
             .
             He
             likewise
             gave
             them
             lawes
             ,
             and
             taught
             them
             the
             customes
             ,
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             sacrifices
             they
             should
             observe
             .
             They
             did
             not
             advance
             nor
             moove
             without
             commandement
             from
             this
             idoll
             .
             He
             gave
             them
             notice
             when
             to
             march
             ,
             and
             when
             to
             stay
             in
             any
             place
             ,
             wherein
             they
             wholy
             obeyed
             him
             .
             The
             first
             thing
             they
             did
             wheresoever
             they
             came
             ,
             was
             to
             build
             a
             house
             or
             tabernacle
             for
             their
             false
             god
             ,
             which
             they
             set
             alwaies
             in
             the
             
             middest
             of
             their
             Campe
             ,
             and
             there
             placed
             the
             Arke
             vppon
             an
             altare
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             manner
             as
             they
             have
             vsed
             in
             the
             holy
             Christian
             Church
             .
             This
             done
             ,
             they
             sowed
             their
             land
             for
             bread
             and
             pulses
             ,
             which
             they
             vsed
             :
             and
             they
             were
             so
             addicted
             to
             the
             obedience
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             that
             if
             he
             commanded
             them
             to
             gather
             ,
             they
             gathered
             ,
             but
             if
             he
             commanded
             them
             to
             raise
             their
             campe
             ,
             all
             was
             left
             there
             for
             the
             nourishment
             of
             the
             aged
             ,
             sicke
             ,
             and
             wearie
             ,
             which
             they
             lest
             purposely
             from
             place
             to
             place
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             people
             it
             ,
             pretending
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             land
             should
             remaine
             inhabited
             by
             their
             Nation
             .
             This
             going
             forth
             and
             peregrination
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             will
             happily
             seeme
             like
             to
             that
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             way
             which
             the
             children
             of
             Israell
             made
             ,
             seeing
             that
             they
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             those
             ,
             were
             warned
             to
             go
             forth
             ,
             and
             to
             seeke
             the
             land
             of
             promise
             ,
             and
             both
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             carried
             their
             god
             for
             their
             guide
             ,
             consulted
             with
             the
             arke
             ,
             and
             made
             him
             a
             tabernacle
             ,
             and
             he
             advised
             them
             ,
             giving
             them
             lawes
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             and
             both
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             spake
             many
             yeares
             in
             their
             voyage
             to
             their
             promised
             land
             ,
             where
             we
             observe
             the
             resemblance
             of
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             as
             thehistories
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             do
             report
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             scripture
             testifie
             of
             the
             Israelites
             .
             And
             without
             doubt
             it
             is
             a
             true
             thing
             ,
             that
             the
             Divell
             the
             prince
             of
             pride
             ,
             hath
             laboured
             by
             the
             superstitions
             of
             this
             Nation
             ,
             to
             counterfaite
             &
             imitate
             that
             which
             the
             most
             high
             God
             did
             with
             this
             Nation
             :
             for
             as
             is
             said
             before
             ,
             Satan
             hath
             a
             strange
             desire
             to
             compare
             and
             make
             himselfe
             equal
             with
             God
             :
             so
             as
             this
             mortall
             enemy
             hath
             pretended
             falsely
             to
             vsurpe
             what
             communication
             and
             familiaritie
             he
             hath
             pleased
             with
             men
             .
             Was
             there
             ever
             divell
             found
             so
             familiarly
             conversant
             with
             men
             ,
             as
             this
             divell
             VitzliputZli
             ?
             We
             may
             wel
             iudge
             
             what
             he
             was
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             was
             never
             seene
             nor
             heard
             speake
             of
             customes
             more
             superstitious
             ,
             nor
             sacrifices
             more
             cruel
             and
             inhumane
             ,
             then
             those
             which
             he
             taught
             them
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             they
             were
             invented
             by
             the
             enemy
             of
             mankinde
             .
             The
             chiefe
             and
             Captaine
             whome
             they
             followed
             ,
             was
             called
             Mexi
             ,
             whence
             came
             the
             name
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             Mexicaine
             Nation
             .
             This
             people
             marching
             thus
             at
             leisure
             ,
             as
             the
             other
             six
             Nations
             had
             done
             ,
             peopling
             and
             tilling
             the
             land
             in
             divers
             partes
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             yet
             some
             shewes
             &
             ruines
             :
             &
             after
             they
             had
             endured
             many
             travells
             and
             dangers
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             they
             came
             to
             the
             Province
             of
             Mechovacan
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             a
             land
             of
             fish
             ,
             for
             there
             is
             great
             abundance
             in
             goodly
             great
             lakes
             ,
             where
             contenting
             themselves
             with
             the
             scituation
             and
             temperature
             of
             the
             ground
             ,
             they
             resolved
             to
             stay
             there
             .
             Yet
             having
             consulted
             with
             their
             idoll
             vpon
             this
             point
             ,
             and
             finding
             him
             vnwilling
             ,
             they
             demanded
             license
             to
             leave
             some
             of
             their
             men
             to
             people
             so
             good
             a
             land
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             granted
             ,
             teaching
             them
             the
             meanes
             how
             to
             do
             it
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             men
             and
             women
             should
             be
             entred
             into
             a
             goodly
             lake
             called
             Pascuaro
             ,
             to
             bathe
             themselves
             ,
             those
             which
             remained
             on
             land
             ,
             should
             steale
             away
             all
             their
             clothes
             ,
             and
             then
             secretly
             raise
             their
             campe
             ,
             and
             depart
             without
             any
             bruite
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             effected
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             which
             dreamt
             not
             of
             this
             deceit
             ,
             (
             for
             the
             pleasure
             they
             tooke
             in
             bathing
             ,
             )
             comming
             forth
             and
             finding
             themselves
             spoiled
             of
             their
             garments
             ,
             and
             thus
             mocked
             and
             left
             by
             their
             companions
             ,
             they
             remained
             discontented
             and
             vexed
             therewith
             :
             so
             as
             to
             make
             shew
             of
             the
             hatred
             they
             had
             conceived
             against
             them
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             they
             changed
             their
             maner
             of
             life
             and
             their
             language
             .
             At
             the
             least
             it
             is
             most
             certaine
             ,
             that
             the
             Me●hovacans
             have
             been
             
             alwaies
             enemies
             to
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             came
             to
             congratulate
             the
             Marquise
             
               De
               Valle
            
             ,
             after
             his
             victory
             obtained
             when
             he
             had
             conquered
             Mexico
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             that
             which
             happened
             in
             
               Malinalco
               ,
               Tula
            
             ,
             and
             in
             Chapultepec
             .
             CHAP.
             5.
             
          
           
             FRom
             Mechovacan
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             are
             above
             fifty
             leagues
             ,
             and
             vpon
             the
             way
             is
             Malinalco
             ,
             where
             it
             happened
             ,
             that
             complaining
             to
             their
             idoll
             of
             a
             woman
             that
             was
             a
             notable
             witch
             ,
             which
             came
             in
             their
             company
             carrying
             the
             name
             of
             their
             sister
             to
             their
             god
             ,
             for
             that
             with
             her
             wicked
             artes
             she
             did
             them
             much
             harme
             ,
             pretending
             by
             certaine
             meanes
             to
             be
             worshipped
             of
             them
             as
             their
             goddesse
             :
             the
             idoll
             spake
             in
             a
             dreame
             to
             one
             of
             those
             old
             men
             that
             carried
             the
             arke
             ,
             commaunding
             him
             to
             comfort
             the
             people
             ,
             making
             them
             new
             and
             great
             promises
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             leave
             this
             his
             sister
             with
             her
             family
             ,
             being
             cruell
             and
             bad
             ,
             raising
             their
             campe
             at
             mid-night
             in
             great
             silence
             ,
             leaving
             no
             shew
             what
             way
             they
             passed
             .
             So
             they
             did
             ,
             and
             the
             witch
             remaining
             alone
             with
             her
             family
             ,
             in
             this
             sort
             peopled
             a
             towne
             which
             they
             call
             Malinalco
             ,
             the
             inhabitants
             whereof
             ,
             are
             held
             for
             great
             sorcerers
             ,
             being
             issued
             from
             such
             a
             mother
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             for
             that
             they
             were
             greatly
             diminished
             by
             these
             divisions
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             number
             of
             sicke
             &
             wearied
             persons
             ,
             which
             they
             had
             left
             behind
             ,
             meant
             to
             repaire
             themselves
             ,
             and
             to
             stay
             in
             a
             place
             called
             Tula
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             place
             of
             reedes
             .
             There
             their
             idoll
             commanded
             them
             to
             stoppe
             a
             great
             river
             ,
             that
             it
             might
             cover
             a
             great
             plaine
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             meanes
             he
             taught
             them
             ,
             they
             did
             inviron
             a
             little
             hill
             called
             Coatepec
             ,
             making
             a
             great
             lake
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             did
             plant
             ●ound
             about
             with
             
             willows
             ,
             elmes
             ,
             sapines
             and
             other
             trees
             .
             There
             beganne
             to
             breede
             much
             fish
             ,
             and
             many
             birdes
             came
             thither
             :
             so
             as
             it
             became
             a
             very
             pleasant
             place
             .
             The
             scituation
             of
             this
             place
             ,
             seeming
             pleasant
             vnto
             them
             ,
             and
             being
             wearied
             with
             travell
             ,
             many
             talked
             of
             peopling
             there
             ,
             and
             to
             passe
             no
             farther
             :
             wherewith
             the
             divell
             was
             much
             displeased
             ,
             threatning
             the
             priests
             with
             death
             ,
             commanding
             them
             to
             returne
             the
             river
             to
             hir
             course
             ,
             saying
             that
             he
             would
             that
             night
             chastise
             those
             which
             had
             beene
             disobedient
             as
             they
             had
             deserved
             .
             And
             as
             to
             do
             ill
             is
             proper
             to
             the
             Divell
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             divine
             Iustice
             doth
             often
             suffer
             such
             to
             be
             delivered
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             such
             a
             tormentor
             ,
             that
             choose
             him
             for
             their
             god
             ;
             It
             chanced
             that
             about
             mid-night
             they
             heard
             a
             great
             noise
             in
             one
             part
             of
             the
             campe
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             morning
             going
             thither
             ,
             they
             found
             those
             dead
             that
             had
             talked
             of
             staying
             there
             .
             The
             maner
             of
             their
             death
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             their
             stomackes
             were
             opened
             ,
             and
             their
             hearts
             pulled
             out
             .
             And
             by
             that
             meanes
             ,
             this
             good
             god
             taught
             these
             poore
             miserable
             creatures
             ,
             the
             kindes
             of
             sacrifices
             that
             pleased
             him
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             in
             opening
             the
             stomacke
             ,
             to
             pull
             out
             the
             heart
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             since
             practised
             in
             their
             horrible
             sacrifices
             .
             Seeing
             this
             punishment
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             plaine
             was
             dried
             ,
             the
             lake
             being
             emptied
             ,
             they
             asked
             counsell
             of
             their
             god
             what
             to
             doe
             ,
             who
             commanded
             them
             to
             passe
             on
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             did
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             vntill
             they
             came
             to
             Chapultepec
             ,
             a
             league
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             famous
             for
             the
             pleasantnes
             thereof
             .
             They
             did
             fortisie
             themselves
             in
             these
             mountaines
             ,
             fearing
             the
             Nations
             which
             inhabited
             that
             Country
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             opposite
             vnto
             them
             ,
             especially
             for
             that
             one
             named
             Copill
             ,
             sonne
             to
             this
             sorceresse
             ,
             left
             in
             Malinalco
             ,
             had
             blamed
             and
             spoken
             ill
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             :
             for
             this
             Copill
             by
             the
             commandement
             
             of
             his
             mother
             ,
             awhile
             after
             followed
             the
             Mexicaines
             course
             ,
             labouring
             to
             incense
             the
             Tapanecas
             ,
             and
             other
             neighbours
             against
             them
             ,
             even
             vnto
             the
             Chalcas
             :
             so
             as
             they
             came
             with
             a
             strong
             army
             to
             destroy
             the
             
               Mexicaines
               .
               Copill
            
             in
             the
             meane
             space
             stoode
             vpon
             a
             little
             hill
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             a
             lake
             called
             Acopilco
             ,
             attending
             the
             destruction
             of
             his
             enemies
             ,
             and
             they
             by
             the
             advise
             of
             their
             idoll
             ,
             went
             against
             him
             ,
             tooke
             him
             suddenly
             ,
             and
             slew
             him
             ,
             carrying
             his
             heart
             to
             their
             god
             ,
             who
             commanded
             them
             to
             cast
             it
             into
             the
             lake
             ,
             faining
             that
             thereof
             did
             grow
             a
             plant
             called
             Tunal
             ,
             where
             since
             Mexico
             was
             built
             .
             They
             came
             to
             fight
             with
             the
             Chalcas
             ,
             and
             other
             Nations
             ,
             having
             chosen
             for
             their
             Captaine
             ,
             a
             valiant
             man
             called
             Vitzilonilti
             ,
             who
             in
             an
             incounter
             ,
             was
             taken
             and
             slaine
             by
             the
             enemies
             .
             But
             for
             all
             this
             ,
             they
             were
             not
             discouraged
             ,
             but
             fought
             valiantly
             ;
             and
             in
             dispight
             of
             their
             enemies
             they
             brake
             the
             squadrons
             ,
             and
             carrying
             their
             aged
             ,
             their
             women
             ,
             and
             yong
             children
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             their
             battaile
             ,
             they
             passed
             on
             to
             Atlacuyavaya
             ,
             a
             towne
             of
             the
             Culhuans
             ,
             whom
             they
             found
             solemnising
             of
             a
             feast
             ,
             in
             which
             place
             they
             fortified
             .
             The
             Chalcas
             nor
             the
             other
             Nations
             did
             not
             follow
             them
             ,
             but
             grieved
             to
             be
             defeated
             by
             so
             small
             a
             number
             of
             men
             ;
             they
             being
             in
             so
             great
             multitudes
             retyred
             to
             their
             townes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Warres
             the
             Mexicaines
             had
             against
             them
             of
             Culhuacan
             .
             CHAP.
             6.
             
          
           
             THe
             Mexicaines
             ,
             by
             the
             advise
             of
             their
             idoll
             ,
             sent
             their
             messengers
             to
             the
             Lord
             o●
             Culhuacan
             ,
             to
             demand
             a
             place
             to
             dwell
             in
             ,
             who
             after
             he
             had
             imparted
             it
             to
             his
             people
             ,
             granted
             them
             the
             place
             of
             Ticaapan
             ,
             
             which
             signifies
             white
             waters
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             should
             all
             perish
             there
             ,
             being
             full
             of
             vipers
             ,
             snakes
             ,
             and
             other
             venomous
             beasts
             which
             bred
             in
             a
             hill
             neere
             adioyning
             .
             But
             being
             perswaded
             and
             taught
             by
             their
             divell
             ,
             they
             accepted
             willingly
             what
             was
             offered
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             divelish
             art
             ,
             tamed
             these
             beastes
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             did
             them
             no
             harme
             ;
             yea
             ,
             they
             vsed
             them
             as
             meat
             ,
             eating
             them
             with
             delight
             and
             appetite
             .
             The
             which
             the
             Lord
             of
             Culhuacan
             seeing
             ,
             &
             that
             they
             had
             tilled
             and
             sowed
             the
             land
             ,
             he
             resolved
             to
             receive
             them
             into
             the
             Cittie
             ,
             and
             to
             contract
             amity
             with
             them
             .
             But
             the
             god
             whom
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             worship
             ,
             (
             as
             he
             is
             accustomed
             to
             do
             no
             good
             ,
             but
             ill
             ,
             )
             said
             vnto
             his
             priest●
             ,
             that
             this
             was
             not
             the
             place
             where
             he
             would
             have
             them
             stay
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             must
             go
             forth
             making
             warres
             .
             Therefore
             they
             must
             seeke
             forth
             a
             woman
             ,
             and
             name
             her
             the
             goddesse
             of
             Discord
             .
             Wherevpon
             they
             resolved
             to
             send
             to
             the
             King
             of
             Culhuacan
             ,
             to
             demand
             his
             daughter
             to
             be
             Queene
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             and
             mother
             to
             their
             god
             ,
             who
             received
             this
             Ambassage
             willingly
             ,
             sending
             his
             daughter
             presently
             gorgeously
             attyred
             and
             well
             accompanied
             .
             The
             same
             night
             she
             arrived
             ,
             by
             order
             of
             the
             murtherer
             whome
             they
             worshipped
             ,
             they
             killed
             her
             cruelly
             ,
             and
             having
             fl●a●d
             her
             artificially
             as
             they
             could
             do
             ,
             they
             did
             clothe
             a
             yong
             man
             with
             her
             skinne
             ,
             and
             therevpon
             her
             apparrell
             ,
             placing
             him
             neere
             their
             idoll
             ,
             dedicating
             him
             for●
             goddesse
             and
             the
             mother
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             and
             ever
             after
             did
             worship
             it
             ,
             making
             an
             idoll
             which
             they
             called
             To●cy
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             our
             grandmother
             .
             Not
             content
             with
             this
             crueltie
             ,
             they
             did
             maliciously
             invite
             the
             King
             of
             Culhuacan
             ,
             the
             father
             of
             the
             yong
             maid
             ,
             to
             come
             and
             worshippe
             his
             daughter
             ,
             who
             was
             now
             consecrated
             ●
             goddesse
             ,
             who
             comming
             with
             great
             presents
             ,
             and
             well
             
             accompanied
             with
             his
             people
             ,
             he
             was
             led
             into
             a
             very
             darke
             chappell
             where
             their
             idoll
             was
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             offer
             sacrifice
             to
             his
             daughter
             that
             was
             in
             that
             place
             .
             But
             it
             chanced
             that
             the
             incense
             that
             was
             vpon
             the
             harth
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             custome
             ,
             kindled
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             hee
             might
             discerne
             his
             daughters
             haire
             ,
             and
             having
             by
             this
             meanes
             discovered
             the
             crueltie
             and
             deceit
             ,
             hee
             went
             forth
             crying
             alowde
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             his
             men
             he
             fell
             vpon
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             forcing
             them
             to
             retyre
             to
             the
             lake
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             were
             almost
             drowned
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             defended
             themselves
             ,
             casting
             certaine
             little
             darts
             ,
             which
             they
             vsed
             in
             the
             warres
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             much
             galled
             their
             ennemies
             .
             But
             in
             the
             end
             they
             got
             land
             ,
             and
             leaving
             that
             place
             ,
             they
             coasted
             along
             the
             lake
             ,
             very
             weary
             and
             wet
             ;
             the
             women
             and
             little
             children
             crying
             and
             making
             great
             exclamations
             against
             them
             and
             their
             god
             that
             had
             brought
             them
             into
             this
             distresse
             .
             They
             were
             inforced
             to
             passe
             a
             river
             that
             could
             not
             be
             waded
             through
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             advised
             to
             make
             small
             boates
             of
             their
             targets
             and
             of
             reedes
             ,
             wherein
             they
             passed
             .
             Then
             afterwardes
             ,
             having
             left
             Culhuacan
             ,
             they
             arived
             at
             Iztacalco
             ,
             and
             finally
             to
             the
             place
             where
             the
             hermitage
             of
             Saint
             Anthonie
             now
             is
             ,
             at
             the
             entry
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             to
             that
             quarter
             which
             they
             now
             call
             S.
             Paul.
             During
             which
             time
             their
             idoll
             did
             comfort
             them
             in
             their
             travells
             and
             incoraged
             them
             ,
             promising
             great
             matters
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Foundation
             of
             Mexico
             .
             CHAP.
             7.
             
          
           
             THe
             time
             being
             now
             come
             ,
             that
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             should
             accomplish
             his
             promise
             made
             to
             his
             people
             ,
             who
             could
             no
             longer
             suffer
             so
             many
             turnings
             ,
             travells
             ,
             
             and
             dangers
             ,
             it
             happened
             that
             some
             old
             priests
             or
             sorcerers
             ,
             being
             entred
             into
             a
             place
             full
             of
             water-lillies
             ,
             they
             met
             with
             a
             very
             faire
             and
             cleere
             current
             of
             water
             ,
             which
             seemed
             to
             be
             silver
             ,
             and
             looking
             about
             ,
             they
             found
             the
             trees
             ,
             medowes
             ,
             fish
             ,
             and
             all
             that
             they
             beheld
             to
             be
             very
             white
             :
             wondring
             heereat
             ,
             they
             remembred
             a
             prophecie
             of
             their
             god
             ,
             whereby
             he
             had
             given
             them
             that
             for
             a
             token
             of
             their
             place
             of
             rest
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             them
             Lords
             of
             other
             Nations
             .
             Then
             weeping
             for
             ioy
             ,
             they
             returned
             to
             the
             people
             with
             these
             good
             newes
             .
             The
             night
             following
             ,
             VitzliputZli
             appeared
             in
             a
             dreame
             to
             an
             antient
             priest
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             seeke
             out
             a
             Tunal
             in
             the
             lake
             ,
             which
             grew
             out
             of
             a
             stone
             ,
             (
             which
             as
             he
             told
             them
             ,
             was
             the
             same
             place
             where
             by
             his
             commandement
             they
             had
             cast
             the
             heart
             of
             Copil
             ,
             sonne
             to
             the
             sorceresse
             their
             enemy
             ,
             )
             and
             vpon
             this
             Tunal
             they
             should
             see
             a
             goodly
             Eagle
             ,
             which
             fed
             on
             certaine
             small
             birdes
             .
             When
             they
             should
             see
             this
             ,
             they
             should
             beleeve
             it
             was
             the
             place
             where
             their
             Cittie
             should
             be
             built
             ,
             the
             which
             shuld
             surmountal
             others
             ,
             &
             be
             famous
             throughout
             the
             world
             .
             Morning
             being
             come
             ,
             the
             old
             man
             assembled
             the
             whole
             people
             ,
             from
             the
             greatest
             to
             the
             least
             ,
             making
             a
             long
             speach
             vnto
             them
             ,
             how
             much
             they
             were
             bound
             vnto
             their
             god
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             which
             (
             although
             vnworthy
             ,
             )
             hee
             had
             received
             that
             night
             ,
             concluding
             that
             all
             must
             seeke
             out
             that
             happie
             place
             which
             was
             promised
             them
             ;
             which
             bred
             such
             devotion
             and
             ioy
             in
             them
             all
             ,
             that
             presently
             they
             vndertooke
             the
             enterprise
             ,
             and
             dividing
             themselves
             into
             bandes
             ,
             they
             beganne
             to
             search
             ,
             following
             the
             sign●s
             of
             the
             revelation
             of
             the
             desired
             place
             .
             Amiddest
             the
             thickest
             of
             these
             water-lillies
             in
             the
             lake
             ,
             they
             met
             with
             the
             same
             course
             of
             water
             they
             had
             seene
             the
             day
             before
             ,
             
             but
             much
             differing
             ,
             being
             not
             white
             ,
             but
             red
             ,
             like
             blood
             ,
             the
             which
             divided
             it selfe
             into
             two
             streames
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             was
             of
             a
             very
             obscure
             azure
             ,
             the
             which
             bred
             admiration
             in
             them
             ,
             noting
             some
             great
             mistery
             as
             they
             said
             .
             After
             much
             search
             heere
             and
             there
             ,
             the
             Tunal
             appeared
             growing
             on
             a
             stone
             ,
             whereon
             was
             a
             royall
             Eagle
             ,
             with
             the
             wings
             displaied
             toward●s
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             receiving
             his
             heat
             .
             About
             this
             Eagle
             were
             many
             rich
             fethers
             ,
             white
             ,
             red
             ,
             yellow
             ,
             blew
             ,
             and
             greene
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             sort
             as
             they
             make
             their
             images
             ,
             which
             Eage
             held
             in
             his
             tallants
             a
             goodly
             birde
             .
             Those
             which
             sawe
             it
             and
             knew
             it
             to
             be
             the
             place
             fore-tolde
             by
             the
             Oracle
             ,
             fel
             on
             their
             knees
             ,
             doing
             great
             worship
             to
             the
             Eagle
             ,
             which
             bowed
             the
             head
             looking
             on
             every
             side●●hen
             was
             their
             great
             cries
             ,
             demonstrations
             ,
             and
             thankes
             vnto
             the
             Creator
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             great
             god
             Vitzliputzli
             ,
             who
             was
             there
             father
             ,
             and
             had
             alwaies
             told
             them
             truth
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             they
             called
             the
             cittie
             which
             they
             founded
             there
             ,
             Tenoxtiltan
             ,
             which
             signifies
             Tunal
             on
             a
             stone
             ,
             and
             to
             this
             day
             they
             carry
             in
             their
             armes
             ,
             an
             Eagle
             vpon
             a
             Tunal
             ,
             with
             a
             bird
             in
             his
             tallant
             ,
             and
             standing
             with
             the
             other
             vpon
             the
             Tunal
             .
             The
             day
             following
             ,
             by
             common
             consent
             they
             made
             an
             hermitage
             adioyning
             to
             the
             Tunal
             of
             the
             Eagle
             ,
             that
             the
             Arke
             of
             their
             god
             might
             rest
             there
             ,
             till
             they
             might
             have
             meanes
             to
             build
             him
             a
             sumptuous
             Temple
             :
             and
             so
             they
             made
             this
             hermitage
             of
             flagges
             &
             turfes
             covered
             with
             straw
             ;
             then
             having
             consulted
             with
             their
             god
             ,
             they
             resolved
             to
             buy
             of
             their
             neighbours
             ,
             stone
             ,
             timber
             ,
             lime
             ,
             in
             exchange
             of
             fish
             ,
             frogges
             ,
             and
             yong
             kids
             ,
             and
             for
             duckes
             ,
             water-hennes
             ,
             courlieus
             ,
             and
             divers
             other
             kindes
             of
             sea
             fowles
             .
             All
             which
             things
             they
             did
             fish
             and
             hunt
             for
             in
             this
             Lake
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             great
             aboundance
             .
             They
             went
             with
             
             these
             things
             to
             the
             markets
             of
             the
             Townes
             and
             Citties
             of
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             and
             of
             them
             of
             Tescuco
             their
             neighbours
             ,
             and
             with
             pollicie
             they
             gathered
             together
             by
             little
             and
             little
             ,
             what
             was
             necessary
             for
             the
             building
             of
             their
             Cittie
             :
             so
             as
             they
             built
             a
             better
             Chappell
             for
             their
             idoll
             of
             lime
             and
             stone
             ,
             and
             laboured
             to
             fill
             vp
             a
             great
             part
             of
             the
             lake
             with
             rubbish
             .
             This
             done
             ,
             the
             idoll
             spake
             one
             night
             to
             one
             of
             his
             priests
             in
             these
             tearmes
             ,
             
               Say
               vnto
               the
            
             Mexicaines
             ,
             
               that
               the
               Noblemen
               divide
               themselves
               everie
               one
               with
               their
               kinsfolkes
               and
               friends
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               divide
               themselves
               into
               foure
               principall
               quarters
               ,
               about
               the
               house
               which
               you
               have
               built
               for
               my
               rest
               ,
               and
               let
               every
               quarter
               build
               in
               his
               quarter
               at
               his
               pleasure
               .
            
             The
             which
             was
             put
             in
             execution
             :
             and
             those
             be
             the
             foure
             principall
             quarters
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             which
             are
             called
             at
             this
             day
             S.
             Iean
             ,
             S.
             Mary
             the
             round
             ,
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             and
             S.
             Sebastian
             .
             After
             this
             ,
             the
             Mexicaines
             being
             thus
             divided
             into
             these
             foure
             quarters
             ,
             their
             god
             commanded
             them
             to
             divide
             amongest
             them
             the
             gods
             he
             should
             name
             to
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             give
             notice
             to
             every
             quarter
             ,
             principal
             of
             the
             other
             foure
             particall
             quarters
             ,
             where
             their
             gods
             should
             be
             worshipped
             .
             So
             as
             vnder
             every
             one
             of
             these
             foure
             principall
             quart●rs
             ,
             there
             were
             many
             lesse
             comprehended
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             number
             of
             the
             idolls
             which
             their
             god
             commanded
             them
             to
             worship
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Calpultetco
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             god
             of
             the
             quarters
             .
             In
             this
             manner
             the
             Cittie
             of
             
               Mexico
               Tenoxtiltan
            
             was
             founded
             ,
             and
             grew
             great
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             sedition
             of
             those
             of
             Tlatelulco
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             first
             Kings
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             choose
             .
             
               CHAP.
               8.
            
             
          
           
             THis
             division
             being
             made
             as
             afore-said
             ,
             some
             olde
             men
             and
             Antients
             held
             opinion
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             division
             ,
             
             they
             had
             not
             respected
             them
             as
             they
             deserved
             :
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             they
             and
             their
             kinsfolke
             ,
             did
             mutine
             ,
             and
             went
             to
             seeke
             another
             residence
             :
             and
             as
             they
             went
             thorough
             the
             lake
             ,
             they
             found
             a
             small
             peece
             of
             ground
             or
             terrasse
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Tloteloli
             ,
             where
             they
             inhabited
             ,
             calling
             it
             Tlatellulco
             ,
             which
             signifies
             place
             of
             a
             terrasse
             .
             This
             was
             the
             third
             division
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             since
             they
             left
             their
             Country
             .
             That
             of
             Mechovacan
             being
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Malinalco
             the
             second
             .
             Those
             which
             seperated
             themselves
             and
             went
             to
             Tlatellulco
             ,
             were
             famous
             men
             ,
             but
             of
             bad
             disposition
             :
             and
             therefore
             they
             practised
             against
             the
             Mexicaines
             their
             neighbours
             ,
             all
             the
             ill
             neighbourhood
             they
             could
             .
             They
             had
             alwaies
             quarrells
             against
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             this
             day
             continues
             their
             hatred
             and
             olde
             leagues
             .
             They
             of
             Tenoxtiltan
             ,
             seeing
             them
             of
             Tlatellulco
             thus
             opposite
             vnto
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             multiplied
             ,
             feared
             that
             in
             time
             they
             might
             surmount
             them
             :
             heerevpon
             they
             assembled
             in
             counsell
             ,
             where
             they
             thought
             it
             good
             to
             choose
             a
             King
             ,
             whome
             they
             should
             obey
             ,
             and
             strike
             terror
             into
             their
             enemies
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             meanes
             they
             should
             bee
             more
             vnited
             and
             stronger
             among
             themselves
             ,
             and
             their
             enemies
             not
             presume
             too
             much
             against
             them
             .
             Being
             thus
             resolved
             to
             choose
             a
             King
             ,
             they
             tooke
             another
             advise
             very
             profitable
             and
             assured
             ,
             to
             choose
             none
             among
             themselves
             ,
             for
             the
             avoyding
             of
             diffentions
             ,
             and
             to
             gaine
             (
             by
             their
             new
             King
             )
             some
             other
             neighbour
             nations
             ,
             by
             whom
             they
             were
             invironed
             ,
             being
             destitute
             of
             all
             succours
             .
             All
             well
             considered
             ,
             both
             to
             pacifie
             the
             King
             of
             Culhuacan
             ,
             whom
             they
             had
             greatly
             offended
             ,
             having
             slaine
             and
             flead
             the
             daughter
             of
             his
             predecessor
             ,
             and
             done
             him
             so
             great
             a
             scorne
             ,
             as
             also
             to
             have
             a
             King
             of
             the
             Mexicaine
             blood
             ,
             of
             which
             generation
             there
             were
             many
             
             in
             Culhuacan
             ,
             which
             continued
             there
             since
             the
             time
             they
             lived
             in
             peace
             amongst
             them
             ;
             they
             resolved
             to
             choose
             for
             their
             King
             ,
             a
             yong
             man
             called
             Acamapixtli
             ,
             sonne
             to
             a
             great
             Mexicaine
             Prince
             ,
             and
             of
             a
             Ladie
             ,
             daughter
             to
             the
             King
             of
             Culhuacan
             .
             Presently
             they
             sent
             Ambassadors
             with
             a
             great
             present
             to
             demand
             this
             man
             ,
             who
             delivered
             their
             Ambassage
             in
             these
             tearmes
             ,
             
               Great
               Lord
               ,
               we
               your
               vassalls
               and
               servants
               ,
               placed
               and
               shut
               vp
               in
               the
               weedes
               and
               reedes
               of
               the
               Lake
               ,
               alone
               and
               abandoned
               of
               all
               the
               Nations
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               led
               onely
               and
               guided
               by
               our
               god
               to
               the
               place
               where
               we
               are
               ,
               which
               falles
               in
               the
               iurisdiction
               of
               your
               limits
               of
            
             Ascapusalco
             ,
             
               and
               of
            
             Tescuco
             .
             
               Although
               you
               have
               suffered
               vs
               to
               live
               and
               remaine
               there
               ,
               yet
               will
               we
               not
               ,
               neither
               is
               it
               reason
               to
               live
               without
               a
               head
               and
               lord
               to
               command
               ,
               correct
               ,
               and
               governe
               vs
               ,
               instructing
               vs
               in
               the
               course
               of
               our
               life
               ,
               and
               defending
               vs
               from
               our
               enemies
               :
               Therefore
               we
               come
               to
               you
               ,
               knowing
               that
               in
               your
               Court
               and
               house
               ,
               there
               are
               children
               of
               our
               generation
               ,
               linckt
               and
               alied
               with
               yours
               ,
               issued
               from
               our
               entrailes
               ,
               and
               yours
               ,
               of
               our
               blood
               and
               yours
               ,
               among
               ●he
               which
               we
               have
               knowledge
               of
               a
               grand-child
               of
               yours
               and
               ours
               ,
               called
            
             Acamapixtli
             .
             
               We
               beseech
               you
               therefore
               ,
               to
               give
               him
               vs
               for
               Lord
               ,
               we
               will
               esteeme
               him
               as
               hee
               deserves
               ,
               seeing
               hee
               is
               of
               the
               linage
               of
               the
               Lords
               of
            
             Mexico
             ,
             
               and
               the
               Kings
               of
            
             Culhuacan
             .
          
           
             The
             king
             having
             consulted
             vppon
             this
             poynt
             ,
             and
             finding
             it
             nothing
             inconvenient
             to
             be
             alied
             to
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             who
             were
             valiant
             men
             ,
             made
             them
             answer
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             take
             his
             grandchilde
             in
             good
             time
             ,
             adding
             therevnto
             ,
             that
             if
             he
             had
             beene
             a
             woman
             ,
             hee
             woulde
             not
             have
             given
             her
             ,
             noting
             the
             foule
             fact
             before
             spoken
             of
             ,
             ending
             his
             discourse
             with
             these
             wordes
             ,
             
               Let
               my
               grand-childe
               go
               to
               serve
               your
               God
               ,
               and
               be
               his
               lievetenant
               ,
               to
               rule
               and
               gov●rne
               his
               creatures
               ,
               by
               whom
               we
               live
               ,
               who
               is
               the
               
               Lord
               of
               night
               ,
               day
               ,
               and
               windes
               :
               Let
               him
               goe
               and
               be
               Lord
               of
               the
               water
               and
               land
               ,
               and
               possesse
               the
               Mexicaine
               Nation
               ,
               take
               him
               in
               good
               time
               ,
               and
               vse
               him
               as
               my
               sonne
               and
               grand-child
               .
            
             The
             Mexicaines
             gave
             him
             thanks
             ,
             all
             ioyntly
             desiring
             him
             to
             marry
             him
             with
             his
             owne
             hand
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             gave
             him
             to
             wife
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             noblest
             Ladies
             amongst
             them
             .
             They
             conducted
             the
             new
             King
             and
             Queene
             with
             all
             honour
             possible
             ,
             and
             made
             him
             a
             solemne
             reception
             ,
             going
             all
             in
             generall
             foorth
             to
             see
             the
             king
             ,
             whom
             they
             led
             into
             pallaces
             which
             were
             then
             but
             meane
             ;
             and
             having
             seated
             them
             in
             royall
             throanes
             ,
             presently
             one
             of
             the
             Antients
             and
             an
             Orator
             much
             esteemed
             amongest
             them
             ,
             did
             rise
             vp
             ,
             speaking
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             
               My
               sonne
               ,
               our
               Lord
               and
               King
               ,
               thou
               art
               welcome
               to
               this
               poore
               house
               and
               citty
               ,
               amongest
               these
               weedes
               and
               mudde
               ,
               where
               thy
               poore
               fathers
               ,
               grandfathers
               ,
               and
               kinsfolkes
               ,
               endure
               what
               it
               pleaseth
               the
               Lord
               of
               things
               created
               .
               Remember
               Lord
               thou
               comm●st
               hither
               to
               be
               the
               defence
               and
               support
               of
               the
               Mexicaine
               Nation
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               the
               resemblance
               of
               our
               God
            
             Vitzliputzli
             ,
             
               whervpon
               the
               charge
               and
               governement
               is
               given
               thee
               .
               Thou
               knowest
               we
               are
               not
               in
               our
               country
               ,
               seeing
               the
               land
               we
               possesse
               at
               this
               day
               is
               anothers
               ,
               neither
               know
               we
               what
               shall
               become
               of
               vs
               to
               morrowe
               ,
               or
               another
               day
               :
               Consider
               therefore
               that
               thou
               commest
               not
               to
               rest
               or
               recreate
               thy selfe
               ,
               but
               rather
               to
               indure
               a
               new
               charge
               vnder
               so
               heavie
               a
               burden
               :
               wherein
               thou
               must
               continually
               labour
               ,
               being
               slave
               to
               this
               multitude
               ,
               which
               is
               fallen
               to
               thy
               lotte
               ,
               and
               to
               all
               this
               neighbour
               people
               ,
               whome
               thou
               must
               strive
               to
               gratifie
               ,
               and
               give
               them
               contentment
               ,
               seeing
               thou
               knowest
               we
               live
               vpon
               their
               lands
               ,
               and
               within
               their
               limites
               .
            
             And
             ending
             ,
             hee
             repeated
             these
             wordes
             ;
             
               Thou
               art
               welcome
               ,
               thou
               and
               the
               Queene
               our
               Mistris
               ,
               to
               this
               your
               realme
               .
            
             This
             was
             the
             speech
             of
             the
             old
             man
             ,
             which
             with
             other
             orations
             (
             which
             the
             Mexicaine
             histories
             do
             celebrate
             )
             
             the
             children
             did
             vse
             to
             learne
             by
             hart
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             were
             kept
             by
             tradition
             ,
             some
             of
             them
             deserve
             well
             to
             be
             reported
             in
             their
             proper
             termes
             .
             The
             king
             aunswering
             ,
             thanked
             them
             ,
             and
             offered
             them
             his
             care
             and
             diligence
             in
             their
             defence
             &
             aide
             in
             all
             he
             could
             .
             After
             they
             gave
             him
             the
             othe
             ,
             and
             after
             their
             mane●
             set
             the
             royall
             crown
             vpon
             his
             head
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             like
             to
             the
             Crowne
             of
             the
             dukes
             of
             Venice
             :
             the
             name
             of
             Acamapixtli
             their
             first
             king
             signifies
             a
             handfull
             of
             reeds
             ,
             and
             therfore
             they
             carry
             in
             their
             armories
             a
             hand
             holding
             many
             arrows
             of
             reedes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             strange
             tribute
             the
             Mexicaines
             paied
             to
             them
             of
             
               Azcapuzalco
               .
               CHAP.
               9.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Mexicaines
             happened
             so
             well
             in
             the
             election
             of
             their
             new
             king
             ,
             that
             in
             short
             time
             they
             grew
             to
             have
             some
             form
             of
             a
             common-weale
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             famous
             among
             strangers
             ;
             wherevpon
             their
             neighbours
             moved
             with
             feare
             ,
             practised
             to
             subdue
             them
             ,
             especially
             the
             Tapane●ans
             ,
             who
             had
             Azcapuzalco
             for
             their
             metropolitane
             citty
             ,
             to
             whome
             the
             Mexicaines
             payed
             tribute
             ,
             as
             strangers
             dwelling
             in
             their
             land
             .
             For
             the
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             fearing
             their
             power
             which
             increased
             ,
             soght
             to
             oppresse
             the
             Mexicanes
             ,
             and
             having
             consulted
             with
             his
             subiects
             ,
             he
             sent
             to
             tel
             king
             Acamapixtli
             ,
             that
             the
             ordinary
             tribut
             they
             payed
             was
             too
             little
             ,
             and
             that
             from
             thencefoorth
             they
             should
             bring
             firre
             trees
             ,
             sapines
             ,
             and
             willowes
             for
             the
             building
             of
             the
             citty
             ,
             and
             moreover
             they
             shoulde
             make
             him
             a
             garden
             in
             the
             water
             planted
             with
             diverse
             kindes
             of
             hearbes
             and
             pulses
             ,
             which
             they
             should
             bring
             vnto
             him
             yearely
             by
             water
             ,
             dressed
             in
             this
             maner
             ,
             without
             failing
             ;
             which
             if
             they
             did
             not
             ,
             he
             declared
             them
             his
             enemies
             ,
             and
             would
             roote
             them
             out
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             
             were
             much
             troubled
             at
             this
             commaundement
             ,
             holding
             it
             impossible
             :
             and
             that
             this
             demaund
             was
             to
             no
             other
             end
             ,
             but
             to
             seeke
             occasion
             to
             ruine
             them
             .
             But
             their
             god
             Vitzliputzli
             comforted
             them
             ,
             appearing
             that
             night
             to
             an
             olde
             man
             ,
             commaunding
             him
             to
             say
             to
             the
             king
             his
             sonne
             in
             his
             name
             ,
             that
             hee
             should
             make
             no
             difficultie
             to
             accept
             of
             this
             tribute
             ,
             he
             would
             help
             them
             and
             make
             the
             meanes
             easie
             ,
             which
             after
             happened
             :
             for
             the
             time
             of
             tribute
             being
             come
             ,
             the
             Mexicanes
             carried
             the
             trees
             that
             were
             required
             ,
             and
             moreover
             ,
             a
             garden
             made
             and
             floating
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             in
             it
             much
             Mays
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             their
             corne
             )
             already
             grained
             and
             in
             the
             eare
             :
             there
             was
             also
             Indian
             pepper
             ,
             beetes
             ,
             Tomates
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             great
             sappy
             and
             savourie
             graine
             ,
             french
             pease
             ,
             f●gges
             ,
             gourds
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             things
             ,
             al
             ripe
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             season
             .
             Such
             as
             have
             not
             seene
             the
             gardines
             in
             the
             lake
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             will
             not
             beleeve
             it
             ,
             but
             will
             say
             it
             is
             an
             inchantment
             of
             the
             Divell
             whom
             they
             worship
             :
             But
             in
             trueth
             it
             is
             a
             matter
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             and
             there
             hath
             beene
             often
             seene
             of
             these
             gardens
             floating
             in
             the
             water
             ;
             for
             they
             cast
             earth
             vpon
             reedes
             and
             grasse
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             as
             it
             never
             wastes
             in
             the
             water
             ;
             they
             sowe
             and
             plant
             this
             ground
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             graine
             growes
             and
             ripens
             very
             well
             ,
             and
             then
             they
             remove
             it
             from
             place
             to
             place
             .
             But
             it
             is
             true
             ,
             that
             to
             make
             this
             great
             garden
             easily
             ,
             and
             to
             have
             the
             fruites
             grow
             well
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             that
             makes
             men
             iudge
             there
             was
             the
             worke
             of
             VitziliputZli
             ,
             whome
             otherwise
             they
             call
             Patillas
             ,
             specially
             having
             never
             made
             nor
             seene
             the
             like
             .
             The
             king
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             wondred
             much
             when
             he
             sawe
             that
             accomplished
             which
             he
             held
             impossible
             saying
             vnto
             his
             subiects
             ,
             that
             this
             people
             had
             a
             great
             god
             that
             made
             all
             easie
             vnto
             them
             ,
             and
             hee
             sayd
             vnto
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             that
             seeing
             their
             God
             gave
             them
             
             all
             things
             perfit
             ,
             hee
             would
             the
             yeare
             following
             ,
             at
             the
             time
             of
             tribute
             ,
             they
             shoulde
             bring
             in
             their
             gardine
             a
             wilde
             ducke
             ,
             and
             a
             heron
             ,
             sitting
             on
             their
             egges
             ,
             in
             such
             sorte
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             hatch
             their
             yoong
             ones
             as
             they
             should
             arrive
             ,
             without
             failing
             of
             a
             minute
             ,
             vpon
             paine
             of
             his
             indignation
             .
             The
             Mexicans
             were
             much
             troubled
             and
             heavy
             with
             this
             prowde
             and
             strict
             commaunde
             :
             but
             their
             god
             ,
             as
             he
             was
             accustomed
             ,
             comforted
             them
             in
             the
             night
             ,
             by
             one
             of
             his
             priests
             ,
             saying
             that
             he
             would
             take
             all
             that
             charge
             vpon
             him
             ,
             willing
             them
             not
             to
             fear
             ,
             but
             beleeve
             that
             the
             day
             would
             come
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Azcapuzalcos
             should
             pay
             with
             their
             lives
             this
             desire
             of
             new
             tributes
             .
             The
             time
             being
             come
             ,
             as
             the
             Mexicans
             carried
             all
             that
             was
             demaunded
             of
             their
             gardins
             ,
             among
             the
             reeds
             and
             weeds
             of
             the
             gardin
             ,
             they
             found
             a
             ducke
             and
             a
             heron
             hatching
             their
             egges
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             instant
             when
             they
             arived
             at
             AzcapuZalco
             their
             yong
             ones
             were
             disclosed
             .
             Whereat
             the
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             wondring
             beyond
             measure
             ,
             he
             said
             againe
             to
             his
             people
             ,
             that
             these
             were
             more
             than
             humane
             things
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Mexicans
             beganne
             as
             if
             they
             would
             make
             themselves
             lordes
             over
             all
             those
             provinces
             .
             Yet
             did
             he
             not
             diminish
             the
             order
             of
             this
             tribute
             ,
             and
             the
             Mexicans
             finding
             not
             themselves
             mighty
             enough
             ,
             endured
             this
             subiection
             and
             slavery
             the
             space
             of
             fifty
             yeeres
             .
             In
             this
             time
             the
             king
             Acamapixtli
             died
             ,
             having
             beautified
             the
             Citty
             of
             Mexico
             with
             many
             goodly
             buildings
             ,
             streets
             ,
             conduits
             of
             water
             ,
             and
             great
             aboundance
             of
             munition
             .
             Hee
             raigned
             in
             peace
             and
             rest
             forty
             yeares
             ,
             having
             bin
             alwayes
             zealous
             for
             the
             good
             and
             increase
             of
             the
             common-weale
             .
          
           
             As
             hee
             drew
             neare
             his
             end
             ,
             hee
             did
             one
             memorable
             thing
             ,
             that
             having
             lawfull
             children
             to
             whom
             he
             might
             leave
             the
             succession
             of
             the
             realme
             ,
             yet
             would
             he
             not
             do
             
             it
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             hee
             spake
             freely
             to
             the
             common-weale
             ,
             that
             as
             they
             had
             made
             a
             free
             election
             of
             him
             ,
             so
             they
             should
             choose
             him
             that
             should
             seeme
             fittest
             for
             their
             good
             government
             ,
             advising
             them
             therein
             to
             have
             a
             care
             to
             the
             good
             of
             the
             common-weale
             ,
             and
             seeming
             grieved
             that
             he
             left
             them
             not
             freed
             from
             tribute
             &
             subiection
             ,
             hee
             died
             ,
             having
             recommended
             his
             wife
             and
             children
             vnto
             them
             ,
             he
             left
             all
             his
             people
             sorowfull
             for
             his
             death
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             second
             King
             ,
             and
             what
             happened
             in
             his
             raigne
             .
             CHAP.
             10.
             
          
           
             THe
             obsequies
             of
             the
             dead
             king
             performed
             ,
             the
             Antients
             ,
             the
             chiefe
             of
             the
             realme
             ,
             and
             some
             part
             of
             the
             people
             assembled
             together
             ,
             to
             choose
             a
             King
             ,
             where
             the
             Antients
             propounded
             the
             necessitie
             wherein
             they
             were
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             was
             needefull
             to
             choose
             for
             chiefe
             of
             their
             citty
             ,
             a
             man
             that
             had
             pity
             of
             age
             ,
             of
             widows
             ,
             and
             orphans
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             a
             father
             of
             the
             commonweale
             :
             for
             in
             very
             deede
             they
             should
             be
             the
             feathers
             of
             his
             wings
             ,
             the
             eie-browes
             of
             his
             eyes
             ,
             and
             the
             beard
             of
             his
             face
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             necessarie
             he
             were
             valiant
             ,
             being
             needefull
             shortly
             to
             vse
             their
             forces
             ,
             as
             their
             god
             had
             prophesied
             .
             Their
             resolution
             in
             the
             end
             was
             to
             chuse
             a
             sonne
             of
             the
             predecessor
             ,
             vsing
             the
             like
             good
             office
             in
             accepting
             his
             sonne
             for
             successor
             ,
             as
             hee
             had
             done
             to
             the
             common-weale
             ,
             relying
             thereon
             .
             This
             young
             man
             was
             called
             Vitzilovitli
             ,
             which
             signifieth
             a
             rich
             feather
             ,
             they
             set
             the
             royall
             crowne
             vpon
             his
             head
             ,
             and
             annointed
             him
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             beene
             accustomed
             to
             doe
             to
             all
             their
             Kings
             ,
             with
             an
             oint●●nt
             they
             call
             Divine
             ,
             being
             the
             same
             vnction
             wherewith
             they
             did
             annoynt
             their
             Idoll
             .
             Presently
             
             an
             Orator
             made
             an
             eloquent
             speech
             ,
             exhorting
             him
             to
             arme
             himselfe
             with
             courage
             ,
             and
             free
             them
             from
             the
             travells
             ,
             slavery
             and
             misery
             they
             suffered
             ,
             being
             oppressed
             by
             the
             AzcapuZalcos
             :
             which
             done
             ,
             all
             did
             him
             homage
             .
             This
             king
             was
             not
             married
             ,
             and
             his
             Counsell
             helde
             opinion
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             good
             to
             marry
             him
             with
             the
             daughter
             of
             the
             king
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             ,
             to
             have
             him
             a
             frind
             by
             this
             aliance
             ,
             and
             to
             obtain
             some
             diminution
             of
             their
             heavy
             burthen
             of
             tributes
             imposed
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             yet
             they
             feared
             lest
             he
             should
             disdaine
             to
             give
             them
             his
             daughter
             ,
             by
             reason
             they
             were
             his
             vassalls
             :
             yet
             the
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             yeelded
             therevnto
             ,
             having
             humbly
             required
             him
             ,
             who
             with
             curteous
             wordes
             gave
             them
             his
             daughter
             ,
             called
             Ayanchigual
             ,
             whom
             they
             ledde
             with
             great
             pompe
             and
             ioy
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             performed
             the
             ceremony
             and
             solemnity
             of
             marriage
             ,
             which
             was
             to
             tie
             a
             corner
             of
             the
             mans
             cloke
             to
             a
             part
             of
             the
             womans
             vaile
             in
             signe
             of
             the
             band
             of
             marriage
             .
             This
             Queene
             broght
             foorth
             a
             sonne
             ,
             of
             whose
             name
             they
             demaunded
             advise
             of
             the
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             ,
             and
             casting
             lots
             as
             they
             had
             accustomed
             (
             being
             greatly
             given
             to
             soothsayings
             ,
             especially
             vpon
             the
             names
             of
             their
             children
             )
             he
             would
             have
             his
             grand-childe
             called
             Chimalpopoca
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             target
             casting
             smoke
             .
             The
             Queene
             his
             daughter
             seeing
             the
             contentment
             the
             King
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             had
             of
             his
             grand-child
             ,
             tooke
             occasion
             to
             intreat
             him
             to
             releeve
             the
             Mexicaines
             of
             the
             heavy
             burthen
             of
             their
             tributes
             ,
             seeing
             he
             had
             now
             a
             grand-child
             Mexicaine
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             King
             willingly
             yeelded
             vnto
             ,
             by
             the
             advise
             of
             his
             Counsell
             ,
             granting
             (
             for
             the
             tribute
             which
             they
             paid
             ,
             )
             to
             bring
             yeerely
             a
             couple
             of
             duckes
             and
             some
             fish
             ,
             in
             signe
             of
             subiection
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             dwelt
             in
             his
             land
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             remained
             
             much
             eased
             and
             content
             ,
             but
             it
             lasted
             little
             .
             For
             the
             Queene
             their
             Protectrix
             died
             soone
             after
             :
             and
             the
             yere
             following
             likewise
             Vitzilovitli
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             died
             ,
             leaving
             his
             sonne
             Chimalpopoca
             tenne
             yeares
             olde
             ,
             hee
             raigned
             thirteene
             yeeres
             ,
             and
             died
             thirty
             yeeres
             old
             ,
             or
             little
             more
             .
             Hee
             was
             held
             for
             a
             good
             king
             ,
             and
             carefull
             in
             the
             service
             of
             his
             gods
             ,
             whose
             Images
             hee
             held
             kings
             to
             be
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             honour
             done
             to
             their
             god
             ,
             was
             done
             to
             the
             king
             who
             was
             his
             image
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             the
             kings
             have
             beene
             so
             affectionate
             to
             the
             service
             of
             their
             gods
             .
             This
             king
             was
             carefull
             to
             winne
             the
             love
             of
             his
             neighbours
             ,
             and
             to
             trafficke
             with
             them
             ,
             whereby
             hee
             augmented
             his
             citty
             ,
             exercising
             his
             men
             in
             warrelike
             actions
             in
             the
             Lake
             ,
             disposing
             them
             to
             that
             which
             he
             pretended
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             see
             presently
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             Chimalpopoca
             the
             third
             king
             ,
             and
             his
             cruell
             death
             ,
             and
             the
             occasion
             of
             warre
             which
             the
             Mexicaines
             made
             .
             
               CHAP.
               11.
            
             
          
           
             THe
             Mexicaines
             for
             successor
             to
             their
             deceased
             king
             did
             choose
             his
             sonne
             Chimalpopoca
             ,
             by
             common
             consent
             ,
             although
             he
             were
             a
             child
             of
             tenne
             yeeres
             old
             ,
             being
             of
             opinion
             that
             it
             was
             alwayes
             necessary
             to
             keepe
             the
             favor
             of
             the
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             ,
             making
             his
             grand-childe
             king
             .
             They
             then
             set
             him
             in
             his
             throane
             ,
             giving
             him
             the
             ensignes
             of
             warre
             ,
             with
             a
             bowe
             and
             arrowes
             in
             one
             hand
             ,
             and
             a
             sword
             with
             rasours
             (
             which
             they
             commonly
             vse
             )
             in
             the
             right
             ,
             signifying
             thereby
             (
             as
             they
             do
             say
             )
             that
             they
             pretended
             by
             armes
             to
             set
             themselves
             at
             liberty
             .
             The
             Mexicaines
             had
             great
             want
             of
             water
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             Lake
             being
             very
             thicke
             and
             muddy
             ,
             and
             therefore
             ill
             to
             drincke
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             caused
             their
             infant
             king
             to
             
             desire
             of
             his
             grandfather
             the
             king
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             ,
             the
             water
             of
             the
             mountaine
             of
             Chapultepec
             ,
             which
             is
             from
             Mexico
             a
             league
             ,
             as
             is
             saide
             before
             ,
             which
             they
             easely
             obtained
             ,
             and
             by
             their
             industry
             made
             an
             aqueduct
             of
             faggots
             ,
             weeds
             and
             flagges
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             they
             brought
             water
             to
             their
             citty
             .
             But
             because
             the
             Cittie
             was
             built
             within
             the
             Lake
             ,
             and
             the
             aqueduct
             did
             crosse
             it
             ,
             it
             did
             breake
             forth
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             could
             not
             inioy
             the
             water
             ,
             as
             they
             desired
             ,
             and
             had
             great
             scarcitie
             :
             whervpon
             ,
             whether
             they
             did
             expresly
             seeke
             it
             ,
             to
             quarrell
             with
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             or
             that
             they
             were
             mooved
             vppon
             small
             occasion
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             they
             sent
             a
             resolute
             ambassage
             to
             the
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             ,
             saying
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             vse
             the
             water
             which
             he
             had
             gratiously
             granted
             them
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             required
             him
             to
             provide
             them
             wood
             ,
             lime
             ,
             and
             stone
             ,
             and
             to
             send
             his
             workmen
             ,
             that
             by
             their
             meanes
             they
             might
             make
             a
             pipe
             of
             stone
             and
             lime
             that
             should
             not
             breake
             .
             This
             message
             nothing
             pleased
             the
             king
             ,
             and
             much
             lesse
             his
             subiects
             ,
             seeming
             to
             be
             too
             presumptuous
             a
             message
             ,
             and
             purposely
             insolent
             ,
             for
             vassals
             to
             their
             Lord.
             The
             chiefe
             of
             the
             Counsell
             disdaining
             thereat
             ,
             said
             it
             was
             too
             bold
             ,
             that
             not
             content
             with
             permission
             to
             live
             in
             an
             others
             land
             ,
             and
             to
             have
             water
             given
             them
             ,
             but
             they
             would
             have
             them
             goe
             to
             serve
             them
             :
             what
             a
             matter
             was
             that
             ?
             And
             whereon
             presumed
             this
             fugitive
             nation
             ,
             shut
             vp
             in
             the
             mud
             ?
             They
             would
             let
             them
             know
             ,
             how
             fit
             they
             were
             to
             worke
             ,
             and
             to
             abate
             their
             pride
             ,
             in
             taking
             from
             them
             their
             land
             and
             their
             lives
             .
          
           
             In
             these
             termes
             and
             choller
             they
             left
             the
             king
             ,
             whom
             they
             did
             somwhat
             suspect
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             his
             grandchild
             ,
             and
             consulted
             againe
             anew
             ,
             what
             they
             were
             to
             doe
             ,
             where
             they
             resolved
             to
             make
             a
             generall
             proclamation
             ,
             
             that
             no
             Tapanecan
             should
             have
             any
             commerce
             or
             trafficke
             with
             any
             Mexicaine
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             not
             goe
             to
             their
             Cittie
             ,
             nor
             receive
             any
             into
             theirs
             ,
             vpon
             paine
             of
             death
             .
             Whereby
             we
             may
             vnderstand
             that
             the
             king
             did
             not
             absolutely
             commaund
             over
             his
             people
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             governed
             more
             like
             a
             Consul
             ,
             or
             a
             Duke
             ,
             than
             a
             King.
             although
             since
             with
             their
             power
             ,
             the
             commaund
             of
             Kings
             increased
             ,
             growing
             absolute
             Tyrants
             ,
             as
             you
             shal
             see
             in
             the
             last
             Kings
             .
             For
             it
             hath
             beene
             an
             ordinarie
             thing
             among
             the
             Barbarians
             ,
             that
             such
             as
             their
             power
             hath
             beene
             ,
             such
             hath
             beene
             their
             commaund
             ;
             yea
             in
             our
             Histories
             of
             Spaine
             ,
             we
             finde
             in
             some
             antient
             kings
             that
             manner
             of
             rule
             which
             the
             Tapanecans
             vsed
             .
             Such
             were
             the
             first
             kings
             of
             the
             Romans
             ,
             but
             that
             Rome
             declined
             from
             Kings
             to
             Consuls
             ,
             and
             a
             Senate
             ,
             till
             that
             after
             they
             came
             to
             be
             commaunded
             by
             Emperours
             .
             But
             these
             Barbarians
             ,
             of
             temperate
             Kings
             became
             tyrants
             ,
             of
             which
             governements
             a
             moderate
             monarchy
             is
             the
             best
             and
             most
             assured
             .
             But
             returne
             we
             now
             vnto
             our
             historie
             .
          
           
             The
             king
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             seeing
             the
             resolution
             of
             his
             subiects
             ,
             which
             was
             to
             kil
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             intreated
             them
             first
             to
             steale
             away
             the
             yong
             king
             his
             grand-childe
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             do
             what
             they
             pleased
             to
             the
             Mexicans
             .
             All
             in
             a
             manner
             yeelded
             heerevnto
             ,
             to
             give
             the
             king
             contentment
             ,
             and
             for
             pitty
             they
             had
             of
             the
             child
             ;
             but
             two
             of
             the
             chiefest
             were
             much
             opposite
             ,
             inferring
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             bad
             counsell
             ,
             for
             that
             Chimalpopoca
             ,
             although
             hee
             were
             of
             their
             bloud
             ,
             yet
             was
             it
             but
             by
             the
             mothers
             side
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             fathers
             was
             to
             be
             preferred
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             concluded
             that
             the
             first
             they
             must
             kill
             was
             Chimalpopoca
             king
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             protesting
             so
             to
             doe
             .
             The
             king
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             was
             so
             troubled
             with
             this
             contradiction
             ,
             
             and
             the
             resolution
             they
             had
             taken
             ,
             that
             soone
             after
             for
             very
             griefe
             he
             fell
             sicke
             ,
             and
             died
             .
             By
             whose
             death
             the
             Tapan●cans
             finishing
             their
             consultation
             ,
             committed
             a
             notable
             treason
             ;
             for
             one
             night
             the
             yong
             King
             of
             Mexico
             sleeping
             without
             guard
             ,
             or
             feare
             of
             any
             thing
             ,
             they
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             entred
             his
             pallace
             ,
             and
             slew
             him
             sodainly
             ,
             returning
             vnseene
             .
             The
             morning
             being
             come
             ,
             when
             the
             Nobles
             w●nt
             to
             salute
             the
             King
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             accustomed
             ,
             they
             found
             him
             slaine
             with
             great
             and
             cruell
             wounds
             ;
             then
             they
             cried
             out
             and
             filled
             all
             their
             cittie
             with
             teares
             :
             and
             transported
             with
             choller
             ,
             they
             presently
             fell
             to
             armes
             ,
             with
             an
             intent
             to
             revenge
             their
             Kings
             death
             .
             As
             they
             ranne
             vppe
             and
             downe
             full
             of
             fury
             and
             disorder
             ,
             one
             of
             their
             chiefest
             knightes
             stept
             foorth
             ,
             labouring
             to
             appease
             them
             ,
             with
             a
             grave
             admonition
             :
             
               Whither
               goe
               you
            
             (
             saide
             hee
             )
             
               O
               yee
               Mexicaines
               ,
               quiet
               your selves
               ,
               consider
               that
               things
               done
               without
               consideration
               ar●
               not
               well
               guided
               ,
               nor
               come
               to
               good
               end
               :
               suppresse
               your
               griefe
               ,
               considering
               that
               although
               your
               king
               be
               dead
               ,
               the
               noble
               blood
               of
               the
               Mexicaines
               is
               not
               extinct
               in
               him
               .
               Wee
               have
               children
               of
               our
               kings
               deceased
               ,
               by
               whose
               conduct
               ,
               succeeding
               to
               the
               realme
               ,
               you
               shall
               the
               better
               execute
               what
               you
               pretend
               ,
               having
               a
               leader
               to
               guide
               your
               enterprise
               ,
               go
               not
               blindely
               ,
               surcease
               ,
               and
               choose
               a
               king
               first
               ,
               to
               guide
               and
               encourage
               you
               against
               your
               en●mies
               :
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               dissemble
               discreetly
               ,
               performing
               the
               funeralls
               of
               your
               deceased
               king
               ,
               whose
               body
               you
               see
               heere
               present
               ,
               for
               heereafter
               you
               shall
               finde
               better
               meanes
               to
               take
               rev●nge
               .
            
             By
             this
             meanes
             the
             Mexicans
             passed
             no
             farther
             ,
             but
             stayed
             to
             make
             the
             obsequies
             of
             their
             King
             ,
             wherevnto
             they
             invited
             the
             Lords
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             and
             Culhuacan
             ,
             reporting
             vnto
             them
             this
             foule
             and
             cruell
             fact
             ,
             which
             the
             Tapanecans
             had
             committed
             ,
             moving
             them
             to
             have
             pitty
             on
             them
             ,
             and
             incensing
             them
             against
             their
             ennemies
             ,
             
             concluding
             that
             their
             resolution
             was
             to
             die
             ,
             or
             to
             bee
             revenged
             of
             so
             great
             an
             indignitie
             ,
             intreating
             them
             not
             to
             favour
             so
             vniust
             a
             fact
             of
             their
             enemies
             ;
             and
             that
             for
             their
             part
             ,
             they
             desired
             not
             their
             aide
             of
             armes
             or
             men
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             bee
             lookers
             on
             of
             what
             should
             passe
             ,
             and
             that
             for
             their
             maintenance
             ,
             they
             would
             not
             stoppe
             nor
             hinder
             the
             comerce
             ,
             as
             the
             Tapanecans
             had
             done
             .
             At
             these
             speeches
             they
             of
             Tescuco
             and
             Culhuacan
             made
             them
             great
             shewes
             of
             good
             will
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             were
             well
             satisfied
             ,
             off●ing
             them
             their
             citties
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             commerce
             they
             desired
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             provide
             vittaile
             and
             munition
             at
             their
             pleasure
             ,
             both
             by
             land
             &
             water
             .
             After
             this
             ,
             the
             Mexicanes
             intreated
             them
             to
             stay
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             assist
             at
             the
             election
             of
             their
             King
             ;
             the
             which
             they
             likewise
             granted
             ,
             to
             give
             them
             contentment
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             fourth
             King
             called
             Izcoalt
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             warre
             against
             the
             Tapanecans
             .
             CHAP.
             12.
             
          
           
             THe
             Electors
             being
             assembled
             ,
             an
             old
             man
             that
             was
             held
             for
             a
             great
             Orator
             ,
             rose
             vp
             ,
             who
             (
             as
             the
             histories
             report
             ,
             )
             spake
             in
             this
             manner
             ,
             
               The
               light
               of
               your
               eyes
               O
               M●xicaines
               is
               darkened
               ,
               but
               not
               of
               your
               hearts
               :
               for
               although
               you
               have
               lost
               him
               that
               was
               the
               light
               and
               guide
               of
               the
               Mexicaine
               Common-weale
               ,
               yet
               that
               of
               the
               heart
               remaines
               :
               to
               consider
               ,
               that
               although
               they
               have
               slaine
               one
               man
               ,
               yet
               there
               are
               others
               that
               may
               supply
               with
               advantage
               ,
               the
               want
               we
               have
               of
               him
               :
               the
               Mexicaine
               Nobilitie
               is
               not
               extinguished
               thereby
               ,
               nor
               the
               blood
               royall
               decaied
               .
               Turne
               your
               eyes
               and
               looke
               about
               you
               ,
               you
               shall
               see
               the
               Nobilitie
               of
            
             Mexico
             
               set
               in
               order
               ,
               not
               one
               nor
               two
               ,
               but
               many
               and
               excellent
               Princes
               ,
               sonnes
               to
            
             Acamapixtli
             ,
             
             
               our
               true
               and
               lawfull
               King
               and
               Lord.
               Heere
               you
               may
               choose
               at
               your
               pleasure
               ,
               saying
               ,
               I
               will
               this
               man
               ,
               and
               not
               that
               .
               If
               you
               have
               lost
               a
               father
               ,
               heere
               you
               may
               finde
               both
               father
               and
               mother
               :
               make
               account
               O
               Mexicaines
               ,
               that
               the
               Sunne
               is
               eclipsed
               and
               darkened
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               and
               will
               returne
               suddenly
               .
               If
            
             Mexico
             
               hath
               beene
               darkened
               by
               the
               death
               of
               your
               King
               ,
               the
               Sun
               will
               soone
               shew
               ,
               in
               choosing
               another
               King.
               Looke
               to
               whom
               ,
               and
               vpon
               whom
               you
               shall
               cast
               your
               eyes
               ,
               and
               towards
               whom
               your
               heart
               is
               inclined
               ,
               and
               this
               is
               hee
               who●
               your
               god
            
             Vitzliputzli
             
               hath
               chosen
            
             .
             And
             continuing
             a
             while
             this
             discourse
             ,
             he
             ended
             to
             the
             satisfaction
             of
             all
             men
             .
             In
             the
             end
             ,
             by
             the
             consent
             of
             this
             Counsell
             ,
             Izcoalt
             was
             chosen
             King
             ,
             which
             signifies
             a
             snake
             of
             rasors
             ,
             who
             was
             sonne
             to
             the
             first
             King
             Acamapixtli
             ,
             by
             a
             slave
             of
             his
             :
             and
             although
             he
             were
             not
             legitimate
             ,
             yet
             they
             made
             choyce
             of
             him
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             exceeded
             the
             rest
             in
             behaviour
             ,
             valour
             ,
             and
             magnanimitie
             of
             courage
             .
             All
             seemed
             very
             well
             satisfied
             ,
             and
             above
             all
             ,
             these
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             for
             their
             king
             was
             m●rried
             to
             a
             sister
             of
             Iscoalts
             .
             After
             the
             King
             had
             beene
             crowned
             and
             set
             in
             his
             royall
             seat
             ,
             another
             Orator
             stept
             vp
             ,
             discoursing
             how
             the
             king
             was
             bound
             to
             his
             Common-weale
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             courage
             he
             ought
             to
             shew
             in
             travell
             ,
             speaking
             thus
             ,
             
               B●hold
               this
               day
               we
               depend
               on
               thee
               ,
               it
               may
               be
               thou
               wilt
               let
               fall
               the
               burthen
               that
               lies
               vpon
               thy
               souldiers
               ,
               and
               suffer
               the
               old
               man
               and
               woman
               ,
               the
               orphlin
               and
               the
               widowe
               to
               perish
               .
               Take
               pittie
               of
               the
               infants
               that
               go
               creeping
               in
               the
               ayre
               ,
               who
               must
               perish
               if
               our
               enemies
               surmount
               vs
               :
               vnfold
               then
               ,
               and
               stretch
               forth
               thy
               cloake
               ,
               my
               Lord
               ,
               to
               beare
               these
               infants
               vpon
               thy
               shoulders
               ,
               which
               be
               the
               poore
               and
               the
               common
               people
               ,
               who
               live
               assured
               vnder
               the
               shadowe
               of
               thy
               wings
               ,
               and
               of
               thy
               bountie
               .
            
             Vttering
             many
             other
             words
             vpon
             this
             subiect
             ,
             the
             which
             ,
             (
             as
             I
             have
             said
             ,
             )
             they
             learne
             by
             heart
             ,
             for
             the
             exercise
             of
             
             their
             children
             ,
             and
             after
             did
             teach
             them
             as
             a
             lesson
             to
             those
             that
             beganne
             to
             learne
             the
             facultie
             of
             Orators
             .
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             ,
             the
             Tapanecans
             were
             resolute
             to
             destroy
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             and
             to
             this
             end
             they
             had
             made
             great
             preparations
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             new
             King
             tooke
             counsell
             for
             the
             proclaiming
             of
             warre
             ,
             and
             to
             fight
             with
             those
             that
             had
             so
             much
             wronged
             them
             .
             But
             the
             common
             people
             ,
             seeing
             their
             adversaries
             to
             exceede
             them
             farre
             in
             numbers
             and
             munition
             for
             the
             warre
             ,
             they
             came
             amazed
             to
             their
             King
             ,
             pressing
             him
             not
             to
             vndertake
             so
             dangerous
             a
             warre
             ,
             which
             would
             destroy
             their
             poore
             Cittie
             and
             Nation
             :
             wherevpon
             being
             demaunded
             what
             advise
             were
             fittest
             to
             take
             ,
             they
             made
             answer
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             was
             very
             pittifull
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             demand
             peace
             ,
             and
             offer
             to
             serve
             him
             ,
             drawing
             them
             forth
             those
             marshes
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             should
             give
             them
             houses
             and
             lands
             among
             his
             subiects
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             meanes
             they
             might
             depend
             all
             vppon
             one
             Lord.
             And
             for
             the
             obtaining
             heereof
             ,
             they
             should
             carry
             their
             god
             in
             his
             litter
             for
             an
             intercessor
             .
             The
             cries
             of
             the
             people
             were
             of
             such
             force
             ,
             (
             having
             some
             Nobles
             that
             approved
             their
             opinion
             ,
             )
             as
             presently
             they
             called
             for
             the
             Priests
             ,
             preparing
             the
             litter
             and
             their
             god
             ,
             to
             performe
             the
             voyage
             .
             As
             this
             was
             preparing
             ,
             and
             every
             one
             yeelded
             to
             this
             treatie
             of
             peace
             ,
             and
             to
             subiect
             themselves
             to
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             a
             gallant
             yong
             man
             ,
             and
             of
             good
             sort
             ,
             stept
             out
             among
             the
             people
             ,
             who
             with
             a
             resolute
             countenance
             spake
             thus
             vnto
             them
             ,
             
               What
               mean●s
               this
               O
               yee
               Mexicaines
               ,
               are
               yee
               mad
               ?
               How
               hath
               so
               great
               cowardise
               crept
               in
               among
               vs
               ?
               Shall
               we
               go
               and
               yeeld
               our selves
               thus
               to
               the
            
             Azcapuzalcans
             .
             Then
             turning
             to
             the
             King
             he
             said
             ,
             
               How
               now
               my
               Lord
               ,
               will
               you
               endure
               this
               ?
               Speake
               to
               the
               people
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               suffer
               vs
               to
               finde
               out
               some
               meanes
               for
               our
               honour
               
               and
               defence
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               yeelde
               our selves
               so
               simply
               and
               shamefully
               into
               the
               hands
               of
               our
               enemies
               .
            
             This
             yong
             man
             was
             called
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             nephew
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             he
             was
             the
             most
             valiant
             Captaine
             and
             greatest
             Counsellor
             that
             ever
             the
             Mexicaines
             had
             ,
             as
             you
             shall
             see
             heereafter
             .
             Izcoalt
             incouraged
             by
             that
             his
             nephew
             had
             so
             wisely
             spoken
             ,
             retained
             the
             people
             ,
             saying
             they
             should
             first
             suffer
             him
             to
             try
             another
             better
             meanes
             .
             Then
             turning
             towards
             his
             Nobilitie
             ,
             he
             said
             vnto
             them
             ,
             
               You
               are
               all
               heere
               ,
               my
               kinsmen
               ,
               and
               the
               best
               of
            
             Mexico
             ,
             
               hee
               that
               hath
               the
               courage
               to
               carrie
               a
               message
               to
               the
            
             Tapanecans
             ,
             
               let
               him
               rise
               vp
            
             .
             They
             looked
             one
             vpon
             another
             ,
             but
             no
             man
             stirred
             nor
             offered
             himselfe
             to
             the
             word
             .
             Then
             this
             yong
             man
             Tlacaellec
             rising
             ,
             offered
             himselfe
             to
             go
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             seeing
             he
             must
             die
             ,
             it
             did
             import
             little
             whether
             it
             were
             to
             day
             or
             to
             morrow
             :
             for
             what
             reason
             should
             he
             so
             carefully
             preserve
             himselfe
             ?
             he
             was
             therefore
             readie
             ,
             let
             him
             command
             what
             he
             pleased
             .
             And
             although
             all
             held
             this
             for
             a
             rash
             attempt
             ,
             yet
             the
             King
             resolv●d
             to
             send
             him
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             thereon
             vnderstand
             the
             will
             and
             disposition
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             and
             of
             his
             people
             ;
             holding
             it
             better
             to
             hasten
             his
             neph●ws
             death
             ,
             then
             to
             hazard
             the
             honour
             of
             his
             Com●on-weale
             .
             Tlacaelies
             being
             ready
             ,
             tooke
             his
             way
             ,
             and
             being
             come
             to
             the
             guards
             ,
             who
             had
             commandement
             to
             kill
             any
             Mexicaines
             that
             came
             towards
             them
             ,
             by
             cunning
             or
             otherwise
             :
             he
             p●rswaded
             them
             to
             suffer
             him
             to
             passe
             to
             the
             king
             ,
             who
             wondered
             to
             see
             him
             ,
             and
             hearing
             his
             ambassage
             ,
             which
             was
             to
             demand
             peace
             of
             him
             vnder
             hon●st
             conditions
             ,
             answered
             ,
             that
             hee
             would
             impart
             it
             to
             his
             subiects
             ,
             willing
             him
             to
             returne
             the
             next
             day
             for
             his
             answer
             ,
             then
             Tlaca●llec
             demanded
             a
             pasport
             ,
             yet
             could
             he
             not
             obtaine
             any
             ,
             but
             that
             he
             should
             vse
             his
             best
             skill
             :
             
             With
             this
             he
             returned
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             giving
             his
             words
             to
             the
             guards
             to
             returne
             .
             And
             although
             the
             King
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             desired
             peace
             ,
             being
             of
             a
             milde
             disposition
             ,
             yet
             his
             subiects
             did
             so
             incense
             him
             ,
             as
             his
             answer
             was
             open
             warre
             .
             The
             which
             being
             heard
             by
             the
             messenger
             ,
             he
             did
             all
             his
             King
             commanded
             him
             ,
             declaring
             by
             this
             ceremony
             ,
             to
             give
             armes
             ,
             and
             anointing
             the
             King
             with
             the
             vnction
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             that
             in
             his
             Kings
             behalfe
             he
             did
             defie
             him
             .
             Having
             ended
             all
             ,
             the
             King
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             suffering
             himselfe
             to
             be
             anointed
             and
             crowned
             with
             feathers
             ,
             giving
             goodly
             armes
             in
             recompence
             to
             the
             messenger
             ,
             wishing
             him
             not
             to
             returne
             by
             the
             pallace
             gate
             ,
             whereas
             many
             attended
             to
             cut
             him
             in
             peeces
             ,
             but
             to
             go
             out
             secretly
             by
             a
             little
             false
             posterne
             that
             was
             open
             in
             one
             of
             the
             courts
             of
             the
             Pallace
             .
             This
             yong
             man
             did
             so
             ,
             and
             turning
             by
             secret
             waies
             ,
             got
             away
             in
             safetie
             in
             sight
             of
             the
             guards
             ,
             and
             there
             defied
             them
             saying
             ,
             Tapanecans
             and
             Azcapuzalcans
             ,
             
               you
               do
               your
               office
               ill
               ,
               vnderstand
               you
               shall
               all
               die
               ,
               and
               not
               one
            
             Tapanecan
             
               shall
               remaine
               alive
            
             .
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             the
             guardes
             fell
             vpon
             him
             ,
             where
             he
             behaved
             him selfe
             so
             valiantly
             ,
             that
             hee
             ●lew
             some
             of
             them
             :
             and
             seeing
             many
             more
             of
             them
             come
             running
             ,
             hee
             retyred
             himselfe
             gallantly
             to
             the
             Cittie
             ,
             where
             he
             brought
             newes
             ,
             that
             warre
             was
             proclaimed
             with
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             had
             defied
             their
             King.
             
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             battell
             the
             Mexicaines
             gave
             to
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             vi●torie
             they
             obtained
             .
             CHAP.
             13.
             
          
           
             THe
             defie
             being
             knowne
             to
             the
             Commons
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             they
             came
             to
             the
             king
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             accustomed
             
             cowardise
             ,
             demaunding
             leave
             to
             departe
             the
             Citty
             ,
             holding
             their
             raigne
             certaine
             .
             The
             king
             didde
             comfort
             and
             incourage
             them
             ,
             promising
             to
             give
             them
             libertie
             if
             they
             vanquished
             their
             enemies
             ,
             willing
             them
             not
             to
             feare
             .
             The
             people
             replied
             .
             
               And
               if
               we
               be
               vanquished
               ,
               what
               shall
               we
               doe
               ?
               If
               we
               be
               overcome
            
             (
             aunswered
             the
             king
             )
             
               we
               will
               be
               bound
               presently
               to
               yeeld
               our selves
               into
               your
               hands
               to
               suffer
               death
               ,
               eate
               our
               flesh
               in
               your
               dishes
               and
               be
               revenged
               of
               vs.
               It
               shall
               be
               so
               then
            
             (
             saide
             they
             )
             
               if
               you
               loose
               the
               victorie
               ,
               and
               if
               you
               obtaine
               the
               victorie
               ,
               we
               do
               presently
               offer
               our selves
               to
               be
               your
               Tributaries
               ,
               to
               labour
               in
               your
               houses
               ,
               to
               sowe
               your
               ground
               ,
               to
               carrie
               your
               armes
               and
               baggage
               when
               you
               goe
               to
               the
               warres
               for
               ever
               ,
               wee
               and
               our
               descendants
               after
               vs.
            
             These
             accordes
             made
             betwixt
             the
             people
             and
             the
             nobilitie
             (
             which
             they
             did
             after
             fully
             performe
             ,
             eyther
             willingly
             ,
             or
             by
             constraint
             ,
             as
             they
             had
             promised
             )
             the
             king
             namd
             for
             his
             captain
             generall
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             the
             whole
             campe
             was
             put
             in
             order
             ,
             and
             into
             squadrons
             ,
             giving
             the
             places
             of
             captaines
             to
             the
             most
             valiant
             of
             his
             kinsfolkes
             and
             friends
             :
             then
             did
             hee
             make
             them
             a
             goodly
             speech
             ,
             whereby
             he
             did
             greatly
             incorage
             them
             ,
             being
             now
             wel
             prepared
             ,
             charging
             all
             men
             to
             obey
             the
             commaundement
             of
             the
             Generall
             whome
             he
             had
             appoynted
             :
             he
             divided
             his
             men
             into
             two
             partes
             ,
             commanding
             the
             most
             valiant
             and
             hardie
             ,
             to
             give
             the
             first
             charge
             with
             him
             ,
             &
             that
             all
             the
             rest
             should
             remaine
             with
             the
             king
             Izcoalt
             ,
             vn●il
             they
             should
             see
             the
             first
             assaile
             their
             enemies
             .
             Marching
             then
             in
             order
             ,
             they
             were
             discovered
             by
             them
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             ,
             who
             presently
             came
             furiously
             foorth
             the
             citty
             ,
             carrying
             great
             riches
             of
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             armes
             of
             great
             value
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             had
             the
             empire
             of
             all
             that
             country
             .
             IZcoalt
             gave
             the
             signall
             to
             battaile
             ,
             with
             a
             little
             drumme
             he
             carried
             on
             his
             shoulders
             ,
             and
             presently
             
             they
             raised
             a
             general
             showt
             ,
             crying
             ,
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Mexico
            
             ,
             they
             charged
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             and
             although
             they
             were
             farre
             more
             in
             number
             ,
             yet
             did
             they
             defeate
             them
             ,
             and
             force
             them
             to
             retire
             into
             their
             Cittie
             ;
             then
             advaunced
             they
             which
             remained
             behinde
             ,
             crying
             ,
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             victorie
             ,
             victorie
             ,
             all
             sodainely
             entred
             the
             Citty
             ,
             where
             (
             by
             the
             Kings
             commandement
             )
             they
             pardoned
             not
             any
             man
             ,
             no
             not
             olde
             men
             ,
             women
             ,
             nor
             children
             ,
             for
             they
             slew
             them
             all
             ,
             and
             spoyled
             the
             Citty
             being
             very
             rich
             .
             And
             not
             content
             heerewith
             ,
             they
             followed
             them
             that
             fled
             ,
             and
             were
             retired
             into
             the
             craggy
             rocks
             of
             the
             Sierres
             or
             neere
             mountaines
             ,
             striking
             and
             making
             a
             great
             slaughter
             of
             them
             .
             The
             Tapanecans
             being
             retired
             to
             a
             mountaine
             cast
             downe
             their
             armes
             ,
             demaunding
             their
             lives
             ,
             and
             offering
             to
             serve
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             to
             give
             them
             lands
             and
             gardins
             ,
             stone
             ,
             lime
             and
             timber
             ,
             and
             to
             hold
             them
             alwayes
             for
             their
             Lordes
             .
             Vpon
             this
             condition
             Tlacaell●c
             retired
             his
             men
             and
             ceased
             the
             battell
             ,
             graunting
             them
             their
             lives
             vpon
             the
             former
             conditions
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             solemnely
             sweare
             .
             Then
             they
             return●d
             to
             AzcapuZalco
             ,
             and
             so
             with
             their
             rich
             and
             victorious
             spoiles
             to
             the
             cittie
             of
             Mexico
             .
             The
             day
             following
             the
             king
             assembled
             the
             nobilitie
             and
             the
             people
             ,
             to
             whom
             he
             laid
             open
             the
             accord
             the
             Commons
             had
             made
             ,
             demaunding
             of
             them
             ,
             if
             they
             were
             content
             to
             persist
             therin
             :
             the
             Commons
             made
             answer
             ,
             that
             they
             had
             promised
             ,
             and
             they
             had
             well
             deserved
             it
             ,
             and
             therfore
             they
             were
             content
             to
             serve
             them
             perpetually
             .
             Wherevpon
             they
             tooke
             an
             othe
             ,
             which
             since
             they
             have
             kept
             without
             contradiction
             .
          
           
             This
             done
             IZcoalt
             returned
             to
             Azcapuzalco
             ,
             (
             by
             the
             advise
             of
             his
             counsell
             )
             he
             divided
             all
             the
             lands
             &
             goods
             of
             the
             conquered
             among
             the
             conquerours
             ,
             the
             chiefest
             
             part
             fell
             to
             the
             King
             ,
             then
             to
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             and
             after
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Nobles
             ,
             as
             they
             best
             deserved
             in
             the
             battell
             .
             They
             also
             gave
             land
             to
             some
             plebeians
             ,
             having
             behaved
             themselves
             valiantly
             ;
             to
             others
             they
             distributed
             the
             pillage
             ,
             making
             small
             account
             of
             them
             as
             of
             cowardes
             .
             They
             appointed
             lands
             in
             common
             for
             the
             quarters
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             to
             every
             one
             his
             part
             ,
             for
             the
             service
             and
             sacrifices
             of
             their
             gods
             .
             This
             was
             the
             order
             which
             after
             they
             alwayes
             kept
             ,
             in
             the
             division
             of
             the
             lands
             and
             spoyles
             of
             those
             they
             had
             vanquished
             and
             subdewed
             .
             By
             this
             meanes
             they
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             remained
             so
             poore
             ,
             as
             they
             had
             no
             lands
             left
             them
             to
             labor
             ,
             and
             (
             which
             was
             worse
             )
             they
             tooke
             their
             king
             from
             them
             ,
             &
             all
             power
             to
             chuse
             any
             other
             then
             him
             of
             Mexico
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             warre
             and
             victory
             the
             Mexicans
             had
             against
             the
             Cittie
             of
             
               Cuyoacan
               .
               CHAP.
               14.
            
             
          
           
             ALthough
             the
             chiefe
             Cittie
             of
             the
             Tapanecans
             ,
             was
             that
             of
             AzcapuZalco
             ,
             yet
             had
             they
             others
             with
             their
             private
             Lordes
             ,
             as
             T●cuba
             and
             Cuyoacan
             .
             These
             seeing
             the
             storme
             passed
             ,
             would
             gladly
             that
             they
             of
             Azcapuzalco
             had
             renewed
             the
             warre
             against
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             and
             seeing
             them
             danted
             ,
             as
             a
             nation
             wholy
             broken
             and
             defeated
             ,
             they
             of
             Cuyoacan
             resolved
             to
             make
             warre
             by
             themselves
             ;
             to
             the
             which
             they
             laboured
             to
             draw
             the
             other
             neighbor
             nations
             ,
             who
             would
             not
             stirre
             nor
             quarrell
             with
             the
             Mexicans
             .
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             the
             hatred
             and
             malice
             increasing
             ,
             they
             of
             Cuyoacan
             beganne
             to
             ill
             intreate
             the
             women
             that
             went
             to
             their
             markets
             ,
             mocking
             at
             them
             ,
             and
             doing
             the
             like
             to
             the
             men
             over
             whom
             they
             had
             power
             :
             for
             which
             cause
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             defended
             ,
             that
             none
             of
             his
             should
             goe
             to
             Cuyoacan
             ,
             and
             
             that
             they
             should
             receive
             none
             of
             them
             into
             Mexico
             ,
             the
             which
             made
             them
             of
             Cuyoacan
             resolve
             wholy
             to
             warre
             :
             but
             first
             they
             would
             provoke
             them
             by
             some
             shamefull
             scorne
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             that
             having
             invited
             them
             to
             one
             of
             their
             solemne
             feasts
             ,
             after
             they
             had
             made
             them
             a
             goodly
             banquet
             ,
             and
             feasted
             them
             with
             a
             great
             daunce
             after
             their
             manner
             ,
             they
             sent
             them
             for
             their
             fruite
             ,
             womens
             apparell
             ,
             forcing
             them
             to
             put
             it
             on
             ,
             and
             so
             to
             returne
             home
             like
             women
             to
             their
             cittie
             ,
             reproching
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             cowards
             and
             effeminate
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             durst
             not
             take
             armes
             being
             sufficiently
             provoked
             .
             Those
             of
             Mexico
             say
             ,
             that
             for
             revenge
             they
             did
             vnto
             them
             a
             fowle
             scorne
             ,
             laying
             at
             the
             gates
             of
             their
             Cittie
             of
             Cuyoacan
             certaine
             things
             which
             smoaked
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             many
             women
             were
             delivered
             before
             their
             time
             ,
             and
             many
             fell
             sicke
             .
             In
             the
             end
             ,
             all
             came
             to
             open
             warre
             ,
             and
             there
             was
             a
             battell
             fought
             ,
             wherein
             they
             imployed
             all
             their
             forces
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             by
             his
             courage
             and
             policie
             in
             warre
             ,
             obtained
             the
             victory
             .
             For
             having
             left
             king
             IZcoalt
             in
             fight
             with
             them
             of
             Cuyoacan
             ,
             he
             put
             himselfe
             in
             ambush
             with
             some
             of
             the
             most
             valiant
             souldiers
             ,
             and
             so
             turning
             about
             ,
             charged
             them
             behind
             ,
             and
             forced
             them
             to
             retire
             into
             their
             Citty
             .
             But
             seeing
             their
             intent
             was
             to
             flie
             into
             a
             Temple
             ,
             which
             was
             verie
             strong
             .
             He
             with
             three
             other
             valiant
             souldiors
             ,
             pursued
             them
             eagerly
             ,
             and
             got
             before
             them
             ,
             seising
             on
             the
             temple
             &
             firing
             it
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             forced
             them
             to
             flie
             to
             the
             fields
             ,
             where
             hee
             made
             a
             great
             slaughter
             of
             the
             vanquished
             ,
             pursuing
             them
             two
             leagues
             into
             the
             Countrey
             ,
             vnto
             a
             litle
             hill
             ,
             where
             the
             vanquished
             casting
             away
             their
             weapons
             and
             their
             armes
             acrosse
             ,
             yeelded
             to
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             and
             with
             many
             teares
             craved
             pardon
             of
             their
             overweening
             follie
             ,
             in
             vsing
             them
             like
             women
             ,
             offering
             to
             bee
             
             their
             slaves
             :
             so
             as
             in
             the
             end
             the
             Mexicaines
             did
             pardon
             them
             .
             Of
             this
             victory
             the
             Mexicanes
             carried
             away
             very
             rich
             spolles
             of
             garments
             ,
             armes
             ,
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             iewells
             ,
             and
             rich
             feathers
             ,
             with
             a
             great
             number
             of
             captives
             .
             In
             this
             battaile
             there
             were
             three
             of
             the
             principals
             of
             Culhuacan
             that
             came
             to
             aide
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             to
             winne
             honour
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             remarkable
             above
             all
             .
             And
             since
             being
             knowen
             to
             Tlasaellec
             ,
             and
             having
             made
             proofe
             of
             their
             fidelitie
             ,
             he
             gave
             them
             Mexicaine
             devises
             ,
             and
             had
             them
             alwayes
             by
             his
             side
             ,
             where
             they
             fought
             in
             all
             places
             very
             valiantly
             .
             It
             was
             apparant
             that
             the
             whole
             victory
             was
             due
             to
             the
             Generall
             ,
             and
             to
             these
             three
             ;
             for
             among
             so
             many
             captives
             taken
             ,
             two
             third
             partes
             were
             wonne
             by
             these
             foure
             ,
             which
             was
             easily
             knowen
             by
             a
             policie
             they
             vsed
             :
             for
             taking
             a
             captive
             ,
             they
             presently
             cut
             off
             a
             little
             of
             his
             haire
             ,
             and
             gave
             it
             to
             others
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             appeared
             that
             those
             which
             had
             their
             haire
             cut
             ,
             amounted
             to
             that
             number
             ,
             whereby
             they
             wonne
             great
             reputation
             and
             fame
             of
             valiant
             men
             .
             They
             were
             honoured
             as
             conquerors
             ,
             giving
             them
             good
             portions
             of
             the
             spoils
             and
             lands
             ,
             as
             the
             Mexicans
             have
             alwayes
             vsed
             to
             doe
             ,
             which
             gave
             occasion
             to
             those
             that
             did
             fight
             ,
             to
             become
             famous
             ,
             and
             to
             winne
             reputation
             by
             armes
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             warre
             and
             victorie
             which
             the
             Mexicans
             had
             against
             the
             Suchimilcos
             .
             
               CHAP.
               15
            
          
           
             THe
             Nation
             of
             the
             Tapanecans
             being
             subdewed
             the
             Mexicaines
             had
             occasion
             to
             do
             the
             like
             to
             the
             Suchimilcos
             ,
             who
             (
             as
             it
             hath
             beene
             saide
             )
             were
             the
             first
             of
             the
             seven
             caves
             or
             linages
             that
             peopled
             this
             land
             .
             The
             Mexi●ans
             sought
             not
             the
             occasion
             ,
             although
             they
             might
             presume
             as
             conquerors
             to
             extend
             their
             limits
             ,
             but
             the
             Suchimilcos
             
             didde
             moove
             them
             ,
             to
             their
             owne
             ruine
             ,
             as
             it
             happens
             to
             men
             of
             small
             iudgement
             that
             have
             no
             foresight
             ,
             who
             not
             preventing
             the
             mischefe
             they
             imagined
             ,
             fall
             into
             it
             .
             The
             Suchimilcos
             held
             opinion
             ,
             that
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             victories
             past
             ,
             should
             attempt
             to
             subdue
             them
             ,
             and
             consulted
             heereon
             among
             themselves
             .
             Some
             among
             them
             thought
             it
             good
             to
             acknowledge
             them
             for
             superiors
             ,
             and
             to
             applaude
             their
             good
             fortune
             ,
             but
             the
             contrary
             was
             allowed
             ,
             and
             they
             went
             out
             to
             give
             them
             battel
             :
             which
             IZcoalt
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             vnderstanding
             ,
             he
             sent
             his
             General
             Tlacael●ec
             against
             them
             ,
             with
             his
             army
             :
             the
             battell
             was
             fought
             in
             the
             same
             field
             that
             divides
             their
             limites
             ,
             which
             two
             armies
             were
             equall
             in
             men
             and
             armes
             ,
             but
             very
             divers
             in
             their
             order
             and
             manner
             of
             fighting
             ;
             for
             that
             the
             Suchimilcos
             charged
             all
             together
             on
             a
             heape
             confusedly
             ,
             and
             Tlacaellec
             divided
             his
             men
             into
             squadrons
             with
             a
             goodly
             order
             ,
             so
             as
             he
             presently
             brake
             his
             ennemies
             ,
             forcing
             them
             to
             retire
             into
             their
             cittie
             ,
             into
             the
             which
             they
             entred
             ,
             following
             them
             to
             the
             Temple
             whither
             they
             fled
             ,
             which
             they
             fiered
             ,
             and
             forcing
             them
             to
             flie
             vnto
             the
             mountaines
             :
             in
             the
             end
             they
             brought
             them
             to
             this
             poynt
             ,
             that
             they
             yeelded
             with
             their
             armes
             acrosse
             .
             The
             Generall
             Tlacaellec
             returning
             in
             great
             triumph
             ,
             the
             priests
             went
             foorth
             to
             receive
             him
             ,
             with
             their
             musicke
             of
             flutes
             ,
             and
             giving
             incense
             .
             The
             chiefe
             Captaines
             vsed
             other
             ceremonies
             and
             shews
             of
             ioy
             ,
             as
             they
             had
             bin
             accustomed
             to
             doe
             ,
             and
             the
             king
             with
             all
             the
             troupe
             went
             to
             the
             Temple
             ,
             to
             give
             thanks
             to
             their
             false
             god
             ,
             for
             the
             divell
             hath
             alwayes
             beene
             very
             desirous
             hereof
             ,
             to
             challenge
             to
             himselfe
             the
             honor
             which
             he
             deserves
             not
             ,
             seeing
             it
             is
             the
             true
             God
             which
             giveth
             victories
             ,
             and
             maketh
             them
             to
             rule
             whome
             he
             pleaseth
             .
             The
             day
             following
             ,
             
             king
             Izcoalt
             went
             vnto
             the
             Citty
             of
             Suchimilco
             ,
             causing
             himselfe
             to
             be
             sworne
             king
             of
             the
             Suchimilcos
             :
             and
             for
             their
             comfort
             he
             promised
             to
             doe
             them
             good
             .
             In
             token
             whereof
             hee
             commaunded
             them
             to
             make
             a
             great
             cawsey
             stretching
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             to
             Suchimilco
             ,
             which
             is
             foure
             leagues
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             there
             might
             bee
             more
             commerce
             and
             trafficke
             amongest
             them
             .
             Which
             the
             Suchimilcos
             performed
             ,
             and
             in
             shorte
             time
             the
             Mexicaine
             governement
             seemed
             so
             good
             vnto
             them
             ,
             as
             they
             helde
             themselves
             happy
             to
             have
             changed
             their
             king
             and
             commonweale
             .
             Some
             neighbors
             pricked
             forward
             by
             envy
             ,
             or
             feare
             ,
             to
             their
             ruines
             were
             not
             yet
             made
             wise
             by
             others
             miseries
             .
          
           
             Cuitlavaca
             was
             a
             citty
             within
             the
             lake
             ,
             which
             though
             the
             name
             and
             dwelling
             be
             chaunged
             ,
             continueth
             yet
             .
             They
             were
             active
             to
             swimme
             in
             the
             lake
             ,
             and
             therefore
             they
             thought
             they
             might
             much
             indomage
             and
             annoy
             the
             Mexicaines
             by
             water
             ,
             which
             the
             King
             vnderstanding
             ,
             hee
             resolved
             to
             send
             his
             army
             presently
             to
             fight
             against
             them
             .
             But
             Tlacaellec
             little
             esteeming
             this
             warre
             ,
             holding
             it
             dishonorable
             to
             lead
             an
             army
             against
             them
             ,
             made
             offer
             to
             conquer
             them
             with
             the
             children
             onely
             :
             which
             he
             performed
             in
             this
             maner
             :
             he
             went
             vnto
             the
             Temple
             &
             drew
             out
             of
             the
             Covent
             such
             children
             as
             he
             thought
             fittest
             for
             this
             action
             ,
             from
             tenne
             to
             eighteene
             yeeres
             of
             age
             ,
             who
             knew
             how
             to
             guide
             their
             boates
             ,
             or
             canoes
             ,
             teaching
             them
             certaine
             pollicies
             .
             The
             order
             they
             held
             in
             this
             warre
             ,
             was
             ,
             that
             he
             went
             to
             Cuitlavaca
             with
             his
             children
             ,
             where
             by
             his
             pollicy
             hee
             pressed
             the
             ennemy
             in
             such
             sorte
             ,
             that
             hee
             made
             them
             to
             flie
             ;
             and
             as
             he
             followed
             them
             ,
             the
             lord
             of
             Cuitlavaca
             mette
             him
             and
             yeelded
             vnto
             him
             ,
             himselfe
             ,
             his
             Citty
             ,
             and
             his
             people
             ,
             and
             by
             this
             meanes
             he
             stayed
             the
             pursuite
             .
             The
             
             children
             returned
             with
             much
             spoyle
             ,
             and
             many
             captives
             for
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             being
             solemnely
             received
             with
             a
             great
             procession
             ,
             musike
             and
             perfumes
             ,
             &
             they
             went
             to
             worshippe
             their
             gods
             ,
             in
             taking
             of
             the
             earth
             which
             they
             did
             eate
             ,
             and
             drawing
             blood
             from
             the
             forepart
             of
             their
             legges
             with
             the
             Priests
             lancets
             ,
             with
             other
             superstitions
             which
             they
             were
             accustomed
             to
             vse
             in
             the
             like
             solemnities
             .
             The
             children
             were
             much
             honoured
             and
             incoraged
             ,
             and
             the
             king
             imbraced
             and
             kissed
             them
             ,
             and
             his
             kinsmen
             and
             alies
             accompanied
             them
             .
             The
             bruite
             of
             this
             victorie
             ranne
             throughout
             all
             the
             country
             ,
             how
             that
             Tlacaellec
             had
             subdued
             the
             city
             of
             Cuitlavaca
             with
             children
             :
             the
             news
             and
             consideration
             whereof
             opened
             the
             eyes
             of
             those
             of
             Tesc●co
             ,
             a
             chiefe
             and
             very
             cunning
             Nation
             for
             their
             manner
             of
             life
             :
             So
             as
             the
             king
             of
             Tescuco
             was
             first
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             subiect
             themselves
             to
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             invite
             him
             therevnto
             with
             his
             cittie
             .
             Therefore
             by
             the
             advise
             of
             his
             Counsell
             ,
             they
             sent
             Ambassadors
             good
             Orators
             with
             honorable
             presents
             ,
             to
             offer
             themselves
             vnto
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             as
             their
             subiects
             ,
             desiring
             peace
             and
             amitie
             ,
             which
             was
             gratiously
             accepted
             ;
             but
             by
             the
             advise
             of
             Tlacaellec
             he
             vsed
             a
             ceremony
             for
             the
             effecting
             thereof
             ,
             which
             was
             that
             those
             of
             Tescuco
             should
             come
             forth
             armed
             against
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             where
             they
             should
             fight
             ,
             and
             presently
             yeelde
             ,
             which
             was
             an
             act
             and
             ceremony
             of
             warre
             ,
             without
             any
             effusion
             of
             bloud
             on
             either
             side
             .
             Thus
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             became
             soveraigne
             Lord
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             but
             hee
             tooke
             not
             their
             king
             from
             them
             ,
             but
             made
             him
             of
             his
             privie
             counsell
             ;
             so
             as
             they
             have
             alwayes
             maintained
             themselves
             in
             this
             manner
             vntill
             the
             time
             of
             Motecuma
             the
             second
             ,
             during
             whose
             raigne
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             .
             Having
             subdued
             the
             land
             and
             citty
             of
             
               Tescuco
               ,
               Mexico
            
             
             remained
             Lady
             and
             Mistris
             of
             all
             the
             landes
             and
             citties
             about
             the
             Lake
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             built
             .
             Izcoalt
             having
             enioyed
             this
             prosperitie
             ,
             and
             raigned
             twelve
             yeeres
             ,
             died
             ,
             leaving
             the
             realme
             which
             had
             beene
             given
             him
             ,
             much
             augmented
             by
             the
             valour
             and
             counsell
             of
             his
             nephew
             Tlacaellec
             (
             as
             hath
             afore
             beene
             saide
             )
             who
             held
             it
             best
             to
             choose
             an
             other
             king
             then
             himselfe
             ,
             as
             shall
             heereafter
             be
             shewed
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             fift
             King
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             called
             Moteçuma
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             that
             name
             .
             
               CHAP.
               16.
            
             
          
           
             FOrasmuch
             as
             the
             election
             of
             the
             new
             King
             ,
             belonged
             to
             foure
             chiefe
             Electors
             ,
             (
             as
             hath
             been
             said
             ,
             )
             and
             to
             the
             King
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             and
             the
             King
             of
             Tacubu
             ,
             by
             especiall
             priviledge
             :
             Tlacaellec
             assembled
             these
             six
             personages
             ,
             as
             he
             that
             had
             the
             soveraigne
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             having
             propounded
             the
             matter
             vnto
             them
             ,
             they
             made
             choise
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             that
             name
             ,
             nephew
             to
             the
             same
             Tlacaellec
             .
             His
             election
             was
             very
             pleasing
             to
             them
             all
             ,
             by
             reason
             whereof
             ,
             they
             made
             most
             solemne
             feasts
             ,
             and
             more
             stately
             then
             the
             former
             .
             Presently
             after
             his
             election
             ,
             they
             conducted
             him
             to
             the
             Temple
             with
             a
             great
             traine
             ,
             where
             before
             the
             divine
             harth
             ,
             (
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             )
             where
             there
             is
             continuall
             fire
             ,
             they
             set
             him
             in
             his
             royall
             throne
             ,
             putting
             vpon
             him
             his
             royall
             ornaments
             .
             Being
             there
             ,
             the
             King
             drew
             blood
             from
             his
             eares
             and
             legges
             with
             a
             griffons
             tallents
             ,
             which
             was
             the
             sacrifice
             wherein
             the
             divell
             delighted
             to
             be
             honoured
             .
             The
             Priests
             ,
             Antients
             ,
             and
             Captaines
             ,
             made
             their
             orations
             ,
             all
             congratulating
             his
             election
             .
             They
             were
             accustomed
             in
             their
             elections
             to
             make
             great
             feasts
             and
             dances
             ,
             where
             they
             wasted
             many
             lightes
             .
             In
             this
             
             Kings
             time
             the
             custome
             was
             brought
             in
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             should
             go
             in
             person
             to
             make
             warre
             in
             some
             province
             ,
             and
             bring
             captives
             to
             solemnize
             the
             feast
             of
             his
             coronation
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             solemne
             sacrifices
             of
             that
             day
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             King
             Moteçuma
             went
             into
             the
             province
             of
             Chalco
             ,
             who
             had
             declared
             themselves
             his
             enemies
             :
             from
             whence
             (
             having
             fought
             valiantly
             ,
             )
             he
             brought
             a
             great
             number
             of
             captives
             ,
             whereof
             he
             did
             make
             a
             notable
             sacrifice
             the
             day
             of
             his
             coronation
             ,
             although
             at
             that
             time
             he
             did
             not
             subdue
             all
             the
             province
             of
             Chalco
             ,
             being
             a
             very
             warlike
             nation
             .
             Many
             came
             to
             this
             coronation
             from
             divers
             provinces
             ,
             as
             well
             neere
             as
             farre
             off
             ,
             to
             see
             the
             feast
             ,
             at
             the
             which
             all
             commers
             were
             very
             bountifully
             entertained
             and
             clad
             ,
             especially
             the
             poore
             ,
             to
             whom
             they
             gave
             new
             garments
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             they
             brought
             that
             day
             into
             the
             Cittie
             ,
             the
             Kings
             tributes
             ,
             with
             a
             goodly
             order
             ,
             which
             consisted
             in
             stuffes
             to
             make
             garments
             of
             all
             sorts
             ,
             in
             Cacao
             ,
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             rich
             feathers
             ,
             great
             burthens
             of
             cotten
             ,
             cucumbers
             ,
             sundry
             sortes
             of
             pulses
             ,
             many
             kindes
             of
             sea
             fish
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             fresh
             water
             ,
             great
             store
             of
             fruites
             ,
             and
             venison
             without
             number
             ,
             not
             reckoning
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             presents
             ,
             which
             other
             kings
             and
             Lords
             sent
             to
             the
             new
             king
             .
             All
             this
             tribute
             marched
             in
             order
             according
             to
             the
             provinces
             ,
             and
             before
             them
             the
             stewards
             and
             receivers
             ,
             with
             divers
             markes
             and
             ensignes
             ,
             in
             very
             goodly
             order
             :
             so
             as
             it
             was
             one
             of
             the
             goodliest
             things
             of
             the
             feast
             ,
             to
             see
             the
             entry
             of
             the
             tribute
             .
             The
             King
             being
             crowned
             ,
             he
             imploied
             himselfe
             in
             the
             conquest
             of
             many
             provinces
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             he
             was
             both
             valiant
             and
             vertuous
             ,
             hee
             still
             increased
             more
             and
             mo●e
             ,
             vsing
             in
             all
             his
             affaires
             the
             counsell
             and
             industry
             of
             his
             generall
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             whom
             he
             did
             alwaies
             love
             and
             esteeme
             very
             much
             ,
             as
             hee
             had
             
             good
             reason
             .
             The
             warre
             wherein
             hee
             was
             most
             troubled
             and
             of
             greatest
             difficultie
             ,
             was
             that
             of
             the
             province
             of
             Chalco
             ,
             wherein
             there
             happened
             great
             matters
             ,
             whereof
             one
             was
             very
             remarkable
             ,
             which
             was
             ,
             that
             they
             of
             Chalcas
             ,
             had
             taken
             a
             brother
             of
             Moteçuma●s
             in
             the
             warres
             ,
             whome
             they
             resolved
             to
             choose
             for
             their
             king
             ,
             asking
             him
             very
             curteously
             ,
             if
             he
             would
             accept
             of
             this
             charge
             .
             He
             answered
             (
             after
             much
             importunity
             ,
             still
             persisting
             therein
             ,
             )
             that
             if
             they
             meant
             plainely
             to
             choose
             him
             for
             their
             king
             ,
             they
             should
             plant
             in
             the
             market
             place
             ,
             a
             tree
             or
             very
             high
             stake
             ,
             on
             the
             toppe
             whereof
             ,
             they
             should
             make
             a
             little
             scaffold
             ,
             and
             meanes
             to
             mount
             vnto
             it
             .
             The
             Chalcas
             supposing
             it
             had
             beene
             some
             ceremony
             to
             make
             himselfe
             more
             apparent
             ,
             presently
             effected
             it
             :
             then
             assembling
             all
             his
             Mexicaines
             about
             the
             stake
             ,
             he
             went
             to
             the
             toppe
             with
             a
             garland
             of
             flowers
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             speaking
             to
             his
             men
             in
             this
             maner
             ,
             
               O
               valiant
               Mexicaines
               ,
               these
               men
               will
               choose
               mee
               for
               their
               King
               ,
               but
               the
               gods
               will
               not
               permit
               ,
               that
               to
               be
               a
               King
               I
               should
               committee
               any
               treason
               against
               my
               countrie
               ,
               but
               contrariwise
               ,
               I
               wil
               that
               you
               learne
               by
               me
               ,
               that
               it
               behoveth
               vs
               rather
               ,
               to
               indure
               death
               ,
               then
               to
               ayde
               our
               enemies
               .
            
             Saying
             these
             words
             ,
             he
             cast
             himselfe
             downe
             ,
             and
             was
             broken
             in
             a
             thousand
             peeces
             ;
             at
             which
             spectacle
             ,
             the
             Chalcas
             had
             so
             great
             horror
             and
             dispits
             ,
             that
             presently
             they
             fell
             vpon
             the
             Mexicaines
             and
             slew
             them
             all
             with
             their
             launces
             ,
             as
             men
             whom
             they
             held
             too
             prowde
             and
             inexorable
             ,
             saying
             ,
             they
             had
             divelish
             hearts
             .
             It
             chanced
             the
             night
             following
             ,
             they
             heard
             two
             owles
             making
             a
             mornefull
             cry
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             interpret
             as
             an
             vnfortunate
             signe
             ,
             and
             a
             presage
             of
             their
             neere
             destruction
             ,
             as
             it
             succeeded
             :
             for
             King
             Moteçuma
             went
             against
             them
             in
             person
             with
             all
             his
             power
             ,
             where
             he
             vanquished
             them
             ,
             and
             ruined
             all
             
             their
             kingdome
             :
             and
             passing
             beyond
             the
             mountaine
             Me●ade
             ,
             hee
             conquered
             still
             even
             vnto
             the
             North
             sea
             .
             Then
             returning
             towards
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             hee
             subdued
             many
             provinces
             :
             so
             as
             he
             became
             a
             mighty
             King
             :
             all
             by
             the
             helpe
             and
             counsell
             of
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             who
             in
             a
             manner
             conquered
             all
             the
             Mexicaine
             nation
             .
             Yet
             hee
             held
             an
             opinion
             ,
             (
             the
             which
             was
             confirmed
             ,
             )
             that
             it
             was
             not
             behoovefull
             to
             conquer
             the
             province
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             that
             the
             Mexicaines
             might
             have
             a
             fronter
             enemy
             ,
             to
             keepe
             the
             youth
             of
             Mexico
             in
             exercise
             and
             allarme
             :
             and
             that
             they
             might
             have
             numbers
             of
             captives
             to
             sacrifice
             to
             their
             idols
             ,
             wherein
             they
             did
             waste
             (
             as
             hath
             beene
             said
             ,
             )
             infinite
             numbers
             of
             men
             ,
             which
             should
             bee
             taken
             by
             force
             in
             the
             warres
             .
             The
             honour
             must
             be
             given
             to
             Moteçuma
             ,
             or
             to
             speake
             truly
             ,
             to
             Tlacaellec
             his
             Generall
             ,
             for
             the
             good
             order
             and
             policy
             setled
             in
             the
             realme
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             the
             counsells
             and
             goodly
             enterprises
             ,
             which
             they
             did
             execute
             :
             and
             likewise
             for
             the
             numbers
             of
             Iudges
             and
             Magistrates
             ,
             being
             as
             well
             ordered
             there
             ,
             as
             in
             any
             common-weale
             ;
             yea
             ,
             were
             it
             in
             the
             most
             flourishing
             of
             Europe
             .
             This
             King
             did
             also
             greatly
             increase
             the
             Kings
             house
             ,
             giving
             it
             great
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             appointing
             many
             and
             sundry
             officers
             ,
             which
             served
             him
             with
             great
             pompe
             and
             ceremony
             .
             Hee
             was
             no
             lesse
             remarkable
             touching
             the
             devotion
             and
             service
             of
             his
             idolls
             ,
             increasing
             the
             number
             of
             his
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             instituting
             new
             ceremonies
             ,
             wherevnto
             hee
             carried
             a
             great
             respect
             .
          
           
             Hee
             built
             that
             great
             temple
             dedicated
             to
             their
             god
             Vitziliputzli
             ,
             whereof
             is
             spoken
             in
             the
             other
             booke
             .
             He
             did
             sacrifice
             at
             the
             dedication
             of
             this
             temple
             ,
             a
             great
             number
             of
             men
             ,
             taken
             in
             sundry
             victories
             :
             finally
             ,
             inioying
             his
             Empire
             in
             great
             prosperitie
             ,
             hee
             fell
             sicke
             ,
             
             and
             died
             ,
             having
             raigned
             twenty
             eight
             yeares
             ,
             〈◊〉
             to
             his
             successor
             Ticoci●
             ,
             who
             did
             not
             resemble
             him
             ,
             neither
             in
             valour
             ,
             nor
             in
             good
             fortune
             .
          
        
         
           
             How
             Tlacaellec
             refused
             to
             be
             King
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             election
             and
             deedes
             of
             
               Ticocic
               .
               CHAP.
               17.
            
             
          
           
             THE
             foure
             Deputies
             assembled
             in
             counsell
             ,
             with
             the
             lords
             of
             Tcscuc●
             &
             Tacuba
             ,
             where
             Tlacaellec
             was
             President
             in
             the
             election
             ,
             where
             by
             all
             their
             voices
             Tlacaellec
             was
             chosen
             ,
             as
             deserving
             this
             charge
             better
             then
             any
             other
             .
             Yet
             he
             refused
             it
             ,
             perswading
             them
             by
             pertinent
             reasons
             ,
             that
             they
             shuld
             choose
             another
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             better
             ,
             and
             more
             expedient
             to
             have
             another
             king
             ,
             and
             he
             to
             be
             his
             instrument
             and
             assistant
             ,
             as
             hee
             had
             beene
             till
             then
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             lay
             the
             whole
             burthen
             vpon
             him
             ,
             for
             that
             he
             held
             himselfe
             no
             lesse
             bound
             for
             the
             Common-weale
             ,
             then
             if
             hee
             were
             king
             .
             It
             is
             a
             rare
             ▪
             thing
             to
             refuse
             principalitie
             and
             commaund
             ,
             and
             to
             indure
             the
             paine
             and
             the
             care
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             reape
             the
             honour
             .
             There
             are
             few
             that
             will
             yeeld
             vp
             the
             power
             and
             authority
             ,
             which
             they
             may
             hold
             ,
             were
             it
             profitable
             to
             the
             common-weale
             .
             This
             Barbarian
             did
             heerein
             exceed
             the
             wisest
             amongst
             the
             Greekes
             and
             Romans
             ,
             and
             it
             may
             be
             a
             lesson
             to
             Alexander
             and
             
               Iulius
               Caesar
            
             ,
             whereof
             the
             one
             held
             it
             little
             to
             command
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             putting
             his
             most
             deere
             and
             faithfull
             servants
             to
             death
             vpon
             some
             small
             iealosies
             of
             rule
             and
             empire
             :
             and
             the
             other
             declared
             himselfe
             enemy
             to
             his
             country
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             if
             it
             were
             lawfull
             to
             do
             any
             thing
             against
             law
             and
             reason
             ,
             it
             was
             for
             a
             kingdome
             :
             such
             is
             the
             thirst
             and
             desire
             of
             commaund
             .
             Although
             this
             acte
             of
             Tlacael●e●●
             might
             well
             proceede
             from
             too
             great
             a
             confidence
             of
             
             himselfe
             ,
             seeming
             to
             him
             ,
             though
             he
             were
             not
             king
             ,
             yet
             in
             a
             maner
             ,
             that
             he
             commanded
             kings
             ,
             suffering
             him
             to
             carry
             certaine
             markes
             ,
             as
             a
             Tiara
             or
             ornament
             for
             the
             head
             ,
             which
             belonged
             onely
             to
             themselves
             .
             Yet
             this
             act
             deserves
             greater
             commendation
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             well
             considered
             of
             ,
             in
             that
             he
             held
             opinion
             to
             be
             better
             able
             to
             serve
             his
             Common-weale
             as
             a
             subiect
             ,
             then
             being
             a
             soveraigne
             Lord.
             And
             as
             in
             a
             comedie
             he
             deserves
             most
             commendation
             ,
             that
             represents
             the
             personage
             that
             importes
             most
             ,
             bee
             it
             of
             a
             sheepheard
             or
             a
             peasant
             ,
             and
             leaves
             the
             King
             or
             Captaine
             to
             him
             that
             can
             performe
             it
             :
             So
             in
             good
             Philosophy
             ,
             men
             ought
             to
             have
             a
             special
             regard
             to
             the
             common
             good
             ,
             and
             apply
             themselves
             to
             that
             office
             and
             place
             which
             they
             best
             vnderstand
             .
             But
             this
             philosophie
             is
             farre
             from
             that
             which
             is
             practised
             at
             this
             day
             .
             But
             let
             vs
             returne
             to
             our
             discourse
             ,
             and
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             recompence
             of
             his
             modestie
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             respect
             which
             the
             Mexicaine
             Electors
             bare
             him
             ,
             they
             demanded
             of
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             (
             that
             seeing
             hee
             would
             not
             raigne
             ,
             )
             whom
             he
             thought
             most
             fit
             :
             Wherevpon
             hee
             gave
             his
             voice
             to
             a
             sonne
             of
             the
             deceased
             king
             ,
             who
             was
             then
             very
             yong
             ,
             called
             Ticocic
             :
             but
             they
             replied
             that
             his
             shoulders
             were
             very
             weake
             to
             beare
             so
             heavy
             a
             burthen
             .
             Tlacaellec
             answered
             ,
             that
             his
             were
             there
             to
             helpe
             him
             to
             beare
             the
             burthen
             ,
             as
             he
             had
             done
             to
             the
             deceased
             :
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             they
             tooke
             their
             resolution
             ,
             and
             Tico●ic
             was
             chosen
             ,
             to
             whom
             were
             done
             all
             the
             accustomed
             ceremonies
             .
          
           
             They
             pierced
             his
             nosthrils
             ,
             and
             for
             an
             ornament
             put
             an
             Emerald
             therein
             :
             and
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             in
             the
             Mexicane
             bookes
             ,
             this
             king
             is
             noted
             by
             his
             nosthrills
             pierced
             .
             Hee
             differed
             much
             from
             his
             father
             and
             predecessor
             ,
             being
             noted
             for
             a
             coward
             ,
             and
             not
             valiant
             .
             He
             went
             
             to
             make
             warre
             for
             his
             coronation
             ,
             in
             a
             province
             that
             was
             rebelled
             ,
             where
             he
             lost
             more
             of
             his
             own
             men
             then
             hee
             tooke
             captives
             ;
             yet
             he
             returned
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             hee
             brought
             the
             number
             of
             captives
             required
             for
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             his
             coronation
             ,
             and
             so
             hee
             was
             crowned
             with
             great
             solemnitie
             .
             But
             the
             Mexicaines
             discontented
             to
             have
             a
             king
             so
             little
             disposed
             to
             warre
             ,
             practised
             to
             hasten
             his
             death
             by
             poison
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             hee
             continued
             not
             above
             foure
             yeares
             in
             the
             kingdome
             :
             whereby
             wee
             see
             that
             the
             children
             do
             not
             alwaies
             follow
             the
             blood
             and
             valour
             of
             their
             fathers
             ;
             and
             the
             greater
             the
             glorie
             of
             the
             predecessors
             hath
             beene
             ,
             the
             more
             odious
             is
             the
             weakenes
             and
             cowardise
             of
             such
             that
             succeed
             them
             in
             command
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             merit
             .
             But
             this
             losse
             was
             well
             repaired
             by
             a
             brother
             of
             the
             deceased
             ,
             who
             was
             also
             sonne
             to
             great
             Moteçuma
             ,
             called
             Axayaca
             ,
             who
             was
             likewise
             chosen
             by
             the
             advice
             of
             Tlacacllec
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             happened
             better
             then
             before
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             death
             of
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             and
             the
             deedes
             of
             Axayaca
             the
             seventh
             King
             of
             Mexicaines
             .
             CHAP.
             18.
             
          
           
             NOw
             was
             Tlacaellec
             very
             old
             ,
             who
             by
             reason
             of
             his
             age
             ,
             he
             was
             carried
             in
             a
             chaire
             vpon
             mens
             shoulders
             ,
             to
             assist
             in
             counsell
             when
             busines
             required
             .
             In
             the
             end
             hee
             fell
             sicke
             ,
             whenas
             the
             king
             (
             who
             was
             not
             yet
             crowned
             ,
             )
             did
             visit
             him
             often
             ,
             sheading
             many
             teares
             ,
             seeming
             to
             loose
             in
             him
             his
             father
             ,
             and
             the
             father
             of
             his
             countrie
             .
             Tlacaellec
             did
             most
             affectionately
             recommend
             his
             children
             vnto
             him
             ,
             especially
             the
             eldest
             ,
             who
             had
             shewed
             himselfe
             valiant
             in
             the
             former
             warres
             .
             The
             king
             promised
             to
             have
             regard
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             the
             more
             to
             comfort
             the
             olde
             man
             ,
             in
             his
             presence
             he
             gave
             him
             
             the
             charge
             and
             ensignes
             of
             Captaine
             Generall
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             preheminences
             of
             his
             father
             ;
             wherewith
             the
             olde
             man
             remained
             so
             well
             satisfied
             ,
             as
             with
             this
             content
             he
             ended
             his
             daies
             .
             If
             hee
             had
             not
             passed
             to
             another
             life
             ,
             they
             might
             have
             held
             themselves
             very
             happy
             ,
             seeing
             that
             of
             so
             poore
             and
             small
             a
             cittie
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             was
             borne
             ,
             he
             established
             by
             his
             valour
             and
             magnanimitie
             ,
             so
             great
             ,
             so
             rich
             ,
             and
             so
             potent
             a
             kingdome
             .
             The
             Mexicans
             made
             his
             funerall
             as
             the
             founder
             of
             that
             Empire
             ,
             more
             sumptuous
             and
             stately
             ,
             then
             they
             had
             done
             to
             any
             of
             their
             former
             kings
             .
             And
             presently
             after
             Axayaca
             ,
             (
             to
             appease
             the
             sorrow
             which
             all
             the
             people
             of
             Mexico
             shewed
             for
             the
             death
             of
             their
             captaine
             ,
             )
             he
             resolved
             to
             make
             the
             voyage
             necessary
             for
             his
             coronation
             .
             Hee
             therefore
             led
             his
             army
             with
             great
             expedition
             into
             the
             province
             of
             Tequantepec
             ,
             two
             hundred
             leagues
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             he
             gave
             battaile
             to
             a
             mighty
             army
             and
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             men
             assembled
             together
             ,
             as
             well
             out
             of
             that
             province
             ,
             as
             from
             their
             neighbours
             ,
             to
             oppose
             themselves
             against
             the
             Mexicans
             .
             The
             first
             of
             his
             Campe
             that
             advanced
             himselfe
             ,
             to
             the
             combate
             ,
             was
             the
             King
             himselfe
             ,
             defying
             his
             ennemies
             ,
             from
             whome
             hee
             made
             shewe
             to
             fly
             when
             they
             charged
             him
             ,
             vntill
             he
             had
             drawne
             them
             into
             an
             ambuscadoe
             ,
             where
             many
             souldiers
             lay
             hidden
             vnder
             straw
             ,
             who
             suddenly
             issued
             forth
             ,
             and
             they
             which
             fled
             ,
             turned
             head
             :
             so
             as
             they
             of
             Tiquantepec
             remained
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             them
             ,
             whom
             they
             charged
             furiously
             ,
             making
             a
             great
             slaughter
             of
             them
             :
             and
             following
             their
             victory
             ,
             they
             razed
             their
             citty
             and
             temple
             ,
             punishing
             all
             their
             neighbours
             rigorously
             .
             Then
             went
             they
             on
             farther
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             stay
             ,
             conquered
             to
             Guatulco
             ,
             the
             which
             is
             a
             port
             at
             this
             day
             well
             knowne
             in
             the
             South
             sea
             .
             Axayaca
             returned
             
             to
             Mexico
             with
             great
             and
             rich
             spoiles
             ,
             where
             he
             was
             honourably
             crowned
             ,
             with
             sumptuous
             and
             stately
             preparation
             of
             sacrifices
             ,
             tributes
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             ,
             whither
             many
             came
             to
             see
             his
             coronation
             .
             The
             Kings
             of
             Mexico
             received
             the
             crowne
             from
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             King
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             who
             had
             the
             preheminence
             .
             He
             made
             many
             other
             enterprises
             ,
             where
             he
             obtained
             great
             victories
             ,
             being
             alwaies
             the
             first
             to
             leade
             the
             army
             ,
             and
             to
             charge
             the
             enemy
             ;
             by
             the
             which
             hee
             purchased
             the
             name
             of
             a
             most
             valiant
             captaine
             :
             &
             not
             content
             to
             subdue
             strangers
             ,
             he
             also
             suppressed
             his
             subiects
             which
             had
             rebelled
             ,
             which
             never
             any
             of
             his
             predecessours
             ever
             could
             doe
             ,
             or
             durst
             attempt
             .
             We
             have
             already
             shewed
             how
             some
             seditious
             of
             Mexico
             had
             divided
             themselves
             from
             that
             common-weale
             ,
             and
             built
             a
             cittie
             neare
             vnto
             them
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Tlatelulco
             ,
             whereas
             now
             saint
             Iaques
             is
             .
          
           
             These
             being
             revolted
             ,
             held
             a
             faction
             aparte
             ,
             and
             encreased
             and
             multiplied
             much
             ,
             refusing
             to
             acknowledge
             the
             kings
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             nor
             to
             yeeld
             them
             obedience
             .
             The
             king
             Axayaca
             sent
             to
             advise
             them
             ,
             not
             to
             live
             divided
             ,
             but
             being
             of
             one
             bloud
             ,
             and
             one
             people
             ,
             to
             ioyne
             together
             ,
             and
             acknowledge
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             :
             wherevpon
             the
             Lorde
             of
             Tlatelulco
             made
             an
             aunswere
             full
             of
             pride
             and
             disdaine
             ,
             defieng
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             to
             single
             combate
             with
             himselfe
             :
             and
             presently
             mustred
             his
             men
             ,
             commaunding
             some
             of
             them
             to
             hide
             themselves
             in
             the
             weeds
             of
             the
             Lake
             ;
             and
             the
             better
             to
             deceive
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             he
             commaunded
             them
             to
             take
             the
             shapes
             of
             ravens
             ,
             geese
             ,
             and
             other
             beasts
             ,
             as
             frogs
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             ,
             supposing
             by
             this
             meanes
             to
             surprise
             the
             Mexicans
             as
             they
             should
             passe
             by
             the
             waies
             and
             cawsies
             of
             the
             Lake
             .
             Having
             knowledge
             of
             this
             defie
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             adversaries
             
             policie
             ,
             he
             divided
             his
             army
             ,
             giving
             a
             part
             to
             his
             generall
             ,
             the
             sonne
             of
             Tlacaellec
             ,
             commaunding
             him
             to
             charge
             this
             ambuscadoe
             ,
             in
             the
             Lake
             ;
             and
             he
             with
             the
             rest
             of
             his
             people
             ,
             by
             an
             vnfrequented
             way
             ,
             went
             and
             incamped
             before
             Tlatelulco
             .
             Presently
             hee
             called
             him
             who
             had
             defied
             him
             ,
             to
             performe
             his
             promise
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             two
             Lordes
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             Tlatelulco
             advaunced
             ,
             they
             commaunded
             their
             subiects
             not
             to
             moove
             ,
             vntill
             they
             had
             seene
             who
             should
             be
             conquerour
             ,
             which
             was
             done
             ,
             and
             presently
             the
             two
             Lordes
             incountered
             valiantly
             ,
             where
             having
             fought
             long
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             the
             Lorde
             of
             Tlatelulco
             was
             forced
             to
             turne
             his
             backe
             ,
             being
             vnable
             to
             indure
             the
             furious
             charge
             of
             the
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
             Those
             of
             Tlatelulco
             seeing
             their
             captaine
             flie
             ,
             fainted
             ,
             &
             fled
             likewise
             ,
             but
             the
             Mexicans
             following
             them
             at
             the
             heeles
             ,
             charged
             them
             furiously
             ;
             yet
             the
             Lord
             of
             Tlatelulco
             escaped
             not
             the
             hands
             of
             Axayaca
             ,
             for
             thinking
             to
             save
             himselfe
             ,
             he
             fled
             to
             the
             toppe
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             but
             Axayaca
             folowed
             him
             so
             neere
             ,
             as
             he
             seised
             on
             him
             with
             great
             force
             ,
             and
             threw
             him
             from
             the
             toppe
             to
             the
             bottome
             ,
             and
             after
             set
             fire
             on
             the
             Temple
             ,
             and
             the
             cittie
             .
             Whilest
             this
             passed
             at
             Tlatelulco
             ,
             the
             Mexicane
             generall
             was
             very
             hote
             in
             the
             revenge
             of
             those
             that
             pretended
             to
             defeate
             him
             by
             pollicie
             ,
             &
             after
             he
             had
             forced
             them
             to
             yeelde
             ,
             and
             to
             crie
             for
             mercy
             ,
             the
             Generall
             sayde
             he
             would
             not
             pardon
             them
             ,
             vntil
             they
             had
             first
             performed
             the
             offices
             of
             those
             figures
             they
             represented
             ,
             and
             therfore
             he
             would
             have
             them
             crie
             like
             frogges
             and
             ravens
             ,
             every
             one
             according
             to
             the
             figure
             which
             he
             had
             vndertaken
             ,
             else
             they
             had
             no
             composition
             :
             which
             thing
             he
             did
             to
             mocke
             them
             with
             their
             owne
             policie
             .
             Feare
             and
             necessitie
             be
             perfect
             teachers
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             did
             sing
             and
             crie
             with
             all
             the
             differences
             of
             voyces
             that
             were
             commaunded
             
             them
             ,
             to
             save
             their
             lives
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             much
             grieved
             at
             the
             sport
             their
             enimies
             made
             at
             them
             .
             They
             say
             that
             vnto
             this
             day
             ,
             the
             Mexicans
             vse
             to
             ieast
             at
             the
             Tlatelulcans
             ,
             which
             they
             beare
             impatiently
             ,
             when
             they
             putte
             them
             in
             minde
             of
             this
             singing
             and
             crying
             of
             beasts
             .
             King
             Axayaca
             tooke
             pleasure
             at
             this
             scorne
             and
             disgrace
             ,
             and
             presently
             after
             they
             retourned
             to
             Mexico
             with
             great
             ioy
             .
             This
             King
             was
             esteemed
             for
             one
             of
             the
             best
             that
             had
             commaunded
             in
             Mexico
             .
             Hee
             raigned
             eleaven
             yeares
             ,
             and
             one
             succeeded
             that
             was
             much
             inferiour
             vnto
             him
             in
             valour
             and
             vertue
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             deedes
             of
             Autzol
             the
             eight
             King
             of
             Mexico
             .
             CHAP.
             19.
             
          
           
             AMong
             the
             foure
             Electors
             that
             had
             power
             to
             chuse
             whome
             they
             pleased
             to
             be
             king
             ,
             there
             was
             one
             indued
             with
             many
             perfections
             ,
             named
             Autzol
             .
             This
             man
             was
             chosen
             by
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             this
             election
             was
             very
             pleasing
             to
             all
             the
             people
             :
             for
             besides
             that
             he
             was
             valiant
             ,
             all
             held
             him
             curteous
             and
             affable
             to
             every
             man
             ,
             which
             is
             one
             of
             the
             chiefe
             qualities
             required
             in
             them
             that
             commaund
             ,
             to
             purchase
             love
             and
             respect
             .
             To
             celebrate
             the
             feast
             of
             his
             coronation
             ,
             hee
             resolved
             to
             make
             a
             voyage
             ,
             and
             to
             punish
             the
             pride
             of
             those
             of
             Quaxulatlan
             ,
             a
             very
             rich
             and
             plentifull
             province
             ,
             and
             at
             this
             day
             the
             chiefe
             of
             new
             Spaine
             .
             They
             had
             robbed
             his
             officers
             and
             stewards
             ,
             that
             carried
             the
             tribute
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             therwithall
             were
             rebelled
             .
             There
             was
             great
             difficulty
             to
             reduce
             this
             Nation
             to
             obedience
             ,
             lying
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             an
             arme
             of
             the
             sea
             stopt
             the
             Mexicans
             passage
             :
             to
             passe
             the
             which
             AutZol
             (
             with
             a
             strange
             device
             and
             industry
             )
             caused
             an
             Iland
             to
             be
             made
             in
             the
             water
             ,
             of
             faggots
             ,
             earth
             ,
             and
             
             other
             matter
             ;
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             both
             hee
             and
             his
             men
             might
             passe
             to
             the
             enemy
             ,
             where
             giving
             them
             battell
             ,
             he
             conquered
             them
             ,
             and
             punished
             them
             at
             his
             pleasure
             .
             Then
             returned
             hee
             vnto
             Mexico
             in
             triumph
             ,
             and
             with
             great
             riches
             ,
             to
             bee
             crowned
             King
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             custome
             .
             Autzol
             extended
             the
             limites
             of
             his
             kingdome
             farre
             ,
             by
             many
             conquests
             ,
             even
             vnto
             Guatimalla
             ,
             which
             is
             three
             hundred
             leagues
             from
             Mexico
             .
             He
             was
             no
             lesse
             liberall
             than
             valiant
             :
             for
             whenas
             the
             tributes
             arrived
             ,
             (
             which
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             )
             came
             in
             great
             aboundaunce
             ,
             hee
             went
             foorth
             of
             his
             pallace
             ,
             gathering
             together
             all
             the
             people
             into
             one
             place
             ,
             then
             commaunded
             he
             to
             bring
             all
             the
             tributes
             ,
             which
             hee
             divided
             to
             those
             that
             had
             neede
             .
             To
             the
             poore
             hee
             gave
             stuffes
             to
             make
             apparrell
             ,
             and
             meate
             ,
             and
             whatsoever
             they
             had
             neede
             of
             in
             great
             aboundaunce
             ,
             and
             things
             of
             value
             ,
             as
             golde
             ,
             silver
             ,
             iewels
             ,
             and
             feathers
             ,
             were
             divided
             amongest
             the
             Captaines
             ,
             souldiers
             ,
             and
             servants
             of
             his
             house
             ,
             according
             to
             every
             mans
             merite
             .
             This
             AutZol
             was
             likewise
             a
             great
             polititian
             ,
             hee
             pulled
             downe
             the
             houses
             ill
             built
             ,
             and
             built
             others
             very
             sumptuous
             .
             It
             seemed
             vnto
             him
             that
             the
             city
             of
             Mexico
             had
             too
             litle
             water
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Lake
             was
             very
             muddy
             ,
             and
             therefore
             hee
             resolved
             to
             let
             in
             a
             great
             course
             of
             water
             ,
             which
             they
             of
             Cuyoacan
             vsed
             .
             For
             this
             cause
             he
             called
             the
             chiefe
             man
             of
             the
             cittie
             vnto
             him
             ,
             being
             a
             famous
             sorcerer
             ,
             having
             propounded
             his
             meaning
             vnto
             him
             ,
             the
             sorcerer
             wished
             him
             to
             be
             well
             advised
             what
             hee
             did
             ,
             being
             a
             matter
             of
             great
             difficulty
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             vnderstoode
             ,
             if
             he
             drew
             the
             river
             out
             of
             her
             ordinary
             course
             ,
             making
             it
             passe
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             hee
             would
             drowne
             the
             citty
             .
             The
             king
             supposed
             these
             excuses
             were
             but
             to
             frustrate
             the
             effect
             of
             his
             desseigne
             ,
             being
             therefore
             in
             choler
             ,
             he
             dismissed
             him
             
             home
             ;
             and
             a
             few
             dayes
             after
             hee
             sent
             a
             provost
             to
             Cuyoacan
             ,
             to
             take
             this
             Sorcerer
             :
             who
             having
             vnderstanding
             for
             what
             intent
             the
             kings
             officers
             came
             ,
             hee
             caused
             them
             to
             enter
             his
             house
             ,
             and
             then
             he
             presented
             himself
             vnto
             them
             in
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             terrible
             Eagle
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             provost
             and
             his
             companions
             being
             terrified
             ,
             they
             returned
             without
             taking
             him
             .
             AutZol
             incensed
             herewith
             sent
             others
             ,
             to
             whome
             hee
             presented
             himselfe
             in
             forme
             of
             a
             furious
             tygre
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             durst
             not
             touch
             him
             .
             The
             third
             came
             ,
             and
             they
             found
             him
             in
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             horrible
             serpent
             ,
             whereat
             they
             were
             much
             afraide
             .
             The
             king
             mooved
             the
             more
             with
             these
             dooings
             ,
             sent
             to
             tell
             them
             of
             Cuyoacan
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             brought
             not
             the
             sorcerer
             bound
             vnto
             him
             ,
             he
             would
             raze
             their
             citty
             .
             For
             feare
             whereof
             ,
             or
             whether
             it
             were
             of
             his
             owne
             free
             will
             ,
             or
             being
             forced
             by
             the
             people
             ,
             he
             suffered
             himselfe
             to
             be
             led
             to
             the
             king
             ,
             who
             presently
             caused
             him
             to
             be
             strangled
             ,
             and
             then
             did
             he
             put
             his
             resolution
             in
             practise
             ,
             forcing
             a
             chanell
             whereby
             the
             water
             might
             passe
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             whereby
             hee
             brought
             a
             great
             current
             of
             water
             into
             the
             Lake
             ,
             which
             they
             brought
             with
             great
             ceremonies
             and
             superstitions
             ,
             having
             priests
             casting
             incense
             along
             the
             banks
             ,
             others
             sacrificed
             quailes
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             bloud
             of
             them
             sprinckled
             the
             channell
             bankes
             ,
             others
             sounding
             of
             cornets
             ,
             accompanied
             the
             water
             with
             their
             musicke
             .
             One
             of
             the
             chiefe
             went
             attired
             in
             a
             habite
             like
             to
             their
             goddesse
             of
             the
             water
             ,
             and
             all
             saluted
             her
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             shee
             was
             welcome
             .
             All
             which
             things
             are
             painted
             in
             the
             Annales
             of
             Mexico
             :
             which
             booke
             is
             now
             at
             Rome
             in
             the
             holy
             Library
             ,
             or
             Vaticane
             ,
             where
             a
             father
             of
             our
             company
             ,
             that
             was
             come
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             did
             see
             it
             ,
             and
             other
             histories
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             did
             expound
             to
             the
             keeper
             of
             his
             Holinesse
             Library
             ,
             taking
             great
             delight
             to
             vnderstand
             
             this
             booke
             ,
             which
             before
             hee
             could
             never
             comprehend
             .
             Finally
             ,
             the
             water
             was
             brought
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             but
             it
             came
             in
             such
             aboundaunce
             ,
             that
             it
             had
             welneere
             drowned
             the
             cittie
             ,
             as
             was
             foretold
             :
             and
             in
             effect
             it
             did
             ruine
             a
             great
             parte
             thereof
             ,
             but
             it
             was
             presently
             prevented
             by
             the
             industry
             of
             Autzol
             ,
             who
             caused
             an
             issue
             to
             be
             made
             to
             draw
             foorth
             the
             water
             :
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             hee
             repaired
             the
             buildings
             that
             were
             fallen
             ,
             with
             an
             exquisite
             worke
             ,
             being
             before
             but
             poore
             cotages
             .
             Thus
             he
             left
             the
             citty
             invironed
             with
             water
             ,
             like
             another
             Venice
             ,
             and
             very
             well
             built
             :
             hee
             raigned
             eleaven
             yeares
             ,
             and
             ended
             with
             the
             last
             and
             greatest
             successor
             of
             all
             the
             Mexicans
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             election
             of
             great
             Moteçuma
             ,
             the
             last
             king
             of
             Mexico
             .
             
               CHAP.
               20.
            
             
          
           
             WHen
             the
             Spaniards
             entred
             new
             Spaine
             ,
             being
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lorde
             one
             thousand
             five
             hundred
             and
             eighteen
             ,
             Moteçuma
             second
             of
             that
             name
             ,
             was
             the
             last
             king
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             I
             say
             the
             last
             ,
             although
             they
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             after
             his
             death
             ,
             chose
             another
             king
             ,
             yea
             in
             the
             life
             of
             the
             same
             Moteçuma
             ,
             whome
             they
             declared
             an
             enemy
             to
             his
             country
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             see
             heereafter
             .
             But
             hee
             that
             succeeded
             him
             ,
             and
             hee
             that
             fell
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             Marquise
             de
             Valle
             ,
             had
             but
             the
             names
             and
             titles
             of
             Kings
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             kingdome
             was
             in
             a
             maner
             al
             yeelded
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             :
             so
             as
             with
             reason
             we
             account
             Moteçuma
             for
             the
             last
             king
             ,
             and
             so
             hee
             came
             to
             the
             periode
             of
             the
             Mexicaines
             power
             and
             greatnesse
             ,
             which
             is
             admirable
             being
             happened
             among
             Barbarians
             :
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             and
             for
             that
             this
             was
             the
             season
             ,
             that
             God
             had
             chosen
             to
             reveale
             vnto
             them
             the
             knowledge
             of
             his
             
             Gospel
             ,
             and
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             I
             will
             r●
             ▪
             late
             more
             at
             large
             the
             actes
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             then
             of
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             Before
             he
             came
             to
             be
             king
             ,
             he
             was
             by
             disposition
             ,
             ve●
             ry
             grave
             and
             stayed
             ,
             and
             spake
             little
             ,
             so
             as
             when
             he●
             gave
             his
             opinion
             in
             the
             privy
             counsell
             ,
             whereas
             he
             assisted
             ,
             his
             speeches
             and
             discourses
             made
             every
             one
             to
             admire
             him
             ,
             so
             as
             even
             then
             he
             was
             feared
             and
             respected
             .
             He
             retired
             himselfe
             vsually
             into
             a
             Chappell
             ,
             appointed
             for
             him
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             Vitziliputzli
             ,
             where
             they
             said
             their
             Idoll
             spake
             vnto
             him
             ;
             and
             for
             this
             cause
             hee
             was
             helde
             very
             religious
             and
             devout
             .
             For
             these
             perfections
             then
             ,
             being
             most
             noble
             and
             of
             great
             courage
             ,
             his
             election
             was
             short
             and
             easie
             ,
             as
             a
             man
             vpon
             whom
             al
             mens
             eyes
             were
             fixed
             ,
             as
             woorthy
             of
             such
             a
             charge
             .
             Having
             intelligence
             of
             this
             election
             ,
             hee
             hidde
             himselfe
             in
             this
             chappell
             of
             the
             Temple
             ,
             whether
             it
             were
             by
             iudgement
             ,
             (
             apprehending
             so
             heavy
             and
             hard
             a
             burthen
             )
             as
             to
             governe
             such
             a
             people
             )
             or
             rather
             as
             I
             beleeve
             throgh
             hypocrisie
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             he
             desired
             not
             Empery
             :
             In
             the
             end
             they
             found
             him
             ,
             leading
             him
             to
             the
             place
             of
             councell
             ,
             whither
             they
             accompanied
             him
             with
             all
             possible
             ioy
             :
             hee
             marched
             with
             such
             a
             gravitie
             ,
             as
             they
             all
             sayd
             the
             name
             of
             Moteçuma
             agreed
             very
             wel
             with
             his
             nature
             ,
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             an
             angry
             Lord.
             The
             electors
             did
             him
             great
             reverence
             ,
             giving
             him
             notice
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             chosen
             king
             :
             from
             thence
             he
             was
             ledde
             before
             the
             harth
             of
             their
             gods
             ,
             to
             give
             incense
             ,
             where
             he
             offered
             sacrifices
             in
             drawing
             bloud
             from
             his
             eares
             ,
             &
             the
             calves
             of
             his
             legges
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             custome
             .
             They
             attired
             him
             with
             the
             royall
             ornaments
             ,
             and
             pierced
             the
             gristle
             of
             his
             nosthrils
             ,
             hanging
             thereat
             a
             rich
             emerald
             ,
             a
             barbarous
             &
             troublous
             custome
             ,
             but
             the
             desire
             of
             rule
             ,
             made
             
             all
             paine
             light
             and
             easie
             .
             Being
             seated
             in
             his
             throne
             ,
             he
             gave
             andience
             to
             the
             Orations
             and
             Speeches
             that
             were
             made
             vnto
             him
             ,
             which
             according
             vnto
             their
             custome
             were
             eloquent
             and
             artificiall
             .
             The
             first
             was
             pronounced
             by
             the
             king
             of
             Tescuco
             ,
             which
             being
             preserved
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             was
             lately
             delivered
             ,
             &
             very
             worthy
             to
             be
             heard
             ,
             I
             will
             set
             it
             downe
             word
             by
             word
             ,
             and
             thus
             hee
             sayde
             :
             
               The
               concordance
               and
               vnitie
               of
               voyces
               vpon
               thy
               election
               ,
               is
               a
               sufficient
               testimonie
               (
               most
               noble
               yong
               man
               )
               of
               the
               happines
               the
               realme
               shall
               receive
               ,
               as
               well
               deserving
               to
               be
               commaunded
               by
               thee
               ,
               as
               also
               for
               the
               generall
               applause
               which
               all
               doe
               shew
               by
               meanes
               thereof
               .
               Wherein
               they
               have
               great
               reason
               ,
               for
               the
               Empire
               of
            
             Mexico
             
               doth
               alreadie
               so
               farre
               extend
               it selfe
               ,
               that
               to
               governe
               a
               world
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               ,
               and
               to
               beare
               so
               heavie
               a
               burthen
               ,
               it
               requires
               no
               lesse
               dexteritie
               and
               courage
               ,
               than
               that
               which
               is
               resident
               in
               thy
               firme
               and
               valiant
               heart
               ,
               nor
               of
               lesse
               wisedome
               and
               iudgement
               than
               thine
               .
               I
               see
               and
               know
               plainely
               ,
               that
               the
               mightie
               God
               loveth
               this
               Cittie
               ,
               seeing
               he
               hath
               given
               vnderstanding
               to
               choose
               what
               was
               fit
               .
               For
               who
               will
               not
               beleeve
               that
               a
               Prince
               ,
               who
               before
               his
               raigne
               had
               pierced
               the
               nine
               vaultes
               of
               heaven
               ,
               should
               not
               likewise
               nowe
               obtaine
               those
               things
               that
               are
               earthlie
               to
               releeve
               his
               people
               ,
               aiding
               himselfe
               with
               his
               best
               iudgement
               ,
               being
               therevnto
               bound
               by
               the
               duetie
               and
               charge
               of
               a
               king
               .
               Who
               will
               likewise
               beleeve
               that
               the
               great
               courage
               which
               thou
               hast
               alwaies
               valiantly
               shewed
               in
               matters
               of
               importance
               ,
               shuld
               now
               faile
               thee
               in
               matters
               of
               greatest
               need
               ?
               Who
               will
               not
               perswade
               himselfe
               ▪
               but
               the
               Mexicane
               Empire
               is
               come
               to
               the
               height
               of
               their
               soveraignetie
               ,
               seeing
               the
               Lorde
               of
               things
               created
               hath
               imparted
               so
               great
               graces
               vnto
               thee
               ,
               that
               with
               thy
               looke
               onelie
               thou
               breedest
               admiration
               in
               them
               that
               beholde
               thee
               ?
               Reioyce
               then
               ,
               O
               happy
               land
               ,
               to
               whom
               the
               Creator
               hath
               given
               a
               Prince
               ,
               as
               a
               firme
               pillar
               to
               support
               thee
               ,
               which
               shall
               be
               thy
               father
               and
               thy
               defence
               ,
               by
               whom
               thou
               shalt
               be
               succoured
               
               at
               neede
               ,
               who
               wil
               be
               more
               than
               a
               brother
               to
               his
               subiects
               ,
               for
               his
               pietie
               and
               clemencie
               .
               Thou
               hast
               a
               king
               ,
               who
               i●
               regard
               of
               his
               estate
               is
               not
               inclined
               to
               delights
               ,
               or
               will
               lie
               stretched
               out
               vpon
               his
               bed
               ,
               occupied
               in
               pleasures
               and
               vices
               ;
               but
               contrariwise
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               his
               sweete
               and
               pleasant
               sleepe
               ,
               hee
               will
               sodainely
               awake
               ,
               for
               the
               care
               he
               must
               have
               over
               thee
               ,
               and
               will
               not
               feele
               the
               taste
               of
               the
               most
               savourie
               ●eates
               ,
               having
               his
               spirites
               transported
               with
               the
               imagination
               of
               thy
               good
               .
               Tell
               me
               then
               (
               O
               happie
               realme
               )
               if
               I
               have
               not
               reason
               to
               saie
               that
               〈◊〉
               oughtest
               reioyce
               ,
               having
               found
               such
               a
               King
               :
               And
               th●●●●ble
               Yong
               man
               ,
               and
               our
               most
               mightie
               Lorde
               ,
               be
               confident
               ,
               and
               of
               ●
               good
               courage
               ,
               that
               seeing
               the
               Lorde
               of
               things
               created
               hath
               given
               thee
               this
               charge
               ,
               hee
               will
               also
               give
               thee
               for●●
               and
               courage
               to
               mannage
               it
               :
               and
               thou
               maiest
               well
               hope
               ,
               th●●
               he
               which
               in
               times
               past
               hath
               vsed
               so
               great
               bountie
               towardes
               thee
               ,
               wil
               not
               now
               denie
               thee
               his
               greater
               gifts
               ,
               seeing
               he
               hath
               given
               thee
               so
               great
               a
               charge
               ,
               which
               I
               wish
               thee
               to
               enioy
               ma●●
               yeares
               .
            
             King
             Moteçuma
             was
             very
             attentive
             to
             this
             Discourse
             ,
             which
             being
             ended
             ,
             they
             say
             he
             was
             so
             troubled
             ,
             that
             indevouring
             thrice
             to
             answer
             him
             ,
             hee
             could
             not
             speake
             ,
             being
             overcome
             with
             teares
             ,
             which
             ioy
             and
             content
             doe
             vsually
             cause
             ,
             in
             signe
             of
             great
             humilitie
             .
             In
             the
             end
             being
             come
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             he
             spake
             brie●ly
             ,
             
               I
               were
               too
               blinde
               ,
               good
               king
               of
            
             Tescuco
             ,
             
               if
               I
               didde
               not
               know
               ,
               that
               what
               thou
               hast
               spoken
               vnto
               me
               ,
               proceeded
               of
               meere
               favour
               ,
               it
               pleaseth
               you
               to
               shew
               me
               ,
               seeing
               among
               so
               m●nie
               noble
               &
               valiant
               men
               within
               this
               realme
               ,
               you
               have
               made
               ch●●●●
               of
               the
               le●st
               sufficient
               :
               and
               in
               trueth
               ,
               I
               finde
               my selfe
               so
               incapable
               of
               a
               charge
               of
               so
               great
               importance
               ,
               that
               I
               know
               not
               what
               to
               doe
               ,
               but
               to
               beseech
               the
               Creator
               of
               all
               created
               things
               ,
               that
               hee
               will
               favour
               mee
               ,
               and
               I
               intreate
               you
               all
               to
               pray
               vnto
               him
               for
               me
               .
            
             These
             wordes
             vttered
             ,
             hee
             beganne
             againe
             to
             weepe
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             How
             Moteçuma
             ordered
             the
             service
             of
             his
             house
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             warre
             hee
             made
             for
             his
             coronation
             .
             
               CHA.
               21
            
          
           
             HE
             that
             in
             his
             election
             made
             such
             shew
             of
             humilitie
             and
             mildenes
             ,
             seeing
             himselfe
             king
             ,
             beganne
             presently
             to
             discover
             his
             aspiring
             thoughts
             .
             The
             first
             was
             ,
             he
             commaunded
             that
             no
             plebeian
             should
             serve
             in
             his
             house
             ,
             nor
             beare
             any
             royall
             office
             ,
             as
             his
             predecesfours
             had
             vsed
             till
             then
             ;
             blaming
             them
             that
             would
             be
             served
             by
             men
             of
             base
             condition
             ,
             commaunding
             that
             all
             the
             noble
             and
             most
             famous
             men
             of
             his
             realme
             shoulde
             live
             within
             his
             pallace
             ,
             and
             exercise
             the
             offices
             of
             his
             court
             ,
             and
             house
             .
             Wherevnto
             an
             olde
             man
             of
             great
             authoritie
             (
             who
             had
             sometimes
             beene
             his
             Schoolemaister
             )
             opposed
             himselfe
             ,
             advising
             him
             ,
             to
             be
             carefull
             what
             hee
             did
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             thrust
             himselfe
             into
             the
             danger
             of
             a
             great
             inconvenience
             ,
             in
             separating
             himselfe
             from
             the
             vulgare
             and
             common
             people
             ,
             so
             as
             they
             should
             not
             dare
             to
             looke
             him
             in
             the
             face
             ,
             seeing
             themselves
             so
             reiected
             by
             him
             .
             He
             answered
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             his
             resolution
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             would
             not
             allow
             the
             plebeians
             to
             goe
             thus
             mingled
             among
             the
             Nobles
             ,
             as
             they
             had
             do
             one
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             the
             service
             they
             did
             ,
             was
             according
             to
             their
             condition
             ,
             so
             as
             the
             kings
             got
             no
             reputation
             ,
             and
             thus
             he
             continued
             firme
             in
             his
             resolution
             .
             Hee
             presently
             commanded
             his
             counsell
             to
             dismisse
             all
             the
             pleb●ians
             from
             their
             charges
             and
             offices
             ,
             as
             well
             those
             of
             his
             houshold
             as
             of
             his
             court
             ,
             and
             to
             provide
             Knightes
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             done
             .
             After
             he
             went
             in
             person
             to
             an
             enterprise
             necessary
             for
             his
             coronation
             .
             At
             that
             time
             a
             province
             lying
             farre
             off
             towards
             the
             North
             Ocean
             ,
             was
             revolted
             from
             the
             
             crowne
             ,
             whether
             he
             led
             the
             flower
             of
             his
             people
             ,
             well
             appointed
             .
             There
             hee
             warred
             with
             such
             valour
             and
             dexteritie
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             end
             he
             subdued
             all
             the
             province
             ,
             and
             punished
             the
             rebells
             severely
             ,
             returning
             with
             a
             great
             number
             of
             captives
             for
             the
             sacrifices
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             spoiles
             .
             All
             the
             cities
             made
             him
             solemne
             receptions
             at
             his
             returne
             ,
             and
             the
             Lords
             thereof
             gave
             him
             water
             to
             wash
             ,
             performing
             the
             offices
             of
             servants
             ,
             a
             thing
             not
             vsed
             by
             any
             of
             his
             predecessors
             .
             Such
             was
             the
             feare
             and
             respect
             they
             bare
             him
             .
             In
             Mexico
             ,
             they
             made
             the
             feasts
             of
             his
             coronation
             with
             great
             preparations
             of
             dances
             ,
             comedies
             ,
             banquets
             ,
             lights
             ,
             and
             other
             inventions
             for
             many
             daies
             .
             And
             there
             came
             so
             great
             a
             wealth
             of
             tributes
             from
             all
             his
             countries
             ,
             that
             strangers
             vnknowne
             came
             to
             Mexico
             ,
             and
             their
             very
             enemies
             resorted
             in
             great
             numbers
             disguised
             to
             see
             these
             feasts
             ,
             as
             those
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             and
             Mechovacan
             :
             the
             which
             Moteçuma
             having
             discovered
             ,
             he
             commanded
             they
             should
             be
             lodged
             and
             gently
             intreated
             ,
             and
             honoured
             as
             his
             own
             person
             .
             He
             also
             made
             them
             goodly
             galleries
             like
             vnto
             his
             owne
             ,
             where
             they
             might
             see
             and
             behold
             the
             feasts
             .
             So
             they
             entred
             by
             night
             to
             those
             feasts
             ,
             as
             the
             king
             himselfe
             ,
             making
             their
             sportes
             and
             maskes
             .
             And
             for
             that
             I
             have
             made
             mention
             of
             these
             provinces
             ,
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             from
             the
             purpose
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             
               Mechovacan
               ,
               Tlascalla
            
             ,
             and
             Tapeaca
             ,
             would
             never
             yeelde
             to
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             but
             did
             alwaies
             fight
             valiantly
             against
             them
             ;
             yea
             ,
             sometimes
             the
             Mechovacans
             did
             vanquish
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             as
             also
             those
             of
             Tapeaca
             did
             .
             In
             which
             place
             ,
             the
             Marquise
             
               Don
               Ferrand
               Cortes
            
             ,
             after
             that
             he
             and
             the
             Spaniards
             were
             expelled
             Mexico
             ,
             pretended
             to
             build
             their
             first
             cittie
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             called
             (
             as
             I
             well
             remember
             ,
             )
             
               Segura
               de
               la
               Frontiere
            
             :
             But
             this
             peopling
             continued
             
             little
             :
             for
             having
             afterwards
             reconquered
             Mexico
             ,
             all
             the
             Spaniards
             went
             to
             inhabite
             there
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             those
             of
             
               Tapeaca
               ,
               Tlascalla
            
             ,
             and
             Mechovacan
             ,
             have
             beene
             alwaies
             enemies
             to
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             although
             Motoçuma
             said
             vnto
             Cortes
             ,
             that
             he
             did
             purposesy
             forbeare
             to
             subdue
             them
             ,
             to
             have
             occasion
             to
             exercise
             his
             men
             of
             warre
             ,
             and
             to
             take
             numbers
             of
             captives
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             behaviour
             and
             greatnes
             of
             Moteçuma
             .
             CHAP.
             22.
             
          
           
             THis
             King
             laboured
             to
             be
             respected
             ,
             yea
             ,
             to
             be
             worshiped
             as
             a
             god
             .
             No
             Plebeian
             might
             looke
             him
             in
             the
             face
             ;
             if
             he
             did
             ,
             he
             was
             punished
             with
             death
             :
             hee
             did
             never
             set
             his
             foote
             on
             the
             ground
             ,
             but
             was
             alwaies
             carried
             on
             the
             shoulders
             of
             Noblemen
             ;
             and
             if
             he
             lighted
             ,
             they
             laid
             rich
             tapestry
             whereon
             he
             did
             go
             .
             When
             hee
             made
             any
             voyage
             ,
             hee
             and
             the
             Noblemen
             went
             as
             it
             were
             in
             a
             parke
             compassed
             in
             for
             the
             nonce
             ,
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             people
             went
             without
             the
             parke
             ,
             invironing
             it
             in
             on
             every
             side
             ;
             hee
             never
             put
             on
             a
             garment
             twice
             ,
             nor
             did
             eate
             or
             drinke
             in
             one
             vessell
             or
             dish
             above
             once
             ;
             all
             must
             be
             new
             ,
             giving
             to
             his
             attendants
             that
             which
             had
             once
             served
             him
             :
             so
             as
             commonly
             they
             were
             rich
             and
             sumptuous
             .
             He
             was
             very
             carefull
             to
             have
             his
             lawes
             observed
             .
             And
             when
             he
             returned
             victor
             from
             any
             wa●●e
             ,
             he
             fained
             sometimes
             to
             go
             and
             take
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             then
             would
             he
             disguise
             himselfe
             ,
             to
             see
             if
             his
             people
             (
             supposing
             if
             he
             weare
             absent
             ,
             )
             would
             omitte
             any
             thing
             of
             the
             feast
             or
             reception
             :
             If
             there
             were
             any
             excesse
             or
             defect
             ,
             he
             then
             did
             punish
             it
             rigorously
             .
             And
             also
             to
             discerne
             how
             his
             ministers
             did
             execute
             their
             offices
             ,
             he
             often
             disguised
             himselfe
             ,
             offering
             guistes
             and
             
             presents
             to
             the
             iudges
             ,
             provoking
             them
             to
             do
             in
             iustice
             .
             If
             they
             offended
             ,
             they
             were
             presently
             punished
             with
             death
             ,
             without
             remission
             or
             respect
             ,
             were
             they
             Noblemen
             ,
             or
             his
             kinsmen
             ;
             yea
             ,
             his
             owne
             bretheren
             .
             He
             was
             little
             conversant
             with
             his
             people
             ,
             and
             seldome
             seene
             ,
             retyring
             himselfe
             most
             commonly
             to
             care
             for
             the
             government
             of
             his
             realme
             .
             Besides
             that
             ,
             hee
             was
             a
             great
             iusticier
             and
             very
             noble
             ,
             hee
             was
             very
             valiant
             and
             happy
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             hee
             obtained
             great
             victories
             ,
             and
             came
             to
             this
             greatnes
             ,
             as
             is
             written
             in
             the
             Spanish
             histories
             ,
             whereon
             it
             seemes
             needelesse
             to
             write
             more
             .
             I
             will
             onely
             have
             a
             care
             heereafter
             to
             write
             what
             the
             bookes
             and
             histories
             of
             the
             Indies
             make
             mention
             of
             ;
             the
             which
             the
             Spanish
             writers
             have
             not
             observed
             ,
             having
             not
             sufficiently
             vnderstood
             the
             secrets
             of
             this
             country
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             things
             very
             worthy
             to
             be
             knowne
             ,
             as
             we
             shall
             see
             heereafter
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             presages
             and
             strange
             prodigies
             which
             happened
             in
             Mexico
             before
             the
             fall
             of
             their
             Empire
             .
             CHAP.
             23.
             
          
           
             ALthough
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             forbids
             vs
             to
             give
             credite
             to
             signes
             and
             vaine
             prognostications
             ,
             
             and
             that
             S.
             Ierome
             doth
             admonish
             vs
             not
             to
             feare
             tokens
             from
             heaven
             ,
             
             as
             the
             Gentiles
             do
             :
             Yet
             the
             same
             Scripture
             teacheth
             vs
             ,
             that
             monstrous
             and
             prodigious
             signes
             are
             not
             altogether
             to
             bee
             contemned
             ,
             and
             that
             often
             they
             are
             fore-runners
             of
             some
             generall
             changes
             and
             chasticements
             which
             God
             will
             take
             ,
             as
             Eusebius
             notes
             well
             of
             Cesarea
             :
             
             For
             that
             the
             same
             Lord
             of
             heaven
             and
             earth
             ,
             sendes
             such
             prodiges
             and
             new
             things
             in
             heaven
             ,
             in
             the
             elements
             ,
             in
             beasts
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             other
             creatures
             ,
             
             that
             this
             might
             partly
             serve
             as
             an
             advertisement
             to
             men
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             paine
             and
             chastisement
             ,
             by
             the
             feare
             and
             amazement
             they
             bring
             .
             It
             is
             written
             in
             the
             second
             booke
             of
             Macabees
             ,
             that
             before
             that
             great
             change
             and
             persecution
             of
             the
             people
             of
             Israel
             :
             
             which
             was
             caused
             by
             the
             tyranny
             of
             Antiochus
             surnamed
             Epiphanes
             ,
             whome
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             call
             the
             roote
             of
             sinne
             ,
             there
             were
             seene
             for
             forty
             dayes
             together
             thorowout
             all
             Ierusalem
             ,
             great
             squadrons
             of
             horsemen
             in
             the
             ayre
             ,
             who
             with
             their
             armour
             guilt
             ,
             their
             lances
             and
             targets
             ,
             and
             vppon
             furious
             horses
             ,
             with
             their
             swordes
             drawne
             did
             strike
             ,
             
             skirmish
             and
             incounter
             one
             against
             the
             other
             :
             and
             they
             say
             that
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             Ierusalem
             seeing
             this
             ,
             they
             prayed
             to
             our
             Lord
             to
             appease
             his
             wrath
             ,
             and
             that
             these
             prodegies
             might
             turne
             to
             good
             .
             It
             is
             likewise
             written
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Wisedome
             ,
             
             That
             when
             God
             would
             drawe
             his
             people
             out
             of
             Egypt
             ,
             and
             punish
             the
             Egyptians
             ,
             some
             terrible
             &
             fearefull
             visions
             appeared
             vnto
             them
             ,
             as
             fires
             seene
             out
             of
             time
             in
             horrible
             formes
             .
             Ioseph
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             Iewishwarres
             ,
             sheweth
             many
             and
             great
             wonders
             going
             before
             the
             destruction
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             and
             the
             last
             captivitie
             of
             his
             wicked
             people
             ,
             whome
             God
             iustly
             abhorred
             :
             
             and
             Eusebius
             of
             Cesarea
             ,
             with
             others
             ,
             alleadge
             the
             same
             texts
             ,
             authorizing
             prognostications
             .
             The
             Histories
             are
             full
             of
             like
             observations
             in
             great
             changes
             of
             states
             and
             common-weales
             ,
             as
             
               Paulus
               Orosius
            
             witnesseth
             of
             many
             :
             and
             without
             doubt
             this
             observation
             is
             not
             vaine
             nor
             vnprofitable
             ;
             for
             although
             it
             be
             vanitie
             ,
             yea
             superstition
             ,
             defended
             by
             the
             lawe
             of
             our
             God
             ,
             lightly
             to
             beleeve
             these
             signes
             and
             tokens
             :
             yet
             in
             matters
             of
             great
             moment
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             changes
             of
             nations
             ,
             kingdoms
             ,
             and
             notable
             laws
             .
             It
             is
             no
             vaine
             thing
             ,
             but
             rather
             certaine
             and
             assured
             ,
             to
             
             beleeve
             that
             the
             wisedome
             of
             the
             most
             High
             dooth
             dispose
             and
             suffer
             these
             things
             ,
             fo
             retelling
             what
             shoulde
             happen
             ,
             to
             serve
             (
             as
             I
             have
             saide
             )
             for
             an
             advertisement
             to
             some
             ,
             and
             a
             chasticement
             to
             others
             ,
             and
             as
             a
             witnes
             to
             all
             ,
             that
             the
             king
             of
             heaven
             hath
             a
             care
             of
             man
             :
             who
             as
             he
             hath
             appointed
             great
             and
             fearefull
             tokens
             of
             that
             great
             change
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             shall
             bee
             the
             day
             of
             iudgement
             ,
             so
             doth
             it
             please
             him
             to
             send
             wonderful
             signes
             to
             demonstrate
             lesser
             changes
             in
             divers
             partes
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             remarkeable
             ,
             whereof
             he
             disposeth
             according
             to
             his
             eternall
             wisedome
             .
             Wee
             must
             also
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             divell
             be
             the
             father
             of
             lies
             ;
             yet
             the
             King
             of
             Glorie
             makes
             him
             often
             to
             confesse
             the
             trueth
             against
             his
             will
             ,
             which
             hee
             hath
             often
             declared
             for
             very
             feare
             ,
             
             as
             hee
             did
             in
             the
             desart
             by
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             possessed
             ,
             crying
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             was
             the
             Saviour
             come
             to
             destroy
             him
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             by
             the
             Pythonisse
             ,
             who
             saide
             that
             Paul
             preached
             the
             true
             God
             ,
             
             as
             when
             he
             appeared
             and
             troubled
             Pilates
             wife
             ,
             whom
             he
             made
             to
             mediate
             for
             Iesus
             a
             iust
             man.
             And
             as
             many
             other
             histories
             besides
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             gave
             diverse
             testimonies
             of
             idols
             ,
             in
             approbation
             of
             christian
             religion
             ,
             wherof
             
               Lactantius
               ,
               Prosperus
            
             ,
             and
             others
             make
             mention
             .
             Let
             them
             reade
             Eusebius
             in
             his
             bookes
             of
             the
             preparation
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ;
             and
             those
             of
             his
             demonstrations
             where
             he
             doth
             amply
             treate
             of
             this
             matter
             .
             I
             have
             purposely
             spoken
             this
             ,
             that
             no
             man
             should
             contemne
             what
             is
             written
             in
             the
             Histories
             and
             Annales
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             touching
             Presages
             and
             strange
             signes
             ,
             of
             the
             approching
             end
             and
             ruine
             of
             their
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Divelles
             tyranny
             ,
             whom
             they
             worshipped
             altogether
             .
             Which
             in
             my
             opinion
             is
             worthy
             of
             credite
             and
             beliefe
             ,
             both
             for
             that
             it
             chanced
             late
             ,
             and
             the
             memory
             is
             yet
             fresh
             ,
             as
             also
             for
             
             that
             it
             is
             likely
             ,
             that
             the
             Divell
             lamented
             at
             so
             great
             a
             change
             ,
             and
             that
             God
             by
             the
             same
             meanes
             beganne
             to
             chastice
             their
             cruell
             and
             abhominable
             idolatries
             .
             I
             will
             therefore
             set
             them
             downe
             heere
             as
             true
             things
             .
             It
             chanced
             that
             Moteçuma
             having
             raigned
             many
             yeers
             in
             great
             prosperity
             ,
             and
             so
             pufft
             vp
             in
             his
             conceit
             ,
             as
             hee
             caused
             himselfe
             to
             be
             served
             and
             feared
             ,
             yea
             to
             be
             worshipped
             as
             a
             god
             ,
             that
             the
             Almighty
             Lord
             beganne
             to
             chastice
             him
             ,
             and
             also
             to
             admonish
             him
             ,
             suffering
             even
             the
             very
             Divelles
             whome
             he
             worshipped
             ,
             to
             tell
             him
             these
             heavy
             tidings
             of
             the
             ruine
             of
             his
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             to
             torment
             him
             by
             visions
             ,
             which
             had
             never
             bin
             seen
             ;
             wherewith
             hee
             remained
             so
             melancholy
             and
             troubled
             ,
             as
             hee
             was
             voyde
             of
             iudgement
             .
             The
             idoll
             of
             those
             of
             Cholola
             ,
             which
             they
             called
             Quetzacoalt
             ,
             declared
             ,
             that
             a
             strange
             people
             came
             to
             possesse
             his
             kingdomes
             .
             The
             king
             of
             Tescuco
             (
             who
             was
             a
             great
             Magitian
             ,
             and
             had
             conference
             with
             the
             Divell
             )
             came
             one
             day
             at
             an
             extraordinarie
             house
             to
             visite
             Moteçuma
             ,
             assuring
             him
             that
             his
             gods
             had
             tolde
             him
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             great
             losses
             preparing
             for
             him
             ,
             and
             for
             his
             whole
             realme
             :
             many
             witches
             and
             sorcerers
             went
             and
             declared
             as
             much
             ,
             amongst
             which
             there
             was
             one
             did
             very
             particularly
             foretell
             him
             what
             should
             happen
             :
             and
             as
             he
             was
             with
             him
             hee
             tolde
             him
             that
             the
             pulses
             of
             his
             feete
             and
             hands
             failed
             him
             .
             Moteçuma
             troubled
             with
             these
             news
             ,
             commanded
             all
             those
             sorcerers
             to
             be
             apprehended
             :
             but
             they
             vanished
             presently
             in
             the
             prison
             ,
             wherewith
             hee
             grewe
             into
             such
             a
             rage
             ,
             that
             hee
             might
             not
             kill
             them
             ,
             as
             hee
             putte
             their
             wives
             and
             children
             to
             death
             ,
             destroying
             their
             houses
             ,
             and
             families
             .
             Seeing
             himselfe
             importuned
             and
             troubled
             with
             these
             advertisements
             ,
             he
             sought
             to
             appease
             the
             anger
             of
             his
             gods
             :
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             hee
             laboured
             
             to
             bring
             a
             huge
             stone
             ,
             thereon
             to
             make
             great
             sacrifices
             :
             For
             the
             effecting
             whereof
             hee
             sent
             a
             great
             number
             of
             people
             with
             engins
             and
             instruments
             to
             bring
             it
             :
             which
             they
             could
             by
             no
             meanes
             moove
             ,
             although
             (
             being
             obstinate
             )
             they
             had
             broken
             many
             instruments
             .
             But
             as
             they
             strove
             still
             to
             raise
             it
             ,
             they
             heard
             a
             voyce
             ioyning
             to
             the
             stone
             ,
             which
             said
             they
             laboured
             in
             vaine
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             should
             not
             raise
             it
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Lorde
             of
             things
             created
             would
             no
             more
             suffer
             those
             things
             to
             be
             doone
             there
             .
             Moteçuma
             vnderstanding
             this
             ,
             ommaunded
             the
             sacrifice
             to
             be
             perfourmed
             in
             that
             ●lace
             ,
             and
             they
             say
             the
             voyce
             spake
             againe
             :
             
               Have
               I
               not
               told
               you
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               not
               the
               pleasure
               of
               the
               Lord
               of
               things
               created
               ,
               that
               it
               should
               be
               done
               :
               and
               that
               you
               may
               well
               know
               that
               it
               is
               so
               ,
               I
               will
               suffer
               myselfe
               to
               be
               transported
               alittle
               ,
               then
               after
               you
               shall
               not
               moove
               mee
               .
            
             Which
             happened
             so
             indeede
             ,
             for
             presently
             they
             carried
             it
             a
             small
             distance
             with
             great
             facility
             ,
             then
             afterwards
             they
             could
             not
             moove
             it
             ,
             till
             that
             after
             many
             prayers
             ,
             it
             suffered
             itselfe
             to
             be
             transported
             to
             the
             entry
             of
             the
             citty
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             sodainly
             it
             fel
             into
             the
             Lake
             ,
             where
             seeking
             for
             it
             ,
             they
             could
             not
             finde
             it
             ,
             but
             it
             was
             afterwards
             found
             in
             the
             same
             place
             from
             whence
             they
             had
             remooved
             it
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             remayned
             amazed
             and
             confounded
             .
             At
             the
             same
             time
             there
             appeared
             in
             the
             element
             a
             great
             flame
             of
             fire
             ,
             very
             bright
             ,
             in
             the
             forme
             of
             a
             Pyramide
             ,
             which
             beganne
             to
             appeare
             at
             midnight
             ,
             and
             went
             still
             mounting
             vntill
             the
             Sunne
             rising
             in
             the
             morning
             ,
             where
             it
             stayed
             at
             the
             South
             ,
             and
             then
             vanished
             away
             .
             It
             shewed
             itselfe
             in
             this
             sort
             the
             space
             of
             a
             whole
             yeare
             ,
             and
             ever
             as
             it
             appeared
             the
             people
             cast
             foorth
             great
             cries
             as
             they
             were
             accustomed
             ,
             beleeving
             it
             was
             a
             presage
             of
             great
             misfortune
             .
             It
             happened
             also
             that
             fir●
             tooke
             the
             Temple
             ,
             whenas
             no
             body
             was
             within
             
             it
             ,
             nor
             neare
             vnto
             it
             ,
             neither
             did
             there
             fall
             any
             lightning
             or
             thunder
             :
             wherevpon
             the
             guardes
             crying
             out
             ,
             a
             number
             of
             people
             ran
             with
             water
             ,
             but
             nothing
             could
             helpe
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             was
             all
             consumed
             ;
             and
             they
             say
             the
             fire
             seemed
             to
             come
             forth
             of
             peeces
             of
             timber
             ,
             which
             kindled
             more
             by
             the
             water
             that
             was
             cast
             vpon
             it
             .
             There
             was
             a
             Comet
             seene
             in
             the
             day
             time
             ,
             running
             from
             the
             west
             to
             the
             east
             ,
             casting
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             sparkles
             ,
             and
             they
             say
             the
             forme
             was
             like
             to
             a
             long
             taile
             ,
             having
             three
             heads
             .
          
           
             The
             great
             lake
             betwixt
             Mexico
             and
             Tescuco
             ,
             without
             any
             wind
             ,
             earthquake
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             apparant
             signe
             ,
             beganne
             sodainely
             to
             swell
             ,
             and
             the
             waves
             grewe
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             all
             the
             buildings
             neare
             vnto
             it
             fell
             downe
             to
             the
             ground
             .
             They
             say
             at
             that
             time
             they
             heard
             many
             voices
             ,
             as
             of
             a
             woman
             in
             paine
             ,
             which
             sayde
             sometimes
             ,
             
               O
               my
               children
               ,
               the
               time
               of
               your
               destruction
               is
               come
               ,
            
             and
             otherwhiles
             it
             sayde
             ,
             
               O
               my
               children
               ,
               whither
               shall
               I
               carry
               you
               ,
               that
               you
               perish
               not
               vtterly
               ?
            
             There
             appeared
             likewise
             many
             monsters
             with
             two
             heads
             ,
             which
             being
             carried
             before
             the
             king
             ,
             sodainely
             vanished
             .
             There
             were
             two
             that
             exceeded
             all
             other
             monsters
             ,
             being
             very
             strange
             ;
             the
             one
             was
             ,
             the
             fishers
             of
             the
             lake
             tooke
             a
             bird
             as
             bigge
             as
             a
             Crane
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             same
             colour
             ,
             but
             of
             a
             strange
             and
             vnseene
             form
             .
             They
             caried
             it
             to
             Moteçuma
             ,
             who
             at
             that
             time
             was
             in
             the
             pallace
             of
             teares
             and
             mourning
             ,
             which
             was
             all
             hanged
             with
             blacke
             ,
             for
             as
             he
             had
             many
             palaces
             for
             his
             recreation
             ,
             so
             had
             he
             also
             others
             for
             times
             of
             affliction
             ,
             where
             with
             hee
             was
             then
             heavily
             charged
             and
             tormented
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             threatnings
             his
             gods
             had
             given
             him
             by
             these
             sorrowfull
             advertisements
             .
             The
             fishers
             came
             about
             noone
             setting
             this
             bird
             before
             him
             ,
             which
             had
             on
             the
             toppe
             of
             his
             head
             a
             thing
             bright
             and
             
             transparent
             ,
             in
             forme
             of
             a
             looking
             glasse
             ,
             wherein
             he
             did
             behold
             a
             warrelike
             nation
             comming
             from
             the
             east
             ,
             armed
             ,
             fighting
             ,
             and
             killing
             .
             He
             called
             his
             Divines
             and
             Astronomers
             (
             whereof
             there
             was
             a
             great
             number
             )
             who
             having
             seene
             these
             things
             ,
             and
             not
             able
             to
             yeelde
             any
             reason
             of
             what
             was
             demaunded
             of
             them
             ,
             the
             bird
             vanished
             away
             ,
             so
             as
             it
             was
             never
             more
             seene
             :
             wherevpon
             Moteçuma
             remained
             very
             heavy
             and
             sorrowfull
             .
             The
             other
             which
             happened
             ,
             was
             a
             laborer
             ,
             who
             had
             the
             report
             of
             a
             very
             honest
             man
             ,
             came
             vnto
             him
             ,
             telling
             him
             ,
             that
             being
             the
             day
             before
             at
             his
             worke
             ,
             a
             great
             Eagle
             flew
             towardes
             him
             ,
             and
             tooke
             him
             vppe
             in
             his
             talants
             ,
             without
             hurting
             him
             ,
             carying
             him
             into
             a
             certaine
             cave
             ,
             where
             it
             left
             him
             ;
             the
             Eagle
             pronouncing
             these
             words
             ,
             
               Most
               mightie
               Lorde
               ,
               I
               have
               brought
               him
               whome
               thou
               hast
               commaunded
               me
               :
            
             This
             Indian
             laborer
             looked
             about
             on
             every
             side
             ,
             to
             whome
             hee
             spake
             ,
             but
             hee
             sawe
             no
             man.
             Then
             he
             heard
             a
             voyce
             which
             sayde
             vnto
             him
             ,
             Doost
             thou
             not
             knowe
             this
             man
             ,
             whome
             thou
             seest
             lying
             vpon
             the
             ground
             :
             and
             looking
             thereon
             ,
             he
             perceived
             ●
             man
             lie
             very
             heavy
             asleepe
             ,
             with
             royall
             ensignes
             ,
             floures
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             and
             a
             staffe
             of
             perfumes
             burning
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             accustomed
             to
             vse
             in
             that
             countrey
             ,
             whome
             the
             labourer
             beholding
             ,
             knew
             it
             was
             the
             great
             king
             Moteçuma
             ,
             and
             answered
             presently
             :
             
               Great
               Lord
               ,
               this
               resembles
               our
               King
               Moteçuma
               .
            
             The
             voyce
             saide
             againe
             ,
             
               Thou
               saiest
               true
               ,
               behold
               what
               he
               is
               ,
               and
               how
               he
               lies
               asleepe
               ,
               carelesse
               of
               the
               great
               miseries
               and
               afflictions
               prepared
               for
               him
               .
               It
               is
               nowe
               time
               that
               hee
               pay
               the
               great
               number
               of
               offences
               hee
               hath
               doone
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               that
               he
               receive
               the
               punishment
               of
               his
               tyrannies
               ,
               and
               great
               pride
               ,
               and
               yet
               thou
               seest
               how
               carelesse
               hee
               lies
               ,
               blinde
               in
               his
               owne
               miseries
               ,
               and
               without
               any
               feling
               .
               But
               to
               the
               end
               thou
               maiest
               the
               better
               see
               him
               ,
               take
               the
               staffe
               of
               perfumes
               hee
               
               holdes
               burning
               in
               his
               hand
               ,
               and
               put
               it
               to
               his
               face
               ,
               thou
               shalt
               then
               find
               him
               without
               feeling
               .
            
             The
             poore
             laborer
             durstnot
             approach
             neere
             him
             ,
             nor
             doe
             as
             he
             was
             commaunded
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             feare
             they
             all
             hadde
             of
             this
             king
             .
             But
             the
             voyce
             saide
             ,
             
               Have
               no
               f●are
               ,
               for
               I
               am
               without
               comparison
               greater
               than
               this
               King
               ,
               I
               can
               destroy
               him
               ,
               and
               defend
               him
               ,
               doe
               therefore
               what
               I
               commaund
               thee
               .
            
             Wherevpon
             the
             laborer
             took
             the
             staffe
             of
             perfumes
             out
             of
             the
             kings
             hand
             ,
             and
             put
             it
             burning
             to
             his
             nose
             ,
             but
             he
             mooved
             not
             ,
             nor
             shewed
             any
             feeling
             .
          
           
             This
             done
             ,
             the
             voice
             said
             vnto
             him
             ,
             that
             seeing
             hee
             had
             found
             the
             king
             so
             sleepy
             ,
             he
             should
             go
             awake
             him
             ,
             and
             tell
             him
             what
             he
             had
             seene
             .
             Then
             the
             Eagle
             by
             the
             same
             commandement
             ,
             tooke
             the
             man
             in
             his
             tallents
             ,
             and
             set
             him
             in
             the
             same
             place
             where
             he
             found
             him
             ,
             and
             for
             accomplishment
             of
             that
             which
             it
             had
             spoken
             ,
             hee
             came
             to
             advertise
             him
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             Moteçuma
             looking
             on
             his
             face
             ,
             found
             that
             he
             was
             burnt
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             had
             not
             felt
             till
             then
             ,
             wherewith
             he
             continued
             exceeding
             heavy
             and
             troubled
             .
             It
             may
             be
             ,
             that
             what
             the
             laborer
             reported
             ,
             had
             happened
             vnto
             him
             by
             imaginary
             vision
             :
             And
             it
             is
             not
             incredible
             ,
             that
             God
             appointed
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             a
             good
             Angell
             ,
             or
             suffered
             by
             a
             bad
             ,
             that
             this
             advertisement
             should
             be
             given
             to
             the
             labourer
             for
             the
             kings
             chasticement
             ,
             although
             an
             infidell
             ,
             seeing
             that
             we
             reade
             in
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             ,
             that
             infidells
             and
             sinners
             have
             had
             the
             like
             apparations
             and
             revelations
             ,
             as
             
               Nabucadonosor
               ,
               Balaam
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Pithonisse
             of
             Saul
             .
             
             And
             if
             some
             of
             these
             apparations
             did
             not
             so
             expresly
             happen
             ,
             yet
             without
             doubt
             ,
             Moteçuma
             had
             many
             great
             afflictions
             and
             discontentments
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             sundry
             &
             divers
             revelations
             which
             he
             had
             ,
             that
             his
             kingdome
             and
             law
             should
             soone
             end
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Of
             the
             newes
             Moteçuma
             received
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             arrivall
             in
             his
             Country
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Ambassage
             he
             sent
             them
             .
             
               CHAP.
               24.
            
             
          
           
             IN
             the
             fourteenth
             yeare
             of
             the
             raigne
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             which
             was
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             1517.
             
             There
             appeared
             in
             the
             North
             seas
             ,
             shippes
             ,
             and
             men
             landing
             ,
             whereat
             the
             subiects
             of
             Moteçuma
             wondred
             much
             ,
             and
             desirous
             to
             learne
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             better
             satisfied
             what
             they
             were
             ,
             they
             went
             aboord
             in
             their
             canoes
             ,
             carrying
             many
             refreshings
             of
             meats
             and
             stuffes
             to
             make
             apparrell
             ,
             vpon
             colour
             to
             sell
             them
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             received
             them
             into
             their
             shippes
             ,
             and
             in
             exchange
             of
             their
             victualls
             and
             stuffes
             ,
             which
             were
             acceptable
             vnto
             them
             ,
             they
             gave
             them
             chaines
             of
             false
             stones
             ,
             red
             ,
             blew
             ,
             greene
             ,
             and
             yellow
             ,
             which
             the
             Indians
             imagined
             to
             be
             precious
             stones
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             informing
             themselves
             who
             was
             their
             king
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             great
             power
             ,
             dismissed
             them
             ,
             willing
             them
             to
             carry
             those
             stones
             vnto
             their
             lord
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             for
             that
             time
             they
             could
             not
             goe
             to
             him
             ,
             but
             they
             would
             presently
             returne
             and
             visit
             him
             .
             Those
             of
             the
             coast
             went
             presently
             to
             Mexico
             with
             this
             message
             ,
             carrying
             the
             representation
             of
             what
             they
             had
             seene
             ,
             painted
             on
             a
             cloth
             ,
             both
             of
             the
             shippes
             ,
             men
             ,
             and
             stones
             which
             they
             had
             given
             them
             .
             King
             Moteçuma
             remained
             very
             pensive
             with
             this
             message
             ,
             commanding
             them
             not
             to
             reveale
             it
             to
             any
             one
             .
             The
             day
             following
             ,
             he
             assembled
             his
             counsell
             ,
             and
             having
             shewed
             them
             the
             painted
             clothes
             ,
             and
             the
             chaines
             ,
             he
             cousulted
             what
             was
             to
             be
             done
             :
             where
             it
             was
             resolved
             to
             set
             good
             watches
             vpon
             all
             the
             sea
             coastes
             ,
             to
             give
             present
             advertisement
             to
             the
             king
             of
             what
             they
             should
             discover
             .
             The
             yeare
             following
             ,
             
             which
             was
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             yeare
             1518.
             they
             discovered
             a
             fleete
             at
             sea
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             was
             the
             Marquise
             of
             
               Valle
               Don
               Fernande
               Cortes
            
             ,
             with
             his
             companions
             ,
             a
             newes
             which
             much
             troubled
             Moteçuma
             ,
             and
             conferring
             with
             his
             counsell
             ,
             they
             all
             said
             ,
             that
             without
             doubt
             ,
             their
             great
             and
             antient
             Lord
             Queztzalcoalt
             was
             come
             ,
             who
             had
             saide
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             returne
             from
             the
             East
             ,
             whither
             he
             was
             gone
             .
             The
             Indians
             held
             opinion
             ,
             that
             a
             great
             Prince
             had
             in
             times
             past
             left
             them
             ,
             and
             promised
             to
             returne
             .
             Of
             the
             beginning
             and
             ground
             of
             which
             opinion
             shall
             be
             spoken
             in
             another
             place
             .
             They
             therefore
             sent
             five
             principall
             Ambassadors
             with
             rich
             presents
             ,
             to
             congratulate
             his
             comming
             ,
             saying
             ,
             they
             knewe
             well
             that
             their
             great
             Lord
             QueztZalcoalt
             was
             come
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             servant
             Moteçuma
             sent
             to
             visit
             him
             ,
             for
             so
             hee
             accounted
             himselfe
             .
             The
             Spaniards
             vnderstood
             this
             message
             by
             the
             meanes
             of
             Mar●●a
             ,
             an
             Indian
             woman
             whom
             they
             brought
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             vnderstoode
             the
             Mexicane
             tongue
             .
             
               Fernande
               Cortes
            
             finding
             this
             a
             good
             ocasion
             for
             his
             entry
             ,
             commanded
             to
             deck
             his
             chamber
             richly
             ,
             and
             being
             set
             in
             great
             state
             and
             pompe
             ,
             he
             caused
             the
             Ambassadors
             to
             enter
             ,
             who
             omitted
             no
             shewes
             of
             humilitie
             ,
             but
             to
             worshippe
             him
             as
             their
             god
             .
          
           
             They
             delivered
             their
             charge
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             his
             servant
             Moteçuma
             sent
             to
             visit
             him
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             held
             the
             country
             in
             his
             name
             as
             his
             lievetenant
             ,
             that
             he
             knew
             well
             it
             was
             the
             Topilcin
             which
             had
             beene
             promised
             them
             many
             yeares
             since
             ,
             who
             should
             returne
             againe
             vnto
             them
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             brought
             him
             such
             garments
             as
             he
             was
             wont
             to
             weare
             ,
             when
             hee
             did
             converce
             amongst
             them
             ,
             beseeching
             him
             to
             accept
             willingly
             of
             them
             ,
             offering
             him
             many
             presents
             of
             great
             value
             .
             Cortes
             receiving
             
             the
             presents
             ,
             answered
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             the
             same
             they
             spake
             of
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             were
             greatly
             satisfied
             ,
             seeing
             themselves
             to
             be
             curteously
             received
             and
             intreated
             by
             him
             (
             for
             in
             that
             ,
             as
             wel
             as
             in
             other
             things
             ,
             this
             valiant
             captaine
             deserved
             commendations
             )
             that
             if
             this
             course
             had
             beene
             continued
             ,
             to
             win
             them
             by
             love
             ,
             it
             seemed
             the
             best
             occasion
             was
             offered
             that
             might
             be
             devised
             ,
             to
             draw
             this
             country
             to
             the
             Gospel
             by
             peace
             and
             love
             :
             but
             the
             sinnes
             of
             these
             cruel
             homicides
             and
             slaves
             of
             Satan
             ,
             required
             punishment
             from
             heaven
             ,
             as
             also
             those
             of
             many
             Spaniards
             ,
             which
             were
             not
             in
             small
             number
             .
             Thus
             the
             high
             iudgements
             of
             God
             disposed
             of
             the
             health
             of
             this
             nation
             ,
             having
             first
             cutte
             off
             the
             perished
             rootes
             :
             and
             as
             the
             Apostle
             saieth
             ,
             
             the
             wickednes
             and
             blindenes
             of
             some
             ,
             hath
             beene
             the
             salvation
             of
             others
             .
             To
             conclude
             ,
             the
             day
             after
             this
             Ambassage
             ,
             all
             the
             Captaines
             and
             Comm●●ders
             of
             the
             fleete
             ,
             came
             vnto
             the
             Admirall
             ,
             where
             vnderstanding
             the
             matter
             ,
             and
             that
             this
             realme
             of
             Moteçuma
             was
             mightie
             and
             rich
             ;
             it
             seemed
             fit
             to
             gaine
             the
             reputation
             of
             brave
             and
             valiant
             men
             among
             this
             people
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             (
             although
             they
             were
             few
             ,
             )
             they
             should
             bee
             feared
             and
             received
             into
             Mexico
             .
             To
             this
             end
             they
             discharged
             all
             their
             artillerie
             from
             their
             shippes
             ,
             which
             being
             a
             thing
             the
             Indians
             had
             never
             heard
             ,
             they
             were
             amazed
             ,
             as
             if
             heaven
             had
             fallen
             vpon
             them
             .
             Then
             the
             Spaniards
             beganne
             to
             defie
             them
             to
             fight
             with
             them
             :
             but
             the
             Indians
             not
             daring
             to
             hazard
             themselves
             ,
             they
             did
             beate
             them
             and
             intreate
             them
             ill
             ,
             shewing
             their
             swordes
             ,
             lances
             ,
             pertuisans
             ,
             and
             other
             armes
             ,
             wherewith
             they
             did
             terrifie
             them
             much
             .
             The
             poore
             Indians
             were
             by
             reason
             heereof
             ,
             so
             fearefull
             and
             amazed
             ,
             as
             they
             changed
             their
             opinion
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             their
             Lord
             Topilcin
             came
             not
             in
             this
             troup
             .
             
             But
             they
             were
             some
             gods
             ,
             (
             their
             enemies
             )
             came
             to
             destroy
             them
             .
             Whenas
             the
             Ambassadors
             returned
             to
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Mo●●çu●a
            
             was
             in
             the
             house
             of
             audience
             ;
             but
             before
             he
             would
             heare
             them
             ,
             this
             miserable
             man
             commanded
             a
             great
             number
             of
             men
             to
             be
             sacrificed
             in
             his
             presence
             ,
             and
             with
             their
             bloud
             to
             sprinkle
             the
             Ambassadors
             ,
             (
             supposing
             by
             this
             ceremony
             ,
             (
             which
             they
             were
             accustomed
             to
             do
             in
             solemne
             Ambassages
             ,
             )
             to
             receive
             a
             good
             answer
             .
             But
             vnderstanding
             the
             report
             and
             information
             of
             the
             maner
             of
             their
             shippes
             ,
             men
             ,
             and
             armes
             ,
             he
             stoode
             perplexed
             and
             confounded
             :
             then
             taking
             counsell
             thereon
             ,
             he
             found
             no
             better
             meanes
             ,
             th●n
             to
             labour
             to
             stoppe
             the
             entrie
             of
             these
             strangers
             ,
             by
             coniurations
             and
             magicke
             Artes.
             They
             had
             accustomed
             often
             to
             vse
             this
             meanes
             ,
             having
             great
             conference
             with
             the
             divell
             ,
             by
             whose
             helpe
             they
             sometimes
             obtained
             strange
             effects
             .
             They
             therefore
             assembled
             together
             all
             the
             Sorcerers
             ,
             Magitians
             ,
             and
             Inchanters
             ,
             who
             being
             perswaded
             by
             Moteç●ma
             ,
             they
             tooke
             it
             in
             charge
             to
             force
             this
             people
             to
             returne
             vnto
             their
             country
             .
             For
             this
             consideration
             ,
             they
             went
             to
             a
             certaine
             place
             which
             they
             thought
             fit
             for
             the
             invocation
             of
             their
             divells
             ,
             and
             practising
             their
             artes
             ,
             (
             a
             thing
             worthy
             of
             consideration
             .
             )
             They
             wrought
             all
             they
             could
             ;
             but
             seeing
             nothing
             could
             prevaile
             against
             the
             Christians
             ,
             they
             went
             to
             the
             king
             ,
             telling
             him
             that
             they
             were
             more
             then
             men
             ,
             for
             that
             nothing
             might
             hurt
             them
             ,
             notwithstanding
             ,
             all
             their
             coniurations
             and
             inchantments
             .
             Then
             Moteçuma
             advised
             him
             of
             another
             pollicie
             ,
             that
             faining
             to
             be
             very
             well
             contented
             with
             their
             comming
             ,
             he
             commanded
             all
             his
             countries
             to
             serve
             these
             celestiall
             gods
             that
             were
             come
             into
             his
             land
             .
             The
             whole
             people
             was
             in
             great
             heavinesse
             and
             amazement
             ,
             and
             often
             newes
             came
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             inquired
             for
             the
             King
             ,
             of
             his
             maner
             of
             
             life
             ,
             of
             his
             house
             &
             meanes
             .
             He
             was
             exceedingly
             vexed
             herewith
             :
             some
             of
             the
             people
             &
             other
             Negromanciers
             advised
             him
             to
             hide
             himselfe
             ,
             offering
             to
             place
             him
             whereas
             no
             creature
             should
             ever
             finde
             him
             .
             This
             seemed
             base
             vnto
             him
             ,
             and
             therefore
             he
             resolved
             to
             attend
             them
             ,
             although
             it
             were
             dying
             .
             In
             the
             end
             he
             left
             his
             houses
             and
             royall
             pallaces
             to
             lodge
             in
             others
             ,
             leaving
             them
             for
             these
             gods
             as
             he
             said
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             Spaniards
             entrie
             into
             
               Mexico
               .
               CHAP.
               25.
            
             
          
           
             I
             Pretend
             not
             to
             intreate
             of
             the
             acts
             and
             deedes
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             who
             conquered
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             nor
             the
             strange
             adventures
             which
             happened
             vnto
             them
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             courage
             and
             invincible
             valour
             of
             their
             Captaine
             
               Don
               Fernando
               Cortes
            
             :
             for
             that
             there
             are
             many
             histories
             and
             relations
             thereof
             ,
             as
             those
             which
             
               Fernando
               Cortes
            
             himselfe
             ,
             did
             write
             to
             the
             Emperour
             Charles
             the
             fift
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             in
             a
             plaine
             stile
             ,
             and
             farre
             from
             arrogancie
             ,
             the
             which
             doe
             give
             a
             sufficient
             testimony
             of
             what
             did
             passe
             ,
             wherein
             he
             was
             worthy
             of
             eternall
             mery
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             accomplish
             my
             intention
             :
             I
             am
             to
             relate
             what
             the
             Indians
             report
             of
             this
             action
             ,
             the
             which
             hath
             not
             to
             this
             day
             beene
             written
             in
             our
             vulgar
             tong
             ▪
             Moteçuma
             therefore
             ,
             having
             notice
             of
             this
             Captaines
             victories
             ,
             that
             he
             advanced
             for
             his
             conquest
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             confederate
             and
             ioyned
             with
             them
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             his
             capitall
             enemies
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             had
             severely
             punished
             them
             of
             Cholola
             his
             friends
             ,
             he
             studied
             how
             to
             deceive
             him
             ,
             or
             else
             to
             try
             him
             in
             sending
             a
             principall
             man
             vnto
             him
             ,
             attyred
             with
             the
             like
             ornaments
             and
             royall
             ensignes
             ,
             the
             which
             shuld
             take
             vpon
             him
             to
             be
             Moteçuma
             ,
             which
             fiction
             being
             discouered
             to
             the
             Marquise
             by
             them
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             (
             who
             did
             accompany
             him
             ,
             )
             he
             sent
             him
             backe
             ,
             after
             a
             milde
             and
             gentle
             reprehension
             ,
             in
             
             seeking
             so
             to
             deceive
             him
             :
             wherevpon
             Moteçuma
             was
             so
             confounded
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             feare
             thereof
             ,
             he
             returned
             to
             his
             first
             imaginations
             and
             practises
             ,
             to
             force
             the
             christians
             to
             retyre
             ,
             by
             the
             invocation
             of
             coniure●s
             and
             witches
             .
             And
             therefore
             he
             assembled
             a
             greater
             number
             then
             before
             ,
             threatning
             them
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             returned
             without
             effecting
             what
             he
             had
             given
             them
             in
             charge
             ,
             not
             any
             one
             should
             escape
             ,
             wherevnto
             they
             all
             promised
             to
             obey
             .
             And
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             all
             the
             divells
             officers
             went
             to
             the
             way
             of
             Chalco
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             should
             passe
             ,
             when
             mounting
             to
             the
             top
             of
             a
             hill
             ,
             Tezcalipuca
             ,
             one
             of
             their
             principall
             gods
             ,
             appeared
             vnto
             them
             ,
             as
             comming
             from
             the
             Spaniards
             campe
             ,
             in
             the
             habite
             of
             Chalcas
             ,
             who
             had
             his
             pappes
             bound
             about
             eight
             folde
             with
             a
             cord
             of
             reedes
             ,
             hee
             came
             like
             a
             man
             beside
             himselfe
             ,
             out
             of
             his
             wits
             ,
             and
             drunke
             with
             rage
             &
             furie
             .
             Being
             come
             to
             this
             troupe
             of
             witches
             and
             coniurers
             ,
             he
             staied
             ,
             and
             spake
             to
             them
             in
             great
             choller
             ,
             
               Why
               come
               you
               hether
               ,
               what
               doth
               Moteçuma
               pretend
               to
               doe
               by
               your
               meanes
               ?
               He
               hath
               advised
               himselfe
               too
               late
               :
               for
               it
               is
               now
               determined
               ,
               that
               his
               Kingdome
               and
               honour
               shall
               be
               taken
               from
               him
               ,
               with
               all
               that
               he
               possesseth
               ,
               for
               punishment
               of
               the
               great
               tyrannics
               he
               hath
               committed
               against
               his
               subiects
               ,
               having
               governed
               not
               like
               a
               Lord
               ,
               but
               like
               a
               traitour
               and
               tyrant
               .
            
             The
             inchanters
             and
             coniurers
             hearing
             these
             words
             ,
             knew
             it
             was
             their
             idoll
             ,
             and
             humbling
             themselves
             before
             him
             ,
             they
             presently
             built
             him
             an
             altar
             of
             stone
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ,
             covering
             it
             with
             flowers
             which
             they
             gathered
             thereaboutes
             ,
             but
             he
             contrariwise
             ,
             making
             no
             account
             of
             these
             things
             ,
             beganne
             againe
             to
             chide
             them
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               What
               come
               you
               hether
               to
               do
               O
               yee
               traitours
               ?
               Returne
               presently
               and
               behold
            
             Mexico
             ,
             
               that
               you
               may
               vnderstand
               what
               shall
               become
               thereof
               .
            
             And
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             turning
             towards
             Mexico
             to
             behold
             it
             ,
             they
             did
             see
             it
             flaming
             
             on
             fire
             .
             Then
             the
             divell
             vanished
             away
             ,
             and
             they
             not
             daring
             to
             passe
             any
             farther
             ,
             gave
             notice
             thereof
             to
             Moteç●ma
             ,
             whereat
             hee
             remained
             long
             without
             speaking
             ,
             looking
             heavily
             on
             the
             ground
             ;
             then
             he
             said
             ,
             what
             shall
             we
             doe
             if
             god
             and
             our
             friends
             leave
             vs
             ,
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             they
             helpe
             and
             favour
             our
             enemies
             ?
             I
             am
             now
             resolute
             ,
             and
             we
             ought
             all
             to
             resolve
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             that
             happen
             what
             may
             ,
             we
             must
             not
             flie
             nor
             hide
             our selves
             ,
             or
             shew
             any
             signe
             of
             cowardice
             .
             I
             onely
             pittie
             the
             aged
             and
             infants
             ,
             who
             have
             neither
             feete
             nor
             hands
             to
             defend
             themselves
             .
             Having
             spoken
             this
             ,
             he
             held
             his
             peace
             ,
             being
             transported
             into
             an
             extasie
             .
             In
             the
             end
             ,
             the
             Marqui●e
             approaching
             to
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Moteçuma
            
             resolved
             to
             make
             of
             necessitie
             a
             vertue
             ,
             going
             three
             or
             foure
             leagues
             out
             of
             the
             cittie
             to
             receive
             him
             with
             a
             great
             ma●●●ty
             ,
             carried
             vpon
             the
             shoulders
             of
             foure
             Noblemen
             ,
             vnder
             a
             rich
             canapie
             of
             gold
             and
             feathers
             :
             when
             they
             mette
             ,
             Moteçuma
             discended
             ,
             and
             they
             saluted
             one
             another
             very
             curteously
             .
             
               Don
               Fernando
               Cortes
            
             said
             vnto
             him
             ,
             that
             he
             should
             not
             care
             for
             any
             thing
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             came
             not
             to
             take
             away
             his
             real
             me
             ,
             no●
             to
             diminish
             his
             authoritie
             .
             Moteçuma
             lodged
             Cortes
             and
             his
             companions
             in
             his
             royall
             pallace
             ,
             the
             which
             was
             very
             stately
             ,
             and
             he
             himselfe
             lodged
             in
             other
             private
             houses
             .
             This
             night
             the
             souldiers
             for
             ioy
             discharged
             their
             artillery
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             Indians
             were
             much
             troubled
             ,
             being
             vnaccustomed
             to
             heare
             such
             musicke
             .
             The
             day
             following
             ,
             Cortes
             caused
             Mot●çuma
             and
             all
             the
             Nobles
             of
             his
             Court
             to
             assemble
             in
             a
             great
             hall
             ,
             where
             being
             set
             in
             a
             high
             chaire
             ,
             he
             said
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             hee
             was
             servant
             to
             a
             great
             prince
             ,
             who
             had
             sent
             them
             into
             these
             countries
             to
             doe
             good
             workes
             ,
             and
             that
             having
             found
             them
             of
             Tl●scalla
             to
             be
             his
             friend●s
             ,
             (
             who
             complained
             of
             wrongs
             and
             greevances
             done
             vnto
             them
             daily
             by
             them
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             )
             
             he
             would
             vnderstand
             which
             of
             them
             was
             in
             the
             blame
             ,
             and
             reconcile
             them
             ,
             that
             heereafter
             they
             might
             no
             more
             afflict
             and
             warre
             one
             against
             another
             :
             and
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             ,
             he
             and
             his
             bretheren
             (
             which
             were
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             )
             would
             remaine
             still
             there
             without
             hurting
             them
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             they
             would
             helpe
             them
             all
             they
             could
             .
             He
             laboured
             to
             make
             them
             all
             vnderstand
             this
             discourse
             ,
             vsing
             his
             interpterers
             &
             truchmen
             .
             The
             which
             being
             vnderstoode
             by
             the
             King
             and
             the
             other
             Mexicane
             Lords
             ,
             they
             were
             wonderfully
             well
             satisfied
             ,
             and
             shewed
             great
             signes
             of
             love
             to
             Cortes
             &
             his
             company
             .
             Many
             hold
             opinion
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             had
             continued
             the
             course
             they
             began
             that
             day
             ,
             they
             might
             easily
             have
             disposed
             of
             the
             king
             &
             his
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             given
             them
             the
             law
             of
             Christ
             ,
             without
             any
             great
             effusion
             of
             bloud
             .
             But
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             are
             great
             ,
             and
             the
             sins
             of
             both
             parties
             were
             infinite
             :
             so
             as
             not
             having
             followed
             this
             course
             ,
             the
             busines
             was
             deferred
             :
             yet
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             God
             shewed
             mercy
             to
             this
             nation
             ,
             imparting
             vnto
             them
             the
             light
             of
             his
             holy
             Gospel
             ,
             after
             he
             had
             shewed
             his
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             punished
             them
             that
             had
             deserved
             it
             ,
             and
             odiously
             offended
             his
             divine
             reverence
             .
             So
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             by
             some
             occasions
             ,
             many
             complaints
             ,
             griefs
             ,
             and
             iealosies
             grew
             on
             either
             side
             .
             The
             which
             Cortes
             finding
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             Indians
             mindes
             began
             to
             be
             distracted
             from
             them
             ,
             he
             thought
             it
             necessary
             to
             assure
             himself
             ,
             in
             laying
             hand
             vpon
             king
             Moteçuma
             ,
             who
             was
             seazed
             on
             ,
             and
             his
             legs
             fettered
             .
             Truly
             this
             act
             was
             strange
             vnto
             all
             men
             ,
             &
             like
             vnto
             that
             other
             of
             his
             ,
             to
             have
             burnt
             his
             ships
             ,
             and
             shut
             himselfe
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             his
             enemies
             ,
             there
             to
             vanquish
             or
             to
             die
             .
             The
             mischiefe
             was
             ,
             that
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             vnexpected
             arrival
             of
             
               Pamphilo
               Narvaes
            
             at
             the
             true
             crosse
             ,
             drawing
             the
             country
             into
             mutiny
             ,
             Cortes
             was
             forced
             to
             
             absent
             himselfe
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             &
             to
             leave
             poore
             Motecuma
             in
             the
             handes
             of
             his
             companions
             ,
             who
             wanted
             discretion
             nor
             had
             not
             moderation
             like
             vnto
             him
             :
             so
             as
             they
             grew
             to
             that
             discention
             ,
             as
             there
             was
             no
             meanes
             to
             pacifie
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             death
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             and
             the
             Spaniards
             departure
             out
             of
             
               Mexico
               .
               CHAP.
               26.
            
             
          
           
             WHenas
             Cortes
             was
             absent
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             he
             that
             remained
             his
             lievetenant
             ,
             resolved
             to
             punish
             the
             Mexicans
             severely
             ,
             causing
             a
             great
             number
             of
             the
             nobilitie
             to
             be
             slaine
             at
             a
             maske
             which
             they
             made
             in
             the
             pallace
             ,
             the
             which
             did
             so
             far
             exceede
             ,
             as
             all
             the
             people
             mutined
             ,
             &
             in
             a
             furious
             rage
             ,
             tooke
             armes
             to
             be
             revenged
             and
             to
             kil
             the
             Spaniards
             .
             They
             therefore
             besieged
             them
             in
             the
             pallace
             ,
             pressing
             them
             so
             neere
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             hurt
             the
             Spaniards
             could
             do
             them
             with
             their
             artillery
             and
             crosse-bowes
             ,
             might
             not
             terrifie
             them
             ,
             nor
             force
             them
             to
             retyre
             from
             their
             enterprise
             ,
             where
             they
             continued
             many
             daies
             ,
             stopping
             their
             victualls
             ,
             nor
             suffering
             any
             one
             to
             enter
             or
             issue
             forth
             .
             They
             did
             fight
             with
             stones
             ,
             and
             cast
             dartes
             after
             their
             maner
             ,
             with
             a
             kinde
             of
             lances
             like
             vnto
             arrowes
             ,
             in
             the
             which
             there
             are
             foure
             or
             six
             very
             sharpe
             rasors
             ,
             the
             which
             are
             such
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             histories
             report
             ,
             )
             that
             in
             these
             warres
             ,
             an
             Indian
             with
             one
             blow
             of
             these
             rasors
             ,
             almost
             cut
             off
             the
             necke
             of
             a
             horse
             ,
             &
             as
             they
             did
             one
             day
             fight
             with
             this
             resolution
             &
             furie
             ,
             the
             Spaniards
             to
             make
             them
             cease
             ,
             shewed
             forth
             Mot●cuma
             ,
             with
             another
             of
             the
             chiefe
             Lords
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             vpon
             the
             top
             of
             a
             platform
             of
             the
             house
             ,
             covered
             with
             the
             targets
             of
             two
             souldiers
             that
             were
             with
             them
             .
             The
             Mexicanes
             seeing
             their
             Lord
             Moteçuma
             ,
             staied
             with
             great
             silence
             .
             
             Then
             Moteçuma
             caused
             the
             Lord
             to
             advise
             them
             to
             pacifie
             themselves
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             warre
             against
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             seeing
             that
             (
             hee
             being
             a
             prisoner
             ,
             )
             it
             could
             little
             profite
             him
             .
             The
             which
             being
             vnderstood
             by
             a
             yong
             man
             called
             Quicuxtemoc
             ,
             whom
             they
             now
             resolved
             to
             make
             their
             king
             ,
             spake
             with
             a
             loude
             voice
             to
             Moteçuma
             ,
             willing
             him
             to
             retyre
             like
             a
             villaine
             ,
             that
             seeing
             he
             had
             bin
             such
             a
             coward
             ,
             as
             to
             suffer
             himselfe
             to
             be
             taken
             ,
             they
             were
             no
             more
             bound
             to
             obey
             him
             ,
             but
             rather
             should
             punish
             him
             as
             he
             deserued
             ,
             calling
             him
             woman
             for
             the
             more
             reproach
             ,
             and
             then
             hee
             beganne
             to
             draw
             his
             bowe
             and
             to
             shoote
             at
             him
             ,
             and
             the
             people
             beganne
             to
             cast
             stones
             at
             him
             ,
             &
             to
             continue
             their
             combate
             .
             Many
             say
             that
             Motecuma
             was
             then
             hurt
             with
             a
             stone
             wherof
             he
             died
             .
             The
             
               Indians
               of
               Mexico
            
             affirme
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             &
             that
             he
             died
             as
             I
             will
             shew
             hereafter
             .
             Alvaro
             &
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             seeing
             themselves
             thus
             pressed
             ,
             gave
             intelligence
             to
             Captaine
             Cortes
             ,
             of
             the
             great
             danger
             they
             were
             in
             :
             who
             having
             with
             an
             admirable
             dexteritie
             &
             valour
             ,
             given
             order
             to
             Narvaes
             affaires
             ,
             and
             assembled
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             his
             men
             ,
             he
             returned
             with
             all
             speede
             to
             succour
             them
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             where
             observing
             the
             time
             the
             Indians
             rest
             ,
             (
             for
             it
             was
             their
             custom
             in
             war
             ,
             to
             rest
             every
             fourth
             day
             :
             )
             He
             one
             day
             advanced
             with
             great
             policy
             &
             courage
             ,
             so
             as
             both
             he
             and
             his
             men
             entred
             the
             pallace
             ,
             whereas
             the
             Spaniards
             had
             fortefied
             themselves
             :
             they
             then
             shewed
             great
             signes
             of
             ioy
             ,
             in
             discharging
             their
             artillery
             .
             But
             as
             the
             Mexicans
             furie
             increased
             ,
             (
             being
             out
             of
             hope
             to
             defend
             themselves
             ,
             )
             Cortes
             resolved
             to
             passe
             away
             secretly
             in
             the
             night
             without
             bruite
             .
             Having
             therefore
             made
             bridges
             to
             passe
             two
             great
             and
             dangerous
             passages
             ,
             about
             mid-night
             they
             issued
             forth
             as
             secretly
             as
             they
             could
             ,
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             his
             people
             having
             passed
             the
             first
             bridge
             ,
             they
             were
             discovered
             by
             an
             Indian
             woman
             before
             they
             could
             passe
             .
             
             The
             second
             who
             cried
             out
             their
             enemies
             fled
             ,
             at
             the
             which
             voice
             all
             the
             people
             ran
             together
             with
             a
             horrible
             furie
             :
             so
             as
             in
             passing
             ,
             the
             second
             bridge
             ,
             they
             were
             so
             charged
             and
             pursued
             ,
             as
             there
             remained
             above
             three
             hundred
             men
             slaine
             &
             hurt
             in
             one
             place
             ;
             where
             at
             this
             day
             there
             is
             a
             smal
             hermitage
             ,
             which
             they
             vnproperly
             cal
             of
             Martyrs
             .
             Many
             Spaniards
             (
             to
             preserve
             the
             gold
             &
             iewells
             which
             they
             had
             gotten
             ,
             )
             perished
             ,
             &
             others
             staying
             to
             carry
             it
             away
             ,
             were
             taken
             by
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             &
             cruelly
             sacrificed
             to
             their
             idols
             .
             The
             Mexicans
             found
             king
             Moteçuma
             dead
             ,
             &
             wounded
             as
             they
             say
             with
             poiniards
             ,
             and
             they
             hold
             opinion
             that
             that
             night
             the
             Spaniards
             shew
             him
             with
             other
             Noblemen
             .
             The
             Marquise
             in
             his
             relation
             sent
             to
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             writes
             the
             contrary
             ,
             &
             that
             the
             Mexicans
             killed
             him
             that
             night
             with
             a
             son
             of
             Moteçuma
             ,
             which
             he
             led
             with
             him
             amongst
             other
             noblemen
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             treasure
             of
             gold
             ,
             stones
             ,
             and
             silver
             ,
             fell
             into
             the
             lake
             &
             was
             never
             more
             seene
             .
             But
             howsoever
             ,
             Moteçuma
             died
             miserably
             ,
             &
             paied
             his
             deserts
             to
             the
             iust
             iudgement
             of
             our
             Lord
             of
             heaven
             for
             his
             pride
             &
             tyranny
             :
             his
             body
             falling
             into
             the
             Indians
             power
             ,
             they
             would
             make
             him
             no
             obsequies
             of
             a
             king
             ,
             no
             not
             of
             an
             ordinarie
             person
             ,
             but
             cast
             it
             away
             in
             great
             disdaine
             &
             rage
             .
             A
             servant
             of
             his
             having
             pittie
             of
             this
             Kings
             miserie
             ,
             (
             who
             before
             had
             bene
             feared
             and
             worshipped
             as
             a
             God
             )
             made
             a
             fier
             thereof
             ,
             and
             put
             the
             ashes
             in
             a
             contemptible
             place
             .
             Returning
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             that
             escaped
             ,
             they
             were
             greatly
             tyred
             and
             turmoiled
             ,
             the
             Indians
             following
             them
             two
             or
             three
             daies
             very
             resolutely
             ,
             giving
             them
             no
             time
             of
             rest
             ,
             being
             so
             distressed
             for
             victualls
             ,
             as
             a
             few
             graines
             of
             Mays
             were
             divided
             amongst
             them
             for
             their
             meate
             .
             The
             relations
             both
             of
             the
             Spaniards
             &
             Indians
             agree
             ,
             that
             God
             delivered
             them
             here
             miraculously
             ,
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             defending
             them
             on
             a
             little
             hill
             ,
             whereat
             this
             day
             three
             leagues
             from
             Mexico
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             
             Church
             built
             in
             remembrance
             thereof
             ,
             called
             our
             Lady
             of
             succour
             .
             They
             retyred
             to
             their
             antient
             friends
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             whence
             (
             by
             their
             aide
             ,
             &
             the
             valour
             &
             pollicie
             of
             Cortes
             ,
             )
             they
             returned
             afterwards
             to
             make
             war
             against
             Mexico
             ,
             by
             water
             and
             land
             ,
             with
             an
             invention
             of
             brigantines
             ,
             which
             they
             put
             into
             the
             lake
             ,
             where
             after
             many
             combates
             ,
             and
             above
             threescore
             dangerous
             battailes
             ,
             they
             conquered
             Mexco
             ,
             on
             S.
             Hippolitus
             day
             ,
             the
             13.
             of
             August
             ,
             1521.
             
             The
             last
             king
             of
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             (
             having
             obstinately
             maintained
             the
             wars
             ,
             )
             was
             in
             the
             end
             taken
             in
             a
             great
             canoe
             ,
             whereinto
             he
             fled
             ,
             who
             being
             brought
             with
             some
             other
             of
             the
             chiefest
             noblemen
             before
             
               Fernando
               Cortes
            
             ,
             this
             pettie
             king
             with
             a
             strange
             resolution
             and
             courage
             ,
             drawing
             his
             dagger
             ,
             came
             neere
             to
             Cortes
             ,
             and
             said
             vnto
             him
             ,
             
               Vntill
               this
               day
               I
               have
               done
               my
               best
               indevour
               for
               the
               defence
               of
               my
               people
               :
               now
               am
               I
               no
               farther
               bound
               ,
               but
               to
               give
               thee
               this
               dagger
               to
               kill
               me
               therewith
               .
               Cortes
            
             answered
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             not
             kill
             him
             ,
             neither
             was
             it
             his
             intention
             to
             hurt
             them
             :
             but
             their
             obstinate
             folly
             was
             guiltie
             of
             all
             the
             misery
             &
             afflictions
             they
             had
             suffered
             ,
             neither
             were
             they
             ignorant
             how
             often
             he
             had
             required
             peace
             and
             amity
             at
             their
             hands
             .
             He
             then
             commanded
             them
             to
             be
             intreated
             curteously
             .
             Many
             strange
             &
             admirable
             things
             chanced
             in
             this
             conquest
             of
             Mexico
             :
             for
             I
             neither
             hold
             it
             for
             an
             vntruth
             ,
             nor
             an
             addition
             ,
             which
             many
             write
             ,
             that
             God
             favoured
             the
             Spaniards
             by
             many
             miracles
             :
             for
             else
             it
             had
             bin
             impossible
             to
             surmount
             so
             many
             difficulties
             ,
             without
             the
             favour
             of
             heaven
             ,
             and
             to
             subiect
             this
             nation
             with
             so
             few
             men
             .
             For
             although
             we
             were
             sinners
             ,
             &
             vnworthy
             so
             great
             a
             favour
             ,
             yet
             the
             cause
             of
             our
             God
             ,
             the
             glorie
             of
             our
             faith
             ,
             the
             good
             of
             so
             many
             thousands
             soules
             ,
             as
             were
             in
             these
             countries
             ,
             whome
             the
             Lord
             had
             predestinate
             ,
             wrought
             this
             change
             which
             wee
             now
             see
             ,
             by
             supernaturall
             meanes
             ,
             and
             proper
             to
             himselfe
             which
             calles
             the
             blinde
             and
             
             prisoners
             ,
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             himselfe
             ,
             giving
             them
             light
             and
             libertie
             by
             his
             holy
             Gospel
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             you
             may
             the
             better
             vnderstand
             this
             ,
             and
             give
             credite
             therevnto
             ,
             I
             will
             aleadge
             some
             examples
             which
             in
             my
             opinion
             are
             fit
             for
             this
             history
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             some
             miracles
             which
             God
             hath
             shewed
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             in
             favour
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             beyond
             the
             desert
             of
             those
             that
             wrought
             them
             .
             
               CHAP.
               27.
            
             
          
           
             SAint
             Croix
             of
             the
             mountaine
             ,
             is
             a
             very
             great
             province
             ,
             and
             farre
             from
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             Peru
             ,
             neighbour
             to
             diverse
             infidell
             nations
             ,
             which
             have
             not
             yet
             any
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             if
             since
             my
             departure
             ,
             the
             fathers
             of
             our
             company
             which
             remane
             there
             ,
             have
             not
             instructed
             them
             .
             Yet
             this
             province
             of
             S.
             Croix
             is
             christned
             ,
             and
             there
             are
             many
             Spaniards
             ,
             and
             great
             numbers
             of
             Indians
             baptized
             .
             The
             maner
             how
             Christianitie
             entred
             ,
             was
             thus
             .
             A
             souldier
             of
             a
             lewd
             life
             ,
             resident
             in
             the
             province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             fearing
             punishment
             ,
             being
             pursued
             for
             his
             offences
             ,
             went
             farre
             vp
             into
             the
             countrie
             ,
             and
             was
             received
             curteously
             by
             this
             barbarous
             people
             .
             The
             Spaniard
             seeing
             them
             in
             a
             great
             extremity
             for
             water
             ,
             and
             that
             to
             procure
             raine
             ,
             they
             vsed
             many
             superstitious
             ceremonies
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             vsuall
             maner
             ,
             he
             said
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             if
             they
             would
             do
             as
             he
             said
             ,
             they
             should
             presently
             have
             raine
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             willingly
             offered
             to
             performe
             .
             Then
             the
             souldier
             made
             a
             great
             crosse
             ,
             the
             which
             he
             planted
             on
             a
             high
             and
             eminent
             place
             ,
             commanding
             them
             to
             worship
             it
             ,
             and
             to
             demand
             water
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             did
             .
             A
             wonderful
             thing
             to
             see
             ,
             there
             presently
             fel
             such
             aboundance
             of
             raine
             ,
             as
             the
             Indians
             tooke
             so
             great
             devotion
             to
             the
             holy
             crosse
             ,
             as
             they
             fled
             vnto
             
             it
             in
             all
             their
             necessities
             ,
             and
             obtained
             all
             they
             demanded
             :
             so
             as
             they
             brake
             downe
             their
             idolls
             ,
             and
             beganne
             to
             carry
             the
             crosse
             for
             their
             badge
             ,
             demanding
             preachers
             to
             instruct
             ,
             and
             to
             baptise
             them
             .
             For
             this
             reason
             ,
             the
             province
             to
             this
             day
             hath
             beene
             called
             S.
             
               Croix
               de
               la
               Sierre
            
             .
             But
             to
             the
             end
             we
             may
             see
             by
             whom
             God
             wrought
             these
             miracles
             ,
             it
             shall
             not
             be
             vnfit
             to
             shew
             how
             that
             this
             souldier
             after
             he
             had
             some
             yeares
             done
             these
             miracles
             ,
             like
             an
             Apostle
             ,
             and
             yet
             nothing
             reformed
             in
             his
             lewd
             course
             of
             life
             ,
             left
             the
             province
             of
             Charcas
             ,
             and
             continuing
             in
             his
             wicked
             courses
             ,
             was
             publikely
             hanged
             at
             
               Potozi
               .
               Polo
            
             (
             who
             knew
             him
             wel
             )
             writes
             all
             this
             ,
             as
             a
             notable
             thing
             happened
             in
             his
             time
             .
             
               Cabeca
               de
               Vaca
            
             ,
             who
             since
             was
             governour
             of
             Paraguey
             ,
             writes
             what
             happened
             vnto
             him
             in
             his
             strange
             peregrination
             in
             Florida
             ,
             with
             two
             or
             three
             other
             companions
             ,
             the
             onely
             remainder
             of
             an
             army
             ,
             where
             they
             continued
             ten
             yeares
             with
             these
             Barbarians
             ,
             traveling
             and
             searching
             even
             vnto
             the
             South
             sea
             ,
             being
             an
             author
             worthy
             of
             credite
             :
             he
             saieth
             ,
             that
             these
             Barbarians
             did
             force
             them
             to
             cure
             certaine
             diseases
             ,
             threatning
             them
             with
             death
             if
             they
             did
             it
             not
             ;
             they
             being
             ignorant
             in
             any
             part
             of
             phisicke
             ,
             and
             having
             nothing
             to
             apply
             ,
             forced
             by
             necessitie
             ,
             made
             evangelicall
             medicines
             ,
             saying
             the
             praiers
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             making
             the
             signe
             of
             the
             crosse
             ,
             by
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             they
             cured
             these
             diseases
             ,
             which
             made
             them
             so
             famous
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             forced
             to
             exercise
             this
             office
             in
             all
             townes
             as
             they
             passed
             ,
             the
             which
             were
             innumerable
             ,
             wherein
             our
             Lord
             did
             aide
             them
             miraculously
             ,
             and
             they
             themselves
             were
             thereat
             amazed
             ,
             being
             but
             of
             an
             ordinarie
             life
             ;
             yea
             ,
             one
             of
             them
             was
             a
             Negro
             .
             Lancero
             was
             a
             souldier
             of
             Peru
             ,
             of
             whom
             they
             knew
             no
             other
             merit
             ,
             but
             to
             be
             a
             souldier
             :
             he
             spake
             certaine
             good
             wordes
             vpon
             wounds
             ,
             and
             making
             the
             signe
             of
             the
             crosse
             ,
             did
             presently
             cure
             them
             :
             so
             as
             they
             
             did
             say
             ,
             (
             as
             in
             a
             proverbe
             ,
             )
             the
             psalme
             of
             Lancero
             .
             Being
             examined
             by
             such
             as
             held
             authority
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             his
             office
             &
             works
             were
             approved
             .
             Some
             men
             worthy
             of
             credite
             report
             ,
             (
             and
             I
             have
             heard
             it
             spoken
             ,
             )
             that
             in
             the
             cittie
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Spaniards
             were
             besieged
             and
             so
             straightly
             pressed
             ,
             that
             without
             helpe
             from
             heaven
             ,
             it
             was
             impossible
             to
             escape
             ,
             the
             Indians
             casting
             fire
             on
             the
             tops
             of
             the
             houses
             ,
             whether
             the
             Spaniards
             were
             retyred
             ,
             (
             in
             which
             place
             the
             great
             Church
             is
             now
             built
             ,
             )
             &
             although
             the
             covering
             were
             of
             a
             kind
             of
             straw
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             Chicho
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             fire
             they
             cast
             ,
             was
             of
             the
             wood
             of
             fat
             &
             slimy
             firre-trees
             ;
             yet
             nothing
             was
             set
             on
             fire
             ,
             nor
             burnt
             ,
             for
             that
             there
             was
             a
             woman
             did
             quench
             it
             presently
             ,
             the
             which
             the
             Indians
             did
             visibly
             see
             ,
             as
             they
             confessed
             afterwards
             being
             much
             amazed
             .
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             by
             the
             relations
             of
             many
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             histories
             which
             are
             written
             ,
             that
             in
             divers
             battailes
             which
             the
             Spaniards
             had
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             as
             in
             Peru
             ,
             the
             Indians
             their
             enemies
             did
             see
             a
             horse-man
             in
             the
             aire
             ,
             mounted
             on
             a
             whit
             horse
             ,
             with
             a
             sword
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
             fighting
             for
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             whence
             comes
             the
             great
             reverence
             they
             beare
             at
             the
             Indies
             to
             the
             glorious
             Apostle
             Saint
             Iames.
             Other
             whiles
             they
             did
             see
             in
             some
             battailes
             ,
             the
             image
             of
             our
             Ladie
             ,
             from
             whom
             the
             Christians
             have
             received
             in
             those
             partes
             incomparable
             favours
             and
             benefites
             :
             if
             I
             should
             particularly
             relate
             all
             the
             workes
             of
             heaven
             ,
             as
             they
             happened
             ,
             it
             would
             make
             a
             very
             long
             discourse
             .
             It
             sufficeth
             to
             have
             said
             this
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             favour
             which
             the
             Queene
             of
             glorie
             did
             to
             our
             men
             ,
             when
             they
             were
             pressed
             and
             pursued
             by
             the
             Mexicans
             ,
             the
             which
             I
             have
             set
             downe
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             we
             may
             know
             how
             our
             Lord
             hath
             had
             a
             care
             to
             favour
             the
             faith
             and
             Christian
             religion
             ,
             defending
             those
             that
             maintained
             it
             ,
             although
             happily
             by
             their
             workes
             they
             deserved
             not
             so
             great
             favours
             and
             benefites
             
             from
             heaven
             .
             And
             therefore
             we
             ought
             not
             to
             condemne
             all
             these
             things
             of
             the
             first
             Conquerours
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             as
             some
             religious
             and
             learned
             men
             have
             done
             ,
             doubtlesse
             with
             a
             good
             zeale
             ,
             but
             too
             much
             affected
             :
             For
             although
             for
             the
             most
             part
             they
             were
             covetous
             men
             ,
             cruell
             ,
             and
             very
             ignorant
             in
             the
             course
             that
             was
             to
             be
             observed
             with
             the
             Infidels
             ,
             who
             had
             never
             offended
             the
             Christians
             ,
             yet
             can
             we
             not
             deny
             ,
             but
             on
             their
             part
             there
             was
             much
             malice
             against
             God
             and
             our
             men
             ,
             which
             forced
             them
             to
             vse
             rigor
             and
             chastisement
             .
             And
             moreover
             ,
             the
             Lord
             of
             all
             (
             although
             the
             faithfull
             were
             sinners
             ,
             )
             would
             favour
             their
             cause
             and
             partie
             ,
             even
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             Infidells
             ,
             who
             should
             bee
             converted
             vnto
             the
             holy
             Gospel
             by
             this
             meanes
             ,
             for
             the
             waies
             of
             God
             are
             high
             ,
             and
             their
             paths
             admirable
             .
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             maner
             how
             the
             Divine
             providence
             disposed
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             to
             give
             an
             entrie
             to
             Christian
             Religion
             .
             
               CHAP.
               28.
            
             
          
           
             I
             Will
             make
             an
             end
             of
             this
             historie
             of
             the
             Indies
             ,
             shewing
             the
             admirable
             meanes
             whereby
             God
             made
             a
             passage
             for
             the
             Gospel
             in
             those
             partes
             ,
             the
             which
             we
             ought
             well
             to
             consider
             of
             ,
             and
             acknowledge
             the
             providence
             and
             bountie
             of
             the
             Creator
             .
             Every
             one
             may
             vnderstand
             by
             the
             relation
             and
             discourse
             I
             have
             written
             in
             these
             bookes
             ,
             as
             well
             at
             Peru
             ,
             as
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             whenas
             the
             Christians
             first
             set
             footing
             ,
             that
             these
             Kingdomes
             and
             Monarchies
             were
             come
             to
             the
             height
             and
             period
             of
             their
             power
             .
             The
             Inguas
             of
             Peru
             ,
             possessing
             from
             the
             Realme
             of
             Chille
             beyond
             Quitto
             ,
             which
             are
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             ,
             being
             most
             aboundant
             in
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             sumptuous
             services
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             :
             as
             also
             in
             
               Mexico
               ,
               Moteçuma
            
             commaunded
             from
             
             the
             North
             Ocean
             sea
             ,
             vnto
             the
             South
             ,
             being
             feared
             and
             worshiped
             not
             as
             a
             man
             ,
             but
             rather
             as
             a
             god
             .
             Then
             was
             it
             ,
             that
             the
             most
             high
             Lord
             had
             determined
             that
             that
             stone
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             which
             dissolved
             the
             Realmes
             and
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             should
             also
             dissolve
             those
             of
             this
             new
             world
             .
             And
             as
             the
             lawe
             of
             Christ
             came
             whenas
             the
             Romane
             Monarchie
             was
             at
             her
             greatnes
             :
             so
             did
             it
             happen
             at
             the
             West
             Indies
             ,
             wherein
             we
             see
             the
             iust
             providence
             of
             our
             Lord
             :
             For
             being
             then
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             I
             meane
             in
             Europe
             but
             one
             head
             and
             temporall
             Lord
             ,
             as
             the
             holy
             Doctors
             do
             note
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Gospel
             might
             more
             easily
             beimparted
             to
             so
             many
             people
             and
             nations
             .
             Even
             so
             hath
             it
             happened
             at
             the
             Indies
             ,
             where
             having
             given
             the
             knowledge
             of
             Christ
             to
             the
             Monarkes
             of
             so
             many
             Kingdomes
             ▪
             it
             was
             a
             meanes
             that
             afterwards
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             gospell
             was
             imparted
             to
             all
             the
             people
             :
             yea
             ,
             there
             is
             herein
             a
             speciall
             thinge
             to
             bee
             observed
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             Lordes
             of
             Cusco
             and
             Mexico
             conquered
             new
             landes
             ,
             so
             they
             brought
             in
             their
             owne
             language
             ,
             for
             although
             there
             were
             (
             as
             at
             this
             day
             )
             great
             diuersitie
             of
             tongues
             yet
             the
             Courtlie
             speeche
             of
             Cusco
             ,
             did
             and
             doth
             at
             this
             day
             runne
             above
             a
             thousand
             leagues
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             Mexico
             did
             not
             extend
             farre
             lesse
             ,
             which
             hath
             not
             beene
             of
             small
             importance
             ,
             but
             hath
             much
             profited
             in
             making
             the
             preaching
             easie
             ,
             at
             such
             a
             time
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             preachers
             had
             not
             the
             gift
             of
             many
             tongues
             ,
             as
             in
             olde
             tymes
             .
             He
             that
             woulde
             knowe
             what
             a
             helpe
             it
             hath
             beene
             for
             the
             conversion
             of
             this
             people
             in
             these
             two
             greate
             Empyres
             ,
             and
             the
             greate
             difficultie
             they
             haue
             founde
             to
             reduce
             those
             Indians
             to
             Christ
             ,
             which
             acknowledge
             no
             Soueraigne
             Lorde
             ,
             let
             him
             goe
             to
             
               Florida
               ,
               Bresill
            
             ,
             the
             Andes
             and
             many
             other
             places
             ,
             where
             they
             have
             not
             prevailed
             so
             much
             by
             their
             preaching
             in
             fiftie
             yeares
             ,
             as
             they
             have
             done
             in
             Peru
             and
             newe
             Spaine
             in
             lesse
             then
             
             five
             .
             If
             they
             will
             impute
             the
             cause
             to
             the
             riches
             of
             the
             countrie
             :
             I
             will
             not
             altogether
             denie
             it
             .
             Yet
             were
             it
             impossible
             to
             have
             so
             great
             wealth
             ,
             and
             to
             bee
             able
             to
             preserve
             it
             if
             there
             had
             not
             beene
             a
             Monarchie
             .
             This
             is
             also
             a
             worke
             of
             God
             in
             this
             age
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             Preachers
             of
             the
             gospell
             are
             so
             colde
             and
             without
             zeale
             ,
             and
             Merchants
             with
             the
             heat
             of
             covetousnes
             and
             desire
             of
             commaund
             ,
             search
             and
             discouer
             newe
             people
             whether
             wee
             passe
             with
             our
             commodities
             ,
             for
             as
             Saint
             Austin
             saith
             ,
             the
             Prophesie
             of
             Esaie
             is
             fulfilled
             ,
             in
             that
             the
             Church
             of
             Christ
             is
             extended
             ,
             
             not
             onely
             to
             the
             right
             hand
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             the
             left
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             (
             as
             he
             declareth
             ,
             )
             by
             humaine
             and
             earthly
             meanes
             ,
             which
             they
             seeke
             more
             commonly
             then
             Iesus
             Christ.
             It
             was
             also
             a
             great
             providence
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             that
             whenas
             the
             first
             Spaniardes
             arrived
             there
             ,
             they
             founde
             ayde
             from
             the
             Indians
             them selves
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             partialities
             and
             greate
             diuisions
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             well
             knowne
             in
             Peru
             ,
             that
             the
             division
             betwixt
             the
             two
             brothers
             Atahulpa
             and
             Guasca
             ,
             the
             great
             King
             Guanacapa
             their
             father
             being
             newly
             dead
             ,
             gave
             entry
             to
             the
             Marquise
             
               Don
               Francis
               Pizarre
            
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             for
             that
             either
             of
             them
             desired
             his
             alliance
             being
             busied
             in
             warre
             one
             against
             the
             other
             .
             The
             like
             experience
             hath
             beene
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             that
             the
             aide
             of
             those
             of
             the
             province
             of
             Tlascalla
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             continuall
             hatred
             against
             the
             Mexicaines
             ,
             gave
             the
             victory
             and
             siegniory
             of
             Mexico
             ,
             to
             the
             Marquise
             
               Fernando
               Cortes
            
             and
             his
             men
             ,
             and
             without
             them
             it
             had
             beene
             impossible
             to
             have
             wonne
             it
             ,
             yea
             ,
             to
             have
             maintained
             themselves
             within
             the
             country
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             much
             deceived
             that
             so
             little
             esteeme
             the
             Indians
             ,
             and
             iudge
             that
             (
             by
             the
             advantage
             the
             Spaniards
             have
             over
             them
             in
             their
             persons
             ,
             horses
             ,
             and
             armes
             ,
             both
             
             offencive
             and
             deffencive
             ,
             )
             they
             might
             easily
             conquer
             any
             land
             or
             nation
             of
             the
             Indies
             .
          
           
             Chille
             standes
             yet
             ,
             or
             to
             say
             better
             ,
             Aranco
             and
             Tu●●●pel
             ,
             which
             are
             two
             citties
             ,
             where
             our
             Spaniards
             could
             not
             yet
             winne
             one
             foote
             of
             ground
             ,
             although
             they
             have
             made
             warre
             there
             above
             five
             and
             twenty
             yeares
             ,
             without
             sparing
             of
             any
             cost
             .
             For
             this
             barbarous
             nation
             ,
             having
             once
             lost
             the
             apprehention
             of
             horse
             and
             shotte
             ,
             and
             knowing
             that
             the
             Spaniards
             fall
             as
             well
             as
             other
             men
             ,
             with
             the
             blow
             of
             a
             stone
             or
             of
             a
             dart
             ,
             they
             hazard
             themselves
             desperately
             ,
             entring
             the
             pikes
             vppon
             any
             enterprise
             .
             How
             many
             yeares
             have
             they
             levied
             men
             in
             New
             Spaine
             ,
             to
             send
             against
             the
             Chychymequos
             ,
             which
             are
             a
             small
             number
             of
             naked
             Indians
             ,
             armed
             onely
             with
             bowes
             and
             arrowes
             :
             yet
             to
             this
             day
             they
             could
             not
             bee
             vanquished
             ,
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             from
             day
             to
             day
             they
             grow
             more
             desperate
             and
             resolute
             .
             But
             what
             shall
             wee
             say
             of
             the
             Chucos
             ,
             of
             the
             Chiraguanas
             ,
             of
             the
             Piscocones
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             other
             people
             of
             the
             Andes
             ?
             Hath
             not
             all
             the
             flower
             of
             Peru
             beene
             there
             ,
             bringing
             with
             them
             so
             great
             provision
             of
             armes
             and
             men
             as
             we
             have
             seene
             ?
             What
             did
             they
             ?
             With
             what
             victories
             returned
             they
             ?
             Surely
             they
             returned
             very
             happy
             in
             saving
             of
             their
             lives
             ,
             having
             lost
             their
             baggage
             and
             almost
             all
             their
             horses
             .
             Let
             no
             man
             thinke
             (
             speaking
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             )
             that
             they
             are
             men
             of
             nothing
             ;
             but
             if
             they
             thinke
             so
             ,
             let
             them
             go
             and
             make
             triall
             .
             Wee
             must
             then
             attribute
             the
             glory
             to
             whom
             it
             appertaines
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             principally
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             his
             admirable
             disposition
             :
             for
             if
             Moteçuma
             in
             Mexiço
             ,
             and
             the
             Ingua
             in
             Peru
             ,
             had
             bin
             resolute
             to
             resist
             the
             Spaniards
             ,
             and
             to
             stoppe
             their
             entrie
             ,
             Cortes
             and
             Pizarre
             had
             prevailed
             little
             in
             their
             landing
             ,
             although
             they
             were
             excellent
             Captaines
             .
             It
             hath
             also
             beene
             a
             great
             helpe
             to
             induce
             the
             Indians
             to
             receive
             the
             law
             of
             Christ
             ,
             the
             subiection
             
             they
             were
             in
             to
             their
             Kings
             and
             Lords
             ,
             and
             also
             the
             servitude
             and
             slaverie
             they
             were
             helde
             in
             by
             the
             divells
             tyrannies
             and
             insupportable
             yoake
             .
             This
             was
             an
             excellent
             disposition
             of
             the
             Divine
             Wisedome
             ,
             the
             which
             drawes
             profite
             from
             ill
             to
             a
             good
             end
             ,
             and
             receives
             his
             good
             from
             an
             others
             ill
             ,
             which
             it
             hath
             not
             sowen
             .
             It
             is
             most
             certaine
             that
             no
             people
             of
             the
             West
             Indies
             have
             beene
             more
             apt
             to
             receive
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             then
             those
             which
             were
             most
             subiect
             to
             their
             Lords
             ,
             and
             which
             have
             beene
             charged
             with
             the
             heaviest
             burthens
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             tributes
             and
             services
             ,
             as
             of
             customes
             and
             bloodie
             practises
             .
             All
             that
             which
             the
             Mexicane
             Kings
             and
             those
             of
             Peru
             did
             possesse
             ,
             is
             at
             this
             day
             most
             planted
             with
             Christian
             religion
             ,
             and
             where
             there
             is
             least
             difficultie
             in
             the
             government
             and
             ecclesiasticall
             discipline
             .
             The
             Indians
             were
             so
             wearied
             with
             the
             heavy
             and
             insupportable
             yoake
             of
             Sathans
             lawes
             ,
             his
             sacrifices
             and
             ceremonies
             ,
             whereof
             wee
             have
             formerly
             spoken
             ,
             that
             they
             consulted
             among
             themselves
             ,
             to
             seeke
             out
             a
             new
             law
             ,
             and
             another
             God
             to
             serve
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             law
             of
             Christ
             seemed
             vnto
             them
             ,
             and
             doth
             at
             this
             day
             seeme
             iust
             ,
             sweete
             ,
             cleane
             ,
             good
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             happinesse
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             which
             is
             difficult
             in
             our
             law
             ,
             to
             beleeve
             so
             high
             and
             soveraigne
             Misteries
             ,
             hath
             beene
             easie
             among
             them
             ,
             for
             that
             the
             Divell
             had
             made
             them
             comprehend
             things
             of
             greater
             difficultie
             ,
             and
             the
             selfe-same
             things
             which
             he
             had
             stolen
             from
             our
             Evangelicall
             law
             ,
             as
             their
             maner
             of
             communion
             and
             confession
             ,
             their
             adoration
             of
             three
             in
             one
             ,
             and
             such
             other
             like
             ,
             the
             which
             against
             the
             will
             of
             the
             enemy
             ,
             have
             holpe●
             for
             the
             casie
             receiving
             of
             the
             truth
             by
             those
             who
             before
             had
             imbraced
             lies
             .
             God
             is
             wise
             and
             admirable
             in
             all
             his
             workes
             ,
             vanquishing
             the
             adversatie
             even
             with
             his
             owne
             weapon
             ,
             hee
             takes
             him
             in
             
             his
             owne
             snare
             ,
             and
             kills
             him
             with
             his
             owne
             sword
             .
             Finally
             ,
             our
             God
             (
             who
             had
             created
             this
             people
             ,
             and
             who
             seemed
             to
             have
             thus
             long
             forgot
             them
             ,
             )
             when
             the
             hour●
             was
             come
             ,
             hee
             would
             have
             the
             same
             divells
             ,
             enemies
             to
             mankinde
             ,
             whom
             they
             falsly
             held
             for
             gods
             ,
             should
             give
             a
             testimony
             against
             their
             will
             ,
             of
             the
             true
             law
             ,
             the
             power
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             triumph
             of
             the
             crosse
             ,
             as
             it
             plainely
             appeares
             by
             the
             presages
             ,
             prophesies
             ,
             signes
             ,
             and
             prodiges
             ,
             heere
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             with
             many
             others
             happened
             in
             divers
             partes
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             same
             Ministers
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             Sorcerers
             ,
             Magitians
             ,
             and
             other
             Indians
             have
             confessed
             it
             .
             And
             we
             cannot
             deny
             it
             ,
             (
             being
             most
             evident
             and
             knowne
             to
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             )
             that
             the
             Divell
             dareth
             not
             hisse
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             practises
             ,
             oracles
             ,
             answers
             ,
             and
             visible
             apparitions
             ,
             which
             were
             so
             ordinary
             throughout
             all
             this
             infidelitie
             ,
             have
             ceased
             ,
             whereas
             the
             Crosse
             of
             Christ
             hath
             beene
             planted
             ,
             where
             there
             are
             Churches
             ,
             and
             where
             the
             name
             of
             Christ
             hath
             beene
             confessed
             .
             And
             if
             there
             be
             at
             this
             day
             any
             cursed
             minister
             of
             his
             ,
             that
             doth
             participate
             thereof
             ,
             it
             is
             in
             caves
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             toppes
             of
             mountaines
             ,
             and
             in
             secret
             places
             ,
             farre
             from
             the
             name
             and
             communion
             of
             Christians
             .
             The
             Soveraigne
             Lord
             be
             blessed
             for
             his
             great
             mercies
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             glory
             of
             his
             holy
             name
             :
             And
             in
             truth
             ,
             if
             they
             did
             governe
             this
             people
             temporally
             and
             spiritually
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             as
             the
             law
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             set
             it
             downe
             ,
             with
             a
             milde
             yoake
             and
             light
             burthen
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             would
             impose
             no
             more
             vppon
             them
             then
             they
             can
             well
             beare
             ,
             as
             the
             letters
             pattents
             of
             the
             good
             Emperour
             of
             happy
             memorie
             doe
             command
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             would
             imploy
             halfe
             the
             care
             they
             have
             to
             make
             profite
             of
             these
             poore
             mens
             sweats
             and
             labours
             ,
             for
             the
             health
             of
             their
             soules
             ,
             it
             were
             the
             most
             peaceable
             and
             happy
             Christan
             part
             of
             all
             the
             world
             .
             But
             our
             sinnes
             are
             often
             an
             occasion
             
             that
             God
             doth
             not
             impart
             his
             graces
             so
             aboundantly
             as
             he
             would
             .
             Yet
             I
             will
             say
             one
             thing
             which
             I
             holde
             for
             truth
             ,
             that
             although
             the
             first
             entry
             of
             the
             Gospel
             hath
             not
             beene
             accompanied
             (
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             )
             with
             such
             sinceritie
             and
             christian
             meanes
             ,
             as
             they
             should
             have
             vsed
             :
             yet
             God
             of
             his
             bountie
             hath
             drawne
             good
             from
             this
             evill
             ,
             and
             hath
             made
             the
             subiection
             of
             the
             Indians
             ,
             a
             perfect
             remedie
             for
             their
             salvation
             .
             Let
             vs
             consider
             a
             little
             ,
             what
             hath
             beene
             newly
             converted
             in
             our
             time
             to
             the
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             East
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             how
             little
             suretie
             and
             perseverance
             in
             the
             faith
             and
             Christian
             Religion
             there
             hath
             beene
             ,
             in
             places
             where
             the
             new
             converted
             have
             had
             full
             libertie
             to
             dispose
             of
             themselves
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             free
             will.
             Christianitie
             without
             doubt
             augments
             and
             increaseth
             ,
             and
             brings
             forth
             daily
             more
             fruite
             among
             the
             Indian
             slaves
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             decreaseth
             and
             threatens
             a
             ruine
             in
             other
             partes
             ,
             where
             have
             beene
             more
             happy
             beginnings
             .
             And
             although
             the
             beginnings
             at
             the
             West
             Indies
             have
             beene
             laboursome
             ,
             yet
             our
             Lord
             hath
             speedily
             sent
             good
             worke-men
             and
             his
             faithfull
             Ministers
             ,
             holy
             men
             and
             Apostolicall
             ,
             as
             Friar
             Martin
             of
             Valence
             ,
             of
             the
             order
             of
             S.
             Francis
             ,
             Friar
             
               Dominicke
               de
               Gerancois
            
             ,
             of
             the
             order
             of
             S.
             Dominicke
             ,
             Friar
             
               Iohn
               de
               Roa
            
             ,
             of
             the
             order
             of
             S.
             Austen
             ,
             with
             other
             servants
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             which
             have
             lived
             holily
             ,
             and
             have
             wrought
             more
             then
             humaine
             things
             .
             Likewise
             ,
             Prelates
             and
             holy
             Priests
             ,
             worthy
             of
             memory
             ,
             of
             whom
             we
             heare
             famous
             miracles
             ,
             and
             the
             very
             acts
             of
             the
             Apostles
             :
             yea
             ,
             in
             our
             time
             we
             have
             knowne
             and
             conferred
             with
             some
             of
             this
             qualitie
             .
          
           
             But
             for
             that
             my
             intention
             hath
             beene
             onely
             to
             touch
             that
             which
             concernes
             the
             proper
             history
             of
             the
             Indians
             themselves
             ,
             and
             to
             come
             vnto
             the
             time
             that
             the
             father
             
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             would
             communicate
             the
             light
             of
             his
             word
             vnto
             them
             .
             I
             will
             passe
             no
             farther
             ,
             leaving
             the
             discourse
             of
             the
             Gospel
             at
             the
             west
             Indies
             for
             another
             time
             ,
             and
             to
             a
             better
             vnderstanding
             :
             Beseeching
             the
             Soveraigne
             Lord
             of
             all
             ,
             and
             intreating
             his
             servants
             ,
             humbly
             to
             pray
             vnto
             his
             Divine
             Maiestie
             ,
             that
             it
             would
             please
             hi●
             of
             his
             bountie
             ,
             often
             to
             visit
             and
             to
             augment
             by
             the
             guifts
             of
             heaven
             this
             new
             Christendome
             ,
             which
             these
             last
             ages
             have
             planted
             in
             the
             farthest
             boundes
             of
             the
             earth
             .
             Glory
             ,
             Honour
             ,
             &
             Empery
             be
             to
             the
             King
             of
             worlds
             for
             ever
             and
             ever
             .
             Amen
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
         
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A22928-e14690
           
             
               Chrysost.
               homil
            
             .
             14
             &
             17.
             
               in
               epist
               and
               Hebre.
            
             
          
           
             
               Chrys.
               hom
            
             .
             6.13
             
               in
               Gen●s
               .
               &
               hom
            
             .
             12
             
               ad
               pop
               .
               Antioch
            
             .
          
           
             Theodore●
             .
          
           
             
               Theophil
               .
               in
               capitul
            
             .
             8.
             
               ad
               Hebre
            
             .
          
           
             
               Lact.
               lib.
            
             3.
             
               divin
               .
               inst
               .
               ca.
            
             24.
             
          
           
             
               Iev
               .
               in
               epist.
               a●
               Ephes.
               ●●●
               .
            
             2.
             
             ●
             4.
             
          
           
             
               Sixtu●
               Senens
               .
               lib.
            
             5.
             
               biblio
               .
               annot
               at
            
             .
             3.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               lib.
            
             2.
             
               de
               Gen.
               ad
               lit
               .
               c.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             
               Id.
               Psal.
            
             35.
             
          
           
             Sapien.
             13.
             
             Rom.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               lib.
            
             2.
             
               de
               Genes
               .
               ad
               lit
               .
               cap.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               ep
            
             .
             109.
             
               ad
               Ianuarium
               .
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             
               August
               .
               lib.
               de
               Genes
               .
               ad
               litteram
               .
               cap.
            
             19.
             
          
           
             Dan.
             14.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             148.
             
          
           
             Hest
             13.
             
             Sap.
             1.27.11.18
             .
             Psal.
             91.7.23.39.97
             .
             Iob
             37.
             
             Eccles.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Ierom.
               cap.
            
             3.
             
               ad
               Ephes.
            
             
          
           
             
               Basil.
               hom
               .
               li.
            
             1.
             
             
               Hexam
               .
               prope
               finem
            
             .
          
           
             
               Amb.
               lib.
            
             10.
             
             
               Hexam
               cap.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             74.
             
          
           
             Amb.
             1.
             
             Hexa
             .
          
           
             Iob.
             9
             26.
             
          
           
             Heb.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               in
               Ps.
            
             13●
             
          
           
             Iob.
             26.
             
          
           
             Iob
             38.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             103.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             103.
             
          
           
             Heb.
             8.
             
          
           
             Exo.
             36.
             
          
           
             
               Chrisost.
               in
            
             20.
             cap.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             103.
             
          
           
             Aug.
             2.
             
               de
               Gen.
               ad
               litterans
               .
               ca.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             Isaie
             .
             66.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Cori●
             .
             ●
             .
             2
             .
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             6.
             c●p
             .
             22.
             
          
           
             
               Via
               lactea
            
             .
          
           
             
               Plut.
               ●li.de
               plac●tis
               ●hil
               .
               cap.
            
             9.
             
             &
             1●
             .
          
           
             
               Aug.
               lib.
            
             16.
             
               de
               c●vit
               .
               cap.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             G●●es
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Lact.
               lib.
            
             7.
             
               in●●
               .
               divin
               .
               cap.
            
             23.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               lib.
            
             16.
             
               de
               ●u●tate
               .
               c.
            
             ●
             .
             9
             .
          
           
             Arist.
             1.
             
               dd
               Cel.
            
             ca.
             3.
             
          
           
             
               Aug
               lib.
               Categoriacum
               .
               c.
            
             10.
             
               in
               tom●
            
             1.
             
          
           
             Lib.
             16.
             c●p
             .
             9
             
          
           
             
               Nazian
               .
               epist.
            
             27.
             
               ad
               P●stumi●num
            
             .
          
           
             Arist.
             2.
             
             
               Meta
               ●ap
            
             .
             5.
             
          
           
             Lucan
             .
             10.
             
             Pharsal
             .
          
           
             Soph.
             ●●
             .
             3
             .
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             ●
             .
             cap.
             61.
             
          
           
             
               Plutarch
               .
               3.
               de
               placitis
               phil
               .
               cap.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             
               S
               Ierom.
               super
               ap
            
             .
             1.
             
               ad
               Ephes.
            
             
          
           
             
               Pil●
               .
               li.
            
             2.
             c.
             67.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             6.
             cap.
             21.
             
          
           
             
               Senec.
               in
               M●d.
               Act.
            
             2.
             
               in
               sin
            
             .
          
           
             In.
             3.
             
               lib.
               Reg.
               cap.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             
               In.
               appaca●●●
               Bibliae
               regiae
               impha
               leg
               .
               ca.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Para●●p
             .
             9.
             3.
             
             Reg.
             10.
             
          
           
             2
             Para.
             ●
             .
             4.
             
             Reg.
             22.
             9.
             
             Reg
             9.
             
          
           
             
               Iectan
               filius
               Heber
               Gen
            
             10.
             
             
               Iecsan
               filius
               Abrahae
               ex
               Cetura
               .
               Gen.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             Reg.
             9.
             4.
             
             Reg.
             22.
             
          
           
             Gen.
             10.
             
          
           
             
               Ierom
               ad
               Marcel
               .
               in
            
             .
             3.
             tomo
             .
          
           
             Iudith
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             
               Lege
               Pline
               .
               lib.
            
             5.
             cap.
             27.
             
          
           
             
               Theodor
               in
            
             1.
             
             Ioan.
             
          
           
             
               Astasmont
               ibid
               and
               in
               alphabeto
               aparatus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ier.
               ad
               Marcel
            
             .
          
           
             Psal
             60
             Isa●●
             .
             16.
             
          
           
             Isay.
             18.
             luxt●
             70.
             
             Interp.
             
          
           
             I●ay
             .
             66.
             
          
           
             2
             2.
             
             
               Para
               ▪
            
             9.
             
          
           
             3
             3.
             
             R●z
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             P●in●lib
             .
             3.
             c●
             .
             6
             
               and
               lib.
            
             34.
             cap.
             1.14
             .
             
               and
               lib.
            
             7.
             cap.
             4.
             
          
           
             
               Dios.
               lib
            
             .
             ●
             .
             cap.
             10.
             
             
               Lucret.
               lib.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               de
               Cuit
               .
               D●●
               c●●
               .
            
             4.
             
               vbi
               multa
               de
               magnet●
            
             .
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib
            
             .
             7.
             c.
             16
             
          
           
             S●p
             .
             2
             
          
           
             Sap.
             14.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             106.
             
          
           
             Lib.
             1.
             
               d●
               Ital.
               illustr
               .
               regn●
            
             .
             19
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             2.
             cap.
             71.
             
             
               &
               .
               lib.
            
             7.
             c.
             1.
             
               vlt.
               Ozor
               .
               de
               reb
               .
               g●st
               .
               Eman.
               li.
            
             1
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               li.
            
             2.
             c.
             69.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib
            
             6.
             c.
             22
             
          
           
             ●en
             .
             7.
             
          
           
             
               A●g
               .
               lib.
            
             6.
             
               d
               :
               Ciuit.
               cap.
            
             7.
             
          
           
             Gen.
             1.
             
          
           
             Gen.
             7.
             
          
           
             
               Sag.
               cap.
            
             12.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             5.
             cap.
             1.
             
               &
               lib.
            
             6.
             c.
             31
             
          
           
             4.
             
             Esdr.
             13.
             
          
           
             Act.
             17.
             
          
           
             Genit●
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A22928-e26570
           
             
               Plato
               in
               Tim.
               &
               Critiae
            
             .
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             6.
             c.
             12
             
          
           
             
               Arist.
               Me.
            
             
          
           
             
               Dionys.
               c.
            
             25.
             
               de
               coel
               .
               hierar
            
             .
          
           
             
               Vi●es
               .
               lib.
            
             13.
             
               de
               Ciuit.
               c.
            
             21.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A22928-e29400
           
             Psal.
             103.135
             .
             91.92.18.8
             .
             Iob
             28.39
             .
          
           
             *
             Psalm●
             134●
             Ieremy
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             
               Iuan.
               de
               ●●cos
               in
               Decade
            
             .
             1.
             li.
             4.
             ca.
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Ex.
               c.
            
             10.
             
             &
             14
             I●b
             .
             17.
             
             Ioan.
             4.
             
             Osee.
             13.
             
             Dan.
             3.
             
          
           
             Herodo●us
             .
          
           
             Ioviu●
             .
          
           
             
               Basil.
               psal
            
             .
             28.
             
               &
               in
               exam
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A22928-e38230
           
             Sap.
             14.
             
          
           
             
             ●●ri●t
             ●
             .
             
               Ethic.
               cap.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             ●●ie
             .
             54.
             
          
           
             
               Aug.
               lib.
            
             1.
             
               de
               con●o●
               .
               ●●ang
               .
               cap.
            
             31.
             
          
           
             
               Philo.
               lib
            
             5.
             
               de
               Genes
               .
               mund
            
             .
          
           
             
               Euseb.
               lib.
            
             8.
             
               de
               prepar
               .
               evau
               .
               c.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             33.
             cap.
             3.
             
          
           
             
               ●li●
               .
               lib.
            
             33.
             c.
             4
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             33.
             c.
             3
             
          
           
             Apoc.
             3.
             
             &
             21.
             
             Cant.
             3.
             
             Psal.
             67.
             3.
             
             Reg.
             6.
             
          
           
             Iob
             18.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             3.
             ca.
             5
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             3
             〈◊〉
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             .
             33.
             〈◊〉
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Ma●cab
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             Iob
             28.
             
          
           
             
               ●lin
               .
               ●b
            
             .
             33.
             c.
             6
             
          
           
             
               G●n●bra●●●●
               Ch●onograph
            
             .
          
           
             
               Every
               ●eece
               is
               worth
            
             13.
             
               rialls
               &
               a
               fourth
               part
            
          
           
             
               Bo●tius
               de
               consolat
            
             .
          
           
             
               ●li
               .
               lib.
            
             33.
             c●
             .
             4
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             
               Every
               Arobe
               is
            
             25.
             pound
             .
          
           
             
               Plin.
               in
               proem
               .
               lib.
            
             33.
             cap.
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Pli.
               lib.
            
             33.
             ca
             6
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             33.
             c.
             6
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             33.
             c.
             4
             
          
           
             Mat.
             3.
             
             Eccles.
             2.
             
             Psal.
             11
             
          
           
             Psal.
             65.
             
             Prover
             .
             17.27
             .
          
           
             Ier●m
             .
             6.
             
             Prover
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Pli.
               lib.
            
             3●
             .
             ca.
             3
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             37.
             c.
             5
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             9.
             c.
             35
             
          
           
             Exod.
             29.39
             .
             Apoc.
             21.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             3.
             c.
             3●
             ▪
             
          
           
             Pli●i
             .
             14.
             c.
             22.
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               ●●b
            
             .
             2.
             c●
             .
             1
             
          
           
             
               Pli.
               lib.
            
             11.
             c.
             16
             
          
           
             
               Pli.
               lib.
            
             12
             c.
             15
             
          
           
             Can●
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Strab.
               lib.
            
             16.
             
             Geograp
             .
          
           
             
               Pli●
               .
               li.
            
             12.
             c.
             25
             
          
           
             
               Plin.
               lib.
            
             12.
             c.
             1
             ▪
             
          
           
             Genes
             .
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Pli.
               li.
            
             10.
             c.
             23.
             
          
           
             
               Pli.
               lib.
            
             10.
             c.
             2●
             
          
           
             
               Arist.
               libr.
            
             3.
             
               de
               partib
               .
               animal
               .
               c.
            
             2.
             lib.
             10.
             c.
             72
             
          
           
             
               Six
               arobes
               〈…〉
               hundred
               and
               fifty
               pounds
               weight
               .
            
          
           
             
               Pli.
               lib.
            
             10.
             c.
             72
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A22928-e54010
           
             Iob.
             41.
             
          
           
             Esa.
             14.
             
          
           
             Ezech.
             2●
             .
          
           
             Mat.
             12.
             
          
           
             Mat.
             4.
             
          
           
             Deut.
             32.
             
          
           
             Sap.
             14.
             
          
           
             Actes
             .
             17.
             
          
           
             Actes
             .
             1●
             .
          
           
             
               Pla.
               in
               Tim.
               Arist.
               c.
               vlt.
            
             2.
             
               metaph
               .
               Tresmegist
               .
               Diman
               .
               &
               Ascl●p
               .
            
          
           
             Sap
             13.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             1.
             
          
           
             Iob.
             31.
             
          
           
             R●m
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Con●il
               .
               Limen●●
            
             .
             2.
             p.
             2.
             cap.
             99.
             
          
           
             Prou.
             27.
             
          
           
             Wisd.
             14.
             
          
           
             Ier.
             10.
             
          
           
             S●ph
             .
             ●
             .
          
           
             Esa.
             44.
             
             I●re
             .
             10.
             
             Baruch
             6.
             
             Psal.
             113.
             
          
           
             Osee.
             ●
             .
          
           
             ●●hn
             .
             5.
             
          
           
             Ex●●
             .
             7.
             
          
           
             
               
                 Plu.
                 lib.
                 de
                 tract
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Iust.
                 in
                 apol
                 .
                 pro
                 cl●ris●
                 .
              
            
          
           
             Dan.
             14.
             
          
           
             Arist.
             12.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             Exodus
             32.
             
          
           
             3
             R●g
             .
             28.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             105.
             4.
             
             Reg.
             ●●
             .
          
           
             Gen.
             15.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             105.
             
          
           
             
               G●te●
               .
               lib.
            
             2.
             
               de
               Hip.
               &
               Platon
               .
               〈◊〉
               .
               cap.
            
             4.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A22928-e68160
           
             Eccles.
             ●
             .
          
           
             Deut.
             28.
             
          
           
             Ier.
             10.
             
          
           
             Lib.
             9.
             
               de
               demo
               .
               Evan.
               demon
            
             .
             1
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Mac.
             5.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Mat.
             1.
             
          
           
             Sap.
             17.
             
          
           
             
               Euseb.
               lib.
            
             1.
             
               de
               eccle
               .
               hist.
            
             
          
           
             Mat.
             1.
             
             Luke
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             Act.
             26.
             
          
           
             Dan
             2.
             
             Num.
             22.
             3.
             
             Reg.
             28.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             11.
             
          
           
             August
             .
             lib.
             2.
             
               de
               ●●●ovang
               .
               ●
            
             .
             36.